EnergyPlus™ Version 9.6.

0 Documentation

Input Output Reference

U.S. Department of Energy

September 23, 2021

Build: f420c06a69
COPYRIGHT (c) 1996-2021 THE BOARD OF TRUSTEES OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS,
THE REGENTS OF THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA THROUGH THE ERNEST ORLANDO
LAWRENCE BERKELEY NATIONAL LABORATORY, OAK RIDGE NATIONAL LABORATORY,
MANAGED BY UT-BATTELLE, ALLIANCE FOR SUSTAINABLE ENERGY, LLC, AND OTHER
CONTRIBUTORS. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED. NO PART OF THIS MATERIAL MAY BE REPRO-
DUCED OR TRANSMITTED IN ANY FORM OR BY ANY MEANS WITHOUT THE PRIOR WRIT-
TEN PERMISSION OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS OR THE ERNEST ORLANDO LAWRENCE
BERKELEY NATIONAL LABORATORY. ENERGYPLUS IS A TRADEMARK OF THE US DEPART-
MENT OF ENERGY.
Contents

1 Input-Output Reference 25
1.1 What’s different about EnergyPlus Input and Output? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.1 EnergyPlus Input Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
1.1.2 General Input Rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.1.3 EnergyPlus Output Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2 IDD Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.1 IDD – IP Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.3 Input – Output Descriptions (Document) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.1 Input Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.2 Output Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.4 Using EnergyPlus as a Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1.4.1 State API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1.4.2 Functional API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.4.3 Runtime API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1.4.4 Data Exchange API . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
1.4.5 Full Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.4.6 Building and Linking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.5 Group – Simulation Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.5.1 Version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.5.2 Timestep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.5.3 ConvergenceLimits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
1.5.4 Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
1.5.5 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
1.5.6 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
1.5.7 HeatBalanceAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
1.5.8 HeatBalanceSettings:ConductionFiniteDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
1.5.9 ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
1.5.10 ZoneAirContaminantBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
1.5.11 ShadowCalculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
1.5.12 Output:Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
1.5.13 Output:DebuggingData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
1.5.14 Output:PreprocessorMessage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.5.15 ZoneCapacitanceMultiplier:ResearchSpecial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
1.5.16 SimulationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
1.5.17 PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
1.5.18 HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

2
CONTENTS 3

1.5.19 Meter:Custom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
1.5.20 Meter:CustomDecrement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
1.5.21 Custom Meter Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
1.5.22 Simulation Parameter Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.6 Group – Compliance Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.6.1 Compliance:Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.7 Group – Location – Climate – Weather File Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.7.1 Site:Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
1.7.2 Site:VariableLocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
1.7.3 SizingPeriod:DesignDay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
1.7.4 Longer Design Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1.7.5 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
1.7.6 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
1.7.7 RunPeriod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
1.7.8 RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
1.7.9 RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
1.7.10 WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
1.7.11 Site:WeatherStation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
1.7.12 Site:HeightVariation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
1.7.13 Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.7.14 Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
1.7.15 Site:GroundTemperature:Deep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.7.16 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
1.7.17 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach . . . . . . . . . . . 109
1.7.18 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
1.7.19 Site:GroundDomain:Slab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
1.7.20 Site:GroundDomain:Basement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
1.7.21 Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.7.22 Site:GroundReflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
1.7.23 Site:GroundReflectance:SnowModifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1.7.24 Site:WaterMainsTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
1.7.25 Site:Precipitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
1.7.26 RoofIrrigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1.7.27 Solar and Visible Spectrum Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
1.7.28 Site:SolarAndVisibleSpectrum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1.7.29 Site:SpectrumData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
1.7.30 Climate Group Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
1.7.31 Weather Data Related Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
1.7.32 Outputs for local temperature/wind speed calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
1.8 Group – Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
1.8.1 Day Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
1.8.2 ScheduleTypeLimits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
1.8.3 Day Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
1.8.4 Schedule:Day:Hourly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
1.8.5 Schedule:Day:Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
1.8.6 Schedule:Day:List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
4 CONTENTS

1.8.7 Week Schedule(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

1.8.8 Schedule:Week:Daily . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
1.8.9 Schedule:Week:Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
1.8.10 Schedule:Year . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
1.8.11 Schedule:Compact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
1.8.12 Schedule:Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
1.8.13 Schedule:File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
1.8.14 Schedule:File:Shading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
1.9 Group – Surface Construction Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
1.9.1 Specifying the Building Envelope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
1.9.2 Material and Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
1.9.3 Material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
1.9.4 Material:NoMass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
1.9.5 Material:InfraredTransparent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
1.9.6 Material:AirGap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
1.9.7 MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
1.9.8 MaterialProperty:PhaseChange . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
1.9.9 MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
1.9.10 MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
1.9.11 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
1.9.12 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm . . . . . . . . 170
1.9.13 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
1.9.14 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution . . . . . . . . . . 172
1.9.15 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
1.9.16 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity . . . . . . 174
1.9.17 Materials for Glass Windows and Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.9.18 WindowMaterial:Glazing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
1.9.19 WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
1.9.20 Glass Optical Properties Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1.9.21 WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
1.9.22 WindowMaterial:Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
1.9.23 WindowMaterial:GasMixture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
1.9.24 WindowMaterial:Gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
1.9.25 WindowGap:DeflectionState . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
1.9.26 WindowGap:SupportPillar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
1.9.27 WindowMaterial:SimpleGlazingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
1.9.28 WindowMaterial:Shade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
1.9.29 WindowMaterial:Blind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
1.9.30 WindowMaterial:ComplexShade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
1.9.31 WindowMaterial:Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
1.9.32 WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
1.9.33 WindowMaterial:Drape:EquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
1.9.34 WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
1.9.35 WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
1.9.36 WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
1.9.37 WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
CONTENTS 5

1.9.38 Material:RoofVegetation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236

1.9.39 Ecoroof / RoofVegetation outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
1.9.40 MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
1.9.41 Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
1.9.42 Constructions - Modeling Underground Walls and Ground Floors Defined
with C and F Factors for Building Energy Code Compliance . . . . . . . . . 246
1.9.43 Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
1.9.44 Construction:FfactorGroundFloor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
1.9.45 ConstructionProperty:InternalHeatSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
1.9.46 Construction:AirBoundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
1.9.47 Composite Wall Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
1.9.48 Construction:ComplexFenestrationState . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
1.9.49 WindowThermalModel:Params . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
1.9.50 Matrix:TwoDimension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
1.9.51 Construction:WindowEquivalentLayer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
1.9.52 Construction:WindowDataFile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
1.10 Group – Thermal Zone Description/Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
1.10.1 Space . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
1.10.2 SpaceList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
1.10.3 Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
1.10.4 Space Thermal Output(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
1.10.5 Zone Thermal Output(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
1.10.6 ZoneList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
1.10.7 ZoneGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
1.10.8 Surface(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
1.10.9 Interzone Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
1.10.10 Surface View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
1.10.11 GlobalGeometryRules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
1.10.12 Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
1.10.13 Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
1.10.14 Wall:Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
1.10.15 Wall:Adiabatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
1.10.16 Wall:Underground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
1.10.17 Wall:Interzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
1.10.18 Roofs/Ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1.10.19 Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
1.10.20 Ceiling:Adiabatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
1.10.21 Ceiling:Interzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
1.10.22 Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
1.10.23 Floor:GroundContact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
1.10.24 Floor:Adiabatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
1.10.25 Floor:Interzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
1.10.26 Windows/Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
1.10.27 Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
1.10.28 Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
1.10.29 GlazedDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
6 CONTENTS

1.10.30 Window:Interzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

1.10.31 Door:Interzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
1.10.32 GlazedDoor:Interzone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
1.10.33 Surface Vertices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
1.10.34 Building Surfaces - Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
1.10.35 Wall:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
1.10.36 RoofCeiling:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
1.10.37 Floor:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
1.10.38 BuildingSurface:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
1.10.39 FenestrationSurface:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
1.10.40 Window Modeling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
1.10.41 InternalMass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
1.10.42 Surface Output Variables/Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
1.10.43 Window Output Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
1.10.44 Surface Output Variables (all heat transfer surfaces) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
1.10.45 Surface Output Variables (exterior heat transfer surfaces) . . . . . . . . . . 336
1.10.46 Opaque Surface Output Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
1.10.47 Window Output Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
1.10.48 Thermochromic Window Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
1.10.49 Other Surface Outputs/Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
1.10.50 Shading Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
1.10.51 Detached Shading Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
1.10.52 Shading:Site, Shading:Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
1.10.53 Shading:Site:Detailed, Shading:Building:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
1.10.54 Attached Shading Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
1.10.55 Shading:Overhang . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
1.10.56 Shading:Overhang:Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
1.10.57 Shading:Fin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
1.10.58 Shading:Fin:Projection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
1.10.59 Shading:Zone:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
1.10.60 ShadingProperty:Reflectance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
1.10.61 WindowShadingControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
1.10.62 WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
1.10.63 WindowProperty:AirflowControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
1.10.64 WindowProperty:StormWindow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
1.10.65 Importing Windows from WINDOW program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
1.10.66 Using LBNLs Windows Calculation Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
1.10.67 Zone Thermal Output(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
1.11 Group – Advanced Surface Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
1.11.1 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
1.11.2 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:MultipleSurface . . . . . . . . . . . 404
1.11.3 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:SurfaceList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
1.11.4 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
1.11.5 SurfaceControl:MovableInsulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
1.11.6 SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
1.11.7 SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
CONTENTS 7

1.11.8 SurfaceProperty:Underwater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415

1.11.9 Foundation:Kiva . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
1.11.10 Foundation:Kiva:Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
1.11.11 SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
1.11.12 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections . . . . . . . . . 433
1.11.13 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections . . . . . . . . 444
1.11.14 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:UserCurve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
1.11.15 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:UserCurve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
1.11.16 SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
1.11.17 SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
1.11.18 Convection Coefficient Application Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
1.11.19 Convection Coefficients Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
1.11.20 SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
1.11.21 SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
1.11.22 SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
1.11.23 ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
1.11.24 GeometryTransform . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 466
1.11.25 SurfaceProperty:SurroundingSurfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
1.11.26 SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
1.11.27 ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
1.11.28 SurfaceProperty:HeatBalanceSourceTerm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
1.11.29 Zone Property View Factors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
1.11.30 ZoneProperty:UserViewFactors:BySurfaceName . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
1.12 Group – Detailed Ground Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
1.12.1 Detailed Ground Heat Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474
1.12.2 GroundHeatTransfer:Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
1.13 Group – Room Air Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
1.13.1 Room Air Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
1.13.2 RoomAirModelType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
1.13.3 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:UserDefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
1.13.4 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:ConstantGradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
1.13.5 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:TwoGradient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480
1.13.6 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:NondimensionalHeight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 483
1.13.7 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:SurfaceMapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
1.13.8 RoomAir:Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
1.13.9 RoomAirSettings:OneNodeDisplacementVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
1.13.10 RoomAirSettings:ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
1.13.11 RoomAirSettings:CrossVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
1.13.12 RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
1.13.13 RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . 502
1.13.14 RoomAirflowNetwork Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
1.13.15 RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 506
1.13.16 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
1.13.17 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 508
1.13.18 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
1.13.19 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
8 CONTENTS

1.14 Group – Internal Gains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511

1.14.1 Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
1.14.2 People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
1.14.3 Simplified ASHRAE 55 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
1.14.4 ComfortViewFactorAngles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
1.14.5 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535
1.14.6 ElectricEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
1.14.7 GasEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
1.14.8 HotWaterEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
1.14.9 SteamEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
1.14.10 OtherEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
1.14.11 Internal Gain Equipment Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
1.14.12 ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 566
1.14.13 ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
1.14.14 SwimmingPool:Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
1.14.15 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
1.14.16 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
1.14.17 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven . . . . . . . . . 593
1.14.18 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:CutoffModel . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
1.14.19 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource . . . . . . . . . . . . 596
1.14.20 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion . . . . 598
1.14.21 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionVelocitySink . . . . . 599
1.14.22 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink . . . . . . . . 601
1.15 Group – Daylighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
1.15.1 Daylighting:Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 602
1.15.2 Daylighting:ReferencePoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 607
1.15.3 Guidelines for Daylighting Modeling Using the SplitFlux Method) . . . . . . 608
1.15.4 DElight Daylighting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
1.15.5 Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
1.15.6 Output:IlluminanceMap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
1.15.7 OutputControl:IlluminanceMap:Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
1.15.8 Daylighting Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
1.15.9 DaylightingDevice:Tubular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 622
1.15.10 DaylightingDevice:Shelf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
1.15.11 DaylightingDevice:LightWell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
1.15.12 Daylighting Modeling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 632
1.16 Group – Exterior Energy Use Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
1.16.1 Exterior:Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
1.16.2 Exterior:FuelEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
1.16.3 Exterior:WaterEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 636
1.17 Group – Airflow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
1.17.1 ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
1.17.2 ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
1.17.3 ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 644
1.17.4 ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
1.17.5 ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 655
CONTENTS 9

1.17.6 ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 662

1.17.7 ZoneMixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 665
1.17.8 ZoneCrossMixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
1.17.9 ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 676
1.17.10 ZoneEarthtube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 679
1.17.11 ZoneEarthTube Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 684
1.17.12 ZoneCoolTower:Shower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 686
1.17.13 ZoneThermalChimney . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 691
1.17.14 ZoneThermalChimney Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 693
1.17.15 ZoneAirMassFlowConservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 694
1.18 Group – Design Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 698
1.18.1 Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing . . . . . . . . . . 698
1.18.2 DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 721
1.18.3 DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir:SpaceList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 724
1.18.4 DesignSpecification:ZoneAirDistribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 725
1.18.5 Sizing:Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 727
1.18.6 OutputControl:Sizing:Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 728
1.18.7 Sizing:Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 729
1.18.8 DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 735
1.18.9 DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743
1.18.10 Sizing:System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744
1.18.11 Sizing:Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 752
1.19 HVAC: Primary and Secondary Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 754
1.20 Group – Node-Branch Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
1.20.1 NodeList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 756
1.20.2 BranchList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
1.20.3 Branch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 762
1.20.4 ConnectorList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 765
1.20.5 Plant Loop Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
1.20.6 Connector:Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 766
1.20.7 Connector:Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 767
1.20.8 Pipe:Adiabatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
1.20.9 Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 768
1.20.10 Pipe:Indoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 769
1.20.11 Pipe:Outdoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 771
1.20.12 Pipe:Underground . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
1.20.13 PipingSystem:Underground Class Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
1.20.14 PipingSystem:Underground:Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 775
1.20.15 PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 779
1.20.16 PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 780
1.20.17 Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 783
1.21 Group – Plant-Condenser Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
1.21.1 PlantLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 784
1.21.2 CondenserLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 795
1.22 Group – Plant-Condenser Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
1.22.1 Operation Schemes (Plant and Condenser) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802
10 CONTENTS

1.22.2 PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 802

1.22.3 CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 803
1.22.4 PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
1.22.5 PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
1.22.6 PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 805
1.22.7 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
1.22.8 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
1.22.9 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorRelativeHumidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
1.22.10 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
1.22.11 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulbDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
1.22.12 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulbDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
1.22.13 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpointDifference . . . . . . . . . . . . 808
1.22.14 PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 809
1.22.15 PlantEquipmentOperation:ThermalEnergyStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 810
1.22.16 PlantEquipmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
1.22.17 CondenserEquipmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 812
1.23 Group – Plant Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
1.23.1 Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 813
1.23.2 Generic Chiller Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 814
1.23.3 Chiller:Absorption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 819
1.23.4 Chiller:Absorption:Indirect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 824
1.23.5 Chiller:ConstantCOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 830
1.23.6 Chiller:Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 834
1.23.7 Chiller:Electric:EIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 843
1.23.8 Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 853
1.23.9 Chiller:EngineDriven . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 859
1.23.10 Chiller:CombustionTurbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
1.23.11 ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 880
1.23.12 ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 889
1.23.13 Boiler:HotWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 899
1.23.14 Boiler:Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 906
1.23.15 Water to Water Heat Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 910
1.23.16 HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 912
1.23.17 HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 916
1.23.18 HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . 918
1.23.19 HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Heating . . . . . . . . . . . 921
1.23.20 HeatPump:PlantLoop:EIR:Cooling (and Heating) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 925
1.23.21 Steps to specify the Ground Source Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 929
1.23.22 DistrictCooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 930
1.23.23 DistrictHeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 932
1.23.24 PlantComponent:TemperatureSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 933
1.23.25 CentralHeatPumpSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 935
1.23.26 ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 942
1.23.27 ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 948
1.24 Group – Water Heaters and Thermal Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 951
1.24.1 Standard Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 953
CONTENTS 11

1.24.2 WaterHeater:Mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 954

1.24.3 WaterHeater:Stratified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 966
1.24.4 WaterHeater:Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 976
1.24.5 WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 979
1.24.6 WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 989
1.24.7 Cold Thermal Storage Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 999
1.24.8 ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1000
1.24.9 ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1002
1.24.10 ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1007
1.24.11 ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1012
1.25 Group – Condenser Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
1.25.1 Equipment Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
1.25.2 CoolingTower:SingleSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1019
1.25.3 CoolingTower:TwoSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
1.25.4 CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1045
1.25.5 CoolingTower:VariableSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1057
1.25.6 CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1066
1.25.7 CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1069
1.25.8 EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1073
1.25.9 EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1081
1.25.10 FluidCooler:SingleSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1090
1.25.11 FluidCooler:TwoSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1093
1.25.12 GroundHeatExchanger:System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1098
1.25.13 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1103
1.25.14 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Array . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
1.25.15 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1105
1.25.16 GroundHeatExchanger:ResponseFactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1106
1.25.17 GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1107
1.25.18 GroundHeatExchanger:Pond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1111
1.25.19 GroundHeatExchanger:Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1114
1.25.20 GroundHeatExchanger:HorizontalTrench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1118
1.25.21 HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1120
1.26 Group – Air Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
1.26.1 AirLoopHVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1129
1.26.2 Systems Level Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1139
1.26.3 System Loads Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
1.26.4 System Energy Use Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1141
1.26.5 System Component Loads Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1142
1.26.6 System Component Energy Use Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1144
1.26.7 Overall Air Loop Syntax . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
1.26.8 AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1145
1.26.9 AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1147
1.26.10 AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1148
1.26.11 AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1150
1.26.12 OutdoorAir:Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1151
1.26.13 Outdoor Air Node outputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1153
12 CONTENTS

1.26.14 OutdoorAir:NodeList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154

1.26.15 OutdoorAir:Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1154
1.27 Group – Airflow Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
1.27.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155
1.27.2 Summary of Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1156
1.27.3 Airflow Network Example Files (included in the installation) . . . . . . . . . 1160
1.27.4 What the Airflow Network Model Can and Cannot Do . . . . . . . . . . . . 1161
1.27.5 AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1162
1.27.6 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1168
1.27.7 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1174
1.27.8 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1181
1.27.9 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1182
1.27.10 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea . . . . . . . . . . . 1183
1.27.11 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SpecifiedFlowRate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1184
1.27.12 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening . . . . . . . . . . . 1185
1.27.13 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening . . . . . . . . . . 1189
1.27.14 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening . . . . . . . . . . . . 1190
1.27.15 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan . . . . . . . . . . . 1191
1.27.16 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1192
1.27.17 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray . . . . . . . . . . . 1194
1.27.18 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues . . . . . . . . . . 1195
1.27.19 AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1196
1.27.20 AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1198
1.27.21 AirflowNetwork with RoomAir Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
1.27.22 AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1199
1.27.23 AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1200
1.27.24 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:DuctViewFactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
1.27.25 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1202
1.27.26 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1205
1.27.27 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio . . . . . . . . . . . . 1206
1.27.28 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208
1.27.29 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
1.27.30 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1210
1.27.31 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger . . . . . . . . . . . 1212
1.27.32 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit . . . . . . . . . . . . 1213
1.27.33 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop . . . . . . . 1215
1.27.34 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow . . . . . . . . . . 1215
1.27.35 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . 1217
1.27.36 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1218
1.28 Group - Zone Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1241
1.28.1 ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1244
1.28.2 ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1247
1.28.3 ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1250
1.29 Group – Zone HVAC Air Loop Terminal Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1252
1.29.1 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1253
1.29.2 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1255
CONTENTS 13

1.29.3 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1256

1.29.4 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan . . . . . . . . . . . . 1263
1.29.5 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1267
1.29.6 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1270
1.29.7 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1273
1.29.8 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1276
1.29.9 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1280
1.29.10 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction . . . . . . . . . 1284
1.29.11 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeBeam . . . . . . . . . . . 1288
1.29.12 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam . . . . . . . . . . . . 1294
1.29.13 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1298
1.29.14 AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1302
1.29.15 AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1304
1.29.16 AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1306
1.30 Group – Zone Forced Air Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
1.30.1 ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1309
1.30.2 ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1322
1.30.3 ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1332
1.30.4 ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1342
1.30.5 ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1348
1.30.6 ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1353
1.30.7 ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1360
1.30.8 ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1361
1.30.9 ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1367
1.30.10 ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1378
1.30.11 ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1390
1.30.12 ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1391
1.30.13 ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1403
1.30.14 ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1409
1.30.15 ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1417
1.30.16 ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1427
1.31 Group – Unitary Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
1.31.1 Furnace and Unitary Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
1.31.2 AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1446
1.31.3 UnitarySystemPerformance:Multispeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1467
1.31.4 AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1469
1.31.5 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1475
1.31.6 Unitary System Heat and Cool (AirLoopHVAC) Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . 1481
1.31.7 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1482
1.31.8 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . 1488
1.31.9 AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1503
1.31.10 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1507
1.31.11 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1511
1.31.12 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass . . . . . . . . . . . 1522
1.32 Group – Variable Refrigerant Flow Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1535
1.32.1 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1536
14 CONTENTS

1.32.2 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl . . . . . . 1564

1.32.3 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl:HR . . . 1575
1.32.4 ZoneTerminalUnitList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1587
1.33 Group – Radiative / Convective Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1588
1.33.1 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1589
1.33.2 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1594
1.33.3 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1599
1.33.4 ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1603
1.33.5 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1611
1.33.6 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1614
1.33.7 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1616
1.33.8 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1627
1.33.9 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1639
1.33.10 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:SurfaceGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1644
1.33.11 ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1645
1.33.12 ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1650
1.33.13 ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1662
1.34 Group – Refrigeration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1663
1.34.1 Refrigeration:CompressorRack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1664
1.34.2 Refrigeration:Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1677
1.34.3 Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
1.34.4 Refrigeration:WalkIn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1690
1.34.5 Refrigeration Case and WalkIn Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1696
1.34.6 Refrigeration:System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1700
1.34.7 Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1715
1.34.8 Refrigeration:Compressor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1724
1.34.9 Refrigeration:CompressorList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1728
1.34.10 Refrigeration:Subcooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1729
1.34.11 Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1731
1.34.12 Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1736
1.34.13 Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1745
1.34.14 Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1751
1.34.15 Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1753
1.34.16 Refrigeration:TransferLoadList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
1.34.17 Refrigeration:SecondarySystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1757
1.34.18 Additional Refrigeration Outputs Available for Each Zone . . . . . . . . . . 1766
1.34.19 Additional Refrigeration Outputs for Each Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1766
1.34.20 Refrigeration:AirChiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1769
1.35 Group - Zone Controls - Thermostats and Humidistats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1779
1.35.1 ZoneControl:Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1780
1.35.2 Zone Thermostat Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788
1.35.3 ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788
1.35.4 ThermostatSetpoint:SingleCooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788
1.35.5 ThermostatSetpoint:SingleHeatingOrCooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1788
1.35.6 ThermostatSetpoint:DualSetpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789
1.35.7 ZoneControl:Thermostat:OperativeTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1789
CONTENTS 15

1.35.8 ZoneControl:Thermostat:TemperatureAndHumidity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1793

1.35.9 ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1795
1.35.10 ZoneControl:Humidistat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1798
1.35.11 ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1802
1.35.12 Thermal Comfort Setpoints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1806
1.35.13 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeating . . . . . . . . . 1807
1.35.14 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleCooling . . . . . . . . . . 1807
1.35.15 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:SingleHeatingOrCooling . . . . 1807
1.35.16 ThermostatSetpoint:ThermalComfort:Fanger:DualSetpoint . . . . . . . . . . 1808
1.35.17 ZoneControl:ContaminantController . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1809
1.36 Group – Air Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1812
1.36.1 AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath, AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath . . . . . . . . . . . . 1812
1.36.2 AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
1.36.3 AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1813
1.36.4 AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1814
1.36.5 AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1816
1.36.6 AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1818
1.36.7 AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1819
1.36.8 AirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1820
1.36.9 AirLoopHVAC:Mixer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1821
1.36.10 AirLoopHVAC:Splitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1822
1.37 Group – Non-Zone Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
1.37.1 LoadProfile:Plant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1823
1.38 Group Solar Collectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825
1.38.1 SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1825
1.38.2 SolarCollectorPerformance:FlatPlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1827
1.38.3 SolarCollector:IntegralCollectorStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1829
1.38.4 SolarCollectorPerformance:IntegralCollectorStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1831
1.38.5 SolarCollector:FlatPlate:PhotovoltaicThermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1835
1.38.6 SolarCollectorPerformance:PhotovoltaicThermal:Simple . . . . . . . . . . . . 1837
1.38.7 Solar Collector Heating System Plant Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1838
1.38.8 Solar Heating System Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1841
1.38.9 SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1843
1.38.10 SolarCollector:UnglazedTranspired:Multisystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1851
1.39 Group Pumps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852
1.39.1 Pump:VariableSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1852
1.39.2 Pump:ConstantSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1858
1.39.3 Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1863
1.39.4 HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1867
1.39.5 HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1871
1.40 Plant-Condenser Flow Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1876
1.40.1 TemperingValve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1876
1.41 Group Heating and Cooling Coils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
1.41.1 Coil:Cooling:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1878
1.41.2 Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1882
1.41.3 CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1888
16 CONTENTS

1.41.4 CoilSystem:Cooling:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1890

1.41.5 Coil:Heating:Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1896
1.41.6 Coil:Heating:Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1899
1.41.7 Heating Coil (Steam) Outputs: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1901
1.41.8 Coil:Heating:Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1902
1.41.9 Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1903
1.41.10 Coil:Heating:Desuperheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1906
1.41.11 Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1909
1.41.12 Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1912
1.41.13 Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl . . . . . 1915
1.41.14 Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl . . . . . 1919
1.41.15 Coil:Heating:Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1921
1.41.16 Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1924
1.41.17 Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1928
1.41.18 Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1938
1.41.19 Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode . . . . . . . . . . . . 1948
1.41.20 Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1952
1.41.21 Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1967
1.41.22 CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1979
1.41.23 Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1989
1.41.24 Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1998
1.41.25 Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2009
1.41.26 Coil:WaterHeating:Desuperheater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2018
1.41.27 CoilSystem:Cooling:DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2024
1.41.28 CoilSystem:Heating:DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2030
1.41.29 CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2031
1.41.30 CoilSystem:IntegratedHeatPump:AirSource . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2034
1.41.31 Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2040
1.41.32 Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2048
1.41.33 Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:VariableSpeed . . . . . . . . . . . 2053
1.41.34 Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation . . . . . . . . . . 2065
1.41.35 Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2069
1.41.36 Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit . . . . . . . . 2075
1.41.37 Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation . . . . . . . . . . 2087
1.41.38 Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2091
1.41.39 Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit . . . . . . . . 2094
1.41.40 Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed:ThermalStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2105
1.41.41 Secondary Coils of DX System and Heat Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2136
1.41.42 Secondary DX Coil Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2144
1.41.43 Coil:Cooling:DX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2145
1.41.44 Coil:Cooling:DX:CurveFit:Performance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2147
1.41.45 Coil:Cooling:DX:CurveFit:OperatingMode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2150
1.41.46 Coil:Cooling:DX:CurveFit:Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2152
1.42 Group – Fans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2168
1.42.1 Fan:SystemModel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2169
1.42.2 Fan:ConstantVolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2175
CONTENTS 17

1.42.3 Fan:OnOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2177

1.42.4 Fan:VariableVolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2180
1.42.5 Fan:ZoneExhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2183
1.42.6 FanPerformance:NightVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2187
1.42.7 Fan:ComponentModel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2188
1.43 Group – Humidifiers and Dehumidifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2198
1.43.1 Humidifier:Steam:Electric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2198
1.43.2 Humidifier:Steam:Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2201
1.43.3 Dehumidifier:Desiccant:NoFans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2204
1.43.4 Dehumidifier:Desiccant:System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2211
1.44 Group – Energy Management System (EMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2217
1.44.1 EnergyManagementSystem:Sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2218
1.44.2 EnergyManagementSystem:Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2219
1.44.3 EnergyManagementSystem:ProgramCallingManager . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2220
1.44.4 EnergyManagementSystem:Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2223
1.44.5 EnergyManagementSystem:Subroutine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2224
1.44.6 EnergyManagementSystem:GlobalVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2225
1.44.7 EnergyManagementSystem:OutputVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2226
1.44.8 EnergyManagementSystem:MeteredOutputVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2227
1.44.9 EnergyManagementSystem:TrendVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2230
1.44.10 EnergyManagementSystem:InternalVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2231
1.44.11 EnergyManagementSystem:CurveOrTableIndexVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . 2232
1.44.12 EnergyManagementSystem:ConstructionIndexVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . 2232
1.45 Group – Python Plugins / Python EMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2233
1.45.1 Python Plugin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2234
1.45.2 PythonPlugin:SearchPaths . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2236
1.45.3 PythonPlugin:Instance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2236
1.45.4 Global and Trend Variable API Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2237
1.45.5 PythonPlugin:Variables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2237
1.45.6 PythonPlugin:TrendVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2238
1.45.7 Packaging Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2239
1.46 Group ExternalInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2240
1.46.1 ExternalInterface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2240
1.46.2 Building Controls Virtual Test Bed (BCVTB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2241
1.46.3 ExternalInterface:Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2241
1.46.4 ExternalInterface:Actuator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2242
1.46.5 ExternalInterface:Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2243
1.46.6 Functional Mock-up Unit (FMU) Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2243
1.46.7 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitImport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2243
1.46.8 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitImport:From:Variable . . . . . . . . 2244
1.46.9 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitImport:To:Schedule . . . . . . . . . 2245
1.46.10 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitImport:To:Actuator . . . . . . . . . 2246
1.46.11 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitImport:To:Variable . . . . . . . . . 2248
1.46.12 Functional Mock-up Unit (FMU) Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2249
1.46.13 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitExport:From:Variable . . . . . . . . 2249
1.46.14 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitExport:To:Schedule . . . . . . . . . 2249
18 CONTENTS

1.46.15 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitExport:To:Actuator . . . . . . . . . 2250

1.46.16 ExternalInterface:FunctionalMockupUnitExport:To:Variable . . . . . . . . . 2251
1.47 Group User Defined HVAC and Plant Component Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2252
1.47.1 ZoneHVAC:ForcedAir:UserDefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2252
1.47.2 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:UserDefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2255
1.47.3 Coil:UserDefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2257
1.47.4 PlantComponent:UserDefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2260
1.47.5 PlantEquipmentOperation:UserDefined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2263
1.48 Group System Availability Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2265
1.48.1 AvailabilityManager:Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2266
1.48.2 AvailabilityManager:ScheduledOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2267
1.48.3 AvailabilityManager:ScheduledOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2268
1.48.4 AvailabilityManager:NightCycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2268
1.48.5 AvailabilityManager:DifferentialThermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2271
1.48.6 AvailabilityManager:HighTemperatureTurnOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2272
1.48.7 AvailabilityManager:HighTemperatureTurnOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2273
1.48.8 AvailabilityManager:LowTemperatureTurnOff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2274
1.48.9 AvailabilityManager:LowTemperatureTurnOn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2275
1.48.10 AvailabilityManager:NightVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2276
1.48.11 AvailabilityManager:HybridVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2277
1.48.12 AvailabilityManager:OptimumStart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2284
1.49 Group Setpoint Managers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2286
1.49.1 SetpointManager:Scheduled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2288
1.49.2 SetpointManager:Scheduled:DualSetpoint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2289
1.49.3 SetpointManager:OutdoorAirReset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2290
1.49.4 SetpointManager:SingleZone:Reheat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2292
1.49.5 SetpointManager:SingleZone:Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2293
1.49.6 SetpointManager:SingleZone:Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2295
1.49.7 SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2296
1.49.8 SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2297
1.49.9 SetpointManager:MixedAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2298
1.49.10 SetpointManager:OutdoorAirPretreat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2300
1.49.11 SetpointManager:Warmest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2302
1.49.12 SetpointManager:Coldest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2303
1.49.13 SetpointManager:ReturnAirBypassFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2305
1.49.14 SetpointManager:WarmestTemperatureFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2306
1.49.15 SetpointManager:MultiZone:Cooling:Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2308
1.49.16 SetpointManager:MultiZone:Heating:Average . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2309
1.49.17 SetpointManager:MultiZone:MinimumHumidity:Average . . . . . . . . . . . 2310
1.49.18 SetpointManager:MultiZone:MaximumHumidity:Average . . . . . . . . . . . 2311
1.49.19 SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Minimum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2312
1.49.20 SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2314
1.49.21 SetpointManager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2315
1.49.22 SetpointManager:FollowSystemNodeTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2316
1.49.23 SetpointManager:FollowGroundTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2317
1.49.24 SetpointManager:CondenserEnteringReset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2318
CONTENTS 19

1.49.25 SetpointManager:CondenserEnteringReset:Ideal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2321

1.49.26 SetpointManager:SingleZone:OneStageCooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2322
1.49.27 SetpointManager:SingleZone:OneStageHeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2323
1.49.28 SetpointManager:ReturnTemperature:ChilledWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2324
1.49.29 SetpointManager:ReturnTemperature:HotWater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2326
1.50 Group Controllers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2328
1.50.1 Controls (Air Loop and Zone Equipment) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2328
1.50.2 Controller:WaterCoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2328
1.50.3 Controller:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2330
1.50.4 Controller:MechanicalVentilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2340
1.50.5 ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator:Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2344
1.51 Group Evaporative Coolers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2348
1.51.1 EvaporativeCooler:Direct:CelDekPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2348
1.51.2 EvaporativeCooler:Direct:ResearchSpecial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2353
1.51.3 EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:CelDekPad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2357
1.51.4 EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:WetCoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2362
1.51.5 EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2366
1.52 Group Heat Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2374
1.52.1 HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2374
1.52.2 HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2378
1.52.3 HeatExchanger:Desiccant:BalancedFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2388
1.52.4 HeatExchanger:Desiccant:BalancedFlow:PerformanceDataType1 . . . . . . . 2392
1.53 Group Demand Limiting Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2401
1.53.1 DemandManagerAssignmentList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2402
1.53.2 DemandManager:ExteriorLights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2405
1.53.3 DemandManager:Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2407
1.53.4 DemandManager:ElectricEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2408
1.53.5 DemandManager:Thermostats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2410
1.53.6 DemandManager:Ventilation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2412
1.53.7 DemandManager:Ventilation Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2413
1.54 Group – Electric Load Center-Generator Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2413
1.54.1 ElectricLoadCenter:Transformer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2414
1.54.2 ElectricLoadCenter:Distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2420
1.54.3 ElectricLoadCenter:Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2431
1.54.4 ElectricLoadCenter:Inverter:Simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2433
1.54.5 ElectricLoadCenter:Inverter:FunctionOfPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2434
1.54.6 ElectricLoadCenter:Inverter:LookUpTable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2436
1.54.7 ElectricLoadCenter:Inverter:PVWatts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2437
1.54.8 ElectricLoadCenter:Storage:Converter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2439
1.54.9 Electric Load Center Converter Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2441
1.54.10 ElectricLoadCenter:Storage:Simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2443
1.54.11 ElectricLoadCenter:Storage:Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2445
1.54.12 ElectricLoadCenter:Storage:LiIonNMCBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2451
1.54.13 Generator:InternalCombustionEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2455
1.54.14 Generator:CombustionTurbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2462
1.54.15 Generator:MicroTurbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2467
20 CONTENTS

1.54.16 Generator:MicroCHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2479

1.54.17 Generator:MicroCHP:NonNormalizedParameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2480
1.54.18 Generator:FuelCell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2488
1.54.19 Generator:FuelCell:PowerModule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2497
1.54.20 Generator:FuelCell:StackCooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2502
1.54.21 Generator:FuelCell:AirSupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2505
1.54.22 Generator:FuelCell:WaterSupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2507
1.54.23 Generator:FuelCell:AuxiliaryHeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2509
1.54.24 Generator:FuelCell:ExhaustGasToWaterHeatExchanger . . . . . . . . . . . . 2511
1.54.25 Generator:FuelCell:ElectricalStorage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2515
1.54.26 Generator:FuelCell:Inverter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2516
1.54.27 Generator:FuelSupply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2517
1.54.28 Photovoltaic Generators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2520
1.54.29 Generator:Photovoltaic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2521
1.54.30 PhotovoltaicPerformance:Simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2523
1.54.31 PhotovoltaicPerformance:EquivalentOne-Diode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2524
1.54.32 PhotovoltaicPerformance:Sandia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2529
1.54.33 Generator:PVWatts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2533
1.54.34 Generator:WindTurbine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2536
1.55 Group Water Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2542
1.55.1 WaterUse:Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2544
1.55.2 WaterUse:Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2550
1.55.3 WaterUse:Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2555
1.55.4 WaterUse:RainCollector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2559
1.55.5 WaterUse:Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2561
1.56 Group - Operational Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2563
1.56.1 Introduction to Operational Faults Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2563
1.56.2 Overview of Operational Fault Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2563
1.56.3 FaultModel:TemperatureSensorOffset:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2564
1.56.4 FaultModel:HumiditySensorOffset:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2565
1.56.5 FaultModel:EnthalpySensorOffset:OutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2566
1.56.6 FaultModel:TemperatureSensorOffset:ReturnAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2567
1.56.7 FaultModel:EnthalpySensorOffset:ReturnAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2568
1.56.8 FaultModel:Fouling:Coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2568
1.56.9 FaultModel:ThermostatOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2570
1.56.10 FaultModel:HumidistatOffset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2571
1.56.11 FaultModel:Fouling:AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2573
1.56.12 FaultModel:TemperatureSensorOffset:ChillerSupplyWater . . . . . . . . . . 2574
1.56.13 FaultModel:TemperatureSensorOffset:CondenserSupplyWater . . . . . . . . 2576
1.56.14 FaultModel:Fouling:CoolingTower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2577
1.56.15 FaultModel:Fouling:Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2579
1.56.16 FaultModel:Fouling:Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2580
1.56.17 FaultModel:Fouling:EvaporativeCooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2581
1.56.18 FaultModel:TemperatureSensorOffset:CoilSupplyAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2583
1.57 Group - Performance Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2584
1.57.1 Curve:Linear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2585
CONTENTS 21

1.57.2 Curve:QuadLinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2586

1.57.3 Curve:QuintLinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2590
1.57.4 Curve:Quadratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2594
1.57.5 Curve:Cubic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2596
1.57.6 Curve:Quartic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2598
1.57.7 Curve:Exponent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2600
1.57.8 Curve:Bicubic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2602
1.57.9 Curve:Biquadratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2604
1.57.10 Curve:CubicLinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2607
1.57.11 Curve:ChillerPartLoadWithLift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2609
1.57.12 Curve:QuadraticLinear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2612
1.57.13 Curve:Triquadratic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2615
1.57.14 Curve:Functional:PressureDrop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2620
1.57.15 Curve:FanPressureRise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2621
1.57.16 Curve:ExponentialSkewNormal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2623
1.57.17 Curve:Sigmoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2625
1.57.18 Curve:RectangularHyperbola1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2627
1.57.19 Curve:RectangularHyperbola2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2628
1.57.20 Curve:ExponentialDecay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2630
1.57.21 Curve:DoubleExponentialDecay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2632
1.58 Group Performance Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2634
1.58.1 Table:Lookup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2634
1.58.2 Table:IndependentVariableList . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2638
1.58.3 Table:IndependentVariable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2639
1.59 Group Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2642
1.59.1 FluidProperties:Name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2643
1.59.2 FluidProperties:GlycolConcentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2644
1.59.3 FluidProperties:Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2645
1.59.4 FluidProperties:Saturated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2646
1.59.5 FluidProperties:Superheated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2647
1.59.6 Glycol Fluid Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2647
1.59.7 FluidProperties:Concentration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2648
1.60 Group – Hybrid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2649
1.60.1 HybridModel:Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2649

2 HVAC Template Objects 2655

2.1 HVACTemplate Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2655
2.2 Group – HVAC Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2656
2.2.1 HVACTemplate:Thermostat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2660
2.2.2 HVACTemplate:Zone:IdealLoadsAirSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2661
2.2.3 HVACTemplate:Zone:BaseboardHeat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2666
2.2.4 HVACTemplate:Zone:FanCoil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2669
2.2.5 HVACTemplate:Zone:PTAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2675
2.2.6 HVACTemplate:Zone:PTHP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2683
2.2.7 HVACTemplate:Zone:WaterToAirHeatPump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2693
2.2.8 HVACTemplate:Zone:VRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2702
22 CONTENTS

2.2.9 HVACTemplate:Zone:Unitary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2709

2.2.10 HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2714
2.2.11 HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:FanPowered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2721
2.2.12 HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:HeatAndCool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2728
2.2.13 HVACTemplate:Zone:ConstantVolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2733
2.2.14 HVACTemplate:Zone:DualDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2738
2.2.15 HVACTemplate:System:VRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2743
2.2.16 HVACTemplate:System:Unitary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2751
2.2.17 HVACTemplate:System:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2760
2.2.18 HVACTemplate:System:UnitarySystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2771
2.2.19 HVACTemplate:System:VAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2786
2.2.20 HVACTemplate:System:PackagedVAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2798
2.2.21 HVACTemplate:System:ConstantVolume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2810
2.2.22 HVACTemplate:System:DualDuct . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2823
2.2.23 HVACTemplate:System:DedicatedOutdoorAir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2842
2.2.24 HVACTemplate:Plant:ChilledWaterLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2852
2.2.25 HVACTemplate:Plant:Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2860
2.2.26 HVACTemplate:Plant:Chiller:ObjectReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2862
2.2.27 HVACTemplate:Plant:Tower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2863
2.2.28 HVACTemplate:Plant:Tower:ObjectReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2865
2.2.29 HVACTemplate:Plant:HotWaterLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2866
2.2.30 HVACTemplate:Plant:Boiler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2871
2.2.31 HVACTemplate:Plant:Boiler:ObjectReference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2873
2.2.32 HVACTemplate:Plant:MixedWaterLoop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2874

3 EnergyPlus Economics 2879

3.1 Group – Economics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2879
3.2 Introduction to Economics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2880
3.3 Conceptual Framework – Variables and Hierarchy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2881
3.4 UtilityCost:Tariff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2882
3.4.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2883
3.5 UtilityCost:Qualify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2889
3.5.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2890
3.6 UtilityCost:Charge:Simple . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2891
3.6.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2891
3.7 UtilityCost:Charge:Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2892
3.7.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2892
3.8 UtilityCost:Ratchet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2894
3.8.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2895
3.9 UtilityCost:Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2896
3.9.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2896
3.10 UtilityCost:Computation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2897
3.10.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2897
3.11 UtilityCost:Tariff Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2898
3.12 UtilityCost:Tariff Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2907
3.13 Economic Results Summary Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2908
CONTENTS 23

3.14 Complex Tariff Modeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2908

3.15 Cost Estimating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2913
3.15.1 ComponentCost:LineItem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2913
3.15.2 ComponentCost:Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2917
3.15.3 ComponentCost:Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2919
3.15.4 Economics Cost Estimate Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2920
3.16 Life-Cycle Costing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2922
3.17 LifeCycleCost:Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2923
3.17.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2923
3.18 LifeCycleCost:RecurringCosts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2927
3.18.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2928
3.19 LifeCycleCost:NonrecurringCost . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2929
3.19.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2930
3.20 LifeCycleCost:UsePriceEscalation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2931
3.20.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2932
3.21 LifeCycleCost:UseAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2934
3.21.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2934
3.22 CurrencyType . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2935
3.22.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2935

4 Parametric Objects 2936

4.1 Group – Parametrics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2936
4.1.1 Expressions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2937
4.1.2 Processing Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2937
4.1.3 Parametric:SetValueForRun . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2937
4.1.4 Parametric:Logic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2938
4.1.5 Parametric:RunControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2943
4.1.6 Parametric:FileNameSuffix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2943

5 Input for Output 2944

5.1 Group – Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2944
5.1.1 Variable Dictionary Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2944
5.1.2 Output:VariableDictionary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2944
5.1.3 Surface Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2945
5.1.4 Output:Surfaces:List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2945
5.1.5 Output:Surfaces:Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2947
5.1.6 Output:Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2948
5.1.7 Output:Constructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2949
5.1.8 Output:DaylightFactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2949
5.1.9 Output:EnergyManagementSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2950
5.1.10 OutputControl:SurfaceColorScheme . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2951
5.1.11 OutputControl:ReportingTolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2952
5.1.12 Output:Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2952
5.1.13 Output:Meter and Output:Meter:MeterFileOnly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2954
5.1.14 Output:Meter:Cumulative and Output:Meter:Cumulative:MeterFileOnly . . 2954
5.1.15 Output:EnvironmentalImpactFactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2958
24 CONTENTS

5.1.16 EnvironmentalImpactFactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2959

5.1.17 FuelFactors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2960
5.1.18 Output:SQLite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2988
5.1.19 OutputControl:Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2990

6 Output 2994
6.1 Using ReadVarsESO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2995
6.1.1 Creating Charts and Spreadsheet files from Output Variables . . . . . . . . 2995

7 Standard Output Reports 2999

7.1 Output:Table:TimeBins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2999
7.1.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2999
7.2 Output:Table:Monthly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001
7.2.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3001
7.3 Output:Table:Annual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3003
7.3.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3003
7.4 Output:Table:SummaryReports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3006
7.4.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3006
7.5 OutputControl:Table:Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3035
7.5.1 Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3035

8 Weather Data 3037

8.1 Missing Weather File Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3037
8.2 Weather Data Hourly Interpolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3038
8.3 Weather File Data Reporting (errors) during Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3039

9 Running EnergyPlus 3041

9.1 Energy+.ini . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3041
9.2 Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3042
9.3 EnergyPlus Execution Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3045
9.3.1 Reducing Run Time Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3045

10 Appendix A. Units and Abbreviations 3047

10.1 Standard EnergyPlus Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3047
10.1.1 Standard Temperature and Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3047
10.2 Standard EnergyPlus Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3047
Chapter 1

Input-Output Reference

This document is intended to be an encyclopedic reference for the EnergyPlus Input Data Dictionary
(IDD), Input Data File (IDF) and potential resultant outputs (various output files).
The following descriptions are “grouped” by the elements in the IDD (ref: Getting Started
Document and the IDD Conventions). In some cases, the descriptions of reporting will be done for
an object (e.g., Lighting electrical consumption or thermal comfort value for a group of people) and
in some cases for the entire group (e.g., ambient condition reports).

1.1 What’s different about EnergyPlus Input and Output?

The usual procedure for non-interactive programs is to process all the input necessary to “do the
job”, perform the actions required by the input, and somewhere along the way produce reports on
the actions. Usually, there will be error messages on incorrect input statements and/or incorrect
conditions detected during processing. Usually, the input is echoed in its entirety so that the context
of errors is shown clearly.
Results are typically output into reports as well as a compilation of various inputs reformatted
into different groupings than were originally entered (defaults filled in, etc.)
EnergyPlus does all the above. However, some nuances are different from the usual actions.

1.1.1 EnergyPlus Input Processing

1) EnergyPlus is compiled with a specific the data dictionary (Energy+.idd) and the input data
file (in.idf) is read prior to doing anything else. Only after this is done does processing start.
HOWEVER, the input processor only knows as much as the data dictionary has told it. It knows
which fields should be alpha and which should be numeric. All of this information (including the
IDD) is echoed to the audit file (audit.out) in case errors occur. Most of the errors show up (out of
context) in the standard error file (eplusout.err) – there might be enough information to decipher
where the error is or you may have to look at the more inclusive audit file. Invalid numeric fields
are detected during this processing and default numeric fields are filled. For more information on
the IDD, its structure and implications, please see the IDD Conventions discussion below.
2) The biggest difference between EnergyPlus and more traditional input processing is that
EnergyPlus is modular in its actual filling in the details for the simulation. Because of the modular
structure of EnergyPlus, each module is responsible for “getting” its own input. It receives this
input from the input processor in the form of alpha and numeric fields. Each module typically gets

25
26 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

all its input the first time it is called. The implication for the user is that error messages may show
up in somewhat peculiar places. A further implication is that no order is needed in the input data
file! Data that is not needed by a particular simulation is not processed.
3) The data dictionary provides the capability to do “automatic” range checking on numeric
fields as well as fill in numeric defaults. Both filling in defaults and “automatic” range checking are
done when the data is read. Other checks may need a combination of fields and won’t be done until
the data is “processed” (after the simulation starts).
4) A couple of other differences that might not be true in other programs: Blanks are
significant in alpha fields SO DesignDay is not the same as Design Day (1 space between Design
and Day) nor Design Day (2 spaces between Design and Day). Alpha objects, however, are case
insensitive SO DesignDay is the same as ‘designday’ or ‘SizingPeriod:DesignDay’.

1.1.2 General Input Rules

Rules shown here are for the input data files. Rules about the Input Data Dictionary are shown in
the Interface Developer’s Guide (there is much similarity and overlap) but most users can view the
IDD (Input Data Dictionary) as an additional quick reference for EnergyPlus.
The input data file is the primary file that EnergyPlus uses to create the building simulation. The
only additional files are referenced by certain objects (such as the Schedule:File object). The input
is order-independent; data can appear in any order and will be retrieved and sorted as necessary
by the EnergyPlus simulation modules. In addition, EnergyPlus allocates everything dynamically,
so there are no limitations as to number of zones, surfaces, etc.

• The initial line of an input object MUST have a comma or semicolon.

• Fields do not extend over line boundaries. Usually, if a comma or (as appropriate) semi-colon
is not the last field value on a line, one will be inserted. Of course, several fields may appear
on a single line as long as they are comma separated. (And the last could be followed by a
semi-colon).

• Commas delimit fields – therefore, no fields can have embedded commas. No error will
occur but you won’t get what you want. You cannot surround a field with “ to accommodate
commas in the fields.

• Blank lines are allowed.

• The comment character is a exclamation “!”. Anything on a line after the exclamation is
ignored.

• Input records (aka input line length) can be up to 500 characters in length. If you go over
that, no error will occur but you won’t get what you want.

• Each Alpha string in the input data file (aka alpha field length) can be up to 100 characters
in length. Anything beyond that is truncated. This would apply to all names (such as zone
name, node name, schedule name) in fields.

• Each Alpha string (including Section and Class/Object keywords) is mapped to UPPER case
during processing, unless the “retaincase” flag marks the field in the IDD. Get routines from
1.2. IDD CONVENTIONS 27

the EnergyPlus code that use the Section and Object keywords automatically map to UPPER
case for finding the item. The primary drawback with this is that error messages coming out
of the input processor will be in UPPER case and may not appear exactly as input.
• Special characters, such as tabs, should NOT be included in the file. However, tabs can be
accommodated and are turned into spaces.
• All numbers can be flexibly input and are processed into single precision variables (i.e. 1.0,
1.000, 1, .1E+1 are all processed equally).

1.1.3 EnergyPlus Output Processing

1. Unlike the usual formatted output text formatted reports, EnergyPlus usual output is either
at the summary or at the detailed (variable) level. Summary reports exist for many inputs
as well as sizing results. The more detailed variable level reporting is produced as “stream of
consciousness” (as the simulation happens) and must be post-processed for more sensible view-
ing. Note that the terms “variable” and “output variable” (accessed by the Output:Variable
and/or Output:Meter objects) are used interchangeably in this document.
2. Most EnergyPlus reporting can be readily viewed in current spreadsheet programs – or other
software that can process “delimited variable” reports. In these kind of reports, each “column”
is separated from the next by a “delimiter”. Typical delimiters are “comma” and “tab”.
Gradually, EnergyPlus reporting is moving from all comma separated reports to allow the
user to select the delimiter via “style” objects.
3. Styled reports allow for more selectable output reporting but also increase the number of
output files as we have chosen to create the report names with extensions that typify the
actual reporting. Depending on the reporting, these can be:
• Tab – reports with a .tab extension have tabs as the delimiter. These report files (directly
from EnergyPlus) will be named something like “eplus<xxx>.tab” where the <xxx> is
a short name of the kind of report (e.g. Zsz for Zone Sizing, Map for Daylighting Map)
• Csv – reports with a .csv extension have commas as the delimiter. These are also
specially formatted for use in spreadsheets (such as the compilation of results from the
eplusout.eso file into the eplusout.csv file using the default post-processor program).
• Txt – reports with a .txt extension have spaces as the “delimiter” but only certain
of these are really formatted the way you might expect: where multiple spaces make
printing with a non-proportional font would produce readable output.
• Html – reports with a .html extension are “web-browser” ready.

1.2 IDD Conventions

The following is a basic description of the structure of the IDD (it’s actually taken directly from the
IDD file). As noted within, ! signifies a comment character as does the \. \ has also been adopted
as a convention for including more specific comments about each field in an object. These have
been used with success in the IDFEditor and it is hoped the flexibility will provide other interface
developers with useful information.
28 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

!IDD_Version ${ CMAKE_VERSION_MAJOR }.${ CMAKE_VERSION_MINOR }.${ CMAKE_VERSION_PATCH }

!IDD_BUILD ${ CMAKE_VERSION_BUILD }
! **************************************************************************
! This file is the Input Data Dictionary (IDD) for EnergyPlus.
! The IDD defines the syntax and data model for each type of input "Object ."
! Lines in EnergyPlus input files (and IDD) are limited to 500 characters.
!
! Object Description
! ------------------
! To define an object (a record with data), develop a key word that is unique
! Each data item to the object can be A (Alphanumeric string) or N (numeric)
! Number each A and N. This will show how the data items will be put into the
! arrays that are passed to the Input Processor "Get" (GetObjectItem) routines.
! All alpha fields are limited to 100 characters. Numeric fields should be
! valid numerics (can include such as 1.0E+05) and are placed into double
! precision variables.
!
! NOTE: Even though a field may be optional , a comma representing that field
! must be included (unless it is the last field in the object). Since the
! entire input is "field -oriented" and not "keyword -oriented", the EnergyPlus
! Input Processor must have some representation (even if blank) for each
! field.
!
! Object Documentation
! --------------------
! In addition , the following special comments appear one per line and
! most are followed by a value. Comments may apply to a field or the object
! or a group of objects.
!
! Field -level comments:
!
! \field Name of field
! (should be succinct and readable , blanks are encouraged)
!
! \note Note describing the field and its valid values. If multiple lines ,
! start each line with \note. Limit line length to 100 characters.
!
! \required -field To flag fields which must have a value. If the idf input is blank and
! there is a \default , then the default will be used. However , as of v8 .6.0
! the use of \required -field and \default on the same field is discouraged
! and instances with both have been changed.
! (this comment has no "value ")
!
! \begin -extensible Marks the first field at which the object accepts an extensible
! field set. A fixed number of fields from this marker define the
! extensible field set , see the object code \extensible for
! more information.
!
! \units Units (must be from EnergyPlus standard units list)
! EnergyPlus units are standard SI units
!
! \ip -units IP -Units (for use by input processors with IP units)
! This is only used if the default conversion is not
! appropriate.
!
! \unitsBasedOnField For fields that may have multiple possible units , indicates
! the field in the object that can be used to determine
! the units. The field reference is in the A2 form.
!
! \minimum Minimum that includes the following value
!
! \minimum > Minimum that must be > than the following value
!
! \maximum Maximum that includes the following value
!
! \maximum < Maximum that must be < than the following value
!
! \default Default for the field (if N/A then omit entire line). If a default is
! added to an existing field , then \required -field should be removed if present.
! Defaults are filled in only if the field is within \min -fields , or the actual
1.2. IDD CONVENTIONS 29

! object is longer than this field.

!
! \deprecated This field is not really used and will be deleted from the object.
! The required information is gotten internally or
! not needed by the program.
!
! \autosizable Flag to indicate that this field can be used with the Auto
! Sizing routines to produce calculated results for the
! field. If a value follows this , then that will be used
! when the "Autosize" feature is flagged. To trigger
! autosizing for a field , enter Autosize as the field 's
! value. Only applicable to numeric fields.
!
! \autocalculatable Flag to indicate that this field can be automatically
! calculated. To trigger auto calculation for a field , enter
! Autocalculate as the field 's value. Only applicable to
! numeric fields.
!
! \type Type of data for the field -
! integer
! real
! alpha (arbitrary string),
! choice (alpha with specific list of choices , see
! \key)
! object -list (link to a list of objects defined elsewhere ,
! see \object -list and \reference)
! external -list (uses a special list from an external source ,
! see \external -list)
! node (name used in connecting HVAC components)
!
! \retaincase Retains the alphabetic case for alpha type fields
!
! \key Possible value for "\ type choice" (blanks are significant)
! use multiple \key lines to indicate all valid choices
!
! \object -list Name of a list of user -provided object names that are valid
! entries for this field (used with "\ reference ")
! see Zone and BuildingSurface :Detailed objects below for
! examples.
! ** Note that a field may have multiple \object -list commands.
!
! \external -list The values for this field should be selected from a special
! list generated outside of the IDD file. The choices for the
! special lists are:
! autoRDDvariable
! autoRDDmeter
! autoRDDvariableMeter
! When one of these are selected the options for the field
! are taken from the RDD or MDD file or both.
!
! \reference Name of a list of names to which this object belongs
! used with "\ type object -list" and with "\object -list"
! see Zone and BuildingSurface :Detailed objects below for
! examples:
!
! Zone ,
! A1 , \field Name
! \type alpha
! \reference ZoneNames
!
! BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
! A4 , \field Zone Name
! \note Zone the surface is a part of
! \type object -list
! \object -list ZoneNames
!
! For each zone , the field "Name" may be referenced
! by other objects , such as BuildingSurface:Detailed , so it is
! commented with "\ reference ZoneNames"
! Fields that reference a zone name , such as BuildingSurface:Detailed 's
30 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

! "Zone Name", are commented as

! "\ type object -list" and "\object -list ZoneNames"
! ** Note that a field may have multiple \reference commands.
! ** This is useful if the object belongs to a small specific
! object -list as well as a larger more general object -list.
!
! Object -level comments:
!
! \memo Memo describing the object. If multiple lines , start each line
! with \memo.
! Limit line length to 100 characters.
!
! \unique -object To flag objects which should appear only once in an idf
! (this comment has no "value ")
!
! \required -object To flag objects which are required in every idf
! (this comment has no "value ")
!
! \min -fields Minimum number of fields that should be included in the
! object. If appropriate , the Input Processor will fill
! any missing fields with defaults (for numeric fields).
! It will also supply that number of fields to the "get"
! routines using blanks for alpha fields (note -- blanks
! may not be allowable for some alpha fields).
!
! \obsolete This object has been replaced though is kept (and is read)
! in the current version. Please refer to documentation as
! to the dispersal of the object. If this object is
! encountered in an IDF , the InputProcessor will post an
! appropriate message to the error file.
! usage: \obsolete New=>[New object name]
!
! \extensible :<#> This object is dynamically extensible -- meaning , if you
! change the IDD appropriately (if the object has a simple list
! structure -- just add items to the list arguments (i.e. BRANCH
! LIST). These will be automatically redimensioned and used during
! the simulation. <#> should be entered by the developer to signify
! how many of the last fields are needed to be extended (and EnergyPlus
! will attempt to auto -extend the object). The first field of the first
! instance of the extensible field set is marked with \begin -extensible.
!
! \begin -extensible See previous item , marks beginning of extensible fields in
! an object.
!
! \format The object should have a special format when saved in
! the IDF Editor with the special format option enabled.
! The options include SingleLine , Vertices , CompactSchedule ,
! FluidProperties , ViewFactors , and Spectral.
! The SingleLine option puts all the fields for the object
! on a single line. The Vertices option is used in objects
! that use X, Y and Z fields to format those three fields
! on a single line.
! The CompactSchedule formats that specific object.
! The FluidProperty option formats long lists of fluid
! properties to ten values per line.
! The ViewFactor option formats three fields related to
! view factors per line.
! The Spectral option formats the four fields related to
! window glass spectral data per line.
!
! \reference -class -name Adds the name of the class to the reference list
! similar to \reference.
!
! Group -level comments:
!
! \group Name for a group of related objects
!
!
! Notes on comments
! -----------------
1.2. IDD CONVENTIONS 31

!
! 1. If a particular comment is not applicable (such as units , or default)
! then simply omit the comment rather than indicating N/A.
!
! 2. Memos and notes should be brief (recommend 5 lines or less per block).
! More extensive explanations are expected to be in the user documentation

1.2.1 IDD – IP Units

In addition, the IDD contains indications of IP (inch-pound) units for the EnergyPlus standard SI
(Systems International) units. These may be used by input and output interfaces to display values
in the IP system. As noted, if the IP units are “standard” (first block below), then no \ip-units is
expected in the field. Note that for some fields – due to their multiple use (for example, schedule
values) – there cannot be a ip-unit designation.
! Default IP conversions (no \ip -units necessary)
! $/(m3/s) = > $/(ft3/min) 0.000472000059660808
! $/(W/K) = > $/(Btu/h-F) 0.52667614683731
! $/kW = > $/( kBtuh/h) 0.293083235638921
! $/m2 = > $/ft2 0.0928939733269818
! $/m3 = > $/ft3 0.0283127014102352
! (kg/s)/W = > (lbm/sec)/(Btu/hr) 0.646078115385742
! 1/K = > 1/F 0.555555555555556
! 1/m = > 1/ft 0.3048
! A/K = > A/F 0.555555555555556
! C = > F 1.8 (plus 32)
! cm = > in 0.3937
! cm2 = > inch2 0.15500031000062
! deltaC = > deltaF 1.8
! deltaJ/kg = > deltaBtu/lb 0.0004299
! g/GJ = > lb/MWh 0.00793664091373665
! g/kg = > grains/lb 7
! g/MJ = > lb/MWh 7.93664091373665
! g/mol = > lb/mol 0.0022046
! g/m-s = > lb/ft -s 0.000671968949659
! g/m-s-K = > lb/ft -s-F 0.000373574867724868
! GJ = > ton -hrs 78.9889415481832
! J = > Wh 0.000277777777777778
! J/K = > Btu/F 526.565
! J/kg = > Btu/lb 0.00042986
! J/kg -K = > Btu/lb -F 0.000239005736137667
! J/kg -K2 = > Btu/lb -F2 0.000132889924714692
! J/kg -K3 = > Btu/lb -F3 7.38277359526066E-05
! J/m2 -K = > Btu/ft2 -F 4.89224766847393E-05
! J/m3 = > Btu/ft3 2.68096514745308E-05
! J/m3 -K = > Btu/ft3 -F 1.49237004739337E-05
! K = > R 1.8
! K/m = > F/ft 0.54861322767449
! kg = > lb 2.2046
! kg/J = > lb/Btu 2325.83774250441
! kg/kg -K = > lb/lb -F 0.555555555555556
! kg/m = > lb/ft 0.67196893069637
! kg/m2 = > lb/ft2 0.204794053596664
! kg/m3 = > lb/ft3 0.062428
! kg/m-s = > lb/ft -s 0.67196893069637
! kg/m-s-K = > lb/ft -s-F 0.373316072609094
! kg/m-s-K2 = > lb/ft -s-F2 0.207397818116164
! kg/Pa -s-m2 = > lb/psi -s-ft2 1412.00523459398
! kg/s = > lb/s 2.20462247603796
! kg/s2 = > lb/s2 2.2046
! kg/s-m = > lb/s-ft 0.67196893069637
! kJ/kg = > Btu/lb 0.429925
! kPa = > psi 0.145038
! L/day = > pint/day 2.11337629827348
! L/GJ = > gal/kWh 0.000951022349025202
32 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

! L/kWh = > pint/kWh 2.11337629827348

! L/MJ = > gal/kWh 0.951022349025202
! lux = > foot -candles 0.092902267
! m = > ft 3.28083989501312
! m/hr = > ft/hr 3.28083989501312
! m/s = > ft/min 196.850393700787
! m/s = > miles/hr 2.2369362920544
! m/yr = > inch/yr 39.3700787401575
! m2 = > ft2 10.7639104167097
! m2/m = > ft2/ft 3.28083989501312
! m2/person = > ft2/person 10.764961
! m2/s = > ft2/s 10.7639104167097
! m2 -K/W = > ft2 -F-hr/Btu 5.678263
! m3 = > ft3 35.3146667214886
! m3 = > gal 264.172037284185
! m3/GJ = > ft3/MWh 127.13292
! m3/hr = > ft3/hr 35.3146667214886
! m3/hr -m2 = > ft3/hr -ft2 3.28083989501312
! m3/hr -person = > ft3/hr -person 35.3146667214886
! m3/kg = > ft3/lb 16.018
! m3/m2 = > ft3/ft2 3.28083989501312
! m3/MJ = > ft3/kWh 127.13292
! m3/person = > ft3/person 35.3146667214886
! m3/s = > ft3/min 2118.88000328931
! m3/s-m = > ft3/min -ft 645.89
! m3/s-m2 = > ft3/min -ft2 196.85
! m3/s-person = > ft3/min -person 2118.6438
! m3/s-W = > (ft3/min)/(Btu/h) 621.099127332943
! N-m = > lbf -in 8.85074900525547
! N-s/m2 = > lbf -s/ft2 0.0208857913669065
! Pa = > psi 0.000145037743897283
! percent/K = > percent/F 0.555555555555556
! person/m2 = > person/ft2 0.0928939733269818
! s/m = > s/ft 0.3048
! V/K = > V/F 0.555555555555556
! W = > Btu/h 3.4121412858518
! W/(m3/s) = > W/(ft3/min) 0.0004719475
! W/K = > Btu/h-F 1.89563404769544
! W/m = > Btu/h-ft 1.04072
! W/m2 = > Btu/h-ft2 0.316957210776545
! W/m2 = > W/ft2 0.09290304
! W/m2 -K = > Btu/h-ft2 -F 0.176110194261872
! W/m2 -K2 = > Btu/h-ft2 -F2 0.097826
! W/m-K = > Btu -in/h-ft2 -F 6.93481276005548
! W/m-K2 = > Btu/h-F2 -ft 0.321418310071648
! W/m-K3 = > Btu/h-F3 -ft 0.178565727817582
! W/person = > Btu/h-person 3.4121412858518
!
! Other conversions supported (needs the \ip -units code)
!
! kPa = > inHg 0.29523
! m = > in 39.3700787401575
! m3/s = > gal/min 15850.3222370511
! Pa = > ftH2O 0.00033455
! Pa = > inH2O 0.00401463
! Pa = > inHg 0.00029613
! Pa = > Pa 1
! W = > W 1
! W/m2 = > W/m2 1
! W/m-K = > Btu/h-ft -F 0.577796066000163
! W/person = > W/person 1
!
! Units fields that are not translated
! $
! 1/hr
! A
! Ah
! A/V
! Availability
! Control
1.3. INPUT – OUTPUT DESCRIPTIONS (DOCUMENT) 33

! cycles/hr
! days
! deg
! dimensionless
! eV
! hr
! J/J
! kg/kg
! kg -H2O/kg -air
! kmol
! kmol/s
! m3/m3
! minutes
! Mode
! ms
! ohms
! percent
! ppm
! rev/min
! s
! V
! VA
! W/m2 or deg C
! W/m2 , W or deg C
! W/s
! W/W
! years
! **************************************************************************

1.3 Input – Output Descriptions (Document)

1.3.1 Input Descriptions
In the descriptions below, the fields for each input object will be described but the Energy+.idd
descriptions will not be shown. Refer to the actual Energy+.idd file for complete specifications.
Energy+.idd is a text file that can be viewed with many text editors or word processors. The
Site:Location object will serve as an example.
Site:Location ,
\unique -object
\min -fields 5
A1 , \field Name
\required -field
\type alpha
N1 , \field Latitude
\units deg
\minimum -90.0
\maximum +90.0
\default 0.0
\note + is North , - is South , degree minutes represented in decimal (i.e. 30 minutes is .5)
\type real
N2 , \field Longitude
\units deg
\minimum -180.0
\maximum +180.0
\default 0.0
\note - is West , + is East , degree minutes represented in decimal (i.e. 30 minutes is .5)
\type real
N3 , \field Time Zone
\note basic these limits on the WorldTimeZone Map (2003)
\units hr
\minimum -12.0
\maximum +14.0
\default 0.0
34 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

\note Time relative to GMT. Decimal hours.

\type real
N4 ; \field Elevation
\units m
\minimum -300.0
\maximum < 8900.0
\default 0.0
\type real

The IDD excerpt above is the complete definition as seen in the IDD file.
First, the object name is given. (Site:Location) This is followed by a comma in both the
definition (IDD) and in an input file (IDF). In fact, all fields except the terminating field of an IDD
class object and IDF object are followed by commas. The final field in an IDD class object or in an
IDF object is terminated by a semi-colon.
Next is an alpha field, the location name. As noted above, for input, spaces are significant in
this field. The main inputs for Site:Location are numeric fields. These are numbered (as is the
alpha field) for convenience. The \ designations will show various information about the objects as
described above in the IDD conventions discussion. Of importance for reading this document are
the units and possible minimum and maximum values for a field.
There is automatic processing of the \minimum, \maximum and \default data for numeric fields.
Any infractions of the \minimum, \maximum fields are automatically detected and messages will
appear in the standard error file. After all the input is checked, infractions will cause program
termination (before the bulk of the simulation is completed). Defaults are also enforced if you leave
the numeric field blank.
Some objects need all the parameters listed by the definition; some do not. In the descriptions
that follow, we will try to indicate which parts are optional. Usually, these will be the last fields in
the object input or definition. Even if items are not used for a particular object (e.g. Multiplier in
the FenestrationSurface:Detailed and type = Door), the field must be included unless it is the last
field in the object. So, for this instance, one must include a multiplier field (must be numeric and
would need to obey any \minimum, \maximum rules) for doors.
Two spreadsheet files are included with the installation:

• ExampleFiles.xls – shows many details about the included example files including highlights
of features.

• ExampleFiles-ObjectsLink.xls – shows, for each object, the first three occurrences of that
object in an example file.

1.3.2 Output Descriptions

In the descriptions below, we will endeavor to have each object’s output displayed as well as
each of the outputs described. The output variables for a run are selected by choosing the Out-
put:VariableDictionary object. This object displays the available output variables for a run on the
eplusout.rdd (regular variables) and eplusout.mdd (meter variables) files. Two significant styles
are available for these displays and the descriptions below may have one for some objects and an-
other for other objects. The variables are the same but will look a bit different. For clarity, the
two displays are shown below:
Note that the IDF-Editor can interpret both sets of files and assist you in getting output variables
into your input files. But you will have to successfully run your input file first.
1.3. INPUT – OUTPUT DESCRIPTIONS (DOCUMENT) 35

The Simple (or regular) display looks like the following figure and is interpreted:
Zone/HVAC – when the output is produced at the “Zone” timestep (ref: number of timesteps
in each hour) or at the “HVAC” aka System timestep (which can vary for each hour).
Average/Sum – whether this is a averaged value over the reporting period (such as a temper-
ature or rate) or whether this is a summed value over the reporting period. Reporting periods are
specified in the Output:Variable or Output:Meter objects.
<Variable Name> – The variable name one uses for reporting is displayed (e.g., Site Outdoor
Drybulb Temperature) along with the units (e.g., [C]).
Example from the eplusout.rdd file:

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Dewpoint Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgAir]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Barometric Pressure [Pa]

• Zone,Average,Wind Speed [m/s]

• Zone,Average,Site Wind Direction [deg]

• Zone,Average,Site Sky Temperature [C]

• HVAC,Sum,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Energy [J]

• HVAC,Sum,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

• HVAC,Average,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate [W]

• HVAC,Average,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

• HVAC,Average,Zone Air Temperature [C]

• HVAC,Average,Zone Thermostat Air Temperature [C]

Note that the eplusout.mdd file is similar, but meters are only available at the Zone timestep.

• Zone,Meter,Electricity:Facility [J]

• Zone,Meter,ExteriorLights:Electricity [J]

• Zone,Meter,Grounds Lights:ExteriorLights:Electricity [J]

• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Facility [J]

• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Building [J]

• Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Zone:R13WALL WALLS [J]

36 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The IDF display has all the same information in an IDF-ready form (i.e., you could copy and
paste it into your input file using a text editor).
Example from the eplusout.rdd file:

• Output:Variable,*,Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature,hourly; !- Zone Average [C]

• Output:Variable,*,Site Outdoor Air Dewpoint Temperature,hourly; !- Zone Average [C]

• Output:Variable,*,Site Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature,hourly; !- Zone Average [C]

• Output:Variable,*,Site Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio,hourly; !- Zone Average [kgWater/kgAir]

• Output:Variable,*,Site Outdoor Air Relative Humidity,hourly; !- Zone Average [%]

• Output:Variable,*,Site Outdoor Air Barometric Pressure,hourly; !- Zone Average [Pa]

• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Energy,hourly; !- HVAC Sum [J]

• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Energy,hourly; !- HVAC Sum [J]

• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate,hourly; !- HVAC Average [W]

• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate,hourly; !- HVAC Average [W]

• Output:Variable,*,Zone Air Temperature,hourly; !- HVAC Average [C]

• Output:Variable,*,Zone Thermostat Air Temperature,hourly; !- HVAC Average [C]

All of the same information appears in a slightly different form and defaults to “hourly” reporting
frequency (which, of course, can be changed when you put it into your input file). The “*” is
preselected so that you would be reporting for all those items.

1.4 Using EnergyPlus as a Library

This section is specifically related to calling EnergyPlus as a function from other clients, including
C programs and Python scripts. For information on using Python Plugins (Python EMS), see
section 1.45.
Since its birth, interacting with EnergyPlus has been essentially limited to creating an input file
and calling on the EnergyPlus binary to run and produce results. For a long time, there has been a
very small API made available to allow limited access to running a simulation from a client by calling
a function, however, it was never widely publicized, and had significant issues. As of version 9.3, a
proper API has been developed, which builds on a number of important developments, including:

• The Energy Management System, which was the first method to allow reading and writ-
ing simulation data while a simulation was running, and allowing user-defined scripts to be
executed to alter simulation data.

• The EnergyPlus unit test structure, which has, as a side-effect, enabled the ability to “reset”
the state of a simulation, and re-run another, in the same memory space.
1.4. USING ENERGYPLUS AS A LIBRARY 37

Release history notes:

• Version 9.3 included the first version of the modern API in EnergyPlus.

• As of version 9.4, the API was improved with the ability to more reliably “reset” the simulation
state. This caused some breaking changes in the API, which are expected to be very rare
moving forward.

• Then as of version 9.5, EnergyPlus became thread-safe. By refactoring 17,000 global and
static variables in the program, the state object now holds the entire state of the program,
and threads will not cross-talk.

• With the release of EnergyPlus 9.6, another major enhancement was made that allowed API
clients to execute input files that included Python Plugins. The original implementation had
a limitation that kept the two from working together, but this was remedied so that interfaces
that call the API can simultaneously execute files with Python Plugins.

Interface developers that have been building on top of EnergyPlus have primarily interacted with
the simulation in the traditional manner. The interface would create an input file in a directory, copy
in weather data and any other supporting data, and then kick off a simulation in that directory.
The interface could grab output messages from the simulation, but that was essentially it. The
interface just had to wait until EnergyPlus completed, check data in the output files, and decide
what to do next. Grabbing any sort of data from the simulation during a run, even just progress,
was highly difficult.
The EnergyPlus API has been created to change that situation and open new doors into the
simulation program and the opportunity to embed EnergyPlus into vastly more workflows and
applications. A new formal EnergyPlus API is implemented that allows interacting with different
“categories” of the simulation. Technically speaking, the categories are not different, as they operate
using the same API mechanics. The categorization is purely organizational. In the following
subsections, the API is laid out with examples in both C and Python. Full API documentation will
be provided separate from this document. Check the release notes for your specific release for more
information.

1.4.1 State API

The state of an EnergyPlus represents the entire contents of a running simulation. Everything from
the current time step to the water side economizer operating part load ratio is tracked in the state
of a running simulation. Since the birth of EnergyPlus, the state of the simulation was hung on the
global program state, with no explicit object owning and managing the data. This was perfectly
acceptable because the only real use of EnergyPlus was to execute the binary (energyplus.exe) and
wait for it to finish and inspect the outputs. However, this has proved to be a burden when trying
to push EnergyPlus into new applications, and as such, the team has worked to move much of
the global state into a state class which can then manage the data on itself. From an internal-to-
EnergyPlus perspective, this means that functions will access variables on a class that is passed
around throughout the program. From an API-client perspective, this means that the client will
need to create a state instance and pass it into the simulation when asking the simulation to do
most operations.
38 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Prior to calling into most of the API functions, the API client must create a new state instance.
This state instance is not to be directly accessed by the client, but instead the client must simply
be a courier of this state instance and pass it in and out of the API calls. Whenever the client is
done with that instance, the instance can be reset to be prepped for another run of EnergyPlus, or
destroyed if the client is done with it.
An example of this in C is listed here:
#include <EnergyPlus/api/state.h>

int main(int argc , const char * argv []) {

EnergyPlusState state = stateNew ();
stateReset(state);
stateDelete(state);
printf ("Wow this was a boring use case\n");
}

That does not do much. But moving through the rest of the API functions, it will become clear
that this is at the core of an EnergyPlus API workflow.
In Python, that same example is similar:
from pyenergyplus.api import EnergyPlusAPI

api = EnergyPlusAPI ()
state = api.state_manager.new_state ()
api.state_manager.reset_state(state)
api.state_manager.delete_state(state)
print ("Wow even boring in Python !?")

1.4.2 Functional API

The “Functional” API allows for users to call into the EnergyPlus binary and request static infor-
mation. Examples of this information include fluid property data (currently only pure water, but
glycol mixtures will be added), refrigerant property data (currently only steam), and psychrometric
properties.
To interact with the fluid property data, the user will create a fluid property class instance. Once
an instance is available, the user will call methods on that instance. To interact with the refrigerant
property data, the user will also create a refrigerant class and access data through methods. For
psychrometrics, in C the function calls do not need to create an instance, however, in Python, a
small class captures the psychrometric functions for organization.
While some functionality in these property routines are stateless from the perspective of the
EnergyPlus simulation engine, an instance of the EnergyPlus “state” class is required to be passed
in.
An example of exercising the functional API in C is listed here:
#include <EnergyPlus/api/func.h>
#include <EnergyPlus/api/state.h>

int main(int argc , const char * argv []) {

EnergyPlusState state = stateNew ();
initializeFunctionalAPI (state);

Glycol glycol = NULL;

glycol = glycolNew(state , "WatEr ");
Real64 specificHeat = glycolSpecificHeat (state , glycol , 35.0);
glycolDelete(state , glycol);

Refrigerant refrig = NULL;

refrig = refrigerantNew(state , "SteaM ");
1.4. USING ENERGYPLUS AS A LIBRARY 39

Real64 satPress = refrigerantSaturationPressure (state , refrig , 100.0);

refrigerantDelete (state , refrig);

Real64 rh = psyRhFnTdbWPb(state , 24, 0.009 , 101325); // psychrometrics are evaluated directly

}

It is quite minimal, objects are constructed, methods are called, and objects are destructed.
Note that the initializeFunctionalAPI function must be called once to setup the program. Note
that the constructor function arguments are case-insensitive. Also note that no simulation has been
executed here, this is purely calling into the library to evaluate functions.
The same operations, but in Python are listed here:
from pyenergyplus.api import EnergyPlusAPI

api = EnergyPlusAPI ()
state = api.state_manager.new_state ()

glycol = api.functional.glycol(state , u"water ")

cp = glycol.specific_heat(state , 35.0)

refrigerant = api.functional.refrigerant(state , "steam ")

satPress = refrigerant.saturation_pressure (state , 100.0)

psychrometrics = api.functional.psychrometrics(state , )
rh = psychrometrics.relative_humidity_b (state , 24, 0.009 , 101325)

Some subtle differences are present. In Python, the client creates an instance of an Ener-
gyPlusAPI class to access all methods. Functional category API methods are accessed via the
EnergyPlusAPI.functional variable. Note that in Python, in contrast to C, the psychrometric
functions also live on a class that must be constructed.

1.4.3 Runtime API

The “Runtime” API allows for users to hook into a running simulation. The client creates functions,
and using this runtime API, they can register these functions to be called back at specific points
in a simulation. Once registered, this API includes a function to start the simulation. There are a
number of calling points available to hook in a callback function. For information on the different
available calling points, see the EMSApplicationGuide documentation packaged with EnergyPlus.
For exact naming conventions on the C and Python registration functions, see either the C header or
Python API file, or the API documentation that will be made available separate from the installer.
See the release notes for information on subsequent documentation.
A minimal approach demonstrating the runtime API in C would be the following:
Note that as of EnergyPlus 9.4, due to the change in handling simulation state, the form of
the callback function has changed. While a simulation is running, there is a matched state object
that must be passed in and out of the program to perform operations. This has already been
demonstrated in the above functional API example, but in this case, the state change is more
pronounced because the callback function must accept a state argument. The reason the callback
must accept the state argument is because while inside a callback, it is expected that the client code
will then call into EnergyPlus to read/write data, and the state must be passed back in. Basically,
the client must be a reliable courier of the state object.
#include <EnergyPlus/api/runtime.h>
#include <EnergyPlus/api/state.h>

void dummyCallbackFunction (EnergyPlusState state) {

printf ("Hmm I could use my state argument to call back into EnergyPlus to do stuff , great !\n");
40 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

int main(int argc , const char * argv []) {

callbackAfterNewEnvironmentWarmupComplete (state , dummyCallbackFunction );
energyplus(state , argc , argv);
stateReset(state); // note previously registered callbacks are cleared here
callbackAfterNewEnvironmentWarmupComplete (state , dummyCallbackFunction );
energyplus(state , argc , argv);
}

The code is straightforward, though excessively minimal. A minimal function is created, which
accepts one argument - a state object, and does nothing. This function is then passed to a callback
registration function via the runtime API. EnergyPlus is executed, passing along any command line
arguments that are received by the test program. This is a convenience because the energyplus
function expects arguments just like the EnergyPlus(.exe) program, so the test script would have
the same command line capabilities as EnergyPlus itself. For this code, it could be executed with
something like: program.exe -D /path/to/input.idf. Once EnergyPlus is complete, the state
object is reset, the callback is re-registered, and EnergyPlus is run again. Since the test script is
complete at this point, there is no need to reset the state again.
The code is strikingly similar in Python:
import sys
from pyenergyplus.api import EnergyPlusAPI

def dummy_callback_function (state_argument):

print ("My argument is called state_argument to avoid duplicating the outer variable below called state
")

api = EnergyPlusAPI ()
state = api.state_manager.new_state ()
api.runtime. callback_begin_new_environment (state , dummy_callback_function )
api.runtime.run_energyplus(state , sys.argv [1:])
api.state_manager.reset_state(state)
api.runtime. callback_begin_new_environment (state , dummy_callback_function )
api.runtime.run_energyplus(state , sys.argv [1:])

Once again, a dummy function is created, then registered, followed by a call to run EnergyPlus
(passing along the relevant command line arguments), the state is cleared, then the function is
registered again and EnergyPlus is run a second time. Note that when calling EnergyPlus as a
library, you should just pass the arguments, not the filename itself. In Python, the argv variable
will have the filename as the first item in the list, so this example trims that off.

1.4.4 Data Exchange API

The “Data Exchange“ API allows for users to interact with simulation data. There are some
functions in this API that are suitable only for Python Plugin workflows, and they will not be
discussed here. For more information on using that workflow, see section 1.45. For this API, five
areas are available: variables, meters, “internal” variables, simulation parameters, and actuators.
They are described in a language-agnostic sense first, then actual examples are provided in C and
Python below.
Variables Variables represent time series output variables in the simulation. There are thousands
of variables made available based on the specific configuration. A user typically requests
variables to be in their output files by adding Output:Variable objects to the input file. It
is important to note that if the user does not request these variables, they are not tracked,
and thus not available on the API.
1.4. USING ENERGYPLUS AS A LIBRARY 41

In an API workflow, the client would interact with variables in three steps. First the user
will either specify the output as requested in the input file provided, or call a variable request
function to mark the variable as requested. Second the user will call to lookup a variable
ID/handle, passing in the variable type name and key. Third the variable value can be looked
up while a simulation is running by calling a get-value function on the API.
Meters Meters represent groups of variables which are collected together, much like a meter on
a building which represents multiple energy sources. Meters are handled the same way as
variables, except that meters do not need to be requested prior running a simulation. From
an API standpoint, a client must simply get a handle to a meter by name, and then access
the meter value by using a get-value function on the API.
Internal Variables The name “internal variable” is used here as it is what these variables were
called in the original EMS implementation. Another name for these variables could be “static”
variables. Basically, these variables represent data that does not change throughout a simula-
tion period. Examples include calculated zone volume or autosized equipment values. These
values are treated just like meters, you use one function to access a handle ID, and then use
this handle to lookup the value.
Simulation Parameters A number of parameters are made available as they vary through the
simulation, including the current simulation day of week, day of year, hour, and many other
things. These do not require a handle, but are available through direct function calls.
With these read-only data exchange items available, there are already a number of new pos-
sibilities. As an example, an EnergyPlus interface developer could very easily change from just
executing the EnergyPlus program, to calling EnergyPlus as a library function. This would unlock
the potential to not only get better progress status updates, but the interface could also request
and lookup values of some energy meters or other output variables, and present this to the user
graphically while the simulation is running. However, much more power comes with the addition
of actuators, described next.

Actuators Actuators are the way that users modify the program at runtime using custom logic
and calculations. Not every variable inside EnergyPlus can be actuated. This is intentional,
because opening that door could allow the program to run at unrealistic conditions, with flow
imbalances or energy imbalances, and many other possible problems. Instead, a specific set of
items are available to actuate, primarily control functions, flow requests, and environmental
boundary conditions. These actuators, when used in conjunction with the runtime API and
data exchange variables, allow a user to read data, make decisions and perform calculations,
then actuate control strategies for subsequent time steps.
Actuator functions are similar, but not exactly the same, as for variables. An actuator
handle/ID is still looked up, but it takes the actuator type, component name, and control
type, since components may have more than one control type available for actuation. The
actuator can then be “actuated” by calling a set-value function, which overrides an internal
value, and informs EnergyPlus that this value is currently being externally controlled. To
allow EnergyPlus to resume controlling that value, there is an actuator reset function as well.

A special note about data exchange. Variables, meters, and actuators are not immediately avail-
able as soon as the program starts. The memory associated with these along with the bookkeeping,
42 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

must be set up during program initialization. There is a risk that the variables requested are not
set up by the first API callback point. This is intentional because some API callbacks may want to
be called this early. To avoid problems, a function is available on this API that will allow a client
to check if the API data is “fully ready”. For almost all applications, if this is not ready, the client
should just return from the callback and let EnergyPlus continue, and wait until it is ready before
doing any manipulation.
It is difficult (impossible?) to exercise the data exchange API without at least also demonstrating
the runtime API. In order to exchange data with the simulation, you must first create a runtime
callback function and register that, then execute EnergyPlus, and finally wait until EnergyPlus calls
your callback function. At this point, you can then perform data exchange. Minimal examples that
tie the runtime and data exchange APIs together are shown here, first in C:
#include <EnergyPlus/api/datatransfer.h>
#include <EnergyPlus/api/runtime.h>
#include <EnergyPlus/api/state.h>

int outdoorDewPointActuator = -1;

int outdoorTempSensor = -1;
int handlesRetrieved = 0;

void afterZoneTimeStepHandler (EnergyPlusState state)

{
if (handlesRetrieved == 0) {
if (! apiDataFullyReady(state)) return;
outdoorDewPointActuator = getActuatorHandle(state , "Weather Data", "Outdoor Dew Point", "Environment
");
outdoorTempSensor = getVariableHandle (state , "SITE OUTDOOR AIR DRYBULB TEMPERATURE", "ENVIRONMENT ");
handlesRetrieved = 1;
}
Real64 oa_temp = getVariableValue(state , outdoorTempSensor);
setActuatorValue(state , outdoorDewPointActuator , oa_temp - 4);
}

int main(int argc , const char * argv []) {

callbackEndOfZoneTimeStepAfterZoneReporting (state , afterZoneTimeStepHandler );
requestVariable(state , "SITE OUTDOOR AIR DRYBULB TEMPERATURE", "ENVIRONMENT ");
energyplus(state , argc , argv);
}

The actual operations happening in this example are completely fictional, but nevertheless
demonstrate a possible minimal case. Note that the variable to be used is requested, and if the api
data is not fully ready in the callback, it simply returns and waits.
And now in Python:
from pyenergyplus.api import EnergyPlusAPI

one_time = True
outdoor_temp_sensor = 0
outdoor_dew_point_actuator = 0

def time_step_handler(state):
global one_time , outdoor_temp_sensor , outdoor_dew_point_sensor , outdoor_dew_point_actuator
if one_time:
if not api.exchange. api_data_fully_ready (state):
return
outdoor_temp_sensor = api.exchange. get_variable_handle (
state , u"SITE OUTDOOR AIR DRYBULB TEMPERATURE", u"ENVIRONMENT"
)
outdoor_dew_point_actuator = api.exchange.get_actuator_handle (
state , "Weather Data", "Outdoor Dew Point", "Environment"
)
one_time = False
oa_temp = api.exchange. get_variable_value (state , outdoor_temp_sensor )
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 43

api.exchange. set_actuator_value (state , outdoor_dew_point_actuator , oa_temp -4)

api = EnergyPlusAPI ()
state = api.state_manager.new_state ()
api.runtime. callback_end_zone_timestep_after_zone_reporting (state , time_step_handler )
api.exchange. request_variable(state , "SITE OUTDOOR AIR DRYBULB TEMPERATURE", "ENVIRONMENT ")
api.runtime.run_energyplus(state , sys.argv [1:])

Note that when strings are passed through the Python API, they are both case-insensitive, and
type-insensitive. By type-insensitive, this means they can be either Python strings, or Python bytes
objects. In this example, both are used, as well as mixed-casing, to demonstrate the flexibility.

1.4.5 Full Examples

Demonstrations of these APIs are available on the EnergyPlus repository in both Python and C
form. For the latest development version, they are at this page.

1.4.6 Building and Linking

Once you have your C or Python code scripted up, you need to actually link that code to the
EnergyPlus library. The EnergyPlus install includes several relevant pieces:
EnergyPlusInstallRoot
- include
- EnergyPlus
- api
- datatransfer.h
- EnergyPlusAPI.h
- func.h
- runtime.h
- state.h
- libenergyplusapi.so
- pyenergyplus
- api.py

When building C applications, the build should include the EnergyPlusInstallRoot path in your
include path, so that when the client has an #include<EnergyPlus/api/func.h>, it will be able to
find it relative to the EnergyPlus install root path. Once the code is compiled, it should be linked
to the EnergyPlus shared library, which also lives in the root of the EnergyPlus install. The actual
command will be different based on your system and compiler, but using gcc on Linux, for example,
the command passed to the linker would be -l/path/to/libenergyplusapi.so.
When building Python applications, the EnergyPlusInstallRoot should be added to the search
path prior to trying to import anything else. This can be accomplished through the use of environ-
ment variables, but it is also easy to do at the beginning of scripts, for example:

import sys
sys.path.insert(0, '/path/to/EnergyPlusInstallRoot')
from pyenergyplus import api

1.5 Group – Simulation Parameters

This group of objects influences the simulation in various ways.
44 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.1 Version
1.5.1.1 Inputs
1.5.1.1.1 Field: Version Identifier
The Version object allows you to enter the proper version that your IDF was created for. This
is checked against the current version of EnergyPlus and a Severe error issued (non-terminating)
if it does not match the current version string. Note that versions are often significant and there
is no guarantee that the older file will run in the newer versions of the program. See IDF Version
Updater (Auxiliary Programs Document) for methods of changing the older files to newer versions.

1.5.2 Timestep
1.5.2.1 Inputs
1.5.2.1.1 Field: Number of Timesteps per Hour
The Timestep object specifies the “basic” timestep for the simulation. The value entered here is
usually known as the Zone Timestep. This is used in the Zone Heat Balance Model calculation as
the driving timestep for heat transfer and load calculations. The value entered here is the number of
timesteps to use within an hour. Longer length timesteps have lower values for Number of Timesteps
per Hour. For example a value of 6 entered here directs the program to use a zone timestep of 10
minutes and a value of 60 means a 1 minute timestep. The user’s choice for Number of Timesteps
per Hour must be evenly divisible into 60; the allowable choices are 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 10, 12, 15, 20,
30, and 60.
The choice made for this field has important implications for modeling accuracy and the overall
time it takes to run a simulation. Here are some considerations when choosing a value:

• The solution technique used in EnergyPlus has been designed to be stable with zone timesteps
of up to sixty minutes (Number Timesteps in Hour = 1). However, 60 minutes is considered a
“long” timestep and it should only be used in rare occasions where there is no HVAC system,
accuracy is not a concern, and short run times are critical. Such long timesteps are not recom-
mended to use because simulation results are more accurate for shorter timesteps, of say 10
minutes or less (Number of Timesteps per Hour of 6 or more). Shorter zone timesteps improve
the numerical solution of the Zone Heat Balance Model because they improve how models
for surface temperature and zone air temperature are coupled together. Longer timesteps
introduce more lag and lead to more a dampened dynamic response.

• Simulation run time increases with shorter timesteps or larger values for Number of Timesteps
per Hour. The effect varies with the nature of the model. The user can test out different
values on their particular model to understand the implications for his or her particular case.
Sometimes large models with multizone HVAC and Plant systems execute nearly as fast with
15 minute timesteps as with 60 minute timesteps because fewer iterations are required in
the system modeling since the prior timestep’s results are close to the final outcome of next
timestep.

• The weather data files usually have 60-minute (or hourly) data. However, it does not follow
that this should be used as the basis for choosing the zone timestep because:
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 45

• EnergyPlus carefully interpolates the weather data between data points for use at shorter
timesteps. This is discussed in a later section: Weather Data Hourly Interpolation

• Many aspects of a model have time scales that differ from the that of the weather data. A
goal of the modeling is to predict how the building will respond to the weather. However,
the building’s response is not governed by the time scale that the weather data are available
at, but rather the time scales of the dynamic performance of the thermal envelope as well as
things like schedules for internal gains, thermostats, and equipment availability.

• If the model will include calculating the cost of electricity, then the user should be aware that
many electric utility tariffs base charges on demand windows of a specified length of time.
If the choice of Number of Timesteps per Hour is not consistent with the demand window,
then unexpected results may be obtained. For reasonable prediction of the maximum rates
for electricity use for in calculating demand charges, the length of the zone timestep needs
to be consistent with the tariff’s demand window. The following table lists what values are
consistent with various demand windows.

Demand Window Applicable Number of Timesteps per Hour

QuarterHour 4, 12, 20, or 60
HalfHour 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 20, 30, or 60
FullHour, Day, Week Any

There is also second type of timestep inside EnergyPlus that is known as the System Timestep.
This is a variable-length timestep that governs the driving timestep for HVAC and Plant system
modeling. The user cannot directly control the system timestep (except by use of the Conver-
genceLimits object). When the HVAC portion of the simulation begins its solution for the current
zone timestep, it uses the zone timestep as its maximum length but then can reduce the timestep,
as necessary, to improve the solution. The technical details of the approach are explained in the
Engineering Documentation under “Integrated Solution Manager”.
Users can see the system timestep used if they select the “detailed” frequency option on an
HVAC output variable (e.g. Zone Air Temperature). To contrast, the “Zone” variables will only be
reported on the zone timestep (e.g. Zone Mean Air Temperature).
And, the IDF example:

Timestep , 6; !- Suggested default for most system simulations

Suggested defaults are 4 for non-HVAC simulations, 6 for simulations with HVAC, 20 is the
minimum for ConductionFiniteDifference and HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement simulations. Green
roof (ref: Material:RoofVegetation) also may require more timesteps.
Note that hourly data (such as outdoor conditions expressed by Design Days or Weather data)
are interpolated to the Zone Timestep. This is discussed in a later section: Weather Data Hourly
Interpolation
46 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.3 ConvergenceLimits
This item is an “advanced” feature that should be used only with caution. It is specifically included
to assist some users “speed up” calculations while not overly compromising accuracy. The user
must judge for him/herself whether the reduced run time is useful.

1.5.3.1 Inputs
1.5.3.1.1 Field: Minimum System Timestep
Usually the minimum system timestep is allowed to vary from the zone timestep (as maximum)
to a minimum timestep of 1 minute during certain system calculations. This might be when the
system turns on or off, for example. Entering 0 in this field sets the minimum system timestep to
be the same as the zone timestep. Otherwise the units of the field are minutes. It’s probably a
good idea to have any minimum entered be a divisor of the zone timestep.

1.5.3.1.2 Field: Maximum HVAC Iterations

The HVAC Manager will iterate to a solution or up to a set number of iterations. If not
“converged”, then a warning error appears:
SimHVAC: Maximum iterations (20) exceeded for all HVAC loops , at CHICAGO IL USA TMY2 -94846 WMO# = 725300 ,
10/07 14:06 - 14:08

In order to reduce time used in simulating your building, you may choose to enter a lesser
number than the default of 20 for the maximum number of iterations to be used. Or, you may
wish to enter a bigger number for certain buildings. To get more information printed with a “max
iteration” message, you need to enter a “Output:Diagnostics, DisplayExtraWarnings;” command
(which may also generate other warnings than just this one).

1.5.3.1.3 Field: Minimum Plant Iterations

The plant system modeling includes a solver that iterates within a single HVAC manager iter-
ation. This input field and the next one provide some control over how the plant solver iterates.
This field sets a minimum threshold for plant iterations. The default for this field is the value “2”
which indicates that a minimum of two full plant model iterations will be performed every time
plant is called by the HVAC manager. For faster performance with simple plant systems, this input
field could be set to the value “1”. For complicated plant systems that present difficulties to solve,
this value may need to be set higher to ensure accuracy but at the expense of speed. Complicated
plant systems include those with several interconnected loops, sizing miss-matches such that plant
components are starved of flow compared to their desired flow, heat recovery systems, and thermal
load following onsite generators.

1.5.3.1.4 Field: Maximum Plant Iterations

The plant system solver iterates within a single HVAC manager iteration. This input field and
the previous one provide some control over how the plant model iterates. This field sets a maximum
limit for plant iterations. The default for this field is the value “8” which indicates that the plant
solver will exit after having completed eight full iterations. This value can be raised for better
accuracy with complex plants or lowered for faster speed with simple plants. The output variable
called “Plant Solver Sub Iteration Count” (typically reported at the “detailed” frequency) is useful
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 47

for understanding how many plant solver iterations are actually being used during a particular
simulation. The lower limit of the value for this field is “2.”
Use in an IDF:
ConvergenceLimits ,
0, !- Minimum System Timestep (0 = same as zone timestep)
25, !- Maximum HVAC Iterations
3, !- Minimum Plant Iterations
9; !- Maximum Plant Iterations

1.5.4 Building
The Building object describes parameters that are used during the simulation of the building.
There are necessary correlations between the entries for this object and some entries in the
Site:WeatherStation and Site:HeightVariation objects, specifically the Terrain field.

1.5.4.1 Inputs
1.5.4.1.1 Field: Building Name
Building name is specified for output convenience.

1.5.4.1.2 Field: North Axis

The Building North Axis is specified relative to true North. Buildings frequently do not line
up with true north. For convenience, one may enter surfaces in a “regular” coordinate system and
then shift them via the use of the North Axis. The value is specified in degrees from “true north”
(clockwise is positive).
The figure below shows how the building north axis can be rotated to correspond with one of
the major axes of an actual building. The relevance of this field is described more completely under
“GlobalGeometryRules”; in particular, the value of “North Axis” is ignored if a coordinate system
other than “relative” is used.

Figure 1.1: Illustration of Building North Axis

48 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.4.1.3 Field: Terrain

The site’s terrain affects how the wind hits the building – as does the building height. In addition,
the external conduction method usually has its own parameters for the calculation. Please see the
Engineering Documentation, External Conduction section for particulars. The legal values for this
field are shown in the following table.

Table 1.2: Values for “Terrain”

Terrain Type Value Terrain Description

Country Flat, Open Country
Suburbs Rough, Wooded Country, Suburbs
City Towns, city outskirts, center of large cities
Ocean Ocean, Bayou flat country
Urban Urban, Industrial, Forest

1.5.4.1.4 Warmup Convergence

The following two fields along with the minimum and maximum number of warmup days (also
in this object) define the user specified criteria for when EnergyPlus will “converge” at each en-
vironment (each sizing period or run period set as Yes in the SimulationControl object). At the
beginning of a new enviroment the building model is reinitialized so that temperatures are ini-
tialized to 23C and zone humidity ratios are initialized to the outdoor humidity ratio (unless this
initialization is suppressed using the input field called Begin Environment Reset Mode in the Sizing-
Perod:DesignDay object). EnergyPlus repeatedly “runs” the first day of the environment or until it
reaches “maximum number of warmup days” or the convergence criteria are met. Note that setting
the convergence tolerance values too loose will cause the program to be satisfied too early and you
may not get the results you expect from the actual simulation. However too tight of a value and
the program will repeat the first day too many times leading to excessive simulation run time.

1.5.4.1.5 Field: Loads Convergence Tolerance Value

This value represents the number at which the loads values must agree before “convergence” is
reached. Loads tolerance is the change in peak zone heating and cooling loads that are predicted
from previous warmup day to the current day, in units of W.

1.5.4.1.6 Field: Temperature Convergence Tolerance Value

This value represents the number at which the zone temperatures must agree (from previous
iteration) before “convergence” is reached. (Units for this field is delta C).
Convergence of the simultaneous heat balance/HVAC solution is reached when either the loads
or temperature criterion is satisfied.
All tolerances have units so the temperature tolerance is in degrees C (or degrees K) and the
loads tolerance is in Watts. Both tolerances work the same way, just one looks at temperatures and
one looks at heating and cooling loads. After the second warm-up day, the program compares the
maximum temperature experienced in a space with the maximum temperature from the previous
day. If those two temperatures are within the tolerance, then it has passed the first warm-up check.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 49

It does a similar comparison with lowest temperatures experience within all the zones. If the
current simulation day and the previous day values are within the tolerance, then it has passed the
second warm-up check. Similar things are done with the loads tolerance and the maximum heating
and cooling loads that are experienced within the spaces. Those are compared individually to the
values for the previous day. If they are both in tolerance, then the simulation has passed the third
and fourth warm-up check. The simulation stays in the warm-up period until ALL FOUR checks
have been passed. See Engineering Reference and Output Details document for further explanation
and outputs.
Please note–other “convergence tolerance” inputs are required for certain HVAC equipment (unit
ventilator, unit heater, window AC, etc.). The purpose and units of these parameters are different
from “load convergence tolerance” and “temperature convergence tolerance” in the BUILDING
object.

1.5.4.1.7 Field: Solar Distribution

Setting this value determines how EnergyPlus treats beam solar radiation and reflectances from
exterior surfaces that strike the building and, ultimately, enter the zone. There are five choices:
MinimalShadowing, FullExterior and FullInteriorAndExterior, FullExteriorWithReflec-
tions, FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections.
MinimalShadowing
In this case, there is no exterior shadowing except from window and door reveals. All beam solar
radiation entering the zone is assumed to fall on the floor, where it is absorbed according to the
floor’s solar absorptance. Any reflected by the floor is added to the reflected diffuse radiation, which
is assumed to be uniformly distributed on all interior surfaces. If no floor is present in the zone, the
incident beam solar radiation is absorbed on all interior surfaces according to their absorptances.
The zone heat balance is then applied at each surface and on the zone’s air with the absorbed
radiation being treated as a flux on the surface.
FullExterior, FullExteriorWithReflections
In this case, shadow patterns on exterior surfaces caused by detached shading, wings, overhangs,
and exterior surfaces of all zones are computed. As for MinimalShadowing, shadowing by window
and door reveals is also calculated. Beam solar radiation entering the zone is treated as for Mini-
malShadowing – All beam solar radiation entering the zone is assumed to fall on the floor, where
it is absorbed according to the floor’s solar absorptance. Any reflected by the floor is added to the
reflected diffuse radiation, which is assumed to be uniformly distributed on all interior surfaces. If
no floor is present in the zone, the incident beam solar radiation is absorbed on all interior surfaces
according to their absorptances. The zone heat balance is then applied at each surface and on the
zone’s air with the absorbed radiation being treated as a flux on the surface.
FullInteriorAndExterior, FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections
This is the same as FullExterior except that instead of assuming all transmitted beam solar falls
on the floor the program calculates the amount of beam radiation falling on each surface in the
zone, including floor, walls and windows, by projecting the sun’s rays through the exterior windows,
taking into account the effect of exterior shadowing surfaces and window shading devices.
If this option is used, you should be sure that the surfaces of the zone totally enclose a space.
This can be determined by viewing the eplusout.dxf file with a program like AutoDesk’s Volo
View Express. You should also be sure that the zone is convex. Examples of convex and non-
convex zones are shown in Figure 1.2. The most common non-convex zone is an L-shaped zone.
(A formal definition of convex is that any straight line passing through the zone intercepts at most
50 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

two surfaces.) If the zone’s surfaces do not enclose a space or if the zone is not convex you should
use Solar Distribution = FullExterior instead of FullInteriorAndExterior.
If you use FullInteriorAndExterior the program will also calculate how much beam radiation
falling on the inside of an exterior window (from other windows in the zone) is absorbed by the
window, how much is reflected back into the zone, and how much is transmitted to the outside. In
this calculation the effect of a shading device, if present, is accounted for.

Figure 1.2: Illustration of Convex and Non-convex Zones

Diffuse Radiation
Diffuse solar transmitted through exterior and interior windows is distributed according to the
approximate view factors between the transmitting window and all other heat transfer surfaces in
the zone. The portion of this diffuse solar that is reflected by all surfaces in the zone is subsequently
redistributed uniformly (based on area and solar absorptance) to all heat transfer surfaces in the
zone, along with interior reflected beam solar and shortwave radiation from lights. Refer to the
section “Solar Distribution” in the Engineering Reference Guide for more information including
equations.
Reflection calculations
Note: Using the reflection calculations can be very time-consuming. Even error-prone. As a
possible alleviation, you can use the Output:Diagnostics “DoNotMirrorDetachedShading” in many
cases to get past a fatal error.
If using reflections, the program calculates beam and sky solar radiation that is reflected from
exterior surfaces and then strikes the building. These reflecting surfaces fall into three categories:
1) Shadowing surfaces. These are surfaces like overhangs or neighboring buildings entered
with Shading:Site, Shading:Building, Shading:Site:Detailed, Shading:Building:Detailed, Shading:-
Overhang, Shading:Overhang:Projection, Shading:Fin, Shading:Fin:Projection or Shading:Zone:-
Detailed objects. See Figure 1.3.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 51

These surfaces can have diffuse and/or specular (beam-to-beam) reflectance values that are
specified with the ShadingProperty:Reflectance object which specifies those parameters. They have
a default value of .2 for both visible and diffuse reflection.
2) Exterior building surfaces. In this case one section of the building reflects solar radiation
onto another section (and vice-versa). See Figure 1.4.
The building surfaces are assumed to be diffusely reflecting if they are opaque (walls, for exam-
ple) and specularly reflecting if they are windows or glass doors. The reflectance values for opaque
surfaces are calculated by the program from the Solar Absorptance and Visible Absorptance val-
ues of the outer material layer of the surface’s construction (ref: Material object properties). The
reflectance values for windows and glass doors are calculated by the program from the reflectance
properties of the individual glass layers that make up surface’s construction assuming no shading
device is present and taking into account inter-reflections among the layers (ref: Window Proper-
ties).
3) The ground surface. Reflection from the ground is calculated even if reflections option is
not used;l but then the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground
by the building itself or by obstructions such as neighboring buildings is ignored. Shadowing by the
building itself or neighboring buildings is taken into account when the “with reflections” option is
used but then the “view factor to ground” is NOT used. This is shown in Figure 1.5.

Figure 1.3: Solar reflection from shadowing surfaces. Solid arrows are beam solar radiation; dashed
arrows are diffuse solar radiation. (a) Diffuse reflection of beam solar radiation from the top of an
overhang. (b) Diffuse reflection of sky solar radiation from the top of an overhang. (c) Beam-to-
beam (specular) reflection from the façade of an adjacent highly-glazed building represented by a
vertical shadowing surface.

1.5.4.1.8 Field: Maximum Number of Warmup Days

This field specifies the number of “warmup” days that might be used in the simulation before
“convergence” is achieved. The default number, 25, is usually more than sufficient for this task;
however, some complex buildings (with complex constructions) may require more days. If you enter
less than 25 as a maximum, that is the number of maximum warmup days that will be used. An
error message will occur when the simulation “runs” out of days and has not converged:
CheckWarmupConvergence: Loads Initialization , Zone = "MAIN ZONE" did not converge after 30 warmup days.
See Warmup Convergence Information in .eio file for details
.. Environment(SizingPeriod) = "DENVER CENTENNIAL GOLDEN N ANN CLG 1% CONDNS DB = >MWB"
52 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.4: Solar reflection from building surfaces onto other building surfaces. In this example
beam solar reflects from a vertical section of the building onto a roof section. The reflection from
the window is specular. The reflection from the wall is diffuse.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 53

Figure 1.5: Shadowing from building affects beam solar reflection from the ground. Beam-to-diffuse
reflection from the ground onto the building occurs only for sunlit areas, A and C, not from shaded
area, B.

..Max Temp Comparison = 2.06E -002 vs Temperature Convergence Tolerance = 0.50 – Pass Convergence
..Min Temp Comparison = 5.95E -003 vs Temperature Convergence Tolerance = 0.50 – Pass Convergence
..Max Cool Load Comparison = 9.5082E -002 vs Loads Convergence Tolerance = 5.00E -002 – Fail Convergence

As noted in the message, there will be more information in the .eio file. (Refer to Output Details
document as well for examples.)
You may be able to increase the Maximum Number of Warmup Days and get convergence, but
some anomalous buildings may still not converge. Simulation proceeds for x warmup days until
“convergence” is reached (see the discussion under the Temperature Convergence Tolerance Value
field in this object, just above).
The value in this field is an overall parameter for all types of environments in the simulation.
The maximum nmber of warmup days can also be controlled separately for individual designgdays
using the input field Maximum Number Warmup Days in the SizingPerod:DesignDay object.

1.5.4.1.9 Field: Minimum Number of Warmup Days

This field specifies the minimum number of “warmup” days before EnergyPlus will check if it
has achieved convergence and can thus start simulating the particular environment (design day,
annual run) in question. Although some older investigations indicated that 6 warmup days is
generally enough on the minimum end of the spectrum, current thinking is that the convergence
checks (controlled by convergence tolerance values above) can be relied on to determine a minimum
number of warm days. An arbitrary high minimum can lead to excessive run times for lightweight
buildings that may converge quickly and not need many warmup days. Therefore the default is
reduced from 6 to just 1. A value of 6 here will replicate older behavior if field was being left blank.
Users may wish to increase the value in certain situations when, based on the output variables
described in the Output Details document, it is determined that EnergyPlus has not converged.
While this parameter should be less than the previous maximum parameter, a value greater than
the value entered in the field “Maximum Number of Warmup Days” above may be used when users
54 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

wish to increase warmup days more than the previous field. In this particular case, the previous
field will be automatically reset to the value entered in this field and EnergyPlus will run exactly
the number of warmup days specified in this field.
An example from an IDF:

Building ,
PSI HOUSE DORM AND OFFICES , !- Name
36.87000 , !- North Axis {deg}
Suburbs , !- Terrain
0.04, !- Loads Convergence Tolerance Value
0.4000000 , !- Temperature Convergence Tolerance Value {deltaC}
FullInteriorAndExterior , !- Solar Distribution
40, !- Maximum Number of Warmup Days
6; !- Minimum Number of Warmup Days

1.5.5 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside
This input object is used control the choice of models used for surface convection at the inside face of
all the heat transfer surfaces in the model. This object sets the selection for convection correlations
in a global way. The Zone Inside Convection Algorithm input field in the Zone object may be used
to selectively override this value on a zone-by-zone basis. Further, individual surfaces can refine
the choice by each surface or surface lists – see object SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients and
object SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface.

1.5.5.1 Inputs
1.5.5.1.1 Field: Algorithm
The model specified in this field is the default algorithm for the inside face all the surfaces..
The key choices are Simple, TARP, CeilingDiffuser, AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm, and
ASTMC1340.
The Simple model applies constant heat transfer coefficients depending on the surface orienta-
tion.
The TARP model correlates the heat transfer coefficient to the temperature difference for
various orientations. This model is based on flat plate experiments.
The CeilingDiffuser model is a mixed and forced convection model for ceiling diffuser config-
urations. The model correlates the heat transfer coefficient to the air change rate for ceilings, walls
and floors. These correlations are based on experiments performed in an isothermal room with a
cold ceiling jet. To avoid discontinuities in surface heat transfer rate calculations, all of correlations
have been extrapolated beyond the lower limit of the data set (3 ACH) to a natural convection
limit that is applied during the hours when the system is off.
The AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm model is an dynamic algorithm that organizes a
large number of different convection models and automatically selects the one that best applies.
The adaptive convection algorithm can also be customized using the SurfaceConvectionAlgo-
rithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections input object. These models are explained in detail in the
EnergyPlus Engineering Reference Document.
The ASTMC1340 model correlates mixed convection coefficients to the surface-to-air temper-
ature difference, heat flow direction, surface tilt angle, surface characteristic length, and air speed
past the surface. These correlations are based on ASTM C1340 standard.
The default is TARP.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 55

IDF Example:

SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm :Inside ,TARP;

1.5.6 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside
Various exterior convection models may be selected for global use. The optional Zone Outside
Convection Algorithm input field in the Zone object may be used to selectively override this
value on a zone-by-zone basis. Further, individual surfaces can refine the choice by each sur-
face or surface lists – see object SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients and object SurfaceProp-
erty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface.

1.5.6.1 Inputs
1.5.6.1.1 Field: Algorithm
The available key choices are SimpleCombined, TARP, MoWiTT, DOE-2, and Adap-
tiveConvectionAlgorithm.
The Simple convection model applies heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness and
windspeed. This is a combined heat transfer coefficient that includes radiation to sky, ground, and
air. The correlation is based on Figure 1.142, Page 25.1 (Thermal and Water Vapor Transmission
Data), 2001 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. Note that if Simple is chosen here or in the
Zone field and a SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients object attempts to override the calculation
with a different choice, the action will still be one of combined calculation. To change this, you
must select one of the other methods for the global default.
All other convection models apply heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness, wind-
speed, and terrain of the building’s location. These are convection only heat transfer coefficients;
radiation heat transfer coefficients are calculated automatically by the program.
The TARP algorithm was developed for the TARP software and combines natural and wind-
driven convection correlations from laboratory measurements on flat plates.
The DOE-2 and MoWiTT were derived from field measurements. DOE-2 uses a correlation
from measurements by Klems and Yazdanian for rough surfaces. MoWitt uses a correlation from
measurements by Klems and Yazdanian for smooth surfaces and, therefore, is most appropriate
for windows (see SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface for how to apply to only
windows).
The AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm model is an dynamic algorithm that organizes a
large number of different convection models and automatically selects the one that best applies.
The adaptive convection algorithm can also be customized using the SurfaceConvectionAlgo-
rithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections input object. All algorithms are described more fully in
the Engineering Reference.
The default is DOE-2.
Note that when the surface is wet (i.e. it is raining and the surface is exposed to wind) then
the convection coefficient appears as a very large number (1000) and the surface is exposed to the
Outdoor Wet-bulb Temperature rather than the Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature.
IDF Example:

SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm :Outside , AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm ;

56 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.7 HeatBalanceAlgorithm
The HeatBalanceAlgorithm object provides a way to select what type of heat and moisture transfer
algorithm will be used for calculating the performance of the building’s surface assemblies. This
input controls the overall algorithm used for all the surfaces unless one or more of the SurfaceProp-
erty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:* objects are used to alter the selection for particular surfaces.

1.5.7.1 Inputs
1.5.7.1.1 Field: Algorithm
Four values are allowed to select which solution will be used.

• The ConductionTransferFunction selection is a sensible heat only solution and does not
take into account moisture storage or diffusion in the construction elements.

• The MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction selection is a sensible

heat diffusion and an inside surface moisture storage algorithm that also needs additional
moisture material property information. Sometimes, this is referred to as the Effective Mois-
ture Penetration Depth or EMPD. See the moisture material property object for additional
information and description of outputs:

– MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings

• Advanced/Research usage:The ConductionFiniteDifference selection is a sensible heat

only solution and does not take into account moisture storage or diffusion in the construction
elements. This solution technique uses a 1-D finite difference solution in the construction
elements. Outputs for the surfaces are described with the material property objects. The
Conduction Finite Difference (aka CondFD) property objects are:

– MaterialProperty:PhaseChange
– MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity
– MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis

• Advanced/Research usage: The CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement is a

coupled heat and moisture transfer and storage solution. The solution technique uses a
one dimensional finite difference solution in the construction elements and requires further
material properties described in the Heat and Moisture Transfer material properties objects.
Outputs from the algorithm are described with these objects. The Heat and Moisture
Transfer property objects are:

– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion
– MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 57

1.5.7.1.2 Field: Surface Temperature Upper Limit

This field is a bit “advanced”. It should only be used when the simulation fails AND you cannot
determine a cause for the failure. That is, you receive an error similar to:
** Severe ** Temperature out of bounds (202.91) for surface = Wall1
** ~~~ ** in Zone = Zone01
** ~~~ ** Occurrence info = NEW YORK CITY NY SUMMER , 07/21 16:00 - 16:01
** ~~~ ** A temperature out of bounds problem can be caused by several things. The user
** ~~~ ** should check the weather environment , the level of internal gains with respect
** ~~~ ** to the zone , and the thermal properties of their materials among other things.
** ~~~ ** A common cause is a building with no thermal mass -- all materials with
** ~~~ ** Regular -R definitions.

And, after careful perusal, you cannot find a solution as suggested in the error description. You
may then want to enter a higher number than the default for this field.

1.5.7.1.3 Field: Minimum Surface Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient Value

This optional field is used to set an overall minimum for the value of the coefficient for surface
convection heat transfer (Hc) in W/m2-K. A minimum is necessary for numerical robustness because
some correlations for Hc can result in zero values and create numerical problems. This field can be
used to support specialized validation testing to suppress convection heat transfer and to investigate
the implications of different minimum Hc values. The default is 0.1.

1.5.7.1.4 Field: Maximum Surface Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient Value

This optional field is used to set an overall maximum for the value of the coefficient for surface
convection heat transfer (Hc) in W/m2-K. High Hc values are used in EnergyPlus to approximate
fixed surface temperature boundary conditions. This field can be used to alter the accepted range
of user-defined Hc values.
And, a default IDF example
HeatBalanceAlgorithm , ConductionTransferFunction ; ! Solution Algorithm

1.5.8 HeatBalanceSettings:ConductionFiniteDifference
This object is used to control the behavior of the Conduction Finite Difference algorithm for surface
heat transfer. The settings are global and affect how the model behaves for all the surfaces.

1.5.8.1 Inputs

1.5.8.1.1 Field: Difference Scheme

This field determines the solution scheme used by the Conduction Finite Difference model.
There are two options CrankNicholsonSecondOrder and FullyImplicitFirstOrder. The CrankNi-
cholsonSecondOrder scheme is second order in time and may be faster. But it can be unstable over
time when boundary conditions change abruptly and severely. The FullyImplicitFirstOrder scheme
is first order in time and is more stable over time. But it may be slower. The default is FullyIm-
plicitFirstOrder when ConductionFiniteDifference is selected as the Heat Balance Algorithm.
58 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.8.1.2 Field: Space Discretization Constant

This field controls how the model determines spatial discretization, or the count of nodes across
each material layer in the construction. The model calculates the nominal distance associated with
a node, ∆x, using
√
∆x = Cα∆t (1.1)
Where
α is the thermal diffusivity of the material layer, in m2 /s
∆t is the length of the timestep in seconds.
C is a constant set by this field.
The default is 3. Typical values are from 1 to 3. Lower values for this constant lead to more
nodes and finer-grained space discretization.

1.5.8.1.3 Field: Relaxation Factor

The finite difference solver includes under-relaxation for improved stability for interactions with
the other surfaces. This input field can optionally be used to modify the starting value for the
relaxation factor. Larger numbers may solve faster, while smaller numbers may be more stable.
The default is 1.0. If the program detects numerical instability, it may reduce the value entered
here to something lower and more stable.

1.5.8.1.4 Field: Inside Face Surface Temperature Convergence Criteria

The surface heat balance model at the inside face has a numerical solver that uses a convergence
parameter for a maximum allowable differences in surface temperature. This field can optionally be
used to modify this convergence criteria. The default value is 0.002 and was selected for stability.
Lower values may further increase stability at the expense of longer runtimes, while higher values
may decrease runtimes but lead to possible instabilities. The units are in degrees Celsius.
An example IDF object follows.
HeatBalanceSettings :ConductionFiniteDifference ,
FullyImplicitFirstOrder , !- Difference Scheme
3.0, !- Space Discretization Constant
1.0, !- Relaxation Factor
0.002; !- Inside Face Surface Temperature Convergence Criteria

1.5.9 ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm
The ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm object provides a way to select what type of solution algorithm
will be used to calculate zone air temperatures and humidity ratios. This object is an optional
object. If the default algorithm is used, this object is not required in an input file.

1.5.9.1 Inputs
1.5.9.1.1 Field: Algorithm
Three choices are allowed to select which solution algorithm will be used. The ThirdOrder-
BackwardDifference selection is the default selection and uses the third order finite difference
approximation to solve the zone air energy and moisture balance equations. The AnalyticalSo-
lution selection uses the integration approach to solve the zone air energy and moisture balance
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 59

equations. The EulerMethod selection uses the first order finite backward difference approxima-
tion to solve the zone air energy and moisture balance equations.
And, a default IDF example is shown below:
ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm , ThirdOrderBackwardDifference ; !- Algorithm

1.5.10 ZoneAirContaminantBalance
The ZoneAirContaminantBalance object provides a way to select which contaminant type will be
simulated. Although carbon dioxide is not considered as an indoor contaminant but it is used as an
indicator of indoor air quality in buildings. From modeling point of view EnergyPlus treats carbon
dioxide as a type of contaminant. In addition to carbon dioxide, a generic contaminant type model
was also added. This object is optional, only required in the input data file if the user wishes to
model contaminant concentration levels as part of their simulation.

1.5.10.1 Inputs
1.5.10.1.1 Field: Carbon Dioxide Concentration
Input is Yes or No. The default is No. If Yes, simulation of carbon dioxide concentration levels
will be performed. If No, simulation of carbon dioxide concentration levels will not be performed.

1.5.10.1.2 Field: Outdoor Carbon Dioxide Schedule Name

This field specifies the name of a schedule that contains outdoor air carbon dioxide level values in
units of ppm. One source of monthly average CO2 levels in the atmosphere is available at NOAA’s
website or via ftp.

1.5.10.1.3 Field: Generic Contaminant Concentration

Input is Yes or No. The default is No. If Yes, simulation of generic contaminant concentration
levels will be performed. If No, simulation of generic contaminant concentration levels will not be
performed.

1.5.10.1.4 Field: Outdoor Generic Contaminant Schedule Name

This field specifies the name of a schedule that contains outdoor air generic contaminant level
values in units of ppm.
An IDF example:
ZoneAirContaminantBalance ,
Yes , !- Carbon Dioxide Concentration
Outdoor CO2 Schedule , !- Outdoor Carbon Dioxide Schedule Name
Yes , !- Generic Contaminant Concentration
Generic Contaminant Schedule; !- Outdoor Generic Contaminant Schedule Name

1.5.10.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available when Carbon Dioxide Concentration = Yes.
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air CO2 Internal Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air CO2 Concentration [ppm]
60 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.10.2.1 Zone Air CO2 Concentration [ppm]

This output variable represents the carbon dioxide concentration level in parts per million (ppm)
for each zone. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the Zone Air Contaminant
Predictor-Corrector module.

1.5.10.2.2 Zone Air CO2 Internal Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This is the total (net) rate of carbon dioxide internal gains/losses for a zone in m3 /s from
all types of sources or sinks. It includes impacts from three objects: ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:CarbonDioxide, People, and GasEquipment. Positive values denote carbon dioxide gener-
ation (gain or source), while negative values denote carbon dioxide removal (loss or sink).

1.5.10.3 Outputs
The following output variable is available when Generic Contaminant Concentration = Yes.
HVAC,Average,Zone Generic Air Contaminant Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Average,Zone Air Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]

1.5.10.3.1 Zone Air Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]

This output variable represents the generic contaminant concentration level in parts per mil-
lion (ppm) for each zone. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the Zone Air
Contaminant Predictor-Corrector module.

1.5.10.3.2 Zone Generic Air Contaminant Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This is the rate of generic air contaminant added (or subtracted) to a zone from all types of
sources or sinks.

1.5.11 ShadowCalculation
This object is used to control some details of EnergyPlus’s solar, shadowing and daylighting models.
There are two basic methods available for the calculations. In order to speed up the calculations,
shadowing calculations (sun position, etc.) for the default method are performed over a period of
days. Note that this value may be very important for determining the amount of sun entering your
building and by inference the amount of cooling or heating load needed for maintaining the building.
Though termed “shadowing” calculations, it in affect determines the sun position for a particular
day in a weather file period simulation. (Each design day will use the date of the design day object).
Even though weather file data contains the amount of solar radiation, the internal calculation of
sun position will govern how that affects various parts of the building. By default, the calculations
are done for every 20 days throughout a weather run period; an average solar position is chosen
and the solar factors (such as sunlit areas of surfaces) remain the same for that number of days.
When more integrated calculations are needed for controlling dynamic windows or shades, a second
method is available where solar calculations are performed at each zone timestep.
This object also allows setting up global flags to import and export exterior shading calculations
results. This enables importing pre-calculated results of the shading fractions for each exterior
building surface from external simulation tools. This also enables reusing the shading results for
parametric runs which usually do not change external shading.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 61

The object also allows input to disable self-shading effect from exterior surfaces from all zones,
or from a subset of zones. Two flags are defined to enable the maximal flexibility of various inter-
pretation of self-shading: one to disable shading between zones of a same zone group, the other to
disable shading between different zone groups. The shading by exterior surfaces of the specified
zones groups will be bypassed.

1.5.11.1 Inputs

1.5.11.1.1 Field: Shading Calculation Method

Select between CPU-based polygon clipping method, the GPU-based pixel counting method, or
importing from external shading data.
Choices are:

1. PolygonClipping

2. PixelCounting

3. Scheduled

4. Imported

Default: PolygonClipping
If PixelCounting is selected and GPU hardware (or GPU emulation) is not available, a warn-
ing will be displayed and EnergyPlus will revert to PolygonClipping. Unlike PolygonClipping,
PixelCounting has no limitations related to zone concavity when used with any “FullInterior” solar
distribution options (i.e., it can accommodate both concave and convex zones equally).
Use of the PixelCounting method requires some overhead in passing instructions between the
CPU and the GPU. For low numbers of shading surfaces (less than about 200 for most hardware),
PolygonClipping requires less runtime than PixelCounting. However, PixelCounting runtime scales
significantly better at higher numbers of shading surfaces.
Some computers have multiple GPUs. In this case, the highest performance GPU is not always
used by default. You may want to select which GPU is used when running EnergyPlus by setting
the graphics performance preferences on your computer.
If Scheduled is chosen, the External Shading Fraction Schedule Name is required in Sur-
faceProperty:LocalEnvironment. If some exterior surfaces do not have their SurfaceProp-
erty:LocalEnvironment objects, no shading is assigned on those exterior surfaces.
If Imported is chosen, the Schedule:File:Shading object is required to define the external
file that stores all shading calculation results. The results are imported altogether by reading the
Schedule:File:Shading object during initialization. The file explicitly defines the mappings to
the surfaces. If the data for a surface is not listed in the file, no shading is assigned on this surface.
The sunlit fraction to overwrite accounts for the shading of both direct and sky diffuse solar
radiation caused by all exterior shadowing surfaces. In this case, shadow patterns on exterior
surfaces caused by detached shading, side-fins, overhangs, and exterior surfaces of all zones are
overwritten. The interior shading devices, such as window shades and blinds, should be further
calculated and applied after the importing.
62 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.11.1.2 Field: Shading Calculation Update Frequency Method

This field is used to control how the solar, shading, and daylighting models are calculated with
respect to the time of calculations during the simulation. The default and fastest method is selected
using the keyword Periodic. A more detailed and slower method can be selected using the keyword
Timestep. The Timestep method must be used for modeling dynamic fenestration and shading
surfaces.

1.5.11.1.3 Field: Shading Calculation Update Frequency

This numeric field will cause the shadowing calculations to be done periodically using the num-
ber in the field as the number of days in each period. This field is only used if the default Periodic
calculation frequency method is used in the previous field. Using this field will allow you to synchro-
nize the shadowing calculations with changes in shading devices. Using the default of 20 days in
each period is the average number of days between significant changes in solar position angles. For
these shadowing calculations, an “average” (over the time period) of solar angles, position, equation
of time are also used.

1.5.11.1.4 Field: Maximum Figures in Shadow Overlap Calculations

This numeric field will allow you to increase the number of figures in shadow overlaps in the
PolygonClipping method. Due to the shadowing algorithm, the number of shadows in a figure may
grow quite large even with fairly reasonable looking structures. Of course, the inclusion of more
allowed figures will increase calculation time. Likewise, too few figures may not result in as accurate
calculations as you desire.

1.5.11.1.5 Field: Polygon Clipping Algorithm

This is an advanced feature. Prior to V7, the internal polygon clipping method was a special
case of the Weiler-Atherton method. Now, three options are available:

SutherlandHodgman A simpler algorithm but it works well in cases where receiving surfaces (of
shadows) are non-convex.

ConvexWeilerAtherton Only accurate where both casting and receiving surfaces are convex.
Warnings/severe errors are displayed when necessary.

SlaterBarskyandSutherlandHodgman Slater-Barsky only applies to rectangular surfaces.

Polygon clipping for rectangular surfaces will be calculated using the Slater-Barsky algorithm,
while the rest adopts the default Sutherl-Hodgman algorithm.

Default is SutherlandHodgman. More details on polygon clipping are contained in the Engi-
neering Reference.

1.5.11.1.6 Field: Pixel Counting Resolution

Number of pixels in both dimensions of the surface rendering. Higher resolution will create more
accurate calculations, but can significantly increase computation time.
Default: 512.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 63

1.5.11.1.7 Field: Sky Diffuse Modeling Algorithm

Two choices are available here: SimpleSkyDiffuseModeling and DetailedSkyDiffuseModeling.
SimpleSkyDiffuseModeling (default) performs a one-time calculation for sky diffuse properties.
This has implications if you have shadowing surfaces with changing transmittance (i.e. not all
opaque or not all transparent) during the year. The program checks to see if this might be the
case and automatically selects DetailedSkyDiffuseModeling if the shading transmittance varies.
Even if the transmittance doesn’t vary and the option for detailed modeling is used, that option
is retained (though it will increase execution time) because you may be using EMS to vary the
transmittance. When the detailed modeling is done, there will be a warning posted if the Calculation
Frequency (above) is > 1.
In general (and you should also read the previous field description), if shadowing surfaces are
used with the transmittance property, the user should be careful to synchronize this calculation with
the scheduled occurrence of the transmittance (if any) (or use 1, which will be the most accurate
but will cause more time in the calculations).
This field applies to the shading calculation update frequency method called “Periodic.” When
the method called “Timestep” is used the diffuse sky modeling always uses DetailedSkyDiffuseMod-
eling.

1.5.11.1.8 Field: Output External Shading Calculation Results This fields indicates
whether or not (Yes or No)to save internal shading calculation results to an external file, which
can be imported back as needed. This file saves external sunlit fractions for all surfaces. If Yes is
chosen, hourly shading fraction of all surfaces will be exported as a CSV file, naming as ”output
file prefix + shading” (the default name is ”eplusshading.csv” if no output file prefix is defined).
Each column of the CSV file lists the annually calculated shading fraction of each surface with
time-step interval. It only writes data for each simulation day that shadows are calculated, e.g.
once every 20 days by default. If the results are intended to be reused to be imported back
using ImportedShading in Field: External Shading Calculation Method, the Calculation
Frequency should be set as one to write year-round hourly results. Design days are not included.
The default choice is No.

1.5.11.1.9 Field: Disable Self-Shading Within Shading Zone Groups This fields spec-
ifies during shading calculation, for all surfaces in a targeted Zone Group, whether or not (Yes or
No ) the self-shading effect by exterior surfaces of all zones within the target Zone Group is dis-
abled. If Yes, self-shading will be disabled from all exterior surfaces in a given Shading Zone Group
to surfaces within the same Shading Zone Group. If both Disable Self-Shading Within Shading
Zone Groups and Disable Self-Shading From Shading Zone Groups to Other Zones = Yes, then all
self-shading from exterior surfaces will be disabled.If only one of these fields = Yes, then at least
one Shading Zone Group must be specified, or this field will be ignored. Shading from Shading:*
surfaces, overhangs, fins, and reveals will not be disabled.

1.5.11.1.10 Field: Disable Self-Shading From Shading Zone Groups to Other Zones
This fields specifies during shading calculation, for all surfaces in a targeted Zone Group, whether
or not (Yes or No ) the self-shading effect from all exterior surfaces in the target Zone Group to
other zones is disabled. If Yes, self-shading will be disabled from all exterior surfaces in a given
Shading Zone Group to all other zones in the model. If both Disable Self-Shading Within Shading
64 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zone Groups and Disable Self-Shading From Shading Zone Groups to Other Zones = Yes, then all
self-shading from exterior surfaces will be disabled. If only one of these fields = Yes, then at least
one Shading Zone Group must be specified, or this field will be ignored. Shading from Shading:*
surfaces, overhangs, fins, and reveals will not be disabled.

1.5.11.1.11 Field: Shading Zone Group ZoneList Name The shading zones group speci-
fies group of zones which are controlled by the Disable Self-Shading fields. This object is extensible,
so additional fields of this type can be added to the end of this object.
Examples of this object in IDF: (note this object must be unique in an IDF)
ShadowCalculation , PixelCounting , Periodic , 1;

ShadowCalculation , PolygonClipping , Periodic , 1, , SutherlandHodgman , , DetailedSkyDiffuseModeling ;

ShadowCalculation , Scheduled , Periodic , , , , , Yes;

ShadowCalculation , PolygonClipping , Periodic , , , , , , , Yes , No , ShadingZoneGroup;

Note that the use of “1” in the examples is NOT the same as using Timestep calculation
frequency – “1” causes daily calculation of the sun position variables but does not change the
shadowing calculations more frequently than daily.

1.5.12 Output:Diagnostics
Sometimes, messages only confuse users – especially new users. Likewise, sometimes certain output
variables exist for only a certain condition but some take them at face value/name. Some features
may be very important but under certain instances cause problems. Thus, we have added the
diagnostic output object to be able to turn on or off certain messages, variables, and features
depending on conditions.
Both fields of the Output:Diagnostics command can accept all the applicable keys. More than
one object may be entered.

1.5.12.1 Inputs
1.5.12.1.1 Field: key1, key2
Allowable choices are:
DisplayAllWarnings – use this to get all warnings (except the developer warnings “Display-
ZoneAirHeatBalanceOffBalance”). This key sets all other display warning values to on.
DisplayExtraWarnings – use this to get all extra warnings. An example of an extra warning
is when a user enters a ceiling height or volume with the Zone object and EnergyPlus calculates
something significantly different based on the entered zone geometry.
DisplayUnusedSchedules – use this to have the unused schedules (by name) listed at the end
of the simulation.
DisplayUnusedObjects – use this to have unused (orphan) objects (by name) listed at the
end of the simulation.
DisplayAdvancedReportVariables – use this to be able to use certain advanced output
variables where the name may be misleading and you need to understand the concepts or reasons
for use. If you put in this field, then you will be able to report on these features. They are noted
in the descriptions of objects or output variables.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 65

DisplayZoneAirHeatBalanceOffBalance – this is a developer diagnostic which you can turn

on, if you desire.
DoNotMirrorDetachedShading – use this to turn off the automatic mirroring of detached
shading surfaces. These surfaces are automatically mirrored so that the user does not need to worry
about facing direction of the surface and the shading surface will shade the building as appropriate.
DoNotMirrorAttachedShading – use this to turn off the automatic mirroring of attached
shading surfaces. These surfaces are automatically mirrored so that the user does not need to worry
about facing direction of the surface and the shading surface will shade the building as appropriate.
Attached shading surfaces include Shading:Overhang, Shading:Overhang:Projection, Shading:Fin,
Shading:Fin:Projection, and Shading:Zone:Detailed.
DisplayWeatherMissingDataWarnings – use this to turn on the missing data warnings from
the read of the weather file.
ReportDuringWarmup – use this to allow reporting during warmup days. This can show you
exactly how your facility is converging (or not) during the initial “warmup” days of the simulation.
Generally, only developers or expert simulation users would need this kind of detail.
ReportDetailedWarmupConvergence – use this to produce detailed reporting (essentially
each warmup day for each zone) for warmup convergence.
ReportDuringHVACSizingSimulation – use this to allow controlling reporting to SQLite
database during sizing period simulations done for HVAC Sizing Simulation. The regular reporting
is done in the usual way. This can show details of how advanced sizing adjustments were determined
by documenting how the systems operated when doing the intermediate sizing periods. Depending
on the number of iterations performed for HVAC Sizing Simulation, there will be a number of sets
of results with each set containing all the Sizing Periods.
In IDF use:
Output:Diagnostics ,
DisplayExtraWarnings ;

1.5.13 Output:DebuggingData
There may be times when a particular input file requires additional debugging. The Out-
put:DebuggingData object may be used to report all available node data (e.g., temperature, mass
flow rate, set point, pressure, etc.). The debug data is reported to the DBG text file. The debug
file first reports the node number and name, and then all available node information for each zone
time step (Ref. Timestep).
The 2 fields of the Output:DebuggingData object can accept either a 1 (turn on) or any other
value (turn off). Only one object may be entered.

1.5.13.1 Inputs
1.5.13.1.1 Field: Report Debugging Data
This field turns on debug reporting when a value of 1 is entered. Any other value (usually 0)
disables debug reporting.

1.5.13.1.2 Field: Report During Warmup

This field allows the debug data to be reported during the warmup period. When a value of
1 is entered the data is reported at all times, even during warmup. Any other value (usually 0)
66 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

disables “reporting at all time” and debug data is only reported for each environment (RunPeriod
or SizingPeriod:DesignDay).
In IDF use:
Output:DebuggingData ,
1,1;

1.5.14 Output:PreprocessorMessage
The Output:PreprocessorMessage object can be used by preprocessor programs to EnergyPlus for
passing certain conditions/errors that might not be detected by scripts executing the EnergyPlus
system of programs. This allows EnergyPlus to intercept problems and terminate gracefully rather
than the user having to track down the exact conditions.
There is no reason for a user to enter an Output:PreprocessorMessage object but you should
encourage interface developers to use this feature. More than one Output:PreprocessorMessage
objects may be entered. Of course, no preprocessor message objects are necessary if there is no
error information to be passed.

1.5.14.1 Inputs
1.5.14.1.1 Field: Preprocessor Name
The preprocessor name (e.g. EPMacro, ExpandObjects) is entered here. Case is retained so
that messages from EnergyPlus look very similar to what a preprocessor would produce.

1.5.14.1.2 Field: Error Severity

This is the error severity. If Fatal, EnergyPlus will terminate after showing all preprocessor
messages.

1.5.14.1.3 Fields: Message Line 1 through Message Line 10

Each line is limited to 100 characters and an appropriate message can be composed.
An IDF Example:

Output:PreprocessorMessage ,
No Preprocessor Used , !- preprocessor name
Information , !- error severity
Illustrative Message , !- message line 1
No problems for processing; !- message line 2

And would appear in output:

Preprocessor = "No Preprocessor Used" has the following Information messages:
Illustrative Message
No problems for processing

1.5.15 ZoneCapacitanceMultiplier:ResearchSpecial
This object is an advanced feature that can be used to control the effective storage capacity of
the zone. Capacitance multipliers of 1.0 indicate the capacitance is that of the (moist) air in the
volume of the specified zone. This multiplier can be increased if the zone air capacitance needs to
be increased for stability of the simulation or to allow modeling higher or lower levels of damping
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 67

of behavior over time. The multipliers are applied to the base value corresponding to the total
capacitance for the zone’s volume of air at current zone (moist) conditions.

1.5.15.1 Inputs
1.5.15.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ZoneCapacitanceMultiplier:ResearchSpecial object.

1.5.15.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList Name

This field is the name of the thermal zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a particular zone capacitance
multiplier to a thermal zone or set of thermal zones in the building. When the ZoneList option is
used then capacity multiplier is applied to each of the zones in the zone list.

1.5.15.1.3 Field: Temperature Capacity Multiplier

This field is used to alter the effective heat capacitance of the zone air volume. This affects the
transient calculations of zone air temperature. Values greater than 1.0 have the effect of smoothing
or damping the rate of change in the temperature of zone air from timestep to timestep. Note that
sensible heat capacity can also be modeled using internal mass surfaces.

1.5.15.1.4 Field: Humidity Capacity Multiplier

This field is used to alter the effective moisture capacitance of the zone air volume. This
affects the transient calculations of zone air humidity ratio. Values greater than 1.0 have the effect
of smoothing, or damping, the rate of change in the water content of zone air from timestep to
timestep.

1.5.15.1.5 Field: Carbon Dioxide Capacity Multiplier

This field is used to alter the effective carbon dioxide capacitance of the zone air volume. This
affects the transient calculations of zone air carbon dioxide concentration. Values greater than 1.0
have the effect of smoothing or damping the rate of change in the carbon dioxide level of zone air
from timestep to timestep.

1.5.15.1.6 Field: Generic Contaminant Capacity Multiplier

This field is used to alter the effective generic contaminant capacitance of the zone air volume.
This affects the transient calculations of zone air generic contaminant concentration. Values greater
than 1.0 have the effect of smoothing or damping the rate of change in the generic contaminant
level of zone air from timestep to timestep.

1.5.16 SimulationControl
The input for SimulationControl allows the user to specify what kind of calculations a given Ener-
gyPlus simulation will perform. For instance the user may want to perform one or more of the sizing
calculations but not proceed to an annual weather file simulation. Or the user might have all flow
rates and equipment sizes already specified and desire an annual weather without any preceding
sizing calculations. Sizing runs, even for large projects, are quickly run – they do not add much to
the overall simulation time. The SimulationControl input allows all permutations of run selection
by means of 5 yes/no inputs.
68 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Only one SimulationControl object is permitted for each EnergyPlus input file. While a Simu-
lationControl is needed to trigger sizing calculations, it is optional for other runs (design days, run
periods). The actions will still be shown in the eplusout.eio file (see Output Details and Examples
Document).

1.5.16.1 Inputs
1.5.16.1.1 Field: Do Zone Sizing Calculation
Input is Yes or No. The default is No. Zone Sizing (see Sizing:Zone object) performs a special
calculation, using a theoretical ideal zonal system, and determines the zone design heating and
cooling flow rates and loads, saving the results in the zone sizing arrays.

1.5.16.1.2 Field: Do System Sizing Calculation

Input is Yes or No. The default is No. System Sizing (see Sizing:System object) also performs
a special calculation that, to oversimplify, sums up the results of the zone sizing calculation and
saves the results in the system sizing arrays for reporting on component size requirements. Thus, in
order to perform the system sizing calculations, the zone sizing arrays need to be filled and hence
the zone sizing calculations must be performed in the same run. (This requirement is enforced by
the program).

1.5.16.1.3 Field: Do Plant Sizing Calculation

Input is Yes or No. The default is No. Unlike Zone and System Sizing, Plant Sizing does not
use the Zone or System sizing arrays. Plant Sizing uses the Sizing:Plant object fields and data on
the maximum component flow rates. The data on component (such as coil) flow rates is saved and
made available to the Plant code whether or not component autosizing is performed and whether or
not zone sizing and/or system sizing is performed. Therefore, you can specify Plant Sizing without
also specifying to do Zone Sizing or System Sizing calculations.

1.5.16.1.4 Field: Run Simulation for Sizing Periods

Input is Yes or No. The default is Yes. Yes implies that the simulation will be run on all
the included SizingPeriod objects (i.e., SizingPeriod:DesignDay, SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays, and
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType). Note that each SizingPeriod object constitutes an “en-
vironment” and warmup convergence (see earlier topic under the Building object) will occur for
each.

1.5.16.1.5 Field: Run Simulation for Weather File Run Periods

Input is Yes or No. The default is Yes. Yes implies the simulation will be run on all the included
RunPeriod objects. Note that each RunPeriod object constitutes an “environment” and warmup
convergence (see earlier topic under the Building object) will occur for each.

1.5.16.1.6 Field: Do HVAC Sizing Simulation for Sizing Periods

This field is optional. It can be used to enable certain advanced sizing calculations that rely on
simulating the sizing periods to collect information. This is currently only applicable when sizing
plant loops using the sizing option called Coincident.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 69

1.5.16.1.7 Field: Maximum Number of HVAC Sizing Simulation Passes

This field is optional and is only used if the previous field is set to Yes. The HVAC Sizing
Simulation approach can use iteration to improve sizing calculations. Each iteration is a Sizing
Pass. This field is used to manually place an upper limit the number of passes that the sizing
algorithms can use.
An IDF example:
SimulationControl ,
No , !- Do Zone Sizing Calculation
No , !- Do System Sizing Calculation
No , !- Do Plant Sizing Calculation
Yes , !- Run Simulation for Sizing Periods
Yes , !- Run Simulation for Weather File Run Periods
No , !- Do HVAC Sizing Simulation for Sizing Periods
2; !- Maximum Number of HVAC Sizing Simulation Passes

1.5.17 PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs
The PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object can be used to control tradeoffs between performance
(speed) and precision for certain EnergyPlus features. This object enables users to choose to use
selected options that are intended to shorten the time needed for the computer to run EnergyPlus
simulations, but may tend to decrease the accuracy of results compared to methods that require
longer computing time. The field by field explanation of the object follows the next section, which
describes the procedure by an example of how to use the _perflog.csv file in conjunction with the
options available in the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object.

1.5.17.0.1 Tuning using the _perflog.csv file

Every time a simulation includes the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object, a file is generated
with the same name as the input but ending with _perflog.csv file (the performance log file). This
file can be opened using a spreadsheet program and may be helpful in adjusting the input field
values for the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object. Unlike most EnergyPlus output files, a new
line of results is appended (added to the end of the file) every time the input file is simulated.
The _perflog.csv file contains a log of results from each run and allows the examination of the
impacts of the changes to the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object and any other simulation inputs.
You are encouraged to not make changes to any other portions of your input file other than the
PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object when you are tuning that object. Also, if you are looking
at the _perflog.csv in a spreadsheet program, make sure you close the file before each simulation.
A spreadsheet program will often lock a CSV file and prevent it from being modified by another
program like EnergyPlus.
To illustrate how to use the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object and the _perflog.csv file
together, here is an example using an IDF file with 100 zones, one window per zone, and is served
by fan coil units and a central boiler and chiller. Seventeen simulations were made, and the results
in the <filename>_perflog.csv for various options in the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object are
shown below in the following tables.
70 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.3: PerfLog Mode Columns

Run Direct Radiant Override Num of Min Suppress System PsyTsatFnPb MaxZone MaxAllowed Runtime
Coil Algorithm Mode Timesteps Warmup Resets Timestep TempDiff DelTemp [second]
[#/hour] [minute]

1 FALSE ScriptF NORMAL 6 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 275.56

2 FALSE ScriptF MODE01 1 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 104.37
3 FALSE ScriptF MODE02 1 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 98.81
4 FALSE ScriptF MODE03 1 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 98.63
5 FALSE ScriptF MODE04 1 1 TRUE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 97.87
6 FALSE ScriptF MODE05 1 1 TRUE 60 Normal 0.30 0.002 47.22
7 FALSE ScriptF MODE06 1 1 TRUE 60 Interpolate 0.30 0.002 45.48
8 FALSE ScriptF MODE07 1 1 TRUE 60 Interpolate 1.00 0.002 45.14
9 FALSE ScriptF MODE08 1 1 TRUE 60 Interpolate 1.00 0.1 44.18
10 TRUE ScriptF NORMAL 6 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 273.42
11 FALSE CarrollMRT NORMAL 6 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 276.68
12 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE01 1 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 102.73
13 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE02 1 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 97.28
14 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE03 1 1 FALSE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 96.77
15 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE04 1 1 TRUE 1 Normal 0.30 0.002 96.56
16 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE05 1 1 TRUE 60 Normal 0.30 0.002 47.31
17 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE06 1 1 TRUE 60 Interpolate 0.30 0.002 45.62
18 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE07 1 1 TRUE 60 Interpolate 1.00 0.002 45.23
19 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE08 1 1 TRUE 60 Interpolate 1.00 0.1 44.09

This example uses 19 different simulations to arrive at the recommended values for the Perfor-
mancePrecisionTradeoffs object, but fewer trials could have been made to reach a similar conclusion.
The first run (Run 1, Normal mode) shows the results of no performance precision tradeoffs being
applied and is the same as not having the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object present. It is a
good idea to use this as a first step so that a baseline of the time, errors, and oscillations are
available for reference. Runs 2 through 9 are just stepping through the Override Modes (Mode01
to Mode08). Run 10 employs the “Use Coil Direct Solution” option, but the time gain for the
simulation is not so significant. Therefore it is not used anymore in later runs. Runs 11 through 19
repeat the various override modes, but this time with the CarrollMRT radiant exchange algorithm.
The biggest savings of the computation time are from Mode01 (Run 2) application. Compared to
the Normal mode (Run 1) baseline, applying Mode01 (Run 2) immediately reduces the simulation
time by 62%, to about only 37.9% of that for the Normal baseline. Then again, by applying Mode02
(Run 3), the simulation time is reduced by 5.3% compared to Mode02 (Run 1); Mode03 (Run 4)
saves about 0.2% compared to Mode02 (Run 3); and Mode04 (Run 5) saves about 0.7% on top of
Mode03 (Run 4). Compared to the normal baseline (Run 1), Mode04 (Run 5) only consumes about
one third (35.5%) of the computation time of Run 1 Normal baseline.
Next, when Mode05 (Run 6) is applied, the simulation time is significantly reduced again—
Mode05 reduces the simulation time by nearly a half compared to Mode04 (Run 5). The run
time for Mode05 (Run 6) is only 51.8% of that for Mode04 (Run 5); and it is only 17.0% of the
Normal baseline (Run 1). The run time for Mode06 (Run 7)was reduced by 3.7% in comparison
with Mode05 (Run6).Mode07 (Run 8) cuts the simulation time by about 0.7% compared to Mode
06 (Run 7); the overall simulation time of Mode07 (Run 8) is about 16.4% of the Normal baseline.
The final Mode08 (Run 9) cuts the simulation time by another 2.1% compared to Mode07 (Run
8); and the overall run time for Mode08 is only 16.0% (or about one-seventh) of that for the Run
1 Normal baseline.
In general, the higher models—Mode05 to Mode08—significantly save the simulation time with
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 71

both ScriptF and CarrollMRT, taking about one-fifth to one-seventh of the original Normal simu-
lation time. These modes seem to be good choices for faster simulations. However, we still need to
look at other results in the _perflog.csv file first before coming to that conclusion.
These example simulations each takes about three minutes or less to try. If your building takes
much longer than a few minutes, you might want to temporarily change the run period to just
a month or even a week to tune the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object inputs. If temporarily
shortening the run period is necessary, it is best to pick a month or week that has some cooling
and some heating. Just remember to set your run period back to a full year before coming to any
conclusions about the building or energy efficiency options being considered for the building.
Table 1.4: PerfLog Energy Columns

Run Direct Radiant Override Electricity Natural Water [m3 ] Runtime

Coil Algorithm Mode [MJ] Gas [MJ] [second]

1 FALSE ScriptF NORMAL 3,351,884 1,524,574 248,815 275.56

2 FALSE ScriptF MODE01 3,340,493 1,508,410 247,179 104.37
3 FALSE ScriptF MODE02 3,342,128 1,511,817 247,759 98.81
4 FALSE ScriptF MODE03 3,342,128 1,511,817 247,759 98.63
5 FALSE ScriptF MODE04 3,342,128 1,511,817 247,759 97.87
6 FALSE ScriptF MODE05 3,341,145 1,532,697 246,121 47.22
7 FALSE ScriptF MODE06 3,341,183 1,532,626 246,122 45.48
8 FALSE ScriptF MODE07 3,341,183 1,532,626 246,122 45.14
9 FALSE ScriptF MODE08 3,342,365 1,516,963 246,906 44.18
10 TRUE ScriptF NORMAL 3,351,884 1,524,574 248,816 273.42
11 FALSE CarrollMRT NORMAL 3,525,611 1,271,563 304,914 276.68
12 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE01 3,511,800 1,260,228 303,189 102.73
13 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE02 3,510,893 1,263,149 303,383 97.28
14 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE03 3,510,893 1,263,149 303,383 96.77
15 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE04 3,510,893 1,263,149 303,383 96.56
16 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE05 3,513,714 1,277,252 302,242 47.31
17 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE06 3,513,750 1,277,187 302,246 45.62
18 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE07 3,513,750 1,277,187 302,246 45.23
19 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE08 3,513,797 1,264,779 303,035 44.09

The CarrollMRT options seem to have a much more significant impact on the natural gas usage;
and the total water and the times are similar to the runtimes using ScriptF. So for this example,
CarrollMRT does not seem to be a right choice. In these cases, the computation times are not very
different from the ScriptF instances; however, the energy usage is further away from the Normal
baseline. The electricity usage differences for Runs 2 through 8 are small compared to Run 1
(the Normal baseline case), and are less than 0.34% different. The natural gas usage has more
significant differences of 0.5% to 1.1%, and the water usage differs from 0.4% to 1.1%. From an
energy perspective, these impacts for the ScriptF Runs 2 through 8 are probably tolerable.
Table 1.5: PerfLog Oscillation Columns

Run Direct Radiant Override Oscillating Oscillating Oscillating Warnings Runtime

Coil Algorithm Mode [hour] Occupancy Deadband [second]
[hour] [hour]

1 FALSE ScriptF NORMAL 2.6 2.25 0.18 64 275.56

2 FALSE ScriptF MODE01 7.87 2.67 6.87 65 104.37
3 FALSE ScriptF MODE02 8.7 3.5 7.7 66 98.81
4 FALSE ScriptF MODE03 8.7 3.5 7.7 67 98.63
5 FALSE ScriptF MODE04 8.7 3.5 7.7 68 97.87
72 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

6 FALSE ScriptF MODE05 169 94 119 70 47.22

7 FALSE ScriptF MODE06 169 94 119 71 45.48
8 FALSE ScriptF MODE07 169 94 119 72 45.14
9 FALSE ScriptF MODE08 161 94 115 2379 44.18
10 TRUE ScriptF NORMAL 2.6 2.25 0.18 65 273.42
11 FALSE CarrollMRT NORMAL 2.18 1.83 0.18 65 276.68
12 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE01 8.57 1.7 7.57 66 102.73
13 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE02 8.83 2.5 7.7 67 97.28
14 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE03 8.83 2.5 7.7 68 96.77
15 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE04 8.83 2.5 7.7 69 96.56
16 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE05 177 105 112 70 47.31
17 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE06 177 105 112 71 45.62
18 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE07 177 105 112 72 45.23
19 FALSE CarrollMRT MODE08 173 100 112 73 44.09

The number of hours any zone is oscillating for Run 1 (the Normal baseline case) using Script F
is only 2.6 hours, with almost none of the hours in the dead band and nearly all during occupancy.
This changes when considering the other ScriptF cases using Mode01 to Mode08 (Run 2 to Run
9). For Mode01 (Run 2), the oscillating hours increase but are still less than 8 hours per year.
While more than doubling, it is still considered a small change on an absolute basis. The change
is even more minor when considering the oscillating hours during occupancy. The oscillation hours
in the dead band for Mode01 (Run 2) increase about 6 hours. For Mode02 to Mode04, there is an
increase of about 1 hours for each oscillating hour categories (the total, the occupancy, and the dead
band ones), though they are considered to be a relatively minor change from the Normal baselines
especially when comparing further with those for the succeeding Mode05 and Mode08. For Mode05
to Mode08 (Runs 6 to 9), the oscillating hours increase significantly, by more than one order of
magnitude to about 161–169 hours per year. The numbers are also reflected in similar fashions for
the the oscillating hours during occupancy and for the oscillating hours during dead band. For the
CarrollMRT cases, similar trends can be observed when applying Mode01 to Mode08. The most
significant change starts from Mode05, which for both ScriptF and CarrollMRT raise the oscillating
hours to about 173–177. This is a substantial change that does indicate a significant shift in the
way the simulation program is behaving. On the other hand, the number of warnings for all the 19
cases are not too much different from each other ranging from 64 to 73, except for Run 9 which has
2,379 warnings. No severe errors are reported for any of these simulations, so no column is shown
for them.
The decision on which mode to use is up to the individual modelers. These simulations runs
can be clearly classified into three tiers based on the simulation speed (computation time) and
the numerical stability (oscillation hours): the first tier is the normal run, which incurs the least
oscillations (the best), but also takes the longest computation time; the second tier includes Mode02
to Mode04, where the simulation time can be cut to roughly one-third of that for the Normal
baseline, but with a minor penalty for increased oscillation hours; and the third tier includes Mode05
to Mode08, which can achieve an superior simulation time advantage, reaching around one-fifth to
one-seventh of that for the Normal baseline, but also with significant oscillation hours penalties
of about one order of magnitude higher. For simulations conducted in these test modes, Runs 5
(Mode04) is recommended as a balanced option for speed and numerical stability (oscillations).
It does not use direct coil solution, uses ScriptF, and Mode04. This simulation time also shows
an advantages over the other lower modes cases–it saves time compared to Mode01–Mode03—
and still has tamed the oscillating hours. Further, it does not add too much additional overrides
compared to the higher modes (Mode05–Mode08), which should be avoided if not adding value. For
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 73

extreme speed benefit, higher modes such as Mode05 to Mode08 definitely show an advantage in
the computation time, as they cost only about only one-seventh to one-fifth of the normal base, and
only about half of those for the lower modes (such as Mode02–Mode04). However, substantially
higher oscillating hours will be incurred as a downside with these higher modes.
Additional guidance on how to make EnergyPlus faster appears in the “Tips And Tricks for Using
EnergyPlus” document that is distributed with EnergyPlus within the section titled “Platforms and
Run-Time.”

1.5.17.0.2 Field: Use Coil Direct Solutions

If Yes, an analytical or empirical solution will be used instead of iteration based method in cal-
culations that determine how to control the coil model. The tradeoff is between an iterative solution
algorithm, see HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm, or a direct solution algorithm as described be-
low. These calculations are at the level of how the coil component model is to be controlled by the
parent system object as it tries to find a part load ratio that just meets a coil load or coil leaving
temperature condition. Once the control calculations have been completed to determine the part
load ratio (or speed ratio for variable speed) the full coil model is still used for the final calculation.
Although this input field may eventually affect all coils, the current implementation is available
for only the limited number of systems and coil configurations listed in the following table. Since
a linear relationship between system output and part load ratio, or speed ratio, is expected, an
analytical direct solution is applied to all coils in the listed in the table when Yes is selected. More
coils will be allowed when time allows. Note that this simulation parameter is global and when
used every such coil model included in the entire building model will be changed to use the direct
method.
The Part Load Ratio (PLR) for a single speed coil or a multiple speed coil at speed 1 is calculated
using the equation below:
SystemLoad − OutputOff
PLR = (1.2)
OutputFull − OutputOff
where
PLR = Part load ratio for a single speed coil or for a multiple speed coil at speed 1;
SystemLoad = Load requested to meet thermostat setpoint;
OutputOff = System output at PLR = 0 as coil off;
OutputFull = System output at PLR = 1 as full output.
The Speed Ratio for a multiple speed coil at speed > 1 is calculated using the equation below:
SystemLoad − OutputFulli−1
SpeedRatio = (1.3)
OutputFulli − OutputFulli−1
where
SpeedRatio = Ratio to represent how long the higher speed runs as a fraction of the system
timestep, and the lower speed runs in the rest of the system timestep;
SystemLoad = Load requested to meet thermostat setpoint;
OutputFulli = System full output at the higher speed;
OutputFulli−1 = System full output at the lower speed.
Note: When a DX cooling coil with a constant volume fan is used, latent degradation is disabled.
When coils of Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed, Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed, and Coil:Heating:DX:Variable
are applied, the desired outlet temperature is used to determine part load ratio or speed ratio.
74 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The Part Load Ratio (PLR) for a single speed coil or a multiple speed coil at speed 1 is calculated
using the equation below:
DesOutTemp − InletTemp
PLR = (1.4)
OutTempFull − InletTemp
where
PLR = Part load ratio for a single speed coil or for a multiple speed coil at speed 1;
DesOutTemp = Desired outlet temperature to meet setpoint;
InletTemp = Inlet temperature;
OutTemptFull = Outlet temperature at PLR = 1 as full output.
The Speed Ratio for a multiple speed coil at speed > 1 is calculated using the equation below:
DesOutTemp − OutTempFulli−1
SpeedRatio = (1.5)
OutTempFulli − OutTempFulli−1
where
SpeedRatio = Ratio to represent how long the higher speed runs as a fraction of the system
timestep, and the lower speed runs in the rest of the system timestep;
DesOutTemp = Desired outlet temperature to meet setpoint;
OutTempFulli = Outlet temperature of full output at the higher speed;
OutTempFulli−1 = Outlet temperature of full output at the lower speed.

Table 1.6: A list of air systems and associated coils al-

lowed for direct solutions

System Allowed Coil

AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed,
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed,
Coil:Heating:Electric,
Coil:Heating:Fuel,
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed,
Coil:Cooling:DX
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed,
Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage,
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage,
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed,
Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
CoilSystem:Heating:DX Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed,
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed

Note: The choice of Load in the Control Type of the AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem object is
required for all coils listed in the above table. In addition, when Coil:Cooling:DX is specified under
AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem, the following coil configurations are supported for Direct Solution:
Single speed mode at Nominal Speed Number = 1 in the Coil:Cooling:DX:CurveFit:OperatingMode
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 75

Multi speed mode at Nominal Speed Number > 1 in the Coil:Cooling:DX:CurveFit:OperatingMode

Single speed SubcoolReheat mode. The SubcoolReheat mode requires all inputs of 3 fields in
the Coil:Cooling:DX:CurveFit:Performance: Base Operating Mode, Alternative Operating Mode 1,
and Alternative Operating Mode 2.

1.5.17.0.3 Field: Zone Radiant Exchange Algorithm

Allowed choices are: ScriptF (default) and CarrollMRT. ScriptF uses view factors among all
surfaces in a zone and calculates radiant heat transfer from each surface in the zone to each other
surface in the zone based on their respective temperatures and emissivities. The CarrollMRT
algorithm calculates radiant heat transfer between surfaces which exchange heat through a central,
mean radiant temperature (MRT) node.
Although, defined view factors cannot be used with CarrollMRT, the algorithm approximates
“view factors” based on relative areas of the surfaces in a similar way to how EnergyPlus determines
its default view factors. One exception is that with CarrollMRT, every surface can “view” every
other surface in the zone regardless of orientation. For enclosed prism shapes, this approximation
is very accurate.

1.5.17.0.4 Field: Override Mode

The Override Mode field provides a single field that will override other inputs located in the
IDF/epJSON file as well as convergence related values that appear in the remaining fields of the
PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs object. The Normal option (default) provides no overrides while
the Mode options provide overrides based on the following tables. The Advanced option, allows
the MaxZoneTempDiff and MaxAllowedDelTemp fields of the PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs to be
used.

Table 1.7: Override Modes

Mode Description
Normal No overrides
Mode01 Zone time step (TimeStep object) will be set to one timestep per hour
Mode02 Mode01 plus ZoneAirHeatBalanceAlgorithm will be set to Euler
Mode03 Mode02 plus Minimum Number of Warmup Days will be set to 1
Mode04 Mode03 plus Begin Environment Reset Mode will be set to Suppres-
sAllBeginEnvironmentResets
Mode05 Mode04 plus minimum system timestep length will be 1 hour
Mode06 Mode05 plus use cubic spline interpolations in replacement of the psy-
chrometric function PsyTsatFnPb
Mode07 Mode06 plus MaxZoneTempDiff will be set to 1.00
Mode08 Mode07 plus MaxAllowedDelTemp will be set to 0.1
Advanced Allow direct input of convergence field values

The increasing mode number roughly corresponds with increased speed. Mode01 to Mode05 are
overriding inputs in other parts of the IDF/epJSON file and is equivalent to changing those input
76 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

directly. Mode06 offers an alternative method to calculate saturated temperature given pressure
in replacement of the psychrometric function PsyTsatFnPb. Mode07 and Mode08 are changing
convergence parameters previously not available to be modified by the user.

1.5.17.0.5 Field: MaxZoneTempDiff

This field is only active and used when Override Mode is set to Advanced. The value provided
here is used for the MaxZoneTempDiff variable within EnergyPlus. This variable sets the maximum
zone temperature change before the HVAC timestep is shortened. Larger values result in fewer
iterations. To understand this input completely, please review the use of the MaxZoneTempDiff
variable in the ManageHVAC() routine located in the HVACManager.cc source file of EnergyPlus.
The value normally used in EnergyPlus is 0.3 (◦ C), which is also the default value. Testing has
been done with a value of 1.0 (◦ C), which increased the overall speed of EnergyPlus for most of a
set of selected files that were tested. Values larger than 1.0 have not been tested.

1.5.17.0.6 Field: MaxAllowedDelTemp

This field is only active and used when Override Mode is set to Advanced. The value pro-
vided here is used for the MaxAllowedDelTemp variable within EnergyPlus. This variable sets
the maximum surface temperature change before the HVAC timestep is shortened. Similar to the
MaxZoneTempDiff parameter, larger MaxAllowedDelTemp values result in fewer iterations. To un-
derstand this input completely, please review the use of the MaxAllowedDetTemp variable in the
CalcHeatBalanceInsideSurf2() routine located in the HeatBalanceSurfaceManager.cc source file of
EnergyPlus. The value normally used in EnergyPlus is 0.002 (◦ C), which is also the default value.
Testing has been done with a value of 0.1 (◦ C), which increased the overall speed of EnergyPlus for
most of a set of selected files that were tested. Values larger than 0.1 have not been tested.

1.5.17.0.7 Field: Use Representative Surfaces for Calculations

If Yes, EnergyPlus will automatically group heat-transfer surfaces with similar characteristics
and perform relevant calculations only once for each group.
Surface are grouped based on the following criteria for similarity:

• construction

• orientation

• surface height

• zone

• enclosure

• solar/wind exposure

• other side boundary condition

• conduction and convection heat transfer algorithms

• movable insulation

• frame and divider (windows only)

1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 77

• storm window construction (windows only)

• other minor attributes

Surfaces with the following objects defined are currently never grouped because there is a high
likelihood that they will experience dissimilar conditions throughout a simulation:

• ConstructionProperty:InternalHeatSource

• ZoneProperty:UserViewFactors:BySurfaceName

• WindowShadingControl

• WindowProperty:AirflowControl

• WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic

• DaylightingDevice:Tubular

• WindowsCalculationEngine

• SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside

Surface heat balance and interior radiation exchange calculations are performed across all sur-
faces within a group. Surface heat balance calculations are skipped for all but one surface within
a group, and subsequently updated using the results from the representative surface. For interior
radiation exchange, surfaces within a group are collected into a single area for participating in inte-
rior longwave radiation exchange. This will reduce the scale and complexity of the algorithm with
minimal impact on accuracy. Solar shading and interior solar distribution are still calculated for
each individual surface. The absorbed solar radiation used for the surface heat balance equations
within a group is the area weighted average of all surfaces within the group.
An IDF example:
PerformancePrecisionTradeoffs ,
Yes , !- Use Coil Direct Solutions
CarrollMRT; !- Zone Radiant Exchange Algorithm
Mode06 , !- Override Mode
0.3, !- MaxZoneTempDiff
0.002 , !- MaxAllowedDelTemp
Yes; !- Use Representative Surfaces for Calculations

1.5.18 HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm
The HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm object provides a way to select what type of solution
algorithm will be used to find a part load ratio or mass flow rate at given equipment/system load
in HVAC system simulations. This object is an optional object. If the default algorithm is used,
this object is not required in an input file.
78 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.18.1 Inputs
1.5.18.1.1 Field: Algorithm
Five choices are allowed to select which solution algorithm will be used: RegulaFalsi, Bisection,
BisectionThenRegulaFalsi, RegulaFalsiThenBisection, and Alternation. The RegulaFalsi selection
is the default selection. Bisection selection will allow the program to use the bisection method to
get a solution. The BisectionThenRegulaFalsi selection requires the program to apply the bisection
method first. After the number of iteration is above the value defined in the next field, the Regu-
laFalsi algorithm will be applied. The RegulaFalsiThenBisection selection requires the program to
apply the RegulaFalsi method first. After the number of iteration is above the value defined in the
next field, the bisection algorithm will be applied. The Alternation selection forces number of iter-
ation (defined in the next field) using RegulaFalsi first. Then Bisection and RegulaFalsi algorithm
will be alternated after the number of iteration is above the value defined in the next field.

1.5.18.1.2 Field: Number of Iterations Before Algorithm Switch

This field is used when RegulaFalsiThenBisection or BisectionThenRegulaFalsi or Alternation
is entered. When the iteration number is greater than the value, algorithm switches either from
RegulaFalsi to Bisection or from Bisection to RegulaFalsi with choices of RegulaFalsiThenBisection
or BisectionThenRegulaFalsi.
An IDF example:
HVACSystemRootFindingAlgorithm ,
RegulaFalsiThenBisection , !- Algorithm
20; !- Number of Iteration Before Algorithm Switch

1.5.19 Meter:Custom
A custom meter allows the user to group variables or meters onto a virtual meter that can be used
just like a normal meter created by EnergyPlus. For consistency, the items being grouped must all
be similar. A Meter:Custom cannot reference another Meter:Custom.

1.5.19.1 Inputs
1.5.19.1.1 Field: Name
This is a user defined name for the custom meter. Names for custom meters cannot duplicate
internal meter names.

1.5.19.1.2 Field: Resource Type

A resource type should be specified for the meter. All assignments to this meter will be checked
to assure that the same resource type is used. Additionally, this may be used in other objects (such
as the Demand Limiting). Valid choices for this field are:

• Electricity

• NaturalGas

• Propane

• FuelOilNo1
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 79

• FuelOilNo2

• Diesel

• Gasoline

• Coal

• OtherFuel1

• OtherFuel2

• Steam

• DistrictHeating

• DistrictCooling

• Water

• Generic

Resource types are generally self-explanatory. Generic is included for convenience when a custom
meter is defined that doesn’t quite fit the “resource” categories. See the examples below.

1.5.19.1.3 Field: group(s) Key Name-Output Variable/Meter Name

The rest of the object is filled with parameters of the key name/output variable or meter names.
When a meter name is used, the key name field is left blank.

1.5.19.1.4 Field: Key Name #

A key name field is used when the following field specifies an output variable. If the field is left
blank, then all the output variables in the following field are assigned to the meter.

1.5.19.1.5 Field: Output Variable or Meter Name #

This field must be a valid output variable name or a valid meter name. If a Meter:Custom
references another Meter:Custom it will generate a warning and not produce any output. For
output variables, only summed variables are valid. For example from the rdd output, any Sum type
variable is valid:
Zone ,Sum ,Exterior Equipment Electricity Energy [J]

1.5.20 Meter:CustomDecrement
The decrement custom meter is very similar to the custom meter specification but additionally
allows a predefined meter to be used as the “source” meter and the remaining items subtract from
that predefined meter.
80 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.5.20.1 Inputs
1.5.20.1.1 Field: Name
This is a user defined name for the custom meter. Names for custom meters cannot duplicate
internal meter names.

1.5.20.1.2 Field: Resource Type

A resource type should be specified for the meter. All assignments to this meter will be checked
to assure that the same resource type is used. Additionally, this may be used in other objects (such
as the Demand Limiting). Valid choices for this field are:

• Electricity

• NaturalGas

• Propane

• FuelOilNo1

• FuelOilNo2

• Diesel

• Gasoline

• Coal

• OtherFuel1

• OtherFuel2

• Steam

• DistrictHeating

• DistrictCooling

• Water

• Generic

1.5.20.1.3 Field: Source Meter Name

This name specifies the meter that will be used as the main source for the decrement custom
meter. The remainder of the fields are subtracted from the value of this meter to create the meter
value named above. The Source Meter is not changed in any way by including this custom meter.

1.5.20.1.4 Field: group(s) Key Name-Output Variable/Meter Name

The rest of the object is filled with parameters of the key name/output variable or meter names.
When a meter name is used, the key name field is left blank.
1.5. GROUP – SIMULATION PARAMETERS 81

1.5.20.1.5 Field: Key Name #

A key name field is used when the following field specifies an output variable. If the field is left
blank, then all the output variables in the following field are assigned to the meter.

1.5.20.1.6 Field: Output Variable or Meter Name #

This field must be a valid output variable name or a valid meter name. Additionally, it must
be contained on the Source Meter. Note that, if an error occurs, only the Variable in error will
show – confusing things if what was entered was a meter name. For output variables, only summed
variables are valid. For example from the rdd output, any Sum type variable is valid:
Zone ,Sum ,Exterior Equipment Electricity Energy [J]

1.5.21 Custom Meter Examples

Details of the Meter:Custom/Meter:CustomDecrement are shown on the Meter Details file.
In the following examples, the custom meters are set up to illustrate the capabilities of custom
meters. Custom meter “MyGeneralLights” duplicates the InteriorLights:Electricity meter. Cus-
tom meter “MyBuildingElectric” duplicates the Electricity:Building meter (by specifying that
meter). Custom Meter (Decrement) “MyBuildingOther” uses the Electricity:Building meter as
the source meter and subtracts out the values for MyGeneralLights (aka InteriorLights:Electricity).
The resultant value for the MyBuildingOther meter should be equal to the value for the meters
Electricity:Building – InteriorLights:Electricity.
Meter:Custom ,
MyGeneralLights , !- Name
Electricity , !- Resource Type
SPACE1 -1, !- Key Name 1
Lights Electricity Energy , !- Output Variable or Meter Name 1
SPACE2 -1, !- Key Name 2
Lights Electricity Energy , !- Output Variable or Meter Name 2
SPACE3 -1, !- Key Name 3
Lights Electricity Energy , !- Output Variable or Meter Name 3
SPACE4 -1, !- Key Name 4
Lights Electricity Energy , !- Output Variable or Meter Name 4
SPACE5 -1, !- Key Name 5
Lights Electricity Energy; !- Output Variable or Meter Name 5

Meter:Custom ,
MyBuildingElectric , !- Name
Electricity , !- Resource Type
, !- Key Name #1
Electricity:Building; !- Output Variable or Meter Name #1

Meter:CustomDecrement ,
MyBuildingOther , !- Name
Electricity , !- Resource Type
Electricity:Building , !- Source Meter Name
, !- Key Name #1
MyGeneralLights; !- Output Variable or Meter Name #1

For an example of “generic” Resource type, one might put the Building Infiltration Heat Loss
& Heat Gain on a set of custom meters:
Meter:Custom ,
Building Infiltration Heat Loss , !- Name
Generic , !- Resource Type
*, !- Key Name 1
Zone Infiltration Total Heat Loss Energy; !- Output Variable Name 1
82 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Meter:Custom ,
Building Infiltration Heat Gain , !- Name
Generic , !- Resource Type
*, !- Key Name 1
Zone Infiltration Total Heat Gain Energy; !- Output Variable Name 1

One can then report these values the same way one reports other standard meters.

1.5.22 Simulation Parameter Outputs

These appear in the eplusout.eio file. For details of the reporting, please see the Output Details
and Examples document.

1.6 Group – Compliance Objects

Not necessarily related directly to simulation, the Compliance Object group provides a repository
for a group of objects that can be used directly or indirectly in reporting compliance (such as
ASHRAE 90.1) to building standards.

1.6.1 Compliance:Building
The Compliance:Building object describes parameters related to compliance to building standards,
building codes, and beyond energy code programs.

1.6.1.1 Inputs
1.6.1.1.1 Field: Building Rotation for Appendix G
Building Rotation for Appendix G allows for the building model to be rotated for use with
compliance such as ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G. Appendix G requires the building to be rotated 0,
90, 180 and 270 degrees and the values averaged to establish baseline energy use. This input works
with relative or world coordinate systems.
An example from an IDF:
Compliance:Building ,
90; !- Building Rotation for Appendix G

1.7 Group – Location – Climate – Weather File Access

This group of objects describes the ambient conditions for the simulation.

1.7.1 Site:Location
The location class describes the parameters for the building’s location. Only one location is allowed.
Weather data file location, if it exists, will override any location data in the IDF. Thus, for an annual
simulation, a Location does not need to be entered.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 83

1.7.1.1 Inputs
1.7.1.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field in output reports.

1.7.1.1.2 Field: Latitude

This field represents the latitude (in degrees) of the facility. By convention, North Latitude
is represented as positive; South Latitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal
fractions of 60. (15’ is 15/60 or .25)

1.7.1.1.3 Field: Longitude

This field represents the longitude (in degrees) of the facility. By convention, East Longitude
is represented as positive; West Longitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal
fractions of 60. (15’ is 15/60 or .25)

1.7.1.1.4 Field: Time Zone

This field represents the time zone of the facility (relative to Greenwich Mean Time or the 0th
meridian). Time zones west of GMT (e.g. North America) are represented as negative; east of
GMT as positive. Non-whole hours can be represented in decimal (e.g. 6:30 is 6.5).

1.7.1.1.5 Field: Elevation

This field represents the elevation of the facility in meters (relative to sea level).
Units with their abbreviations are shown in Appendix A. And, as shown in an IDF:
Site:Location , DENVER COLORADO , ! Name
39.75000 , ! Latitude {N+ S-}
-104.8700 , ! Longitude {W- E+}
-7.000000 , ! TimeZoneNumber {GMT+/-}
1610.26; ! Elevation {m}

Most examples in this document include the comment lines that illustrate each data field’s value.
However, this is not necessary (though it makes the IDF more readable). The previous example
could also be:
Site:Location , DENVER COLORADO ,39.75 , -104.87 , -7 ,1610.26;

1.7.2 Site:VariableLocation
This variable location class describes the parameters for a moving and/or rotating building’s loca-
tion. The applications for this include:

• a vehicle driving along the road,

• a rotating building, such as for experimental testing at different orientations, or

• if combind with a “SurfaceProperty:Underwater” boundary condition, it could apply to ships

and vessels.

The latitude, longitude, and orientation are all defined according to the same conventions as in
the regular “Site:Location” object.
84 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.2.1 Inputs
1.7.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field in output reports.

1.7.2.1.2 Field: Building Location Latitude Schedule

This field represents the latitude (in degrees) of the facility. By convention, North Latitude
is represented as positive; South Latitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal
fractions of 60. (15’ is 15/60 or .25)

1.7.2.1.3 Field: Building Location Longitude Schedule

This field represents the longitude (in degrees) of the facility. By convention, East Longitude
is represented as positive; West Longitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal
fractions of 60. (15’ is 15/60 or .25)

1.7.2.1.4 Field: Building Location Orientation Schedule

This field represents the time zone of the facility (relative to Greenwich Mean Time or the 0th
meridian). Time zones west of GMT (e.g. North America) are represented as negative; east of
GMT as positive. Non-whole hours can be represented in decimal (e.g. 6:30 is 6.5).
As shown in an IDF:
Site:VariableLocation ,
MovingAndRotatingBuilding , !- Name
LatitudeSchedule , !- Building Location Latitude Schedule
LongitudeSchedule , !- Building Location Longitude Schedule
OrientationSchedule; !- Building Location Orientation Schedule

Schedule:File ,
LatitudeSchedule , !- Name
, !- Schedule Type Limits Name
TripLog.csv , !- File Name
2, !- Column Number
1; !- Rows to Skip at Top

Schedule:File ,
LongitudeSchedule , !- Name
, !- Schedule Type Limits Name
TripLog.csv , !- File Name
3, !- Column Number
1; !- Rows to Skip at Top

Schedule:File ,
OrientationSchedule , !- Name
, !- Schedule Type Limits Name
TripLog.csv , !- File Name
4, !- Column Number
1; !- Rows to Skip at Top

1.7.3 SizingPeriod:DesignDay
The design day input describes the parameters to effect a “design day” simulation, often used for
load calculations or sizing equipment. Using the values in these fields, EnergyPlus “creates” a
complete days’ worth of weather data (air temperatures, solar radiation, etc.) Normal operation
uses the default range multipliers as shown in Figure 1.6 though users may choose to input their
own multiplier schedule. Likewise, normal operation specifies one “humidity indicating condition”
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 85

which is used to calculate the humidity ratio at maximum temperature – this is used as the constant
humidity ratio for the entire day. Again, this can be overridden by specifying a relative humidity
schedule or requesting generation of an hourly wet-bulb temperature profile. Multiple design days
may be specified.
We refer you to the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals for philosophy of what parameters
are important for use as “design conditions” in sizing equipment.

In the install, the “design day files” are included for the weather file locations that are included
(weatherdata folder). All the design day definitions from the ASHRAE design conditions (latest pub-
lication date) are included, grouped by WMO region, on the main web site with the weather data.
https://www.energyplus.net/weather These files are in “macro” form but it is easy to cut and paste
the appropriate definition segments. These files include the location information as well as some loca-
tions have RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime objects.

1.7.3.1 Inputs
1.7.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field, like the location name, is used simply for reporting and identification. This name
must be unique among the SizingPeriod names entered.

1.7.3.1.2 Field: Month

This numeric field specifies the month. That, in conjunction with the day of the month and
location information, determines the current solar position and solar radiation values for each hour
of the day.

1.7.3.1.3 Field: Day of Month

This numeric field specifies the day of the month. That, in conjunction with the month and
location information, determines the current solar position and solar radiation values for each hour
of the day.

1.7.3.1.4 Field: Day Type

This alpha field specifies the day type for the design day. This value indicates which day profile
to use in schedules. For further information, see the Schedule discussion later in this document.
(ref: Schedule) Note that two of the possible day types are SummerDesignDay (for cooling) and
WinterDesignDay (for heating) – allowing the user to customize schedules for the design conditions.
That is, for design days tagged with a SummerDesignDay type, you can set schedules to be worst
or typical schedules for a cooling season.

1.7.3.1.5 Field: Maximum Dry-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field should contain the day’s maximum dry-bulb temperature in degrees Celsius.
(Reference Appendix A of this document for EnergyPlus standard units and abbreviations). The
MacroDataSets design day files show extreme temperature for locations as indicated in the ASHRAE
HOF design condition tables.
86 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.3.1.6 Field: Daily Dry-bulb Temperature Range

A design day can have a “high” temperature and a “low” temperature (or can be a constant
temperature for each hour of the day). If there is a difference between high and low temperatures,
this field should contain the difference from the high to the low. EnergyPlus, by default, distributes
this range over the 24 hours in the day as shown in the figure below:

Figure 1.6: Default Daily range Multiplier for Design Days

The multipliers are taken from the ASHRAE 2009 HOF. More explicitly, EnergyPlus creates
an air temperature for each timestep by using the entered maximum dry-bulb temperature in
conjunction with the entered daily range and the above multiplier values. The actual equation used
is shown below:

Tcurrent = TM ax − Trange · TM ultiplier (1.6)

where
Tcurrent = Air temperature of current Hour of Day
TM ax = User supplied Max Dry-bulb Temperature
Trange = User supplied Daily Temperature Range
TM ultiplier = Range multiplier as shown on the above graph
The range multiplier values represent typical conditions of diurnal temperatures (i.e. the low
temperature for the day occurring about 5:00 AM and the maximum temperature for the day
occurring about 3:00 PM. Note that EnergyPlus does not shift the profile based on the time of solar
noon as is optionally allowed in ASHRAE procedures.
ASHRAE research indicates that dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures typically follow the same
profile, so EnergyPlus can use the default profile to generate humidity conditions (see Humidity
Indicating Type = WetBulbProfileDefaultMultipliers below).

1.7.3.1.7 Field: Dry-Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Type

If you are happy with lows at 5am and highs at 3pm, you can ignore this field. If you want to
specify your own temperature range multipliers (see earlier discussion at the Temperature Range
field description), you can specify a type here and create a day schedule which you reference in the
next field.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 87

If you specify MultiplierSchedule in this field, then you need to create a day schedule that
specifies a multiplier applied to the temperature range field (above) to create the proper dry-bulb
temperature range profile for your design day.
If you specify DifferenceSchedule in this field, then you need to create a day schedule that
specifies a number to be subtracted from dry-bulb maximum temperature for each timestep in the
day. Note that numbers in the delta schedules cannot be negative as that would result in a higher
maximum than the maximum previously specified.
If you specify TemperatureProfileSchedule in this field, then you need to create a day
schedule that specifies the actual dry-bulb temperatures throughout the day. You will not need to
include a Maximum Dry-Bulb Temperature in that field.
If you leave this field blank or enter DefaultMultipliers, then the default multipliers will be
used as shown in the “temperature range” field above.

1.7.3.1.8 Field: Dry-Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Day Schedule Name

This field is the name of a day schedule (ref. Schedule:Day:Hourly, Schedule:Day:Interval,
Schedule:Day:List objects) with the values as specified in the Dry-Bulb Temperature Range Modifier
Type field above.

1.7.3.1.9 Field: Humidity Condition Type

The values/schedules indicated here and in subsequent fields create the humidity values in the 24
hour design day conditions profile. Valid choices here are: WetBulb, Dewpoint, WetBulbPro-
fileDefaultMultipliers, WetBulbProfileDifferenceSchedule, WetBulbProfileMultiplier-
Schedule, HumidityRatio, Enthalpy, and Schedule.
The Humidity Condition Type fields have interacting uses and units, summarized as follows:

Table 1.8: Humidity Indicating Field Interactions - De-

sign Day

Humidity Condition Type Primary Humidity Indi- Humidity Indicating Day

cating Field Schedule
WetBulb Wetbulb or DewPoint at N/A (unused)
Maximum Dry-Bulb
DewPoint Wetbulb or DewPoint at N/A (unused)
Maximum Dry-Bulb
HumidityRatio Humidity Ratio at Max- N/A (unused)
imum Dry-Bulb
Enthalpy Enthalpy at Maximum N/A (unused)
Dry-Bulb
WetBulbProfile- Wetbulb or DewPoint at N/A (unused)
DefaultMultipliers Maximum Dry-Bulb
WetBulbProfile- Wetbulb or DewPoint at Fractions of wet-bulb daily
MultiplierSchedule Maximum Dry-Bulb range (0 – 1)
88 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.8: Humidity Indicating Field Interactions - De-

sign Day

Humidity Condition Type Primary Humidity Indi- Humidity Indicating Day

cating Field Schedule
WetBulbProfile- Wetbulb or DewPoint at Difference between maxi-
DifferenceSchedule Maximum Dry-Bulb mum and hour/timestep
wet-bulb temperature, C
RelativeHumiditySchedule N/A Relative humidity (%, 0 –
100)

Humidity conditions over the day are derived as follows:

WetBulb, DewPoint, HumidityRatio, or Enthalpy:
These four methods assume constant absolute humidity over the day. Calculate W = humidity
ratio at Maximum Dry-Bulb Temperature and Humidity Indicating Conditions. Derive hourly/-
timestep humidity conditions from W and hour/timestep dry-bulb temperature.
WetBulbProfileDefaultMultipliers
Generate the wet-bulb temperature profile using Default Daily Range Multiplier for Design
Days (shown in Figure 1.6 above) and Daily Wet-Bulb Temperature Range (below). This method
is analogous to DefaultMultiplier generation of the dry-bulb temperature profile and is the procedure
recommended in Chapter 14 of ASHRAE 2009 HOF.
WetBulbProfileMultiplierSchedule
Generate the wet-bulb profile using multipliers from the Humidity Indicating Day Schedule and
Daily Wet-Bulb Temperature Range (below). Analogous to dry-bulb MultiplierSchedule.
WetBulbProfileDifferenceSchedule
Generate the wet-bulb profile by subtracting Humidity Indicating Day Schedule values from the
daily maximum wet-bulb temperature (specified in Humidity Indicating Conditions at Maximum
Dry-Bulb). Analogous to dry-bulb DifferenceSchedule.
RelativeHumiditySchedule
Hourly relative humidity is specified in Humidity Indicating Day Schedule.
In all cases, the humidity ratio is limited to saturation at the hour/timestep dry-bulb (that is,
the dry-bulb temperature is used as specified, but the humidity ratio is modified as needed to be
physically possible). Once a valid air state is determined, a complete set of consistent hour/timestep
psychrometric values (dewpoint, wet-bulb, and enthalpy) is derived.

1.7.3.1.10 Field: Wetbulb or DewPoint at Maximum Dry-Bulb

If you choose Wetbulb or Dewpoint in the Humidity Condition Type field, then this numeric
field should contain that value. Note that this field is unnecessary when you put in a humidity
indicating day schedule (described later in this section).

1.7.3.1.11 Field: Humidity Condition Day Schedule Name

Allows specification a day schedule (ref. Schedule:Day:Hourly, Schedule:Day:Interval, Sched-
ule:Day:List objects) of values for relative humidity or wet-bulb profile per Humidity Indicating
Type field.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 89

1.7.3.1.12 Field: Humidity Ratio at Maximum Dry-Bulb

If HumidityRatio is chosen for the Humidity Condition Type field, then this numeric field
should contain the desired humidity ratio at maximum dry-bulb temperature (units kg Water / kg
Dry Air).

1.7.3.1.13 Field: Enthalpy at Maximum Dry-Bulb

If Enthalpy is chosen for the Humidity Condition Type field, then this numeric field should
contain the desired enthalpy at maximum dry-bulb temperature (units Joules /kg).

1.7.3.1.14 Field: Daily Wet-Bulb Temperature Range

The difference between the maximum and minimum wet-bulb temperatures on the design day
(Celsius). Used for generating daily profiles of humidity conditions when Humidity Condition Type
field (above) is WetBulbProfileDefaultMultipliers or WetBulbProfileMultiplierSchedule.
Values for wet-bulb temperature range are tabulated by month for 5564 locations worldwide on the
CD that accompanies the ASHRAE 2009 HOF.

1.7.3.1.15 Field: Barometric Pressure

This numeric field is the constant barometric pressure (Pascals) for the entire day.

1.7.3.1.16 Field: Wind Speed

This numeric field is the wind speed in meters/second (constant throughout the day) for the
day. The MacroDataSets design day files includes wind speed values (99.6% - heating, 1% cooling)
as indicated in ASHRAE HOF design condition tables. But, you should be aware that traditional
values for these are 6.7056 m/s (15 mph) for heating and 3.3528 m/s (7 mph) for cooling. A
reminder is shown in the comments for the wind speed values. The comments also note the extreme
wind speeds from the ASHRAE tables.

1.7.3.1.17 Field: Wind Direction

This numeric field is the source wind direction in degrees. By convention, winds from the North
would have a value of 0., from the East a value of 90.

1.7.3.1.18 Field: Rain Indicator

This field indicates whether or not the building surfaces are wet. If the value is Yes, then it
is assumed that the building surfaces are wet. Wet surfaces may change the conduction of heat
through the surface.

1.7.3.1.19 Field: Snow Indicator

This field indicates whether or not there is snow on the ground. If the value is Yes, then
it is assumed there is snow on the ground. Snow on the ground changes the ground reflectance
properties.

1.7.3.1.20 Field: Daylight Saving Time Indicator

This field specifies whether to consider this day to be a Daylight Saving Day. Yes in the field
indicates that daylight saving time is operational for this day. Yes essentially adds 1 hour to the
scheduling times used in items with schedules.
90 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.3.1.21 Field: Solar Model Indicator

This field allows the user to select ASHRAEClearSky, ASHRAETau, ASHRAETau2017,
ZhangHuang, or Schedule for solar modeling in the calculation of the solar radiation in the design
day. ASHRAEClearSky and ZhangHuang use the Clearness value as part of their calculations.
ASHRAETau invokes the revised model specified in Chapter 14 of the ASHRAE 2009 HOF and
uses Taub and Taud values (below) and ASHRAETau2017 invokes the revised model specified in
Chapter 14 of the ASHRAE 2017 HOF and uses Taub and Taud values (below). Technical details
of the models are described in the Engineering Reference. The Schedule choice allows you to enter
schedule values for the day’s profile (use the next two fields for the names).

1.7.3.1.22 Field: Beam Solar Day Schedule Name

This field allows the option for you to put in your own day profile of beam solar values (wh/m2).
These values will replace the calculated values during design day processing. Only day schedules
(ref. Schedule:Day:Hourly, Schedule:Day:Interval, Schedule:Day:List objects) are used here.

1.7.3.1.23 Field: Diffuse Solar Day Schedule Name

This field allows the option for you to put in your own day profile of diffuse solar values (wh/m2).
These values will replace the calculated values during design day processing. Only day schedules
(ref. Schedule:Day:Hourly, Schedule:Day:Interval, Schedule:Day:List objects) are used here.

1.7.3.1.24 Field: ASHRAE Clear Sky Optical Depth for Beam Irradiance (taub)
Optical depth for beam radiation, used only when Solar Model Indicator is ASHRAETau or
ASHRAETau2017. See next field.

1.7.3.1.25 Field: ASHRAE Clear Sky Optical Depth for Diffuse Irradiance (taud)
Optical depth for diffuse radiation, used only when Solar Model Indicator is ASHRAETau or
ASHRAETau2017. Taub and Taud values are tabulated by month for 5564 locations worldwide on
the CD that accompanies the ASHRAE HOF. ASHRAETau model Taub and Taud values are used
from the 2009 ASHRAE HOF and ASHRAETau2017 model Taub and Taud values are used from
either 2013 or 2017 ASHRAE HOF as needed.

1.7.3.1.26 Field: Sky Clearness

If the choice in the Solar Model Indicator field is ASHRAEClearSky or ZhangHuang, then this
numeric field should be entered. This value represents the “clearness” value for the day. This value,
along with the solar position as defined by the Location information and the date entered for the
design day, help define the solar radiation values for each hour of the day. Clearness may range
from 0.0 to 1.2, where 1.0 represents a clear sky at sea level. Values greater than 1.0 may be used
for high altitude locations. Traditionally, one uses 0.0 clearness for Winter Design Days. Note that
this “sky clearness” does not have the same meaning as output variable “Site Daylighting Model
Sky Clearness”.

1.7.3.1.27 Field: Maximum Number Warmup Days

Optional integer number of days for an upper limit on the number of warmup days when running
this sizing period. This overrides the global maximum set in the Building object for this particular
design day.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 91

1.7.3.1.28 Field: Begin Environment Reset Mode

Optional choice field to control if zone heat balance history terms should be reset when begin-
ning to run this sizing period. This can reduce the number of warmup days needed to reach zone
convergence. The options are FullResetAtBeginEnvironment or SuppressThermalResetAt-
BeginEnvironment. FullResetAtBeginEnvironment means that at the beginning of the de-
sign day warmup the building model’s surfaces are set to 23 degrees C, which is the usual starting
point for each environment. SuppressThermalResetAtBeginEnvironment means that at the
beginning of the design day warmup the building model’s surfaces are not reset and will just retain
whatever thermal history results they had at the end of the previous design day. The warmup days
still proceed as usual but because the initial condition is closer it needs fewer warmup days to reach
convergence. This is available to reduce simulation run time when using many design days that are
similiar to each other.
IDF Examples:
! Phoenix Sky Harbor Intl Ap_AZ_USA Annual Cooling (WB = >MDB)
! .4%, MDB = 35.8 °C WB = 24.5 °C
SizingPeriod:DesignDay ,
Phoenix Sky Harbor Intl Ap Ann Clg .4% Condns WB = >MDB , !- Name
7, !- Month
21, !- Day of Month
SummerDesignDay ,!- Day Type
35.8, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
12, !- Daily Dry -Bulb Temperature Range {C}
DefaultMultipliers , !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Type
, !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Name
Wetbulb , !- Humidity Condition Type
24.5, !- Wetbulb at Maximum Dry -Bulb {C}
, !- Humidity Indicating Day Schedule Name
, !- Humidity Ratio at Maximum Dry -Bulb {kgWater/kgDryAir}
, !- Enthalpy at Maximum Dry -Bulb {J/kg}
, !- Daily Wet -Bulb Temperature Range {deltaC}
97342. , !- Barometric Pressure {Pa}
4.1, ! Wind Speed {m/s}
260, !- Wind Direction {Degrees; N = 0, S = 180}
No , !- Rain {Yes/No}
No , !- Snow on ground {Yes/No}
No , !- Daylight Savings Time Indicator
ASHRAETau , !- Solar Model Indicator
, !- Beam Solar Day Schedule Name
, !- Diffuse Solar Day Schedule Name
0.588 , !- ASHRAE Clear Sky Optical Depth for Beam Irradiance (taub)
1.653; !- ASHRAE Clear Sky Optical Depth for Diffuse Irradiance (taud)

SizingPeriod:DesignDay ,
Denver Centennial Golden Ann Htg 99% Condns DB - sched solar , !- Name
1, !- Month
13, !- Day of Month
WinterDesignDay , !- Day Type
-16, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
0.0, !- Daily Dry -Bulb Temperature Range {deltaC}
, !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Type
, !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Name
Wetbulb , !- Humidity Condition Type
-16, !- Wetbulb or DewPoint at Maximum Dry -Bulb {C}
, !- Humidity Indicating Day Schedule Name
, !- Humidity Ratio at Maximum Dry -Bulb {kgWater/kgDryAir}
, !- Enthalpy at Maximum Dry -Bulb {J/kg}
, !- Daily Wet -Bulb Temperature Range {deltaC}
83411. , !- Barometric Pressure {Pa}
2.3, !- Wind Speed {m/s}
180, !- Wind Direction {deg}
No , !- Rain Indicator
No , !- Snow Indicator
No , !- Daylight Saving Time Indicator
92 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Schedule , !- Solar Model Indicator

Winter (1/13) Beam Solar ,!- Beam Solar Day Schedule Name
Winter (1/13) Diffuse Solar; !- Diffuse Solar Day Schedule Name

Schedule:Day:Hourly ,
Winter (1/13) Beam Solar ,
Any Number ,
0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,190 ,698 ,852 ,892 ,919 ,957 ,953 ,856 ,700 ,213 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0 ,0;

Schedule:Day:Hourly ,
Winter (1/13) Diffuse Solar ,
Any Number ,
0,0,0,0,0,0,0,35,118,116,92,65,40,14,0,0,5,0,0,0,0,0,0,0;

Look at the example files 1ZoneUncontrolled_DDChanges.idf and 1ZoneUncontrolled_DD2009

for several examples of specifying Design Day inputs.

1.7.3.2 Outputs
For the schedule fields in the object, several output variables can be used:

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Beam Solar Schedule Value [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Diffuse Solar Schedule Value [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Humidity Condition Schedule Value [%]

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Humidity Condition Schedule Value []

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value []

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value

[deltaC]

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value [C]

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Sky Temperature Schedule Value [deltaC]

• Zone,Average,Sizing Period Site Sky Temperature Schedule Value [C]

1.7.3.2.1 Sizing Period Site Beam Solar Schedule Value [W/m2]

1.7.3.2.2 Sizing Period Site Diffuse Solar Schedule Value [W/m2]

This schedule value is active when any Design Day objects have / use the solar schedule option.
For those objects that don’t have this option, the value will be displayed as -999.

1.7.3.2.3 Sizing Period Site Humidity Condition Schedule Value [%]

1.7.3.2.4 Sizing Period Site Humidity Condition Schedule Value []

This schedule value is active when any Design Day objects have / use the humidity schedule
option. For those objects that don’t have this option, the value will be displayed as -999.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 93

1.7.3.2.5 Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value []

1.7.3.2.6 Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value
[deltaC]

1.7.3.2.7 Sizing Period Site Drybulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Value [C]

This schedule value is active when any Design Day objects have / use the drybulb temperature
range modifier schedule option. For those objects that don’t have this option, the value will be
displayed as -999.

1.7.3.2.8 Sizing Period Site Sky Temperature Schedule Value [deltaC]

1.7.3.2.9 Sizing Period Site Sky Temperature Schedule Value [C]

This schedule value is active when any Design Day objects have / use the WeatherProper-
ties:SkyTemperature schedule option. For those objects that don’t have this option, the value will
be displayed as -999.

1.7.4 Longer Design Periods

Some features may benefit by using a longer design weather period for sizing or loads calculations.
Longer design periods may be created by using the SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays or Sizing-
Period:WeatherFileConditionType objects. These two objects allow for selections from an
attached weather file to be used in the sizing calculations.

1.7.5 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays
The SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays object describes using a selected period from the “attached”
weather file to be used in load calculations or sizing equipment. The period selected can be as small
as a single day or larger. Multiple periods may be input. While this object may be used for sizing
calculations, you should also consider using design days that represent more long term extremes or
conditions.

1.7.5.1 Inputs
1.7.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field allows for an assigned name for this run period so it can be tracked easily in sizing
and other outputs.

1.7.5.1.2 Field: Begin Month

This numeric field should contain the starting month number (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.)
for the annual run period desired.
94 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.5.1.3 Field: Begin Day of Month

This numeric field should contain the starting day of the starting month (must be valid for
month) for the annual run period desired.

1.7.5.1.4 Field: End Month

This numeric field should contain the ending month number (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.)
for the annual run period desired.

1.7.5.1.5 Field: End Day of Month

This numeric field should contain the ending day of the ending month (must be valid for month)
for the annual run period desired.

1.7.5.1.6 Field: Day of Week for Start Day

For flexibility, the day of week indicated on the weather file can be overridden by this field’s
value. Valid days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Satur-
day) or special days (SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, CustomDay1, CustomDay2) must be
entered in this field. To clarify, this value will be used as the Start Day (type) for this sizing
period. When weekdays are used, each subsequent day in the period will be incremented. When
SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, CustomDay1, CustomDay2 – are used, the day type will be
applied for the entire period.

1.7.5.1.7 Field: Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period

Weather files can contain indicators of Daylight Saving Period days. For flexibility, you may
want to ignore these designations on the weather file. This field should contain the word Yes if you
will accept daylight saving period days as contained on the weather file (note: not all weather files
may actually have this period) or No if you wish to ignore Daylight Saving Period days that may
be on the weather file.
Note that a blank or null field in this field will indicate Yes.

1.7.5.1.8 Field: Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators

Weather files can contain “rain” and “snow” indicators. (EPW field “Present Weather Codes” –
described in the AuxiliaryPrograms document). In turn, rain indicates wet surfaces which changes
the film convection coefficient for the surface. Other models may use rain as well (Ground Heat
Exchangers). Snow indicators can change the ground reflectance if there is snow on the ground.
Entering “Yes” in this field allows the weather file conditions to represent “Rain” and “Snow”;
entering “No” in the field “turns off” the rain/snow indicators for this period. You might use this
to be able to compare two “same location” weather files of different years, origins, etc.
IDF Example:
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays ,
Summer including Extreme Summer days , !- Name
7,18,7,25, !- Begin/end Day/Month
SummerDesignDay , !- Day type
No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators

SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays ,
Winter including Extreme Winter days , !- Name
1,25,2,1, !- Begin/end Day/Month
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 95

WinterDesignDay , !- Day type

No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators

1.7.6 SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType
When the EPW files are created, a heuristic procedure identifies extreme and typical periods in
the actual weather file. This object will allow one of those periods to be selected for sizing or load
calculations (typically). Multiple objects may be input. While this object may be used for sizing
calculations, you should also consider using design days that represent more long term extremes or
conditions.

1.7.6.1 Inputs
1.7.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field allows for an assigned name for this run period so it can be tracked easily in sizing
and other outputs.

1.7.6.1.2 Field: Period Selection

This field allows the generic period calculated from the weather file to be selected for this run
period. It is not completely generic as there may be extreme cold periods in some weather files but
extreme wet periods (tropical) in others. Not all weather files have all of the valid choices. The
choices for this field are:

• SummerExtreme

• SummerTypical

• WinterExtreme

• WinterTypical

• AutumnTypical

• SpringTypical

• WetSeason

• DrySeason

• NoDrySeason

• NoWetSeason

• TropicalHot

• TropicalCold
96 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.6.1.3 Field: Day of Week for Start Day

For flexibility, the day of week indicated on the weather file can be overridden by this field’s
value. Valid days of the week (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Satur-
day) or special days (SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, CustomDay1, CustomDay2) must be
entered in this field. To clarify, this value will be used as the Start Day (type) for this sizing
period. When weekdays are used, each subsequent day in the period will be incremented. When
SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, CustomDay1, CustomDay2 – are used, the day type will be
applied for the entire period.

1.7.6.1.4 Field: Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period

Weather files can contain indicators of Daylight Saving Period days. For flexibility, you may
want to ignore these designations on the weather file. This field should contain the word Yes if you
will accept daylight saving period days as contained on the weather file (note: not all weather files
may actually have this period) or No if you wish to ignore Daylight Saving Period days that may
be on the weather file.
Note that a blank or null field in this field will indicate Yes.

1.7.6.1.5 Field: Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators

Weather files can contain “rain” and “snow” indicators. (EPW field “Present Weather Codes” –
described in the AuxiliaryPrograms document). In turn, rain indicates wet surfaces which changes
the film convection coefficient for the surface. Other models may use rain as well (Ground Heat
Exchangers). Snow indicators can change the ground reflectance if there is snow on the ground.
Entering “Yes” in this field allows the weather file conditions to represent “Rain” and “Snow”;
entering “No” in the field “turns off” the rain/snow indicators for this period. You might use this
to be able to compare two “same location” weather files of different years, origins, etc.
IDF Example:
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType ,
Extreme Summer Weather Period for Design , !- Name
SummerExtreme , !- Period Selection
SummerDesignDay , !- Day Type
No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators

SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType ,
Extreme Winter Weather Period for Design , !- Name
WinterExtreme , !- Period Selection
WinterDesignDay , !- Day Type
No , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No; !- Use Weather File Rain and Snow Indicators

1.7.7 RunPeriod
The RunPeriod object describes the elements necessary to create a weather file simulation. Multi-
ple run periods may be input. EnergyPlus accepts weather files in the special EnergyPlus weather
format (described briefly below this document and in more detail in the Auxiliary Programs doc-
ument). These files can describe Daylight Saving Time periods as well as holidays within their
definitions. Note that the weather file also may contain design condition information, typical and
extreme period information, ground temperatures based on air temperature calculations. The Run-
Period object allows the user to override the use of both the Daylight Saving Period (i.e. use or
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 97

ignore) and holidays that are embedded within the weather file. The object also describes the ele-
ments necessary to use a specially crafted (likely multiple year) weather file in a simulation. These
kinds of weather files and simulations might be useful for matching utility periods or simulating
several years of differing weather data. Leap days are required when using actual weather (see
“Treat as Actual Weather” below), but will be processed and used during leap years when the days
are present in the weather file and enabled in the weather file header. Note that when the weather
is treated as non-actual, the leap day will be skipped if it is not present, resulting in incorrect day
types for the remainder of the year. Further, the weather data interpolation for the first hour can
also be specified to use Hour1 (natural) or Hour24 (considering warning up).

1.7.7.1 Inputs
1.7.7.1.1 Field: Name
This optional field allows the RunPeriod to be named for output reporting. When left blank,
the weather file location name is used. Note that the weather file location name will be appended
to this name in tabular/summary reports.

1.7.7.1.2 Field: Begin Month

This numeric field should contain the starting month number (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.)
for the annual run period desired.

1.7.7.1.3 Field: Begin Day of Month

This numeric field should contain the starting day of the starting month (must be valid for
month) for the annual run period desired.

1.7.7.1.4 Field: Begin Year

This optional numeric field may contain the beginning year for the range. If this field is specified
along with the Day of Week for Start Day, the inputs are validated to make sure that the date
is valid. If this field is not specified, then a year will be selected based upon other inputs (which,
in the case of the day of the week, may be defaulted).

1.7.7.1.5 Field: End Month

This numeric field should contain the ending month number (1 = January, 2 = February, etc.)
for the annual run period desired.

1.7.7.1.6 Field: End Day of Month

This numeric field should contain the ending day of the ending month (must be valid for month)
for the annual run period desired.

1.7.7.1.7 Field: End Year

This optional numeric field should contain the end year for the range. It is only allowed to be
specified when the Begin Year is given and must be after the Begin Year. If it is not specified,
it will be set to be the first occurrence of End Month/End Day of Month after the start date.
Note that this could be several years after the start date (e.g. if the end date is specified as a leap
day 2/29).
98 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.7.1.8 Field: Day of Week for Start Day

This field allows the start day of the week to be specified. Valid days of the week (Sunday,
Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday) may be entered in this field. To clarify,
this value will be used as the Start Day (type) for this run period and subsequent days will be
implemented. If the field is blank, then the starting day type defaults to Sunday.

1.7.7.1.9 Field: Use Weather File Holidays and Special Days

Weather files can contain holiday designations or other kinds of special days. These day types
cause a corresponding day’s schedule (see SCHEDULE definitions below) to be used during that
day. This field should contain the word Yes if holidays or other special days indicated directly
on the weather file should retain their “day type” or No if holidays or other special days on the
weather file should be ignored. Reference the RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays object below to enter
your own special days and holidays.
Note that a blank or null field in this field will indicate Yes.

1.7.7.1.10 Field: Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period

Weather files can contain indicators of Daylight Saving period days. For flexibility, you may
want to ignore these designations on the weather file. This field should contain the word Yes if you
will accept daylight saving period days as contained on the weather file (note: not all weather files
may actually have this period) or No if you wish to ignore Daylight Saving period days that may
be on the weather file.
Note that a blank or null field in this field will indicate Yes.

1.7.7.1.11 Field: Apply Weekend Holiday Rule

In some countries (notably the US), when holidays fall on weekends, they are often observed on
a weekday close to the holiday day. (Usually if the specific day falls on a Saturday, the observed
day is Friday; if on a Sunday, the observed day is Monday). EnergyPlus will represent this custom
using the value in this field. If the field is Yes, then specific date holidays that have a duration of
one day, will be “observed” on the Monday after the day. (Specific day holidays are such as January
1 – a day-month combination). If the field is blank or No, then the holiday will be shown on the
day-month as entered. As this option is listed at the RunPeriod, all applicable special days for the
run will use the rule – there is no override for individual special days.
Note that a blank or null field in this field will indicate No.

Note: EnergyPlus processed weather files available on the EnergyPlus web site: https://www.
energyplus.net/weather have neither special days specified nor daylight saving period. However, DDY
(Design Day) files produced from the ASHRAE Design Conditions that accompany the EPW files may
include a DaylightSavingPeriod object for certain locations.

1.7.7.1.12 Field: Use Weather File Rain Indicators

Weather files can contain “rain” indicators. (EPW field “Present Weather Codes” – described
in the AuxiliaryPrograms document). In turn, rain indicates wet surfaces which changes the film
convection coefficient for the surface. Other models may use rain as well (Ground Heat Exchangers).
Entering “Yes” in this field allows the weather file conditions to represent “Rain”; entering “No”
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 99

in the field “turns off” the rain indicator for this period. You might use this to be able to compare
two “same location” weather files of different years, origins, etc.

1.7.7.1.13 Field: Use Weather File Snow Indicators

Weather files can contain “snow” indicators. (EPW field “Snow Depth” > 0 indicates “Snow
on the ground”). In turn, snow changes the reflectivity of the ground and cascades changes of this
reflectivity. Entering “Yes” in this field allows the weather file conditions to represent “Snow”;
entering “No” in the field “turns off” the snow indicator for this period. You might use this to be
able to compare two “same location” weather files of different years, origins, etc.

1.7.7.1.14 Field: Treat Weather as Actual

This field determines how stringent date matching between this object and the weather file is.
Though all EnergyPlus (EPW) weather files contain a year field, this data is not typically used.
Specifying “Yes” in this field causes the program to look specifically for the begin date (i.e. Begin
Month, Begin Day of Month, Begin Year) and for the end date (i.e. End Month, End Day of Month,
End Year) and require that leap days be present for leap years.

1.7.7.1.15 Field: First Hour Interpolation Starting Values

This field allows the user to choose which hour of data should be used for the first day inter-
polation. In general, EnergyPlus uses a warm-up period to achieve a periodic initial condition for
simulation. After the warming up period, EnergyPlus sets the first day’s starting conditions the
same as the end of that day. Therefore, Hour 24 is usually used for this type of annual simula-
tions. However, there are other running scenarios where the user would like to examine the natural
transition in the first hour, since the first day’s beginning and end weather condition usually do
not match in a weather file—sometimes or even often, with large differences, e.g. in temperature,
humidity, or wind conditions. This input field allows a user to choose a more suitable option based
on the user’s specific simulation goals.
If the “Hour1” is selected for this field, the weather data interpolation during the first hour will
be based on the weather data on Hour 1 of the simulation period. If the “Hour24” is selected, the
interpolation during the first hour will be based on the Hour 1 and Hour 24 (now assumed this is
the intended conditions from a successful warm-up cycling). The default value is “Hour24”. Note
that this option only affects the first hour of the first day in the entire run period; the succeeding
days in a run period would not be affected.
And, as shown in an IDF:
RunPeriod , ! Winter Simulation
Winter Simulation , !- Name
12, !- Begin Month
1, !- Begin Day of Month
, !- Begin Year
3, !- End Month
31, !- End Day of Month
, !- End Year
UseWeatherFile , !- Day of Week for Start Day
Yes , !- Use Weather File Holidays and Special Days
Yes , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No , !- Apply Weekend Holiday Rule
Yes , !- Use Weather File Rain Indicators
Yes , !- Use Weather File Snow Indicators
No , !- Treat Weather as Actual
Hour24; !- First Hour Interpolation Starting Values
100 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

! Actual weather simulation example

RunPeriod ,
Multiple Years , !- Name
1, !- Begin Month
1, !- Begin Day of Month
2010, !- Begin Year
12, !- End Month
31, !- End Day of Month
, !- End Year
UseWeatherFile , !- Day of Week for Start Day
Yes , !- Use Weather File Holidays and Special Days
Yes , !- Use Weather File Daylight Saving Period
No , !- Apply Weekend Holiday Rule
Yes , !- Use Weather File Rain Indicators
Yes , !- Use Weather File Snow Indicators
Yes , !- Treat Weather as Actual
Hour1; !- First Hour Interpolation Starting Values

1.7.8 RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays
For weather file run periods, special day run periods can be described. These will always be in
effect for the selected days in the run period. Depending on the Use Special Days value in the
RunPeriod:* object(s), these can augment any special days included on the weather file.

Note: EnergyPlus processed weather files available on the EnergyPlus web site: https://www.
energyplus.net/weather have neither special days specified nor daylight saving period. However, DDY
(Design Day) files produced from the ASHRAE Design Conditions that accompany the EPW files may
include a DaylightSavingPeriod object for certain locations.

1.7.8.1 Inputs
1.7.8.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field is the title for the special day period. It must be unique among all the special
day period objects entered.

1.7.8.1.2 Field: Start Date

This field is the starting date for the special day period. Dates in this field can be entered in
several ways as shown in the accompanying table:

Table 1.9: Date Field Interpretation

Field Contents Interpretation

< number > / < number > Month / Day
< number > Month Day and Month
Month < number > Day and Month
< number > Weekday in Month Numbered weekday of month
Last Weekday In Month Last weekday of month
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 101

In the table, Month can be one of (January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August,
September, October, November, December). Abbreviations of the first three characters are also
valid.
In the table, Weekday can be one of (Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday,
Saturday). Abbreviations of the first three characters are also valid.

1.7.8.1.3 Field: Duration

This numeric field specifies how long (number of days) the special day period lasts.

1.7.8.1.4 Field: Special Day Type

This alpha field designates the “day type” for schedule use during the special period. It must
be one of (Holiday, SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, CustomDay1, CustomDay2).
An example in the IDF would be:
RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays , ’Presidents Day , 3rd Monday in February ,1, Holiday;
RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays , Thanksgiving , 4th Thursday in November , 1,Holiday;
RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays , Halloween , 10/31 , 1, Holiday;
RunPeriodControl:SpecialDays , Vacation , 5/1, 14, CustomDay1;

1.7.9 RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime
Similar to a special day period, a daylight saving period may be entered to be applied to weather
file run periods. These will always be in effect, regardless of the value entered on the RunPeriod
object. Note that this period will always override any daylight saving period specified in a weather
file.

Note: EnergyPlus processed weather files available on the EnergyPlus web site: https://www.
energyplus.net/weather have neither special days specified nor daylight saving period.
Note: For EnergyPlus Output:Variable and Output:Meter reporting, the time stamps
are always in standard time. When daylight saving time is active, scheduled loads and
controls will shift one hour relative to standard time.

1.7.9.1 Inputs
1.7.9.1.1 Field: Start Date
This is the starting date of the daylight saving period. Note that it can be entered in several
formats as shown in Table 1.9. Date Field Interpretation.

1.7.9.1.2 Field: End Date

This is the ending date of the daylight saving period. Note that it can be entered in several
formats as shown in Table 1.9. Date Field Interpretation.
And in the IDF:
! U.S. Standard for Daylight Saving
RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime ,2nd Sunday in March , 1st Sunday in November; !2007
! Brazil standard
RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime ,1st Sunday in October , Last Sunday in February;
! European Standard
RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime , Last Sunday in March , Last Sunday in October;
102 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

! Syria Standard
RunPeriodControl:DaylightSavingTime , 4/1, 10/1;

Of course, these could not all appear in the same IDF as only one DaylightSavingPeriod ob-
ject per input file is allowed. More information on Daylight Saving Periods can be seen on the
web at: http://www.webexhibits.org/daylightsaving/. The ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals
[ASHRAE 2005] also contains information about daylight saving periods and their climatic infor-
mation now includes start and end dates for many locations.

1.7.10 WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature
Sky Temperature, or radiative sky temperature, is internally calculated by EnergyPlus with an
empirical model using sky cloudiness factors and current clear sky emissivity. For flexibility, the
following object can be entered to override the entire internal sky temperature calculation from
schedule import.
In particular, during Weather File Run Periods, the sky temperature is derived by the horizontal
infrared radiation if presented in the weather file input by default. For flexibility, the field Use
Weather File Horizontal IR can be set to “No” to ignore horizontal IR values from the weather
file and always use the specified sky model for horizontal infrared radiation and sky temperature
calculations.
By default, EnergyPlus calculates clear sky emissivity using Clark-Allen model. The following
object can also be entered to adopt alternative sky emissivity calculation methods. Alternative
methods of sky emissivity calculation include the calibrated forms of Berdahl & Martin, Brunt, and
Idso model. Their algorithms are all described in the Engineering Reference document. Much of the
literature describes the sky temperature as relative to water vapor pressure, drybulb or dewpoint
temperature.

1.7.10.1 Inputs

1.7.10.1.1 Field: Name

This name references an existing design period (i.e., SizingPeriod:DesignDay, SizingPe-
riod:WeatherFileDays, or SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType) or run period (by name or
blank for all run periods).

1.7.10.1.2 Field: Calculation Type

Allowable entries here are: ClarkAllen, Brunt, Idso, BerdahlMartin, ScheduleValue,
DifferenceScheduleDryBulbValue, or DifferenceScheduleDewPointValue.
In the case of ScheduleValue, DifferenceScheduleDryBulbValue and DifferenceSched-
uleDewPointValue the following field must specify a valid schedule name.
ClarkAllen – the clear sky emissivity are calculated using Clark and Allen model. This is the
default model to calculate clear sky emissivity.
Brunt – the clear sky emissivity are calculated using Brunt model.
Idso – the clear sky emissivity are calculated using Idso model.
BerdahlMartin – the clear sky emissivity are calculated using Berdahl & Martin model.
ScheduleValue – the values in the schedule are used as the sky temperature.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 103

DifferenceScheduleDryBulbValue – the values in the schedule are subtracted from the dry-
bulb temperature value (+values would then be less than the drybulb temperature, -values would
then be greater than the drybulb temperature) for the resulting sky temperature value.
DifferenceScheduleDewPointValue – the values in the schedule are subtracted from the
dewpoint temperature value (+values would then be less than the dewpoint temperature, -values
would then be greater than the dewpoint temperature) for the resulting sky temperature value.

1.7.10.1.3 Field: ScheduleName

This field specifies a schedule name to accomplish the sky temperature calculation from the pre-
vious field. A Schedule:Day:* (i.e., Schedule:Day:Hourly, Schedule:Day:Interval, Schedule:Day:List)
should be specified if the name in the name field matches a SizingPeriod:DesignDay object. If the
name is one of the weather file period specifications (i.e. matches a SizingPeriod:WeatherFileDays,
SizingPeriod:WeatherFileConditionType or RunPeriod), then the schedule name must match a full
year schedule (i.e. Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, Schedule:File, or Schedule:Constant).

1.7.10.1.4 Field: Use Weather File Horizontal IR

This field specifies whether or not to use the horizontal infrared radiation values from weather
files if presented. The field is default to be true. If yes or blank, and the values are presented in
weather file, EnergyPlus uses the values from weather file for weather calculations, otherwise it uses
the specified sky model to calculate the values. If no, it always uses the specified sky model and
ignores the horizontal IR values from the weather file. For Calculation Type = ScheduleValue,
ScheduleValue or DifferenceScheduleDewPointValue, this field is ignored and the scheduled
values are used. If this field is set to No but no specific sky model is declared in the field Calculation
Type, the default sky model ClarkAllen is used.
An example of IDF usage (with DesignDay):
SizingPeriod:DesignDay ,
DENVER_STAPLETON Ann Clg 1% Sky Temperature modifier , !- Name
32.6, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
15.2, !- Daily Temperature Range {deltaC}
15.5, !- Humidity Indicating Conditions at Maximum Dry -Bulb
83411. , !- Barometric Pressure {Pa}
4, !- Wind Speed {m/s}
120, !- Wind Direction {deg}
1.00, !- Sky Clearness
0, !- Rain Indicator
0, !- Snow Indicator
25, !- Day of Month
7, !- Month
SummerDesignDay , !- Day Type
0, !- Daylight Saving Time Indicator
WetBulb , !- Humidity Indicating Type
, !- Relative Humidity Day Schedule Name
deltaschedule , !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Type
temp range deltas; !- Dry -Bulb Temperature Range Modifier Schedule Name

WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature ,
DENVER_STAPLETON Ann Clg 1% Sky Temperature modifier , !- Name
ScheduleValue , !- Calculation Type
DaySchedule5; !- Schedule Name

Schedule:Day:Interval ,
DaySchedule5 , !- Name
Temperature , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Yes , !- Interpolate to Timestep
until: 24:00 , !- Time 1
5; !- Value Until Time 1
104 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Another example of IDF usage:

WeatherProperty:SkyTemperature ,
,
UseBerdahlMartinModel , !- Calculation Type
,
No; !- Use Weather File Horizontal IR

1.7.11 Site:WeatherStation
The Site:WeatherStation object is used to specify the measurement conditions for the climatic data
listed in the weather file. These conditions indicate the height above ground of the air temperature
sensor, the height above ground of the wind speed sensor, as well as coefficients that describe
the wind speed profile due to the terrain surrounding the weather station. There are necessary
correlations between the entries for this object and some entries in the Building object, specifically
the Terrain field.
Weather stations throughout the world (ref: WMO – World Meteorological Organization) take
their measurements at standard conditions:

• Air temperature is measured at approximately 1.5 m above ground

• Wind speed is measured at 10 m above ground

• Weather station is in a flat, open field with little protection from the wind.

When using weather data from standard sources (e.g., TMY2, IWEC, TMY, or ASHRAE design
day data), it is not necessary to use the Site:WeatherStation object. However, if you are using
custom weather data or real-time weather data, you may need to read and understand the concepts
in the Site:WeatherStation object.
The measurement conditions at the weather station (i.e., the weather file) are used by En-
ergyPlus in conjunction with the Terrain field of the Building object, or optionally with the
Site:HeightVariation object (see below), to calculate the local variation in atmospheric proper-
ties as a function of height above ground. Outdoor air temperature decreases with height, while wind
speed increases with height. The algorithms for this calculation are in the Engineering Reference.
The Site:WeatherStation object is useful when working with a custom weather file that
includes data that were not measured at the WMO standard conditions. For example, the weather
data could be measured on site, or on the roof top of a nearby building. The wind speed profile
coefficients can be estimated from the table below or calculated beforehand using more sophisticated
techniques such as CFD modeling of the weather station terrain.

Table 1.10: Wind Speed Profile Coefficients (ASHRAE

Fundamentals 2005).

Terrain Description Exponent Boundary Layer Thickness (m)

Flat, open country 0.14 270
Rough, wooded country 0.22 370
Towns and cities 0.33 460
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 105

Table 1.10: Wind Speed Profile Coefficients (ASHRAE

Fundamentals 2005).

Terrain Description Exponent Bounhary Layer Thickness (m)

Ocean 0.10 210
Urban, industrial, forest 0.22 370

If the Site:WeatherStation object is omitted from the input file, the WMO standard mea-
surement conditions are assumed.

1.7.11.1 Inputs
1.7.11.1.1 Field: Wind Sensor Height Above Ground
The height [m] above ground for the wind speed sensor.

1.7.11.1.2 Field: Wind Speed Profile Exponent

The wind speed profile exponent for the terrain surrounding the weather station. The exponent
can be estimated from the table above or calculated beforehand using more sophisticated techniques,
such as CFD modeling of the weather station terrain.

1.7.11.1.3 Field: Wind Speed Profile Boundary Layer Thickness

The wind speed profile boundary layer thickness [m] for the terrain surrounding the weather
station. The boundary layer can be estimated from the table above or calculated beforehand using
more sophisticated techniques, such as CFD modeling of the weather station terrain.

1.7.11.1.4 Field: Air Temperature Sensor Height Above Ground

The height [m] above ground for the air temperature sensor.
For example, if you are using weather data measured on the top of your building, you should
set the Wind Sensor Height Above Ground and the Air Temperature Sensor Height Above Ground
to equal the height of your building (say 30 m). The Wind Speed Profile Exponent and Wind Speed
Profile Boundary Layer Thickness should be set to match the values associated with the Terrain
field of the Building object, or the equivalent fields of the Site:HeightVariation object.
Or, in IDF terms, with a building in a town or city:
Site:WeatherStation ,
30, !- Wind Sensor Height Above Ground {m}
0.33, !- Wind Speed Profile Exponent {}
460, !- Wind Speed Profile Boundary Layer Thickness {m}
30; !- Air Temperature Sensor Height Above Ground {m}

This would change if you had a different wind speed profile exponent or wind speed profile
boundary layer thickness at your site.

1.7.12 Site:HeightVariation
The Site:HeightVariation object is used to specify the local variation in atmospheric properties at the
site and should be used only if you require advanced control over the height-dependent variations
106 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

for wind speed and temperature. The coefficients set by this object are used by EnergyPlus, in
conjunction with the Site:WeatherStation object (see above), to calculate the local variation in
atmospheric properties as a function of height above ground. Outdoor air temperature decreases
with height, while wind speed increases with height. The local outdoor air temperature and wind
speed are calculated separately for all zones and surfaces, and optionally for outdoor air nodes
for which a height has been specified (see OutdoorAir:Node object). With the default inputs,
wind speed falls significantly at heights lower than the weather station measurement height, and
temperature increases slightly. The algorithms for this calculation are in the Engineering Reference.
There are necessary correlations between the entries for this object and some entries in the Building
object, specifically the Terrain field.

Table 1.11: Atmospheric Variables at Two Different

Heights Above Ground Level.

Variable 1.5 m 284 m Absolute Diff Percent Diff

Air Temperature 15°C 13.15°C 1.85°C 12.3%
Barometric Pressure 101,325 Pa 97,960 Pa 3,365 Pa 3.3%
Wind Speed 2.46 m/s 7.75 m/s 5.29 m/s 215%

Note that using this object overrides the wind speed profile coefficients implied by the Terrain
field of the Building object even if the wind speed profile fields are left blank. The wind speed
profile coefficients can be estimated from the table above (see Site:WeatherStation) or calculated
beforehand using more sophisticated techniques such as CFD modeling of the site terrain.

1.7.12.1 Inputs
1.7.12.1.1 Field: Wind Speed Profile Exponent
The wind speed profile exponent for the terrain surrounding the site. The exponent can be
estimated from the table above (see Site:WeatherStation) or calculated beforehand using more
sophisticated techniques, such as CFD modeling of the site terrain. Note that using this object
overrides the wind speed profile coefficients implied by the Terrain field of the Building object
even if this field is left blank. This field can be set to zero to turn off all wind dependence on height.

1.7.12.1.2 Field: Wind Speed Profile Boundary Layer Thickness

The wind speed profile boundary layer thickness [m] for the terrain surrounding the site. The
boundary layer can be estimated from the table above (see Site:WeatherStation) or calculated
beforehand using more sophisticated techniques, such as CFD modeling of the site terrain. Note
that using this object overrides the wind speed profile coefficients implied by the Terrain field of
the Building object even if this field is left blank.

1.7.12.1.3 Field: Air Temperature Gradient Coefficient

The air temperature gradient coefficient [K/m] is a research option that allows the user to control
the variation in outdoor air temperature as a function of height above ground. The real physical
value is 0.0065 K/m. This field can be set to zero to turn off all temperature dependence on height.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 107

Note that the Air Temperature Sensor Height in the Site:WeatherStation object should also be
set to zero in order to force the local outdoor air temperatures to match the weather file outdoor
air temperature. This change is required because the Site:WeatherStation object assumes an
air temperature gradient of 0.0065 K/m. This field can be set to zero to turn off all temperature
dependence on height.
Site:HeightVariation ,
0.22, !- Wind Speed Profile Exponent
370, !- Wind Speed Profile Boundary Layer Thickness {m}
0.0065; !- Air Temperature Gradient Coefficient {deltaC/m}

1.7.13 Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface
Ground temperatures are used for the ground heat transfer model. There can be only one ground
temperature object included, and it is used as the outside surface temperature for all surfaces
with Outside Boundary Condition = Ground. The object is options if you have no surfaces with
ground contact. The outside surface temperature for individual surfaces can be specified using the
OtherSideCoefficients (ref: SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients) object that allows Toutside to
be set with a schedule. This permits using any number of different outside face temperatures in
addition to the ground temperature.

Caution: The “undisturbed” ground temperatures calculated by the weather converter should not
be used in building losses but are appropriate to be used in the Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow and
Site:GroundTemperature:Deep objects. The reasoning (for building losses) is that these values are
too extreme for the soil under a conditioned building. For best results, use the Slab or Basement
program described in this document to calculate custom monthly average ground temperatures (see
the Ground Heat Transfer section). This is especially important for residential applications and very
small buildings. If one of these ground temperature preprocessors is not used, for typical commercial
buildings in the USA, a reasonable default value is 2 ◦C less than the average indoor space temperature.

More information about determining appropriate ground temperatures is given in the Auxiliary
Programs document.

1.7.13.1 Inputs
1.7.13.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the indicated
month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
An IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface ,19 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20 ,20;

1.7.14 Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow
Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow are used by the Surface Ground Heat Exchanger (i.e. object:
GroundHeatExchanger:Surface). Only one shallow ground temperature object can be included.
108 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Note that the ground temperatures included in full year weather files may be suitable of being used
for the values in these fields – namely, the .5 m depth temperatures that are calculated for “undisturbed”
soil of “typical” conditions. However, you may wish to use some other change effect – based on the
weather conditions of the building location.

This object may be used for objects requiring “undisturbed” ground temperatures. In these
instances, the “name” input field is not required.

1.7.14.1 Inputs
1.7.14.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly surface ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the
indicated month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
An IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:Shallow ,4 ,4 ,6,6,10,10,15,15,14,14,8 ,8;

1.7.15 Site:GroundTemperature:Deep
Site:GroundTemperature:Deep are used by the Pond Ground Heat Exchanger object (i.e. object:
GroundHeatExchanger:Pond). Only one deep ground temperature object can be included.

Note that the ground temperatures included in full year weather files may be suitable of being used
for the values in these fields – namely, the 4 m depth temperatures that are calculated for “undisturbed”
soil of “typical” conditions. However, you may wish to use some other change effect – based on the
weather conditions or special knowledge of the building location.

This object may be used for objects requiring “undisturbed” ground temperatures. In these
instances, the “name” input field is not required.

1.7.15.1 Inputs
1.7.15.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly deep ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the
indicated month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
An IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:Deep , 16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16 ,16;

1.7.16 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference may be used by all objects requiring “undis-
turbed” ground temperatures. The object uses a 1D finite difference heat transfer model which uses
the weather file to obtain surface boundary conditions. An annual simulation is run on the model
during it’s initialization until the annual ground temperature profile has reached steady periodic be-
havior. Once steady periodic behavior is reached, the ground temperatures are cached for retrieval
during the rest of the simulation.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 109

1.7.16.1 Inputs
1.7.16.1.1 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.

1.7.16.1.2 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.7.16.1.3 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of dry soil, in J/kg-K.

1.7.16.1.4 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction

A nominal value of soil moisture content to be used when evaluating soil thermal properties.

1.7.16.1.5 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation

A nominal value of soil moisture content when the soil is saturated, this is used in evaluating
thermal properties of freezing soil.

1.7.16.1.6 Field: Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter

Numeric field specifies the ground cover effects used in the evapotranspiration model at the
ground surface heat balance. The values range from 0 (solid, non-permeable ground surface) to 1.5
(wild growth).
An IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:FiniteDifference ,
FDTemps , !- Name of object
1.08, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
962, !- Soil Density {kg/m3}
2576, !- Soil Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction {percent}
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation {percent}
0.408; !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter

1.7.17 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach may be used by all objects requiring
“undisturbed” ground temperatures. It provides an undisturbed ground temperature based on
the correlation developed by Kusuda T. and P. Achenbach. 1965. The correlation uses three
parameters for ground temperature at the surface to define a correlation for undisturbed ground
temperatures as a function of depth and time. If one thinks of the ground temperature for a
given depth as a sinusoid, the average ground temperature, amplitude (average difference between
maximum ground temperature and minimum ground temperature), and the phase shift (day of
minimum surface temperature) are all required to define the correlation.
If the parameters are left blank they can be autocalculated by including soil surface temperatures
in the input using the Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow object. They can also be calculated by using
the CalcSoilSurfTemp preprocessor.
Kusuda, T. and P.R. Achenbach. 1965. ‘Earth Temperatures and Thermal Diffusivity at Se-
lected Stations in the United States.’ ASHRAE Transactions. 71(1): 61-74.
110 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.17.1 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.

1.7.17.2 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.7.17.3 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of dry soil, in J/kg-K.

1.7.17.4 Field: Average Annual Ground Surface Temperature

This is the average ground surface temperature throughout the entire year, in ◦C.

1.7.17.5 Field: Average Amplitude of Annual Ground Surface Temperature

This is the average amplitude of the ground surface temperature, in ◦C.

1.7.17.6 Field: Phase Shift of Minimum Surface Temperature

This is day of the year which has the lowest ground surface temperature.
An IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach ,
KATemps , !- Name of object
1.08, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
962, !- Soil Density {kg/m3}
2576, !- Soil Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
15.5, !- Average Soil Surface Temperature {C}
12.0, !- Average Amplitude of Surface Temperature {deltaC}
21; !- Phase Shift of Minimum Surface Temperature {days}

1.7.18 Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing
Site:GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing may be used by all objects requiring “undisturbed”
ground temperatures. It provides an undisturbed ground temperature based on the correlation
developed by Xing, 2014. The correlation is a 5 parameter, 2 harmonic model based on the work
of Lord Kelvin (Thomson, 1862). The average soil surface temperature and two sets of surface
temperature amplitude and phase shift must be provided. Parameters for 4000+ international
locations can be found in Xing, 2014.
Thomson, W. 1862. ‘On the Reduction of Observations of Underground Temperature, with
applications to Professor Forbes’ Edinburgh Observations and the continued Calton Hill Series.’
Proceedings of the Royal Society of Edinburgh. IV: 342-346.
Xing, L. 2014. Estimations of Undisturbed Ground Temperatures using Numerical and Analyt-
ical Modeling. Ph.D. Diss. Oklahoma State University, Stillwater, OK.

1.7.18.1 Inputs
1.7.18.1.1 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 111

1.7.18.1.2 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.7.18.1.3 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of dry soil, in J/kg-K.

1.7.18.1.4 Field: Average Soil Surface Temperature

The average annual surface temperature of the soil, in deg C.

1.7.18.1.5 Field: Soil Surface Temperature Amplitude 1

First soil surface temperature amplitude parameter, in deg C.

1.7.18.1.6 Field: Soil Surface Temperature Amplitude 2

Second soil surface temperature amplitude parameter, in deg C.

1.7.18.1.7 Field: Phase Shift of Surface Temperature Amplitude 1

Phase shift of surface temperature amplitude 1, in days.

1.7.18.1.8 Field: Phase Shift of Surface Temperature Amplitude 2

Phase shift of surface temperature amplitude 2, in days.
An IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:Undisturbed:Xing ,
Chicago -Ohare ,!- Name of object
1.08, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
962, !- Soil Density {kg/m3}
2576, !- Soil Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
11.1, !- Average Soil Surface Tempeature {C}
13.4, !- Soil Surface Temperature Amplitude 1 {deltaC}
0.7, !- Soil Surface Temperature Amplitude 2 {deltaC}
25, !- Phase Shift of Temperature Amplitude 1 {days}
30; !- Phase Shift of Temperature Amplitude 2 {days}

1.7.19 Site:GroundDomain:Slab
This section documents the input object used to simulate ground coupled heat transfer with horizon-
tal building surfaces within EnergyPlus. Horizontal ground surfaces within EnergyPlus interact with
the Site:GroundDomain object by utilizing the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel object.
By utilizing this object, multiple horizontal surfaces can be coupled to the same Site:GroundDomain
object. Each horizontal surface may also have its unique ground domain, however, runtime will be
adversely affected.
Generally, there are two scenarios which Site:GroundDomain is equipped to model: in-grade
slabs and on-grade slabs.
The in-grade slab option can be used to simulate situations when the upper slab surface is near
the ground surface level. For this situation, slab’s upper surface must interact with the zone via
an OSCM boundary. Due to this, the FloorConstruction object for the zone floor must include
a thin layer of the upper floor material. Horizontal and vertical insulation are modeled by the
GroundDomain in this scenario. Horizontal insulation can be modeled as covering the full horizontal
112 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.7: In-grade configuration.

1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 113

surface, or it can be limited to the perimeter regions only. In the latter case, the perimeter insulation
width must be specified.

Figure 1.8: On-grade configuration

The on-grade slab option can be used to simulate situations when the lower slab surface is
near the ground surface level. In this situation, the entire floor must be included within the
floor construction object. Vertical insulation is modeled by the GroundDomain in this scenario.
Horizontal insulation can only be modeled as covering the full horizontal surface.

1.7.19.1 Inputs
1.7.19.1.1 Field: Name
Alpha field used as a unique identifier for each ground domain.

1.7.19.1.2 Field: Ground Domain Depth

Numeric field used to determine the depth of the simulation domain, in meters.

1.7.19.1.3 Field: Aspect Ratio

Numeric field, which is the ratio of slab length to width and is used to determine the aspect
ratio of the slab. This field along with the total slab floor area, which is taken as the combination
of all surfaces connected to the floor OtherSideConditionsModel, are used to determine the size
and shape of the ground domain. Any given aspect ratio and its inverse should produce identical
results. i.e. AR = 2 equals AR = 0.5. This field has units of meters/meters.
114 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.19.1.4 Field: Perimeter Offset

Numeric field used to determine the distance from the slab perimeter to the domain perimeter,
in meters.

1.7.19.1.5 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.

1.7.19.1.6 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.7.19.1.7 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of dry soil, in J/kg-K. If moisture is defined in this object, moisture and
freezing effects are accounted for by varying the specific heat value.

1.7.19.1.8 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction

A nominal value of soil moisture content to be used when evaluating soil thermal properties.

1.7.19.1.9 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation

A nominal value of soil moisture content when the soil is saturated, this is used in evaluating
thermal properties of freezing soil.

1.7.19.1.10 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

This is the type of undisturbed ground temperature object that is used to determine the ground
temperature.

1.7.19.1.11 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

This is the name of the undisturbed ground temperature object that is used to determine the
ground temperature.

1.7.19.1.12 Field: Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter

Numeric field specifies the ground cover effects used in the evapotranspiration model at the
ground surface heat balance. The values range from 0 (solid, non-permeable ground surface) to 1.5
(wild growth).

1.7.19.1.13 Field: Slab Boundary Condition Model Name

This is the name of the other side boundary condition model used.

1.7.19.1.14 Field: Slab Location

Alpha field indicates whether the slab is in-grade (top surface level with ground surface) or on-
grade (bottoms surface level with ground surface). Options include “ONGRADE” and “INGRADE”.

1.7.19.1.15 Field: Slab Material Name

Name of the material object representing the slab material. Only applicable to in-grade situa-
tions.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 115

1.7.19.1.16 Field: Horizontal Insulation

Alpha field indicates whether horizontal insulation is present. Options include “YES” and “NO”.
Only applicable to in-grade situations.

1.7.19.1.17 Field: Horizontal Insulation Material Name

This alpha field is the name of a material object representing the horizontal slab insulation. It
should be noted that the material listed here cannot be a ”no mass” material (Material:NoMass)
that is defined by R-Value only but should be defined as a regular material with an actual thickness.
This optional argument is only required if horizontal insulation is present.

1.7.19.1.18 Field: Horizontal Insulation Extents

Alpha field indicates whether the horizontal slab insulation extends to cover the full horizontal
area of the slab, or only covers the slab perimeter. Optional argument only required if horizontal
insulation is present. Options include “FULL” and “PERIMETER”.

1.7.19.1.19 Field: Perimeter Insulation Width

Numeric field indicating the width of the perimeter insulation measured from the slab edge.
Valid range from > 0 to < half of smallest slab width.

1.7.19.1.20 Field: Vertical Insulation

Alpha field indicates whether vertical insulation is present. Options include “YES” and “NO”.

1.7.19.1.21 Field: Vertical Insulation Name

This alpha field is the name of a material object representing the vertical slab insulation. It
should be noted that the material listed here cannot be a ”no mass” material (Material:NoMass)
that is defined by R-Value only but should be defined as a regular material with an actual thickness.
This optional argument is only required if vertical insulation is present.

1.7.19.1.22 Field: Vertical Insulation Depth

Numeric field indicates the depth measured in meters from the ground surface to which the
vertical perimeter insulation extends. Valid range from > Slab Thickness to < Domain Depth.

1.7.19.1.23 Field: Simulation Timestep

Alpha field indicating whether the domain will update temperatures at each zone timestep, or
at hourly intervals. Options include “timestep” and “hourly”.

1.7.19.1.24 Field: Geometric Mesh Coefficient

This numeric field represents the compression of cell distribution A value in this field equal to 1
would result in a uniform distribution, while a value of 2 would provide a highly skewed distribution.
Values for this field should be limited from 1.0 to 2.0. If this field is omitted, the default value is
1.6.
116 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.19.1.25 Field: Mesh Density Parameter

This numeric integer field represents the number of cells to be placed between any two “domain
partitions” during mesh development. A domain partition may be thought of as a slab edge or
insulation edge. Once these components are laid out in the domain, this field number of cells are
placed between the partitions. If this field is omitted, the default value is 6.
An IDF example of an in-grade slab.
Site:GroundDomain:Slab ,
IngradeCoupledSlab , !- Name
5, !- Ground Domain Depth
1, !- Aspect Ratio
5, !- Domain Perimeter Offset
1.8, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity
3200, !- Soil Density
836, !- Soil Specific Heat
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
1, !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter
GroundCoupledOSCM , !- Name of Floor Boundary Condition Model
InGrade , !- Slab Location (InGrade/OnGrade)
Slab Material -In -grade , !- Slab Material Name
Yes , !- Horizontal Insulation
Slab Insulation , !- Horizontal Insulation Material Name
Perimeter , !- Full Horizontal or Perimeter Only
1, !- Perimeter insulation width
Yes , !- Vertical Insulation
Slab Insulation , !- Vertical Insulation Name
2, !- Vertical perimeter insulation depth from surface
Hourly; !- Simulation timestep

And IDF example of an on-grade slab

Site:GroundDomain:Slab ,
OngradeCoupledSlab , !- Name
5, !- Ground Domain Depth {m}
1, !- Aspect Ratio
5, !- Domain Perimeter Offset {m}
1.8, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3200, !- Soil Density {kg/m3}
836, !- Soil Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps; !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
1, !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter
GroundCoupledOSCM , !- Name of Floor Boundary Condition Model
OnGrade , !- Slab Location (InGrade/OnGrade)
, !- Slab Material Name
, !- Horizontal Insulation (Yes/No)
, !- Horizontal Insulation Material Name
, !- Full Horizontal or Perimeter Only
, !- Perimeter insulation width (m)
Yes , !- Vertical Insulation (Yes/No)
Slab Insulation , !- Vertical Insulation Name
2, !- Vertical perimeter insulation depth from surface
Hourly; !- Simulation timestep. (Timestep/Hourly) </td >

1.7.19.2 Outputs
The following output variables are available.
• Zone, Average, Zone Coupled Surface Heat Flux [W/m2]
• Zone, Average, Zone Coupled Surface Temperature [C]
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 117

1.7.19.2.1 Zone Coupled Surface Heat Flux [W/m2]

This is the value of the heat flux provided to the GroundDomain as a boundary condition. This
is calculated by taking the average heat flux of all surfaces coupled to the domain’s SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideConditionsModel model.

1.7.19.2.2 Zone Coupled Surface Temperature [C]

This is the value of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel surface temperature. This
is the temperature provided to the ground coupled surfaces as an outside boundary condition.

1.7.20 Site:GroundDomain:Basement
This section documents the input object used to simulate ground coupled heat transfer with
underground zones within EnergyPlus. Zone surfaces within EnergyPlus interact with the
Site:GroundDomain:Basement object by utilizing the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel
object. Two separate OSCM are required for the basement vertical and horizontal surfaces.
Vertical wall surfaces will interact with the first OSCM while the horizontal floor surface will
interact with the second OSCM. Basement floor and wall surfaces are constructed normally
by using the BuildingSurface:Detailed object, with the outside boundary condition being the
OtherSideConditionsModel for the basement floor or wall. The outside surface of the wall being
the interface between the ground domain and the EnergyPlus zone. Horizontal and vertical ground
insulation are simulated by the ground domain, and therefore should not be included in the wall
and floor construction objects.
Site:GroundDomain:Basement ,
CoupledBasement , !- Name
10, !- Ground Domain Depth {m}
1, !- Aspect ratio
5, !- Perimeter offset {m}
1.8, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3200, !- Soil Density {kg/m3}
836, !- Soil Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction {percent}
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation {percent}
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
1, !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter
BasementFloorOSCM , !- Name of Basement Floor Boundary Condition Model
Yes , !- Basement Horizontal Underfloor Insulation Present (Yes/No)
Basement Insulation , !- Basement Horizontal Insulation Underfloor Material Name
Full , !- Full Horizontal or Perimeter Only (Full/Perimeter)
, !- Perimeter width (m)
2.5, !- Depth of Basement Wall In Ground Domain {m}
BasementWallOSCM , !- Name of Basement Wall Boundary Condition Model
Yes , !- Basement Wall Vertical Insulation Present(Yes/No)
Basement Insulation , !- Basement Wall Vertical Insulation Material Name
2.5, !- Vertical insulation depth from surface (m)
Hourly; !- Domain Update interval. (Timestep , Hourly)
4; ! Mesh Density Parameter

1.7.20.1 Inputs
1.7.20.1.1 Field: Name
Alpha field used as a unique identifier for each basement domain. Multiple basements domains
can be simulated simultaneously, however, each domain must have a unique name. Additionally,
despite the ability to simulate multiple domains simultaneously, these domains do not interact with
118 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.9: Basement Configuration

1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 119

each other and are treated as independent domains with boundary conditions given by the model
parameters below.

1.7.20.1.2 Field: Ground Domain Depth

Numeric field used to determine the depth of the simulation domain, in meters. A value of 10
meters is the default.

1.7.20.1.3 Field: Aspect Ratio

Numeric field, which is the ratio of basement length to width, used to determine the aspect
ratio of the basement. This field along with the total basement floor area, which is taken as the
combination of all surfaces connected to the floor OtherSideConditionsModel, are used to determine
the size and shape of the basement domain. Aspect ratios and the inverse of aspect ratios should
produce identical results. i.e. AR = 2 equals AR = 0.5. This field has units of meters/meters.

1.7.20.1.4 Field: Domain Perimeter Offset

Numeric field used to determine the distance from the basement perimeter to the domain perime-
ter, in meters. A value of 5 is default.

1.7.20.1.5 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.

1.7.20.1.6 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.7.20.1.7 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of dry soil, in J/kg-K. If moisture is defined in this object, moisture and
freezing effects are accounted for by varying the specific heat value.

1.7.20.1.8 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction

A nominal value of soil moisture content to be used when evaluating soil thermal properties.

1.7.20.1.9 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation

A nominal value of soil moisture content when the soil is saturated, this is used in evaluating
thermal properties of freezing soil.

1.7.20.1.10 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

This is the type of undisturbed ground temperature object that is used to determine the ground
temperature.

1.7.20.1.11 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

This is the name of the undisturbed ground temperature object that is used to determine the
ground temperature.
120 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.20.1.12 Field: Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter

Numeric field specifies the ground cover effects used in the evapotranspiration model at the
ground surface heat balance. The values range from 0 (solid, non-permeable ground surface) to 1.5
(wild growth). Model can be sensitive to variations in this parameter, especially in dry climates.

1.7.20.1.13 Field: Basement Floor Boundary Condition Model Name

This is the name of the other side boundary condition model used for the basement floor surface.

1.7.20.1.14 Field: Horizontal Insulation

Alpha field indicates whether horizontal insulation is present. Options include “YES” and “NO”.

1.7.20.1.15 Field: Horizontal Insulation Name

This alpha field is the name of a material object representing the horizontal underfloor base-
ment insulation. It should be noted that the material listed here cannot be a ”no mass” material
(Material:NoMass) that is defined by R-Value only but should be defined as a regular material with
an actual thickness. This optional argument is only required if horizontal insulation is present.

1.7.20.1.16 Field: Horizontal Insulation Extents

Alpha field indicates whether the horizontal underfloor insulation extends to cover the full hor-
izontal area of the basement floor, or only covers the basement floor perimeter. Optional argument
only required if horizontal insulation is present. Options include “FULL” and “PERIMETER”.

1.7.20.1.17 Field: Perimeter Insulation Width

Numeric field indicating the width of the perimeter insulation measured from the basement floor
edge. Valid range from > 0 to < half of smallest basement floor width.

1.7.20.1.18 Field: Basement Depth

Depth of basement floor surface referenced from the ground surface, in meters. This domain
should be the distance from the ground surface down to the basement floor surface. In cases where
the ground surface is below the main above-ground building level, a separate wall surface should
be employed between the basement walls and the main level walls.

1.7.20.1.19 Field: Basement Wall Boundary Condition Model Name

Name of the other side condition boundary model used for the basement walls.

1.7.20.1.20 Field: Vertical Insulation

Alpha field indicates whether vertical insulation is present. Options include “YES” and “NO”.

1.7.20.1.21 Field: Vertical Insulation Name

This alpha field is the name of a material object representing the vertical basement insulation.
It should be noted that the material listed here cannot be a “no mass” material (Material:NoMass)
that is defined by R-Value only but should be defined as a regular material with an actual thickness.
This optional argument is only required if vertical insulation is present.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 121

1.7.20.1.22 Field: Vertical Insulation Depth

Numeric field indicates the depth measured in meters from the ground surface to which the
vertical perimeter insulation extends. Valid range from > 0 to < Basement Depth.

1.7.20.1.23 Field: Simulation Timestep

Alpha field indicating whether the domain will update temperatures at each zone timestep, or
at hourly intervals. Options include “timestep” and “hourly”.

1.7.20.1.24 Mesh Density Parameter

Integer field indicating the density of the finite difference ground domain cells between the
basement and the far field boundaries. Default value is 4. Total number of ground domain cells,
insulation cells, and ground surface cells are indicated as outputs to the eio file.

1.7.20.2 Outputs

The following output variables are available.

• Wall Interface Heat Flux

• Wall Interface Temperature

• Floor Interface Heat Flux

• Floor Interface Temperature

1.7.20.2.1 Wall Interface Heat Flux [W/m2]

This is the value of the heat flux provided to ground domain as a boundary condition for the
basement walls. Should be equal to the basement wall outside heat flux.

1.7.20.2.2 Wall Interface Temperature [C]

This is the value of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel surface temperature. This
is the temperature provided to the basement wall surfaces as an outside boundary condition.

1.7.20.2.3 Floor Interface Heat Flux [W/m2]

This is the value of the heat flux provided to ground domain as a boundary condition for the
basement floor. Should be equal to the basement floor outside heat flux.

1.7.20.2.4 Floor Interface Temperature [C]

This is the value of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel surface temperature. This
is the temperature provided to the ground coupled floor surfaces as an outside boundary condition.
122 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.21 Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod
Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod is used only by the underground walls or slabs-on-grade
or underground floors defined with C-factor (Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall) and F-factor
(Construction:FfactorGroundFloor) method for code compliance calculations where detailed con-
struction layers are unknown. Only one such ground temperature object can be included. The
monthly ground temperatures for this object are close to the monthly outside air temperatures
delayed by three months. If user does not input this object in the IDF file, it will be defaulted to
the 0.5m set of monthly ground temperatures from the weather file if they are available. Entering
these will also overwrite any ground temperatures from the weather file in the F and C factor usage.
If neither is available, an error will result.

1.7.21.1 Inputs
1.7.21.1.1 Field: Month Temperature(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly ground temperature (degrees Celsius) used for the indicated
month (January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
And, the IDF example:
Site: GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod , 9.5, 3.5, -0.7, -1.7, -0.6, 3.6, 9.3, 14, 18.2, 22.7, 21.2, 16.8;

1.7.22 Site:GroundReflectance
Ground reflectance values are used to calculate the ground reflected solar amount. This fractional
amount (entered monthly) is used in this equation:

GroundReflectedSolar = (BeamSolar · cos (SunZenithAngle) + DiffuseSolar) · GroundReflectance

(1.7)
Of course, the Ground Reflected Solar is never allowed to be negative. The ground reflectance
can be further modified when snow is on the ground by the Snow Ground Reflectance Modifier. To
use no ground reflected solar in your simulation, enter 0.0 for each month.

1.7.22.1 Inputs
1.7.22.1.1 Field: Month Average Ground Reflectance(s) – 12 fields in all
Each numeric field is the monthly average reflectivity of the ground used for the indicated month
(January = 1st field, February = 2nd field, etc.)
And use in an IDF:
Site:GroundReflectance ,
0.600 , !January Ground Reflectance
0.600 , !February Ground Reflectance
0.400 , !March Ground Reflectance
0.300 , !April Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !May Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !June Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !July Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !August Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !September Ground Reflectance
0.200 , !October Ground Reflectance
0.300 , !November Ground Reflectance
0.400; !December Ground Reflectance
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 123

1.7.23 Site:GroundReflectance:SnowModifier
It is generally accepted that snow resident on the ground increases the basic ground reflectance.
EnergyPlus allows the user control over the snow ground reflectance for both “normal ground
reflected solar” calculations (see above) and snow ground reflected solar modified for daylighting.
These are entered under this object and both default to 1 (same as normal ground reflectance – no
special case for snow which is a conservative approach).

1.7.23.1 Inputs
1.7.23.1.1 Field: Ground Reflected Solar Modifier
This field is a decimal number which is used to modified the basic monthly ground reflectance
when snow is on the ground (from design day input or weather data values).

GroundReflectanceused = GroundReflectance · ModifierSnow (1.8)

The actual Ground Reflectance is limited to [0.0,1.0].

1.7.23.1.2 Field: Daylighting Ground Reflected Solar Modifier

This field is a decimal number which is used to modified the basic monthly ground reflectance
when snow is on the ground (from design day input or weather data values).

DaylightingGroundReflectanceused = GroundReflectance · ModifierSnow (1.9)

The actual Ground Reflectance is limited to [0.0,1.0].

An IDF example:
Site: GroundReflectance:SnowModifier ,
1.0; !- Ground Reflected Solar Modifier

Outputs will show both the inputs from the above object as well as monthly values for both
Snow Ground Reflectance and Snow Ground Reflectance for Daylighting.

1.7.24 Site:WaterMainsTemperature
The Site:WaterMainsTemperature object is used to calculate water temperatures delivered by under-
ground water main pipes. The mains temperatures are used as default, make-up water temperature
inputs for several plant objects, including: WaterUse:Equipment, WaterUse:Connections,
WaterHeater:Mixed and WaterHeater:Stratified. The mains temperatures are also used in
the water systems objects to model the temperature of cold water supplies.
Water mains temperatures are a function of outdoor climate conditions and vary with time of
year. A correlation has been formulated to predict water mains temperatures based on two weather
inputs:

• average annual outdoor air temperature (dry-bulb)

• maximum difference in monthly average outdoor air temperatures

124 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

These values can be calculated from annual weather data using the auxillary program CalcSoil-
SurfTemp preprocessor. For more information on the water mains temperatures correlation, see the
EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
Alternatively, the Site:WaterMainsTemperature object can read values from a schedule. This is
useful for measured data or when water comes from a source other than buried pipes, e.g., a river
or lake.
If there is no Site:WaterMainsTemperature object in the input file, a default constant value of
◦
10 C is assumed.

1.7.24.1 Inputs
1.7.24.1.1 Field: Calculation Method
This field selects the calculation method and must have the keyword Schedule, Correlation
or CorrelationFromWeatherFile. If calculation method is CorrelationFromWeatherFile, the two
numeric input fields below are ignored. Instead, EnergyPlus calculates them from weather file.

1.7.24.1.2 Field: Schedule Name

If the calculation method is Schedule, the water mains temperatures are read from the schedule
referenced by this field. If the calculation method is Correlation or CorrelationFromWeatherFile,
this field is ignored.

1.7.24.1.3 Field: Annual Average Outdoor Air Temperature

If the calculation method is Correlation, this field is used in the calculation as the annual
average outdoor air temperature (dry-bulb) [C]. If the calculation method is Schedule or Correla-
tionFromWeatherFile, this field is ignored.

1.7.24.1.4 Field: Maximum Difference In Monthly Average Outdoor Air Tempera-

tures
If the calculation method is Correlation, this field is used in the calculation as the maximum
difference in monthly average outdoor air temperatures [∆C]. If the calculation method is Schedule
or CorrelationFromWeatherFile, this field is ignored.
Site:WaterMainsTemperature ,
Correlation , !- Calculation Method {SCHEDULE | CORRELATION | CORRELATIONFROMWEATHERFILE }
, !- Schedule Name
9.69, !- Annual Average Outdoor Air Temperature {C}
28.1; !- Maximum Difference In Monthly Average Outdoor Air Temperatures {deltaC}

1.7.25 Site:Precipitation
The Site:Precipitation object is used to describe the amount of water precipitation at the building
site over the course of the simulation run period. Precipitation includes both rain and the equivalent
water content of snow. Precipitation is not yet described well enough in the many building weather
data files. So this object can be used to provide the data using Schedule objects that define rates
of precipitation in meters per hour.
A set of schedules for site precipitation have been developed for USA weather locations and
are provided with EnergyPlus in the data set called PrecipitationSchedulesUSA.idf. The user can
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 125

develop schedules however they want. The schedules in the data set were developed using En-
ergyPlus’ weather file (EPW) observations and the average monthly precipitation for the closest
weather site provided by NOAA. EPW files for the USA that were based on TMY or TMY2 include
weather observations for Light/Moderate/Heavy rainfall, however most international locations do
not include these observations. The values were modeled by taking the middle of the ranges quoted
in the EPW data dictionary. The assumed piecewise function is shown below.


Light = 0.0125

Amount (m/hour) = Moderate = 0.052 (1.10)


Heavy = 0.1
The values were inserted on hour by hour basis for the month based on the observations. Then
each month was rescaled to meet the average precipitation for the month based on the 30-year
average (1971-2000) provided by the NOAA/NCDC. Therefore, the flags in the EPW file match the
precipitation schedules for the USA. Note that summing the average monthly precipitation values
will not give you the average yearly precipitation. The resulting value may be lower or higher than
the average yearly value.
Once the typical rainfall pattern and rates are scheduled, the Site:Precipitation object provides
a method of shifting the total rainfall up or down for design purposes. Wetter or drier conditions
can be modeled by changing the Design Annual Precipitation although the timing of precipitation
throughout the year will not be changed.

1.7.25.1 Inputs
1.7.25.1.1 Field: Precipitation Model Type
Choose rainfall modeling options. Only available option is ScheduleAndDesignLevel.

1.7.25.1.2 Field: Design Level for Total Annual Precipitation

Magnitude of total precipitation for an annual period to be used in the model. Value selected
by the user to correspond with the amount of precipitation expected or being assumed for design
purposes. The units are in meters. This field works with the following two fields to allow easily
shifting the amounts without having to generate new schedules.

1.7.25.1.3 Field: Precipitation Rate Schedule Name

Name of a schedule defined elsewhere that describes the rate of precipitation. The precipitation
rate schedule is analogous to weather file data. However, weather files for building simulation do
not currently contain adequate data for such calculations. Therefore, EnergyPlus schedules are
used to enter the pattern of precipitation events. The values in this schedule are the average rate
of precipitation in meters per hour. The integration of these values over an annual schedule should
equal the nominal annual precipitation.

1.7.25.1.4 Field: Average Total Annual Precipitation

Magnitude of annual precipitation associated with the rate schedule. This value is used to
normalize the precipitation.
IDF example:
126 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Site:Precipitation ,
ScheduledAndDesignLevel , !- Precipitation Model Type
0.75, !- Design Level Total Annual Precipitation {m/yr}
PrecipitationSchd , !- Schedule Name for Precipitation Rates
0.80771; !- Average Total Annual Precipitation {m/yr}

1.7.26 RoofIrrigation
The RoofIrrigation object is used to describe the amount of irrigation on the ecoroof surface over
the course of the simulation runperiod. This object is used to provide irrigation data using Schedule
objects that define rates of irrigation in meters per hour. These schedules can be one of two types:
Schedule, or SmartSchedule.

1.7.26.1 Inputs

1.7.26.1.1 Field: Irrigation Model Type

Choose irrigation modeling options. Available options are Schedule and SmartSchedule. The
Schedule type is used to force an irrigation schedule regardless of the current moisture state of the
soil. The SmartSchedule type allows the precipitation schedule to be overridden if the current
moisture state of the soil is greater than 40% saturated.

1.7.26.1.2 Field: Irrigation Rate Schedule Name

Name of a schedule defined elsewhere that describes the rate of irrigation. The values in this
schedule are the average rate of irrigation in meters per hour.

1.7.26.1.3 Field: Irrigation Maximum Saturation Threshold

Used with the SmartSchedule option in the Irrigation Model Type field to override the default
40% saturation limit for turning off the irrigation: values of 0 to 100 (percent) can be entered with
40% being the default.
IDF example:
RoofIrrigation ,
Schedule , !- Irrigation Model Type
IrrigationSchd; !- Schedule Name for Irrigation Rates

1.7.27 Solar and Visible Spectrum Objects

The next two objects enable users to enter solar and visible spectrum which is used to calculate
the thermal and visual performance of windows if their glazings are defined with full spectral
data. EnergyPlus versions 8.0 and older hard-wired the solar and visible spectrum. The solar
spectrum assumes air mass 1.5 terrestrial solar global spectral irradiance values (W/m2-micron)
on a 37° tilted surface, based on ISO 9845-1 and ASTM E 892; derived from Optics5 data file
ISO-9845GlobalNorm.std, 10-14-99. The visible/photopic spectrum is based on CIE 1931 observer;
ISO/CIE 10527, CIE Standard Calorimetric Observers; derived from Optics5 data file “CIE 1931
Color Match from E308.txt”, which is the same as WINDOW4 file Cie31t.dat.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 127

1.7.28 Site:SolarAndVisibleSpectrum
The SolarAndVisibleSpectrum object is used to specify the solar and visible spectrum data which
is used as spectral weighting function to calculate the window performance (transmittance and
absorptance) in EnergyPlus. This is a unique object, if it is missing from an IDF file, the default
(same as EnergyPlus version 8.0) solar and visible spectrum data will be used.

1.7.28.1 Inputs
1.7.28.1.1 Field: Name
This field specifies the name of the SolarAndVisibleSpectrum object.

1.7.28.1.2 Field: Spectrum Data Method

This field specifies the method used to enter the spectrum data. Two choices are available:
Default and UserDefined. The choice Default will continue to use the hard-wired spectrum data in
EnergyPlus (for backward compatibility). The choice UserDefined allows users to specify custom
solar and visible spectrum data. The default choice is Default.

1.7.28.1.3 Field: Solar Spectrum Data Name

This field is required if the Spectrum Data Method is set to UserDefined. This field references
a spectrum dataset for solar.

1.7.28.1.4 Field: Visible Spectrum Data Name

This field is required if the Spectrum Data Method is set to UserDefined. This field references
a spectrum dataset for visible.
IDF example:
Site:SolarAndVisibleSpectrum ,
LocalSpectrum , !- Name
UserDefined , !- Spectrum Data Method: Default , UserDefined
SolarSpectrum , !- Solar Spectrum Data Object Name
VisibleSpectrum; !- Visible Spectrum Data Object

1.7.29 Site:SpectrumData
The Site:SpectrumData object holds the user defined solar or visible spectrum data. For solar
spectrum, up to 107 pairs of (wavelength, spectrum) can be entered. For visible spectrum, up to
81 pairs can be entered.

1.7.29.1 Inputs
1.7.29.1.1 Field: Name
This field specifies the name of the SpectrumData object. The name must be unique across all
SpectrumData objects.

1.7.29.1.2 Field: Spectrum Data Type

This field specifies the type of spectrum data. Choices are Solar and Visible.
128 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.29.1.3 Field: Wavelength <n>

This field specifies the nth wavelength in micron.

1.7.29.1.4 Field: Spectrum <n>

This field specifies the nth spectrum corresponding to the nth wavelength.
IDF example:
Site:SpectrumData ,
SolarSpectrum , !- Name
Solar , !- Spectrum Data Type
0.3,0, !- up to 107 pair of (wavelength , spectrum)
0.305 ,3.4 ,
0.31 ,15.6 ,
0.315 ,41.1 ,
0.32 ,71.2 ,
0.325 ,100.2 ,
0.33 ,152.4 ,
0.335 ,155.6 ,
0.34 ,179.4 ,
0.345 ,186.7 ,
0.35 ,212 ,
0.36 ,240.5 ,
0.37 ,324 ,
0.38 ,362.4 ,
...;

1.7.30 Climate Group Outputs

Climate related variables appear in two places for EnergyPlus outputs. Certain objects that are
invariant throughout a simulation period have lines appear in the eplusout.eio file. For descriptions
of this reporting, please see the Output Details and Examples document.

1.7.31 Weather Data Related Outputs

Variables related to ambient environment data are available at timestep and higher resolutions.
Below is a variable dictionary of these variables and subsequent definitions:

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Dewpoint Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgAir]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Barometric Pressure [Pa]

• Zone,Average,Site Wind Speed [m/s]

• Zone,Average,Site Wind Direction [deg]

• Zone,Average,Site Sky Temperature [C]

1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 129

• Zone,Average,Site Horizontal Infrared Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Site Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Site Direct Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Site Total Sky Cover []

• Zone,Average,Site Opaque Sky Cover []

• Zone,Sum,Site Precipitation Depth [m]

• Zone,Average,Site Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Site Ground Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Surface Ground Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Deep Ground Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Simple Factor Model Ground Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Enthalpy [J/kg]

• Zone,Average,Site Outdoor Air Density [kg/m3]

• Zone,Average,Site Solar Azimuth Angle [deg]

• Zone,Average,Site Solar Altitude Angle [deg]

• Zone,Average,Site Solar Hour Angle [deg]

• Zone,Average,Site Rain Status []

• Zone,Average,Site Snow on Ground Status []

• Zone,Average,Site Exterior Horizontal Sky Illuminance [lux]

• Zone,Average,Site Exterior Horizontal Beam Illuminance [lux]

• Zone,Average,Site Exterior Beam Normal Illuminance [lux]

• Zone,Average,Site Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Luminous Efficacy [lum/W]

• Zone,Average,Site Beam Solar Radiation Luminous Efficacy [lum/W]

• Zone,Average,Site Daylighting Model Sky Clearness []

• Zone,Average,Sky Brightness for Daylighting Calculation []

• Zone,Average,Site Daylight Saving Time Status []

• Zone,Average,Site Day Type Index []

• Zone,Average,Site Mains Water Temperature [C]

130 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

• HVAC,Average,Site Precipitation Rate [m/s]

• HVAC,Sum,Site Precipitation Depth [m]

• HVAC,Sum,Water System Roof Irrigation Scheduled Depth[m]

• HVAC,Sum,Water System Roof Irrigation Actual Depth[m]

Note that these data values may be interpolated from “hour” points (ref: Weather Data Hourly
Interpolation). Most of the data values represent the “average” over the reporting resolution period.

1.7.31.1 Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

This is the outdoor dry-bulb temperature in degrees C.

1.7.31.2 Site Outdoor Air Dewpoint Temperature [C]

This is the outdoor dewpoint temperature in degrees C.

1.7.31.3 Site Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor wet-bulb temperature is derived (at the timestep) from the values for dry-bulb tem-
perature, humidity ratio and barometric pressure.

1.7.31.4 Site Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgAir]

The outdoor humidity ratio is derived (at the timestep) from the dry-bulb temperature, relative
humidity and barometric pressure.

1.7.31.5 Site Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%]

This is the outdoor relative humidity expressed in percent.

1.7.31.6 Site Outdoor Air Barometric Pressure [Pa]

This is the atmospheric/barometric pressure in Pa.

1.7.31.7 Site Wind Speed [m/s]

This is the outdoor wind speed in m/s.

1.7.31.8 Site Wind Direction [deg]

This is the wind direction (N = 0, E = 90, S = 180, W = 270).

1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 131

1.7.31.9 Site Sky Temperature [C]

The sky temperature is derived from horizontal infrared radiation intensity. It is expressed in de-
grees C. The default calculation is shown below but this value may be modified by the WeatherProp-
erty:SkyTemperature object. Note that Sigma is the Stefan-Boltzmann constant in the following
equation:

  14
Horizontal IR
Sky T emperature = − 273.15Conversion f rom Kelvin to Centigrade (1.11)
Sigma

1.7.31.10 Site Horizontal Infrared Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The horizontal infrared radiation intensity is expressed in W/m2 based, if missing from the weather
file, on opaque sky cover, sky emissivity, temperature and other factors. The general calculation of
Site Horizontal Infrared Radiation Rate per Area is discussed in both the Engineering Reference
and the Auxiliary Programs document.

1.7.31.11 Site Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

Diffuse solar is the amount of solar radiation in W/m2 received from the sky (excluding the solar
disk) on a horizontal surface.

1.7.31.12 Site Direct Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

Site Direct Solar Radiation Rate per Area is amount of solar radiation in W/m2 received within a
5.7° field of view centered on the sun. This is also known as Beam Solar.

1.7.31.13 Site Total Sky Cover []

This is the total sky cover in tenths of sky. The value ranges from 0 (clear) to 10 (full cover).

1.7.31.14 Site Opaque Sky Cover []

This is the opaque sky cover in tenths of sky. The value ranges from 0 (clear) to 10 (full cover).

1.7.31.15 Site Precipitation Depth [m]

This is the amount of liquid precipitation (m). The source of this field may be the weather file or
the Site:Precipitation object. The weather file values are in millimeters, but the report here is in
meters. Two separate entities are displayed – from the weather file the key value is “Environment”;
from the Site:Precipitation object the key value is Site:Precipitation.
If the weather file does not have a liquid precipitation field but does have the present weather
fields, then a heuristic calculation is attempted for both flagging when it is raining and the amount
of precipitation. If the weather file does have liquid precipitation fields, then the output (e.g.
monthly) can be compared with the weather file stat file.
132 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.31.16 Site Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]
The ground reflected solar amount (W/m2 ) is derived from the Beam Solar, Diffuse Solar, User
specified Ground Reflectance (for month) and Solar Altitude Angle:

Groundreflectedsolar
= (Beamsolar · cos (SolarAltitudeAngle) + Diffusesolar) · Groundreflectancemonth (1.12)

where if the calculation returns a value < 0.0, then 0.0 will be reported.

1.7.31.17 Site Ground Temperature [C]

The ground temperature is reported in degrees C – this is a user-specified input by month.

1.7.31.18 Site Surface Ground Temperature [C]

The ground temperature is reported in degrees C – this is a user-specified input (object:
Site:GroundTemperature:Shallow) by month.

1.7.31.19 Site Deep Ground Temperature [C]

The ground temperature is reported in degrees C – this is a user-specified input (object:
Site:GroundTemperature:Deep) by month.

1.7.31.20 Site Simple Factor Model Ground Temperature [C]

The Site Simple Factor Model Ground Temperature is reported in degrees C – this is a user-specified
input (object: Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod) by month or gleaned from the weather
file as noted in the description of the object.

1.7.31.21 Site Outdoor Air Enthalpy [J/kg]

Outdoor enthalpy is derived at each timestep from the Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature and
the Site Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio. It is reported in J/kg.

1.7.31.22 Site Outdoor Air Density [kg/m3]

Outdoor air density is derived at each timestep from the Site Outdoor Air Barometric Pressure, the
Outdoor Dry-bulb temperature and the Outdoor Humidity Ratio. It is reported in units kg/m3 .

1.7.31.23 Site Solar Azimuth Angle [deg]

The Solar Azimuth Angle (f) is measured from the North (clockwise) and is expressed in degrees.
This is shown more clearly in the following figure.

1.7.31.24 Site Solar Altitude Angle [deg]

The Solar Altitude Angle (b) is the angle of the sun above the horizontal (degrees).
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 133

Figure 1.10: Solar Position Illustration

134 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.31.25 Site Solar Hour Angle [deg]

The Solar Hour Angle (H ) gives the apparent solar time for the current time period (degrees). It
is common astronomical practice to express the hour angle in hours, minutes and seconds of time
rather than in degrees. You can convert the hour angle displayed from EnergyPlus to time by
dividing by 15. (Note that 1 hour is equivalent to 15 degrees; 360° of the Earth’s rotation takes
place every 24 hours.) The relationship of angles in degrees to time is shown in the following table:

Table 1.12: Relationship of Angles (degrees) to Time

Unit of Angle Equivalent time

1 radian 3.819719 hours
1 degree 4 minutes
1 arcmin 4 seconds
1 arcsec 0.066667 seconds

1.7.31.26 Site Rain Status []

This field shows whether or not (1 = yes, 0 = no) the weather shows “raining”. For a Design Day,
one can denote rain for the entire day but not timestep by timestep. Weather files may indicate
rain for a single time interval. This is an “averaged” field – thus a 1 shown for a time period (e.g.
daily reporting) means that it was raining during each timestep of that period.

1.7.31.27 Site Snow on Ground Status []

This field shows whether or not (1 = yes, 0 = no) the weather shows “snow on the ground”. For
a Design Day, one can denote snow for the entire day but not timestep by timestep. Weather files
may indicate snow (snow depth) for a single time interval. This is an “averaged” field – thus a 1
shown for a time period (e.g. daily reporting) means that there was snow on the ground during
each timestep of that period.

1.7.31.28 Site Daylight Saving Time Status []

This field shows when daylight saving time (1 = yes, 0 = no) is in effect. Though shown as an
average variable, this value is only set on a daily basis.

1.7.31.29 Site Day Type Index []

This field shows what “day type” the current day is. Day types are (1 = Sunday, 2 = Monday, etc.)
with Holiday = 8, SummerDesignDay = 9, WinterDesignDay = 10, CustomDay1 = 11, CustomDay2
= 12. Though shown as an average variable, this value is only set on a daily basis.

1.7.31.30 Site Mains Water Temperature [C]

The value of the Water Mains Temperature is reported in C following the calculation shown in the
Water Mains Temperature object.
1.7. GROUP – LOCATION – CLIMATE – WEATHER FILE ACCESS 135

1.7.31.31 Site Precipitation Rate [m/s]

1.7.31.32 Site Precipitation Depth [m]
The rate and quantity of precipitation at the site. These outputs are only available if a Site
Precipitation object is used. Precipitation is measured in meters.

1.7.31.33 Water System Roof Irrigation Scheduled Depth[m]

This is the scheduled amount of irrigation for the green roof (ecoroof) based on the user input.
Amount is measured in meters.

1.7.31.34 Water System Roof Irrigation Actual Depth[m]

This is the actual amount of irrigation for the green roof (ecoroof) based on the scheduled user
input and moisture state/saturation of the soil. Amount is measured in meters.

1.7.32 Outputs for local temperature/wind speed calculations

Local atmospheric properties for outdoor air temperature and wind speed are separately calculated
and reported for all zones, surfaces, and outdoor air nodes. The output variables are associated
with their respective objects:

• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Wind Speed [m/s]

• Zone,Average,Surface Ext Outdoor Dry Bulb [C]

• Zone,Average,Surface Ext Outdoor Wet Bulb [C]

• Zone,Average,Surface Ext Wind Speed [m/s]

• HVAC,Average,System Node Temperature [C] (for OUTDOOR AIR NODE object)

1.7.32.1 Zone Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.

1.7.32.2 Zone Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor air wet-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.

1.7.32.3 Zone Outdoor Air Wind Speed [m/s]

The outdoor wind speed calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.
136 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.7.32.4 Surface Ext Outdoor Dry Bulb [C]

The outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.

1.7.32.5 Surface Ext Outdoor Wet Bulb [C]

The outdoor air wet-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.

1.7.32.6 Surface Ext Wind Speed [m/s]

The outdoor wind speed calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.

1.7.32.7 System Node Temperature [C]

When reporting for the OutdoorAir:Node object, this is the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature
calculated at the height above ground of the node, if height is specified in the input.

1.8 Group – Schedules

This group of objects allows the user to influence scheduling of many items (such as occupancy
density, lighting, thermostatic controls, occupancy activity). In addition, schedules are used to
control shading element density on the building.
EnergyPlus schedules consist of three pieces: a day description, a week description, and an
annual description. An optional element is the schedule type. Each description level builds off the
previous sub-level. The day description is simply a name and the values that span the 24 hours
in a day to be associated with that name. The week description also has an identifier (name) and
twelve additional names corresponding to previously defined day descriptions. There are names for
each individual day of the week plus holiday, summer design day, winter design day and two more
custom day designations. Finally, the annual schedule contains an identifier and the names and
FROM-THROUGH dates of the week schedules associate with this annual schedule. The annual
schedule can have several FROM-THROUGH date pairs. One type of schedule reads the values from
an external file to facilitate the incorporation of monitored data or factors that change throughout
the year.
Schedules are processed by the EnergyPlus Schedule Manager, stored within the Schedule Man-
ager and are accessed through module routines to get the basic values (timestep, hourly, etc).
Values are resolved at the Zone Timestep frequency and carry through any HVAC timesteps.

1.8.1 Day Type

A brief description of “Day Type” which is used in the SizingPeriod objects, RunPeriodCon-
trol:SpecialDays object, the Sizing objects and also used by reference in the Schedule:Week:Daily
object (discussed later in this section).
Schedules work on days of the week as well as certain specially designated days. Days of the week
are the normal – Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday and Saturday. Special
day types that can be designated are: Holiday, SummerDesignDay, WinterDesignDay, CustomDay1,
CustomDay2. These day types can be used at the user’s convenience to designate special scheduling
(e.g. lights, electric equipment, set point temperatures) using these days as reference.
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 137

For example, a normal office building may have normal “occupancy” rules during the weekdays
but significantly different use on weekend. For this, you would set up rules/schedules based on
the weekdays (Monday through Friday, in the US) and different rules/schedules for the weekend
(Saturday and Sunday, in the US). However, you could also specially designate SummerDesignDay
and WinterDesignDay schedules for sizing calculations. These schedules can be activated by setting
the Day Type field in the Design Day object to the appropriate season (SummerDesignDay for
cooling design calculations; WinterDesignDay for heating design calculations).
In a different building, such as a theater/playhouse, the building may only have occupancy
during certain weeks of the year and/or certain hours of certain days. If it was every week, you
could designate the appropriate values during the “regular” days (Sunday through Saturday). But
this would also be an ideal application for the “CustomDay1” and/or “CustomDay2”. Here you
would set the significant occupancy, lighting, and other schedules for the custom days and use
unoccupied values for the normal weekdays. Then, using a weather file and setting special day
periods as appropriate, you will get the “picture” of the building usage during the appropriate
periods.

1.8.2 ScheduleTypeLimits
Schedule types can be used to validate portions of the other schedules. Hourly day schedules,
for example, are validated by range – minimum/maximum (if entered) – as well as numeric type
(continuous or discrete). Annual schedules, on the other hand, are only validated for range – as the
numeric type validation has already been done.

1.8.2.1 Inputs
1.8.2.1.1 Field: Name
This alpha field should contain a unique (within the schedule types) designator. It is referenced
wherever Schedule Type Limits Names can be referenced.

1.8.2.1.2 Field: Lower Limit Value

In this field, the lower (minimum) limit value for the schedule type should be entered. If this
field is left blank, then the schedule type is not limited to a minimum/maximum value range.

1.8.2.1.3 Field: Upper Limit Value

In this field, the upper (maximum) limit value for the schedule type should be entered. If this
field is left blank, then the schedule type is not limited to a minimum/maximum value range.

1.8.2.1.4 Field: Numeric Type

This field designates how the range values are validated. Using Continuous in this field allows
for all numbers, including fractional amounts, within the range to be valid. Using Discrete in this
field allows only integer values between the minimum and maximum range values to be valid.

1.8.2.1.5 Field: Unit Type

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the schedule that
references the ScheduleTypeLimits object. It is used by IDF Editor to display the appropriate SI
138 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

and IP units. This field is not used by EnergyPlus. The available options are shown below. If none
of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless.

• Dimensionless
• Temperature
• DeltaTemperature
• PrecipitationRate
• Angle
• Convection Coefficient
• Activity Level
• Velocity
• Capacity
• Power
• Availability
• Percent
• Control
• Mode

Several IDF Examples will illustrate the use:

ScheduleTypeLimits ,Any Number; ! Not limited
ScheduleTypeLimits ,Fraction , 0.0 , 1.0 ,CONTINUOUS;
ScheduleTypeLimits ,Temperature ,-60,200, CONTINUOUS;
ScheduleTypeLimits ,Control Type ,0,4, DISCRETE;
ScheduleTypeLimits ,On/Off ,0,1, DISCRETE;

1.8.3 Day Schedules

The day schedules perform the assignment of pieces of information across a 24 hour day. This can
occur in various fashions including a 1-per hour assignment, a user specified interval scheme or a
list of values that represent an hour or portion of an hour.

1.8.4 Schedule:Day:Hourly
The Schedule:Day:Hourly contains an hour-by-hour profile for a single simulation day.

1.8.4.1 Inputs
1.8.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all DaySchedules) designation for this schedule. It is
referenced by WeekSchedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 139

1.8.4.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).

1.8.4.1.3 Field: Hour Values (1-24)

These fields contain the hourly values for each of the 24 hours in a day. (Hour field 1 represents
clock time 00:00:01 AM to 1:00:00 AM, hour field 2 is 1:00:01 AM to 2:00:00 AM, etc.) The values
in these fields will be passed to the simulation as indicated for “scheduled” items.
An IDF example:
Schedule:Day:Hourly , Day On Peak , Fraction ,
0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,1. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0. ,0.;

1.8.5 Schedule:Day:Interval
The Schedule:Day:Interval introduces a slightly different way of entering the schedule values for a
day. Using the intervals, you can shorten the “hourly” input of the “Schedule:Day:Hourly” object to
2 fields. And, more importantly, you can enter an interval that represents only a portion of an hour.
Schedule values are “given” to the simulation at the zone timestep, so there is also a possibility of
“interpolation” from the entries used in this object to the value used in the simulation.

1.8.5.1 Inputs
1.8.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all DaySchedules) designation for this schedule. It is
referenced by WeekSchedules to define the appropriate schedule values.

1.8.5.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).

1.8.5.1.3 Field: Interpolate to Timestep

Three possible inputs are available for this field: Average, Linear, and No. The default value is
No.
If “Average” is entered, it is used to apply values that aren’t coincident with the given timestep
(ref: Timestep) intervals. If “Average” is entered, then any intervals entered here will be interpo-
lated/averaged and that value will be used at the appropriate minute in the hour. For example, if
“Average” is entered and the interval is every 15 minutes (say a value of 0 for the first 15 minutes,
then .5 for the second 15 minutes) AND there is a 10 minute timestep for the simulation: the value
at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .25. In earlier versions of EnergyPlus,
this was the Yes option for the field.
If “No” is entered, then the value that occurs on the appropriate minute in the hour will be used
as the schedule value. For the same input entries but “no” for this field, the value at 10 minutes
will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .5. No is the default for this field.
140 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

If “Linear” is entered, then the value that is used is based on the linear interpolation between
successive values. With linear, if the value at 1:00 is 0.0 and the value at 2:00 is 10.0, with fifteen
minute timesteps, the value at 1:15 would be 2.5, the value at 1:30 would be 5.0 and the value at
1:45 would be 7.5.

1.8.5.1.4 Field-Set: Time and Value (extensible object)

To specify each interval, both an “until” time (which includes the designated time) and the
value must be given. This object is extensible, so additional pairs of the following two fields can be
added to the end of this object.

1.8.5.1.5 Field: Time

The value of each field should represent clock time (standard) in the format “Until: HH:MM”.
24 hour clock format (i.e. 1PM is 13:00) is used. Note that Until: 7:00 includes all times up through
07:00 or 7am.

1.8.5.1.6 Field: Value

This represents the actual value to be passed to the simulation at the appropriate timestep.
(Using interpolation value as shown above). Limits on the values are indicated by the Schedule
Type Limits Name field of this object.
And an example of use:
Schedule:Day:Interval ,
dd winter rel humidity , !- Name
Percent , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
No , !- Interpolate to Timestep
until: 24:00 , !- Time 1
74; !- Value Until Time 1

1.8.6 Schedule:Day:List
To facilitate possible matches to externally generated data intervals, this object has been included.
In similar fashion to the Schedule:Day:Interval object, this object can also include “sub-hourly”
values but must represent a complete day in its list of values.

1.8.6.1 Inputs

1.8.6.1.1 Field: Name

This field should contain a unique (within all day schedules) designation for this schedule. It is
referenced by week schedules to define the appropriate schedule values.

1.8.6.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 141

1.8.6.1.3 Field: Interpolate to Timestep

Three possible inputs are available for this field: Average, Linear, and No. The default value is
No.
If “Average” is entered, it is used to apply values that aren’t coincident with the given timestep
(ref: Timestep) intervals. If “Average” is entered, then any intervals entered here will be interpo-
lated/averaged and that value will be used at the appropriate minute in the hour. For example, if
“Average” is entered and the interval is every 15 minutes (say a value of 0 for the first 15 minutes,
then .5 for the second 15 minutes) AND there is a 10 minute timestep for the simulation: the value
at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .25. In earlier versions of EnergyPlus,
this was the Yes option for the field.
If “No” is entered, then the value that occurs on the appropriate minute in the hour will be used
as the schedule value. For the same input entries but “no” for this field, the value at 10 minutes
will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .5. No is the default for this field.
If “Linear” is entered, then the value that is used is based on the linear interpolation between
successive values. With linear, if the value at 1:00 is 0.0 and the value at 2:00 is 10.0, with fifteen
minute timesteps, the value at 1:15 would be 2.5, the value at 1:30 would be 5.0 and the value at
1:45 would be 7.5.

1.8.6.1.4 Field: Minutes Per Item

This field allows the “list” interval to be specified in the number of minutes for each item. The
value here must be < = 60 and evenly divisible into 60 (same as the timestep limits).

1.8.6.1.5 Field Value 1 (same definition for each value – up to 1440 (24*60) allowed)

This is the value to be used for the specified number of minutes.

For example:
Schedule:Day:List ,
Myschedule , ! name
Fraction , ! Schedule type
No , ! Interpolate value
30, ! Minutes per item
0.0, ! from 00:01 to 00:30
0.5, ! from 00:31 to 01:00
<snipped >

1.8.7 Week Schedule(s)

The week schedule object(s) perform the task of assigning the day schedule to day types in the
simulation. The basic week schedule is shown next.

1.8.8 Schedule:Week:Daily
1.8.8.1 Inputs
1.8.8.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (within all WeekSchedules) designation for this schedule. It
is referenced by Schedules to define the appropriate schedule values.
142 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.8.8.1.2 Field: Schedule Day Name Fields (12 day types – Sunday, Monday, … )
These fields contain day schedule names for the appropriate day types. Days of the week (or
special days as described earlier) will then use the indicated hourly profile as the actual schedule
value.
An IDF example:
Schedule:Week:Daily , Week on Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,
Day On Peak ,Day On Peak ,Day On Peak;

1.8.9 Schedule:Week:Compact
Further flexibility can be realized by using the Schedule:Week:Compact object. In this the fields,
after the name is given, a “for” field is given for the days to be assigned and then a dayschedule
name is used.

1.8.9.1 Inputs
1.8.9.1.1 Field:Name
This field should contain a unique (within all WeekSchedules) designation for this schedule. It
is referenced by Schedules to define the appropriate schedule values.

1.8.9.1.2 Field-Set – DayType List#, Schedule:Day Name #

Each assignment is made in a pair-wise fashion. First the “days” assignment and then the
dayschedule name to be assigned. The entire set of day types must be assigned or an error will
result.

1.8.9.1.3 Field: DayType List #

This field can optionally contain the prefix “For” for clarity. Multiple choices may then be
combined on the line. Choices are: Weekdays, Weekends, Holidays, Alldays, SummerDesignDay,
WinterDesignDay, Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday, Custom-
Day1, CustomDay2. In fields after the first “for”, AllOtherDays may also be used. Note that the
colon (:) after the For is optional but is suggested for readability.

1.8.9.1.4 Field: Schedule:Day Name #

This field contains the name of the day schedule (any of the Schedule:Day object names) that
is to be applied for the days referenced in the prior field.
Some IDF examples:
Schedule:Week:Compact , Week on Peak ,
For: AllDays ,
Day On Peak;

Schedule:Week:Compact , WeekDays on Peak ,

WeekDays ,
Day On Peak ,
AllOtherDays
Day Off Peak;
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 143

1.8.10 Schedule:Year
The yearly schedule is used to cover the entire year using references to week schedules (which in
turn reference day schedules). If the entered schedule does not cover the entire year, a fatal error
will result.

1.8.10.1 Inputs
1.8.10.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (between Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, and Sched-
ule:File) designation for the schedule. It is referenced by various “scheduled” items (e.g. Lights,
People, Infiltration) to define the appropriate schedule values.

1.8.10.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).

1.8.10.1.3 Field Set (WeekSchedule, Start Month and Day, End Month and Day)
Each of the designated fields is used to fully define the schedule values for the indicated time
period). Up to 53 sets can be used. An error will be noted and EnergyPlus will be terminated if an
incomplete set is entered. Missing time periods will also be noted as warning errors; for these time
periods a zero (0.0) value will be returned when a schedule value is requested. Each of the sets has
the following 5 fields:

1.8.10.1.4 Field: Schedule Week Name #

This field contains the appropriate WeekSchedule name for the designated time period.

1.8.10.1.5 Field: Start Month #

This numeric field is the starting month for the schedule time period.

1.8.10.1.6 Field: Start Day #

This numeric field is the starting day for the schedule time period.

1.8.10.1.7 Field: End Month #

This numeric field is the ending month for the schedule time period.

1.8.10.1.8 Field: End Day #

This numeric field is the ending day for the schedule time period.
Note that there are many possible periods to be described. An IDF example with a single
period:
Schedule:Year , On Peak , Fraction ,
Week On Peak , 1,1, 12 ,31;

And a multiple period illustration:

144 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Schedule:Year ,CoolingCoilAvailSched ,Fraction ,

FanAndCoilAllOffWeekSched , 1,1, 3,31,
FanAndCoilSummerWeekSched , 4,1, 9,30,
FanAndCoilAllOffWeekSched , 10,1, 12 ,31;

The following definition will generate an error (if any scheduled items are used in the simulation):
Schedule:Year ,MySchedule ,Fraction ,4,1,9,30;

1.8.11 Schedule:Compact
For flexibility, a schedule can be entered in “one fell swoop”. Using the Schedule:Compact object,
all the features of the schedule components are accessed in a single command. Like the “regular”
schedule object, each schedule:compact entry must cover all the days for a year. Additionally, the
validations for DaySchedule (i.e. must have values for all 24 hours) and WeekSchedule (i.e. must
have values for all day types) will apply. Schedule values are “given” to the simulation at the zone
timestep, so there is also a possibility of “interpolation” from the entries used in this object to the
value used in the simulation.
This object is an unusual object for description. For the data the number of fields and position
are not set, they cannot really be described in the usual Field # manner. Thus, the following
description will list the fields and order in which they must be used in the object. The name and
schedule type are the exceptions:

1.8.11.1 Inputs
1.8.11.1.1 Field: Name
This field should contain a unique (between Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, and Sched-
ule:File) designation for the schedule. It is referenced by various “scheduled” items (e.g. Lights,
People, Infiltration) to define the appropriate schedule values.

1.8.11.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).

1.8.11.1.3 Field-Set (Through, For, Interpolate, Until, Value)

Each compact schedule must contain the elements Through (date), For (days), Interpolate
(optional), Until (time of day) and Value. In general, each of the “titled” fields must include
the “title”. Note that the colon (:) after these elements (Through, For, Until) is optional but is
suggested for readability.

1.8.11.1.4 Field: Through

This field starts with “Through:” and contains the ending date for the schedule period (may be
more than one). Refer to Table 1.9. Date Field Interpretation for information on date entry – note
that only Month-Day combinations are allowed for this field. Each “through” field generates a new
WeekSchedule named “Schedule Name”_wk_# where # is the sequential number for this compact
schedule.
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 145

1.8.11.1.5 Field: For

This field starts with “For:” and contains the applicable days (reference the compact week
schedule object above for complete description) for the 24 hour period that must be described.
Each “for” field generates a new DaySchedule named “Schedule Name”_dy_# where # is the
sequential number for this compact schedule.

1.8.11.1.6 Field: Interpolate (optional)

This field, if used, starts with “Interpolate:” and contains the word “Average”, “Linear” or “No”.
If this field is not used, it should not be blank – rather just have the following field appear in this
slot.
If “Average” is entered, it is used to apply values that aren’t coincident with the given timestep
(ref: Timestep) intervals. If “Average” is entered, then any intervals entered here will be interpo-
lated/averaged and that value will be used at the appropriate minute in the hour. For example, if
“Average” is entered and the interval is every 15 minutes (say a value of 0 for the first 15 minutes,
then .5 for the second 15 minutes) AND there is a 10 minute timestep for the simulation: the value
at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .25. In earlier versions of EnergyPlus,
this was the Yes option for the field.
If “No” is entered, then the value that occurs on the appropriate minute in the hour will be used
as the schedule value. For the same input entries but “no” for this field, the value at 10 minutes
will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .5. No is the default for this field.
If “Linear” is entered, then the value that is used is based on the linear interpolation between
successive values. With linear, if the value at 1:00 is 0.0 and the value at 2:00 is 10.0, with fifteen
minute timesteps, the value at 1:15 would be 2.5, the value at 1:30 would be 5.0 and the value at
1:45 would be 7.5.

1.8.11.1.7 Field: Until

This field contains the ending time (again, reference the interval day schedule discussion above)
for the current days and day schedule being defined.

1.8.11.1.8 Field: Value

Finally, the value field is the schedule value for the specified time interval.
And, some IDF examples:
Schedule:Compact ,
POFF , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 4/30,
For: AllDays ,
Until: 24:00 , 1.0,
Through: 12/31 ,
For: Weekdays ,
Until: 7:00, .1,
Until: 17:00 , 1.0,
Until: 24:00 , .1,
For: Weekends Holidays ,
Until: 24:00 , .1,
For: AllOtherDays ,
Until: 24:00 , .1;

! Schedule Continuous
Schedule:Compact ,
Continuous ,
on/off ,
146 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Through: 12/31 ,
For: AllDays ,
Until: 24:00 , 1.0;

! Schedule Daytime Ventilation

Schedule:Compact ,
Daytime Ventilation ,
Fraction ,
Through: 12/31 ,
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay ,
Until: 08:00 , 0.0,
Until: 18:00 , 1.0,
Until: 24:00 , 0.0,
For: Weekends WinterDesignDay ,
Until: 10:00 , 0.0,
Until: 16:00 , 1.0,
Until: 24:00 , 0.0,
For: Holidays AllOtherDays ,
Until: 24:00 , 0.0;

1.8.12 Schedule:Constant
The constant schedule is used to assign a constant hourly value. This schedule is created when a
fixed hourly value is desired to represent a period of interest (e.g., always on operation mode for
supply air fan).

1.8.12.1 Inputs

1.8.12.1.1 Field: Name

This field should contain a unique name designation for this schedule. It is referenced by
Schedules to define the appropriate schedule value.

1.8.12.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).

1.8.12.1.3 Field: Hourly Value

This field contains a constant real value. A fixed value is assigned as an hourly value.
An IDF example:
Schedule:Constant ,
AlwaysOn , !- Name
On/Off , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
1.0; !- Hourly Value

ScheduleTypeLimits ,
On/Off , !- Name
0, !- Lower Limit Value
1, !- Upper Limit Value
DISCRETE , !- Numeric Type
Availability; !- Unit Type
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 147

1.8.13 Schedule:File
At times, data is available from a building being monitored or for factors that change throughout
the year. The Schedule:File object allows this type of data to be used in EnergyPlus as a schedule.
Schedule:File can also be used to read in hourly or sub-hourly schedules computed by other software
or developed in a spreadsheet or other utility.
The format for the data file referenced is a text file with values separated by commas (or other
optional delimiters) with one line per hour. The file may contain header lines that are skipped. The
file should contain values for an entire year (8760 or 8784 hours of data) or a warning message will
be issued. Multiple schedules may be created using a single external data file or multiple external
data files may be used. The first row of data must be for January 1, hour 1 (or timestep 1 for
subhourly files).
Schedule:File may be used along with the FuelFactors object and TDV files in the DataSets
directory to compute Time Dependent Valuation based source energy as used by the California
Energy Commission’s Title 24 Energy Code. See Fuel Factor for more discussion on Time Dependent
Valuation.
Two optional fields: Interpolate to Timestep and Minutes per Item allow for the input of
sub-hourly schedules (similar to the Schedule:Day:List object).

1.8.13.1 Inputs

1.8.13.1.1 Field: Name

This field should contain a unique (between Schedule:Year, Schedule:Compact, and Sched-
ule:File) designation for the schedule. It is referenced by various “scheduled” items (e.g. Lights,
People, Infiltration, FuelFactors) to define the appropriate schedule values.

1.8.13.1.2 Field: Schedule Type Limits Name

This field contains a reference to the Schedule Type Limits object. If found in a list of Schedule
Type Limits (see ScheduleTypeLimits object above), then the restrictions from the referenced object
will be used to validate the hourly field values (below).

1.8.13.1.3 Field: File Name

This field contains the name of the file that contains the data for the schedule. The field should
include a full path with file name, for best results. The field must be ≤ 100 characters. The file name
must not include commas or an exclamation point. A relative path or a simple file name should
work with version 7.0 or later when using EP-Launch even though EP-Launch uses temporary
directories as part of the execution of EnergyPlus. If using RunEPlus.bat to run EnergyPlus from
the command line, a relative path or a simple file name may work if RunEPlus.bat is run from the
folder that contains EnergyPlus.exe.

1.8.13.1.4 Field: Column Number

The column that contains the value to be used in the schedule. The first column is column one.
If no data for a row appears for a referenced column the value of zero is used for the schedule value
for that hour.
148 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.8.13.1.5 Field: Rows to Skip at Top

Many times the data in a file contains rows (lines) that are describing the files or contain the
names of each column. These rows need to be skipped and the number of skipped rows should be
entered for this field. The next row after the skipped rows must contain data for January 1, hour 1.

1.8.13.1.6 Field: Number of Hours of Data

The value entered in this field should be either 8760 or 8784 as the number of hours of data.
8760 does not include the extra 24 hours for a leap year (if needed). 8784 will include the possibility
of leap year data which can be processed according to leap year indicators in the weather file or
specified elsewhere. Note if the simulation does not have a leap year specified but the schedule file
contains 8784 hours of data, the first 8760 hours of data will be used. The schedule manager will
not know to skip the 24 hours representing February 29.

1.8.13.1.7 Field: Column Separator

This field specifies the character used to separate columns of data if the file has more than
one column. The choices are: Comma, Tab, Fixed (spaces fill each column to a fixed width), or
Semicolon. The default is Comma.

1.8.13.1.8 Field: Interpolate to Timestep

The value contained in this field directs how to apply values that aren’t coincident with the
given timestep (ref: TimeStep object) intervals. If “Yes” is entered, then any intervals entered here
will be interpolated/averaged and that value will be used at the appropriate minute in the hour. If
“No” is entered, then the value that occurs on the appropriate minute in the hour will be used as
the schedule value.
For example, if “yes” is entered and the minutes per item is 15 minutes (say a value of 0 for
the first 15 minutes, then .5 for the second 15 minutes) AND there is a 10 minute timestep for the
simulation: the value at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes will be .25. For the same
input entries but “no” for this field, the value at 10 minutes will be 0 and the value at 20 minutes
will be .5.

1.8.13.1.9 Field: Minutes Per Item

This field represents the number of minutes for each item – in this case each line of the file. The
value here must be ≤ 60 and evenly divisible into 60 (same as the timestep limits).
Here is an IDF example:
Schedule:File ,
elecTDVfromCZ01res , !- Name
Any Number , !- ScheduleType
TDV_kBtu_CTZ01.csv , !- Name of File
2, !- Column Number
4, !- Rows to Skip at Top
8760, !- Number of Hours of Data
Comma; !- Column Separator

or with a relational path:

Schedule:File ,
elecTDVfromCZ01res , !- Name
Any Number , !- ScheduleType
DataSets\TDV\TDV_kBtu_CTZ01.csv , !- Name of File
2, !- Column Number
4; !- Rows to Skip at Top
1.8. GROUP – SCHEDULES 149

A sub-hourly indication. Note that this is identical to an hourly file because there are 60 minutes
per item – the number of hours defaults to 8760 and the column separator defaults to a comma. If
the number of minutes per item had been, say, 15, then the file would need to contain 8760*4 or
35,040 rows for this item.
Schedule:File ,
elecTDVfromCZ06com , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
DataSets\TDV\ TDV_2008_kBtu_CTZ06 .csv , !- File Name
1, !- Column Number
4, !- Rows to Skip at Top
, !- Number of Hours of Data
, !- Column Separator
, !- Interpolate to Timestep
60; !- Minutes per Item

1.8.13.2 Outputs
An optional report can be used to gain the values described in the previous Schedule objects. This
is a condensed reporting that illustrates the full range of schedule values – in the style of input:
DaySchedule, WeekSchedule, Annual Schedule.
! will give them on hourly increments (day schedule resolution)
Output:Schedules , Hourly;
! will give them at the timestep of the simulation
Output:Schedules , Timestep;

This report is placed on the eplusout.eio file. Details of this reporting are shown in the Output
Details and Examples document.

1.8.13.2.1 Schedule Value Output

Zone ,Average ,Schedule Value {[]}

1.8.13.2.2 Schedule Value

This is the schedule value (as given to whatever entity that uses it). It has no units in this
context because values may be many different units (i.e. temperatures, fractions, watts). For best
results, you may want to apply the schedule name when you use this output variable to avoid output
proliferation. For example, the following reporting should yield the values shown above, depending
on day of week and day type:
Output:Variable ,People_Shopping_Sch ,Schedule Value ,hourly;
Output:Variable ,Activity_Shopping_Sch ,Schedule Value ,hourly;

1.8.14 Schedule:File:Shading
The Schedule:File:Shading object allows shading schedules to be imported altogether from a file
exported using ShadowCalculation Output External Shading Calculation Results. The object can
also be used to read in hourly or sub-hourly schedules of the sunlit fraction of all exterior surfaces
computed by other software or developed in a spreadsheet or other utility.
The format for the data file is Comma-separated values (CSV). The CSV file referenced is a
text file with values separated by commas (or other optional delimiters) with one line per timestep.
Each column stores the annual shading sunlit fraction schedule data of an exterior surface. The
150 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

sunlit fraction is only overwritten and used when the sun is above horizon at a certain time step. To
map to the surface, each column should name its column header exactly the same with the surface
name defined in the Surface:Detailed object. If any surface name is missing, the sunlit fraction
of this surface will be set to 1.0 during the run period, which means no shading will be assigned
for this surface, and a warning message will be issued. The file should contain values for an entire
year with the exact same number of rows as the total number of time steps in a year (number of
days in a year * number of hours per day * number of time steps per hour). Time step should be
consistent with the setting in the Timestep object. Otherwise, an error will be issued.
The first row of the CSV file should be the header, and the first column of the CSV file should
be the timestamp and is not imported.
With a Schedule:File:Shading object defined, the shading schedules for all exterior surfaces
(if defined) can be imported altogether without repeatedly defining Schedule:File objects.

1.8.14.1 Inputs
1.8.14.1.1 Field: File Name
This field contains the name of the file that contains the data for the shading schedules. The
field should include a full path with file name, for best results. The field must be ≤ 100 characters.
The file name must not include commas or an exclamation point. A relative path or a simple
file name should work with version 7.0 or later when using EP-Launch even though EP-Launch
uses temporary directories as part of the execution of EnergyPlus. If using RunEPlus.bat to run
EnergyPlus from the command line, a relative path or a simple file name may work if RunEPlus.bat
is run from the folder that contains EnergyPlus.exe.
Here is an IDF example:
Schedule:File ,
eplusshading.csv; !- Name of File

1.9 Group – Surface Construction Elements

This group of objects describes the physical properties and configuration for the building envelope
and interior elements. That is, the walls, roofs, floors, windows, doors for the building.

1.9.1 Specifying the Building Envelope

Building element constructions in EnergyPlus are built from the basic thermal and other mate-
rial property parameters in physical constructions. Materials are specified by types and named.
Constructions are defined by the composition of materials. Finally, surfaces are specified for the
building with geometric coordinates as well as referenced constructions.

1.9.2 Material and Material Properties

There are several material “types” which may be used to describe layers within opaque construction
elements. The choice of which of these types to use is left up to the user. However, some guidance
as to which material type to use is appropriate before describing each in detail. The opaque types
are:
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 151

• Material

• Material:NoMass

• Material:AirGap

• Material:RoofVegetation

• Material:InfraredTransparent

Material is the “preferred” type of material. This requires knowledge of many of the thermal
properties of the material, but it allows EnergyPlus to take into account the thermal mass of
the material and thus allows the evaluation of transient conduction effects. Material:NoMass is
similar in nature but only requires the thermal resistance (R-value) rather than the thickness,
thermal conductivity, density, and specific heat. Note that using a simple R-value only material
forces EnergyPlus to assume steady state heat conduction through this material layer. Finally,
Material:AirGap should only be used for an air gap between other layers in a construction. This
type assumes that air is sufficiently lightweight to require only an R-value. In addition, since it is
not exposed to any external environment, surface properties such as absorptance are not necessary.
Material:RoofVegetation is used to help model “green roofs”. Material:InfraredTransparent is used
similarly to the NoMass materials. Each of these materials is described in more detail below.
There are several material additions that can be made to the basic material properties. These
additional material types are:

• MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity

• MaterialProperty:PhaseChange

• MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis

These material property objects are used in conjunction with the basic material specification and
reference back to the name of the basic material type. Without the basic material type specified the
program, will give a severe error and terminate. For example, specifying the moisture materials and
changing the HeatBalanceAlgorithm to a moisture simulation will allow the moisture simulation to
take place.
152 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.3 Material
This definition should be used when the four main thermal properties (thickness, conductivity,
density, and specific heat) of the material are known. This syntax is used to describe opaque
construction elements only.
When a Material is used for the Construction of a building surface, care should be taken to
not attempt to model assemblies that were not included in the intended scope of applicability for
the underlying heat transfer models. The building surface models are for normal applications
to building energy efficiency where the main focus is on assemblies with some thermal resistance.
Extremely thin and/or highly conductive material layers should be neglected from the Construction
rather than included because they will not contribute to the assembly’s overall thermal resistance
or heat capacity. For some cases, thin and/or highly conductive materials are a serious problem
for the heat transfer modeling and the values for thickness, conductivity, density and specific heat
are checked for appropriateness. This check calculates the Material’s thermal diffusivity from the
inputs for conductivity, density, and specific heat and compares it to a maximum threshold of 1.E-5
(m2 /s). If the diffusivity is above this threshold, then the program checks if the layer is sufficiently
thick and may issue a warning if it is too thin and highly conductive.
The absorptance values in this object impart surface properties to the construction and should
be applied to the thermally significant inner and outer layers in the overall assembly. Attempting
to trick the program by modeling thin “paint” layers to apply surface properties is not a good idea;
the models were not intended to support such strategies.

1.9.3.1 Inputs
1.9.3.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).

1.9.3.1.2 Field: Roughness

This alpha field defines the relative roughness of a particular material layer. This parameter only
influences the convection coefficients, more specifically the exterior convection coefficient. A special
keyword is expected in this field with the options being “VeryRough”, “Rough”, “MediumRough”,
“MediumSmooth”, “Smooth”, and “VerySmooth” in order of roughest to smoothest options.

1.9.3.1.3 Field: Thickness

This field characterizes the thickness of the material layer in meters. This should be the dimen-
sion of the layer in the direction perpendicular to the main path of heat conduction. This value
must be a positive. Modeling layers thinner (less) than 0.003 m is not recommended;
rather, add those properties to one of the adjacent layers.

1.9.3.1.4 Field: Conductivity

This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer. Units for this pa-
rameter are W/(m-K). Thermal conductivity must be greater than zero. Modeling layers with
conductivity higher than 5.0 W/(m-K) is not recommended; however, this may be
appropriate for non-surfaces such as pipes and TDDs (ref. DaylightingDevice:Tubular
object).
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 153

1.9.3.1.5 Field: Density

This field is used to enter the density of the material layer in units of kg/m3 . Density must be
a positive quantity. In some cases textbooks and references may use g/m3 : be careful to
not confuse units.

1.9.3.1.6 Field: Specific Heat

This field represents the specific heat of the material layer in units of J/(kg-K). Note that these
units are most likely different than those reported in textbooks and references which tend to use
kJ/(kg-K) or J/(g-K). They were chosen for internal consistency within EnergyPlus. Only values
of specific heat of 100 or larger are allowed. Typical ranges are from 800 to 2000
J/(kg-K).

1.9.3.1.7 Field: Thermal Absorptance

The thermal absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident
long wavelength (>2.5 microns) radiation that is absorbed by the material. This parameter is
used when calculating the long wavelength radiant exchange between various surfaces and affects
the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). For long wavelength radiant
exchange, thermal emissivity and thermal emittance are equal to thermal absorptance. Values for
this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing “black body” conditions). The default
value for this field is 0.9.

1.9.3.1.8 Field: Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident solar
radiation that is absorbed by the material. Solar radiation (0.3 to 2.537 microns) includes the visible
spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating
the amount of incident solar radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat
balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). If solar reflectance (or reflectivity) data is
available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials). Values for this
field must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value for this field is 0.7.

1.9.3.1.9 Field: Visible Absorptance

The visible absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident
visible wavelength radiation that is absorbed by the material. Visible wavelength radiation ( 0.37
to 0.78 microns weighted by photopic response) is slightly different than solar radiation in that
the visible band of wavelengths is much more narrow while solar radiation includes the visible
spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating
the amount of incident visible radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat
balances (both inside and outside as appropriate) as well as the daylighting calculations. If visible
reflectance (or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for
opaque materials). Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value for this
field is 0.7.
An IDF example:

Material ,A2 - 4 IN DENSE FACE BRICK , ! Material Name

Rough , ! Roughness
0.1014984 , ! Thickness {m}
1.245296 , ! Conductivity {W/M*K}
154 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

2082.400 , ! Density {Kg/M**3}

920.4800 , ! Specific Heat {J/Kg*K}
0.9000000 , ! Thermal Absorptance
0.9300000 , ! Solar Absorptance
0.9300000 ; ! Visible Absorptance

1.9.4 Material:NoMass
Use this definition when only the thermal resistance (R value) of the material is known. This object
is used to describe opaque construction elements.

1.9.4.1 Inputs
1.9.4.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).

1.9.4.1.2 Field: Roughness

This alpha field defines the relative roughness of a particular material layer. This parameter only
influences the convection coefficients, more specifically the exterior convection coefficient. A key-
word is expected in this field with the options being “VeryRough”, “Rough”, “MediumRough”,
“MediumSmooth”, “Smooth”, and “VerySmooth” in order of roughest to smoothest options.

1.9.4.1.3 Field: Thermal Resistance

This field is used to enter the thermal resistance (R-value) of the material layer. Units for this
parameter are (m2 -K)/W. Thermal resistance must be greater than zero. Note that most R-values
in the USA are calculated in Inch-Pound units and must be converted to the SI equivalent.

1.9.4.1.4 Field: Thermal Absorptance

The thermal absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident
long wavelength (>2.5 microns) radiation that is absorbed by the material. This parameter is
used when calculating the long wavelength radiant exchange between various surfaces and affects
the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). For long wavelength radiant
exchange, thermal emissivity and thermal emittance are equal to thermal absorptance. Values for
this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing “black body” conditions). The default
value for this field is 0.9.

1.9.4.1.5 Field: Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident solar
radiation that is absorbed by the material. Solar radiation (0.3 to 2.537 microns) includes the visible
spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating
the amount of incident solar radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat
balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). If solar reflectance (or reflectivity) data is
available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials). Values for this
field must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value for this field is 0.7.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 155

1.9.4.1.6 Field: Visible Absorptance

The visible absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident
visible wavelength radiation that is absorbed by the material. Visible wavelength radiation ( 0.37
to 0.78 microns weighted by photopic response) is slightly different than solar radiation in that
the visible band of wavelengths is much more narrow while solar radiation includes the visible
spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating
the amount of incident visible radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat
balances (both inside and outside as appropriate) as well as the daylighting calculations. If visible
reflectance (or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for
opaque materials). Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0. The default value for this
field is 0.7.
An IDF example:

Material:NoMass ,R13LAYER , ! Material Name

Rough , ! Roughness
2.290965 , ! Resistance {M**2K/W}
0.9000000 , ! Thermal Absorptance
0.7500000 , ! Solar Absorptance
0.7500000 ; ! Visible Absorptance

1.9.5 Material:InfraredTransparent
A Infrared Transparent surface is similar to a resistance-only surface. The surface will actually
participate in the transfer of visible and solar radiation by doing a wavelength transformation and
making all short wave length radiation that is incident on the surface into long wave length radiation
and having it participate in the long wavelength radiant exchange. Note the ConvectionCoef-
ficient instructions that follow the Infrared Transparent construction object below.

1.9.5.1 Inputs
1.9.5.1.1 Field: Name
This field contains the unique name (across all Material objects) for the Infrared Transparent
material.
A Infrared Transparent surface should not participate in a convective/conductive exchange be-
tween the zones it separates. In order to minimize this effect, the ConvectionCoefficients object
must be used for the surfaces referencing the Infrared Transparent (IRT) construction.
An example idf object specification for use with the IRT surface is shown below. Note that
surfaces are not described in this example

Material:InfraredTransparent ,
IRTMaterial1; !- Name

Construction ,
IRTSurface , !- Name
IRTMaterial1; !- Outside Layer

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Bottom:Top , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
156 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}

, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
SecondLevel:Bottom , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
SecondLevel:Top , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
ThirdLevel:Bottom , !- SurfaceName
Outside , !- Convection Type 1
value , !- Convection Value Type 1
0.1, !- Convection value 1 {W/m2 -K}
, !- Convection Schedule 1
Inside , !- Convection Type 2
value , !- Convection Value Type 2
0.1; !- Convection value 2 {W/m2 -K}

1.9.6 Material:AirGap
This material is used to describe the air gap in an opaque construction element. Glass elements use
a different property (WindowGas) to describe the air between two glass layers.

1.9.6.1 Inputs
1.9.6.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).

1.9.6.1.2 Field: Thermal Resistance

This field is used to enter the thermal resistance (R-value) of the material layer. Units for this
parameter are (m2 -K)/W. Thermal resistance must be greater than zero. Note that most R-values
in the USA are calculated in Inch-Pound units and must be converted to the SI equivalent.
An IDF example:

Material:AirGap ,B1 - AIRSPACE RESISTANCE , ! Material Name

0.1603675 ; ! Resistance {M**2K/W}
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 157

1.9.7 MaterialProperty:MoisturePenetrationDepth:Settings
This material is used to describe the nine moisture material properties that are used in the EMPD
(Effective Moisture Penetration Depth) heat balance solution algorithm. The EMPD algorithm
is a simplified, lumped moisture model that simulates moisture storage and release from interior
surfaces. The model uses convective mass transfer coefficients that are determined by existing heat
and mass transfer relationships, e.g. the Lewis relation. The EMPD model includes two fictitious
layers of material with uniform moisture content: a surface layer, which accounts for short-term
moisture buffering, and a deep layer, which accounts for more slowly responding moisture buffering.
The model calculates the moisture transfer between the air and the surface layer and between the
surface layer and the deep layer. This moisture transfer impacts the zone humidity, and also impacts
the zone temperature through latent-to-sensible conversion from the heat of adsorption.
This moisture model is used when the appropriate EMPD moisture materials are specified and
the Solution Algorithm parameter is set to MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction.

1.9.7.1 Inputs
1.9.7.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data (ref: Construction object).

1.9.7.1.2 Field: Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor

The vapor diffusion resistance factor is the resistance to water vapor diffusion relative to the
resistance to water vapor diffusion in stagnant air. In other words, µ equals 1 for air, and is generally
greater than 1 for building materials.
The equation for µ is:
δperm,air
µ=
δperm
where δperm,air is the permeability of water vapor in air [kg/m-s-Pa], and δperm is the permeability
of water vapor in the material. The permeability of water vapor in air can be estimated as:

2 × 10−7 · T 0.81
δperm,air =
Pambient
where T is the temperature [C] and Pambient the ambient atmospheric pressure [Pa].

1.9.7.1.3 Fields: Moisture equilibrium constants

The next four fields, coefficients a, b, c, and d, define the sorption isotherm curve used for
building materials under equilibrium conditions. They define the relationship between the material’s
moisture content and the surface air relative humidity (ref: Effective Moisture Penetration Depth
(EMPD) Model in the Engineering Reference):

u = a · ϕb + c · ϕd
where
a, b, c, d = Coefficients to define the relationship between the material’s moisture content and
the surface air relative humidity
158 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

u = Moisture content defined as the mass fraction of water contained in a material, per mass of
dry material [kg/kg]
ϕ = Surface air relative humidity [0 to 1],

1.9.7.1.4 Field: Surface Layer Penetration Depth

The Surface Layer Penetration Depth is the fictitious thickness of the surface layer in meters,
and is used to calculate the volume of material that participates in short-term moisture transfer and
storage. This layer has a uniform moisture content, and can be considered a lumped-capacitance.
The penetration depth is based on the amount of material that interacts with the zone air when
subject to a cyclic relative humidity variation. It also impacts the mass transfer resistance between
the zone air and this layer, with thinner depths resulting in lower mass transfer resistances (ref:
Effective Moisture Penetration Depth (EMPD) Model in the Engineering Reference). For this reason
very small values can lead to instabilities depending on the timestep.The surface penetration depth
can be estimated with the following equation:
s
δperm Psat τsurf
dEM P D,surf = du
ρmaterial dϕ π

where
δperm = water vapor permeability in the material, kg/m-s-Pa (see Vapor diffusion resistance
factor above)
Psat = saturated vapor pressure at some nominal temperature, Pa
τsurf = cycle period of typical RH variations, s. 24 hours (87600 s) is often used.
ρmaterial = dry density of material, kg/m^3
du
dϕ
= slope of moisture soprtion curve, abϕb−1 + cdϕd−1
If this field is left blank or set to autocalculate, the above equation will be used to calculate
the surface layer penetration depth assuming a τsurf of 24 hours. To use a period different than
24 hours, the equation above can be used to calculate the penetration depth based on a different
value of τsurf . The penetration depth can also be entered as an empirical value, as in Woods and
Winkler, 2016. If calculating dEM P D,surf , the assumed value of τsurf should not be less than 4x the
simulation timestep to ensure an accurate and stable solution.

1.9.7.1.5 Field: Deep Layer Penetration Depth

The Deep Layer Penetration Depth is the fictitious thickness of the deep layer in meters, and
is used to calculate the volume of material that participates in long-term moisture transfer and
storage. This layer has a uniform moisture content, and can be considered a lumped-capacitance.
The deep penetration depth is based on the amount of material that interacts with the surface layer
when subject to cyclic relative humidity variation. The deep penetration depth can be estimated
with the following equation:
s
δperm Psat τdeep
dEM P D,deep = du
ρmaterial dϕ π

where each term is the same as the surface layer, except that the cycle period is different. This
is usually on the order of weeks for the deep layer.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 159

If this field is left blank or set to autocalculate, the above equation will be used to calculate
the deep layer penetration depth assuming a τdeep of three weeks. To use a period different than
3 weeks, the equation above can be used to calculate the penetration depth based on a different
value of τdeep . The penetration depth can also be entered as an empirical value, as in Woods and
Winkler, 2016.

1.9.7.1.6 Field: Coating Layer Thickness

The Coating Layer Thickness (in meters) adds an additional resistance between the surface layer
and the zone and represents a thin coating, such as paint, plaster, or other wall coverings.
This input is optional, and an input of zero implies no coating.

1.9.7.1.7 Field: Coating Layer Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor

The vapor diffusion resistance factor of the coating is the coating’s resistance to water vapor
diffusion relative to the resistance to water vapor diffusion in stagnant air (see Vapor diffusion
resistance factor section above).
This input is optional, and an input of zero implies no coating.
Below are two IDF examples:
This set of inputs can be used for aerated concrete (assuming linear sorption curve). Density,
input elsewhere, is 650 kg/m^3:
MaterialProperty: MoisturePenetrationDepth :Settings ,
Concrete , !- Name
6.55, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
0.066 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient a {dimensionless}
1, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient b {dimensionless}
0, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient c {dimensionless}
1, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient d {dimensionless}
0.007 , !- Surface Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.024 , !- Deep Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0, !- Coating Layer Thickness {m}
1; !- Coating Layer Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}

This set of inputs is for gypsum board with density 750 kg/m^3. This also assumes 2 coats of
latex paint:
MaterialProperty: MoisturePenetrationDepth :Settings ,
Concrete , !- Name
6.0, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
0.0065 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient a {dimensionless}
0.65, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient b {dimensionless}
0.022 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient c {dimensionless}
10, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient d {dimensionless}
0.021 , !- Surface Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.08, !- Deep Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.0003 , !- Coating Layer Thickness {m}
6000; !- Coating Layer Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}

Finally, here are values representing the empirical whole-house inputs from Woods et al., 2014
(see Engineering Reference). Density is 800 kg/m^3:
MaterialProperty: MoisturePenetrationDepth :Settings ,
Concrete , !- Name
8.0, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}
0.012 , !- Moisture Equation Coefficient a {dimensionless}
1, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient b {dimensionless}
0, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient c {dimensionless}
1, !- Moisture Equation Coefficient d {dimensionless}
0.019 , !- Surface Layer Penetration Depth {m}
0.113 , !- Deep Layer Penetration Depth {m}
160 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0, !- Coating Layer Thickness {m}

1; !- Coating Layer Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor {dimensionless}

Other materials inputs can be estimated using the equations above and material properties
from a variety of sources, such as Kumaran, 1996, the WUFI simulation software, or the ASHRAE
1018-RP report.

1.9.7.2 Outputs
1.9.7.2.1 EMPD Surface Inside Face Water Vapor Density [kg/m3]
The vapor density at the inside face of the surface, where the EMPD moisture balance solution
algorithm is applied. This is the actual surface, separated from the zone air only by the convective
mass transfer coefficient.
Units are kg of water per cubic meter of air.

1.9.7.2.2 EMPD Surface Layer Moisture Content [kg/kg]

The moisture content, u, of the fictitious surface layer. The surface layer node is not at the
actual surface, but is instead at the center of surface layer, which has a uniform moisture content.
This node is separated from the inside face of the surface by a diffusive resistance, as described in
the Engineering Reference.
Units are kg of water per kg of solid material (e.g., gypsum).

1.9.7.2.3 EMPD Deep Layer Moisture Content [kg/kg]

The moisture content, u, of the fictitious deep layer. The deep layer node interacts only with
the surface layer node through a diffusive resistance.
Units are kg of water per kg of solid material.

1.9.7.2.4 EMPD Surface Layer Equivalent Relative Humidity [%]

The equivalent relative humidity of the surface layer, converted from the surface-layer moisture
content discussed above and the surface temperature. The moisture content is related to the relative
humidity through the slope of the moisture curve, the surface penetration depth, and the material
density, as discussed in the engineering reference.

1.9.7.2.5 EMPD Deep Layer Equivalent Relative Humidity [%]

The equivalent relative humidity of the deep layer, converted from the deep-layer moisture
content discussed above and the surface temperature.

1.9.7.2.6 EMPD Surface Layer Equivalent Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The equivalent humidity ratio of the surface layer. Units are kg of water per kg of dry air.

1.9.7.2.7 EMPD Deep Layer Equivalent Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The equivalent humidity ratio of the deep layer. Units are kg of water per kg of dry air.

1.9.7.2.8 EMPD Surface Moisture Flux to Zone [kg/m2-s]

The mass flux of water vapor from the surface layer of a specific surface to the zone air. A
positive mass flux is from the surface to the zone.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 161

1.9.7.2.9 EMPD Deep Layer Moisture Flux [kg/m2-s]

The mass flux of water vapor from the deep layer of a specific surface to the surface layer of
that surface. A positive flux is from the surface layer to the deep layer.

1.9.8 MaterialProperty:PhaseChange
Advanced/Research Usage: This material is used to describe the temperature dependent mate-
rial properties that are used in the Conduction Finite Difference solution algorithm. This conduction
model is done when the appropriate materials are specified and the Solution Algorithm parame-
ter is set toConductionFiniteDifference. This permits simulating temperature dependent thermal
conductivity and phase change materials (PCM) in EnergyPlus.

1.9.8.1 Inputs
1.9.8.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a regular material name specifying the material with which this additional temper-
ature dependent property information will be associated.

1.9.8.1.2 Field: Temperature Coefficient for Thermal Conductivity

This field is used to enter the temperature dependent coefficient for thermal conductivity of
the material. Units for this parameter are (W/(m-K2 ). This is the thermal conductivity change
per unit temperature excursion from 20 C. The conductivity value at 20 C is the one specified
with the basic material properties of the regular material specified in the name field. The thermal
conductivity is obtained from:

k = ko + k1 (Ti − 20) (1.13)

where:
ko is the 20C value of thermal conductivity(normal idf input)
k1 is the change in conductivity per degree temperature difference from 20C

1.9.8.1.3 Field Set: Temperature-Enthalpy

The temperature – enthalpy set of inputs specify a two column tabular temperature-enthalpy
function for the basic material. Sixteen pairs can be specified. Specify only the number of pairs
necessary. The tabular function must cover the entire temperature range that will be seen by the
material in the simulation. It is suggested that the function start at a low temperature, and extend
to 100C. Note that the function has no negative slopes and the lowest slope that will occur is the base
material specific heat. Temperature values should be strictly increasing. Enthalpy contributions of
the phase change are always added to the enthalpy that would result from a constant specific heat
base material. An example of a simple enthalpy temperature function is shown below.

1.9.8.1.4 Field: Temperature x

This field is used to specify the temperature of the temperature-enthalpy function for the basic
material. Units are C.
162 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.11: Temp-Enth Example

1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 163

1.9.8.1.5 Field: Enthalpy x

This field specifies the enthalpy that corresponds to the previous temperature of the temperature-
enthalpy function. Units are J/kg.
And, an IDF example showing how it is used in conjunction with the Material:
Note, the following Heat Balance Algorithm is necessary (only specified once). Also, when using
ConductionFiniteDifference, it is more efficient to set the zone timestep shorter than those used for
the ConductionTransferFunction solution algorithm. It should be set to 12 timesteps per hour or
greater, and can range up to 60.

HeatBalanceAlgorithm ,
ConductionFiniteDifference ;

Timestep ,
12;

Material ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.9050000E-02, !- Thickness {m}
0.7264224 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
1601.846 , !- Density {kg/m3}
836.8000 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9000000 , !- Thermal Absorptance
0.9200000 , !- Solar Absorptance
0.9200000; !- Visible Absorptance

MaterialProperty:PhaseChange ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
0.0, !- Temperature coefficient ,thermal conductivity(W/m K2)
-20., !- Temperature 1, C
0.01, !- Enthalpy 1 at –20C, (J/kg)
20., !- Temperature 2, C
33400 , !- Enthalpy 2, (J/kg)
20.5, !- temperature 3, C
70000 , !- Enthalpy 3, (J/kg)
100., !- Temperature 4, C
137000; !- Enthalpy 4, (J/kg)

1.9.9 MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis
This object is used to describe an advanced level of physics belonging to phase change materials
used in building envelopes. The base phase change input object describes a single process curve
whereby a material moves from a crystallized to liquid state and back. This input object adds a
hysteresis effect, allowing the melting/freezing process to follow different curves, representing an
effect that is commonly seen in actual building envelope phase change material applications. This
object also allows users to enter characteristic properties of the processes instead of a detailed
temperature/enthalpy curve, making it more amenable for studies in which the user does not have
the detailed test data required to generate the temperature/enthalpy curve. For more information
on the use of phase change materials (PCM) with hysteresis, see the Conduction Finite Difference
Solution Algorithm section of the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference document.
164 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.9.1 Inputs
The MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis object includes the following inputs. For the charac-
teristic curve properties, see the engineering reference.

1.9.9.1.1 Field: Name

This input must match the name of a material defined elsewhere within EnergyPlus. The
thermal properies of that material are then overridden by the properties defind in this object.

1.9.9.1.2 Field: Latent Heat during the Entire Phase Change Process
This is the total amount of latent heat absorbed or discharged during the transition from solid
to liquid or back, in Joules. The shapes of the enthalpy curves differ based on direction, but the
total amount of energy from one state to the other does not.

1.9.9.1.3 Field: Liquid State Thermal Conductivity

This is the constant thermal conductivity used while the material is fully liquid, in W/m-K.

1.9.9.1.4 Field: Liquid State Density

This is the constant density while the material is fully liquid, in kg/m3.

1.9.9.1.5 Field: Liquid State Specific Heat

This is the constant specific heat while the material is fully liquid, in J/kg-K.

1.9.9.1.6 Field: High Temperature Difference of Melting Curve

This is the width of the enthalpy/specific heat melting curve, on the high side of the peak
melting temperature, in Celsius (technically it is “change in Celsius”).

1.9.9.1.7 Field: Peak Melting Temperature

This is the center (peak) of the melting curve, in Celsius.

1.9.9.1.8 Field: Low Temperature Difference of Melting Curve

This is the width of the enthalpy/specific heat melting curve, on the low side of the peak melting
temperature, in Celsius (technically it is “change in Celsius”).

1.9.9.1.9 Field: Solid State Thermal Conductivity

This is the constant thermal conductivity used while the material is fully solid, in W/m-K.

1.9.9.1.10 Field: Solid State Density

This is the constant density while the material is fully solid, in kg/m3.

1.9.9.1.11 Field: Solid State Specific Heat

This is the constant specific heat while the material is fully crystallized, in J/kg-K.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 165

1.9.9.1.12 Field: High Temperature Difference of Freezing Curve

This is the width of the enthalpy/specific heat freezing curve, on the high side of the peak
freezing temperature, in Celsius (technically it is “change in Celsius”).

1.9.9.1.13 Field: Peak Freezing Temperature

This is the center (peak) of the freezing curve, in Celsius. This will generally be lower than
the peak melting temperature based on empirical data. Note, however, that EnergyPlus does allow
users to specify a peak freezing temperature that is higher than the peak melting temperature.

1.9.9.1.14 Field: Low Temperature Difference of Freezing Curve

This is the width of the enthalpy/specific heat freezing curve, on the low side of the peak freezing
temperature, in Celsius (technically it is “change in Celsius”).
An IDF example using hysteresis in conjunction with an actual Material definition is shown
below. This example includes the specification of the Heat Balance Algorithm and Timestep to
show appropriate values for these inputs when MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis is used.
Heat Balance Algorithm and Timestep are only specified once in a particular idf file. Note that
when using ConductionFiniteDifference, it is more efficient to set the zone timestep shorter than
those used for the ConductionTransferFunction solution algorithm. It should be set to 12 timesteps
per hour or greater and can range up to 60.

HeatBalanceAlgorithm , ConductionFiniteDifference ;

Timestep , 12;

Material ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.9050000E-02, !- Thickness {m}
0.7264224 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
1601.846 , !- Density {kg/m3}
836.8000 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9000000 , !- Thermal Absorptance
0.9200000 , !- Solar Absorptance
0.9200000; !- Visible Absorptance

MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis ,
E1 - 3 / 4 IN PLASTER OR GYP BOARD , !- Name
10000 , !- Latent Heat of Fusion {J/kg}
0.5, !- Liquid State Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1500, !- Liquid State Density {kg/m3}
2000, !- Liquid State Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
1, !- High Temperature Difference of Melting Curve {deltaC}
23, !- Peak Melting Temperature {C}
1, !- Low Temperature Difference of Melting Curve {deltaC}
0.5, !- Solid State Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1600, !- Solid State Density {kg/m3}
2000, !- Solid State Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
1, !- High Temperature Difference of Freezing Curve {deltaC}
20, !- Peak Freezing Temperature {C}
1; !- Low Temperature Difference of Freezing Curve {deltaC}

1.9.9.2 Outputs
The MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis object also includes the following outputs. The Con-
duction Finite Difference solution algorithm uses a finite difference solution technique where the
166 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

surfaces are divided into a nodal arrangement. These outputs are specific to Conduction Finite
Difference solution.
The following output variables are applicable to all opaque heat transfer surfaces when using
Solution Algorithms ConductionFiniteDifference. Note that the “X” in the list and descriptions
below must be replaced by a number that indicates the node at which the variables are being
reported. So, for example, to report the surface temperature for node 7, one would use “CondFD
Surface Temperature Node 7”.

• Zone,Average,CondFD Phase Change State <X> []

• Zone,Average,CondFD Phase Change Previous State <X> []
• Zone,Average,CondFD Phase Change Node Temperature <X> [C]
• Zone,Average,CondFD Phase Change Node Conductivity <X> [W/m-K]
• Zone,Average,CondFD Phase Change Node Specific Heat <X> [J/kg-K]

1.9.9.2.1 CondFD Phase Change State []

This outputs the current phase classification for the node. The values for this output relate to
the following phase categories:

• -2 = liquid
• -1 = melting
• 0 = transition
• 1 = freezing
• 2 = crystallized

1.9.9.2.2 CondFD Phase Change Previous State []

This outputs the previous phase classification for the node. The values for this output are the
same as for the output CondFD Phase Change State above.

1.9.9.2.3 CondFD Phase Change Node Temperature <X> [C]

This will output temperatures for a node in the surfaces being simulated with Conduction-
FiniteDifference. The nodes are numbered from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing
will appear in the RDD file. This output is specific to surfaces that use the Conduction Finite Dif-
ference solution technique and have a MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis object in the input
file. The units for this output field are degrees Celsius.

1.9.9.2.4 CondFD Phase Change Node Conductivity <X> [W/m-K]

This will output the conductivity for a node in the surfaces being simulated with Conduction-
FiniteDifference. The nodes are numbered from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing
will appear in the RDD file. This output is specific to surfaces that use the Conduction Finite Dif-
ference solution technique and have a MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis object in the input
file. The units for this output field are W/m-K.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 167

1.9.9.2.5 CondFD Phase Change Node Specific Heat <X> [J/kg-K]

This will output the specific heat for a node in the surfaces being simulated with Conduction-
FiniteDifference. The nodes are numbered from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing
will appear in the RDD file. This output is specific to surfaces that use the Conduction Finite Dif-
ference solution technique and have a MaterialProperty:PhaseChangeHysteresis object in the input
file. The units for this output field are J/kg-K.

1.9.10 MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity
This object is used to describe the temperature dependent material properties that are used in the
CondFD (Conduction Finite Difference) solution algorithm. This conduction model is used when
the appropriate CondFD materials are specified and the Solution Algorithm parameter is set to
condFD.

1.9.10.1 Inputs
1.9.10.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a regular material name specifying the material with which this additional temper-
ature dependent property information will be associated.

1.9.10.1.2 Field Set: Temperature-Thermal Conductivity

The temperature – conductivity set of inputs specify a two column tabular temperature-thermal
conductivity function for the basic material. Ten pairs can be specified. Specify only the number
of pairs necessary. Temperature values should be strictly increasing.

1.9.10.1.3 Field: Temperature x

This field is used to specify the temperature of the temperature-conductivity function for the
basic material. Units are C.

1.9.10.1.4 Field: Thermal Conductivity x

This field specifies the conductivity that corresponds to the temperature (previous field) of the
temperature-conductivity function. Units are W/m-K.
And, an IDF example showing how it is used in conjunction with the Materials:
Note, the following Heat Balance Algorithm is necessary (only specified once). Also, when using
Conduction Finite Difference, it is more efficient to set the zone time step shorter than those used
for the Conduction Transfer Function solution algorithm. It should be set to 12 time steps per hour
or greater, and can range up to 60.

HeatBalanceAlgorithm ,
ConductionFiniteDifference ;

Timestep ,
12;

Material ,
PCMPlasterBoard , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.9050000E-02, !- Thickness {m}
168 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

4.2, !- Conductivity {W/m-K}

1601.846 , !- Density {kg/m3}
836.8000 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9000000 , !- Thermal Absorptance
0.9200000 , !- Solar Absorptance
0.9200000; !- Visible Absorptance

MaterialProperty:VariableThermalConductivity ,
PCMPlasterBoard , !- Name
0, !- Temperature 1 {C}
4.2, !- Thermal Conductivity 1 {W/m-K}
22, !- Temperature 2 {C}
4.2, !- Thermal Conductivity 2 {W/m-K}
22.1, !- Temperature 3 {C}
2.5, !- Thermal Conductivity 3 {W/m-K}
100, !- Temperature 4 {C}
2.5; !- Thermal Conductivity 4 {W/m-K}

1.9.10.2 Outputs
The Conduction Finite Difference solution algorithm uses a finite difference solution technique where
the surfaces are divided into a nodal arrangement. These outputs are specific to Conduction Finite
Difference solution.
The following output variables are applicable to all opaque heat transfer surfaces when using
Solution Algorithms ConductionFiniteDifference. Note that the “X” in the list and descriptions
below must be replaced by a number that indicates the Node at which the variables are being
reported. So, for example, to report the surface temperature for node 7, one would use “CondFD
Surface Temperature Node 7”.

• Zone,Sum,CondFD Inner Solver Loop Iteration Count []

• Zone,Average,CondFD Surface Temperature Node <X> [C]

• Zone,Average,CondFD Surface Heat Flux Node <X> [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance Outer Half Node <X> [W/m2-K]

• Zone,Average,CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance Inner Half Node <X> [W/m2-K]

1.9.10.2.1 CondFD Inner Solver Loop Iteration Count []

This outputs the count of iterations on the inner solver loop of CondFD for each surface.

1.9.10.2.2 CondFD Surface Temperature Node <X> [C]

This will output temperatures for a node in the surfaces being simulated with ConductionFinite-
Difference. The key values for this output variable are the surface name. The nodes are numbered
from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing will appear in the RDD file.

1.9.10.2.3 CondFD Surface Heat Flux Node <X> [W/m2]

This will output heat flux at each node in surfaces being simulated with ConductionFiniteD-
ifference. The key values for this output variable are the surface name. The nodes are numbered
from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing will appear in the RDD file. A positive value
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 169

indicates heat flowing towards the inside face of the surface. Note that this matches the sign con-
vention for Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area and is opposite the sign
of Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area.

1.9.10.2.4 CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance Outer Half Node <X> [W/m2-K]

1.9.10.2.5 CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance Inner Half Node <X> [W/m2-K]
These will output the half-node heat capacitance in surfaces being simulated with Conduc-
tionFiniteDifference. The key values for this output variable are the surface name. The nodes are
numbered from outside to inside of the surface. The full listing will appear in the RDD file. For this
output, the heat capacitance is defined as the product of specific heat, density, and node thickness.
Zero is reported for R-layer half-nodes and for undefined half-nodes. There is no outer half-node for
Node 1 which is the outside face of the surface, and there is no inner half-node for Node N which
is the inside face of the surface. CondFD Surface Heat Capacitance is only available when the user
includes a Output:Diagnostics, DisplayAdvancedReportVariables designation in the input file.

1.9.11 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings
Advanced/Research Usage: This object is used to describe two of the seven additional ma-
terial properties needed for the CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution
algorithm. The settings object is used when the solutions algorithm is set to CombinedHeatAnd-
MoistureFiniteElement and the appropriate material properties are assigned to each material. This
permits the simulation of the moisture dependent thermal properties of the material as well as the
transfer of moisture through, into and out of the material into the zone or exterior.
In addition to the Porosity and Initial Water content properties described here, five additional
properties, described by tabulated relationships between variables, are required. These properties
are;

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion

• MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity

All materials in a construction are required to have all material properties defined for HAMT
to work.
Within the MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Settings object the following fields are
defined.

1.9.11.1 Inputs
1.9.11.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.
170 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.11.1.2 Field: Porosity

The porosity of a material is the maximum fraction, by volume, of a material that can be taken
up with water. The units are [m3/m3].

1.9.11.1.3 Field: Initial Water Content Ratio

For this solution algorithm, the initial water content is assumed to be distributed evenly through
the depth of the material. The units are [kg/kg].
Below is an example input for the porosity and initial water content of a material.

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer :Settings ,

Concrete , !- Name
0.76, !- Porosity
0.2; !- Initial (or typical) Water content

1.9.12 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:SorptionIsotherm
Advanced/Research Usage: This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The Isotherm data relates the moisture, or water content [kg/m3] of a material with the relative
humidity (RH). The water content is expected to increase as relative humidity increases, starting
at zero content at 0.0relative humidity fraction and reaching a maximum, defined by the porosity,
at 1.0 relative humidity fraction, which corresponds to 100% relative humidity. Relative humidities
are entered as fraction for this object ranging from 0.0 to 1.0. These two extremes (0.0 and 1.0) are
automatically set by the HAMT solution. However, if they are entered they will be used as extra
data points. Data should be provided with increasing RH and moisture content up to as high an
RH as possible to provide a stable solution. One possible reason for the following error message
may be that a material has a very rapid increase in water content for a small change in RH, which
can happen if the last entered water content point is at a low RH and the material has a very high
porosity.
** Warning ** HeatAndMoistureTransfer : Large Latent Heat for Surface ROOF

Another potential reason for this error being generated is the use of inappropriate values for
Vapor Transfer Coefficients. See the SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients object in the Advanced
Surface Concepts group.

1.9.12.1 Inputs
1.9.12.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.

1.9.12.1.2 Field: Number of data Coordinates

A maximum of 25 coordinates can be specified.

1.9.12.1.3 Field Set: Relative Humidity-Moisture Content

1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 171

1.9.12.1.4 Field: Relative Humidity Fraction x

The relative humidity of the xth coordinate. The relative humidity is entered as fraction, not in
percent.

1.9.12.1.5 Field: Moisture Content x

The Moisture Content of the xth coordinate. The units are [kg/m3]
Below is an example input for a material isotherm

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer :SorptionIsotherm ,

Concrete , !- Name
10, !- Number of data Coordinates
0.2205 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #1
22.31 , !- Moisture content #1
0.202 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #2
19.665 , !- Moisture content #2
0.449 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #3
40.02 , !- Moisture content #3
0.454 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #4
36.915 , !- Moisture content #4
0.6506 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #5
56.005 , !- Moisture content #5
0.655 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #6
52.325 , !- Moisture content #6
0.824 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #7
72.565 , !- Moisture content #7
0.8725 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #8
85.1, !- Moisture content #8
0.924 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #9
91.08 , !- Moisture content #9
0.964 , !- Relative Humidity fraction #10
100.28; !- Moisture content #10

1.9.13 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Suction
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The suction data relates the liquid transport coefficient, under suction, to the water content
of a material. A data point at zero water content is required. The liquid transport coefficient at
the highest entered water content value is used for all liquid transport coefficient values above this
water content. These coefficients are used by HAMT when the rain flag is set in the weather file.

1.9.13.1 Inputs
1.9.13.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.

1.9.13.1.2 Field: Number of Suction points

A maximum of 25 points can be specified.

1.9.13.1.3 Field Set: Moisture Content-Liquid Transport Coefficient

172 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.13.1.4 Field: Moisture Content x

The moisture content of the xth point. The units are [kg/m3].

1.9.13.1.5 Field: Liquid Transport Coefficient x

The Liquid Transport Coefficient of the xth point. The units are [m2/s].
Below is an example input for a material liquid transport coefficient under suction.

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer :Suction ,

Concrete , !- Name
5, !- Number of Suction points
0, !- Moisture content 1
0, !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 1
72, !- Moisture content 2
0.0000000000741 , !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 2
85, !- Moisture content 3
0.000000000253 , !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 3
100, !- Moisture content 4
0.00000000101 , !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 4
118, !- Moisture content 5
0.00000000128; !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 5

1.9.14 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Redistribution
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The redistribution data relates the liquid transport coefficient to the water content of a material
under normal conditions. A data point at zero water content is required. The liquid transport
coefficient at the highest entered water content value is used for all liquid transport coefficient
values above this water content. These coefficients are used by the Heat and Moisture Transfer
algorithm when the rain flag is NOT set in the weather file.

1.9.14.1 Inputs
1.9.14.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.

1.9.14.1.2 Field: Number of Redistribution points

A maximum of 25 points can be specified.

1.9.14.1.3 Field Set: Moisture Content– Liquid Transport Coefficient

1.9.14.1.4 Field: Moisture Content x

The moisture content of the xth point. The units are [kg/m3].

1.9.14.1.5 Field: Liquid Transport Coefficient x

The Liquid Transport Coefficient of the xth point. The units are [m2/s].
Below is an example input for the object.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 173

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer :Redistribution ,

Concrete , !- Name
5, !- Number of Redistribution points
0, !- Moisture content 1
0, !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 1
72, !- Moisture content 2
0.00000000000741 , !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 2
85, !- Moisture content 3
0.0000000000253 , !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 3
100, !- Moisture content 4
0.000000000101 , !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 4
118, !- Moisture content 5
0.000000000128; !- Liquid Transport Coefficient 5

1.9.15 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:Diffusion
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The MU data relates the vapor diffusion resistance factor (dimensionless) to the relative humidity
as fraction(RH). A data point at zero RH is required. The vapor diffusion resistance factor at the
highest entered relative humidity (RH) value is used for all vapor diffusion resistance factor values
above this RH. The relative humidity maximum value in fraction is 1.0.

1.9.15.1 Inputs
1.9.15.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.

1.9.15.1.2 Field: Number of Data Pairs

A maximum of 25 pairs can be specified.

1.9.15.1.3 Field Set: Relative Humidity-Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor

1.9.15.1.4 Field: Relative Humidity Fraction #x

The moisture content of the xth pair. The relative humidity is entered as fraction, not in percent.

1.9.15.1.5 Field: Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor #x

The Liquid Transport Coefficient of the xth pair.
Below are some examples of the values for materials.

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer :Diffusion ,

Plywood , !- Name
3, !- Number of data Points
0, !- Relative Humidity Fraction 1
700, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor 1
0.5, !- Relative Humidity Fraction 2
200, !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor 2
1, !- Relative Humidity Fraction 3
20; !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor 3

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer :Diffusion ,

Concrete , !- Name
174 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1, !- Number of Mu Points
0, !- Relative Humidity Fraction 1
180; !- Water Vapor Diffusion Resistance Factor 1

1.9.16 MaterialProperty:HeatAndMoistureTransfer:ThermalConductivity
Advanced/Research Usage:This material property is used in conjunction with the Combined-
HeatAndMoistureFiniteElement heat balance solution algorithm.
The thermal data relates the thermal conductivity [W/m-K] of a material to the moisture or
water content [kg/m3]. A data point at zero water content is required. The thermal conductivity
at the highest entered water content value is used for all thermal conductivity values above this
water content. If this object is not defined for a material then the algorithm will use a constant
value entered in the Material object for all water contents.

1.9.16.1 Inputs
1.9.16.1.1 Field: Material Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.

1.9.16.1.2 Field: Number of Thermal Coordinates

A maximum of 25 coordinates can be specified.

1.9.16.1.3 Field Set: Moisture Content- Thermal Conductivity

1.9.16.1.4 Field: Moisture Content x

The moisture content of the xth coordinate. The units are [kg/m3]

1.9.16.1.5 Field: Thermal Conductivity x

The Thermal Conductivity of the xth coordinate. The units are [W/m-K]
Below is an example of values for a material.

MaterialProperty: HeatAndMoistureTransfer : ThermalConductivity

Concrete , !- Name
2, !- Number of Thermal Coordinates
0, !- Moisture content \#1
1.6, !- Thermal Conductivity \#1
180, !- Moisture content \#2
2.602; !- Thermal Conductivity \#2

1.9.16.2 Surface Outputs

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Average Water Content Ratio [kg/kg]

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Inside Face Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Inside Face Relative Humidity [%]

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Inside Face Vapor Pressure [Pa]

1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 175

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Outside Face Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Outside Face Relative Humidity [%]

1.9.16.2.1 HAMT Surface Average Water Content Ratio [kg/kg]

This output is the summed water content [kg/kg] of all cells in a surface expressed as a fraction
of the mass of the water to the material mass.

1.9.16.2.2 HAMT Surface Inside Face Temperature [C]

This output is the temperature [C] on the internal “surface” of the surface.

1.9.16.2.3 HAMT Surface Inside Face Relative Humidity [%]

1.9.16.2.4 HAMT Surface Inside Face Relative Humidity [%]

This output is the relative humidity on the internal “surface” of the surface expressed as a
percentage.

1.9.16.2.5 HAMT Surface Inside Face Vapor Pressure [Pa]

This output is the vapor pressure [Pa] on the internal “surface” of the surface.

1.9.16.2.6 HAMT Surface Outside Face Temperature [C]

This output is the temperature on the external “surface” of the surface.

1.9.16.2.7 HAMT Surface Outside Face Relative Humidity [%]

This output is the relative humidity on the external “surface” of the surface.

1.9.16.3 Internal Cell Outputs

Detailed profile data for the variables Temperature [C], Relative Humidity [%] and Water Content
[kg/kg] within each surface can also be reported. To calculate the heat and moisture transfer
through surfaces HAMT splits up surfaces into discrete cells. Each cell is composed of a single
material and has a position within the surface. HAMT automatically assigns cells to construction
objects so that there are more cells closer to boundaries between materials and also at the “surfaces”
of the surface. It is not possible for users to define their own cells.
Each surface is made from a particular construction. The construction-surface relationship is
output by HAMT to the eplusout.eio file with the following format. The output also contains the
HAMT cell origins and cell number for each surface combination. The coordinate system origin is
defined as the exterior surface of the construction.
! <HAMT cells >, Surface Name , Construction Name , Cell Numbers
! <HAMT origins >, Surface Name , Construction Name , Cell origins (m)
HAMT cells , FLOOR ,FLOOR , 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16,
17
HAMT origins ,FLOOR ,FLOOR , 0.0000000 , 0.0122726 , 0.0601616 , 0.1512518 , 0.2766268 , 0.4240140 , 0.5789860 ,
0.7263732 , 0.8517482 , 0.9428384 , 0.9907274 , 1.0035729 , 1.0056459 , 1.0090000 , 1.0123541 , 1.0144271 ,
1.0150000

Users can select any one of the Temperature, Relative Humidity or Water Content variables for
any cell to be reported, using the following naming scheme for the output variable.
176 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Temperature Cell N [C]

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Water Content Cell N [kg/kg]

• Zone,Average,HAMT Surface Relative Humidity Cell N [%]

1.9.16.3.1 HAMT Surface Relative Humidity Cell <N> [%]

This is the relative humidity of the cell in the surface.

1.9.16.3.2 HAMT Surface Temperature Cell <N> [C]

This is the temperature of the cell in the surface.

1.9.16.3.3 HAMT Surface Water Content Cell <N> [kg/kg]

This is the relative water content of the cell in the surface.

1.9.17 Materials for Glass Windows and Doors

All the materials for glass windows and doors have the prefix “WindowMaterial”. The follow-
ing WindowMaterial descriptions (Glazing, Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod, Gas, GasMix-
ture, Shade, Screen and Blind) apply to glass windows and doors. The property definitions de-
scribed herein for Glazing, Gas and GasMixture are supported by the National Fenestration Rating
Council as standard.
“Front side” is the side of the layer opposite the zone in which the window is defined. “Back
side” is the side closest to the zone in which the window is defined. Therefore, for exterior windows,
“front side” is the side closest to the outdoors. For interior windows, “front side” is the side closest
to the zone adjacent to the zone in which the window is defined.
The solar radiation transmitted by the window layers enters the zone and is a component of the
zone load. The solar radiation absorbed in each solid layer (glass, shade, screen or blind) participates
in the window layer heat balance calculation. The visible transmittance and reflectance properties
of the window are used in the daylighting calculation.

1.9.18 WindowMaterial:Glazing
In the following, for exterior windows, “front side” is the side of the glass closest to the outside air
and “back side” is the side closest to the zone the window is defined in. For interzone windows,
“front side” is the side closest to the zone adjacent to the zone the window is defined in and “back
side” is the side closest to the zone the window is defined in.

1.9.18.1 Inputs

1.9.18.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the glass layer. It corresponds to a layer in a window construction.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 177

1.9.18.1.2 Field: Optical Data Type

Valid values for this field are SpectralAverage, Spectral, SpectralAndAngle, and BSDF.
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage, the values you enter for solar transmittance and re-
flectance are assumed to be averaged over the solar spectrum, and the values you enter for visible
transmittance and reflectance are assumed to be averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted
by the response of the human eye. There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMate-
rial:Glazing that contains spectral average properties for many different types of glass.
If Optical Data Type = Spectral, then, in the following field, you must enter the name of
a spectral data set defined with the WindowGlassSpectralData object. In this case, the values
of solar and visible transmittance and reflectance in the fields below should be blank.
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, then, in the last 3 fields, you must enter the name of
a spectral and angle data set defined with a curve or table object with two independent variables.
In this case, the Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name should be blank, and the values of solar
and visible transmittance and reflectance in the fields below should be blank.
If Optical Data Type = BSDF, the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object must be used
to define the window construction layers. The Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object con-
tains references to the BSDF files which contain the optical properties of the Complex Fenestration
layers. In this case,

1.9.18.1.3 Field: Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name

If Optical Data Type = Spectral, this is the name of a spectral data set defined with a Win-
dowGlassSpectralData object.

1.9.18.1.4 Field: Thickness

The surface-to-surface thickness of the glass (m).

1.9.18.1.5 Field: Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence

Transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum. Used only when Optical
Data Type = SpectralAverage.
For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties are available—such as thickness, solar
index of refraction, and solar extinction coefficient—they can be converted to equivalent solar
transmittance and reflectance values using the equations given in “Glass Optical Properties
Conversion.”

1.9.18.1.6 Field: Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence

Front-side reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum. Used only when
Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage.

1.9.18.1.7 Field: Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence

Back-side reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum. Used only when
Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage.

1.9.18.1.8 Field: Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence

Transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the re-
sponse of the human eye. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage.
178 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties are available—such as thickness, visible
index of refraction, and visible extinction coefficient—they can be converted to equivalent visible
transmittance and reflectance values using the equations given in “Glass Optical Properties
Conversion.”

1.9.18.1.9 Field: Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence

Front-side reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by
the response of the human eye. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage.

1.9.18.1.10 Field: Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence

Back-side reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the
response of the human eye. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage.

1.9.18.1.11 Field: Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence

Long-wave transmittance at normal incidence.

1.9.18.1.12 Field: Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Front-side long-wave emissivity.

1.9.18.1.13 Field: Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Back-side long-wave emissivity.

1.9.18.1.14 Field: Conductivity

Thermal conductivity (W/m-K).

1.9.18.1.15 Field: Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
This is a factor that corrects for the presence of dirt on the glass. The program multiplies the
fields “Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence” and “Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence”
by this factor if the material is used as the outer glass layer of an exterior window or glass door.1
If the material is used as an inner glass layer (in double glazing, for example), the dirt correction
factor is not applied because inner glass layers are assumed to be clean. Using a material with dirt
correction factor < 1.0 in the construction for an interior window will result in an error message.
Representative values of the dirt correction factor are shown in Table 1.13.

Table 1.13: Dirt Correction Factors

Type of Location Angle of Glazing

Vertical 45o Horizontal
Non-industrial 0.9 0.8 0.7
Industrial 0.7 0.6 0.5

1
If Optical Data Type = Spectral, the program multiplies the solar and visible transmittance at each wavelength
by the dirt correction factor.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 179

Table 1.13: Dirt Correction Factors

Type of Location Angle of Glazing

Vertical 45o Horizontal
Very Dirty 0.6 0.5 0.4
From Appendix A, “Daylighting in Sports Halls, Report 2,” SportScotland, Nov. 2002 (www.sportscotland.org.uk)

The default value of the dirt correction factor is 1.0, which means the glass is clean.
It is assumed that dirt, if present, has no effect on the IR properties of the glass.

1.9.18.1.16 Field: Solar Diffusing

Takes values No (the default) and Yes. If No, the glass is transparent and beam solar radiation
incident on the glass is transmitted as beam radiation with no diffuse component. If Yes, the glass is
translucent and beam solar radiation incident on the glass is transmitted as hemispherically diffuse
radiation with no beam component.2 See Figure 1.12. Solar Diffusing = Yes should only be used
on the innermost pane of glass in an exterior window; it does not apply to interior windows.
For both Solar Diffusing = No and Yes, beam is reflected as beam with no diffuse component
(see Figure 1.12). Solar Diffusing cannot be used with Window Shading Control devices (except
Switchable Glazing). When attempted, the window property will be set to No for Solar Diffusing.
The Surface Details report will reflect the override.
If, in the Building object, Solar Distribution = FullInteriorAndExterior, use of Solar Diffusing
= Yes for glass in an exterior window will change the distribution of interior solar radiation from
the window. The result is that beam solar radiation that would be transmitted by a transparent
window and get absorbed by particular interior surfaces will be diffused by a translucent window
and be spread over more interior surfaces. This can change the time dependence of heating and
cooling loads in the zone.
In a zone with Daylighting:Detailed, translucent glazing—which is often used in skylights—will
provide a more uniform daylight illuminance over the zone and will avoid patches of sunlight on the
floor.

1.9.18.1.17 Field: Young’s modulus

A measure of the stiffness of an elastic material. It is defined as the ratio of the uniaxial stress
over the uniaxial strain in the range of stress in which Hooke’s Law holds. It is used only with
complex fenestration systems defined through the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object.
The default value for glass is 7.2e10 Pa.

1.9.18.1.18 Field: Poisson’s ratio

The ratio, when a sample object is stretched, of the contraction or transverse strain (per-
pendicular to the applied load), to the extension or axial strain (in the direction of the applied
load). This value is used only with complex fenestration systems defined through the Construc-
tion:ComplexFenestrationState object. The default value for glass is 0.22.
2
EnergyPlus does not model the “partially translucent” case in which beam solar radiation incident on the glass
is transmitted as a combination of beam and diffuse.
180 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.12: Comparison between transmittance properties of transparent glass (Solar Diffusing =
No) and translucent glass (Solar Diffusing = Yes).

1.9.18.1.19 Field: Window Glass Spectral and Incident Angle Transmittance Data
Set Table Name
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, this is the name of a spectral and angle data set of
transmittance defined with a curve or table object with two independent variables. The first and
second independent variables must be Angle, and Wavelength, respectively. The restriction is based
on internal dataset use. Each dataset is divided into subsets for each incident angle internally.

1.9.18.1.20 Field: Window Glass Spectral and Incident Angle Front Reflectance Data
Set Table Name
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, this is the name of a spectral and angle data set of
front reflectance defined with a curve or table object with two independent variables. The first and
second independent variables must be Angle, and Wavelength, respectively. The restriction is based
on internal dataset use. Each dataset is divided into subsets for each incident angle internally.

1.9.18.1.21 Field: Window Glass Spectral and Incident Angle Back Reflectance Data
Set Table Name
If Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle, this is the name of a spectral and angle data set of
back reflectance defined with a curve or table object with two independent variables. The first and
second independent variables must be Angle, and Wavelength, respectively. The restriction is based
on internal dataset use. Each dataset is divided into subsets for each incident angle internally.
It should be pointed out that when Optical Data Type = SpectralAndAngle for a glass layer
in a construction, the table input data are converted into polynomial curve fits with 6 coefficients,
so that all outputs of optical properties for the same construction will be curve values for a given
incident angle. Therefore, the values may be slightly different from input values.
IDF examples of Spectral average and using a Spectral data set:

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
CLEAR 3MM , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.003 , !- Thickness {m}
0.837 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 181

0.075 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence

0.075 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.898 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.081 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.081 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0, !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.84, !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.84, !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9; !- Conductivity {W/m-K}

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
SPECTRAL GLASS INNER PANE , ! Material name
Spectral , ! Optical data type {SpectralAverage or Spectral}
TestSpectralDataSet , ! Name of spectral data set
0.0099 , ! Thickness {m}
, ! Solar transmittance at normal incidence
, ! Solar reflectance at normal incidence: front side
, ! Solar reflectance at normal incidence: back side
, ! Visible transmittance at normal incidence
, ! Visible reflectance at normal incidence: front side
, ! Visible reflectance at normal incidence: back side
0.0, ! IR transmittance at normal incidence
0.84, ! IR emissivity: front side
0.84, ! IR emissivity: back side
0.798; ! Conductivity {W/m-K}

IDF example using a SpectralAndAngle data set:

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
SPECTRAL AND ANGLE GLASS INNER PANE , ! Material name
SpectralAndAngle , ! Optical data type {SpectralAverage or Spectral}
, !- Name of spectral data set
0.0099 , ! Thickness {m}
, !- Solar transmittance at normal incidence
, !- Solar reflectance at normal incidence: front side
, !- Solar reflectance at normal incidence: back side
, !- Visible transmittance at normal incidence
, !- Visible reflectance at normal incidence: front side
, !- Visible reflectance at normal incidence: back side
0.0, !- IR transmittance at normal incidence
0.84, !- IR emissivity: front side
0.84, !- IR emissivity: back side
0.798 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
, !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
, !- Solar Diffusing
, !- Young 's modulus
, !- Poisson 's ratio
TranmittanceDataSet , !- Window Glass Spectral+Incident Angle Transmittance Data Set Table Name
FrontReflectanceDataSet , !- Window Glass Spectral+Incident Angle Front Reflectance Data Set Table
Name
BackReflectanceDataSet ; !- Window Glass Spectral+Incident Angle Back Reflectance Data Set Table Name

IDF example of Spectral Data Type = BSDF

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
Glass_5012_Layer , !- Layer name : CLEAR_6.PPG
BSDF , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Spectral Data name
0.005664 , !- Thickness
, !- Solar Transmittance
, !- Solar Front Reflectance
, !- Solar Back Reflectance
, !- Visible Transmittance
, !- Visible Front Reflectance
, !- Visible Back reflectance
0.000000 , !- IR Transmittance
182 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.840000 , !-Front Emissivity

0.840000 , !-Back Emissivity
1.000000 , !-Conductivity
, !-Dirt Correction Factor for Sol/Vis Transmittance
, !-Solar Diffusing
7.2e10 , !-’Youngs modulus
0.22; !-’Poissons ratio

1.9.19 WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod
This is an alternative way of specifying glass properties. Index of refraction and extinction coeffi-
cient are given instead of the transmittance and reflectance values used in WindowMaterial:Glazing.
However, unlike WindowMaterial:Glazing, WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod
is restricted to cases where the front and back optical properties of the glass are the same.
This means it cannot be used for glass with a coating on one side. In that case Win-
dowMaterial:Glazing should be used. Also, unlike WindowMaterial:Glazing, WindowMate-
rial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod does not allow input of glass wavelength-by-wavelength
(spectral) properties.

1.9.19.1 Inputs
1.9.19.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glass layer. It corresponds to a layer in a window construction.

1.9.19.1.2 Field: Thickness

The surface-to-surface thickness of the glass (m).

1.9.19.1.3 Field: Solar Index of Refraction

Index of refraction averaged over the solar spectrum.

1.9.19.1.4 Field: Solar Extinction Coefficient

Extinction coefficient averaged over the solar spectrum (m−1 ).

1.9.19.1.5 Field: Visible Index of Refraction

Index of refraction averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human
eye.

1.9.19.1.6 Field: Visible Extinction Coefficient

Extinction coefficient averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the
human eye (m−1 ).

1.9.19.1.7 Field: Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence

Long-wave transmittance at normal incidence.

1.9.19.1.8 Field: Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Long-wave hemispherical emissivity, assumed the same on both sides of the glass.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 183

1.9.19.1.9 Field: Conductivity

Thermal conductivity (W/m-K).

1.9.19.1.10 Field: Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
This is a factor that corrects for the presence of dirt on the glass. It multiplies the solar and
visible transmittance at normal Incidence (which the program calculates from the input values of
thickness, solar index of refraction, solar extinction coefficient, etc.) if the material is used as the
outer glass layer of an exterior window or glass door. If the material is used as an inner glass layer
(in double glazing, for example), the dirt correction factor is not applied because inner glass layers
are assumed to be clean. Using a material with dirt correction factor < 1.0 in the construction for
an interior window will result in an error message.
Representative values of the direct correction factor are shown in Table 1.13.
The default value of the dirt correction factor is 1.0, which means the glass is clean. It is assumed
that dirt, if present, has no effect on the IR properties of the glass.

1.9.19.1.11 Field: Solar Diffusing

Takes values No (the default) and Yes. If No, the glass is transparent. If Yes, the glass is
translucent and beam solar radiation incident on the glass is transmitted as hemispherically diffuse
radiation with no beam component. (EnergyPlus does not model the “partially translucent” case
in which beam solar radiation incident on the glass is transmitted as a combination of beam and
diffuse.) Solar Diffusing = Yes should only be used on the innermost pane of glass in an exterior
window; it does not apply to interior windows.
If, in the Building object, Solar Distribution = FullInteriorAndExterior, use of Solar Diffusing
= Yes for glass in an exterior window will change the distribution of interior solar radiation from
the window. The result is that beam solar radiation that would be transmitted by a transparent
window and get absorbed by particular interior surfaces will be diffused by a translucent window
and be spread over more interior surfaces. This can change the time dependence of heating and
cooling loads in the zone.
In a zone with Daylighting:Detailed, translucent glazing, which is often used in skylights, will
provide a more uniform daylight illuminance over the zone and will avoid patches of sunlight on the
floor.
An IDF example:
WindowMaterial:Glazing:RefractionExtinctionMethod ,
4MM CLEAR GLASS , !- Material name
0.004 , !- Thickness {m}
1.526 , !- Solar index of refraction
30.0 , !- Solar extinction coefficient (1/m)
1.526 , !- Visible index of refraction
30.0 , !- Visible extinction coefficient (1/m)
0.0, !- IR transmittance at normal incidence
0.84, !- IR emissivity
0.9; !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
184 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.20 Glass Optical Properties Conversion

1.9.20.1 Conversion from Glass Optical Properties Specified as Index of Refraction
and Transmittance at Normal Incidence
The optical properties of uncoated glass are sometimes specified by index of refraction, n, and
transmittance at normal incidence, T.
The following equations show how to convert from this set of values to the transmittance and
reflectance values required by WindowMaterial:Glazing. These equations apply only to uncoated
glass, and can be used to convert either spectral-average solar properties or spectral-average visible
properties (in general, n and T are different for the solar and visible). Note that since the glass is
uncoated, the front and back reflectances are the same and equal to the R that is solved for in the
following equations.
Given n and T , find R:
 2
n−1
r=
n+1
1/2
[(1 − r)4 + 4r2 T 2 ] − (1 − r)2
τ=
2r2 T
(1 − r)2 rτ 2
R=r+
1 − r2 τ 2
Example:

T = 0.86156

n = 1.526

 2
1.526 − 1
r=
1.526 + 1

τ = 0.93974

R = 0.07846

1.9.21 WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic
Thermochromic (TC) materials have active, reversible optical properties that vary with temper-
ature. Thermochromic windows are adaptive window systems for incorporation into building en-
velopes. Thermochromic windows respond by absorbing sunlight and turning the sunlight energy
into heat. As the thermochromic film warms it changes its light transmission level from less ab-
sorbing to more absorbing. The more sunlight it absorbs the lower the light level going through
it. By using the suns own energy the window adapts based solely on the directness and amount of
sunlight. Thermochromic materials will normally reduce optical transparency by absorption and/or
reflection, and are specular (maintaining vision).
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 185

A thermochromic window is defined with a Construction object which references a special

layer defined with a WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic object. The WindowMate-
rial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic object further references a series of WindowMaterial:Glazing
objects corresponding to each specification temperature of the TC layer.
This object specifies a layer of thermochromic glass, part of a thermochromic window. An
example file ThermochromicWindow.idf is included in the EnergyPlus installation.

1.9.21.1 Inputs
1.9.21.1.1 Field: Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular thermochromic glass material.

1.9.21.1.2 Field Set (Optical Data Temperature, Window Material Glazing Name)
This object is extensible, so additional sets of the next two fields can be added to the end of
this object.

1.9.21.1.3 Field:Optical Data Temperature <N>

The temperature of the TC glass layer corresponding to the optical data of the TC layer. Unit
is °C.

1.9.21.1.4 Field: Window Material Glazing Name <N>

The window glazing (defined with WindowMaterial:Glazing) name that provides the TC glass
layer performance at the above specified temperature.
IDF Examples
Construction ,
window_const , !- Name
Usual Glass , !- Layer 1
AIR 6MM , !- Layer 2
TCGlazings , !- Layer 3
AIR 6MM , !- Layer 4
Usual Glass; !- Layer 5

WindowMaterial:Gas ,
AIR 6MM , !- Name
Air , !- Gas Type
0.0063; !- Thickness {m}

! Added for thermochromic glazings

WindowMaterial:GlazingGroup:Thermochromic ,
TCGlazings ,
0 , TCGlazing0 ,
20, TCGlazing20 ,
25, TCGlazing25 ,
30, TCGlazing30 ,
35, TCGlazing35 ,
40, TCGlazing40 ,
45, TCGlazing45 ,
50, TCGlazing50 ,
55, TCGlazing55 ,
60, TCGlazing60 ,
65, TCGlazing65 ,
75, TCGlazing75 ,
85, TCGlazing85;

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing0 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
186 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name

0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing20 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing25 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing30 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 187

TCGlazing35 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing40 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing45 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing50 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing
188 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing55 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing60 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing65 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing75 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 189

1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance

No; !- Solar Diffusing

WindowMaterial:Glazing ,
TCGlazing85 , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.0030 , !- Thickness
0.2442 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Front Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.7058 , !- Back Side Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.3192 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Front Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.6308 , !- Back Side Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence
0.0000 , !- Infrared Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.9000 , !- Front Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.9000 , !- Back Side Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0199 , !- Conductivity
1.0000 , !- Dirt Correction Factor for Solar and Visible Transmittance
No; !- Solar Diffusing

1.9.21.2 Outputs
1.9.21.2.1 Surface Window Thermochromic Layer Temperature [C]
The temperature of the TC glass layer of a TC window at each time step.

1.9.21.2.2 Surface Window Thermochromic Layer Property Specification Tempera-

ture [C]
The temperature under which the optical data of the TC glass layer are specified.
The overall properties (U-factor/SHGC/VT) of the thermochromic windows at different spec-
ification temperatures are reported in the EIO file. These window constructions are created by
EnergyPlus during run time. They have similar names with suffix “_TC_XX” where XX repre-
sents a specification temperature.

1.9.22 WindowMaterial:Gas
This object specifies the properties of the gas between the panes of a multi-pane window. Gas Type
= Custom allows you to specify the properties of gases other than air, Argon, Krypton or Xenon.
There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for Material:WindowGas that contains several types
of gas of different thicknesses. See Material:WindowGasMixture for the case that the gas fill is a
mixture of different gases.

1.9.22.1 Inputs
1.9.22.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the gas fill. It refers to a layer in a window construction.

1.9.22.1.2 Field: Gas Type

The type of gas. The choices are Air, Argon, Krypton, or Xenon. If Gas Type = Custom you
can use Conductivity Coefficient A, etc. to specify the properties of a different type of gas.
190 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.22.1.3 Field: Thickness

The thickness (m) of the gas layer.

1.9.22.1.4 Properties for Custom Gas Types

The following entries are used only if Gas Type = Custom. The A and B coefficients are those
in the following expression that gives a property value as a function of temperature in degrees K:

P roperty = Coef f icientA +Coef f icientB ∗T emperatureK +Coef f icientC ∗T emperature2K (1.14)

1.9.22.1.5 Field: Conductivity Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.6 Field: Conductivity Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.7 Field: Conductivity Coefficient C

The C coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K3 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.8 Field: Viscosity Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.9 Field: Viscosity Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s-K). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.10 Field: Viscosity Coefficient C

The C coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.11 Field: Specific Heat Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.12 Field: Specific Heat Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.13 Field: Specific Heat Coefficient C

The C coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K3 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.14 Field: Specific Heat Ratio

The specific heat ratio for gas. Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.22.1.15 Field: Molecular Weight

The molecular weight for gas. The molecular weight is the mass of 1 mol of the substance. This
has a numerical value which is the average molecular mass of the molecules in the substance mul-
tiplied by Avogadro’s constant. (kg/kmol) (Shown in the IDD as g/mol for consistency)
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 191

1.9.22.1.16 Field: Specific Heat Ratio

The specific heat ratio for gas. The specific heat ratio of a gas is the ratio of the specific heat
at contant pressure, to the specific heat at constant volume. Used only if Gas Type = Custom.
An IDF example:

WindowMaterial:Gas ,AIRGAP ,
AIR , ! Gas type (Air - Argon - Krypton - Xenon - Custom)]
0.0125; ! Thickness {m} 1/2 inch

An IDF example to be used with a WindowMaterial:Gap definition (see below)

WindowMaterial:Gas ,
Gas_1_W_0_0100 , !- gap name - Air
Air , !- type
0.0100; !- thickness

An IDF example for a Custom Gas

WindowMaterial:Gas ,
Gas_16_W_0_0003 , !- gap name
Custom , !- type
0.0003 , !- thickness
2.873000e-003, !- Conductivity Coefficient A
7.760000e-005, !- Conductivity Coefficient B
0.000000e+000, !- Conductivity Coefficient C
3.723000e-006, !- Conductivity Viscosity A
4.940000e-008, !- Conductivity Viscosity B
0.000000e+000, !- Conductivity Viscosity C
1002.737000 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient A
0.012324 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient B
0.000000 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient C
28.969999 , !- Molecular Weight
1.400000; !- Specific Heat Ratio

1.9.23 WindowMaterial:GasMixture
This object allows you to specify the fill between the panes of a multi-pane window to be a mixture
of two, three or four different gases chosen from air, argon, krypton and xenon. It can also be used
if only one type of gas in the fill. In this case you can also use WindowMaterial:Gas. Note that the
fractions of gas types in the mixture should add up to 1.0.

1.9.23.1 Inputs
1.9.23.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the gas mixture. It refers to a layer in a window construction.

1.9.23.1.2 Field: Thickness

The thickness (m) of the gas mixture layer.

1.9.23.1.3 Field: Number of Gases in Mixture

The number of different types of gas in the mixture ( a value from 1 to 4)

1.9.23.1.4 Set: Gas Type-Fraction (up to 4)

192 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.23.1.5 Field: Gas 1 Type

The type of the first gas in the mixture. Choices are Air, Argon, Krypton and Xenon.

1.9.23.1.6 Field: Gas 1 Fraction

The fraction of the first gas in the mixture.
An IDF example:

WindowMaterial:GasMixture ,ArgonKryptonMix ,
0.0125 , ! Thickness {m} 1/2 inch
2, ! Number of Gases in Mixture
Argon , ! Gas 1 Type
0.6, ! Gas 1 Fraction
Krypton , ! Gas 2 Type
0.4; ! Gas 2 Fraction

1.9.24 WindowMaterial:Gap
This input object is used to define the gap between two layers in a complex fenestration system,
where the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object is used. It references the gas or gas mix-
tures defined in the WindowMaterial:Gas and WindowMaterial:GasMixture objects. It is referenced
as a layer in the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object ;it cannot be referenced as a layer
from the Construction object.

1.9.24.1 Inputs
1.9.24.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the gap.

1.9.24.1.2 Field: Thickness

The thickness (m) of the gap layer.

1.9.24.1.3 Field: Pressure

The pressure (Pa) of the gas in the gap layer, used to calculate the gas properties of the glazing
system gap. Default is atmospheric pressure, 101325 Pa.When modeling vacuum glazing, this value
should represent the pressure in the evacuated glazing system. If this pressure is less that the
ThermalModelParams:PressureLimit value, the the glazing system will be modeled as a vacuum
glazing.

1.9.24.1.4 Field: Deflection State

This field is used when modeling the deflection of the glass layers in a window if the Win-
dowThermalModel:Params value for “deflection model” is “MeasuredDeflection”.

1.9.24.1.5 Field: Support Pillar

References the support pillar of the gap layer if vacuum glazing is being modeled. If left empty,
then it is considered that gap layer does not have support pillars.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 193

1.9.24.1.6 Field: Gas (or GasMixture)

References gas (WindowMaterial:Gas) or gas mixture (WindowMaterial:GasMixture) of the gap
layer.
An IDF example for simple glazing:

WindowMaterial:Gas ,
Gas_1_W_0_0120 , !- gap name - Air
Air , !- type
0.0120; !- thickness

WindowMaterial:Gap ,
Gap_1_Layer , !- gap name: Air
0.0120 , !- thickness
Gas_1_W_0_0120 , !- Gas (or Gas Mixture) name
101325.0000; !- pressure

An IDF example for vacuum glazing:

WindowMaterial:Gap ,
Gap_16_Layer , !- gap name: Vacuum_0 .001_pr -0.5_ps -50.8
0.0003 , !- thicknessGas_16_W_0_0003 ,
!- Gas (or Gas Mixture) name
0.1333 , !- pressure
, !- deflection state
SupportPillar_16_Gap_1 ; !- SupportPillar

WindowGap:SupportPillar ,
SupportPillar_16_Gap_1 , !- Name
0.0508 , !- spacing
0.0005; !- radius

1.9.25 WindowGap:DeflectionState
This input object is used to enter data describing deflection state of the gap. It is referenced from
WindowMaterial:Gap object only and it is used only when deflection model is set to MeasuredDe-
flection (see WindowThermalModel:Params), otherwise it is ignored.

1.9.25.1 Inputs
1.9.25.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the deflection state.

1.9.25.1.2 Field: Deflected Thickness

The thickness (m) of the gap in deflected state. It represents value of deflection at point of
maximum which is usually at the center poing of glazing system. It is used only with tarcog
algorithm set to Measured Deflection (WindowThermalModel:Params), otherwise this field will be
ignored.
An IDF example where WindowThermalModel:Params Deflection Model = MeasuredDeflection:

WindowMaterial:Gap ,
Gap_1_Layer , !- gap name: Air
0.0120 , !- thickness
Gas_1_W_0_0120 , !- Gas (or Gas Mixture) name
101325.0000 , !- pressure
194 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Gap_1_Deflection; !- deflection state

WindowGap:DeflectionState , !- deflection state of gap

Gap_1_Deflection , !- name
0.011; !- gap thickness in deflected state

1.9.26 WindowGap:SupportPillar
This input object is used to enter data describing support pillar of the gap. Support pillars are
used in vacuum glazing in order to prevent deflection of glass layers.

Figure 1.13: Support Pillar

1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 195

1.9.26.1 Inputs
1.9.26.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the support pillar.

1.9.26.1.2 Field: Spacing

Distance (m) between support pillar centers (see the Engineering reference document for more
information).

1.9.26.1.3 Field: Radius

The radius (m) of the support pillar (see Engineering reference document for more information).
An IDF example for vacuum glazing (see Vacuum Glazing example in WindowMaterial:Gap
above)

WindowGap:SupportPillar , !- gap support pillar

SupportPillar_16_Gap_1 , !- basis matrix name
0.05, !- pillar spacing
0.005; !- pillar radius

1.9.27 WindowMaterial:SimpleGlazingSystem
This model should be used with caution. There may be significant differences in performance
between the simple window system and the usual more detailed model.
This input object differs from the other WindowMaterial objects in that it describes an entire glazing
system rather than individual layers. This object is used when only very limited information is available
on the glazing layers or when specific performance levels are being targeted. The layer by layer description
offers superior method of modeling windows that should be used instead of this object when sufficient data
are available. This object accesses a model that turns simple performance indices into a fuller model of
the glazing system.
The performance indices are U-factor and Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, and optionally Visible Transmit-
tance. The values for these performance indices can be selected by the user to represent either glazing-only
windows (with no frame) or an average window performance that includes the frame. Inside the program
the model produces an equivalent window glazing layer with no frame. The properties of the modeled glaz-
ing layer are reported to the EIO file using the IDF input object syntax for the WindowMaterial:Glazing
input object. This equivalent layer could be reused in subsequent models if desired, however there will
be important differences in the modeled window performance because the simple glazing system model
includes its own special model for angular dependence when incident beam solar is not normal to the plane
of the window.
When this object is referenced in a Construction object, it cannot be used with other glazing or gas
material layers. Shades or blinds cannot be located between the glass, but these can be used on the inside
or the outside of the glazing system. If the glazing system does have between-the-glass shades or blinds,
then the U and SHGC values entered in this object should include the impacts of those layers. Adding
window treatment layers such as shades or screens will alter the overall performance to be different than
the performance levels prescribed in this object.

1.9.27.1 Inputs
1.9.27.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glazing system. This value is unique across all constructions.
196 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.27.1.2 Field: U-Factor

This field describes the value for window system U-Factor, or overall heat transfer coefficient. Units are
in W/m2 ·K. This is the rated (NFRC) value for U-factor under winter heating conditions. The U-factor
is assumed to be for vertically mounted products. In versions up till 9.6.0, the maximum allowable input is
U-7.0 W/m2 ·K, and the effective upper limit of the glazing generated by the underlying model is around
U-5.8 W/m2 ·K. In later versions, such upper bound of the input U value is removed. So is the mis-match
between the user input U and the effective U is resolved.

1.9.27.1.3 Field: Solar Heat Gain Coefficient

This field describes the value for SHGC, or solar heat gain coefficient. There are no units. This is
the rated (NFRC) value for SHGC under summer cooling conditions and represents SHGC for normal
incidence and vertical orientation.

1.9.27.1.4 Field: Visible Transmittance

This field is optional. If it is omitted, then the visible transmittance properties are taken from the solar
properties. If it is included then the model includes it when developing properties for the glazing system.
This is the rated (NFRC) value for visible transmittance at normal incidence.
An example of this object.

WindowMaterial:SimpleGlazingSystem ,
SimpleWindow:DOUBLE PANE WINDOW , !- Name
2.716 , !- U-Factor
0.763 , !- Solar Heat Gain Coefficient
0.812 ; !- Visible Transmittance

1.9.28 WindowMaterial:Shade
This object specifies the properties of window shade materials. Reflectance and emissivity properties are
assumed to be the same on both sides of the shade. Shades are considered to be perfect diffusers (all trans-
mitted and reflected radiation is hemispherically-diffuse) with transmittance and reflectance independent
of angle of incidence. There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMaterial:Shade that contains
properties of generic window shades.
Window shades can be on the inside of the window (“interior shades”), on the outside of the window
(“exterior shades”), or between glass layers (“between-glass shades”). When in place, the shade is assumed
to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame,
if present. The plane of the shade is assumed to be parallel to the glazing.
WindowMaterial:Shade can be used for diffusing materials such as drapery and translucent roller
shades. For slat-type shading devices, like Venetian blinds, that have a strong angular dependence of
transmission, absorption and reflection, it is better to use WindowMaterial:Blind. WindowMaterial:Screen
should be used to model wire mesh insect screens where the solar and visible transmission and reflection
properties vary with the angle of incidence of solar radiation.
Transmittance and reflectance values for drapery material with different color and openness of weave
can be obtained from manufacturers or determined from 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig.
31.
There are two methods of assigning a shade to a window:

1.9.28.1 Inputs
1.9.28.1.1 Method 1:
1) Define the construction of the window without the shade, the so-called “bare” construction.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 197

2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.

3) Define the WindowMaterial:Shade.
4) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) specify that this WindowMate-
rial:Shade is the window’s shading device and (b) specify how the shade is controlled.

1.9.28.1.2 Method 2:
1) Define the Construction of the window without the shade, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Shade.
4) Define another Construction, called the “shaded construction,” that includes the WindowMate-
rial:Shade.
5) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) reference the shaded construction
and (b) specify how the shade is controlled.
Note that WindowShadingControl has to be used with either method, even if the shade is in place
at all times. You will get an error message if you try to reference a shaded construction directly from
FenestrationSurface:Detailed.

1.9.28.1.3 Field: Name

Name of the shade. It is referenced as an inside or outside layer in a window construction.

1.9.28.1.4 Field: Solar Transmittance

Transmittance averaged over the solar spectrum. Assumed independent of incidence angle.

1.9.28.1.5 Field: Solar Reflectance

Reflectance averaged over the solar spectrum. Assumed same on both sides of shade and independent
of incidence angle.

1.9.28.1.6 Field: Visible Transmittance

Transmittance averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye.
Assumed independent of incidence angle.

1.9.28.1.7 Field: Visible Reflectance

Reflectance averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. Assumed
same on both side of shade and independent of incidence angle.

1.9.28.1.8 Field: Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Effective long-wave emissivity. Assumed same on both sides of shade. We can approximate this effective
emissivity, εef f , as follows. Let η be the “openness” the shade, i.e., the ratio of the area of openings in
the shade to the overall shade area (see Field: Air-Flow Permeability, below). Let the emissivity of the
shade material be ε. Then

εeff ≈ ε (1 − η) (1.15)

For most non-metallic materials ε is about 0.9.

198 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.28.1.9 Field: Infrared Transmittance

Effective long-wave transmittance. Assumed independent of incidence angle. We can approximate this
effective long-wave transmittance, Teff as follows. Let η be the “openness” of the shade, i.e., the ratio of
the area of openings in the shade to the overall shade area. Let the long-wave transmittance of the shade
material be T . Then

Teff ≈ η + T (1 − η) (1.16)
For most materials T is very close to zero, which gives

Teff ≈ η (1.17)

1.9.28.1.10 Field: Thickness

Thickness of the shade material (m). If the shade is not flat, such as for pleated pull-down shades or
folded drapery, the average thickness normal to the plane of the shade should be used.

1.9.28.1.11 Field: Conductivity

Shade material conductivity (W/m-K).

1.9.28.1.12 Field: Shade to Glass Distance

Distance from shade to adjacent glass (m). This is denoted by s in Figure 1.14 and Figure 1.15, below.
If the shade is not flat, such as for pleated pull-down shades or folded drapery, the average shade-to-glass
distance should be used. (The shade-to-glass distance is used in calculating the natural convective air flow
between glass and shade produced by buoyancy effects.). Not used for between-glass shades.
In the following, H is the glazing height and W is the glazing width.

1.9.28.1.13 Field: Top Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the top of the shade divided by sW, the horizontal area between glass and
shade (see Figures below).

1.9.28.1.14 Field: Bottom Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the bottom of the shade divided by sW, the horizontal area between glass
and shade (see Figures below).

1.9.28.1.15 Field: Left-Side Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the left side of the shade divided by sH, the vertical area between glass
and shade (see Figures below).

1.9.28.1.16 Field: Right-Side Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the right side of the shade divided by sH, the vertical area between glass
and shade (see Figures below).

1.9.28.1.17 Field: Field: Air-Flow Permeability

The fraction of the shade surface that is open to air flow, i.e., the total area of openings (“holes”) in
the shade surface divided by the shade area, HW. If air cannot pass through the shade material, Air-Flow
Permeability = 0. For drapery fabric and screens the Air-Flow Permeability can be taken as the “openness”
of the fabric (see 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig. 31), which is 0.0 to 0.07 for closed weave,
0.07 to 0.25 for semi-open weave, and 0.25 and higher for open weave.
An IDF example:
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 199

Figure 1.14: Vertical section (a) and perspective view (b) of glass and interior shade layers showing
variables used in the gap air flow analysis. In (b), the air-flow opening areas Abot , Atop , Al , Ar and
Ah are shown schematically. See Engineering Manual for definition of thermal variables.
200 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.15: Examples of air-flow openings for an interior shade covering glass of height H and width
W . Not to scale. (a) Horizontal section through shade with openings on the left and right sides
(top view). (b) Vertical section through shade with openings at the top and bottom (side view).
In (a) Left-Side Opening Multiplier = Al /sH = min(l/s, 1) and Right-Side Opening Multiplier =
Ar /sH = min(r/s, 1). In (b) Top Opening Multiplier = Atop /sW = t/s and Bottom Opening
Multiplier = Abot /sW = b/s.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 201

WindowMaterial:Shade ,
DRAPES - CLOSE WEAVE MEDIUM , !- Name
0.05, !- Solar transmittance
0.3000000 , !- Solar Reflectance
.05, !- Visible transmittance
0.3000000 , !- Visible reflectance
0.9000000 , !- Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity
0.0, !- Infrared Transmittance
0.003 , !- Thickness {m}
0.1, !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
0.050 , !- Shade to glass distance {m}
1.0, !- Top opening multiplier
1.0, !- Bottom opening multiplier
0.0, !- Left -side opening multiplier
0.0, !- Right -side opening multiplier
0.0; !- Air flow permeability

1.9.29 WindowMaterial:Blind
This object specifies the properties of a window blind consisting of flat, equally-spaced slats. Unlike
window shades, which are modeled as perfect diffusers, window blinds have solar and visible transmission
and reflection properties that strongly depend on slat angle and angle of incidence of solar radiation. There
is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMaterial:Blind that contains properties of generic window
blinds.
Blinds can be located on the inside of the window (“interior blinds”), on the outside of the window
(“exterior blinds”), or between two layers of glass (“between-glass blinds”). When in place, the blind is
assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover any of the
window frame, if present. The plane of the blind is assumed to be parallel to the glazing. When the blind
is retracted it is assumed to cover none of the window. The solar and thermal effects of the blind’s support
strings, tapes or rods are ignored. Slat curvature, if present, is ignored.
There are two methods of assigning a blind to a window:

1.9.29.1 Inputs
1.9.29.1.1 Method 1:
1) Define the construction of the window without the blind, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Blind.
4) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) specify that this WindowMate-
rial:Blind is the window’s shading device and (b) specify how the blind is controlled.

1.9.29.1.2 Method 2:
1) Define the Construction of the window without the blind, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Blind.
4) Define another Construction, called the “shaded construction,” that includes the WindowMate-
rial:Blind.
5) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) reference the shaded construction
and (b) specify how the blind is controlled.
Note that WindowShadingControl has to be used with either method, even if the blind is in place at
all times. You will get an error message if you try to reference a construction with a blind directly from
Window objects (FenestrationSurface:Detailed or Window).
202 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Note also that WindowShadingControl is used to determine not only when the blind is in place, but
how its slat angle is controlled.

1.9.29.1.3 Field: Name

Name of the blind. It is referenced as a layer in a window construction (ref: Construction object) or
as a “Material Name of Shading Device” in a WindowShadingControl object.

1.9.29.1.4 Field: Slat Orientation

The choices are Horizontal and Vertical. “Horizontal” means the slats are parallel to the bottom of
the window; this is the same as saying that the slats are parallel to the X-axis of the window. “Vertical”
means the slats are parallel to Y-axis of the window.

1.9.29.1.5 Field: Slat Width

The width of the slat measured from edge to edge (m). See Figure 1.16.

1.9.29.1.6 Field: Slat Separation

The distance between the front of a slat and the back of the adjacent slat (m). See Figure 1.16.

1.9.29.1.7 Field: Slat Thickness

The distance between the faces of a slat (m). See Figure 1.16.

1.9.29.1.8 Field: Slat Angle

The angle (degrees) between the glazing outward normal and the slat outward normal, where the
outward normal points away from the front face of the slat (degrees). See Figure 1.16.
If the WindowShadingControl for the blind has Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = FixedSlatAngle,
the slat angle is fixed at “Slat Angle.”
If Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = BlockBeamSolar, the program automatically adjusts the
slat angle so as just block beam solar radiation. In this case the value of “Slat Angle” is used only when
the blind is in place and there is no beam solar radiation incident on the blind.
If Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = ScheduledSlatAngle, the slat angle is variable. In this case
“Slat Angle” is not applicable and the field should be blank.
If Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = FixedSlatAngle and “Slat Angle” is less than the minimum
or greater than the maximum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation and Slat Thickness, the slat angle
will be reset to the corresponding minimum or maximum and a warning will be issued.

1.9.29.1.9 Field: Slat Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the slat (W/m-K).

1.9.29.1.10 Field: Slat Beam Solar Transmittance

The beam solar transmittance of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence on the slat.
Any transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent).

1.9.29.1.11 Field: Front Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance

The beam solar reflectance of the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence
(matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not
well modeled.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 203

1.9.29.1.12 Field: Back Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance

The beam solar reflectance of the back side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence
(matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not
well modeled.

1.9.29.1.13 Field: Slat Diffuse Solar Transmittance

The slat transmittance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal “Slat Beam
Solar Transmittance.”

1.9.29.1.14 Field: Front Side Slat Diffuse Solar Reflectance

The front-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal “Front
Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance.”

1.9.29.1.15 Field: Back Side Slat Diffuse Solar Reflectance

The back-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal “Back
Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance.”

1.9.29.1.16 Field: Slat Beam Visible Transmittance

The beam visible transmittance of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence on the
slat. Any transmitted visible radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent).

1.9.29.1.17 Field: Front Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance

The beam visible reflectance on the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of
incidence (matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats)
are not well modeled.

1.9.29.1.18 Field: Back Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance

The beam visible reflectance on the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of
incidence (matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats)
are not well modeled.

1.9.29.1.19 Field: Slat Diffuse Visible Transmittance

The slat transmittance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal “Slat Beam
Visible Transmittance.”

1.9.29.1.20 Field: Front Side Slat Diffuse Visible Reflectance

The front-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal
“Front Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance.”

1.9.29.1.21 Field: Back Side Slat Diffuse Visible Reflectance

The back-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal
“Back Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance..”

1.9.29.1.22 Field: Slat Infrared Hemispherical Transmittance

The slat Infrared transmittance. It is zero for solid metallic, wooden or glass slats, but may be non-zero
in some cases (e.g., thin plastic slats).
204 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.29.1.23 Field: Front Side Slat Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Front-side hemispherical emissivity of the slat. Approximately 0.9 for most materials. The most
common exception is bare (unpainted) metal slats or slats finished with a metallic paint.

1.9.29.1.24 Field: Back Side Slat Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Back-side hemispherical emissivity of the slat. Approximately 0.9 for most materials. The most
common exception is bare (unpainted) metal slats or slats finished with a metallic paint.

1.9.29.1.25 Field: Blind to Glass Distance

For interior and exterior blinds, the distance from the mid-plane of the blind to the adjacent glass (m).
See Figure 1.16. Not used for between-glass blinds. As for window shades (ref: WindowMaterial:Shade)
this distance is used in calculating the natural convective air flow between glass and blind that is produced
by buoyancy effects.

1.9.29.1.26 Opening Multipliers

The following opening multipliers are defined in the same way as for window shades (see WindowMate-
rial:Shade, Figure 1.14 and Figure 1.15). Note that, unlike window shades, there is no input for Air-Flow
Permeability; this is automatically calculated by the program from slat angle, width and separation.

1.9.29.1.27 Field: Blind Top Opening Multiplier

Defined as for Material:WindowShade.

1.9.29.1.28 Field: Blind Bottom Opening Multiplier

Defined as for Material:WindowShade.

1.9.29.1.29 Field: Blind Left-Side Opening Multiplier

Defined as for Material:WindowShade.

1.9.29.1.30 Field: Blind Right-Side Opening Multiplier

Defined as for Material:WindowShade.

1.9.29.1.31 Field: Minimum Slat Angle

The minimum allowed slat angle (degrees). Used only if WindowShadingControl (for the window that
incorporates this blind) varies the slat angle (i.e., the WindowShadingControl has Type of Slat Angle
Control for Blinds = ScheduledSlatAngle or BlockBeamSolar). In this case, if the program tries to select
a slat angle less than Minimum Slat Angle it will be reset to Minimum Slat Angle. (Note that if the
Minimum Slat Angle itself is less than the minimum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation and Slat
Thickness, it will be reset to that minimum.)

1.9.29.1.32 Field: Maximum Slat Angle

The maximum allowed slat angle (degrees). Used only if WindowShadingControl (for the window that
incorporates this blind) varies the slat angle (i.e., the WindowShadingControl has Type of Slat Angle
Control for Blinds = ScheduledSlatAngle or BlockBeamSolar). In this case, if the program tries to select
a slat angle greater than Maximum Slat Angle the slat angle will be reset to Maximum Slat Angle. (Note
that if the Maximum Slat Angle itself is greater than the maximum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation
and Slat Thickness, it will be reset to that maximum.)
An IDF example:
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 205

WindowMaterial:Blind ,
White Painted Metal Blind , !- Name
HORIZONTAL , !- Slat orientation
0.025 , !- Slat width (m)
0.01875 , !- Slat separation (m)
0.001 , !- Slat thickness (m)
45.0 , !- Slat angle (deg)
44.9 , !- Slat conductivity (W/m-K)
0.0 , !- Slat beam solar transmittance
0.8 , !- Front Side Slat beam solar reflectance
0.8 , !- Back Side Slat beam solar reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat diffuse solar transmittance
0.8 , !- Front Side Slat diffuse solar reflectance
0.8 , !- Back Side Slat diffuse solar reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat beam visible transmittance
0.7 , !- Front Side Slat beam visible reflectance
0.7 , !- Back Side Slat beam visible reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat diffuse visible transmittance
0.7 , !- Front Side Slat diffuse visible reflectance
0.7 , !- Back Side Slat diffuse visible reflectance
0.0 , !- Slat Infrared hemispherical transmittance
0.9 , !- Front Side Slat Infrared hemispherical emissivity
0.9 , !- Back Side Slat Infrared hemispherical emissivity
0.050 , !- Blind -to -glass distance
0.0 , !- Blind top opening multiplier
0.0 , !- Blind bottom opening multiplier
0.5 , !- Blind left -side opening multiplier
0.5 , !- Blind right -side opening multiplier
, !- Minimum slat angle (deg)
; !- Maximum slat angle (deg)

1.9.30 WindowMaterial:ComplexShade
This input object is used to define shade layers used in the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object.

1.9.30.1 Inputs
1.9.30.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the shading layer.

1.9.30.1.2 Field: Shading Layer Type

The type of shading layer. The options are:
• VenetianHorizontal – for modeling horizontal venetian blinds
• VenetianVertical – for modeling vertical venetian blinds
• Woven – for modeling shading systems with a regular weave
• Perforated – for modeling perforated screens
• BSDF – for modeling shades whose properties are represented by a BSDF file
• OtherShadingType – for modeling shading systems which do not belong to the any of the previous
group

1.9.30.1.3 Field: Thickness

The thickness (m) of the shading layer. This value is ignored for ShadingLayerType = Venetian*,
because the program will calculate the thickness based on the slat angle. This value is needed for Shad-
ingLayerType = Woven and Perforated
206 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.16: (a) Side view of a window blind with horizontal slats (or top view of blind with vertical
slats) showing slat geometry. The front face of a slat is shown by a heavy line. The slat angle is
defined as the angle between the glazing outward normal and the slat outward normal, where the
outward normal points away from the front face of the slat. (b) Slat orientations for representative
slat angles. The slat angle varies from 0o , when the front of the slat is parallel to the glazing and
faces toward the outdoors, to 90o , when the slat is perpendicular to the glazing, to 180o , when the
front of the slat is parallel to the glazing and faces toward the indoors. The minimum and maximum
slat angles are determined by the slat thickness, width and separation.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 207

1.9.30.1.4 Field: Conductivity

The conductivity (W/mK) of the shading layer material. Default: 1.0

• Venetian* – the conductivity of the venetian blind slat material

• Woven – the conductivity of the woven shade material (such as the thread for a fabric shade)

• Perforated – for modeling perforated screens

• BSDF – for modeling shades whose properties are represented by a BSDF file

• OtherShadingType – for modeling shading systems which do not belong to the any of the previous
group

1.9.30.1.5 Field: IR Transmittance

The IR transmittance of the shading layer. Minimum value: 0. Maximum value: 1. Default: 0.

1.9.30.1.6 Field: Front Emissivity

The front emissivity of the shading layer. Minimum value: > 0. Maximum value: 1. Default: 0.90.

1.9.30.1.7 Field: Back Emissivity

The back emissivity of the shading layer. Minimum value: > 0. Maximum value: 1. Default: 0.90.

1.9.30.1.8 Field: Top Opening Multiplier

The top opening multiplier value will depend on the location of the shading device within the glazing
system. There are several possible scenarios which can occur and they can be divided into two groups:
Shading device on the indoor/outdoor side of the window
In this case the opening multiplier is calculated as the smallest distance between the shading device
and the frame (dtop ), divided by the gap width (S). There are three possible cases for the position of a
shading device the on indoor/outdoor side (see Figure 1.17).
In the case where the distance between the frame and the shading device is bigger than the gap width,
the dtop multiplier is equal to one. Therefore, the calculation of the Dtop opening multiplier is:

Atop = min(dtop /S, 1)

Shading device between glass layers
In this case the opening multiplier is calculated as the smallest distance between the shading device
and the frame or spacer (dtop ), divided by the smaller gap width (the minimum of (S1 andS2 )).
The Dtop opening multiplier for a between glass shade is calculated as:

Atop = min(dtop /Smin , 1)

Where

Smin = min(S1 , S2 )

1.9.30.1.9 Field: Bottom Opening Multiplier

The bottom opening multiplier (dbot ) is calculated in the same way as the top opening multiplier, with
the rules applied to the bottom of the shading device.
208 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.17: Three cases for the Dtop calculation for an indoor/outdoor shade: Case a) A shading
device between the frame; Case b) A shading device outside the frame, covering the frame; Case c)
a shading device outside the frame, not covering the frame.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 209

Figure 1.18: Calculation of Dtop for a shading device between glass layers
210 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.30.1.10 Field: Left Side Opening Multiplier

The left side opening multiplier (dlef t ) is calculated in the same way as the top opening multiplier,
with the rules applied to the left side of the shading device.

1.9.30.1.11 Field: Right Side Opening Multiplier

The right side opening multiplier (dright ) is calculated in the same way as the top opening multiplier,
with the rules applied to the right side of the shading device.

1.9.30.1.12 Field: Front Opening Multiplier

The fraction of glazing system area that is open on the front of the shading layer (see Figure 1.19).
This fraction is calculated as follows: Afront / (W * H), where Afront = Area of the front of the glazing
system that is not covered by the shading system, W = the width of the glazing system (IGU) and H is
height of the glazing system (IGU).

Figure 1.19: Front view of shading layer openings.

1.9.30.1.13 Field: Slat Width

The width (m) of the venetian slats. Used only for ShadingLayerType = Venetian.

1.9.30.1.14 Field: Slat Spacing

The distance (m) between front sides of the venetian slats. Used only for ShadingLayerType =
Venetian.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 211

1.9.30.1.15 Field: Slat Thickness

The thickness (m) of the venetian slats. Used only for ShadingLayerType = Venetian.

1.9.30.1.16 Field: Slat Angle

The slat tilt angle (degrees) of the venetian slats. Used only for ShadingLayerType = Venetian. Range
of slat angle is from -90 to 90 degrees.

1.9.30.1.17 Field: Slat Conductivity

The conductivity (W/mK) of the venetian slats. Used only for ShadingLayerType = Venetian.

1.9.30.1.18 Field: Slat Curve

The curvature radius (m) of the venetian slats. Setting this value to zero means there is no curvature
in the slat (it is flat), while a non-zero value is the radius of the slat curve. This value cannot be smaller
than Slat Width / 2. Used only for ShadingLayerType = Venetian.
An IDF example for ShadingLayerType = Venetian

WindowMaterial:ComplexShade , !- venetian blind layer

Shade_30001_Layer , !- name
Venetian , !- shading layer type
0.005 , !- thickness
160, !- layer conductivity
0.0, !- IR transmittance
0.9, !- front emissivity
0.9, !- back emissivity
0.0, !- top opening multiplier
0.0, !- bottom opening multiplier
0.0, !- left side opening multiplier
0.0, !- right side opening multiplier
0.05, !- front opening multiplier
0.016 , !- venetian slat width
0.012 , !- venetian slat spacing
0.0006 , !- venetian slat thickness
-45.00, !- venetian slat angle
160.00 , !- venetian slat conductivity
0.0000; !- venetian slat curve

An IDF example for ShadingLayerType = Woven

(Note that it is not necessary to include “blank” lines for the venetian blind input for a Woven shade
definition).

WindowMaterial:ComplexShade , !- woven shade layer

Shade_30002_Layer , !- name
Woven , !- shading layer type
0.011 , !- thickness
1, !- layer conductivity
0.0, !- IR transmittance
0.9, !- front emissivity
0.9, !- back emissivity
0.0, !- top opening multiplier
0.0, !- bottom opening multiplier
0.0, !- left side opening multiplier
0.0, !- right side opening multiplier
0.17; !- front opening multiplier

1.9.31 WindowMaterial:Screen
This object specifies the properties of exterior window screen materials. The window screen model assumes
the screen is made up of intersecting orthogonally-crossed cylinders. The surface of the cylinders is assumed
212 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.20: Side view of horizontal venetian blind slats or top view of blinds with vertical slats.
Front face of slats is marked with red line.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 213

to be diffusely reflecting, having the optical properties of a Lambertian surface.

The beam solar radiation transmitted through a window screen varies with sun angle and is made up
of two distinct elements: a direct beam component and a reflected beam component. The direct beam
transmittance component is modeled using the geometry of the screen material and the incident angle of the
sun to account for shadowing of the window by the screen material. The reflected beam component is an
empirical model that accounts for the inward reflection of solar beam off the screen material surface. This
component is both highly directional and small in magnitude compared to the direct beam transmittance
component (except at higher incident angles, for which case the magnitude of the direct beam component is
small or zero and the reflected beam component, though small in absolute terms can be many times larger
than the direct beam component). For this reason, the reflected beam transmittance component calculated
by the model can be a. disregarded, b. treated as an additive component to direct beam transmittance
(and in the same direction), or c. treated as hemispherically-diffuse transmittance based on a user input
to the model.

Figure 1.21: Direct beam and reflected beam transmittance components

The window screen “assembly” properties of overall beam solar reflectance and absorptance (including
the screen material ‘cylinders’ and open area) also change with sun angle and are calculated based on the
values of the beam solar transmittance components (direct and reflected components described above) and
the physical properties of the screen material (i.e., screen material diameter, spacing, and reflectance).
Transmittance, reflectance, and absorptance of diffuse solar radiation are considered constant values
and apply to both the front and back surfaces of the screen. These properties are calculated by the model
as an average value by integrating the screen’s beam solar properties over a quarter hemisphere of incident
radiation. Long-wave emissivity is also assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen.
There is an EnergyPlus Reference Data Set for WindowMaterial:Screen that contains properties for
generic window screens. Window screens of this type can only be used on the outside surface of the window
(“exterior screens”). When in place, the screen is assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window,
214 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

including dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame, if present. The plane of the screen is assumed
to be parallel to the glazing.
WindowMaterial:Screen can be used to model wire mesh insect screens where the solar and visible
transmission and reflection properties vary with the angle of incidence of solar radiation. For diffusing
materials such as drapery and translucent roller shades it is better to use the WindowMaterial:Shade
object. For slat-type shading devices like Venetian blinds, which have solar and visible transmission and
reflection properties that strongly depend on slat angle and angle of incidence of solar radiation, it is better
to use WindowMaterial:Blind.
There are two methods of assigning a screen to a window:

1.9.31.1 Inputs
1.9.31.1.1 Method 1:
1) Define the construction of the window without the screen, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Screen object.
4) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) specify that this Mate-
rial:WindowScreen is the window’s shading device, and (b) specify how the screen is controlled.

1.9.31.1.2 Method 2:
1) Define the Construction of the window without the screen, the so-called “bare” construction.
2) Reference the bare construction in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed for the window.
3) Define the WindowMaterial:Screen object.
4) Define another Construction, called the “shaded construction,” that includes the WindowMate-
rial:Screen.
5) Define a WindowShadingControl for the window in which you (a) reference the shaded construction,
and (b) specify how the screen is controlled.
Note that WindowShadingControl has to be used with either method, even if the screen is in place
at all times. You will get an error message if you try to reference a shaded construction directly from a
FenestrationSurface:Detailed object.

1.9.31.1.3 Field: Name

Enter a unique name for the screen. This name is referenced as an outside layer in a window construc-
tion.

1.9.31.1.4 Field: Reflected Beam Transmittance Accounting Method

This input specifies the method used to account for screen-reflected beam solar radiation that is trans-
mitted through the window screen (as opposed to being reflected back outside the building). Since this
inward reflecting beam solar is highly directional and is not modeled in the direction of the actual reflec-
tion, the user is given the option of how to account for the directionality of this component of beam solar
transmittance. Valid choices are DoNotModel, ModelAsDirectBeam (i.e., model as an additive component
to direct solar beam and in the same direction), or ModelAsDiffuse (i.e., model as hemispherically-diffuse
radiation). The default value is ModelAsDiffuse.

1.9.31.1.5 Field: Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This input specifies the solar reflectance (beam-to-diffuse) of the screen material itself (not the effective
value for the overall screen “assembly” including open spaces between the screen material). The outgoing
diffuse radiation is assumed to be Lambertian (distributed angularly according to Lambert’s cosine law).
The solar reflectance is assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen. This value must be from 0
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 215

to less than 1.0. In the absence of better information, the input value for diffuse solar reflectance should
match the input value for diffuse visible reflectance.

1.9.31.1.6 Field: Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This input specifies the visible reflectance (beam-to-diffuse) of the screen material itself (not the effective
value for the overall screen “assembly” including open spaces between the screen material) averaged over the
solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. The outgoing diffuse radiation is assumed
to be Lambertian (distributed angularly according to Lambert’s cosine law). The visible reflectance is
assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen. This value must be from 0 to less than 1.0.
If diffuse visible reflectance for the screen material is not available, then the following guidelines can
be used to estimate this value:

• Dark-colored screen (e.g., charcoal): 0.08 – 0.10

• Medium-colored screen (e.g., gray): 0.20 – 0.25

• Light-colored screen (e.g., bright aluminum): 0.60 – 0.65

Commercially-available gray scale or grayscale reflecting chart references can be purchased for improved
accuracy in estimating visible reflectance (by visual comparison of screen reflected brightness with that of
various known-reflectance portions of the grayscale).

1.9.31.1.7 Field: Thermal Hemispherical Emissivity

Long-wave emissivity ε of the screen material itself (not the effective value for the overall screen
“assembly” including open spaces between the screen material). The emissivity is assumed to be the same
for both sides of the screen.
For most non-metallic materials, ε is about 0.9. For metallic materials, ε is dependent on material, its
surface condition, and temperature. Typical values for metallic materials range from 0.05 – 0.1 with lower
values representing a more finished surface (e.g. low oxidation, polished surface). Material emissivities may
be found in Table 1.11 from the 2005 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, page 3.9. The value for this
input field must be between 0 and 1, with a default value of 0.9 if this field is left blank.

1.9.31.1.8 Field: Conductivity

Screen material conductivity (W/m-K). This input value must be greater than 0. The default value is
221 W/m-K (aluminum).

1.9.31.1.9 Field: Screen Material Spacing

The spacing, S, of the screen material (m) is the distance from the center of one strand of screen to the
center of the adjacent one. The spacing of the screen material is assumed to be the same in both directions
(e.g., vertical and horizontal). This input value must be greater than the non-zero screen material diameter.
If the spacing is different in the two directions, use the average of the two values.

1.9.31.1.10 Field: Screen Material Diameter

The diameter, D, of individual strands or wires of the screen material (m). The screen material
diameter is assumed to be the same in both directions (e.g., vertical and horizontal). This input value
must be greater than 0 and less than the screen material spacing. If the diameter is different in the two
directions, use the average of the two values.
216 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.22: Screen Material Spacing and Diameter

1.9.31.1.11 Field: Screen to Glass Distance

Distance from the window screen to the adjacent glass surface (m). If the screen is not flat, the average
screen to glass distance should be used. The screen-to-glass distance is used in calculating the natural
convective air flow between the glass and the screen produced by buoyancy effects. This input value must
be from 0.001 m to 1 m, with a default value of 0.025 m if this field is left blank.

1.9.31.1.12 Field: Top Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the top of the screen divided by the horizontal area between the glass and
screen (see the same field for the Material:WindowShade object for additional description). The opening
multiplier fields can be used to simulate a shading material that is offset from the window frame. Since
window screens are typically installed against the window frame, the default value is equal to 0.This input
value can range from 0 to 1.

1.9.31.1.13 Field: Bottom Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the bottom of the screen divided the horizontal area between the glass and
screen (see the same field for the Material:WindowShade object for additional description). The opening
multiplier fields can be used to simulate a shading material that is offset from the window frame. Since
window screens are typically installed against the window frame, the default value is equal to 0. This input
value can range from 0 to 1.

1.9.31.1.14 Field: Left-Side Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the left side of the screen divided the vertical area between the glass and
screen (see the same field for the Material:WindowShade object for additional description). The opening
multiplier fields can be used to simulate a shading material that is offset from the window frame. Since
window screens are typically installed against the window frame, the default value is equal to 0. This input
value can range from 0 to 1.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 217

1.9.31.1.15 Field: Right-Side Opening Multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the right side of the screen divided the vertical area between the glass and
screen (see the same field for the Material:WindowShade object for additional description). The opening
multiplier fields can be used to simulate a shading material that is offset from the window frame. Since
window screens are typically installed against the window frame, the default value is equal to 0. This input
value can range from 0 to 1.

1.9.31.1.16 Field: Angle of Resolution for Screen Transmittance Output Map

Angle of resolution, in degrees, for the overall screen beam transmittance (direct and reflected) output
map. The comma-separated variable file eplusscreen.csv (Ref. OutputDetailsandExamples.pdf) will con-
tain the direct beam and reflected beam solar radiation that is transmitted through the window screen as
a function of incident sun angle (0 to 90 degrees relative solar azimuth and 0 to 90 degrees relative solar
altitude) in sun angle increments specified by this input field. The default value is 0, which means no
transmittance map is generated. Other valid choice inputs are 1, 2, 3 and 5 degrees.
An IDF example for this object, along with Construction and WindowShadingControl objects, is shown
below:

WindowMaterial:Screen ,
EXTERIOR SCREEN , !- Name
ModelAsDiffuse , !- Reflected Beam Transmittance Accounting Method
0.6, !- Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.6, !- Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.9, !- Thermal Hemispherical Emissivity
221.0 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
0.00154 , !- Screen Material Spacing (m)
0.000254 , !- Screen Material Diameter (m)
0.025 , !- Screen -to -Glass Distance {m}
0.0, !- Top Opening Multiplier
0.0, !- Bottom Opening Multiplier
0.0, !- Left -Side Opening Multiplier
0.0, !- Right -Side Opening Multiplier
0; !- Angle of Resolution for Output Map {deg}

Construction ,
DOUBLE PANE WITHOUT SCREEN , !- Name
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN , !- Outside Layer
WinAirB1 - AIRSPACE RESISTANCE , !- Layer \#2
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN; !- Layer \#3

WindowShadingControl ,
DOUBLE PANE WITH SCREEN , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
1, !- Shading Control Sequence Number
ExteriorScreen , !- Shading Type
, !- Name of construction with shading
AlwaysOn , !- Shading Control Type
ScreenSchedule , !- Schedule Name
20.0, !- SetPoint {W/m2 , W or deg C}
YES , !- Shading Control Is Scheduled
NO , !- Glare Control Is Active
EXTERIOR SCREEN , !- Material Name of Shading Device
, !- Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds
, !- Slat Angle Schedule Name
, !- Setpoint 2 {W/m2 or deg C}
, !- Daylighting Control Object Name
Sequential , !- Multiple Surface Control Type
Zn001:Wall001:Win001; !- Fenestration Surface 1 Name
218 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.32 WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer
This object specifies the properties of Equivalent Layer window shade (roller blind) materials. Shades are
considered to be thin, flat and perfect diffusers (all transmitted and reflected radiation is hemispherically-
diffuse). However, shades can have beam-beam transmittance by virtue of their material openness. The
beam-beam transmittence is assumed to be the same for both sides of the shade and is the same as
the openness area fraction. Beam-diffuse transmittance and reflectance, and emissivity properties can be
different for front and back side of the shade.Window shades can be placed on the inside of the window,
on the outside of the window, or between glass layers. WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer is used
for roller blinds. The off-normal solar property calculation of shades (roller blind) is based on a set of
correlations developed from measurement of samples of commercially produced roller blind material with
openness fraction less than 0.14. The model is not intended for materials with unusually high values
of openness and should be limited to a maximum openness fraction of 0.20. The visible spectrum solar
properties input fields are not used currently hence can be left blank. The equivalent layer window shade
model does not support WindowShadingControl.

1.9.32.1 Inputs
1.9.32.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the shade. It is referenced as an inside, inbetween or outside layer in an equivalent layer win-
dow construction.

1.9.32.1.2 Field: Shade Beam-Beam Solar Transmittance

This value is the beam-beam transmittance of the shade at normal incidence and it is the same as the
openness area fraction of the shade material. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides of the roller
blinds. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.0. For
most common shade materials (e.g. Roller Blinds) the material oppeness fraction doesn’t exceed 0.20.

1.9.32.1.3 Field: Front Side Shade Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse transmittance of the shade material at normal incidence
averaged over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less
than 1.0. The default value is 0.0.

1.9.32.1.4 Field: Back Side Shade Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse transmittance of the shade material at normal incidence
averaged over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less
than 1.0. The default value is 0.0.

1.9.32.1.5 Field: Front Side Shade Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse reflectance of the shade material at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.32.1.6 Field: Back Side Shade Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse reflectance of the shade material at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 219

1.9.32.1.7 Field: Shade Beam-Beam Visible Transmittance

This value is the beam-beam transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the visible spectrum of
solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum
value is less than 1.0. Currently this input field is not used.

1.9.32.1.8 Field: Shade Beam-Diffuse Visible Transmittance

This value is the beam-diffuse transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the visible spectrum of
solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum
value is less than 1.0. Currently this input field is not used.

1.9.32.1.9 Field: Shade Beam-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the beam-diffuse reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the visible spectrum of
solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum
value is less than 1.0. Currently this input field is not used.

1.9.32.1.10 Field: Shade Material Infrared Transmittance

This value is the long-wave transmittance of the shade material and assumed to be the same for front
and back sides of the shade. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value
is 0.05.

1.9.32.1.11 Field: Front Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity

This value is the front side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of shade material. The minimum value
is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.91. The front side effective emissivity of the
shade layer is calculated using this value and the material openness specified above.

1.9.32.1.12 Field: Back Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity

This value is the back side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of shade material. The minimum value
is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.91. The back side effective emissivity of the
shade is calculated using this value and the material openness specified above.
An IDF example for this object is shown below:

WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer ,
Shade1 , !- Name
0.190 , !- Shade Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.206 , !- Front Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.206 , !- Back Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.499 , !- Front Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.499 , !- Back Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Shade Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Shade Material Infrared Transmittance
0.84, !- Front Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity
0.84; !- Back Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity

1.9.33 WindowMaterial:Drape:EquivalentLayer
Specifies the optical and thermal properties of equivalent layer window drape fabric materials.
Drapery fabric shades are commonly placed on the the inside of the window. The long-wave (Thermal)
properties for commonly used drapery fabrics are assumed to be the same on both sides but different values
can be specified when required. Drape fabric shade layers are considered to be perfect diffusers (reflected
220 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

radiation is hemispherically-diffuse independent of angle of incidence). Unpleated drape fabric is treated

as thin and flat layer.The off-normal optical properties of drapery fabric is determined from user specified
optical properties at normal incidence using empirical correlations. Pleated drape fabric requires entering
the pleated section average width and length as shown in Figure 1.23. For pleated drapes the effective
beam-beam and beam-diffuse solar properties are determined by tracking both radiation components, for
a given incident angle solar radiation, through various interactions with a fabric pleated in a rectangular
geometry shown in Figure 1.23. The solar properties of the two different pleat facets are evaluated on the
basis of the local solar incidence angle. Therefore, the effective layer properties are influenced not just by
horizontal solar profile angle, but also by incidence angle. The correlations used for drape fabrics optical
property calculations reqiure that the solar absorptance of the fabric, at normal incidence, is not less than
1%. The equivalent layer window drapery fabric shade model does not support WindowShadingControl.

1.9.33.1 Inputs
1.9.33.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the drape fabric shade layer. It is referenced as an inside, in between or outside layer in an
equivalent layer window construction.

1.9.33.1.2 Field: Drape Beam-Beam Solar Transmittance

This value is the drape fabric beam-beam transmittance at normal incidence, and it is the same as the
drape fabric openness area fraction. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides of the drape fabric
layer. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. For most drape fabric materials the
maximum fabric openness fraction do not exceed 0.2. The default value is 0.0.

1.9.33.1.3 Field: Front Side Drape Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse solar transmittance of the drape fabric material at normal
incidence averaged over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum
value is less than 1.0.

1.9.33.1.4 Field: Back Side Drape Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse solar transmittance of the drape fabric material at normal
incidence averaged over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum
value is less than 1.0.

1.9.33.1.5 Field: Front Side Drape Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse solar reflectance of the drape fabric material at normal incidence
averaged over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less
than 1.0.

1.9.33.1.6 Field: Back Side Drape Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse solar reflectance of the drape fabric material at normal incidence
averaged over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less
than 1.0.

1.9.33.1.7 Field: Drape Beam-Beam Visible Transmittance

This value is the drape fabric beam-beam visible transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the
visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides of the drape
fabric layer. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.0. This
input field is not used currently.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 221

Figure 1.23: Geometry used for Pleated Drape Analysis

222 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.33.1.8 Field: Front Side Drape Beam-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the front side drape fabric beam-diffuse visible reflectance at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides of the
drape. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.0. This
input field is not used currently.

1.9.33.1.9 Field: Back Side Drape Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the back side drape fabric diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides of the
drape. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.0. This
input field is not used currently.

1.9.33.1.10 Field: Drape Material Infrared Transmittance

This value is the long-wave hemispherical transmittance of the fabric material at zero fabric openness
fraction. Assumed to be the same for front and back sides of the drape fabric material layer. The minimum
value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.05.

1.9.33.1.11 Field: Front Side Drape Material Infrared Emissivity

This value is the front side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of fabric material at zero shade openness.
The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. the default value is 0.87. The front side
effective emissivity of the drape fabric layer is calculated using this value and the fabric openness area
fraction specified above.

1.9.33.1.12 Field: Back Side Drape Material Infrared Emissivity

This value is the back side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of fabric material at zero fabric openness
fraction. The minimum value is 0.0 and maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.87. The
back side effective emissivity of the drape fabric layer is calculated using this value and the fabric openness
area fraction specified above.

1.9.33.1.13 Field: Width of Pleated Fabric

This value is the width of the pleated section of the draped fabric, w(m). If the drape fabric is flat
(unpleated), then the pleated section width is set to zero. The default value is 0.0, i.e., assumes flat drape
fabric.

1.9.33.1.14 Field: Length of Pleated Fabric

This value is the length of the pleated section of the draped fabric, s(m). If the drape fabric is flat
(unpleated), then the pleated section length is set to zero. The default value is 0.0, i.e., assumes flat drape
fabric.
An IDF example for this object is shown below:
WindowMaterial:Drape:EquivalentLayer ,
Drape02 , !- Name
0.14, !- Shade Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.10, !- Front Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.10, !- Back Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.40, !- Front Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.50, !- Back Side Shade Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Shade Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.10, !- Shade Material Infrared Transmittance
0.90, !- Front Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity
0.80, !- Back Side Shade Material Infrared Emissivity
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 223

0.01, !- Width of Pleated Fabric

0.025; !- Length of Pleated Fabric

1.9.34 WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer
This object specifies the properties of an Equivalent Layer window blind consisting of thin and equally-
spaced slats. The model assumes that slats are flat and thin, and applies correction for the slat curvature
effect based on the user specified slat crown. Slats are assumed to transmit and reflect diffusely. The
effective shortwave optical and longwave optical properties of venetian blind layer is estimated analytically.
The Equivalent Layer blind model requires optical properties and geometry of the slats shown in Figure 1.24.
Likewise, effective longwave properties are obtained for the layer knowing longwave properties of the slats.
The input data required to characterize a venetian blind are: front and back side reflectance and
transmittance of the slat, geometry (Slat width, w, slat spacing, s, slat crown, c, and slat angle, ϕ, and
long wave emittance and transmittance of the slat. Blinds can be located on the inside of the window, on
the outside of the window, or between two layers of glass. The blind is assumed to cover all of the glazed
part of the window. The equivalent layer window blind model allows three slat angle control types (see
Slat Angle Control input field) but does not support WindowShadingControl.

1.9.34.1 Inputs
1.9.34.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the venetian blind. It is referenced as an inside, outside or in between layers in an equivalent
layer window construction.

1.9.34.1.2 Field: Slat Orientation

The choices are Horizontal and Vertical. “Horizontal” means the slats are parallel to the bottom of
the window; this is the same as saying that the slats are parallel to the X-axis of the window. “Vertical”
means the slats are parallel to Y-axis of the window. The default is “Horizontal”.

1.9.34.1.3 Field: Slat Width

This value is the width of the slat measured from edge to edge (m). The default value is 0.0254.

1.9.34.1.4 Field: Slat Separation

The distance between the front of a slat and the back of the adjacent slat (m). The default value is
0.025. The slat separation should not be greater than the slat width.

1.9.34.1.5 Field: Slat Crown

The perpendicular length between the slat cord and the curve (m). Crown = 0.0625x“Slat width”. Slat
is assumed to be rectangular in cross section and flat. The crown accounts for curvature of the slat. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the default value is 0.0015m.

1.9.34.1.6 Field: Slat Angle

The angle (degrees) between the glazing outward normal and the slat outward normal, where the
outward normal points away from the front face of the slat (degrees). The slat angle is +ve if the tip of
the slat front face is tilted upward, or else the slat angle is -ve if the tip of the slat front face is tilted
downward. The slat angle varies between -90 to +90. If the ‘Slat Angle Control input field below specified
is “FixedSlatAngle”, then the slat angle is fixed at “Slat Angle” value entered. Minimum value allowed is
-90.0, and the maximum value allowed is 90.0 degrees. The default value is 45 degrees.
224 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.24: Geometry and Properties used for venetian blind analysis
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 225

1.9.34.1.7 Field: Front Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the slat front side beam-diffuse solar transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the
entire spectrum of solar radiation. Any transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e.,
slats are translucent). Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value
is 0.0.

1.9.34.1.8 Field: Back Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the slat back side beam-diffuse solar transmittance at normal incidence averaged over the
entire spectrum of solar radiation. Any transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e.,
slats are translucent). Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value
is 0.0.

1.9.34.1.9 Field: Front Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is slat front side beam-diffuse solar reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the entire
spectrum of solar radiation. All the reflected component is assumed to be diffuse. Minimum value is 0.0,
and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.34.1.10 Field: Back Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the slat back side beam-diffuse solar reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the
entire spectrum of solar radiation. All the reflected component is assumed to be diffuse. Minimum value
is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.34.1.11 Field: Front Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Visible Solar Transmittance

This value is the slat front side beam-diffuse visible transmittance at normal incidence averaged over
the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Any transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100%
diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent). Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. The
default value is 0.0.

1.9.34.1.12 Field: Back Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Visible Solar Transmittance

This value is the slat back side beam-diffuse visible transmittance at normal incidence averaged the
visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Any transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse
(i.e., slats are translucent). Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default
value is 0.0.

1.9.34.1.13 Field: Front Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Visible Solar Reflectance

This value is the slat front side beam-diffuse visible reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the
visible spectrum range of solar radiation. All the reflected component is assumed to be diffuse. Minimum
value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0

1.9.34.1.14 Field: Back Side Slat Beam-Diffuse Visible Solar Reflectance

This value is the slat back side beam-diffuse visible reflectance at normal incidence averaged over the
visible spectrum range of solar radiation. All the reflected component is assumed to be diffuse. Minimum
value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0

1.9.34.1.15 Field: Slat Diffuse-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the slat diffuse-diffuse solar transmittance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This
value is the same for front and back side of the slat. Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is
less than 1.0.
226 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.34.1.16 Field: Front Side Slat Diffuse-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the slat front side diffuse-diffuse solar reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation.
Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.34.1.17 Field: Back Side Slat Diffuse-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the slat back side diffuse-diffuse solar reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation.
Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.34.1.18 Field: Slat Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Transmittance

This value is the slat diffuse-diffuse visible transmittance for hemispherically diffuse visible spectrum
range of solar radiation. This value is the same for front and back side of the slat. Minimum value is
0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. This input field is not used currently.

1.9.34.1.19 Field: Front Side Slat Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the slat front side diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible
spectrum range of solar radiation. Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. This
input field is not used currently.

1.9.34.1.20 Field: Back Side Slat Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the slat back side diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible
spectrum range of solar radiation. Minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. This
input field is not used currently.

1.9.34.1.21 Field: Slat Infrared Transmittance

This value is the long-wave hemispherical transmittance of the slat material. Assumed to be the same
for both sides of the slat. The minimum value is 0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default
value is 0.0.

1.9.34.1.22 Field: Front Side Slat Infrared Emissivity

This value is the front side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of the slat material. The minimum value
is 0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.9.

1.9.34.1.23 Field: Back Side Slat Infrared Emissivity

This value is the back side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of the slat material. The minimum value
is 0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.9.

1.9.34.1.24 Field: Slat Angle Control

This input field is used only if slat angle control is desired. The three key choice inputs allowed
are “FixedSlatAngle”, “MaximizeSolar”, and “BlockBeamSolar”. The default value is “FixedSlatAngle”.If
Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = MaximizeSolar the slat angle is adjusted to maximize solar gain. If
Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = BlockBeamSolar, the slat angle is adjusted to maximize visibiity
while eliminating beam solar radiation. If Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds = FixedSlatAngle, then
the model uses a fixed slat angle specified above.
An IDF example for this object, is shown below:

WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer ,
VBU8D6 +45SW1 , ! - Name
Horizontal , ! - Slat Orientation
0.025 , ! - Slat Width
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 227

0.025 , ! - Slat Separation

0.0, ! - Slat Crown
45.0, ! - Slat Angle
0.0, ! - Front Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.0, ! - Back Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.0, ! - Front Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, ! - Back Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, ! - Front Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, ! - Back Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, ! - Front Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, ! - Back Side Slat Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, ! - Slat Diffuse -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.80, ! - Front Side Slat Diffuse -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.60, ! - Back Side Slat Diffuse -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, ! - Slat Diffuse -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, ! - Front Side Slat Diffuse -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, ! - Back Side Slat Diffuse -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, ! - Slat Infrared Transmittance
0.90, ! - Front Side Slat Infrared Emissivity
0.90, ! - Back Side Slat Infrared Emissivity
FixedSlatAngle; ! - Slat Angle Control

1.9.35 WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer
This object specifies the optical and thermal properties of exterior screen materials for Equivalent Layer
Window. Can only be placed on the exterior side of window construction. The window screen model
assumes the screen is made up of intersecting orthogonally-crossed cylinders. The surface of the cylinders
is assumed to be diffusely reflecting. The beam solar radiation transmitted through an equivalent Layer
window screen varies with sun angle and is made up of two distinct elements: a beam-beam component
and a beam-diffuse component. The beam-beam transmittance component is calculated using screen
openness area fraction determined from the geometry of the screen and the incident angle of the sun.
Empirical correlations are used to obtain the effective off-normal solar and longwave properties of insect
screens. Insect screen geometry is shown in Figure 1.25. The calculation of effective solar properties
requires a set of properties measured at normal incidence. The equivalent layer window screen shade
model does not support WindowShadingControl.
The formulation of the model, assumption and correlations used to calculate effective solar and longwave
properties of insect screens are described in the Engineering Reference.

1.9.35.1 Inputs
1.9.35.1.1 Field: Name
Name of the insect screen. It is referenced as an outside layer in an equivalent layer window construction.

1.9.35.1.2 Field: Screen Beam-Beam Solar Transmittance

This value is the beam-beam transmittance of the screen material at normal incidence. This value is
the same as the screen openness area fraction. This value can be autocalculated from the wire spacing
and wire diameter. It is the same for both sides of the screen. The minimum value is 0.0, and maximum
value is less than 1.0.

1.9.35.1.3 Field: Screen Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the beam-diffuse solar transmittance of the screen material at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.
228 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.25: Geometry used for insect screen analysis

1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 229

1.9.35.1.4 Field: Screen Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the beam-diffuse solar reflectance of the screen material at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.35.1.5 Field: Screen Beam-Beam Visible Transmittance

This value is the beam-beam visible transmittance of the screen material at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen.
The minimum value is 0.0, and maximum value is less than 1.0. This input input field is not used currently.

1.9.35.1.6 Field: Screen Beam-Diffuse Visible Transmittance

This value is the beam-diffuse visible reflectance of the screen material at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen.
The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. This input input field is not used
currently.

1.9.35.1.7 Field: Screen Beam-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the beam-diffuse visible reflectance of the screen material at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Assumed to be the same for both sides of the screen.
The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. This input input field is not used
currently.

1.9.35.1.8 Field: Screen Infrared Transmittance

This value is the long-wave hemispherical transmittance of the the screen material. Assumed to be the
same for both sides of the screen material. The minimum value is 0.0, the maximum value is less than
1.0. The default value is 0.02

1.9.35.1.9 Field: Screen Infrared Emissivity

This value is the long-wave hemispherical emissivity of the screen material. Assumed to be the same
for both sides of the screen material. The minimum value is 0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The
default value is 0.93.

1.9.35.1.10 Field: Screen Wire Spacing

The spacing, S (m), of the screen material is the distance from the center of one strand of screen to the
center of the adjacent one. The spacing of the screen material is assumed to be the same in both directions
(e.g., vertical and horizontal). This input value must be greater than the non-zero screen material diameter.
If the spacing is different in the two directions, use the average of the two values. Default value is 0.0025m.

1.9.35.1.11 Field: Screen Wire Diameter

The diameter, D (m), of individual strands or wires of the screen material. The screen material
diameter is assumed to be the same in both directions (e.g., vertical and horizontal). This input value
must be greater than 0 and less than the screen wire spacing. If the diameter is different in the two
directions, use the average of the two values. Default value is 0.005m.
An IDF example for this object, is shown below:

WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer ,
INSCRN , !- Name
0.763 , !- Screen Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.052 , !- Screen Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
230 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.076 , !- Screen Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance

0.0, !- Screen Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Screen Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Screen Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Screen Infrared Transmittance
0.84, !- Screen Infrared Emissivity
0.025 , !- Screen Wire Spacing
0.005; !- Screen Wire Diameter

1.9.36 WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer
Glass material properties for equivalent layer window model. Uses transmittance/reflectance input
method. For exterior windows, “front side” is the side of the glass closest to the outside air and “back
side” is the side closest to the zone the window is defined in. For interzone windows, “front side” is the
side closest to the zone adjacent to the zone the window is defined in and “back side” is the side clos-
est to the zone the window is defined in. The equivalent layer window glazing model does not support
WindowShadingControl.

1.9.36.1 Inputs
1.9.36.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the glass layer. It corresponds to a layer in an equivalent layer window construction.

1.9.36.1.2 Field: Optical Data Type

Valid values for this field are SpectralAverage, or Spectral. If Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage,
the values you enter for solar transmittance and reflectance are assumed to be averaged over the solar
spectrum, and the values you enter for visible transmittance and reflectance are assumed to be averaged
over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. SpectralAverage is the default.
Spectral data input is not supported now.

1.9.36.1.3 Field: Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name

This input field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.4 Field: Front Side Beam-Beam Solar Transmittance

This value is the front side beam-beam solar transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.5 Field: Back Side Beam-Beam Solar Transmittance

This value is the back side beam-beam solar transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.6 Field: Front Side Beam-Beam Solar Reflectance

This value is the front side beam-beam solar reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 231

1.9.36.1.7 Field: Back Side Beam-Beam Solar Reflectance

This value is the back side beam-beam solar reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.8 Field: Front Side Beam-Beam Visible Transmittance

This value is the front side beam-beam visible transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAver-
age. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.9 Field: Back Side Beam-Beam Visible Transmittance

This value is the back side beam-beam visible transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAver-
age. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.10 Field: Front Side Beam-Beam Visible Reflectance

This value is the front side beam-beam visible reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAver-
age. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.11 Field: Back Side Beam-Beam Visible Reflectance

This value is the back side beam-beam visible reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAver-
age. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.12 Field: Front Side Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse solar transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. For
clear glazing the beam-diffuse transmittance is zero. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value
is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0.

1.9.36.1.13 Field: Back Side Beam-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse solar transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. For
clear glazing the beam-diffuse solar transmittance is zero. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum
value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0.

1.9.36.1.14 Field: Front Side Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse solar reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0.

1.9.36.1.15 Field: Back Side Beam-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse solar reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the entire spectrum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The
minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0.
232 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.36.1.16 Field: Front Side Beam-Diffuse Visible Transmittance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse visible transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence
averaged over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type =
SpectralAverage. For clear glazing the beam-diffuse visible transmittance is zero. The minimum value is
0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0. This input field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.17 Field: Back Side Beam-Diffuse Visible Transmittance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse visible transmittance of the glazing at normal incidence av-
eraged over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = Spec-
tralAverage. For clear glazing the beam-diffuse visible transmittance is zero. The minimum value is 0.0,
and the maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0. This input field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.18 Field: Front Side Beam-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the front side beam-diffuse visible reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAver-
age. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0. This input
field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.19 Field: Back Side Beam-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the back side beam-diffuse visible reflectance of the glazing at normal incidence averaged
over the visible spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAver-
age. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0. Default value is 0.0. This input
field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.20 Field: Diffuse-Diffuse Solar Transmittance

This value is the diffuse-diffuse solar transmittance of the glazing averaged over the entire spectrum of
solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The diffuse-diffuse transmittance
is assumed to be the same for both sides of the glazing. EnergyPlus automatically estimates the diffuse-
diffuse solar transmittance from other inputs. If this input field is specified as “Autocalculate”, then the
calculated transmittance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.21 Field: Front Side Diffuse-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the front side diffuse-diffuse solar reflectance of the glazing averaged over the entire spec-
trum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. EnergyPlus automatically
estimates the diffuse-diffuse reflectance from other inputs. If this input field is specified as “Autocalculate”,
then the calculated reflectance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less
than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.22 Field: Back Side Diffuse-Diffuse Solar Reflectance

This value is the back side diffuse-diffuse solar reflectance of the glazing averaged over the entire spec-
trum of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. EnergyPlus automatically
estimates the diffuse-diffuse reflectance from other inputs. If this input field is specified as “Autocalculate”,
then the calculated reflectance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less
than 1.0.

1.9.36.1.23 Field: Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Solar Transmittance

This value is the diffuse-diffuse visible transmittance of the glazing averaged over the visible spectrum
range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. The diffuse-diffuse
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 233

visible transmittance is assumed to be the same for both sides of the glazing. If this input field is specified
as “Autocalculate”, then the calculated transmittance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the
maximum value is less than 1.0. This input field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.24 Field: Front Side Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the front side diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance of the glazing averaged over the visible
spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. EnergyPlus
automatically estimates the front side diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance from front side beam-beam visible
reflectance at normal incidence specified above. If this input field is specified as “Autocalculate”, then the
calculated reflectance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.
This input field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.25 Field: Back Side Diffuse-Diffuse Visible Reflectance

This value is the back side diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance of the glazing averaged over the visible
spectrum range of solar radiation. Used only when Optical Data Type = SpectralAverage. EnergyPlus
automatically estimates the back side diffuse-diffuse visible reflectance from back side beam-beam visible
reflectance at normal incidence specified above. If this input field is specified as “Autocalculate”, then the
calculated reflectance will be used. The minimum value is 0.0, and the maximum value is less than 1.0.
This input field is not used currently.

1.9.36.1.26 Field: Infrared Transmittance (applies to front and back)

This value is the long-wave hemispherical transmittance of the glazing. Assumed to be the same for
both sides of the glazing. The minimum value is 0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default
value is 0.0.

1.9.36.1.27 Field: Front Side Infrared Emissivity

This value is the front side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of the glazing. The minimum value is
0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.84.

1.9.36.1.28 Field: Back Side Infrared Emissivity

This value is the back side long-wave hemispherical emissivity of the glazing. The minimum value is
0.0, the maximum value is less than 1.0. The default value is 0.84.

1.9.36.1.29 Field: Thermal Resistance

This field is used to enter the thermal resistance (R-value) of the material layer. Units for this parameter
are (m2 -K)/W. Thermal resistance must be greater than zero. The default value is 0.158 which is roughly
equivalent to a single layer of 1/4” glass. This field is only used if this equivalent layer of glazing is being
referenced for movable insulation.
An IDF example for this object, is shown below:

WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer ,
GLZCLR , !- Name
SpectralAverage , !- Optical Data Type
, !- Window Glass Spectral Data Set Name
0.83, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.83, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Solar Transmittance
0.08, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Solar Reflectance
0.08, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Beam Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Beam Visible Reflectance
234 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance

0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Beam -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.76, !- Diffuse -Diffuse Solar Transmittance
0.14, !- Front Side Diffuse -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.14, !- Back Side Diffuse -Diffuse Solar Reflectance
0.0, !- Diffuse -Diffuse Visible Transmittance
0.0, !- Front Side Diffuse -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Back Side Diffuse -Diffuse Visible Reflectance
0.0, !- Infrared Transmittance
0.84, !- Front Side Infrared Emissivity
0.84, !- Back Side Infrared Emissivity
0.158; !- Thermal Resistance (used for movable insulation only)

1.9.37 WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer
This object is used in windows equivalent layer construction object and specifies the properties of the
gap between the layers in multi-layer equivalent layer window object. There is an EnergyPlus Reference
Data Set for Material:WindowGas that contains several types of gas. This object uses the gas types:
Air, Argon, Xenon, Crypton, and Custom. For Custom gas type users are required to entering the
thermophicial properties.

1.9.37.1 Inputs
1.9.37.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the gap. It refers to a layer in a window construction equivalent layer.

1.9.37.1.2 Field: Gas Type

The type of gas. The choices allowed are AIR, ARGON, XENON, KRYPTON, or CUSTOM.

1.9.37.1.3 Field: Thickness

The thickness (m) of the gap layer.

1.9.37.1.4 Field: Gap Vent Type

This input field contains the valid key choice for gap vent type. The valid vent types are: Sealed,
VentedIndoor, and VentedOutdoor. Sealed means the gap is enclosed and gas tight, i.e., no venting
to indoor or outdoor environment. The gap types “VentedIndoor” and “VentedOutdoor” are used with
gas type “Air” only. VentedIndoor means the air in the gap is naturally vented to indoor environment,
and VentedOutdoor means the air in the gap is naturally vented to the outdoor environment.

1.9.37.1.5 Properties for Custom Gas Types

The following entries are used only if Gas Type = Custom. The A, B and C coefficients are those in
the following expression that gives a property value as a function of temperature in degrees K:

P roperty = Coef fA + Coef fB × T emperatureK + Coef fC × T emperature2K (1.18)

1.9.37.1.6 Field: Conductivity Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 235

1.9.37.1.7 Field: Conductivity Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.8 Field: Conductivity Coefficient C

The C coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K3 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.9 Field: Viscosity Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.10 Field: Viscosity Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s-K). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.11 Field: Viscosity Coefficient C

The C coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.12 Field: Specific Heat Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.13 Field: Specific Heat Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.14 Field: Specific Heat Coefficient C

The C coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K2 ). Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.15 Field: Specific Heat Ratio

The specific heat ratio for gas. Used only if Gas Type = Custom.

1.9.37.1.16 Field: Molecular Weight

The molecular weight for gas. The molecular weight is the mass of 1 mol of the substance. This
has a numerical value which is the average molecular mass of the molecules in the substance multiplied by
Avogadro’s constant. (kg/kmol) (Shown in the IDD as g/mol for consistency)

1.9.37.1.17 Field: Specific Heat Ratio

The specific heat ratio for gas. The specific heat ratio of a gas is the ratio of the specific heat at
contant pressure, to the specific heat at constant volume. Used only if Gas Type = Custom.
An IDF example for this object, is shown below:

WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer ,
Custom CO2 Sealed 12mm , !- Name
CUSTOM , !- Gas Type
0.0120 , !- Thickness {m}
Sealed , !- Gap Vent Type
-5.8181E-3, !- Conductivity Coefficient A {W/m-K}
7.4714E-5, !- Conductivity Coefficient B {W/m-K2}
0.0, !- Conductivity Coefficient C {W/m-K3}
8.5571E-7, !- Viscosity Coefficient A {kg/m-s}
4.7143E-8, !- Viscosity Coefficient B {kg/m-s-K}
0.0, !- Viscosity Coefficient C {kg/m-s-K2}
5.76903E2 , !- Specific Heat Coefficient A {J/kg -K}
9.18088E-2, !- Specific Heat Coefficient B {J/kg -K2}
0.0, !- Specific Heat Coefficient C {J/kg -K3}
44.01; !- Molecular Weight {g/mol}
236 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.38 Material:RoofVegetation
This definition must be used in order to simulate the green roof (ecoroof) model. The material becomes
the outside layer in a green roof construction (see example below). In the initial release of the green roof
model, only one material may be used as a green roof layer though, of course, several constructions using
that material may be used. In addition, the model works only with the ConductionTransferFunction heat
balance solution algorithm. This model was developed for low-sloped exterior surfaces (roofs). It is not
recommended for high-sloped exterior surfaces (e.g., walls).

1.9.38.1 Inputs
1.9.38.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to a particular ecoroof material. This name
can then be referred to by other input data.

1.9.38.1.2 Field: Height of Plants

This field defines the height of plants in units of meters. This field is limited to values in the range
0.005 < Height < 1.00 m. Default is .2 m.

1.9.38.1.3 Field: Leaf Area Index

This is the projected leaf area per unit area of soil surface. This field is dimensionless and is limited
to values in the range of 0.001 < LAI < 5.0. Default is 1.0. At the present time the fraction vegetation
cover is calculated directly from LAI (Leaf Area Index) using an empirical relation. The user may find it
necessary to increase the specified value of LAI in order to represent high fractional coverage of the surface
by vegetation.

1.9.38.1.4 Field: Leaf Reflectivity

This field represents the fraction of incident solar radiation that is reflected by the individual leaf sur-
faces (albedo). Solar radiation includes the visible spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths.
Values for this field must be between 0.05 and 0.5. Default is .22. Typical values are .18 to .25.

1.9.38.1.5 Field: Leaf Emissivity

This field is the ratio of thermal radiation emitted from leaf surfaces to that emitted by an ideal black
body at the same temperature. This parameter is used when calculating the long wavelength radiant
exchange at the leaf surfaces. Values for this field must be between 0.8 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing
“black body” conditions). Default is .95.

1.9.38.1.6 Field: Minimum Stomatal Resistance

This field represents the resistance of the plants to moisture transport. It has units of s/m. Plants
with low values of stomatal resistance will result in higher evapotranspiration rates than plants with high
resistance. Values for this field must be in the range of 50.0 to 300.0. Default is 180.

1.9.38.1.7 Field: Soil Layer Name

This field is a unique reference name that the user assigns to the soil layer for a particular ecoroof.
This name can then be referred to by other input data. Default is Green Roof Soil.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 237

1.9.38.1.8 Field: Roughness

This alpha field defines the relative roughness of a particular material layer. This parameter only
influences the convection coefficients, more specifically the exterior convection coefficient. A keyword is
expected in this field with the options being “VeryRough”, “Rough”, “MediumRough”, “MediumSmooth”,
“Smooth”, and “VerySmooth” in order of roughest to smoothest options. Default is MediumRough.

1.9.38.1.9 Field: Thickness

This field characterizes the thickness of the material layer in meters. This should be the dimension of
the layer in the direction perpendicular to the main path of heat conduction. This value must be a positive
number. Depths of .10m (4 inches) and .15m (6 inches) are common. Default if this field is left blank is
.1. Maximum is .7m. Must be greater than .05 m.

1.9.38.1.10 Field: Conductivity of Dry Soil

This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer. Units for this parameter are
W/(m-K). Thermal conductivity must be greater than zero. Typical soils have values from .3 to .5. The
minimum is .2, the default is .35, and the maximum is 1.5.

1.9.38.1.11 Field: Density of Dry Soil

This field is used to enter the density of the material layer in units of kg/m3 . Density must be a
positive quantity. Typical soils range from 400 to 1000 (dry to wet). Minimum is 300, maximum is 2000
and default if field is left blank is 1100.

1.9.38.1.12 Field: Specific Heat of Dry Soil

This field represents the specific heat of the material layer in units of J/(kg-K). Note that these units
are most likely different than those reported in textbooks and references which tend to use kJ/(kg-K) or
J/(g-K). They were chosen for internal consistency within EnergyPlus. Only positive values of specific
heat are allowed.

1.9.38.1.13 Field: Thermal Absorptance

The thermal absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident long
wavelength (>2.5 microns) radiation that is absorbed by the material. This parameter is used when calcu-
lating the long wavelength radiant exchange between various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances
(both inside and outside as appropriate). For long wavelength radiant exchange, thermal emissivity and
thermal emittance are equal to thermal absorptance. Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0
(with 1.0 representing “black body” conditions). Typical values are from .9 to .98. The default value for
this field is 0.9.

1.9.38.1.14 Field: Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident solar
radiation that is absorbed by the material. Solar radiation (0.3 to 2.537 microns) includes the visible
spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating the
amount of incident solar radiation absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both
inside and outside as appropriate). If solar reflectance (or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance
is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials). Values for this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Typical values are from .6 to .85. The default value for this field is 0.7.
238 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.9.38.1.15 Field: Visible Absorptance

The visible absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident visible
wavelength radiation that is absorbed by the material. Visible wavelength radiation ( 0.37 to 0.78 microns
weighted by photopic response) is slightly different than solar radiation in that the visible band of wave-
lengths is much more narrow while solar radiation includes the visible spectrum as well as infrared and
ultraviolet wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating the amount of incident visible radiation
absorbed by various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate)
as well as the daylighting calculations. If visible reflectance (or reflectivity) data is available, then absorp-
tance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials). Values for this field must be between 0.5
and 1.0. The default value for this field is 0.75.

1.9.38.1.16 Field: Saturation Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer

The field allows for user input of the saturation moisture content of the soil layer. Maximum moisture
content is typically less than .5. Range is [.1,.5] with the default being .3.

1.9.38.1.17 Field: Residual Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer

The field allows for user input of the residual moisture content of the soil layer. Default is .01, range
is [.01,.1].

1.9.38.1.18 Field: Initial Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer

The field allows for user input of the initial moisture content of the soil layer. Range is (.05, .5] with
the default being .1.

1.9.38.1.19 Field: Moisture Diffusion Calculation Method

The field allows for two models to be selected: Simple or Advanced. EnergyPlus Currently supports
only the Simple Moisture Diffusion Calculation Method.
Simple is the original Ecoroof model - based on a constant diffusion of moisture through the soil. This
model starts with the soil in two layers. Every time the soil properties update is called, it will look at the
two soils moisture layers and asses which layer has more moisture in it. It then takes moisture from the
higher moisture layer and redistributes it to the lower moisture layer at a constant rate.
Advanced is the later Ecoroof model. The model requires higher number of timesteps in hour for the
simulation with a recommended value of 20. This moisture transport model is based on a project which
looked at the way moisture transports through soil. It uses a finite difference method to divide the soil
into layers (nodes). It redistributes the soil moisture according the model described in:
Marcel G Schaap and Martinus Th. van Genuchten, 2006, ‘A modified Maulem-van Genuchten For-
mulation for Improved Description of the Hydraulic Conductivity Near Saturation’, Vadose Zone Journal
5 (1), p 27-34. However, currently Advanced Moisture Diffusion Calculation Method is not supported in
EnergyPlus.
An IDF example:

Material:RoofVegetation ,
BaseEco , !- Name
0.5, !- Height of Plants {m}
5, !- Leaf Area Index {dimensionless}
0.2, !- Leaf Reflectivity {dimensionless}
0.95, !- Leaf Emissivity
180, !- Minimum Stomatal Resistance {s/m}
EcoRoofSoil , !- Soil Layer Name
MediumSmooth , !- Roughness
0.18, !- Thickness {m}
0.4, !- Conductivity of Dry Soil {W/m-K}
641, !- Density of Dry Soil {kg/m3}
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 239

1100, !- Specific Heat of Dry Soil {J/kg -K}

0.95, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.8, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7, !- Visible Absorptance
0.4, !- Saturation Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
0.01, !- Residual Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
0.2, !- Initial Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
Simple; !- Moisture Diffusion Calculation Method

Material:RoofVegetation ,
LowLAI , !- Name
0.5, !- Height of Plants {m}
0.5, !- Leaf Area Index {dimensionless}
0.2, !- Leaf Reflectivity {dimensionless}
0.95, !- Leaf Emissivity
180, !- Minimum Stomatal Resistance {s/m}
EcoRoofSoil , !- Soil Layer Name
MediumSmooth , !- Roughness
0.18, !- Thickness {m}
0.4, !- Conductivity of Dry Soil {W/m-K}
641, !- Density of Dry Soil {kg/m3}
1100, !- Specific Heat of Dry Soil {J/kg -K}
0.95, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.8, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7, !- Visible Absorptance
0.4, !- Saturation Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
0.01, !- Residual Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
0.2, !- Initial Volumetric Moisture Content of the Soil Layer
Simple; !- Moisture Diffusion Calculation Method

And construction using the ecoroof material:

Construction ,
ASHRAE 90.1 -2004 _Sec 5.5-2_Roof , !- Name
BaseEco , !- Outside Layer
ASHRAE 90.1 -2004 _Sec 5.5-2 _Roof Insulation_1 , !- Layer \#2
ASHRAE 90.1 -2004 _Sec 5.5-2_MAT -METAL; !- Layer \#3

1.9.39 Ecoroof / RoofVegetation outputs

The following outputs are available for the Roof Vegetation surface.

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Vegetation Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Root Moisture Ratio []

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Near Surface Moisture Ratio []

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Vegetation Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Vegetation Moisture Transfer Rate [m/s]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Moisture Transfer Rate [m/s]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Vegetation Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]

• Zone,Average,Green Roof Soil Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
240 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Cumulative Precipitation Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Cumulative Irrigation Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Cumulative Runoff Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Cumulative Evapotranspiration Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Current Precipitation Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Current Irrigation Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Current Runoff Depth [m]

• Zone,Sum,Green Roof Current Evapotranspiration Depth [m]

1.9.39.1 Green Roof Soil Temperature [C]

Temperature of the Soil layer temperature in C. Note that Surface Outside Face Temperature of Roof, one
of the surface output variables, is the temperature at the interface between the soil and the next material
layer.

1.9.39.2 Green Roof Vegetation Temperature [C]

Temperature of the Vegetation layer temperature in C.

1.9.39.3 Green Roof Soil Root Moisture Ratio []

Mean value of root moisture (m3 /m3 )

1.9.39.4 Green Roof Soil Near Surface Moisture Ratio []

The moisture content in the soil near the surface (m3 /m3 )

1.9.39.5 Green Roof Soil Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Sensible heat flux to ground (W/m2 )

1.9.39.6 Green Roof Vegetation Sensible Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Sensible heat transfer to foliage (W/m2 )

1.9.39.7 Green Roof Vegetation Moisture Transfer Rate [m/s]

Water evapotranspiration rate associated with latent heat from vegetation (m/s)

1.9.39.8 Green Roof Soil Moisture Transfer Rate [m/s]

Water evapotranspiration rate associated with latent heat from ground surface (m/s)

1.9.39.9 Green Roof Vegetation Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Latent heat flux from vegetation (W/m2 )
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 241

1.9.39.10 Green Roof Soil Latent Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Latent heat flux from ground surface (W/m2 )

1.9.39.11 Green Roof Cumulative Precipitation Depth [m]

1.9.39.12 Green Roof Current Precipitation Depth [m]
Cumulative or current precipitation (m)

1.9.39.13 Green Roof Cumulative Irrigation Depth [m]

1.9.39.14 Green Roof Current Irrigation Depth [m]
Cumulative or current irrigation (m)

1.9.39.15 Green Roof Cumulative Runoff Depth [m]

1.9.39.16 Green Roof Current Runoff Depth [m]
Cumulative or current runoff (m). Multiply by roof area to get volume.

1.9.39.17 Green Roof Cumulative Evapotranspiration Depth [m]

1.9.39.18 Green Roof Current Evapotranspiration Depth [m]
Cumulative or current evapotranspiration from soil and plants (m).

1.9.40 MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData
With the MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData object, you can specify the wavelength-by-wavelength
transmittance and reflectance properties of a glass material. To determine the overall optical properties of
a glazing system (solar and visible transmittance and solar absorptance vs. angle of incidence) EnergyPlus
first calculates transmittance and absorptance vs. angle of incidence for each wavelength. This is then
weighted by a standard solar spectrum to get the solar transmittance and absorptance vs. angle of incidence
(for use in the solar heat gain calculations), and further weighted by the response of the human eye to get
the visible transmittance vs. angle of incidence (for use in the daylighting calculation).
MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData should be used for multi-pane windows when one or more of
the glass layers is spectrally selective, i.e., the transmittance depends strongly on wavelength. An example
is glass with a coating that gives high transmittance in the daylight part of the solar spectrum (roughly 0.4
to 0.7 microns) and low transmittance at longer wavelengths, thus providing better solar heat gain control
than uncoated glass. If spectral data is not used in case, the overall optical properties of the glazing system
that EnergyPlus calculates will not be correct.
You can input up to 450 sets of values for wavelengths covering the solar spectrum. Each set consists
of {wavelength (microns), transmittance, front reflectance, back reflectance}
Spectral data of this kind are routinely measured by glass manufacturers. Data sets for over 800
commercially available products are contained in an Optical Data Library maintained by the Windows
Group at Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory. This library can be downloaded from http://windows.
lbl.gov/. You will have to edit entries from this library to put them in the format required by the EnergyPlus
WindowGlassSpectralData object.
An alternative to using the MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData object is to run the WINDOW
window analysis program. This program has built-in access to the Optical Data Library and let’s you
242 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

easily create customized, multi-layer glazing systems that can be exported for use in EnergyPlus. For more
details, see “StormWindow”.

1.9.40.1 Inputs
1.9.40.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the spectral data set. It is referenced by WindowMaterial:Glazing when Optical Data
Type = Spectral.

1.9.40.1.2 Fields 1-4 (repeated up to 450 times)

Sets of values for wavelengths covering the solar spectrum (from about 0.25 to 2.5 microns [10−6 m]).
Each set consists of
{wavelength (microns), transmittance, front reflectance, back reflectance}
The wavelength values must be in ascending order. The transmittance and reflectance values are at
normal incidence. “Front reflectance” is the reflectance for radiation striking the glass from the outside,
i.e., from the side opposite the zone in which the window is defined. “Back reflectance” is the reflectance for
radiation striking the glass from the inside, i.e., from the zone in which the window is defined. Therefore,
for exterior windows, “front” is the side closest to the outdoors and “back” is the side closest to the zone
in which the window is defined. For interior windows, “front” is the side closest to the adjacent zone and
“back” is the side closest to the zone in which the window is defined.
An IDF example:

MaterialProperty:GlazingSpectralData ,
TestSpectralDataSet ,
! { from WINDOW 4 library }
! { actual 9.91 mm clear laminate: 15 _mil PVB , ID :37966/50032 -39 -9 } 10.38
! { conductivity PVB adjusted , W/M/K } 0.798
! { thermal IR transmittance , assumed } tir = 0.00
! { thermal IR hemispherical emittance , assumed } emis = 0.84 0.84

! WL T Rfront Rback
.300, 0.000 , 0.045 , 0.045 ,
.310, 0.000 , 0.044 , 0.044 ,
.320, 0.000 , 0.044 , 0.044 ,
.330, 0.000 , 0.042 , 0.042 ,
.340, 0.000 , 0.041 , 0.041 ,
.350, 0.000 , 0.040 , 0.040 ,
<snip >
2.450 , 0.200 , 0.040 , 0.040 ,
2.500 , 0.214 , 0.039 , 0.039;

1.9.41 Construction
For walls, roofs, floors, windows, and doors, constructions are “built” from the included materials. Each
layer of the construction is a material name listed in order from “outside” to “inside”. Up to ten layers
(eight for windows) may be specified (one of the few limitations in EnergyPlus!). “Outside” is the layer
furthest away from the Zone air (not necessarily the outside environment). “Inside” is the layer next to
the Zone air. In the example floor below, for example, the outside layer is the acoustic tile below the floor,
the next layer is the air space above the tile, and the inside layer is the concrete floor deck.
Window constructions are similarly built up from items in the Window Materials set using similar
layers.. See Figure 1.27. Illustration for material ordering in windows, which shows the case where an
interior shading layer such as a blind is present. The gap between the inside glass layer (layer #3) and the
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 243

Figure 1.26: Example Floor Construction illustration.

244 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

interior shading layer is not entered. Similarly, for an exterior shading layer, the gap between the outside
glass layer and the shading layer is not entered.

Figure 1.27: Illustration for material ordering in windows.

However, for a between-glass shading device the gaps on either side of the shading layer must be entered
and they must have the same gas type. In addition, the gap widths with and without the between-glass
shading layer must be consistent (see Figure 1.28).
A maximum of four glass layers and one shading layer is allowed. A gas layer must always separate
adjacent glass layers in a multi-pane glazing without a between-glass shading layer.
Outside and inside air film resistances are never given as part of a construction definitions since they
are calculated during the EnergyPlus simulation. Note also that constructions are assumed to be one-
dimensional in a direction perpendicular to the surface.

1.9.41.1 Inputs
1.9.41.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a user specified name that will be used as a reference by other input syntax. For example,
a heat transfer surface (ref: Building Surfaces) requires a construction name to define what the make-up
of the wall is. This name must be identical to one of the Construction definitions in the input data file.

1.9.41.1.2 Field: Outside Layer

Each construction must have at least one layer. This field defines the material name associated with the
layer on the outside of the construction—outside referring to the side that is not exposed to the zone but
rather the opposite side environment, whether this is the outdoor environment or another zone. Material
layers are defined based on their thermal properties elsewhere in the input file (ref: Material and Material
Properties and Materials for Glass Windows and Doors). As noted above, the outside layer should NOT
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 245

Figure 1.28: Window construction with and without a between-glass shading layer. Shown are gap
widths g, g1 and g2 , and shading layer width, w. An error will result if g1 + g2 + w is not equal to
g, where w is zero for a blind and greater than zero for a shade.
246 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

be a film coefficient since EnergyPlus will calculate outside convection and radiation heat transfer more
precisely.

1.9.41.1.3 Field(s) 2-10: Layers

The next fields are optional and the number of them showing up in a particular Construction definition
depends solely on the number of material layers present in that construction. The data expected is identical
to the outside layer field (see previous field description). The order of the remaining layers is important
and should be listed in order of occurrence from the one just inside the outside layer until the inside layer is
reached. As noted above, the inside layer should NOT be a film coefficient since EnergyPlus will calculate
inside convection and radiation heat transfer more precisely.
IDF Example (floor construction):

Construction , FLOOR38 , ! Material layer names follow:

E5 - ACOUSTIC TILE ,
E4 - CEILING AIRSPACE ,
C12 - 2 IN HW CONCRETE;

IDF Example (window construction, no shade):

Construction , DOUBLE PANE WINDOW , !- Material layer names follow:

GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN ,
WinAirB1 - AIRSPACE RESISTANCE ,
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN;

IDF Example (window construction, with interior shade):

Construction , DOUBLE PANE WITH ROLL SHADE , !- Material layer names follow:
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN ,
WinAirB1 - AIRSPACE RESISTANCE ,
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN ,
ROLL SHADE - LIGHT

1.9.42 Constructions - Modeling Underground Walls and Ground

Floors Defined with C and F Factors for Building Energy Code
Compliance
Building energy code and standards like ASHRAE 90.1, 90.2 and California Title 24 require the under-
ground wall constructions and slabs-on-grade or underground floors not to exceed certain maximum values
of C-factor and F-factor, which do not specify detailed layer-by-layer materials for the constructions.
A simplified approach is introduced to create equivalent constructions and model the ground heat
transfer through underground walls and ground floors for the building energy code compliance calcula-
tions. The approach is to create constructions based on the user defined C or F factor with two layers:
one concrete layer (0.15 m thick) with thermal mass, and one fictitious insulation layer with no thermal
mass. Three new objects were created for such purpose: Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall,
Construction:FfactorGroundFloor, and Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod. Details of
the approach are described in the Engineering Reference document. The wall and floor construction objects
are described in this section; the ground temperature object is described with the other ground temperature
objects.
When a underground wall or ground floor surface (BuildingSurface:Detailed, Floor:Detailed, and
Wall:Detailed) references one of the two construction objects, its field ‘Outside Boundary Condition’ needs
to be set to GroundFCfactorMethod. For simple (rectangular) wall and floor objects, the outside boundary
condition is inferred from the construction type.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 247

The Site:GroundTemperature:FCfactorMethod is described in the section for ground temperatures, the

following section describes the two new construction objects.

1.9.43 Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall
This input object differs from the usual wall construction object in that it describes an entire construction
rather than individual layers. This object is used when only the wall height (depth to the ground) and the
C-factor are available. This object accesses a model that creates an equivalent layer-by-layer construction
for the underground wall to approximate the heat transfer through the wall considering the thermal mass
of the earth soil.
This object is referenced by underground wall surfaces with their fields ‘Outside Boundary Condition’
set to GroundFCfactorMethod.

1.9.43.1 Inputs
1.9.43.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the underground wall construction.

1.9.43.1.2 Field: C-Factor

C-Factor is the time rate of steady-state heat flow through unit area of the construction, induced by a
unit temperature difference between the body surfaces. The C-Factor unit is W/m2 ·K. The C-factor does
not include soil or air films. ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and California Title 24 specify maximum C-factors
for underground walls depending on space types and climate zones.

1.9.43.1.3 Field: Height

This field describes the height of the underground wall, i.e. the depth to the ground surface. The unit
is meters.
IDF Example:

Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall ,
CfactorUGWall ,
0.436 , ! C-factor (W/m2K), does not include soil or air films
4.57; ! Height (m)

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Name
Wall , !- Surface Type
CfactorUGWall , !- Construction Name
ZONE ONE , !- Zone Name
GroundFCfactorMethod , !- Outside Boundary Condition
, !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0.0 ,0.0 ,4.572 , !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 1
0.0 ,0.0 ,0.0 , !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 2
15.24 ,0.0 ,0.0 , !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 3
15.24 ,0.0 ,4.572; !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 4

1.9.44 Construction:FfactorGroundFloor
This input object differs from the usual ground floor construction object in that it describes an entire
construction rather than individual layers. This object is used when only the floor area, exposed perimeter,
248 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

and the F-factor are available. This object accesses a model that creates an equivalent layer-by-layer
construction for the slab-on-grade or underground floor to approximate the heat transfer through the floor
considering the thermal mass of the earth soil.
This object is referenced by slab-on-grade or underground floor surfaces with their fields ‘Outside
Boundary Condition’ set to GroundFCfactorMethod.

1.9.44.1 Inputs
1.9.44.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the ground floor construction.

1.9.44.1.2 Field: F-Factor

F-Factor represents the heat transfer through the floor, induced by a unit temperature difference
between the outside and inside air temperature, on the per linear length of the exposed perimeter of the
floor. The unit for this input is W/m·K. ASHRAE Standard 90.1 and California Title 24 specify maximum
F-factors for slab-on-grade or underground floors depending on space types and climate zones.

1.9.44.1.3 Field: Area

This field describes the area (in square meters) of the slab-on-grade or underground floor.

1.9.44.1.4 Field: PerimeterExposed

This field describes the exposed (direct contact with ambient air) perimeter (in meters) of the slab-on-
grade or underground floor.
IDF Example:

Construction:FfactorGroundFloor ,
slabconst ,
0.12, !F-factor in W/m-K
232.26 , !Area in m2
61.0; !Exposed perimeter in m

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Name
Floor , !- Surface Type
slabconst , !- Construction Name , FLOOR
ZONE ONE , !- Zone Name
GroundFCfactorMethod , !- Outside Boundary Condition , Surface
, !- Outside Boundary Condition Object , Zn001:Flr001
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
15.24 ,0.0 ,0.0 , !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 1
0.0 ,0.0 ,0.0 , !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 2
0.0 ,15.240 ,0.0 , !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 3
15.24 ,15.24 ,0.0; !- X,Y,Z = = > Vertex 4

1.9.45 ConstructionProperty:InternalHeatSource
In some cases, such as radiant systems, a construction will actually have resistance wires or hydronic tubing
embedded within the construction. Heat is then either added or removed from this building element to
provide heating or cooling to the zone in question. In the case of building-integrated photovoltaics, the
energy removed in the form of electricity will form a sink. It is possible to enter such constructions
into EnergyPlus with the syntax described below. The internal source capability is available with both
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 249

the ConductionTransferFunction and ConductionFiniteDifference solution algorithms. The only

difference is that the two dimensional pipe arrangements are not available to ConductionFiniteDifference.
Those fields are ignored in that implementation.

1.9.45.1 Inputs
1.9.45.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a user specified name that will be used as a reference by other input syntax. For example,
a heat transfer surface (ref: Building Surfaces) requires a construction name to define what the make-up
of the wall is.

1.9.45.1.2 Field: Source Present After Layer Number

This field is an integer that relates the location of the heat source or sink. The integer refers to the list
of material layers that follow later in the syntax and determines the layer after which the source is present.
If a source is embedded within a single homogenous layer (such as concrete), that layer should be split into
two layers and the source added between them. For example, a value of “2” in this field tells EnergyPlus
that the source is located between the second and third material layers listed later in the construction
description (see layer fields below). This field must be between 1 and the number of material layers in the
construction (maximum of 10 layers).

1.9.45.1.3 Field: Temperature Calculation Requested After Layer Number

The nature of this field is similar to the source interface parameter (see previous field) in that it is
an integer, refers to the list of material layers that follow, and defines a location after the layer number
identified by the user-defined number. In this case, the user is specifying the location for a separate
temperature calculation rather than the location of the heat source/sink. This feature is intended to allow
users to calculate a temperature within the construction. This might be important in a radiant cooling
system where condensation could be a problem. This temperature calculation can assist users in making
that determination in absence of a full heat and mass balance calculation. This field must be between 1
and the number of material layers in the construction (maximum of 10 layers).
It should also be noted that when using this construction in conjunction with a low temperature radiant
system such as the variable flow, constant flow, or electric radiant system that this parameter also
defines the location for the temperature that is used with the Surface Interior Temperature control. In
other words, when using the Surface Interior Temperature control with a low temperature radiant system,
the location for this temperature that is interior to the radiant surface is also defined in part by this
input field. Note that two fields below (Dimensions for the CTF Calculation and Two-Dimensional
Temperature Calculation Position) will also have an impact on this location if the user elects to
perform a 2-D solution for the surfaces using this construction.

1.9.45.1.4 Field: Dimensions for the CTF Calculation

This field is also an integer and refers to the detail level of the calculation. A value of “1” states
that the user is only interested in a one-dimensional calculation. This is appropriate for electric resistance
heating and for hydronic heating (when boiler/hot water heater performance is not affected by return and
supply water temperatures). A value of “2” will trigger a two-dimensional solution for this surface only.
This may be necessary for hydronic radiant cooling situations since chiller performance is affected by the
water temperatures provided.
A few things should be noted about requesting two-dimensional solutions. First, the calculation of the
conduction transfer functions (CTF) is fairly intensive and will require a significant amount of computing
time. Second, the solution regime is two-dimensional internally but it has a one-dimensional boundary
250 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

condition imposed at the inside and outside surface (i.e., surface temperatures are still isothermal as if the
surface was one-dimensional).

1.9.45.1.5 Field: Tube Spacing

This field defines the distance between adjacent hydronic tubes spaced in the direction perpendicular
to the main direction of heat transfer. The value for this parameter must be greater than 0.01m (or a tube
spacing of 1 cm) and less than 1.0m (or a tube spacing of 1m). Note that this parameter is only used for
two-dimensional solutions (see previous field) or when the user requests that the tube length for a hydronic
radiant system ( variable flow or constant flow) be autosized. In the case of autosizing the tube length,
this parameter is used along with the dimensions of the surface to approximate the tube length.

1.9.45.1.6 Field: Two-Dimensional Temperature Calculation Position

This field only has a meaning when the user opts to have a two-dimensional solution in Dimensions
for the CTF Calculation above. It is used in conjunction with the information in Temperature
Calculation Requested After Layer Number above to specify a location for where the simulation
will calculate a temperature at the interior of a surface. The Temperature Calculation Requested
After Layer Number field sets where the position is in the main direction of heat transfer. This field
determines the position of this point in the direction perpendicular to the main direction of heat transfer.
Note that this parameter is a dimensionless value that is allowed to range from 0.0 to 1.0. A value of 0.0 is
used for a position that is in line with the tubing in the construction. A value of 1.0 is used for a position
that is at the mid-point between adjacent tubes. The user is also given the flexibility to select a point in
between those two extremes.
It should also be noted that for values between 0.0 and 1.0 will not allow for exact positioning of the
point at which this temperature is calculated. Instead, it will be used to calculate which node in the
state space representation will be used to calculate the temperature. Currently, EnergyPlus uses seven
nodes in the direction perpendicular to the main direction of heat transfer. In this case, 0.0 represents
the first node and 1.0 represents the seventh or last node in the perpendicular direction. So, this field
will be used to determine which node in the direction pendicular to the main direction of heat transfer
to use and there are five other nodes (second, third, fourth, fifth, and sixth) that are possible locations.
For example, if the user enters a value of 0.167, the second node will be used. Likewise, if the user enters
a value of 0.1, because this will be closest to the second node, the second node will be used to calculate
the internal temperature. For more information on two-dimensional heat transfer within surfaces using
ConstructionProperty:InternalHeatSource, please refer to the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.

1.9.45.2 Outputs
• Zone,Average,Surface Internal Source Location Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Surface Internal User Specified Location Temperature [C]

1.9.45.2.1 Surface Internal Source Location Temperature [C]

This output is the temperature within the surface at the location of the source/sink.

1.9.45.2.2 Surface Internal User Specified Location Temperature [C]

This output is the temperature within the surface at the location requested by the user.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 251

1.9.46 Construction:AirBoundary
Construction:AirBoundary indicates an open boundary between two zones. It may be used for base surfaces
and fenestration surfaces. When this construction type is used, the Outside Boundary Condition of the
surface (or the base surface of a fenestration surface) must be either Surface or Zone. A base surface with
Construction:AirBoundary cannot hold any fenestration surfaces.
The two zones separated by this air boundary will be grouped together into a combined enclosure
for solar distribution, daylighting, and radiant exchange (including distribution of radiant internal gains).
If a given zone has an air boundary with more than one zone, then all of the connected zones will be
grouped together. For example, if there is an air boundary between zones A and B, and another air
boundary between zones B and C, all three zones (A, B, and C) will be grouped into a single enclo-
sure. Normal default simplified view factors will apply unless detailed view factors are specified using
ZoneProperty:UserViewFactors:BySurfaceName.

1.9.46.1 Inputs
1.9.46.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the construction.

1.9.46.1.2 Field: Air Exchange Method

This field controls how the surface is modeled for radiant exchange calculations. There are two choices:

None There will be no air exchange modeled across this surface. Other objects, such as ZoneMixing and
ZoneCrossMixing or AirflowNetwork openings may be specified if desired.

SimpleMixing For each pair of zones connected by Construction:AirBoundary, a pair of ZoneMixing

objects will created automatically. These mixing objects may be automatically adjusted to balance
HVAC system flows using the ZoneAirMassFlowConservation object.

1.9.46.1.3 Field: Simple Mixing Air Changes per Hour

If the Air Exchange Method is SimpleMixing* then this field specifies the air change rate [1/hr] using
the volume of the smaller zone as the basis. The default is 0.5. If an AirflowNetwork simulation is active
this field is ignored.

1.9.46.1.4 Field:Simple Mixing Schedule Name

If the Air Exchange Method is SimpleMixing then this field specifies the schedule name for the air mixing
across this boundary. If this field is blank, then the schedule defaults to always 1.0. If an AirflowNetwork
simulation is active this field is ignored.
IDF Example:
Construction:AirBoundary ,
Air Wall , !- Name
SimpleMixing , !- Air Exchange Method
0.5, !- Simple Mixing Air Changes per Hour {1/hr}
; !- Simple Mixing Schedule Name

1.9.47 Composite Wall Constructions

Standard constructions in EnergyPlus are built with the materials and layers described earlier. However,
some configurations will not be adequately represented by using this approach. The Reference Data Set
CompositeWallConstructions.idf contains constructions and associated materials for a set of composite
252 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

walls. These are walls—such as stud walls—that have complicated heat-flow paths so that the conduction
is two- or three-dimensional. Thermal bridges are one of the common terms for these complicated heat-flow
paths; this dataset will help you represent these in EnergyPlus.
The materials here are not real materials but are “equivalent” materials obtained from finite-difference
modeling. (The thickness, conductivity, density and specific heat values of the material layers for the
different constructions have been taken from the ASHRAE report “Modeling Two- and Three-Dimensional
Heat Transfer through Composite Wall and Roof Assemblies in Hourly Energy Simulation Programs (1145-
TRP),” by Enermodal Engineering Limited, Oak Ridge National Laboratory, and the Polish Academy of
Sciences, January 2001.). EnergyPlus will calculate conduction transfer functions using these materials.
The heat transfer based on these conduction transfer functions will then be very close to what would be
calculated with a two- or three-dimensional heat transfer calculation.
For stud walls, using these composite constructions will give more accurate heat flow than you would
get by manually dividing the wall into a stud section and a non-stud section.
If your wall’s exterior or interior roughness or thermal, solar or visible absorptances are different from
those in the data set, you can make the appropriate changes to the first material (the outside layer) or the
third material (the inside layer). None of the other values should be changed.

Complete description of the CompositeWallConstructions data set are found in the OutputDetail-
sAndExamples document.

1.9.48 Construction:ComplexFenestrationState
This input object is used to describe the properties of a single state for complex fenestration. There are
two parts to the input, 1) layer-by-layer physical description of fenestration system and 2) a set of matrices
that describe overall system optical performance. Each layer also has associated with it two matrices that
give the layer absorptance (for front and back incidence on the system.
The optical properties are given as a two-dimensional matrix describing the basis and four two-
dimensional matrices of system bidirectional optical properties.
These input objects will generally be exported directly from the WINDOW program and it is expected
that users usually will not develop the input themselves. However, this is an option for users who prefer
to use a different method (e.g., Monte-Carlo ray-trace or measurement) of determining optical properties.
Multiple instances of this object are used to define the separate operating states of complex fenestra-
tion. For example, blinds could be deployed or redirected to create a new state, or electrochromic glazings
could change transmittance. Each separate state defines the materials present and the overall optical
performance. If the glazing system has only one state, then only one of these objects is needed.
If there is more than one complex fenestration state, it will be controlled using the EMS actuator called
“Surface” with the control type “Construction State” and the EMS input object called EnergyManage-
mentSystem:ConstructionIndexVariable.

1.9.48.1 Inputs
1.9.48.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of this construction. Used to identify type of window in surface objects.

1.9.48.1.2 Field: Basis Type keyword

Only value currently implemented is “LBNLWINDOW”. More options may be added in the future.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 253

1.9.48.1.3 Field: Basis Symmetry, keyword

Only value currently implemented is “None”. More options will be added in the future.

1.9.48.1.4 Field: Thermal Parameters

This field gives the name of WindowThermalModel:Params object used to keep common data necessary
for thermal simulation.

1.9.48.1.5 Field: Basis Matrix Name

This field gives the name of an 2 x N matrix object that defines the basis For a fenestration basis, N
would be the number of theta (polar angle) values, the first of the two elements for each of the i = 1,..,N
would be the theta value, and the second would be the number of phi (azimuthal angle) values that 360º
is divided into for that theta.

1.9.48.1.6 Field: Solar Optical Complex Front Transmittance Matrix Name

This field contains the name of matrix object that describes the solar transmittance at different incident
angles. This is from the outside toward the inside.

1.9.48.1.7 Field: Solar Optical Complex Back Reflectance Matrix Name

This field contains the name of matrix object that describes the solar back reflectance at different
incident angles. This is from the inside toward the outside.

1.9.48.1.8 Field: Visible Optical Complex Front Transmittance Matrix Name

This field contains the name of matrix object that describes the visible transmittance at different
incident angles. This is from the outside toward the inside.

1.9.48.1.9 Field: Visible Optical Complex Back Reflectance Matrix Name

This field contains the name of vector object that describes the visible back reflectance at different
incident angles. This is from the inside toward the outside.

1.9.48.1.10 Field: Outside Layer <x = 1>

Each construction must have at least one layer. The layer order is from outside to inside, with the
first layer being either WindowMaterial:Glazing or WindowMaterial:ComplexShade. The next layer is
a WindowMaterial:Gap layer, and the following layers then alternate between WindowMaterial:Glazing
or WindowMaterial:ComplexShade and WindowMaterial:Gap. The last layer cannot be WindowMate-
rial:Gap.

1.9.48.1.11 Field: Outside Layer Directional Front Absorptance Matrix Name

Points to an Nbasis x 1 matrix object.

1.9.48.1.12 Field: Outside Layer Directional Back Absorptance Matrix Name

Points to an Nbasis x 1 matrix object.

1.9.48.1.13 Above 3 fields are optionally repeated for layers 2-10

These layers include gaps, which do not need to have matrix data specified.
An IDF example of complex fenestration with single layer:
254 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Construction:ComplexFenestrationState , !- single layer example

CFS_Glz_1 , !- name
LBNLWindow , !- basis type
None , !- basis symmetry type
ThermParam_1 , !- window thermal model
CFS_Glz_1_Basis , !- basis matrix name
CFS_Glz_1_TfSol , !- Tfsol
CFS_Glz_1_RbSol , !- Rbsol
CFS_Glz_1_Tfvis , !- Tfvis
CFS_Glz_1_Tbvis , !- Tbvis
Glass_102_Layer , !- layer 1 name
CFS_Glz_1_Layer_1_fAbs , !- fAbs
CFS_Glz_1_Layer_1_bAbs ; !- bAbs

An complex fenestration IDF example with double layer (first layer is shading device):

Construction:ComplexFenestrationState , !- double layer example

CFS_Glz_59 , !- name
LBNLWindow , !- basis type
None , !- basis symmetry type
ThermParam_59 , !- window thermal model
CFS_Glz_59_Basis , !- basis matrix name
CFS_Glz_59_TfSol , !- Tfsol
CFS_Glz_59_RbSol , !- Rbsol
CFS_Glz_59_Tfvis , !- Tfvis
CFS_Glz_59_Tbvis , !- Tbvis
Shade_30001_Layer , !- layer 1 name (shading device)
CFS_Glz_59_Layer_1_fAbs , !- fAbs
CFS_Glz_59_Layer_1_bAbs , !- bAbs
Gap_1_Layer , !- layer 1 name
, !- absorptance matrices for gaps should be empty for now
, !- it is for future use
Glass_3110_Layer , !- layer 2 name
CFS_Glz_59_Layer_3110_fAbs , !- fAbs
CFS_Glz_59_Layer_3110_bAbs ; !- bAbs

1.9.49 WindowThermalModel:Params
This input object is used with the Construction:ComplexFenestrationState

1.9.49.1 Inputs
1.9.49.1.1 Field: Name
Unique name of the window thermal model parameters.

1.9.49.1.2 Field: Calculation Standard

The type of the calculation standard. The choices are:

• ISO15099

• EN673Declared

• EN673Design

The default is ISO15099.

1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 255

1.9.49.1.3 Field: Thermal Model

The type of thermal model. The choices are:

• ISO15099

• ScaledCavityWidth

• ConvectiveScalarModel_NoSDThickness

• ConvectiveScalarModel_withSDThickness

The default is ISO15099.

1.9.49.1.4 Field: SD Scalar

Shading Device Scalar Factor. Only used for Thermal Model = Convective Scalar Model. Factor of
venetian shading device layer contribution to convection. Real value between 0 (where the shading device
contribution to convection is neglected) and 1 (where the shading device treated as “closed” – as if it is a
glass layer with thermal properties of SD slat material). Default: 1.0

1.9.49.1.5 Field: Deflection Model

The type of deflection model used to model deflection in windows and glass. The choices are:

• NoDeflection

• TemperatureAndPressureInput

• MeasuredDeflection

The default is NoDeflection.

1.9.49.1.6 Field: Vacuum Pressure Limit

The pressure (Pa) which will be considered to be the limit for vacuum glazing pressure. All pressures
less than or equal to this pressure will be considered to be vacuum. Default: 13.238 Pa.

1.9.49.1.7 Field: Initial Temperature

The temperature (o C) of the gap in the time of fabrication. It is used only when WindowTher-
malModel:Params DeflectionModel = TemperatureAndPressureInput

1.9.49.1.8 Field: Initial Pressure

The pressure (Pa) of the gap at the time of fabrication of the sealed glazing system unitIt is used only
when WindowThermalModel:Params DeflectionModel = TemperatureAndPressureInput.
An IDF example for WindowThermalModel:Params (without deflection):

WindowThermalModel:Params ,
ThermParam_59 , !- name
ISO15099 , !- standard
ISO15099 , !- thermal model standard
1.00, !- SD scalar
NoDeflection; !- deflection model

An IDF example for thermal parameters (with deflection):

256 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

WindowThermalModel:Params ,
ThermParam_59 , !- name
ISO15099 , !- standard
ISO15099 , !- thermal model standard
1.00, !- SD scalar
TemperatureAndPressureInput , !- deflection model
, !- vacuum pressure limit
21.00 , !- temperature at time of fabrication
10000.00; !- pressure at time of fabrication

An IDF example for WindowThermalModel:Params for modeling vacuum glazing

WindowThermalModel:Params ,
ThermParam_1006 , !- name
ISO15099 , !- standard
ISO15099 , !- thermal model
1.0000 , !- SDScalar
NoDeflection , !- deflection model
13.238; !- vacuum pressure limit

1.9.50 Matrix:TwoDimension
This is input object is only used with Construction:ComplexFenestrationState object to enter a two-
dimensional matrix of values.
It is used to define the Basis Matrix for BSDF input data, and is also used to define the actual BSDF
matrices data for the complete fenestration definition as well as the individual layers of the system.
The data are entered in row-major order: all the elements of row 1, followed by all the elements of
row 2, etc. The number of values to be entered depends on the number of rows and the number of
columns. Blank fields are treated as having been set to zero.
See example IDF file “SmOff_ CmplxGlz_IntExtShading.idf” for the definition of two complex shading
layers with matrix data defined.

1.9.50.1 Field: Name

Unique name of matrix input object.

1.9.50.2 Field: Number of Rows

This field is the number of rows in the matrix.

1.9.50.3 Field: Number of Columns

This field is the number of columns in the matrix

1.9.50.4 < Field Set: Value # N >

Repeat entering value exactly the same number of times as the number of rows times the number of
columns.

1.9.50.5 Field: Value # 1

This is the value of the matrix at the first row and first column.
1.9. GROUP – SURFACE CONSTRUCTION ELEMENTS 257

1.9.50.6 Field: Value #2

This is the value of the matrix at the first row and the second column.
An IDF example of matrix for defining BSDF basis:

Matrix:TwoDimension , !- matrix for basis definition

CFS_Glz_1_Basis , !- basis matrix name
9, !- number of rows
2, !- number of columns
0.00000 , 1.00000 ,
10.00000 , 8.00000 ,
20.00000 , 16.00000 ,
30.00000 , 20.00000 ,
40.00000 , 24.00000 ,
50.00000 , 24.00000 ,
60.00000 , 24.00000 ,
70.00000 , 16.00000 ,
82.50000 , 12.00000;

1.9.51 Construction:WindowEquivalentLayer
This object defines the construction for equivalent layer window (ASHWAT) model. This window can
model various mix of glazing and shading layers combination. Shadings are defined as an integral part of
the construction. The construction is defined by listing the layers name starting with outside layer and
work your way to the inside Layer. Up to six solid layers (glazing and shade) and up to five gaps, i.e.,
a total of up to 11 layers maximum are allowed in equivalent layer window object. The solid layer types
allowed are: Glazing, Insect Screen, Roller Blinds, Venetian Blind, and Drape Fabrics. This window model
requires optical data of the individual glazing and shading layers to calculate the effective optical properties
of the composite fenestration construction. Venetian blinds in equivalent layer window model can be in
a fixed slat angle or has the option to control the slat angle in order to maximize visibility, or maximize
solar gains. An equivalent-layer concept can simulate wide range of multiple glazing and shading layers
combination and provides unlimited flexibility to combine different types of shading layers in a fenestration.
The equivalent-layer window model does not support daylighting control. For the gap layer object any
one of the five different Gas types can be specified: AIR, ARGON, XENON, KRYPTON, or CUSTOM.
This window object is referenced by fenestration surfaces. For details of the model description refer to
Equivalent Layer Fenestration Model section in Engineering Reference. The various layer objects that can
be referenced in Equivalent Layer window model are:
WindowMaterial:Glass:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Shade:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Drape:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Screen:EquivalentLayer
WindowMaterial:Gap:EquivalentLayer

1.9.51.1 Inputs
1.9.51.1.1 Field: Name
This field is a user specified name that will be used as a reference by other input syntax. For example,
a heat transfer surface (ref: Fenestration) requires a construction name to define what the make-up of
the fenestration is. This name must be identical to one of the Window Construction Equivalent Layer
definitions in the input data file.

1.9.51.1.2 Field: Outside Layer

258 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Each equivalent layer window construction must have at least one layer. This field defines the material
name associated with the layer on the outside of the construction—outside referring to the side that is
exposed to the outdoor environment or another zone. Material layers for equivalent layer window model
are defined based on their thermal properties elsewhere in the input file (ref: WindowEquivalentLayerMa-
terialNames)

1.9.51.1.3 Field: Layer 2 - Layer11

The next fields are optional and the number of them showing up in a particular equivalent layer window
construction definition depends solely on the number of material layers present in that construction. The
data expected is identical to the outside layer field (see previous field description). The order of the
remaining layers is important and should be listed in order of occurrence from the one just inside the
outside layer until the inside layer is reached. As noted above, the inside layer should NOT be a film
coefficient since EnergyPlus will calculate inside convection and radiation heat transfer more precisely.
An IDF example for this object, is shown below:

Construction:WindowEquivalentLayer ,
Six Solid Layers Window , !- Name
INSCRN , !- Outside Layer
Air GAP Outdoor 12.7mm , !- Layer 2
GLZGRY , !- Layer 3
Argon GAP Sealed 12.7mm , !- Layer 4
FEP , !- Layer 5
Xenon GAP Sealed 12.7mm , !- Layer 6
LOF1436 , !- Layer 7
Krypton GAP Sealed 12.7mm , !- Layer 8
GLZCLR , !- Layer 9
Air GAP Indoor 12.7mm , !- Layer 10
ShadeTrns; !- Layer 11

1.9.52 Construction:WindowDataFile
The WINDOW program, which does a thermal and optical analysis of a window under different design
conditions, writes a data file (“Window data file”) containing a description of the window that was analyzed.
The Construction:WindowDataFile object allows a window to be read in from the WINDOW data file—
see “Importing Windows from WINDOW.” For information on adding a shading device to the window see
“WindowShadingControl.”

1.9.52.1 Inputs
1.9.52.1.1 Field: Name
This is the name of a window on the Window data file. An error will result if EnergyPlus cannot find
a window of this name on the file, or if the file, shown in the next field, is not present. The location of the
data file should be specified in the File Name field. For details on what is done with the data if a matching
window is found on the file see “Importing Windows from WINDOW.”

1.9.52.1.2 Field: File Name

This is the file name of the Window data file that contains the Window referenced in the previous field.
The field may include a full path with file name, for precise results. The field must be < = 100 characters.
The file name must not include commas or an exclamation point. A relative path or a simple file name
should work with version 7.0 or later when using EP-Launch even though EP-Launch uses temporary
directories as part of the execution of EnergyPlus. If using RunEPlus.bat to run EnergyPlus from the
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 259

command line, a relative path or a simple file name may work if RunEPlus.bat is run from the folder that
contains EnergyPlus.exe.
If this field is left blank, the file name is defaulted to Window5DataFile.dat.
Input Example
Construction:WindowDataFile ,
DoubleClear; !- Name of a Window on the Window Data File
! Note -- Window5DataFile.dat is presumed to be in the "run" folder where EnergyPlus.exe is

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name
Window , !- Class
DoubleClear , !- Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name , and Target (if applicable)
0.5, !- View Factor to Ground
, !- Frame/Divider name
1.0, !- Multiplier
4, !- Number of vertices
0.548 , 0.0, 2.5000 , !- X,Y,Z of Vertices
0.548 , 0.0, 0.5000 ,
5.548 , 0.0, 0.5000 ,
5.548 , 0.0, 2.5000;

An example showing use of specific data file name and complete path location follows:
Construction:WindowDataFile ,
DoubleClear , !- Name of a Window on the Window Data File
C:\ EnergyPlusData\DataSets\MyWindow.dat;

1.9.52.2 Outputs
An optional report (contained in eplusout.eio) gives calculational elements for the materials and construc-
tions used in the input. These reports are explained fully in the Output Details and Examples document.

1.10 Group – Thermal Zone Description/Geometry

Without spaces, thermal zones, and surfaces, the building can’t be simulated. This group of objects (Space,
Zone, BuildingSurface) describes the thermal zone characteristics as well as the details of each surface to
be modeled. Included here are shading surfaces.

1.10.1 Space
This object defines a space (or room) in the building. All Spaces are part of a Zone. Every Zone contains
one or more spaces.
Space is an optional input. If a Zone has no Space(s) specified in the input then a default Space named
<Zone Name> will be created. If some surfaces in a Zone are assigned to a Space and some are not,
then a default Space named <Zone Name>-Remainder will be created. Input references to Space Names
must have a matching Space object. Default space names may not be referenced in the input except for
Output:Variable keys).
Space geometry is specified by attaching surfaces to a space using the “Space Name” field. If a Space
has only floor surface(s) assigned to it, the Space is assumed to share the same enclosure with other such
Spaces in the same Zone (and with any surfaces that are not explicitly assinged to a space). If a Space
also has other types of surfaces (non-floor) then the Space forms its own enclosure unless it is connected
to other spaces with air boundaries (see Construction:AirBoundary).
260 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.1.1 Inputs
1.10.1.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the Space object. Must be unique across Zone and Space names.

1.10.1.1.2 Field: Zone Name

The name of the Zone this Space is a part of. This field is required.

1.10.1.1.3 Field: Floor Area

Space floor area is used in many places within EnergyPlus. EnergyPlus automatically calculates the
space floor area (m2 ) from the space geometry given by the surfaces that belong to the space. If this
field is 0.0, negative or autocalculate (the default), then the calculated space floor area will be used in
subsequent calculations. If this field is positive, then it will be used as the space floor area. If this number
differs significantly from the calculated space floor area a warning message will be issued.

1.10.1.1.4 Field: Space Type

Space type is used to categorize spaces by activity type, such as office, classroom, storage, etc. There
is no predefined list of space types; any valid input string may be used. Several table outputs include a
subtable by Space Type. There are also SpaceType Output:Meters. See the meter details (mtd) output
file for a list of all available meters for a given simulation. If left blank, this field defaults to “General”’.

1.10.1.1.5 Field: Tag <#>

Tags are used to group spaces by additional characteristics that may be more or less detailed than
Space Type. For example, codes and standards designations for ventilation or occupancy may use specific
terms that are different from one standard to the next. There is no predefined list of tags; any valid input
string may be used. Several table outputs include a subtable by Space Tag.

1.10.2 SpaceList
The SpaceList object defines a list of Space objects. It is primarily used with Internal Gains objects
(People, Lights, etc.) to apply the same gain across a group of Spaces.
Space lists are not exclusive. A Space can be referenced by more than one SpaceList object.

1.10.2.1 Inputs
1.10.2.1.1 Field: Space List Name
The name of the SpaceList object. Must be unique across SpaceLists and Spaces.

1.10.2.1.2 Field: Space <#> Name

Reference to a Space object.

SpaceList ,
Mid Floor List , !- Name
Mid West Space , !- Space 1 Name
Mid Center Space , !- Space 2 Name
Mid East Space; !- Space 3 Name
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 261

1.10.3 Zone
This element sets up the parameters to simulate each thermal zone of the building. This object defines a
thermal zone of the building. Every Zone contains one or more Spaces.
Space is an optional input. If a Zone has no Space(s) specified in the input then a default Space named
<Zone Name> will be created. If some surfaces in a Zone are assigned to a Space and some are not,
then a default Space named <Zone Name>-Remainder will be created. Input references to Space Names
must have a matching Space object. Default space names may not be referenced in the input except for
Output:Variable keys).

1.10.3.1 Inputs
1.10.3.1.1 Field: Name
The name of the Zone object. Must be unique across Zone and Space names.

1.10.3.1.2 Field: Direction of Relative North

The Zone North Axis is specified relative to the Building North Axis. This value is specified in
degrees (clockwise is positive). For more information, see the figure below as well as the description under
“GlobalGeometryRules”.

1.10.3.1.3 Field(s): (X,Y,Z) Origin

The X,Y,Z coordinates of a zone origin can be specified, for convenience in vertice entry. Depending
on the values in “GlobalGeometryRules” (see description later in this section), these will be used to
completely specify the building coordinates in “world coordinate” or not. Zone Origin coordinates are
specified relative to the Building Origin (which always 0,0,0). The following figure illustrates the
use of Zone North Axis as well as Zone Origin values.

1.10.3.1.4 Field: Type

Zone type is currently unused.

1.10.3.1.5 Field: Multiplier

Zone Multiplier is designed as a “multiplier” for floor area, zone loads, and energy consumed by internal
gains. It takes the calculated load for the zone and multiplies it, sending the multiplied load to the attached
HVAC system. The HVAC system size is specified to meet the entire multiplied zone load and will report
the amount of the load met in the Zone Air System Sensible Heating or Cooling Energy/Rate output
variable. Autosizing automatically accounts for multipliers. Metered energy consumption by internal gains
objects such as Lights or Electric Equipment will be multiplied. The default is 1.

1.10.3.1.6 Field: Ceiling Height

Zone ceiling height is used in several areas within EnergyPlus (such as various room models, some
convection coefficient calculations and, primarily, in calculating zone volume in the absence of other pa-
rameters). Energyplus automatically calculates the zone ceiling height (m) from the average height of the
zone. If this field is 0.0, negative or autocalculate, then the calculated zone ceiling height will be used
in subsequent calculations. If this field is positive, then the calculated zone ceiling height will not be used
– the number entered here will be used as the zone ceiling height. If this number differs significantly from
the calculated ceiling height, then a warning message will be issued. If a zone ceiling height is entered, but
no Volume is entered, then the floor area (if there is one) times the zone ceiling height will be used as the
volume.
262 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.29: Illustration of Zone North Axis and Origins

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 263

Note that the Zone Ceiling Height is the distance from the Floor to the Ceiling in the Zone, not an
absolute height from the ground.

1.10.3.1.7 Field: Volume

Zone volume is used in several areas within EnergyPlus (such as calculating air change rates for report-
ing or flow when air change rates are chosen as input, daylighting calculations, some convection coefficient
calculations). EnergyPlus automatically calculates the zone volume (m3 ) from the zone geometry given by
the surfaces that belong to the zone. If this field is 0.0, negative or autocalculate, then the calculated
zone volume will be used in subsequent calculations. If this field is positive, then it will be used as the
zone volume. If this number differs significantly from the calculated zone volume a warning message will
be issued. For autocalculate to work properly, the zone must be enclosed by the entered walls. Note that
indicating the volume to be calculated but entering a positive ceiling height in the previous field will cause
the volume to be calculated as the floor area (if > 0) times the entered ceiling height; else the volume will
be calculated from the described surfaces. If this field is positive, any ceiling height positive value will not
be used in volume calculations.

1.10.3.1.8 Field: Floor Area

Zone floor area is used in many places within EnergyPlus. EnergyPlus automatically calculates the
zone floor area (m2 ) from the zone geometry given by the surfaces that belong to the zone. If this field is
0.0, negative or autocalculate, then the calculated zone floor area will be used in subsequent calculations.
If this field is positive, then it will be used as the zone floor area. If this number differs significantly from
the calculated zone floor area a warning message will be issued.

1.10.3.1.9 Field: Zone Inside Convection Algorithm

The Zone Inside Convection Algorithm field is optional. This field specifies the convection model to
be used for the inside face of heat transfer surfaces associated with this zone. The choices are: Simple
(constant natural convection - ASHRAE), TARP (combines natural and wind-driven convection corre-
lations from laboratory measurements on flat plates), CeilingDiffuser (ACH based forced and mixed
convection correlations for ceiling diffuser configuration with simple natural convection limit), Adaptive-
ConvectionAlgorithm (complex arrangement of various models that adapt to various zone conditions
and can be customized), TrombeWall (variable natural convection in an enclosed rectangular cavity),
and ASTMC1340 (mixed convection coefficients specified for attic zone). See the Inside Convection
Algorithm object for further descriptions of the available models.
If omitted or blank, the algorithm specified in the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside object is the
default.

1.10.3.1.10 Field: Zone Outside Convection Algorithm

The Zone Outside Convection Algorithm field is optional. This field specifies the convection model
to be used for the outside face of heat transfer surfaces associated with this zone. The choices are:
SimpleCombined, TARP, DOE-2, MoWiTT, and AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm. The simple
convection model applies heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness and windspeed. This is a
combined heat transfer coefficient that includes radiation to sky, ground, and air. The correlation is based
on Figure 1.142, Page 25.1 (Thermal and Water Vapor Transmission Data), 2001 ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals.
The other convection models apply heat transfer coefficients depending on the roughness, windspeed,
and terrain of the building’s location. These are convection only heat transfer coefficients; radiation heat
transfer coefficients are calculated automatically by the program. The TARP algorithm was developed
for the TARP software and combines natural and wind-driven convection correlations from laboratory
264 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

measurements on flat plates. The DOE-2 and MoWiTT were derived from field measurements. The
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm model is an dynamic algorithm that organizes a large number of different
convection models and automatically selects the one that best applies. The adaptive convection algorithm
can also be customized using the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections input ob-
ject. All algorithms are described more fully in the Engineering Reference.
If omitted or blank, the algorithm specified in the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside object is the
default.

1.10.3.1.11 Field: Part of Total Floor Area

This optional field defaults to Yes if not specified. The field is used to show when a zone is not part of
the Total Floor Area as shown in the Annual Building Utility Performance Summary tables. Specifically,
when No is specified, the area is excluded from both the conditioned floor area and the total floor area in
the Building Area sub table and the Normalized Metrics sub tables.
And, an IDF example:

Zone ,
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Name
0.0000000E+00, !- Direction of Relative North {deg}
0.0000000E+00, !- X Origin {m}
6.096000 , !- Y Origin {m}
0.0000000E+00, !- Z Origin {m}
1, !- Type
1, !- Multiplier
autocalculate , !-Ceiling Height {m}
autocalculate; !- Volume {m3}

1.10.3.2 Zone Outputs

• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

• Zone,Average,Zone Outdoor Air Wind Speed [m/s]

1.10.3.2.1 Zone Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.

1.10.3.2.2 Zone Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor air wet-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.

1.10.3.2.3 Zone Outdoor Air Wind Speed [m/s]

The outdoor wind speed calculated at the height above ground of the zone centroid.

1.10.4 Space Thermal Output(s)

• Zone,Sum,Space Total Internal Radiant Heating Energy [J]

• Zone,Average,Space Total Internal Radiant Heating Rate [W]

• Zone,Sum,Space Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]

• Zone,Average,Space Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 265

• Zone,Sum,Space Total Internal Convective Heating Energy [J]

• Zone,Average,Space Total Internal Convective Heating Rate [W]

• Zone,Sum,Space Total Internal Latent Gain Energy [J]

• Zone,Average,Space Total Internal Latent Gain Rate [W]

• Zone,Sum,Space Total Internal Total Heating Energy [J]

• Zone,Average,Space Total Internal Total Heating Rate [W]

1.10.5 Zone Thermal Output(s)

In addition to the canned Surface reports (view the Reports section later in this document) and
surface variables (above), the following variables are available for all zones:

– Zone,Sum,Zone Total Internal Radiant Heating Energy [J]

– Zone,Average,Zone Total Internal Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Total Internal Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Total Internal Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Total Internal Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Total Internal Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Total Internal Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Total Internal Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Exfiltration Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Exfiltration Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Exfiltration Latent Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Exhaust Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Exhaust Air Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Exhaust Air Latent Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Mean Air Dewpoint Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Mean Radiant Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Operative Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Internal Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Surface Convection Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Interzone Air Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Outdoor Air Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance System Air Transfer Rate [W]
266 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance System Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Air Energy Storage Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Heat Balance Deviation Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Humidity Ratio[kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Relative Humidity[%]

Two of these are of particular interest:

Zone ,Average ,Zone Mean Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air Temperature [C]

These two variable outputs are/should be identical. However, note that they can be reported at
different time intervals. “Zone Mean Air Temperature” is only available on the Zone/HB timestep
(Number of Timesteps per Hour) whereas “Zone Air Temperature” can be reported at the HVAC
timestep (which can vary).

1.10.5.1 Zone Mean Air Temperature [C]

From the code definition, the zone mean air temperature is the average temperature of the air
temperatures at the system timestep. Remember that the zone heat balance represents a “well
stirred” model for a zone, therefore there is only one mean air temperature to represent the air
temperature for the zone.

1.10.5.2 Zone Air Temperature [C]

This is very similar to the mean air temperature in the last field. The “well stirred” model for the
zone is the basis, but this temperature is also available at the “detailed” system timestep.

1.10.5.3 Zone Mean Air Dewpoint Temperature [C]

This is the dewpoint temperature of the zone calculated from the Zone Mean Air Temperature
(above), the Zone Air Humidity Ratio (below) and the outdoor barometric pressure.

1.10.5.4 Zone Thermostat Air Temperature [C]

This is the zone air node temperature for the well-mixed room air model, which is the default
room air model type (RoomAirModelType = Mixing). But for other types of Room Air Model (the
RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:* and RoomAirSettings:* objects) the zone thermostat air tempera-
ture may depend on the Thermostat Height and Thermostat Offset.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 267

1.10.5.5 Zone Mean Radiant Temperature [C]

The Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT) in degrees Celsius of a space is a measure of the combined
effects of temperatures of surfaces within that space. Specifically it is the surface area × emissivity
weighted average of the zone inside surface temperatures (ref. Surface Inside Temperature), where
emissivity is the Thermal Absorptance of the inside material layer of each surface.

1.10.5.6 Zone Operative Temperature [C]

Zone Operative Temperature (OT) is the average of the Zone Mean Air Temperature (MAT) and
Zone Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT), OT = 0.5*MAT + 0.5*MRT. This output variable is not
affected by the type of thermostat controls in the zone, and does not include the direct effect of high
temperature radiant systems. See also Zone Thermostat Operative Temperature.

1.10.5.7 Zone Air Heat Balance Internal Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance Internal Convective Heat Gain Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat
transferred to the zone air from all types of internal gains, including people, lights, equipment etc.
This and the following provide results on the load components of the zone air heat balance. This
field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.

1.10.5.8 Zone Air Heat Balance Surface Convection Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance Surface Convection Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to the
zone air from all the surfaces. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.

1.10.5.9 Zone Air Heat Balance Interzone Air Transfer Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance Interzone Air Transfer Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to
the zone air from all the transfers of air from other thermal zones. This field is not multiplied by
zone or group multipliers.

1.10.5.10 Zone Air Heat Balance Outdoor Air Transfer Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance Outdoor Air Transfer Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to
the zone air from all the transfers of air from the out side, such as infiltration. This field is not
multiplied by zone or group multipliers.

1.10.5.11 Zone Air Heat Balance System Air Transfer Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance System Air Transfer Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat transferred to the
zone air by HVAC forced-air systems and air terminal units. Such HVAC systems are connected to
the zone by an inlet node (see ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections input field called Zone Air Inlet
Node or Node List Name) This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers. The Zone Air
Heat Balance System Air Transfer Rate may not agree exactly with the equipment-level delivered
energy transfer rate when the zone temperature is changing significantly over a timestep (e.g. during
thermostat setback and setup), but the energy will balance out over time.
268 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.5.12 Zone Air Heat Balance System Convective Heat Gain Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance System Convective Heat Gain Rate is the sum, in watts, of heat trans-
ferred directly to the zone air by “non-air” HVAC systems. Such HVAC systems are not connected
to the zone by an inlet node but rather add or subtract heat directly to the zone air in a manner
similar to internal gains. These include the convective fraction of zone HVAC baseboards and high
temperature radiant systems, zone HVAC refrigeration chiller set, and the extra convective cool-
ing provided by the cooled beam air terminal unit. This field is not multiplied by zone or group
multipliers.

1.10.5.13 Zone Air Heat Balance Air Energy Storage Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance Air Energy Storage Rate is the heat stored, in watts, in the zone air as
result of zone air temperature changing from one timestep to the next. This field is not multiplied
by zone or group multipliers.

1.10.5.14 Zone Air Heat Balance Deviation Rate [W]

The Zone Air Heat Balance Deviation Rate is the imbalance, in watts, in the energy balance for zone
air. The value should be near zero but will become non-zero if zone conditions are changing rapidly
or erratically. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers. (This output variable is only
generated if the user has set a computer system environment variable DisplayAdvancedReportVari-
ables equal to “yes”.)

1.10.5.15 Zone Air System Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This output variable represents the sensible heating energy in Joules that is actually supplied by
the system to that zone for the timestep reported. This is the sensible heating rate multiplied
by the simulation timestep. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the Zone
Predictor-Corrector module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.

Zone Air System Sensible Heating (and Cooling) Energy (and Rate) all report the heating or
cooling delivered by the HVAC system to a zone. These values are calculated by multiplying
the supply air mass flow rate by the difference between the supply air temperature and the zone
air temperature. This does not always indicate the operation of heating or cooling coils. For
example, cooling will be reported if the supply air is cooled due to the introduction of outside
air, even if all coils are off.
In addition, certain ”non-air” zone-based systems will also add their heating or cooling contri-
bution to this output variable. For example, the following zone equipment will also add their
output to the appropriate heating or cooling energy/rate output variable:

– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 269

– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
– ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water
– ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet

This means that system output from equipment such as high and low temperature radiant systems
are NOT included in this output variable as the control of these radiant systems are handled
separately with their own unique controls.
Finally, note that these variables are calculated at the system timestep. When reported at the
“detailed” reporting frequency, these variables will never show heating and cooling both in the
same system timestep. If reported at a frequency less than “Detailed” (for example, Hourly)
values may appear in both the heating and cooling variable for the same hour if the system
cooled the zone for part of the reporting period and heated the zone for another part of the
reporting period.

1.10.5.16 Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This output variable represents the sensible cooling energy in Joules that is actually supplied by
the system to that zone for the timestep reported. This is the sensible cooling rate multiplied
by the simulation timestep. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the Zone
Predictor-Corrector module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers. For additional
information on this output variable, see the note that accompanies the Zone Air System Sensible
Heating Energy output variable above.

1.10.5.17 Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output variable represents the sensible heating rate in Watts that is actually supplied by the
system to that zone for the timestep reported. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step
in the Zone Predictor-Corrector module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.
For additional information on this output variable, see the note that accompanies the Zone Air
System Sensible Heating Energy output variable above.

1.10.5.18 Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output variable represents the sensible cooling rate in Watts that is actually supplied by the
system to that zone for the timestep reported. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step
in the Zone Predictor-Corrector module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.
For additional information on this output variable, see the note that accompanies the Zone Air
System Sensible Heating Energy output variable above.

1.10.5.19 Zone Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

This output variable represents the air humidity ratio after the correct step for each zone. The
humidity ratio is the mass of water vapor to the mass of dry air contained in the zone in (kg
water/kg air) and is unitless.
270 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.5.20 Zone Air Relative Humidity [%]

This output variable represents the air relative humidity after the correct step for each zone. The
relative humidity is in percent and uses the Zone Air Temperature, the Zone Air Humidity Ratio
and the Outside Barometric Pressure for calculation.

1.10.5.21 Space or Zone Total Internal Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.10.5.22 Space or Zone Total Internal Radiant Heating Energy [J]

These output variables represent the sum of radiant gains from specific internal sources (e.g. equip-
ment) throughout the space or zone in Watts (for rate) or joules. This includes radiant gain from
People, Lights, Electric Equipment, Gas Equipment, Other Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and
Steam Equipment.

1.10.5.23 Space or Zone Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]

1.10.5.24 Space or Zone Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]

These output variables expresse the sum of heat gain in Watts (for rate) or joules that is the
calculated short wavelength radiation gain from lights in the space or zones. This calculation uses
the total energy from lights and the fraction visible to realize this value, summed over the space or
zones in the simulation.

1.10.5.25 Space or Zone Total Internal Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.10.5.26 Space or Zone Total Internal Convective Heating Energy [J]

These output variables represent the sum of convective gains from specific sources (e.g. equipment)
throughout the space or zone in Watts (for rate) or joules. This includes convective gain from People,
Lights, Electric Equipment, Gas Equipment, Other Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and Steam
Equipment.

1.10.5.27 Space or Zone Total Internal Latent Gain Rate [W]

1.10.5.28 Space or Zone Total Internal Latent Gain Energy [J]

These output variables represent the sum of latent gains from specific internal sources (e.g. equip-
ment) throughout the space or zone in Watts (for rate) or joules. This includes latent gain from
People, Electric Equipment, Gas Equipment, Other Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and Steam
Equipment.

1.10.5.29 Space or Zone Total Internal Total Heating Rate [W]

1.10.5.30 Space or Zone Total Internal Total Heating Energy [J]

These output variables represent the sum of all heat gains throughout the space or zone in Watts (for
rate) or joules. This includes all heat gains from People, Lights, Electric Equipment, Gas Equipment,
Other Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and Steam Equipment.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 271

1.10.5.31 Zone Exfiltration Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.5.32 Zone Exfiltration Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.5.33 Zone Exfiltration Latent Heat Transfer Rate [W]

These output variables represent the heat emitted to ambient from exfiltration in Watts. The
exfiltration rate is calculated by solving a mass flow balance on the zone including infiltration,
ventilation, outdoor air mixing, zone-to-zone mixing, and all of the zone inlet, exhaust, and return
nodes. The latent parts are determined by taking the difference between the total and the sensible
rate. Positive values indicate the zone injects heat to the environment, while negative values indicate
the building extracts heat from the environment.

1.10.5.34 Zone Exhaust Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.5.35 Zone Exhaust Air Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.5.36 Zone Exhaust Air Latent Heat Transfer Rate [W]

These output variables represent the heat emitted to ambient from exhaust air in Watts. The zone
exhaust air flow rate is aggregated from the zone exhaust nodes. Positive values indicate the building
injects heat to the environment, while negative values indicate the building extracts heat from the
environment.

1.10.5.37 Site Total Zone Exfiltration Heat Loss [W]

These output variables represent the total amount of heat emitted to ambient from all zones by
exfiltration in Watts. Positive values indicate the building injects heat to the environment, while
negative values indicate the building extracts heat from the environment. This includes both sensible
and latent heat loss from zone exfiltration.

1.10.5.38 Site Total Zone Exhaust Air Heat Loss [W]

These output variables represent the total amount of heat emitted to ambient from all zones by
exhaust air in Watts. Positive values indicate the building injects heat to the environment, while
negative values indicate the building extracts heat from the environment. This includes both sensible
and latent heat loss from zone exhaust air.

1.10.6 ZoneList
The ZoneList object defines a list of Zone objects. It is primarily used with the ZoneGroup object
to provide a generalized way for doing “Floor Multipliers”. (See the ZoneGroup description below.)
The associated ZoneList output variables also provide a way to aggregate and organize zone loads.
Zone lists are not exclusive. A zone can be referenced be more than one ZoneList object.
272 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.6.1 Inputs

1.10.6.1.1 Field: Zone List Name

The name of the ZoneList object. Must be unique across ZoneLists.

1.10.6.1.2 Field: Zone <#> Name

Reference to a Zone object. This object is extensible, so additional fields of this type can be added
to the end of this object.

ZoneList ,
Mid Floor List , !- Name
Mid West Zone , !- Zone 1 Name
Mid Center Zone , !- Zone 2 Name
Mid East Zone; !- Zone 3 Name

1.10.6.2 Outputs

The following output variables are reported by the ZoneList object:

– HVAC,Average,Zone List Sensible Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Zone List Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone List Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone List Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

All ZoneList variables are the sum of the corresponding Zone variables. Zone Multiplier fields in the
Zone objects are also taken into account.

1.10.7 ZoneGroup
The ZoneGroup object adds a multiplier to a ZoneList. This can be used to reduce the amount
of input necessary for simulating repetitive structures, such as the identical floors of a multi-story
building. To create a “Floor Multiplier”, use the ZoneList object to organize several zones into a
typical floor. Then use the Zone List Multiplier field in the ZoneGroup object to multiply the system
load for the zones in the list will also be multiplied. Zones with a Multiplier field greater than one
in the Zone object are effectively double-multiplied.

NOTE: Although ZoneLists are not exclusive by themselves, ZoneLists used to form a ZoneGroup
are exclusive; the ZoneLists used with a ZoneGroup must not have any zones in common.

1.10.7.1 Inputs

1.10.7.1.1 Tips for Multi-Story Simulations:

– For floors that are multiplied, connect exterior boundary conditions of the floor to the ceiling
and vice versa.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 273

– Since exterior convection coefficients vary with elevation, locate the typical middle floor zones
mid-height between the lowest and highest middle floors to be modeled.
– Shading must be identical for all multiplied floors or less accurate results may be obtained by
using the zone list multiplier.

ZoneGroup and ZoneList can also be used to simulate other repetitive cases, such as clusters of zones
on the ground.

1.10.7.1.2 Field: Zone Group Name

The name of the ZoneGroup object. This must be unique across ZoneGroups.

1.10.7.1.3 Field: Zone List Name

Reference to a ZoneList object. The zones in the list constitute the zones in the group.

1.10.7.1.4 Field: Zone List Multiplier

An integer multiplier. Zone List Multiplier is designed as a “multiplier” for floor area, zone loads,
and energy consumed by internal gains. It takes the calculated load for the zone and multiplies
it, sending the multiplied load to the attached HVAC system. The HVAC system size is specified
to meet the entire multiplied zone load and will report the amount of the load met in the Zone
Air System Sensible Heating or Cooling Energy/Rate output variable. Autosizing automatically
accounts for multipliers. Metered energy consumption by internal gains objects such as Lights or
Electric Equipment will be multiplied. The default is 1.

ZONE GROUP ,
Mid Floor , !- Zone Group Name
Mid Floor List , !- Zone List Name
8; !- Zone List Multiplier

1.10.7.2 Outputs

The following output variables are reported by the ZoneGroup object:

– HVAC,Average,Zone Group Sensible Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Group Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Group Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Group Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

All ZoneGroup variables report the associated ZoneList value multiplied by the Zone List Multiplier.

1.10.8 Surface(s)
What’s a building without surfaces?
EnergyPlus allows for several surface types:

– BuildingSurface:Detailed
274 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– FenestrationSurface:Detailed
– Shading:Site:Detailed
– Shading:Building:Detailed
– Shading:Zone:Detailed

Each of the preceding surfaces has “correct” geometry specifications. BuildingSurface and Fenes-
tration surfaces (heat transfer surfaces) are used to describe the important elements of the building
(walls, roofs, floors, windows, doors) that will determine the interactions of the building surfaces
with the outside environment parameters and the internal space requirements. These surfaces are
also used to represent “interzone” heat transfer. All surfaces are modeled as a thin plane (with no
thickness) except that material thicknesses are taken into account for heat transfer calculations.
During specification of surfaces, several “outside” environments may be chosen:

– Ground – when the surface is in touch with the ground (e.g. slab floors)
– Outdoors – when the surface is an external surface (e.g. walls, roofs, windows directly exposed
to the outdoor conditions)
– Surface – when the surface is
∗ An adiabatic internal zone surface
∗ A interzone surface
– Zone – when the surface is
∗ A interzone surface in which the other surface is not put in the input file.
– OtherSideCoefficients – when using a custom profile to describe the external conditions of
the surface (advanced concept – covered in subject: SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients)
– OtherSideConditionsModel – when using specially modeled components, such as active
solar systems, that cover the outside surface and modify the conditions it experiences.

Surface items must also specify an “outside face object”. This is

– Current surface name – for adiabatic internal surfaces.

– A surface name in another zone – for interzone heat transfer.
– An “opposing” surface name (in the current zone) – for representing “middle” zones.

Zone items must also specify an “outside face object”. This is

– The zone that contains the other surface that is adjacent to this surface but is not entered in
input.

Note that heat transfer surfaces are fully represented with each description. As stated earlier in
the Construction description, materials in the construction (outside to inside) are included but
film coefficients neither inside nor outside are used in the description – these are automatically
calculated during the EnergyPlus run. Interzone surfaces which do not have a symmetrical
construction (such as a ceiling/floor) require two Construction objects with the layers in reverse
order. For example, CEILING with carpet, concrete, ceiling tile and FLOOR with ceiling tile,
concrete, carpet. If interzone surfaces have a symmetrical construction, the specification for the
two surfaces can reference the same Construction. When a surface is connected as the outside
boundary condition for another surface, the two surfaces may be in the same plane, or they may
be separated to imply thickness.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 275

Note also that if interzone constructions include either WindowMaterial:Glazing or WindowMa-

terial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer then the materials properties of layers consisting of those material
types will have front and back side values that may differ from one another. So, if using such
materials in the definition of an interzone construction, reversed materials must also have their
front and back properties inverted so as to match in reverse order. For example, if there is a
single layer of glass of type WindowMaterial:Glazing defined for an interzone construction and
the front and back properties differ, the user must define two materials with equivalent prop-
erties except that the front and back values must be reversed. This means that one material
used for the definition on one side might have a front side solar reflectance at normal incidence
of 0.35 and a back side solar reflectance at normal incidence of 0.25. The material used for the
other side of the interzone construction must then have a front side solar reflectance at normal
incidence of 0.25 and a back side solar reflectance at normal incidence of 0.35 to match properly
in reverse. EnergyPlus checks for all of the user input properties for single and multiple layer
interzone constructions that use these two material types to confirm that this has been done
correctly so that the simulation accurately reflects the properties of the materials on each side.

Shading surfaces are used to describe aspects of the site which do not directly impact the physical
interactions of the environmental parameters but may significantly shade the building during specific
hours of the day or time so the year (e.g. trees, bushes, mountains, nearby buildings which aren’t
being simulated as part of this facility, etc.)

Note that surfaces which are part of the simulated building automatically shade other parts of
the building as geometry and time of day dictate – there is no need on the user’s part to include
surfaces that might be in other zones for shading.

Another surface type:

– InternalMass

is used to specify the construction/material parameters and area of items within the space that are
important to heat transfer calculations but not necessarily important geometrically. (For example,
furniture within the space – particularly for large spaces). Internal mass can also be used for
internal walls that are not needed (when FullInteriorAndExterior Solar Distribution is in effect) for
solar distribution or to represent many, if not all, interior walls when solar is distributed to the floors
only.

1.10.9 Interzone Surfaces

EnergyPlus can quite accurately simulate the surface heat exchange between two zones. However,
this accuracy is not always required and using interzonal heat transfer does add to the complexity
of the calculations – thus requiring more CPU time to simulate. More information about interzonal
heat transfer calculations is contained in the Engineering Reference. Some simple guidelines are
presented here – for three cases: adiabatic surfaces, surfaces in “middle” zones, and surfaces where
heat transfer is “expected” (e.g. between a residence and an unheated, attached garage).
276 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Adiabatic Surfaces – These surfaces would be represented as common surfaces (between two
zones) where both zones are typically the same temperature. Thus, no transfer is expected
in the surface from one zone to the next. These surfaces should be described as simply in-
ternal surfaces for the zone referencing as their Outside Boundary Condition Object (see later
description in individual surface objects) their own surface names.
– Surfaces in Middle Zones – Middle zones in a building can be simulated using a judicious use of
surfaces and zone multipliers to effect the correct “loads” for the building. Thus, middle zone
behavior can be simulated without modeling the adjacent zones. This is done by specifying a
surface within the zone. For example, a middle floor zone can be modeled by making the floor
the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling the Outside Boundary
Condition Object for the floor.
– Surfaces between Zones with differing temperatures – These zones represent the true use of
interzone surfaces. In a residence that has an attached garage, the garage may be unheat-
ed/uncooled or at least not conditioned to the same degree as the residence interior. In this
case, EnergyPlus can be used to accurately calculate the effects of the differently conditioned
space to the other spaces.

1.10.10 Surface View Factors

EnergyPlus uses an area weighted approximation to calculate “view factors” between surfaces within
a thermal zone. Each surface uses the total area that it can “see” among the other surfaces. The
approximate view factor from this surface to each other surface is then the area of the receiving
surface over the sum of areas that is visible to the sending surface.
In order to account in some limited way for the fact that certain surfaces will not see each other,
several assumptions have been built into this simple view factor approximation. First, a surface
cannot see itself. Second, surfaces with approximately the same azimuth (facing direction) and tilt
(“same” being within a built in limit) will not see each other. This means that a window will not see
the wall that it is placed on, for example. Third, floors cannot see each other. Fourth, if the surface
is a floor, ceiling, roof, or internal mass, the rule for the same azimuth and tilt eliminating radiant
exchange between surface is waived when the receiving surface is floor, roof, ceiling, or internal mass
as long as both surfaces are not floors.
Note that this does not take into account that surfaces may be “around the corner” from each other
and in reality not see each other at all. Rooms are assumed to be convex rather than concave in this
method.
To summarize, using the Surface “Class”, the approximate view factors have:

1. No surface sees itself.

2. No Floor sees another floor.
3. All other surface types see Internal Mass.
4. All other surface types see floors.
5. Floors always see ceilings.
6. Floors always see roofs.
7. All other surfaces whose tilt or facing angle differences are greater than 10 degrees see each
other.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 277

If geometry is correct, conditions 1, 3, and 7 should take care of all surfaces, but the other conditions
supply common sense when the geometry is incorrect. More information about the EnergyPlus view
factor calculation is contained in the Engineering Reference document.

1.10.11 GlobalGeometryRules
Before the surface objects are explained in detail, a description of geometric parameters used in
EnergyPlus will be given. Since the input of surface vertices is common to most of the surface types,
it will also be given a separate discussion.
Some flexibility is allowed in specifying surface vertices. This flexibility is embodied in the Global-
GeometryRules class/object in the input file. Note that the parameters specified in this statement
are used for all surface vertice inputs – there is no further “flexibility” allowed.
In order to perform shadowing calculations, the building surfaces must be specified. EnergyPlus uses
a three dimensional (3D) Cartesian coordinate system for surface vertex specification. This Right
Hand coordinate system has the X-axis pointing east, the Y-axis pointing north, and the Z-axis
pointing up. See figure below.

Figure 1.30: EnergyPlus Coordinate System

1.10.11.1 Inputs

1.10.11.1.1 Field: Starting Vertex Position

The shadowing algorithms in EnergyPlus rely on surfaces having vertices in a certain order and
positional structure. Thus, the surface translator needs to know the starting point for each surface
entry. The choices are: UpperLeftCorner, LowerLeftCorner , UpperRightCorner, or LowerRight-
Corner. Since most surfaces will be 4 sided, the convention will specify this position as though each
278 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

surface were 4 sided. Extrapolate 3 sided figures to this convention. For 5 and more sided figures,
again, try to extrapolate the best “corner” starting position.

1.10.11.1.2 Field: Vertex Entry Direction

Surfaces are always specified as being viewed from the outside of the zone to which they belong.
(Shading surfaces are specified slightly differently and are discussed under the particular types).
EnergyPlus needs to know whether the surfaces are being specified in counterclockwise or clockwise
order (from the Starting Vertex Position). EnergyPlus uses this to determine the outward facing
normal for the surface (which is the facing angle of the surface – very important in shading and
shadowing calculations.

1.10.11.1.3 Field: Coordinate System

Vertices can be specified in two ways: using World coordinates, or a Relative coordinate specifica-
tion. Relative coordinates allow flexibility of rapid change to observe changes in building results due
to orientation and position. World coordinates will facilitate use within a CADD system structure.
Relative coordinates make use of both Building and Zone North Axis values as well as Zone Origin
values to locate the surface in 3D coordinate space. World coordinates do not use these values.
Typically, all zone origin values for “World” coordinates will be (0,0,0) but Building and Zone North
Axis values may be used in certain instances (namely the Daylighting Coordinate Location entries).

1.10.11.1.4 Field: Daylighting Reference Point Coordinate System

Daylighting reference points need to be specified as well. Again, there can be two flavors; Relative
and World. Daylighting reference points must fit within the zone boundaries.
Relative coordinates make use of both Building and Zone North Axis values as well as Zone Origin
values to locate the reference point in 3D coordinate space. World coordinates do not use these
values.

1.10.11.1.5 Field: Rectangular Surface Coordinate System

Simple, rectangular surfaces (Wall:Exterior, Wall:Adiabatic, Wall:Underground, Wall:Interzone,
Roof, Ceiling:Adiabatic, Ceiling:Interzone, Floor:GroundContact, Floor:Adiabatic, Floor:Interzone)
can be specified with their Lower Left Corner as relative or world.
Relative (default) corners are specified relative to the Zone Origin for each surface. World corners
would specify the absolute/world coordinate for this corner.

1.10.12 Surfaces
Surfaces make up the buildings and the elements that shade buildings. There are several methods
to inputting surfaces, ranging from simple rectangular surfaces to detailed descriptions that describe
each vertex in the order specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object. The simple, rectangular
surface objects are described first with the more detailed descriptions following.

1.10.13 Walls
Walls are usually vertical (tilt = 90 degrees). These objects are used to describe exterior walls,
interior walls (adiabatic), underground walls, and walls adjacent to other zones.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 279

1.10.14 Wall:Exterior
The Wall:Exterior object is used to describe walls that are exposed to the external environment.
They receive sun, wind – all the characteristics of the external world.

1.10.14.1 Inputs

1.10.14.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the exterior wall. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.14.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.14.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.14.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction that the wall faces (outward normal). The angle is
specified in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.14.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground).
Normally, walls are tilted 90 degrees and that is the default for this field.

Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates,
depending on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.14.1.6 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.14.1.7 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.14.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).
280 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.14.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the wall in meters.

1.10.14.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the wall in meters.

1.10.15 Wall:Adiabatic
The Wall:Adiabatic object is used to describe interior walls and partitions. Adiabatic walls are used
to describe walls next to zones that have the same thermal conditions (thus, no heat transfer).

1.10.15.1 Inputs

1.10.15.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the interior wall. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.15.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.15.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.15.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction that the wall faces (outward normal). The angle is
specified in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.15.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground).
Normally, walls are tilted 90 degrees and that is the default for this field.

Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates,
depending on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.15.1.6 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 281

1.10.15.1.7 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.15.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.15.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the wall in meters.

1.10.15.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the wall in meters.

1.10.16 Wall:Underground
The Wall:Underground object is used to describe walls with ground contact. The temperature at
the outside of the wall is the temperature in the GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface object.

1.10.16.1 Inputs

1.10.16.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the underground wall. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.16.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones. Note that if
the construction is Construction:CfactorUndergroundWall then the GroundFCfactoreMethod
will be used for this wall.

1.10.16.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.16.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction that the wall faces (outward normal). The angle is
specified in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.16.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground).
Normally, walls are tilted 90 degrees and that is the default for this field.
282 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.16.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.16.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.16.1.8 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.16.1.9 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.16.1.10 Field: Length

This field is the length of the wall in meters.

1.10.16.1.11 Field: Height

This field is the height of the wall in meters.

1.10.17 Wall:Interzone
The Wall:Interzone object is used to describe walls adjacent to zones that are significantly different
conditions than the zone with this wall.

1.10.17.1 Inputs

1.10.17.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the interzone wall. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.17.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.17.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 283

1.10.17.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

The Outside Boundary Condition Object field is the name of a wall in an adjacent zone or the name
of the adjacent zone. If the adjacent zone option is used, the adjacent wall is automatically generated
in the adjacent zone. If the surface name is used, it must be in the adjacent zone.

1.10.17.1.5 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction that the wall faces (outward normal). The angle is
specified in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.17.1.6 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground).
Normally, walls are tilted 90 degrees and that is the default for this field.

1.10.17.1.7 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.17.1.8 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.17.1.9 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.17.1.10 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.17.1.11 Field: Length

This field is the length of the wall in meters.

1.10.17.1.12 Field: Height

This field is the height of the wall in meters.

1.10.18 Roofs/Ceilings
Roofs and ceilings are, by default, flat (tilt = 0 degrees). These objects are used to describe roofs,
interior ceilings (adiabatic) and ceilings adjacent to other zones.

1.10.19 Roof
The Roof object is used to describe roofs that are exposed to the external environment.
284 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.19.1 Inputs

1.10.19.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the roof. It is used in several other places as a reference
(e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.19.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.19.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.19.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction of the outward normal for the roof. The angle is specified
in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.19.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground). Flat
roofs are tilted 0 degrees and that is the default for this field.

1.10.19.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.19.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.19.1.8 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.19.1.9 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.19.1.10 Field: Length

This field is the length of the roof in meters.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 285

1.10.19.1.11 Field: Width

This field is the width of the roof in meters.

1.10.20 Ceiling:Adiabatic
The Ceiling:Adiabatic object is used to describe interior ceilings that separate zones of like conditions.

1.10.20.1 Inputs

1.10.20.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the ceiling. It is used in several other places as a reference
(e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.20.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.20.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.20.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction of the outward normal for the roof. The angle is specified
in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.20.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground). Flat
ceilings are tilted 0 degrees and that is the default for this field.

1.10.20.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.20.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.20.1.8 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).
286 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.20.1.9 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.20.1.10 Field: Length

This field is the length of the ceiling in meters.

1.10.20.1.11 Field: Width

This field is the width of the ceiling in meters.

1.10.21 Ceiling:Interzone
The Ceiling:Interzone object is used to describe interior ceilings that separate zones of differing
conditions (and expect heat transfer through the ceiling from the adjacent zone).

1.10.21.1 Inputs

1.10.21.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the interzone ceiling. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.21.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.21.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.21.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

The Outside Boundary Condition Object field is the name of a floor in an adjacent zone or the
name of the adjacent zone. If the adjacent zone option is used, the adjacent floor is automatically
generated in the adjacent zone. If the surface name is used, it must be in the adjacent zone.

1.10.21.1.5 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction of the outward normal for the roof. The angle is specified
in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.21.1.6 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground). Flat
ceilings are tilted 0 degrees and that is the default for this field.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 287

1.10.21.1.7 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.21.1.8 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.21.1.9 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.21.1.10 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.21.1.11 Field: Length

This field is the length of the ceiling in meters.

1.10.21.1.12 Field: Width

This field is the width of the ceiling in meters.

1.10.22 Floors
Floors are, by default, flat (tilt = 180 degrees). These objects are used to describe floors on the
ground, interior floors (adiabatic) and floors adjacent to other zones.

1.10.23 Floor:GroundContact
The Floor:GroundContact object is used to describe floors that have ground contact (usually called
slabs). The temperature at the outside of the floor is the temperature in the GroundTempera-
ture:BuildingSurface object.

1.10.23.1 Inputs

1.10.23.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the floor.

1.10.23.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones. Note that
if the construction is Construction:FfactorGroundFloor, then the GroundFCfactorMethod will
be used with this floor.
288 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.23.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.23.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction of the outward normal for the roof. The angle is specified
in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.23.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground). Flat
floors are tilted 180 degrees and that is the default for this field.

1.10.23.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.23.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.23.1.8 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.23.1.9 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.23.1.10 Field: Length

This field is the length of the floor in meters.

1.10.23.1.11 Field: Width

This field is the width of the floor in meters.

1.10.24 Floor:Adiabatic
The Floor:Adiabatic object is used to describe interior floors or floors that you wish to model with
no heat transfer from the exterior to the floor.

1.10.24.1 Inputs

1.10.24.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the floor.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 289

1.10.24.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.24.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.24.1.4 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction of the outward normal for the roof. The angle is specified
in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.24.1.5 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground). Flat
floors are tilted 180 degrees and that is the default for this field.

1.10.24.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.24.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.24.1.8 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.24.1.9 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.24.1.10 Field: Length

This field is the length of the floor in meters.

1.10.24.1.11 Field: Width

This field is the width of the floor in meters.

1.10.25 Floor:Interzone
The Floor:Interzone object is used to describe floors that are adjacent to other zones that have
differing conditions and you wish to model the heat transfer through the floor.
290 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.25.1 Inputs

1.10.25.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the floor.

1.10.25.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.25.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.25.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

The Outside Boundary Condition Object field is the name of a ceiling in an adjacent zone or the
name of the adjacent zone. If the adjacent zone option is used, the adjacent ceiling is automatically
generated in the adjacent zone. If the surface name is used, it must be in the adjacent zone.

1.10.25.1.5 Field: Azimuth Angle

The Azimuth Angle indicates the direction of the outward normal for the roof. The angle is specified
in degrees where East = 90, South = 180, West = 270, North = 0.

1.10.25.1.6 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the wall is tilted from horizontal (or the ground). Flat
floors are tilted 180 degrees and that is the default for this field.

1.10.25.1.7 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This is specified with (x,y,z) and can be relative to the zone origin or in world coordinates, depending
on the value for rectangular surfaces specified in the GlobalGeometryRules object.

1.10.25.1.8 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.25.1.9 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

1.10.25.1.10 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 291

1.10.25.1.11 Field: Length

This field is the length of the floor in meters.

1.10.25.1.12 Field: Width

This field is the width of the floor in meters.

1.10.26 Windows/Doors
The following window and door objects can be used to specify simple, rectangular doors and windows.
In each case, the lower left corner (locator coordinate) of the window or door is specified relative to
the surface it is on. Viewing the base surface as a planar surface, base the relative location from the
lower left corner of the base surface. Vertex entry description as well as provisions for a few other
surface types can be entered with the FenestrationSurface:Detailed object.

1.10.27 Window
The Window object is used to place windows on surfaces that can have windows, including exterior
walls, interior walls, interzone walls, roofs, floors that are exposed to outdoor conditions, interzone
ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the more
detailed vertex entry objects. Shades and screens may be applied by referencing this subsurface in
a window shading control (ref: WindowShadingControl object). To assign a shade to a window or
glass door, see WindowMaterial: Shade. To assign a screen, see WindowMaterial:Screen. To assign
a blind, see WindowMaterial:Blind. To assign switchable glazing, such as electrochromic glazing,
see WindowShadingControl.

1.10.27.1 Inputs

1.10.27.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the window.

1.10.27.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: objects: Construction, Construc-
tion:WindowDataFile, Construction:ComplexFenestrationState).
For windows, if Construction Name is not found among the constructions on the input (.idf) file,
the Window Data File (ref. Construction:WindowDataFile object) will be searched for that Con-
struction Name (see “Importing Windows from WINDOW”). If that file is not present or if the
Construction Name does not match the name of an entry on the file, an error will result. If there is
a match, a window construction and its corresponding glass and gas materials will be created from
the information read from the file.

1.10.27.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not
be allowed to have subsurfaces. For example, a surface in contact with the ground (e.g., Outside
Boundary Condition = Ground) cannot contain a window. The window assumes the outward facing
angle as well as the tilt angle of the base surface.
292 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.27.1.4 Field: Frame and Divider Name

This field, if not blank, can be used to specify window frame, divider and reveal-surface data (ref:
WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). It is used only for exterior GlassDoors and rectangular
exterior Windows, i.e., those with OutsideFaceEnvironment = Outdoors.
This field should be blank for triangular windows.

1.10.27.1.5 Field: Multiplier

This field is the number of identical items on the base surface. Using Multiplier can save input
effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area (and area of frame and divider, if present
and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier. The calculation of shadowing on the
subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of beam solar radiation transmitted by
windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.

1.10.27.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular subsurfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This corner is specified relative to the lower left corner of the base surface by specifying the X and
Z values from that corner.

1.10.27.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.27.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.27.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the window in meters.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 293

1.10.27.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the window in meters.

1.10.28 Door
The Door object is used to place opaque doors on surfaces that can have doors, including exterior
walls, interior walls, interzone walls, roofs, floors that are exposed to outdoor conditions, interzone
ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the more
detailed vertex entry objects.

1.10.28.1 Inputs

1.10.28.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the door.

1.10.28.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: Construction object)

1.10.28.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not be
allowed to have subsurfaces. The door assumes the outward facing angle as well as the tilt angle of
the base surface.

1.10.28.1.4 Field: Multiplier

This field is the number of identical items on the base surface. Using Multiplier can save input
effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area (and area of frame and divider, if present
and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier. The calculation of shadowing on the
subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of beam solar radiation transmitted by
windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.
294 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.28.1.5 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular subsurfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This corner is specified relative to the lower left corner of the base surface by specifying the X and
Z values from that corner.

1.10.28.1.6 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.28.1.7 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.28.1.8 Field: Length

This field is the length of the door in meters.

1.10.28.1.9 Field: Height

This field is the height of the door in meters.

1.10.29 GlazedDoor
The GlazedDoor object is used to place doors on surfaces that can have doors, including exterior
walls, interior walls, interzone walls, roofs, floors that are exposed to outdoor conditions, interzone
ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular objects or the more
detailed vertex entry objects. Shades and screens may be applied by referencing this subsurface in
a window shading control (ref: WindowShadingControl object). To assign a shade to a window or
glass door, see WindowMaterial: Shade. To assign a screen, see WindowMaterial:Screen. To assign
a blind, see WindowMaterial:Blind. To assign switchable glazing, such as electrochromic glazing,
see WindowShadingControl.

1.10.29.1 Inputs

1.10.29.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the glass door.

1.10.29.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: objects: Construction, Construc-
tion:WindowDataFile, Construction:ComplexFenestrationState).
For windows, if Construction Name is not found among the constructions on the input (.idf) file,
the Window Data File (ref. Construction:WindowDataFile object) will be searched for that Con-
struction Name (see “Importing Windows from WINDOW”). If that file is not present or if the
Construction Name does not match the name of an entry on the file, an error will result. If there is
a match, a window construction and its corresponding glass and gas materials will be created from
the information read from the file.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 295

1.10.29.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not be
allowed to have subsurfaces. For example, a surface in contact with the ground (Outside Boundary
Condition = Ground) cannot contain a window. The door assumes the outward facing angle as well
as the tilt angle of the base surface.

1.10.29.1.4 Field: Frame and Divider Name

This field, if not blank, can be used to specify window frame, divider and reveal-surface data (ref:
WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). It is used only for exterior GlassDoors and rectangular
exterior Windows, i.e., those with OutsideFaceEnvironment = Outdoors.
This field should be blank for triangular windows.

1.10.29.1.5 Field: Multiplier

This field is the number of identical items on the base surface. Using Multiplier can save input
effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area (and area of frame and divider, if present
and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier. The calculation of shadowing on the
subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of beam solar radiation transmitted by
windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.

1.10.29.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular subsurfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This corner is specified relative to the lower left corner of the base surface by specifying the X and
Z values from that corner.

1.10.29.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.29.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).
296 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.29.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the door in meters.

1.10.29.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the door in meters.

1.10.30 Window:Interzone
The Window:Interzone object is used to place windows on surfaces that can have windows, including
interzone walls, interzone ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular
objects or the more detailed vertex entry objects.

1.10.30.1 Inputs

1.10.30.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the window.

1.10.30.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: objects: Construction, Construc-
tion:WindowDataFile, Construction:ComplexFenestrationState).
For windows, if Construction Name is not found among the constructions on the input (.idf) file,
the Window Data File (ref. Construction:WindowDataFile object) will be searched for that Con-
struction Name (see “Importing Windows from WINDOW”). If that file is not present or if the
Construction Name does not match the name of an entry on the file, an error will result. If there is
a match, a window construction and its corresponding glass and gas materials will be created from
the information read from the file.

1.10.30.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not be
allowed to have subsurfaces. For example, a surface in contact with the ground (Outside Boundary
Condition = Ground) cannot contain a window. The window assumes the outward facing angle as
well as the tilt angle of the base surface.

1.10.30.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

The Outside Boundary Condition Object field is the name of a window in an adjacent zone or the
name of the adjacent zone. If the adjacent zone option is used, the adjacent ceiling is automatically
generated in the adjacent zone. If the surface name is used, it must be in the adjacent zone.

1.10.30.1.5 Field: Multiplier

This field is the number of identical items on the base surface. Using Multiplier can save input
effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area (and area of frame and divider, if present
and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier. The calculation of shadowing on the
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 297

subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of beam solar radiation transmitted by
windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.

1.10.30.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular subsurfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This corner is specified relative to the lower left corner of the base surface by specifying the X and
Z values from that corner.

1.10.30.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.30.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.30.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the window in meters.

1.10.30.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the window in meters.

1.10.31 Door:Interzone
The Door:Interzone object is used to place opaque doors on surfaces that can have doors, including
interzone walls, interzone ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular
objects or the more detailed vertex entry objects.
298 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.31.1 Inputs

1.10.31.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the door.

1.10.31.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: Construction object).

1.10.31.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not be
allowed to have subsurfaces. The door assumes the outward facing angle as well as the tilt angle of
the base surface.

1.10.31.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

The Outside Boundary Condition Object field is the name of a door in an adjacent zone or the
name of the adjacent zone. If the adjacent zone option is used, the adjacent ceiling is automatically
generated in the adjacent zone. If the surface name is used, it must be in the adjacent zone.

1.10.31.1.5 Field: Multiplier

This field is the number of identical items on the base surface. Using Multiplier can save input
effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area (and area of frame and divider, if present
and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier. The calculation of shadowing on the
subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of beam solar radiation transmitted by
windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.

1.10.31.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular subsurfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This corner is specified relative to the lower left corner of the base surface by specifying the X and
Z values from that corner.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 299

1.10.31.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.31.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.31.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the door in meters.

1.10.31.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the door in meters.

1.10.32 GlazedDoor:Interzone
The GlazedDoor:Interzone object is used to place doors on surfaces that can have doors, including
interzone walls, interzone ceiling/floors. These, of course, can be entered using the simple rectangular
objects or the more detailed vertex entry objects.

1.10.32.1 Inputs

1.10.32.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the glass door.

1.10.32.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: objects: Construction, Construc-
tion:WindowDataFile, Construction:ComplexFenestrationState).
For windows, if Construction Name is not found among the constructions on the input (.idf) file,
the Window Data File (ref. Construction:WindowDataFile object) will be searched for that Con-
struction Name (see “Importing Windows from WINDOW”). If that file is not present or if the
Construction Name does not match the name of an entry on the file, an error will result. If there is
a match, a window construction and its corresponding glass and gas materials will be created from
the information read from the file.

1.10.32.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not be
allowed to have subsurfaces. For example, a surface in contact with the ground (Outside Boundary
Condition = Ground) cannot contain a window. The door assumes the outward facing angle as well
as the tilt angle of the base surface.

1.10.32.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

The Outside Boundary Condition Object field is the name of a glazed (glass) door in an adjacent
zone or the name of the adjacent zone. If the adjacent zone option is used, the adjacent ceiling is
automatically generated in the adjacent zone. If the surface name is used, it must be in the adjacent
zone.
300 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.32.1.5 Field: Multiplier

This field is the number of identical items on the base surface. Using Multiplier can save input
effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area (and area of frame and divider, if present
and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier. The calculation of shadowing on the
subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of beam solar radiation transmitted by
windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.

1.10.32.1.6 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular subsurfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate.
This corner is specified relative to the lower left corner of the base surface by specifying the X and
Z values from that corner.

1.10.32.1.7 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.32.1.8 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.32.1.9 Field: Length

This field is the length of the door in meters.

1.10.32.1.10 Field: Height

This field is the height of the door in meters.
Examples of the rectangular surfaces are found in the example files 4ZoneWithShading_Simple_1.idf
and 4ZoneWithShading_Simple_2. Some examples:

Wall:Exterior ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Name
EXTERIOR , !- Construction Name
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 301

ZONE 1, !- Zone Name

180, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
0, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
10; !- Height {m}

Window ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name
SINGLE PANE HW WINDOW , !- Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Building Surface Name
, !- Frame and Divider Name
1, !- Multiplier
4, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
3, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
3, !- Length {m}
5; !- Height {m}

Door ,
Zn001:Wall001:Door001 , !- Name
HOLLOW WOOD DOOR , !- Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Building Surface Name
1, !- Multiplier
14, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
3, !- Length {m}
5; !- Height {m}

Wall:Adiabatic ,
Zn001:Wall004 , !- Name
INTERIOR , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
90, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
20, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
10; !- Height {m}

Floor:Adiabatic ,
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Name
FLOOR , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
90, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
180, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
0, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
20; !- Width {m}

Ceiling:Interzone ,
Zn001:Roof001 , !- Name
CEILING34 , !- Construction Name
ZONE 1, !- Zone Name
Zn003:Flr001 , !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
180, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
0, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
0, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
10, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
20, !- Length {m}
20; !- Width {m}

Window ,
Zn002:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name
SINGLE PANE HW WINDOW , !- Construction Name
302 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zn002:Wall001 , !- Building Surface Name

, !- Frame and Divider Name
1, !- Multiplier
4, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
3, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
3, !- Length {m}
5; !- Height {m}

1.10.33 Surface Vertices

Each of the following surfaces:

– BuildingSurface:Detailed
– Wall:Detailed
– RoofCeiling:Detailed
– Floor:Detailed
– FenestrationSurface:Detailed
– Shading:Site:Detailed
– Shading:Building:Detailed
– Shading:Zone:Detailed

use the same vertex input. The numeric parameters indicated below are taken from the BuildingSur-
face:Detailed definition; the others may not be exactly the same but are identical in configuration.
They are also “extensible” – so, to define more vertices for these surfaces, simply add the required
number of vertices (X, Y, and Z coordinates for each vertex) to the input file. Note that Fenestra-
tionSurface:Detailed is not extensible and is limited to 4 (max) vertices. If the Number of Surface
Vertex groups is left blank or entered as autocalculate, EnergyPlus looks at the number of groups
entered and figures out how many coordinate groups are entered.

Note that the resolution on the surface vertex input is 1 millimeter (.001 meter).
Therefore, using vertices that are very close together (< 1 mm) may result in invalid
dot product and fatal errors during shading calculations.

The figure above will help illustrate Surface Vertex entry. The convention used in “GlobalGeom-
etryRules” dictates the order of the vertices (ref: GlobalGeometryRules). In this example, the
conventions used are Starting Vertex Position = UpperLeftCorner and Vertex Entry Direction =
CounterClockwise. The surfaces for this single zone are:
4,0,0,H, 0,0,0, A,0,0, A,0,H; ! (4 vertices , South Wall)
4,A,0,H,A,0,0,A,B,0,A,B,H; ! (4 vertices , East Wall)
ignore other walls that are not shown in this figure
4,C,0,J,A,0,H,A,B,H,C,B,J; ! (4 vertices , roof)
3,C,0,J,0,0,H,A,0,H; ! (3 vertices , gable end)
4,0,0,H, 0,0,0, A,0,0, A,0,H; ! (4 vertices , South Wall)

Note that in this example, point 1 of the entry is the Upper Left Corner of the rectangular surfaces
and the point of the triangle for the 3 sided surface. The east wall shows the order of vertex
entry. For horizontal surfaces, any vertex may be chosen as the starting position, but the Vertex
Entry Direction convention must be followed. The surface details report (Output: Surfaces:List,
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 303

Figure 1.31: Illustration for Surface Vertices

Details;) is very useful for reviewing the accuracy of surface geometry inputs (ref: Surface Output
Variables/Reports and Variable Dictionary Reports).
From the detailed vertices, EnergyPlus tries to determine the “height” and “width” of the surface.
Obviously, this doesn’t work well for >4 sided surfaces; for these, if the calculated height and width
are not close to the gross area for the surface, the height and width shown will be the square root of
the area (and thus a square).

1.10.34 Building Surfaces - Detailed

A building surface is necessary for all calculations. There must be at least one building surface
per zone. You can use the detailed descriptions as shown below or the simpler, rectangular surface
descriptions shown earlier.

1.10.35 Wall:Detailed
The Wall:Detailed object is used to describe walls.

1.10.35.1 Inputs

1.10.35.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
304 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.35.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.35.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.35.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition

This value can be one of several things depending on the actual kind of surface.

1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be a
surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate
a group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as
this increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone
unless the two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be
very different (temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment
or specify this field as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent
to) is placed in the next field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange
heat with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where
both sides of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition
Object can be left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface
in the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the
surface, EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice.
See Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Foundation - uses an alternative model (currently only the KivaTM model) to account for
the multi-dimensional heat transfer of foundation surfaces. The Outside Boundary Condition
Object will refer to the name of a Foundation:Kiva object (or be left blank to use the default
foundation without extra insulation).
6. Ground - The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:Surface
value for the month.
7. GroundFCfactorMethod – if this surface is exposed to the ground and using the Construc-
tion:CfactorUndergroundWall, then this is the choice. The temperature on the outside of
this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:FcfactorMethod value for the month.
8. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other
parameters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice.
The outside boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients
specification.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 305

9. OtherSideConditionsModel – if this surface has a specially-modeled multi-skin component,

such as a transpired collector or vented photovoltaic panel, attached to the outside (See Sur-
faceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification), then this the choice. The outside face
environment will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
11. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
12. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the
Basement preprocessor calculations.
15. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
16. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.

1.10.35.1.5 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

If neither Surface, Zone, Foundation, OtherSideCoefficients, or OtherSideConditionsModel are spec-
ified for the Outside Boundary Condition (previous field), then this field should be left blank.
As stated above, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “Surface”, then this field’s value must be the
surface name whose inside face temperature will be forced on the outside face of the base surface.
This permits heat exchange between adjacent zones (interzone heat transfer) when multiple zones
are simulated, but can also be used to simulate middle zone behavior without modeling the adjacent
zones. This is done by specifying a surface within the zone. For example, a middle floor zone can be
modeled by making the floor the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling
the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the floor.
If the Outside Boundary Condition is Zone, then this field should contain the zone name of the
adjacent zone for the surface.

Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute
to gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this
field. Also, for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you
want interzone heat transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface
object with the outside face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a
floor surface object in the attic that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.

Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value
must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary
Condition is “OtherSideConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.
306 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.35.1.6 Field: Sun Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the sun, then “SunExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoSun” should be entered.
Note, a cantilevered floor could have “Outdoors” but “NoSun” exposure.

1.10.35.1.7 Field: Wind Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the Wind, then “WindExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoWind” should be entered.

Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not
have a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using
“NoWind” also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to
both the sky and the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a
surface specified with “NoWind”.

1.10.35.1.8 Field: View Factor to Ground

The fraction of the ground plane (assumed horizontal) that is visible from a heat-transfer surface.
It is used to calculate the diffuse solar radiation from the ground that is incident on the surface.
For example, if there are no obstructions, a vertical surface sees half of the ground plane and so
View Factor to Ground = 0.5. A horizontal downward-facing surface sees the entire ground plane,
so View Factor to Ground = 1.0. A horizontal upward-facing surface (horizontal roof) does not see
the ground at all, so View Factor to Ground = 0.0.
Unused if reflections option in Solar Distribution field in Building object input unless a Daylight-
ingDevice:Shelf or DaylightingDevice:Tubular has been specified.
If you do not use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object input,
you are responsible for entering the View Factor to Ground for each heat-transfer surface. Typical
values for a surface that is not shadowed are obtained by the simple equation:
View Factor to Ground = (1-cos(SurfTilt))/2
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object
input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will
automatically calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing
(including shadowing of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building,
Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you still need to enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For
DaylightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 307

the shelf. And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the
FenestrationSurface:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device.
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it
is calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and
shadowing surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not
user inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces.
Shadowing surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so
they are lumped together with the ground in calculating the ground IR view factor.

1.10.35.1.9 Field: Number of Vertices

This field specifies the number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further
information, see the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above.

1.10.36 RoofCeiling:Detailed
The RoofCeiling:Detailed object is used to describe a roof or ceiling.

1.10.36.1 Inputs

1.10.36.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.36.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.36.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.36.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition

This value can be one of several things depending on the actual kind of surface.

1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be a
surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate
a group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as
this increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone
unless the two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be
very different (temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment
308 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

or specify this field as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent
to) is placed in the next field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange
heat with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where
both sides of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition
Object can be left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface
in the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the
surface, EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice.
See Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Ground – The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Ground Temperature.
6. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other
parameters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice.
The outside boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients
specification.
7. OtherSideConditionsModel – if this surface has a specially-modeled multi-skin component,
such as a transpired collector or vented photovoltaic panel, attached to the outside (See Sur-
faceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification), then this the choice. The outside face
environment will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification.
8. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
9. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
11. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
12. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the
Basement preprocessor calculations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.

1.10.36.1.5 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

If neither Surface, Zone, Foundation, OtherSideCoefficients, or OtherSideConditionsModel are spec-
ified for the Outside Boundary Condition (previous field), then this field should be left blank.
As stated above, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “Surface”, then this field’s value must be the
surface name whose inside face temperature will be forced on the outside face of the base surface.
This permits heat exchange between adjacent zones (interzone heat transfer) when multiple zones
are simulated, but can also be used to simulate middle zone behavior without modeling the adjacent
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 309

zones. This is done by specifying a surface within the zone. For example, a middle floor zone can be
modeled by making the floor the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling
the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the floor.
If the Outside Boundary Condition is Zone, then this field should contain the zone name of the
adjacent zone for the surface.

Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute
to gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this
field. Also, for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you
want interzone heat transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface
object with the outside face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a
floor surface object in the attic that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.

Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value
must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary
Condition is “OtherSideConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.

1.10.36.1.6 Field: Sun Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the sun, then “SunExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoSun” should be entered.
Note, a cantilevered floor could have “Outdoors” but “NoSun” exposure.

1.10.36.1.7 Field: Wind Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the Wind, then “WindExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoWind” should be entered.

Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not
have a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using
“NoWind” also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to
both the sky and the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a
surface specified with “NoWind”.

1.10.36.1.8 Field: View Factor to Ground

The fraction of the ground plane (assumed horizontal) that is visible from a heat-transfer surface.
It is used to calculate the diffuse solar radiation from the ground that is incident on the surface.
For example, if there are no obstructions, a vertical surface sees half of the ground plane and so
View Factor to Ground = 0.5. A horizontal downward-facing surface sees the entire ground plane,
so View Factor to Ground = 1.0. A horizontal upward-facing surface (horizontal roof) does not see
the ground at all, so View Factor to Ground = 0.0.
310 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Unused if reflections option in Solar Distribution field in Building object input unless a Daylight-
ingDevice:Shelf or DaylightingDevice:Tubular has been specified.
If you do not use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object input,
you are responsible for entering the View Factor to Ground for each heat-transfer surface. Typical
values for a surface that is not shadowed are obtained by the simple equation:
View Factor to Ground = (1-cos(SurfTilt))/2
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object
input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will
automatically calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing
(including shadowing of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building,
Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you still need to enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For
DaylightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with
the shelf. And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the
FenestrationSurface:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device.
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it
is calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and
shadowing surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not
user inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces.
Shadowing surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so
they are lumped together with the ground in calculating the ground IR view factor.

1.10.36.1.9 Field: Number of Vertices

This field specifies the number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further
information, see the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above.

1.10.37 Floor:Detailed
The Floor:Detailed object is used to describe floors.

1.10.37.1 Inputs

1.10.37.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 311

1.10.37.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.37.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.37.1.4 Field: Outside Boundary Condition

This value can be one of several things depending on the actual kind of surface.

1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be a
surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate
a group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as
this increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone
unless the two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be
very different (temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment
or specify this field as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent
to) is placed in the next field.
2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange
heat with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where
both sides of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition
Object can be left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface
in the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the
surface, EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice.
See Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Foundation - uses an alternative model (currently only the KivaTM model) to account for
the multi-dimensional heat transfer of foundation surfaces. The Outside Boundary Condition
Object will refer to the name of a Foundation:Kiva object (or be left blank to use the default
foundation without extra insulation).
6. Ground - The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:Surface
value for the month..
7. GroundFCfactorMethod – if this surface is exposed to the ground and using the Construc-
tion:CfactorUndergroundWall, then this is the choice. The temperature on the outside of
this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:FcfactorMethod value for the month.
8. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other
parameters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice.
The outside boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients
specification.
312 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

9. OtherSideConditionsModel – if this surface has a specially-modeled multi-skin component,

such as a transpired collector or vented photovoltaic panel, attached to the outside (See Sur-
faceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification), then this the choice. The outside face
environment will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
11. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
12. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the
Basement preprocessor calculations.
15. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
16. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.

1.10.37.1.5 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

If neither Surface, Zone, Foundation, OtherSideCoefficients, or OtherSideConditionsModel are spec-
ified for the Outside Boundary Condition (previous field), then this field should be left blank.
As stated above, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “Surface”, then this field’s value must be the
surface name whose inside face temperature will be forced on the outside face of the base surface.
This permits heat exchange between adjacent zones (interzone heat transfer) when multiple zones
are simulated, but can also be used to simulate middle zone behavior without modeling the adjacent
zones. This is done by specifying a surface within the zone. For example, a middle floor zone can be
modeled by making the floor the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling
the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the floor.
If the Outside Boundary Condition is Zone, then this field should contain the zone name of the
adjacent zone for the surface.

Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute
to gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this
field. Also, for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you
want interzone heat transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface
object with the outside face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a
floor surface object in the attic that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.

Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value
must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary
Condition is “OtherSideConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 313

1.10.37.1.6 Field: Sun Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the sun, then “SunExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoSun” should be entered.
Note, a cantilevered floor could have “Outdoors” but “NoSun” exposure.

1.10.37.1.7 Field: Wind Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the Wind, then “WindExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoWind” should be entered.

Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not
have a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using
“NoWind” also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to
both the sky and the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a
surface specified with “NoWind”.

1.10.37.1.8 Field: View Factor to Ground

The fraction of the ground plane (assumed horizontal) that is visible from a heat-transfer surface.
It is used to calculate the diffuse solar radiation from the ground that is incident on the surface.
For example, if there are no obstructions, a vertical surface sees half of the ground plane and so
View Factor to Ground = 0.5. A horizontal downward-facing surface sees the entire ground plane,
so View Factor to Ground = 1.0. A horizontal upward-facing surface (horizontal roof) does not see
the ground at all, so View Factor to Ground = 0.0.
Unused if reflections option in Solar Distribution field in Building object input unless a Daylight-
ingDevice:Shelf or DaylightingDevice:Tubular has been specified.
If you do not use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object input,
you are responsible for entering the View Factor to Ground for each heat-transfer surface. Typical
values for a surface that is not shadowed are obtained by the simple equation:
View Factor to Ground = (1-cos(SurfTilt))/2
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object
input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will
automatically calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing
(including shadowing of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building,
Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you still need to enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For
DaylightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with
314 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

the shelf. And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the
FenestrationSurface:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device.
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it
is calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and
shadowing surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not
user inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces.
Shadowing surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so
they are lumped together with the ground in calculating the ground IR view factor.

1.10.37.1.9 Field: Number of Vertices

This field specifies the number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further
information, see the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above.
Some examples of using these objects:

Floor:Detailed ,
Floor_NorthZone_1stFloor ,!- Name
FLOOR -SLAB -ASSEMBLY , !- Construction Name
NorthZone_1stFloor , !- Zone Name
Ground , !- Outside Boundary Condition
, !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0, 11, 0, !- X,Y,Z 1 {m}
25, 11, 0, !- X,Y,Z 2 {m}
25, 5.5, 0, !- X,Y,Z 3 {m}
0, 5.5, 0; !- X,Y,Z 4 {m}

RoofCeiling:Detailed ,
Ceiling_SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Name
CEILING -FLOOR -ASSEMBLY , !- Construction Name
SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Zone Name
Surface , !- Outside Boundary Condition
Floor_SouthZone_2ndFloor ,!- Outside Boundary Condition Object
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0, 0, 3.4, !- X,Y,Z 1 {m}
25, 0, 3.4, !- X,Y,Z 2 {m}
25, 5.5, 3.4, !- X,Y,Z 3 {m}
0, 5.5, 3.4; !- X,Y,Z 4 {m}

Wall:Detailed ,
InteriorWall_SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Name
INTERIOR -WALL -ASSEMBLY , !- Construction Name
SouthZone_1stFloor , !- Zone Name
Surface , !- Outside Boundary Condition
InteriorWall_NorthZone_1stFloor , !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
NoSun , !- Sun Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
25, 5.5, 3.7, !- X,Y,Z 1 {m}
25, 5.5, 0, !- X,Y,Z 2 {m}
0, 5.5, 0, !- X,Y,Z 3 {m}
0, 5.5, 3.7; !- X,Y,Z 4 {m}
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 315

1.10.38 BuildingSurface:Detailed
The BuildingSurface:Detailed object can more generally describe each of the surfaces.

1.10.38.1 Inputs

1.10.38.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with each building surface. It is used in several other places as a
reference (e.g. as the base surface name for a Window or Door).

1.10.38.1.2 Field: Surface Type

Used primarily for convenience, the surface type can be one of the choices illustrated above – Wall,
Floor, Ceiling, Roof. Azimuth (facing) and Tilt are determined from the vertex coordinates. Note
that “normal” floors will be tilted 180° whereas flat roofs/ceilings will be tilted 0°. EnergyPlus uses
this field’s designation, along with the calculated tilt of the surface, to issue warning messages when
tilts are “out of range”. Calculations in EnergyPlus use the actual calculated tilt values for the actual
heat balance calculations. Note, however, that a floor tilted 0° is really facing “into” the zone and is
not what you will desire for the calculations even though the coordinate may appear correct in the
viewed DXF display.
“Normal” tilt for walls is 90° – here you may use the calculated Azimuth to make sure your walls
are facing away from the zone’s interior.

1.10.38.1.3 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface. Regardless of
location in the building, the “full” construction (all layers) is used. For example, for an interior wall
separating two zones, zone x would have the outside layer (e.g. drywall) as the material that shows
in zone y and then the layers to the inside layer – the material that shows in zone x. For symmetric
constructions, the same construction can be used in the surfaces described in both zones.

1.10.38.1.4 Field: Zone Name

This is the zone name to which the surface belongs.

1.10.38.1.5 Field: Outside Boundary Condition

This value can be one of several things depending on the actual kind of surface.

1. Surface – if this surface is an internal surface, then this is the choice. The value will either be a
surface in the base zone or a surface in another zone. The heat balance between two zones can
be accurately simulated by specifying a surface in an adjacent zone. EnergyPlus will simulate
a group of zones simultaneously and will include the heat transfer between zones. However, as
this increases the complexity of the calculations, it is not necessary to specify the other zone
unless the two zones will have a significant temperature difference. If the two zones will not be
very different (temperature wise), then the surface should use itself as the outside environment
or specify this field as Adiabatic. The surface name on the “outside” of this surface (adjacent
to) is placed in the next field.
316 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

2. Adiabatic – an internal surface in the same Zone. This surface will not transfer heat out of the
zone, but will still store heat in thermal mass. Only the inside face of the surface will exchange
heat with the zone (i.e. two adiabatic surfaces are required to model internal partitions where
both sides of the surface are exchanging heat with the zone). The Outside Boundary Condition
Object can be left blank.
3. Zone – this is similar to Surface but EnergyPlus will automatically create the required surface
in the adjacent zone when this is entered for the surface. If there are windows or doors on the
surface, EnergyPlus automatically creates appropriate sub-surfaces as well.
4. Outdoors – if this surface is exposed to outside temperature conditions, then this is the choice.
See Sun Exposure and Wind Exposure below for further specifications on this kind of surface.
5. Foundation - uses an alternative model (currently only the KivaTM model) to account for
the multi-dimensional heat transfer of foundation surfaces. The Outside Boundary Condition
Object will refer to the name of a Foundation:Kiva object (or be left blank to use the default
foundation without extra insulation).
6. Ground - The temperature on the outside of this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:Surface
value for the month.
7. GroundFCfactorMethod – if this surface is exposed to the ground and using the Construc-
tion:CfactorUndergroundWall, then this is the choice. The temperature on the outside of
this surface will be the Site:GroundTemperature:FcfactorMethod value for the month.
8. OtherSideCoefficients – if this surface has a custom, user specified temperature or other
parameters (See SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients specification), then this is the choice.
The outside boundary condition will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients
specification.
9. OtherSideConditionsModel – if this surface has a specially-modeled multi-skin component,
such as a transpired collector or vented photovoltaic panel, attached to the outside (See Sur-
faceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification), then this the choice. The outside face
environment will be the name of the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel specification.
10. GroundSlabPreprocessorAverage – uses the average results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
11. GroundSlabPreprocessorCore – uses the core results from the Slab preprocessor calcula-
tions.
12. GroundSlabPreprocessorPerimeter – uses the perimeter results from the Slab preprocessor
calculations.
13. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageWall – uses the average wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
14. GroundBasementPreprocessorAverageFloor – uses the average floor results from the
Basement preprocessor calculations.
15. GroundBasementPreprocessorUpperWall – uses the upper wall results from the Base-
ment preprocessor calculations.
16. GroundBasementPreprocessorLowerWall – uses the lower wall results from the Basement
preprocessor calculations.

1.10.38.1.6 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 317

If neither Surface, Zone, Foundation, OtherSideCoefficients, or OtherSideConditionsModel are spec-

ified for the Outside Boundary Condition (previous field), then this field should be left blank.
As stated above, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “Surface”, then this field’s value must be the
surface name whose inside face temperature will be forced on the outside face of the base surface.
This permits heat exchange between adjacent zones (interzone heat transfer) when multiple zones
are simulated, but can also be used to simulate middle zone behavior without modeling the adjacent
zones. This is done by specifying a surface within the zone. For example, a middle floor zone can be
modeled by making the floor the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the ceiling, and the ceiling
the Outside Boundary Condition Object for the floor.
If the Outside Boundary Condition is Zone, then this field should contain the zone name of the
adjacent zone for the surface.

Note: Zones with interzone heat transfer are not adiabatic and the internal surfaces contribute
to gains or losses. Adiabatic surfaces are modeled by specifying the base surface itself in this
field. Also, for interzone heat transfer, both surfaces must be represented – for example, if you
want interzone heat transfer to an attic space, the ceiling in the lower zone must have a surface
object with the outside face environment as the floor in the attic and, likewise, there must be a
floor surface object in the attic that references the ceiling surface name in the lower zone.

Equally, if the Outside Boundary Condition is “OtherSideCoefficients”, then this field’s value
must be the SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients name. Or if the Outside Boundary
Condition is “OtherSideConditionsModel” then this field’s value must be the SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideConditionsModel name.

1.10.38.1.7 Field: Sun Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the sun, then “SunExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoSun” should be entered.
Note, a cantilevered floor could have “Outdoors” but “NoSun” exposure.

1.10.38.1.8 Field: Wind Exposure

If the surface is exposed to the Wind, then “WindExposed” should be entered in this field. Otherwise,
“NoWind” should be entered.

Note: When a surface is specified with “NoWind”, this has several implications. Within the heat
balance code, this surface will default to using the simple ASHRAE exterior convection coefficient
correlation with a zero wind speed. In addition, since the ASHRAE simple method does not
have a separate value for equivalent long wavelength radiation to the sky and ground, using
“NoWind” also eliminates long wavelength radiant exchange from the exterior of the surface to
both the sky and the ground. Thus, only simple convection takes place at the exterior face of a
surface specified with “NoWind”.

1.10.38.1.9 Field: View Factor to Ground

The fraction of the ground plane (assumed horizontal) that is visible from a heat-transfer surface.
It is used to calculate the diffuse solar radiation from the ground that is incident on the surface.
318 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

For example, if there are no obstructions, a vertical surface sees half of the ground plane and so
View Factor to Ground = 0.5. A horizontal downward-facing surface sees the entire ground plane,
so View Factor to Ground = 1.0. A horizontal upward-facing surface (horizontal roof) does not see
the ground at all, so View Factor to Ground = 0.0.
Unused if reflections option in Solar Distribution field in Building object input unless a Daylight-
ingDevice:Shelf or DaylightingDevice:Tubular has been specified.
If you do not use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object input,
you are responsible for entering the View Factor to Ground for each heat-transfer surface. Typical
values for a surface that is not shadowed are obtained by the simple equation:
View Factor to Ground = (1-cos(SurfTilt))/2
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object
input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will
automatically calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing
(including shadowing of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building,
Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you still need to enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For
DaylightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with
the shelf. And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the
FenestrationSurface:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device.
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it
is calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and
shadowing surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not
user inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces.
Shadowing surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so
they are lumped together with the ground in calculating the ground IR view factor.

1.10.38.1.10 Field: Number of Vertices

This field specifies the number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further
information, see the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above.
IDF example of three walls (first is an exterior wall, second and third are interzone partitions):

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name

Wall ,EXTERIOR , !- Class and Construction Name
ZONE 1 @ 200 601 0 T, !- Zone
Outdoors ,, !- Outside Boundary Condition and Target (if applicable)
SunExposed , !- Solar Exposure
WindExposed , !- Wind Exposure
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
4, !-Rectangle
0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00, 3.048000 ,
0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00,
6.096000 , 0.0000000E+00, 0.0000000E+00,
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 319

6.096000 , 0.0000000E+00, 3.048000 ;

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,Zn001:Wall006 , !-Base Surface Name

Wall ,INTERIOR , !- Class and Construction Name
HEARTLAND AREA , !- Zone
Surface ,Zn004:Wall005 , !- Outside Boundary Conditions and Target (if applicable)
NoSun , !- Solar Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
4, !-Rectangle
38.01000 , 28.25000 , 10.00000 ,
38.01000 , 28.25000 , 0.0000000E+00,
38.01000 , 18.25000 , 0.0000000E+00,
38.01000 , 18.25000 , 10.00000 ;

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,Zn001:Wall007 , !- Base Surface Name

Wall ,INTERIOR , !- Class and Construction Name
HEARTLAND AREA , !- Zone
Surface ,Zn003:Wall006 , !- Outside Boundary Conditions and Target (if applicable)
NoSun , !- Solar Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
4, !-Rectangle
58.01000 , 18.25000 , 10.00000 ,
58.01000 , 18.25000 , 0.0000000E+00,
58.01000 , 28.25000 , 0.0000000E+00,
58.01000 , 28.25000 , 10.00000 ;

1.10.39 FenestrationSurface:Detailed
This surface class is used for subsurfaces, which can be of five different types: Windows, Doors,
GlassDoors, TubularDaylightDomes, and TubularDaylightDiffusers. A subsurface (such as a win-
dow) of a base surface (such as a wall) inherits several of the properties (such as Outside Boundary
Condition, Sun Exposure, etc.) of the base surface. Windows, GlassDoors, TubularDaylightDomes,
and TubularDaylightDiffusers are considered to have one or more glass layers and so transmit solar
radiation. Doors are considered to be opaque. For Surface Type = Window and GlassDoor, shades
and screens may be applied by referencing this subsurface in a window shading control (ref: Window-
ShadingControl object). To assign a shade to a window or glass door, see WindowMaterial: Shade.
To assign a screen, see WindowMaterial:Screen. To assign a blind, see WindowMaterial:Blind. To
assign switchable glazing, such as electrochromic glazing, see WindowShadingControl.
The surface can be of 3 sides or 4 sides. A 4-sided but non-rectangular fenestration surface is allowed
and will be transferred to an equivalent rectangular surface with the same area and aspect ratio for
the convection calculations at window air gaps.

1.10.39.1 Inputs

1.10.39.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the heat transfer subsurface. It may be used in other places
as a reference (e.g. as the opposing subsurface of an interzone window or door).

1.10.39.1.2 Field: Surface Type

The choices for Surface Type are Window, Door, GlassDoor, TubularDaylightDome, and Tubular-
DaylightDiffuser. Doors are assumed to be opaque (do not transmit solar radiation) whereas the
other surface types do transmit solar radiation. Windows and Glass Doors are treated identically
320 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

in the calculation of conduction heat transfer, solar gain, daylighting, etc. A Window or GlassDoor,
but not a Door, can have a movable interior, exterior or between-glass shading device, such as blinds
(ref: WindowMaterial:Blind object), and can have a frame and/or a divider (ref: WindowProp-
erty:FrameAndDivider object). TubularDaylightDomes and TubularDaylightDomes are specialized
subsurfaces for use with the DaylightingDevice:Tubular object to simulate Tubular Daylighting De-
vices (TDDs). TubularDaylightDomes and TubularDaylightDomes cannot have shades, screens or
blinds. In the following, the term “window” applies to Window, GlassDoor, TubularDaylightDome,
and TubularDaylightDome, if not otherwise explicitly mentioned.
As noted in the description of the BuildingSurface:Detailed, Azimuth (facing angle) and Tilt are
calculated from the entered vertices. Tilts of subsurfaces will normally be the same as their base
surface. If these are significantly beyond the “normals” for the base surface, warning messages may
be issued. If the facing angles are not correct, you may have a window pointing “into” the zone
rather than out of it – this would cause problems in the calculations. Note, too, that a “reveal”
(inset or outset) may occur if the plane of the subsurface is not coincident with the base surface; the
reveal has an effect on shading of the subsurface.

1.10.39.1.3 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the subsurface’s construction (ref: Construction object [for Door] and Construc-
tion, Construction:ComplexFenestrationState, Construction:WindowDataFile objects [for Window
and GlassDoor]).
For windows, if Construction Name is not found among the constructions on the input (.idf) file,
the Window Data File (ref. Construction:WindowDataFile object) will be searched for that Con-
struction Name (see “Importing Windows from WINDOW”). If that file is not present or if the
Construction Name does not match the name of an entry on the file, an error will result. If there is
a match, a window construction and its corresponding glass and gas materials will be created from
the information read from the file.

1.10.39.1.4 Field: Building Surface Name

This is the name of a surface that contains this subsurface. Certain kinds of surfaces may not be
allowed to have subsurfaces. For example, a surface in contact with the ground (Outside Boundary
Condition = Ground) cannot contain a window.

1.10.39.1.5 Field: Outside Boundary Condition Object

If the base surface has Outside Boundary Condition = Surface or OtherSideCoefficients, then this
field must also be specified for the subsurface. Otherwise, it can be left blank.
If the base surface has Outside Boundary Condition = Zone, then this surface retains that charac-
teristic and uses the same zone of the base surface. It can be entered here for clarity or it can be
left blank.
If Outside Boundary Condition for the base surface is Surface, this field should specify the subsurface
in the opposing zone that is the counterpart to this subsurface. The constructions of the subsurface
and opposing subsurface must match, except that, for multi-layer constructions, the layer order of
the opposing subsurface’s construction must be the reverse of that of the subsurface.
If Outside Boundary Condition for the base surface is OtherSideCoefficients, this field could specify
the set of SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients for this subsurface. If this is left blank, then the
Other Side Coefficients of the base surface will be used for this subsurface. Windows and GlassDoors
are not allowed to have Other Side Coefficients.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 321

1.10.39.1.6 Field: View Factor to Ground

The fraction of the ground plane (assumed horizontal) that is visible from a heat-transfer surface.
It is used to calculate the diffuse solar radiation from the ground that is incident on the surface.
For example, if there are no obstructions, a vertical surface sees half of the ground plane and so
View Factor to Ground = 0.5. A horizontal downward-facing surface sees the entire ground plane,
so View Factor to Ground = 1.0. A horizontal upward-facing surface (horizontal roof) does not see
the ground at all, so View Factor to Ground = 0.0.
Unused if reflections option in Solar Distribution field in Building object input unless a Daylighting
Device:Shelf or Daylighting Device:Tubular has been specified.
If you do not use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your Building object input,
you are responsible for entering the View Factor to Ground for each heat-transfer surface. Typical
values for a surface that is not shadowed are obtained by the simple equation:
View Factor to Ground = (1-cos(SurfTilt))/2
For example, this gives 0.5 for a wall of tilt 90°. If the tilt of the wall changes, then the View Factor
to Ground must also change.
If you enter autocalculate in this field, EnergyPlus will automatically calculate the view factor to
ground based on the tilt of the surface.
If you do use the reflections option in the Solar Distribution field in your BUILDING
object input, you do not have to enter View Factor to Ground values. In this case the program will
automatically calculate the value to use for each exterior surface taking into account solar shadowing
(including shadowing of the ground by the building) and reflections from obstructions (ref: Building,
Field: Solar Distribution).
However, if you do use the reflections option AND you are modeling a DaylightingDevice:Shelf or
DaylightingDevice:Tubular, then you should enter some values of View Factor to Ground. For Day-
lightingDevice:Shelf you need to enter View Factor to Ground for the window associated with the
shelf. And for DaylightingDevice:Tubular you need to enter the View Factor to Ground for the
FenestrationSurface:Detailed corresponding to the dome of the tubular device (ref: DaylightingDe-
vice:Tubular).
Note 1: The corresponding view factor to the sky for diffuse solar radiation is not a user input; it
is calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface orientation, sky solar radiance distribution, and
shadowing surfaces.
Note 2: The view factors to the sky and ground for thermal infrared (long-wave) radiation are not
user inputs; they are calculated within EnergyPlus based on surface tilt and shadowing surfaces.
Shadowing surfaces are considered to have the same emissivity and temperature as the ground, so
they are lumped together with the ground in calculating the ground infrared view factor.
Note 3: If the view factor to the ground is autosized and a DaylightingDevice:Shelf is present,
EnergyPlus will adjust both the view factor to the ground first and then the sky so that the sum of
all three view factors (to the ground, to the sky, and to the shelf) does not exceed 1.0.

1.10.39.1.7 Field: Frame and Divider Name

This field, if not blank, can be used to specify window frame, divider and reveal-surface data (ref:
WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). It is used only for exterior GlassDoors and rectangular
exterior Windows, i.e., those with OutsideFaceEnvironment = Outdoors.
This field should be blank for triangular windows.
322 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.39.1.8 Field: Multiplier

Used only for Surface Type = Window, Door or Glass Door. It is the number of identical items on the
base surface. Using Multiplier can save input effort and calculation time. In the calculation the area
(and area of frame and divider, if present and surface type is a window) is multiplied by Multiplier.
The calculation of shadowing on the subsurfaces (and the calculation of the interior distribution of
beam solar radiation transmitted by windows and glass doors) are done for the specified subsurface
position and dimensions.
Multiplier should be used with caution. Multiplier > 1 can give inaccurate or nonsensical results in
situations where the results are sensitive to window or glass door position. This includes shadowing
on the window/glass door, daylighting from the window/glass door, and interior distribution of solar
radiation from the window/glass door. In these cases, the results for the single input window/glass
door, after multiplication, may not be representative of the results you would get if you entered each
of the multiple subsurfaces separately.
If Multiplier > 1, you will get
–a warning if Solar Distribution = FullExterior or FullInteriorAndExterior (ref: Building - Field:
Solar Distribution), indicating that the shadowing on the input window or the interior solar radiation
distribution from the input window may not be representative of the actual group of windows. No
warning is issued if Solar Distribution = MinimalShadowing.
–an error if the window is an exterior window/glass door in a zone that has a detailed daylighting
calculation (Daylighting:Detailed specified for the zone). Since a single window with a multiplier
can never give the same daylight illuminance as the actual set of windows, you are not allowed to
use Multiplier in this situation.

1.10.39.1.9 Field: Number of Vertices

The number of sides the surface has (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further information, see
the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above. Door and GlassDoor subsurfaces are rectangular and
therefore have four vertices. Window subsurfaces can be rectangular or triangular and therefore have
four or three vertices, respectively.

1.10.39.1.10 Fields: Vertex Coordinates

This is a total of twelve fields giving the x,y,z coordinate values of the four vertices of rectangular
subsurfaces [m], or a total of nine fields giving the x,y,z coordinate values of the three vertices of
triangular windows.
For triangular windows the first vertex listed can be any of the three vertices, but the order of the ver-
tices should be counter-clockwise if VertexEntry is CounterClockWise and clockwise if VertexEntry
is ClockWise (ref: GlobalGeometryRules).
An IDF example of a rectangular subsurface (Window):

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- SubSurface Name
Window ,SINGLE PANE HW WINDOW , !- Class and Construction Name
Zn001:Wall001 ,, !- Base Surface Name and Target (if applicable)
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
WINDOW -CONTROL -DRAPES , !- Window Shading Control
TestFrameAndDivider , !- Frame/Divider name
5, !- Multiplier
4, !- Rectangle (number of sides)
1.524000 , 0.1520000 , 2.743000 ,
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 323

1.524000 , 0.1520000 , 0.3050000 ,

4.572000 , 0.1520000 , 0.3050000 ,
4.572000 , 0.1520000 , 2.743000 ;

1.10.40 Window Modeling Options

The following table shows what input objects/fields to use to model different window options. It
also gives the name of an example input, if available, that demonstrates the option.

Table 1.14: Window Modeling Options

Option Object/Field or Output Vari- Input File (distributed with

able install)

Build up a window from lay- WindowMaterial:Glazing, WindowTests.idf

ers WindowMaterial:-Gas,
WindowMaterial:Shade,
WindowMaterial:Screen,
WindowMaterial:Blind, Con-
struction
Add an overhang Shading:Zone:Detailed 5ZoneAirCooled.idf
Add a shading device WindowMaterial:Shade, WindowTests.idf, PurchAir-
WindowMaterial:Screen WindowBlind.idf
or WindowMaterial:Blind;
WindowShadingControl
Control a shading device Window:ShadingControl PurchAirWindowBlind.idf
Determine when a shading de- Print the variable “Surface PurchAirWindowBlind.idf
vice is on in a particular Shading Device Is On Time
timestep Fraction”
Control the slat angle of a WindowShadingControl PurchAirWindowBlind.idf
blind
Add a frame WindowProperty:- PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf
FrameAndDivider
Add a divider WindowProperty:FrameAnd- PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf
Divider
Allow window to daylight a Daylighting:Controls PurchAirWithDay-
zone lighting.idf, DElight-Detailed-
Comparison.idf
Find solar reflected onto Building/SolarDistribution ReflectiveAdjacent-
window from neighboring field – uses “WithReflections” Building.idf
buildings
Model switchable glazing WindowShadingControl PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf
(e.g., electrochromic glass)
Add an interior window Define two Fenestration- PurchAirWithDoubleFacade-
Surface:Detailed’s, one for Daylighting.idf
each associated interior wall
324 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.14: Window Modeling Options

Option Object/Field or Output Vari- Input File (distributed with

able install)

Track how beam solar falls on Building/Solar Distribution = PurchAirWithDoubleFacade-

interior surfaces FullInteriorAndExterior Daylighting.idf
Track beam solar transmitted Building/Solar Distribution = PurchAirWithDoubleFacade-
through interior windows FullInteriorAndExterior Daylighting.idf
Add a shading device on an Not allowed
interior window
Model an airflow window WindowProperty:Airflow- AirflowWindowsAndBetween-
(aka, heat extract window) Control GlassBlinds.idf
Add a storm window glass WindowProperty:Storm- StormWindow.idf
layer Window
Add natural ventilation Ventilation or Airflow- AirflowNetwork3zvent.idf
through an open window Network objects (Airflow-
Network:Multizone:Surface,
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:-
Component:DetailedOpening,
etc.)
Add diffusing glass WindowMaterial:Glazing/-
Solar Diffusing = Yes
Add dirt on window WindowMaterial:Glazing/-
Dirt Correction Factor for
Solar and Visible Transmit-
tance
Import window (and frame/di- See “Importing Windows from
vider if present) from WIN- WINDOW program”
DOW program
Find daylighting through See “Double Facades: Day- PurchAirWithDoubleFacade-
interior windows lighting through Interior Win- Daylighting.idf
dows”
Determine when condensa- Print the variables “Surface
tion occurs Window Inside Face Glaz-
ing Condensation Status,”
“Surface Window Inside Face
Frame Condensation Status,”
“Surface Window Inside Face
Divider Condensation Status”

1.10.41 InternalMass
Any surface that would logically be described as an interior wall, floor or ceiling can just as easily be
described as Internal Mass. Internal Mass surface types only exchange energy with the zone in which
they are described; they do not see any other zones. There are two approaches to using internal
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 325

mass. The first approach is to have several pieces of internal mass with each piece having a different
construction type. The other approach is to choose an average construction type and combine all of
the interior surfaces into a single internal mass. Similar to internal surfaces with an adiabatic bound-
ary condition, the zone will only exchange energy with the inside of the Internal Mass construction.
If both sides of the surface exchange energy with the zone then the user should input twice the area
when defining the Internal Mass object. Note that furniture and other large objects within a zone
can be described using internal mass. However, simplifying calculations using internal mass must be
used with caution when the “FullInteriorAndExterior” or “FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections”
Solar Distribution model (see Building parameters) is chosen. A single Internal Mass object can be
applied to a set of zones. This requires specifying a zone list name instead of a zone name in the
input field Zone or ZoneList Name.

1.10.41.1 Inputs

Example
When zoning an office building, five west-facing offices have been combined into one zone. All of the
offices have interior walls made of the same materials. As shown in the figure below, this zone may
be described with 5 exterior walls and 11 internal walls or 1 exterior wall and 1 internal mass. Note
that fewer surfaces will speed up the EnergyPlus calculations.

Figure 1.32: Representing 11 internal walls as internal mass

Example
A five-story building has the same ceiling/floor construction separating each of the levels. Zones that
are on floors 2 through 4 may be described using a single piece of internal mass to represent both
326 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

the floor and ceiling. The construction for this internal mass would be identical to the ceiling/floor
construction that would be used to describe separate surfaces and the area of the internal mass
surface would be the total surface area of the combined ceilings/floors (i.e. twice the total floor
area).

1.10.41.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with the internal mass surface. Though it must be
unique from other surface names, it is used primarily for convenience with internal mass surfaces.

1.10.41.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This is the name of the construction (ref: Construction object) used in the surface.

1.10.41.1.3 Field: Zone or ZoneList Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) or ZoneList (ref: ZoneList) and represents a particular
internal mass object in a thermal zone or set of thermal zones in the building. When the ZoneList
option is used then this internal mass object is applied to each of the zones in the zone list. The
name of the actual internal mass object in each zone becomes <Zone Name> <InternalMass Object
Name> and should be less than the standard length (100 characters) for a name field. If it is greater
than this standard length, it may be difficult to specify in output reporting as it will be truncated. A
warning will be shown if the generated name is greater than 100 characters. If it duplicates another
such concatenated name, there will be a severe error and terminate the run.

1.10.41.1.4 Field: Surface Area

This field is the surface area of the internal mass. The area that is specified must be the entire
surface area that is exposed to the zone. If both sides of a wall are completely within the same zone,
then the area of both sides must be included when describing that internal wall.
IDF examples of Internal Mass surfaces:
InternalMass ,
Zn002:IntM001 , !- Surface Name
INTERIOR , !- Construction Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
408.7734; !- Total area exposed to Zone {m2}

InternalMass ,
Zn002:IntM002 , !- Surface Name
PARTITION02 , !- Construction Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
371.6122; !- Total area exposed to Zone {m2}

1.10.42 Surface Output Variables/Reports

Note that Surface Outputs from specialized algorithms (such as Effective Moisture Penetration
Depth (EMPD), Combined Heat and Moisture Transport (HAMT) and Conduction Finite Difference
(CondFD) are discussed under the objects that describe the specialized inputs for these algorithms).
You can access them via these links:

– Moisture Penetration Depth (EMPD) Outputs

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 327

– Conduction Finite Difference (CondFD) Outputs

– Heat and Moisture (HAMT) Outputs

Additionally, the output variables applicable to all heat transfer surfaces:

Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Heat Balance Calculation Iteration Count []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Interior Movable Insulation Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Adjacent Air Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2 -K]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2 -K]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Air Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2 -K]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Sky Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2 -K]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Ground Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2 -K]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone , Sum ,Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Transmitted Out Window Solar Radiation
Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Construction Index []

Output variables applicable to all exterior heat transfer surfaces:

Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Wind Speed [m/s]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Wind Direction [deg]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Area [m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Fraction \protect\hyperlinksection -1
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Ext Diff Sol From Bm -To -Diff Refl From Ground[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per
Area[W/m2]
328 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per
Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Beam Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per
Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate
per Area[W/m2]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Anisotropic Sky Multiplier []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window BSDF Beam Direction Number []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window BSDF Beam Theta Angle [rad]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window BSDF Beam Phi Angle [rad]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Heat Emission to Air Rate [W]

Output variables applicable to opaque heat transfer surfaces (FLOOR, WALL, ROOF, DOOR).
Note – these are advanced variables – you must read the descriptions and understand
before use – then you must use the Diagnostics object to allow reporting.
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Heat Storage Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Heat Storage Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Heat Storage Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Heat Storage Rate per Area [W/m2]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Heat Storage Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction [W]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction [W]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Gain[W]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Loss[W]
Zone ,Average , Surface Inside Face Beam Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.43 Window Output Variables

Output variables applicable to exterior windows and glass doors:
Zone ,Average ,Zone Windows Total Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Transmitted Solar Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Windows Total Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Windows Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Windows Total Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Windows Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 329

Zone ,Sum ,Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Shading Device Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Shading Device Absorbed Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average , Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window System Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window System Solar Absorptance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window System Solar Reflectance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Heat Loss Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Net Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Net Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Glazing Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Glazing Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Glazing Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Model Solver Iteration Count []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Solar Horizontal Profile Angle[deg]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Solar Vertical Profile Angle[deg]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Outside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Outside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Energy
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Reveal Absorbed Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Condensation Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Frame Condensation Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Divider Condensation Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Shading Device Is On Time Fraction []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Slat Angle [deg]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
Zone ,State ,Surface Storm Window On Off Status []
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Inside Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Frame Outside Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Inside Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Divider Outside Temperature [C]
330 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

If the user requests to display advanced report/output variables (e.g. see Output:Diagnostics keyword
DisplayAdvancedReportVariables) the the following additional output variables are available for
exterior windows and glass doors
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Shortwave from Zone Back Out Window Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Gap between Shade and Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain
Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Shade Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Inside Face Shade Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate [W]

Output variables applicable to interior windows and glass doors:

Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam to Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Beam to Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Heat Gain Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Heat Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Heat Loss Rate [W]
Zone ,Sum ,Surface Window Heat Loss Energy [J]

If the user requests to display advanced report/output variables (e.g. see Output:Diagnostics key-
word DisplayAdvancedReportVariables) the the following additional output variable is available for
Equivalent Layer Window;
Zone ,Average , Surface Window Inside Face Other Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]

Output variables applicable to interior and exterior windows and doors under certain conditions (see
next three subsections for more information) are:
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Total Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate Layer <x> [W]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Front Face Temperature Layer <x> [C]
Zone ,Average ,Surface Window Back Face Temperature Layer <x> [C]

1.10.43.1 Surface Window Total Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate Layer <x>
[W]

This will output shortwave radiation absorbed in a window layer. The key values for this output
variable are the surface name. Layers are numbered from the outside to the inside of the surface.
The full listing will appear in the RDD file. Note that this variable is only defined for constructions
defined by a Construction:ComplexFenestrationState.

1.10.43.2 Surface Window Front Face Temperature Layer <x> [C]

This will output a temperature for the front face of the layer. The layer front face is considered to be
the face closest to the outside environment. The full listing will appear in the RDD file. Note that
this variable is only defined for constructions defined by a Construction:ComplexFenestrationState.
For other window constructions, this variable is also defined for the outer layer (Layer 1) only. The
value will be identical to the Surface Outside Face Temperature.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 331

1.10.43.3 Surface Window Back Face Temperature Layer <x> [C]

This will output a temperature for the back face of the layer. The layer back face is considered to
be the face closest to the inside environment. The full listing will appear in the RDD file. Note that
this variable is only defined for constructions defined by a Construction:ComplexFenestrationState.
For other window constructions, this variable is also defined for the inner layer only. The value will
be identical to the Surface Inside Face Temperature.

1.10.44 Surface Output Variables (all heat transfer surfaces)

The various output variables related to surface heat transfer are organized around the inside and
outside face of each surface. The zone heat balance model draws energy balances at each side, or
face, of a surface and so each surface essentially has two sets of results. The inside face is the side
of a heat transfer surface that faces toward the thermal zone. The outside face is the side of a heat
transfer surface that faces away from the thermal zone, typically facing outdoors. The Key Value
for these is generally the user-defined name of the surface.

1.10.44.1 Surface Inside Face Heat Balance Calculation Iteration Count []

This output is the number of iterations used in a part of the solution for surface heat transfer that
accounts for thermal radiation heat transfer between zone surfaces. This is simply a counter on the
iteration loop for inside face surface modeling. There is only one instance of this output in a given
run and the Key Value is “Simulation.”

1.10.44.2 Surface Inside Face Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the surface’s inside face, in degrees Celsius. Former Name: Prior to
version 7.1 this output was called Surface Inside Temperature.

1.10.44.3 Surface Inside Face Interior Movable Insulation Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of movable insulation installed on the inside of the construction at the
movable insulation’s inside face (the one facing the zone), in degrees Celsius. This variable is only
valid when the surface has movable insulation and the movable insulation is actually scheduled to
be present. For surfaces that have no movable insulation or the movable insulation is not scheduled
to be present, the value of this variable is set to the Surface Inside Face Temperature. It should be
noted that users can limit how often this output variable is generating by using a schedule to control
when this output is produced. For example, this user could add the following syntax to an input file
that includes movable insulation:
Output:Variable ,Zone1:WestWall ,Surface Inside Face Interior Movable Insulation Temperature ,
timestep , MovableInsulationSchedule ;

In this example, interior movable insulation is used on the west wall of zone 1 and is only present
when the schedule (MovableInsulationSchedule) is greater than zero. Adding this output variable
syntax to the input file reports the temperature at the inside face of the interior movable insulation
only when the movable insulation is present. The use of the movable insulation schedule in the
output variable designation limits when this value shows up in the EnergyPlus output file to when
it is actually scheduled to be present. At other times, no value will be reported. The limiting of
332 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

when the output is generated allows the user to generate useful statistics instead of having those
statistics influenced by values for when the movable insulation is not present. If the user does not
use the output variable schedule feature, the output for this variable will equal the surface inside
face temperature when the movable insulation is not present.

1.10.44.4 Surface Outside Face Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the surface’s outside face, in degrees Celsius. Former Name: Prior to
version 7.1, this output was called Surface Outside Temperature.

1.10.44.5 Surface Inside Face Adjacent Air Temperature [C]

This is the effective bulk air temperature used for modeling the inside surface convection heat
transfer. This is the same as the zone mean air temperature when using the mixing model for
roomair. However, if more advanced roomair models are used, this variable will report the air
temperature predicted by the roomair model as it was used in the surface heat balance model
calculations. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called Surface Int Adjacent Air
Temperature.

1.10.44.6 Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.7 Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.8 Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “inside face convection heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by convection
between the inside face and the zone air. The values can be positive or negative with positive
indicating heat is being added to the surface’s face by convection. Different versions of the report
are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy
version (J).

Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Surface Int Convection Heat *” and
had used the opposite sign convention.

1.10.44.9 Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2-K]

This is the coefficient that describes the convection heat transfer. It is the value of “Hc” in the
classic convection model Q = Hc* A* (T – T). This is the result of the surface convection algorithm
used for the inside face. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Int
Convection Coeff.”
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 333

1.10.44.10 Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate
[W]

1.10.44.11 Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate
per Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.12 Surface Inside Face Net Surface Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Energy
[J]

These “inside face net surface thermal radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat trans-
ferred by longwave infrared thermal radiation exchanges between the inside faces of other surfaces
in the zone. The values can be positive or negative with positive indicating heat is being added to
the surface’s face by thermal radiation. Different versions of the report are available including the
basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).

1.10.44.13 Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.14 Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.15 Surface Inside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “inside face solar radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by solar
radiation onto the inside face. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being added to
the surface’s face by solar radiation. This is sunlight that has entered the zone through a window
and been absorbed on the inside face of the surface. Different versions of the report are available
including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).

1.10.44.16 Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.17 Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area
[W/m2]

1.10.44.18 Surface Inside Face Lights Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “inside face lights radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by
shortwave radiation onto the inside face. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being
added to the surface’s face by shortwave radiation that emanated from electric lighting equipment
and was absorbed by the surface. Different versions of the report are available including the basic
heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).

1.10.44.19 Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.20 Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Rate per
Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.21 Surface Inside Face Internal Gains Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “inside face internal gains radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred
by longwave infrared thermal radiation onto the inside face that emanated from internal gains such
334 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

as lights, electric equipment, and people. The values are always positive and indicate heat is being
added to the surface’s face by the absorption of longwave thermal radiation. Different versions of
the report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2),
and an energy version (J).

1.10.44.22 Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.23 Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area
[W/m2]

1.10.44.24 Surface Inside Face System Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “inside face system radiation heat gain” output variables describe the heat transferred by in-
frared thermal radiation onto the inside face that emanated from HVAC equipment such as baseboard
heaters or high-temperature radiant heating panels. The values are always positive and indicate heat
is being added to the surface’s face by the absorption of thermal radiation. Different versions of the
report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2), and
an energy version (J).

1.10.44.25 Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.26 Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Gain Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.27 Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “outside face convection” output variables describe heat transferred by convection between
the outside face and the surrounding air. The values can be positive or negative with positive values
indicating heat is added to the surface face by convection heat transfer. Different versions of the
report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux (W/m2 ), and
an energy version (J).
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Surface Ext Convection Heat *” and
used the opposite sign convention.

1.10.44.28 Surface Outside Face Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient [W/m2-K]

This is the coefficient that describes the convection heat transfer. It is the value of “Hc” in the
classic convection model Q = Hc* A* (T – T). This is the result of the surface convection algorithm
used for the outside face. Former Name: Prior to Version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext
Convection Coeff.”

1.10.44.29 Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.44.30 Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Rate per
Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.31 Surface Outside Face Net Thermal Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “outside face net thermal radiation” output variables describe the heat transferred by longwave
infrared thermal radiation exchanges between the surface and the surroundings of the outside face.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 335

This is the net of all forms of longwave thermal infrared radiation heat transfer. The values can be
positive or negative with positive indicating the net addition of heat to the outside face. Different
versions of the report are available including the basic heat gain rate (W), and a per unit area flux
(W/m2), and an energy version (J).
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Surface Ext Thermal Radiation Heat
*” and used the opposite sign convention.

1.10.44.32 Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation
Rate [W]

1.10.44.33 Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation
Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.34 Surface Inside Face Exterior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation
Energy [J]

Beam solar radiation from the exterior windows in a zone incident on the inside face of a surface in the
zone. If Solar Distribution in the BUILDING object is equal to MinimalShadowing or FullExterior,
it is assumed that all beam solar from exterior windows falls on the floor. In this case the value
of this output variable can be greater than zero only for floor surfaces. If Solar Distribution equals
FullInteriorExterior the program tracks where beam solar from exterior windows falls inside the zone,
in which case the value of this variable can be greater than zero for floor as well as wall surfaces.
Different versions of the report are available including the basic incident rate (W), a per unit area
flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).

1.10.44.35 Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation
Rate [W]

1.10.44.36 Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation
Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.44.37 Surface Inside Face Interior Windows Incident Beam Solar Radiation
Energy [J]

Beam solar radiation from the interior (i.e., interzone) windows in a zone incident on the inside face
of a surface in the zone. This value is calculated only if Solar Distribution in the BUILDING object
is equal to FullInteriorExterior. However, the program does not track where this radiation falls.
Instead, it is treated by the program as though it were diffuse radiation uniformly distributed over
all of the zone surfaces. See Figure 1.33. Different versions of the report are available including
the basic incident rate (W), a per unit area flux (W/m2), and an energy version (J).

1.10.44.38 Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Absorbed Solar Radi-
ation Rate [W]

As of Version 2.1, diffuse solar transmitted through exterior and interior windows is no longer
uniformly distributed. Instead, it is distributed according to the approximate view factors between
the transmitting window and all other heat transfer surfaces in the zone. This variable is the
336 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.33: Beam solar radiation entering a zone through an interior window is distributed inside
the zone as though it were diffuse radiation.

amount of transmitted diffuse solar that is initially absorbed on the inside of each heat transfer
surface. The portion of this diffuse solar that is reflected by all surfaces in the zone is subsequently
redistributed uniformly to all heat transfer surfaces in the zone, along with interior reflected beam
solar and shortwave radiation from lights. The total absorbed shortwave radiation is given by the
next variable.

1.10.44.39 Surface Inside Face Absorbed Shortwave Radiation Rate [W]

As of Version 2.1, the previous variable plus absorbed shortwave radiation from uniformly distributed
initially-reflected diffuse solar, reflected beam solar, and shortwave radiation from lights. This sum
is the power of all sources of solar and visible radiation absorbed by the surface at the inside face.

1.10.44.40 Surface Construction Index []

The variable reports an index that points to specific Construction. The variable is an additional
output variable when Output:Diagnostics, DisplayAdvancedReportVariables; is given in an input
file.
In order to find a corresponding construction using the index, following steps are suggested:
1. Find a surface name from Surface Construction Index in the .csv file
2. Search the surface name in lines starting with HeatTransfer Surface in the .eio file
3. The seventh item is the construction name with matched surface name.

1.10.45 Surface Output Variables (exterior heat transfer surfaces)

1.10.45.1 Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext Outdoor Dry Bulb.”
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 337

1.10.45.2 Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Wetbulb Temperature [C]

The outdoor air wet-bulb temperature calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid.
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext Outdoor Wet Bulb.”

1.10.45.3 Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Wind Speed [m/s]

The outdoor wind speed calculated at the height above ground of the surface centroid. This value
may differ from site wind speed depending on the height of the surface (ref. Site:HeightVariation).
In addition, the value may be different from the site wind speed when using OutdoorAir:Node with
SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment or ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment. It can also be modified
using EMS. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext Wind Speed.”

1.10.45.4 Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Wind Direction [deg]

This output reports the actual wind direction at the outside face of a surface. As with the wind
speed variable above, this value may be different from the site wind direction when using Out-
doorAir:Node with SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment or ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment. It can
also be modified using EMS.

1.10.45.5 Surface Outside Face Sunlit Area [m2]

The outside area of an exterior surface that is illuminated by (unreflected) beam solar radiation.

1.10.45.6 Surface Outside Face Sunlit Fraction []

The fraction of the outside area of an exterior surface that is illuminated by (unreflected) beam solar
radiation. Equals Surface Outside Face Sunlit Area divided by total surface area.

1.10.45.7 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Air Heat Transfer Coeffi-
cient [W/m2-K]

This is the coefficient that describes thermal radiation heat transfer between the outside face and the
air mass surrounding the surface. It is the value of “Hr” in the classic linearized model for thermal
radiation Q = Hr * A * (T_surf – T_surfodb) when applied to the ambient air. Where T_surf =
Surface Outside Face Temperature, and T_surfodb = Surface Outside Face Outdoor Air Drybulb
Temperature. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this output was called “Surface Ext Rad to Air
Coeff.”

1.10.45.8 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Sky Heat Transfer Coeffi-
cient [W/m2-K]

This is the coefficient that describes thermal radiation heat transfer between the outside face and
the sky surrounding the surface. It is the value of “Hr” in the classic linearized model for thermal
radiation Q = Hr * A * (T_surf – T_sky) when applied to the sky. Where T_surf = Surface Outside
Face Temperature, and T_sky = Site Sky Temperature. Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this
output was called “Surface Ext Rad to Sky Coeff.”
338 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.45.9 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Ground Heat Transfer Co-
efficient [W/m2-K]

This is the coefficient that describes thermal radiation heat transfer between the outside face and
the ground surrounding the surface. It is the value of “Hr” in the classic linearized model for
thermal radiation Q = Hr * A * (T_surf – T_odb) when applied to the ground. Where T_surf
= Surface Outside Face Temperature, and T_odb = Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature (used
as an approximation for the ground surface temperature). Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, this
output was called “Surface Ext Rad to Ground Coeff.”

1.10.45.10 Surface Outside Face Thermal Radiation to Air Heat Transfer Rate
[W]

This is thermal radiation heat transfer rate between the outside face and the air mass surrounding
the surface.

1.10.45.11 Surface Outside Face Heat Emission to Air Rate [W]

This is total heat transfer rate between the outside face and the air mass surrounding the surface by
convection and thermal radiation.

1.10.45.12 Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.45.13 Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate per Area
[W/m2]

1.10.45.14 Surface Outside Face Solar Radiation Heat Gain Energy [J]

These “outside face solar radiation” output variables describe the heat transferred by the absorption
of solar radiation at the outside face. This is the result of incident solar radiation being absorbed at
the surface face. The values are always positive.

1.10.45.15 Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The total solar radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface. It is the sum of:

– Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area
– Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area
– Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area
– Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area
– Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Beam Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area
– Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 339

1.10.45.16 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area
[W/m2]

The solar beam radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface, including the effects of
shadowing, if present. The beam here is that directly from the sun; it excludes beam specularly
reflected from obstructions.

1.10.45.17 Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per
Area [W/m2]

The solar diffuse radiation from the sky incident on the outside of an exterior surface, including the
effects of shadowing, if present.

1.10.45.18 Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate
per Area [W/m2]

The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from reflection of
beam solar and sky diffuse solar from the ground. This is the sum of the next two output variables,
“Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area”
and “Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar Radiation Rate per Area.”
The reflected solar radiation from the ground is assumed to be diffuse and isotropic (there is no
specular component).
If “Reflections” option is not chosen in the Solar Distribution Field in the BUILDING object, the
effects of shadowing are accounted for by the user-specified value of View Factor to Ground for the
surface. If “Reflections” option is chosen, the program determines the effects of shadowing, including
time-varying shadowing of the ground plane by the building itself.

1.10.45.19 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Ground Reflected

Solar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from beam-to-
diffuse reflection from the ground. It is assumed that there is no beam-to-beam (specular) component.
The beam here is that directly from the sun; it excludes beam specularly reflected from obstructions.

1.10.45.20 Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Ground Reflected Solar
Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from sky diffuse
solar reflection from the ground. The sky diffuse here is that directly from the sky; it excludes
reflection of sky diffuse from obstructions.

1.10.45.21 Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Surface Reflected Solar
Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from sky diffuse
reflection from one or more obstructions. This value will be non-zero only if “Reflections” option is
chosen in the BUILDING object.
340 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.45.22 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Beam Surface Reflected Solar
Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The solar beam radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from beam-to-beam
(specular) reflection from one or more obstructions. This value will be non-zero only if “Reflections”
option is chosen in the BUILDING object. For windows, the program treats this beam radiation as
diffuse radiation in calculating its transmission and absorption.

1.10.45.23 Surface Outside Face Incident Beam To Diffuse Surface Reflected So-
lar Radiation Rate per Area [W/m2]

The solar diffuse radiation incident on the outside of an exterior surface that arises from beam-
to-diffuse reflection from building shades or building surfaces. This value will be non-zero only if
“Reflections” option is chosen in the BUILDING object.

1.10.45.24 Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value []

The cosine of the angle of incidence of (unreflected) beam solar radiation on the outside of an exterior
surface. The value varies from 0.0 for beam parallel to the surface (incidence angle = 90O ) to 1.0
for beam perpendicular to the surface (incidence angle = 0O ). Negative values indicate the sun is
behind the surface, i.e the surface does not see the sun.

1.10.45.25 Surface Anisotropic Sky Multiplier []

This is the view factor multiplier for diffuse sky irradiance on exterior surfaces taking into account
the anisotropic radiance of the sky. The diffuse sky irradiance on a surface is given by Anisotropic
Sky Multiplier * Diffuse Solar Irradiance.

1.10.45.26 Surface Window BSDF Beam Direction Number []

1.10.45.27 Surface Window BSDF Beam Phi Angle [rad]

1.10.45.28 Surface Window BSDF Beam Theta Angle [rad]

1.10.46 Opaque Surface Output Variables

The following variables apply only to opaque surfaces, where an opaque surface is considered here to
be an exterior or interzone heat transfer surface of class FLOOR, WALL, ROOF or DOOR. Note
– these are advanced variables – you must read the descriptions and understand before
use – then you must use the Output:Diagnostics object to allow reporting.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 341

1.10.46.1 Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.46.2 Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.46.3 Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.46.4 Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]

These “inside face conduction” output variables describe heat flow by conduction right at the inside
face of an opaque heat transfer surface. A positive value means that the conduction is from just
inside the inside face toward the inside face. A negative value means that the conduction is from
the inside face into the core of the heat transfer surface.
Note that Inside Face Conduction, when positive, does not indicate the heat flow from the surface
to the zone air, which is governed by the inside face convection coefficient and the difference in
temperature between the inside face and the zone air.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat gain rate (W) and a per unit area
flux (W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates
heat flowing toward the face itself. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have only
positive values or zero when the heat flow direction opposes.
Former Name: Prior to version 7.1, these outputs were called “Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduc-
tion *.”
Former Name: For Conduction Finite Difference simulations (CondFD), CondFD Inside Surface
Heat Flux is replaced with Surface Inside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate Per Area. Likewise
for CondFD Inside Heat Flux to Surface.

1.10.46.5 Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.46.6 Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.46.7 Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.46.8 Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]

These “outside face conduction” output variables describe heat flow by conduction right at the
outside face of an opaque heat transfer surface. A positive value means that the conduction is from
just inside the outside face toward the outside face. A negative value means that the conduction is
from the outside face into the core of the heat transfer surface.
Note that outside face conduction, when positive, does not indicate the heat flow from the surface
to the surrounding air, which is governed by the outside face convection coefficient and the difference
in temperature between the inside face and the surrounding air.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat transfer rate (W) and a per unit area
flux (W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates
heat flowing toward the face itself. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have only
positive values or zero when the heat flow direction opposes.
Former Name: For Conduction Finite Difference simulations (CondFD), CondFD Outside Surface
Heat Flux is replaced with Surface Outside Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate Per Area. Likewise
for CondFD Outside Heat Flux to Surface.
342 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.46.9 Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.46.10 Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Rate per Area
[W/m2]

1.10.46.11 Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.46.12 Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Loss Rate [W]

1.10.46.13 Surface Average Face Conduction Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These “average face conduction” output variables combine the inside face conduction and outside
face conduction reports together to describe the conduction situation in a heat transfer surface in a
nominal way. This is simply the average of the inside and outside face conduction rates, but with
the sign convention for the outside face switched to match the inside face so that positive values here
indicate heat flowing into the thermal zone.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat conduction rate (W) and a per unit
area flux (W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates
heat flowing toward the thermal zone. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have
only positive values or zero when the heat flow direction opposes (W). Finally there is a version for
total energy transfer (J).

1.10.46.14 Surface Heat Storage Rate [W]

1.10.46.15 Surface Heat Storage Rate per Area [W/m2]

1.10.46.16 Surface Heat Storage Gain Rate [W]

1.10.46.17 Surface Heat Storage Loss Rate [W]

1.10.46.18 Surface Heat Storage Energy [J]

These “heat storage” output variables combine the inside face conduction and outside face conduction
reports together to describe the thermal storage situation in a heat transfer surface in a nominal
way. This is simply the difference between the inside and outside face conduction, but with the sign
convention arranged so that positive values indicate heat being added to the core of the surface.
Different versions of the reports are available. The basic heat storage rate (W) and a per unit area
flux (W/m2 ) can have positive or negative values with the sign convention that positive indicates
heat being added to the surface’s mass. There are also directed “gain” and “loss” versions that have
only positive values or zero when the heat storage direction opposes (W). Finally there is a version
for total energy stored (J).

1.10.46.19 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction [W]

The sum of the Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values for all opaque surfaces in a zone for
both positive and negative sums. For example, assume a zone has six opaque surfaces with Opaque
Surface Inside Face Conduction values of 100, -200, 400, 50, 150 and –300 W. Then Zone Opaque
Surface Inside Face Conduction = 700 - 500 = 200 W. Or if a zone has six opaque surfaces with
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 343

Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values of -100, -200, 400, -50, 150 and –300W. Then Zone
Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction = 550 – 650 = -100 W.

1.10.46.20 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Rate
[W]

1.10.46.21 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain En-
ergy [J]

These are the power and energy sums for the Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values for all
opaque surfaces in a zone when that sum is positive. For example, assume a zone has six opaque
surfaces with Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values of 100, -200, 400, 50, 150 and –300 W.
Then Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Gain Rate = 700 - 500 = 200 W.

1.10.46.22 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Rate
[W]

1.10.46.23 Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss En-
ergy [J]

These are the power and energy absolute value for the sums of the Opaque Surface Inside Face
Conduction values for all opaque surfaces in a zone when that sum is negative. For example, assume
a zone has six opaque surfaces with Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction values of -100, -200,
400, -50, 150 and –300W. Then Zone Opaque Surface Inside Faces Total Conduction Heat Loss Rate
= |550 – 650| = |-100| = 100 W.

1.10.46.24 Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction [W]

The sum of the Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction values for all opaque surfaces in a zone for
both positive and negative sums. For example, assume a zone has six opaque surfaces with Opaque
Surface Outside Face Conduction values of 100, -200, 400, 50, 150 and –300 W. Then Zone Opaque
Surface Outside Face Conduction = 700 - 500 = 200 W. Or if a zone has six opaque surfaces with
Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction values of -100, -200, 400, -50, 150 and –300W. Then Zone
Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction = 550 – 650 = -100 W.

1.10.46.25 Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Gain [W]

1.10.46.26 Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Gain Energy [J]

These are the power and energy sums for the Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction values for
all opaque surfaces in a zone when that sum is positive. For example, assume a zone has six opaque
surfaces with Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction values of 100, -200, 400, 50, 150 and –300
W. Then Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Gain = 700 - 500 = 200 W.
344 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.46.27 Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Loss [W]

1.10.46.28 Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Loss Energy [J]

These are the power and energy absolute value for the sums of the Opaque Surface Outside Face
Conduction values for all opaque surfaces in a zone when that sum is negative. For example, assume
a zone has six opaque surfaces with Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction values of -100, -200,
400, -50, 150 and -300W. Then Zone Opaque Surface Outside Face Conduction Loss = |550 – 650|
= |-100| = 100 W.

1.10.46.29 Surface Inside Face Beam Solar Radiation Heat Gain Rate [W]

Beam solar radiation from exterior windows absorbed on the inside face of an opaque heat transfer
surface. For Solar Distribution = FullInteriorAndExterior, this quantity can be non-zero for both
floor and wall surfaces. Otherwise, for Solar Distribution = FullExterior or MinimalShadowing, it
can be non-zero only for floor surfaces since in this case all entering beam solar is assumed to fall on
the floor. Note that this variable will not be operational (have a real value) unless there are exterior
windows in the zone.

1.10.47 Window Output Variables

The following output variables apply to subsurfaces that are windows or glass doors. These two
subsurface types are called “window” here. “Exterior window” means that the base surface of the
window is an exterior wall, floor, roof or ceiling (i.e., the base surface is a BuildingSurface:Detailed
with OutsideFaceEnvironment = ExteriorEnvironment). “Interior window” means that the base
surface of the window is an inter-zone wall, floor or ceiling. “Glass” means a transparent solid layer,
usually glass, but possibly plastic or other transparent material. “Shading device” means an interior,
exterior or between-glass shade or blind, or an exterior screen (only exterior windows can have a
shading device).

1.10.47.1 Zone Windows Total Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]

1.10.47.2 Zone Windows Total Transmitted Solar Radiation Energy [J]

The total Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate of all the exterior windows in a zone.

1.10.47.3 Zone Windows Total Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.47.4 Zone Windows Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sum of the heat flow from all of the exterior windows in a zone when that sum is positive. (See
definition of “heat flow” under “Window Heat Gain,” below.)

1.10.47.5 Zone Windows Total Heat Loss Rate [W]

1.10.47.6 Zone Windows Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

The absolute value of the sum of the heat flow from all of the exterior windows in a zone when that
sum is negative.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 345

1.10.47.7 Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Shortwave Radiation

Rate [W]

1.10.47.8 Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate
[W]

1.10.47.9 Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]

The total exterior beam and diffuse solar radiation absorbed in all of the glass layers of an exterior
window.

1.10.47.10 Surface Window Shading Device Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]

Surface Window Shading Device Absorbed Solar Radiation Energy [J]

The exterior beam and diffuse solar radiation absorbed in the shading device, if present, of an exterior
window.

1.10.47.11 Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]

1.10.47.12 Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Energy [J]

The amount of beam and diffuse solar radiation entering a zone through an exterior window. It is
the sum of the following two variables, “Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate”
and “Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate.”

1.10.47.13 Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]

1.10.47.14 Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]

The solar radiation transmitted by an exterior window whose source is beam solar incident on the
outside of the window. For a bare window, this transmitted radiation consists of beam radiation
passing through the glass (assumed transparent) and diffuse radiation from beam reflected from the
outside window reveal, if present. For a window with a shade, this transmitted radiation is totally
diffuse (shades are assumed to be perfect diffusers). For a window with a blind, this transmitted
radiation consists of beam radiation that passes between the slats and diffuse radiation from beam-
to-diffuse reflection from the slats. For a window with a screen, this value consists of direct beam
radiation that is transmitted through the screen (gaps between the screen material) and diffuse
radiation from beam-to-diffuse reflection from the screen material.
For each zone time step,
Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate = Surface Window Transmitted Beam To
Beam Solar Radiation Rate + Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate
Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy = Surface Window Transmitted Beam
To Beam Solar Radiation Energy + Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation
Energy
346 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.47.15 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Beam Solar Radiation Rate

[W]

1.10.47.16 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Beam Solar Radiation Energy

[J]

For a window with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of beam radiation that passes between
the slats. For a window with a screen, this value consists of direct beam radiation that is transmitted
through the screen (gaps between the screen material).

1.10.47.17 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate

[W]

1.10.47.18 Surface Window Transmitted Beam To Diffuse Solar Radiation En-

ergy [J]

For a window with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of diffuse radiation reflected from
beam by the slats. For a window with a screen, this value consists of diffuse radiation reflected by
the screen material.

1.10.47.19 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation

Rate [W]

1.10.47.20 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]

The sum of the Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate (see definition above) from
all exterior windows in a zone.

1.10.47.21 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate
[W]

1.10.47.22 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]

The sum of the Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate (see definition above) from
all interior windows in a zone.

1.10.47.23 Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate [W]

1.10.47.24 Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Energy [J]

The solar radiation transmitted by an exterior window whose source is diffuse solar incident on the
outside of the window. For a bare window, this transmitted radiation consists of diffuse radiation
passing through the glass. For a window with a shade, this transmitted radiation is totally diffuse
(shades are assumed to be perfect diffusers). For a window with a blind, this transmitted radiation
consists of diffuse radiation that passes between the slats and diffuse radiation from diffuse-to-
diffuse reflection from the slats. For a window with a screen, this value consists of diffuse radiation
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 347

transmitted through the screen (gaps between the screen material) and diffuse radiation from diffuse-
to-diffuse reflection from the screen material.

1.10.47.25 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation

Rate [W]

1.10.47.26 Zone Exterior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation

Energy [J]

The combined beam and diffuse solar that first entered adjacent zones through exterior windows in
the adjacent zones, was subsequently reflected from interior surfaces in those zones (becoming diffuse
through that reflection), and was then transmitted through interior windows into the current zone.

1.10.47.27 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation

Rate [W]

1.10.47.28 Zone Interior Windows Total Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation

Energy [J]

The sum of the Surface Window Transmitted Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate (see definition above)
from all interior windows in a zone.

1.10.47.29 Surface Window System Solar Transmittance []

Effective solar transmittance of an exterior window, including effect of shading device, if present.
Equal to “Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate” divided by total exterior beam plus
diffuse solar radiation incident on the window (excluding frame, if present).

1.10.47.30 Surface Window System Solar Absorptance []

Effective solar absorptance of an exterior window, including effect of shading device, if present.
Equal to “Window Solar Absorbed: All Glass Layers” plus “Window Solar Absorbed: Shading
Device” divided by total exterior beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on window (excluding
frame, if present)

1.10.47.31 Surface Window System Solar Reflectance []

Effective solar reflectance of an exterior window, including effect of shading device, if present. Equal
to: [1.0 – “Surface Window System Solar Transmittance” – “Surface Window System Solar Absorp-
tance”].

1.10.47.32 Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.47.33 Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Energy [J]

For an airflow window, the forced convective heat flow from the gap through which airflow occurs.
This is the heat gained (or lost) by the air from the glass surfaces (and between-glass shading device
348 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

surfaces, if present) that the air comes in contact with as it flows through the gap. If the gap airflow
goes to the zone indoor air, the gap convective heat flow is added to the zone load. Applicable to
exterior windows only.

1.10.47.34 Surface Window Heat Gain Rate [W]

1.10.47.35 Surface Window Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total heat flow to the zone from the glazing, frame and divider of an exterior window when the
total heat flow is positive.
For a window without an interior shading device, this heat flow is equal to:

– [Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate (see definition, above)]

– [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
– [Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing]
– [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window]
– [Convection to zone from window frame and divider, if present]

Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
For a window with an interior shading device, this heat flow is equal to:

– [Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate]

– [Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and
shading device]
– [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
– [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
– [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
– [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window]
– [Convection to zone from window frame and divider, if present]

The total window heat flow can also be thought of as the sum of the solar and conductive gain to
the zone from the window.

1.10.47.36 Surface Window Heat Loss Rate [W]

1.10.47.37 Surface Window Heat Loss Energy [J]

The absolute value of the total heat flow through an exterior window when the total heat flow is
negative. (See definition of “total heat flow” under “Surface Window Heat Gain Rate,” above.)
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 349

1.10.47.38 Surface Window Net Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.10.47.39 Surface Window Net Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The total heat flow through the glazing, frame and divider of an exterior window. Negative values
imply heat flow to the exterior.
The important distinction between this output variable and those for “Surface Window Heat
Gain/Loss” is that this represents the net heat flow through the window and not the heat flow to
the zone. The only difference is the heat flow to the zone does not account for radiation from the
opaque frame and divider components. This is because these components, as a simplification, do
not participate in the overall radiative exchange with other surfaces in the zone.
For a window without an interior shading device, this heat flow is equal to:

– [Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate (see definition, above)]

– [Convective heat flow from the zone side of the glazing]
– [Net IR heat flow from the zone side of the glazing]
– [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window]
– [Conduction through window frame and divider, if present]

Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
For a window with an interior shading device, this heat flow is equal to:

– [Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate]

– [Convective heat flow from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading device]
– [Convective heat flow from the zone side of the shading device]
– [Net IR heat flow from the zone side of the glazing]
– [Net IR heat flow from the zone side of the shading device]
– [Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window]
– [Conduction through the window frame and divider, if present]

1.10.47.40 Surface Window Glazing Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []

The fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on the glass of an exterior window that is
transmitted through the glazing as beam radiation. This is for the base window without shading.
Takes into account the angle of incidence of beam solar radiation on the glass.

1.10.47.41 Surface Window Glazing Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []

The fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on the glazing of an exterior window that is
transmitted through the glazing as diffuse radiation.

1.10.47.42 Surface Window Glazing Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []

The fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on the glass of an exterior window that is
transmitted through the glass assuming that the window has no shading device. It is assumed that
incident diffuse solar is transmitted only as diffuse with no beam component.
350 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.47.43 Surface Window Model Solver Iteration Count []

The number of iterations needed by the window-layer heat balance solution to converge.

1.10.47.44 Surface Window Solar Horizontal Profile Angle [deg]

For a vertical exterior window, this is an angle appropriate for calculating beam solar quantities
appropriate to horizontal window elements such as horizontal reveal surfaces, horizontal frame and
divider elements and horizontal slats of window blinds. It is defined as the angle between the window
outward normal and the projection of the sun’s ray on the vertical plane containing the outward
normal. See Figure 1.34.
For an exterior window of arbitrary tilt, it is defined as the angle between the window outward normal
the projection of the sun’s ray on the plane that contains the outward normal and is perpendicular
to the ground.
If the sun is behind the window, the horizontal profile angle is not defined and is reported as 0.0.
Note that in most texts and in window equivalent layer model what we call “horizontal profile angle”
is called “vertical profile angle.”

1.10.47.45 Surface Window Solar Vertical Profile Angle [deg]

For a vertical exterior window, this is an angle appropriate for calculating beam solar quantities
appropriate to vertical window elements such as vertical reveal surfaces, vertical frame and divider
elements and vertical slats of window blinds. It is defined as the angle between the window outward
normal and the projection of the sun’s ray on the horizontal plane containing the outward normal.
See Figure 1.34.
For an exterior window of arbitrary tilt, it is defined as the angle between the window outward normal
the projection of the sun’s ray on the plane that contains the outward normal and is perpendicular to
the plane defined above for Surface Window Solar Horizontal Profile Angle for a window of arbitrary
tilt.
If the sun is behind the window, the vertical profile angle is not defined and is reported as 0.0.
Note that in most texts and in window equivalent layer model what we call “vertical profile angle”
is called “horizontal profile angle.”

1.10.47.46 Surface Window Outside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation

Rate [W]

1.10.47.47 Surface Window Outside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]

Beam solar radiation reflected from the outside reveal surfaces of a window (ref: Reveal Surfaces
under WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). There are both rate and energy versions.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 351

Figure 1.34: Vertical exterior window showing solar horizontal profile angle, solar vertical profile
angle and solar incidence angle.
352 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.47.48 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation Rate
[W]

1.10.47.49 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Beam Solar Radiation En-
ergy [J]

Beam solar radiation reflected from the inside reveal surfaces of a window (ref: Reveal Surfaces
under WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object). There are both rate and energy versions.

1.10.47.50 Surface Window Inside Reveal Absorbed Beam Solar Radiation Rate
[W]

Beam solar radiation absorbed at the inside reveal surfaces of a window, in Watts.

1.10.47.51 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Diffuse Zone Solar Radiation
Rate [W]

Diffuse solar radiation reflected from inside reveal surfaces of a window into the zone, in Watts.

1.10.47.52 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Diffuse Frame Solar Radia-
tion Rate [W]

Diffuse solar radiation reflected from inside reveal surfaces onto the frame surfaces of a window, in
Watts.

1.10.47.53 Surface Window Inside Reveal Reflected Diffuse Glazing Solar Radi-
ation Rate [W]

Diffuse solar radiation reflected from inside reveal surfaces onto the glazing surfaces of a window, in
Watts.

1.10.47.54 Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Condensation Status []

A value of 1 means that moisture condensation will occur on the innermost glass face of an exterior
window (i.e., on the glass face in contact with the zone air). Otherwise the value is 0. The condition
for condensation is glass inside face temperature < zone air dewpoint temperature.
For airflow exterior windows, in which forced air passes between adjacent glass faces in double- and
triple-pane windows, a value of 1 means that condensation will occur on one or both of the glass
faces in contact with the airflow. In this case the condition for condensation is:

– For airflow source = indoorair, temperature of either face in contact with airflow < zone air
dewpoint temperature.
– For airflow source = outdoorair, temperature of either face in contact with airflow < outside
air dewpoint temperature.

As for regular windows, the value will also be 1 if condensation occurs on the innermost glass face.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 353

1.10.47.55 Surface Window Inside Face Frame Condensation Status []

If an exterior window has a frame and the value of this flag is 1, condensation will occur on the
inside surface of the frame. The condition for condensation is frame inside surface temperature <
zone air dewpoint temperature.

1.10.47.56 Surface Window Inside Face Divider Condensation Status []

If an exterior window has a divider and the value of this flag is 1, condensation will occur on the
inside surface of the divider. The condition for condensation is divider inside surface temperature <
zone air dewpoint temperature.

1.10.47.57 Surface Shading Device Is On Time Fraction []

The fraction of time that a shading device is on an exterior window. For a particular simulation
timestep, the value is 0.0 if the shading device is off (or there is no shading device) and the value is
1.0 if the shading device is on. (It is assumed that the shading device, if present, is either on or off
for the entire timestep.) If the shading device is switchable glazing, a value of 0.0 means that the
glazing is in the unswitched (light colored) state, and a value of 1.0 means that the glazing is in the
switched (dark colored) state.
For a time interval longer a timestep, this is the fraction of the time interval that the shading device
is on. For example, take the case where the time interval is one hour and the timestep is 10 minutes.
Then if the shading device is on for two timesteps in the hour and off for the other four timesteps,
then the fraction of time that the shading device is on = 2/6 = 0.3333.

1.10.47.58 Surface Window Blind Slat Angle [deg]

For an exterior window with a blind, this is the angle in degrees between the glazing outward normal
and the blind slat angle outward normal, where the outward normal points away from the front face
of the slat. The slat angle varies from 0 to 180 deg. If the slat angle is 0 deg or 180 deg, the slats
are parallel to the glazing and the slats are said to be “closed”. If the slat angle is 90 deg, the slats
are perpendicular to the glazing and the slats are said to be “fully open”. See illustrations under
WindowMaterial:Blind. For blinds with a fixed slat angle, the value reported here will be constant.
For WindowMaterial:Blind:EquivalentLayer blinds the slat angle varies from -90 to 90 deg. If the
slat angle is -90 deg or 90 deg, the slats are parallel to the glazing and the slats are said to be
“closed”. If the slat angle is 0 deg, the slats are perpendicular to the glazing and the slats are said
to be “fully open”. For blinds with a fixed slat angle, the value reported here will be constant.

1.10.47.59 Surface Window Blind Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []

For an exterior window with a blind, this is the fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on
the blind that is transmitted through the blind as beam solar radiation when the blind is isolated
(i.e., as though the window glass were not present). Depends on various factors, including slat angle,
width, separation, and thickness, and horizontal solar profile angle (for blinds with horizontal slats)
or vertical solar profile angle (for blinds with vertical slats). The transmittance value reported here
will be non-zero only when some beam solar can pass through the blind without hitting the slats.
354 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.47.60 Surface Window Blind Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []

For an exterior window with a blind, the fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on the
blind that is transmitted through the blind as diffuse solar radiation when the blind is isolated (i.e., as
though the window glass were not present). Depends on various factors, including slat angle, width,
separation, thickness and reflectance, and horizontal solar profile angle (for blinds with horizontal
slats) or vertical solar profile angle (for blinds with vertical slats).

1.10.47.61 Surface Window Blind Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance []

For an exterior window with a blind, the fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on the
blind that is transmitted through the blind as diffuse solar radiation when the blind is isolated (i.e.,
as though the window glass were not present). Depends on various factors, including slat angle,
width, separation, thickness and reflectance. For blinds with a fixed slat angle the transmittance
value reported here will be constant.

1.10.47.62 Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmit-
tance []

The fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a blind (excluding
window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the blind/glass system as beam solar radia-
tion. Depends on various factors, including type of glass; solar incidence angle; slat angle, width,
separation, and thickness; and horizontal solar profile angle (for blinds with horizontal slats) or
vertical solar profile angle (for blinds with vertical slats).

1.10.47.63 Surface Window Blind and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmit-
tance []

The fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a blind (exclud-
ing window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the blind/glass system as diffuse solar
radiation. Depends on various factors, including type of glass and slat angle, width, separation,
thickness and reflectance. For blinds with a fixed slat angle the transmittance value reported here
will be constant.

1.10.47.64 Surface Window Screen Beam to Beam Solar Transmittance []

For an exterior window with a screen, this is the fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on
the screen that is transmitted through the screen as beam solar radiation when the screen is isolated
(i.e., as though the window glass were not present). Depends on various factors, including the screen
reflectance and the relative angle of the incident beam with respect to the screen. This value will
include the amount of inward reflection of solar beam off the screen material surface if the user
specifies this modeling option (i.e., Material: WindowScreen, field Reflected Beam Transmittance
Accounting Method = Model as Direct Beam).

1.10.47.65 Surface Window Screen Beam to Diffuse Solar Transmittance[]

For an exterior window with a screen, the fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on the
screen that is transmitted through the screen as diffuse solar radiation when the screen is isolated
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 355

(i.e., as though the window glass were not present). Depends on various factors, including the screen
reflectance and the relative angle of the incident beam with respect to the screen. This value is the
amount of inward reflection of solar beam off the screen material surface if the user specifies this
modeling option (i.e., Material: WindowScreen, field Reflected Beam Transmittance Accounting
Method = Model as Diffuse); otherwise, this value will be zero.

1.10.47.66 Surface Window Screen Diffuse to Diffuse Solar Transmittance[]

For an exterior window with a screen, the fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on the
screen that is transmitted through the screen as diffuse solar radiation when the screen is isolated
(i.e., as though the window glass were not present). Depends on various factors including screen
material geometry and reflectance. This value is calculated as an average, constant For a window
with a screen, this value consists of diffuse radiation transmitted through the screen (gaps between
the screen material) and diffuse radiation from diffuse-to-diffuse reflection from the screen material.
For a window with a screen, this value consists of diffuse radiation transmitted through the screen
(gaps between the screen material) and diffuse radiation from diffuse-to-diffuse reflection from the
screen material.

1.10.47.67 Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Beam Solar Transmit-
tance[]

The fraction of exterior beam solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a screen (exclud-
ing window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the screen/glass system as beam solar
radiation. Depends on various factors, including the screen reflectance and the relative angle of the
incident beam with respect to the screen. This value will include the amount of inward reflection of
solar beam off the screen material surface if the user specifies this modeling option (i.e., Material:
WindowScreen, field Reflected Beam Transmittance Accounting Method = Model as Direct Beam).

1.10.47.68 Surface Window Screen and Glazing System Diffuse Solar Transmit-
tance []

The fraction of exterior diffuse solar radiation incident on an exterior window with a screen (exclud-
ing window frame, if present) that is transmitted through the screen/glass system as diffuse solar
radiation. Depends on various factors including screen material geometry and reflectance.

1.10.47.69 Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Rate [W]

1.10.47.70 Surface Window Transmitted Beam Solar Radiation Energy [J]

The beam solar radiation transmitted through an interior window. Calculated only if Solar Distri-
bution = FullInteriorAndExterior in your Building input. The origin of this radiation is beam solar
that enters through an exterior window in a zone and then passes through an interior window into
the adjacent zone. The amount of this radiation depends on several factors, including sun position,
intensity of beam solar incident on the exterior window (including effects of shadowing, if present),
relative position of the exterior and interior window, and the size and transmittance of the windows.
Note that if there are two or more exterior windows in a zone, then beam solar from one or more
of them may pass through the same interior window. Likewise, if there are more than two or more
356 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

interior windows in a zone then beam solar from a single exterior window may pass through one or
more of the interior windows. There are both rate and energy versions of the output.

1.10.47.71 Surface Storm Window On Off Status []

Indicates whether a storm window glass layer is present (ref: StormWindow object). The value is 0
if the storm window glass layer is off, 1 if it is on, and –1 if the window does not have an associated
storm window. Applicable only to exterior windows and glass doors.

1.10.47.72 Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Transmitted Out Win-
dow Solar Radiation Rate [W]

As of Version 2.1, the diffuse solar transmitted through exterior windows that is initially distributed
to another window in the zone and transmitted out of the zone through that window. For exterior
windows, this transmitted diffuse solar is “lost” to the exterior environment For interior windows,
this transmitted diffuse solar is distributed to heat transfer surfaces in the adjacent zone, and is
part of the Surface Inside Face Initial Transmitted Diffuse Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate for these
adjacent zone surfaces.

1.10.47.73 Additional Window Outputs (Advanced)

The following output variables for windows or glass doors are available when the user requests to
display advanced output variables. These seven reports show the individual components that are
combined to determine overall Surface Window Heat Gain Rate and/or Surface Window Heat Loss
Rate (described above).

1.10.47.74 Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate
[W]

The surface convection heat transfer from the glazing to the zone in watts. This output variable
is the term called “[Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]” under the
description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable. If the window has an interior
shade or blind, then this is zero and the glazing’s convection is included in the report called “Surface
Window Inside Face Gap between Shade and Glazing Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate”.

1.10.47.75 Surface Window Inside Face Glazing Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate
[W]

The net exchange of infrared radiation heat transfer from the glazing to the zone in watts. This
output variable is the term called “[Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing]”
under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable.

1.10.47.76 Surface Window Shortwave from Zone Back Out Window Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]

This is the short-wave radiation heat transfer from the zone back out the window in watts. This is
a measure of the diffuse short-wave light (from reflected solar and electric lighting) that leave the
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 357

zone through the window. This output variable is the term called “[Short-wave radiation from zone
transmitted back out the window]” under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate
output variable.

1.10.47.77 Surface Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate
[W]

This is the heat transfer from any frames and/or dividers to the zone in watts. This output variable
is the term called “[Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present]” under the
description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable. (The word “conduction”
here is used because the models is simplified compared to the complexities of surface convection and
radiation.)

1.10.47.78 Surface Window Frame Heat Gain Rate [W]

This is the positive heat flow from window frames to the zone in watts. This is part of the Surface
Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate.

1.10.47.79 Surface Window Frame Heat Loss Rate [W]

This is the negative heat flow from window frames to the zone in watts. This is part of the Surface
Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate.

1.10.47.80 Surface Window Frame Inside Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the inside surface of the window frames.

1.10.47.81 Surface Window Frame Outside Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the outside surface of the window frames.

1.10.47.82 Surface Window Divider Heat Gain Rate [W]

This is the positive heat flow from window dividers to the zone in watts. This is part of the Surface
Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate.

1.10.47.83 Surface Window Divider Heat Loss Rate [W]

This is the negative heat flow from window dividers to the zone in watts. This is part of the Surface
Window Inside Face Frame and Divider Zone Heat Gain Rate.

1.10.47.84 Surface Window Divider Inside Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the inside surface of the window dividers.

358 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.47.85 Surface Window Divider Outside Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the outside surface of the window dividers.

1.10.47.86 Surface Window Inside Face Gap between Shade and Glazing Zone
Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]

This is the convection surface heat transfer from the both the glazing and the shade’s back face to
the zone in Watts. This output variable is the term called “[Convective heat flow to the zone from
the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading device]” under the description above for
Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable. For Equivalent Layer window this output variable
is the convection heat gain from vented interior air gap to the zone in Watts.

1.10.47.87 Surface Window Inside Face Shade Zone Convection Heat Gain Rate
[W]

This is the convection surface heat transfer from the front side of any interior shade or blind to the
zone in Watts. This output variable is the term called “[Convective heat flow to the zone from the
zone side of the shading device]” under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate
output variable. For equivalent Layer window this output variable is the convection heat gain rate
from the inside face of a glazing or a shade to the zone in Watts.

1.10.47.88 Surface Window Inside Face Shade Net Infrared Heat Transfer Rate
[W]

The net exchange of infrared radiation heat transfer from the shade or blind to the zone in watts.
This output variable is the term called “[Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the
shading device]” under the description above for Surface Window Heat Gain Rate output variable.

1.10.47.89 Surface Window Inside Face Other Convection Heat Gain Rate [W]

The other (extra) convection heat transfer rate from the inside face of a an equivalent layer window.
This output is computed from the difference in convection flux when using equivalent inside surface
temperature of a window instead of the inside surface temperature from the standard surface heat
balance calculation.

1.10.48 Thermochromic Window Outputs

1.10.48.1 Window Thermochromic Layer Temperature [C]

The temperature of the TC glass layer of a TC window at each time step.

1.10.48.2 Surface Window Thermochromic Layer Property Specification Tem-

perature [C]

The temperature under which the optical data of the TC glass layer are specified.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 359

The overall properties (U-factor/SHGC/VT) of the thermochromic windows at different specification

temperatures are reported in the .eio file. These window constructions are created by EnergyPlus
during run time. They have similar names with suffix “_TC_XX” where XX represents a specifica-
tion temperature.

1.10.48.3 Switchable Window Outputs

1.10.48.4 Surface Window Switchable Glazing Switching Factor[]

The switching factor (tint level) of the switchable window: 0 means no switching – clear state; 1
means fully switched – dark state.

1.10.48.5 Surface Window Switchable Glazing Visible Transmittance[]

The visible transmittance of the switchable window.

1.10.49 Other Surface Outputs/Reports

Several reports can be selected for Surfaces. (See Group – Report for details on how to specify).
Examples are:

1.10.49.1 DXF

This report produces a special file (eplusout.dxf) in the industry standard DXF (Drawing Inter-
change Format) for drawings. It is produced and accepted by many popular, commercial CAD
programs. Detailed reference can be found on the AutoCADTM website at: http://www.autodesk.
com/techpubs/autocad/acadr14/dxf/index.htm.
EnergyPlus produces this file from the Report command:

Output:Reports , Surfaces , DXF;

1.10.49.2 Details, Vertices, DetailsWithVertices

This version of the report creates lines in the eplusout.eio file for each surface (except internal mass
surfaces). Details of this reporting is shown in the Output Details and Examples document.

1.10.50 Shading Surfaces

Shading surfaces are entities outside of the building that may cast shadows on the building’s heat
transfer surfaces. These entities do not typically have enough thermal mass to be described as part
of the building’s thermal makeup.
The most important effect of shading surfaces is to reduce solar gain in windows that are shadowed.
(However, in some cases, shading surfaces can reflect solar onto a wall or window and increase solar
gain.)
360 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

There are two kinds of shading surfaces in EnergyPlus: detached and attached. A detached
shading surface, such as a tree or neighboring building, is not connected to the building. An attached
shading surface is typically an overhang or fin that is attached to a particular base surface of the
building, usually a wall; attached shading surfaces are usually designed to shade specific windows.
Objects for detached shading surfaces:

– Shading:Site
– Shading:Building
– Shading:Site:Detailed
– Shading:Building:Detailed

Similarly to the surfaces, the detailed objects use vertex entry whereas the other objects are limited
to rectangular representation.
Objects for attached shading surfaces:

– Shading:Overhang
– Shading:Overhang:Projection
– Shading:Fin
– Shading:Fin:Projection
– Shading:Zone:Detailed

EnergyPlus creates “bi-directional” shades from each shading surface entered. This means that the
shade you input will cast a shadow no matter which side of the shade the sun is on. For example,
a vertical fin will cast a shadow whether the sun is on the left side or right side of the fin. Prior to
V1.0.2, a shading surface cast a shadow only in the hemisphere toward which the surface faced. This
hemisphere is the one pointed to by the shading surface’s outward normal vector, which is the cross
product V23 x V21, where V23 is the vector from vertex 2 to vertex 3 of the shading surface and
V21 is the vector from vertex 2 to vertex 1. Beginning with V1.0.2, the shades in EnergyPlus are
“bi-directional” so that they can cast shadows in both hemispheres depending on the time-varying
position of the sun relative to the shading surface.
It is important to note that EnergyPlus will automatically account for “self-shading” effects—such
as in L-shaped buildings—in which some of the building’s wall and roof surfaces shade other parts
of the building, especially windows. This means that you only need to describe shading elements
that aren’t building heat-transfer surfaces.
Shading surfaces can also reflect solar radiation onto the building. This feature is simulated if
you choose FullExteriorWithReflections or FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections in the Building
object (ref: Building - Field: Solar Distribution). In this case, you may specify the reflectance
properties of a shading surface with the ShadingProperty:Reflectance object. Note: If no Shading-
Property:Reflectance object is defined, then the shading surface reflectance values are assumed to be
0.2 and the fraction of shading surface that is glazed is assumed to be 0.0.
Shading surfaces also automatically shade diffuse solar radiation (and long-wave radiation) from the
sky. And they will automatically shade diffuse solar radiation from the ground if Solar Distribution
Field = FullExteriorWithReflections or FullInteriorAndExteriorWithReflections in the Building ob-
ject. (If the reflections option for Solar Distribution is used, the program also takes into account
the reduction of solar radiation reflected from the ground due to shading of the ground by shading
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 361

surfaces and by the building itself.) Otherwise, shading surfaces will not shade diffuse radiation from
the ground unless you enter a reduced value for View Factor to Ground for those building surfaces
that are shaded (ref: BuildingSurface:Detailed - Field: View Factor to Ground and FenestrationSur-
face:Detailed - Field: View Factor to Ground).

1.10.51 Detached Shading Surfaces

1.10.52 Shading:Site, Shading:Building

These objects are used to describe rectangular shading elements that are external to the building.
Examples are trees, high fences, near-by hills, and neighboring buildings.
If relative coordinates are used (ref: Field: Coordinate System in GlobalGeometryRules), shading
surfaces entered with Shading:Site remain stationary if the building is rotated, whereas those entered
with Shading:Building rotate with the building. If world coordinates are used Shading:Site and
Shading:Building are equivalent.
These shading elements are always opaque.

1.10.52.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with the detached shading surface. Though it must be
unique from other surface names, it is used primarily for convenience with detached shading surfaces.

1.10.52.2 Field: Azimuth Angle

Theoretically, this should face to the surface it is shading (i.e. if a south wall, this should be a north
facing shade) but since EnergyPlus automatically generates the mirror image, the facing angle per
se’ is not so important.

1.10.52.3 Field: Tilt Angle

The tilt angle is the angle (in degrees) that the shade is tilted from horizontal (or the ground).
Default for this field is 90 degrees.

1.10.52.4 Starting Corner for the surface

The rectangular surfaces specify the lower left corner of the surface for their starting coordinate. See
the introductory paragraph for rules on this entry.

1.10.52.5 Field: Starting X Coordinate

This field is the X coordinate (in meters).

1.10.52.6 Field: Starting Y Coordinate

This field is the Y coordinate (in meters).

362 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.52.7 Field: Starting Z Coordinate

This field is the Z coordinate (in meters).

1.10.52.8 Field: Length

This field is the length of the shade in meters.

1.10.52.9 Field: Height

This field is the width of the shade in meters.

Examples of these (can be found in example files 4ZoneWithShading_Simple_1.idf and
4ZoneWithShading_Simple_2.idf)

Shading:Building ,
Bushes -East , !- Name
90, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
45, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
50, !- Length {m}
1; !- Height {m}

Shading:Site ,
Bushes -North , !- Name
0, !- Azimuth Angle {deg}
90, !- Tilt Angle {deg}
45, !- Starting X Coordinate {m}
50, !- Starting Y Coordinate {m}
0, !- Starting Z Coordinate {m}
50, !- Length {m}
1; !- Height {m}

1.10.53 Shading:Site:Detailed, Shading:Building:Detailed

These objects are used to describe shading elements that are external to the building. Examples are
trees, high fences, near-by hills, and neighboring buildings.
If relative coordinates are used (ref: Field: Coordinate System in GlobalGeometryRules), shading
surfaces entered with Shading:Site:Detailed remain stationary if the building is rotated, whereas
those entered with Shading:Building:Detailed rotate with the building. If world coordinates are used
Shading:Site:Detailed and Shading:Building:Detailed are equivalent.
While “detached” implies that shading surfaces are not part of the building, the detached shading
sequence can be used to describe attached shading surfaces that may shade heat transfer surfaces
in more than one zone. For example, wing A of a building might shade several zones of wing B but
wing A (for whatever reason) is not described in the geometry for the simulation so it is represented
by a detached shade to get its shadowing effect.

1.10.53.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with the detached shading surface. Though it must be
unique from other surface names, it is used primarily for convenience with detached shading surfaces.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 363

1.10.53.2 Field: Transmittance Schedule Name

The name of a schedule of solar transmittance values from 0.0 to 1.0 for the shading surface. If
a blank is entered in this field, the transmittance value defaults to 0.0, i.e., the shading surface is
opaque at all times. This scheduling can be used to allow for seasonal transmittance change, such
as for deciduous trees that have a higher transmittance in winter than in summer. Transmittance
based on time of day can also be used—a movable awning, for example, where the transmittance is
some value less than 1.0 when the awning is in place and is 1.0 when the awning is retracted.
The following assumptions are made in the shading surface transmittance calculation:

– Both sides of the shading surface have the same transmittance properties.
– The transmittance is the same for both beam and diffuse solar radiation.
– Beam solar transmittance is independent of angle of incidence on the shading surface.
– Beam radiation incident on a shading surface is transmitted as beam radiation with no change
in direction, i.e., there is no beam-to-diffuse component.
– If two shading surfaces with non-zero transmittance overlap, the net transmittance is the
product of the individual transmittances. Inter-reflection between the shading surfaces (and
between the shading surfaces and the building) is ignored.
– For the daylighting calculation (ref: Group – Daylighting) the shading surface’s visible trans-
mittance is assumed to be the same as its solar transmittance.
– Shading devices are assumed to be opaque to long-wave radiation no matter what the solar
transmittance value is.

Note that shading devices only shade solar radiation when the sun is up, which is automatically
determined by EnergyPlus from latitude, time of year, etc. The user need only account for the
time-varying transmittance of the shading device in the transmittance schedule, not whether the
sun is up or not.

1.10.53.3 Field: Number Vertices

The number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further information, see
the discussion on “Surface Vertices” above.
IDF example of Detached Shading Surfaces:

Shading:Building:Detailed ,
EAST SIDE TREE , !- Detached Shading
ShadingTransmittance :0002 , !- Shadowing Transmittance & Schedule
3, !-Triangle
33.52800 , 10.66800 , 10.05800 ,
33.52800 , 13.71600 , 0.9140000 ,
33.52800 , 4.572000 , 0.9140000 ;

Shading:Building:Detailed ,
WEST SIDE TREE , !- Detached Shading
ShadingTransmittance :0002 , !- Shadowing Transmittance & Schedule
3, !-Triangle
-3.048000 , 7.620000 , 10.05800 ,
-3.048000 , 4.572000 , 0.9140000 ,
-3.048000 , 13.71600 , 0.9140000 ;
364 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.54 Attached Shading Surfaces

Overhangs are usually horizontal devices that are used to shade windows. Fins are usually vertical
devices that similarly shade windows.

1.10.55 Shading:Overhang
An overhang typically is used to shade a window in a building.

1.10.55.1 Inputs

1.10.55.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name of the overhang. It must be different from other surface names.

1.10.55.1.2 Field: Window or Door Name

The name of a window or door that this overhang shades.

1.10.55.1.3 Field: Height above Window or Door

This field is the height (meters) above the top of the door for the overhang.

1.10.55.1.4 Field Tilt Angle from Window/Door

This field is the tilt angle from the Window/Door. For a flat overhang, this would be 90 (degrees).

1.10.55.1.5 Field: Left Extension from Window/Door Width

This field is the width from the left edge of the window/door to the start of the overhang (meters).

1.10.55.1.6 Field: Right Extension from Window/Door Width

This field is the width from the right edge of the window/door to the start of the overhang (meters).

1.10.55.1.7 Field: Depth

This field is the depth of the overhang (meters) projecting out from the wall.

1.10.56 Shading:Overhang:Projection
An overhang typically is used to shade a window in a building. This object allows for specifying the
depth of the overhang as a fraction of the window or door’s height.

1.10.56.1 Inputs

1.10.56.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name of the overhang. It must be different from other surface names.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 365

1.10.56.1.2 Field: Window or Door Name

The name of a window or door that this overhang shades.

1.10.56.1.3 Field: Height above Window or Door

This field is the height (meters) above the top of the door for the overhang.

1.10.56.1.4 Field Tilt Angle from Window/Door

This field is the tilt angle from the Window/Door. For a flat overhang, this would be 90 (degrees).

1.10.56.1.5 Field: Left Extension from Window/Door Width

This field is the width from the left edge of the window/door to the start of the overhang (meters).

1.10.56.1.6 Field: Right Extension from Window/Door Width

This field is the width from the right edge of the window/door to the start of the overhang (meters).

1.10.56.1.7 Field: Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Height

This field is the fraction of the window/door height to specify as the depth of the overhang (meters)
projecting out from the wall.

1.10.57 Shading:Fin
Fins shade either side of windows/doors in a building. This object allows for specification of both
fins for the window. Fin placement is relative to the edge of the glass and user must include the
frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.57.1 Inputs

1.10.57.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name of the fin. It must be different from other surface names.

1.10.57.1.2 Field: Window or Door Name

The name of a window or door that this fin shades.

1.10.57.1.3 Field: Left Fin Extension from Window/Door

This field is the width from the left edge of the window/door to the plane of the left fin (meters).
The extension width is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame
is present.

1.10.57.1.4 Field: Left Fin Distance Above Top of Window

This field is the distance from the top of the window to the top of the left fin (meters) and is relative
to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.
366 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.57.1.5 Field: Left Fin Distance Below Bottom of Window

This field is the distance from the bottom of the window to the bottom of the left fin (meters) and
is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.57.1.6 Field: Left Fin Tilt Angle from Window/Door

This field is the tilt angle from the window / door for the left fin. Typically, a fin is 90 degrees
(default) from its associated window/door.

1.10.57.1.7 Field: Left Fin Depth

This field is the depth (meters) of the left fin (projecting out from the wall).

1.10.57.1.8 Field: Right Fin Extension from Window/Door

This field is the width from the right edge of the window/door to the plane of the right fin (meters).
The extension width is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame
is present.

1.10.57.1.9 Field: Right Fin Distance Above Top of Window

This field is the distance from the top of the window to the top of the right fin (meters) and is
relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.57.1.10 Field: Right Fin Distance Below Bottom of Window

This field is the distance from the bottom of the window to the bottom of the right fin (meters) and
is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width.

1.10.57.1.11 Field: Right Fin Tilt Angle from Window/Door

This field is the tilt angle from the window / door for the right fin. Typically, a fin is 90 degrees
(default) from its associated window/door.

1.10.57.1.12 Field: Right Fin Depth

This field is the depth (meters) of the right fin (projecting out from the wall).

1.10.58 Shading:Fin:Projection
Fins shade either side of windows/doors in a building. This object allows for specification of both
fins for the window. This object allows for specifying the depth of the fin as a fraction of the window
or door’s width. Fin placement is relative to the edge of the glass and user must include the frame
width when a frame is present.

1.10.58.1 Inputs

1.10.58.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name of the fin. It must be different from other surface names.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 367

1.10.58.1.2 Field: Window or Door Name

The name of a window or door that this fin shades.

1.10.58.1.3 Field: Left Fin Extension from Window/Door

This field is the width from the left edge of the window/door to the plane of the left fin (meters).
The extension width is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame
is present.

1.10.58.1.4 Field: Left Fin Distance Above Top of Window

This field is the distance from the top of the window to the top of the left fin (meters) and is relative
to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.58.1.5 Field: Left Fin Distance Below Bottom of Window

This field is the distance from the bottom of the window to the bottom of the left fin (meters) and
is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.58.1.6 Field: Left Fin Tilt Angle from Window/Door

This field is the tilt angle from the window / door for the left fin. Typically, a fin is 90 degrees
(default) from its associated window/door.

1.10.58.1.7 Field: Left Fin Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Width

This field is the fraction of the window/door width to specify as the depth of the left fin (meters)
projecting out from the wall.

1.10.58.1.8 Field: Right Fin Extension from Window/Door

This field is the width from the right edge of the window/door to the plane of the right fin (meters)..
The extension width is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame
is present.

1.10.58.1.9 Field: Right Fin Distance Above Top of Window

This field is the distance from the top of the window to the top of the right fin (meters) and is
relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.58.1.10 Field: Right Fin Distance Below Bottom of Window

This field is the distance from the bottom of the window to the bottom of the right fin (meters) and
is relative to the edge of the glass and includes the frame width when a frame is present.

1.10.58.1.11 Field: Right Fin Tilt Angle from Window/Door

This field is the tilt angle from the window / door for the right fin. Typically, a fin is 90 degrees
(default) from its associated window/door.
368 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.58.1.12 Field: Right Fin Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Width

This field is the fraction of the window/door width to specify as the depth of the right fin (meters)
projecting out from the wall.
Examples of these (can be found in example files 4ZoneWithShading_Simple_1.idf and
4ZoneWithShading_Simple_2.idf)

Shading:Overhang:Projection ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001:Shade001 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Window or Door Name
.7, !- Height above Window or Door {m}
90, !- Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
.2, !- Left extension from Window/Door Width {m}
.2, !- Right extension from Window/Door Width {m}
.6; !- Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Height {m}

Shading:Overhang ,
Zn001:Wall001:Door001:Shade001 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001:Door001 , !- Window or Door Name
.6, !- Height above Window or Door {m}
90, !- Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
0, !- Left extension from Window/Door Width {m}
0, !- Right extension from Window/Door Width {m}
3; !- Depth {m}

Shading:Fin:Projection ,
Zn001:Wall001:Shade003 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Window or Door Name
.1, !- Left Extension from Window/Door {m}
.1, !- Left Distance Above Top of Window {m}
.1, !- Left Distance Below Bottom of Window {m}
90, !- Left Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
.6, !- Left Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Width {m}
.1, !- Right Extension from Window/Door {m}
.1, !- Right Distance Above Top of Window {m}
.1, !- Right Distance Below Bottom of Window {m}
90, !- Right Tilt Angle from Window/Door {deg}
.6; !- Right Depth as Fraction of Window/Door Width {m}

1.10.59 Shading:Zone:Detailed
This object is used to describe attached “subsurfaces” such as overhangs, wings or fins that project
outward from a base surface. This classification is used for convenience; actually, a device of this
type can cast shadows on the surface to which it is attached as well as on adjacent surfaces. For
example, a fin may shade its parent wall as well as adjacent walls.
Note that a zone surface can cast shadows on other zone surfaces. However, you don’t have to
worry about such effects—for example, one wall of an L-shaped building shading another wall–
because EnergyPlus will automatically check for this kind of “self shadowing” and do the proper
calculations.
Unlike attached (or detached) shading surfaces, building surfaces can only cast shadows in the
hemisphere towards which they face. This means, for example, that a roof that faces upward will
not cast a shadow downward. (Thus, specifying an oversized roof in an attempt to account for the
shading effects of overhangs will not work). Interior surfaces do not cast shadows of any kind.

1.10.59.1 Inputs

1.10.59.1.1 Field: Name

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 369

This is the name of the attached shading surface. It must be different from other surface names.

1.10.59.1.2 Field: Base Surface Name

This is the name of the surface to which this shading device is attached. This surface can be a wall
(or roof) but not a window or door.

1.10.59.1.3 Field: Transmittance Schedule Name

The name of a schedule of solar transmittance values from 0.0 to 1.0 for the shading surface. If
a blank is entered in this field, the transmittance value defaults to 0.0, i.e., the shading surface is
opaque at all times. This scheduling can be used to allow for seasonal transmittance change, such
as for deciduous trees that have a higher transmittance in winter than in summer. Transmittance
based on time of day can also be used—a movable awning, for example, where the transmittance is
some value less than 1.0 when the awning is in place and is 1.0 when the awning is retracted.
The following assumptions are made in the shading surface transmittance calculation:

– Both sides of the shading surface have the same transmittance properties.
– The transmittance is the same for both beam and diffuse solar radiation.
– Beam solar transmittance is independent of angle of incidence on the shading surface.
– Beam radiation incident on a shading surface is transmitted as beam radiation with no change
in direction, i.e., there is no beam-to-diffuse component.
– If two shading surfaces with non-zero transmittance overlap, the net transmittance is the
product of the individual transmittances. Inter-reflection between the shading surfaces (and
between the shading surfaces and the building) is ignored.
– For the daylighting calculation (ref: Group – Daylighting) the shading surface’s visible trans-
mittance is assumed to be the same as its solar transmittance.
– Shading devices are assumed to be opaque to long-wave radiation no matter what the solar
transmittance value is.

Note that shading devices only shade solar radiation when the sun is up, which is automatically
determined by EnergyPlus from latitude, time of year, etc. The user need only account for the
time-varying transmittance of the shading device in the transmittance schedule, not whether the
sun is up or not.

1.10.59.1.4 Field: Number Vertices

The number of sides in the surface (number of X,Y,Z vertex groups). For further information, see the
discussion on “Surface Vertices” above. The example below shows the correct input for an overhang
(to shade the appropriate portion of the base wall and window).
Proper specification for this overhang (facing up) is:
4,(C,0,D),(C,-B,D),(C+A,-B,D),(C+A,0,D); () used to illustrate each vertex.

Note that for horizontal surfaces, any corner may be chosen as the starting corner. The order
of vertices determines whether the surface is facing up or down. Shading surfaces are mirrored
automatically unless the user specifies “DoNotMirrorDetachedShading”, so each shading surface
need only be described once.
370 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.35: Illustration for Attached Shading Surface

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 371

Thus, another shading surface will be created (facing down):

4,(C+A,-B,D),(C+A,0,D),(C,0,D),(C,-B,D);
IDF example of attached shading surfaces (overhang, fin):
Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Shade001 , !- Surface Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
ShadingTransmittance :0001 , !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- RectangularOverhang
1.524000 , -0.3050000 , 2.865000 ,
1.524000 , 0.0000000E+00, 2.865000 ,
4.572000 , 0.0000000E+00, 2.865000 ,
4.572000 , -0.3050000 , 2.865000;

Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Zn003:Wall001:Shade001 , !- Surface Name
Zn003:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
ShadingTransmittance :0001 , !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- RectangularLeftFin
57.97000 , 8.450000 ,10.00000 ,
57.97000 , 8.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
57.97000 , 6.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
57.97000 , 6.450000 ,10.00000 ;

Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Zn003:Wall001:Shade002 , !- Surface Name
Zn003:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
ShadingTransmittance :0003 , !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- RectangularRightFin
77.97000 , 6.450000 ,10.00000 ,
77.97000 , 6.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
77.97000 , 8.450000 , 0.0000000E+00,
77.97000 , 8.450000 ,10.00000 ;

1.10.60 ShadingProperty:Reflectance
Specifies the reflectance properties of a shading surface when the solar reflection calculation has
requested, i.e., when if “WithReflections” option is chosen in the Building object (ref: Building
- Field: Solar Distribution). It is assumed that shading surfaces are divided into an unglazed,
diffusely reflecting portion and a glazed, specularly-reflecting portion, either of which may be zero.
The reflectance properties are assumed to be the same on both sides of the shading surface.
Note that a shadowing transmittance schedule (ref: Shading Surfaces, Field: Transmittance Sched-
ule Name) can be used with a reflective shading surface. However, EnergyPlus assumes that the
reflectance properties of the shading surface are constant even if the transmittance varies.
If no ShadingProperty:Reflectance objects are entered, the default values shown here will be used
for shading surfaces. Other surfaces have their reflectance properties defined by the materials in the
outer layers of the constructions.

1.10.60.1 Inputs

1.10.60.1.1 Field: Shading Surface Name

The name of the Shading:Site, Shading:Building, Shading:Site:Detailed, Shading:Building:Detailed,
Shading:Overhang, Shading:Overhang:Projection, Shading:Fin, Shading:Fin:Projection or Shad-
ing:Zone:Detailed object to which the following fields apply.
If this ShadingProperty:Reflectance object is not defined for a shading surface the default values
listed in each of the following fields will be used in the solar reflection calculation.
372 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.60.1.2 Field: Diffuse Solar Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface

The diffuse solar reflectance of the unglazed part of the shading surface (default = 0.2). This
reflectance is assumed to be the same for beam-to-diffuse and diffuse-to-diffuse reflection. Beam-
to-diffuse reflection is assumed to be independent of angle of incidence of beam radiation. Diffuse-
to-diffuse reflection is assumed to be independent of angular distribution of the incident of diffuse
radiation. The outgoing diffuse radiation is assumed to be isotropic (hemispherically uniform).
The sum of this reflectance and the shading surface transmittance should be less than or equal to
1.0.

1.10.60.1.3 Field: Diffuse Visible Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Sur-

face
The diffuse visible reflectance of the unglazed part of the shading surface (default = 0.2). This
reflectance is assumed to be the same for beam-to-diffuse and diffuse-to-diffuse reflection. Beam-
to-diffuse reflection is assumed to be independent of angle of incidence of beam radiation. Diffuse-
to-diffuse reflection is assumed to be independent of angular distribution of the incident of diffuse
radiation. The outgoing diffuse radiation is assumed to be isotropic (hemispherically uniform).
This value if used only for the daylighting calculation (ref: Daylighting:Controls). The sum of this
reflectance and the shading surface transmittance should be less than or equal to 1.0.

1.10.60.1.4 Field: Fraction of Shading Surface That Is Glazed

The fraction of the area of the shading surface that consists of windows (default = 0.0). It is assumed
that the windows are evenly distributed over the surface and have the same glazing construction (see
following “Name of Glazing Construction”). This might be the case, for example, for reflection
from the façade of a neighboring, highly-glazed building. For the reflection calculation the possible
presence of shades, screens or blinds on the windows of the shading surface is ignored. Beam-to-beam
(specular) reflection is assumed to occur only from the glazed portion of the shading surface. This
reflection depends on angle of incidence as determined by the program from the glazing construction.
Beam-to-diffuse reflection from the glazed portion is assumed to be zero. The diffuse-to-diffuse
reflectance of the glazed portion is determined by the program from the glazing construction.

1.10.60.1.5 Field: Glazing Construction Name

The name of the construction of the windows on the shading surface. Required if Fraction of Shading
Surface That Is Glazed is greater than 0.0.
IDF example of Shading Surface Reflectance for shading surface with specular reflection

Shading:Site:Detailed ,
Adjacent Glazed Facade , !- User Supplied Surface Name
, !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- Number of Surface Vertex Groups -- Number of (X,Y,Z) groups
0,-24,30, !- Vertex 1 X,Y,Z coordinates
0,-24,0, !- Vertex 2 X,Y,Z coordinates
0,0,0, !- Vertex 3 X,Y,Z coordinates
0,0,30; !-Vertex 3 X,Y,Z coordinates

ShadingProperty:Reflectance ,
Adjacent Glazed Facade , !- Name of Surface:Shading Object
0.3, !- Diffuse Solar Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 373

0.3, !- Diffuse Visible Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface

0.7, !- Fraction of Shading Surface That Is Glazed
GlassCon -1; !- Name of Glazing Construction

IDF example of Shading Surface Reflectance for shading surface without specular reflection

Shading:Site:Detailed ,
Adjacent Blank Facade , !- User Supplied Surface Name
, !- Shadowing Transmittance Schedule
4, !- Number of Surface Vertex Groups -- Number of (X,Y,Z) groups
0,-24,30,
0,-24,0,
0,0,0,
0,0,30;

ShadingProperty:Reflectance ,
Adjacent Blank Facade , !- Name of Surface:Shading Object
0.4, !- Diffuse Solar Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
0.4, !- Diffuse Visible Reflectance of Unglazed Part of Shading Surface
0.0, !- Fraction of Shading Surface That Is Glazed
; !- Name of glazing construction

1.10.61 WindowShadingControl
Window shading with coverings like drapes, blinds, screens or pull-down shades can be used to reduce
the amount of solar radiation entering the window or reduce daylighting glare. It can also be used
to reduce heat loss through the window (movable insulation). Leaving the window covering open in
the winter can maximize solar heat gain and thereby reduce heating loads.
With WindowShadingControl you specify the type, location, and timing of the shading device, what
variable or combination of variables controls deployment of the shading device, and what the control
setpoint is. If the shading device is a blind, you also specify how the slat angle is controlled. Each
WindowShadingControl object is associated with a zone and has a list of one or more windows and
glass doors to which the shading control is applied (ref: FenestrationSurface:Detailed with Type =
Window or GlassDoor, Window, and GlazedDoor).
NOTE: WindowShadingControl does not work with complex fenestration systems. Controlled com-
plex fenestration systems can be made only with Energy Management Systems objects. Refrencing a
FenestrationSurface:Detailed in a WindowShadingControl while using complex fenestration systems
will be ignored by program.
As shown in Figure 1.36, a shading device can be inside the window (Shading Type = Interior-
Shade or InteriorBlind), outside the window (Shading Type = ExteriorShade or ExteriorBlind), or
between panes of glass (Shading Type = BetweenGlassShade or BetweenGlassBlind). The exception
is window screens which can only be outside the window (Shading Type = ExteriorScreen).
When a shading device is present it is either retracted or activated. When it is retracted it covers
none of the window. When it is activated it covers the entire glazed part of the window (but not the
frame). Whether the shading device is retracted or activated in a particular timestep depends on
the control mechanism: see “Shading Control Type,” below. To model a case in which the shading
device, when activated, covers only part of the window you will have to divide the window into two
separate windows, one with the shading device and one without the shading device.
A shading device can also be of a kind in which the optical properties of the glazing switch from
one set of values to another in order to increase or decrease solar or visible transmittance (Shading
Type = SwitchableGlazing).
374 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.36: Allowed locations of a window shading device.

There are two ways of specifying the actual shading device:

– Specify “Name of Construction with Shading”

This is the name of a window Construction that has the shading device as one of its lay-
ers. The thermal and solar-optical properties of the shading device are given by the shading
material referenced in that Construction (ref: Construction, WindowMaterial:Shade, Win-
dowMaterial:Screen and WindowMaterial:Blind). To use this method you have to define two
Constructions for the window, one without the shading device and one with it. See Example
1, below.
The Construction without the shading device is referenced in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed
input for the window (see IDF example, below). The Construction with the shading device is
referenced by the window’s WindowShadingControl.
For Shading Type = InteriorShade, InteriorBlind, ExteriorShade, ExteriorScreen and Exteri-
orBlind these two Constructions must be identical expect for the presence of the shading layer
in the shaded Construction, otherwise you will get an error message. You will also get an error
message if the Construction referenced by the window has a shading layer.
– Specify the “Material Name of the Shading Device”
This is the name of a WindowMaterial:Shade, WindowMaterial:Screen or WindowMate-
rial:Blind. This method can be used with Shading Type = InteriorShade, InteriorBlind,
ExteriorShade and ExteriorBlind. It cannot be used with Shading Type = BetweenGlassShade,
BetweenGlassBlind, or SwitchableGlazing. If Shading Type = InteriorShade or ExteriorShade,
then you specify the name of a WindowMaterial:Shade. If Shading Type = InteriorBlind
or ExteriorBlind, then you specify the name of a WindowMaterial:Blind. If Shading Type
= ExteriorScreen, then you specify the name of a WindowMaterial:Screen. See Example 2,
below. This method is simpler to use since you don’t have to specify two Constructions that
differ only by the shading layer.
When this method is used, the program will automatically create a shaded window construction
by adding a shading layer to the outside or inside of the construction corresponding to the
windows referenced by the WindowShadingControl. The name, created by the program, of
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 375

this shaded construction is composed as follows: if the name of the window construction is
CCC and the material name of the shading device is DDD, then the shaded construction name
is CCC:DDD:INT for an interior shading device and CCC:DDD:EXT for an exterior shading
device.
This method is the required if you want to add a shading device to a construction brought in
from a WINDOW Data File (ref:Construction:WindowDataFile).
Note that if both “Name of Construction with Shading” and “Material Name of Shading Device”
are specified, the former takes precedence.

Most Shading Control Types allow you to specify a schedule that determines when the control is
active. One example is a control that is active seasonally. For example, to deploy shading only in
the summer when the incident solar is high enough, use Shading Control Type = OnIfHighSolarOn-
Window with a schedule that is 1 during the summer months and 0 otherwise and specify Shading
Control Is Scheduled = YES.
To deploy one shading device during one time period and another during another time period for
the same window, specify two different WindowShadingControl objects that both reference the same
fenestration. Each of the WindowShadingControl input objects would include the same window on
their lists of fenestration objects, but would reference different schedule input objects. The referenced
schedule input objects should have non-zero values specified at different times for each WindowShad-
ingControl. This approach can be used to add shading that is different for different seasons. When
more than one WindowShadingControl is used for the same window based on schedule, the type
of shading, control type, setpoints, and several other parameters must be the same in the different
WindowShadingControl objects, but the shading device and construction can be different.
In addition, most Shading Control Types also allow you to specify that glare control is active in
addition to the specified Control Type. For example, you might want to deploy shading when
the solar incident on a window is too high OR the glare from the window is too high. This type
of joint control requires that the window be in a daylit zone, that the maximum allowed glare
be specified in the Daylighting object for the zone, and that Glare Control Is Active = YES in
WindowShadingControl.
If Shading Type = InteriorBlind, ExteriorBlind or BetweenGlassBlind you can use WindowShading-
Control to specify how the slat angle of the blind is controlled when the blind is in place.
A special type of WindowShadingControl is SwitchableGlazing. An example is electrochromic glaz-
ing in which the transmittance and reflectance of the glass is controlled electronically. For example,
you could have electrochromic glazing switch from clear (high transmittance) to dark (low trans-
mittance) to control solar gain. If you choose the Shading Type = SwitchableGlazing option for
WindowShadingControl, the unswitched (clear) state is specified by the Construction referenced by
the window and the switched (dark) state is specified by the Construction referenced by Window-
ShadingControl for that window. For example, if you specify Shading Type = SwitchableGlazing
and Shading Control Type = OnIfHighSolarOnWindow, then the glazing will switch to the dark
state whenever the solar radiation striking the window exceeds the Setpoint value.
For Shading Type = SwitchableGlazing the state of the window is either clear (unswitched) or dark
(fully switched) for all Shading Control Types except MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint. In this
case, the transmittance of the glazing is adjusted to just meet the daylight illuminance set point at
the first daylighting reference point (see Daylighting). This type of control assures that there is just
enough solar gain to meet the daylighting requirements in a zone, and no more, thus reducing the
cooling load.
To specify the order of when shades are deployed, the two different approaches can be used:
376 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

- If shades for each window are independently controlled, than a single WindowShadingControl
object should be used and the Multiple Surface Control Type field should be set to Sequential. The
windows should be specified in the Fenestration Surface N Name fields in the order that they should
be deployed. The Shading Control Sequence Number field is not used being used since only one
WindowShadingControl is used so it can be set to any value or left blank.
- If shades for a group of windows are deployed together and shades for another group of windows
are deployed after that, than multiple WindowShadingControl objects should be used. Each Win-
dowShadingControl should have Multiple Surface Control Type field should be set to Group and the
names of each window in the group should be specified in the Fenestration Surface N Name fields.
The Shading Control Sequence Number in the WindowShadingControl object that controls the first
group of shades should be set to 1. The Shading Control Sequence Number in the WindowShading-
Control object that controls the second group of shades should be set to 2. Any number of additional
groups of shades can be added and Shading Control Sequence Number can be incremented by one
for each group.
It is possible to mix these two approaches. For example, if first a group of shades is controlled together
followed by a sequence of individual windows than these approaches can be combined with the
Multiple Surface Control Type field should be set to Sequential in the second WindowShadingControl
object.

1.10.61.1 Inputs

1.10.61.1.1 Field: Name

Name of the window shading control.

1.10.61.1.2 Field: Zone Name

Name of the zone where this shading control is used.

1.10.61.1.3 Field: Shading Control Sequence Number

If multiple WindowShadingControl objects are used in the same zone, then the order that they
deploy the window shades can be set with this field. The first WindowShadingControl should be
1 and subsequent WindowShadingControl should 2, 3, etc. This is usually used when the Multiple
Surface Control Type field is set to Group to control groups of windows in a certain order.

1.10.61.1.4 Field: Shading Type

The type of shading device. The choices are:
InteriorShade: A diffusing shade is on the inside of the window. (In the shaded Construction the
shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Shade.)
ExteriorShade: A diffusing shade is on the outside of the window. (In the shaded Construction the
shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Shade.)
BetweenGlassShade: A diffusing shade is between two glass layers. (In the shaded Construction the
shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Shade.) This shading type is allowed only for double- and
triple-glazing. For triple-glazing the shade must be between the two inner glass layers.
ExteriorScreen: An insect screen is on the outside of the window. (In the shaded Construction the
shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Screen.)
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 377

InteriorBlind: A slat-type shading device, such as a Venetian blind, is on the inside of the window.
(In the shaded Construction the shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Blind.)
ExteriorBlind: A slat-type shading device is on the outside of the window. (In the shaded Construc-
tion the shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Blind.)
BetweenGlassBlind: A slat-type shading device is between two glass layers. (In the shaded Con-
struction the shading layer must be a WindowMaterial:Blind.) This shading type is allowed only for
double- and triple-glazing. For triple-glazing the blind must be between the two inner glass layers.
SwitchableGlazing: Shading is achieved by changing the characteristics of the window glass, such as
by darkening it.

1.10.61.1.5 Field: Construction with Shading Name

Name of the window Construction that has the shading in place. The properties of the shad-
ing device are given by the shading material referenced in that Construction (ref: Construction,
WindowMaterial:Shade, WindowMaterial:Screen and WindowMaterial:Blind). For Shading Type
= SwitchableGlazing, this is the name of the Construction that corresponds to the window in its
fully-switched (darkest) state.
Specifying “Name of Construction with Shading” is required if Shading Type = BetweenGlassShade,
BetweenGlassBlind, or SwitchableGlazing. For other Shading Types, you may alternatively specify
“Material Name of Shading Device” (see below).

1.10.61.1.6 Field: Shading Control Type

Specifies how the shading device is controlled, i.e., it determines whether the shading device is “on”
or “off.” For blinds, screens and shades, when the device is “on” it is assumed to cover all of the
window except its frame; when the device is “off” it is assumed to cover none of the window (whether
“on” or “off” the shading device is assumed to cover none of the wall that the window is on).
For switchable glazing, “on” means that the glazing is in the fully-switched state and “off” means
that it is in the unswitched state; for example, for electrochromic glazing, “on” means the glazing is
in its darkest state and “off” means it is in its lightest state.
The choices for Shading Control Type are the following. If SetPoint is applicable its units are shown
in parentheses.
AlwaysOn: Shading is always on.
AlwaysOff : Shading is always off.
The following six control types are used primarily to reduce zone cooling load due to window solar
gain.
OnIfScheduleAllows: Shading is on if schedule value is non-zero. Requires that Schedule Name be
specified and Shading Control Is Scheduled = Yes.
Note: For exterior window screens AlwaysOn, AlwaysOff, and OnIfScheduleAllows are the only valid
shading control types.
OnIfHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is on if beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on the window
exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 ) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighHorizontalSolar: Shading is on if total (beam plus diffuse) horizontal solar irradiance ex-
ceeds SetPoint (W/m2 ) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
378 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

OnIfHighOutdoorAirTemperature: Shading is on if outside air temperature exceeds SetPoint (C) and

schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighZoneAirTemperature: Shading is on if zone air temperature in the previous timestep exceeds
SetPoint (C) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighZoneCooling: Shading is on if zone cooling rate in the previous timestep exceeds SetPoint
(W) and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
OnIfHighGlare: Shading is on if the total daylight glare index at the zone’s first daylighting reference
point from all of the exterior windows in the zone exceeds the maximum glare index specified in the
daylighting input for zone (ref: Group – Daylighting). Applicable only to windows in zones with
daylighting.
Note: Unlike other Shading Control Types, glare control is active whether or not a schedule is
specified.
MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint: Used only with ShadingType = SwitchableGlazing in zones with
daylighting controls. In this case the transmittance of the glazing is adjusted to just meet the day-
light illuminance set point at the first daylighting reference point. Note that the daylight illuminance
set point is specified in the Daylighting:Controls object for the Zone; it is not specified as a Win-
dowShadingControl SetPoint. When the glare control is active, if meeting the daylight illuminance
set point at the first daylighting reference point results in higher discomfort glare index (DGI) than
the specified zone’s maximum allowable DGI for either of the daylight reference points, the glazing
will be further dimmed until the DGI equals the specified maximum allowable value.
The following three control types can be used to reduce zone heating load during the winter by
reducing window conductive heat loss at night and leaving the window unshaded during the day
to maximize solar gain. They are applicable to any Shading Type except ExteriorScreen but are
most appropriate for interior or exterior shades with high insulating value (“movable insulation”).
“Night” means the sun is down and “day” means the sun is up.
OnNightIfLowOutdoorTempAndOffDay: Shading is on at night if the outside air temperature is less
than SetPoint (C) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
OnNightIfLowInsideTempAndOffDay: Shading is on at night if the zone air temperature in the
previous timestep is less than SetPoint (C) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off
during the day.
OnNightIfHeatingAndOffDay: Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous timestep
exceeds SetPoint (W) and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
The following two control types can be used to reduce zone heating and cooling load. They are
applicable to any Shading Type except ExteriorScreen but are most appropriate for translucent
interior or exterior shades with high insulating value (“translucent movable insulation”).
OnNightIfLowOutdoorTempAndOnDayIfCooling: Shading is on at night if the outside air tempera-
ture is less than SetPoint (C). Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous
timestep is non-zero. Night and day shading is subject to schedule, if specified.
OnNightIfHeatingAndOnDayIfCooling: Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the previous
timestep exceeds SetPoint (W). Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous
timestep is non-zero. Night and day shading is subject to schedule, if specified.
The following control types can be used to reduce zone cooling load. They are applicable to any
Shading Type except ExteriorScreen but are most appropriate for interior or exterior blinds, interior
or exterior shades with low insulating value, or switchable glazing.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 379

OffNightAndOnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is off at night. Shading is on during

the day if the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 ) and if the zone cooling
rate in the previous timestep is non-zero. Daytime shading is subject to schedule, if specified.
OnNightAndOnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is on at night. Shading is on during
the day if the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint (W/m2 ) and if the zone
cooling rate in the previous timestep is non-zero. Day and night shading is subject to schedule, if
specified. (This Shading Control Type is the same as the previous one, except the shading is on at
night rather than off.)
OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is on if the outside air temperature
exceeds the Setpoint (C) and if the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint 2
(W/m2 ).
OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighHorizontalSolar: Shading is on if the outside air temperature
exceeds the Setpoint (C) and if the horizontal solar radiation exceeds SetPoint 2 (W/m2 ).
OnIfHighZoneAirTempAndHighSolarOnWindow: Shading is on if the zone air temperature exceeds
the Setpoint (C) and if the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds SetPoint 2 (W/m2 ).
OnIfHighZoneAirTempAndHighHorizontalSolar: Shading is on if the zone air temperature exceeds
the Setpoint (C) and if the horizontal solar radiation exceeds SetPoint 2 (W/m2 ).

1.10.61.1.7 Field: Schedule Name

Required if Shading Control Is Scheduled = Yes. If schedule value > 0 , shading control is active,
i.e., shading can be on only if the shading control test passes. If schedule value = 0, shading is off
whether or not the control test passes. If Schedule Name is not specified, shading control is assumed
to be active at all times.

1.10.61.1.8 Field: Setpoint

The setpoint for activating window shading. The units depend on the type of trigger:

– W/m2 for solar-based controls

– W for cooling- or heating-based controls
– Degrees C for temperature-based controls

SetPoint is unused for Shading Control Type = OnIfScheduleAllows, OnIfHighGlare and Daylight-
Illuminance.

1.10.61.1.9 Field: Shading Control Is Scheduled

Accepts values YES and NO. The default is NO. Not applicable for Shading Control Type =
OnIfHighGlare and should be blank in that case.
If YES, Schedule Name is required and that schedule determines whether the shading control specified
by Shading Control Type is active or inactive (see Schedule Name, above).
If NO, Schedule Name is not applicable (should be blank) and the shading control is unscheduled.
Shading Control Is Scheduled = YES is required if Shading Control Type = OnIfScheduleAllows.
380 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.61.1.10 Field: Glare Control Is Active

Accepts values YES and NO. The default is NO.
If YES and the window is in a daylit zone, shading is on if the zone’s discomfort glare index exceeds
the maximum discomfort glare index specified in the Daylighting object referenced by the zone. For
switchable windows with MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint shading control, if Glare Control is active,
the windows are always continuously dimmed as necessary to meet the zone’s maximum allowable
DGI while providing appropriate amount of daylight for the zone.
The glare test is OR’ed with the test specified by Shading Control Type. For example, if Glare
Control Is Active = YES and Shading Control Type = OnIfHighZoneAirTemp, then shading is on
if glare is too high OR if the zone air temperature is too high.
Glare Control Is Active = YES is required if Shading Control Type = OnIfHighGlare.

1.10.61.1.11 Field: Shading Device Material Name

The name of a WindowMaterial:Shade, WindowMaterial:Screen or WindowMaterial:Blind. Required
if “Name of Construction with Shading” is not specified. Not applicable if Shading Type = Be-
tweenGlassShade, BetweenGlassBlind or SwitchableGlazing and should be blank in this case. If
both “Name of Construction with Shading” and “Material Name of Shading Device” are entered the
former takes precedence.

1.10.61.1.12 Field: Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds

Applies only to Shading Type = InteriorBlind, ExteriorBlind or BetweenGlassBlind. Specifies how
the slat angle is controlled. The choices are FixedSlatAngle, ScheduledSlatAngle and BlockBeam-
Solar.
If FixedSlatAngle (the default), the angle of the slat is fixed at the value input for the WindowMa-
terial:Blind that is contained in the construction specified by Name of Construction with Shading
or is specified by Material Name of Shading Device.
If ScheduledSlatAngle, the slat angle varies according to the schedule specified by Slat Angle Schedule
Name, below.
If BlockBeamSolar, the slat angle is set each timestep to just block beam solar radiation. If there is
no beam solar on the window the slat angle is set to the value input for the WindowMaterial:Blind
that is contained in the construction specified by Name of Construction with Shading or is specified
by Material Name of Shading Device. The BlockBeamSolar option prevents beam solar from entering
the window and causing possible unwanted glare if the beam falls on work surfaces while at the same
time allowing near-optimal indirect radiation for daylighting.

1.10.61.1.13 Field: Slat Angle Schedule Name

This is the name of a schedule of slat angles that is used when Type of Slat Angle Control for
Blinds = ScheduledSlatAngle. You should be sure that the schedule values fall within the range
given by the Minimum Slat Angle and Maximum Slat Angle values entered in the corresponding
WindowMaterial:Blind. If not, the program will force them into this range.

1.10.61.1.14 Field: Setpoint 2

Used only as the second setpoint for the following setpoint control types: OnIfHighOut-
doorAirTempAndHighSolarOnWindow, OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighHorizontalSolar,
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 381

OnIfHighZoneAirTempAndHighSolarOnWindow, and OnIfHighZoneAirTempAndHighHorizontal-

Solar

1.10.61.1.15 Field: Daylighting Controls Object Name

Name of the Daylighting:Controls object that provides the glare and illuminance control to the zone.

1.10.61.1.16 Field: Multiple Surface Control Type

The field can have one of two options:
Sequential: The following list of fenestration surfaces are controlled individually in the order specified.
Group: The entire list of fenestration surfaces is controlled simultaneously, and if glare control is
needed, the entire group of window shades are deployed together a the same time.

1.10.61.1.17 Field: Fenestration Surface <n> Name

The name of a FenestrationSurface:Detailed, Window, or GlazedDoor object controlled by this Win-
dowShadingControl. This field can be repeated to apply the same shading control to more than
one fenestration surface. When Multiple Surface Control Type is set to Sequential, the order of the
Fenestration Surface Names is the order that the shades will be deployed. The object is extensible
so additional fields of fenestration surface names can be added to the object. All of the fenestration
surfaces must be either in the zone specified in the Zone Name field or in an adjacent zone connected
by an interior window.
An IDF example: window with interior roll shade that is deployed when solar incident on the window
exceeds 50 W/m2 .
! Example 1: Interior movable shade specified by giving name of shaded construction
! in WindowShadingControl

WindowMaterial:Glazing , GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN , !- Material Name

SpectralAverage ,! Optical data type { SpectralAverage or Spectral}
, ! Name of spectral data set when Optical Data Type = Spectral
0.003 , !- Thickness {m}
0.837 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.075 , !- Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Front Side
0.075 , !- Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Back Side
0.898 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.081 , !- Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Front Side
0.081 , !- Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Back Side
0.0 , !- IR Transmittance
0.8400000 , !- IR Emissivity: Front Side
0.8400000 , !- IR Emissivity: Back Side
0.9000000 ; !- Conductivity {W/m-K}

WindowMaterial:Shade , ROLL SHADE , !- Material Name

0.3 , !- Solar Transmittance at normal incidence
0.5000000 , !- Solar Reflectance (same for front and back side)
0.3 , !- Visible Transmittance at normal incidence
0.5000000 , !- Visible reflectance (same for front and back side)
0.9000000 , !- IR Emissivity (same for front and back side)
0.05 , !- IR Transmittance
0.003 , !- Thickness
0.1 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
0.0 , !- Top Opening Multiplier
0.0 , !- Bottom Opening Multiplier
0.5 , !- Left -Side Opening Multiplier
0.5 , !- Right -Side Opening Multiplier
0.0 ; !- Air -Flow Permeability
382 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Construction , SINGLE PANE WITH NO SHADE , ! Name of construction without shade

GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN; !- First material layer

Construction , SINGLE PANE WITH INT SHADE , ! Name of construction with shade
GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN , !- First material layer
ROLL SHADE ; !- Second material layer

WindowShadingControl ,
CONTROL ON INCIDENT SOLAR , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
1, !- Shading Control Sequence Number
InteriorShade , !- Shading Type
SINGLE PANE WITH INT SHADE , !- Name of construction with shading device
OnIfHighSolarOnWindow , !- Shading Control Type
, !- Schedule name
50.0, !- Setpoint {W/m2}
NO , !- Shading Control Is Scheduled
NO , !- Glare Control Is Active
, !- Material Name of Shading Device
, !- Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds
, !- Slat Angle Schedule Name
, !- Setpoint 2 {W/m2 or deg C}
West Zone_DaylCtrl , !- Daylighting Control Object Name
Sequential , !- Multiple Surface Control Type
Zn001:Wall001:Win001; !- Fenestration Surface 1 Name

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- SubSurface Name
Window , !- Class
SINGLE PANE WITH NO SHADE , !- Name of construction without shading device
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Target
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
, !- Frame/Divider name
1.0 , !- Multiplier
4 , !- Number of vertices (assumed rectangular)
0.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 , !- x,y,z of vertices {m}
0.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 ;

! Example 2: Interior movable shade specified by giving name of shading device in

WindowShadingControl

WindowMaterial:Glazing , GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN , !- Material Name

SpectralAverage ,! Optical data type { SpectralAverage or Spectral}
, ! Name of spectral data set when Optical Data Type = Spectral
0.003 , !- Thickness {m}
0.837 , !- Solar Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.075 , !- Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Front Side
0.075 , !- Solar Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Back Side
0.898 , !- Visible Transmittance at Normal Incidence
0.081 , !- Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Front Side
0.081 , !- Visible Reflectance at Normal Incidence: Back Side
0.0 , !- IR Transmittance
0.8400000 , !- IR Emissivity: Front Side
0.8400000 , !- IR Emissivity: Back Side
0.9000000 ; !- Conductivity {W/m-K}

WindowMaterial:Shade , ROLL SHADE , !- Material Name

0.3 , !- Solar Transmittance at normal incidence
0.5000000 , !- Solar Reflectance (same for front and back side)
0.3 , !- Visible Transmittance at normal incidence
0.5000000 , !- Visible reflectance (same for front and back side)
0.9000000 , !- IR Emissivity (same for front and back side)
0.05 , !- IR Transmittance
0.003 , !- Thickness
0.1 , !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
0.0 , !- Top Opening Multiplier
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 383

0.0 , !- Bottom Opening Multiplier

0.5 , !- Left -Side Opening Multiplier
0.5 , !- Right -Side Opening Multiplier
0.0 ; !- Air -Flow Permeability

Construction , SINGLE PANE WITH NO SHADE , ! Name of construction without shade

GLASS - CLEAR SHEET 1 / 8 IN; !- First material layer

WindowShadingControl ,
CONTROL ON INCIDENT SOLAR , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
1, !- Shading Control Sequence Number
InteriorShade , !- Shading Type
, !- Name of shaded construction
OnIfHighSolarOnWindow , !- Shading Control Type
, !- Schedule name
50.0, !- Setpoint {W/m2}
NO , !- Shading Control Is Scheduled
NO , !- Glare Control Is Active
ROLL SHADE , !- Material Name of Shading Device
, !- Type of Slat Angle Control for Blinds
, !- Slat Angle Schedule Name
, !- Setpoint 2 {W/m2 or deg C}
West Zone_DaylCtrl , !- Daylighting Control Object Name
Sequential , !- Multiple Surface Control Type
Zn001:Wall001:Win001; !- Fenestration Surface 1 Name

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- SubSurface Name
Window , !- Class
SINGLE PANE WITH NO SHADE , !- Name of construction without shade
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Target
0.5000000 , !- VF to Ground
, !- Frame/Divider name
1.0 , !- Multiplier
4 , !- Number of vertices (assumed rectangular)
0.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 , !- x,y,z of vertices {m}
0.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 0.5 ,
5.548 , 0.0 , 2.5 ;

1.10.62 WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider
The WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider object is referenced by exterior windows that have

– a frame, and/or
– a divider, and/or
– reveal surfaces that reflect beam solar radiation.

A frame surrounds the glazing in a window (see Figure 1.37 and Figure 1.38). It is assumed that
all frame characteristics—such as width, conductance and solar absorptance—are the same for the
top, bottom and side elements of the frame. If the frame elements are not the same then you should
enter area-weighted average values for the frame characteristics.
The window vertices that you specify in the FenestrationSurface:Detailed object are those of the
glazed part of the window, not the frame. EnergyPlus automatically subtracts the area of the
frame—determined from the glazing dimensions and the frame width—from the area of the wall
containing the window.
384 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

A divider, as shown in Figure 1.37, Figure 1.38 and Figure 1.39, divides the glazing up into separate
lites. It is assumed that all divider elements have the same characteristics. If not, area-weighted
average values should be used. EnergyPlus automatically subtracts the divider area from the glazed
area of the window.
Reveal surfaces, as shown in Figure 1.40, are associated with the setback of the glazing from the
outside and/or inside surface of the parent wall. If the depth and solar absorptance of these surfaces
are specified, the program will calculate the reflection of beam solar radiation from these surfaces.
The program also calculates the shadowing (onto the window) of beam and diffuse solar radiation
by outside reveal surfaces.
In EnergyPlus, a window can have any combination of frame, divider and reveal surfaces, or none
of these.
The best source of frame and divider characteristics is the WINDOW program, which will calcu-
late the values required by EnergyPlus for different frame and divider types. In particular, the
THERM program within the WINDOW program will calculate the effective conductance of frames
and dividers; this is the conductance taking 2-D heat transfer effects into account.
Note that a window’s frame and divider characteristics, along with other window information, can
be read in from the Window Data File (see “Importing Windows from the WINDOW program”
and “Construction:WindowDataFile object”). In this case the WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider
referenced by the window is not applicable and should be blank unless you want to specify reveal
surfaces for beam solar reflection.
In the illustration above, the divider has two horizontal elements and one vertical element.

1.10.62.1 Inputs

1.10.62.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the frame/divider object. It is referenced by WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider Name
in FenestrationSurface:Detailed.
Frame Fields

1.10.62.1.2 Field: Frame Width

The width of the frame elements when projected onto the plane of the window. It is assumed that
the top, bottom and side elements of the frame have the same width. If not, an average frame width
should be entered such that the projected frame area calculated using the average value equals the
sum of the areas of the frame elements.

1.10.62.1.3 Field: Frame Outside Projection

The amount by which the frame projects outward from the outside surface of the window glazing.
If the outer surface of the frame is flush with the glazing, Frame Outside Projection = 0.0. Used
to calculate shadowing of frame onto glass, solar absorbed by frame, IR emitted and absorbed by
frame, and convection from frame.

1.10.62.1.4 Field: Frame Inside Projection

The amount by which the frame projects inward from the inside surface of the window glazing. If
the inner surface of the frame is flush with the glazing, Frame Inside Projection = 0.0. Used to
calculate solar absorbed by frame, IR emitted and absorbed by frame, and convection from frame.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 385

Figure 1.37: A window with a frame and divider.

386 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.38: Illustration showing frame and divider dimensioning.

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 387

1.10.62.1.5 Field: Frame Conductance

The effective thermal conductance of the frame measured from inside to outside frame surface (no
air films) and taking 2-D conduction effects into account. Obtained from the WINDOW program or
other 2-D calculation.

1.10.62.1.6 Field: Ratio of Frame-Edge Glass Conductance to Center-Of-Glass

Conductance
The glass conductance near the frame (excluding air films) divided by the glass conductance at the
center of the glazing (excluding air films). Used only for multi-pane glazing constructions. This
ratio is greater than 1.0 because of thermal bridging from the glazing across the frame and across
the spacer that separates the glass panes. Values can be obtained from the WINDOW program the
user-selected glazing construction and frame characteristics.

1.10.62.1.7 Field: Frame Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance of the frame. The value is assumed to be the same on the inside and outside
of the frame and to be independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If solar reflectance
(or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque
materials).

1.10.62.1.8 Field: Frame Visible Absorptance

The visible absorptance of the frame. The value is assumed to be the same on the inside and outside
of the frame and to be independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If visible reflectance
(or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque
materials).

1.10.62.1.9 Field: Frame Thermal Hemispherical Emissivity

The thermal emissivity of the frame, assumed the same on the inside and outside.
Divider Fields

1.10.62.1.10 Field: Divider Type

The type of divider (see figure below). Divider Type = Suspended is applicable only to multi-pane
glazing. It means that the divider is suspended between the panes. (If there are more than two glass
layers, the divider is assumed to be placed between the two outermost layers.)
Divider Type = DividedLite means that the divider elements project out from the outside and inside
surfaces of the glazing and divide the glazing into individual lites. For multi-pane glazing, this type
of divider also has between-glass elements that separate the panes.

1.10.62.1.11 Field: Divider Width

The width of the divider elements when projected onto the plane of the window. It is assumed that
the horizontal and vertical divider elements have the same width. If not, an average divider width
should be entered such that the projected divider area calculated using the average value equals the
sum of the areas of the divider elements.
388 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.39: Illustration showing divider types.

1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 389

1.10.62.1.12 Field: Number of Horizontal Dividers

The number of divider elements parallel to the top and bottom of the window.

1.10.62.1.13 Field: Number of Vertical Dividers

The number of divider elements parallel to the sides of the window.

1.10.62.1.14 Field: Divider Outside Projection

The amount by which the divider projects out from the outside surface of the window glazing. For
Divider Type = Suspended, Divider Projection = 0.0. Used to calculate shadowing of divider onto
glass, solar absorbed by divider, IR emitted and absorbed by divider, and convection from divider.

1.10.62.1.15 Field: Divider Inside Projection

The amount by which the divider projects inward from the inside surface of the window glazing.
If the inner surface of the divider is flush with the glazing, Divider Inside Projection = 0.0. Used
to calculate solar absorbed by divider, IR emitted and absorbed by divider, and convection from
divider.

1.10.62.1.16 Field: Divider Conductance

The effective thermal conductance of the divider measured from inside to outside divider surface (no
air films) and taking 2-D conduction effects into account. Obtained from the WINDOW program or
other 2-D calculation.

1.10.62.1.17 Field: Ratio of Divider-Edge Glass Conductance to Center-Of-Glass

Conductance
The glass conductance near the divider (excluding air films) divided by the glass conductance at
the center of the glazing (excluding air films). Used only for multi-pane glazing constructions. This
ratio is greater than 1.0 because of thermal bridging from the glazing across the divider and across
the spacer that separates the glass panes. Values can be obtained from the WINDOW program for
the user-selected glazing construction and divider characteristics.

1.10.62.1.18 Field: Divider Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance of the divider. The value is assumed to be the same on the inside and outside
of the divider and to be independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If solar reflectance
(or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque
materials).

1.10.62.1.19 Field: Divider Visible Absorptance

The visible absorptance of the divider. The value is assumed to be the same on the inside and outside
of the divider and to be independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If visible reflectance
(or reflectivity) data is available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque
materials).
390 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.62.1.20 Field: Divider Thermal Hemispherical Emissivity

The thermal emissivity of the divider, assumed the same on the inside and outside.
Reveal Surface Fields
The following fields specify the properties of the window reveal surfaces (reveals occur when the
window is not in the same plane as the base surface). From this information and from the geometry
of the window and the sun position, the program calculates beam solar radiation absorbed and
reflected by the top, bottom, right and left sides of outside and inside window reveal surfaces. In
doing this calculation, the shadowing on a reveal surface by other reveal surfaces is determined using
the orientation of the reveal surfaces and the sun position.
It is assumed that:

– The window is an exterior window.

– The reveal surfaces are perpendicular to the window plane.
– If an exterior shade, screen or blind is in place it shades exterior and interior reveal surfaces so
that in this case there is no beam solar on these surfaces.
– If an interior shade or blind is in place it shades the interior reveal surfaces so that in this case
there is no beam solar on these surfaces.
– The possible shadowing on inside reveal surfaces by a window divider is ignored.
– The outside reveal surfaces (top, bottom, left, right) have the same solar absorptance and
depth. This depth is not input here but is automatically determined by the program—from
window and wall vertices–as the distance between the plane of the outside face of the glazing
and plane of the outside face of the parent wall.
– The inside reveal surfaces are divided into two categories: (1) the bottom reveal surface, called
here the “inside sill;” and (2) the other reveal surfaces (left, right and top).
– The left, right and top inside reveal surfaces have the same depth and solar absorptance. The
inside sill is allowed to have depth and solar absorptance values that are different from the
corresponding values for the other inside reveal surfaces.
– The inside sill depth is required to be greater than or equal to the depth of the other inside
reveal surfaces. If the inside sill depth is greater than zero the depth of the other inside reveal
surfaces is required to be greater than zero.
– The reflection of beam solar radiation from all reveal surfaces is assumed to be isotropic diffuse;
there is no specular component.
– Half of the beam solar reflected from outside reveal surfaces is goes towards the window;
the other half goes back to the exterior environment (i.e., reflection of this outward-going
component from other outside reveal surfaces is not considered).
– The half that goes towards the window is added to the other solar radiation incident on the
window. Correspondingly, half of the beam solar reflected from inside reveal surfaces goes
towards the window, with the other half going into the zone. The portion going towards the
window that is not reflected is absorbed in the glazing or is transmitted back out into the
exterior environment.
– The beam solar that is absorbed by outside reveal surfaces is added to the solar absorbed by
the outside surface of the window’s parent wall; similarly, the beam solar absorbed by the
inside reveal surfaces is added to the solar absorbed by the inside surface of the parent wall.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 391

The net effect of beam solar reflected from outside reveal surfaces is to increase the heat gain to the
zone, whereas the effect of beam solar reflected from inside reveal surfaces is to decrease the heat
gain to the zone since part of this reflected solar is transmitted back out the window.
If the window has a frame, the absorption of reflected beam solar by the inside and outside surfaces
of the frame is considered. The shadowing of the frame onto interior reveal surfaces is also considered.

1.10.62.1.21 Field: Outside Reveal Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance of outside reveal surfaces.

1.10.62.1.22 Field: Inside Sill Depth

The depth of the inside sill, measured from the inside surface of the glazing to the edge of the sill
(see Figure 1.40).

1.10.62.1.23 Field: Inside Sill Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance of the inside sill.
Field: Inside Reveal Depth
The depth of the inside reveal surfaces other than the sill, measured from the inside surface of the
glazing to the edge of the reveal surface (see Figure 1.40).

1.10.62.1.24 Field: Inside Reveal Solar Absorptance

The solar absorptance of the inside reveal surfaces other than the sill.
An IDF example:

WindowProperty:FrameAndDivider ,
TestFrameAndDivider , ! Frame/Divider Name
0.05, ! Frame Width
0.04, ! Frame Outside Projection
0.03, ! Frame Inside Projection
5.0, ! Frame Conductance
1.3, ! Ratio of Frame -Edge Glass Conductance to Center -Of -Glass Conductance
0.8, ! Frame Solar Absorptance
0.8, ! Frame Visible Absorptance
0.9, ! Frame Thermal Emissivity
DividedLite , ! Divider Type
0.03, ! Divider Width
2, ! Number of Horizontal Dividers
2, ! Number of Vertical Dividers
0.03, ! Divider Outside Projection
0.03, ! Divider Inside Projection
5.0, ! Divider Conductance
1.3, ! Ratio of Divider -Edge Glass Conductance to Center -Of -Glass Conductance
0.8, ! Divider Solar Absorptance
0.8, ! Divider Visible Absorptance
0.9, ! Divider Thermal Emissivity
0.7, ! Outside Reveal Solar Absorptance
0.25, ! Inside Sill Depth (m)
0.6, ! Inside Sill Solar Absorptance
0.2, ! Inside Reveal Depth (m)
0.5; ! Inside Reveal Solar Absorptance
392 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.40: (a) Vertical section through a window (with frame) showing outside and inside reveal
surfaces and inside sill. (b) Perspective view looking from the outside of a window (without frame)
showing reveal surfaces. Note that “Outside Reveal Depth” is not a user input; it is calculated by
the program from the window and wall vertices.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 393

1.10.63 WindowProperty:AirflowControl
This object is used to specify the control mechanism for windows in which forced air flows in the gap
between adjacent layers of glass. Such windows are called “airflow windows.” They are also known
as “heat-extract windows” or “climate windows.”
A common application is to reduce the zone load by exhausting indoor air through the window. In
the cooling season this picks up and expels some of the solar heat absorbed by the window glass
(and by the between-glass shade or blind, if present). In the heating season this warms the window,
reducing the heat loss from the window. A side benefit is increased thermal comfort. This is because
the inside surface of the window will generally be cooler in summer and warmer in winter.
The surface output variable “Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Rate” gives the heat
picked up (or lost) by the gap airflow.

1.10.63.1 Inputs

1.10.63.1.1 Field: Name

Name of the window that this WindowProperty:AirflowControl refers to. It must be a window with
two or three glass layers, i.e., double- or triple-glazing. For triple-glazing the airflow is assumed to
be between the two inner glass layers.
An error will result if the gas in the airflow gap is other than air. If an airflow window has a
between-glass shade or blind, the gas in the gap on either side of the shade or blind must be air.

1.10.63.1.2 Field: Airflow Source

The source of the gap airflow. The choices are:
IndoorAir: Indoor air from the window’s zone is passed through the window.
OutdoorAir: Outdoor air is passed through the window.

1.10.63.1.3 Field: Airflow Destination

This is where the gap air goes after passing through the window. The choices are:
IndoorAir: The gap air goes to the indoor air of the window’s zone.
OutdoorAir: The gap air goes to the outside air.
ReturnAir. The gap air goes to the return air for the window’s zone. This choice is allowed only if
Airflow Source = InsideAir. If the return air flow is zero, the gap air goes to the indoor air of the
window’s zone. If the sum of the gap airflow for all of the windows in a zone with Airflow Destination
= ReturnAir exceeds the return airflow, then the difference between this sum and the return airflow
goes to the indoor air. The name of the Return Air Node may be specified below.
Figure 1.41 shows the allowed combinations of Airflow Source and Airflow Destination. The allowed
combinations of Airflow Source and Airflow Destination are:
IndoorAir -> OutdoorAir
IndoorAir -> IndoorAir
IndoorAir -> ReturnAir
OutdoorAir -> IndoorAir
OutdoorAir -> OutdoorAir
394 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.63.1.4 Field: Maximum Flow Rate

The maximum value of the airflow, in m3 /s per m of glazing width. The value is typically 0.006 to
0.009 m3 /s-m (4 to 6 cfm/ft).
The airflow can be modulated by specifying Airflow Has Multiplier Schedule = Yes and giving the
name of the Airflow Multiplier Schedule (see below).
The fan energy used to move the air through the gap is generally very small and so is ignored.

1.10.63.1.5 Field: Airflow Control Type

Specifies how the airflow is controlled. The choices are:
AlwaysOnAtMaximumFlow. The airflow is always equal to Maximum Airflow.
AlwaysOff. The airflow is always zero.
ScheduledOnly. The airflow in a particular timestep equals Maximum Airflow times the value of the
Airflow Multiplier Schedule for that timestep.

1.10.63.1.6 Field: Airflow Is Scheduled

Specifies if the airflow is scheduled. The choices are:
Yes. The airflow is scheduled.
No. The airflow is not scheduled.
If Yes, Airflow Multiplier Schedule Name is required.

1.10.63.1.7 Field: Airflow Multiplier Schedule Name

The name of a schedule with values between 0.0 and 1.0. The timestep value of the airflow is
Maximum Airflow times the schedule value. Required if Airflow Is Scheduled = Yes. Unused if
Airflow Is Scheduled = No. This schedule should have a ScheduleType with Numeric Type =
Continuous and Range = 0.0 : 1.0.

1.10.63.1.8 Field: Airflow Return Air Node Name

The name of the return air node for this airflow window if the Airflow Destination is ReturnAir. If
left blank, this defaults to the first return air node for the zone containing the window surface.
An IDF example: window with a constant airflow from inside to outside at 0.008 m3 /s-m.
WindowProperty:AirflowControl ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win002 , !- Name
InsideAir , !- Airflow Source
OutsideAir , !- Airflow Destination
0.008 , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s-m}
AlwaysOnAtMaxFlow , !- Airflow Control Type
No , !- Airflow Is Scheduled
; !- Airflow Multiplier Schedule Name
, !- Airflow Return Air Node Name
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 395

Figure 1.41: Gap airflow configurations for airflow windows. (a) Air exhaust window: Airflow
Source = InsideAir, Airflow Destination = OutsideAir; (b) Indoor air curtain window: Airflow
Source = InsideAir, Airflow Destination = InsideAir; (c) Air supply window: Airflow Source =
OutsideAir, Airflow Destination = InsideAir; (d) Outdoor air curtain window: Airflow Source
= OutsideAir, Airflow Destination = OutsideAir; (e) Airflow to Return Air: Airflow Source =
InsideAir, Airflow Destination = ReturnAir. Based on “Active facades,” Version no. 1, Belgian
Building Research Institute, June 2002.
396 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.64 WindowProperty:StormWindow
This object allows you to assign a movable exterior glass layer (“storm window” or “storm glass”)
that is usually applied to a window in the winter to reduce heat loss and removed in the summer.
A WindowProperty:StormWindow object is required for each window that has an associated storm
window. It is assumed that:

– When the storm glass is in place it is the outermost layer of the window, it covers only the
glazed part of the window and not the frame, and it forms a tight seal. See Figure 1.42.
– When the storm glass is not in place it is completely removed and has no effect on window
heat transfer.
– The gap between the storm glass and rest of the glazing is filled with air.

Figure 1.42: Section through a single-glazed window without (left) and with (right) a storm glass
layer. Not to scale.

With the addition of a storm window, single glazing effectively becomes double glazing, double
glazing becomes triple glazing, etc.
The presence of a storm window is indicated by the output variable “Surface Storm Window On Off
Status” (see “Window Output Variables”). This flag is 0 if the storm window is off, 1 if it is on, and
–1 if the window does not have an associated storm window.
The program automatically creates a window construction (ref: Construction) that consists of the
storm window glass layer and its adjacent air layer added to the original (unshaded, or “bare”)
window construction. In the eplusout.eio file this construction is called BARECONSTRUCTION-
WITHSTORMWIN:n, where n is the number of the associated StormWin object. If the window
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 397

has a shaded construction, the program creates a construction called SHADEDCONSTRUCTION-

WITHSTORMWIN:n that consists of the storm window glass layer and its adjacent air layer added
to the original shaded window construction.
The program also creates a WindowMaterial:Gas layer corresponding to the air layer adjacent to
the storm glass. In the eplusout.eio file this layer is called AIR:STORMWIN:kMM, where k is the
thickness of the air layer expressed as an integer number of millimeters.

1.10.64.1 Inputs

1.10.64.1.1 Field: Window Name

This is the name of a window (or glass door) to which the storm glass is applied. Not all windows
can accept WindowProperty:StormWindow. The rules are:

– The window must be an exterior window. WindowProperty:StormWindow is not applicable to

interior (interzone) windows.
– The window construction (without the storm glass layer) can have up to three glass layers.
– If the window has an associated shaded construction (ref: WindowShadingControl), that con-
struction can have an interior shade or blind and up to three glass layers, or a between-glass
shade or blind and two glass layers. The shaded construction cannot have an exterior shade
or blind, cannot have a between-glass shade or blind and three glass layers, and cannot be
switchable glazing.
– The window cannot be an airflow window, i.e., a window that has an associated WindowProp-
erty:AirflowControl.

1.10.64.1.2 Field: Storm Glass Layer Name

This is the name of a window glass material. Storm windows are assumed to consist of a single layer
of glass. A storm window frame, if present, is ignored.

1.10.64.1.3 Field: Distance Between Storm Glass Layer and Adjacent Glass
The separation between the storm glass and the rest of the window (Figure 1.42). It is measured
from the inside of the storm glass layer to the outside of the adjacent glass layer.

1.10.64.1.4 Field: Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Put On

The number of the month (January = 1, February = 2, etc.) during which the storm window is put
in place.

1.10.64.1.5 Field: Day of Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Put On

The day of the month that the storm window is put in place. It is assumed that the storm window
is put in place at the beginning of this day, i.e., during the first simulation timestep of the day, and
remains in place until that month and day given by the following two fields.

1.10.64.1.6 Field: Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Taken Off

The number of the month (January = 1, February = 2, etc.) during which the storm window is
removed.
398 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.64.1.7 Field: Day of Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Taken Off
The day of the month that the storm window is removed. It is assumed that the storm window is
removed at the beginning of this day, i.e., during the first simulation timestep of the day, and stays
off until the month and day given by Month that Storm Glass Layer Is Put On, Day of Month that
Storm Glass Layer Is Put On.
In the northern hemisphere, the month the storm window is put on is generally greater than the
month it is taken off (for example put on in month 10, when it starts to get cold, and taken off in
month 5, when it starts to warm up). In the southern hemisphere this is reversed: month on is less
than month off.
An IDF example of WindowProperty:StormWindow. The storm window is put in place on October
15 and removed on May 1.
WindowProperty:StormWindow ,
Window1 , !- Name of Window to Which Storm Window Glass Layer is Applied
GlassA , !- Name of Material:WindowGlass or MATERIAL:WindowGlass:AltInput that is the storm
window layer
0.060 , !- Distance from storm window to adjacent glass (m)
10, !- Month that Storm Window Is Put On
15, !- Day of Month that Storm Window Is Put On
5, !- Month that Storm Window Is Taken Off
1; !- Day of Month that Storm Window Is Taken Off

1.10.65 Importing Windows from WINDOW program

WINDOW v6.3 and later is capable of writing IDF excerpts for Window data. This is the
preferred method as no external file is necessary. See the Tips document for details on obtaining
the IDF excerpt.

The WINDOW program calculates the U-value, Solar Heat Gain Coefficient, solar transmission/ab-
sorption characteristics, visible transmission characteristics and other properties of a window under
standard indoor and outdoor conditions. WINDOW treats the whole window system—glazing,
frame and divider. A sub-program of WINDOW called THERM uses a 2-D finite element calcula-
tion to determine the effective conductance of frame, divider and edge-of-glass elements. Another
sub-program, OPTICS, determines the solar-optical properties of glazing, including laminates and
coated glass.
WINDOW can write a data file containing a description of the window that was analyzed. An
example of this file (which is no longer the preferred method) is shown in the Tips document under
WINDOW generated files. is shown below. This file, which can be named by the user, can be
read by EnergyPlus. For more complete description and examples, see the object description –
Construction:WindowDataFile.
In this way, the same window that was created in WINDOW can be imported into EnergyPlus for
annual energy analysis without having to re-input the window data. To obtain WINDOW, THERM,
or OPTICS go to http://windows.lbl.gov and choose the software link. A major advantage of using
WINDOW to create window input for EnergyPlus is that you will have direct access to WINDOW’s
expanding database of over 1000 different glass types; and you will be able to browse through this
database according to different criteria (color, transmittance, solar heat gain coefficient, etc.) to
help you select the best glass type for your application.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 399

Although WINDOW writes only one window entry on the WINDOW data file, EnergyPlus users
can combine two or more of these files to end up with a single data file with multiple window entries
of different types. In this way a library of windows from WINDOW can be built up if so desired.
If you combine files like this you should be sure not to leave out or change any of lines from the
original files.
There are four methods for inputting window constructions in EnergyPlus:

1. input full spectral data for each layer in the IDF,

2. input spectral average data for each layer in the IDF,
3. items 1 and 2 can be accomplished by reporting the IDF excerpt method from WINDOW
4. import WINDOW report containing layer-by-layer calculated values and overall glazing system
angular values.

Note: When using method 4, the overall glazing system angular dependent prop-
erties, including Tsol, Abs, Rfsol, Rbsol, Tvis, Rfvis, and Rbvis, are not used by
EnergyPlus. Therefore, methods 1 and 2 and preferably 3 are recommended.

– The SHGC calculations in EnergyPlus for window layers input using full spectral data use
a spectral weighting data set (derived from Optics5 data file ISO-9845GlobalNorm.std) that
is different from the WINDOW default spectral weighting data set (W5_NFRC_2003.std).
This difference accounts for most of the variation in SHGC values reported by EnergyPlus and
WINDOW for full spectral data window layer input. This variation is more pronounced for
window constructions of three glass layers or more.
– Users intending to select a window construction based on SHGC value for energy code compli-
ance should base their selection on the value reported by WINDOW since this is the officially
recognized value.

In EnergyPlus, the Window data file is searched for each “Construction:WindowDataFile” object in
the EnergyPlus input. This object has a very simple form:
Construction:WindowDataFile ,
ConstructionName ,
FileName; ! Default is Window5DataFile.dat in the "run" folder.

If there is a window called ConstructionName on the Window data file, the data for that window
is read from the file and the following EnergyPlus objects and their names are created. The “W5”
prefixed to these names indicates that the object originated in the Window data file.

1.10.66 Using LBNLs Windows Calculation Engine

This is new windows simulation engine that will be used in both EnergyPlus and Berkeley Lab WIN-
DOW. The intent is for this engine to replace all other window calculation modules in EnergyPlus.
For the time being, other modules will still be available. To use the new Window Calculation Engine,
insert the following into IDF:
WindowsCalculationEngine ,
ExternalWindowsModel;
400 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.10.67 Zone Thermal Output(s)

In addition to the canned Surface reports (view the Reports section later in this document) and
surface variables (above), the following variables are available for all zones:
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Total Internal Radiant Heating Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Total Internal Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Total Internal Convective Heating Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Total Internal Latent Gain Energy [J]
Zone ,Sum ,Zone Total Internal Total Heating Energy [J]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Mean Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Mean Radiant Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Operative Temperature [C]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Heat Index [C]
Zone ,Average ,Zone Humidity Index [C]
HVAC ,Sum ,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Sum ,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air Humidity Ratio[kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air Relative Humidity [%]

Two of these are of particular interest:

Zone ,Average ,Zone Mean Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Air Temperature [C]

These two variable outputs are/should be identical. However, note that they can be reported at
different time intervals. “Zone Mean Air Temperature” is only available on the Zone/HB timestep
(Number of Timesteps per Hour) whereas “Zone Air Temperature” can be reported at the HVAC
timestep (which can vary).

1.10.67.1 Zone Mean Air Temperature [C]

From the code definition, the zone mean air temperature is the average temperature of the air
temperatures at the system timestep. Remember that the zone heat balance represents a “well
stirred” model for a zone, therefore there is only one mean air temperature to represent the air
temperature for the zone.

1.10.67.2 Zone Air Temperature [C]

This is very similar to the mean air temperature in the last field. The “well stirred” model for the
zone is the basis, but this temperature is also available at the “detailed” system timestep.

1.10.67.3 Zone Mean Radiant Temperature [C]

The Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT) in degrees Celsius of a space is really the measure of the
combined effects of temperatures of surfaces within that space. The larger the surface area and the
closer one is to it, the more effect the surface temperature of that surface has on each other. The
MRT is the measure of all these surface areas and temperatures.
1.10. GROUP – THERMAL ZONE DESCRIPTION/GEOMETRY 401

1.10.67.4 Zone Operative Temperature [C]

Zone Operative Temperature (OT) is the average of the Zone Mean Air Temperature (MAT) and
Zone Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT), OT = 0.5*MAT + 0.5*MRT. This output variable is not
affected by the type of thermostat controls in the zone, and does not include the direct effect of high
temperature radiant systems. See also Zone Thermostat Operative Temperature.

1.10.67.5 Zone Heat Index [C]

Zone heat index (HI) is an index that combines air temperature and relative humidity in shaded
areas, to posit a human-perceived equivalent temperature, as how hot it would feel if the humidity
were some other value in the shade. The HI measures the temperature feels like to the human body
when relative humidity is combined with the air temperature. Zone Heat Index is only reported
when ThermalResilienceSummary is declared in Output:Table:SummaryReports.

1.10.67.6 Zone Humdity Index [C]

The Humdity Index (humidex) is an index number used by Canadian meteorologists to describe
how hot the weather feels to the average person, by combining the effect of heat and humidity.
The humidex is a nominally dimensionless quantity (though generally recognized by the public as
equivalent to the degree Celsius) based on the dew-point temperature. Zone Humdity Index is only
reported when ThermalResilienceSummary is declared in Output:Table:SummaryReports.

1.10.67.7 Zone Air System Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This field represents the sensible heating energy in Joules that is actually supplied by the system to
that zone for the timestep reported. This is the sensible heating rate multiplied by the simulation
timestep. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the Zone Predictor-Corrector
module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.

Zone Air System Sensible Heating (and Cooling) Energy (and Rate) all report the heating or
cooling delivered by the HVAC system to a zone. These values are calculated by multiplying
the supply air mass flow rate by the difference between the supply air temperature and the zone
air temperature. This does not always indicate the operation of heating or cooling coils. For
example, cooling will be reported if the supply air is cooled due to the introduction of outside
air, even if all coils are off.
Note that these variables are calculated at the system timestep. When reported at the “detailed”
reporting frequency, these variable will never show heating and cooling both in the same system
timestep. If reported at a frequency less than “Detailed” (for example, Hourly) values may
appear in both the heating and cooling variable for the same hour if the system cooled the zone
for part of the reporting period and heated the zone for another part of the reporting period.

1.10.67.8 Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field represents the sensible cooling energy in Joules that is actually supplied by the system to
that zone for the timestep reported. This is the sensible cooling rate multiplied by the simulation
402 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

timestep. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the Zone Predictor-Corrector
module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers.

1.10.67.9 Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This field represents the sensible heating rate in Watts that is actually supplied by the system to
that zone for the timestep reported. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the
Zone Predictor-Corrector module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers. The
Zone Air System Sensible Heating Rate may not agree exactly with the equipment-level delivered
energy transfer rate when the zone temperature is changing significantly over a timestep (e.g. during
thermostat setback and setup), but the energy will balance out over time.

1.10.67.10 Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field represents the sensible cooling rate in Watts that is actually supplied by the system to
that zone for the timestep reported. This is calculated and reported from the Correct step in the
Zone Predictor-Corrector module. This field is not multiplied by zone or group multipliers. The
Zone Air System Sensible Cooling Rate may not agree exactly with the equipment-level delivered
energy transfer rate when the zone temperature is changing significantly over a timestep (e.g. during
thermostat setback and setup), but the energy will balance out over time.

1.10.67.11 Zone Air Humidity Ratio[kgWater/kgDryAir]

This field represents the air humidity ratio after the correct step for each zone. The humidity ratio
is the mass of water vapor to the mass of dry air contained in the zone in (kg water/kg air) and is
unitless.

1.10.67.12 Zone Air Relative Humidity[%]

This field represents the air relative humidity ratio after the correct step for each zone. The relative
humidity is in percent and uses the Zone Air Temperature, the Zone Air Humidity Ratio and the
Outside Barometric Pressure for calculation.

1.10.67.13 Zone Total Internal Radiant Heating Energy [J]

This field represents the sum of radiant gains from specific internal sources (e.g. equipment) through-
out the zone in joules. This includes radiant gain from People, Lights, Electric Equipment, Gas
Equipment, Other Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and Steam Equipment.

1.10.67.14 Zone-Total Internal Visible Heat Gain [J]

This field expresses the sum of heat gain in joules that is the calculated short wavelength radiation
gain from lights in the zones. This calculation uses the total energy from lights and the fraction
visible to realize this value, summed over the zones in the simulation.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 403

1.10.67.15 Zone Total Internal Convective Heating Energy [J]

This field represents the sum of convective gains from specific sources (e.g. equipment) throughout
the zone in joules. This includes convective gain from People, Lights, Electric Equipment, Gas
Equipment, Other Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and Steam Equipment.

1.10.67.16 Zone Total Internal Latent Gain Energy [J]

This field represents the sum of latent gains from specific internal sources (e.g. equipment) throughout
the zone in joules. This includes latent gain from People, Electric Equipment, Gas Equipment, Other
Equipment, Hot Water Equipment, and Steam Equipment.

1.10.67.17 Zone Total Internal Total Heating Energy [J]

This field represents the sum of all heat gains throughout the zone in joules. This includes all
heat gains from People, Lights, Electric Equipment, Gas Equipment, Other Equipment, Hot Water
Equipment, and Steam Equipment.

1.11 Group – Advanced Surface Concepts

This group of objects describe concepts applied to heat transfer surfaces that are of an advanced
nature. Careful consideration must be given before using these.

1.11.1 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm
This object, and three other related objects, can be used to control which surface heat transfer
model is used on specific surfaces. The separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to
control the heat transfer model in an overall way while this object can be used to revise the algo-
rithm selections for specific surfaces. This object allows selectively overriding the global setting in
HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose one of the following models for a particular surface:

– CTF (Conduction Transfer Functions),

– EMPD (Effective Moisture Penetration Depth with Conduction Transfer Functions).
– CondFD (Conduction Finite Difference)
– HAMT (Combined Heat And Moisture Finite Element)

1.11.1.1 Inputs

1.11.1.1.1 Field: Surface Name

This is the name of the surface that will be assigned to use the heat transfer algorithm selected in
the next field. This should be a name of a surface defined elsewhere.
404 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.1.1.2 Field: Algorithm

This field is used to determine the heat transfer algorithm that is to be applied to the surface named
in the previous field. The allowable choices are:

– ConductionTransferFunction
– MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
– ConductionFiniteDifference
– CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement

1.11.2 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:MultipleSurface
This object can be used to control the surface heat transfer model used for specific types of surfaces.
The separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control the heat transfer model in an
overall way while this object can be used to revise the algorithm selections for specific types of
surfaces. This object allows selectively overriding the global setting in HeatBalanceAlgorithm to
choose one of the following models for all surfaces of a particular type:

– CTF (Conduction Transfer Functions),

– EMPD (Effective Moisture Penetration Depth with Conduction Transfer Functions).
– CondFD (Conduction Finite Difference)
– HAMT (Combined Heat And Moisture Finite Element)

1.11.2.1 Inputs

1.11.2.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique, user-defined name for the object.

1.11.2.1.2 Field: Surface Type

This field is selects the type of surfaces that are all assigned to use the heat transfer algorithm
selected in the next field. This field is used with one of the following allowable keywords:

– AllExteriorSurfaces—all surfaces that have “Outdoors” outside boundary condition

– AllExteriorWalls—all walls that have “Outdoors” outside boundary condition
– AllExteriorRoofs—all roofs that have “Outdoors” outside boundary condition
– AllExteriorFloors—all floors that have “Outdoors” outside boundary condition
– AllGroundContactSurfaces—all surfaces that have “Ground” outside boundary condition
– AllInteriorSurfaces—all surfaces that are internal partition-type surfaces
– AllInteriorWalls—all walls that are internal surfaces
– AllInteriorCeilings—all ceilings that are internal surfaces
– AllInteriorFloors—all floors that are internal surfaces
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 405

1.11.2.1.3 Field: Algorithm

This field is used to determine the heat transfer algorithm that is to be applied to the surface types
in the previous field. The allowable choices are:

– ConductionTransferFunction
– MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
– ConductionFiniteDifference
– CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement

SurfaceProperty: HeatTransferAlgorithm :MultipleSurface ,

my exterior wall override ,
AllExteriorWalls ,
ConductionFiniteDifference ;

1.11.3 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:SurfaceList
This object can be used to control the surface heat transfer model used for a list of surfaces. The
separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control the heat transfer model in an overall
way while this object can be used to revise the algorithm selections for a list of specific surfaces.
This object allows selectively overriding the global setting in HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose one
of the following models for listed:

– CTF (Conduction Transfer Functions),

– EMPD (Effective Moisture Penetration Depth with Conduction Transfer Functions).
– CondFD (Conduction Finite Difference)
– HAMT (Combined Heat And Moisture Finite Element)

1.11.3.1 Inputs

1.11.3.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique, user-defined name for the object.

1.11.3.1.2 Field: Algorithm

This field is used to determine the heat transfer algorithm that is to be applied to the surface listed
in the remaining fields. The allowable choices are:

– ConductionTransferFunction
– MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
– ConductionFiniteDifference
– CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement
406 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.3.1.3 Field: Surface Name N

This is the name of the “Nth” surface that will be assigned to use the heat transfer algorithm selected
in this object. These should be the names of surfaces defined elsewhere. This object is extensible.
Additional surfaces can be added to extend the object.
An example IDF object follows.

SurfaceProperty: HeatTransferAlgorithm :SurfaceList ,

my wall construct override , !- Name
ConductionFiniteDifference , !- Algorithm
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name 1
Zn001:Wall002 , !- Surface Name 2
Zn001:Wall003 , !- Surface Name 3
Zn001:Wall004; !- Surface Name 4

1.11.4 SurfaceProperty:HeatTransferAlgorithm:Construction
This object can be used to control the surface heat transfer model used for surfaces that have a
specific type of construction. The separate object called HeatBalanceAlgorithm is used to control
the heat transfer model in an overall way while this object can be used to revise the algorithm
selections for specific constructions. This object allows selectively overriding the global setting in
HeatBalanceAlgorithm to choose one of the following models for all surfaces with particular type of
construction:

– CTF (Conduction Transfer Functions),

– EMPD (Effective Moisture Penetration Depth with Conduction Transfer Functions).
– CondFD (Conduction Finite Difference)
– HAMT (Combined Heat And Moisture Finite Element)

1.11.4.1 Inputs

1.11.4.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique, user-defined name for the object.

1.11.4.1.2 Field: Algorithm

This field is used to determine the heat transfer algorithm that is to be applied to the surfaces with
the type of of construction listed in the next field. The allowable choices are:

– ConductionTransferFunction
– MoisturePenetrationDepthConductionTransferFunction
– ConductionFiniteDifference
– CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 407

1.11.4.1.3 Field: Construction Name

This field is the name of a Construction object defined elsewhere. All the surfaces in the model that
are assigned this type of construction will be assigned to use the heat transfer algorithm selected in
the previous field.
An example IDF object follows.

SurfaceProperty: HeatTransferAlgorithm :Construction ,

my wall construct override , !- Name
ConductionFiniteDifference , !- Algorithm
R13WALL; !- Construction Name

1.11.5 SurfaceControl:MovableInsulation

Movable insulation can be used/scheduled on any surface regular surface (such as a wall, floor,
roof, etc.) but not on a subsurface (such as a window, use WindowShadingControl instead). With
movable insulation, no reference is made in the surface that is using the insulation – rather the
movable insulation statement references the surface to which it is applied.
Exterior and interior movable insulation have undergone some testing and appears to producing
expected results. The underlying principle has been implemented in EnergyPlus for both interior
and exterior movable insulation with the possibility for exterior movable insulation to be transparent
(transparent insulation material or TIM).
TIM exterior layers can be used with the ConductionFiniteDifference (CondFD) solution algorithm.
With this addition, TIM layers can be used in conjunction with wall layers that have phase change
materials (PCM) included, or any other advanced capability of the CondFD algorithm such as
variable conductivity. The input requirements are exactly the same as when used with the CTF
algorithm. The Solution Algorithm needs to be changed to CondFD, and as with CTF, the “Sur-
faceControl:MovableInsulation” object must be completed to specify the insulated surface and the
“WindowMaterial:Glazing” or “WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer” object is needed to pro-
vide the TIM layer properties.
Basically, the addition of movable insulation allows the user to schedule an extra amount of insu-
lation on either the inside or outside surface of a wall (or both). The insulation must be a simple,
homogenous material layer (linked to a material definition within the input data file). Note that En-
ergyPlus allows the exterior movable insulation layer to be transparent to short wavelength radiation
(solar). In this case, incident solar is split between the plane between the movable insulation and
the surface and the plane between the movable insulation and the surrounding air. This calculation
is fairly basic and based on the solar transmittance of the insulation layer (material properties).
Using transparent layers for exterior movable insulation allows solar energy to penetrate deeper into
a construction where it can be stored for later use in the building (similar in concept to a Trombe
Wall).

1.11.5.1 Field: Insulation Type

This field determines whether the movable insulation is applied to the inside or the outside of the
surface by entering either “Inside” or “Outside”, respectively.
408 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.5.2 Field: Surface Name

This field refers the movable insulation back to a particular surface (ref: Building Surfaces) via its
user assigned name so that EnergyPlus knows where to apply this extra layer of insulation. This
will affect either the inside or outside surface heat balance of this surface depending on the value in
the insulation type field (see previous field).

1.11.5.3 Field: Material Name

This field refers to a material layer (e.g., Material, Material:NoMass, WindowMaterial:Glazing, or

WindowMaterial:Glazing:EquivalentLayer; transparent layers are only valid for outside movable in-
sulation) via its user assigned name. This provides the program with a full complement of material
properties so that the effect of the insulation (R-value and solar transmittance) can be correctly
taken into account by EnergyPlus. Note that for non-glazing materials the solar absorptivity of the
layer will be used directly in the calculations. For glazing material layers, the solar absorptivity will
be calculated by subtracting both the transmissivity and the front side reflectivity from unity for
the material.

1.11.5.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is a schedule that theoretically can be any positive real number but was originally intended
to be a parameter between 0.0 and 1.0. Its purpose is to act as a fractional modifier on the resistance
of the material layer. The actual thermal resistance of the movable insulation is equal to the resistance
of the material layer times the current value in the movable insulation schedule. A value of 0.0 simply
means that the movable insulation is not present.
An example of this syntax implemented in an input file is:

SurfaceControl:MoveableInsulation ,
Exterior , ! Insulation Type
Zone001:Wall001 , ! Surface Name
TransparentInsulationMaterial , ! Material Name
PresentInWinterSchedule ; ! Schedule Name

1.11.6 SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients
By referencing the Other Side Coefficients statement in the surface statements (i.e. Outside Bound-
ary Condition), the temperature of the outer plane of a surface (see Figure 1.43) can be directly
controlled. Other side coefficients can also be used to control the exterior convective heat transfer
coefficient of a surface and the corresponding exterior air temperature. It should be noted that solar
effects are not accounted for when other side coefficients are used. In addition, if other side coeffi-
cients are specified for a surface, they also hold for subsurfaces of that surface (though subsurfaces
can have their own coefficient set).
other side coefficients have the same effect on all types of heat transfer surfaces. In other words,
an interior surface with other side coefficients specified and an exterior wall with identical other
side coefficients specified are simulated exactly the same. A surface that uses other side coefficients
should be thought of as a new or separate type of surface. All heat transfer surfaces are simulated
in the same manner through conduction transfer functions. The only difference between the various
types of heat transfer surfaces is the environment on the other side of the surface. For example, the
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 409

other side environment of an exterior surface is the outdoor environment. For an interior surface,
the temperature of the outer plane of the surface is set equal to the temperature of the inner plane
of the surface. Similarly, a surface with other side coefficients specified will allow the user to control
the other side environment.
Heat transfer through a surface is an extremely important component in the calculation of zone
loads. The information to calculate this heat transfer is readily available if the surface is exposed
to the outdoor environment or to another zone that is being simulated. Occasionally, a user will
want to model the heat transfer through a surface that is adjacent to an area that is not included
in the EnergyPlus model. For example, an office area is attached to a warehouse and the user is
only interested in simulating the office area. An interior surface with other side coefficients specified
could be used to control the environment on the other side of the surface, thereby accounting for
the heat transfer through the adjoining surface.
Other Side Coefficients affects the “other side” of a surface as described below. Each coefficient
has a special meaning. You may enter a 0 or blank if you are not using a particular coefficient.
Note that there are two potential ways to use other side coefficients. Either they are used to set
the temperature of the exterior side surface directly (if the combined convective/radiative coefficient
below is less than or equal to zero) or to set both the film coefficient (positive value for the combined
convective/radiative coefficient below) and the outside air temperature.

1.11.6.1 Inputs

1.11.6.1.1 Field: Name

This, of course, is the string referenced in the Surface statement that is using OtherSideCoefficients
as the Outside Boundary Condition.

1.11.6.1.2 Field: Combined Convective/Radiative Film Coefficient

This is a trigger value. If the value is greater than zero, then it is taken to be the combined
convective/radiative film coefficient. In this case (value > 0), the remaining fields are used first
to calculate the outside air temperature for the surface and then to calculate the outside surface
temperature based on the outside air temperature and the film coefficient. If this field is less than
or equal to zero, then the remaining fields are used to calculate the surface temperature (not the
outside air temperature). The units for this field are the same as for a convective heat transfer
coefficient: W/(m2 *K). This is referred to as “C1” in the reference below.

1.11.6.1.3 Field: Constant Temperature

This field defines a temperature term that is a constant part of the calculation either of the surface
or outside air temperature. This parameter is shown as “C2” in the equation below. The units for
this parameter are degrees C. If a schedule name is included as the second parameter, the value of
this parameter will be overridden by the value from the schedule. The default for this field is 0.0.

1.11.6.1.4 Field: Constant Temperature Coefficient

This field defines a constant coefficient that is applied to the constant temperature (see previous
field). This parameter is shown as “C3” in the equation below. This parameter is dimensionless.
The value of this parameter is usually 1.0 if a schedule is used to set C2. This field is ignored if
Sinusoidal Variation of Constant Temperature Coefficient = Yes. The default for this field is 1.0.
410 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.6.1.5 Field: External Dry-Bulb Temperature Coefficient

This field defines a constant coefficient that is applied to the outside air dry-bulb temperature. This
parameter is shown as “C4” in the equation below. This parameter is dimensionless. The default
for this field is 0.0.

1.11.6.1.6 Field: Ground Temperature Coefficient

This field defines a constant coefficient that is applied to the ground temperature (ref.
Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface). This parameter is shown as “C5” in the equation
below. This parameter is dimensionless.

1.11.6.1.7 Field: Wind Speed Coefficient

This field defines a constant coefficient that is applied to the product of the outside air dry-bulb
temperature and the wind speed. This parameter is shown as “C6” in the equation below. This
parameter has dimensions of inverse velocity or s/m. The default for this field is 0.0.

1.11.6.1.8 Field: Zone Air Temperature Coefficient

This field defines a constant coefficient that is applied to the temperature of the zone to which
this surface belongs. This parameter is shown as “C7” in the equation below. This parameter is
dimensionless. The default for this field is 0.0.

1.11.6.1.9 Field: Constant Temperature Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name. That schedule will supply the “constant” temperature
value C2. Note that the value of the C3 field should normally be 1.0 if a schedule is used for C2. If
not blank, this field must be a valid schedule name.

1.11.6.1.10 Field: Sinusoidal Variation of Constant Temperature Coefficient

This field is optional and can be used to define an alternate method of prescribing the coefficient
that is applied to the constant temperature (see the fields Constant Temperature and Constant
Temperature Coefficient). This parameter is shown as “C2” in the equation below. If this field is
omitted, left blank, or set to “No,” then C2 is a constant (defined in the field Constant Temperature
Coefficient). However, if this is set to “Yes,” then the value of C2 varies with a unitary sine wave in
the following way:

 
(time of day)
C2 = Sin 2π (1.19)
(period)

The value for “period” is controlled in the following field. The value for “time of day” is based on
the zone timestep and is in units of hours. The sine function here uses input as radians. When using
this option, the value for C2 will vary between -1.0 and 1.0 and the value put in the field Constant
Temperature Coefficient is not used. This option cannot be used at the same time as scheduling a
constant temperature with the previous field.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 411

1.11.6.1.11 Field: Period of Sinusoidal Variation

This field is used to define the period of the sine wave when using the Sinusoidal Variation of Constant
Temperature Coefficient capability selected in the previous field. This field is the time period of the
sine wave in units of hours. The default is 24 hours and provides a diurnal sine wave. The value
entered here is “period” in the equation in the previous field.

1.11.6.1.12 Field: Previous Other Side Temperature Coefficient

This field defines a constant coefficient that is applied to the other side temperature computed by
this object from the previous zone time step. This parameter is shown as “C8” in the equation
below. This parameter is dimensionless. The default for this field is 0.0.

1.11.6.1.13 Field: Minimum Other Side Temperature Limit

This field specifies a lower limit for the other side temperature result in degrees C. If blank, there is
no lower limit.

1.11.6.1.14 Field: Maximum Other Side Temperature Limit

This field specifies an upper limit for the other side temperature result in degrees C. If blank, there
is no upper limit.
The coefficients listed above are used in the following equation:

T = C2 ∗ C3 + C4 ∗ T oadb + C5 ∗ T grnd + C6 ∗ W spd ∗ T oadb + C7 ∗ T zone + C8 ∗ T past (1.20)

where:
T = Outside Air Temperature when C1 (Combined convective/radiative film Coeff) > 0
T = Exterior Surface Temperature when C1 (Combined convective/radiative film Coeff) < = 0
Tzone = Temperature of the zone being simulated (°C)
Toadb = Dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (°C)
Tgrnd = Temperature of the ground (°C) from Site:GroundTemperature:BuildingSurface
Wspd = Outdoor wind speed (m/sec)
Tpast = Other side temperature from previous zone timestep (°C)
! Example input using temperature schedule
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients ,
OSCCoef:Zn005:Wall003 , !- Name
0, !- Combined Convective/Radiative Film Coefficient {W/m2 -K}
0.000000 , !- Constant Temperature {C}
1.000000 , !- Constant Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- External Dry -Bulb Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Ground Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Wind Speed Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Zone Air Temperature Coefficient
Zn005Wall003OtherSideTempSched ; !- Constant Temperature Schedule Name

! Example input for outside heat transfer coefficient of 1.23, using Toadb
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients ,
OSCCoef:Zn005:Wall004 , !- Name
1.230000 , !- Combined Convective/Radiative Film Coefficient {W/m2 -K}
0.000000 , !- Constant Temperature {C}
412 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.43: Illustration for Other Side Coefficients

0.000000 , !- Constant Temperature Coefficient

1.000000 , !- External Dry -Bulb Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Ground Temperature Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Wind Speed Coefficient
0.000000 , !- Zone Air Temperature Coefficient
, !- Constant Temperature Schedule Name
No , !- Sinusoidal Variation of Constant Temperature Coefficient
24, !- Period of Sinusoidal Variation {hr}
0., !- Previous Other Side Temperature Coefficient
, !- Minimum Other Side Temperature Limit {C}
; !- Maximum Other Side Temperature Limit {C}

1.11.6.2 Outputs
Zone ,Average ,Surface Other Side Coefficients Exterior Air Drybulb Temperature

1.11.6.2.1 Surface Other Side Coefficients Exterior Air Drybulb Temperature

[C]
This is the air temperature applied to the other side of the surface.

1.11.7 SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel
By referencing the Other Side Conditions Model statement in the surface statements (i.e. Outside
Boundary Condition), the boundary conditions for the outer plane of the mass wall can be connected
to the appropriate model for various multi-skin components. The types of multi-skin components
that use this object include systems that are mounted to the outside surface using standoffs that
create a small air gap – see Figure 1.44. This type of modeling allows using the usual heat transfer
calculations for the underlying surface with other types of multi-skin component models that are
available including: unglazed transpired solar collectors, ventilated photovoltaic panels, and naturally
ventilated facades.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 413

The boundary condition values are determined dynamically by the program using internal component
models. If you want to define other side surface temperatures or convection conditions, then use
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients instead of this object.
It should be noted that when other side conditions models are used, solar effects are removed from
the surface’s outside face heat balance but are used in modeling the component adjacent to that
surface.
The other side conditions model also includes underground piping system interaction. The Pip-
ingSystem:Underground:Domain object represents a mass of ground which may include interaction
with, for example, basement surfaces. In this case, the ground model will internally use the other
side condition model hook to update boundary conditions for those surfaces which use that other
side condition model name reference.
The other side conditions model also includes an underwater boundary condition connection. By
specifying “ConvectiveUnderwater” as the boundary type, and including any number of “Surface-
Property:Underwater” objects in the input, the user can connect surfaces to water such as for a
moving vessel.

1.11.7.1 Inputs

1.11.7.1.1 Field: Name

This is the string referenced in the Surface statement that is using OtherSideModel as the Exterior
Environment.

1.11.7.1.2 Field: Type of Modeling

This is a string key selection used to identify the type of model that will be used to determine
boundary conditions. The only available choices are ”GapConvectionRadiation,” “UndergroundPip-
ingSystemSurface,” “GroundCoupledSurface,” and “ConvectiveUnderwater.”
An example specification is:

SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel ,
UTSC OSCM ZN11 , ! OtherSideConditionsModel Name
GapConvectionRadiation ; ! Type of Modeling used to determine Boundary Conditions

1.11.7.2 Outputs

– Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Air Temperature [C]

– Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient
[W/m2-K]
– Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Radiation Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Radiation Heat Transfer Coefficient
[W/m2-K]

1.11.7.2.1 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Air Temperature

[C]
This is the air temperature exposed to the other side of the surface by the model and used in
convection heat transfer calculations.
414 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.44: Illustration for Other Side Conditions Model

1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 415

1.11.7.2.2 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Convection Heat Transfer

Coefficient [W/m2-K]
This is the surface convection heat transfer coefficient applied to the other side of the surface by the
model.

1.11.7.2.3 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Radiation Temperature [C]

This is the effective temperature exposed to the other side of the surface for thermal radiation heat
transfer calculations.

1.11.7.2.4 Surface Other Side Conditions Modeled Radiation Heat Transfer Co-
efficient [W/m2-K]
This is the effective (Linearized) radiation heat transfer coefficient applied to the other side of the
surface by the model.

1.11.8 SurfaceProperty:Underwater
This object captures the inputs required to model a water-connected boundary condition for a
surface. This model is useful for either statically positioned buildings with natural convection to the
water boundary condition, or a moving building (vessel).

1.11.8.1 Inputs

1.11.8.1.1 Field: Name

This is the string referenced in the Surface statement that is using this OtherSideModel as the
Exterior Environment.

1.11.8.1.2 Field: Distance from Surface Centroid to Leading Edge of Boundary

Layer
This distance represents the distance from the centroid of this particular surface to leading edge of
the boundary layer. For a surface with zero velocity, this field will be irrelevant, because there is no
forced boundary layer, and convection will be buoyantly driven. For a moving vessel, this distance
should be the nominal distance from the leading edge of the vessel, assuming a nearly flat surface
along that path.

1.11.8.1.3 Field: Free Stream Water Temperature Schedule

This schedule defines the temperature of the free stream water used in the convection calculations.

1.11.8.1.4 Field: Free Stream Water Velocity Schedule

This schedule defines the average velocity of the free stream water used in the convection calculations.
This schedule could be the water velocity as it moves past stationary surface, the surface velocity as
it moves past stationary water, or an effective velocity as a result of the combination.
An example specification is:
416 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

SurfaceProperty:Underwater ,
Underwater , !- Name
140, !- Distance from Surface Centroid to Leading Edge of Boundary Layer
WaterTempSchedule , !- Free Stream Water Temperature Schedule
VelocitySchedule; !- Free Stream Water Velocity Schedule

Schedule:Constant ,
WaterTempSchedule ,
Any Number ,
23;

Schedule:Constant ,
VelocitySchedule ,
Any Number ,
10.2;

1.11.9 Foundation:Kiva
Foundation:Kiva objects describe boundary conditions for ground-coupled foundation surfaces. Sur-
faces with the “Outside Boundary Condition” defined as “Foundation”, may also refer to a Founda-
tion:Kiva object in the “Outside Boundary Condition Object” field (if unspecified, a default Foun-
dation:Kiva object will be created and applied).
Limitations when using Foundation:Kiva objects include:

– Only floors and walls may use Foundation:Kiva objects as Outside Boundary Conditions.
– For a given zone, each floor surface must reference a different Foundation:Kiva object. In
other words, multiple foundation floor surfaces may exist in the same thermal zone so long as
they reference separate Foundation:Kiva objects. The same Foundation:Kiva object may be
referenced by multiple floors so long as they are in different zones.
– Any number of wall surfaces may reference a single Foundation:Kiva object so long as that
object is referenced by exactly one floor surface in the same thermal zone.
– Foundation wall surfaces that are not triangular or quadrilateral may not translate well into
the two-dimensional finite difference context.

For each floor surface with “Foundation” set as the “Outside Boundary Condition” there must also
be a corresponding “SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter” object to define how much of
the floor perimeter is below exterior walls.
The inputs from Foundation:Kiva objects are translated into Kiva’s foundation heat transfer model.
KivaTM generates a two-dimensional heat transfer calculation to represent heat flow between a zone
and the adjacent ground. Foundation:Kiva surfaces do not use the same HeatBalanceAlgorithm
(e.g., Conduction Transfer Functions) as the rest of the model.
Foundation:Kiva objects are used to describe the two-dimensional features that cannot be captured
by the typical one-dimensional constructions used in EnergyPlus. Figure 1.45 illustrates Kiva’s two-
dimensional context for a basement where the basement slab and wall both refer to “Foundation”
as the Outside Boundary Condition, the ceiling of the basement and the exterior wall of the zone
above the basement refer to “Surface” (or “Zone”) and “Outdoors”, respectively. Note: Not all of
the foundation wall surface needs to be below grade (see the “Wall Height Above Grade” field for
this object). Any part of the foundation wall above grade is modeled in Kiva’s two-dimensional heat
transfer calculations. The non-foundation surfaces are shown in Figure 1.45 for context, but are not
part of the Kiva model.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 417

Figure 1.45: Outside Boundary Conditions for surfaces within Kiva’s Two-dimensional context.
Only surfaces referencing “Foundation” are simulated in Kiva

Figure 1.46: Structural and insulation components of Foundation:Kiva objects

418 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.47: Two-dimensional interpretation of foundation surface data

This context allows for a finer description of the structural and insulation components of a foundation
that impact heat transfer (Figure 1.46).
Foundation:Kiva objects define only the aspects of the foundation that are not already defined by
the one-dimensional constructions of the respective surfaces. That is, the footing wall and slab
constructions and their relative dimensions are inferred from the respective Surface objects (see
Figure 1.47).
The depth of the foundation is defined by the height of the wall surfaces that reference the Founda-
tion:Kiva boundary condition object. For slab-on-grade foundations, a depth of zero is implied by
having no associated wall surfaces. Figure 1.48 shows a slab-on-grade foundation with whole slab
insulation. Notice there are no walls referencing the “Foundation” Outside Boundary Condition. In
this case, the under-slab insulation is modeled as part of the slab construction, while the edge/gap
insulation is modeled using the interior vertical insulation fields of a Foundation:Kiva object. Note:
Since there are no wall surfaces for slab foundations, the footing wall construction is defined within
the Foundation:Kiva object (or defaulted to a 0.3m wide cast concrete wall).
A walkout basement (with a variable grade along the sides; see Figure 1.49) is best modeled using
discrete quadrilateral surfaces of stepped height for the walls as shown in Figure 1.50.
The width of the floor surface in the two-dimensional context is defined by the area and the exposed
perimeter (see SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter) of the floor surface object. Details on
this calculation can be found in the Engineering Reference document.
Other components of the two-dimensional context are defined by the Foundation:Kiva:Settings object
and applied uniformly for all instances of Foundation:Kiva objects. These components include:

– Far-Field width
– Deep Ground depth (and boundary type)
– Soil and ground surface thermal properties

1.11.9.1 Example IDF

1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 419

Figure 1.48: Two-dimensional interpretation of foundation surface data

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Slab Floor , !- Name
Floor , !- Surface Type
Slab Construction , !- Construction Name
Living Room , !- Zone Name
Foundation , !- Outside Boundary Condition
Slab Details , !- Outside Boundary Condition Object
No , !- Sun Exposure
No , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- View Factor to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
0.0, 0.0, 0.0, !- Vertex 1
0.0, 20.0, 0.0, !- Vertex 2
20.0, 20.0, 0.0, !- Vertex 3
20.0, 0.0, 0.0; !- Vertex 4

Foundation:Kiva ,
Slab Details , !- Name
, !- Initial Indoor Air Temperature
XPS , !- Interior Horizontal Insulation Material Name
0.2, !- Interior Horizontal Insulation Depth
0.6, !- Interior Horizontal Insulation Width
XPS , !- Interior Vertical Insulation Material Name
0.2, !- Interior Vertical Insulation Depth
, !- Exterior Horizontal Insulation Material Name
, !- Exterior Horizontal Insulation Depth
, !- Exterior Horizontal Insulation Width
, !- Exterior Vertical Insulation Material Name
, !- Exterior Vertical Insulation Depth
0.2, !- Wall Height Above Grade
0.3, !- Wall Depth Below Slab
Slab Footing Construction; !- Footing Wall Construction Name

Material ,
XPS , !- Name
Rough , !- Roughness
0.05, !- Thickness
0.029 , !- Conductivity
28, !- Density
1450, !- Specific Heat
0.9, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.7, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7; !- Visible Absorptance
420 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.49: Example walkout basement

1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 421

Figure 1.50: Walkout basement wall and floor surfaces (in gray) all reference the same Founda-
tion:Kiva object
422 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.51: Placement of interior horizontal insulation

Material ,
Concrete , !- Name
Rough , !- Roughness
0.3, !- Thickness
1.95, !- Conductivity
2400, !- Density
900, !- Specific Heat
0.9, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.7, !- Solar Absorptance
0.7; !- Visible Absorptance

Construction ,
Slab Footing Construction , !- Name
Concrete; !- Outside Layer Name

1.11.9.2 Inputs

1.11.9.2.1 Field: Name

The unique identifier of the Foundation:Kiva object. Referenced by a the “Outside Boundary Con-
dition Object” field in a surface object.

1.11.9.2.2 Field: Initial Indoor Air Temperature

Indoor air temperature used for Kiva initialization (prior to warmup period). If left blank, indoor
air temperature during initialization will be estimated based on zone setpoints.

1.11.9.2.3 Field: Interior Horizontal Insulation Material Name

A reference to a material object associated with the interior horizontal insulation. If left blank, no
interior horizontal insulation will be used. Default: blank.
The following two fields define the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context
and are illustrated in Figure 1.51.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 423

Figure 1.52: Placement of interior vertical insulation

1.11.9.2.4 Field: Interior Horizontal Insulation Depth

Distance from the bottom of the slab to the top of interior horizontal insulation, in m. Generally,
interior horizontal insulation is placed directly below the slab, and therefore, this value will generally
be set to zero (as indicated in Figure 1.51). Required if Interior Horizontal Insulation Material Name
is defined.

1.11.9.2.5 Field: Interior Horizontal Insulation Width

Extent of insulation as measured from the wall interior to the edge of interior horizontal insulation,
in m. Required if Interior Horizontal Insulation Material Name is defined.

1.11.9.2.6 Field: Interior Vertical Insulation Material Name

A reference to a material object associated with the interior vertical insulation. If left blank, no
interior vertical insulation will be used. Default: blank.
The following field defines the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context and
are illustrated in Figure 1.52.

1.11.9.2.7 Field: Interior Vertical Insulation Depth

Extent of insulation as measured from the wall top to the bottom edge of the interior vertical
insulation, in m. Required if Interior Vertical Insulation Material Name is defined.

1.11.9.2.8 Field: Exterior Horizontal Insulation Material Name

A reference to a material object associated with the exterior horizontal insulation. If left blank, no
exterior horizontal insulation will be used. Default: blank.
The following two fields define the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context
and are illustrated in Figure 1.53.
424 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.53: Placement of exterior horizontal insulation

1.11.9.2.9 Field: Exterior Horizontal Insulation Depth

Distance from the exterior grade to the top of exterior horizontal insulation, in m. Required if
Exterior Horizontal Insulation Material Name is defined.

1.11.9.2.10 Field: Exterior Horizontal Insulation Width

Extent of insulation as measured from the wall exterior to the edge of exterior horizontal insulation,
in m. Required if Exterior Horizontal Insulation Material Name is defined.

1.11.9.2.11 Field: Exterior Vertical Insulation Material Name

A reference to a material object associated with the exterior vertical insulation. If left blank, no
exterior vertical insulation will be used. Default: blank
The following field defines the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context and
are illustrated in Figure 1.54.

1.11.9.2.12 Field: Exterior Vertical Insulation Depth

Extent of insulation as measured from the wall top to the bottom edge of the exterior vertical
insulation, in m. Required if Exterior Vertical Insulation Material Name is defined.

1.11.9.2.13 Field: Wall Height Above Grade

Distance from the exterior grade to the wall top, in m. Default: 0.2 m
Figures 1.55 and 1.56 illustrate the definition of both the “Wall Height Above Grade” and the
following field, “Wall Depth Below Slab”. If the top of foundation wall is flush with the ground then
the “Wall Height Above Grade” is zero.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 425

Figure 1.54: Placement of exterior vertical insulation

Figure 1.55: Definition of exterior grade and footing wall depth relative to the wall surface (for a
basement foundation context)
426 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.56: Definition of exterior grade and footing wall depth relative to the wall surface (for a
slab foundation context)

1.11.9.2.14 Field: Wall Depth Below Slab

Distance from the slab bottom to the bottom of the foundation wall, in m. Default: 0.0 m
Extending the wall below the slab provides a coarse approximation of the foundation footing. Alter-
natively, one may use the fields “Footing Material Name” and “Footing Depth” to explicitly model
the footing. Note, that explicit modeling of the footing requires a higher spatial discretization and,
therefore, longer computation times.

1.11.9.2.15 Field: Footing Wall Construction Name

Defines the construction of the foundation footing wall for slab foundations where the foundation
wall is not exposed to the zone (and has no zone surface to explicitly assign a construction).
By default, this is the same construction as any associated below-grade wall surfaces, or a 0.3 m
wide poured concrete wall (conductivity = 1.95 W/m-K, density = 2240 kg/m3, specific heat = 900
J/kg-K).

1.11.9.2.16 Field: Footing Material Name

A reference to a material object associated with the foundation footing (typically some form of
concrete). The thickness of this material is used to determine the width of the footing. If left blank,
no footing will be used. Default: blank
The following field defines the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context and
are illustrated in Figure 1.57.

1.11.9.2.17 Field: Footing Depth

Top-to-bottom dimension of the footing (not to be confused with its depth in the ground). The
width of the footing is defined by the material’s thickness. Default: 0.3 m.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 427

Figure 1.57: Placement of footing

1.11.9.2.18 Field: Custom Block <x> Material Name

A reference to a material object associated with a custom block in the two-dimensional foundation
context. The thickness of this material determines the width of the block.
Custom blocks can be used to represent solid materials in the two-dimensional context that are
not otherwise covered by the fields above. Examples of this might include interior finishings and
insulation (Figure 1.58) or backfill soil with different thermal properties (Figure 1.59).
If two or more custom blocks overlap, the final properties are determined by the higher block number
(e.g., Custom Block 4 in the input object supersedes properties defined by Custom Block 2). All
custom blocks properties are superseded by the elements shown in Figure 1.46.
The following fields defines the placement of this material within Kiva’s two-dimensional context
and are illustrated in Figure 1.60.

1.11.9.2.19 Field: Custom Block <x> Depth

Top-to-bottom dimension of the block downward. The default is the depth from the wall top to the
top of the slab to facilitate interior constructions. Default: Slab depth

1.11.9.2.20 Field: Custom Block <x> X Position

Position outward (+) or inward (-) relative to the foundation wall.

1.11.9.2.21 Field: Custom Block <x> Z Position

Position downward (+) relative to the foundation wall top. Default: Wall top

1.11.9.3 Outputs

Output for surfaces with a Foundation boundary condition type will include all opaque surface
output variables except:
428 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.58: Custom blocks representing interior batt insulation and dry wall

Figure 1.59: Custom block representing exterior backfill

1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 429

Figure 1.60: Placement of a custom block

– Surface Outside Face variables (since there is no “Outside Face”)

– Surface Heat Storage variables (since this definition depends on an “Outside Face”)
– Surface Internal Source Location Temperature (Kiva doesn’t handle internal sources yet, but
this is a possible future enhancement)

1.11.10 Foundation:Kiva:Settings
This object defines settings applied across all Kiva foundation calculations. This object is not
required. If it is not defined, all defaults will be applied.

1.11.10.1 Inputs

1.11.10.1.1 Field: Soil Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K. Default: 1.73 W/m-K.

1.11.10.1.2 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3. Default: 1842 kg/m3.

1.11.10.1.3 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of the soil, in J/kg-K. Default: 419 J/kg-K

1.11.10.1.4 Field: Ground Solar Absorptivity

Solar absorptivity of the exterior grade surface. Default: 0.9.

1.11.10.1.5 Field: Ground Thermal Absorptivity

Long-wave absorptivity (emissivity) of the exterior grade surface. Default: 0.9.
430 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.10.1.6 Field: Ground Surface Roughness

The relief roughness of the exterior ground surface in m. Default: 0.03 m.
Estimates of surface roughnesses in m are shown in Table 1.15.

Table 1.15: Example Surface and Roughness

Example Surface Roughness [m]

Concrete 0.002
Brick 0.003
Soil 0.005
Gravel 0.012
Grass 0.030

1.11.10.1.7 Field: Far-Field Width

The distance from the wall interior to the zero horizontal heat flux (i.e., adiabatic) far-field boundary,
in m. This distance represents either the distance halfway between this foundation and a similar
foundation of a neighboring building, or a distance adequately far from the foundation such that it
is isolated from the effects of the boundary (typically >= 40 m). Default: 40 m.

1.11.10.1.8 Field: Deep-Ground Boundary Condition

Defines the type of boundary condition to apply at the Deep-Ground Depth. Options are:

– ZeroFlux
– GroundWater
– Autoselect

ZeroFlux applies a zero vertical heat flux (i.e. adiabatic) boundary condition. GroundWater applies a
constant temperature boundary condition, with a temperature equal to the average outdoor air dry-
bulb temperature from the environment(s). Autoselect applies either boundary condition depending
on the elevation of the building site (Williams and Williamson, 1989):

dwt = 0.1022 · delev

If dwt ≤ 40 m., the GroundWater boundary is applied, otherwise a ZeroFlux boundary is applied
at 40 m. If the calculated ground water depth is shallower than any element of the foundation
construction, then the GroundWater is applied at 1 m below the lowest element.
Default: Autoselect.

1.11.10.1.9 Field: Deep-Ground Depth

The distance from the exterior grade to the deep ground boundary, in m. This distance represents
either the distance to the ground water level, or a distance adequately far from the foundation such
that it is isolated from the effects of the boundary (typically >= 40 m). Default 40 m, or the distance
determined by the “Auto” Deep-Ground Boundary Condition.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 431

1.11.10.1.10 Field: Minimum Cell Dimension

The minimum cell dimension, in m, used in the Kiva discretization. Default: 0.02 m.

1.11.10.1.11 Field: Maximum Cell Growth Coefficient

The maximum ratio of growth between neighboring cells in the direction away from the near-field
area of interest. Default: 1.50.

1.11.10.1.12 Field: Simulation Timestep

This field allows the user to choose whether to calculate foundation loads on the zone timestep or at
hourly intervals. Hourly intervals will allow for less overall computation time, but with less accuracy.
Choices are “Hourly” and “Timestep”. Default: Hourly

1.11.11 SurfaceProperty:ExposedFoundationPerimeter
This object (currently only used in conjunction with Foundation:Kiva boundary conditions) defines
the perimeter of a foundation floor that is exposed to the exterior environment through the floor.
The user may either define the total exposed perimeter, the fraction of the total perimeter that
is exposed, or individually define which segments of the floor surface perimeter are exposed. This
object is required for any floor surface with a Foundation:Kiva boundary condition.
Figure 1.61 illustrates how the exposed perimeter is determined from a floor plan of the foundation
level.
Some buildings may have neighboring zones with different foundation types. For example, a
crawlspace next to a garage with a slab (Figure 1.62). The foundation wall in this case is NOT
considered part of either floor’s exposed perimeter, and should not reference a Foundation boundary
condition. Kiva does not calculate heat flow between two zones through ground. In this case, it is
best to approximate interior foundation wall using an Adiabatic Outside Boundary Condition.

1.11.11.1 Inputs

1.11.11.1.1 Field: Surface Name

Name of foundation floor surface object.

1.11.11.1.2 Field: Exposed Perimeter Calculation Method

Required key/choice field that tells which method to use to calculate the exposed foundation perime-
ter. Choices are:

– TotalExposedPerimeter: Exposed perimeter is defined as an absolute distance in m. (The Total

Exposed Perimeter field should be filled.)
– ExposedPerimeterFraction: Exposed perimeter is defined as a fraction of the total floor perime-
ter. (The Exposed Perimeter Fraction field should be filled.) Note: This option works best
when you are confident that the floor surface is completely exposed.
432 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.61: Exposed foundation perimeter

Figure 1.62: Interior foundation wall

1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 433

– BySegment: Each segment of the floor polygon (corresponding to distance between each set of
vertices) is defined as exposed (“Yes”) or not exposed (“No”) in an extensible list corresponding
to the number of vertices in the floor polygon. Exposed perimeter is defined as the sum of all
exposed segment lengths. (The Surface Segment <x> Exposed fields should be filled.) Note:
The number of segments identified in this object must match the number of vertices in the
corresponding surface object.

1.11.11.1.3 Field: Total Exposed Perimeter

Total perimeter that is exposed in m.

1.11.11.1.4 Field: Exposed Perimeter Fraction

Fraction of the total perimeter that is exposed. Default 1.0

1.11.11.1.5 Field: Surface Segment <x> Exposed

Surface Segment <x> is the perimeter between the <x>th and (<x>+1)th vertices.

1.11.12 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections
This object provides options to change the individual convection model equations for dynamic selec-
tion when using AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm. This object is only needed to make changes to the
default model selections for any or all of the surface categories. This object is for the inside face, the
side of the surface facing a thermal zone.

1.11.12.1 Inputs

1.11.12.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name for the object.

1.11.12.1.2 Field: Simple Buoyancy Vertical Wall Equation Source

Applies to zone with no HVAC or when HVAC is off. This is for vertical walls. The key choice
options include: FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVertical-
Wall, KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat, KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall,
ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.3 Field: Simple Buoyancy Vertical Wall User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.4 Field: Simple Buoyancy Stable Horizontal Equation Source

Applies to zone with no HVAC or when HVAC is off. This is for horizontal surfaces with heat flow
directed for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizon-
talOrTilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve
434 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.12.1.5 Field: Simple Buoyancy Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve

Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.6 Field: Simple Buoyancy Unstable Horizontal Equation Source

Applies to zone with no HVAC or when HVAC is off. This is for passive horizontal surfaces with
heat flow for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHori-
zontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.7 Field: Simple Buoyancy Unstable Horizontal Equation User Curve

Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.8 Field: Simple Buoyancy Stable Tilted Equation Source

Applies to zone with no HVAC or when HVAC is off. This is for tilted surfaces with heat flow
for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt,
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.9 Field: Simple Buoyancy Stable Tilted Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.10 Field: Simple Buoyancy Unstable Tilted Equation Source

Applies to zone with no HVAC or when HVAC is off. This is for tilted surfaces with heat flow for
unstable thermal stratification. The key choices include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, Alam-
dariHammondUnstableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.11 Field: Simple Buoyancy Unstable Tilted Equation User Curve

Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.12 Field: Simple Buoyancy Windows Equation Source

Applies to zone with no HVAC or when HVAC is off. This is for all window surfaces. The key choice
options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, FohannoPolidoriVertical-
Wall, KaradagChilledCeiling, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.13 Field: Simple Buoyancy Windows Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 435

1.11.12.1.14 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Vertical Wall Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for vertical walls. The
key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, Khali-
faEq3WallAwayFromHeat, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.15 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Vertical Wall Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.16 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Horizontal Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for passive horizontal surfaces
with heat flow for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHori-
zontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.17 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Horizontal Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.18 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Horizontal Equation

Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for passive horizontal surfaces
with heat flow for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnsta-
bleHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat, or
UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.19 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Horizontal Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.20 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Heated Floor Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for a floor with active heating
elements. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammon-
dUnstableHorizontal, AwbiHattonHeatedFloor, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.21 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Heated Floor Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
436 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.12.1.22 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Chilled Ceiling Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for a ceiling with active
cooling elements. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHam-
mondUnstableHorizontal, KaradagChilledCeiling, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.23 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Chilled Ceiling Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.24 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Tilted Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for tilted surfaces with heat
flow for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt,
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.25 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Stable Tilted Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.26 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Tilted Equation Source
Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for tilted surfaces with heat
flow for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizon-
talOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.27 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Unstable Tilted Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.28 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Window Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-floor heating and/or in-ceiling cooling. This is for all window sur-
faces. The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall,
ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.29 Field: Floor Heat Ceiling Cool Window Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 437

1.11.12.1.30 Field: Wall Panel Heating Vertical Wall Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for vertical walls that are not actively
heated. The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVertical-
Wall, KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall,
ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.31 Field: Wall Panel Heating Vertical Wall Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.32 Field: Wall Panel Heating Heated Wall Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for vertical walls that are being actively
heated. The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall,
KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat, AwbiHattonHeatedWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, AlamdariHam-
mondVerticalWall, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.33 Field: Wall Panel Heating Heated Wall Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.34 Field: Wall Panel Heating Stable Horizontal Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for horizontal surfaces with heat flow directed
for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt,
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.35 Field: Wall Panel Heating Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.36 Field: Wall Panel Heating Unstable Horizontal Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for horizontal surfaces with heat flow directed for
unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, WaltonUn-
stableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, KhalifaEq7Ceiling, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.37 Field: Wall Panel Heating Unstable Horizontal Equation User

Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
438 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.12.1.38 Field: Wall Panel Heating Stable Tilted Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for tilted surfaces with heat flow for stable thermal
stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammond-
StableHorizontal, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.39 Field: Wall Panel Heating Stable Tilted Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.40 Field: Wall Panel Heating Unstable Tilted Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for tilted surfaces with heat flow for unstable
thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, Alamdar-
iHammondUnstableHorizontal, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.41 Field: Wall Panel Heating Unstable Tilted Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.42 Field: Wall Panel Heating Window Equation Source

Applies to zone with in-wall panel heating. This is for all window surfaces. The key choice
options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, FohannoPolidoriVertical-
Wall, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.43 Field: Wall Panel Heating Window Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.44 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Wall Equation Source

Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for vertical walls not directly affected by
heater. The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVertical-
Wall, KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat, KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall,
ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.45 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Wall Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 439

1.11.12.1.46 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Walls Near Heater Equation
Source
Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for vertical walls that are directly affected by
heater. Walls are considered “near” when listed in field set for Fraction of Radiant Energy to Sur-
face. The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, Khal-
ifaEq5WallNearHeat, AwbiHattonHeatedWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, or
UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.47 Field: Convective Zone Heater Vertical Walls Near Heater Equation
User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.48 Field: Convective Zone Heater Stable Horizontal Equation Source

Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for horizontal surfaces with heat flow directed
for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt,
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.49 Field: Convective Zone Heater Stable Horizontal Equation User

Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.50 Field: Convective Zone Heater Unstable Horizontal Equation

Source
Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for horizontal surfaces with heat flow directed
for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOr-
Tilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat, KhalifaEq7Ceiling,
or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.51 Field: Convective Zone Heater Unstable Horizontal Equation User

Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.52 Field: Convective Zone Heater Stable Tilted Equation Source

Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for tilted surfaces with heat flow for stable thermal
stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammond-
StableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.53 Field: Convective Zone Heater Stable Tilted Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
440 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.12.1.54 Field: Convective Zone Heater Unstable Tilted Equation Source

Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for tilted surfaces with heat flow for unstable thermal
stratification. The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammon-
dUnstableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.55 Field: Convective Zone Heater Unstable Tilted Equation User

Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.56 Field: Convective Zone Heater Windows Equation Source

Applies to zone with convective heater. This is for all window surfaces. The key choice options in-
clude: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat, Fo-
hannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.57 Field: Convective Zone Heater Windows Equation User Curve

Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.58 Field: Central Air Diffuser Wall Equation Source

Applies to zone with mechanical forced central air with diffusers. This is for all wall surfaces. The
key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls, Alamdari-
HammondVerticalWall, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposing-
Wall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls, or
UserCurve

1.11.12.1.59 Field: Central Air Diffuser Wall Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.60 Field: Central Air Diffuser Ceiling Equation Source

Applies to zone with mechanical forced central air with diffusers. This is for all ceiling surfaces. The
key choice options include: FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStable-
Ceiling, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.61 Field: Central Air Diffuser Ceiling Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.62 Field: Central Air Diffuser Floor Equation Source

Applies to zone with mechanical forced central air with diffusers. This is for all floor surfaces. The key
choice options include: FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor,
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor, GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor, or UserCurve.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 441

1.11.12.1.63 Field: Central Air Diffuser Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.64 Field: Central Air Diffuser Window Equation Source

Applies to zone with mechanical forced central air with diffusers. This is for all window surfaces. The
key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls, Beausoleil-
MorrisonMixedAssistedWall, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall,
AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow, or
UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.65 Field: Central Air Diffuser Window Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.66 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Vertical Wall Equation

Source
The key choice options include: KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat, ASHRAEVerticalWall, FisherPed-
ersenCeilingDiffuserWalls, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall,
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, Gold-
steinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.67 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Vertical Wall Equation

User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.68 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Horizontal Equation

Source
The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizon-
tal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.69 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Horizontal Equation

User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.70 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Horizontal Equa-

tion Source
The key choice options include: KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat, WaltonUnstableHorizontalOr-
Tilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, or UserCurve.
442 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.12.1.71 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Horizontal Equa-

tion User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.72 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Tilted Equation

Source
The key choice options include: WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.73 Field Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Stable Tilted Equation User
Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.74 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Tilted Equation

Source
The key choice options include: WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHor-
izontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.75 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Tilted Equation

User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.76 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Window Equation Source

The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, FohannoP-

olidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.77 Field: Mechanical Zone Fan Circulation Unstable Tilted Equation

User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.78 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Assisting Flow on Walls Equation

Source
The key choice options include: BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall, AlamdariHammondVerti-
calWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ASHRAEVerticalWall, FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls,
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.79 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Assisting Flow on Walls Equation

User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 443

1.11.12.1.80 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Opposing Flow on Walls Equation

Source
The key choice options include: BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall, AlamdariHammondVerti-
calWall, FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall, ASHRAEVerticalWall, FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls,
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.81 Field: Mixed Regime Buoyancy Opposing Flow on Walls Equation

User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve

1.11.12.1.82 Field: Mixed Regime Stable Floor Equation Source

The key choice options include: BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor, WaltonStableHorizontalOr-
Tilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve

1.11.12.1.83 Field: Mixed Regime Stable Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.84 Field: Mixed Regime Unstable Floor Equation Source

The key choice options include: BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor, WaltonUnstableHorizon-
talOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.85 Field: Mixed Regime Unstable Floor Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.86 Field: Mixed Regime Stable Ceiling Equation Source

The key choice options include: BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling, WaltonStableHorizontalOr-
Tilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.87 Field: Mixed Regime Stable Ceiling Equation User Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.88 Field: Mixed Regime Unstable Ceiling Equation Source

The key choice options include: BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling, WaltonUnstableHorizon-
talOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, or UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.89 Field: Mixed Regime Unstable Ceiling Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.
444 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.12.1.90 Field: Mixed Regime Window Equation Source

The key choice options include: GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow, ISO15099Windows, or
UserCurve.

1.11.12.1.91 Field: Mixed Regime Window Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.13 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections
Options to change the individual convection model equations for dynamic selection when using
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm. This object is only needed to make changes to the default model
selections for any or all of the surface categories. This object is for the outside face, the side of the
surface facing away from the thermal zone.

1.11.13.1 Inputs

1.11.13.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name for the object

1.11.13.1.2 Field: Wind Convection Windward Vertical Wall Equation Source

This is for just the wind-driven component of the total convection coefficient. The key choice options
include: SimpleCombined, TARPWindward, MoWiTTWindward, DOE2Windward, NusseltJurges,
McAdams, Mitchell, Blocken, Emmel, or UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.3 Field: Wind Convection Windward Equation Vertical Wall User

Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.4 Field: Wind Convection Leeward Vertical Wall Equation Source

This is for just the wind-driven component of the total convection coefficient. The key choice
options include: SimpleCombined, TARPLeeward, MoWiTTLeeward, DOE2Leeward, Emmel, Nus-
seltJurges, McAdams, Mitchell, or UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.5 Field: Wind Convection Leeward Vertical Wall Equation User Curve
Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.6 Field: Wind Convection Horizontal Roof Equation Source

This is for just the wind-driven component of the total convection coefficient. The key choice options
include: SimpleCombined, TARPWindward, MoWiTTWindward, DOE2Windward, NusseltJurges,
McAdams, Mitchell, Blocken, Emmel, ClearRoof, or UserCurve.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 445

1.11.13.1.7 Field: Wind Convection Horizontal Roof User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.8 Field: Natural Convection Vertical Wall Equation Source

This is for just the natural convection portion of the total film coefficient. This is for vertical walls.
The key choice options include: ASHRAEVerticalWall, AlamdariHammondVerticalWall, FohannoP-
olidoriVerticalWall, ISO15099Windows, UserCurve, or None.

1.11.13.1.9 Field: Natural Convection Vertical Wall Equation User Curve Name

The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.10 Field: Natural Convection Stable Horizontal Equation Source

This is for just the natural convection portion of the total film coefficient. This is for horizontal
surfaces with heat flow directed for stable thermal stratification. The key choice options include:
WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal, UserCurve, or None.

1.11.13.1.11 Field: Natural Convection Stable Horizontal Equation User Curve

Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.13.1.12 Field: Natural Convection Unstable Horizontal Equation Source

This is for just the natural convection portion of the total film coefficient. This is for horizontal
surfaces with heat flow directed for unstable thermal stratification. The key choice options include:
WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt, AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal, UserCurve, or None

1.11.13.1.13 Field: Natural Convection Unstable Horizontal Equation User

Curve Name
The SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:UserCurve named in this field is used when the previous field is
set to UserCurve.

1.11.14 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:UserCurve
This object is used to describe a custom model equation for surface convection heat transfer coeffi-
cients. If more than one curve is referenced, or non-blank, then they are all used, and the result is
the simple addition of all the curve results.

1.11.14.1 Inputs

1.11.14.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name of input object.
446 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.14.1.2 Field: Reference Temperature for Convection Heat Transfer

This field controls the nature of the reference temperature used with convection coefficient when
calculating the heat flow at the surface. Select one of the three choices: MeanAirTemperature,
AdjacentAirTemperature, SupplyAirTemperature. MeanAirTemperature is the typical application
for the classic convection model used with the complete mixing of room air. AdjacentAirTemperature
applies when used with Roomair models that account for temperature variations within the zone air
and directs the model to use the temperature near the surface rather than the average for the entire
zone. SupplyAirTemperature directs the model to use the supply air conditions for the heat transfer
conditions.

1.11.14.1.3 Field: Hc Function of Temperature Difference Curve Name

This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hc , the
convection coefficient, as a function of temperature difference. The curve’s “x” is absolute value of
delta-T (Surface temperature minus air temperature, (C))

1.11.14.1.4 Field: Hc Function of Temperature Difference Divided by Height

Curve Name
This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hc , the
convection coefficient, as a function of temperature difference divided by height. The curve’s “x” is
absolute value of delta-T/Height (Surface temp minus Air temp)/(vertical length scale), (C/m). For
an inside face, the vertical length scale is the zone’s interior height.

1.11.14.1.5 Field: Hc Function of Air Change Rate Curve Name

This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hc , the
convection coefficient, as a function of air change rate. The curve’s “x” is mechanical ACH (Air
Changes per hour from mechanical air system), (1/hr)

1.11.14.1.6 Field: Hc Function of Air System Volume Flow Rate Divided by

Zone Perimeter Length Curve Name
This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hc , the
convection coefficient, as a function of air change rate divided perimeter scale. Curve’s “x” is
mechanical system air flow rate (m3 /s) divided by zone’s length along exterior walls (m).

1.11.15 SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:UserCurve
This object is used to describe a custom model equation for surface convection heat transfer coeffi-
cients. If more than one curve is referenced, or non-blank, then they are all used and the result is
the simple addition of all the curve results.

1.11.15.1 Inputs

1.11.15.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name of input object.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 447

1.11.15.1.2 Field: Wind Speed Type for Curve

This field specifies what sort of wind velocity data should be used in when evaluating the curve in
the following field. There are for key choice options. “WeatherFile” directs using the unmodified
value from the epw file or design weather data. “HeightAdjust” uses the value from the epw file
modified for height above ground, as determined by the z coordinate, using the site terrain and
weather station information. “ParallelComponent” uses the value from the epw file modified to take
just the velocity component that is parallel to the surface. “ParallelComponentHeightAdjust” uses
the height adjusted wind velocity and then computes the parallel component.

1.11.15.1.3 Field: Hf Function of Wind Speed Curve Name

This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hf , the
forced convection coefficient, as a function of wind speed. The curve’s “x” is wind speed as defined
by the method chosen in the previous field.

1.11.15.1.4 Field: Hn Function of Temperature Difference Curve Name

This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hn , the
natural convection coefficient, as a function of temperature difference. Curve’s “x” is absolute value
of delta-T (Surface temperature minus air temperature, (C))

1.11.15.1.5 Field: Hc Function of Temperature Difference Divided by Height

Curve Name
This field contains the name of separate performance curve or table object that describes hn , the
natural convection coefficient, as a function of temperature difference divided by height. Curve’s “x”
is absolute value of delta-T/Height (Surface temp minus Air temp)/(vertical length scale), (C/m).
For an outside face the vertical length scale is the exterior facade’s overall height.

1.11.16 SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients
The convection coefficients of each surface, both exterior and interior, are automatically calculated
during EnergyPlus execution. These calculations are “governed” by other objects such as the Sur-
faceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside (overall default), the Zone object’s field called Zone Inside Convec-
tion Algorithm (Zone Default), the and the SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside (overall default),
and/or the Zone object’s field called Zone Outside Convection Algorithm (Zone Default). Usually,
that will be enough flexibility for most users. However, if you need to match pre-existing convection
coefficients (from another program) or are trying to match a test suite of results, you may wish
to use the “override” convection coefficients in the following object. This object allows for a single
surface to be given specific convection coefficients.
Note that using these in conjunction, in particular, the “Simple” option on either the Outside
Convection Algorithm or the Zone Outside Convection Algorithm field will result in a combined
coefficient regardless of choice chosen here.

Note that surfaces with “SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients” cannot use this object with
the “outside” coefficient – attempting to do so will cause a severe error; SurfaceProp-
erty:OtherSideCoefficients surfaces can apply an “inside” coefficient. And, surfaces with
448 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

“Ground” exposure do not use the “outside” coefficient that might be supplied here. Note,
too, that some lower boundaries are used regardless by certain surface types (i.e. Window) or
certain algorithm types.

1.11.16.1 Inputs

1.11.16.1.1 Field: Surface Name

This field is the applicable surface name for the user supplied convection coefficient.

1.11.16.1.2 Fields (Convection Location, Type, Coefficient & Schedule Name)

For simplicity, the descriptions of these field occur together – however, the fields are used sequentially
when put into the IDF file (reference the IDF examples following the descriptions).

1.11.16.1.3 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 Location

1.11.16.1.4 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 Location

This field contains the word “Outside” or “Inside” depending on which location is being described.

1.11.16.1.5 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 Type

1.11.16.1.6 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 Type

The entries can be of several types: Value (simple numeric value), Schedule (name of schedule with
the values), the usual key choices for overall models for Outside or Inside (Simple, SimpleCombined,
TARP, AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm etc.), the key choices for individual convection equations used
for customizing the adaptive algorithm, or a custom user defined correlation. The field should con-
tain one of the keys listed in the table below along with face they can be applied. The definitions of
the models and key choices are discussed under SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside, SurfaceConvec-
tionAlgorithm:Outside, SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections, and Surface-
ConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections.

Key choice Applies to Inside or Outside

Value Both
Schedule Both
Simple Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
TARP Both
DOE-2 Outside
MoWitt Outside
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm Both
ASHRAEVerticalWall Both
ASTMC1340 Inside
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 449

Key choice Applies to Inside or Outside

WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt Both
WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt Both
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondVerticalWall Both
KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat Inside
KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls Inside
KhalifaEq7Ceiling Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedFloor Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling Inside
FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall Both
KaradagChilledCeiling Inside
ISO15099Windows Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
NusseltJurges Outside
McAdams Outside
Mitchell Outside
BlockenWindard Outside
Emmel Outside
ClearRoof Outside
UserCurve Both

1.11.16.1.7 Field: Convection Coefficient 1

1.11.16.1.8 Field: Convection Coefficient 2

450 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

If the Convection type was “Value”, then this field is filled and contains the simple value to be used.
Otherwise, this can be blank.

1.11.16.1.9 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 Schedule Name

1.11.16.1.10 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 Schedule Name

If the Convection type was “Schedule”, then this field contains the name of a schedule describing
the value to be used during the time intervals for the schedule.

1.11.16.1.11 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 User Curve Name

1.11.16.1.12 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 User Curve Name

If the Convection type was “UserCurve”, then this field contains the name of a SurfaceConvectionAl-
gorithm:UserCurve input object describing the model equations to be used during the time intervals
for the schedule.
In IDF usage:

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Zn001:Wall001 , ! Surface Name
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
9.8, ! Convection Coefficient 1
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 Schedule Name
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 User Curve Name
Inside , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Location
Schedule , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Type
, ! Convection Coefficient 2 {blank because using schedule}
MyInteriorCC , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Schedule Name
; ! Convection Coefficient 2 User Curve Name

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Zn001:Wall002 , ! Surface Name
Inside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
.8, ! Convection Coefficient 1
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 Schedule Name
, ! Convection Coefficient 1 User Curve Name
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 2 Type
5.5, ! Convection Coefficient 2
; ! Convection Coefficient 2 User Curve Name

SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients ,
Zn001:Wall003 , ! Surface Name
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
Value , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
9.8; ! Convection Coefficient 1

1.11.17 SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface
The convection coefficients of each surface, both outside and inside, are automatically calculated
during EnergyPlus execution. These calculations are “governed” by other objects such as the Inside
Convection Algorithm (overall default) and the Zone Inside Convection Algorithm (Zone Default) and
the Outside Convection Algorithm (overall default) and/or the Zone Outside Convection Algorithm
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 451

(Zone Default). Usually, that will be enough flexibility for most users. However, if you need to
match pre-existing convection coefficients (from another program) or are trying to match a test suite
of results, you may wish to use the “override” convection coefficients in the following object. This
object is similar to the preceding “ConvectionCoefficients” object but allows multiple surfaces to be
assigned a type with one object entry.
Note that using these in conjunction, in particular, the “Simple” option on either the Outside
Convection Algorithm or the Zone Outside Convection Algorithm field will result in a combined
coefficient regardless of choice chosen here.
Note that surfaces with “SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients” cannot use this object with the
“outside” coefficient – attempting to do so will ignore OSC surfaces during a multiple surface “apply”;
SurfaceProperty:OtherSideCoefficients surfaces can apply an “inside” coefficient. And, surfaces with
“Ground” exposure do not use the “outside” coefficient that might be supplied here. Note, too,
that some lower boundaries are used regardless by certain surface types (i.e. Window) or certain
algorithm types.

1.11.17.1 Inputs

1.11.17.1.1 Field: Surface Type

This field is the applicable surface name for the user supplied convection coefficient. The allowable
surface types are:

– AllExteriorSurfaces (all surfaces that are “external environment” surfaces)

– AllExteriorWindows (all windows that are “external environment” surfaces)
– AllExteriorWalls
– AllExteriorRoofs
– AllExteriorFloors
– AllInteriorSurface (all surfaces that are “internal” surfaces)
– AllInteriorWindows
– AllInteriorCeilings
– AllInteriorFloors

1.11.17.1.2 Fields (Convection Location, Type, Coefficient & Schedule Name)

For simplicity, the descriptions of these field occur together – however, the fields are used sequentially
when put into the IDF file (reference the IDF examples following the descriptions).

1.11.17.1.3 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 Location

1.11.17.1.4 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 Location

This field contains the word “Outside” or “Inside” depending on which location is being described.

1.11.17.1.5 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 Type

452 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.17.1.6 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 Type

The entries can be of several types: Value (simple numeric value), Schedule (name of schedule with
the values), the usual key choices for overall models for Outside or Inside (Simple, SimpleCombined,
TARP, AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm etc.), the key choices for individual convection equations used
for customizing the adaptive algorithm, or a custom user defined correlation. The field should con-
tain one of the keys listed in the table below along with face they can be applied. The definitions of
the models and key choices are discussed under SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside , SurfaceConvec-
tionAlgorithm:Outside, SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections, and Surface-
ConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections.

Key choice Applies to Inside or Outside

Value Both
Schedule Both
Simple Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
TARP Both
DOE-2 Outside
MoWitt Outside
AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm Both
ASHRAEVerticalWall Both
ASTMC1340 Inside
WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt Both
WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt Both
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling Inside
FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal Both
AlamdariHammondVerticalWall Both
KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat Inside
KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat Inside
KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls Inside
KhalifaEq7Ceiling Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedFloor Inside
AwbiHattonHeatedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling Inside
BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling Inside
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 453

Key choice Applies to Inside or Outside

FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall Both
KaradagChilledCeiling Inside
ISO15099Windows Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls Inside
GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor Inside
SimpleCombined Outside
NusseltJurges Outside
McAdams Outside
Mitchell Outside
BlockenWindard Outside
Emmel Outside
ClearRoof Outside
UserCurve Both

1.11.17.1.7 Field: Convection Coefficient 1

1.11.17.1.8 Field: Convection Coefficient 2

If the Convection type was “Value”, then this field is filled and contains the simple value to be used.
Otherwise, this can be blank.

1.11.17.1.9 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 Schedule Name

1.11.17.1.10 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 Schedule Name

If the Convection type was “Schedule”, then this field contains the name of a schedule describing
the value to be used during the time intervals for the schedule.

1.11.17.1.11 Field: Convection Coefficient 1 User Curve Name

1.11.17.1.12 Field: Convection Coefficient 2 User Curve Name

If the Convection type was “UserCurve”, then this field contains the name of a SurfaceConvectionAl-
gorithm:UserCurve input object describing the model equations to be used during the time intervals
for the schedule.
In IDF usage:

SurfaceProperty: ConvectionCoefficients :MultipleSurface ,

AllExteriorWindows , ! Surface Types
Outside , ! Convection Coefficient 1 Location
MoWitt; ! Convection Coefficient 1 Type
454 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.18 Convection Coefficient Application Hierarchy

Ultimate flexibility and possibly ultimate user confusion can result from the convection coefficient
possibilities in EnergyPlus. The objects that control how convection models are assigned to individ-
ual surfaces are:

– SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside
– SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside
– Zone, Field: Zone Inside Convection Algorithm
– Zone, Field: Zone Outside Convection Algorithm
– SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients
– SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients:MultipleSurface

General to Specific, they are assigned in this order:

Table 1.18: Convection Coefficient Assignment Hierarchy

Objects/Description Action

SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:* Assigns for all surfaces in the run.

Zone, Fields: Zone * Convection Algorithm Trumps global assignment and assigns for all
surfaces in Zone.
SurfaceProperty:...:MultipleSurfaces Trumps above and assigns for specific types of
surfaces.
Two Multiple Surface Assignments overlap- Order in IDF is now important. Whichever
ping (such as AllExteriorSurfaces vs AllEx- is first gets the cookie and the second gets a
teriorWalls) warning.
Specific Surface Assignment Trumps all Above.

There are additional objects that provide fine control over the models that get assigned.

– SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:AdaptiveModelSelections
– SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:AdaptiveModelSelections
– SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Inside:UserCurve
– SurfaceConvectionAlgorithm:Outside:UserCurve

1.11.19 Convection Coefficients Outputs

Outputs for the User Supplied Convection Coefficients appear as values in the Surface Output Vari-
ables (Surface Inside Face Convection Heat Transfer Coefficient and Surface Outside Face Convection
Heat Transfer Coefficient). What the program expects to use is shown in the Surface Details report
(Output:Surfaces:List, Details;)
When EnergyPlus is set to Display Advanced Variables (Output:Diagnostics, DisplayAdvancedVari-
ables;), then additional output variables are available that indicate the status of convection modeling
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 455

by identifying which models are in effect at a given time. The adaptive convection algorithms may
switch between models over time and the following output variables provide a way to monitor this
behavior. These outputs are integer codes and the integer values are explained in tables.

1.11.19.1 Surface Inside Face Convection Classification Index

This variable reports how the surface was classified as part of the adaptive convection algorithm for
the inside face. The algorithm examines probable flow regimes, heat flow directions, orientations,
HVAC equipment connections, and current operating status to assign each surface a category. The
numbers in this report are integer codes that correspond to surface categories as described in the
following table.

Code Zone Airflow Regime Type of surface Heat Flow

-1 Invalid N/A N/A

1 A1 Radiant Heated Vertical Wall Any
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
2 A1 Radiant Heated Horizontal Stable
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
3 A1 Radiant Heated Horizontal Unstable
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
4 A1 Radiant Heated Heated Floor Unstable
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
5 A1 Radiant Heated Chilled Ceiling Unstable
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
6 A1 Radiant Heated Tilted Stable
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
7 A1 Radiant Heated Tilted Unstable
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
8 A1 Radiant Heated Window Any
Floor or Chilled Ceil-
ing
9 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Non-heated Vertical Any
Wall
10 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Heated wall Any
11 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Horizontal Stable
12 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Horizontal Unstable
13 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Tilted Stable
14 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Tilted Unstable
456 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Code Zone Airflow Regime Type of surface Heat Flow

15 A2 Radiant Wall Heat Windows Any

16 A3 Simple Buoyancy Vertical Walls Any
17 A3 Simple Buoyancy Horizontal Stable
18 A3 Simple Buoyancy Horizontal Unstable
19 A3 Simple Buoyancy Tilted Stable
20 A3 Simple Buoyancy Tilted Unstable
21 A3 Simple Buoyancy Windows Any
22 B Convective Zone Vertical Walls Any
Heat
23 B Convective Zone Vertical Walls near Any
Heat heater
24 B Convective Zone Horizontal Stable
Heat
25 B Convective Zone Horizontal Unstable
Heat
26 B Convective Zone Tilted Stable
Heat
27 B Convective Zone Tilted Unstable
Heat
28 B Convective Zone Windows Any
Heat
29 C Central Air Diffuser Walls Any
30 C Central Air Diffuser Ceiling Any
31 C Central Air Diffuser Floor Any
32 C Central Air Diffuser Windows Any
33 D Zone Fan Unit Walls Any
34 D Zone Fan Unit Horizontal Stable
35 D Zone Fan Unit Horizontal Unstable
36 D Zone Fan Unit Tilted Stable
37 D Zone Fan Unit Tilted Unstable
38 D Zone Fan Unit Windows Any
39 E Mixed Forced and Walls Assisting
Buoyancy
40 E Mixed Forced and Walls Opposing
Buoyancy
41 E Mixed Forced and Floor Stable
Buoyancy
42 E Mixed Forced and Floor Unstable
Buoyancy
43 E Mixed Forced and Ceiling Stable
Buoyancy
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 457

Code Zone Airflow Regime Type of surface Heat Flow

44 E Mixed Forced and Ceiling Unstable

Buoyancy
45 E Mixed Forced and Windows Any
Buoyancy

1.11.19.2 Surface Inside Face Convection Model Equation Index

This variable reports the specific model equation used to calculate the inside face convection co-
efficient. This can vary when using the adaptive convection algorithm and so the result of that
selection algorithm is reported here. The following table lists the models associated with specific
interger codes reported here. The models correspond to key words used in input objects.

Report Code Related key and model

200 UserValue
201 UserSchedule
202 UserCurve
203 ASHRAEVerticalWall
204 WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt
205 WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt
206 FisherPedersenCeilDiffuserFloor
207 FisherPedersenCeilDiffuserCeiling
208 FisherPedersenCeilDiffuserWalls
209 AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal
210 AlamdariHammondVerticalWall
211 AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal
212 KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat
213 KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat
214 KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat
215 KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls
216 KhalifaEq7Ceiling
217 AwbiHattonHeatedFloor
218 AwbiHattonHeatedWall
219 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistingWall
220 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOppossingWall
221 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling
222 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling
223 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor
224 BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor
225 FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall
226 KaradagChilledCeiling
458 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Report Code Related key and model

227 ISO15099Windows
228 GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow
229 GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls
230 GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor

1.11.19.3 Surface Inside Face Convection Reference Air Index

The inside face convection heat transfer calculations can be based on different reference air temper-
atures. This reference air temperature can vary during the simulation when the adaptive algorithm
selects models that use different references. The following table lists the meaning of the integer
codes.

Report Code Reference Air Temperature Method

1 Zone mean air temperature

2 Surface adjacent air temperature
3 Supply air temperature

1.11.19.4 Surface Outside Face Convection Classification Index

This variable reports how the surface was classified as part of the adaptive convection algorithm for
the outside face. The algorithm examines the wind direction, heat flow directions and orientations
to assign each surface a category. The numbers in this report are integer codes that correspond to
surface categories as described in the following table.

Report Code Surface Classification

-1 Invalid
101 Vertical Wall, Windward
102 Vertical Wall, Leeward
103 Roof, stable heat flow direction
104 Roof, unstable heat flow direction

1.11.19.5 Surface Outside Face Forced Convection Model Equation Index

1.11.19.6 Surface Outside Face Natural Convection Model Equation Index

These variables report the specific model equation used to calculate the outside face’s convection
coefficient. They can vary when using the adaptive convection algorithm and so the results of that
selection algorithm are reported in these variables. The following table lists the models associated
with specific integer codes that might be reported here. The models correspond to key words used
in input objects.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 459

Report Code Related key and model

300 None
301 UserValue
302 UserSchedule
303 UserCurve
304 ASHRAESimpleCombined
305 NaturalASHRAEVerticalWall
306 NaturalWaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt
307 NaturalWaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt
308 SparrowWindward
309 SparrowLeeward
310 MoWiTTWindward
311 MoWiTTLeeward
312 DOE2Windward
313 DOE2Leeward
314 NusseltJurges
315 McAdams
316 Mitchell
317 ClearRoof
318 BlockenWindward
319 EmmelVertical
320 EmmelRoof
321 AlamdariHammondVerticalWall
322 FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall
323 ISO15099Windows
324 AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal
325 AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal

1.11.20 SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients
Advanced/Research Usage: The internal and external vapor transfer coefficients that are used by the
CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement model are automatically calculated during EnergyPlus
execution using information on the convection coefficients. However it is sometimes useful to be able
to “override” the calculation and set fixed values of vapor transfer coefficient for a single surface.
These coefficients are only used by the CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement model and will be
ignored by other solution algorithms.

1.11.20.1 Inputs

1.11.20.1.1 Field: Surface Name

This field is the applicable surface name for the user supplied vapor transfer coefficient.
460 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.20.1.2 Field: Constant External Vapor Transfer Coefficient

Select ‘yes’ to use the value supplied as the external vapor transfer coefficient

1.11.20.1.3 Field: External Vapor Coefficient Value

HAMT will use this value to calculate the vapor transfer into and out off the external surface of this
surface. Units are kg/Pa.s.m2.

1.11.20.1.4 Field: Constant Internal vapor Transfer Coefficient

Select ‘yes’ to use the value supplied as the internal vapor transfer coefficient

1.11.20.1.5 Field: Internal Vapor Coefficient Value

The CombinedHeatAndMoistureFiniteElement algorithm will use this value to calculate the vapor
transfer into and out of the internal surface of this surface. Units are kg/Pa.s.m2.
Below is an example input of vapor transfer coefficients for a surface.

SurfaceProperties:VaporCoefficients ,
South wall , !- Surface Name
Yes , !- Constant External Vapor Transfer Coefficient
0.0000000625 , !- External Vapor Coefficient Value
Yes , !- Constant Internal vapor Transfer Coefficient
0.00000002; !- Internal Vapor Coefficient Value

1.11.21 SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity
This object is used to model a multi-skin exterior heat transfer surface. This is a special case where
the outside face is a slightly detached layer forming a naturally ventilated cavity. The actual outer
surface is referred to as the baffle. The modeling here assumes that the heat capacity in the outer baf-
fle can be neglected since it is much lower than the underlying mass surface. This object is used with
the BuildingSurface:Detailed object where the Heat Transfer surfaces are referred to as the underly-
ing surfaces. The constructions and materials for the BuildingSurface:Detailed object should reflect
the construction of just the underlying surface. The SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity
object is used to describe the decoupled layer, or baffle, and the characteristics of the cavity and
openings for natural ventilation. This object is also used in conjunction with the OtherSideCondi-
tionsModel.
The area and orientation are obtained from BuildingSurface:Detailed objects, which are refer-
enced by name. This object can be used to model certain types of photovoltaic mounting configu-
rations such as interlocking roof pavers. If the baffle covers only part of a surface, then that surface
should be split into separate BuildingSurface:Detailed objects where one matches the size of
the baffle. A single baffle can be associated with as many BuildingSurface:Detailed objects as
desired. The base heat transfer surfaces need not be contiguous nor have the same orientation, but
the program will issue warnings if surfaces have widely ranging tilts and azimuths.
Note that the model involves predicting the rates that ambient air moves in and out of the cavity.
Accurate modeling of these air flows would be extremely challenging and so the models provided
through this object are simplistic engineering models based on discharge coefficients that are sensitive
to wind and buoyancy effects. The accuracy depends on the values for, and applicability of, the
discharge coefficients and unfortunately little research is available to help characterize these. The
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 461

models should be considered rudimentary and the user is encouraged to explore different values for
the coefficients in attempts to bound the importance of natural ventilation for the cavities. See the
Engineering Reference for more details.

1.11.21.1 Inputs

1.11.21.1.1 Field: Name

This field contains a unique name for the ventilated cavity.

1.11.21.1.2 Field: Boundary Conditions Model Name

This field contains the name of an SurfaceProperty:OtherSideConditionsModel object declared else-
where in the input file. This will connect the baffle and ventilated cavity to the exterior boundary
conditions for the underlying heat transfer surface.

1.11.21.1.3 Field: Area Fraction of Openings

This field is used to enter an area fraction for what part of the baffle consists of openings. The area
of the openings will set to the product of this field and the sum of the area of the underlying surfaces.

1.11.21.1.4 Field: Thermal Emissivity of Exterior Baffle Material

This field is used to enter the thermal emissivity of the baffler. This surface property is for longwave
infrared radiation. The property is used for both sides of collector. Most painted materials have an
emissivity of 0.9.

1.11.21.1.5 Field: Solar Absorptivity of Exterior Baffle

This field is used to enter the solar absorptivity of the baffle. This surface property is for shortwave,
solar radiation. The property is used for the front side of the baffle that faces the environment.
Darker colors have a higher absorptivity. While black is the highest performance, other colors might
be used to match the color scheme of the rest of the façade.

1.11.21.1.6 Field: Height Scale for Buoyancy-Driven Ventilation

This field is used to enter a nominal height scale (m) for prediction of ventilation induced by buoyancy.
This value (∆HN P L ) is defined as the height from the midpoint of the lower opening to the neutral
pressure level. Increasing the value will increase the ventilation rate due to buoyancy.

1.11.21.1.7 Field: Effective Thickness of Cavity Behind Exterior Baffle

This field is used to enter a nominal gap thickness (m) for the collector. If the baffle is corrugated,
use the average depth. This distance value is only used when the collector is near horizontal to
determine a length scale in the vertical direction for buoyancy calculations. For example, if the
collector is mounted on a flat roof, its tilt-adjusted height is zero and the program will use this gap
thickness as a length scale rather than the height from the previous field.
462 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.21.1.8 Field: Ratio of Actual Surface Area to Projected Surface Area

This field is used to enter a factor that accounts for the extra surface area resulting from and uneven
baffle surface. Corrugations may be present to help stiffen the baffle or ventilated roofing tiles may
have more surface are for convection heat transfer than the underlying surface. The projected surface
area is obtained by the program from the (flat) underlying surfaces. If the baffle is flat then this
ratio is 1.0. If the baffle is corrugated, then this ratio will be greater than one with a typical value
might be 1.165.

1.11.21.1.9 Field: Roughness of Exterior Surface

This field is used to describe the relative roughness of the baffle material. This field is similar to one
in the Material object. This parameter only influences the convection coefficients, more specifically
the exterior convection coefficient. A special keyword is expected in this field with the options
being “VeryRough”, “Rough”, “MediumRough”, “MediumSmooth”, “Smooth”, and “VerySmooth”
in order of roughest to smoothest options.

1.11.21.1.10 Field: Effectiveness for Perforations with Respect to Wind

This field is used to enter a value for the coefficient used to determine natural air exchanges from
wind. Wind will cause exterior air to move in and out of the cavity. Cv is an arbitrary coefficient
used to model the effectiveness of openings and depends on opening geometry and the orientation
with respect to the wind. Cv should probably be in the range 0.05 to 0.65. Increasing Cv will
increase the amount of natural ventilation. The following equation shows how Cv is used in the
program to predict the volumetric flow rate due to wind:

V̇wind = Cv Ain U∞ (1.21)

1.11.21.1.11 Field: Discharge Coefficient for Openings with Respect to Buoyancy

Driven Flow
This field is used to enter a value for the coefficient used to determine natural air exchanges from
buoyancy. Stack or buoyancy effects will cause exterior air to move in and out of the cavity. Cd is an
arbitrary discharge coefficient that depends on the geometry of the opening. Cd should probably be
in the range 0.1 to 1.0. Increasing Cd will increase the amount of natural ventilation. The following
equations show how Cd is used in the program to predict the volume flow rate due to buoyancy:
√
V̇thermal = CD Ain 2g∆HN P L (Ta,cav − Tamb ) /Ta,cav (if Ta,cav > Tamb )
√
V̇thermal = CD Ain 2g∆HN P L (Tamb − Ta,cav ) /Tamb (if Tamb > Ta,cav and baffle is vertical)
where ∆HN P L is the value input into the field above for the height scale for buoyancy-driven venti-
lation.

1.11.21.1.12 Field(s): Surface <1 thru x> Name

The remaining fields are used to name the BuildingSurface:Detailed objects that are associated
with the exterior naturally vented cavity. These are the underlying heat transfer surfaces and are
defined elsewhere in the input file. These surfaces should all specify OtherSideConditionsModel as
their exterior environment. This object is extensible, so additional fields of this type can be added
to the end of this object.
An example IDF entry is
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 463

SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity ,
PVRoofPaverExtVentCav1 , ! Name
PVRoofPaverSystem1 , ! OtherSideConditionsModel Object Name
0.02, ! Area Fraction of Openings
0.9, ! Thermal Emissivity of Exterior Baffle Material
0.92, ! Solar Absorbtivity of Exterior Baffle
0.05, ! Height scale for buoyancy -driven ventilation
0.05, ! Effective Thickness of Cavity Behind Exterior Baffle
0.97, ! Ratio of Actual surface area to projected surface area
Smooth , ! Roughness of collector
0.1 , ! Cv , Effectiveness for perforations with respect to Wind
0.5 , ! Cd , Discharge Coefficient for Openings with respect to buoyancy -driven flow
Zn001:Roof001 ; ! Surface Name

1.11.21.2 Outputs

In addition to related output that can be obtained for all surfaces, these outputs are available for
exterior naturally vented cavity configurations:

– HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Baffle Surface Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Air Change Rate [ACH]
– HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Wind Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Buoyancy Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]

1.11.21.2.1 Surface Exterior Cavity Air Drybulb Temperature [C]

The temperature of air inside the cavity behind the baffle.

1.11.21.2.2 Surface Exterior Cavity Baffle Surface Temperature [C]

The surface temperature of the exterior baffle material itself.

1.11.21.2.3 Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Air Change Rate
[ACH]
The rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when the collector is
inactive in Air Changes per Hour.

1.11.21.2.4 Surface Exterior Cavity Total Natural Ventilation Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
The mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when the
collector is inactive.

1.11.21.2.5 Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Wind Mass Flow
Rate [kg/s]
The part of mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when
the collector is inactive due to wind-driven forces.
464 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.21.2.6 Surface Exterior Cavity Natural Ventilation from Buoyancy Mass

Flow Rate [kg/s]
The part of mass flow rate of natural ventilation air exchange between the plenum and ambient when
the collector is inactive due to buoyancy-driven forces.

1.11.22 SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside
This object can be used as an alternative to the standard (automatic) EnergyPlus calculation of
the solar radiation incident on interior surfaces of the building. Using this method, the normal
EnergyPlus calculation is replaced with a schedule of solar incidence values that are calculated
outside the program.

1.11.22.1 Inputs

1.11.22.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside object Must be unique between all Surface-
Property:SolarIncidentInside objects.

1.11.22.1.2 Field: Surface Name

The building surface associated with this object (ref BuildingSurface:Detailed). Solar absorptance
values in the schedule file will be applied to the inside of this surface.

1.11.22.1.3 Field: Construction Name

The building construction associated with this object (ref Construction). It is possible that the En-
ergy Management System will change the construction associated with the surface; if the construction
is changed, a new set of data may need to be applied to the current surface.

1.11.22.1.4 Field: Inside Surface Incident Sun Solar Radiation Schedule Name
This field specifies the name of a schedule that contains the values for incident solar radiation. Values
from the schedule data will be used to replace the absorbed solar radiation that would normally be
calculated by EnergyPlus. Units in the external schedule file must be W/m2 .
Example for SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside using a compact schedule:

Schedule:Compact ,
North Wall SSG , !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,10 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,20 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,15; !- Field 7

SurfaceProperty:SolarIncidentInside ,
North Wall Solar Incident , !- Name
Room102 North Wall , !- Surface Name
Room Wall - North , !- Construction Name
North Wall SSG; !- Schedule Name
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 465

1.11.23 ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers
This object can be used as an alternative to the standard (automatic) EnergyPlus calculation of the
solar radiation absorbed by fenestration systems in the building. Using this method, the normal
EnergyPlus calculation is replaced with a schedule of solar absorptance values that are calculated
outside the program.

1.11.23.1 Inputs

1.11.23.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers object Must be unique between
all ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers objects.

1.11.23.1.2 Field: Fenestration Surface

The fenestration surface associated with this object (ref FenestrationSurface:Detailed). Values from
the schedule data will be used to replace the absorbed solar radiation in the fenestration layers that
would normally be calculated by EnergyPlus. Value units in the schedule must be W/m2 .

1.11.23.1.3 Field: Construction Name

The building construction associated with this object (ref Construction). It is possible that the En-
ergy Management System will change the construction associated with the surface; if the construction
is changed, a new set of data may need to be applied to the current surface.

1.11.23.1.4 Field: Layer 1 Solar Radiation Absorbed Schedule Name

Specifies the name of a schedule that contains the absorbed solar radiation values in units of W/m2 .
Values from the schedule are used for the absorbed solar radiation of the first (outside) layer.

1.11.23.1.5 Field: Layer 2 Solar Radiation Absorbed Schedule Name

Specifies the name of a schedule that contains absorbed solar radiation values in units of W/m2 .
Values from the schedule are used for the absorbed solar radiation of the second layer.

1.11.23.1.6 Field: Layer 3 Solar Radiation Absorbed Schedule Name

Specifies the name of a schedule that contains absorbed solar radiation values in units of W/m2 .
Values from the schedule are used for the absorbed solar radiation for the third layer.

1.11.23.1.7 Field: Layer 4 Solar Radiation Absorbed Schedule Name

Specifies the name of a schedule that contains absorbed solar radiation values in units of W/m2 .
Values from the schedule are used for the absorbed solar radiation of the fourth layer.
466 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.23.1.8 Field: Layer 5 Solar Radiation Absorbed Schedule Name

Specifies the name of a schedule that contains absorbed solar radiation values in units of W/m2 .
Values from the schedule are used for the absorbed solar radiation of the fifth layer.
Example for ComplexFenestrationProperty:SolarAbsorbedLayers with compact schedules:

Schedule:Compact ,
Layer 1, !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,1 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,2 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,1.5; !- Field 7

Schedule:Compact ,
Layer 2, !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,0.8 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,1.2 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,1.0; !- Field 7

Schedule:Compact ,
Layer 3, !- Name
Positive Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 07:00 ,1 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,2.1 , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 ,1.7; !- Field 7

ComplexFenestrationProperty :SolarAbsorbedLayers ,
South Window Solar Absorbed Layers , !- Name
Room 102 South Window , !- Fenestration surface name
CFS_Glz_2 , !- Construction Surface name
Layer 1, !- Absorbed solar energy in layer 1
Layer 2, !- Absorbed solar energy in layer 2
Layer 3; !- Absorbed solar energy in layer 3

1.11.24 GeometryTransform
This object provides a simple method of altering the footprint geometry of a model. The intent is to
provide a single parameter that can be used to reshape the building description contained in the rest
of the input file. This object was implemented for use in parametric massing studies and with the
optimization program GenOpt. Although building footprint is often constrained in practice, analysts
may find this object useful for investigating how building form impacts daylighting and solar gains
on the east and west facades without having to change all of the surface geometry input.
Aspect Ratio is defined as the overall length in the East-West direction divided by the overall length
in the North-South direction.
This object should be used with considerable care since it will completely alter the geometry modeled
by EnergyPlus and may have unintended side effects. The surface areas of all horizontal surfaces may
change radically with corresponding changes in Zone floor areas. The total floor area will not change
but individual horizontal surfaces will gain and loose area. Vertical surfaces will have the same
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 467

height but will gain and lose length. Lighting and electrical equipment design levels for individual
zones will likely have a different energy per unit area in the transformed geometry.
The surface geometry must be set to Relative, see GlobalGeometryRules. Of course, the coor-
dinates must be entered in relative coordinates as well.
Since windows in EnergyPlus need to be rectangular, it is possible to define a horizontal window
(skylight) that once transformed is no longer rectangular and will cause EnergyPlus to halt. To
avoid this problem, horizontal windows should be defined orthogonal to the Cardinal directions and
building rotation (see Building) used to orient the final form with respect to North.
The object doesn’t create any specific output, but the results of using it can be understood by
viewing DXF output files. Figure 1.63 shows an example of a building that has been morphed using
the Aspect Ratio Transform object. Using this object allowed the same geometry input to generate
both of the models represented in by their DXF output files.

1.11.24.1 Inputs

1.11.24.1.1 Field: Plane of Transform

This field specifies the plane that the geometry transform should act on. It is currently restricted to
altering the horizontal footprint of a building and must be set to “XY.”

1.11.24.1.2 Field: Current Aspect Ratio

This field specifies the aspect ratio of the building geometry described in the rest of the input file.
It is used to scale the new aspect ratio. If this field is set to 1.0, then the altered building will not
necessarily have the new aspect ratio defined in the next field.

1.11.24.1.3 Field: New Aspect Ratio

This field specifies the aspect ratio that the building described in the rest of the input file will be
changed to.

1.11.25 SurfaceProperty:SurroundingSurfaces
The object is used to calculate long wave radiation to an external surface from its surrounding
surfaces, defining the properties of the surrounding surfaces. The property object declares a list of
single surrounding surfaces which has a name, a field of view factor, and another field Temperature
Schedule Name referencing a schedule containing the temperature of the surrounding surface, which
can be overwritten at each time step in EnergyPlus run time through co-simulation. View factors
are assumed to be constant values. At least one surrounding surface should be defined in this object.
The object also defines the sky and ground temperature and view factors to the external surface.
The sum of all defined view factors should not exceed 1.0. If only sky view is defined in this object,
the ground view factor to this surface will be 1.0 subtracted with the ground view factor and all
other defined surface view factors. If only ground view is defined in this object, the sky view factor
to this surface will be 1.0 subtracted with the sky view factor and all other defined surface view
factors. If neither of the sky and ground view factors are explicitly declared here, the sum of the sky
and ground view factor would be 1.0 subtracted with all other defined surface view factors and the
proportion will be set as the same with the global setting.
468 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.63: Example of Geometry Transform – Aspect Ratio

1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 469

1.11.25.1 Field: Name

This is the unique name of the surface property.

1.11.25.2 Field: Sky View Factor

This field defines the constant sky view factor to an external surface. The sky view factor used
in solar radiation calculation of the surface would be overwritten with the value of the fraction if
defined here. If the field is left blank, the sky view factor of this surface will be calculated with the
rules demonstrated above.

1.11.25.3 Field: Sky Temperature Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the sky temperature. The sky temperature used
in solar radiation calculation of the surface would be overwritten with the value of the scheduled
temperature if defined here. If the field is left blank, the global sky temperature would be used.

1.11.25.4 Field: Ground View Factor

This field defines the constant ground view factor to an external surface. The ground view factor
used in solar radiation calculation of the surface would be overwritten with the value of the fraction
if defined here. If the field is left blank, the ground view factor of this surface will be calculated with
the rules demonstrated above.

1.11.25.5 Field: Ground Temperature Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the ground temperature. The ground temperature
used in solar radiation calculation of the surface would be overwritten with the value of the scheduled
temperature if defined here. If the field is left blank, the global ground temperature would be used.

1.11.25.6 Field: Surrounding Surface 1 Name

This field defines the name of a surrounding surface to the external surface.

1.11.25.7 Field: Surrounding Surface 1 View Factor

This field defines the constant view factor of a surrounding surface to an external surface.

1.11.25.8 Field: Surrounding Surface 1 Temperature Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the of a surrounding surface temperature.
The object is extensible so the last three fields can be repeated to define multiple surrounding surface
name, temperature and view factor sets.
An example IDF object follows.
470 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

SurfaceProperty:SurroundingSurfaces ,
SrdSurfs:Window , !- Name
0.3, !- Sky View Factor
, !- Sky Temperature Schedule Name
0.1, !- Ground View Factor
, !- Ground Temperature Schedule Name
SurroundingSurface1 , !- Surrounding Surface 1 Name
0.6, !- Surrounding Surface 1 View Factor
Surrounding Temp Sch 1; !- Surrounding Surface 1 Temperature Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
Surrounding Temp Sch 1, !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , 15.0; !- Field 3

1.11.26 SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment
The object links to a surface object Surface:Detailed and is used when there is a need to calculate
surface level environmental data externally and import them into the simulation to override existing
environmental data, including external solar shading fractions, local air velocity, temperature and
humidity, and surrounding surface temperatures and view factors. The object links to three op-
tional objects including a schedule object declared by Field: External Shading Fraction Sched-
ule Name, a SurfaceProperty:SurroundingSurfaces object declared by Field: Surrounding
Surfaces Object Name, and an OutdoorAir:Node object declared by Field: Outdoor Air
Node Name. The object provides inputs to calculate shading, solar radiation, zone air balance and
surface exterior heat balance.

1.11.26.1 Field: Name

This is the unique name of the surface property.

1.11.26.2 Field: Surface Name

This is the name of the surface that will be assigned to use the local environmental data defined in
the next three fields. This should be a name of a surface defined elsewhere.

1.11.26.3 Field: External Shading Fraction Schedule Name

This field is used to import external shading fraction data from external calculation. This should be
a name of a schedule object with fraction input.

1.11.26.4 Field: Surrounding Surfaces Object Name

This field is used to import surrounding surfaces properties (temperature and view factors to
the external surface) from external calculation. This should be a name of a SurfaceProp-
erty:SurroundingSurfaces object.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 471

1.11.26.5 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This field is used to import local environmental data from local outdoor air nodes, including dry
and wet bulb temperature, wind speed and wind direction. This should be a name of a Out-
doorAir:Node object.
An example IDF object follows.
SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment ,
LocEnv:Zn001:Wall001 , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Exterior Surface Name
ExtShadingSch:Zn001:Wall001 , !- External Shading Fraction Schedule Name
SrdSurf:Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surrounding Surfaces Object Name
OutdoorAirNode :0001; !- Outdoor Air Node Name

1.11.27 ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment
The object links to a Zone object and is used when there is a need to calculate zone level envi-
ronmental data externally and import them into the simulation to override existing environmental
data, including local air temperature and humidity, wind velocity and direction. links to an Out-
doorAir:Node object declared by Field: Outdoor Air Node Name. The reference local outdoor
air node provides ambient conditions for the calculation of infiltration and ventilation at the zone
level.

1.11.27.1 Field: Name

This is the unique name of the zone property.

1.11.27.2 Field: Zone Name

This is the name of the zone that will be assigned to use the local environmental data defined in the
next field. This should be a name of a surface defined elsewhere.

1.11.27.3 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This field is used to import local environmental data from local outdoor air nodes, including dry
and wet bulb temperature, wind speed and wind direction. This should be a name of a Out-
doorAir:Node object.
An example IDF object follows.
ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment ,
LocEnv:Zn001 , !- Name
Zn001 , !- Exterior Surface Name
OutdoorAirNode :0001; !- Outdoor Air Node Name

1.11.28 SurfaceProperty:HeatBalanceSourceTerm
The object allows additional heat source term of the surface boundary condition in the surface heat
balance calculation. The object specifies a surface with the additional heat source term described by
a schedule of heat rates (can be positive or negative values) in W/m2 . A heat source can be added to
either or both the inside and outside of the same surface. The heat rates are pre-calculated outside
EnergyPlus.
472 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.28.1 Field: Surface Name

This is the name of the surface that will be assigned to use the additional heat source term in heat
balance calculation

1.11.28.2 Field: Inside Face Heat Source Term Schedule Name

The value of this schedule is the source term value for the inside face of this surface. If this field
is left blank, no inside surface source term will be applied. The schedule values are heat rate per
surface area (W/m2), when positive schedule values indicate heat gain and negative values indicates
loss.

1.11.28.3 Field: Outside Face Heat Source Term Schedule Name

The value of this schedule is the source term value for the outside face of this surface. If this field
is left blank, no outside surface source term will be applied. The schedule values are heat rate per
surface area (W/m2), when positive schedule values indicate heat gain and negative values indicates
loss.
SurfaceProperty:HeatBalanceSourceTerm ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name
, !- Inside Face Heat Source Term Schedule Name
HeatSourceSch :001; !- Outside Face Heat Source Term Schedule Name

1.11.29 Zone Property View Factors

EnergyPlus has two options for specifying the thermal radiation exchange view factors between
surfaces in a zone: the approximate option and the user input option. Because the actual geometric
arrangement within a zone is very complex, the approximate method of including thermal mass and
other forced exchanges is more realistic than trying to come up with “exact” view factors. However,
in some research situations it might be desirable to have control of the view factors used. For this
reason, a user input mode has been included in EnergyPlus. The two modes are described in the
next sections.

1.11.29.1 Approximate Option

The first option produces approximate results and uses an area weighted scheme to calculate “view
factors” between surfaces within a thermal zone. Each surface uses the total area that it can “see”
among the other surfaces. The approximate view factor from this surface to each other surface is
then the area of the receiving surface over the sum of areas that are visible to the sending surface.
In order to account in some limited way for the fact that certain surfaces will not see each other,
several assumptions have been built into this view factor approximation. First, a surface cannot
see itself. Second, surfaces with approximately the same azimuth (facing direction) and tilt (“same”
being within a built in limit) will not see each other. This means that a window will not see the wall
that it is placed on, for example. Third, floors cannot see each other. Fourth, if the surface is a floor,
ceiling, roof, or internal mass, the rule for the same azimuth and tilt eliminating radiant exchange
between surfaces is waived when the receiving surface is floor, roof, ceiling, or internal mass as long
as both surfaces are not floors.
1.11. GROUP – ADVANCED SURFACE CONCEPTS 473

Note that this does not take into account that surfaces may be “around the corner” from each other
and in reality not see each other at all. Rooms are assumed to be convex rather than concave in this
method.
To summarize, using the Surface “Class”, the approximate view factors have:

1. No surface sees itself.

2. No Floor sees another floor.
3. All other surface types see Internal Mass.
4. All other surface types see floors.
5. Floors always see ceilings.
6. Floors always see roofs.
7. All other surfaces whose tilt or facing angle differences are greater than 10 degrees see each
other.

If geometry is correct, conditions 1, 3, and 7 should take care of all surfaces, but the other conditions
supply common sense when the geometry is incorrect. More information about the EnergyPlus view
factor calculation is contained in the Engineering Reference document.

1.11.29.2 User Input View Factors

The second option for specifying view factors requires user input values. These should be
used with care in research or special situations. The object available for this is ZoneProp-
erty:UserViewFactors:BySurfaceName.

1.11.30 ZoneProperty:UserViewFactors:BySurfaceName
The method of entering user view factors is to enter each surface name and its view factor value to
other surfaces in a radiant/solar enclosure which may consist of one space, one zone or a group of
spaces or zones.

1.11.30.1 Inputs

1.11.30.1.1 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

An enclosure for radiant exchange may be a single space or zone, or a group of spaces or zones
connected by one or more air boundaries (see Construction:AirBoundary). An enclosure may also
be a group of spaces in the same zone with implied air boundaries because the spaces are defined
only by floor surfaces (see Space. If a ZoneList name is specified, the referenced “ZoneList”) must
match a group of zones connected with Construction:AirBoundary.
Enter the applicable surface pairs with non-zero view factors. Any omitted surface pair is assumed
to have a zero view factor.

1.11.30.1.2 Field: From Surface 1

This field specifies the name of the “from surface”.
474 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.11.30.1.3 Field: To Surface 1

This field specifies the name of the “to surface”.

1.11.30.1.4 Field: Factor 1

This value is the view factor for “from Surface” to “to Surface”.
An IDF Example:
ZoneProperty: UserViewFactors :BySurfaceName ,Lshaped Zone ,
Lshaped Zone:South Wall ,Lshaped Zone:South Wall ,0.000000 ,
Lshaped Zone:South Wall ,Lshaped Zone:East Wall ,0.101310 ,
<snip >

1.12 Group – Detailed Ground Heat Transfer

1.12.1 Detailed Ground Heat Transfer
The following objects may be included in an EnergyPlus input IDF file but are handled by the Slab
preprocessor:

– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:Materials
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:MatlProps
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:BoundConds
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:BldgProps
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:Insulation
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:EquivalentSlab
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:AutoGrid
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:ManualGrid
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:XFACE
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:YFACE
– GroundHeatTransfer:Slab:ZFACE

The following objects may be included in an EnergyPlus input IDF file but are handled by the
Basement preprocessor:

– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:SimParameters
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:MatlProps
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:Insulation
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:SurfaceProps
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:BldgData
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:Interior
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:ComBldg
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:EquivSlab
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:EquivAutoGrid
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:AutoGrid
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:ManualGrid
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:XFACE
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:YFACE
– GroundHeatTransfer:Basement:ZFACE
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 475

The documentation both the Slab and Basement objects appear in the AuxiliaryPrograms document
under the “Ground Heat Transfer in EnergyPlus” heading.
The only object described in this section is the control object which activates the use of the prepro-
cessor.

1.12.2 GroundHeatTransfer:Control
The GroundHeatTransfer:Control object determines if the Slab and Basement preprocessors are
going to be executed. When a Slab or Basement run is performed the results are saved in files with
extensions .SLAB or .BSMT so that they do not need to be rerun if no input changes are made to
the GroundHeatTransfer:Slab or GroundHeatTransfer:Basement objects.

1.12.2.1 Inputs

1.12.2.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is the name of the GroundHeatTransfer:Control object. It is used as an identifier.

1.12.2.1.2 Field: Run Basement Preprocessor

The field can either be Yes or No and defaults to No. It is used to control whether the Basement
preprocessor program is executed. If it has been previously executed the results are stored in the
.BSMT file and do not necessary need to be run again unless the GroundHeatTransfer:Basement
objects have changed.

1.12.2.1.3 Field: Run Slab Preprocessor

The field can either be Yes or No and defaults to No. It is used to control whether the Slab
preprocessor program is executed. If it has been previously executed the results are stored in the
.SLAB file and do not necessary need to be run again unless the GroundHeatTransfer:Slab objects
have changed.

1.13 Group – Room Air Models

1.13.1 Room Air Models
The group of input objects described in this section is used to account for non-uniform room air
temperatures that may occur within the interior air volume of a zone. Room air modeling was added
to EnergyPlus starting with Version 1.2. Although there are many types of analyses (comfort, indoor
air quality, etc) that might benefit from localized modeling of how room air varies across space, only
the temperature distribution of room air within the zone is currently addressed in EnergyPlus. This
allows surface heat transfer and air system heat balance calculations to be made taking into account
natural thermal stratification of air and different types of intentional air distribution designs such as
under-floor and side-wall displacement ventilation that purport to extract room air at higher-than-
mean temperatures. Note that EnergyPlus does not have completely general methods of modeling
room air that are applicable to every conceivable type of airflow that might occur in a zone. Such
models (e.g. RANS-CFD) are too computationally expensive to use with EnergyPlus for the foresee-
able future. The models that are available in EnergyPlus offer only limited modeling capabilities for
476 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

select room airflow configurations. Also note that because the complete mixing model for room air
has long been the standard in building energy simulation, there is not currently a consensus on how
to best model non-uniform air temperatures in buildings. Therefore, it is up to the user to have a
good understanding of when, where, and how to apply the room air models available in EnergyPlus.
The rest of this section provides some guidance in the way of examples and further discussion of the
models available in EnergyPlus.
EnergyPlus offers the different types of air models listed in the table below along with the input
objects associated with the use of that model.

Table 1.24: Summary of Room Air Models

Air Model Key Air model Algorithm Applicability Input Objects Required

Mixing Well-Mixed All zones None, default

UserDefined User Defined All zones ‘RoomAirModelType’,
‘RoomAir:Temperature-
Pattern:UserDefined’,
‘RoomAir:Temperature-
Pattern:***’
OneNodeDisplacement- Mundt displacement ventilation ‘RoomAirModelType’,
Ventilation ‘RoomAirSettings:OneNode-
DisplacementVentilation’,
‘RoomAir:Node’
ThreeNodeDisplacement- UCSD Displacement Ventila- displacement ventilation ‘RoomAirModelType’,
Ventilation tion ‘RoomAirSettings:Three-
NodeDisplacement-
Ventilation’
UnderFloorAirDistribution- UCSD UFAD Interior Model Interior zones served by a ‘RoomAirModelType’,
Interior UFAD system ‘RoomAirSettings:Under-
FloorAirDistributionInterior’
UnderFloorAirDistribution- UCSD UFAD Exterior Model Exterior zones served by a ‘RoomAirModelType’,
Exterior UFAD system ‘RoomAirSettings:Under-
FloorAirDistribution-
Exterior’
CrossVentilation UCSD Cross Ventilation cross ventilation ‘RoomAirModelType’,
‘RoomAirSettings:Cross-
Ventilation’

1.13.2 RoomAirModelType
EnergyPlus uses the RoomAirModelType object to determine which air model is available for use in
a given zone during the simulation. If no RoomAirModelType object is specified (for each zone or the
whole building), then EnergyPlus will run with the conventional, completely mixing air model (for
each zone or the whole building). Include a RoomAirModelType for each zone that the user wants
modeled using a more detailed method. Currently only a single RoomAirModelType object can be
specified for each zone; you cannot switch between models during a simulation. However, the UCSD
Displacement, Cross Ventilation and UFAD models switch from displacement to mixing ventilation
when the operating conditions do not give rise to unmixed flow. The following parameters are fields
required by the RoomAirModelType object.

1.13.2.1 Inputs

1.13.2.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is the air model name selected by user. It is used as an identifier
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 477

1.13.2.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This alpha field indicates the unique name of a Zone object defined elsewhere in the input file. The
type of room air model selected will be applied to this zone.

1.13.2.1.3 Field: Room-Air Modeling Type

This alpha field indicates the room-air model used for the specified zone. Currently, there are three
options for different air models. Entering the keyword ‘Mixing’ specifies the conventional complete-
mixing air model. Note that Mixing is the default and no RoomAirModelType object would be
needed to use the complete-mixing model. Entering the keyword ‘UserDefined ‘specifies the User
Defined Room Air Temperature Patterns. Entering the keyword ‘OneNodeDisplacementVentila-
tion ‘specifies the Mundt one node displacement ventilation air model for displacement ventilation.
Entering the keyword ‘ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation‘ specifies the three-node displacement
ventilation model developed by the University of California, San Diego (UCSD DV). Entering the
keyword ‘CrossVentilation’ specifies the two-zone cross ventilation model developed by the Univer-
sity of California, San Diego (UCSD CV). Entering the keyword ‘UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior‘
specifies the two-node interior zone under floor air distribution model developed by the University
of California, San Diego (UCSD UFI). Entering the keyword ‘UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior‘
specifies the two-node exterior zone under floor air distribution model developed by the University
of California, San Diego (UCSD UFE).

1.13.2.1.4 Field: Air Temperature Coupling Strategy

This alpha field indicates how air temperatures predicted by the air models are used by the surface
heat balance calculation. Two different coupling schemes are available: Direct (also known as T-
couple) or Indirect (DT-couple). In general, indirect coupling is more suited to situations where
room air is well controlled and/or the room air model is less robust. Direct coupling is more suited
for floating zone air temperatures and/or accurate room air models.
The Mundt model can use either coupling scheme; the UCSD DV, UCSD CV, UCSD UFI, and
UCSD UFE models ignore this field and use direct coupling.
Input either Direct or Indirect
An example idf entry follows
RoomAirModelType ,
MOD1 , !- Room -Air Model Name
ZONE ONE , !- Zone Name
ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation , !- Room -Air Modeling Type
Direct; !- Air Temperature Coupling Strategy

1.13.3 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:UserDefined
This object is used to explicitly define temperature patterns that are to be applied to the mean air
temperature within a thermal zone. This Room Air modeling option is made available for a number
of reasons. It allows modeling the consequences of air temperature variations during the design phase
when little information is available about the specifics of the air distribution system or positioning
of various loads. This option can be used to evaluate the energy implications of different design
targets for the temperature patterns. It also provides a method of modeling the annual energy use
implications for air temperature distributions determined using separate analyses or measurements.
478 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

For example, this option could be used to understand the annual energy implications of an air
distribution system that has been previously analyzed using Computational Fluid Dynamics.
This approach differs from the other Room Air modeling in that the static temperature pattern is
not really modeled so that it will respond to conditions that develop during the simulation. More
sophisticated dynamic Room Air models will adjust the temperature pattern based on various factors,
such as air system flow rate, floor temperature, or rates of internal heat gains. The user-defined
temperature distribution patterns are fixed at the beginning and EnergyPlus simply provides results
that include the implications of those patterns. This user-defined distribution option may also be
useful for checking dynamic Room Air models by using “bounding” analysis.
Note that using this object carries a certain degree of responsibility. It would be very easy to define
a pattern that is non-physical and will lead to erroneous results. The user-defined temperature
distributions should (probably) be balanced about the mean so that basic conservation of energy
laws are not violated.

1.13.3.1 Inputs

1.13.3.1.1 Field: Name

This field provides a unique name for this object.

1.13.3.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file.

1.13.3.1.3 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field provides the name of a schedule that will determine if this model is available. When not
available the room air is modeled as completely mixed. When it is available, then a user-defined
temperature distribution will be applied. This schedule should be set to “1.0” when model is available
and “0.0” when the model is not to be used. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all
time periods.

1.13.3.1.4 Field: Pattern Control Schedule Name

This field provides the name of schedule that will be used to control which user-defined RoomAir
temperature pattern will be applied at any given time. This schedule needs to have inte-
ger values that are closely coordinated with those defined as the second field in one of the
RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:* objects described below. These schedule values provide the link
to the actual patterns to be used throughout the day. This allows controlling which user-defined
pattern is used at different times during the simulation. For example, one could use one pattern
when the air system is scheduled to be on, and a different pattern when the air system is schedule
to be off. Or if the user has knowledge of how the air temperature pattern changes over the course
of day in response to changing thermal loads, then this schedule can be used to control when
individual patterns are used. For example, a control schedule could use a pattern designated as
number 100 from 18:00 to 6:00, pattern number 200 from 6:00 to 12:00, and pattern number 300
from 12:00 to 18:00.
An example of this object is
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 479

RoomAir: TemperaturePattern :UserDefined ,

Ground Floor South Air Temp Controls , ! Name
ZN2_S_1 , ! Zone Name
Always_on , ! Availability Schedule Name
Roomair Pattern 1; ! Pattern Control Schedule Name

1.13.4 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:ConstantGradient
This object is used to model room air with a fixed temperature gradient in the vertical direction.
This fixed-slope method is about the simplest distribution pattern.
In addition to the vertical temperature gradient, there are three other parameters included in the
pattern that are important. The first two might affect how the air system conditioning the room is
operated. The first describes the temperature difference between the mean air temperature and the
point where the sensor of a drybulb thermostat is situated. The second describes the temperature
difference between the mean and the point where system air is being extracted from the zone. This
is considered important because the changes in temperature difference between supply and return
can affect how an air system is controlled to meet the loads. The third parameter can affect the zone
air heat balance by altering the temperature of the air leaving the zone through exhaust fans.
One example of a source of input data for the vertical temperature gradient is ANSI/ASHRAE
Standard 55-2004 Thermal Environmental Conditions for Human Occupancy. Table 5.2.4.3 in this
Standard specifies an allowable vertical temperature difference between head level and ankle level
of 3ºC (5ºF). If we assume a head to ankle length scale of 1.5 m (5 ft), this leads to a temperature
gradient of 3ºC/1.5m, or 2.0 ºC/m.

1.13.4.1 Inputs

1.13.4.1.1 Field: Name

This field provides a unique name for this object.

1.13.4.1.2 Field: Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule Name

This field should contain an integer value that is unique among all other RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:*
objects. The value used here needs to be in the Pattern Control Schedule for those times when this
pattern is to be used for the Room Air Temperature Distribution.

1.13.4.1.3 Field: Thermostat Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between where the thermostat is situated and the
mean air temperature.

1.13.4.1.4 Field: Return Air Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between the air leaving the zone and returning to the
air system and the mean air temperature.

1.13.4.1.5 Field: Exhaust Air Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between the air leaving the zone and being exhausted
out of the building and the mean air temperature.
480 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.4.1.6 Field: Temperature Gradient

This field specifies the gradient, or slope, of temperature changes in the vertical direction in ºK/m.
An example of this object is:
RoomAir: TemperaturePattern :ConstantGradient ,
half C per Meter , ! Name
10005 , ! Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule Name
0.0, ! Thermostat Offset (Temp at thermostat - Mean Air Temp) [C]
1.0, ! Return Air Offset (Tleaving - Mean Air Temp ) [C]
1.0, ! Exhaust Air Offset (Texhaust - Mean Air Temp) [C]
0.5; ! Temperature Gradient [K/m]

1.13.5 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:TwoGradient
This object provides various controls over the value of the gradient used for determining the pattern of
room air temperatures. It is similar to previous object RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:ConstantGradient
object but simplifies the potentially arduous task of preparing and scheduling a large number
of those objects. With this object, two different gradients are entered and user is given several
options for controlling how the program will interpolate between the two bounds. The user inputs
the height of the location of thermostat, return air, and exhaust air in meters rather than the
temperature offset.

1.13.5.1 Inputs

1.13.5.1.1 Field: Name

This field provides a unique name for this object.

1.13.5.1.2 Field: Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule Name

This field should contain an integer value that is unique among all other RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:*
objects. The value used here needs to be in the Pattern Control Schedule for those times when this
pattern is to be used for the Room Air Temperature Distribution.

1.13.5.1.3 Field: Thermostat Height

This field specifies the distance above the floor where the thermostat is situated. This height is
used by the model to determine the thermostat temperature relative to the mean air temperature
by applying the gradient.

1.13.5.1.4 Field: Return Air Height

This field specifies the distance above the floor where the air leaves the zone and returns to the air
system. and the mean air temperature. This height is used by the model to determine the return
air temperature relative to the mean air temperature by applying the gradient.

1.13.5.1.5 Field: Exhaust Air Height

This field specifies the distance above the floor where the air leaves the zone and enters and exhaust
device such as an exhaust fan. This height is used by the model to determine the exhaust air
temperature relative to the mean air temperature by applying the gradient.
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 481

1.13.5.1.6 Field: Temperature Gradient Lower Bound

This field specifies the gradient, or slope, of temperature changes in the vertical direction in ºC/m.

1.13.5.1.7 Field: Temperature Gradient Upper Bound

This field specifies the gradient, or slope, of temperature changes in the vertical direction in ºC/m.

1.13.5.1.8 Field: Gradient Interpolation Mode

This field specifics how the program will vary between the two gradients. Select one of the following
keywords to choose the simulation data used to scale: ‘Outdoor Environment Drybulb Temperature’,
‘Zone Drybulb Temperature’, ‘Delta Outdoor and Zone Temperature’, ‘Sensible Cooling Load’, and
‘Sensible Heating Load’. These are explained in detail below. All of these options have several
things in common. They are essentially hard-coded. There is no support for a general method. The
interpolation scheme is based on some variable that might reasonably be expected to correlate with
gradient changes. This variable’s current value is used to continually adjust the value of the vertical
gradient for room air temperature.
OutdoorDryBulbTemperature: This key directs the program to interpolate between upper and
lower values of the vertical gradient based on the outdoor air temperature. If the outdoor temperature
exceeds the upper limit set in the next field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient
Upper Bound’ field is used. Similarly if the outdoor air temperature is below the value set in the
‘Lower Temperature’ field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Lower Bound’
is used. For outdoor temperatures that lie between the upper and lower bounds, the gradient is
determined by linear interpolation between the two.
ZoneDryBulbTemperature: This key directs the program to interpolate between upper and
lower values of the vertical gradient based on the mean zone air temperature. If the mean zone
air temperature exceeds the upper limit set in the next field, then the gradient entered in the
‘Temperature Gradient Upper Bound’ field is used. Similarly if the mean zone air temperature is
below the value set in the ‘Lower Temperature’ field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature
Gradient Lower Bound’ is used. For mean zone air temperatures that lie between the upper and
lower bounds, the gradient is determined by linear interpolation between the two.
ZoneAndOutdoorTemperatureDifference: This key directs the program to interpolate between
upper and lower values of the vertical gradient based on the difference between the outdoor envi-
ronment and the mean zone air temperature. If the temperature difference exceeds the upper limit
set in the next field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Upper Bound’ field
is used. Similarly if the temperature difference is below the value set in the ‘Lower Temperature’
field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Lower Bound’ is used. For tempera-
ture differences that lie between the upper and lower bounds, the gradient is determined by linear
interpolation between the two.
SensibleCoolingLoad: This key directs the program to interpolate between upper and lower values
of the vertical gradient based on the sensible cooling load. If the cooling load exceeds the upper limit
set in the next field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Upper Bound’ field
is used. Similarly if the cooling load is below the value set in the ‘Lower Temperature’ field, then
the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Lower Bound’ is used. For cooling loads that lie
between the upper and lower bounds, the gradient is determined by linear interpolation between the
two.
SensibleHeatingLoad: This key directs the program to interpolate between upper and lower values
of the vertical gradient based on the sensible heating load. If the heating load exceeds the upper
482 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

limit set in the next field, then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Upper Bound’
field is used. Similarly if the heating load is below the value set in the ‘Lower Temperature’ field,
then the gradient entered in the ‘Temperature Gradient Lower Bound’ is used. For heating loads
that lie between the upper and lower bounds, the gradient is determined by linear interpolation
between the two.

1.13.5.1.9 Field: Upper Temperature Bound

This field is used to enter the upper bound on temperature values in Celsius. It is required for the
interpolation modes based on temperature.

1.13.5.1.10 Field: Lower Temperature Bound

This field is used to enter the lower bound on temperature values in Celsius. It is required for the
interpolation modes based on temperature.

1.13.5.1.11 Field: Upper Heat Rate Bound

This field is used to enter the upper bound on heat rate values. It is required for the interpolation
modes based on load. Both heating and cooling loads are entered as positive numbers (in watts).

1.13.5.1.12 Field: Lower Heat Rate Bound

This field is used to enter the lower bound on heat rate values. It is required for the interpolation
modes based on load. Both heating and cooling loads are entered as positive numbers (in watts).
An example of this object follows. This pattern will apply no gradient (effectively the mixing model)
if zone air temperatures are 22.5 C or lower. It will apply a gradient of 1 K/m if zone temperatures
are 26.0 C or higher. For zone air temperatures between 22.5 and 26.0 it will determine the gradient
by linear interpolation and use a gradient between 0.0 and 1.0 K/m depending on where the zone
air temperature is in the range.
RoomAir: TemperaturePattern :TwoGradient ,
Mixed to one C per M by Zone DB , ! Name
2002, ! Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule
1.1, ! Thermostat Height meters
4.5, ! Return Air Height
3.5, ! Exhaust Air Height
0.0, ! Temperature Gradient Lower Bound K/m
1.0, ! Temperature Gradient Upper Bound K/m
ZoneDrybulbTemperature , ! Gradient Interpolation Mode
26.0, ! Upper Temperature [C]
22.5, ! Lower Temperature [C]
, ! Upper Heat Rate [W]
; ! Lower Heat Rate [W]

1.13.5.2 Outputs

The user-defined air temperature pattern that interpolates between two gradients produces the
following output variable.
HVAC ,Average ,Room Air Zone Vertical Temperature Gradient [K/m]
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 483

1.13.5.2.1 Room Air Zone Vertical Temperature Gradient [K/m]

This output variable is the result of the interpolation performed by the user-defined roomair model
using RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:TwoGradient. This is the temperature gradient in the vertical
direction. The units are degrees Kelvin per meter.

1.13.6 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:NondimensionalHeight
This object defines a distribution pattern for air temperatures relative to the current mean air
temperature as a function of height. The height, referred to as Zeta, is non-dimensional by normal-
izing with the zone ceiling height. (The actual zone ceiling height can be explicitly entered in the
‘Zone’ object but if not it is calculated by EnergyPlus from the surfaces attached to the zone.) The
temperature differences are not non-dimensional and remain in units of degrees Celsius.
An example of a vertical temperature pattern is shown in the figure below. The pattern itself is
treated as a piecewise, linear model of air temperature as a function of height. This Zeta-DeltaTai
curve, or lookup table, is then mapped to surfaces defined elsewhere in the file. The centroid of each
surface and zone ceiling height are used to automatically assign Zeta values within the program. The
zone named in the referencing RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:UserDefined object is used to determine
which surfaces will be associated with the pattern when it is applied. A single pattern object can be
reused for multiple zones and times.
In addition to the vertical temperature pattern there are three other parameters included in the
pattern that are important. The first two might affect how the air system conditioning the room is
operated. The first describes the temperature difference between the mean air temperature and the
point where the sensor of a drybulb thermostat is situated. The second describes the temperature
difference between the mean and the point where system air is being extracted from the zone. This
is considered important because the changes in temperature difference between supply and return
can affect how an air system is controlled to meet the loads. The third parameter can affect the zone
air heat balance by altering the temperature of the air leaving the zone through exhaust fans.

1.13.6.1 Inputs

1.13.6.1.1 Field: Name

This field provides a unique name for this object.

1.13.6.1.2 Field: Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule Name

This field should contain an integer value that is unique among all other RoomAir Temperature
Pattern objects. The value used here needs to be in the Pattern Control Schedule for those times
when this pattern is to be used for the Room Air Temperature Distribution.

1.13.6.1.3 Field: Thermostat Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between where the thermostat is situated and the
mean air temperature.

1.13.6.1.4 Field: Return Air Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between the air leaving the zone and returning to the
air system and the mean air temperature.
484 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.64: Example of a Vertical Air Temperature Pattern

1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 485

1.13.6.1.5 Field: Exhaust Air Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between the air leaving the zone and being exhausted
out of the building and the mean air temperature.

1.13.6.1.6 Field Set Zeta and Temperature Difference

The remaining fields contain pairs of values that define a lookup table for the temperature pattern
in the vertical direction. The first value is Zeta and the second value is DeltaTai.

1.13.6.1.7 Field: Pair <#> Zeta non-dimensional Height

Zeta is the normalized height and should be a fractional value from 0.0 to 1.0. A value of 0.0
corresponds to the floor and a value of 1.0 corresponds to the ceiling. The Zeta values need to be in
increasing value.

1.13.6.1.8 Field: Pair <#> Delta Adjacent Air Temperature

DeltaTai is the temperature difference between the air temperature at the associated Zeta (Tai ) and
the mean air temperature and is given in degrees Celsius.
This object is extensible, so additional pairs of these last two fields of this type can be added to the
end of this object. An example of this object corresponding to the figure above is:
RoomAir: TemperaturePattern :NondimensionalHeight ,
Rough UFAD Approx , ! Name
3001, ! Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule
! note reference this entry in Schedule
-1.0 , ! Thermostat Offset
1.5 , ! Return Air Offset (Tleaving - Mean Air Temp ) deg C
1.75, ! Exhaust Air Offset (Texhaust - Mean Air Temp) deg C
0.05, -1.8, ! pair 1 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.1, -1.7, ! pair 2 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.2, -0.8, ! pair 3 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.3, -0.2, ! pair 4 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.4, 0.5, ! pair 5 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.5, 0.8, ! pair 6 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.6, 1.2, ! pair 7 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.7, 1.4, ! pair 8 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.8, 1.4, ! pair 9 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.9, 1.42, ! pair 10 (Zeta , DeltaTai)
0.95, 1.44; ! pair 11 (Zeta , DeltaTai)

1.13.7 RoomAir:TemperaturePattern:SurfaceMapping
This object defines a distribution pattern for the air temperatures adjacent to individual surfaces.
This object uses the specific names of individual surfaces defined elsewhere in the model. This
pattern allows controlling the adjacent air temperature on a surface-by-surface basis rather than by
height. This allows modeling different adjacent air temperatures on the opposite sides of the zone.
In addition to the surface mappings there are three other parameters included in the pattern that
are important. The first two might affect how the air system conditioning the room is operated. The
first describes the temperature difference between the mean air temperature and the point where the
sensor of a drybulb thermostat is situated. The second describes the temperature difference between
the mean and the point where system air is being extracted from the zone. This is considered
important because the changes in temperature difference between supply and return can affect how
486 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

an air system is controlled to meet the loads. The third parameter can affect the zone air heat
balance by altering the temperature of the air leaving the zone through exhaust fans.

1.13.7.1 Inputs

1.13.7.1.1 Field: Name

This field provides a unique name for this object.

1.13.7.1.2 Field: Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule Name

This field should contain an integer value that is unique among all other RoomAir Temperature
Pattern objects. The value used here needs to be in the Pattern Control Schedule for those times
when this pattern is to be used for the RoomAir Temperature Distribution.

1.13.7.1.3 Field: Thermostat Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between where the thermostat is situated and the
mean air temperature.

1.13.7.1.4 Field: Return Air Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between the air leaving the zone and returning to the
air system and the mean air temperature.

1.13.7.1.5 Field: Exhaust Air Offset

This field specifies the temperature difference between the air leaving the zone and being exhausted
out of the building and the mean air temperature.

1.13.7.1.6 Field Set: Surface Name, Temperature Difference

1.13.7.1.7 Fields (6 and on): Pairs of Surface Names and Temperature Differ-
ences
The remaining fields contain pairs that define a lookup table for the temperature pattern on a
surface-by-surface basis.

1.13.7.1.8 Field: Surface Name Pair <#>

The name of a surface defined elsewhere in the input file.

1.13.7.1.9 Field: Delta Adjacent Air Temperature Pair <#>

DeltaTai is the temperature difference between the air temperature adjacent to the associated surface
(Tai ) and the mean air temperature and is given in degrees Celsius.
This object is extensible, so additional pairs of fields of these types can be added to the end of this
object. An example of this object, which might be used to elevate temperatures near west windows
in the afternoon, is:
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 487

RoomAir: TemperaturePattern :SurfaceMapping ,

GroundFloor SW Corner Hot Near West Wall , ! Name
4001, ! Control Integer for Pattern Control Schedule Name
0.0, ! Thermostat Offset(Temp at thermostat - Mean Air Temp)
0.0, ! Return Air Offset deg C
0.0, ! Exhaust Air Offset
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :1 , 0.8, ! pair 1 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :2 , 0.9, ! pair 2 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :3 , 1.0, ! pair 3 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :4, 1.1, ! pair 4 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :5, 1.3, ! pair 5 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :6, 1.5, ! pair 6 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :7, 1.7, ! pair 7 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :8, 2.1, ! pair 8 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)
ZN1_SW_1:W_ExtWall :9, 2.4 ; ! pair 8 (Surface Name , DeltaTai)

1.13.8 RoomAir:Node
The RoomAir:Node object is used to define air nodes for a nodal air model. The number of air node
objects that need to be specified depends on the nodal air model selected. (However, currently only
the Mundt model uses this object). In order to use the Mundt model, the user must specify six or
more RoomAir:Node objects of different types for each zone. The exact number of RoomAir:Node
in the model will vary based on the resolution of walls. If walls (heat transfer surfaces) are split
into separate segments in the vertical direction, then more air nodes of type ‘MundtRoom’ will be
useful. At a minimum, for the Mundt model RoomAir Nodes of the following type are required:
‘Inlet, ‘Floor, ‘Control, ‘Ceiling, ‘MundtRoom, and ‘Return.’

1.13.8.1 Inputs

1.13.8.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is a name for the air node. It should be unique and is used as an identifier

1.13.8.1.2 Field: Node Type

This alpha field indicates the type of this air node. The following explains options available for use
with the Mundt nodal air model.
Inlet is specified for the air node located where the system air enters the zone.
Floor is specified for the air node located near the floor.
Control is specified for the air node located near the thermostat.
Ceiling is specified for the air node located near the ceiling.
MundtRoom is specified for the air node located adjacent to the wall(s).
Return is specified for the air node located where the system air leaves the zone.

1.13.8.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This field indicates the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) that this air node belongs to. This should be
the unique name of a zone object defined elsewhere in the input file.
488 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.8.1.4 Field: Height of Nodal Control Volume Center

This numeric field indicates the height of the air node center. Air models such as the Mundt model
compute the air temperature as a function of height and the value entered here will be used to
determine a result for this node. The value should be specified in meters and relative to the floor of
the zone.

1.13.8.1.5 Field: Surface <#> Name

These remaining alpha fields indicate the names of the surfaces (Ref: Surface) that are interacting
convectively with this air node. This field is optional and related to the previous field. Currently, at
most 20 surfaces are allowed to interact with a single air node. Only those nodes that interact with
the inside faces of surfaces need to specify surface names. Each surface should couple to no more
than 1 node.
An IDF example:

RoomAir:Node ,
WESTZN:FLOORAIR , !- Node Name
Floor , !- Node Type
WEST ZONE , !- Name of Zone to Which the Air Node Belongs
0.1, !- Height of Nodal Control Volume Center {m}
WESTZN:FLOOR:LEFF , !- surface name
WESTZN:FLOOR:RIGHT; !- surface name

1.13.9 RoomAirSettings:OneNodeDisplacementVentilation
The RoomAirSettings:OneNodeDisplacementVentilation object is used to specify additional input
parameters required by the Mundt model that are not available in other input objects in EnergyPlus.
A single object will be used for the zone.

1.13.9.1 Inputs

1.13.9.1.1 Field: Zone Name

This alpha field indicates the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) for the required input parameters as
specified in the following fields.

1.13.9.1.2 Field: Fraction of Convective Internal Loads Added to Floor Air

This numeric field indicates what fraction of the convective part of the internal gains is added to the
air near the floor in the zone specified.

1.13.9.1.3 Field: Fraction of Infiltration Internal Loads Added to Floor Air

This numeric field indicates what fraction of the infiltration air enters near the floor in the zone
specified.
An IDF example:
RoomAirSettings: OneNodeDisplacementVentilation ,
WEST ZONE , !- Zone Name
0.1, !- Fraction of internal loads from the convective Floor Air
0.1; !- Fraction of internal loads from the Infiltration Air
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 489

1.13.9.2 Outputs

The following output is available for the Mundt model.

Room Air Node Air Temperature {[}C{]}

1.13.9.2.1 Room Air Node Air Temperature [C]

This output variable provides the drybulb air temperature used in, or calculated by, the Mundt
model. The selection key is the name of an air node defined in a ROOMAIR Node object.

1.13.10 RoomAirSettings:ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation
This model is applicable to spaces that are served by a low velocity floor-level displacement ventilation
air distribution system. Furthermore, the dominant sources of heat gain should be from people and
other localized sources located in the occupied part of the room. The model should be used with
caution in zones which have large heat gains or losses through exterior walls or windows or which
have considerable direct solar gain. The model predicts three temperatures in the room:

– A foot level temperature (TFLOOR ). The floor region is 0.2 meters deep and TFLOOR represents
the temperature at the mid-point of the region.
– An occupied subzone temperature (TOC ), representing the temperature in the region between
the floor layer and the upper, mixed layer.
– An upper node representing the mixed-layer/outflow temperature (TMX ) essential for overall
energy budget calculations and for modeling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.

The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD Displacement Ventilation Model
Controls’ object.

1.13.10.1 Inputs

1.13.10.1.1 Field: Zone Name

This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file. A single instance of
the ‘UCSD Displacement Ventilation Model Controls’ object is needed for each zone that is to be
modeled using this method.

1.13.10.1.2 Field: Gain Distribution Schedule Name

This field specifies the unique name of schedule defined elsewhere in the input file. The schedule
values are the fractions of the convective portion of the internal gains in the occupied subzone that
remain in the occupied subzone. The remainder of the convective portion of the internal gains in
the occupied subzone enters the plumes and is carried to the upper subzone. The types of internal
gains that are assumed to be located in the occupied subzone are:

– people
– task lights
– electric equipment
490 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.65: Schematic representation of the three temperature points and temperature gradients
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 491

– gas equipment
– hot water equipment
– steam equipment
– other equipment
– baseboard heat

Types of internal gains that are assumed to be in the upper subzone are:

– general lights
– tubular daylighting devices
– high temperature radiant heaters

The schedule values should be between 0 and 1. A value of 1 means that all the convection gains
from equipment, task lights and people are dispersed in the lower occupied subzone. Conversely a
value of 0 puts all the lower subzone convective gains into the plumes rising into the upper well-mixed
subzone.

1.13.10.1.3 Field: Number of Plumes per Occupant

This field specifies number of plumes per occupant. Plumes are associated with localized sources of
convective heat gain from people and equipment. For example, a value of 2.0 would be used if each
occupant has a computer that generates a separate plume that does not merge with the plume from
the occupant in the lower, occupied, subzone.

1.13.10.1.4 Field: Thermostat Height

This field is the height in meters of the thermostat/temperature control sensor above the floor.

1.13.10.1.5 Field: Comfort Height

The height in meters above the floor at which air temperature is calculated for comfort purposes.
The air temperature at this height is used in calculating the available measures of comfort: Fanger,
Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55 or AnkleDraftASH55. The default is 1.1 meters.

1.13.10.1.6 Field: Temperature Difference Threshold for Reporting

This field specifies a minimum temperature difference between the upper mixed subzone and the
occupied subzone that will be used to trigger whether or not the displacement ventilation auxiliary
outputs will be calculated. These outputs are Room Air Zone Transition Height, Room Air Zone
Recommended Minimum Flow Fraction, Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient and Room
Air Zone Maximum Temperature Gradient. They are set to negative values when the temperature
difference is less than the threshold and the output Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status is set to 1.
The value should be greater than or equal to zero and is in units of degrees Centigrade. The default
value is 0.4 degrees C.
An example input:
492 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

RoomAirSettings: ThreeNodeDisplacementVentilation ,
ZONE ONE , !- Zone Name
Constant - .2, !- Gain Distribution Schedule Name
1, !- Number of Plumes per Occupant
, !- Thermostat Height
, !- Comfort Height
.3; !- Temp. Difference Threshold for Displacement Ventilation

1.13.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Occupied Subzone Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Floor Subzone Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Transition Height [m]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Recommended Minimum Flow Fraction
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient [K/m]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Maximum Temperature Gradient [K/m]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Thermal Comfort Effective Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Thermostat Temperature [C]

1.13.10.2.1 Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]

The temperature of the upper well-mixed subzone in degrees C.

1.13.10.2.2 Room Air Zone Occupied Subzone Temperature [C]

The average temperature of the lower, stratified, occupied subzone in degrees C.

1.13.10.2.3 Room Air Zone Floor Subzone Temperature [C]

The temperature of the region near the floor in degrees C.

1.13.10.2.4 Room Air Zone Transition Height [m]

The height above the floor, in meters, of the boundary between the lower occupied subzone and the
upper well-mixed subzone.

1.13.10.2.5 Room Air Zone Recommended Minimum Flow Fraction []

The ratio of the minimum recommended flow rate to the actual flow rate. Here flow rate means
the sum of infiltration, ventilation, mixing and system air flow rates. The minimum flow is the flow
needed to establish the boundary between the occupied and mixed subzones at 1.5 meters.

1.13.10.2.6 Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status []

An integer flag that indicates whether the zone is mixed (single node well-mixed zone model used)
or stratified (UCSD DV model used). The value 1 means well-mixed; 0 means stratified.
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 493

1.13.10.2.7 Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient [K/m]

The temperature gradient between the middle of the floor region and the middle of the well-mixed
upper subzone in degrees Kelvin per meter.

1.13.10.2.8 Room Air Zone Maximum Temperature Gradient [K/m]

The maximum of the temperature gradient between the middle of the floor region and the middle
of the occupied subzone and the temperature gradient between the middle of the occupied subzone
and the middle of the well-mixed subzone. The gradient is in degrees Kelvin per meter.

1.13.10.2.9 Room Air Zone Thermal Comfort Effective Air Temperature [C]
The temperature at the user specified comfort height in degrees C.

1.13.10.2.10 Room Air Zone Thermostat Temperature [C]

The temperature at the height of the thermostat (specified by user input) in degrees C.

1.13.11 RoomAirSettings:CrossVentilation
The UCSD Cross Ventilation Room Air Model provides a simple model for heat transfer and tem-
perature prediction in cross ventilated rooms. Cross Ventilation (CV) is common in many naturally
ventilated buildings, with air flowing through windows, open doorways and large internal apertures
across rooms and corridors in the building.
The CV model is used in EnergyPlus in the context of natural ventilation simulations using the
AirflowNetwork airflow prediction model. Typical CV room flows are characterized by two clearly
distinguishable flow regions that have different airflow velocities and temperature:

– Jet regions in front of the inflow windows

– Recirculation regions in the portions of the room that are not directly in front of the windows.

Each inflow aperture has one jet region while the recirculation regions are treated as a whole, with
a single temperature and characteristic velocity. The default EnergyPlus perfectly mixed single
temperature node room air approach is not suitable for these partially mixed flows. The proposed
CV model uses multiple nodes with distinct air temperature and airflow velocity (one node for the
recirculations plus one additional node for each inflow aperture).
The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD Cross Ventilation Model Controls’
object.

1.13.11.1 Inputs

1.13.11.1.1 Field: Zone Name

This field provides the name of the zone to which this object applies. A single instance of the ‘UCSD
Cross Ventilation Model Controls’ object is needed for each zone modeled using this method.
494 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.66: Schematic representation of room air geometry a) schematic representation of a room
geometry that generates cross ventilation airflow. b) the proposed model distinguishes two regions
in the flow: jet and recirculation (shown here in a CFD simulation of one half of a symmetrical
room).
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 495

Figure 1.67: Schematic top view — possible airflow patterns in cross-ventilation.

496 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.11.1.2 Field: Gain Distribution Schedule Name

This field specifies the unique name of schedule defined elsewhere in the input file. The schedule
values define the fractions of the convective portion of the internal gains in the jet and recirculation
regions.
The schedule values should be between 0 and 1. A value of 1 means that all the convective gains are
dispersed in the jet region. Conversely a value of 0 puts all the convective gains into the recirculation
region.

1.13.11.1.3 Field: Airflow Region Used for Thermal Comfort Evaluation

Required field whenever thermal comfort is predicted. Defines air temperature and mean airflow
velocity that will be used in the Fanger model. Conditions must refer to one of the two regions
defined in the model: jet or recirculation.
Possible choices: Jet or Recirculation.

1.13.11.2 Outputs
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Jet Region Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Recirculation Region Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Recirculation Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Window Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Recirculation and Inflow Rate Ratio
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Inflow Opening Area [m2]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Room Length [m]
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Is Mixing Status
– Zone,Average,Room Air Zone Is Recirculating Status

1.13.11.2.1 Room Air Zone Jet Region Temperature [C]

Average air temperature in the jet region of the flow in degrees C. If there is more than one inflow
window this output will be the inflow-area-weighted average of the jet region temperature.

1.13.11.2.2 Room Air Zone Recirculation Region Temperature [C]

Average air temperature in the recirculation region of the flow in degrees C.

1.13.11.2.3 Room Air Zone Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the jet region of the flow in meters per second. If there is more than one
inflow window this output will be the inflow area weighted area of the jet inflow velocities.

1.13.11.2.4 Room Air Window Jet Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the jet region in front of the window, in meters per second.
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 497

1.13.11.2.5 Room Air Zone Recirculation Region Average Air Velocity [m/s]
Average airflow velocity in the recirculation region of the flow in meters per second.

1.13.11.2.6 Room Air Zone Recirculation and Inflow Rate Ratio []

Ratio between airflow rate in the recirculation regions and the total inflow rate, non-dimensional.

1.13.11.2.7 Room Air Zone Inflow Opening Area [m2]

Area of the inflow aperture in square meters. This area can change due to variation in wind direction
(as inflow aperture changes) or variations in the opening schedule.

1.13.11.2.8 Room Air Zone Room Length [m]

Length of the room along the cross ventilation direction, in meters.

1.13.11.2.9 Room Air Zone Is Mixing Status []

An integer flag that indicates whether the zone is mixed (single node well-mixed zone model used)
or significant momentum conservation is occurring (UCSD CV model used). The value 1 means
well-mixed; 0 means cross ventilation is present. Transition to mixed flow can occur due to three
mechanism: reduction in inflow velocity, reduction in inflow aperture area and dominance of buoy-
ancy effects. A value of 1 is yes, a value of 0 is no.

1.13.11.2.10 Room Air Zone Is Recirculating Status []

An integer flag that indicates whether recirculations are present in the flow. A cross ventilation flow
does not have recirculations whenever the inflow area is similar to the room cross section area (such
as airflow in a typical corridor). A value of 1 is yes, a value of 0 is no.

1.13.12 RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior
This model is applicable to interior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system.
The dominant sources of heat gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources
located in the occupied part of the room. The model should be used with caution in zones which
have large heat gains or losses through exterior walls or windows or which have considerable direct
solar gain. The model predicts two temperatures in the room:

– An occupied subzone temperature (TOC ), representing the temperature in the region between
the floor and the boundary of the upper subzone.
– An upper subzone temperature (TMX ) essential for overall energy budget calculations and for
modeling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.

The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD UFAD Interior Model Controls’
object.
498 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.12.1 Inputs

1.13.12.1.1 Field: Zone Name

This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file. A single instance of
the ‘RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior’ object is needed for each zone that is to
be modeled using this method.

1.13.12.1.2 Field: Number of Diffusers

The total number of diffusers in this zone. This field can allowed to Autocalculate (in which case it
is set to the design occupancy level; i.e., number of people). If the design occupancy is low or zero
but there are still heat sources that could generate buoyancy driven plumes, the user should input a
value based on the design supply air flow rate of the zone and the design flow rate of an individual
diffuser. In the absence of any other information, divide the zone area by 100 ft2 . The default for
this field is Autocalculate.

1.13.12.1.3 Field: Power per Plume

The power in watts incorporated in a buoyancy driven thermal plume. Normally we assume all the
loads of a workstation create a single plume so that this represents the convective heat gain from a
workstation – 1 person, 1 computer terminal, plus any task lighting. A typical value would be 220
watts. However, the model assumes an “equivalent” plume derived from the zone extraction rate
normalized to the number of workstations/occupants. This field should be allowed to default – the
program will calculate a value based upon the occupancy and the extraction rate. The default is
Autocalculate.

1.13.12.1.4 Field: Design Effective Area of Diffuser

This is the design air flow opening area in square meters of a single diffuser. The default value
depends on the diffuser type. For swirl diffusers it is 0075 m2 , for variable area diffusers 0.035 m2 ,
for horizontal swirl diffusers 0.006 m2 , and for linear bar grilles 0.03 m2 . The default is Autocalculate..

1.13.12.1.5 Field: Diffuser Slot Angle from Vertical

This input describes the angle at which air emerges from the diffusers. It should be the angle in
degrees between the vertical and the diffuser slots. The defaults depend on the diffuser type: for
swirl diffusers it is 28 degrees, for variable area diffusers 45 degrees, for DV diffusers 73 degrees, and
for linear bar grilles 15 degrees.

1.13.12.1.6 Field: Thermostat Height

This field is the height in meters of the thermostat/temperature control sensor above the floor. The
default is 1.2 meters.

1.13.12.1.7 Field: Comfort Height

The height in meters above the floor at which air temperature is calculated for comfort purposes.
The air temperature at this height is used in calculating the available measures of comfort: Fanger,
Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55 or AnkleDraftASH55. The default is 1.1 meters.
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 499

1.13.12.1.8 Field: Temperature Difference Threshold for Reporting

This field specifies a minimum temperature difference between the upper subzone and the occupied
subzone that will be used to trigger whether or not the UFAD auxiliary outputs will be calculated.
These outputs are Room Air Zone Transition Height and Room Air Zone Average Temperature
Gradient. They are set to zero when the temperature difference is less than the threshold and the
output Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status is set to 1.
The value should be greater than or equal to zero and is in units of degrees Centigrade. The default
value is 0.4 degrees C.

1.13.12.1.9 Field: Diffuser Type

The choices for this alpha field are Swirl | VariableArea | HorizontalSwirl | LinearBarGrille
| Custom. The swirl and displacement diffusers are fixed area diffusers. The variable area diffusers
maintain an approximately constant exit velocity. Linear bar grilles are normally used in exterior
zonesand are fixed area diffusers. Custom is used to signify that the user intends to input the
coefficients A – E (see below) rather than let the program set the coefficients based on diffuser type.
The default is Swirl.

1.13.12.1.10 Field: Transition Height

An optional field to allow the user to specify the transition height (meters above floor) rather than
have the program calculate it. The default is 1.7 meters.

1.13.12.1.11 Field: Coefficient A

The coefficient A in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.

1.13.12.1.12 Field: Coefficient B

The coefficient B in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.

1.13.12.1.13 Field: Coefficient C

The coefficient C in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.
500 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.12.1.14 Field: Coefficient D

The coefficient D in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.

1.13.12.1.15 Field: Coefficient E

The coefficient E in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.
An example input is:

RoomAirModelType ,
SPACE5 -1 RoomAir Model , !- Name
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone Name
UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior , !- Room -Air Modeling Type
DIRECT; !- Air Temperature Coupling Strategy

RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionInterior ,
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone Name
Autocalculate , !- Number of Diffusers
Autocalculate , !- Power per Plume
Autocalculate , !- Design Effective Area of Diffuser {m2}
Autocalculate , !- Diffuser Slot Angle from Vertical {deg}
, !- Thermostat Height {m}
, !- Comfort Height {m}
0.001 , !- Temperature Difference Threshold for Reporting {deltaC}
Swirl , !- Diffuser Type
1.7, !- Transition Height {m}
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient A
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient B
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient C
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient D
Autocalculate; !- Coefficient E

1.13.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Occupied Subzone Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Transition Height [m]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status []
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient [K/m]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Effective Comfort Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Thermostat Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Transition Height Gamma Value []
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Temperature Stratification Fraction []
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 501

1.13.12.2.1 Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]

The temperature of the upper subzone in degrees C.

1.13.12.2.2 Room Air Zone Occupied Subzone Temperature [C]

The temperature of the lower, occupied subzone in degrees C.

1.13.12.2.3 Room Air Zone Transition Height [m]

The height above the floor, in meters, of the boundary between the lower occupied subzone and the
upper subzone..

1.13.12.2.4 Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status []

An integer flag that indicates whether the zone is mixed (single node well-mixed zone model used)
or stratified (UCSD UFI model used). The value 1 means well-mixed; 0 means stratified.

1.13.12.2.5 Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient [K/m]

The temperature gradient between the middle of the occupied subzone and the middle of the upper
subzone in degrees Kelvin per meter.

1.13.12.2.6 Room Air Zone Effective Comfort Air Temperature [C]

The temperature at the user specified comfort height in degrees C.

1.13.12.2.7 Room Air Zone Thermostat Temperature [C]

The temperature at the height of the thermostat (specified by user input) in degrees C.

1.13.12.2.8 Room Air Zone Transition Height Gamma Value []

Value of gamma – a dimensionless “height” used in calculating the transition height. Lower values of
gamma indicate increased stratification, higher values less. Generally the values should be between
2 and 30.

1.13.12.2.9 Room Air Zone Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The heat in watts driving the plumes in the occupied subzone.

1.13.12.2.10 Room Air Zone Temperature Stratification Fraction []

This output, (Phi) is a measure of temperature stratification in the space. It is the difference between
the occupied subzone temperature and the supply temperature divided by difference between the
return temperature and the supply temperature. Technically it is equal to Kc. As phi approaches
1, the space is fully mixed. As phi approaches 0, the space becomes fully stratified. Expressed as an
equation:

Tocc − Tsup
(1.22)
Tret − Tsup
502 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.13 RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior
This model is applicable to exterior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system.
The dominant sources of heat gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources
located in the occupied part of the room, as well as convective gain coming from a warm window.
The model predicts two temperatures in the room:

– An occupied subzone temperature (TOC ), representing the temperature in the region between
the floor and the boundary of the upper subzone..
– An upper subzone temperature (TMX ) essential for overall energy budget calculations and for
modeling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.

The following fields are used to define an instance of the ‘UCSD UFAD Exterior Model Controls’
object.

1.13.13.1 Inputs

1.13.13.1.1 Field: Zone Name

This field provides the unique name of a zone described elsewhere in the file. A single instance of
the ‘RoomAirSettings:UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior’ object is needed for each zone that is to
be modeled using this method.

1.13.13.1.2 Field: Number of Diffusers

The total number of diffusers in this zone. This field can allowed to Autocalculate (in which case it
is set to the design occupancy level; i.e., number of people). If the design occupancy is low or zero
but there are still heat sources that could generate buoyancy driven plumes, the user should input a
value based on the design supply air flow rate of the zone and the design flow rate of an individual
diffuser. In the absence of any other information, divide the zone area by 100 ft2 . The default for
this field is Autocalculate.

1.13.13.1.3 Field: Power per Plume

The power in watts incorporated in a buoyancy driven thermal plume. Normally we assume all the
loads of a workstation create a single plume so that this represents the convective heat gain from a
workstation – 1 person, 1 computer terminal, plus any task lighting. A typical value would be 220
watts. However, the model assumes an “equivalent” plume derived from the zone extraction rate
normalized to the number of workstations/occupants. This field should be allowed to default – the
program will calculate a value based upon the occupancy and the extraction rate. The default is
Autocalculate.

1.13.13.1.4 Field: Design Effective Area of Diffuser

This is the design air flow opening area in square meters of a single diffuser. The default value
depends on the diffuser type. For swirl diffusers it is 0075 m2 , for variable area diffusers 0.035 m2 ,
for horizontal swirl diffusers 0.006 m2 , and for linear bar grilles 0.03 m2 . The default is Autocalculate..
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 503

1.13.13.1.5 Field: Diffuser Slot Angle from Vertical

This input describes the angle at which air emerges from the diffusers. It should be the angle in
degrees between the vertical and the diffuser slots. The defaults depend on the diffuser type: for
swirl diffusers it is 28 degrees, for variable area diffusers 45 degrees, for DV diffusers 73 degrees, and
for linear bar grilles 15 degrees.

1.13.13.1.6 Field: Thermostat Height

This field is the height in meters of the thermostat/temperature control sensor above the floor. The
default is 1.2 meters.

1.13.13.1.7 Field: Comfort Height

The height in meters above the floor at which air temperature is calculated for comfort purposes.
The air temperature at this height is used in calculating the available measures of comfort: Fanger,
Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55 or AnkleDraftASH55. The default is 1.1 meters.

1.13.13.1.8 Field: Temperature Difference Threshold for Reporting

This field specifies a minimum temperature difference between the upper subzone and the occupied
subzone that will be used to trigger whether or not the UFAD auxiliary outputs will be calculated.
These outputs are Room Air Zone Transition Height and Room Air Zone Average Temperature
Gradient. They are set to zero when the temperature difference is less than the threshold and the
output Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status is set to 1.
The value should be greater than or equal to zero and is in units of degrees Centigrade. The default
value is 0.4 degrees C.
The value should be greater than or equal to zero and is in units of degrees Centigrade. The default
value is 0.4 degrees C.

1.13.13.1.9 Field: Diffuser Type

The choices for this alpha field are Swirl | VariableArea | HorizontalSwirl | LinearBarGrille
| Custom. The swirl and displacement diffusers are fixed area diffusers. The variable area diffusers
maintain an approximately constant exit velocity. Linear bar grilles are normally used in exterior
zonesand are fixed area diffusers. Custom is used to signify that the user intends to input the
coefficients A – E (see below) rather than let the program set the coefficients based on diffuser type.
The default is Swirl.

1.13.13.1.10 Field: Transition Height

An optional field to allow the user to specify the transition height (meters above floor) rather than
have the program calculate it. The default is 1.7 meters.

1.13.13.1.11 Field: Coefficient A

The coefficient A in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.
504 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.13.1.12 Field: Coefficient B

The coefficient B in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.

1.13.13.1.13 Field: Coefficient C

The coefficient C in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.

1.13.13.1.14 Field: Coefficient D

The coefficient D in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.

1.13.13.1.15 Field: Coefficient E

The coefficient E in the formula: Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2. Gamma
is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. Kc is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients
in the formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type. A user would normally allow this field to
default. The default is autocalculate.
An example input is:
RoomAirSettings: UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior ,
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone Name
Autocalculate , !- Number of Diffusers per Zone
Autocalculate , !- Power per Plume
Autocalculate , !- Design Effective Area of Diffuser {m2}
Autocalculate , !- Diffuser Slot Angle from Vertical {deg}
, !- Thermostat Height {m}
, !- Comfort Height {m}
0.001 , !- Temperature Difference Threshold for Reporting {deltaC}
LinearBarGrille , !- Diffuser Type
1.7, !- Transition Height {m}
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient A
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient B
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient C
Autocalculate , !- Coefficient D
Autocalculate; !- Coefficient E

1.13.13.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Occupied Subzone Temperature [C]
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 505

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Transition Height [m]

– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status []
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient [K/m]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Effective Comfort Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Thermostat Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Transition Height Gamma Value []
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Window Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Room Air Zone Temperature Stratification Fraction []

1.13.13.2.1 Room Air Zone Mixed Subzone Temperature [C]

The temperature of the upper subzone in degrees C.

1.13.13.2.2 Room Air Zone Occupied Subzone Temperature [C]

The temperature of the lower, occupied subzone in degrees C.

1.13.13.2.3 Room Air Zone Transition Height [m]

The height above the floor, in meters, of the boundary between the lower occupied subzone and the
upper subzone..

1.13.13.2.4 Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status []

An integer flag that indicates whether the zone is mixed (single node well-mixed zone model used)
or stratified (UCSD UFE model used). The value 1 means well-mixed; 0 means stratified.

1.13.13.2.5 Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient [K/m]

The temperature gradient between the middle of the occupied subzone and the middle of the upper
subzone in degrees Kelvin per meter.

1.13.13.2.6 Room Air Zone Effective Comfort Air Temperature [C]

The temperature at the user specified comfort height in degrees C.

1.13.13.2.7 Room Air Zone Thermostat Temperature [C]

The temperature at the height of the thermostat (specified by user input) in degrees C.

1.13.13.2.8 Room Air Zone Transition Height Gamma Value []

Value of gamma – a dimensionless “height” used in calculating the transition height. Lower values of
gamma indicate increased stratification, higher values less. Generally the values should be between
2 and 30.
506 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.13.2.9 Room Air Zone Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The heat in watts driving the plumes in the occupied subzone.

1.13.13.2.10 Room Air Zone Window Plume Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The convective heat gain from windows in an UnderFloorAirDistributionExterior zone.

1.13.13.2.11 Room Air Zone Temperature Stratification Fraction []

This output, (Phi) is a measure of temperature stratification in the space. It is the difference between
the occupied subzone temperature and the supply temperature divided by difference between the
return temperature and the supply temperature. Technically it is equal to Kc. As phi approaches
1, the space is fully mixed. As phi approaches 0, the space becomes fully stratified. Expressed as an
equation:

Tocc − Tsup
(1.23)
Tret − Tsup

1.13.14 RoomAirflowNetwork Model

This model simulates a thermal zone using a network approach by assuming intra-zone nodes con-
nected by user-defined patterns of airflows. The new model also allows users to specify a node to
be connected to surfaces to have convective heat transfer between surfaces and the node, portion
of internal gains and supply air and return air fractions from zone equipment. The model requires
following objects to work together:

– RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
– RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork
– RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList
– RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains
– RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment
– AirflowNetwork:Intrazone:Node
– AirflowNetwork:Intrazone:Linkage

The first five objects are described below. The last two objects are described in the Airflow Network
Model section. This model also requires additional AirflowNetwork:* objects to form a complete
network.

1.13.15 RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
This object provides inputs in a thermal zone needed for the RoomAirflowNetwork model. The
inputs specify a thermal zone and a list of RoomAir nodes. The object gives a summary of the
model configuration in a zone.
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 507

1.13.15.1 Inputs

1.13.15.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAirSettings:AirflowNet-
work object.

1.13.15.1.2 Field: Zone Name

The name of the EnergyPlus thermal zone corresponding to the RoomAir model zone.

1.13.15.1.3 Field: Control Point RoomAir:Node Name

This is the name of a RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork object that contains the sensor for zone HVAC
controls. The conditions at this node will be used for thermostatic, humidistatic, or comfort based
control decisions. The zone node defined in a Zone object is required.

1.13.15.1.4 Field: RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork x Name

The name of a RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork object defined elsewhere. This node will receive the
fraction of internal gains, and HVAC equipment, and a list of surface names exposed to this node
with convective heat transfer.
An IDF example input is:

RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork ,
NORTH_ZONE , !- Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Zone Name
RoomAir Schedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Control Point RoomAir:Node Name
LeftUpper , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 1 Name
CentralUpper , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 2 Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 3 Name
LeftMiddle , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 4 Name
LeftLower , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 5 Name
CentralLower; !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork 6 Name

1.13.16 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork
This object is used to define a node in a thermal zone. The input specifies the fraction of zone
volume and provides a list of names to define fraction of internal gains, surface connection and
HVAC equipment.

1.13.16.1 Inputs

1.13.16.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAirSettings:AirflowNet-
work object.

1.13.16.1.2 Field: Zone Name

The name of the EnergyPlus thermal zone and is defined in an RoomAirSettings:AirflowNetwork
object.
508 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.16.1.3 Field: Fraction of Zone Air Volume

The field specifies a fraction of the overall zone air volume that is assigned to this RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork
object. The fraction will be used to calculate zone air storage term. See corresponding sections in
Engineering Reference for its use in the node energy and moisture balance equations.

1.13.16.1.4 Field: RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList Name

The field specifies a name to provide a list of connected adjacent surfaces with convective heat
transfer between surfaces and this particular node. When a moisture mode is assigned to surfaces,
convective moisture transfer will be calculated. See corresponding sections in Engineering Reference
for its use in the node energy and moisture balance equations.

1.13.16.1.5 Field: RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains Name

The field specifies a name to provide a list of internal gain objects and associated fractions assigned
to this particular node. See corresponding sections in Engineering Reference for its use in the node
energy and moisture balance equations.

1.13.16.1.6 Field: RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment Name

The field specifies a name to provide a list of HVAC equipment, including AirLoop terminals and
zone equipment. See corresponding sections in Engineering Reference for its use in the node energy
and moisture balance equations.
RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork ,
LeftUpper , !- Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Zone Name
0.15, !- Fraction of Zone Air Volume
Surface_18_T_List , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork: AdjacentSurfaceList Name
LeftUpper_Gain , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains Name
LeftUpper_HVAC; !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment Name

1.13.17 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList
This object is used to provide a list of connected adjacent surfaces with convective heat transfer
between surfaces and this particular node. When a moisture mode is assigned to surfaces, convective
moisture transfer will be calculated. It should be pointed out that a fraction of a surface exposed to
this particular node is not allowed.

1.13.17.0.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:-
AdjacentSurfaceList object.

1.13.17.0.2 Field: Surface <#> Name

The field specifies a surface name. This object is extensible, so additional fields of this type can be
added to the end of this object.

RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:AdjacentSurfaceList ,
Surface_18_T_List , !- Name
Surface_18_T; !- Surface 1 Name
1.13. GROUP – ROOM AIR MODELS 509

1.13.18 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains
This object is used to define a list of internal gains in the same zone and associated fraction assigned
to this particular node.

1.13.18.1 Inputs

1.13.18.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAir:Node:AirflowNet-
work:InternalGains object.

1.13.18.1.2 Field: Internal Gain Object <#> Type

The field specifies an internal gain object type based on the list in EnergyPlus.

1.13.18.1.3 Field: Internal Gain Object <#> Name

The field specifies an internal gain object name based on the list in EnergyPlus.

1.13.18.1.4 Field: Fraction of Gains to Node <#>

The field specifies a fraction of the particular internal gain object assigned to this node.
This object is extensible, so additional groups of these last three fields can be added to the end of
this object.
RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:InternalGains ,
CentralUpper_Gain , !- Name
People , !- Internal Gain Object 1 Type
NORTH_ZONE People , !- Internal Gain Object 1 Name
0.15, !- Fraction of Gains to Node 1
Lights , !- Internal Gain Object 2 Type
NORTH_ZONE Lights , !- Internal Gain Object 2 Name
0.15, !- Fraction of Gains to Node 2
ElectricEquipment , !- Internal Gain Object 3 Type
NORTH_ZONE Equip , !- Internal Gain Object 3 Name
0.15; !- Fraction of Gains to Node 3

1.13.19 RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment
This object is used to define a list of HVAC equipment objects in the same zone and associated
fractions assigned to this particular node.

1.13.19.1 Inputs

1.13.19.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the RoomAir:Node:AirflowNet-
work:HVACEquipment object.

1.13.19.1.2 Field: ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Type <#>

The field specifies an object type of ZoneHVAC equipment or terminal type based on the list in the
Energy+.idd.
510 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.13.19.1.3 Field: ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Name <#>

The field specifies the object name based on the object type defined in the previous field.

1.13.19.1.4 Field: Fraction of Output or Supply Air from HVAC Equipment

<#>
The field specifies a fraction of supply air from the particular equipment to this node.

1.13.19.1.5 Field: Fraction of Input or Return Air from HVAC Equipment <#>

The field specifies a fraction of return air from the particular equipment to this node.
This object is extensible, so additional groups fields of these last four fields can be added to the end
of this object.

RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork:HVACEquipment ,
CentralUpper_HVAC , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner , !- ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Type 1
NORTH_ZONE PTAC , !- ZoneHVAC or Air Terminal Equipment Object Name 1
0.14, !- Fraction of Output or Supply Air from HVAC Equipment 1
0.14; !- Fraction of Input or Return Air to HVAC Equipment 1

1.13.19.2 Outputs

Each room air model sets up outputs specific to that model. The effect of room air modeling is
usually to adjust the adjacent air temperature along the inside surface of heat transfer surfaces. The
output report “Surface Int Adjacent Air Temperature [C]” is provided for this and described under
Surface Outputs.

1.13.19.2.1 Zone Predicted Sensible Load Room Air Correction Factor

This output variable provides the value of the correction factor applied to the predicted zone loads.
Predicted zone load to setpoint is (usually) used to control HVAC air systems and the presence of
a room air model has an impact on the loads. The predicted loads are multiplied by the factor in
this output variable. The value is always 1.0 when there is no Room Air model. When there is a
Room Air model, this output shows how that model is increasing or decreasing overall zone loads
experienced by the air system.

1.13.19.3 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node Relative Humidity [%]
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node SumIntSensibleGain [W]
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node SumIntLatentGain [W]
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node NonAirSystemResponse [W]
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node SysDepZoneLoadsLagged [W]
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node HVAC Supply Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node HVAC Return Fraction []
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 511

1.13.19.3.1 RoomAirflowNetwork Node Temperature [C]

The temperature at a Room Air Node in a zone in degrees C.

1.13.19.3.2 HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node Humidity Ratio [kgWa-

ter/kgDryAir]
The humidity ratio at a Room Air Node in a zone in kgWater/kgDryAir.

1.13.19.3.3 RoomAirflowNetwork Node Relative Humidity [%]

The relative humidity ratio at a Room Air Node in a zone in percent.

1.13.19.3.4 HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node SumIntSensibleGain

[W]
A sum of internal sensible gains assigned to a Room Air node in a zone.

1.13.19.3.5 HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node SumIntLatentGain [W]

A sum of internal latent gains assigned to a Room Air node in a zone.

1.13.19.3.6 HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node NonAirSystemResponse

[W]
A sum of system convective gains, collected via NonAirSystemResponse, and assigned to a Room
Air node in a zone.

1.13.19.3.7 HVAC,Average,RoomAirflowNetwork Node SysDepZoneLoad-

sLagged [W]
A sum of SysDepZoneLoads saved to be added to zone heat balance at the next HVAC time step.
A typical system is a zone dehumidifier.

1.14 Group – Internal Gains (People, Lights, Other in-

ternal zone equipment)
Not all the influence for energy consumption in the building is due to envelope and ambient condi-
tions. This group of objects describes other internal gains that may come into play (People, Lights,
Various Equipment Types).

1.14.1 Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s)

Each internal gains object has a field for “Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name”. All
internal gains are modeled at the Space level, so each internal gain input object may be expanded
to multiple instances of that gain according to the following rules with names constructed using
the <Object Name>, <Zone Name>, or <Space Name>. If the resulting concatenated name is
512 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

greater than 100 characters a warning will be shown and it will be truncated. If the resulting name
duplicates another such concatenated name, there will be a severe error and terminate the run. The
concatenated name is used when referring to specific instances of internal gains for Output:Variables,
Energy Management System (EMS) controls, and Demand Limiting Controls.

Space Name will result in one instance of the internal gain, named <Object Name>. The full
magnitude of the gain will be applied to the Space using the design level, space floor area, or
space occupancy as appropriate.
SpaceList Name will result in one instance of the internal gain for each Space in the SpaceList,
named <Space Name> <Object Name>. The full magnitude of the gain will be applied to
each Space in the SpaceList using the design level, space floor area, or space occupancy as
appropriate.
Zone Name will result in one instance of the internal gain for each Space in the Zone. If there
is only one Space in the Zone, then the single instance will be named <Object Name>. If
there is more than one Space in the Zone, then each instance will be named <Space Name>
<Object Name>. The full magnitude of the gain will be split between the Spaces in the Zone
apportioned by the Space floor area or occupancy depending on the input method.
ZoneList Name will result in one instance of the internal gain for each Space in each Zone in the
ZoneList. Each instance will be named <Space Name> <Object Name>. The full magnitude
of the gain will be applied to each Zone in the ZoneList then split between the Spaces in each
Zone apportioned by the Space floor area or occupancy depending on the input method.

One exception to this is ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled which only allows Zone or Space Name.
If a Zone Name is specified which contains more than one Space, the same rules apply.
As an example, assume that Zone 1 contains Space 1A and Space 1B, and Zone 2 contains only
Space 2 (objects are abbreviated for clarity):
Space ,
Space 1A, !- Name
Zone 1, !- Zone Name
75.0, !- Floor Area

Space ,
Space 1B, !- Name
Zone 1; !- Zone Name
25.0, !- Floor Area

Space ,
Space 2, !- Name
Zone 2, !- Zone Name

SpaceList ,
All Spaces , !- Name
Space 1A, !- Space 1 Name
Space 1B, !- Space 2 Name
Space 2, !- Space 3 Name

People ,
Office People , !- Name
Zone 1, !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
100.0 , !- Number of People

People ,
Lunchroom People , !- Name
Zone 2, !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
50.0, !- Number of People

People ,
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 513

Cleaning Crew , !- Name

All Spaces , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
2.0, !- Number of People

Resulting instances of People:

Space 1A Office People , 75 people. (concatenated name , apportioned by space floor area)
Space 1B Office People , 25 people. (concatenated name , apportioned by space floor area)
Lunchroom People , 50 people. (simple object name for a single space)
Space 1A Cleaning Crew , 2 people. (full load applied to each space in SpaceList)
Space 1B Cleaning Crew , 2 people.
Space 2 Cleaning Crew , 2 people.

1.14.2 People
The people statement is used to model the occupant’s effect on the space conditions. The following
definition addresses the basic affects as well as providing information that can be used to report the
thermal comfort of a group of occupants. The Fanger, Pierce Two-Node, Kansas State University
Two-Node, ASHRAE Standard 55 Elevated Air Cooling Effect model, and ASHRAE Standard 55
Ankle Draft Risk thermal comfort models are available in EnergyPlus. A user may select any of
these models for each People statement by simply adding the appropriate choice keyword after the
air velocity schedule name. Thermal comfort calculations will only be made for people statements
that include specific requests for these thermal comfort models. This object also requires input of
carbon dioxide generation rate based on people activity level for zone carbon dioxide simulations.

1.14.2.1 Inputs

1.14.2.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the People object. Must be unique across all People objects.

1.14.2.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this People object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the building. The
Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the people/area and area/person
options of the Number of People Calculation Method to place a varying number of people at the
same density in each zone or space. The names of the actual people objects may be concatenated
as <Space Name> <People Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s) for more
details.

1.14.2.1.3 Field: Number of People Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedules) that modifies the number of people parameter
(see Number of People Calculation Method and related fields). The schedule values can be any
positive number. The actual number of people in a zone as defined by this statement is the product
of the number of people field and the value of the schedule specified by name in this field.

1.14.2.1.4 Field: Number of People Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal number of occupants (people) in the Zone. The key/choices
are:
514 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– People

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the number of occupants (peo-
ple). (The Number of People field should be filled.)

– People/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The People per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Area/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of floor area per person. (The Zone Floor Area
per Person field should be filled).

1.14.2.1.5 Field: Number of People

This field is used to represent the maximum number of people in a zone that is then multiplied by a
schedule fraction (see schedule field). In EnergyPlus, this is slightly more flexible in that the number
of people could be a “diversity factor” applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the
schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the number of people field is constant for all simulation
environments.

1.14.2.1.6 Field: People per Zone Floor Area

This factor (person/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Floor Area to determine the maximum number
of people as described in the Number of People field. The choice from the method field should be
“people/area”.

1.14.2.1.7 Field: Zone Floor Area per Person

This factor (m2 /person) is used, along with the Zone Floor Area to determine the maximum number
of people as described in the Number of People field. The choice from the method field should be
“area/person”.

1.14.2.1.8 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the type of heat
being given off by people in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total
sensible energy emitted by people to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from human
beings in a zone. The remainder of the sensible load is assumed to be convective heat gain. Note
that latent gains from people are not included in either the radiant or convective heat gains. See the
Engineering Reference document for more details. Default value is 0.30.

1.14.2.1.9 Field: Sensible Heat Fraction

The user can use this field to specify a fixed sensible fraction for the heat gain due to this PEOPLE
object. Normally the program calculates the sensible/latent split; this field gives the user control
over this split. This field is autocalculated: if the field is blank or autocalculate, the program will
calculate the sensible/latent split; if a value is entered, it will be used as the sensible fraction of the
current total heat gain.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 515

1.14.2.1.10 Field: Activity Level Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that determines the amount of heat gain per person in the
zone under design conditions. This heat gain impacts the basic zone heat balance as well as the
modeling of thermal comfort. This value is modified somewhat based on a correlation to account
for variations in space temperature. The schedule values may be any positive number and the units
for this parameter is Watts per person. This schedule represents the total heat gain per person
including convective, radiant, and latent. An internal algorithm is used to determine what fraction
of the total is sensible and what fraction is latent. Then, the sensible portion is divided into radiant
and convective portions using the value specified for Fraction Radiant (above). See the Engineering
Reference document for more details.
Values for activity level can range anywhere from approximately 100-150 Watts per person for most
office activities up to over 900 Watts per person for strenuous physical activities such as competitive
wrestling. The following table (Table 1.25) is based on Table 1.10 from the 2005 ASHRAE Handbook
of Fundamentals, page 8.6. In addition to the information from the ASHRAE HOF, there is an added
column of values in W/Person such as necessary for the activity level schedule values. This column
uses the standard adult body surface area of 1.8 m2 to multiply the activity levels in W/m2 that are
used in the table. Warnings are produced when the activity level schedule values fall outside normal
ranges. Having too low or too high values can also skew thermal comfort reporting values.

1.14.2.1.11 Field: Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate

This numeric input field specifies carbon dioxide generation rate per person with units of m3/s-W.
The total carbon dioxide generation rate from this object is:
Number of People * People Schedule * People Activity * Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate. The
default value is 3.82E-8 m3/s-W (obtained from ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 value at 0.0084
cfm/met/person over the general adult population). The maximum value can be 10 times the
default value.

1.14.2.1.12 Field: Enable ASHRAE 55 comfort warnings

This field accepts either “Yes” or “No” as values. When “Yes” is specified, warnings are generated
when the space conditions are outside of the ASHRAE 55 comfort range as discussed in the sections
that follow titled “Simplified ASHRAE 55-2004 Graph Related Outputs” and “Simplified ASHRAE
55 Warnings.” The default is not to provide these warnings so if you want to know if your space is
outside this comfort range you must set this field to Yes.

Table 1.25: Metabolic Rates for Various Activities

Activity Activity Level Activity Level met*

Schedule Value (W/Person) (W/m2 )

Resting

Sleeping 72 40 0.7
Reclining 81 45 0.8
Seated, quiet 108 60 1
Standing, relaxed 126 70 1.2
Walking (on level surface)
516 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.25: Metabolic Rates for Various Activities

Activity Activity Level Activity Level met*

Schedule Value (W/Person) (W/m2 )

3.2 km/h (0.9 m/s) 207 115 2

4.3 km/h (1.2 m/s) 270 150 2.6
6.4 km/h (1.8 m/s) 396 220 3.8
Office Activities

Reading, seated 99 55 1
Writing 108 60 1
Typing 117 65 1.1
Filing, seated 126 70 1.2
Filing, standing 144 80 1.4
Walking about 180 100 1.7
Lifting/packing 216 120 2.1
Miscellaneous Occupational
Activities

Cooking 171 to 207 95 to 115 1.6 to 2.0

Housecleaning 207 to 360 115 to 200 2.0 to 3.4
Seated, heavy limb movement 234 130 2.2
Machine work 189 105 1.8
sawing (table saw) 207 to 252 115 to 140 2.0 to 2.4
light (electrical industry) 423 235 4
Handling 50 kg bags 423 235 4
Pick and shovel work 423 to 504 235 to 280 4.0 to 4.8
Miscellaneous Leisure Activi-
ties

Dancing, social 252 to 459 140 to 255 2.4 to 4.4

Calisthenics/exercise 315 to 423 175 to 235 3.0 to 4.0
Tennis, singles 378 to 486 210 to 270 3.6 to 4.0
Basketball, competitive 522 to 792 290 to 440 5.0 to 7.6
Wrestling, competitive 738 to 909 410 to 505 7.0 to 8.7
*Note that one met = 58.1 W/m2

1.14.2.1.13 Field: Mean Radiant Temperature Calculation Type

This field specifies the type of Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT) calculation the user wishes to use
for the thermal comfort model. At the present time, there are three options for MRT calculation type:
zone averaged, surface weighted, and a list of angle factors. The default calculation is “ZoneAveraged”
and is used if field is left blank. In the zone averaged MRT calculation, the MRT used for the
thermal comfort calculations is for an “average” point in the zone. MRT is calculated based on an
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 517

area-emissivity weighted average of all of the surfaces in the zone. In cases where the emissivity
of all of the surfaces are sufficiently small (near zero), the mean radiant temperature will be set to
the mean air temperature of the space to avoid divide by zero errors. The other MRT calculation
type is “SurfaceWeighted”. The goal of this calculation type is to estimate a person in the space
close to a particular surface without having to define exact view factors for all of the surfaces and
the location of the person in the space. The MRT used in the thermal comfort calculations when
the “surface weighted” calculation type is selected is actually the average of the temperature of
the surface to which the person is closest (defined by the next field “Surface Name”) and the zone
averaged MRT (defined above). The surface temperature alone is not used because in theory the
maximum view factor from a person to any flat surface is roughly 0.5. In the “surfaceweighted”
calculation, the surface in question actually gets slightly more weighting than 50% since the surface
selected is still a part of the zone average MRT calculation. Again, this simplification was made to
avoid the specification of view factors and the exact location of the person.
A third option is to use “AngleFactor”. This option allows for more explicit positioning of the person
within the space by defining the angle factors from the person to the various surfaces in the zone.
This option requires the user to list the surfaces that the person can see from a radiation standpoint
and also define the angle (or view) factor for each surface. The ComfortViewFactorAngles object
(see next object description) is intended to give the user this opportunity.

1.14.2.1.14 Field: Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name

This field is only valid when the user selects “SurfaceWeighted” or “AngleFactor” for the MRT
calculation type (see the previous input field description). In the case of “SurfaceWeighted”, the
field is the name of a surface within the zone the people are residing. This surface will be used in
the MRT calculation as defined above to come up with a more representative MRT for a person near
a particular surface. The MRT used for thermal comfort calculations using the “SurfaceWeighted”
MRT calculation method is the average of the temperature of the surface specified in this field and the
“zone averaged” MRT (see the Mean Radiant Temperature calculation type field above). In the case
of “AngleFactor”, the field is the name of a ComfortViewFactorAngles input object defined elsewhere.
This field is required when the previous field is set to “SurfaceWeighted” or “AngleFactor” and is
set to run one of the following thermal comfort models: Fanger, Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55
or AnkleDraftASH55.

1.14.2.1.15 Field: Work Efficiency Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that determines the efficiency of energy usage within the human
body that will be used for thermal comfort calculations. Note that all energy produced by the body
is assumed to be converted to heat for the zone heat balance calculation. A value of zero corresponds
to all of the energy produced in the body being converted to heat. A value of unity corresponds to
all of the energy produced in the body being converted to mechanical energy. The values for this
parameter defined in the schedule must be between 0.0 and 1.0. Any value greater than zero will
result in a reduction of heat that impacts the thermal comfort energy balance of a person within the
space, resulting in PMV results appearing lower than expected. Ensure that if this value is non-zero,
the base activity level is chosen to ensure that the net activity converted to heat and zone conditions
are sufficient to maintain thermal comfort. This field is required to run one of the following thermal
comfort models: Fanger, Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55 or AnkleDraftASH55. If a schedule is
listed here but no thermal comfort model is selected, then a warning message will be produced and
this schedule will be listed as unused in the error file.
518 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.2.1.16 Field: Clothing Insulation Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next two fields are filled and is descriptive
of the method for calculating the clothing insulation value of occupants (people) in the Zone. The
key/choices are:

– ClothingInsulationSchedule

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the scheduled clothing insulation
values of occupants (people). (The Clothing Insulation Schedule Name field should be filled.)

– DynamicClothingModelASHRAE55

With this choice, the method used will be the dynamic predictive clothing insulation model developed
by Schiavon and Lee (2013) based on 6,333 selected observations taken from ASHRAE RP-884 and
RP-921 databases. It varies the clothing insulation as a function of outdoor air temperature measured
at 6am as illustrated below.

– CalculationMethodSchedule

With this choice, the method used can be either the ClothingInsulationSchedule or the Dynamic-
ClothingModelASHRAE55, depending on a schedule (to be entered as the next field) that determines
which method to use in different time of a day. When this option is chosen, the next field “Clothing
Insulation Calculation Method Schedule Name” is a required input.

1.14.2.1.17 Field: Clothing Insulation Calculation Method Schedule Name

This field specifies which clothing insulation method (ClothingInsulationSchedule or DynamicCloth-
ingModelASHRAE55) to use at a particular time of the day. A schedule value of 1 means the
ClothingInsulationSchedule method, and 2 means the DynamicClothingModelASHRAE55 method.
This field is only required when the “Clothing Insulation Calculation Method” field is set to Cal-
culationMethodSchedule. If this field is left blank, the specified clothing insulation calculation
method will be used and not changed during the simulation.

1.14.2.1.18 Field: Clothing Insulation Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that defines the amount of clothing being worn by a typical zone
occupant during various times in the simulation period. The choice from the Clothing Insulation
Calculation Method field should be “ClothingInsulationSchedule”. This parameter must be a
positive real number and has units of Clo. Typical values for Clo can be seen in the ASHRAE 2009
HOF Table 7, page 9.8 (for clothing ensembles) and Table 1.14, page 9.9 (for garment values) )
or www.cbe.berkeley.edu/comforttool/. This field is required to run one of the following thermal
comfort models: Fanger, Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55 or AnkleDraftASH55. If a schedule is
listed here but no thermal comfort model is selected, then a warning message will be produced and
this schedule will be listed as unused in the error file.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 519

Figure 1.68: Graphical representation fo the dynamic predictive clothing insulation model
520 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.2.1.19 Field: Air Velocity Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that approximates the amount of air movement in the space
as a function of time throughout the simulation period. The user has control over this parameter
through the schedule that requires the individual numbers in the schedule to be positive real numbers
having units of meters per second. This field is required to run one of the following thermal comfort
models: Fanger, Pierce, KSU, CoolingEffectASH55 or AnkleDraftASH55. If a schedule is listed here
but no thermal comfort model is selected, then a warning message will be produced and this schedule
will be listed as unused in the error file.

1.14.2.1.20 Field: Thermal Comfort Model Type (up to 7 allowed)

The final one to five fields are optional and are intended to trigger various thermal comfort models
within EnergyPlus. By entering the keywords Fanger, Pierce, KSU, AdaptiveASH55, Adaptive-
CEN15251, CoolingEffectASH55, and AnkleDraftASH55, the user can request the Fanger, Pierce
Two-Node, Kansas State UniversityTwo-Node, the adaptive comfort models of the ASHRAE Stan-
dard 55 and CEN Standard 15251, ASHRAE Standard 55 Elevated Air Cooling Effect model, and
ASHRAE Standard 55 Ankle Draft Risk model results for this particular people statement. Detailed
descriptions and requirements of the seven models as listed below.

Fanger Fanger’s Comfort model is applied to calculate related thermal comfort metrics. Fanger
Model PMV, PPD, and Clothing Surface Temperature are calculated and reported as each time
step. Apart from existing required fields in People object, extra fields required for this model
include Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name, Work Efficiency Schedule Name, Clothing
Insulation Schedule Name, and Air Velocity Schedule Name.
Pierce The Pierce Two-Node model is applied to calculate related thermal comfort metrics. Pierce
Model Effective Temperature PMV, Standard Effective Temperature PMV, Discomfort Index,
Thermal Sensation Index, and Standard Effective Temperature are calculated and reported as
each time step.Apart from existing required fields in People object, extra fields required for
this model include Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name, Work Efficiency Schedule Name,
Clothing Insulation Schedule Name, and Air Velocity Schedule Name.
KSU The KSU Two-Node Model is applied to calculate related thermal comfort metrics. KSU
Model Thermal Sensation Vote is calculated and reported as each time step. Note that the
KSU model is computationally intensive and may noticeably increase the execution time of
the simulation. Apart from existing required fields in People object, extra fields required for
this model include Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name, Work Efficiency Schedule Name,
Clothing Insulation Schedule Name, and Air Velocity Schedule Name.
AdaptiveASH55 Adaptive Comfort Model Based on ASHRAE Standard 55-2010 is applied to
calculate related thermal comfort metrics. ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model 90% Acceptability
Status, 80% Acceptability Status, Running Average Outdoor Air Temperature, and the Adap-
tive Model Temperature are calculated and reported as each time step. AdaptiveASH55 is only
applicable when the running average outdoor air temperature for the past 7 days is between
10.0 and 33.5C.
AdaptiveCEN15251 Adaptive Comfort Model Based on European Standard EN15251-2007 is
applied to calculate related thermal comfort metrics. CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category
I/II/II Status, Running Average Outdoor Air Temperature, and the Adaptive Model Temper-
ature are calculated and reported as each time step. AdaptiveCEN15251 is only applicable
when the running average outdoor air temperature for the past 30 days is between 10.0 and
30.0C.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 521

CoolingEffectASH55 ASHRAE 55-2017 Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect Model is applied to
calculate related thermal comfort metrics. Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect, Cooling Effect
Adjusted PMV, and Cooling Effect Adjusted PPD are calculated and reported as each time
step. Apart from existing required fields in People object, extra fields required for this model
include Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name, Work Efficiency Schedule Name, Clothing
Insulation Schedule Name, and Air Velocity Schedule Name.
AnkleDraftASH55 ASHRAE 55-2017 Ankle Draft Risk Model is applied to calculate related
thermal comfort metrics. Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Ankle Draft PPD is calculated
and reported as each time step. Apart from existing required fields in People object, extra
fields required for this model include Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name, Work Efficiency
Schedule Name, Clothing Insulation Schedule Name, Air Velocity Schedule Name, and Ankle
Level Air Velocity Schedule Name. Ankle draft PPD calculations are only applicable for relative
air velocity is below 0.2 m/s, and the subject’s metabolic rate and clothing level should be kept
below 1.3 met and 0.7 clo. PPD at ankle draft will be set to -1.0 if if these conditions are not
met.

For descriptions of the thermal comfort calculations, see the Engineering Reference document.
Note that since up to seven models may be specified, the user may opt to have EnergyPlus calculate
the thermal comfort for people identified with this people statement using all seven models if desired.

1.14.2.1.21 Field: Ankle Level Air Velocity Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that approximates the amount of air movement at the occu-
pants’ ankle level (0.1 m above floor level) as a function of time throughout the simulation period.
The user has control over this parameter through the schedule that requires the individual numbers
in the schedule to be positive real numbers having units of meters per second. This field is required
to run the AnkleDraftASH55 thermal comfort model. If a schedule is listed here but no thermal
comfort model is selected, then a warning message will be produced and this schedule will be listed
as unused in the error file.
The following IDF example allows for a maximum of 31 people with scheduled occupancy of “Office
Occupancy”, 60% radiant using an Activity Schedule of “Activity Sch”. The example allows for
thermal comfort reporting.

People ,
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Name
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
BLDG_OCC_SCH , !- Number of People Schedule Name
People , !- Number of People Calculation Method
25.2000,,, !- Number of People , People per Zone Floor Area , Zone Floor Area per Person
0.3000 , !- Fraction Radiant
AUTOCALCULATE , !- Sensible Heat Fraction
ACTIVITY_SCH , !- Activity Level Schedule Name
3.82E-8, !- Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate {m3/s-W}
No , !- Enable ASHRAE 55 Comfort Warnings
ZoneAveraged , !- Mean Radiant Temperature Calculation Type
, !- Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name
WORK_EFF_SCH , !- Work Efficiency Schedule Name
ClothingInsulationSchedule , !- Clothing Insulation Calculation Method
, !- Clothing Insulation Calculation Method Schedule Name
CLOTHING_SCH , !- Clothing Insulation Schedule Name
AIR_VELO_SCH , !- Air Velocity Schedule Name
Fanger; !- Thermal Comfort Model 1 Type

A simpler example, without using the thermal comfort reporting option:

522 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

People ,
RIGHT FORK , !- Name
RIGHT FORK , !- Zone or ZoneListName
Dorm Occupancy , !- Number of People Schedule Name
people , !- Number of People Calculation Method
8.00000 , !- Number of People ,
, !- People per Zone Floor Area
, !- Zone Floor Area per Person
0.6000000 , !- Fraction Radiant
Autocalculate , !- Sensible Heat Fraction
Activity Sch , !- Activity level Schedule Name

And with the sensible fraction specified:

People ,
SPACE1 -1 People 1, !- Name
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone or ZoneListName
OCCUPY -1, !- Number of People Schedule Name
people , !- Number of People Calculation Method
11, !- Number of People
, !- People per Zone Floor Area
, !- Zone Floor Area per Person
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0.55, !- Sensible Heat Fraction
ActSchd; !- Activity level Schedule Name

Global People Object:

ZoneList ,AllOccupiedZones ,SPACE1 -1,SPACE2 -1,SPACE3 -1,SPACE4 -1,SPACE5 -1;

People ,
AllZones with People , !- Name
AllOccupiedZones , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
OCCUPY -1, !- Number of People Schedule Name
People/Area , !- Number of People Calculation Method
, !- Number of People
.11, !- People per Zone Floor Area {person/m2}
, !- Zone Floor Area per Person {m2/person}
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
, !- Sensible Heat Fraction
ActSchd , !- Activity Level Schedule Name
3.82E-8, !- Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate {m3/s-W}
No , !- Enable ASHRAE 55 Comfort Warnings
surfaceweighted , !- Mean Radiant Temperature Calculation Type
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name/Angle Factor List Name
Work Eff Sch , !- Work Efficiency Schedule Name
ClothingInsulationSchedule , !- Clothing Insulation Calculation Method
, !- Clothing Insulation Calculation Method Schedule Name
Clothing Sch , !- Clothing Insulation Schedule Name
Air Velo Sch , !- Air Velocity Schedule Name
FANGER , !- Thermal Comfort Model 1 Type
PIERCE , !- Thermal Comfort Model 2 Type
KSU; !- Thermal Comfort Model 3 Type

1.14.2.2 Outputs

People objects have output variables for individual objects and for space and zone totals.
People specific outputs include:

– Zone,Average,People Occupant Count []

– Zone,Sum,People Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,People Radiant Heating Rate [W]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 523

– Zone,Sum,People Convective Heating Energy [J]

– Zone,Average,People Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,People Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,People Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,People Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,People Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,People Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,People Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space People Occupant Count []
– Zone,Sum,Space People Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space People Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space People Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space People Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space People Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space People Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space People Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space People Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space People Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space People Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone People Occupant Count []
– Zone,Sum,Zone People Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone People Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone People Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone People Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone People Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone People Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone People Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone People Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone People Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone People Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,People Air Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,People Air Relative Humidity [%]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Mean Radiant Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Operative Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Fanger Model PMV []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Fanger Model PPD [%]
524 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Clothing Surface Temperature [C]

– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Effective Temperature PMV []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Standard Effective Temperature PMV []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Discomfort Index []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Thermal Sensation Index []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Standard Effective Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort KSU Model Thermal Sensation Index []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model 80% Acceptability Status
[]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model 90% Acceptability Status
[]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model Running Average Outdoor
Air Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category I Status []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category II Status []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category III Status
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Running Average Outdoor
Air Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect [C]
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect Adjusted
PMV []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect Adjusted
PPD []
– Zone,Average,Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Ankle Draft PPD []

It should be noted that if a user is trying to output the Standard Effective Temperature (SET) that
the Pierce two-node model must be selected. This variable is calculated as part of the Pierce model
and can be seen in the output by requesting Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Standard Effective
Temperature.

1.14.2.2.1 People Occupant Count []

This field is the number of people for this PEOPLE object during the timestep in question.

1.14.2.2.2 People Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.3 People Radiant Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of radiant heat gain for this People object in Watts (for
rate) or Joules. This is determined by the current sensible heat gain from people to the zone and
the “Fraction Radiant” specified in the input. The radiant gains from people are distributed to the
surfaces using an area weighting scheme.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 525

1.14.2.2.4 People Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.5 People Convective Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of convective heat gain for this People object in Watts (for
rate) or Joules. This is determined by the current sensible heat gain from people to the zone and
the “Fraction Radiant” specified in input. Note that the radiant and convective gains should add
up to the sensible heat gain from people. The convective heat gain from people is added to the zone
air heat balance directly.

1.14.2.2.6 People Latent Gain Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.7 People Latent Gain Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of latent heat gain for this People object in Watts (for rate)
or Joules. This amount is based on the number of people in the space as well as the total amount
of energy produced by a typical person defined by the activity schedule in the input. An internal
algorithm is used to determine what fraction of the total is sensible and what fraction is latent.
Details about this split are included in the Engineering Reference document.

1.14.2.2.8 People Sensible Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.9 People Sensible Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of sensible heat gain for this People object in Watts (for rate)
or Joules. This amount is based on the number of people in the space as well as the total amount
of energy produced by a typical person defined by the activity schedule in the input. An internal
algorithm (described in the Engineering Reference document) is used to determine what fraction of
the total is sensible and what fraction is latent. The sensible plus the latent heat gain from people
equals the total gain specified in the input.

1.14.2.2.10 People Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.11 People Total Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the total amount of heat gain for this People object in Watts (for rate)
or Joules. This is derived from the activity level times the number of occupants.

1.14.2.2.12 People Air Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the zone air temperature based on the Fanger thermal comfort
model. If there is a ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort object specified and the thermal
zone is occupied, then the value of “People Air Temperature” is determined based on the thermal
comfort that satisfies the thermal comfort setpoint PMV value specified; otherwise, it is set to average
zone air temperature.
526 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.2.2.13 People Air Relative Humidity [%]

This output variable represents the zone air relative humidity based on the Fanger thermal comfort
model. If there is a ZoneControl:Thermostat:ThermalComfort object specified and the thermal zone
is occupied, then the value of “People Air Relative Humidity” is determined from the mean zone
air temperature and zone air humidity ratio that satisfies the thermal comfort setpoint PMV value
specified; otherwise, it is calculated from the zone air temperature and humidity ratio averaged over
the time step.

1.14.2.2.14 Space or Zone People Occupant Count []

This field is the total number of people within the space or zone during the timestep in question.

1.14.2.2.15 Space or Zone People Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.16 Space or Zone People Radiant Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of radiant heat gain from people within the space or zone in
Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is determined by the current sensible heat gain from people to the
space or zone and the “Fraction Radiant” specified in the input. The radiant gains from people are
distributed to the surfaces using an area weighting scheme.

1.14.2.2.17 Space or Zone People Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.18 Space or Zone People Convective Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of convective heat gain from people within the space or zone
in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is determined by the current sensible heat gain from people to the
space or zone and the “Fraction Radiant” specified in input. Note that the radiant and convective
gains should add up to the sensible heat gain from people. The convective heat gain from people is
added to the space or zone air heat balance directly.

1.14.2.2.19 Space or Zone People Latent Gain Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.20 Space or Zone People Latent Gain Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of latent heat gain from people within the space or zone in
Watts (for rate) or Joules. This amount is based on the number of people in the space as well as the
total amount of energy produced by a typical person defined by the activity schedule in the input.
An internal algorithm is used to determine what fraction of the total is sensible and what fraction
is latent. Details about this split are included in the Engineering Reference document.

1.14.2.2.21 Space or Zone People Sensible Heating Rate [W]

1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 527

1.14.2.2.22 Space or Zone People Sensible Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of sensible heat gain from people within the space or zone in
Watts (for rate) or Joules. This amount is based on the number of people in the space as well as the
total amount of energy produced by a typical person defined by the activity schedule in the input.
An internal algorithm (described in the Engineering Reference document) is used to determine what
fraction of the total is sensible and what fraction is latent. The sensible plus the latent heat gain
from people equals the total gain specified in the input.

1.14.2.2.23 Space or Zone People Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.2.2.24 Space or Zone People Total Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the total amount of heat gain from people within the space or zone in
Watts (for rate) or Joules. Derived from the activity level times the number of occupants, this is
summed for each people object within a zone.

1.14.2.2.25 Zone Thermal Comfort Mean Radiant Temperature [C]

This output variable is the mean radiant temperature used in the thermal comfort calculations. This
value is computed according to the “MRT Calculation Type” specified in the PEOPLE object. If
a high temperature radiant system is present in the zone, this value will be adjusted according to
the current heater operation and the “Fraction of radiant energy incident on people” specified in the
HIGH TEMP RADIANT SYSTEM object.

1.14.2.2.26 Zone Thermal Comfort Operative Temperature [C]

This output variable is the operative temperature as defined by the thermal comfort operations.
Specifically, it is the average of the thermal comfort mean radiant temperature and the zone air
temperature.
Note for all Thermal Comfort reporting: Though the published values for thermal comfort “vote”
have a discrete scale (e.g. –3 to +3 or –4 to +4), the calculations in EnergyPlus are carried out on
a continuous scale and, thus, reporting may be “off the scale” with specific conditions encountered
in the space. This is not necessarily an error in EnergyPlus – rather a different approach that does
not take the “limits” of the discrete scale values into account.

1.14.2.2.27 Zone Thermal Comfort Fanger Model PMV []

This field is the “predicted mean vote” (PMV) calculated using the Fanger thermal comfort model.
Details on the equations used to calculate the Fanger PMV are shown in the EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference. If the zone in question is currently being controlled using a thermostat object, then the
value of the PMV is determined by using the air temperature and humidity that is calculated at the
system time step; otherwise, if the zone is uncontrolled, the PMV is determined using the zone air
temperature and humidity that is averaged over the zone time step.

1.14.2.2.28 Zone Thermal Comfort Fanger Model PPD [%]

This field is the “predicted percentage of dissatisfied” (PPD) calculated using the Fanger thermal
comfort model. Details on the equations used to calculate the Fanger PPD are shown in the Energy-
Plus Engineering Reference. If the zone in question is currently being controlled using a thermostat
528 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

object, then the value of the PPD is determined by using the air temperature and humidity that is
calculated at the system time step; otherwise, if the zone is uncontrolled, the PPD is determined
using the zone air temperature and humidity that is averaged over the zone time step.

1.14.2.2.29 Zone Thermal Comfort Clothing Surface Temperature [C]

This output variable is the calculation of the clothing surface temperature using the Fanger thermal
comfort model.

1.14.2.2.30 Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Effective Temperature PMV []

This field is the “predicted mean vote” (PMV) calculated using the effective temperature and the
Pierce two-node thermal comfort model.

1.14.2.2.31 Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Standard Effective Tempera-

ture PMV []
This field is the “predicted mean vote” (PMV) calculated using the “standard” effective temperature
and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model.

1.14.2.2.32 Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Discomfort Index []

This field is the “discomfort index” calculated using the the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model.

1.14.2.2.33 Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Thermal Sensation Index []

This field is the “thermal sensation index” (PMV) calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal
comfort model.

1.14.2.2.34 Zone Thermal Comfort Pierce Model Standard Effective Tempera-

ture [C]
This field is the “standard effective temperature” (SET) calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal
comfort model. Note that if a user wishes to report the Pierce Model SET that it must be done
using the Pierce two-node model and the user must select “Pierce” as one of the Thermal Comfort
model types as shown above in the input syntax for the People statement.

1.14.2.2.35 Zone Thermal Comfort KSU Model Thermal Sensation Vote []

This field is the “thermal sensation vote” (TSV) calculated using the KSU two-node thermal comfort
model.

1.14.2.2.36 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model 90% Accept-

ability Status []
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the 90% acceptability limits of
the adaptive comfort in ASHRAE 55-2010. A value of 1 means within (inclusive) the limits, a value
of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable (when unoccupied or running
average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 33.5C).
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 529

1.14.2.2.37 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model 80% Accept-

ability Status []
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the 80% acceptability limits of
the adaptive comfort in ASHRAE 55-2010. A value of 1 means within (inclusive) the limits, a value
of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable (when unoccupied or running
average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 33.5C).

1.14.2.2.38 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model Running Av-

erage Outdoor Air Temperature [C]
This field reports the mean monthly outdoor air temperature, an input parameter for the ASHRAE-
55 adaptive comfort model. This can be computed in two ways. If the .stat file is provided for the
simulation, this field will reflect the monthly daily average temperature.
If the .epw file is used, the field reports the simple running average of the daily average outdoor
dry-bulb temperatures of the previous 30 days.

1.14.2.2.39 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Adaptive Model Temperature

[C]
This field reports the ideal indoor operative temperature, or comfort temperature, as determined
by the ASHRAE-55 adaptive comfort model. The 80% acceptability limits for indoor operative
temperature are defined as no greater than 3.5 degrees C from the adaptive comfort temperature.
The 90% acceptability limits are defined as no greater than 2.5 degrees C from the adaptive comfort
temperature. A value of -1 means not applicable (when running average outdoor temp is outside the
range of 10.0 to 33.5C).

1.14.2.2.40 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category I Sta-
tus
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the Category I (90% acceptability)
limits of the adaptive comfort in the European Standard EN15251-2007. A value of 1 means within
(inclusive) the limits, a value of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable
(when unoccupied or running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).

1.14.2.2.41 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category II Sta-
tus
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the Category II (80% acceptability)
limits of the adaptive comfort in the European Standard EN15251-2007. A value of 1 means within
(inclusive) the limits, a value of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not applicable
(when unoccupied or running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).

1.14.2.2.42 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Category III
Status
This field is to report whether the operative temperature falls into the Category III (65% accept-
ability) limits of the adaptive comfort in the European Standard EN15251-2007. A value of 1 means
within (inclusive) the limits, a value of 0 means outside the limits, and a value of -1 means not ap-
plicable (when unoccupied or running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).
530 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.2.2.43 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Running Aver-
age Outdoor Air Temperature
This field reports the weighted average of the outdoor air temperature of the previous seven days,
an input parameter for the CEN-15251 adaptive comfort model.

1.14.2.2.44 Zone Thermal Comfort CEN 15251 Adaptive Model Temperature

This field reports the ideal indoor operative temperature, or comfort temperature, as determined by
the CEN-15251 adaptive comfort model. Category I, II, and II limits for indoor operative tempera-
ture are defined as no greater than 2, 3, and 4 degrees C from this value respectively. A value of -1
means not applicable (when running average outdoor temp is outside the range of 10.0 to 30.0C).

1.14.2.2.45 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling

Effect
This field is the calculated Cooling Effect of the elevated air speed in degree celsius. It is the
value that, when subtracted equally from both the average air temperature and the mean radiant
temperature, yields the same SET under still air as in the first SET calculation under elevated air
speed.

1.14.2.2.46 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling

Effect Adjusted PMV
This field is the “predicted mean vote” (PMV) calculated using the Fanger PMV model, adjusted
by the ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect. The Cooling Effect adjusted PMV for an
environment with elevated average air speed is calculated using the adjusted average air temperature,
the adjusted radiant temperature, and still air (0.1 m/s).

1.14.2.2.47 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling

Effect Adjusted PPD
This field is the “predicted percentage of dissatisfied” (PPD) calculated using the Fanger PMV-PPD
model, adjusted by the ASHRAE 55 Elevated Air Speed Cooling Effect. The Cooling Effect adjusted
PPD for an environment with elevated average air speed is calculated using the adjusted average air
temperature, the adjusted radiant temperature, and still air (0.1 m/s).

1.14.2.2.48 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Ankle Draft PPD

This field is the “ppredicted percentage of dissatisfied” (PPD) on draft at ankle level. It is used as
the metric to evaluate the ankle draft risk as a function of PMV and air speed at the ankle level (0.1
m).

1.14.2.3 Outputs

The following output variables are all based on whether the humidity ratio and the operative tem-
perature is within the region shown in ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 in Figure 5.2.1.1. For these
outputs the operative temperature is simplified to be the average of the air temperature and the
mean radiant temperature. For summer, the 0.5 Clo level is used and, for winter, the 1.0 Clo level
is used. The graphs below are based on the following tables which extend the ASHRAE values to
zero humidity ratio.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 531

Table 1.26: Winter Clothes (1.0 Clo)

Operative Temperature (C) Humidity Ratio (kgWater/kgDryAir)

19.6 0.012
23.9 0.012
26.3 0.000
21.7 0.000

Figure 1.69: Winter Comfort Range

Table 1.27: Summer Clothes (0.5 Clo)

Operative Temperature (C) Humidity Ratio (kgWater/kgDryAir)

23.6 0.012
26.8 0.012
28.3 0.000
25.1 0.000
532 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.70: Summer Comfort Range

1.14.2.3.1 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Summer Clothes

Not Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative tempera-
ture is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region (see above)

1.14.2.3.2 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Winter Clothes

Not Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative tempera-
ture is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region (see above)

1.14.2.3.3 Zone Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Summer or Winter

Clothes Not Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative tempera-
ture is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region (see above)

1.14.2.3.4 Facility Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Summer

Clothes Not Comfortable Time[hr]
The time when any zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temper-
ature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region (see above)
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 533

1.14.2.3.5 Facility Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Winter Clothes

Not Comfortable Time [hr]
The time when any zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temper-
ature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region (see above)

1.14.2.3.6 Facility Thermal Comfort ASHRAE 55 Simple Model Summer or

Winter Clothes Not Comfortable Time [hr]
The time when any zone is occupied that the combination of humidity ratio and operative temper-
ature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region (see above)

1.14.3 Simplified ASHRAE 55 Warnings

The simplified ASHRAE 55 calculations may be computed for occupied zones and, possibly, warnings
are shown on the .err file at the end of each simulated environment. To enable this option set the
“Enable ASHRAE 55 comfort warnings” field of the People object to Yes. These warnings will not
be generated by default.
If you enable the warnings, the simplified ASHRAE 55 calculations are done for occupied zones and,
possibly, warnings are shown on the .err file at the end of each simulated environment.
** Warning ** More than 4% of time (350.4 hours) uncomfortable in zone ZSF1
** ~~~ ** 553.0 hours were uncomfortable based on ASHRAE 55 -2004 graph (Section 5.2.1.1)
** ~~~ ** During Environment [10/01 - 09/30]: CHICAGO IL USA TMY2 -94846 WMO\# = 725300
** Warning ** More than 4% of time (350.4 hours) uncomfortable in zone ZNF1
** ~~~ ** 827.8 hours were uncomfortable based on ASHRAE 55 -2004 graph (Section 5.2.1.1)
** ~~~ ** During Environment [10/01 - 09/30]: CHICAGO IL USA TMY2 -94846 WMO\# = 725300
** Warning ** More than 4% of time (350.4 hours) uncomfortable in zone ZSF2
** ~~~ ** 593.5 hours were uncomfortable based on ASHRAE 55 -2004 graph (Section 5.2.1.1)
** ~~~ ** During Environment [10/01 - 09/30]: CHICAGO IL USA TMY2 -94846 WMO\# = 725300
** Warning ** More than 4% of time (350.4 hours) uncomfortable in zone ZNF2
** ~~~ ** 875.8 hours were uncomfortable based on ASHRAE 55 -2004 graph (Section 5.2.1.1)
** ~~~ ** During Environment [10/01 - 09/30]: CHICAGO IL USA TMY2 -94846 WMO\# = 725300

You may decide if you need to change parameters to reduce these “uncomfortable” hours. The
individual output variables shown previously may help you get more details on when these are
occurring.
Following are some suggestions that might be applicable:

– Eliminate occupancy when conditioning equipment is off.

– Note that the ASHRAE graph lower limit is (19.6C to 21.7C) – heating setpoints may need to
be nearer 22.2C (72F) than 21.1C (70F).
– Unoccupied heating setpoint should be nearer 16.7C (62F) rather than 12.8C (55F) to reduce
the start up recovery.
– Start the occupied setpoint schedule, fan availability schedule, cooling pump availability sched-
ule, reheat coil availability, one hour before occupancy. Seasonal turn on and off of equipment
may cause more warnings (but potentially more energy consumption).
– Unoccupied cooling setpoint should be nearer 29.4C (85F) rather than 40.0 (104F) to reduce
the start up recovery.
534 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.4 ComfortViewFactorAngles
When requesting EnergyPlus to do a thermal comfort calculation, the program user has three options
for defining how the mean radiant temperature will be calculated. The user may select “zoneaver-
aged” which results in a mean radiant temperature that is characteristic of an “average” location
near the center of the zone. The user may also elect to place the person near a particular surface
by selecting “surfaceweighted” in the People statement. This takes the average of the zone mean
radiant temperature and the temperature of the surface that the person is near and uses this value
as the mean radiant temperature when calculating thermal comfort.
The third option is for the user to more explicitly position the person within the space by defining
the angle factors from the person to the various surfaces in the zone. This option requires the user
to list the surfaces that the person can see from a radiation standpoint and also define the angle
(or view) factor for each surface. The AngleFactorList input line is intended to give the user this
opportunity.

1.14.4.1 Inputs

1.14.4.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for the list of surfaces that can be seen radiantly by the
person for whom thermal comfort is to be evaluated. Any reference to this list by a People statement
will use this name.

1.14.4.1.2 Field: Zone Name

Zone Name for this surface list. Each of the surfaces listed must be in this zone.

1.14.4.1.3 Field: Surface <#> Name

This field is the name of a surface in the zone seen by the person.

1.14.4.1.4 Field: Angle Factor <#>

This field is the fraction that this surface contributes to the total mean radiant temperature. This
can be thought of as a weighting factor for this surface and the actual mean radiant temperature used
in the thermal comfort model is simply the sum of all angle factors multiplied by the corresponding
inside surface temperature. The sum of all angle factors within any angle factor list must equal
unity, otherwise the program will not accept the input as valid.
Note that the Surface Name/Angle Factor pair is extensible to accommodate as many surfaces as
required.
An example IDF with an electric low temperature radiant system is shown below.
ComfortViewFactorAngles ,
South Zone Angle Factors , !- name of angle factor list
South Zone , !- Zone Name
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Surface name 1
0.75, !- Angle factor for surface 1
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface name 2
0.15, !- Angle factor for surface 2
Zn001:Roof001 , !- Surface name 3
0.10; !- Angle factor for surface 3
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 535

1.14.5 Lights
The Lights statement allows you to specify information about a zone’s electric lighting system,
including design power level and operation schedule, and how the heat from lights is distributed
thermally.
A zone may have multiple Lights statements. For example, one statement may describe the general
lighting in the zone and another the task lighting. Or you can use multiple Lights statements for a
zone that has two or more general lighting systems that differ in design level, schedule, etc.

1.14.5.1 Inputs

1.14.5.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the Lights object.

1.14.5.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this Lights object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the building. The
Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the watts/area and watts/person
options of the Design Level Calculation Method to place a varying lighting load at the same density
in each zone or space. The names of the actual lights objects may be concatenated as <Space Name>
<Lights Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s) for more details.

1.14.5.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

The name of the schedule that modifies the lighting power design level (see Design Level Calculation
Method field and related subsequent fields). The schedule values can be any positive number. The
electrical input for lighting in a particular timestep is the product of the design level and the value of
this schedule in that timestep. If the design level is the maximum lighting power input the schedule
should contain values between 0.0 and 1.0.

1.14.5.1.4 Field: Design Level Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal lighting level in the Zone. The key/choices are:

– LightingLevel

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the lighting level (Watts) for the
Zone. (The Lighting Level field should be filled.)

– Watts/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Watts per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Watts/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of lighting level (watts) per person. (The Watts
per person field should be filled).
536 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.5.1.5 Field: Lighting Level

This is typically the maximum electrical power input (in Watts) to lighting in a zone, including
ballasts, if present. This value is multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field) to get the
lighting power in a particular timestep. In EnergyPlus, this is slightly more flexible in that the
lighting design level could be a “diversity factor” applied to a schedule of real numbers.

1.14.5.1.6 Field: Watts per Zone Floor Area

This factor (watts/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Floor Area to determine the maximum light-
ing level as described in the Lighting Level field. The choice from the method field should be
“watts/area”.

1.14.5.1.7 Field: Watts per Person

This factor (watts/person) is used, along with the number of occupants (people) to determine the
maximum lighting level as described in the Lighting Level field. The choice from the method field
should be “watts/person”.

1.14.5.1.8 Heat Gains from Lights:

The electrical input to lighting ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads or to return
air heat gains. In EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are
given by the input fields Return Air Fraction, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Visible. A fourth,
defined as the fraction of the heat from lights convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program
as:
fconvected = 1.0 – (Return Air Fraction + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Visible)
You will get an error message if Return Air Fraction + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Visible exceeds
1.0.
These fractions depend on the type of lamp and luminaire, whether the luminaire is vented to the
return air, etc.

1.14.5.1.9 Field: Return Air Fraction

The fraction of the heat from lights that goes into the zone return air (i.e., into the zone outlet node).
If the return air flow is zero or the zone has no return air system, the program will put this fraction
into the zone air. Return Air Fraction should be non-zero only for luminaires that are return-air
ducted (see Table 1.28 and Figure 51). (However, see the field “Return Air Fraction Is Calculated
from Plenum Temperature,” below, for an approach to modeling the case where Return Air Fraction
is caused by conduction between a luminaire that is in contact with a return-air plenum.)

1.14.5.1.10 Field: Fraction Radiant

The fraction of heat from lights that goes into the zone as long-wave (thermal) radiation. The
program calculates how much of this radiation is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according
the area times thermal absorptance product of these surfaces.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 537

1.14.5.1.11 Field: Fraction Visible

The fraction of heat from lights that goes into the zone as visible (short-wave) radiation. The program
calculates how much of this radiation is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according the
area times solar absorptance product of these surfaces.
Approximate values of Return Air Fraction, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Visible are given in
Table 1.28 for overhead fluorescent lighting for a variety of luminaire configurations. The data is
based on ASHRAE 1282-RP “Lighting Heat Gain Distribution in Buildings” by Daniel E. Fisher
and Chanvit Chantrasrisalai.

Table 1.28: Approximate values of Return Air Fraction, Frac-

tion Radiant and Fraction Visible for overhead fluorescent
lighting for different luminaire configurations.

Fixture No. Luminaire Feature Return Air Fraction Fraction fconvected

Fraction Radiant Visible

1 Recessed, Parabolic 0.31 0.22 0.20 0.27

Louver, Non-Vented,
T8
2 Recessed, Acrylic Lens, 0.56 0.12 0.20 0.12
Non-Vented, T8
3 Recessed, Parabolic 0.28 0.19 0.20 0.33
Louver, Vented, T8
4 Recessed, Acrylic Lens, 0.54 0.10 0.18 0.18
Vented, T8
5 Recessed, 0.34 0.17 0.16 0.33
Direct/Indirect, T8
6 Recessed, Volumetric, 0.54 0.13 0.20 0.13
T5
7 Downlights, Compact 0.86 0.04 0.10 0.00
Fluorescent, DTT
8 Downlights, Compact 0.78 0.09 0.13 0.00
Fluorescent, TRT
9a Downlights, 0.29 0.10 0.6 0.01
Incandescent, A21
9b Downlights, 0.21 0.08 0.71 0.00
Incandescent, BR40
10 Surface Mounted, 0.00 0.27 0.23 0.50
T5HO
11 Pendant, 0.00 0.32 0.23 0.45
Direct/Indirect, T8
12 Pendant, Indirect, 0.00 0.32 0.25 0.43
T5HO
538 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.28: Approximate values of Return Air Fraction, Frac-

tion Radiant and Fraction Visible for overhead fluorescent
lighting for different luminaire configurations.

Fixture No. Luminaire Feature Return Air Fraction Fraction fconvected

Fraction Radiant Visible

1 Recessed, Parabolic 0.27 0.27 0.21 0.25

Louver, Non-Vented,
T8 - Ducted
5 Recessed, 0.27 0.22 0.17 0.34
Direct/Indirect, T8 -
Ducted

1 Recessed, Parabolic 0.45 0.30 0.22 0.03

Louver, Non-Vented,
T8 - Half Typical
Supply Airflow Rate
3 Recessed, Parabolic 0.43 0.25 0.21 0.11
Louver, Vented, T8 -
Half Typical Supply
Airflow Rate
5 Recessed, 0.43 0.27 0.18 0.12
Direct/Indirect, T8 -
Half Typical Supply
Airflow Rate

1 Recessed, Parabolic 0.10 0.16 0.20 0.54

Louver, Non-Vented,
T8 - Half Typical
Supply Airflow Rate
3 Recessed, Parabolic 0.11 0.15 0.19 0.55
Louver, Vented, T8 -
Half Typical Supply
Airflow Rate
5 Recessed, 0.04 0.13 0.16 0.67
Direct/Indirect, T8 -
Half Typical Supply
Airflow Rate

1.14.5.1.12 Field: Fraction Replaceable

This field defines the daylighting control for the LIGHTS object.
If Daylighting:Controls is specified for the space or zone, this field is used as an on/off flag for
dimming controls. If set to 0.0, the lights are not dimmed by the daylighting controls. If set to 1.0,
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 539

the lights are allowed to be dimmed by the applicable daylighting control. If daylighting controls
are operating in the space or zone, all of the applicable Lights objects with a Fraction Replaceable
greater than zero will be reduced by a multiplicative factor that accounts for how much the electric
lighting is lowered due to daylighting (ref. Daylighting Lighting Power Multiplier).

1.14.5.1.13 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Task Lights”, “Hall Lights”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the lights
will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize
the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and the LEED EAp2-4/5. Performance
Rating Method Compliance table.

1.14.5.1.14 Field: Return Air Fraction Calculated from Plenum Temperature

Accepts values Yes or No (the default). Yes is for advanced used only. In this case the program will
calculate the return air fraction by assuming that it is due to conduction of some of the light heat
into the zone’s return air plenum and that the amount of the conduction depends on the plenum air
temperature. A Yes value should only be used for luminaires that are recessed and non-vented, as
shown in Figure 1.71.
The value you enter for the Return Air Fraction field will be ignored and you can enter, for fluorescent
lighting, Fraction Radiant = 0.37 and Fraction Visible = 0.18, as indicated in Table 1.28.
This feature requires that the coefficients described below be determined from measurements or
detailed calculations since they are very sensitive to the luminaire type, lamp type, thermal resistance
between fixture and plenum, etc.
If “Return Air Fraction Is Calculated from Plenum Temperature” = Yes, the return air fraction is
calculated each timestep from the following empirical correlation:

(ReturnAirFraction)calculated = C1 − C2 × Tplenum (1.24)

where Tplenum is the previous-time-step value of the return plenum air temperature (C),
and C1 and C2 are the values of the coefficients entered in the next two fields.
To compensate for the change in the return air fraction relative to its input value, the program
modifies Fraction Radiant and fconvected by a scale factor such that

(ReturnAirFraction)calculated +(FractionRadiant)modified +(fconvected )modified +(FractionVisible)input = 1.0

(1.25)
It is assumed that Fraction Visible is a constant equal to its input value.

1.14.5.1.15 Field: Return Air Fraction Function of Plenum Temperature Coeffi-

cient 1
The coefficient C1 in the equation for (Return Air Fraction)calculated .
540 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.5.1.16 Field: Return Air Fraction Function of Plenum Temperature Coeffi-

cient 2
The coefficient C2 in the equation for (Return Air Fraction)calculated . Its units are 1/O C.

1.14.5.1.17 Field: Return Air Heat Gain Node Name

Name of the return air node for this heat gain. If left blank, it defaults to the first return air node
for the zone containing this Lights object. Leave blank when using a ZoneList name.

1.14.5.1.18 Field:Exhaust Air Heat Gain Node Name

Name of the exhaust air node for this heat gain. If left blank, no heat gain from retun air fraction
will be added to the zone exhast node. When the exhaust node name is entered, the return air heat
gain will be shared by both return and exhast nodes. The equipment can draw air from the exhaust
node, but the inlet air properties is combined properties with mixing mass flow rates of both nodes
and added lights heat gain.

Figure 1.71: Vertical section through a zone and its return air plenum showing recessed lighting (not
to scale). The heat from lights is divided into four fractions, three of which — ReturnAirFraction,
FractionRadiant and FractionConvected — depend on plenum air temperature.

An IDF example:
Lights ,
RIGHT FORK Lights 1, !- Name
RIGHT FORK , !- Zone Name
Office Lighting , !- SCHEDULE Name
LightingLevel , !- Design Level calculation method
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 541

1039.706 , !- Lighting Level {W}

0.0000000E+00, !- Return Air Fraction
0.4000000 , !- Fraction Radiant
0.2000000 , !- Fraction Visible
1.0, !- Fraction Replaceable
GeneralLights; !- End -Use Subcategory

Global Lights Object:

ZoneList ,AllOccupiedZones ,SPACE1 -1,SPACE2 -1,SPACE3 -1,SPACE4 -1,SPACE5 -1;

Lights ,
AllZones with Lights , !- Name
AllOccupiedZones , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
LIGHTS -1, !- Schedule Name
Watts/Area , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Lighting Level {W}
16, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Watts per Person {W/person}
0.2, !- Return Air Fraction
0.59, !- Fraction Radiant
0.2, !- Fraction Visible
0, !- Fraction Replaceable
GeneralLights; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.14.5.2 Outputs

Lights objects have output variables for individual objects and for space and zone totals.
A related output is Daylighting Lighting Power Multiplier.

– Zone,Average,Lights Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Lights Radiant Heat Gain [J]
– Zone,Average,Lights Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Lights Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Lights Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Lights Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Lights Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Lights Return Air Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Lights Return Air Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Lights Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Lights Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Lights Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Lights Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space Lights Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space Lights Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Lights Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Lights Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Lights Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]
542 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Sum,Space Lights Convective Heating Energy [J]

– Zone,Average,Space Lights Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Lights Return Air Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Lights Return Air Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Lights Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Lights Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Lights Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Lights Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Lights Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Lights Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Lights Return Air Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Return Air Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Lights Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Lights Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Lights Electricity Energy [J]

1.14.5.2.1 Lights Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.2 Lights Radiant Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from lights that is in the form of long-wave (thermal) radiation entering the
zone. This heat is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according to an area times long-wave
absorptance weighting scheme.

1.14.5.2.3 Lights Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.4 Lights Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from lights that is in the form of visible (short-wave) radiation entering the
zone. This heat is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according to an area times short-wave
absorptance weighting scheme.

1.14.5.2.5 Lights Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.6 Lights Convective Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from lights that is convected to the zone air.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 543

1.14.5.2.7 Lights Return Air Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.8 Lights Return Air Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from lights that goes into the zone’s return air (and, therefore, does not
directly contribute to the zone load). If the zone has no return air system or the zone’s air system
is off, this heat will be added to the zone air.

1.14.5.2.9 Lights Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.10 Lights Total Heating Energy [J]

The total heat gain from lights. It is the sum of the following four outputs, i.e., Total Heat Gain
= Return Air Heat Gain + Radiant Heat Gain + Visible Heat Gain + Convective Heat Gain. It is
also equal to the electrical input to the lights.

1.14.5.2.11 Lights Electricity Rate [W]

The electric power input for the lights.

1.14.5.2.12 Lights Electricity Energy [J]

The lighting electrical consumption including ballasts, if present. This will have the same value as
Lights Total Heating Energy (above). The energy amount is also included in the following Electricity
meters:
Electricity:Facility
Electricity:Building
Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorLights:Electricity
InteriorLights:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorLights:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorLights:Electricity
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorLights:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorLights:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.5.2.13 Space or Zone Lights Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.14 Space or Zone Lights Radiant Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from all lights in the space or zone that is in the form of long-wave (thermal)
radiation entering the space or zone. This heat is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the space or
zone according to an area times long-wave absorptance weighting scheme.

1.14.5.2.15 Space or Zone Lights Visible Radiation Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.16 Space or Zone Lights Visible Radiation Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from all lights in the space or zone that is in the form of visible (short-wave)
radiation entering the space or zone. This heat is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the space or
zone according to an area times short-wave absorptance weighting scheme.
544 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.5.2.17 Space or Zone Lights Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.18 Space or Zone Lights Convective Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from all lights in the space or zone that is convected to the space or zone
air.

1.14.5.2.19 Space or Zone Lights Return Air Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.20 Space or Zone Lights Return Air Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from all lights in the space or zone that goes into the space or zone’s return
air (and, therefore, does not directly contribute to the space or zone load). If the space or zone has
no return air system or the space or zone’s air system is off, this heat will be added to the space or
zone air.

1.14.5.2.21 Space or Zone Lights Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.22 Space or Zone Lights Total Heating Energy [J]

The total heat gain from all lights in the space or zone. It is the sum of the following four outputs, i.e.,
Total Heat Gain = Return Air Heat Gain + Radiant Heat Gain + Visible Heat Gain + Convective
Heat Gain. It is also equal to the electrical input to the lights.

1.14.5.2.23 Space or Zone Lights Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.5.2.24 Space or Zone Lights Electricity Energy [J]

The electric power input for all lights in the space or zone. This will have the same value as Zone
Lights Total Heating Rate or Energy (above).

1.14.6 ElectricEquipment
The object models equipment in the zone which consumes electricity, such as computers, televisions,
and cooking equipment, also known as “plug loads.” All of the energy consumed by the equipment
becomes a heat gain in the zone or is lost (exhausted) as specified below.

1.14.6.1 Inputs

1.14.6.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ElectricEquipment object.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 545

1.14.6.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this ElectricEquipment object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the
building. The Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the watts/area and
watts/person options of the Design Level Calculation Method to place a varying equipment load at
the same density in each zone or space. The names of the actual electric equipment objects may
be concatenated as <Space Name> <ElectricEquipment Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable
Zone(s) or Space(s) for more details.

1.14.6.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that modifies the design level parameter for electric equipment
(see Design Level Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). The schedule values can
be any positive number. The actual electrical input for equipment in a zone as defined by this
statement is the product of the design level field and the value of the schedule specified by name in
this field.

1.14.6.1.4 Field: Design Level Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal electric equipment level in the Zone. The key/choices are:

– EquipmentLevel

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the electric equipment level (Watts)
for the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)

– Watts/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Watts per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Watts/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The
Watts per Person field should be filled).

1.14.6.1.5 Field: Design Level

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum electrical input to equipment in a
zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is slightly
more flexible in that the electric equipment design level could be a “diversity factor” applied to a
schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design
level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.14.6.1.6 Field: Watts per Zone Floor Area

This factor (watts/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum equipment level
as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field should be “Watts/Area”.
546 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.6.1.7 Field: Watts per Person

This factor (watts/person) is used, along with the number of occupants (people) to determine the
maximum equipment level as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field
should be “Watts/Person”.

1.14.6.1.8 Heat Gains from Electric Equipment:

The electrical input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In
EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input
fields Fraction Latent, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Lost. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the
heat from electric equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as:

fconvected = 1.0 − (FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost) (1.26)

You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.

1.14.6.1.9 Field: Fraction Latent

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent
heat given off by electric equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied
by the total energy consumed by electric equipment to give the amount of latent energy produced
by the electric equipment. This energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.

1.14.6.1.10 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of long-
wave radiant heat being given off by electric equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field
will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment to give the amount of long
wavelength radiation gain from electric equipment in a zone.

1.14.6.1.11 Field: Fraction Lost

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of “lost”
heat being given off by electric equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be
multiplied by the total energy consumed by electric equipment to give the amount of heat which is
“lost” and does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to electrical energy
converted to mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.

1.14.6.1.12 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Computers”, “Copy Machines”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment
will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the
end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5.
Performance Rating Method Compliance.
An IDF example:
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 547

ElectricEquipment ,
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS ElecEq 1, !- Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone Name
Residence Equipment , !- SCHEDULE Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level calculation method
9210.921 , !- Design Level {W}
, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {watts/m2}
, !- Watts per Person {watts/person}
0.0000000E+00, !- Fraction Latent
0.3000000 , !- Fraction Radiant
0.0000000E+00, !- Fraction Lost
Computers; !- End -use Subcategory

Global ElectricEquipment example:

ZoneList ,AllOccupiedZones ,SPACE1 -1,SPACE2 -1,SPACE3 -1,SPACE4 -1,SPACE5 -1;

ElectricEquipment ,
AllZones with Electric Equipment , !- Name
AllOccupiedZones , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
EQUIP -1, !- Schedule Name
Watts/Person , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Design Level {W}
, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
96, !- Watts per Person {W/person}
0, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0; !- Fraction Lost

1.14.7 GasEquipment
The object models equipment in the zone which consumes natural gas, such as cooking equipment
or a gas fireplace. All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a heat gain in the zone or
is lost (exhausted) as specified below.

1.14.7.1 Inputs

1.14.7.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the GasEquipment object.

1.14.7.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this GasEquipment object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the building.
The Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the watts/area and watts/person
options of the Design Level Calculation Method to place a varying equipment load at the same
density in each zone or space. The names of the actual gas equipment objects may be concatenated
as <Space Name> <GasEquipment Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s)
for more details.

1.14.7.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that modifies the design level parameter for gas equipment
(see Design Level Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). The schedule values can
be any positive number. The actual energy input for gas equipment in a zone as defined by this
statement is the product of the design level field and the value of the schedule specified by name in
this field.
548 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.7.1.4 Field: Design Level Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal gas equipment level in the Zone. The key/choices are:

– EquipmentLevel

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the gas equipment level (Watts) for
the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)

– Watts/Area or Power/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Watts/Person or Power/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The
Power per Person field should be filled).

1.14.7.1.5 Field: Design Level

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum energy input to gas equipment
in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is
slightly more flexible in that the gas equipment design level could be a “diversity factor” applied
to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the
design level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.14.7.1.6 Field: Power per Zone Floor Area

This factor (watts/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum equipment level
as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field should be “Watts/Area”
or “Power/Area”.

1.14.7.1.7 Field: Power per Person

This factor (watts/person) is used, along with the number of occupants (people) to determine the
maximum equipment level as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field
should be “Watts/Person” or “Power/Person”.

1.14.7.1.8 Heat Gains from Gas Equipment:

The fuel input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In
EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input
fields Fraction Latent, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Lost. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the
heat from gas equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as:

fconvected = 1.0 − (FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost) (1.27)

You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 549

1.14.7.1.9 Field: Fraction Latent

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent
heat given off by gas equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by
the total energy consumed by gas equipment to give the amount of latent energy produced by the
gas equipment. This energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.

1.14.7.1.10 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of long-
wave radiant heat being given off by gas equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will
be multiplied by the total energy consumed by gas equipment to give the amount of long wavelength
radiation gain from gas equipment in a zone.

1.14.7.1.11 Field: Fraction Lost

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of “lost”
heat being given off by gas equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied
by the total energy consumed by gas equipment to give the amount of heat which is “lost” and
does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to input energy converted to
mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.

1.14.7.1.12 Field: Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate

This numeric input field specifies carbon dioxide generation rate with units of m3/s-W. The default
value of 0.0 assumes the equipment is fully vented to outdoors. In the absence of better information,
the user might consider using a value of 3.45E-8 m3/s-W which assumes the equipment is not vented
to outdoors. This value is converted from natural gas CO2 emission rate at 11.7 lbs CO2 per therm.
The CO2 emission rate is provided by U.S. Energy Information Administration, “Frequently Asked
Questions - Environment, Questions About Environmental Emissions”, http://tonto.eia.doe.gov/
ask/environment_faqs.asp#CO2_quantity, January 2010. The maximum value for this input field
is 3.45E-7 m3/s-W.

1.14.7.1.13 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Cooking”, “Clothes Drying”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment
will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the
end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5
Performance Rating Method Compliance.
An IDF example:
GasEquipment ,
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS GasEq 1, !- Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
Gas Eq Sch , !-Schedule Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level Calculation Method
29287.51 , !- Design Level {W}
, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Power per Person {W/Person}
0, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0, !- Fraction Lost
550 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0, !- Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate {m3/s-W}

Cooking; !- End -Use Subcategory

Global Gas Equipment example:

ZoneList ,OfficeZones ,Left Fork , Middle Fork , Right Fork;

GasEquipment ,
Office Zones with Gas , !- Name
OfficeZones , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
Gas Eq Sch , !- Schedule Name
Watts/Area , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Design Level {W}
197, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Power per Person {W/Person}
0.0000000E+00, !- Fraction Latent
0.3000000 , !- Fraction Radiant
0.0000000E+00; !- Fraction Lost

1.14.8 HotWaterEquipment

The object models hot water equipment in the zone which consumes district heating, such as cooking
equipment or process loads. All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a heat gain in the
zone or is lost (exhausted) as specified below. This object consumes district heating energy directly
and does not cause a load on a hot water plant loop or water heater. For domestic hot water uses,
such as sinks and showers, see WaterUse:Equipment.

1.14.8.1 Inputs

1.14.8.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the HotWaterEquipment object.

1.14.8.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this HotWaterEquipment object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the
building. The Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the watts/area and
watts/person options of the Design Level Calculation Method to place a varying equipment load at
the same density in each zone or space. The names of the actual hot water equipment objects may be
concatenated as <Space Name> <HotWaterEquipment Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable
Zone(s) or Space(s) for more details.

1.14.8.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that modifies the design level parameter for hot water equipment
(see Design Level Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). The schedule values can
be any positive number. The actual energy input for hot water equipment in a zone as defined by
this statement is the product of the design level field and the value of the schedule specified by name
in this field.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 551

1.14.8.1.4 Field: Design Level Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal hot water equipment level in the Zone. The key/choices are:

– EquipmentLevel

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the hot water equipment level
(Watts) for the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)

– Watts/Area or Power/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Watts/Person or Power/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The
Power per Person field should be filled).

1.14.8.1.5 Field: Design Level

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum energy input to hot water equipment
in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is
slightly more flexible in that the hot water equipment design level could be a “diversity factor”
applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to
hour, the design level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.14.8.1.6 Field: Power per Zone Floor Area

This factor (watts/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum equipment level
as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field should be “Watts/Area”
or “Power/Area”.

1.14.8.1.7 Field: Power per Person

This factor (watts/person) is used, along with the number of occupants (people) to determine the
maximum equipment level as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field
should be “Watts/Person” or “Power/Person”.

1.14.8.1.8 Heat Gains from Hot Water Equipment:

The fuel input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In
EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input
fields Fraction Latent, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Lost. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the
heat from hot water equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as:

fconvected = 1.0 − (FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost) (1.28)

You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.
552 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.8.1.9 Field: Fraction Latent

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent
heat given off by hot water equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied
by the total energy consumed by hot water equipment to give the amount of latent energy produced
by the hot water equipment. This energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.

1.14.8.1.10 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of long-
wave radiant heat being given off by hot water equipment in a zone. The number specified in this
field will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by hot water equipment to give the amount of
long wavelength radiation gain from hot water equipment in a zone.

1.14.8.1.11 Field: Fraction Lost

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of “lost”
heat being given off by hot water equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be
multiplied by the total energy consumed by hot water equipment to give the amount of heat which
is “lost” and does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to input energy
converted to mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.

1.14.8.1.12 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Cooking”, “Clothes Drying”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter obejct).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment
will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the
end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5
Performance Rating Method Compliance.
IDF Examples:
HotWaterEquipment ,
SPACE2 -1 HWEq 1, !- Name
SPACE2 -1, !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
EQUIP -1, !- SCHEDULE Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level calculation method
300, !- Design Level {W}
, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {watts/m2}
, !- Power per Person {watts/person}
0.2, !- Fraction Latent
0.1, !- Fraction Radiant
0.5, !- Fraction Lost
Dishwashing; !- End -Use Subcategory

Global Hot Water Equipment example:

ZoneList ,OfficeZones ,Left Fork , Middle Fork , Right Fork;

HotWaterEquipment ,
Office Zones with HoWater Equipment ,!- Name
OfficeZones , !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
HotWater Eq Sch , !- Schedule Name
Watts/Area , !- Design Level Calculation Method
, !- Design Level {W}
50, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Power per Person {W/Person}
0.0000000E+00, !- Fraction Latent
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 553

0.3000000 , !- Fraction Radiant

0.0000000E+00; !- Fraction Lost

1.14.9 SteamEquipment
The object models steam equipment in the zone which consumes district heating, such as cooking
equipment or process loads. All of the energy consumed by the equipment becomes a heat gain
in the zone or is lost (exhausted) as specified below. This object consumes district heating energy
directly and does not cause a load on a steam plant loop.

1.14.9.1 Inputs

1.14.9.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the SteamEquipment object.

1.14.9.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this SteamEquipment object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the building.
The Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the watts/area and watts/person
options of the Design Level Calculation Method to place a varying equipment load at the same density
in each zone or space. The names of the actual steam equipment objects may be concatenated as
<Space Name> <SteamEquipment Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s)
for more details.

1.14.9.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that modifies the design level parameter for steam equipment
(see Design Level Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). The schedule values can
be any positive number. The actual energy input for steam equipment in a zone as defined by this
statement is the product of the design level field and the value of the schedule specified by name in
this field.

1.14.9.1.4 Field: Design Level Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal steam equipment level in the Zone. The key/choices are:

– EquipmentLevel

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the steam equipment level (Watts)
for the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)

– Watts/Area or Power/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Watts/Person or Power/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The
Power per Person field should be filled).
554 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.9.1.5 Field: Design Level

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum energy input to steam equipment
in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is
slightly more flexible in that the steam equipment design level could be a “diversity factor” applied
to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the
design level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.14.9.1.6 Field: Power per Zone Floor Area

This factor (watts/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum equipment level
as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field should be “Watts/Area”
or “Power/Area”.

1.14.9.1.7 Field: Power per Person

This factor (watts/person) is used, along with the number of occupants (people) to determine the
maximum equipment level as described in the Design Level field. The choice from the method field
should be “Watts/Person” or “Power/Person”.

1.14.9.1.8 Heat Gains from Steam Equipment:

The fuel input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In
EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input
fields Fraction Latent, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Lost. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the
heat from steam equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as:

fconvected = 1.0 − (FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost) (1.29)

You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.

1.14.9.1.9 Field: Fraction Latent

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent
heat given off by steam equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied
by the total energy consumed by steam equipment to give the amount of latent energy produced by
the steam equipment. This energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.

1.14.9.1.10 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of long-
wave radiant heat being given off by steam equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field
will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by steam equipment to give the amount of long
wavelength radiation gain from steam equipment in a zone.

1.14.9.1.11 Field: Fraction Lost

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of “lost”
heat being given off by steam equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be
multiplied by the total energy consumed by steam equipment to give the amount of heat which
is “lost” and does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to input energy
converted to mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 555

1.14.9.1.12 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Cooking”, “Clothes Drying”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment
will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the
end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5
Performance Rating Method Compliance.
IDF Examples:

SteamEquipment ,
SPACE4 -1 ElecEq 1, !- Name
SPACE4 -1, !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
EQUIP -1, !- SCHEDULE Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level calculation method
1050, !- Design Level {W}
, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {watts/m2}
, !- Power per Person {watts/person}
0.5, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0, !- Fraction Lost
Laundry; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.14.10 OtherEquipment
Other Equipment object is provided as an additional source for heat gains or losses directly to the
zone with a fuel type that is configurable. If a fuel type is specified, the energy is attributed to the
appropriate end use. Otherwise, a loss can be entered by putting a negative value into the Design
Level field and this object will not have an end-use component – gains or losses do not show up in
the bottom energy lines (except as influencing overall zone gains or losses).

1.14.10.1 Inputs

1.14.10.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the OtherEquipment object.

1.14.10.1.2 Field: Fuel Type

This field designates the appropriate meter for the equipment. Valid fuel types are: None, Electric-
ity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Diesel, Gasoline, Coal, Steam, DistrictHeating,
DistrictCooling, OtherFuel1 and OtherFuel2. The fuel type triggers the application of consumption
amounts to the appropriate energy meters. If the None fuel type is selected (the default if left blank),
no end uses will be associated with the object, only the zone gains.

1.14.10.1.3 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this OtherEquipment object to one or more thermal zones or spaces in the building.
The Zone, Zonelist or SpaceList options can be used effectively with the watts/area and watts/person
options of the Design Level Calculation Method to place a varying equipment load at the same density
in each zone or space. The names of the actual other equipment objects may be concatenated as
<Space Name> <OtherEquipment Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s)
for more details.
556 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.10.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that modifies the design level parameter for other equipment
(see Design Level Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). The schedule values can
be any positive number. The actual energy input for other equipment in a zone as defined by this
statement is the product of the design level field and the value of the schedule specified by name in
this field.

1.14.10.1.5 Field: Design Level Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next three fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal other equipment level in the Zone. The key/choices are:

– EquipmentLevel

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the other equipment level (Watts)
for the Zone. (The Design Level field should be filled.)

– Watts/Area or Power/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Power per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Watts/Person or Power/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor of equipment level (watts) per person. (The
Power per Person field should be filled).

1.14.10.1.6 Field: Design Level

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum energy input to other equipment
in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is
slightly more flexible in that the other equipment design level could be a “diversity factor” applied
to a schedule of real numbers. This value can be negative to denote a loss if the None fuel type is
selected, otherwise this must be positive. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to
hour, the design level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.14.10.1.7 Field: Power per Zone Floor Area

This factor (watts/m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum equipment
level as described in the Design Level field. This value can be negative to denote a loss if the None
fuel type is selected, otherwise this must be positive. The choice from the method field should be
“Watts/Area” or “Power/Area”.

1.14.10.1.8 Field: Power per Person

This factor (watts/person) is used, along with the number of occupants (people) to determine the
maximum equipment level as described in the Design Level field. This value can be negative to
denote a loss if the None fuel type is selected, otherwise this must be positive. The choice from the
method field should be “Watts/Person” or “Power/Person”.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 557

1.14.10.1.9 Heat Gains/Losses from Other Equipment:

The fuel input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In
EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input
fields Fraction Latent, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Lost. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the
heat from other equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as:

fconvected = 1.0 − (FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost) (1.30)

You will get an error message if FractionLatent + FractionRadiant + FractionLost exceeds 1.0.

1.14.10.1.10 Field: Fraction Latent

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent
heat given off by other equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by
the total energy consumed by other equipment to give the amount of latent energy produced by the
other equipment. This energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.

1.14.10.1.11 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of long-
wave radiant heat being given off by other equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field
will be multiplied by the total energy consumed by other equipment to give the amount of long
wavelength radiation gain from other equipment in a zone.

1.14.10.1.12 Field: Fraction Lost

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of “lost”
heat being given off by other equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied
by the total energy consumed by other equipment to give the amount of heat which is “lost” and
does not impact the zone energy balances. This might correspond to input energy converted to
mechanical work or heat that is vented to the atmosphere.

1.14.10.1.13 Field: Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate

This numeric input field specifies carbon dioxide generation rate with units of m3/s-W. The default
value of 0.0 assumes the equipment is fully vented to outdoors. The maximum value for this input
field is 3.45E-7 m3/s-W.

1.14.10.1.14 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Cooking”, “Clothes Drying”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment
will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the
end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5
Performance Rating Method Compliance.
IDF Examples
558 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

OtherEquipment ,
BASE -1 OthEq 1, !- Name
Propane , !- Fuel Use Type
BASE -1, !- Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name
ALWAYSON , !- SCHEDULE Name
EquipmentLevel , !- Design Level calculation method
6766. , !- Design Level {W}
, !- Power per Zone Floor Area {watts/m2}
, !- Power per Person {watts/person}
0, !- Fraction Latent
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0, !- Fraction Lost
1.2E-7, !- Carbon Dioxide Generation Rate
SubCategory1; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.14.11 Internal Gain Equipment Outputs

Each type of equipment object has output variables for individual objects and for space and zone
totals.
Electric Equipment

– Zone,Average,Electric Equipment Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Electric Equipment Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Electric Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Electric Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Electric Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Electric Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Electric Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Electric Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Electric Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Electric Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Electric Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Electric Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space Electric Equipment Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Electric Equipment Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space Electric Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Electric Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Electric Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Electric Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Electric Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Electric Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Electric Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Electric Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Electric Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 559

– Zone,Average,Space Electric Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

– Zone,Average,Zone Electric Equipment Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Electric Equipment Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Electric Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Electric Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Electric Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Electric Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Electric Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Electric Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Electric Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Electric Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Electric Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Electric Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

Gas Equipment

– Zone,Average,Gas Equipment Gas Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Gas Equipment Gas Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Gas Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Gas Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Gas Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Gas Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Gas Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Gas Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Gas Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Gas Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Gas Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Gas Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space Gas Equipment Gas Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Gas Equipment Gas Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space Gas Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Gas Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Gas Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Gas Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Gas Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Gas Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Gas Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Gas Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
560 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Sum,Space Gas Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]

– Zone,Average,Space Gas Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone Gas Equipment Gas Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Gas Equipment Gas Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Gas Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Gas Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Gas Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Gas Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Gas Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Gas Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Gas Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Gas Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Gas Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Gas Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

HotWater Equipment

– Zone,Average,Hot Water Equipment District Heating Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Hot Water Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Hot Water Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Hot Water Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Hot Water Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Hot Water Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Hot Water Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Hot Water Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Hot Water Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Hot Water Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Hot Water Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Hot Water Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space Hot Water Equipment District Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Hot Water Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space Hot Water Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Hot Water Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Hot Water Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Hot Water Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Hot Water Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Hot Water Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Hot Water Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 561

– Zone,Average,Space Hot Water Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Space Hot Water Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Hot Water Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone Hot Water Equipment District Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Hot Water Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Hot Water Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Hot Water Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Hot Water Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Hot Water Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Hot Water Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Hot Water Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Hot Water Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Hot Water Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Hot Water Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Hot Water Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

Steam Equipment

– Zone,Average,Steam Equipment District Heating Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Steam Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Steam Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Steam Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Steam Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Steam Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Steam Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Steam Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Steam Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Steam Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Steam Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Steam Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space Steam Equipment District Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Steam Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space Steam Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Steam Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Steam Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Steam Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Steam Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Steam Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
562 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Sum,Space Steam Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]

– Zone,Average,Space Steam Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Steam Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Steam Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone Steam Equipment District Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Steam Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Steam Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Steam Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Steam Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Steam Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Steam Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Steam Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Steam Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Steam Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Steam Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Steam Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

Other Equipment

– Zone,Average,Other Equipment Fuel Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Other Equipment Fuel Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Other Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Other Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Other Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Other Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Other Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Other Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Other Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Other Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Other Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Other Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Other Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Other Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Other Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Other Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Other Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Other Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Other Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 563

– Zone,Average,Space Other Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Space Other Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Other Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Other Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Other Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Other Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Other Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Other Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Other Equipment Latent Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Other Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Other Equipment Lost Heat Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Other Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Other Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.1 Electric Equipment Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.2 Electric Equipment Electricity Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.3 Space or Zone Electric Equipment Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.4 Space or Zone Electric Equipment Electricity Energy [J]

The electric equipment electric power consumption in Watts (for power) or Joules (for energy). It
is the sum of the radiant, convective, latent and lost components. Electric Equipment Electricity
Energy is added to the following electricity meters:
Electricity:Facility
Electricity:Building
Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:Electricity
InteriorEquipment:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.11.0.5 Gas Equipment NaturalGas Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.6 Gas Equipment NaturalGas Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.7 Space or Zone Gas Equipment NaturalGas Rate [W]

564 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.11.0.8 Space or Zone Gas Equipment NaturalGas Energy [J]

The gas equipment natural gas consumption in Watts (for power) or Joules (for energy). It is the
sum of the radiant, convective, latent and lost components. Gas Equipment NaturalGas Energy is
added to the following NaturalGas meters:
NaturalGas:Facility
NaturalGas:Building
NaturalGas:Zone:<Zone Name >
NaturalGas:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:NaturalGas
InteriorEquipment:NaturalGas:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:NaturalGas:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:NaturalGas
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:NaturalGas:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:NaturalGas:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.11.0.9 Hot Water Equipment District Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.10 Hot Water Equipment District Heating Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.11 Space or Zone Hot Water Equipment District Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.12 Space or Zone Hot Water Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
The hot water equipment district heating consumption in Watts (for power) or Joules (for energy).
It is the sum of the radiant, convective, latent and lost components. Hot Water Equipment District
Heating Energy is added to the following district heating meters:.
DistrictHeating:Facility
DistrictHeating:Building
DistrictHeating:Zone:<Zone Name >
DistrictHeating:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating
InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.11.0.13 Steam Equipment District Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.14 Steam Equipment District Heating Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.15 Space or Zone Steam Equipment District Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.16 Space or Zone Steam Equipment District Heating Energy [J]

The steam equipment district heating consumption in Watts (for power) or Joules (for energy). It is
the sum of the radiant, convective, latent and lost components. Steam Equipment District Heating
Energy is added to the following :
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 565

DistrictHeating:Facility
DistrictHeating:Building
DistrictHeating:Zone:<Zone Name >
DistrictHeating:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating
InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:DistrictHeating:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.11.0.17 Other Equipment Fuel Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.18 Other Equipment Fuel Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.19 Space or Zone Other Equipment Fuel Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.20 Space or Zone Other Equipment Fuel Energy [J]

The other equipment fuel consumption in Watts (for power) or Joules (for energy). It is the sum of
the radiant, convective, latent and lost components. Other Equipment Fuel Energy is added to the
following fuel meters corresponding to the Fuel Type input. If Fuel Type = None, this energy is not
metered.
<Fuel Type >: Facility
<Fuel Type >: Building
<Fuel Type >: Zone:<Zone Name >
<Fuel Type >: SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:<Fuel Type >
InteriorEquipment:<Fuel Type >: Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:<Fuel Type >: SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:<Fuel Type >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:<Fuel Type >: Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:<Fuel Type >: SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.11.0.21 <Type> Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.22 <Type> Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.23 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.24 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Radiant Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from equipment that is in the form of long-wave (thermal) radiation entering
the zone. This heat is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the space or zone according to an area
times long-wave absorptance weighting scheme.

1.14.11.0.25 <Type> Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.26 <Type> Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]

566 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.11.0.27 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.28 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Convective Heating Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from equipment that is convected to the space or zone air.

1.14.11.0.29 <Type> Latent Gain Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.30 <Type> Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.31 Space or Zone <Type> Latent Gain Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.32 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Latent Gain Energy [J]

The amount of heat gain from equipment that goes added to the space or zone air as a latent
(moisture) gain.

1.14.11.0.33 <Type> Lost Heat Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.34 <Type> Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.35 Space or Zone <Type> Lost Heat Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.36 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Lost Heat Energy [J]

The amount of energy input to the equipment that is removed (exhausted) and does not add any
heat gain to the space or zone.

1.14.11.0.37 <Type> Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.38 <Type> Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]

1.14.11.0.39 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.11.0.40 Space or Zone <Type> Equipment Total Heating Energy [J]

The total heat gain from equipment. It is the sum of the following components: Total Heat Gain
= Radiant Heat Gain + Convective Heat Gain + Latent Heat Gain. It is also equal to the power
input to the equipment minus any Lost Heat.

1.14.12 ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled
This object describes air-cooled electric information technology equipment (ITE) which has variable
power consumption as a function of loading and temperature.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 567

1.14.12.1 Inputs

1.14.12.1.1 Field: Name

The name of this object.

1.14.12.1.2 Field: Zone or Space Name

This field applies this ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled object to a thermal zones or space in the
building. If a Zone Name is specified and the zone contains more than one Space, the names of the
actual IT equipment objects will be concatenated as <Space Name> <ITEquipment Object Name>.
See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s) for more details.

1.14.12.1.3 Field: Air Flow Calculation Method

This field specifies the method used to calculate the IT inlet temperature and zone return air tem-
perature.
If FlowFromSystem is chosen, the zone is assumed to be well-mixed.
If FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures is chosen, Supply and Return approach tempera-
ture should be defined to indicate the temperature difference due to the air distribution.The inputs of
Air Inlet Connection Type, Design Recirculation Fraction and Recirculation Function of Loading and
Supply Temperature Curve Name are ignored. For multiple ITE objects defined for one zone, the
same calculation method should apply. The FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures only
applies to ITE zones with single duct VAV terminal unit. Other return air heat gains from window
or lights are not allowed when FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures is chosen.
The default method is FlowFromSystem.

1.14.12.1.4 Field: Design Power Input Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next two fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the nominal electric power input to the ITE. The key/choices are:
Watts/Unit
With this choice, the design power input will be the product of Design Level per Unit and Number
of Units. (Both of these fields should be filled.) This is the default.
Watts/Area
With this choice, the design power input will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Watts per
Zone Floor Area field should be filled).

1.14.12.1.5 Field: Watts per Unit

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the design electrical power input to the ITE when
fully loaded and the entering air temperatures is at the specified design value. This field is used if
the choice from the method field is “EquipmentLevel”.

1.14.12.1.6 Field: Number of Units

This field is multiplied times the Design Level per Unit to determine the design electrical power input
to this ITE object when fully loaded and the entering air temperature is at the specified design value.
This field is used if the choice from the method field is “EquipmentLevel”. The default is 1.
568 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.12.1.7 Field: Watts per Zone Floor Area

This factor (Watts/m2) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the design electrical power
input as described in the Design Level field above. This field is used if the choice from the method
field is “Watts/Area”.

1.14.12.1.8 Field: Design Power Input Schedule Name

This field is the name of the operating schedule that modifies the design level power input for
this equipment This schedule specifies the fraction (typically 0.0 to 1.0) of this equipment which is
available (powered up), regardless of CPU utilization. If this field is blank, the schedule is assumed
to always be 1.0.

1.14.12.1.9 Field: CPU Loading Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that specifies the CPU loading for this equipment as a fraction
from 0.0 (idle) to 1.0 (full load). If this field is blank, the schedule is assumed to always be 1.0.

1.14.12.1.10 Field: CPU Power Input Function of Loading and Air Temperature
Curve Name
The name of a two-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the CPU power input as a
function of CPU loading (x) and air inlet node temperature (y). This curve (table) should equal 1.0
at design conditions (CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).

1.14.12.1.11 Field: Design Fan Power Input Fraction

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to specify the fraction of the total
power input at design conditions which is for the cooling fan(s). If fan power data is not available,
set this fraction to 0.0. The default is 0.0.

1.14.12.1.12 Field: Design Fan Air Flow Rate per Power Input
Specifies the cooling fan air flow rate in m3/s per Watt of total electric power input at design
conditions (CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).
This is normalized by power input to allow the design power input to be changed without needing
to change this value.

1.14.12.1.13 Field: Air Flow Function of Loading and Air Temperature Curve
Name
The name of a two-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the cooling air flow rate as
a function of CPU loading (x) and air inlet node temperature (y). This curve (table) should equal
1.0 at design conditions (CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).

1.14.12.1.14 Field: Fan Power Input Function of Flow Curve Name

The name of a single-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the fan power input as a
function of airflow fraction (x). This curve (table) should equal 1.0 at the design air flow rate (flow
fraction = 1.0).
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 569

1.14.12.1.15 Field: Design Entering Air Temperature

Specifies the entering air temperature in deg. C at design conditions. The default is 15C.

1.14.12.1.16 Field: Environmental Class

Specifies the allowable operating conditions for the air inlet conditions. The available inputs are A1,
A2, A3, A4, B, C, or None. This is used to report the “ITE Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded
Time” If None is specified (the default), then no reporting of time outside allowable conditions will
be done.

1.14.12.1.17 Field: Air Inlet Connection Type

Specifies the type of connection between the zone and the ITE air inlet node. The choices are:
AdjustedSupply = This option is used to apply a recirculation adjustment to the ITE inlet conditions.
If this option is specified, then the Supply Air Node Name is required and the air inlet temperature
to the ITE will be the current supply air node temperature adjusted by the current recirculation
fraction. All heat output is added to the zone air heat balance as a convective gain. AdjustedSupply
is the default.
ZoneAirNode = This option is used if there is no containment and the ITE air inlet node is at the
average zone condition. All heat output is added to the zone air heat balance as a convective gain.
RoomAirModel = This option connects the ITE air inlet and outlet nodes to a room air model (Ref.
RoomAirModelType and RoomAir:Node). Currently in EnergyPlus, this option has not been fully
implemented. If the user chooses this option, the program will issue a warning message and this
field will be adjusted to ZoneAirNode.
This field is only used when Air Flow Calculation Method is FlowFromSystem.

1.14.12.1.18 Field: Air Inlet Room Air Model Node Name

Specifies the name of a room air model node (ref. RoomAir:Node) which is the air inlet to this
equipment. This field is required if the Air Node Connection Type = RoomAirModel.

1.14.12.1.19 Field: Air Outlet Room Air Model Node Name

Specifies the node name of a room air model node (ref. RoomAir:Node) which is the air outlet from
this equipment. This field is required if the Air Node Connection Type = RoomAirModel.

1.14.12.1.20 Field: Supply Air Node Name

Specifies the node name of the supply air inlet node service this ITE. If the Air Node Connection
Type = AdjustedSupply ,then this field is required, and the conditions at this node will be used to
determine the ITE air inlet conditions. This field is also required if reporting of the Supply Heat Index
is desired. Also required if Calculation Method = FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures.

1.14.12.1.21 Field: Design Recirculation Fraction

Specifies the recirculation fraction for this equipment at design conditions. This field is used only if
the Air Node Connection Type = AdjustedSupply. The recirculation fraction is defined as the ratio
of recirculated air flow to total air flow entering the ITE. Recirculation is dependent upon many
factors including rack and containment configuration. The default is 0.0 (no recirculation). This
field is only used when Air Flow Calculation Method = FlowFromSystem.
570 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.12.1.22 Field: Recirculation Function of Loading and Supply Temperature

Curve Name
The name of a two-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the Design Recirculation
Fraction as a function of CPU loading (x) and supply air node temperature (y). This curve (table)
should equal 1.0 at design conditions (CPU loading = 1.0 and Design Entering Air Temperature).
This field is used only if the Air Node Connection Type = AdjustedSupply. If this curve is left blank,
then the curve is assumed to always equal 1.0. This field is only used when Air Flow Calculation
Method = FlowFromSystem.

1.14.12.1.23 Field: Design Electric Power Supply Efficiency

This field is a decimal number used to specify the efficiency of the power supply system serving this
ITE. The default is 1.0.

1.14.12.1.24 Field: Electric Power Supply Efficiency Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
The name of a single-variable curve or table lookup object which modifies the electric power supply
efficiency as a function of part load ratio (x). This curve (table) should equal 1.0 at the design power
consumption (part load ratio = 1.0). If this curve is left blank, then the curve is assumed to always
equal 1.0.

1.14.12.1.25 Field: Fraction of Electric Power Supply Losses to Zone

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to specify the fraction of the electric
power supply losses which are a heat gain to the zone containing the ITE. If this value is less than
1.0, the remainder of the losses are assumed to be lost to the outdoors. The default is 1.0.

1.14.12.1.26 Field: CPU End-Use Subcategory

This equipment is metered on the Interior Equipment end-use category for Electricity. This field
allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory for the CPU power consumption. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter object). Any text
may be used here to categorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and
in the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance. The default is
ITE-CPU.

1.14.12.1.27 Field: Fan End-Use Subcategory

This equipment is metered on the Interior Equipment end-use category for Electricity. This field
allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory for the fan power consumption. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter object). Any text
may be used here to categorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and
in the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance. The default is
ITE-Fans

1.14.12.1.28 Field: Electric Power Supply End-Use Subcategory

This equipment is metered on the Interior Equipment end-use category for Electricity. This field
allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory for the electric power supply power con-
sumption. A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 571

object). Any text may be used here to categorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcat-
egory table and in the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance.
The default is ITE-UPS

1.14.12.1.29 Field: Supply Temperature Difference

The difference of the IT inlet temperature from the AHU supply air temperature (δTsupply =
Tin − Tsupply ). Either Supply Temperature Difference or Supply Temperature Difference Schedule is
required if Air Flow Calculation Method is set to FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures.
This field is ignored when Air Flow Calculation Method is FlowFromSystem.

1.14.12.1.30 Field: Supply Temperature Difference Schedule

The difference schedule of the IT inlet temperature from the AHU supply air temperature (δTsupply =
Tin − Tsupply ). Either Supply Temperature Difference or Supply Temperature Difference Schedule is
required if Air Flow Calculation Method is set to FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures.
This field is ignored when Air Flow Calculation Method is FlowFromSystem.

1.14.12.1.31 Field: Return Temperature Difference

The difference of the actual AHU return air temperature to the IT equipment outlet temperature
(δTreturn = Treturn −Tout ). Either Return Temperature Difference or Return Temperature Difference
Schedule is required if Air Flow Calculation Method is set to FlowControlWithApproachTem-
peratures. This field is ignored when Air Flow Calculation Method is FlowFromSystem.

1.14.12.1.32 Field: Return Temperature Difference Schedule

The difference schedule of the actual AHU return air temperature to the IT equipment outlet tem-
perature (δTreturn = Treturn − Tout ). Either Return Temperature Difference or Return Temperature
Difference Schedule is required if Air Flow Calculation Method is set to FlowControlWithAp-
proachTemperatures. This field is ignored when Air Flow Calculation Method is FlowFrom-
System.
An IDF example:

ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled ,
Data Center Servers , !- Name
Main Zone , !- Zone or Space Name
FlowFromSystem , !- Air Flow Calculation Method
Watts/Unit , !- Design Power Input Calculation Method
500, !- Watts per Unit {W}
200, !- Number of Units
, !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
Data Center Operation Schedule , !- Design Power Input Schedule Name
Data Center CPU Loading Schedule , !- CPU Loading Schedule Name
Model 5250 Power fLoadTemp , !- CPU Power Input Function of Loading and Air Temperature Curve
Name
0.4, !- Design Fan Power Input Fraction
0.0001 , !- Design Fan Air Flow Rate per Power Input {m3/s-W}
Model 5250 AifFlow fLoadTemp , !- Air Flow Function of Loading and Air Temperature Curve Name
ECM FanPower fFlow , !- Fan Power Input Function of Flow Curve Name
15, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
A3 , !- Environmental Class
AdjustedSupply , !- Air Inlet Connection Type
, !- Air Inlet Room Air Model Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Room Air Model Node Name
Main Zone Inlet Node , !- Supply Air Node Name
572 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.1, !- Design Recirculation Fraction

Data Center Recirculation fLoadTemp , !- Recirculation Function of Loading and Supply Temperature
Curve Name
0.9, !- Design Electric Power Supply Efficiency
UPS Efficiency fPLR , !- Electric Power Supply Efficiency Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
Name
1, !- Fraction of Electric Power Supply Losses to Zone
ITE -CPU , !- CPU End -Use Subcategory
ITE -Fans , !- Fan End -Use Subcategory
ITE -UPS; !- Electric Power Supply End -Use Subcategory

Another IDF example when Air Flow Calculation Method = FlowControlWithApproachTempera-

tures:
ElectricEquipment :ITE:AirCooled ,
SmallDataCenter ComputerRoom Elec Equip , !- Name
ComputerRoom ZN , !- Zone or Space Name
FlowControlWithApproachTemperatures , !- Air Flow Calculation Method
Watts/Area , !- Design Power Input Calculation Method
, !- Watts per Unit {W}
, !- Number of Units
430.556416668389 , !- Watts per Zone Floor Area {W/m2}
Data Center Operation Schedule , !- Design Power Input Schedule Name
DataCenter Equipment_SCH , !- CPU Loading Schedule Name
Data Center Servers Power fLoadTemp , !- CPU Power Input Function of Loading and Air
Temperature Curve Name
0.4, !- Design Fan Power Input Fraction
0.0001 , !- Design Fan Air Flow Rate per Power Input {m3/s-W}
Data Center Servers Airflow fLoadTemp , !- Air Flow Function of Loading and Air Temperature
Curve Name
ECM FanPower fFlow , !- Fan Power Input Function of Flow Curve Name
15, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
A3 , !- Environmental Class
AdjustedSupply , !- Air Inlet Connection Type
, !- Air Inlet Room Air Model Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Room Air Model Node Name
Node 6, !- Supply Air Node Name
0, !- Design Recirculation Fraction
Data Center Recirculation fLoadTemp , !- Recirculation Function of Loading and Supply
Temperature Curve Name
0.9, !- Design Electric Power Supply Efficiency
UPS Efficiency fPLR , !- Electric Power Supply Efficiency Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
Name
1, !- Fraction of Electric Power Supply Losses to Zone
ITE -CPU , !- CPU End -Use Subcategory
ITE -Fans , !- Fan End -Use Subcategory
ITE -UPS , !- Electric Power Supply End -Use Subcategory
3, !- field Supply Approach Temperature
, !- field Supply Approach Temperature Schedule
-3, !- field Return Approach Temperature
; !- field Return Approach Temperature Schedule

ElectricEquipment:ITE:AirCooled Outputs

– Zone,Average,ITE CPU Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Average,ITE Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,ITE UPS Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,ITE CPU Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
– Zone,Average,ITE Fan Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
– Zone,Average,ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,ITE CPU Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,ITE UPS Electricity Energy [J]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 573

– Zone,Sum,ITE CPU Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]

– Zone,Sum,ITE Fan Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
– Zone,Sum,ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,ITE Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Average,ITE Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity [%]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Outlet Dry-Bulb Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average,ITE Supply Heat Index []
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Difference Above Operating Range [deltaC]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Difference Below Operating Range [deltaC]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Difference Above Operating Range [deltaC]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Difference Below Operating Range [deltaC]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Difference Above Operating Range [%]
– Zone,Average,ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Difference Below Operating Range [%]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE CPU Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE UPS Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE CPU Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE Fan Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE CPU Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE UPS Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE CPU Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Fan Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– Zone,Average,Space ITE Average Supply Heat Index []
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Space ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time [hr]
574 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Adjusted Return Air Temperature [C]

– Zone,Average,Zone ITE CPU Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE UPS Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE CPU Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Fan Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE CPU Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE UPS Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE CPU Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Fan Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– Zone,Average,Zone ITE Average Supply Heat Index []
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time [hr]

1.14.12.1.33 Space or Zone ITE CPU Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.34 ITE CPU Electricity Rate [J]

1.14.12.1.35 Space or Zone ITE CPU Electricity Energy [J]

1.14.12.1.36 ITE CPU Electricity Energy [J]

The electric power (or energy) input to the ITE equipment CPU (total power input less cooling fan
power). The ITE CPU Electricity Energy output is also added to a meter object with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = InteriorEquipment, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter
object).

1.14.12.1.37 Space or Zone ITE CPU Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions
[W]

1.14.12.1.38 ITE CPU Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]

1.14.12.1.39 Space or Zone ITE CPU Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Condi-
tions [J]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 575

1.14.12.1.40 ITE CPU Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]

The electric power (or energy) input to the ITE equipment CPU (total power input less cooling
fan power) if the air inlet temperature were held at the design condition. May be used to calculate
“IT efficiency”, the ratio of (IT energy consumed in the facility) / (IT energy that would have been
consumed in the facility if the ITE were held at the reference temperature).

1.14.12.1.41 Space or Zone ITE Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.42 ITE Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.43 Space or Zone ITE Fan Electricity Energy [J]

1.14.12.1.44 ITE Fan Electricity Energy [J]

The electric power (or energy) input to the ITE cooling fan. The ITE Fan Electricity Energy output
is also added to a meter object with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = InteriorEquipment,
Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter object).

1.14.12.1.45 Space or Zone ITE Fan Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions
[W]

1.14.12.1.46 ITE Fan Electricity Rate at Design Inlet Conditions [W]

1.14.12.1.47 Space or Zone ITE Fan Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Condi-
tions [J]

1.14.12.1.48 ITE Fan Electricity Energy at Design Inlet Conditions [J]

The electric power (or energy) input to the ITE cooling fan if the air inlet temperature were held at
the design condition. May be used to calculate “IT efficiency”, the ratio of (IT energy consumed in
the facility) / (IT energy that would have been consumed in the facility if the ITE were held at the
reference temperature).

1.14.12.1.49 Space or Zone ITE UPS Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.50 ITE UPS Electricity Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.51 Space or Zone ITE UPS Electricity Energy [J]

1.14.12.1.52 ITE UPS Electricity Energy [J]

The net electric power (or energy) input to the ITE equipment UPS (total power input less power
delivered to ITE). The ITE UPS Electricity Energy output is also added to a meter object with
Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = InteriorEquipment, Group Key = Building (Ref.
Output:Meter object).
576 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.12.1.53 ITE Electricity Meters

The ITE CPU Electricity Energy, ITE Fan Electricity Energy, and ITE UPS Electricity Energy are
each included separately in the following Electricity meters, with their respective end-use subcate-
gory:
Electricity:Facility
Electricity:Building
Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:Electricity
InteriorEquipment:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.12.1.54 Space or Zone ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.55 ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.56 Space or Zone ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]

1.14.12.1.57 ITE UPS Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]

The heat gain rate (or energy) to the zone from the UPS.

1.14.12.1.58 Space or Zone ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.59 ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Rate [W]

1.14.12.1.60 Space or Zone ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]

1.14.12.1.61 ITE Total Heat Gain to Zone Energy [J]

The heat gain rate (or energy) to the zone from the UPS and from the CPU and fans if the ITE.
Air Inlet Connection Type is AdjustedSupply or ZoneAirNode. If RoomAirModel is selected, then
only the heat gain from the UPS is added directly to the zone air heat balance, the heat gain from
the CPU and fans will be added to the ITE air Outlet Room Air Model Node

1.14.12.1.62 Space or Zone ITE Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.14.12.1.63 ITE Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

Reports the average air volume flow rate through the ITE over the reporting interval. Standard
density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC dry bulb, dry air, and nominally adjusted for elevation.

1.14.12.1.64 Space or Zone ITE Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 577

1.14.12.1.65 ITE Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

Reports the average air volume flow rate through the ITE over the reporting interval, calculated
using the current density at the air inlet node.

1.14.12.1.66 Space or Zone ITE Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.14.12.1.67 ITE Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Reports the average air mass flow rate through the ITE over the reporting interval, calculated using
the current density at the air inlet node.

1.14.12.1.68 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature [C]

The dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE.

1.14.12.1.69 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature [C]

The dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE.

1.14.12.1.70 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity [%]

The dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE.

1.14.12.1.71 ITE Air Outlet Dry-Bulb Temperature [C]

The dry-bulb temperature of the air leaving the ITE.

1.14.12.1.72 Space or Zone ITE Average Supply Heat Index []

1.14.12.1.73 ITE Supply Heat Index []

The supply heat index (SHI) for this equipment. SHI is a dimensionless measure of recirculation
of hot air into the cold air intake of the ITE. SHI = (Tin – Tsupply)/(Tout-Tsupply) where Tin is
the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE, Tout is the dry-bulb temperature of the air
leaving the ITE, and Tsupply is the dry-bulb temperature at the Supply Air Node. If a Supply Air
Node Name is not specified for this object, then this output will not be reported.

1.14.12.1.74 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded Time
[hr]

1.14.12.1.75 ITE Air Inlet Operating Range Exceeded Time [hr]

Hours when the dry-bulb and/or dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is outside the
range specified by the ITE Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.76 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above
Operating Range Time [hr]
578 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.12.1.77 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Above Operating Range Time
[hr]
Hours when the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by
the ITE Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.78 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Difference Above Operating

Range [deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dry-bulb temperature and
the maximum allowable dry-bulb temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only
positive values are reported. When the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is below
the maximum specified by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.

1.14.12.1.79 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below
Operating Range Time [hr]

1.14.12.1.80 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Below Operating Range Time
[hr]
Hours when the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by
the ITE Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.81 ITE Air Inlet Dry-Bulb Temperature Difference Below Operating

Range [deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dry-bulb temperature and the
minimum allowable dry-bulb temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only negative
values are reported. When the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the
minimum specified by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.

1.14.12.1.82 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above
Operating Range Time [hr]

1.14.12.1.83 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Above Operating Range Time
[hr]
Hours when the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by
the ITE Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.84 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Difference Above Operating

Range [deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dewpoint temperature and
the maximum allowable dewpoint temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only
positive values are reported. When the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is below
the maximum specified by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.

1.14.12.1.85 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below
Operating Range Time [hr]
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 579

1.14.12.1.86 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Below Operating Range Time
[hr]
Hours when the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by
the ITE Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.87 ITE Air Inlet Dewpoint Temperature Difference Below Operating

Range [deltaC]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet dewpoint temperature and
the minimum allowable dewpoint temperature specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only
negative values are reported. When the dewpoint temperature of the air entering the ITE is above
the minimum specified by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.

1.14.12.1.88 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Oper-
ating Range Time [hr]

1.14.12.1.89 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Above Operating Range Time [hr]

Hours when the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the ITE
Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.90 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Difference Above Operating Range
[%]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet relative humidity and the
maximum allowable relative humidity specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only positive
values are reported. When the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is below the maximum
specified by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.

1.14.12.1.91 Space or Zone ITE Any Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Oper-
ating Range Time [hr]

1.14.12.1.92 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Below Operating Range Time [hr]

Hours when the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is above the range specified by the ITE
Environmental Class.

1.14.12.1.93 ITE Air Inlet Relative Humidity Difference Below Operating Range
[%]
The temperature difference (in degrees DeltaC) between the air inlet relative humidity and the
minimum allowable relative humidity specified by the ITE Environmental Class. Only negative
values are reported. When the relative humidity of the air entering the ITE is above the minimum
specified by the ITE Environmental Class, this output will be zero.

1.14.12.1.94 Zone ITE Adjusted Return Air Temperature [C]

Return air temperature after adjustment by ITE objects.
580 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.13 ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled
This object specifies outside temperature-controlled (OTC) baseboard heating. The capacities (high
and low) are specified in W at the temperatures specified. The schedule allows both capacities to
change hourly on a proportional basis. This baseboard heater does not operate if the outdoor dry-
bulb is above the high temperature limit. Between the high temperature and the low temperature,
the capacity is interpolated (linear) between the high and the low capacity values. Below the low
temperature, the capacity is set at the low capacity value. This allows the user to add baseboard
heat to a perimeter zone starting at a prescribed temperature and then slowly increases this capacity
to a max value.
Example:

Temperature High = 10 C Capacity High = 100,000 W

Temperature Low = 0 C Capacity Low = 500,000 W

Table 1.29: Outdoor Temperature Controlled Baseboard

Heat Temperature vs. Capacity

Outdoor Dry-bulb(C) Baseboard Output

> 10 0
10 100,000
8 180,000
6 260,000
4 340,000
2 420,000
0 500,000
<0 500,000

1.14.13.1 Inputs

1.14.13.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled object.

1.14.13.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList or Space or SpaceList Name

This field applies this ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled object to one or more thermal
zones or spaces in the building. The names of the actual baseboard heat objects may be concatenated
as <Space Name> <ZoneBaseboard Object Name>. See Specifying Applicable Zone(s) or Space(s)
for more details.

1.14.13.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that modifies the capacities (high and low) for baseboard
heat equipment (see next four fields). The schedule values can be any positive number. The actual
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 581

energy input for the baseboard equipment in a zone as defined by this statement depends on the
actual outdoor temperature and where that temperature is in the range of Low Temperature to High
Temperature..

1.14.13.1.4 Field: Capacity at Low Temperature

This is the baseboard equipment capacity (Watts) at the low temperature limit. This is the maximum
capacity of the baseboard equipment in full load operation. This field is autosizable.

1.14.13.1.5 Field: Low Temperature

If the outdoor dry-bulb temperature (degrees Celsius) is at or below the low temperature the base-
board heater operates at the low temperature capacity. This field is autosizable. The lowest design
outdoor dry bulb temperature is chosen, if autosized.

1.14.13.1.6 Field: Capacity at High Temperature

This is the baseboard equipment capacity (Watts) at the high temperature limit. This field is auto-
sizable. The capacity at low temperature is prorated against the reference low and high temperature
fields, if autosized.

1.14.13.1.7 Field: High Temperature

If the outdoor dry-bulb temperature (degrees Celsius) is greater than the high temperature the
baseboard heater will not operate. This field is autosizable. If autosized, this is equal to the design
zone heating setpoint temperature described below, so that the capacity at high temperature is zero.

1.14.13.1.8 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the type of heat
being given off by baseboard heat equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be
multiplied by the total energy consumed by the baseboard heat equipment to give the amount of
long wavelength radiation gain to the zone.

1.14.13.1.9 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Perimeter Baseboards”, etc. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to categorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and
in the LEED Summary table EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance. If this field is
omitted or blank, the baseboard equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.14.13.1.10 Field: Design Zone Heating Setpoint

This is heating setpoint temperature in the zone where the unit serves. This is used to autosize high
temperature and capacity at high temperature fields. The default value is 20°C.
An IDF example:
582 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled ,
SPACE4 -1 BBHeat 1, !- Name
SPACE4 -1, !- Zone Name
EQUIP -1, !- SCHEDULE Name
1500, !- Capacity at low temperature {W}
0, !- Low Temperature {C}
500, !- Capacity at high temperature {W}
10, !- High Temperature {C}
0.5, !- Fraction Radiant
Baseboard Heat , !- End -Use Subcategory
20; !- Design Zone Heating Setpoint {C}

1.14.13.2 Outputs

ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled objects have output variables for individual objects

and for zone totals. The following outputs are available:

– Zone,Average,Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Space Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Space Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Space Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Space Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Zone Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Zone Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.13.2.1 Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power for the ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled object in
Watts.

1.14.13.2.2 Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]

The outdoor temperature controlled baseboard heat option is assumed to be fueled by electricity.
This field is the same as the Baseboard Total Heating Energy (above) in joules. This energy is
included in the following meters:
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 583

Electricity:Facility
Electricity:Building
Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
InteriorEquipment:Electricity
InteriorEquipment:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
InteriorEquipment:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity:Zone:<Zone Name >
<End -Use Subcategory >: InteriorEquipment:Electricity:SpaceType:<Space Type Name >

1.14.13.2.3 Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]

1.14.13.2.4 Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of radiant heat gain for the ZoneBaseboard:Outdoor-
TemperatureControlled object in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is determined by the current heat
gain from the heater to the zone and the “Fraction Radiant” specified in the input. The radiant
gains (long wavelength) are distributed to the surfaces using an area weighting scheme.

1.14.13.2.5 Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.13.2.6 Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of convective heat gain for the ZoneBaseboard:Outdoor-
TemperatureControlled object in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is determined by the current heat
gain from the heater to the zone and the “Fraction Radiant” specified in input (1-FractionRadiant
= FractionConvected). The convective heat gain is added to the zone air heat balance directly.

1.14.13.2.7 Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.13.2.8 Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of heat gain for the ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperature-
Controlled object in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is determined by the sum of the radiant and
convective heat gains from the baseboard heat.

1.14.13.2.9 Space or Zone Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power for all ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperatureControlled objects within
the space or zone in Watts.

1.14.13.2.10 Space or Zone Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]

The outdoor temperature controlled baseboard heat option is assumed to be fueled by electricity.
This field is the same as the Baseboard Total Heating Energy (above) in joules.

1.14.13.2.11 Space or Zone Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]

584 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.13.2.12 Space or Zone Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of radiant heat gain for all ZoneBaseboard:Outdoor-
TemperatureControlled objects within the space or zone in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is
determined by the current heat gain from the heater to the space or zone and the “Fraction
Radiant” specified in the input. The radiant gains (long wavelength) are distributed to the surfaces
using an area weighting scheme.

1.14.13.2.13 Space or Zone Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]

1.14.13.2.14 Space or Zone Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of convective heat gain for all ZoneBaseboard:Outdoor-
TemperatureControlled objects within the space or zone in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is
determined by the current heat gain from the heater to the space or zone and the “Fraction Radiant”
specified in input (1-FractionRadiant = FractionConvected). The convective heat gain is added to
the space or zone air heat balance directly.

1.14.13.2.15 Space or Zone Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

1.14.13.2.16 Space or Zone Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

These output variables are the amount of heat gain for all ZoneBaseboard:OutdoorTemperature-
Controlled objects within the space or zone in Watts (for rate) or Joules. This is determined by the
sum of the radiant and convective heat gains from the baseboard heat.

1.14.14 SwimmingPool:Indoor
The Indoor Swimming Pool object is used to describe the indoor swimming pools that are exposed
to the internal environment. There are several rules that should be noted regarding the specification
of an indoor pool in EnergyPlus. First, the pool is linked to a surface that must be a floor. The pool
is assumed to cover the entire floor to which it is linked. If the pool only covers part of the floor in
the actual building, then the user must break the floor up into multiple sections.
As pools attempt to achieve a particular water temperature and have a variety of heat losses, heating
equipment is necessary to maintain the proper setpoint temperature. In EnergyPlus, the pool itself
becomes part of the demand side of a plant loop with heating equipment on the supply side providing
whatever heating is needed to maintain the desired temperature. This heating equipment as well
as the loop connections must be entered separately and the input shown in this section only details
what is needed to specify the pool itself.
There are a variety of rules that limit the application of indoor swimming pools in EnergyPlus. The
following are a list of these rules:

– The pool must reference a valid surface in the input file. This surface must be a floor and
cannot be other surface types like ceilings, walls, windows, etc.
– The pool cannot refer to a surface that is also a radiant system, ventilated slab, or another
pool.
– The surface that the pool references must be modeled using conduction transfer functions
(CTF).
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 585

– The pool cannot utilize movable insulation or have a heat source or sink associated with it
(something used to model low temperature radiant systems).

The following information is useful for defining and modeling an indoor pool in EnergyPlus. For
more information on the algorithm used for this model or details on some of the input parameters,
please reference the indoor pool section of the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference document.

1.14.14.1 Inputs

1.14.14.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique name associated with the indoor swimming pool.

1.14.14.1.2 Field: Surface Name

This is the name of the surface (floor) where the pool is located. Pools are not allowed on any
surfaces other than a floor. For more rules on surfaces that can be used for pools, please see the
information in this section on indoor pools above.

1.14.14.1.3 Field: Average Depth

This field is the average depth of the pool in meters. If the pool has variable depth, the average
depth should be specified to achieve the proper volume of water in the pool.

1.14.14.1.4 Field: Activity Factor Schedule Name

This field references a schedule that contains values for pool activity. This parameter can be varied
using the schedule named here, and it has an impact on the amount of evaporation that will take
place from the pool to the surrounding zone air. For example values of the activity factor and what
impact it will have on the evaporation of water from the pool, please refer to the Indoor Swimming
Pool section of the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference document. If left blank, the activity factor
will be assumed to be unity. Note that the activity factor should not be set equal to an occupancy
schedule since an activity factor of zero means that no evaporation will take place from the pool.

1.14.14.1.5 Field: Make-up Water Supply Schedule Name

The scheduled named by this field establishes a cold water temperature [C] for the water that
replaces the water which is lost from the pool due to evaporation. If blank, water temperatures are
calculated by the Site:WaterMainsTemperature object. This field (even if blank) overrides the Cold
Water Supply Temperature Schedule in all of the listed WaterUse:Equipment objects.

1.14.14.1.6 Field: Cover Schedule Name

This schedule defines when the pool water cover is available and affects the evaporation, convection,
and radiation rate calculations. A schedule value of 0.0 means that the pool is not covered. A
schedule value of 1.0 means the pool is 100% covered. The pool may be fully covered, fully open
(uncovered), or partially covered (a value between 0.0 and 1.0). The user also has the option
to control the evaporation, convection, short-wavelength radiation, and long-wavelength radiation
factors when the pool is covered. These terms are discussed in the next four fields.
586 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.14.1.7 Field: Cover Evaporation Factor

This input field can optionally be used to modify the pool evaporation rate and is used in conjunction
with the pool cover factor defined by the Pool Cover Schedule field (see above). The value for
this parameter can normally range from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1 means that the pool cover completely
eliminates evaporation from the pool surface, 0 means the pool cover has no effect on evaporation,
and fractions in between 0 and 1 result in a fractional reduction in evaporation by the pool cover.
So, if this parameter is 0.5 and the pool is 50% covered, the overall reduction in evaporation from a
fully uncovered pool is 25% or 0.25.

1.14.14.1.8 Field: Cover Convection Factor

This input field can optionally be used to modify the pool convection rate and is used in conjunction
with the pool cover factor defined by the Pool Cover Schedule field (see above). The value for
this parameter can normally range from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1 means that the pool cover completely
eliminates convection from the pool surface, 0 means the pool cover has no effect on convection, and
fractions in between 0 and 1 result in a fractional reduction in convection by the pool cover. So, if
this parameter is 0.5 and the pool is 50% covered, the overall reduction in convection from a fully
uncovered pool is 25% or 0.25.

1.14.14.1.9 Field: Cover Short-Wavelength Radiation Factor

This input field can optionally be used to modify the pool short-wavelength radiation rate and is
used in conjunction with the pool cover factor defined by the Pool Cover Schedule field (see above).
The value for this parameter can normally range from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1 means that the pool cover
completely eliminates short-wavelength radiation from the pool surface, 0 means the pool cover
has no effect on short-wavelength radiation, and fractions in between 0 and 1 result in a fractional
reduction in short-wavelength radiation by the pool cover. So, if this parameter is 0.5 and the pool is
50% covered, the overall reduction in short-wavelength radiation from a fully uncovered pool is 25%
or 0.25. Note that with radiation terms that whatever portion of the short-wavelength radiation is
blocked by the cover is transferred via convection to the surrounding zone air.

1.14.14.1.10 Field: Cover Long-Wavelength Radiation Factor

This input field can optionally be used to modify the pool long-wavelength radiation rate and is
used in conjunction with the pool cover factor defined by the Pool Cover Schedule field (see above).
The value for this parameter can normally range from 0.0 to 1.0, where 1 means that the pool
cover completely eliminates long-wavelength radiation from the pool surface, 0 means the pool cover
has no effect on long-wavelength radiation, and fractions in between 0 and 1 result in a fractional
reduction in long-wavelength radiation by the pool cover. So, if this parameter is 0.5 and the pool is
50% covered, the overall reduction in long-wavelength radiation from a fully uncovered pool is 25%
or 0.25. Note that with radiation terms that whatever portion of the long-wavelength radiation is
blocked by the cover is transferred via convection to the surrounding zone air.

1.14.14.1.11 Field: Pool Water Inlet Node

This input is the name of the node on the demand side of a plant loop that leads into the pool. From
the standpoint of an EnergyPlus input file, the pool sits on a plant demand loop, and the pump and
heater reside on the plant supply loop. The pool heater and pump must be defined by other existing
EnergyPlus input.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 587

1.14.14.1.12 Field: Pool Water Outlet Node

This input is the name of the node on the demand side of a plant loop that leads out of the pool.
From the standpoint of an EnergyPlus input file, the pool sits on a plant demand loop, and the
pump and heater reside on the plant supply loop. The pool heater and pump must be defined by
other existing EnergyPlus input.

1.14.14.1.13 Field: Pool Water Maximum Flow Rate

This input is the maximum water volumetric flow rate in m3/s going between the pool and the water
heating equipment. This along with the pool setpoint temperature and the heating plant equipment
outlet temperature will establish the maximum heat addition to the pool. This flow rate to the
pool will be varied in an attempt to reach the desired pool water setpoint temperature (see Setpoint
Temperature Schedule below).

1.14.14.1.14 Field: Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Power

This input defines the power consumption rate of miscellaneous equipment such as the filtering and
chlorination technology associated with the pool. The units for this input are in power consumption
per flow rate of water through the pool from the heater or W/(m3/s). This field will be multiplied
by the flow rate of water through the pool to determine the power consumption of this equipment.
Any heat generated by this equipment is assumed to have no effect on the pool water itself.

1.14.14.1.15 Field: Setpoint Temperature Schedule

Pools attempt to maintain a particular water temperature. In EnergyPlus, this field defines the
setpoint temperature for the desired pool water temperature. It is input as a schedule to allow the
user to vary the pool setpoint temperature as desired. The equipment defined to provide heating
for the pool will deliver the necessary hot water to the pool, up to the capacity of that equipment
defined by other input by the user.

1.14.14.1.16 Field: Maximum Number of People

This field defines the maximum occupancy of people actually in the pool and thus will be used with
the next two inputs to determine how much heat people contribute to the pool heat balance. People
who are not in the pool should be modeled separately using the standard People description for
zones.

1.14.14.1.17 Field: People Schedule

This field defines a schedule that establishes how many people are in the pool at any given time.
The current value of this schedule is multiplied by the maximum number of people in the previous
field determines how many people are currently in the pool.

1.14.14.1.18 Field: People Heat Gain Schedule

This field defines the amount of heat given off by an average person in the pool in Watts. This field
is a schedule so that this heat gain can be allowed to vary as the type of activity in a pool can vary
greatly and thus the amount of heat gain per person also varies. This parameter times the number
of people in the pool determines how much heat is added to the pool. All heat given off by people
is added to the heat balance of the pool water.
An example of an indoor swimming pool definition is:
588 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

SwimmingPool:Indoor ,
Test Pool , !- Name
F1 -1, !- Surface Name
1.5, !- Average Depth {m}
PoolActivitySched , !- Pool Activity Schedule
MakeUpWaterSched , !- MakeUp Water Temperature Schedule
PoolCoverSched , !- Pool Cover Schedule
0.0, !- Cover Evaporation Factor
0.2, !- Cover Convection Factor
0.9, !- Cover Short -Wavelength Radiation Factor
0.5, !- Cover Long -Wavelength Radiation Factor
Pool Water Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node (Plant/Heater)
Pool Water Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node (Plant/Heater)
0.1, !- Maximum flow rate from water heating system {m3/s}
0.6, !- Miscellaneous Equipment Power Factor {W/(m3/s)}
PoolSetpointTempSched , !- Pool Water Setpoint Temperature Schedule
15, !- Maximum Number of People in Pool
PoolOccupancySched , !- Pool People Schedule
PoolOccHeatGainSched; !- Pool People Heat Gain Schedule

1.14.14.2 Outputs

– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Makeup Water Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Makeup Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Makeup Water Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Water Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Inlet Water Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Inlet Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Power [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Energy [J]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Water Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Water Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Radiant to Convection by Cover [W]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool People Heat Gain [W]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Activity Factor []
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover Factor []
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Evaporative Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Indoor Pool Evaporative Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Saturation Pressure at Pool Temperature [Pa]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Partial Pressure of Water Vapor in Air [Pa]
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover Evaporation Factor []
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover Convective Factor []
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover SW Radiation Factor []
– HVAC, Average, Indoor Pool Current Cover LW Radiation Factor []

1.14.14.2.1 Indoor Pool Makeup Water Rate [m3/s]

The water consumption rate for the makeup water of indoor swimming pool.

1.14.14.2.2 Indoor Pool Makeup Water Volume [m3]

The water consumption for the makeup water of indoor swimming pool.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 589

1.14.14.2.3 Indoor Pool Makeup Water Temperature [C]

The temperature of the makeup water of indoor swimming pool.

1.14.14.2.4 Indoor Pool Water Temperature [C]

The average calculated pool water temperature during the simulation at the time frequency re-
quested.

1.14.14.2.5 Indoor Pool Inlet Water Temperature [C]

The temperature of the water being sent to the pool from the plant heating equipment.

1.14.14.2.6 Indoor Pool Inlet Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow rate of water being sent to the pool from the plant heating equipment. Typically this
water is being passed through a heater and miscellaneous equipment.

1.14.14.2.7 Indoor Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Power [W]

The miscellaneous equipment power includes the power consumption of pool filter and chlorinator
in Watts.

1.14.14.2.8 Indoor Pool Miscellaneous Equipment Energy [J]

The miscellaneous equipment power consumption includes the energy consumption of pool filter and
chlorinator in Joules.

1.14.14.2.9 Indoor Pool Water Heating Rate [W]

This is the rate of heating provided by the plant loop to the pool in Watts.

1.14.14.2.10 Indoor Pool Water Heating Energy [J]

This is the amount of heating provided by the plant loop to the pool in Joules over the time step
requested.

1.14.14.2.11 Indoor Pool Radiant to Convection by Cover [W]

The pool cover may block some or all of short- and long-wavelength radiation incident on the pool.
To account for this and to not have the cover result in energy that is not accounted for by the model,
the radiation that is blocked by the cover is converted to a convective gain (or loss) to/from the zone
air. This output field reports this value.

1.14.14.2.12 Indoor Pool Current Activity Factor []

This is the current activity factor as defined by the user input schedule.

1.14.14.2.13 Indoor Pool Current Cover Factor []

This is the current cover factor as defined by the user input schedule.
590 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.14.2.14 Indoor Pool Evaporative Heat Loss Rate [W]

This is the rate of evaporative heat loss (latent) to the zone from the pool in Watts.

1.14.14.2.15 Indoor Pool Evaporative Heat Loss Energy [J]

This is the amount of evaporative heat loss (latent) to the zone from the pool in in Joules over the
time step requested.

1.14.14.2.16 Indoor Pool Saturation Pressure at Pool Temperature [Pa]

This is the saturation pressure of water vapor in air at the pool water temperature.

1.14.14.2.17 Indoor Pool Partial Pressure of Water Vapor in Air [Pa]

This is the partial pressure of water vapor in air at the current zone air conditions for dry bulb
temperature and humidity ratio.

1.14.14.2.18 Indoor Pool Current Cover Evaporation Factor []

This is the current value of the cover evaporation factor that is used as a modifier for the actual
evaporation. A value of zero means no evaporation will take place while a value of unity means the
maximum allowed evaporation will take place. This value is based on the current cover condition as
well as the user input for the cover evaporation factor.

1.14.14.2.19 Indoor Pool Current Cover Convective Factor []

This is the current value of the cover convective factor that is used as a modifier for the actual
convection. A value of zero means the cover will block all convection while a value of unity means
that the cover will not affect convection from the water surface at all. This value is based on the
current cover condition as well as the user input for the cover convective factor.

1.14.14.2.20 Indoor Pool Current Cover SW Radiation Factor []

This is the current value of the cover short wavelength radiation factor that is used as a modifier for
the actual short wavelength radiation. A value of zero means the cover will block all short wavelength
radiation while a value of unity means that the cover will not affect short wavelength radiation from
the water surface at all. This value is based on the current cover condition as well as the user input
for the cover short wavelength radiation factor.

1.14.14.2.21 Indoor Pool Current Cover LW Radiation Factor []

This is the current value of the cover long wavelength radiation factor that is used as a modifier for
the actual long wavelength radiation. A value of zero means the cover will block all long wavelength
radiation while a value of unity means that the cover will not affect long wavelength radiation from
the water surface at all. This value is based on the current cover condition as well as the user input
for the cover long wavelength radiation factor.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 591

1.14.15 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object allows users to input carbon diox-
ide sources or sinks in a zone. Note that carbon dioxide generation within a zone can also
be specified using People and GasEquipment objects. Multiple ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:CarbonDioxide objects can be specified for the same zone.

1.14.15.1 Inputs

1.14.15.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object. The name for each
ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object must be unique.

1.14.15.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and links a particular ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:CarbonDioxide object to a thermal zone in the building.

1.14.15.1.3 Field: Design Generation Rate

This field denotes the design carbon dioxide generation rate (m3 /s). The design value is modified
by the schedule fraction (see Field: Schedule Name). The resulting volumetric generation rate is
converted to mass generation rate using the current zone indoor air density at each time step. The
rate can be either positive or negative. A positive value represents a source rate (CO2 addition to
the zone air) and a negative value represents a sink rate (CO2 removal from the zone air).
When the mass design generation rate is available, a conversion is required to meet input requirement
with volumetric flow rate. This can be accomplished by the mass flow rate divided by the density
of carbon dioxide.

1.14.15.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedules) that modifies the design carbon dioxide
generation rate (see previous field). The schedule values can be any positive number between 0.0
and 1.0. For each simulation time step, the actual CO2 generation rate in a zone is the product of
the Design Generation Rate field (above) and the value specified by this schedule.
An IDF example is provided below:

ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :CarbonDioxide ,
NORTH_ZONE CO2 , !- Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.e-6, !- Design Generation Rate {m3/s}
CO2 Source Schedule; !- Schedule Name

1.14.15.2 Outputs
HVAC ,Average , Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC ,Average , Zone Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.14.15.2.1 Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the net carbon dioxide internal gain/loss in m3 /s for an individual ZoneContami-
nantSourceAndSink:CarbonDioxide object.
592 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.15.2.2 Zone Contaminant Source or Sink CO2 Gain Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
This output is the net carbon dioxide internal gain/loss in m3 /s for all ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:CarbonDioxide objects in a zone.

1.14.16 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant object specifies the generic contaminant
generation rate and removal rate coefficient in a zone. The associated fraction schedules are re-
quired for allowing users to change the magnitude of sources and sinks. The object is equivalent to
the combination of the constant coefficient model and the burst source model defined in the sources
and sinks element types of CONTAM 3.0. The basic equation used to calculate generic contaminant
source and sink for the constant model is given below:

Sf (t) = Gf (t) ∗ FG − Rf (t)Cf (t) ∗ 1.0E − 6 ∗ FR (1.31)

where
Sf = Contaminant generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Gf = Generic contaminant generation rate [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
Rf = Generic contaminant effective removal rate [m3 /s]
FR = Fraction value from the sink fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
Cf = Generic contaminant concentration value at a given previous time step [ppm]

1.14.16.1 Inputs

1.14.16.1.1 Field: Name

This field represents a unique identifying name.

1.14.16.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field signifies the Name of the zone with constant generic contaminant source and sink.

1.14.16.1.3 Field: Design Generation Rate

This field denotes the full generic contaminant design generation rate (m3 /s). The design generation
rate is the maximum amount of generic contaminant expected at design conditions. The design value
is modified by the schedule fraction (see Field:Generation Schedule Name).
When the mass generation rate is available, the rate must be converted to a volume flow rate. Use
the mass flow rate divided by the vapor density of the generic contaminant.

1.14.16.1.4 Field: Generation Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design generation
rate (Gf ). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as FG in the above equation.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 593

1.14.16.1.5 Field: Design Removal Coefficient

This field denotes the full generic contaminant design removal coefficient (m3 /s). The design removal
rate is the maximum amount of generic contaminant expected at design conditions times the generic
contaminant concentration in the same zone. The design value is modified by the schedule fraction
(see Field:Removal Schedule Name).

1.14.16.1.6 Field: Removal Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design generation
rate (Rf ). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as FR in the above equation.
An IDF example is provided below:
ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:Constant ,
NORTH ZONE GC , !- Name
NORTH ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.0E-6, !- Design Generation Rate {m3/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Generation Schedule Name
1.0E-7, !- Design Removal Coefficient {m3/s}
GC Removal Schedule; !- Removal Schedule Name

1.14.16.2 Outputs

When a ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Constant object is specified, the following output

variables are available:
ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Constant Source Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.14.16.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Constant Source Generation Volume Flow

Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:Constant object. The generation rate is a sum of generation and removal rates.
The zone air generic contaminant level at the previous zone time step is used in the removal rate
calculation.

1.14.17 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Pressure-
Driven
The SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven object specifies the generic contam-
inant generation rate coefficient, which is used to calculate the generation rate due to the pressure
difference across the surface. The object is equivalent to the pressure driven model defined in the
sources and sinks element types of CONTAM 3.0. This object assumes to work with the AirflowNet-
work model. The surface has to be defined in the AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface. Although the
model is designed to be applied to radon and soil gas entry, it is expanded to be applied to all
contaminant transport, including generic contaminant. However, it should be used in caution. The
basic equation used to calculate generic contaminant source for the pressure driven constant model
is provided below:

Sf (t) = Hf (t) ∗ FG ∗ (Pj − Pi )n (1.32)

594 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

where
Sf = Generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Hf = Generic contaminant generation rate coefficient [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
n = Flow power exponent
Pi = Zone pressure [Pa]
Pj = Pressure in an adjacent zone for a interior surface or outdoor for an exterior surface [Pa]

1.14.17.1 Inputs

1.14.17.1.1 Field: Name

The field signifies the unique identifying name.

1.14.17.1.2 Field: Surface Name

This field represents the name of the surface as a generic contaminant source using the pressure
driven model.

1.14.17.1.3 Field: Design Generation Rate Coefficient

This field denotes the generic contaminant design generation coefficient (m3 /s). The design gener-
ation rate is the maximum amount of generic contaminant expected at design conditions times the
pressure difference with a power exponent across a surface. The design value is modified by the
schedule fraction (see Field:Generation Schedule Name).

1.14.17.1.4 Field: Generation Exponent

This field denotes the flow power exponent,* n*, in the contaminant source equation. The valid
range is 0.0 to 1.0,
An IDF example is provided below:
SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:PressureDriven ,
WEST ZONE GC BLD , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name
1.0E-6, !- Design Generation Rate Coefficient {m3/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Generation Schedule Name
0.5; !- Generation Exponent

1.14.17.2 Outputs

When a SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven object is specified, the following

output variables are available:

– ZONE,Average,Generic Air Contaminant Pressure Driven Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.14.17.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Pressure Driven Generation Volume Flow

Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminant-
SourceAndSink:Generic:PressureDriven object.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 595

1.14.18 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:CutoffModel
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic contaminant:CutoffModel object specifies the generic
contaminant generation rate based on the cutoff concentration model. The basic equation used to
calculate generic contaminant source for the pressure driven constant model is given below:

(   )
Cf (t)
Gf (t) ∗ FG ∗ 1 − Ccutof f Cf < Ccutof f
Sf (t) = (1.33)
0 Cf ≥ Ccutof f

where
Sf = Generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Gf = Generic contaminant generation rate [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
Ccutoff = Cutoff concentration at which emission ceases [ppm]
Cf = Generic contaminant concentration value at a given previous time step [ppm]

1.14.18.1 Inputs

1.14.18.1.1 Field: Name

The field signifies the unique identifying name.

1.14.18.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field represents the name of the zone with generic contaminant source and sink using the cutoff
model.

1.14.18.1.3 Field: Design Generation Rate Coefficient

This field denotes the full generic contaminant design generation rate (m3 /s). The design generation
rate is the maximum amount of generic contaminant expected at design conditions. The design value
is modified by the schedule fraction (see Field:Generation Schedule Name).
When the mass generation rate is available, the rate must be converted to a volume flow rate. Use
the mass flow rate divided by the vapor density of the generic contaminant.

1.14.18.1.4 Field: Generation Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design generation
rate (Gf ). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as FG in the above equation.

1.14.18.1.5 Field: Cutoff Generic Contaminant at which Emission Ceases

This field is the generic contaminant cutoff concentration level where the source ceases its emission.
An IDF example is provided below:
596 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:CutoffModel ,
NORTH ZONE GC CutoffModel , !- Name
NORTH ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.0E-5, !- Design Generation Rate Coefficient {m3/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Schedule Name
100000; !- Cutoff Generic Contaminant at which Emission Ceases {ppm
}

1.14.18.2 Outputs

When a ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:CutoffModel object is specified, the following out-

put variables are available:
ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Cutoff Model Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.14.18.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Cutoff Model Generation Volume Flow

Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminant-
SourceAndSink:Generic:CutoffModel object.

1.14.19 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource object specifies the generic contaminant
generation rate based on the decay source model. The basic equation used to calculate generic
contaminant source for the decay source model is given below:

Sf (t) = Gf (t)FG exp(−t/tc ) (1.34)

where
Sf = Generic contaminant source strength [m3 /s]
Gf = Initial generic contaminant generation rate [m3 /s]
FG = Fraction value from the source fraction schedule at a given time [dimensionless]
t = Time since the start of emission [second]
tc = Decay time constant [second]

1.14.19.1 Inputs

1.14.19.1.1 Field: Name

This field is the unique identifying name.

1.14.19.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field represents the name of the zone with a generic contaminant decaying source.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 597

1.14.19.1.3 Field: Initial Emission Rate

This field denotes the initial generic contaminant design emission rate (m3 /s). The generation is
controlled by a schedule, as defined in the next field. Generic contaminant emission begins when
the schedule changes from a zero to a non-zero value (between zero and one). The initial emission
rate is equal to the schedule value times the initial generation rate. A single schedule may be used
to initiate several emissions at different times.(see Field:Generation Schedule Name).

1.14.19.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design emission
rate (Gf ). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as FG in the above equation. When the value
is equal to 1, the generation rate is used and time is reset to zero. When the value is equal to zero,
the schedule value is ignored in the equation.

1.14.19.1.5 Field: Decay Time Constant

This field is the time at which the generation rate reaches 0.37 of the original rate.

Note: The variable t, time since the start of emission, will be reset to zero, when a new run
period starts, or the generation schedule value is equal to zero.

An IDF example is provided below:

ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:DecaySource ,
WEST ZONE GC DecaySource , !- Name
WEST ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.0E-5, !- Initial Emission Rate {m3/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Schedule Name
100000; !- Delay Time Constant {s}

1.14.19.2 Outputs

When a ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DecaySource object is specified, the following out-

put variables are available:

– Zone,Average,Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Average,Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Emission Start Elapsed Time
[s]

1.14.19.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Volume Flow

Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant decay rate from each SurfaceContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:DecaySource object.

1.14.19.2.2 Generic Air Contaminant Decay Model Generation Emission Start

Elapsed Time [s]
This output is the decay time since the start of emission. The start time is either at the beginning
of each run period, including design day simulations, or the time when the egenration schedule value
is zero.
598 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.20 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Boundary-
LayerDiffusion
The SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion object specifies the
generic contaminant generation rate from surface diffusion. The object is equivalent to the
boundary layer diffusion model driven model defined in the sources and sinks element types of
CONTAM 3.0.
The boundary layer diffusion controlled reversible sink/source model with a linear sorption isotherm
follows the descriptions presented in [Axley 1991]. The boundary layer refers to the region above
the surface of a material through which a concentration gradient exists between the near-surface
concentration and the air-phase concentration. The rate at which a contaminant is transferred onto
a surface (sink) is defined as:

 
Cs
Sf = h ∗ ρ ∗ A Cf − ∗ 1.0E − 6 (1.35)
k

where
h = Average film mass transfer coefficient over the sink [m/s]
ρ = Film density of air [kg/m3 ]
A = Surface area of the adsorbent [m2 ]
Cf = Concentration in the air at the previous time step [ppm]
Cs = Concentration in the adsorbent [ppm]
k = Henry adsorption constant or partition coefficient [dimensionless]

1.14.20.1 Inputs

1.14.20.1.1 Field: Name

This field signifies a unique identifying name.

1.14.20.1.2 Field: Surface Name

This field denotes the name of the surface as a generic contaminant reversible source or sink using
the boundary layer diffusion model.

1.14.20.1.3 Field: Mass Transfer Coefficient

This field specifies the average mass transfer coefficient of the contaminant generic contaminant
within the boundary layer (or film) above the surface of the adsorbent.

1.14.20.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the mass transfer coefficient with
the value between 0.0 and 1.0.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 599

1.14.20.1.5 Field: Henry Adsorption Constant or Partition Coefficient

This field denotes the generic contaminant Henry partition coefficient in the units of dimensionless.
The coefficient relates the concentration of the contaminant generic contaminant in the bulk-air to
that at the surface of the adsorption material.
An IDF example is provided below:
SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion ,
WEST ZONE GC BLD , !- Name
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Surface Name
1.0E-2, !- Mass Transfer Coefficient {m/s}
GC Source Schedule , !- Schedule Name
2.0; !- Henry adsorption constant or partition coefficient

1.14.20.2 Outputs

When a SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion object is specified, the

following output variables are available:

– ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Generation Volume Flow
Rate [m3/s]
– ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Inside Face Concentration
[ppm]

1.14.20.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Generation Vol-

ume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminant-
SourceAndSink:Generic:BoundaryLayerDiffusion object.

1.14.20.2.2 Generic Air Contaminant Boundary Layer Diffusion Inside Face Con-
centration [ppm]
This output is the average generic contaminant level at the interior surface.

1.14.21 SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Deposition-
VelocitySink
The SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionVelocitySink object specifies the generic
contaminant removal rate from a surface. The object is equivalent to the deposition velocity sink
model defined in CONTAM 3.0 sources and sinks element types.
The deposition velocity model provides for the input of a sink’s characteristic in the familiar term
of deposition velocity. The removal stops when the sink concentration level is higher than the zone
air concentration level. The deposition velocity model equation is:

Sf (t) = νd As m ∗ Cf (t) ∗ 1.0E − 6 ∗ F R (1.36)

where
Sf (t) = Removal rate at time t [m3 /s]
600 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

νd = Deposition velocity [m/s]

As = Deposition surface area [m2 ]
m = Element multiplier [dimensionless]
Cf (t) = Concentration of contaminant generic contaminant at the previous time step [ppm]
FR = Schedule or control signal value at time t [-]

1.14.21.1 Inputs

1.14.21.1.1 Field: Name

This field denotes a unique identifying name.

1.14.21.1.2 Field: Surface Name

This field represents the name of the surface as a generic contaminant sink using the deposition
velocity sink model.

1.14.21.1.3 Field: Deposition Velocity

This field specifies the deposition velocity to the surface of the adsorbent in the units of m/s.

1.14.21.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design removal
rate (Sf ). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as FR in the above equation.
An IDF example is provided below:
SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:DepositionVelocitySink ,
EAST ZONE GC DVS , !- Name
Zn002:Wall001 , !- Surface Name
1.0E-3, !- Deposition Velocity {m/s}
GC Source Schedule; !- Schedule Name

1.14.21.2 Outputs

The following output variables are available when the SurfaceContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:-

DepositionVelocitySink object is specified.

– ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Velocity Removal Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.14.21.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Velocity Removal Volume Flow

Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each SurfaceContaminant-
SourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionVelocitySink object.
1.14. GROUP – INTERNAL GAINS 601

1.14.22 ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:Deposition-
RateSink
The ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink object specifies the generic con-
taminant removal rate from a zone. The object is equivalent to the deposition rate sink model
defined in CONTAM 3.0 sources and sinks element types.
The deposition rate model provides for the input of a sink’s characteristic in the familiar term of
deposition rate in a zone. The removal stops when the sink concentration level is higher than the
zone air concentration level. The deposition rate model equation is:

Sf (t) = kd Vz ∗ Cf (t) ∗ 1.0E − 6 ∗ FR m (1.37)

Where
Sf (t) = Removal rate at time t [m3 /s]
kd = Deposition rate [1/T]
Vz = Zone volume [m3 ]
m = Element multiplier [dimensionless]
C f (t) = Concentration of generic contaminant at the previous time step [ppm]
FR = Schedule or control signal value at time t [dimensionless]

1.14.22.1 Inputs

1.14.22.1.1 Field: Name

This field denotes a unique identifying name.

1.14.22.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field represents the name of the zone as a generic contaminant sink using the deposition rate
sink model.

1.14.22.1.3 Field: Deposition Rate

This field specifies the deposition rate to the zone in the units of 1/s.

1.14.22.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design removal
rate (Sf ). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as FR in the above equation.
An IDF example is provided below:
ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink :Generic:DepositionRateSink ,
NORTH ZONE GC DRS , !- Name
NORTH ZONE , !- Zone Name
1.0E-5, !- Deposition Rate {m3/s}
GC Source Schedule; !- Schedule Name
602 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.14.22.2 Outputs

When the ZoneContaminantSourceAndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink object is specified, the fol-

lowing output variables are available:

– ZONE,Average, Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Rate Removal Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.14.22.2.1 Generic Air Contaminant Deposition Rate Removal Volume Flow

Rate [m3/s]
This output is the average generic contaminant generation rate from each ZoneContaminantSource-
AndSink:Generic:DepositionRateSink object.

1.15 Group – Daylighting

Daylighting can be invoked in EnergyPlus primarily by the use of the objects: Daylight-
ing:Controls and Daylighting:ReferencePoint. Other objects related to daylighting are
Daylighting:DElight:ComplexFenestration, Output:IlluminanceMap, and OutputCon-
trol:IlluminanceMap:Style. These are described in the following object descriptions.

Note that two different methodologies are used in the Daylighting:Controls object (SplitFlux and
DElight) and may be intermixed in a single IDF but may not be used in the same zone.

1.15.1 Daylighting:Controls
When this object is used, daylighting illuminance levels are calculated and then used to determine
how much the electric lighting can be reduced. The daylight illuminance level in a zone depends
on many factors, including sky condition; sun position; calculation point; location, size, and glass
transmittance of windows; window shading devices; and reflectance of interior surfaces. Reduction
of electric lighting depends on daylight illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone con-
trolled and type of lighting control. Two different methods of computing the daylighitng illuminance
and subsequent lighting reduction called SplitFlux and DElight. After the object description below
is are sections that describe the two methodologies in more detail.

1.15.1.1 Inputs

1.15.1.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the Daylighting:Controls object.

1.15.1.1.2 Field: Zone or Space Name

The name of the Zone or Space to which the following daylighting-related input applies. If a zone
name is specified, the zone must lie completely within a single solar enclosure.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 603

1.15.1.1.3 Field: Daylighting Method

The Daylighting Method field can be set to either of the following: SplitFlux or DElight. Different
Zones can have different settings in the same file but in a single zone only one method should be
used at a time. Guidelines for using the SplitFlux method and additional details on the DElight
method are shown in following sections.

1.15.1.1.4 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field is optional and may be used to define the name of a schedule that denotes whether
or not the control is available to operate during a given time period. If the schedule value is greater
than zero, then the controls will be available to operate for that time period. If the schedule value
is zero or less, then the controls will not be available. If this field is left blank, the controls will be
always available. For example, this can be useful for scheduling the daylighting controls off during
design days so that the daylighting controls do not affect lighting power during sizing.

1.15.1.1.5 Field: Lighting Control Type

The type of overhead electric lighting control. All reference points specified are assumed to have this
type of control.
For Lighting Control Type set to Continuous, the overhead lights dim continuously and linearly
from (maximum electric power, maximum light output) to (minimum electric power, minimum light
output) as the daylight illuminance increases. The lights stay on at the minimum point with further
increase in the daylight illuminance.
For Lighting Control Type set to Stepped, the electric power input and light output vary in discrete,
equally spaced steps. The number of steps is given by Number of Steps (Excluding Off) of Stepped
Control. For example, if Number of Steps = 3 and Illuminance Setpoint = 600, then the following
table shows the fraction of the lights that are on vs. daylight illuminance.

Table 1.30: Example of a Stepped Lighting Control System

with Three Steps

Daylight illuminance Fraction of lights that are on

0-200 1.0
200-400 2/3
400-600 1/3
600 and above 0.0

Lighting Control Type set to ContinuousOff is the same similar to Lighting Control Type set to
Continuous except that the lights switch off completely when the minimum dimming point is reached.

1.15.1.1.6 Field: Minimum Input Power Fraction for Continuous Dimming Con-
trol
For Lighting Control Type set to Continuous, the lowest power the lighting system can dim down
to, expressed as a fraction of maximum input power (see figure, below). For Lighting Control Type
set to ContinuousOff, this is the power fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely.
604 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.72: Illustration of continuous dimming relationship

The figure shows the relationship between electric light output and electrical input.

1.15.1.1.7 Field: Minimum Light Output Fraction for Continuous Dimming Con-
trol
For Lighting Control Type set to Continuous, the lowest lighting output the lighting system can
dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum light output (see figure). This is the fractional
light output that the system produces at minimum input power. For Lighting Control Type set to
ContinuousOff, this is the light output fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely.

1.15.1.1.8 Field: Number of Stepped Control Steps

The number of steps, excluding off, in a stepped lighting control system (see figure, below). Required
and must be >0 if Lighting Control Type is set to Stepped. The steps are assumed to be equally
spaced.

1.15.1.1.9 Field: Probability Lighting will be Reset When Needed in Manual

Stepped Control
May be specified if a stepped lighting control system (Lighting Control Type set to Stepped) is
manually operated, such as in a simple, one-step (on-off) system. Gives the probability the occupants
of a daylit zone will set the electric lights to the correct level to obtain the required illuminance.
The rest of the time the lights are assumed to be set one step too high. For example, consider an
on-off lighting system (Number of Steps = 1) with a set point of 600 lux and 0.7 reset probability.
Then, when daylighting exceeds 600 lux, the electric lights will be off 70% of the time and on 30%
of the time.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 605

Figure 1.73: Stepped lighting control with Number of Steps = 3.

606 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.15.1.1.10 Field: Glare Calculation Daylighting Reference Point Name

The Daylighting:ReferencePoint name should be specified that is used for determining the glare. Only
one reference point is used to calculate the glare. This input is only used in when the Daylighting
Method is set to SplitFlux. This input is ignored when Daylighting Method is set to DElight.

1.15.1.1.11 Field: Glare Calculation Azimuth Angle of View Direction Clockwise

from Zone y-Axis
Daylight glare from a window depends on occupant view direction. It is highest when you look
directly at a window and decreases as you look away from a window. This field specifies the view
direction for calculating glare. It is the angle, measured clockwise in the horizontal plane, between
the zone y-axis and the occupant view direction. This input is only used in when the Daylighting
Method is set to SplitFlux. This input is ignored when Daylighting Method is set to DElight.

1.15.1.1.12 Field: Maximum Allowable Discomfort Glare Index

If a daylit zone has windows with shading devices (except exterior screens), the shades will be
deployed if the daylight glare at Daylighting:ReferencePoint specified in the Glare Calculation Day-
lighting Reference Point Name field exceeds the value of this field. To get this type of glare control
you have to specify Trigger = Glare, GlareOrSolarOnWindow, GlareOrHorizontalSolar, GlareOrOut-
sideAirTemp, GlareOrZoneAirTemp or GlareOrZoneLoad in WindowShadingControl for one or more
windows in the zone (see WindowShadingControl). This input is only used in when the Daylighting
Method is set to SplitFlux. This input is ignored when Daylighting Method is set to DElight.
If a zone has two or more windows with glare control, the shading devices will be deployed one by
one in the order in which the windows are input until the glare level at each reference point falls
below Maximum Allowable Discomfort Glare Index or is as close as possible to it.
The following table gives recommended values of Maximum Allowable Discomfort Glare Index.

Table 1.31: Recommended Values of Maximum Allowable

Discomfort Glare Index (DGI)

Activity or Zone Type Maximum Allowable DGI

Art Galleries 16
Factories: Rough work 28
Factories: Engine assembly 26
Factories: Fine assembly 24
Factories: Instrument assembly 22
Hospital wards 18
Laboratories 22
Museums 20
Offices 22
School classrooms 20

1.15.1.1.13 Field: DElight Gridding Resolution

1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 607

The maximum surface area for nodes in gridding (subdividing) all surfaces in the zone when Day-
lighting Method is set to DElight. All reflective and transmitting surfaces will be subdivided into
approximately square nodes that do not exceed this maximum. Higher resolution subdivisions re-
quire greater calculation times, but generally produce more accurate results. This same gridding
resolution is also used to subdivide any Complex Fenestration System surfaces. It is advisable to
perform at least one simulation of new input using a small gridding resolution such as 0.1m2 to
compare these results against simulation runs at lower resolution (i.e., higher maximum area nodal
grids) to get a sense of possible levels of error. This input is only used in when the Daylighting
Method is set to DElight. This input is ignored when Daylighting Method is set to SplitFlux.

1.15.1.1.14 Field Set (reference point name, fraction controlled, illuminance set-
point)
This set of fields is used together and can be repeated an unlimited number of times to specify some
of the name of the reference point, the fraction of the zone lighting controlled by that reference point
and the illuminance setpoint that should be applied for daylighting control at that reference point.

1.15.1.1.15 Field: Daylighting Reference Point Name <x>

The Daylighting:ReferencePoint name should be specified that is used for determining the daylighting
control sensor location.

1.15.1.1.16 Field: Fraction of Lights Controlled by Reference Point <x>

The fraction of the zone or space’s electric lighting is controlled by the daylight illuminance at the
named Daylighting:ReferencePoint. If the sum of the fractions are less than 1.0, the remaining
portion is assumed to have no lighting control.

1.15.1.1.17 Field: Illuminance Setpoint at Reference Point <x>

The desired lighting level (in lux) at the named Daylighting:ReferencePoint. This is the lighting
level that would be produced at this reference point at night if the overhead electric lighting were
operating at full input power. Recommended values depend on type of activity; they may be found,
for example, in the Lighting Handbook of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America.
A typical value for general office work (excluding computer terminals) is 500 lux.

1.15.2 Daylighting:ReferencePoint
This object is referenced by Daylighting:Controls to identify the reference point coordinates for
each sensor. The reference points in the zone are where horizontal daylighting illuminance will be
calculated. It is assumed that the photocells that control the overhead electric lighting respond to
the light levels at the specified coordinates. Reference points are given in coordinates specified in
the GlobalGeometryRules object Daylighting Reference Point CoordinateSystem field.
When the DElight Daylighting Method is used, there may be up to a maximum of 100 reference
points for each zone. Each Reference Point that is input does NOT need to be included in the
control of the electric lighting system within the zone. This is determined by the fraction of the zone
controlled by each Reference Point, which can be input as 0. Note when the DElight Daylighting
Method is used, that the sum of all Reference Point control fractions must equal 1 to obtain correct
overall results.
608 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.15.2.1 Inputs

1.15.2.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the Daylighting:ReferencePoint object.

1.15.2.1.2 Field: Zone or Space Name

The name of the Zone or Space in which the reference point is located.

1.15.2.1.3 Fields: (X,Y,Z) Coordinate of Reference Point

These three fields are the X, Y and Z values of the reference point in the coordinate system you
specified for daylighting reference points in the GlobalGeometryRules object. Figure 1.74 shows an
example using the relative coordinate (to zone) system. Z is typically at desk height (0.8 m).
An IDF example:

Daylighting:Controls ,
West Zone_DaylCtrl , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone or Space Name
SplitFlux , !- Daylighting Method
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Continuous , !- Lighting Control Type
0.3, !- Minimum Input Power Fraction for Continuous or ContinuousOff
Dimming Control
0.2, !- Minimum Light Output Fraction for Continuous or ContinuousOff
Dimming Control
, !- Number of Stepped Control Steps
1.0, !- Probability Lighting will be Reset When Needed in Manual Stepped
Control
West Zone_DaylRefPt1 , !- Glare Calculation Daylighting Reference Point Name
180.0 , !- Glare Calculation Azimuth Angle of View Direction Clockwise from
Zone y-Axis {deg}
20.0, !- Maximum Allowable Discomfort Glare Index
, !- DElight Gridding Resolution {m2}
West Zone_DaylRefPt1 , !- Daylighting Reference Point 1 Name
1.0, !- Fraction of Lights Controlled by Reference Point 1
500.; !- Illuminance Setpoint at Reference Point 1 {lux}

Daylighting:ReferencePoint ,
West Zone_DaylRefPt1 , !- Name
West Zone , !- Zone or Space Name
3.048 , !- X-Coordinate of Reference Point {m}
3.048 , !- Y-Coordinate of Reference Point {m}
0.9; !- Z-Coordinate of Reference Point {m}

1.15.3 Guidelines for Daylighting Modeling Using the SplitFlux

Method)

Following are some guidelines for preparing EnergyPlus input to model the effects of daylighting
when using the SplitFlux method. Before studying these guidelines, however, you should read the
description of each input field under Daylighting:Controls, Daylighting:ReferencePoint, and review
the IDF example, above, and the sample daylighting input, PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 609

Figure 1.74: Example showing location of daylighting reference points in the zone coordinate system
(relative) of a rectangular zone with three windows. (a) Perspective view, (b) plan view, (c) elevation
view. All dimensions are in meters.
610 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.15.3.1 Use of Window Multipliers

If an exterior wall in a daylit enclosure has a number of identical windows, the windows should be
entered separately rather than using a window multiplier (ref: FenestrationSurface:Detailed). Using
a multiplier would give an incorrect illuminance calculation since individual windows would not be
positioned correctly on the wall.

1.15.3.2 Use of Zone Multipliers

A zone multiplier should not be used on a daylit zone if the windows in the zone are shadowed by
exterior obstructions like trees or neighboring buildings, or by obstructions caused by other parts
of building. The reason for this is that the shadowing on the windows of the multiplied zone may
be different from zone to zone depending on exactly how the shadows fall on the zones. However, a
zone multiplier may be used on a daylit zone if the shadowing is by overhangs, fins and/or window
setback.

1.15.3.3 Thermal Zoning for Daylighting

To correctly calculate both direct and inter-reflected daylight illuminance you should try to model
a thermal zone consisting of several similar rooms separated by interior walls as a representative
room with a zone multiplier (ref: Zone). An example of this is shown in Figure 1.75. Room-1 is the
representative room, with a zone multiplier = 4.
Interior walls IW-1, IW-2 and IW-3 should be treated as adiabatic, i.e., they should have Outside
Boundary Condition = Surface and Outside Boundary Condition Object = IW-1, IW-2, or IW-3,
respectively (ref: BuildingSurface:Detailed). Similarly, if the ceiling and floor of Room-1 are interior
surfaces, they should be treated as adiabatic.

Figure 1.75: For daylighting purposes the thermal zone enclosed by the dashed boundary line should
be modeled as a typical zone (Room-1) with a zone multiplier of 4.

Sometimes a representative room cannot be found. Figure 1.76 shows a section of a building with
four rooms having different daylighting characteristics because of different floor area, orientation
and/or window size. In this case lumping the rooms into a single thermal zone would give nonsen-
sical daylighting illuminance values because of the presence of the interior walls, which EnergyPlus
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 611

ignores when calculating illuminance reaching a reference point directly from a window (i.e., without
reflection). The solution in this case is to describe each room as a separate thermal zone with its
own daylighting reference points, and input the interior walls because these will participate in the
calculation of inter-reflected illuminance.

Figure 1.76: Rooms A, B, C and D have different daylighting characteristics. If lumped into a
single thermal zone the daylighting calculation will be less accurate because the blockage of direct
light by the interior walls between these rooms is modeled with some simplifications (see Interior
Obstructions below). To get a good daylighting calculation each room should be input as a separate
thermal zone.

1.15.3.4 Multiple Lighting Zones

The daylighting control calculation allows a thermal zone or space to be divided into multiple
independently-controlled lighting zones. (See the fields: Daylighting Reference Point Name, Frac-
tion of Lights Controlled by Reference Point, and Illuminance Setpoint at Reference Point.) An
example is shown in Figure 1.77, where a relatively deep thermal zone has two lighting zones of
equal area.

1.15.3.5 Fins, Overhangs and Other Exterior Obstructions

The daylighting calculation accounts for the presence of exterior obstructions in determining the
amount of light that strikes the windows. For daylighting purposes exterior obstructions fall into
three categories:

– Fins, overhangs, trees, neighboring buildings, etc., entered with the objects Shad-
ing:Zone:Detailed, Shading:Site:Detailed, or Shading:Building:Detailed.
– Building surfaces like walls and roofs (in an L-shaped building, for example).
– Surfaces associated with window setback.
612 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.77: Two independently-controlled lighting zones, each with 50% of the area of the thermal
zone.

Category (1) obstructions can have an associated solar transmittance schedule (see description of
the field Transmittance Schedule Name for these shading surfaces). If this schedule is not specified,
the surface is opaque (has zero transmittance).
The daylighting calculation takes the transmittance into account in determining, for example, how
much light enters a window through a translucent awning. It is assumed that the solar and visible
transmittance is the same and that the surfaces are non-diffusing, i.e., they do not change the
direction of transmitted light. Ref:Daylighting:Controls.
Category (2) and (3) surfaces are assumed to be opaque.
Surfaces in all three categories are assumed to be black, i.e., they do not reflect light, unless you
set if “Reflections” option is chosen in the Building object. Then obstructions can reflect light,
such as the top of an overhang reflecting light onto the window above. Ref: Building, Field: Solar
Distribution (with reflections options).

1.15.3.6 Interior Obstructions

The daylighting calculation accounts for the presence of interior obstructions that lie between a
window and a reference point. Unlike exterior obstructions, which can be light transmitting, interior
obstructions are assumed to be opaque. Interior obstructions can reduce or eliminate the light
directly reaching the reference point through a window.
However, interior obstructions that are walls, ceilings or floors are reflecting so they contribute to
the inter-reflected component of daylight illuminance as do the non-obstructing zone surfaces.
Interior obstructions can belong to the Shading object series. This type of obstruction is assumed
to be non-reflecting so does not contribute to the inter-reflected component of daylight illuminance.
An example of an interior obstruction that is a wall in an L-shaped room is shown in Figure 1.78.
Here, wall A (or, equivalently, Wall B) prevents light from directly getting to the Reference Point
from the window.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 613

Figure 1.78: Wall A (or Wall B) is an interior obstruction that prevents light from directly reaching
the daylighting reference point from the window.

1.15.3.7 Double Façades: Daylighting through Interior Windows

The Daylighting:Controls method, with no additional user input, calculates the contribution of
daylight that passes into a target zone through interior windows.[1] The origin of this daylight is
exterior windows in adjacent zones that share interior windows with the target zone. This capability
is aimed at daylighting through a double façade (also called “double envelope” or “double skin.”)
This is illustrated in Figure 1.79, which shows a double-façade buffer zone, Z0, with exterior windows
EW1 and EW2. Z0 shares interior windows IW1, IW2 and IW3 with daylit occupied zones ZD1,
ZD2 and ZD3, respectively (“daylit” here means the zone has an associated Daylighting:Controls
object). The daylight illuminance at reference points RP1, RP2 and RP3 comes from the interior
windows and has two main sources:

– Daylight that passes through both an exterior window and an interior window in Z0 and reaches
a reference point without reflection. This is called “direct illuminance.”
– Daylight from Z0 that passes through an interior window and reaches a reference point by inter-
reflection in the daylit zone. Because the program calculates this source from the interior solar
distribution in Z0 it is recommended that the most accurate calculation of this distribution be
made, which occurs if Solar Distribution = FullInteriorAndExterior in the Building object.

A third possible source is neglected because it is generally small in double-façade cases. This is
daylight that is reflected from the surfaces of Z0, passes through an interior window and then
reaches a reference point without inter-reflection in the daylit zone.
PurchAirWithDoubleFacadeDaylighting.idf is an input example of daylighting through an interior
window.
614 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.79: Vertical section through a double-façade building showing daylighting through interior
windows. The dashed lines show that (1) reference point RP1 receives direct light from exterior
window EW1 via interior window IW1; (2) RP2 receives direct light from EW1 and EW2 via IW2;
and (3) RP3 receives direct light from EW2 via IW3.

1.15.3.8 Interior Window Daylighting Configurations that EnergyPlus Can Cal-

culate

Figure 1.80 shows schematically the general configuration of daylighting through interior windows
that can be calculated with EnergyPlus. Here, daylit zone ZD has one or more interior windows
that are adjacent to other zones, each of which has one or more exterior windows. ZD itself may
or may not have exterior windows. If it does, than the daylight illuminance from its exterior and
interior windows will be additive. The zones adjacent to ZD may or may not be daylit and may or
may not have other interior windows that are not adjacent to ZD. (The program does not consider
the illuminance in ZD from electric lighting in adjacent zones.)

1.15.3.9 Interior Window Daylighting Configurations that EnergyPlus Cannot

Calculate

Figure 1.81 shows schematically a configuration of daylighting through interior windows that cannot
be calculated with EnergyPlus. Here, zone Z has an interior window that is adjacent to zone Z1
which in turn has an interior window adjacent to zone Z2. However, the daylight from the exterior
window in Z2 that enters Z after passing through Z1 is not calculated because Z2 is not adjacent to
Z.

1.15.3.10 Restrictions on Shading Devices

There are two restrictions on the use of exterior-window shading devices when a daylit zone has
interior windows:
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 615

Figure 1.80: General configuration of daylighting through interior windows that can be calculated
with EnergyPlus. IW = interior window, EW = exterior window.

Figure 1.81: Configuration in which daylighting of zone Z through its interior window cannot be
calculated with EnergyPlus. IW = interior window, EW = exterior window.
616 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1) If two daylit zones share an interior window, neither zone can have an exterior window whose
shading device does glare control (i.e., the WindowShadingControl for the exterior window has Glare
Control Is Active = Yes).
2) If two daylit zones share an interior window, neither zone can have an exterior window with a
WindowShadingControl that has Shading Control Type = MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint.

1.15.4 DElight Daylighting Method

The DElight method of analyzing daylighting in buildings is very similar to that used in the SplitFlux
method and uses the same Daylighting:Controls and Daylighting:ReferencePoint objects but the
Daylighting Method should be set to DElight. For each point in time, DElight calculates the interior
daylighting illuminance at specified reference points and then determines how much the electric
lighting can be reduced while still achieving a combined daylighting and electric lighting illuminance
target. The daylight illuminance level in a zone depends on many factors, including exterior light
sources; location, size, and visible light transmittance of simple and complex fenestration systems;
reflectance of interior surfaces; and location of calculation reference points. The subsequent reduction
of electric lighting depends on daylight illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone
controlled, and type of lighting control.
There are two primary differences between the SplitFlux and DElight methods of calculating interior
illuminance levels. The first is that DElight includes the capability of analyzing complex fenestration
systems that include geometrically complicated shading systems (e.g., roof monitors) and/or optically
complicated glazings (e.g., prismatic or holographic glass). The second key difference is that DElight
uses a radiosity method to calculate the effects of light reflection inside a zone. These methods are
discussed in more detail in the engineering documentation.
There are other important differences between the two methods. One is the inability of DElight to
perform the type of dynamic shading controls possible using the SplitFlux method at each point in
time during the thermal simulation (e.g., changes in electrochromic glazing transmittances and blind
slat angles). A second is the current lack of visual quality (e.g., glare) calculations performed by
DElight. Third, the modeling of interior obstructions is different in the two methods. In the DElight
method interior obstructions block interreflections but do not block the initial direct illuminance.
In the SplitFlux method, interior obstructions block the initial direct illuminance but do not block
interreflections. See the engineering documentation for more details. Fourth, when using DElight
daylighting the presence of exterior shading surfaces such as overhangs is ignored.
Input for invoking the DElight method involves three object types: Daylighting:Controls, Day-
lighting:ReferencePoint, and Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration.

1.15.5 Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration
Another input object that can only be used when the DElight Daylighting Method is used is
the Daylighting:DElight:ComplexFenestration object. The DElight daylighting analysis method
can be applied to daylighting zones that contain only simple fenestration systems such as win-
dows and skylights that are standard EnergyPlus sub-surfaces. In this situation, no Daylight-
ing:DElight:ComplexFenestration object would be input.
In addition to analyzing simple fenestration systems, DElight includes the capability of analyzing
complex fenestration systems such as geometrically complicated static shading systems (e.g., roof
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 617

monitors) and/or optically complicated glazings (e.g., prismatic or holographic glass). This ca-
pability is based on characterizing these complex fenestration systems (CFS) using bi-directional
transmittance distribution functions (BTDF). In general, BTDF data for a specific CFS must be ei-
ther measured or simulated (e.g., using ray-tracing techniques) prior to employing DElight to analyze
it within EnergyPlus. The current implementation of DElight CFS calculations within EnergyPlus
supports two approaches to the input of BTDF, an analytical approach and a file-based approach.
The details of inputting these two approaches are described below under the User Complex Fenes-
tration Type field.
Two analytical CFS BTDF types are currently supported, window and light shelf. The file-based
approach requires that a user has access to a data file containing raw BTDF data that DElight reads
as additional input during its analysis calculations. BTDF data files are described separately since
it is anticipated that individual EnergyPlus users will not create these data files themselves.
The methods related to characterizing and analyzing CFS using BTDF are still evolving. DElight
is an early implementation of CFS analysis methods. These methods, and the input associated with
them here, will likely change in the future.

1.15.5.1 Inputs

1.15.5.1.1 Field: User Name

User name of the DElight daylighting Complex Fenestration to which the following input applies.

1.15.5.1.2 Field: Complex Fenestration Type

Type name of the DElight daylighting Complex Fenestration system to be analyzed. This type name
must take one of the following two forms.

BTDF^GEN^Analytical Type^Normal Visible Transmittance^Dispersion Angle

BTDF^FILE^Filename

The first form above is for supported analytical CFS types which currently include WINDOW
and LIGHTSHELF. While these analytical types are relatively simple, they represent flexible ways
to explore diffusing CFS systems and the impact of light shelves in redirecting light through an
aperture. Each of these types also requires the visible transmittance of the CFS at normal incidence
angle, and a dispersion angle (in degrees) that represents the “spread” of transmitted light. A small
dispersion angle of 10 corresponds to clear glazing while a large angle of 90 corresponds to perfectly
diffusing glazing. The “^” symbol must be used as a delimiter between sub-fields within this Complex
Fenestration type name string as shown in the IDF example for WINDOW below, and in the DElight
sample input data files.
The second form above is for CFS types for which there is pre-measured or pre-simulated BTDF
data. In this case the Filename sub-field must be a valid data file name that is associated with an
existing BTDF dataset that DElight can use in its calculations.

1.15.5.1.3 Field: Building Surface Name

The name of the heat transfer surface object instance hosting this Complex Fenestration, analogous
to the Building Surface Name field for subsurfaces such as Windows. This must be a valid name
that has been associated with a heat transfer surface contained in the same EnergyPlus input data
file.
618 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.15.5.1.4 Field: Window Name

The name of the Window (ref: FenestrationSurface:Detailed object) instance that will be used to
account for the geometry, and the solar/thermal gains/losses, of the Complex Fenestration system
surface. This must be a valid name that has been associated with a Window contained in the same
EnergyPlus input data file. The geometry for the Complex Fenestration is taken from the geometry
input for this standard EnergyPlus subsurface, hence the term “Doppelganger.”
Note that DElight only deals with the visible spectrum of light transmitted through a Complex
Fenestration. To account for the solar/thermal influences of a Complex Fenestration, a geometrically
coincident subsurface that will be accounted for by methods already within EnergyPlus must be
defined in the input data file. This is an interim solution to the issue of accounting for solar/thermal
influences that will likely change as techniques analogous to the daylighting analysis of BTDF are
developed.

1.15.5.1.5 Field: Fenestration Rotation

The in-plane counter-clockwise rotation angle between the Complex Fenestration optical reference
direction and the base edge of the Doppelganger Surface geometry. The Complex Fenestration
optical reference direction is the direction of the zero azimuth angle for the BDTF dataset. This
Rotation angle will typically be zero when the Doppelganger surface is rectangular and its width
edge is aligned with the Complex Fenestration optical reference direction.
An IDF example for an analytical WINDOW type CFS:

Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration ,
Window CFS , !- DElight Complex Fenestration User Name
BTDF^GEN^WINDOW ^1.0^20.0 , !- Complex Fenestration Type
ZN003:WALL001 , !- Complex Fenestration Host Surface
Zn003:Wall001:Doppel001 , !- Doppelganger Surface Name
0.0; !- Fenestration Rotation {deg}

1.15.5.2 Outputs

The following daylighting-specific outputs are available for Daylighting:Controls:

– Zone,Average,Site Exterior Beam Normal Illuminance [lux]

– Zone,Average,Site Exterior Horizontal Beam Illuminance [lux]
– Zone,Average,Site Exterior Horizontal Sky Illuminance [lux]
– Zone,Average,Site Beam Solar Radiation Luminous Efficacy [lum/W]
– Zone,Average,Site Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Luminous Efficacy [lum/W]
– Zone,Average,Site Daylighting Model Sky Clearness []
– Zone,Average,Site Daylighting Model Sky Brightness []
– Surface,Average,Daylighting Window Reference Point <x> View Luminance [cd/m2]
– Surface,Average,Daylighting Window Reference Point <x> Illuminance [lux]
– Zone,Average,Daylighting Reference Point <x> Illuminance [lux]
– Zone,Average,Daylighting Reference Point <x> Glare Index []
– Zone,Sum,Daylighting Reference Point <x> Glare Index Setpoint Exceeded Time [hr]
– Zone,Sum,Daylighting Reference Point <x> Daylight Illuminance Setpoint Exceeded Time [hr]
– Zone,Average,Daylighting Lighting Power Multiplier []
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 619

1.15.5.2.1 Site Exterior Beam Normal Illuminance [lux]

Beam normal illuminance of the sun at the earth’s surface, measured in lux (lumens/m2 )

1.15.5.2.2 Site Exterior Horizontal Beam Illuminance [lux]

Beam illuminance on an unobstructed horizontal plane at the earth’s surface. Equals “Site Exterior
Beam Normal Illuminance” times sine of solar altitude.

1.15.5.2.3 Site Exterior Horizontal Sky Illuminance [lux]

Illuminance from sky solar radiation on an unobstructed horizontal plane at the earth’s surface. The
total exterior horizontal illuminance is the sum of “Site Exterior Horizontal Beam Illuminance” and
“Site Exterior Horizontal Sky Illuminance.”

1.15.5.2.4 Site Beam Solar Radiation Luminous Efficacy [lum/W]

A measure of the visible light content of beam solar radiation; equal to the number of lumens per
watt of beam solar radiation. Depends on atmospheric conditions (moisture, turbidity, cloudiness)
and solar altitude.

1.15.5.2.5 Site Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Luminous Efficacy [lum/W]

A measure of the visible light content of sky diffuse solar radiation; equal to the number of lumens
per watt of sky diffuse solar radiation. Depends on atmospheric conditions (moisture, turbidity,
cloudiness) and solar altitude.

1.15.5.2.6 Site Daylighting Model Sky Clearness []

Clearness of sky. One of the factors used to determine sky type and luminous efficacy of solar
radiation (see EnergyPlus Engineering Document). Sky Clearness close to 1.0 corresponds to an
overcast sky. Sky Clearness > 6 is a clear sky.

1.15.5.2.7 Site Daylighting Model Sky Brightness []

Brightness of sky. One of the factors used to determine sky type and luminous efficacy of solar
radiation (see EnergyPlus Engineering Document).

1.15.5.2.8 Daylighting Window Reference Point <x> View Luminance [cd/m2]

The area-averaged luminance of an exterior window as viewed from the first reference point in the
daylit zone containing the window. In general, higher window luminance values are associated with
higher daylight glare values. (Printed only for exterior windows in daylit zones without interior
windows.)

1.15.5.2.9 Daylighting Window Reference Point <x> Illuminance [lux]

The contribution from a particular exterior window to the daylight illuminance at the first reference
point in the daylit zone containing the window. (Not printed for exterior windows in daylit zones
with interior windows.)
620 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.15.5.2.10 Daylighting Reference Point <x> Illuminance [lux]

The total daylight illuminance at the first reference point from all of the windows in a daylit zone.

1.15.5.2.11 Daylighting Reference Point <x> Glare Index []

The daylight glare index at the first reference point in a daylit zone.

1.15.5.2.12 Daylighting Reference Point <x> Glare Index Setpoint Exceeded

Time [hr]
The number of hours when the calculated daylight glare index at the first reference point exceeds
the glare index setpoint.

1.15.5.2.13 Daylighting Reference Point <x> Daylight Illuminance Setpoint Ex-

ceeded Time [hr]
The number of hours when the calculated daylight illuminance at the first reference point exceeds
the daylight illuminance setpoint.

1.15.5.2.14 Daylighting Lighting Power Multiplier []

The amount by which the overhead electric lighting power in a space or zone is multiplied due to
usage of daylighting to dim or switch electric lights. For example, if the multiplier is M and the
electric power without dimming is P, then the electric power with dimming is M*P. The multiplier
varies from 0.0, which corresponds to maximum dimming (zero electric lighting), to 1.0, which
corresponds to no dimming.

1.15.6 Output:IlluminanceMap
The Output:IlluminanceMap object expands on the reporting capabilities of the daylighting simu-
lation. For any zone simulated with Daylighting:Controls, the illuminance map can generate up to
2,500 points of additional daylighting illuminance values. The resulting map is output as a comma
delimited text file that can be imported into a spreadsheet program for rapid visualization of the
daylighting illuminance patterns in a zone. The values are produced on an hourly basis. The Z height
of the map is constant (parallel to a flat floor). More than one illuminance map can be created for
a zone. IlluminanceMap output is available only when SplitFlux daylighting method is selected in
Daylighting:Controls object.

1.15.6.1 Inputs

1.15.6.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the map object.

1.15.6.1.2 Field: Zone Name

Reference to a zone with Daylighting:Controls. The zone must lie completely within a single solar
enclosure.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 621

1.15.6.1.3 Field: Z Height

The height or elevation of the grid of daylighting points.

1.15.6.1.4 Field: X Minimum Coordinate

The minimum X coordinate boundary for the map.

1.15.6.1.5 Field: X Maximum Coordinate

The maximum X coordinate boundary for the map.

1.15.6.1.6 Field: Number of X Grid Points

The number of daylighting reference points in the X direction from the minimum to the maximum
boundaries. The maximum number of points that can be generated is 2500 (Number of X Grid
Points X Number of Y Grid Points).

1.15.6.1.7 Field: Y Minimum Coordinate

The minimum Y coordinate boundary for the map.

1.15.6.1.8 Field: Y Maximum Coordinate

The maximum Y coordinate boundary for the map.

1.15.6.1.9 Field: Number of Y Grid Points

The number of daylighting reference points in the Y direction from the minimum to the maximum
boundaries. The maximum number of points that can be generated is 2500 (Number of X Grid
Points X Number of Y Grid Points).
Note: Daylighting factors cannot be accurately calculated for reference points that are very close
to a wall or window (less than 0.15 m or 6 inches). An error is reported for a reference point that is
too close to a window, but no error is reported for a point that is too close to a wall.

Output:IlluminanceMap ,
Daylit Map , ! Map Name
Daylit Zone , ! Zone Name
0, ! Z Height [m]
0.1, ! X Minimum Coordinate [m]
4.9, ! X Maximum Coordinate [m]
10, ! Number of X Grid Points
0.1, ! Y Minimum Coordinate [m]
9.9, ! Y Maximum Coordinate [m]
10; ! Number of Y grid Points

Since not all zones are rectangular, it is possible to have map points that are outside the zone. Any
illuminance registered at these points is inaccurate and, additionally, a “*” marks these values for
easy observance.

1.15.7 OutputControl:IlluminanceMap:Style
This object specifies the “style” for the illuminance map output (described in the Output Details and
Examples document). As described early in the document (see: EnergyPlus Output Processing),
the user may select the “style” for the daylighting illuminance map output file (eplusmap.<ext>).
622 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.15.7.1 Inputs

1.15.7.1.1 Field: Column Separator

For this field, the desired separator for columns is entered. “Comma” creates comma separated field-
s/columns in the outputs (eplusmap.csv file is created). “Tab” creates tab separated fields/columns
in the outputs (eplusmap.tab file is created). “Fixed” creates space separated fields/columns in the
outputs (eplusmap.txt file is created) but these are not necessarily lined up for easy printing.
Note that both tab and comma separated files easily import into ExcelTM or other spreadsheet
programs. The tab delimited files can also be viewed by text editors, word processing programs and
easily converted to “tables” within those programs.

1.15.8 Daylighting Devices

Daylighting devices work in conjunction with the Daylighting:Controls object to simulate components
that can improve daylighting in a zone.
Daylighting devices are also tightly integrated into the zone heat balance. The thermal effects of
these devices are simulated with or without the use of a Daylighting:Controls object.
There are two types of daylighting device in EnergyPlus: tubular daylighting devices and daylighting
shelves.

1.15.9 DaylightingDevice:Tubular
Tubular daylighting devices (TDDs), also known as tubular skylights or light pipes, are used to bring
natural exterior daylight into the hard-to-reach, interior spaces of a building.
TDDs consist of three components: a dome, a pipe, and a diffuser.
In EnergyPlus each of these components corresponds to an object in the input file.
The dome and diffuser are defined in the same way as windows using the FenestrationSurface:Detailed
object. The Surface Type field must be specified as TubularDaylightDome or TubularDaylightDiffuser
accordingly.
The location and orientation of the dome surface affect the total amount of daylight collected.
The Base Surface of the diffuser object determines to which zone the daylighting is delivered. The
location and orientation of the diffuser surface affect the amount of daylight received at the Day-
lighting:Controls reference points.
Although the object definition is the same as for a window, there are several restrictions on Tubu-
larDaylightDome and TubularDaylightDiffuser objects:

– Shading control devices are not allowed.

– Frames and dividers are not allowed.
– Multipliers must be 1.0.
– Dome, diffuser, and pipe areas (as given by diameter) must be approximately equal.
– Outside face environment objects are not allowed.
– Dome and diffuser constructions cannot be more than one layer.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 623

Figure 1.82: Tubular daylighting device diagram.

Since commercial TDDs are assumed to be cylindrical in shape, it is recommended that the circular
areas of the actual dome and diffuser be approximated with a square of equivalent area for the Tubu-
larDaylightDome and TubularDaylightDiffuser objects. Although it is possible to use a triangular
surface instead, a square is a much better geometric approximation of a circle.
Note that the TubularDaylightDome surface is allowed to have a different position and tilt from the
roof base surface. If the actual TDD projects some height above the roof surface, the TubularDay-
lightDome coordinates should be located accordingly.
The TubularDaylightDome surface automatically casts a shadow on the roof base surface. However,
since the pipe is not represented by a surface, it will not cast a shadow. If this effect must be
simulated, one or more SURFACE:SHADING objects can be used.
The dome and diffuser objects are connected by the DAYLIGHTING DEVICE:TUBULAR object:

1.15.9.1 Inputs

1.15.9.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the TDD object.

1.15.9.1.2 Field: Dome Name

Reference to a FenestrationSurface:Detailed object with Surface Type TubularDaylightDome.
624 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.83: Tubular daylighting device DXF output.

1.15.9.1.3 Field: Diffuser Name

Reference to a FenestrationSurface:Detailed object with Surface Type TubularDaylightDiffuser.

1.15.9.1.4 Field: Construction Name

The construction of the TDD pipe. The visible and solar absorptance of the inside material layer
determines the reflectivity of the inner mirrored surface of the TDD. This is very important for the
overall transmittance of the TDD.

1.15.9.1.5 Field: Diameter

The diameter [m] of the TDD pipe. The area of the pipe must match the areas of the dome and
diffuser.

1.15.9.1.6 Field: Total Length

The total length [m] of the TDD pipe between the dome and the diffuser, including the exterior
part above the roof. The exterior length is determined internally by subtracting the transition zone
lengths from the total length.

1.15.9.1.7 Field: Effective Thermal Resistance

The effective thermal resistance [m2 -K/W], i.e. R-value, of the TDD between the exterior dome
surface and the interior diffuser surface.

1.15.9.1.8 Field: Transition Zone<#> Name

Name of zone that the TDD pipe passes through before reaching the delivery zone.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 625

1.15.9.1.9 Field: Transition Zone <#> Length

Length of pipe [m] in the transition zone. This is used for determining heat gains due to solar
absorbed by the pipe in each transition zone. The distribution of absorbed solar gains can be
customized by adjusting the length of pipe in each transition zone. The transition zone gain is
proportional to the length of pipe in the zone. If no transition zones are specified, all solar absorbed
by the pipe is lost to the exterior environment.
The Transition Zone Name and Transition Zone Length fields can be repeated for additional tran-
sition zones.
DaylightingDevice:Tubular ,
Pipe1 , !- Object Name
Dome1 , !- Dome Name
Diffuser1 , !- Diffuser Name
Reflective Aluminum , !- Construction Name
0.3556 , !- Diameter [m] (approximately 14", a standard size)
1.4, !- Total Length [m] (subtract zone lengths to get outdoor exposed
length)
0.28, !- Effective Thermal Resistance [m2 -K/W] between TubularDaylightDome
and TubularDaylightDiffuser
Attic Zone , !- Transition Zone 1 Name
1.1; !- Transition Zone 1 Length [m]

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Dome1 , !- Subsurface Name
TubularDaylightDome , !- Surface Type
Clear Acrylic Dome , !- Construction Name (only 1 layer allowed in construction)
Attic Roof , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Outside Face Environment (not allowed for TubularDaylightDome )
0.0, !- VF to Ground
, !- Window Shading Control (not allowed for TubularDaylightDome )
, !- Frame/Divider Name (not allowed for TubularDaylightDome )
1.0, !- Multiplier (must be 1.0 for TubularDaylightDome )
4, !- Number of Vertices
2.3425 , 3.1575 , 3.9,
2.3425 , 2.8425 , 3.9,
2.6575 , 2.8425 , 3.9,
2.6575 , 3.1575 , 3.9;

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Diffuser1 , !- Subsurface Name
TubularDaylightDiffuser , !- Surface Type
Frosted Acrylic Diffuser , !- Construction Name (only 1 layer allowed in construction)
Daylit Zone Ceiling , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Outside Face Environment (not allowed for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
0.0, !- VF to Ground
, !- Window Shading Control (not allowed for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
, !- Frame/Divider Name (not allowed for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
1.0, !- Multiplier (must be 1.0 for TubularDaylightDiffuser )
4, !- Number of Vertices
2.3425 , 3.1575 , 2.5,
2.3425 , 2.8425 , 2.5,
2.6575 , 2.8425 , 2.5,
2.6575 , 3.1575 , 2.5;

1.15.9.2 Outputs

– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]

– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Pipe Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Heat Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Heat Loss Rate [W]
626 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Beam Solar Transmittance []

– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Beam Visible Transmittance []
– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Diffuse Solar Transmittance []
– Zone,Average,Tubular Daylighting Device Diffuse Visible Transmittance []

1.15.9.2.1 Tubular Daylighting Device Beam Solar Transmittance []

This is the transmittance of beam solar radiation through the TDD.

1.15.9.2.2 Tubular Daylighting Device Beam Visible Transmittance []

This is the transmittance of beam visible radiation, or daylight, through the TDD.

1.15.9.2.3 Tubular Daylighting Device Diffuse Solar Transmittance []

This is the transmittance of diffuse solar radiation through the TDD.

1.15.9.2.4 Tubular Daylighting Device Diffuse Visible Transmittance []

This is the transmittance of diffuse visible radiation, or daylight, through the TDD.

1.15.9.2.5 Tubular Daylighting Device Heat Gain Rate [W]

This is the rate of heat gain to the zone by the TDD, in Watts.

1.15.9.2.6 Tubular Daylighting Device Heat Loss Rate [W]

This is the rate of heat loss from the zone by the TDD, in Watts.

1.15.9.2.7 Tubular Daylighting Device Pipe Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]

This is the rate at which solar radiation is absorbed by the pipe in the TDD, in Watts.

1.15.9.2.8 Tubular Daylighting Device Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]

This is the rate at which solar radiation is transmitted by the TDD, in Watts.
In addition, several surface and window variables are also reported for the TubularDaylightDome
and TubularDaylightDiffuser objects. For the TubularDaylightDome:

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Area [m2]

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Fraction []
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per
Area[W/m2]
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 627

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value[]

– Zone,Average,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]

For the TubularDaylightDiffuser:

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2] (incident
inside of pipe)
– Zone,Average,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W] (same as Tubular Day-
lighting Device Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate)
– Zone,Average,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]

1.15.10 DaylightingDevice:Shelf
Daylighting shelves, or simply light shelves, are another device for bringing more daylight into a
building. Installed as an accessory to a window, daylighting shelves work by reflecting exterior light
onto the ceiling of a room. Daylighting shelves can have an inside shelf, an outside shelf, or both.

Figure 1.84: Daylighting shelf diagram.

The inside shelf redistributes light that would have entered the zone anyway. Instead of entering as
a beam, all light is reflected onto the zone ceiling and is converted to diffuse shortwave radiation.
The outside shelf changes the amount of light entering the zone. If the shelf surface is more reflective
than the ground, it can increase the amount of light incident on the upper part of the window.
However, the shading effect of the outside shelf on the lower part of the window must also be
considered as it can easily negate any gain achieved in the upper part of the window. All light
reflected from the outside shelf that enters the upper window is assumed to strike the ceiling.
628 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.85: Daylighting shelf DXF output.

In EnergyPlus a daylighting shelf is simulated using a DaylightingDevice:Shelf object in combination

with up to three other objects: a window, a heat transfer surface, and an attached shading surface.
The window must be divided into two window surfaces: an upper window and a lower window.
The upper window interacts directly with the daylighting shelf object and is not allowed to have
any shading control devices or frames or dividers. The lower window does not interact with the
daylighting shelf object, but does receive shading from the outside shelf. There are no restrictions
on the lower window.
The inside shelf is defined as a regular heat transfer surface in the zone. However, the surface
must have the Outside Boundary Condition field set to Surface with itself as the other zone surface.
Shading and thermal mass effects are taken into account.
The outside shelf is defined as a Shading:Zone:Detailed object. The visible and solar absorptance of
the outside material layer determines the reflectivity of the shelf.

NOTE: Unlike a regular Shading:Zone:Detailed object, the vertices of the outside shelf surface
must be ordered so that the outward normal vector points upward, i.e. toward the upper window.
This is necessary in order for the outside shelf to properly receive sunlight and shading from other
surfaces. A mirror shading surface with the outward normal vector pointing in the opposite
direction is automatically created by the program to shade the lower window.

The inside shelf and outside shelf are both optional. However, if neither shelf is specified, the
daylighting shelf object has no effect on the simulation.
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 629

1.15.10.1 Inputs

1.15.10.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the daylighting shelf object.

1.15.10.1.2 Field: Window Name

Reference to a FenestrationSurface:Detailed object with Surface Type WINDOW.

1.15.10.1.3 Field: Inside Shelf Name

Reference to a BuildingSurface:Detailed object. This field is optional. If used, this surface must
have OTHERZONESURFACE specified for the Outside Face Environment field and the referenced
other zone surface must be itself. The number of vertices of this surface object must be 4.

1.15.10.1.4 Field: Outside Shelf Name

Reference to a Shading:Zone:Detailed object. This field is optional. If used, the number of vertices
of this surface object must be 4.

1.15.10.1.5 Field: Outside Shelf Construction Name

Reference to a CONSTRUCTION object. This field is required if an outside shelf is specified. The
visible and solar absorptance of the outside material layer determines the shelf reflectivity.

1.15.10.1.6 Field: View Factor To Outside Shelf

User defined value for the view factor from the window to the outside shelf. This field is optional. If
not specified, an exact view factor is calculated for two perpendicular rectangles of the same width
having a shared edge. If the given surfaces do not meet these geometric requirements, it is necessary
to specify a value here.

NOTE: It is up to the user to adjust the view factor to ground of the upper window to account
for the part of the view blocked by the outside shelf. The calculated View Factor To Outside
Shelf is reported in the eio file for this purpose. For the typical case where the shelf is parallel
to the ground and the upper window is perpendicular to the ground, the view factor to ground
is simply: 0.5 – View Factor To Outside Shelf.

DaylightingDevice:Shelf ,
Shelf , !- Name
Daylit Upper Window , !- Window Name
Inside Shelf , !- Inside Shelf Name
Outside Shelf , !- Outside Shelf Name
Shelf Construction; !- Outside Shelf Construction Name (required if outside shelf specified)
! 0.29; !- View Factor To Outside Shelf (optional)

FenestrationSurface :Detailed ,
Daylit Upper Window , !- Subsurface Name
Window , !- Surface Type
Standard Window , !- Construction Name
Daylit South Wall , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Outside Face Environment
0.211 , !- VF to Ground (user must adjust to account for view factor to outside shelf)
630 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

, !- Window Shading Control (not allowed)

, !- Frame/Divider Name (not allowed)
1.0, !- Multiplier (must be 1.0)
4, !- Number of Vertices
1.0, 0.0, 2.8,
1.0, 0.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.8;

BuildingSurface:Detailed ,
Inside Shelf , !- Surface Name
Wall , !- Surface Type
Shelf Construction , !- Construction Name
Daylit Zone , !- Zone Name
OtherZoneSurface , !- Exterior Conditions (must be OtherZoneSurface)
Inside Shelf , !- Target (must be itself)
NoSun , !- Solar Exposure
NoWind , !- Wind Exposure
0.0, !- VF to Ground
4, !- Number of Vertices
1.0, 0.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.0,
4.0, 1.0, 2.0,
1.0, 1.0, 2.0;

Shading:Zone:Detailed ,
Outside Shelf , !- Surface Name
Daylit South Wall , !- Base Surface Name
, !- Shading Transmittance Schedule (default is always opaque)
4, !- Number of Vertices
1.0, 0.0, 2.0, !- Outward normal vector must point up toward the upper window
1.0, -1.0, 2.0,
4.0, -1.0, 2.0,
4.0, 0.0, 2.0;

1.15.10.2 Outputs

The view factor to outside shelf calculation shows up in the .eio file along with the associated window
and window view factors to sky and ground:
! <Shelf Details>,Name,View Factor to Outside Shelf,Window Name,Window View Factor to
Sky,Window View Factor to Ground
SHELF,0.29,DAYLIT UPPER WINDOW,0.50,0.21
This variable reports the calculated View Factor To Outside Shelf so that the user can correctly
adjust the view factor to ground of the upper window.
The usual window and surface variables are relevant for the upper window:

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Area [m2]

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Fraction []
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per
Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value[]
1.15. GROUP – DAYLIGHTING 631

– Zone,Average,Surface Window Transmitted Solar Radiation Rate [W]

– Zone,Average,Surface Window Total Glazing Layers Absorbed Solar Radiation Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Surface Window Heat Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Surface Window Heat Loss Rate [W]

The following surface variables are reported for the outside shelf surface, if specified:

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Area [m2]

– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Sunlit Fraction []
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Beam Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Incident Ground Diffuse Solar Radiation Rate per
Area[W/m2]
– Zone,Average,Surface Outside Face Beam Solar Incident Angle Cosine Value[]

1.15.11 DaylightingDevice:LightWell
This object is used to model the impacts on daylighting of a “light well” that might be associated
with exterior windows such as skylights. The light well model attenuates the light transmitted
by the skylight. The attenuation is characterized by the well efficiency, which is the ratio of the
amount of light leaving the well to the amount of light entering the well. The well efficiency varies
from close to 1.0 to close to zero if there is high attenuation. The well efficiency is used only
in the EnergyPlus detailed daylighting calculation, where it multiplies the beam and diffuse light
transmitted by the skylight. (The well efficiency is not used in calculating the solar gain through
the skylight.)
The input object describes the light well using basic characteristics of the geometry along with
the visible reflectance of the well’s side walls. The following figure diagrams how the geometry is
characterized.

1.15.11.1 Inputs

1.15.11.1.1 Field: Exterior Window Name

The name of the exterior window that this Light Well is associated with. Generally this is a skylight
in a roof. However, light wells can be applied to an exterior window of any slope. Light wells can
be assigned to both rectangular and triangular exterior windows, but they should not be assigned
to interior windows. Note that the sides of the light well can be sloped and the bottom of the light
well can be any shape, not just rectangular.

1.15.11.1.2 Field: Height of Well

The distance from the bottom of the skylight to the bottom of the well. If the skylight and well
bottom are not coplanar, this is the distance from the center of the bottom of the skylight to center
of the bottom of the well. See Figure 1.86.
632 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.86: Skylight with light well: (a) perspective view, (b) vertical section. If the bottom of the
light well is a rectangle of side lengths c and d, as shown in (a), then the perimeter of the bottom
of the well = 2(c+d) and the area = cd (see description of field names for the Light Well object).

1.15.11.1.3 Field: Perimeter of Bottom of Well

The perimeter of the bottom opening of the well. See Figure 1.86.

1.15.11.1.4 Field: Area of Bottom of Well

The area of the bottom opening of the well. A warning will be issued if this area is less that the
area of the skylight, including frame if present. See Figure 1.86.

1.15.11.1.5 Field: Visible Reflectance of Well Walls

The visible reflectance of the side walls of the well. If the walls do not all have the same reflectance,
an area-weighted average value can be used. This is the well-wall reflectance expressed as a fraction.
An IDF example:
DaylightingDevice:LightWell , ! The well is 60% reflecting , is 1.2m high and has a 2.5m x 5.5m
bottom opening.
Skylight -1, !- Name of Exterior Window that this Light Well Applies To
1.2, !- Height of Well(m)
16.0, !- Perimeter of Bottom of Well (m)
13.75 , !- Area of Bottom of Well (m2)
0.60; !- Visible Reflectance of Well Walls

1.15.12 Daylighting Modeling Options

The following table shows what input objects/fields to use to model different daylighting options. It
also gives the name of an example input, if available, that demonstrates the option.

Table 1.32: Daylighting Modeling Options

Option Object/Field or Output Variable Input File

Allow a thermal zone to be Daylighting:Controls, Daylighting:ReferencePoint PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf,

daylit DElight-Detailed-
Comparison.idf
1.16. GROUP – EXTERIOR ENERGY USE EQUIPMENT 633

Table 1.32: Daylighting Modeling Options

Option Object/Field or Output Variable Input File

Specify visible transmittance WindowMaterial:Glazing PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf

of the glazing
Specify the visible WindowMaterial:Shade, WindowMaterial:Screen or PurchAirWindowBlind.idf
transmittance of a shading WindowMaterial:Blind
device
Use a shading device to WindowMaterial:Shade or WindowMaterial:Blind; PurchAirWindowBlind.idf
control glare WindowShadingControl*
Use electrochromic glazing WindowShadingControl/Shading Type = PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf
to control glare SwitchableGlazing, Shading Control Type = On If High
Glare, Glare Control Is Active = Yes*
Adjust electrochromic WindowShadingControl/Shading Type =
glazing to just meet SwitchableGlazing, Shading Control Type =
daylighting illuminance MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint*
setpoint
Print an illuminance map Daylighting:Illuminance Map*
Control electric lighting Daylighting:Controls/Lighting Control Type = PurchAirWithDaylighting.idf;
response to daylight Continuous, Stepped or Continuous/Off, plus other fields; DElight-Detailed-
illuminance level or …. Comparison.idf
Add a light shelf (with DaylightingDevice:Shelf * DaylightingDeviceShelf.idf
Daylighting:Controls)
Add a light shelf (with Daylighting:Controls using DElight DElightCFSLightShelf.idf
Daylighting:Controls)
Add a light pipe DaylightingDevice:Tubular * DaylightingDeviceTubular.idf
Model a skylight having a DaylightingDevice:LightWell *
light well
Model daylighting through See “Double Facades: Daylighting through Interior PurchAirWithDoubleFacadeDaylighting.idf
double facade Windows”*
Add diffusing (translucent) WindowMaterial:Glazing/Solar Diffusing = Yes*
glass
Model complex fenestration Daylighting:Controls using DElight DElightCFSWindow.idf
Get a radiosity-based Daylighting:Controls using DElight DElight-Detailed-
interior light inter-reflection Comparison.idf
calculation
Find effect on daylighting of Building/SolarDistribution uses “withReflections” option
solar reflected from
overhangs, neighboring
buildings, etc.
Find visible transmittance WindowMaterial:Glazing/Dirt Correction Factor for Solar
effect of dirt on window and Visible Transmittance*

*Used only with Daylighting:Controls with the SplitFlux Daylighting Method.

[1] Formerly, only the exterior windows in a zone could provide daylight to that zone.

1.16 Group – Exterior Energy Use Equipment

To facilitate the reporting of exterior consumption (to the building’s heat balance/loads considera-
tions), several objects have been included. The consumption related to these items will appear on
meters specific to the items.
634 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.16.1 Exterior:Lights
1.16.1.1 Inputs

1.16.1.1.1 Field: Name

This descriptive name allows the values of exterior lights consumption to appear in the “normal”
output variable list as well as the meters. It cannot be blank nor can it be duplicated by other
Exterior:Lights statements.

1.16.1.1.2 Field: Schedule Name

A schedule will allow the exterior lights consumption to be operationally different, hour to hour as
well as seasonally. Fractional values in the basic schedule will be applied to the design level field
below.

1.16.1.1.3 Field: Design Level

This field (in Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum electrical input to exterior lighting
fixtures that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this
is slightly more flexible in that the lighting design level could be a “diversity factor” applied to
a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour and
seasonally, the design level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.16.1.1.4 Field: Control Option

This field is used to determine how the exterior lights are controlled. There are currently two
options, ‘ScheduleNameOnly’ and ‘AstronomicalClock.’ If this field is omitted or left blank then the
program will default to Schedule Name Only mode. The ‘ScheduleNameOnly’ mode dictates that
the exterior lights always follow the schedule named in the field above. The ‘AstronomicalClock’
mode dictates that despite what the schedule indicates, the exterior lights will not run when the
sun is up. Using the Astronomical Clock mode makes it simple to model exterior lights that are
controlled by a photocell or other controller that ensures that outdoor lights will not run during the
daytime. However, the Astronomical Clock control works off of the position of the sun and therefore
does not operate exactly like a photocell. During the night, the schedule values are still applied in
the usual way.

1.16.1.1.5 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Grounds Lights”, “Facade Lights”,
etc. A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the lights will
be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the
end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary table named
EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance.
An IDF Example:

Exterior:Lights ,
OutsideLights , !- Name
ON , !- SCHEDULE Name
1000, !- Design Level
AstronomicalClock , !- Control Option
Grounds Lights; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.16. GROUP – EXTERIOR ENERGY USE EQUIPMENT 635

1.16.1.2 Outputs

Output for exterior lights appears in three possible places. It will appear on two meters (Electric-
ity:Facility and ExteriorLights:Electricity) as well as in its own designated value in the standard
output file.

– Zone,Average,Exterior Lights Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Exterior Lights Electricity Energy [J]

1.16.1.2.1 Exterior Lights Electricity Rate [W]

1.16.1.2.2 Exterior Lights Electricity Energy [J]

These are the electric power and energy consumed by the exterior lights.

1.16.2 Exterior:FuelEquipment

1.16.2.1 Inputs

1.16.2.1.1 Field: Name

This descriptive name allows the values of exterior equipment consumption to appear in the “normal”
output variable list as well as the meters. It cannot be blank nor can it be duplicated by other
Exterior:FuelEquipment or Exterior:WaterEquipment statements.

1.16.2.1.2 Field: Fuel Use Type

This field designates the appropriate meter for the exterior fuel equipment. Valid fuel types are: Elec-
tricity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Diesel, Gasoline, Coal, Steam, DistrictHe-
ating, DistrictCooling, OtherFuel1 and OtherFuel2. The fuel type triggers the application of con-
sumption amounts to the appropriate energy meters.

1.16.2.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

A schedule will allow the exterior lights consumption to be operationally different, hour to hour as
well as seasonally. Fractional values in the basic schedule will be applied to the design level field
below.

1.16.2.1.4 Field: Design Level

This field (Watts) is typically used to represent the maximum input to exterior fixtures that is then
multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is slightly more flexible in
that the design level could be a “diversity factor” applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that
while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour and seasonally, the design level field is constant
for all simulation environments.
636 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.16.2.1.5 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Fountains”, etc. A new meter for
reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Subcategories are
also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment will be assigned
to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the end-uses in the
ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating
Method Compliance table.
IDF Examples:

Exterior:FuelEquipment ,OutsideGasEq ,NaturalGas ,ON ,1000;

Exterior:FuelEquipment ,OutsideCoalEq ,Coal ,ON ,1000;
Exterior:FuelEquipment ,OutsideFuelOilNo1Eq ,FuelOilNo1 ,ON ,1000;
Exterior:FuelEquipment ,OutsideFuelOilNo2Eq ,FuelOilNo2 ,ON ,1000;
Exterior:FuelEquipment ,OutsideLPGEq ,Propane ,ON ,1000;

1.16.3 Exterior:WaterEquipment
1.16.3.1 Inputs

1.16.3.1.1 Field: Name

This descriptive name allows the values of exterior equipment consumption to appear in the “normal”
output variable list as well as the meters. It cannot be blank nor can it be duplicated by other
Exterior:FuelEquipment or Exterior:WaterEquipment statements.

1.16.3.1.2 Field: FuelUseType

For Exterior:WaterEquipment, only “Water” is current allowed for this field.

1.16.3.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

A schedule will allow the exterior water consumption to be operationally different, hour to hour as
well as seasonally. Fractional values in the basic schedule will be applied to the design level field
below.

1.16.3.1.4 Field: Design Level

This field (in m3/s) is typically used to represent the maximum volumetric flow for water fixtures
that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). In EnergyPlus, this is slightly
more flexible in that the exterior water equipment design level could be a “diversity factor” applied
to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour and
seasonally, the design level field is constant for all simulation environments.

1.16.3.1.5 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Landscaping”, etc. A new meter for
reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Subcategories are
also reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the equipment will be assigned
to the “General” end-use subcategory. Any text may be used here to categorize the end-uses in the
1.16. GROUP – EXTERIOR ENERGY USE EQUIPMENT 637

ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating
Method Compliance table.
IDF Example:

Exterior:WaterEquipment ,
OutsideWaterEq , !- Name
Water , !- Fuel Use Type
ON , !- Schedule Name
1000.0 , !- Design Level
General; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.16.3.2 Outputs

Output for exterior equipment consumption appears in three possible places. It will appear on two
meters (Fuel Type:Facility and ExteriorEquipment:Fuel Type) as well as in its own designated value
in the standard output file, Exterior Equipment Fuel Type Energy. Consumption also appears on any
user-defined end-use subcategory meters, i.e., End-Use Subcategory:ExteriorEquipment:Fuel Type.
All outputs are in [J] except water consumption which is in [m3]. There are also rate versions

– Zone, Average, Exterior Equipment Fuel Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Gas Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Exterior Equipment Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Water Volume [m3]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Mains Water Volume [m3]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Coal Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment FuelOilNo1 Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment FuelOilNo2 Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Propane Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Gasoline Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Diesel Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment Steam Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment OtherFuel1 Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment OtherFuel2 Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment District Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Exterior Equipment District Cooling Energy [J]

1.16.3.2.1 Exterior Equipment Fuel Rate [W]

1.16.3.2.2 Exterior Equipment Fuel Type Energy [J]

These are the fuel consumption rate and energy for the exterior equipment.

1.16.3.2.3 Exterior Equipment Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

638 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.16.3.2.4 Exterior Equipment Water Volume [m3]

These are the water consumption rate and volume for the exterior equipment.

1.16.3.2.5 Exterior Equipment Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the water volume drawn for the mains water service to serve the exterior equipment.

1.17 Group – Airflow

An important characteristic of energy consumption in buildings is the airflow between zones and
airflow due to natural ventilation (e.g., open windows) or mechanically-induced ventilation (e.g.,
exhaust air fans). This group of objects describes those elements.
The AirflowNetwork model can also be used to model infiltration and mixing (zone-to-zone air flow)
with or without the HVAC air distribution system operating (see Group – Airflow Network).

1.17.1 ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate
Infiltration is the unintended flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal zone.
Infiltration is generally caused by the opening and closing of exterior doors, cracks around windows,
and even in very small amounts through building elements. The basic equation used to calculate
infiltration with this object is:



Infiltration = Idesign (Fschedule ) A + B |(Tzone − Todb )| + C (WindSpeed) + D Windspeed2
(1.38)
More advanced infiltration calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model for
natural infiltration driven by wind and/or by forced air. Infiltration described by the equation shown
above is entered into EnergyPlus using the following syntax. Exfiltration (the leakage of zone air to
the outside) is generally handled better as zone exhaust air in the zone equipment description. The
equation must always yield a non-negative results; negative values are set to 0.0.
The question of typical values for these coefficients is subject to debate. Ideally, one should do a
detailed analysis of the infiltration situation and then determine a custom set of coefficients using
methods such as those laid out in Chapter 26 of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The
EnergyPlus defaults are 1,0,0,0 which give a constant volume flow of infiltration under all conditions.
BLAST (one of the EnergyPlus predecessors) used the following values as defaults: 0.606, 0.03636,
0.1177, 0. These coefficients produce a value of 1.0 at 0C deltaT and 3.35 m/s (7.5 mph) windspeed,
which corresponds to a typical summer condition. At a winter condition of 40C deltaT and 6 m/s
(13.4 mph) windspeed, these coefficients would increase the infiltration rate by a factor of 2.75.
In DOE-2 (the other EnergyPlus predecessor), the air change method defaults are (adjusted to SI
units) 0, 0, 0.224 (windspeed), 0. With these coefficients, the summer conditions above would give
a factor of 0.75, and the winter conditions would give 1.34. A windspeed of 4.47 m/s (10 mph) gives
a factor of 1.0.
The source of the BLAST defaults is noted in the BLAST documentation as:
“Empirical equation and the coefficient default were determined from ASHRAE journal articles and
other data on the effects of outdoor weather conditions.”
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 639

The source of the DOE-2 defaults is based on examining the infiltration relationships described in
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
The EnergyPlus example files use all of the above, the BLAST defaults in some (e.g., GeometryTest),
the DOE-2 defaults in some (e.g., 5ZoneAirCooled), and the EnergyPlus defaults in some (e.g.,
LgOffVAVDetCoil).
The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature used in the above basic equation (Todb ) is typically a function
of the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second
field. The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature calculation procedure is given in the section of “Local
Outdoor Air Temperature Calculation” in the Engineering Reference.
The local outdoor wind speed used in the above basic equation (WindSpeed) is also a function of
the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second
filed. The local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is given in the section of “Local Wind
Speed Calculation” in the Engineering Reference.

Note: When the value of the Wind Speed Profile Exponent field in the Site:HeightVariation is
equal to 0.0. The local wind speed is always equal to the wind speed given in the weather data
and will not be dependent on zone centroid height. Similarly, if the value of the Air Temperature
Gradient Coefficient is set equal to 0 the local air dry-bulb temperature is also always equal
to the air dry-bulb temperature given in the weather data and will not be dependent on zone
centroid height.

One or more infiltration objects can be defined for each zone, and the resulting infiltration rate for
the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the infiltration objects.

1.17.1.1 Inputs

1.17.1.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate object. This needs to be unique across all different
ZoneInfiltration objects.

1.17.1.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) or ZoneList (ref: ZoneLIst) and attaches a particular
infiltration statement to a thermal zone or set of thermal zones in the building. When the ZoneList
option is used then this infiltration definition is applied to each of the zones in the zone list effecting
a global definition for the amount of infiltration flow rate in the zone. The Zonelist option can be
used effectively with the flow/area, flow/exteriorarea, flow/exteriorwallarea, or airchanges/hour of
the Design Flow Rate Calculation Method.
The name of the actual infiltration object becomes <Zone Name> <ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate
Object Name> and should be less than the standard length (100 characters) for a name field. If
it is greater than this standard length, it may be difficult to specify in output reporting as it will
be truncated. A warning will be shown if the generated name is greater than 100 characters. If it
duplicates another such concatenated name, there will be a severe error and terminate the run.
640 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.1.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design volume flow
rate (Idesign ) (see Design Flow Rate Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). This
fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as Fschedule in the above equation.

1.17.1.1.4 Field: Design Flow Rate Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next four fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the design volume flow rate. The key/choices are:

– Flow/Zone

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)

– Flow/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The flow per Zone
Area field should be filled).

– Flow/ExteriorArea

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per exterior surface area of the zone. (The flow
per Exterior Surface Area field should be filled).

– Flow/ExteriorWallArea

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per exterior wall surface area of the zone. (The
flow per Exterior Surface Area field should be filled).

– AirChanges/Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate.
(The Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).

1.17.1.1.5 Field: Design Flow Rate

This field denotes the full design volume flow rate (m3 /s). The previous field should choose “flow/-
zone” as the choice. The design volume flow rate (noted as Idesign in the above equation) is the
maximum amount of infiltration expected at design conditions. The design value is modified by the
schedule fraction (see Field:Schedule Name) and user specified coefficients (see ”coefficient” fields
below). The resulting volume flow rate is converted to mass flow using the current outdoor air
density at each time step.

1.17.1.1.6 Field: Flow per Zone Floor Area

This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum Design Flow
Rate as described in the Design Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field should be
“Flow/Area”.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 641

1.17.1.1.7 Field: Flow per Exterior Surface Area

This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is used, along with the Exterior Surface Area in the Zone to determine the
maximum Design Flow Rate as described in the Design Flow Rate field. The choice from the method
field should be “Flow/Exteriorarea” or “Flow/ExteriorWallArea”.

1.17.1.1.8 Field: Air Changes per Hour

This factor is used, along with the Zone Volume to determine the maximum Design Flow Rate
as described in the Design Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field should be “Air-
Changes/Hour”.

1.17.1.1.9 Field: Constant Term Coefficient

This number is the “A” parameter in the above infiltration equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter, however, is a
constant under all conditions and is not modified by any environmental effect. As a result, it is
dimensionless.

1.17.1.1.10 Field: Temperature Term Coefficient

This number is the “B” parameter in the above infiltration equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
the temperature difference between the outdoor and indoor air dry-bulb temperatures. The units
for this parameter are inverse Celsius.

1.17.1.1.11 Field: Velocity Term Coefficient

This number is the “C” parameter in the above infiltration equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are s/m.

1.17.1.1.12 Field: Velocity Squared Term Coefficient

This number is the “D” parameter in the above infiltration equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
square of the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are
s2 /m2 .
An IDF example:

ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate ,
Infiltration 1, !- Name
DORM ROOMS AND COMMON AREAS , !- Zone Name
Infiltration Sch , !- Schedule Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
2.831685 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Flow per Exterior Surface Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Air Changes per Hour
0.6060000 , !- Constant Term Coefficient
3.6359996E-02, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0.1177165 , !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0.0000000E+00; !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient

Global Infiltration example:

642 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ZoneList ,OfficeZones ,Left Fork , Middle Fork , Right Fork;

ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate ,
OfficeZones Infiltration , !- Name
OfficeZones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
Infiltration Sch , !- Schedule Name
AirChanges/Hour , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Flow per Exterior Surface Area {m3/s-m2}
4.7, !- Air Changes per Hour
0.6060000 , !- Constant Term Coefficient
3.6359996E-02, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0.1177165 , !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0.0000000E+00; !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient

1.17.2 ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea
ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea model is similar to the other infiltration objects but uses a
different equation to model the unintended flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into
a thermal zone. Infiltration is generally caused by the opening and closing of exterior doors,
cracks around windows, and even in very small amounts through building elements. This model
is based on work by Sherman and Grimsrud (1980) and is appropriate for smaller, residential-type
buildings. The equation used to calculate infiltration in the effective leakage area model is:

q
AL
Inf iltration = (FSchedule ) Cs ∆T + Cw (W indSpeed)2 (1.39)
1000

where ∆T is the average difference between zone air temperature and the outdoor air temperature
and the other coefficients are described below.
Note that the coefficients for the “EffectiveLeakageArea” model are not interchangeable with the
similarly named coefficients in the “FlowCoefficient” model (see ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient
object).
One or more infiltration objects of different types can be defined for each zone, and the resulting
infiltration rate for the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the infiltration
objects.

1.17.2.1 Inputs

1.17.2.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea object. This needs to be unique across all
different ZoneInfiltration objects.

1.17.2.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a particular infiltration statement to a
thermal zone in the building.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 643

1.17.2.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of a schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the volume flow rate calculated by
the model. This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as Fschedule in the above equation.

1.17.2.1.4 Field: Effective Air Leakage Area

This field is the effective air leakage area, in cm2 , at 4 Pa. This is the value AL in the equation
above. Effective leakage area data can be obtained from a whole-building pressure test (eg. blower
door test). ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals also lists typical values component leakage areas
for low-rise residential (e.g. Table 1.2 in Chapter 26 of HoF 2001). The value should correspond to
a pressure difference of 4 Pa.

1.17.2.1.5 Field: Stack Coefficient

This field is the value of the stack coefficient, Cs in the equation above. The coefficient has units of
(L/s)2 /(cm4 ·K). Values for the “Basic Model Stack Coefficient” listed in the ASHRAE Handbook
of Fundamentals (2005 and 2001) are:

One story house Two story house Three story house

0.000145 0.000290 0.000435

1.17.2.1.6 Field: Wind Coefficient

This field is the value of the wind coefficient, Cw in the equation above. The coefficient has units
of (L/s)2 /(cm4 ·(m/s)2 ). Values for the “Basic Model Wind Coefficient” listed in the ASHRAE
Handbook of Fundamentals (2005 chapter 27; 2001, Chapter 26) depend on the type of shelter and
are listed in the following tables.

Shelter class One story house Two story house Three story house

1 0.000319 0.000420 0.000494

2 0.000246 0.000325 0.000382
3 0.000174 0.000231 0.000271
4 0.000104 0.000137 0.000161
5 0.000032 0.000042 0.000049

Shelter class Description

1 No obstructions or local shielding

2 Typical shelter for an isolated rural house
3 Typical shelter caused by other buildings across the street
4 Typical shelter for urban buildings on larger lots
5 Typical shelter produced by buildings that are immediately adjacent.

An example IDF object is

644 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea ,
LIVING ZONE Infil 1, !- Name
LIVING ZONE , !- Zone Name
INF -SCHED , !- Schedule Name
500.0 , !- Effective Air Leakage Area
0.000145 , !- Stack Coefficient
0.000174 ; !- Wind Coefficient

1.17.3 ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient
ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient model is similar to the other infiltration objects but uses a different
equation to model the unintended flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal
zone. Infiltration is generally caused by the opening and closing of exterior doors, cracks around
windows, and even in very small amounts through building elements. This reformulated model is
based on the AIM-2 model by Walker and Wilson (1998) and is appropriate for smaller, residential-
type buildings. The equation used to calculate infiltration in the flow coefficient model is:
r  2
Inf iltration = (FSchedule ) (c Cs ∆T n )2 + c Cw (s ∗ W indSpeed)2n (1.40)

Where ∆T is the average difference between zone air temperature and the outdoor air temperature
and the other coefficients are described below.
Note that the coefficients for the “Flow Coefficient” model are not interchangeable with the similarly
named coefficients in the “Effective Leakage Area” model (see ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea
object).
One or more infiltration objects of different types can be defined for each zone, and the resulting
infiltration rate for the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the infiltration
objects.

1.17.3.1 Inputs

1.17.3.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient object. This needs to be unique across all different
ZoneInfiltration objects.

1.17.3.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a particular infiltration statement to a
thermal zone in the building.

1.17.3.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of a schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the volume flow rate calculated by
the model. This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as Fschedule in the above equation.

1.17.3.1.4 Field: Flow Coefficient

This field is the flow coefficient in m3 /(s·Pan ). This is the value c in the equation above. The
flow coefficient can be determined from the effective leakage area and whole-building pressure tests
(eg. blower door test).
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 645

1.17.3.1.5 Field: Stack Coefficient

This field is the value of the stack coefficient, Cs in the equation above. The coefficient has units
of (Pa/K)n . Values for the “Enhanced Model Stack Coefficient” listed in the ASHRAE Handbook
of Fundamentals (2005 and 2001) are:

One story house Two story house Three story house

With Flue 0.069 0.089 0.107

No Flue 0.054 0.078 0.098

1.17.3.1.6 Field: Pressure Exponent

This field is the value of the pressure exponent, n in the equation above. The pressure exponent
generally lies between 0.6 and 0.7 with a typical value of n = 0.67 for the enhanced model.

1.17.3.1.7 Field: Wind Coefficient

This field is the value of the wind coefficient, Cw in the equation above. The coefficient has units of
(Pa·s2 /m2 )n . Values for the “Enhanced Model Wind Coefficient” listed in the ASHRAE Handbook
of Fundamentals (2005 and 2001) are:

One story house Two story house Three story house

Basement/slab; With 0.142 0.156 0.167

Flue
Basement/slab; No 0.156 0.170 0.170
Flue
Crawlspace; With Flue 0.128 0.142 0.154
Crawlspace; No Flue 0.128 0.142 0.151

1.17.3.1.8 Field: Shelter Factor

This field is the value of the wind coefficient, s in the equation above. The coefficient is dimen-
sionless. Values for the “Enhanced Model Shelter Factor” listed in the ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals (2005 and 2001) are:

Shelter class No Flue One story house with flue Two story house with flue Three story house with flue

1 1.00 1.10 1.07 1.06

2 0.90 1.02 0.98 0.97
3 0.70 0.86 0.81 0.79
4 0.50 0.70 0.64 0.61
5 0.30 0.54 0.47 0.43
646 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Shelter class Description

1 No obstructions or local shielding

2 Typical shelter for an isolated rural house
3 Typical shelter caused by other buildings across the street
4 Typical shelter for urban buildings on larger lots
5 Typical shelter produced by buildings that are immediately adjacent.

An Example IDF object is:

ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient ,
LIVING ZONE Infil 1, !- Name
LIVING ZONE , !- Zone Name
INF -SCHED , !- Schedule Name
0.05, !- Flow Coefficient
0.089 , !- Stack Coefficient
0.67 , !- Pressure Exponent
0.156 , !- Wind Coefficient
0.64; !- Shelter Factor

1.17.3.2 Outputs

Zone Infiltration objects have output variables for individual objects and for zone totals.
Object level outputs include:

– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Infiltration Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Infiltration Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Current Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Standard Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Infiltration Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Infiltration Air Change Rate [ach]

Zone level outputs include:

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 647

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Infiltration Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Infiltration Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Current Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Standard Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Infiltration Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Infiltration Air Change Rate [ach]

Note: If ZoneInfiltration:* objects and ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir (with Air Balance Method =

Quadrature) objects reference the same Zone Name, the above infiltration output variables will not
be reported for that zone. Instead, output variables for zone outdoor air flow will be reported by
the corresponding ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir object.

1.17.3.2.1 Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat loss that occurs when the infiltration air temperature (outdoor) <
zone air temperature.

1.17.3.2.2 Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat gain that occurs when the infiltration air temperature (outdoor) >
= zone air temperature.

1.17.3.2.3 Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

The latent heat loss that occurs when the infiltration air humidity ratio (outdoor) < zone air humidity
ratio.

1.17.3.2.4 Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The latent heat gain that occurs when the infiltration air humidity ratio (outdoor) > = zone air
humidity ratio.

1.17.3.2.5 Zone Infiltration Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total heat loss that occurs when the sum of Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy and
Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy < the sum of Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy
and Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.3.2.6 Zone Infiltration Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total heat gain that occurs when the sum of Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy and
Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy > = the sum of Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss
Energy and Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.3.2.7 Zone Infiltration Current Density Volume [m3]

648 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.3.2.8 Zone Infiltration Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of infiltration air based on the current
density of zone air.

1.17.3.2.9 Zone Infiltration Standard Density Volume [m3]

1.17.3.2.10 Zone Infiltration Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of infiltration air based on the standard
density of air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC drybulb, dry air, and nominally
adjusted for elevation.

1.17.3.2.11 Zone Infiltration Mass [kg]

The mass flow of the Infiltration air.

1.17.3.2.12 Zone Infiltration Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow rate of the Infiltration air.

1.17.3.2.13 Zone Infiltration Air Change Rate [ach]

The rate of infiltration in air changes per hour.

1.17.4 ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate
Ventilation is the purposeful flow of air from the outdoor environment directly into a thermal zone in
order to provide some amount of non-mechanical cooling. Ventilation, as specified by the input syntax
for the ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate object, is intended to model “simple” ventilation as opposed
to the more detailed ventilation investigations that can be performed with the AirflowNetwork model
or with air systems that have outdoor air mixers. Zone ventilation, as specified via this input object,
can be controlled by a schedule and through the specification of minimum, maximum and delta
temperatures as described below. The temperatures can be either single constant values for the
entire simulation or schedules which can vary over time. As with infiltration, the actual flow rate
of ventilation air can be modified by the temperature difference between the inside and outside
environment and the wind speed. The basic equation used to calculate ventilation with this model
is:



V entilation = (Vdesign ) (Fschedule ) A + B |Tzone − Todb | + C (W indSpeed) + D W indSpeed2
(1.41)
Similar to infiltration, the question of typical values for these coefficients is subject to debate. Ideally,
one should do a detailed analysis of the ventilation situation and then determine a custom set of
coefficients using methods such as those laid out in Chapter 26 of the ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals. The EnergyPlus defaults are 1,0,0,0 which give a constant volume flow of ventilation
under all conditions. The following discussion is duplicated from the infiltration design flow rate
object. The equation must always yield a non-negative results; negative values are set to 0.0.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 649

BLAST (one of the EnergyPlus predecessors) used the following values as defaults: 0.606, 0.03636,
0.1177, 0. These coefficients produce a value of 1.0 at 0C deltaT and 3.35 m/s (7.5 mph) windspeed,
which corresponds to a typical summer condition. At a winter condition of 40C deltaT and 6 m/s
(13.4 mph) windspeed, these coefficients would increase the infiltration rate by a factor of 2.75.
In DOE-2 (the other EnergyPlus predecessor), the air change method defaults are (adjusted to SI
units) 0, 0, 0.224 (windspeed), 0. With these coefficients, the summer conditions above would give
a factor of 0.75, and the winter conditions would give 1.34. A windspeed of 4.47 m/s (10 mph) gives
a factor of 1.0.
The source of the BLAST defaults is noted in the BLAST documentation as:
“Empirical equation and the coefficient default were determined from ASHRAE journal articles and
other data on the effects of outdoor weather conditions.”
The source of the DOE-2 defaults is based on examining the infiltration relationships described in
the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature used in the above basic equation (Todb ) is typically a function
of the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second
field. The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature calculation procedure is described in the “Local
Outdoor Air Temperature Calculation” section of the Engineering Reference.
The local outdoor wind speed used in the above basic equation (WindSpeed) is also a function of
the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second
field. The local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is described in the “Local Wind Speed
Calculation” section of the Engineering Reference.
Note: When the value of the Wind Speed Profile Exponent field in the Site:HeightVariation object
is equal to 0.0, the local wind speed is always equal to the wind speed given in the weather data
and will not be dependent on zone centroid height. Similarly, if the value of the Air Temperature
Gradient Coefficient is set equal to 0, the local air dry-bulb temperature is also always equal to
the air dry-bulb temperature given in the weather data and will not be dependent on zone centroid
height.
One or more ventilation objects (i.e., ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and/or ZoneVentila-
tion:WindandStackOpenArea) can be defined for each zone, and the resulting ventilation rate for
the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the ventilation objects.
More advanced ventilation calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model.

1.17.4.1 Inputs

1.17.4.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate object.

1.17.4.1.2 Field: Zone or ZoneList Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) or ZoneList (ref: ZoneList) and attaches a particular
ventilation statement to a thermal zone or set of thermal zones in the building. When the ZoneList
option is used then this ventilation definition is applied to each of the zones in the zone list effecting a
global definition for the amount of infiltration flow rate in the zone. The Zonelist option can be used
effectively with the flow/area, flow/person, or airchanges/hour of the Design Flow Rate Calculation
Method.
650 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The name of the actual ventilation object becomes <Zone Name> <ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate
Object Name> and should be less than the standard length (100 characters) for a name field. If
it is greater than this standard length, it may be difficult to specify in output reporting as it will
be truncated. A warning will be shown if the generated name is greater than 100 characters. If it
duplicates another such concatenated name, there will be a severe error and terminate the run.

1.17.4.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design volume flow
rate (Vdesign ) (see Design Flow Rate Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). This
fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as Fschedule in the above equation.

1.17.4.1.4 Field: Design Flow Rate Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next four fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the design volume flow rate. The key/choices are:

– Flow/Zone

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)

– Flow/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Flow per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Flow/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per nominal number of people in the zone. (The
Flow per Person field should be filled).

– AirChanges/Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate.
(The Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).

1.17.4.1.5 Field: Design Flow Rate

This field denotes the full design volume flow rate (m3 /s). The previous field should choose “flow/-
zone” as the choice. The design volume flow rate (noted as Vdesign in the above equation) is the
maximum amount of ventilation expected at design conditions. The design value is modified by the
schedule fraction (see Field: Schedule Name) and user specified coefficients (see four “coefficient”
fields below).

1.17.4.1.6 Field: Flow Rate per Zone Floor Area

This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum Design Volume
Flow Rate as described in the Design Volume Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field
should be “flow/area”.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 651

1.17.4.1.7 Field: Flow Rate per Person

This factor (m3 /s-person) is used, along with the nominal (maximum) number of occupants (people)
in the Zone to determine the maximum Design Volume Flow Rate as described in the Design Volume
Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field should be “flow/person”.

1.17.4.1.8 Field: Air Changes per Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the ventilation
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate.
The choice from the method field should be “AirChanges/Hour”.

1.17.4.1.9 Field: Ventilation Type

This alpha character string defines the type of ventilation as one of the following options: Natural,
Exhaust, Intake, or Balanced. Natural ventilation is assumed to be air movement/exchange as
a result of openings in the building façade and will not consume any fan energy. Values for fan
pressure and efficiency for natural ventilation are ignored. For either Exhaust or Intake, values for
fan pressure and efficiency define the fan electric consumption. For Natural and Exhaust ventilation,
the conditions of the air entering the space are assumed to be equivalent to outside air conditions.
For Intake and Balanced ventilation, an appropriate amount of fan heat is added to the entering air
stream. For Balanced ventilation, both an intake fan and an exhaust fan are assumed to co-exist,
both having the same flow rate and power consumption (using the entered values for fan pressure
rise and fan total efficiency). Thus, the fan electric consumption for Balanced ventilation is twice
that for the Exhaust or Intake ventilation types which employ only a single fan.

1.17.4.1.10 Field: Fan Pressure Rise

This is the pressure rise experienced across the fan in Pascals (N/m2 ). This is a function of the fan
and plays a role in determining the amount of energy consumed by the fan.

1.17.4.1.11 Field: Fan Total Efficiency

This value is the overall efficiency of the fan, i.e., the ratio of the power delivered to the fluid to
the electrical input power. It is the product of the motor efficiency and the impeller efficiency. The
motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the
motor. The impeller efficiency is power delivered to the fluid (air) divided by the shaft power. The
power delivered to the fluid is the mass flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided
by the air density. This input value must be between 0 and 1.”

1.17.4.1.12 Field: Constant Term Coefficient

This number is the “A” parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter, however, is a
constant under all conditions and is not modified by any environmental effect. As a result, it is
dimensionless.

1.17.4.1.13 Field: Temperature Term Coefficient

This number is the “B” parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
652 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

the temperature difference between the outdoor and indoor air dry-bulb temperatures. The units
for this parameter are inverse Celsius.

1.17.4.1.14 Field: Velocity Term Coefficient

This number is the “C” parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are s/m.

1.17.4.1.15 Field: Velocity Squared Term Coefficient

This number is the “D” parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
square of the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are
s2 /m2 .

1.17.4.1.16 Field: Minimum Indoor Temperature

This is the indoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shutoff. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is -100.0°C if the field
is left blank. This lower temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space and thus result
in a heating load. For example, if the user specifies a minimum temperature of 20°C, ventilation is
assumed to be available if the zone air temperature is above 20°C. If the zone air temperature drops
below 20°C, then ventilation is automatically turned off.

1.17.4.1.17 Field: Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
indoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The mini-
mum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This
field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Minimum Indoor Temperature field.
If the user enters a valid schedule name, the minimum temperature values specified in this schedule
will override the constant value specified in the Minimum Indoor Temperature field.

1.17.4.1.18 Field: Maximum Indoor Temperature

This is the indoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shutoff. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is 100.0°C if the field
is left blank. This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space and thus result
in a cooling load. For example, if the user specifies a maximum temperature of 28°C, ventilation
is assumed to be available if the zone air temperature is below 28°C. If the zone air temperature
increases to 28°C, then ventilation is automatically turned off.

1.17.4.1.19 Field: Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
indoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The mini-
mum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This
field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Maximum Indoor Temperature field.
If the user enters a valid schedule name, the maximum temperature values specified in this schedule
will override the constant value specified in the Maximum Indoor Temperature field.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 653

1.17.4.1.20 Field: Delta Temperature

This is the temperature difference (in Celsius) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb tempera-
tures below which ventilation is shutoff. The minimum value for this field is -100.0°C and thedefault
value is also -100.0°C if the field is left blank. This field allows ventilation to be stopped if the tem-
perature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space. For example, if the user specifies
a delta temperature of 2°C, ventilation is assumed to be available if the outside air temperature is
at least 2°C cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is less
than 2°C cooler than the indoor dry-bulb temperature, then ventilation is automatically turned off.
The values for this field can include negative numbers. This allows ventilation to occur even if the
outdoor temperature is above the indoor temperature. The Delta Temperature is used in the code
in the following way:
IF ((IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < DeltaTemperature) Then ventilation is not allowed.
Thus, if a large negative number is input for DeltaTemperature, the ventilation can be kept on even
if the outdoor temperature is greater than the indoor temperature. This is useful for uncontrolled
natural ventilation (open windows) or as a way to estimate the effect of required ventilation air for
load calculations.

1.17.4.1.21 Field: Delta Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the tem-
perature difference (in Celsius) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperatures below
which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The minimum temperature difference value in the
schedule can be -100°C. This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Delta
Temperature field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the delta temperature values specified
in this schedule will override the constant value specified in the Delta Temperature field.

1.17.4.1.22 Field: Minimum Outdoor Temperature

This is the outdoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shut off. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is -100.0°C if
the field is left blank. This lower temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space, which
could result in a heating load.

1.17.4.1.23 Field: Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Minimum Outdoor Temperature
field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the temperature values in this schedule will override
the constant value specified in the Minimum Outdoor Temperature field.

1.17.4.1.24 Field: Maximum Outdoor Temperature

This is the outdoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shut off. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is 100.0°C if the field
is left blank. This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space, which could
result in a cooling load.
654 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.4.1.25 Field: Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Maximum Outdoor Temperature
field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the temperature values in this schedule will override
the constant value specified in the Maximum Outdoor Temperature field.

1.17.4.1.26 Field: Maximum Wind Speed

This is the wind speed (m/s) above which ventilation is shut off. This can help simulate conditions
where one would normally close windows to avoid chaos in a space (papers blowing around, etc.).
Two IDF examples are provided below:

ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate ,
Ventilation 1, !- Name
ZONE 2, !- Zone Name
Simple Vent , !- Schedule Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Volume Flow Rate calculation method
6.131944 , !- Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
INTAKE , !- Ventilation Type
400.0 , !- Fan Pressure Rise{Pa}
0.9, !- Fan Total Efficiency
0.6060000 , !- Constant Term Coefficient
2.0199999E-02, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
5.9800001E-04, !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0.0000000E+00!- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient
18.0, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
1.0; !- Delta temperature {C}

ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate ,
SPACE1 -1 Ventl 1, !-Name
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone Name
NightVentSched , !- SCHEDULE Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Volume Flow Rate calculation method
.05295 , !- Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Volume Flow Rate per person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
Intake , !- Ventilation Type
67., !- Fan Pressure Rise
.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
1, !- Constant Term Coefficient
0, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
MinIndoorTemp , !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
MaxIndoorTemp , !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Delta Temperature {deltaC}
DeltaTemp , !- Delta Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MinOutdoorTemp , !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MaxOutdoorTemp , !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
40; !- Maximum WindSpeed {m/s}
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 655

Global Ventilation example:

Zonelist , West -East Zones , West Zone , East Zone;

ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate ,
West -East Zones Ventilation , !- Name
West -East Zones , !- Zone or ZoneList Name
VentSched , !- Schedule Name
AirChanges/Hour , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow Rate per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Flow Rate per Person {m3/s-person}
1.7, !- Air Changes per Hour
Intake , !- Ventilation Type
67., !- Fan Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
1, !- Constant Term Coefficient
0, !- Temperature Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Term Coefficient
0, !- Velocity Squared Term Coefficient
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
MinIndoorTemp , !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
MaxIndoorTemp , !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Delta Temperature {deltaC}
DeltaTemp , !- Delta Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MinOutdoorTemp , !- Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature {C}
MaxOutdoorTemp , !- Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name
40; !- Maximum Wind Speed {m/s}

1.17.5 ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea
For this model, the ventilation air flow rate is a function of wind speed and thermal stack effect,
along with the area of the opening being modeled. This object can be used alone or in combination
with ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate objects. This model is intended for simplified ventilation
calculations as opposed to the more detailed ventilation investigations that can be performed with the
AirflowNetwork model. Using the “Wind and Stack with Open Area” model, the natural ventilation
flow rate can be controlled by a multiplier fraction schedule applied to the user-defined opening area
and through the specification of minimum, maximum and delta temperatures. The temperatures
can be either single constant values for the entire simulation or schedules which can vary over time.
The equation used to calculate the ventilation rate driven by wind is:

Qw = Cw Aopening Fschedule V (1.42)

where,
Qw = Volumetric air flow rate driven by wind [m3 /s]
Cw = Opening effectiveness [dimensionless]
Aopening = Opening area [m2 ]
Fschedule = Open area fraction [user-defined schedule value, dimensionless]
V = Local wind speed [m/s]
The equation used to calculate the ventilation rate due to stack effect is:
656 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

p
Qs = CD Aopening Fschedule 2g∆HN P L (|Tzone − Todb |/Tzone ) (1.43)

where,
Qs = Volumetric air flow rate due to stack effect [m3 /s]
CD = Discharge coefficient for opening [dimensionless]
Aopening = Opening area [m2 ]
Fschedule = Open area fraction [user-defined schedule value, dimensionless]
ΔHN P L = Height from midpoint of lower opening to the neutral pressure level [m].
Estimation of this value is difficult; refer to Chapter 16 of the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Funda-
mentals for guidance.
Tzone = Zone air dry-bulb temperature [K]
Todb = Local outdoor air dry-bulb temperature [K]
The total ventilation rate calculated by this model is the quadrature sum of the wind and stack air
flow components:

q
V entilationW indAndStack = Qs 2 + Qw 2 (1.44)

The local outdoor air dry-bulb temperature used in the stack effect equation (Todb ) is typically a
function of the height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in
the second field. The local outdoor air dry-bulb temperature calculation procedure is described in
the “Local Outdoor Air Temperature Calculation” section of the Engineering Reference.
The local outdoor wind speed used in the above wind-driven equation (V) is also a function of the
height of the zone centroid above ground. The corresponding zone name is given in the second
field. The local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is described in the “Local Wind Speed
Calculation” section of the Engineering Reference.
Note: When the value of the Wind Speed Profile Exponent field in the Site:HeightVariation object
is equal to 0.0, the local wind speed is always equal to the wind speed given in the weather data
and will not be dependent on zone centroid height. Similarly, if the value of the Air Temperature
Gradient Coefficient is set equal to 0, the local air dry-bulb temperature is also always equal to
the air dry-bulb temperature given in the weather data and will not be dependent on zone centroid
height.
One or more ventilation objects (i.e., ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and/or ZoneVentila-
tion:WindandStackOpenArea) can be defined for each zone, and the resulting ventilation rate for
the zone will simply be the summation of the flow rates specified by the ventilation objects.
More advanced ventilation calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model.

1.17.5.1 Inputs

1.17.5.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea object.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 657

1.17.5.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a particular ventilation statement to a
thermal zone in the building.

1.17.5.1.3 Field: Opening Area

This is the opening area exposed to outdoors (m2 ) in a zone.

1.17.5.1.4 Field: Opening Area Fraction Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) which modifies the Opening Area value (see
previous field). The schedule values must be any positive number between 0 and 1 as a fraction.
The actual opening area in a zone for a particular simulation time step is defined as the product of
the Opening Area input field and the value specified by the schedule named in this input field.

1.17.5.1.5 Field: Opening Effectiveness

This field is the opening effectiveness (Cw ). The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0 or the value can
be autocalculated. If a real value is input, that constant value will be used in the calculations. Oth-
erwise, this field can be left blank (default = Autocalculate) or the user can input Autocalculate.
Based on recommended values provided in Chapter 16 of the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Funda-
mentals, Cw = 0.55 for perpendicular winds and Cw = 0.3 for diagonal winds. For Autocalculate,
any angles between perpendicular and diagonal are linearly interpolated between 0.3 and 0.55 by
the model.

1.17.5.1.6 Field: Effective Angle

This is the angle in degrees counting from the North clockwise to the opening outward normal.
The value must be between 0 and 360, with the default being 0 if this input field is left blank.
The Effective Angle is 0 if the opening outward normal faces North, 90 if faces East, 180 if faces
South, and 270 if faces West. The value is fixed and independent of coordinate system defined in
the GlobalGeometryRules object. This input field value is used to calculate the angle between the
wind direction and the opening outward normal to determine the opening effectiveness values when
the input field Opening Effectiveness = Autocalculate.

1.17.5.1.7 Field: Height Difference

This is the height difference between the midpoint of the lower opening and the neutral pressure
level in meters. This value is a required user input.
Note: Estimation of the height difference is difficult for natural ventilated buildings. Chapter 16
of the 2009 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals may provide guidance for estimating the height
difference.

1.17.5.1.8 Field: Discharge Coefficient for Opening

This is the discharge coefficient for the opening (CD ). The value must be between 0.0 and 1.0, or
the value can be autocalculated. If a real value is input, that constant value will be used in the
calculations. Otherwise, this field can be left blank (default = Autocalculate) or the user can input
Autocalculate. For Autocalculate, the program will determine the discharge coefficient based on
the following equation:
658 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

CD = 0.40 + 0.0045 |Tzone − Todb | (1.45)

1.17.5.1.9 Field: Minimum Indoor Temperature

This is the indoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shutoff. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is -100.0°C
if the field is left blank. This lower temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space and
thus result in a heating load. For example, if the user specifies a minimum temperature of 20°C,
ventilation is assumed to be available if the zone air temperature is above 20°C. If the zone air
temperature drops below 20°C, then ventilation is automatically turned off.

1.17.5.1.10 Field: Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
indoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The mini-
mum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This
field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Minimum Indoor Temperature field.
If the user enters a valid schedule name, the minimum temperature values specified in this schedule
will override the constant value specified in the Minimum Indoor Temperature field.

1.17.5.1.11 Field: Maximum Indoor Temperature

This is the indoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shutoff. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is 100.0°C if the field
is left blank. This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space and thus result
in a cooling load. For example, if the user specifies a maximum temperature of 28°C, ventilation
is assumed to be available if the zone air temperature is below 28°C. If the zone air temperature
increases to 28°C, then ventilation is automatically turned off.

1.17.5.1.12 Field: Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
indoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The mini-
mum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This
field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Maximum Indoor Temperature field.
If the user enters a valid schedule name, the maximum temperature values specified in this schedule
will override the constant value specified in the Maximum Indoor Temperature field.

1.17.5.1.13 Field: Delta Temperature

This is the temperature difference (in Celsius) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb tem-
peratures below which ventilation is shutoff. The minimum value for this field is -100.0°C and the
default value is also -100.0°C if the field is left blank. This field allows ventilation to be stopped if
the temperature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space. For example, if the user
specifies a delta temperature of 2°C, ventilation is assumed to be available if the outside air temper-
ature is at least 2°C cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is
less than 2°C cooler than the indoor dry-bulb temperature, then ventilation is automatically turned
off.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 659

The values for this field can include negative numbers. This allows ventilation to occur even if the
outdoor temperature is above the indoor temperature. The Delta Temperature is used in the code
in the following way:
IF ((IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < DeltaTemperature) Then ventilation is not allowed.
Thus, if a large negative number is input for DeltaTemperature, the ventilation can be kept on even
if the outdoor temperature is greater than the indoor temperature. This is useful for uncontrolled
natural ventilation (open windows) or as a way to estimate the effect of required ventilation air for
load calculations.

1.17.5.1.14 Field: Delta Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the tem-
perature difference (in Celsius) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperatures below
which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The minimum temperature difference value in the
schedule can be -100°C. This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Delta
Temperature field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the delta temperature values specified
in this schedule will override the constant value specified in the Delta Temperature field.

1.17.5.1.15 Field: Minimum Outdoor Temperature

This is the outdoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shut off. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is -100.0°C if
the field is left blank. This lower temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space, which
could result in a heating load.

1.17.5.1.16 Field: Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) below which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Minimum Outdoor Temperature
field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the temperature values in this schedule will override
the constant value specified in the Minimum Outdoor Temperature field.

1.17.5.1.17 Field: Maximum Outdoor Temperature

This is the outdoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shut off. The minimum value
for this field is -100.0°C and the maximum value is 100.0°C. The default value is 100.0°C if the field
is left blank. This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space, which could
result in a cooling load.

1.17.5.1.18 Field: Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) above which ventilation is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Maximum Outdoor Temperature
field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the temperature values in this schedule will override
the constant value specified in the Maximum Outdoor Temperature field.
660 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.5.1.19 Field: Maximum Wind Speed

This is the wind speed (m/s) above which ventilation is shut off. This can help simulate conditions
where one would normally close windows to avoid chaos in a space (papers blowing around, etc.).
An IDF example is provided below:

ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea ,
ZONE 3 Ventl 1, !- Name
ZONE 3, !- Zone Name
0.5, !- Opening Area {m2}
Constant , !- Opening Area Fraction Schedule Name
AutoCalculate , !- Opening Effectiveness
0.0, !- Effective Angle {deg}
1.0, !- Height Difference {m}
AutoCalculate , !- Discharge Coefficient for Opening
18.0, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature {C}
, !- Minimum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature {C}
, !- Maximum Indoor Temperature Schedule Name
1.0; !- Delta Temperature {deltaC}

1.17.5.2 Outputs

Current ventilation output variables:

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilation Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilation Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Current Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Standard Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilation Air Change Rate [ach]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilation Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilation Air Inlet Temperature [C]

Note: If ZoneVentilation:* objects and ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir (with Air Balance Method =

Quadrature) objects reference the same Zone Name, the above ventilation output variables will not
be reported for that zone. Instead, output variables for zone outdoor air flow will be reported by
the corresponding ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir object.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 661

1.17.5.2.1 Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat loss that occurs when the ventilation inlet air temperature <
zone air temperature. If multiple ventilation objects are specified for a particular zone, the
ventilation inlet air temperature is from all ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and ZoneVentila-
tion:WindandStackOpenArea objects specified for the zone.

1.17.5.2.2 Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat gain that occurs when the ventilation inlet air temperature >
= zone air temperature. If multiple ventilation objects are specified for a particular zone, the
ventilation inlet air temperature is from all ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and ZoneVentila-
tion:WindandStackOpenArea objects specified for the zone.

1.17.5.2.3 Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

The latent heat loss that occurs when the Ventilation air humidity ratio (outdoor) < zone air hu-
midity ratio from all ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea
objects specified for the zone.

1.17.5.2.4 Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The latent heat gain that occurs when the Ventilation air humidity ratio (outdoor) > = zone air hu-
midity ratio from all ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and ZoneVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea
objects specified for the zone.

1.17.5.2.5 Zone Ventilation Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total heat loss that occurs when the sum of Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Energy and
Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Energy < the sum of Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Energy
and Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.5.2.6 Zone Ventilation Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total heat gain that occurs when the sum of Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Energy and
Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Energy > = the sum of Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss
Energy and Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.5.2.7 Zone Ventilation Current Density Volume [m3]

1.17.5.2.8 Zone Ventilation Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of ventilation air based on the current
density of zone air.

1.17.5.2.9 Zone Ventilation Standard Density Volume [m3]

1.17.5.2.10 Zone Ventilation Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of ventilation air based on the standard
density of air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC drybulb, dry air, and nominally
adjusted for elevation.
662 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.5.2.11 Zone Ventilation Mass [kg]

This output is the total mass flow into a particular zone from outdoors.

1.17.5.2.12 Zone Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output is the total mass flow rate into a particular zone from outdoors.

1.17.5.2.13 Zone Ventilation Air Change Rate [ach]

The volume flow rate of the ventilation air in air changes per hour.

1.17.5.2.14 Zone Ventilation Fan Electricity Energy [J]

The fan electrical consumption for Intake or Exhaust ventilation types (for ZoneVentila-
tion:DesignFlowRate objects only).

1.17.5.2.15 Zone Ventilation Air Inlet Temperature [C]

This is equal to the outdoor air temperature except when INTAKE fan power is included (for
ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate objects only). When intake fan power is used, then the additional
heat due to the fan is added to the outdoor temperature and this will be reported as the inlet air
temperature. If multiple ventilation objects are specified for a particular zone, the reported value is
the mass flow weighted temperature for the multiple ventilation objects specified for this zone.

1.17.6 ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir
This model calculates a combined zone outdoor airflow by including interactions between mechan-
ical ventilation, infiltration and duct leakage. It is mainly applied to a single zone (e.g., residen-
tial) building. The model combines all outdoor airflows from ZoneInfiltration and ZoneVentilation
objects in the same zone. This object also includes the induced outdoor airflows due to unbal-
anced duct leakage, and unbalanced outdoor airflows introduced by unbalanced airflows from Zone-
HVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator objects when the exhaust airflow is greater than the supply outdoor
airflow. This model is intended for simplified outdoor airflow calculations as opposed to the more
detailed outdoor airflow investigations that can be performed with the AirflowNetwork model. The
equation used to calculate the combined zone outdoor airflow is:
q
Q= Qn 2 + Qu,v 2 + Qu,l 2 + Qb,v (1.46)

where,
Q = Combined outdoor airflow with infiltration, balanced and unbalanced outdoor air flows, and
unbalanced duct leakage [m3 /s]
Qn = Natural infiltration airflow from ZoneInfiltration:* objects [m3 /s]
Qb,v = Balanced ventilation airflow, excluding infiltration [m3 /s]
Qu,v = Unbalanced ventilation airflow, excluding infiltration [m3 /s]
Qu,l = Unbalanced duct leakage: the difference between supply and return leaks [m3 /s]
This object cannot be used simultaneously with the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model. If the
AirflowNetwork model is active for a simulation time step, the Air Balance Method is reset to “None”
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 663

for that time step. More advanced outdoor airflow calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus
AirflowNetwork model.
This object does not combine any airflows from Fan:ZoneExhaust objects and is independent of
HVAC equipment operation.
This object will not work with the AvailabilityManager:HybridVentilation object in the same zone,
when the Simple Airflow Control Type Schedule Name is provided in the HybridVentilation object.
For this case, the Air Balance Method is reset to “None”.

1.17.6.1 Inputs

1.17.6.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the object.

1.17.6.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a combined outdoor airflow statement to
a thermal zone in the building.

1.17.6.1.3 Field: Air Balance Method

This choice field determines the air balance method. Two choices are Quadrature and None. If
Quadrature, the combined zone outdoor air flow is calculated based on the above equation. If None,
no combining of outdoor air will be performed (i.e., any ZoneInfiltration:* and ZoneVentilation:*
objects specified for this zone are simulated individually).

1.17.6.1.4 Field: Induced Outdoor Air Due to Unbalanced Duct Leakage

This is the induced outdoor airflow rate, in m3 /s, due to unbalanced duct leakage. If left blank, the
default value is 0.

1.17.6.1.5 Field: Induced Outdoor Air Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) which modifies the induced outdoor airflow
rate value (see previous field). The schedule values must be any positive number between 0 and 1 as
a fraction. The actual induced outdoor airflow rate in a zone for a particular simulation time step
is defined as the product of the Induced Outdoor Air Due to Unbalanced Duct Leakage input field
and the value specified by the schedule named in this input field.
Note: Since this object is independent of HVAC operation, the inputs for the last two fields should
be carefully selected to match HVAC system operation schedules.
An IDF example is provided below:

ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir ,
ZONE 2 Balance 1, !- Name
ZONE 2, !- Zone Name
Quadrature , !- Air Balance Method
0.00, !- Induced Outdoor Air Due to Unbalanced Duct Leakage {m3/s}
Constant; !- Induced Outdoor Air Schedule Name
664 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.6.2 Outputs

ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir output variables will be provided when the Air Balance Method is
Quadrature. Output variables from the associated ZoneVentilation:* and ZoneInfiltration:* objects
for the same zone will not be produced when ZoneAirBalance:OutdoorAir output variables are
available. If the Air Balance Method = None, then no ZoneAirBalance:OutputAir outputs will
be produced and the associated ZoneVentilation:* and ZoneInfiltration:* objects will specify their
output variables for the zone.

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Current Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Combined Outdoor Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Combined Outdoor Air Changes per Hour [ach]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone Combined Outdoor Air Fan Electricity Energy [J]

1.17.6.2.1 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
The sensible (temperature) heat loss that occurs when the outdoor air temperature < zone air
temperature.

1.17.6.2.2 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
The sensible (temperature) heat gain that occurs when the outdoor air temperature > = zone air
temperature.

1.17.6.2.3 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
The latent heat loss that occurs when the outdoor air humidity ratio < zone air humidity ratio.

1.17.6.2.4 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
The latent heat gain that occurs when the outdoor air humidity ratio > = zone air humidity ratio.

1.17.6.2.5 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
The total heat loss that occurs when the sum of Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain
Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy < the sum of Zone Combined
Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 665

1.17.6.2.6 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Total Heat Gain Energy [J]
The total heat gain that occurs when the sum of Zone Combined Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Gain
Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Gain Energy > = the sum of Zone Combined
Outdoor Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Combined Outdoor Air Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.6.2.7 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Current Density Volume [m3]

1.17.6.2.8 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Current Density Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of outdoor air based on the current density
of zone air.

1.17.6.2.9 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume [m3]

1.17.6.2.10 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
These outputs are the total volume and volume flow rate of outdoor air based on the standard
density of air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC drybulb, dry air, and nominally
adjusted for elevation.

1.17.6.2.11 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Mass [kg]

This output is the total mass flow into a particular zone from outdoors.

1.17.6.2.12 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output is the total mass flow rate into a particular zone from outdoors.

1.17.6.2.13 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Changes per Hour [ach]

The volume flow rate of the ventilation air in air changes per hour.

1.17.6.2.14 Zone Combined Outdoor Air Fan Electricity Energy [J]

The fan electrical consumption for Intake, Exhaust, or Balanced ventilation types (for
ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate objects used to calculate a combined zone outdoor airflow).

1.17.7 ZoneMixing
ZoneMixing is intended to allow simplified treatment of air exchange between zones. Note that
this statement only affects the energy balance of the “receiving” zone and that this statement will
not produce any effect on the “source” zone. ZoneMixing statements can be complementary and
include multiple zones, but the balancing of flows between zones is left to the user’s discretion. Also
see ZoneCrossMixing and ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing. More advanced mixing calculations are
possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model for multi-zone airflow with or without HVAC
system operation.
666 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.7.1 Inputs

1.17.7.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneMixing object.

1.17.7.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) receiving the amount of air being exchanged and
attaches a particular mixing statement to a thermal zone in the building.

1.17.7.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design volume
flow rate parameter (see next field). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 modifies the design level
parameter.

1.17.7.1.4 Field: Design Flow Rate Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next four fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the design volume flow rate. The key/choices are:

– Flow/Zone

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)

– Flow/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Flow per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Flow/Person

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per nominal number of people in the zone. (The
Flow per Person field should be filled).

– AirChanges/Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate.
(The Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).

1.17.7.1.5 Field: Design Flow Rate

This field denotes the full design volume flow rate (m3 /s). The previous field should choose “flow/-
zone” as the choice. The design volume flow rate is the maximum amount of mixing air expected.
The design value is modified by the schedule fraction (see Field: Schedule Name) and user specified
coefficients (see four “coefficient” fields below).
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 667

1.17.7.1.6 Field: Flow Rate per Zone Floor Area

This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum Design Volume
Flow Rate as described in the Design Volume Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field
should be “Flow/Area”.

1.17.7.1.7 Field: Flow Rate per Person

This factor (m3 /s-person) is used, along with the nominal (maximum) number of occupants (people)
in the Zone to determine the maximum Design Volume Flow Rate as described in the Design Volume
Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field should be “Flow/Person”.

1.17.7.1.8 Field: Air Changes per Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the mixing amount.
This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate. The choice
from the method field should be “AirChanges/Hour”.

1.17.7.1.9 Field: Source Zone Name

This field is the name of the “source” zone (ref: Zone) that exhausts the amount of air specified by
the design level and schedule fields to the zone named in the zone name field.

1.17.7.1.10 Field: Delta Temperature

This number controls when mixing air from the source zone is sent to the receiving zone. This pa-
rameter is a temperature and is expressed in units of Celsius. If this field is positive, the temperature
of the zone from which the air is being drawn (source zone) must be “Delta Temperature” warmer
than the receiving zone air or else no mixing occurs. If this field is negative, the temperature of
the source zone must be “Delta Temperature” cooler than the receiving zone air or else no mixing
occurs. If this parameter is zero, mixing occurs regardless of the relative zone temperatures.

1.17.7.1.11 Field: Delta Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the temper-
ature difference (in Celsius) between the source zone and receiving zone air dry-bulb temperatures
as a function of time. This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Delta
Temperature field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the delta temperature values specified
in this schedule will supersede the constant value specified in the Delta Temperature field.

1.17.7.1.12 Field: Minimum Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
receiving zone temperature (in Celsius) below which mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the minimum zone temperature control is
not applied.
668 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.7.1.13 Field: Maximum Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
receiving zone temperature (in Celsius) above which mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
maximum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum zone temperature control is
not applied.
Note: The maximum zone temperature when mixing is shutoff must be greater than or equal to
the minimum zone temperature when mixing is shutoff at any given time. Otherwise, warnings
will be issued and the maximum zone shutoff temperature will be set to the minimum zone shutoff
temperature.

1.17.7.1.14 Field: Minimum Source Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
source zone temperature (in Celsius) below which mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the minimum source zone temperature
control is not applied.

1.17.7.1.15 Field: Maximum Source Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
source zone temperature (in Celsius) above which mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
maximum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum source zone temperature
control is not applied.
Note: The maximum source zone temperature when mixing is shutoff must be greater than or
equal to the minimum source zone temperature when mixing is shutoff at any given time. Otherwise,
warnings will be issued and the maximum source zone shutoff temperature will be set to the minimum
source zone shutoff temperature.

1.17.7.1.16 Field: Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) below which mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The minimum
temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This field
is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the minimum outdoor temperature control is not
applied.

1.17.7.1.17 Field: Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) above which mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The maximum
temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C. This field
is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum outdoor temperature control is not
applied.
Note: The maximum outdoor temperature when mixing is shutoff must be greater than or equal to
the minimum outdoor temperature which mixing is shutoff at any given time. Otherwise, a warning
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 669

will be issued and the maximum outdoor shutoff temperature will be set to the minimum outdoor
shutoff temperature.
An IDF Example:

ZoneMixing ,
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 Exhaust Fanmixing_0 , !- Name
Kitchen_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Zone Name
Hours_of_operation , !- Schedule Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Flow Rate Calculation Method
1.4540 , !- Design Level
, !- Volume Flow Rate per Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Volume Flow Rate Per Person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes per Hour {ACH}
CAFETERIA_ZN_1_FLR_1 , !- Source Zone Name
0.0; !- Delta Temperature

1.17.7.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Total Heat Loss [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

1.17.7.2.1 Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

The air volume in m3 entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door
mixing during the hour or timestep.

1.17.7.2.2 Zone Mixing Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The air volumetric flow rate in m3 /s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep using the density of air evaluated at current
zone air conditions.

1.17.7.2.3 Zone Mixing Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The air volumetric flow rate in m3 /s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep using the density of air evaluated at standard
conditions.
670 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.7.2.4 Zone Mixing Mass [kg]

The air mass in kg entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door
mixing during the hour or timestep. The air mass is calculated using the air volume flow from
each “source” zone and the density of air calculated for the average conditions (temperature and
humidity) between the “source” and “receiving” zones.

1.17.7.2.5 Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The air mass flow rate in kg/s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep.

1.17.7.2.6 Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17.7.2.7 Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat transfer due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-
door mixing in the host (receiving) zone is the sum of all the incoming air mass flow rates multiplied
by the elapsed time, the specific heat (calculated for the average conditions (temperature and humid-
ity) between the “source” and “receiving” zones) and the temperature differences between the host
zone and corresponding source zones. If the heat transfer is negative, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing sensible heat loss. If the heat transfer is positive, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing sensible heat gain.

1.17.7.2.8 Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17.7.2.9 Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The latent heat transfer due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing in
the host (receiving) zone is the sum of all the incoming air mass flow rates multiplied by the elapsed
time, the heat of vaporization (calculated for the average conditions (temperature and humidity)
between the “source” and “receiving” zones) and the humidity ratio differences between the host
zone and corresponding source zones. If the heat transfer is negative, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing latent heat loss. If the heat transfer is positive, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing latent heat gain.

1.17.7.2.10 Zone Mixing Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total heat loss due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing that occurs
when the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy
< the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.7.2.11 Zone Mixing Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total heat gain due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing that
occurs when the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain
Energy > = the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss
Energy.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 671

1.17.8 ZoneCrossMixing
ZoneCrossMixing is ideally suited for two zones that exchange an equal amount of air between
each other. As with ZoneMixing, this is a simplified interzone airflow in EnergyPlus. The main
difference between ZoneMixing and ZoneCrossMixing is that cross mixing has an energy effect on
both the source and the receiving zone, thus maintaining both the air mass and energy balances
in the two zones. For refrigerated zones, see ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing. More advanced mixing
calculations are possible using the EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork model for multi-zone airflow with or
without HVAC system operation.
ZoneCrossMixing can be entered once (in one of the mixing zones), twice (once for each zone), or
multiple times (exchanging with more than one zone). Each object will be modeled with its own
control conditions. The object may be entered once if Delta Temperature > 0.0 and it is desirable
to have mixing only when the source zone is warmer than the receiving zone. This might be the
case when the warmer zone is below the colder zone and the mixing is buoyancy driven. If the zones
are next to each other, separated by an open doorway, it would be more suitable to input a cross
mixing object for each zone. Then mixing would occur if the zone temperatures differed by Delta
Temperature or greater regardless of which is the warmer zone.

1.17.8.1 Inputs

1.17.8.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneCrossMixing object.

1.17.8.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) receiving the amount of air being exchanged and
attaches a particular cross mixing statement to a thermal zone in the building.

1.17.8.1.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design volume
flow rate parameter (see next field). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 modifies the design level
parameter.

1.17.8.1.4 Field: Design Flow Rate Calculation Method

This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next four fields are filled and is descriptive of
the method for calculating the design volume flow rate. The key/choices are:

– Flow/Zone

With this choice, the method used will be a straight insertion of the design volume flow rate. (The
Design Flow Rate field should be filled.)

– Flow/Area

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per floor area of the zone. (The Flow per Zone
Floor Area field should be filled).

– Flow/Person
672 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

With this choice, the method used will be a factor per nominal number of people in the zone. (The
flow per person field should be filled).

– AirChanges/Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the infiltration
amount. This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate.
(The Air Changes per Hour field should be filled).

1.17.8.1.5 Field: Design Flow Rate

This field denotes the full design volume flow rate (m3 /s). The previous field should choose “flow/-
zone” as the choice. The design volume flow rate is the maximum amount of mixing air expected.
The design value is modified by the schedule fraction (see Field: Schedule Name) and user specified
coefficients (see four “coefficient” fields below).

1.17.8.1.6 Field: Flow Rate per Zone Floor Area

This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is used, along with the Zone Area to determine the maximum Design Volume
Flow Rate as described in the Design Volume Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field
should be “Flow/Area”.

1.17.8.1.7 Field: Flow Rate per Person

This factor (m3 /s-person) is used, along with the nominal (maximum) number of occupants (people)
in the Zone to determine the maximum Design Volume Flow Rate as described in the Design Volume
Flow Rate field. The choice from the method field should be “Flow/Person”.

1.17.8.1.8 Field: Air Changes per Hour

With this choice, the method used will be the number of air changes per hour for the mixing amount.
This factor, along with the Zone Volume, will be used to determine the Design Flow Rate. The choice
from the method field should be “AirChanges/Hour”.

1.17.8.1.9 Field: Source Zone Name

This field is the name of the “source” zone (ref: Zone) that exhausts the amount of air specified by
the design level and schedule fields to the zone named in the zone name field. In reality, the “source”
and “receiving” zones are interchangeable since the cross-mixed air affects both zones.

1.17.8.1.10 Field: Delta Temperature

This number controls when mixing air from the source zone is sent to the receiving zone. This pa-
rameter is a temperature and is expressed in units of Celsius. If this field is positive, the temperature
of the zone from which air is being drawn (“source zone”) must be “Delta Temperature” warmer
than the zone air or no mixing occurs. If this field is zero, mixing occurs regardless of the relative
air temperatures. Negative values for “Delta Temperature” are not permitted.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 673

1.17.8.1.11 Field: Delta Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the temper-
ature difference (in Celsius) between the source zone and receiving zone air dry-bulb temperatures
as a function of time. This field is an optional field and has the same functionality as the Delta
Temperature field. If the user enters a valid schedule name, the delta temperature values specified
in this schedule will supersede the constant value specified in the Delta Temperature field.

1.17.8.1.12 Field: Minimum Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
receiving zone temperature (in Celsius) below which cross mixing is shutoff as a function of time.
The minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be
100°C. This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the minimum zone temperature
control is not applied.

1.17.8.1.13 Field: Maximum Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
receiving zone temperature (in Celsius) above which cross mixing is shutoff as a function of time.
The maximum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be
100°C. This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum zone temperature
control is not applied.
Note: The maximum zone temperature when cross mixing is shutoff must be greater than or equal to
the minimum zone temperature when cross mixing is shutoff at any given time. Otherwise, warnings
will be issued and the maximum zone shutoff temperature will be set to the minimum zone shutoff
temperature.

1.17.8.1.14 Field: Minimum Source Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
source zone temperature (in Celsius) below which cross mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the minimum source zone temperature
control is not applied.

1.17.8.1.15 Field: Maximum Source Zone Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
source zone temperature (in Celsius) above which cross mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
maximum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum source zone temperature
control is not applied.
Note: The maximum source zone temperature when cross mixing is shutoff must be greater than
or equal to the minimum source zone temperature when cross mixing is shutoff at any given time.
Otherwise, warnings will be issued and the maximum source zone shutoff temperature will be set to
the minimum source zone shutoff temperature.
674 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.8.1.16 Field: Minimum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the minimum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) below which cross mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
minimum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the minimum outdoor temperature control
is not applied.

1.17.8.1.17 Field: Maximum Outdoor Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule (ref. Schedule objects) which contains the maximum
outdoor temperature (in Celsius) above which cross mixing is shutoff as a function of time. The
maximum temperature value in the schedule can be -100°C and the maximum value can be 100°C.
This field is an optional field. If this field is not entered, the maximum outdoor temperature control
is not applied.
Note: The maximum outdoor temperature when cross mixing is shutoff must be greater than
or equal to the minimum outdoor temperature which cross mixing is shutoff at any given time.
Otherwise, a warning will be issued and the maximum outdoor shutoff temperature will be set to
the minimum outdoor shutoff temperature.
An IDF Example:

ZoneCrossMixing ,
1stFloor -Garage , !- Name
GARAGE , !- Zone Name
Always On , !- SCHEDULE Name
Flow/Zone , !- Design Flow Rate calculation method
0.1, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow Rate per Area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Flow Rate per Person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
1ST -FLOOR , !- Source Zone Name
1.0; !- Delta temp

ZoneCrossMixing ,
Garage -1stFloor , !- Name
1ST -FLOOR , ! Zone Name
Always On , !- SCHEDULE Name
flow/zone , !- Design Flow Rate calculation method
0.1, !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Flow Rate per area {m3/s/m2}
, !- Flow Rate per person {m3/s/person}
, !- Air Changes Per Hour
GARAGE , ! Source Zone Name
1.0; ! Delta temp

1.17.8.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 675

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

1.17.8.2.1 Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

The air volume in m3 entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door
mixing during the hour or timestep.

1.17.8.2.2 Zone Mixing Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The air volumetric flow rate in m3 /s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep using the density of air evaluated at current
zone air conditions.

1.17.8.2.3 Zone Mixing Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The air volumetric flow rate in m3 /s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep using the density of air evaluated at standard
conditions.

1.17.8.2.4 Zone Mixing Mass [kg]

The air mass in kg entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door
mixing during the hour or timestep. The air mass is calculated using the air volume flow from
each “source” zone and the density of air calculated for the average conditions (temperature and
humidity) between the “source” and “receiving” zones.

1.17.8.2.5 Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The air mass flow rate in kg/s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep.

1.17.8.2.6 Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17.8.2.7 Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat transfer due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-
door mixing in the host (receiving) zone is the sum of all the incoming air mass flow rates multiplied
by the elapsed time, the specific heat (calculated for the average conditions (temperature and humid-
ity) between the “source” and “receiving” zones) and the temperature differences between the host
zone and corresponding source zones. If the heat transfer is negative, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing sensible heat loss. If the heat transfer is positive, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing sensible heat gain.

1.17.8.2.8 Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

676 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.8.2.9 Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The latent heat transfer due tothe sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing in the
host (receiving) zone is the sum of all the incoming air mass flow rates multiplied by the elapsed
time, the heat of vaporization (calculated for the average conditions (temperature and humidity)
between the “source” and “receiving” zones)and the humidity ratio differences between the host zone
and corresponding source zones. If the heat transfer is negative, the heat transfer is considered to
be a zone mixing latent heat loss. If the heat transfer is positive, the heat transfer is considered to
be a zone mixing latent heat gain.

1.17.8.2.10 Zone Mixing Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total heat loss due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing that occurs
when the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy
< the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.8.2.11 Zone Mixing Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total heat gain due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing that
occurs when the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain
Energy > = the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss
Energy.

1.17.9 ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing
ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing is ideally suited for two zones, at least one of which is refrigerated, that
exchange an equal amount of dry air. As with ZoneMixing, this is a simplified interzone airflow in
EnergyPlus. The ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing approach shares some features of both ZoneMixing
and ZoneCrossMixing. Like ZoneCrossMixing, ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing has an energy effect on
both the source and the receiving zone, thus maintaining both the air mass and energy balances in
the two zones. Unlike the other two mixing objects, ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing always calculates
the air exchange rate based on the zone temperature and relative humidity. That is, the user does
not specify the air flow rate. The user can moderate the flow through a door-opening schedule.
ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing can only be entered once for any unique pair of zones. It doesn’t
matter which zone is listed first and the zones will automatically switch back and forth between
source and receiving zones depending upon which zone is colder.

1.17.9.1 Inputs

1.17.9.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing object.

1.17.9.1.2 Field: Zone 1 Name

This field is the name of one of the two zones (ref: Zone) exchanging air and attaches a particular
refrigeration door mixing statement to both thermal zones in the building.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 677

1.17.9.1.3 Field: Zone 2 Name

This field is the name of the other zone (ref: Zone) exchanging air and attaches a particular refrig-
eration door mixing statement to both thermal zones in the building.

1.17.9.1.4 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the door opening between the
two zones and should contain values between 0.0 and 1.0.

1.17.9.1.5 Field: Door Height

This field denotes the door opening height (m). The default value is 3 m.

1.17.9.1.6 Field: Door Area

This field denotes the door opening area (m2 ). The default value is 9 m2 .

1.17.9.1.7 Field: Door Protection Type

This field is a key/choice field that tells how the door is protected. The impact of this choice is
decribed in the Engineering Reference. The key/choices are:

– None

None, or no door protection is the default choice

– AirCurtain
– StripCurtain

An IDF Example:

ZoneRefrigerationDoorMixing ,
Freezer1_Cooler1 , !- Name
Freezer1 , !- Zone 1 Name
Cooler1 , !- Zone 2 Name
Freezer1DoorSched , !- Schedule Name
1.8, !- Door height {m}
2.3, !- Door area {m2}
StripCurtain; !- Door protection type

1.17.9.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
678 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Total Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Mixing Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

1.17.9.2.1 Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

The air volume in m3 entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door
mixing during the hour or timestep.

1.17.9.2.2 Zone Mixing Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The air volumetric flow rate in m3 /s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep using the density of air evaluated at current
zone air conditions.

1.17.9.2.3 Zone Mixing Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The air volumetric flow rate in m3 /s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep using the density of air evaluated at standard
conditions.

1.17.9.2.4 Zone Mixing Mass [kg]

The air mass in kg entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door
mixing during the hour or timestep. The air mass is calculated using the air volume flow from
each “source” zone and the density of air calculated for the average conditions (temperature and
humidity) between the “source” and “receiving” zones.

1.17.9.2.5 Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The air mass flow rate in kg/s entering the zone due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and
refrigeration-door mixing during the hour or timestep.

1.17.9.2.6 Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17.9.2.7 Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat transfer due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-
door mixing in the host (receiving) zone is the sum of all the incoming air mass flow rates multiplied
by the elapsed time, the specific heat (calculated for the average conditions (temperature and humid-
ity) between the “source” and “receiving” zones) and the temperature differences between the host
zone and corresponding source zones. If the heat transfer is negative, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing sensible heat loss. If the heat transfer is positive, the heat transfer is considered
to be a zone mixing sensible heat gain.

1.17.9.2.8 Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 679

1.17.9.2.9 Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The latent heat transfer due tothe sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing in the
host (receiving) zone is the sum of all the incoming air mass flow rates multiplied by the elapsed
time, the heat of vaporization (calculated for the average conditions (temperature and humidity)
between the “source” and “receiving” zones)and the humidity ratio differences between the host zone
and corresponding source zones. If the heat transfer is negative, the heat transfer is considered to
be a zone mixing latent heat loss. If the heat transfer is positive, the heat transfer is considered to
be a zone mixing latent heat gain.

1.17.9.2.10 Zone Mixing Total Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total heat loss due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing that occurs
when the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy
< the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy.

1.17.9.2.11 Zone Mixing Total Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total heat gain due to the sum of mixing, cross-mixing, and refrigeration-door mixing that
occurs when the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain
Energy > = the sum of Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy and Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss
Energy.

1.17.10 ZoneEarthtube
An earth tube is a long, underground metal or plastic pipe through which air is drawn. During
cooling season, as air travels through the pipe, it gives up some of its heat to the surrounding soil
and enters the room as cooler air. Similarly, during heating season, as air travels through the pipe,
it receives some of its heat from the soil and enters the room as warmer air. Simple earth tubes in
EnergyPlus can be controlled by a schedule and through the specification of minimum, maximum,
and delta temperatures as described below. As with infiltration and ventilation, the actual flow rate
of air through the earth tube can be modified by the temperature difference between the inside and
outside environment and the wind speed. The basic equation used to calculate air flow rate of earth
tube in EnergyPlus is:



EarthT ubeF lowRate = (Edesign ) (Fschedule ) A + B |Tzone − Todb | + C (W indSpeed) + D W indSpeed2
(1.47)
For the simulation of the earth tube, a weather data file is required and, therefore, the earth tube
cannot run without weather data file. The required input fields to simulate the earth tube include the
average soil surface temperature, the amplitude of soil surface temperature, and the phase constant
of soil surface temperature. These fields should be calculated in advance by using a separate stand-
alone program (CalcSoilSurfTemp) and should be input into earth tube.

1.17.10.1 CalcSoilSurfTemp – Auxiliary Programs Document

The CalcSoilSurfTemp program is simple and requires only two input fields : soil condition and soil
surface condition in addition to a valid weather file. For soil condition, the user should select the
number corresponding to the actual condition of the soil surrounding the earth tube from the four
680 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

following options: 1. HEAVY AND SATURATED, 2. HEAVY AND DAMP, 3. HEAVY AND DRY
and 4. LIGHT AND DRY. This determines the thermal diffusivity and thermal conductivity of the
surrounding soil. For soil surface conditions, the user should select the number corresponding to
the actual condition of the ground surface above the earth tube from the eight following options:
1. BARE AND WET, 2. BARE AND MOIST, 3. BARE AND ARID, 4. BARE AND DRY, 5.
COVERED AND WET, 6. COVERED AND MOIST, 7. COVERED AND ARID and 8. COVERED
AND DRY. This determines the absorption coefficient and the fraction of evaporation rate of the
ground surface.
From this information and an analysis of the weather for the location selected, the CalcSoilSurfTemp
program (ref. Auxiliary Programs document) calculates the three parameters listed above. The user
must then add these parameters as input into EnergyPlus. The full input description of an earth
tube in EnergyPlus is given below.

1.17.10.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a particular earth tube statement to a
thermal zone in the building.

1.17.10.3 Field: Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that modifies the maximum design volume flow
rate parameter (see next field). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is noted as Fschedule in the above
equation.

1.17.10.4 Field: Design Flow Rate

This number (noted as Edesign in the above equation) is the maximum amount of air mass flow rate
of the earth tube expected at design conditions. The flow rate is expressed in units of m3 /s. The
design value is modified by the schedule fraction (see previous field) and user specified coefficients
(see last four fields).

1.17.10.5 Field: Minimum Zone Temperature when Cooling

This is the indoor temperature (in Celsius) below which the earth tube is shut off. This lower
temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space and thus result in a heating load. For
example, if the user specifies a minimum temperature of 20°C, earth tube is assumed to be available
if the zone air temperature is above 20°C. If the zone air temperature drops below 20°C, then earth
tube is automatically turned off.

1.17.10.6 Field: Maximum Zone Temperature when Heating

This is the indoor temperature (in Celsius) above which the earth tube is shut off. This higher
temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space and thus result in a cooling load. For
example, if the user specifies a maximum temperature of 20°C, earth tube is assumed to be available
if the zone air temperature is below 20°C. If the zone air temperature rises above 20°C, then earth
tube is automatically turned off.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 681

1.17.10.7 Field: Delta Temperature

This is the temperature difference (in Celsius) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temper-
atures below which the earth tube is shut off. This is to allow the earth tube to be stopped either
if the temperature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space or if the temperature
outside is too cold and could potentially cool the space. For example, if the user specifies a delta
temperature of 2°C, earth tube is assumed to be available if the temperature difference between
indoor and outdoor temperature is at least 2°C. If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is less than
2°C cooler or warmer than the indoor dry-bulb temperature, then the earth tube is automatically
turned off.

1.17.10.8 Field: Earthtube Type

This alpha character string defines the type of earth tube as one of the following options: Natural,
Exhaust, or Intake. A natural earth tube is assumed to be air movement/exchange that will not
consume any fan energy or is the result of natural air flow through the tube and into the building.
Values for fan pressure and efficiency for a natural flow earth tube are ignored. For either EXHAUST
or Intake, values for fan pressure and efficiency define the fan electric consumption. For Natural and
Exhaustearth tubes, the conditions of the air entering the space are assumed to be equivalent to
the air which is cooled or heated by passing along the pipe. For Intake earth tubes, an appropriate
amount of fan heat is added to the air stream.

1.17.10.9 Field: Fan Pressure Rise

This is the pressure rise experienced across the fan in Pascals (N/m2 ). This is a function of the fan
and plays a role in determining the amount of energy consumed by the fan.

1.17.10.10 Field: Fan Total Efficiency

This is the total fan efficiency (a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0). This is a function of the fan
and plays a role in determining the amount of energy consumed by the fan.

1.17.10.11 Field: Pipe Radius

This is the radius of the earth tube/pipe (in meters). This plays a role in determining the amount
of heat transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe. If the pipe has
non-circular cross section, user can use the concept of hydraulic diameter as follows.

D = 4 × Area/P erimeter (1.48)

However, since this field requires the pipe radius, hydraulic diameter should be divided by two.

1.17.10.12 Field: Pipe Thickness

This is the thickness of the pipe wall (in meters). This plays a role in determining the amount of
heat transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe.
682 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.10.13 Field: Pipe Length

This is the total length of the pipe (in meters). This plays a role in determining the amount of heat
transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe. As the length of the pipe
becomes longer, the amount of the heat transfer becomes larger.

1.17.10.14 Field: Pipe Thermal Conductivity

This is the thermal conductivity of the pipe (in W/m°C). This plays a role in determining the amount
of heat transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe.

1.17.10.15 Field: Pipe Depth Under Ground Surface

This is the depth of the pipe under the ground surface (in meters). This plays a role in determining
the temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe.

1.17.10.16 Field: Soil Condition

This alpha character string defines the actual condition of the soil surrounding the earth tube and
can be one of any of the following options: HeavyAndSaturated, HeavyAndDamp, HeavyAndDry or
LightAndDry. This determines the thermal diffusivity and thermal conductivity of the surrounding
soil, which play a role in determining the amount of heat transferred from the surrounding soil to
the air passing along the pipe.

1.17.10.17 Field: Average Soil Surface Temperature

This is the annual average soil surface temperature straight above the earth tube, which plays a role
in determining the temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe. This field should be calculated in
advance using the separate CalcSoilSurfTemp program.

1.17.10.18 Field: Amplitude of Soil Surface Temperature

This is the amplitude of soil surface temperature above the earth tube, which plays a role in de-
termining the temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe. This is the difference between the
maximum and minimum soil surface temperature for the whole year divided by two. This field
should be calculated in advance using the separate CalcSoilSurfTemp program.

1.17.10.19 Field: Phase Constant of Soil Surface Temperature

This is the phase constant of the soil surface temperature straight above the earth tube, which play
a role in determining the temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe at particular time. This is the
time elapsed from the beginning of the year until the soil surface temperature reaches the minimum
value of the year. This field should be calculated in advance using the separate CalcSoilSurfTemp
program.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 683

1.17.10.20 Field: Constant Term Flow Coefficient

This number is the “A” parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter, however, is a
constant under all conditions and is not modified by any environmental effect. As a result, it is
dimensionless.

1.17.10.21 Field: Temperature Term Flow Coefficient

This number is the “B” parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
the temperature difference between the outdoor and indoor air dry-bulb temperatures. The units
for this parameter are inverse Celsius.

1.17.10.22 Field: Velocity Term Flow Coefficient

This number is the “C” parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are s/m.

1.17.10.23 Field: Velocity Squared Term Flow Coefficient

This number is the “D” parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified
modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by
square of the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are
s2 /m2 .
An IDF example:

EARTHTUBE ,
Zone 2, !- Zone Name
Simple EarthTube , !- Schedule Name
3.425198 , !- Design Volume Flow Rate
10.0, !- Minimum Zone Temperature when Cooling
30.0, !- Maximum Zone Temperature when Heating
1.0, !- Delta Temperature
NATURAL , !- EarthTube Type
350.0 , !- Fan Pressure Rise
0.9, !- Fan Total Efficiency
0.25, !- Pipe Radius
0.2, !- Pipe Thickness
15.0, !- Pipe Length
200.0 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity
3.5, !- Pipe Depth Under Ground Surface
HeavyAndDamp , !- Soil Condition
15.0, !- Average Soil Surface Temperature
5.6, !- Amplitude of Soil Surface Temperature
0.0, !- Phase Constant of Soil Surface Temperature
0.6060000 , !- Constant Term Flow Coef
2.0199999E-02, !- Temp Term Flow Coef
5.9800001E-04, !- Velocity Term Flow Coef
0.0000000E+00; !- Velocity **2 Term Flow Coef
684 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.11 ZoneEarthTube Outputs

Current Earth Tube output variables:

– HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Air Flow Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Air Flow Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Zone Inlet Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Ground Interface Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Outdoor Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Inlet Wet Bulb Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Inlet Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

1.17.11.1 Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

1.17.11.2 Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

These are the energy and rate associated with the zone cooling provided by the air from the earth
tube. This occurs when the earth tube outlet air temperature is less than zone air temperature.

1.17.11.3 Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.17.11.4 Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]

These are the energy and rate associated with the zone heating provided by the air from the earth
tube. This occurs when the earth tube outlet air temperature is greater than the zone air temper-
ature.

1.17.11.5 Earth Tube Air Flow Volume [m3]

The volume flow of air through the earth tube.

1.17.11.6 Earth Tube Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The volume flow rate of air through the earth tube evaluating density at current zone conditions.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 685

1.17.11.7 Earth Tube Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The volume flow rate of air through the earth tube evaluating density at standard conditions.

1.17.11.8 Earth Tube Air Flow Mass [kg]

The mass flow of air through the earth tube.

1.17.11.9 Earth Tube Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow rate of air through the earth tube.

1.17.11.10 Earth Tube Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow rate of water vapor at the exit of the earth tube.

1.17.11.11 Earth Tube Fan Electricity Energy [J]

1.17.11.12 Earth Tube Fan Electricity Rate [W]

These are the fan electricity consumption and power for intake or exhaust earth tube types.

1.17.11.13 Earth Tube Zone Inlet Air Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the air entering the zone after passing through the earth tube [C]. This
temperature includes the cooling or heating of outdoor air as it passes along the pipe. When intake
fan assist is used, then the additional heat due to the fan is included in the inlet air temperature.

1.17.11.14 Earth Tube Ground Interface Temperature [C]

This is the average temperature of the ground along the outer surface of the earth tube [C].

1.17.11.15 Earth Tube Outdoor Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate of heat transfer from the earth tube to the outdoor air [W]. Positive values indicate
the rate at which outdoor air is preheated; negative values indicate the rate of precooling.

1.17.11.16 Earth Tube Zone Inlet Wet Bulb Temperature [C]

This is the wet bulb temperature of the air entering the zone after passing through the earth tube
[C].

1.17.11.17 Earth Tube Zone Inlet Humidity Ratio [kgWater/krDryAir]

This is the humidity ratio of the air entering the zone after passing through the earth tube [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir].
686 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.12 ZoneCoolTower:Shower
A cooltower (which is sometimes referred to as a wind tower or a shower cooling tower) is a component
that is intended to model a passive downdraught evaporative cooling (PDEC) that is designed to
capture the wind at the top of a tower and cool the outside air using water evaporation before
delivering it to a space. The air flow in these systems is natural as the evaporation process increases
the density of the air causing it to fall through the tower and into the space without the aid of a
fan. A cooltower typically consists of a water spray or an evaporative pad, a shaft, and a water tank
or reservoir. Wind catchers to improve the wind-driven performance at the top of the tower are
optional. Water is pumped over an evaporative device by water pump which is the only component
consumed power for this system. This water cools and humidifies incoming air and then the cool,
dense air naturally falls down through shaft and leaves through large openings at the bottom of
cooltowers.
The shower cooling tower can be controlled by a schedule and the specification of maximum water
flow rate and volume flow rate as well as minimum indoor temperature. The actual flow rate of
water and air can be controlled as users specify the fractions of water loss and flow schedule. The
required input fields include effective tower height and exit area to obtain the temperature and flow
rate of the air exiting the tower. A schedule and rated power for the water pump are also required
to determine the power consumed. The component typically has a stand alone water system that is
not added to the water consumption from mains. However, users are required to specify the water
source through an optional field, the name of water supply storage tank, in case any water comes
from a water main. The model is described more fully in the Engineering Reference document.
This model requires weather information obtained from either design day or weather file specifica-
tions. The control is accomplished by either specifying the water flow rate or obtaining the velocity
at the outlet with inputs and weather conditions when the water flow rate is unknown. As with
infiltration, ventilation, and earth tubes, the component is treated in a similar fashion to “natural
ventilation” in EnergyPlus.

1.17.12.1 Inputs

1.17.12.1.1 Field: Name

This field is a unique user assigned name for each cooltower. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.

1.17.12.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule that denotes whether the cooltower can run during a given time
period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the cooltower is available
and can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes
that the cooltower is not available and must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the
schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.17.12.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) and attaches a particular cooltower statement to a
thermal zone in the building.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 687

1.17.12.1.4 Field: Water Supply Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the cooltower obtains water used for evaporative
cooling. If blank or omitted, then the cooltower will obtain water directly from local water main.
If the name of a Water Storage Tank object is used here, then the cooltower will obtain its water
from that tank. If a tank is specified, the cooltower will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from
the tank. However, if the tank cannot provide all the water the cooltower needs, then the cooltower
will still operate and obtain the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’
water).

1.17.12.1.5 Field: Flow Control Type

This field specifies how the user wishes to control the cooltower. The air flow from the cooltower
may be controlled by either the water flow rate along with the water pump schedule or naturally
driven by wind flow. The user must select from the following options: WaterFlowSchedule and
WindDrivenFlow. If the user either wishes to control the water flow rate or has information about
the water flow rate, WaterFlowSchedule must be selected. WindDrivenFlow for cooltower flow
control must be selected when the water flow rate is unknown and the user wishes to have the flow
rate of both air and water controlled by the external weather conditions (wind speed). If the user
does not select a control type, WindDrivenFlow is assumed as a flow control type.

1.17.12.1.6 Field: Pump Flow Rate Schedule Name

This field modifies the maximum flow rate of water through the cooltower in m3/sec. This input is
“optional.” If the user does not enter a schedule, the flow rate through the cooltower is assumed to
be constant during all hours that it is operating based on the value entered in the previous input
field. Note that the values for this schedule must be between zero and one.

1.17.12.1.7 Field: Maximum Water Flow Rate

This field is the maximum water flow rate distributed to the tower in m3/s. This limit is intended
to avoid over estimation of water flow rate, which leads higher air flow rate and exit temperature of
the air.

1.17.12.1.8 Field: Effective Tower Height

This field is the effective tower height for evaporative cooling, from the water spray to the top of the
exit in m.

1.17.12.1.9 Field: Airflow Outlet Area

This field is the area at the exit of the tower in m2. This field is used to determine the air flow rate
leaving the tower with the velocity of the air flow.

1.17.12.1.10 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

This field is the maximum volumetric flow rate of the air leaving the tower in m3/s. This airflow
maximum allows the cooltower performance to be limited if the outside wind speed and the tower
height are relatively high and thus result in high airflow supplied to the space.
688 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.12.1.11 Field: Minimum Indoor Temperature

This field is the minimum indoor temperature in Celsius below which cooltower is shutoff. This lower
temperature limit is intended to avoid overcooling a space and thus result in a heating load. For
example, if the user specifies a minimum temperature of 20°C, cooltower is assumed to be available
if the zone air temperature is above 20°C. If the zone air temperature drops below 20°C, then
cooltower is automatically turned off.

1.17.12.1.12 Field: Fraction of Water Loss

This field specifies the fraction of the loss of water during either operation or transient operation. If
the user does not enter a fraction, no loss of water is assumed and the cooltower water consumption
includes only evaporation. Note that the fraction must be between zero and one.

1.17.12.1.13 Field: Fraction of Flow Schedule

This field specifies the fraction of the airflow that actually goes to the outside. The user who wishes
to control the actual flow to the inside of the building must specify the value of the fraction. If the
user does not enter a fraction, the calculated flow rate is the “zone cooltower volume flow rate.” Note
that the fraction must be between zero and one.

1.17.12.1.14 Field: Rated Power Consumption

This field is the pump’s rated power consumption in Watts.
Below is an example input for a cooltower.

ZoneCoolTower:Shower
Cool Tower 1, !- Name of cooltowers
Zone 1, !- Zone name
Simple Vent , !- Schedule
, !- Name of water supply storage tanks
WindDrivenFlow , !- Flow control type
0.0005 , !- Water flow rate from the spray in m3/s
, !- schedule for flow rate (optional , non -existent means constant)
5.0, !- Effective tower height in m
1.0, !- Exit area in m2
10.0, !- Maximum supply air volume flow rate in m3/s
18.0, !- Minimum indoor temperature to prevent overcooling in C
0.05, !- Fraction of Water loss
0.05, !- Fraction of flow that goes to outside
250.0; !- Rated power consumption in W

1.17.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Air Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 689

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Air Mass [kg]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Air Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Air Inlet Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Air Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Air Outlet Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Cooltower Pump Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Mains Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Cooltower Starved Mains Water Volume [m3]

1.17.12.2.1 Zone Cooltower Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17.12.2.2 Zone Cooltower Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]

The sensible heat loss that occurs when the temperature at the exit of the cooltower is less than
that of the zone.

1.17.12.2.3 Zone Cooltower Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

1.17.12.2.4 Zone Cooltower Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]

The latent heat loss that occurs when the humidity ratio at the exit of the cooltower is greater than
that of the zone.

1.17.12.2.5 Zone Cooltower Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volumetric flow rate of the air leaving the cooltower evaluating density at current zone conditions.

1.17.12.2.6 Zone Cooltower Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volumetric flow rate of the air leaving the cooltower evaluating density at standard conditions.

1.17.12.2.7 Zone Cooltower Air Volume [m3]

The sum of actual volumetric flow of the air leaving cooltower

1.17.12.2.8 Zone Cooltower Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow rate of the air leaving the cooltower

1.17.12.2.9 Zone Cooltower Air Mass [kg]

The sum of actual mass flow of the air leaving the cooltower
690 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.12.2.10 Zone Cooltower Air Inlet Temperature [C]

The dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air the inlet of the cooltower

1.17.12.2.11 Zone Cooltower Air Inlet Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The humidity ratio of the outdoorair at the inlet of the cooltower

1.17.12.2.12 Zone Cooltower Air Outlet Temperature [C]

The temperature at the exit of the cooltower.

1.17.12.2.13 Zone Cooltower Air Outlet Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The humidity ratio of the air at the exit of the cooltower.

1.17.12.2.14 Zone Cooltower Water Volume [m3]

The water consumption includes not only the direct thermodynamics of water evaporation but also
other sources of consumption such as drift or concentration blow down specified by users throughout
all processes during the operation.

1.17.12.2.15 Zone Cooltower Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the water consumed by the cooltower that actually be met by the mains water. This output
variable appears only when the water comes from mains.

1.17.12.2.16 Zone Cooltower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

This is the water consumed by the cooltower that actually be met by the water storage tank. If any
amount of the water is starved from mains, this water consumption is the difference between the
Zone Cooltower Water Volume and the following output. This output variable appears only when
the water comes from storage tank waters.

1.17.12.2.17 Zone Cooltower Starved Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the source (mains) of water consumed by the cooltower that could not actually be met by the
storage tank. This output variable appears only when the water comes from storage tank waters.

1.17.12.2.18 Zone Cooltower Pump Electricity Rate [W]

The power consumed by the recirculating pump in Watts.

1.17.12.2.19 Zone Cooltower Pump Electricity Energy [J]

The energy consumed by the recirculating pump in Joules.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 691

1.17.13 ZoneThermalChimney
A thermal chimney is a vertical shaft utilizing solar radiation to enhance the natural ventilation in
buildings. It consists of a absorber wall, air gap and glass cover with high solar transmissivity. For
the high solar absorption, it is usually south facing.
The key output parameter in the thermal chimney model is the enhanced amount of natural ven-
tilation rate caused by the presence of a thermal chimney. In order to determine the enhanced
ventilation, the discharge air temperature from a thermal chimney should be calculated, which, in
turn, should be computed based on the information on the absorber wall temperature, glass cover
temperature and the vertical air temperature distribution within the thermal chimney. Among them,
energy balances for the absorber wall and the glass cover are carried out using the existing algorithm
currently available in EnergyPlus, which has the similar approach to the Trombe wall. As stated in
the Trombe wall object as well, this approach allows the flexibility for users to specify the various
wall parameters and to explore unusual configurations. On the other hand, the vertical air tempera-
ture distribution and the resultant discharge air temperature of the thermal chimney are computed
using the separate thermal chimney algorithm described in the Engineering Reference document.
Similar to the Trombe wall model, a zone is coupled to the desired surface via an interzone partition.
To simulate the thermal chimney, the Solar Distribution field in the Building object should be set
to FullInteriorAndExterior so that the majority of the solar flux is directed on the absorber wall.
For a normal sized thermal chimney zone, the user can set the Zone Inside Convection Algorithm to
“Detailed”, which takes into account natural convection effects intended for a normal zone. For a
narrow cavity zone having high aspect ratios, there is no built-in algorithm for calculating the correct
convection coefficients on the inside of thermal chimney zone walls. One option is to use the “De-
tailed” convection algorithm similar to the Trombe wall model. However, some error may be incurred
when used with a narrow zone. Another option is to use the SurfaceProperty:ConvectionCoefficients
object to schedule coefficients that have been determined beforehand by the user. In addition, the
wall construction of the adjoining zone must be the mirror image of the wall construction in the
thermal chimney zone.
The full input description of a thermal chimney in EnergyPlus is given below.

1.17.13.1 Field: Name

This field is a unique user assigned name for an instance of the thermal chimney system.

1.17.13.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the thermal chimney zone (ref: Zone). Since the thermal chimney is not
only a system component but also a zone itself, this field is also necessary. It should be differentiated
from the Zone name field described later.

1.17.13.3 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the thermal chimney can
operate during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates
that the system is available and can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0
(usually 0 is used) denotes that the system is not available and must be off for the time period. If
this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
692 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.13.4 Field: Width of the Absorber Wall

This number is the width of the absorber wall in the thermal chimney. The width is expressed
in units of m. Even though this value is specified in Surface objects as well, this value is used to
compute the discharge air temperature and the enhanced ventilation rate caused by the thermal
chimney.

1.17.13.5 Field: Cross Sectional Area of Air Channel Outlet

This number is the cross sectional area of air channel outlet. The area is expressed in units of
m2 . The enhanced air flow rate by the thermal chimney is dependent on cross sectional areas of
air channel inlet and outlet. Cross sectional areas of air channel inlet will be described later in
conjunction with the distance from the top of thermal chimney to each inlet and relative ratios of
air flow rates passing through each inlet.

1.17.13.6 Field: Discharge Coefficient

This dimensionless number is the discharge coefficient of the thermal chimney. The ventilation rate
enhanced by the thermal chimney is also dependent on the discharge coefficient.

1.17.13.7 Field: Zone <#> Name

This field is the name of the zone (ref: Zone) to which the thermal chimney is attached. It is used
in conjunction with the next three fields. Note that up to 20 sets of zone name, distance from the
top of the thermal chimney to each inlet, relative ratios of air flow rates passing through each zone
and cross sectional areas of each air channel inlet may be entered for a single thermal chimney if
multiple zones share the common thermal chimney.

1.17.13.8 Field: Distance from Top of Thermal Chimney to Inlet <#>

This field is the distance from the top of the thermal chimney to each inlet corresponding to each
zone. It is used in conjunction with the zone name, relative ratios of air flow rates passing through
each zone and cross sectional areas of each air channel inlet. The distance is expressed in units of
m. The air flow rate enhanced by the thermal chimney is dependent on the distance between the
thermal chimney outlet and inlet.

1.17.13.9 Field: Relative Ratios of Air Flow Rates Passing through Zone <#>

This dimensionless number is the relative ratio of air flow rates enhanced by the thermal chimney
passing through each zone. The total air flow rate enhanced by the thermal chimney is distributed
to each zone based on this number if multiple zones share the common thermal chimney. It is used
in conjunction with the zone name, the distance from the top of the thermal chimney to each inlet
and cross sectional areas of each air channel inlet. Note that the sum of all ratios must be equal to
1.0.
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 693

1.17.13.10 Field: Cross Sectional Areas of Air Channel Inlet <#>

This field is the cross sectional areas of each air channel inlet corresponding to each zone. It is used
in conjunction with the zone name, the distance from the top of the thermal chimney to each inlet
and relative ratios of air flow rates passing through each zone. The area is expressed in units of
m2 . The air flow rate enhanced by the thermal chimney is dependent on cross sectional areas of air
channel inlet and outlet.
An IDF example:

ZoneThermalChimney ,
ThermalChimney1 , !- Name of Thermal Chimney System
ThermalChimneyZone , !- Name of Thermal Chimney Zone
ThermalChimneyAvail , !- Availability Schedule Name
3.5, !- Width of the Absorber Wall
0.04, !- Cross Sectional Area of Air Channel Outlet
0.8, !- Discharge Coefficient
Zone1 , !- Zone Name 1
8.0, !- Distance from the Top of the Thermal Chimney to Inlet 1
0.8, !- Relative Ratios of Air Flow Rates Passing through Zone 1
0.02, !- Cross Sectional Areas of Air Channel Inlet 1
Zone2 , !- Zone Name 2
5.0, !- Distance from the Top of the Thermal Chimney to Inlet 2
0.2, !- Relative Ratios of Air Flow Rates Passing through Zone 2
0.02; !- Cross Sectional Areas of Air Channel Inlet 2

1.17.14 ZoneThermalChimney Outputs

Current ThermalChimney output variables:

– HVAC,Average,Zone Thermal Chimney Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Thermal Chimney Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Thermal Chimney Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Thermal Chimney Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Thermal Chimney Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Thermal Chimney Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Thermal Chimney Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Thermal Chimney Mass [kg]

1.17.14.1 Zone Thermal Chimney Heat Loss Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat loss of each zone that occurs when the thermal chimney cools the
zone air.

1.17.14.2 Zone Thermal Chimney Heat Gain Energy [J]

The sensible (temperature) heat gain of each zone that occurs when the thermal chimney heats the
zone air.
694 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.14.3 Zone Thermal Chimney Volume [m3]

The air volumetric flow of each zone enhanced by the thermal chimney.

1.17.14.4 Zone Thermal Chimney Mass [kg]

The air mass flow of each zone enhanced by the thermal chimney.

1.17.14.5 Zone Thermal Chimney Current Density Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The total air volumetric flow rate caused by the thermal chimney evaluating density at the current
zone conditions.

1.17.14.6 Zone Thermal Chimney Standard Density Air Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

The total air volumetric flow rate caused by the thermal chimney evaluating density at standard
conditions.

1.17.14.7 Zone Thermal Chimney Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The total air mass flow rate caused by the thermal chimney.

1.17.14.8 Zone Thermal Chimney Outlet Temperature [C]

The temperature of the air which is discharged from the thermal chimney through the outlet.
In addition, the mass flow rate and associated sensible and latent loads are included in Zone Infiltra-
tion * output variables. In other words, the output variables of Zone Infiltration * include impact
of ZoneThermalChimney.

1.17.15 ZoneAirMassFlowConservation
This global object allows users to trigger the zone air mass flow conservation calculation when de-
sired. This object has three input fields; the first choice input field allows the user whether to adjust
mixing flows, the return air flow, or a combination of mixing and return air flows to enforce the
zone air mass flow conservation; and the other fields allows the user to specify how infiltration object
mass flow rate is calculated for zone air mass flow balance calculation. Currently supported options
are: AdjustMixingOnly, AdjustReturnOnly, AdjustMixingThenReturn, AdjustReturn-
ThenMixing, or None. If adjustments for either of mixing, return, or a combination of mixing and
return or infiltration is specified then the zone air mass balance attempts to enforce conservation. If
adjutement choice is None and infiltration adjustments are off, then the zone air mass flow calcula-
tion uses the default method which does not include zone mixing objects and assumes self-balanced
simple infiltration. The default method may not necessarily enforce zone air mass flow conservation
unless the user has specified a balanced flow to begin with. The zone air mass flow conservation
primarily accounts for the zonemixing objects and return air flows in the zone air flow mass balance
calculation. In addition to the zonemixing object and zone return air flows, the procedure accounts
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 695

for zone supply, exhaust, and adjusts infiltration air flows (up or down) when required in order to
balance the zone air mass flow. Mixing and infiltration adjustments will only be made in zones
which have zonemixing or infiltration objects defined in the input. For example, if a zone does not
have any infiltration objects, then no infiltration adjustment will be made for that zone.
The zone mixing object and return flows adjusting options to enforce zone air mass flow conseravtion
are defined as follows. AdjustMixingOnly adjusts the zone mixing object flow only to enforce
zone air mass flow balance. AdjustReturnOnly adjusts the zone return air flow only to enforce
zone air mass flow balance while the zone mixing object flow are kept at user specified values.
AdjustMixingThenReturn adjusts the zone mixing object flow first, and followed with adjusting
the return air flows to enforce zone air mass flow balance. AdjustReturnThenMixing adjusts the
zone return air flow first, and followed with adjusting the zone mixing object flow to enforce zone
air mass flow balance. None does not adjust either the zone mixing or the zone return air flow, and
the zone air mass flow balance uses the default method.
First, depending user choice either the ZoneMixing object mass flow rate, the zone total return air
flow rate, or a combination zone mixing and zone total return flow rates are adjusted or modified in
order to balance zone air mass flow while assuming any zone infiltration objects are self-balanced.
This step will always results in balanced zone air mass for receiving zones of ZoneMixing object but
it may not necessarily result in a balanced air mass flow for source zones.
Second, infiltration flow rates are adjusted according to the options set. Infiltration flow will be
increased or decreased to balance the net flow from supply, exhaust, mixing, and return air flows. If
a negative infiltration rate (exfiltration) is required to balance a zone’s airflow, then the infiltration
rate will be set to zero. This can happen, for example, if the total supply flow exceeds the total
exahust plus return flow.
This object is optional. If it is not present in the input file, the default zone air mass flow calculastion
are used which do not account for zonemixing and infiltration flows.

1.17.15.1 Inputs

1.17.15.1.1 Field: Adjust Zone Mixing and Return For Air Mass Flow Balance

This field has five choices: AdjustMixingOnly, AdjustReturnOnly, AdjustMixingThenReturn, Adjus-

tReturnThenMixing or None. When set to AdjustMixingOnly, the zone air mass flow balance attempts
to enforce zone mass flow conservation by adjusting zone mixing flow rates and zone infiltration air
flow may be increased or decreased if required in order to balance the zone air mass flow. When set
to AdjustReturnOnly, the zone air mass flow balance attempts to enforce zone mass flow conservation
by adjusting zone total return air flow rates and zone infiltration air flow may be increased or de-
creased if required in order to balance the zone air mass flow. When set to AdjustMixingThenReturn,
first the zone air mass flow balance attempts to enforce zone mass flow conservation by adjusting
zone mixing object flow rates, then the zone total return flow rates are adjusted and zone infiltration
air flow may be increased or decreased if required in order to balance the zone air mass flow. When
set to AdjustReturnThenMixing, first the zone air mass flow balance attempts to enforce zone mass
flow conservation by adjusting zone total return air flow rates, then the zone mixing flow rates are
adjusted and zone infiltration air flow may be increased or decreased if required in order to balance
the zone air mass flow. When set to None, mixing flow rates are not adjusted; the mixing flows
specified in ZoneMixing obects will be used. The default is None.
696 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.17.15.1.2 Field: Infiltration Balancing Method

This field has three choices: AddInfiltrationFlow, AdjustInfiltrationFlow, or None. The default is
AddInfiltrationFlow. With all three options, the base infiltration flow rate is the flow specified in all
Infiltration:* objects for a given zone.
AddInfiltrationFlow: The base infiltration flow may be increased in order to balance the zone air
mass flow. This additional infiltration air mass flow is not self-balanced, i.e., it is always assumed to
be incoming flow which leaves by exahust, mixing, or return. If no infiltration air is required in order
to balance the zone air mass flow, then the additional infiltration air mass flow rate is set to zero.
For this option, the base infiltration flow is always assumed to be self-balanced (i.e., exfiltration =
infiltration) and is not included in the zone air mass flow balance.
AdjustInfiltrationFlow: The base infiltration flow may be increased or decreased in order to balance
the zone air mass flow. If no infiltration is required to balance the zone air flow, then the base
infiltration flow rate is retained and assumed to be self-balanced (i.e., exfiltration = infiltration). If
the required infiltration flow rate is negative (exfiltration), then the infiltration flow rate is set to
zero and surplus flow in the zone is assumed to leave as exfiltration.
None: The base infiltration flow is always assumed to be self-balanced (i.e., exfiltration = infiltration)
and is not included in the zone air mass flow balance. No changes are made to the base infiltration
flow rate.

1.17.15.1.3 Field: Infiltration Balancing Zones

This field allows user to choose which zones are included in infiltration balancing. There are two
choices: MixingSourceZoneOnly or AllZones.
MixingSourceZonesOnly: Infiltration balancing is active only in zones which are source zones for
mixing and which have a base infiltration object defined.
AllZones: Infiltration balance is active in any zone which has a base infiltration object defined.
An IDF example is shown below:

ZoneAirMassFlowConservation ,
Yes , !- Adjust Zone Mixing For Zone Air Mass Flow Balance
AdjustInfiltrationFlow ; !- Infiltration Balancing Method
AllZones; !- Infiltration Balancing Zones

1.17.15.2 Outputs

Current ZoneAirMassFlowConservation output variables (only applicable variables will be gener-

ated):

– HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Supply Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Exhaust Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Return Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Receiving Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Source Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Zone Infiltration Air Mass Flow Balance Status, []
– HVAC, Average, Zone Mass Balance Infiltration Air Mass Flow Rate, [kg/s]
1.17. GROUP – AIRFLOW 697

1.17.15.2.1 Zone Air Mass Balance Supply Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total supply air mass flow rate of a zone. The value is determined
by summing the supply air mass flow rates contributions from all supply air inlet nodes of a zone.

1.17.15.2.2 Zone Air Mass Balance Exhaust Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total exhaust air mass flow rate of a zone. The value is determined
by summing the exhaust air mass flow rates contributions from all exhaust air nodes of a zone.

1.17.15.2.3 Zone Air Mass Balance Return Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total return air mass flow rate of a zone. The value is determined
by summing the return air mass flow rates contributions from return air nodes of a zone.

1.17.15.2.4 Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Receiving Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total zone mixing air mass flow rate of a receiving zone from one
or more mixing objects. The value is determined by summing the air mass flow contributions from
all zone mixing objects connected to a single receiving zone.

1.17.15.2.5 Zone Air Mass Balance Mixing Source Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the total zone mixing source air mass flow rate of a source zone feeding
one or more mixing objects. The value is determined by summing the air mass flow contributions
from all zone mixing objects connected to a single source zone.

1.17.15.2.6 Zone Air Mass Balance Infiltration Status []

This output variable indicates the status of the infiltration object mass flow rate use for balancing
the zone mass flow at each time step. It has values of either 0 or 1. If the value of this report
variable is 0 then the zone infiltration object mass flow rate is not used in the zone mass conservation
calculation, hence the infiltration rate calculated based on the user specified inputs is manintained
and the infiltration rate is assumed as self-balanced for the current timestep. If the value is 1 then
the zone infiltration object mass flow rate is included in the zone air mass flow balance calculation,
hence the user specified infiltration rate is modified and it is considered as incoming flow to the zone,
i.e., self-balanced assumption is not valid for this zone and current time step.

1.17.15.2.7 Zone Air Mass Balance Infiltration Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output variable represents the zone infiltration air mass flow rate in kg/s. This output variable is
reported only for source zones and when the zone air mass flow balance is active. Its value depends on
the Infiltration Balancing Method specified. When the infiltration method is AddInfiltrationFlow this
output represents the additional infiltration air mass flow rate added on top of the base infiltration
air flow in order to balance the zone air mass flow. In this case, the base infiltration air mass flow
calculated using the user specified input is assumed self-balanced. When the infiltration method is
AdjustInfiltrationFlow and the value of “Zone Air Mass Balance Infiltration Status” is 1, this output
represents the infiltration air mass flow rate required to balance the zone air mass flow. This value
could be negative if the zone supply exceeds all other outflows. If the value of “Zone Air Mass
Balance Infiltration Status” is 0, then this output is the self-balanced base infiltration flow rate for
current timestep.
698 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18 Group – Design Objects

1.18.1 Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing
1.18.1.1 Overview

In order for EnergyPlus to successfully calculate zone design heating and cooling loads and air flow
rates and for the program to use these results to automatically size the HVAC components a number
of input objects must be present and certain object input fields must be entered.

– The input file should contain a SimulationControl object. The 1st field Do Zone Sizing Calcu-
lation should be entered as Yes. This will cause a zone sizing simulation to be done using all
the sizing periods in the input file as weather. If there are no air or water loops in the HVAC
input fields 2 and 3 can be set to No. If there are one or more air loops (i.e., there is at least one
AirLoopHVAC object in the input file) then the 2nd field Do System Sizing Calculation should
be entered as Yes. If there are one or more water loops (Plant Loop objects) then the 3rd field
Do Plant Sizing Calculation should be set to Yes. Finally either the 4th field (Run Simulation
for Sizing Periods) or the 5th field (Run Simulation for Weather File Run Periods) should be
set to Yes in order to autosize the components and do a real simulation using the autosized
components. The component autosizing calculations are done on the first pass through the
HVAC system in the real simulation.
– There must be at least 2 (up to any number) SizingPeriod objects present. Normally one will
be for summer conditions and one for winter. The summer day should normally have the field
Day Type set to SummerDesignDay. The winter design day should normally have Day Type
set to WinterDesignDay.
– To apply a global sizing factor include the Sizing:Parameters object.
– For each controlled zone in the input file there should be a corresponding Sizing:Zone object.
Similarly for each AirLoopHVAC there should be a Sizing:System object. And for each Plant
or Condenser Loop there should be a Sizing:Plant object. Note however that if a controlled
zone has no corresponding Zone Sizing object the data from the first Zone Sizing object will
be used. Thus if all the zone sizing information is the same only one Zone Sizing object need
be entered.
– Only controlled zones are included in the zone and system sizing calculations. Thus for a design
air flow rate to be calculated for a zone, it must contain a thermostat even though it might not
need or have a thermostat in the full simulation. An illustration would be a three zone building
with a packaged single zone system and a thermostat in one of the zones. In order for the two
slave zones to be included in the design air flow calculations they must be treated as if they
have a thermostat: there must be a ZoneControl:Thermostat for each of the slave zones.
– Some attention should be paid to schedules. In a weekly schedule object the 9th and 10th day
schedules are for summer and winter design days respectively. This means that if a SizingPeriod
object has field Day Type set to SummerDesignDay the day schedule for summer sizing periods
will be in effect. Similarly if a SizingPeriod object has field Day Type set to WinterDesignDay
the day schedule for winter sizing periods will be in effect. Some possible applications of this
capability are:

1) setting internal loads (lights, equipment, occupancy) to maximum all day for cooling and to zero
all day for heating;
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 699

2) setting heating and cooling thermostat set points to constant values (no set up or set back);
3) setting heating and cooling equipment to be always on.
None of these applications are necessarily recommended but these and other uses of the special
summer/winter design day schedules may prove useful for specific situations.

– Other than zone thermostat setpoints, the sizing calculations generally know nothing about the
system control inputs such as setpoints and availability schedules. The user must coordinate
sizing inputs with the actual simulation control inputs.
– The sizing calculations only recognize the presence of central heating and cooling coils, preheat
and precool coils and reheat coils. These are assumed to deliver the various supply temperatures
specified in the Sizing:System and Sizing:Zone objects. The impact of other components such
as heat recovery, dehumidifiers, and pumps are not accounted for in the sizing calculations.
Central supply and return fan temperature rise is taken into account in sizing the central
cooling coils.

1.18.1.2 Component Autosizing

For autosizing to occur at the component level the user must enter the special value autosize in
the numeric fields for which autosizing is available. Those fields can be found by looking at the
Energy+.idd data dictionary file or under individual object details in this document. Fields that
can be autosized are denoted with the comment \autosizable. The components and fields that are
autosizable are listed in the following table. Note that spaces may be inserted in object names to
facilitate readability.

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Water Condenser Volume Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
AirLoopHVAC
Design Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
700 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Supply Air Flow Rate

AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
Cooling System Air Flow Rate
Heating System Air Flow Rate
No Load System Air Flow Rate
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supple-
mental Heater
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed
Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supple-
mental Heater
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir
Supply Air Flow Rate
Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supple-
mental Heater
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 701

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Maximum Supply Air Temperature
AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
Maximum Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV
Maximum Damper Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
Maximum Terminal Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam
Supply Air Volumetric Flow Rate
Maximum Total Chilled Water Volumetric Flow
Rate
Number of Beams
Beam Length
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
Maximum Total Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate
Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
Maximum Primary Air Flow Rate
Maximum Secondary Air Flow Rate
Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction
Fan On Flow Fraction
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Primary Air Flow Rate
Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
702 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Maximum Air Flow Rate

Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Re-
heat
Maximum Flow Fraction During Reheat
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate
Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
Boiler:HotWater
Nominal Capacity
Design Water Flow Rate
Boiler:Steam
Nominal Capacity
Branch
Maximum Flow Rate
Chiller:Absorption
Nominal Capacity
Nominal Pumping Power
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Design Generator Fluid Flow Rate
Chiller:Absorption:Indirect
Nominal Capacity
Nominal Pumping Power
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Design Generator Fluid Flow Rate
Chiller:CombustionTurbine
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 703

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Nominal Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Gas Turbine Engine Capacity
Chiller:ConstantCOP
Nominal Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Chiller:Electric
Nominal Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Fluid Flow Rate
Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate
Chiller:Electric:EIR
Reference Capacity
Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate
Reference Condenser Fluid Flow Rate
Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate
Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR
Reference Capacity
Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate
Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate
Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate
Chiller:EngineDriven
Nominal Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired
Nominal Cooling Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Design Hot Water Flow Rate
ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect
Nominal Cooling Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Design Hot Water Flow Rate
704 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR
Reference Cooling Mode Evaporator Capacity
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate
Design Condenser Water Flow Rate
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
Speed 1 Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Speed 1 Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Speed 1 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 1 Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Speed 1 Rated Evaporative Condenser Pump
Power Consumption
Speed 2 Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Speed 2 Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Speed 2 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 2 Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Speed 2 Rated Evaporative Condenser Pump
Power Consumption
Speed 3 Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Speed 3 Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Speed 3 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 3 Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Speed 3 Rated Evaporative Condenser Pump
Power Consumption
Speed 4 Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Speed 4 Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Speed 4 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 4 Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Speed 4 Rated Evaporative Condenser Pump
Power Consumption
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Rated Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed:ThermalStorage
Rated Evaporator Air Flow Rate
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 705

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Cooling Only Mode Rated Total Evaporator

Cooling Capacity
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed
High Speed Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
High Speed Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
High Speed Rated Air Flow Rate
Low Speed Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Low Speed Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Low Speed Rated Air Flow Rate
High Speed Evaporative Condenser Air Flow
Rate
High Speed Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated
Power Consumption
Low Speed Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Low Speed Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated
Power Consumption
Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Rated Air Flow Rate
Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity At Selected
Nominal Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
Coil:Cooling:Water
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Inlet Water Temperature
Design Inlet Air Temperature
Design Outlet Air Temperature
Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio
Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio
Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
Maximum Water Flow Rate
706 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Tube Outside Surface Area

Total Tube Inside Area
Fin Surface Area
Minimum Airflow Area
Coil Depth
Fin Diameter
Number of Tubes per Row
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
Rated Air Flow Rate
Rated Water Flow Rate
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Sensible Cooling Capacity
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity At Selected
Nominal Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Rated Water Flow Rate At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Speed 1 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 1 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 2 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 2 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 3 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 3 Rated Air Flow Rate
Speed 4 Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Speed 4 Rated Air Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Rated Air Flow Rate
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Rated Air Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 707

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Rated Heating Capacity At Selected Nominal

Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Coil:Heating:Electric
Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage
Stage 1 Nominal Capacity
Stage 2 Nominal Capacity
Stage 3 Nominal Capacity
Stage 4 Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Fuel
Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage
Stage 1 Nominal Capacity
Stage 2 Nominal Capacity
Stage 3 Nominal Capacity
Stage 4 Nominal Capacity
Coil:Heating:Steam
Maximum Steam Flow Rate
Coil:Heating:Water
U-Factor Times Area Value
Maximum Water Flow Rate
Rated Capacity
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
Rated Air Flow Rate
Rated Water Flow Rate
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
Rated Heating Capacity At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
Rated Air Flow Rate At Selected Nominal Speed
Level
Rated Water Flow Rate At Selected Nominal
Speed Level
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
708 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio

Rated Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
CondenserLoop
Maximum Loop Flow Rate
Controller:OutdoorAir
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Controller:WaterCoil
Controller Convergence Tolerance
Maximum Actuated Flow
CoolingTower:SingleSpeed
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Fan Power
Design U-Factor Times Area Value
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed
Design Water Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Fan Power
High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Fan Power
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel
Nominal Capacity
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate U-Factor Times Area Value
EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial
Secondary Fan Flow Rate
EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power
Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 709

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed
High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Fan Power
High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
Fan:ComponentModel
Maximum Flow Rate
Minimum Flow Rate
Motor Fan Pulley Ratio
Belt Maximum Torque
Maximum Motor Output Power
Maximum VFD Output Power
Fan:ConstantVolume
Maximum Flow Rate
Fan:OnOff
Maximum Flow Rate
FanPerformance:NightVentilation
Maximum Flow Rate
Fan:VariableVolume
Maximum Flow Rate
FluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate
Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power
FluidCooler:TwoSpeed
High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value
Design Water Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate
High Fan Speed Fan Power
HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed
Total Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed
Total Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
710 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Nominal Supply Air Flow Rate

HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid
Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate
Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate
Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value
Humidifier:Steam:Electric
Rated Power
HVACTemplate:Plant:Boiler
Capacity
HVACTemplate:Plant:Chiller
Capacity
HVACTemplate:Plant:Tower
High Speed Nominal Capacity
High Speed Fan Power
Low Speed Nominal Capacity
Low Speed Fan Power
Free Convection Capacity
HVACTemplate:System:ConstantVolume
Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate
Heating Coil Capacity
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:DedicatedOutdoorAir
Supply Fan Flow Rate
DX Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
DX Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:DualDuct
Main Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate
Cold Duct Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate
Hot Duct Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate
Heating Coil Capacity
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:PackagedVAV
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 711

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate

Supply Fan Minimum Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heating Coil Capacity
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:Unitary
Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heating Coil Capacity
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heat Pump Heating Coil Gross Rated Capacity
Supplemental Heating Coil Capacity
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:UnitarySystem
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
DX Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
DX Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heating Coil Gross Rated Capacity
Supplemental Heating or Reheat Coil Capacity
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
712 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Humidifier Rated Electric Power

HVACTemplate:System:VAV
Supply Fan Maximum Flow Rate
Supply Fan Minimum Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Humidifier Rated Electric Power
HVACTemplate:System:VRF
Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity
Gross Rated Heating Capacity
Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity
Water Condenser Volume Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate
Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Con-
sumption
HVACTemplate:Zone:BaseboardHeat
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:ConstantVolume
Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:DualDuct
Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:FanCoil
Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:IdealLoadsAirSystem
Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate
Maximum Sensible Heating Capacity
Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate
Maximum Total Cooling Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:PTAC
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heating Coil Capacity
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 713

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Baseboard Heating Capacity

HVACTemplate:Zone:PTHP
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heat Pump Heating Coil Gross Rated Capacity
Supplemental Heating Coil Capacity
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:Unitary
Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV
Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:FanPowered
Primary Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Primary Supply Air Minimum Flow Fraction
Secondary Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Parallel Fan On Flow Fraction
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:HeatAndCool
Supply Air Maximum Flow Rate
Baseboard Heating Capacity
HVACTemplate:Zone:VRF
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
No Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heat Pump Heating Coil Gross Rated Capacity
Baseboard Heating Capacity
714 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

HVACTemplate:Zone:WaterToAirHeatPump
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Total Capacity
Cooling Coil Gross Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
Heat Pump Heating Coil Gross Rated Capacity
Supplemental Heating Coil Capacity
Baseboard Heating Capacity
PlantComponent:TemperatureSource
Design Volume Flow Rate
PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint
Component 1 Flow Rate
Component 2 Flow Rate
Component 3 Flow Rate
Component 4 Flow Rate
Component 5 Flow Rate
Component 6 Flow Rate
Component 7 Flow Rate
Component 8 Flow Rate
Component 9 Flow Rate
Component 10 Flow Rate
PlantLoop
Maximum Loop Flow Rate
Pump:ConstantSpeed
Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
Pump:VariableSpeed
Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate
Rated Flow Rate
Rated Power Consumption
Sizing:System
Design Outdoor Air Flow Rate
SolarCollector:FlatPlate:PhotovoltaicThermal
Design Flow Rate
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 715

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
Use Side Design Flow Rate
Source Side Design Flow Rate
ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified
Use Side Design Flow Rate
Source Side Design Flow Rate
UnitarySystemPerformance:HeatPump:Multispeed
Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Ratio
Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Ratio
WaterHeater:Mixed
Tank Volume
Heater Maximum Capacity
Use Side Design Flow Rate
Source Side Design Flow Rate
WaterHeater:Stratified
Tank Volume
Tank Height
Heater 1 Capacity
Use Side Design Flow Rate
Source Side Design Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
Nominal Capacity
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
U-Factor Times Area Value
Maximum Water Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
Nominal Capacity
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
Maximum Steam Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
Rated Capacity
716 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

Maximum Water Flow Rate

ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
Supply Air Flow Rate
Exhaust Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit
Design Supply Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
Maximum Power Input
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate
Maximum Sensible Heating Capacity
Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate
Maximum Total Cooling Capacity
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
Maximum Electrical Power to Panel
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
Hydronic Tubing Length
Maximum Hot Water Flow
Maximum Cold Water Flow
ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit
Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Exhaust Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 717

Table 1.40: Details of Autosizable Objects/Fields

Component / Object Name Autosizable Fields

No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supple-
mental Heater
ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
No Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate
Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab
Maximum Air Flow Rate
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
No Load Supply Air Flow Rate
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supple-
mental Heater
ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate
Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate
718 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

There are 3 places in the input where the user can impose sizing factors.
1. In Sizing Parameters (object: Sizing:Parameters), the user can specify an over-all sizing factor.
This factor is applied to all the zone design loads and air flow rates resulting from the zone sizing
calculations.
2. In Zone Sizing (object: Sizing:Zone), the user can specify a sizing factor for a specific zone.
The factor is applied to the calculated zone design loads and air flow rates for the zone named in
the Sizing:Zone object. This sizing factor overrides the global sizing factor. That is, a zone sizing
factor, if specified, replaces the global sizing factor for the named zone.
3. For some plant components (basically all central chillers, boilers and cooling towers) the user
can specify a sizing factor that modifies the autosized component capacity and flow rates. These
factors are applied after the application of global or zone sizing factors. They are primarily used to
split the design load between multiple components. These sizing factors can change the autosizing
of the associated loops and pumps. The following rules are followed the effect of plant component
sizing factors on loops and pumps.
a. For supply side branches, the sizing factors of all components in series on the branch are summed
and the result becomes the branch sizing factor. If there is a branch pump its autosized design flow
rate is multiplied by the branch sizing factor.
b. For each loop, if the average of the branch sizing factors is less than 1, the loop sizing factor is
set equal to the sum of the branch sizing factors. If the average is greater than 1, the loop sizing
factor is set equal to the maximum of the branch sizing factors. The loop sizing factor is applied to
the loop design flow rate (if autosized) and to the loop pump flow rate (if autosized).

1.18.1.3 Mixing User-Specified and Autosized Inputs

Mixed user-specified and autosized inputs can be successfully used if the following points and sug-
gestions are followed.
1. Each component is autosized independently. Thus user input for a flow rate in one component will
have no effect on other components’ autosized flow rates. For instance, specifying the chilled water
loop pump’s rated flow rate will have no effect on the autosizing of the chiller’s design evaporator
flow rate or on the plant loop’s autosized maximum loop flow rate.
2. Within a component it is best to autosize all inputs and enter specified values for all inputs.
For example, in a chiller, if only the nominal capacity is user-specified, the autosized chilled water
flow rate may not be consistent with the specified capacity.
3. Sizing information flows only from the sizing objects to the components. The sizing calculations
have no knowledge of user-specified values in a component. The only exception to this rule is that
plant loop sizing will collect all component design water flow rates whether autosized or user-specified.
4. If the user wants to specify a zone or system air flow rate it should be done using the Sizing:Zone
and Sizing:System objects rather than done in the individual components.
5. The plant loop flow rates are sized from the total design demand of the components connected
to each loop. The components demanding water need not be autosized for the plant loop autosizing
to work successfully. So the user could specify all the air side components and autosize all the plant
loops and plant components. Or specify the chilled water loop flow rate, chilled water pump inputs
and chiller inputs and let the condenser loop and tower autosize.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 719

1.18.1.4 Component Sizing Output

The results of the component autosizing calculations are reported on the eplusout.eio file. For each
component field that has been autosized the object type, object name, field description with unit,
and value are printed out as comma separated data on a line beginning with Component Sizing.
Examples of this are shown in the Output Details and Examples document.
The complete list of objects that have autosized fields is shown in the following table. Note that
spaces may be inserted in object names to facilitate readability.

Table 1.41: Complete list of Objects with autosized Fields

Object Name Object Name

AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow AirLoopHVAC
AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir
AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:ReheatAirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
Boiler:HotWater
Boiler:Steam Branch
Chiller:Absorption Chiller:Absorption:Indirect
Chiller:CombustionTurbine Chiller:ConstantCOP
Chiller:Electric Chiller:Electric:EIR
Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR Chiller:EngineDriven
ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect
ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed:ThermalStorage
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed Coil:Cooling:Water
Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed Coil:Heating:Electric
Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage Coil:Heating:Fuel
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage Coil:Heating:Steam
Coil:Heating:Water Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
720 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Table 1.41: Complete list of Objects with autosized Fields

Object Name Object Name

Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling
CondenserLoop Controller:OutdoorAir
Controller:WaterCoil CoolingTower:SingleSpeed
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed CoolingTower:VariableSpeed
CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial
EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed
Fan:ComponentModel Fan:ConstantVolume
Fan:OnOff FanPerformance:NightVentilation
Fan:VariableVolume FluidCooler:SingleSpeed
FluidCooler:TwoSpeed HeaderedPumps:ConstantSpeed
HeaderedPumps:VariableSpeed HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid Humidifier:Steam:Electric
HVACTemplate:Plant:Boiler HVACTemplate:Plant:Chiller
HVACTemplate:Plant:Tower HVACTemplate:System:ConstantVolume
HVACTemplate:System:DedicatedOutdoorAir HVACTemplate:System:DualDuct
HVACTemplate:System:PackagedVAV HVACTemplate:System:Unitary
HVACTemplate:System:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir HVACTemplate:System:UnitarySystem
HVACTemplate:System:VAV HVACTemplate:System:VRF
HVACTemplate:Zone:BaseboardHeat HVACTemplate:Zone:ConstantVolume
HVACTemplate:Zone:DualDuct HVACTemplate:Zone:FanCoil
HVACTemplate:Zone:IdealLoadsAirSystem HVACTemplate:Zone:PTAC
HVACTemplate:Zone:PTHP HVACTemplate:Zone:Unitary
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:FanPowered
HVACTemplate:Zone:VAV:HeatAndCool HVACTemplate:Zone:VRF
HVACTemplate:Zone:WaterToAirHeatPump PlantComponent:TemperatureSource
PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint PlantLoop
Pump:ConstantSpeed Pump:VariableSpeed
Pump:VariableSpeed:Condensate Sizing:System
SolarCollector:FlatPlate:PhotovoltaicThermal ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified UnitarySystemPerformance:HeatPump:Multispeed
WaterHeater:Mixed WaterHeater:Stratified
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:ElectricZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:WaterZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 721

Table 1.41: Complete list of Objects with autosized Fields

Object Name Object Name

ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner

1.18.1.5 User or External Zone Design Flow Rate Inputs

In EnergyPlus the autosizing calculations start with a calculation of the zone design air flow rates
using zone by zone design day simulations. The resulting zone design air flow rates and daily air flow
sequences are used in the subsequent HVAC and central plant air and fluid flow design calculations
and in the component autosizing calculations. The user can override or change the calculated zone
design air flow rates in several ways.
1) The user can enter a value for Sizing Factor in the Sizing:Parameters object (see description
below).
2) The user can specify a zone level Zone Sizing Factor in each Sizing:Zone object.
3) For each zone the user can input a Cooling Design Air Flow Rate and/or a Heating Design
Air Flow Rate (and specify Cooling Design Air Flow Method = Flow/Zone and Heating Design Air
Flow Method = Flow/Zone). These user inputs override the calculated values. The program divides
the user input cooling or heating design air flow rate by the calculated values and uses the result as
a zone sizing factor to multiply all the elements in the design heating and cooling air flow and load
sequences. From this point the design calculations proceed as usual.

1.18.1.6 User or External System Design Flow Rate Inputs

Using the results of the zone design air flow rate calculation (including any user input or altered flow
rates) EnergyPlus proceeds to calculate central air system flow rates and cooling and heating loads.
The results of this calculation can be overridden in the following way.
For each system (AirLoopHVAC), in the corresponding Sizing:System object, specify Cooling Design
Air Flow Method to be Flow/System and input a value for Cooling Design Air Flow Rate. Similarly
for heating specify Heating Design Air Flow Method to be Flow/System and input a value for Heating
Design Air Flow Rate.

1.18.2 DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir
This object allows for the outdoor air requirements to be defined in a common location for use by
other objects. This object may be referenced by name from other objects (e.g., VAV terminal units,
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat, and AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer) as required
to identify an outdoor air quantity for use by that object. Note that a zone name Is not included
as an input to this zone outdoor air definition and the number of people in a zone, zone floor area,
and zone volume can only be determined after this object has been referenced by another. A single
722 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

zone outdoor air definition may be referenced by multiple objects to specify that the same outdoor
air requirements are used by those objects or multiple zone outdoor air objects may be defined and
referenced by other objects as needed. If multiple zone outdoor air definitions are used, each outdoor
air definition must have a unique name.

1.18.2.1 Inputs

1.18.2.1.1 Field: Name

Unique identifying name. Any reference to this name by other objects will denote that the following
outdoor air requirements will be used.

1.18.2.1.2 Field: Outdoor Air Method

The input must be either Flow/Person, Flow/Area, Flow/Zone, AirChanges/Hour, Sum, Maximum,
IndoorAirQualityProcedure, ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOccupancy, or ProportionalControl-
BasedOnOccupancySchedule. The default is Flow/Person.

– Flow/Person means the program will use the input from the field Outdoor Air Flow per Person
and the actual zone occupancy to calculate a zone outdoor air flow rate. The density of air is
measured at IUPAC standard temperature and pressure.
– Flow/Area means that the program will use the input from the field Outdoor Air Flow per
Zone Floor Area and the actual zone floor area as the zone outdoor air flow rate. The density
of air is measured at IUPAC standard temperature and pressure.
– Flow/Zone means that the program will use the input of the field Outdoor Air Flow per Zone as
the zone outdoor air flow rate. The density of air is measured at IUPAC standard temperature
and pressure.
– AirChanges/Hour means that the program will use the input from the field Air Changes per
Hour and the actual zone volume (divided by 3600 seconds per hour) as the zone outdoor air
flow rate.
– Sum means that the flows calculated from the fields Outdoor Air Flow per Person, Outdoor Air
Flow per Area, Outdoor Air Flow per Zone, and Air Changes per Hour (using the associated
conversions to m3 /s for each field) will be added to obtain the zone outdoor air flow rate.
– Maximum means that the maximum flow derived from Outdoor Air Flow per Person, Outdoor
Air Flow per Area, Outdoor Air Flow per Zone, and Air Changes per Hour (using the associated
conversions to m3 /s for each field) will be used as the zone outdoor air flow rate.
– IndoorAirQualityProcedure means that the program will use the other procedure defined in
ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007 to calculate the amount of outdoor air necessary in order to
maintain the levels of indoor air carbon dioxide at or below the setpoint defined in the ZoneCon-
trol:ContaminantController object. Appendix A of the ASHRAE 62.1-2010 user′ s manual dis-
cusses another method for implementing CO2-based DCV in a single zone system. The last
two methods of Proportional Control calculate the required outdoor air flow rate which varies
in proportion to the percentage of the CO2 signal range and has two choices to calculate
occupancy-based outdoor air rate.
– ProportionalControlBasedOnOccupancySchedule uses the real occupancy at the current time
step to calculate outdoor air rate.
– ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOccupancy uses the design occupancy level to calculate out-
door air rate. The former choice is a good approach to estimate outdoor air rate. However,
for practical applications, the zone controller usually does not have the real time occupancy
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 723

information, and the design occupancy level is assumed. The latter choice is used in the design
stage.

1.18.2.1.3 Field: Outdoor Air Flow per Person

The design outdoor air volume flow rate per person for this zone in cubic meters per second per
person, density of air measured at IUPAC standard temperature and pressure. The default is 0.00944
(20 cfm per person). An outdoor air flow rate is calculated based on the total number of people for
all People statements assigned to the zone. Occupancy schedule values are not applied during sizing
calculations and are applied during the remainder of the simulation. This input is used if Outdoor
Air Method is one of Outdoor Air Flow per Person, Sum, or Maximum.

1.18.2.1.4 Field: Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area

The design outdoor air volume flow rate per square meter of floor area (units are m3 /s-m2 ), density
of air measured at IUPAC standard temperature and pressure. This input is used if Outdoor Air
Method is Flow/Area, Sum or Maximum. The default value for this field is 0.

1.18.2.1.5 Field: Outdoor Air Flow per Zone

The design outdoor air flow rate for this zone in cubic meters per second, density of air measured
at IUPAC standard temperature and pressure. This input field is used if Outdoor Air Method is
Flow/Zone, Sum or Maximum. The default value for this field is 0.

1.18.2.1.6 Field: Outdoor Air Flow Changes per Hour

The design outdoor air volume flow rate in air changes per hour, density of air measured at IUPAC
standard temperature and pressure. This factor is used along with the Zone Volume and converted
to cubic meters per second. This input field is used if Outdoor Air Method is AirChanges/Hour,
Sum or Maximum. The default value for this field is 0.

1.18.2.1.7 Field: Outdoor Air Schedule Name

This field is the name of schedule that defines how outdoor air requirements change over time. The
field is optional. If left blank, the schedule defaults to 1.0. If used, then the schedule values are
multiplied by the outdoor air flow rate defined by the previous fields. The schedule values must be
between 0 and 1, inclusive.
If this DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object is referenced by a Controller:MechanicalVentilation
object (either directly or indirectly through Sizing:Zone), the schedule will be applied to all types of
outdoor air calculations for the corresponding zone, regardless of the System Outdoor Air Method
selected. If the schedule value is zero, then the zone will be completely removed from the system
outdoor air calculations.

1.18.2.1.8 Field: Proportional Control Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate Sched-
ule Name
This field is the name of schedule that defines how minimum outdoor air requirements change
over time. The field is optional. If left blank, the schedule defaults to 1.0. If used when
724 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

the field System Outdoor Air Method = ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOARate in Con-

troller:MechanicalVentilation, then the schedule values are multiplied by the outdoor air flow
rate.
An IDF example:

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir
ZoneOAData , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00944 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.00305 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone {m3/s}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , 1.0, !- Field 4
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 , 0.5; !- Field 7

1.18.3 DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir:SpaceList
This object creates a composite outdoor air specification for a list of Spaces (ref Space). The indi-
vidual DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir objects in the list are evaluated during sizing and operation
at the respective Space floor area, volume, and/or occupancy and summed for a total outdoor air
requirement.

1.18.3.1 Inputs

1.18.3.1.1 Field: Name

Unique identifying name. Any reference to this name by other objects will denote that the following
outdoor air requirements will be used.

1.18.3.1.2 Field: Space <#> Name

Reference to a Space object.

1.18.3.1.3 Field: Space <#> Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
Reference to a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object.
An IDF example:

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir:SpaceList ,
SZ DSOA Zone 5 List , !- Name
Space 5 Office , !- Space 1 Name
SZ DSOA Zone 5 Office , !- Space 1 Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
Space 5 Conference , !- Space 2 Name
SZ DSOA Zone 5 Conference; !- Space 2 Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 725

1.18.4 DesignSpecification:ZoneAirDistribution
This object is used to describe the air distribution effectiveness and fraction of secondary recirculation
air (return air not directly mixed with outdoor air) of a zone. It is referenced by the Sizing:Zone
and Controller:MechanicalVentilation objects.

1.18.4.1 Inputs

1.18.4.1.1 Field: Name

The unique user assigned name for an instance of this object. Any other object referencing this
object will use this name.

1.18.4.1.2 Field: Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Cooling Mode

The positive numeric input for this field is the zone air distribution effectiveness when the zone is
in cooling mode. Default value of this field is 1.0. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010 provides typical
values.

1.18.4.1.3 Field: Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Heating Mode

The positive numeric input for this field is the zone air distribution effectiveness when the zone is
in heating mode. Default value of this field is 1.0. ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010 provides typical
values as follows:

1.18.4.1.4 Field: Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness Schedule Name

This optional field input points to a schedule with values of zone air distribution effectiveness. It
provides a more flexible way of specifying zone air distribution effectiveness if it changes with time
and/or system operating status and controls. If the schedule is specified, the zone air distribution
effectiveness in cooling mode and heating mode will be ignored.

1.18.4.1.5 Field: Zone Secondary Recirculation Fraction

The non-negative numeric input for this field is the fraction of a zone’s recirculation air that does
not directly mix with the outdoor air. The zone secondary recirculation fraction Er is determined by
the designer based on system configuration. For plenum return systems with secondary recirculation
(e.g., fan-powered VAV with plenum return) Er is usually less than 1.0, although values may range
from 0.1 to 1.2 depending upon the location of the ventilation zone relative to other zones and the
air handler. For ducted return systems with secondary recirculation (e.g., fan-powered VAV with
ducted return), Er is typically 0.0, while for those with system-level recirculation (e.g, dual-fan dual-
duct systems with ducted return) Er is typically 1.0. For other system types, Er is typically 0.75.
Minimum is 0.0, and default is 0.0 for single-path systems (also to maintain backward compatibility).
For parallel fan-powered VAV systems, the secondary ventilation path only functions (Er > 0.0)
when the fans in the VAV boxes operate, which is during heating. The local ventilation path and
the benefits of secondary recirculation disappear during cooling, when the local parallel fans are off
(Er = 0.0).
726 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.87: Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness (Source: ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2010)
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 727

1.18.4.1.6 Field: Minimum Zone Ventilation Efficiency

This optional input sets a minimum on the ventilation efficiency for the zone. It is only used with
the Ventilation Rate Procedure (VRP), single-path method. VRP should be chosen in Sizing Sys-
tem, System Outdoor Air Method = Standard62.1VentilationRateProcedure. Single-path method is
indicated by leaving the previous input (Zone Secondary Recirculation Fraction) blank or setting it
to 0.0. If the calculated value of ventilation efficiency for a zone is less than this value, it is raised
to this minimum by raising the zone minimum air flow rate. This new value for zone minimum air
flow rate then overrides other defaults and inputs in Sizing:Zone.
An example of this in an IDF context is shown:

DesignSpecification :ZoneAirDistribution ,
CM DSZAD ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_1 , !- Name
1, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Cooling Mode {
dimensionless}
1, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Heating Mode {
dimensionless}
; !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness Schedule Name

1.18.5 Sizing:Parameters
This object allows the user to specify global heating and cooling sizing ratios. These ratios will be
applied at the zone level to all of the zone heating and cooling loads and air flow rates. These new
loads and air flow rates are then used to calculate the system level flow rates and capacities and are
used in all component sizing calculations.
The user can also specify the width (in load timesteps) of a moving average window which can be
used to smooth the calculated zone design flow sequences. The use of this parameter is described
below.

1.18.5.1 Inputs

1.18.5.1.1 Field: Heating Sizing Factor

The global heating sizing ratio applied to all of the zone design heating loads and air flow rates.

1.18.5.1.2 Field: Cooling Sizing Factor

The global cooling sizing ratio applied to all of the zone design cooling loads and air flow rates

1.18.5.1.3 Field: Timesteps in Averaging Window

The number of load timesteps in the zone design flow sequence averaging window. The default is 1,
in which case the calculated zone design flow rates are averaged over the load timestep.
The zone design air flow rate calculation is performed assuming a potentially infinite supply of
heating or cooling air at a fixed temperature. Thus the calculated design air flow rate will always
be able to meet any load or change in load no matter how large or abrupt. In reality air flow rates
are limited by duct sizes and fan capacities. The idealized zone design flow calculation may result
in unrealistically large flow rates, especially if the user is performing the sizing calculations using
thermostat schedules with night setup or setback. The calculated zone design flow rates are always
averaged over the load timestep. The user may want to perform a broader average to mitigate
728 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

the effect of thermostat setup and setback and prevent the warm up or cool down flow rates from
dominating the design flow rate calculation. Specifying the width of the averaging window allows
the user to do this.
For example, if the load calculation timestep is 15 minutes and the user specifies the Timesteps in
Averaging Window to be 4, the zone design air flows will be averaged over a time period of 1 hour.
Specifying 8 would result in averaging over a 2 hour period.

1.18.5.2 Outputs

The sizing factors and the averaging window size are reported out on the eplusout.eio file. An
example is:
! <Load Timesteps in Zone Design Calculation Averaging Window >, Value
Timesteps in Averaging Window , 1
! <Heating Sizing Factor Information >, Sizing Factor ID , Value
Heating Sizing Factor , Global , 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE1 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE2 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE3 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE4 -1, 1.3000
Heating Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE5 -1, 1.3000
! <Cooling Sizing Factor Information >, Sizing Factor ID , Value
Cooling Sizing Factor , Global , 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE1 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE2 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE3 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE4 -1, 1.3000
Cooling Sizing Factor , Zone SPACE5 -1, 1.3000

1.18.6 OutputControl:Sizing:Style
As described early in the document (see: EnergyPlus Output Processing), the user may select the
“style” for the sizing result files (epluszsz.<ext>, eplusssz.<ext>). This object applies to all sizing
output files.
OutputControl:Sizing:Style ,
\memo default style for the Sizing output files is comma -- this works well for
\memo importing into spreadsheet programs such as Excel(tm) but not so well for word
\memo processing progams -- there tab may be a better choice. fixed puts spaces between
\memo the "columns"
\unique -object
A1; \field Column Separator
\required -field
\type choice
\key Comma
\key Tab
\key Fixed

1.18.6.1 Inputs

1.18.6.1.1 Field: Column Separator

For this field, the desired separator for columns is entered. “Comma” creates comma separated
fields/columns in the outputs (eplus<sizing type>.csv files are created). “Tab” creates tab separated
fields/columns in the outputs (eplus<sizing type>.tab files are created). “Fixed” creates space
separated fields/columns in the outputs (eplus<sizing type>.txt files are created) but these are not
necessarily lined up for easy printing.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 729

Note that both tab and comma separated files easily import into ExcelTM or other spreadsheet
programs. The tab delimited files can also be viewed by text editors, word processing programs and
easily converted to “tables” within those programs.

1.18.7 Sizing:Zone
The Sizing:Zone object provides the data needed to perform a zone design air flow calculation for
a single zone. This calculation assumes a variable amount of supply air at a fixed temperature and
humidity. The information needed consists of the zone inlet supply air conditions: temperature and
humidity ratio for heating and cooling. The calculation is done for every design day included in the
input. The maximum cooling load and air flow and the maximum heating load and air flow are then
saved for the system level design calculations and for the component automatic sizing calculations.
The Sizing:Zone object is also the place where the user can specify the design outdoor air flow
rate by referencing the name of a design specification outdoor air object. This can be specified in
a number of ways (ref. DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir).This data is saved for use in the system
sizing calculation or for sizing zone components that use outdoor air.
The user can also place limits on the heating and design cooling air flow rates. See Heating Design
Air Flow Method and Cooling Design Air Flow Method below and the explanations of the various
heating and cooling flow input fields.
The user can ask the zone design calculation to take into account the effect of a Dedicated Outdoor
Air System on the zone design loads and airflow rates. The design calculation will calculate the heat
addition rate to the zone of an idealized SOA system and add or subtract the result from the total
zone loads and flow rates.

1.18.7.1 Inputs

1.18.7.1.1 Field: Zone Name

The name of the Zone corresponding to this Sizing:Zone object. This is the zone for which the design
air flow calculation will be made using the input data of this Sizing:Zone Object.

1.18.7.1.2 Field: Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method
The input must be either SupplyAirTemperature or TemperatureDifference. SupplyAirTemperature
means that the user inputs from the fields of Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature will be
used to determine the zone cooling design air flow rates. TemperatureDifference means that the user
inputs from the fields of Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Difference will be used to
determine the zone cooling design air flow rates.

1.18.7.1.3 Field: Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature

The supply air temperature in degrees Celsius for the zone cooling design air flow rate calculation. Air
is supplied to the zone at this temperature during the cooling design day simulation. The zone load
is met by varying the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is saved as the zone cooling
design air flow rate. This field is only used when Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Input
Method = SupplyAirTemperature. If the value entered for this parameter is less than zero, a
warning message is produced so that the user will double check the input to make sure it is correct.
730 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18.7.1.4 Field: Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Difference

The temperature difference between cooling design supply air temperature and room air temperature
in degrees Celsius for the zone cooling design air flow rate calculation. Air is supplied to the zone
at this temperature during the cooling design day simulation. The zone load is met by varying
the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is saved as the zone cooling design air flow
rate. This field is only used when Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method =
TemperatureDifference.

1.18.7.1.5 Field: Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method
The input must be either SupplyAirTemperature or TemperatureDifference. SupplyAirTemperature
means that the user inputs from the fields of Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature will be
used to determine the zone heating design air flow rates. TemperatureDifference means that the user
inputs from the fields of Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Difference will be used to
determine the zone heating design air flow rates.

1.18.7.1.6 Field: Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature

The supply air temperature in degrees Celsius for the zone heating design air flow rate calculation.
Air is supplied to the zone at this temperature during the heating design day simulation. The
zone load is met by varying the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is saved as the
zone heating design air flow rate. This field is only used when Zone Heating Design Supply Air
Temperature Input Method = SupplyAirTemperature. If the value entered for this parameter
is less than zero, a warning message is produced so that the user will double check the input to
make sure it is correct though other severe errors may happen before this happens. In addition,
this parameter must be greater than the Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature field shown
above.

1.18.7.1.7 Field: Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Difference

The temperature difference between heating design supply air temperature and room air temperature
in degrees Celsius for the zone heating design air flow rate calculation. Air is supplied to the zone
at this temperature during the heating design day simulation. The zone load is met by varying
the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is saved as the zone heating design air flow
rate. This field is only used when Zone Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Input Method =
TemperatureDifference.

1.18.7.1.8 Field: Zone Cooling Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio

The humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air of the supply air in the zone cooling
design air flow rate calculation.

1.18.7.1.9 Field: Zone Heating Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio

The humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air of the supply air in the zone heating
design air flow rate calculation.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 731

1.18.7.1.10 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object which specifies the
design outdoor air flow rate for the zone.
When a choice of IndoorAirQualityProcedure is entered in the Outdoor Air Method field of the
DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object, the design outdoor airflow rate is calculated based on the
choice of Sum in the same field.
When a choice of ProportionalControlBasedOnDesignOccupancy or ProportionalControlBase-
dOnOccupancySchedule is entered, the design outdoor airflow rate is calculated based on equations
specified in the ”Proportional Control” section in the Engineering Reference.

1.18.7.1.11 Field: Zone Heating Sizing Factor

This input is a zone level heating sizing ratio. The zone design heating air flow rates and loads will
be multiplied by the number input in this field. This input overrides the building level sizing factor
input in the Sizing:Parameters object. And, of course, if this field is blank or zero, the global heating
sizing factor from the Sizing:Parameters object is used.

1.18.7.1.12 Field: Zone Cooling Sizing Factor

This input is a zone level cooling sizing ratio. The zone design cooling air flow rates and loads will
be multiplied by the number input in this field. This input overrides the building level sizing factor
input in the Sizing:Parameters object. And, of course, if this field is blank or zero, the global cooling
sizing factor from the Sizing:Parameters object is used.

1.18.7.1.13 Field: Cooling Design Air Flow Method

The input must be either Flow/Zone, DesignDay, or DesignDayWithLimit. Flow/Zone means that
the program will use the input of the field Cooling Design Air Flow Rate as the zone design cooling
air flow rate. DesignDay means the program will calculate the zone design cooling air flow rate using
the Sizing:Zone input data and a design day simulation without imposing any limits other than those
set by the minimum outside air requirements. DesignDayWithLimit means that the maximum from
Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area and Cooling Minimum Air Flow will set a lower
limit on the design maximum cooling air flow rate. The default method is DesignDay: i.e., the
program uses the calculated design values subject to ventilation requirements.

1.18.7.1.14 Field: Cooling Design Air Flow Rate

The design zone cooling air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This input is used if Cooling Design
Air Flow Method is specified as Flow/Zone. This value will be multiplied by the global or zone sizing
factor and by zone multipliers.

1.18.7.1.15 Field: Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area
The minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate per square meter (units are m3 /s-m2 ). This field is
used when Cooling Design Air Flow Method is specified as DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets
a lower bound on the zone design cooling air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from
Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area, Cooling Minimum Air Flow, Cooling Minimum
Air Flow Fraction and the design outdoor air flow rate (including VRP adjustments) is used to set a
minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.000762, corresponding
to 0.15 cfm/ft2 . The applicable sizing factor is not applied to this value.
732 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18.7.1.16 Field: Cooling Minimum Air Flow

The minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate in m3 /s. This field is used when Cooling Design
Air Flow Method is specified as DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets a lower bound on the zone
design cooling air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling Minimum Air Flow
per Zone Floor Area, Cooling Minimum Air Flow, Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction and the
design outdoor air flow rate (including VRP adjustments) is used to set a minimum supply air flow
rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is zero. The applicable sizing factor is not applied
to this value.

1.18.7.1.17 Field: Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction

The minimum zone design cooling volumetric flow rate expressed as a fraction of the zone design
cooling volumetric flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling Minimum Air
Flow per Zone Floor Area, Cooling Minimum Air Flow, Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction and
the design outdoor air flow rate (including VRP adjustments) is used to set a minimum supply air
flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.2. This input is currently used in sizing
the VAV air terminal unit and fan minimum flow rate. It does not currently affect other component
autosizing.

1.18.7.1.18 Field: Heating Design Air Flow Method

The input must be either Flow/Zone, DesignDay, or DesignDayWithLimit. Flow/Zone means that
the program will use the input of the field Heating Design Air Flow Rate as the zone design heating
air flow rate. DesignDay means the program will calculate the zone design heating air flow rate using
the Sizing:Zone input data and a design day simulation without imposing any limits other than those
set by the minimum outside air requirements. DesignDayWithLimit means that the maximum from
Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area and Heating Maximum Air Flow will set a lower
limit on the design maximum heating air flow rate. The default method is DesignDay: i.e., the
program uses the calculated design values subject to ventilation requirements.

1.18.7.1.19 Field: Heating Design Air Flow Rate

The design zone heating air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This input is used if Heating
Design Air Flow Method is specified as Flow/Zone. This value will be multiplied by the global or
zone sizing factor and by zone multipliers.

1.18.7.1.20 Field: Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area
The maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate per square meter (units are m3 /s-m2 ). This field is
used when Heating Design Air Flow Method is specified as DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets
an upper bound on the zone design heating air flow rate. For this and the next two input fields, the
maximum flow derived from Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area, Heating Maximum
Air Flow, and Heating Maximum Air Flow Fraction is used to set a maximum heating supply air
flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.002032, corresponding to 0.40 cfm/ft2 . If
the maximum heating design flow rate calculated using these input fields is greater than the design
heating flow rate calculated during sizing, these input fields have no impact on sizing. It may be
more appropriate to select only one of these three fields to calculate the maximum heating design
flow rate (i.e., if one or more of these three fields is 0, it will not be used in calculating the maximum
heating design flow rate).
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 733

1.18.7.1.21 Field: Heating Maximum Air Flow

The maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate in m3 /s. This field is used when Heating Design
Air Flow Method is specified as DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets an upper bound on the
zone design heating air flow rate. For this field and the two input fields just prior to and after this
field„the maximum flow derived from Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area, Heating
Maximum Air Flow, and Heating Maximum Air Flow Fraction is used to set a maximum heating
supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.1415762, corresponding to 300
cfm. If the maximum heating design flow rate calculated using these input fields is greater than the
design heating flow rate calculated during sizing, these input fields have no impact on sizing. It may
be more appropriate to select only one of these three fields to calculate the maximum heating design
flow rate (i.e., if one or more of these three fields is 0, it will not be used in calculating the maximum
heating design flow rate).

1.18.7.1.22 Field: Heating Maximum Air Flow Fraction

The maximum zone design heating volumetric flow rate expressed as a fraction of the zone design
cooling volumetric flow rate. For this and the previous two input fields, the maximum flow derived
from Heating Maximum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area, Heating Maximum Air Flow, and Heating
Maximum Air Flow Fraction is used to set a maximum heating supply air flow rate for the zone for
VAV systems. The default is 0.3. If the maximum heating design flow rate calculated using these
input fields is greater than the design heating flow rate calculated during sizing, these input fields
have no impact on sizing. It may be more appropriate to select only one of these three fields to
calculate the maximum heating design flow rate (i.e., if one or more of these three fields is 0, it will
not be used in calculating the maximum heating design flow rate).

1.18.7.1.23 Field: Design Specification Zone Air Distribution Object Name

The name of the DesignSpecification:ZoneAirDistribution object, defining the air distribution effec-
tiveness and secondary recirculation air fraction, that applies to the zone or zone list. This object
may be used for the same zone in the Controller:MechanicalVentilation object if no such Design-
Specification:ZoneAirDistribution object is specified.

1.18.7.1.24 Field: Account for Dedicated Outdoor Air System

This is a choice field with choices Yes or No. The default is No. Choosing Yes means that the zone
sizing calculation will use the subsequent inputs to calculate the heat gain or loss (heat gains are
positive, heat loss is negative) imposed on the zone by a Dedicated Outdoor Air System (DOAS).
This heat gain is then added to the zone design heat gain for the zone and the zone design air flow
rate is adjusted to meet the DOAS heat gain plus the zone design heat gain.

1.18.7.1.25 Field: Dedicated Outdoor Air System Control Strategy

This is a choice field with a choice of three ideal control strategies for the DOA system. The choices
are NeutralSupplyAir, NeutralDehumidifiedSupplyAir, or ColdSupplyAir. The default is NeutralSup-
plyAir.
NeutralSupplyAir implies that the ventilation air supplied to the zone will cause little heating or
cooling. The air will be heated or cooled to keep it between the low and high temperature setpoints
specified in the subsequent two fields. A good choice for these fields might be 21.1 and 23.9 degrees
C.
734 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

NeutralDehumidifiedSupplyAir means that the ventilation air will be cooled and dehumidified and
then reheated to a neutral temperature. The ventilation air is cooled to the lower setpoint tempera-
ture (if necessary) and reheated to the upper setpoint temperature. A good choice for the setpoints
would be 14.4 and 22.2 degrees C.
ColdSupplyAir means that the ventilation air will be used to supply cooling to the zone. Cold outside
air is heated to the upper setpoint; warm outside air is cooled to the lower setpoint. A good choice
for the setpoints would be 12.2 and 14.4 degrees C.

1.18.7.1.26 Field: Dedicated Outdoor Air Low Temperature Setpoint for Design

The lower setpoint temperature to be used with the DOAS design control strategy. The units are
degrees C. The default is autosized to the values given above for the three design control strategies.

1.18.7.1.27 Field: Dedicated Outdoor Air High Temperature Setpoint for Design

The higher setpoint temperature to be used with the DOAS design control strategy. The units are
degrees C. The default is autosized to the values given above for the three design control strategies.
An IDF example:

Sizing:Zone ,
SPACE5 -1, !- Name of a zone
14., !- Zone cooling design supply air temperature {C}
50., !- Zone heating design supply air temperature {C}
0.009 , !- Zone cooling design supply air humidity ratio {kg -H2O/kg -air}
0.004 , !- Zone heating design supply air humidity ratio {kg -H2O/kg -air}
DSOA1 , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
0.0, !- zone heating sizing factor
0.0, !- zone cooling sizing factor
designdaywithlimit , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- cooling design air flow rate {m3/s}
, !- Cooling Minimum Air Flow per zone area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Cooling Minimum Air Flow {m3/s}
, !- fraction of the cooling design air flow rate
designday , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- heating design air flow rate {m3/s}
, !- heating max air flow per zone area {m3/s-m2}
, !- heating max air flow {m3/s}
, !- fraction of the cooling design air flow rate
DSZADO1 , !- Design Specification Zone Air Distribution Object Name
Yes , !- Account for Dedicated Outside Air System
ColdSupplyAir , !- Dedicated Outside Air System Control Strategy
12.2, !- Dedicated Outside Air Low Setpoint for Design
14.4; !- Dedicated Outside Air High Setpoint for Design

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
DSOA1 , !- Name
SUM , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00236 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person
0.000305 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area
0.0, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone
0.0, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

DesignSpecification :ZoneAirDistribution ,
DSZADO1 , !- Name
1.0, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Cooling Mode
1.0, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness in Heating Mode
, !- Zone Air Distribution Effectiveness Schedule Name
0.3; !- Zone Secondary Recirculation Fraction
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 735

1.18.7.2 Outputs

The zone design air flow rates and loads are output onto the local file “epluszsz.<ext>” where <ext>
is the extension from the sizing style object (default is csv – a comma separated file epluszsz.csv).
The columns are clearly labeled. It will easily import into Excel or other spreadsheet program that
accepts delimited files. All of these values are design air flow rates and loads calculated by the
program. No sizing factors have been applied.
The calculated zone design air flow rates and the user input or altered zone design air flow rates are
also reported on the eplusout.eio file. The values are printed out for each zone as comma separated
records beginning with Zone Sizing. Items output on the eio file are: zone name, load type (heating
or cooling), design load, calculated design air flow rate, user design air flow rate, design day name,
time of peak, outside temperature at peak, outside humidity ratio at peak.

1.18.8 DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing
This object is used to describe general sizing and scalable sizing methods which are referenced by
zone HVAC equipment objects. It is optional input field in zone HVAC objects. If a name of this
optional input is not specified or is blank then the sizing method or input specified in the parent
object is used. If the name of this object is entered, then the values or method specified overrides
the sizing method in the parent zone HVAC objects. This object is meant to provide scalable sizing
method to users. The name of this object is an optional input field in the zoneHVAC objects. When
this name in not specified in the zone HVAC object the sizing method or the value specified in the
zone HVAC object will be used.
List of zoneHVAC objects than can reference this object include:

– ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
– ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
– ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
– ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
– ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
– ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
– ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
– ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
– ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab
– ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit
– ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem

The sizing methods input fields available in this objects are for supply air flow and capacity for
heating and cooling operating modes. Some zone HVAC equipment has single supply air flow rate
input field that serves both cooling and heating operating modes. So entering either of the cool-
ing or heating scalable sizing input field is sufficient. When there are separate input fields for
cooling, heating, no-cooling, and no-heating operating modes, the corresponding input fields are
specified. The child components supply air flow rate are also sized using scalable sizing methods
specified in the parent objects. The methods allow users to enter a fixed or hard sized values,
autosizable, or scalable sizing methods. Methods allowed for sizing supply air flow rates include:
736 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

SupplyAirFlowRate, FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow, FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow, Flow-

PerFloorArea, FlowPerCoolingCapacity, and FlowPerHeatingCapacity. The different sizing options
are defined as follows:

– SupplyAirFlowRate: entered when it is intended that the user specified either hard value
or the simulation engine autosize the supply air flow rates for cooling, heating, and no-cooling
or no-heating operating modes.
– FlowPerFloorArea: entered when it is intended that the simulation engine determine the
supply air flow rates from the user specified supply air flow rates per unit floor area and the
zone floor area of the zone served by the zone HVAC equipment.
– FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow: entered when it is intended that the simulation en-
gine determines the supply air flow rates from the user specified flow fraction and autosized
cooling design supply air flow rate.
– FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow: entered when it is intended that the simulation en-
gine determines the supply air flow rates from the user specified flow fraction and autosized
heating design supply air flow rate.
– FlowPerCoolingCapacity: entered when it is intended t that he simulation engine deter-
mines the supply air flow rates from the user specified supply air flow per cooling capacity value
and autosized cooling design capacity.
– FlowPerHeatingCapacity: entered when it is intended that the simulation engine deter-
mines the supply air flow rates from the user specified supply air flow per heating capacity
value and autosized heating design capacity.

The Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing object also has input fields for sizing or scalable siz-
ing of cooling and heating capacity. However, most of the parent zone HVAC objects do not have
input fields for sizing capacities. So, the capacity scalable sizing fields in the parent objects are
used for sizing child components capacity sizings. The scalable capacity sizing may be indirectly
impacted by the scalable supply air flow rates sizing values. Moreover, the autosized cold water,
hot water and steam flow rates in the parent zone HVAC objects (e.g. FanCoils, UnitHeaters,
UnitVentilators, and VentilatedSlabs) and capacity in child components are determined using the
scalable sizing methods. Sizing methods allowed for cooling and heating capacity include: CoolingDe-
signCapacity, HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity,
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity.

– CoolingDesignCapacity: entered when it is intended that user specifies either a hard sized
cooling capacity value or the simulation engine autosizes cooling capacity value for the cooling
design capacity.
– HeatingDesignCapacity: entered when it is intended that user specifies either a hard sized
heating capacity value or the simulation engine autosized heating capacity value for the heating
design capacity.
– CapacityPerFloorArea: is entered when it is intended that the simulation engine determines
the cooling or heating capacity from user specified capacity per floor area value and the floor
area of the zone served by the zone HVAC equipment.
– FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity: entered when it is intended that the simulation
engine sizes the cooling capacity from the user specified capacity fraction and autosized cooling
design capacity value.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 737

– FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity: entered when it is intended that the simulation

engine sizes the heating capacity from the user specified capacity fraction and autosized heating
design capacity value.

Description of the input fields of the design specification zone HVAC sizing object “DesignSpecifica-
tion:ZoneHVAC:Sizing”:

1.18.8.1 Inputs

1.18.8.1.1 Field: Name

Unique identifier name of the DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. This sizing specification
object referenced by a zone HVAC equipment whose design calculation will be made using the input
data of this object.

1.18.8.1.2 Field: Cooling Design Air Flow Method

The input of this field must be the method used to determine the cooling supply air volume flow
rate. Input allowed is either None, SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosized-
CoolingAirflow, or FlowPerCoolingCapacity. None means cooling coil is not included in the zone
HVAC equipment or this field may be left blank. SupplyAirFlowRate means the user specifies the
magnitude of supply air flow rate or the program calculates the design cooling supply air volume
flow rate if autosize is specified. FlowPerFloorArea means the program calculates the cooling supply
air volume flow rate from zone floor area served by the zone HVAC unit and user specified Flow
Per Floor Area value. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow means the program calculates the cooling
supply air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and the autosized design cooling supply air
volume flow rate value determined by the simulation. FlowPerCoolingCapacity means the supply
air volume is calculated from user specified flow per cooling capacity and design cooling capacity
determined by the simulation. The default method is SupplyAirFlowRate.

1.18.8.1.3 Field: Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}

Enter the magnitude of the cooling supply air volume flow rate in m3/s. This input is an alternative
to using the program auto-calculated value. This input is a required field when the Cooling Design
air Flow Method is SupplyAirFlowRate. This field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included
in the zone HVAC equipment. This input field is also autosizable.

1.18.8.1.4 Field: Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-
m2}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Cooling Design air Flow Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field may be
left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design Air
Flow Method is not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow
rate from the zone conditioned floor area served by the zone HVAC equipment and the flow per unit
area value specified by the user. Zone sizing object (Sizing:Zone) is not required.
738 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18.8.1.5 Field: Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized cooling supply air flow
rate. This input field is required when the Cooling Design air Flow Method is FractionOfAutosized-
CoolingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC
equipment or the Cooling Design air Flow Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. The
program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling supply
air flow rate and user specified fraction. Zone sizing object (Sizing:Zone) is required.

1.18.8.1.6 Field: Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Cooling Capac-
ity {m3/s-W}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per unit cooling capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Cooling Design air Flow Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity. This field may
be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design air
Flow Method is not FlowPerCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the cooling supply air volume
flow rate from the design autosized cooling capacity and user specified flow per cooling capacity
value. Zone sizing object (Sizing:Zone) is required.

1.18.8.1.7 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
Enter the method used to determine the supply air volume flow rate when No Cooling or Heating
is required. Inputs allowed are None, SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosized-
CoolingAirflow, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. None is used when a cooling or heating
coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or this field may be left blank. SupplyAirFlowRate
means user specifies the magnitude of supply air flow rate or the program calculates the design
supply air volume flow rate if autosize is specified. FlowPerFloorArea means the program calculates
the supply air volume flow rate from the zone floor area served by the zone HVAC unit and Flow Per
Floor Area value specified by user. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow means the program calculates
the supply air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and autosized design cooling supply air
volume flow rate value determined by the program. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow means the
program calculates the supply air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and autosized heating
supply air flow rate value determined by the program. The default method is SupplyAirFlowRate.

1.18.8.1.8 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
{m3/s}
Enter the magnitude of the supply air volume flow rate when no cooling or heating is required in
m3/s. This input is an alternative to using the program auto-calculated value. This input is a
required field when the Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is Required is
SupplyAirFlowRate. This field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC
equipment. This input field is also autosizable.

1.18.8.1.9 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is
Required {m3/s-m2}
Enter the magnitude of supply air volume flow rate per zone floor area in m3/s-m2. This input
is a required field when Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is Required
is FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the supply air flow rate when no cooling or heating
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 739

is required from user specified flow per floor area and the zone area served by current zoneHVAC
equipment.

1.18.8.1.10 Field: Fraction of Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No
Clg or Htg Required
Enter the fraction of supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized cooling supply air
flow rate. This input field is required field when Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or
Heating is Required is FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. The program calculates the supply air
flow rate when no cooling or heating is required from user specified fraction and the design cooling
autosized supply air flow rate.

1.18.8.1.11 Field: Fraction of Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No
Clg or Htg Required
Enter the fraction of supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized cooling supply air
flow rate. This input field is required field when Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or
Heating is Required is FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. The program calculates the supply air
flow rate when no cooling or heating is required from user specified fraction and the design heating
autosized supply air flow rate.

1.18.8.1.12 Field: Heating Design Air Flow Method

The input of this field must be the method used to determine the heating supply air volume flow
rate. Input allowed is either None, SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosized-
CoolingAirflow, or FlowPerCoolingCapacity. None means heating coil is not included in the zone
HVAC equipment or this field may be left blank. SupplyAirFlowRate means the user specifies the
magnitude of supply air flow rate or the program calculates the design heating supply air volume
flow rate if autosize is specified. FlowPerFloorArea means the program calculates the heating supply
air volume flow rate from zone floor area served by the zone HVAC unit and user specified Flow
Per Floor Area value. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow means the program calculates the heating
supply air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and the autosized design heating supply air
volume flow rate value determined by the simulation. FlowPerHeatingCapacity means the supply
air volume is calculated from user specified flow per heating capacity and design heating capacity
determined by the simulation. The default method is SupplyAirFlowRate.

1.18.8.1.13 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}

Enter the magnitude of the heating supply air volume flow rate in m3/s. This input is an alternative
to using the program auto-calculated value. This input is a required field when the Heating Design
air Flow Method is SupplyAirFlowRate. This field may be left blank if a heating coil is not included
in the zone HVAC equipment. This input field is also autosizable.

1.18.8.1.14 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-
m2}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field may be
left blank if a heating coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Heating Design Air
Flow Method is not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow
740 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

rate from the zone conditioned floor area served by the zone HVAC equipment and the flow per unit
area value specified by the user.

1.18.8.1.15 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate

Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the autosized heating supply air flow
rate. This input field is required when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FractionOfAutosized-
HeatingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if a heating coil is not included in the zone HVAC
equipment or the Heating Design air Flow Method is not FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. The
program calculates the heating supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized heating supply
air flow rate and user specified fraction.

1.18.8.1.16 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Heating Ca-
pacity {m3/s-W}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per unit heating capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FlowPerHeatingCapacity. This field may
be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Heating Design
air Flow Method is not FlowPerHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating supply air
volume flow rate from the design autosized heating capacity and user specified flow per unit heating
capacity value.

1.18.8.1.17 Field Cooling Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the cooling design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed
is either None, CoolingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCa-
pacity. None is used when a cooling coil is not included in the Zone HVAC equipment or this field
may be left blank. If this input field is left blank, then the design cooling capacity is set to zero.
CoolingDesignCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of cooling capacity or the program calcu-
lates the design cooling capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program
calculates the design cooling capacity from user specified cooling capacity per floor area and floor
area of the zone served by the HVAC unit. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity means the program
calculates the design cooling capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design cooling
capacity. The default method is CoolingDesignCapacity.

1.18.8.1.18 Field: Cooling Design Capacity {W}

Enter the magnitude of the cooling capacity in Watts. This input is an alternative to using the
program auto-calculated cooling capacity value. This input is a required field when the Cooling
Design Capacity Method is CoolingDesignCapacity. This field may be left blank if a cooling coil is
not included in the zone HVAC equipment or alternative method is specified. This input field is
autosizable. Design day sizing run must be specified.

1.18.8.1.19 Field: Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the cooling capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2. This field is required field when the
Cooling Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. This field may be left blank if a cooling
coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design Capacity Method is not
CapacityPerFloorArea. The program calculates the cooling capacity from floor area of the zone
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 741

served by the zone HVAC equipment and the cooling capacity per unit floor area value specified by
the user.

1.18.8.1.20 Field: Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity

Enter the cooling capacity as a fraction of the autosized cooling capacity. This input field is required
when the Cooling Design Capacity Method is FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. This input field
may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design
Capacity Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the cooling
capacity from the design autosized cooling capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing
run must be specified.

1.18.8.1.21 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed
is either None, HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCa-
pacity. None is used when a heating coil is not included in the Zone HVAC equipment or this field
may be left blank. If this input field is left blank, then the design heating capacity is set to zero.
HeatingDesignCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of heating capacity or the program cal-
culates the design heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program
calculates the design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor
area of the zone served by the HVAC unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means the program
calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design heating
capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.18.8.1.22 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

Enter the magnitude of the heating capacity in Watts. This input is an alternative to using the
program auto-calculated heating capacity value. This input is a required field when the Heating
Design Capacity Method is HeatingDesignCapacity. This field may be left blank if a heating coil
is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or alternative method is specified. This input field is
autosizable. Design day sizing run must be specified.

1.18.8.1.23 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2. This field is required field when the
Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. This field may be left blank if a heating
coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Heating Design Capacity Method is not
CapacityPerFloorArea. The program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone
served by the zone HVAC equipment and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by
the user.

1.18.8.1.24 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity. This input field is required
when the Heating Design Capacity Method is FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. This input field
may be left blank if a heating coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Heating Design
Capacity Method is not FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating
capacity from the design autosized cooling capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing
run must be specified.
742 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec1 , !- Name
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
autosize , !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is
Required
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No
Clg or Htg
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No
Clg or Htg
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}

DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec2 , !- Name
FlowPerFloorArea , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
3.6311418E-03, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
FlowPerFloorArea , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
3.6311418E-03, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is
Required
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No
Clg or Htg
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No
Clg or Htg
FlowPerFloorArea , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
3.6311418E-03, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}

DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec3 , !- Name
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
0.5, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 743

, !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required

, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is
Required
0.5, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg
or Htg
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg
or Htg
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
0.5, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}

DesignSpecification :ZoneHVAC:Sizing ,
VRFDesignSpec4 , !- Name
FlowPerCoolingCapacity , !- Cooling Design Air Flow Method
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate
2.9541628E-05, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow , !- Supply Air Flow Rate Method When No Cooling or Heating is
Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating is Required
, !- Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area When No Clg or Htg is
Required
, !- Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg
or Htg
0.413231177 , !- Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air Flow Rate When No Clg
or Htg
FlowPerHeatingCapacity , !- Heating Design Air Flow Method
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate
2.9541628E-05, !- Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Heating Capacity
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}

1.18.9 DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing
This object modifies the sizing of an air loop terminal unit. It may be referenced by a Zone-
HVAC:AirDistributionUnit object. The values specified here are applied to the base sizing results
from the corresponding Sizing:Zone inputs. Any given DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing object
may be used by multiple terminal units with similar characteristics.

1.18.9.1 Inputs

1.18.9.1.1 Field: Name

744 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Name of the design specification air terminal sizing object. This name may be referenced by a
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit object.

1.18.9.1.2 Field: Fraction of Design Sensible Cooling Load

The fraction of the design sensible cooling load to be met by this terminal unit. This fraction is
applied after the Zone Cooling Sizing Factor (see Sizing:Zone).

1.18.9.1.3 Field: Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Difference Ratio

This ratio adjusts the supply air temperature difference used to calculate the cooling design supply
air flow rate for this terminal unit.

1.18.9.1.4 Field: Fraction of Design Sensible Heating Load

The fraction of the design sensible heating load to be met by this terminal unit. This fraction is
applied after the Zone Heating Sizing Factor (see Sizing:Zone).

1.18.9.1.5 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Difference Ratio

This ratio adjusts the supply air temperature difference used to calculate the heating design supply
air flow rate for this terminal unit.

1.18.9.1.6 Field: Fraction of Minimum Outdoor Air Flow

The fraction of the zone minimum outdoor air requirement to be met by this terminal unit.
An IDF example:

DesignSpecification :AirTerminal:Sizing ,
Recirculation System A Terminal Sizing , !- Name
0.6, !- Fraction of Design Cooling Load
0.8, !- Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature Difference Ratio
1.0, !- Fraction of Design Heating Load
1.0, !- Heating Design Supply Air Temperature Difference Ratio
0.0; !- Fraction of Minimum Outdoor Air Flow

1.18.10 Sizing:System
The Sizing:System object contains the input needed to perform a central forced air system design
air flow, heating capacity, and cooling capacity calculation for a system serving one or more zones.
The information needed consists of the outside environmental conditions and the design supply air
temperatures, outdoor air flow rate, and minimum system air flow ratio.
The outside conditions come from the design days in the input. A system sizing calculation is
performed for every design day in the input file and the resulting maximum heating and cooling air
flow rates and capacities are saved for use in the component sizing calculations.
Supply air conditions are specified by inputting a supply air temperature for cooling, a supply air
temperature for heating, and a preheat temperature.
The system sizing calculation sums the zone design air flow rates to obtain a system supply air flow
rate. The design conditions and the outdoor air flow rate are used to calculate a design mixed air
temperature. The temperature plus the design supply air temperatures allows the calculation of
system design heating and cooling capacities.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 745

1.18.10.1 Inputs

1.18.10.1.1 Field: AirLoop Name

The name of the AirLoopHVAC corresponding to this Sizing:System object. This is the air system
for which the design calculation will be made using the input data of this Sizing:System Object.

1.18.10.1.2 Field: Type of Load to Size On

The user specified type of load on which to size the central system. The choices are Sensible, Total
and VentilationRequirement. Sensible and Total mean that the central system supply air flow rate
will be determined by combining the zone design air flow rates, which have been calculated to meet
the zone sensible loads from the design days. VentilationRequirement means that the central system
supply air flow rate will be determined by the system ventilation requirement. In addition Sensible
tells the program to size the central cooling coil using entering air flow rate and air conditions at
the sensible load peak; Total indicates that the program should size the central cooling coil at the
air flow rate and conditions at the total load peak. The central heating coil is always sized at the
conditions at the peak sensible heating load.

1.18.10.1.3 Field: Design Outdoor Air Flow Rate

The design outdoor air flow rate in cubic meters per second. Generally this should be the minimum
outdoor air flow. It is used for both heating and cooling design calculations. The assumption for
cooling is that any outdoor air economizer will be closed. If Autosize is input the outdoor air flow
rate will be taken from the sum of the zone outdoor air flow rates or calculated based on the System
Outdoor Air Method selection (field below).

1.18.10.1.4 Field: Central Heating Maximum System Air Flow Ratio

The ratio of the maximum system air flow rate for heating to the maximum system air flow rate.
The value must be between 0 and 1. For constant volume systems the ratio should be set to 1.
This ratio should be set to reflect what the user expects the system flow rate to be when maximum
heating demand occurs. This ratio is used in calculating the central system heating capacity. Thus
if the system is VAV with the zone VAV dampers held at minimum flow when there is a zone heating
demand, this ratio should be set to the minimum flow ratio. If the zone VAV dampers are reverse
action and can open to full flow to meet heating demand, this ratio should be set to 1. The default
is set to 0.5, reflecting the fact that VAV dampers are typically not allowed to fully open during
heating.
This field can be set to AutoSize. When automatically calculated, the ratio is determined from
the system heating design flow rate divided by the main (which is usually the max of heating and
cooling design flow rates) design flow rate. The design flow rates are also adjusted to be more
accurate by examining each of the air terminals attached to the air system and summing the heating
and maximum flow rates.

1.18.10.1.5 Field: Preheat Design Temperature

The design air temperature exiting the preheat coil (if any) in degrees Celsius.

1.18.10.1.6 Field: Preheat Design Humidity Ratio

The design humidity ratio exiting the preheat coil (if any) in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry
air. (kgWater/kgDryAir)
746 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18.10.1.7 Field: Precool Design Temperature

The design air temperature exiting the precooling coil (if any) in degrees Celsius.

1.18.10.1.8 Field: Precool Design Humidity Ratio

The design humidity ratio exiting the precooling coil (if any) in kilograms of water per kilogram of
dry air. (kgWater/kgDryAir)

1.18.10.1.9 Field: Central Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature

The design supply air temperature for cooling in degrees Celsius. This should be the temperature
of the air exiting the central cooling coil.

1.18.10.1.10 Field: Central Heating Design Supply Air Temperature

The design supply air temperature for heating in degrees Celsius. This can be either the reset
temperature for a single duct system or the actual hot duct supply air temperature for dual duct
systems. It should be the temperature at the exit of the main heating coil. This value is also used
for the sizing of zone equipment (e.g., reheat coil) for the system embedded with central heating
coils, but it is not used if there is no central heating coil in the system.

1.18.10.1.11 Field: Type of Zone Sum to Use

If the input is coincident the central system air flow rate will be sized on the sum of the coincident
zone air flow rates. If the input is noncoincident the central system air flow rate will be sized on the
sum of the noncoincident zone air flow rates. The default is noncoincident.

1.18.10.1.12 Field: 100% Outdoor Air in Cooling

Entering Yes means the system will be sized for cooling using 100% outdoor air. Entering No means
the system will be sized for cooling using minimum outside air (the default).

1.18.10.1.13 Field: 100% Outdoor Air in Heating

Entering Yes means the system will be sized for heating using 100% outdoor air. Entering No means
the system will be sized for heating using minimum outside air (the default).

1.18.10.1.14 Field: Central Cooling Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio

The design humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air at the exit of the central
cooling coil. The default is 0.008 (kgWater/kgDryAir).

1.18.10.1.15 Field: Central Heating Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio

The design humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air at the exit of the central
heating coil. This value is also used for the sizing of zone equipment (e.g., reheat coil) for the system
embedded with central heating coils, but it is not used if there is no central heating coil in the
system. The default is 0.008 (kgWater/kgDryAir).
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 747

1.18.10.1.16 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method

The input of this field must be the method used to determine the airloop cooling supply air volume
flow rate. The input must be either, DesignDay, Flow/System, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAuto-
sizedCoolingAirflow, or FlowPerCoolingCapacity. DesignDay means the program will calculate the
system design cooling supply air volume flow rate using the System Sizing input data and a design
day simulation. Flow/System means that the program will use the input of the field Cooling Design
Air Flow Rate as the system design cooling supply air volume flow rate. FlowPerFloorArea means the
program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from zone floor area served by the airloop
and user specified Flow Per Floor Area value. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow means the pro-
gram calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and the autosized
design cooling supply air volume flow rate value determined by the simulation. FlowPerCoolingCa-
pacity means the supply air volume is calculated from user specified flow per cooling capacity and
design cooling capacity determined by the simulation. The default method is DesignDay: i.e., the
program uses the calculated design values.

1.18.10.1.17 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

The design system cooling air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This input is an alternative to
using the program autocalculated value. This input is used if Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method
is Flow/System. This value will not be multiplied by any sizing factor or by zone multipliers. If
using zone multipliers, this value must be large enough to serve the multiplied zones.

1.18.10.1.18 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field
may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the airloop or the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
Method is not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate
from the cooled floor area served by the air loop and the Flow Per Unit Area value specified by the
user.

1.18.10.1.19 Field: Cooling Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Supply Air

Flow Rate
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the airloop autosized cooling supply
air flow rate. This input field is required when the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is Frac-
tionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in
the airloop or the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow.
The program calculates the cooling supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling
supply air flow rate and user specified fraction.

1.18.10.1.20 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Cooling Capacity
{m3/s-W}
Enter the cooling supply air volume flow rate per unit cooling capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity. This field
may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the airloop or the Cooling Supply Air Flow
Rate Method is not FlowPerCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the airloop cooling supply
air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling capacity and user specified Flow Per Cooling
Capacity value.
748 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18.10.1.21 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method

The input of this field must be the method used to determine the airloop heating supply air volume
flow rate. The input must be either, DesignDay, Flow/System, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAu-
tosizedHeatingAirflow, FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow or FlowPerHeatingCapacity. DesignDay
means the program will calculate the system design heating supply air volume flow rate using the
System Sizing input data and a design day simulation. Flow/System means that the program will
use the input of the field Heating Design Air Flow Rate as the system design heating supply air
volume flow rate. FlowPerFloorArea means the program calculates the system heating supply air
volume flow rate from zone floor area served by the airloop and user specified Flow Per Floor Area
value. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow means the program calculates the system heating supply
air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and the autosized system design heating supply air
volume flow rate value determined by the simulation. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow means the
program calculates the system heating supply air volume flow rate from user specified fraction and
the autosized system design cooling supply air volume flow rate value determined by the simula-
tion. FlowPerHeatingCapacity means the system heating supply air volume is calculated from user
specified flow per heating capacity and design heating capacity determined by the simulation. The
default method is DesignDay: i.e., the program uses the calculated design values.

1.18.10.1.22 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

The design system heating air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This input is an alternative to
using the program autocalculated value. This input is used if Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method
is Flow/System. This value will not be multiplied by any sizing factor or by zone multipliers. If
using zone multipliers, this value must be large enough to serve the multiplied zones.

1.18.10.1.23 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per zone conditioned floor area in m3/s-m2. This field
is required field when the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerFloorArea. This field
may be left blank if a heating coil is not included in the airloop or the Heating Supply Air Flow
Rate Method is not FlowPerFloorArea. The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow
rate from the heated or cooled floor area served by the air loop and the Flow Per Unit Area value
specified by the user.

1.18.10.1.24 Field: Heating Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the airloop autosized heating supply
air flow rate. This input field is required when the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is Frac-
tionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if heating coil is not included in
the airloop or the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is not FractionOfAutosizedHeatingAirflow.
The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized heating
supply air flow rate and user specified fraction.

1.18.10.1.25 Field: Heating Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate as a fraction of the airloop autosized cooling supply
air flow rate. This input field is required when the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is Frac-
tionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow. This input field may be left blank if heating coil is not included in
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 749

the airloop or the Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingAirflow.
The program calculates the heating supply air volume flow rate from the design autosized cooling
supply air flow rate and user specified fraction.

1.18.10.1.26 Field: Heating Design Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Heating
Capacity {m3/s-W}
Enter the heating supply air volume flow rate per unit heating capacity in m3/s-W. This input field
is required when the Heating Design air Flow Method is FlowPerCoolingCapacity. This field may
be left blank if a heating coil is not included in the airloop or the Heating Design air Flow Method
is not FlowPerHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the airloop heating supply air volume flow
rate from the design autosized heating capacity and user specified Flow Per Heating Capacity value.

1.18.10.1.27 Field: System Outdoor Air Method

The method used to calculate the system minimum outdoor air flow. The three choices are ZoneSum,
Standard62.1VentilationRateProcedure (VRP), and Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure (SP). Zone-
Sum sums the outdoor air flows across all zones served by the system. VRP uses the multi-zone equa-
tions defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1 to calculate the system outdoor air flow. VRP considers zone
air distribution effectiveness and zone diversification of outdoor air fractions. VRP may also adjust
autosized air terminal maximum and minimum supply flow rates if needed to ensure adequate outdoor
air flow rate to each zone. SP is similar to VRP and was introduced in ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2019.
The main difference with VRP is that it uses a simplified approach to calculate a system’s ventilation
efficiency which is in turn used to calculate the system outdoor air flow. Additionally, when set to au-
tosize, the minimum (primary) air flow (or air flow fraction) of these types of air terminals will be cal-
culated following SP: AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat (Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
or Fixed Minimum Air Flow Fraction), AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat (Constant Minimum
Air Flow Fraction or Fixed Minimum Air Flow Fraction), AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
(Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction), AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat(Minimum Pri-
mary Air Flow Fraction).

1.18.10.1.28 Field: Zone Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction

This positive numeric input is the zone maximum outdoor air fraction. For an air loop, when a
zone requires outdoor air higher than the user specified Zone Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction, the
zone supply air flow will be increased to cap the outdoor air fraction at the maximum value. This
allows the system level outdoor air flow to be reduced while the total supply air flow increases. Valid
values are from 0 to 1.0. Default is 1.0 which indicates zones can have 100% outdoor air maintaining
backward compatibility. This input work for constant volume air systems, single and dual duct VAV
systems.

1.18.10.1.29 Field Cooling Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the cooling design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed is
either None, CoolingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapac-
ity. None is used when a cooling coil is not included in the airloop. If this input field is left blank,
or None is specified, then the autosized design cooling capacity determined by the program is used.
CoolingDesignCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of cooling capacity or the program calcu-
lates the design cooling capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program
calculates the design cooling capacity from user specified cooling capacity per floor area and floor
750 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

area of the zones served by the airloop. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity means the program
calculates the design cooling capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design cooling
capacity. If the value this input field is blank or specified as None, then the next three input fields
are not required. The default method is CoolingDesignCapacity.

1.18.10.1.30 Field: Cooling Design Capacity {W}

Enter the magnitude of the cooling capacity in Watts. This input is an alternative to using the
program auto-calculated cooling capacity value. This input is a required field when the Cooling
Design Capacity Method is CoolingDesignCapacity. This field may be left blank if a cooling coil is
not included in the air loop or alternative method is specified. This input field is autosizable.

1.18.10.1.31 Field: Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the cooling capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2. This field is required field when the Cooling
Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. This field may be left blank if a cooling coil is
not included in the airloop or the Cooling Design Capacity Method is not CapacityPerFloorArea.
The program calculates the cooling capacity from floor area of the zones served by the airloop and
the cooling capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user.

1.18.10.1.32 Field: Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity

Enter the cooling capacity as a fraction of the autosized cooling capacity. This input field is required
when the Cooling Design Capacity Method is FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. This input field
may be left blank if a cooling coil is not included in the zone HVAC equipment or the Cooling Design
Capacity Method is not FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the cooling
capacity from the design autosized cooling capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing
run must be specified.

1.18.10.1.33 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed is
either None, HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapac-
ity. None is used when a heating coil is not included in the airloop. If this input field is left blank,
then the autosized design heating capacity determined by the program is used. HeatingDesignCa-
pacity means user specifies the magnitude of heating capacity or the program calculates the design
heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the
design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the zones
served by the airllop. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means the program calculates the design
heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design heating capacity. If the value
this input field is blank or specified as None, then the next three input fields are not required. The
default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.18.10.1.34 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

Enter the magnitude of the heating capacity in Watts. This input is an alternative to using the
program auto-calculated heating capacity value. This input is a required field when the Heating
Design Capacity Method is HeatingDesignCapacity. This field may be left blank if a heating coil is
not included in the airloop or alternative method is specified. This input field is autosizable.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 751

1.18.10.1.35 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2. This field is required field when the Heat-
ing Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. This field may be left blank if a heating coil
is not included in the airloop or the Heating Design Capacity Method is not CapacityPerFloorArea.
The program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zones served by the airloop and
the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user.

1.18.10.1.36 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity. This input field is required
when the Heating Design Capacity Method is FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. This input field
may be left blank if heating coil is not included in the airloop or the Heating Design Capacity Method
is not FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the
design autosized cooling capacity and user specified fraction.

1.18.10.1.37 Field: Central Cooling Capacity Control Method

Specifies how the central cooling coil will be controlled, which affects the coil sizing calculation.
There are 4 choices: VAV, Bypass, VT, and OnOff. Choose VAV if the cooling output is controlled
by varying the air flow. Bypass should be chosen if the capacity is controlled by bypassing a variable
fraction of the mixed air around the coil face. VT indicates that cooling coil output is controlled by
varying the coil exit temperature while the flow rate is constant. And OnOff means that the cooling
output is controlled by cycling the air flow.

1.18.10.1.38 Field: Occupant Diversity

The Occupant Diversity (D) as defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.1. The Occupant Diversity is a
ratio of the expected peak population to the design zone population for all zones attached to the air
system. If left blank or set to autosize, EnergyPlus will calculate it by using the people schedules
and design levels included in the model.
An IDF example:

Sizing:System ,
VAV Sys 1, !- AirLoop Name
sensible , !- Type of Load to Size On
autosize , !- Design Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.3, !- Minimum System Air Flow Ratio
4.5, !- Preheat Design Temperature {C}
.008, !- Preheat Design Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
11.0, !- Precool Design Temperature {C}
.008, !- Precool Design Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
12.8, !- Central Cooling Design Supply Air Temperature {C}
16.7, !- Central Heating Design Supply Air Temperature {C}
noncoincident , !- Sizing Option
no , !- 100% Outdoor Air in Cooling
no , !- 100% Outdoor Air in Heating
0.008 , !- Central Cooling Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
0.008 , !- Central Heating Design Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
designday , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method
0, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Cooling Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {-}
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Cooling Capacity {m3/s-W}
designday , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method
0, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
752 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

, !- Heating Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {-}

, !- Heating Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {-}
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit Heating Capacity {m3/s-W}
ZoneSum , !- System Outdoor Air Method
0.5, !- Zone Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Cooling Design Capacity {W}
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity {W}
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}
; !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity {-}

1.18.10.2 Outputs

The system design air flow rates and heating and cooling capacities are output onto the local file
“eplusssz.<ext>” where <ext> is the extension from the sizing style object (default is csv – a comma
separated file eplusssz.csv). The columns are clearly labeled. It will easily import into Excel or other
spreadsheet program that accepts delimited files. The results are calculated values and do not include
any user input system flow rates.
The calculated system design air flow rates and the user input system design air flow rates are also
reported on the eplusout.eio file. The values are printed out for each system as comma separated
records beginning with System Sizing. An example is:
! <System Sizing Information >c++, System Name , Field Description , Value
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, Calculated Cooling Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 1.3194
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, User Cooling Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 1.5000
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, Calculated Heating Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 0.90363
System Sizing , VAV SYS 1, User Heating Design Air Flow Rate [m3/s], 1.0000

1.18.11 Sizing:Plant
The Sizing:Plant object contains the input needed for the program to calculate plant loop flow rates
and equipment capacities when autosizing. This information is initially used by components that
use water for heating or cooling such as hot or chilled water coils to calculate their maximum water
flow rates. These flow rates are then summed for use in calculating the Plant Loop flow rates.
The program will size any number of chilled water, hot water, condenser water and other plant loops.
There should be one Sizing:Plant object for each plant loop that is to be autosized.

1.18.11.1 Inputs

1.18.11.1.1 Field: Plant or Condenser Loop Name

The name of a Plant Loop or Condenser Loop object corresponding to this Sizing:Plant object. This
is the plant loop for which this data will be used for calculating the loop flow rate.

1.18.11.1.2 Field: Loop Type

The possible inputs are Heating, Steam, Cooling, or Condenser.
1.18. GROUP – DESIGN OBJECTS 753

1.18.11.1.3 Field: Design Loop Exit Temperature

The water temperature in degrees Celsius at the exit of the supply side of the plant loop, Thus this
is the temperature of the water supplied to the inlet of chilled or hot water coils and other equipment
that places loads on a plant loop.

1.18.11.1.4 Field: Loop Design Temperature Difference

The design temperature rise (for cooling or condenser loops) or fall (for heating loops) in degrees
Celsius across the demand side of a plant loop. This temperature difference is used by component
models to determine flow rates required to meet design capacities. Larger values lead to smaller
design flow rates.

1.18.11.1.5 Field: Sizing Option

This field is optional. This field controls how concurrence issues impact the plant loop design flow
rate. If it is not used then the program uses noncoincident method, which is the historical behavior
prior to version 8.3. There are two choices, noncoincident and coincident. The use of Coincident
sizing option requires that the SimulationControl object be set to YES for the input field called Do
HVAC Sizing Simulation for Sizing Periods.

1.18.11.1.6 Field: Zone Timesteps in Averaging Window

This field is optional and is only used if the preceding field is set to Coincident. This is the number
of zone timesteps used in a moving average to determine the design flow rate from HVAC Sizing
Simulation approach. This allows using a broader average over time when using coincident plant
sizing. This is similar in concept to the similar field in Sizing:Parameters which specifies the averaging
window for zone loads. The default is 1.

1.18.11.1.7 Field: Coincident Sizing Factor Mode

This field is only used if the sizing option is set to Coincident. This field controls the behavior
of coincident sizing with respect to what, if any, sizing factor should be applied to further modify
the flow rate measured while running HVAC Sizing Simulations. There are four options. Enter the
keword None to use the raw value for flow rate without modification. Enter the keyword GlobalHeat-
ingSizingFactor to modify the flow by the sizing factor entered in the object called Sizing:Parameters
for heating. Enter the keyword GlobalCoolingSizingFactor to modify the flow by the sizing factor
entered in the object called Sizing:Parameters for cooling. Enter the keyword LoopComponentSiz-
ingFactor to modify the flow by a sizing factor determined from the combination of component-level
sizing factors in the associated plant loop.
An IDF example:

Sizing:Plant ,
Chilled Water Loop , ! name of loop
Cooling , ! type of loop
7.22, ! chilled water supply temperature
6.67, ! chilled water delta T
NonCoincident , !- Sizing Option
1, !- Zone Timesteps in Averaging Window
GlobalCoolingSizingFactor ; !- Coincident Sizing Factor Mode
754 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.18.11.2 Outputs

The loop flow rates are reported on the eplusout.eio file along with the component sizing results.
When coincident plant sizing method is used, the eio file contains special summary report with
various details and interim values from the calculations, under the following record header: ! ,
Plant Loop Name, Sizing Pass {#}, Measured Mass Flow{kg/s}, Measured Demand {W}, Demand
Calculated Mass Flow{kg/s}, Sizes Changed {Yes/No}, Previous Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}, New
Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}, Demand Check Applied {Yes/No}, Sizing Factor {}, Normalized Change
{}, Specific Heat{}.

1.19 HVAC: Primary and Secondary Systems

The HVAC and equipment section of the EnergyPlus input data dictionary and input data file are
slightly more complex than the description of building geometry, internal gains, etc. because of the
interconnections of the various parts of an HVAC system. In EnergyPlus, there are several portions
to the HVAC simulation. All of these parts must be correctly specified in order to arrive at a valid
simulation model. The goal of this section is to provide interface developers and advanced users
with guidelines on what input is expected and also provide some background on basic EnergyPlus
simulation methodology.
An EnergyPlus HVAC simulation consists of various components that are connected physically in the
actual system by ducts, piping, etc. Every component in an HVAC system must have an inlet and
outlet “node”. In the actual system, a node might be a point in the system at which fluid properties
can be measured. In an EnergyPlus simulation, the nodes are points at which fluid properties are
evaluated and passed on to subsequent equipment.
Components are linked together to form various loops within the simulation. Thus, the output node
from one component also serves as the inlet node to the next component. Loops are constructed
by defining these loops and also defining the components on the loops. The figure below shows a
generic example of the loop-node concept.
Loop nodes are a key defining feature in EnergyPlus. As a result, it is recommended that one of the
first steps taken in defining an HVAC system in EnergyPlus be the definition of a node diagram or
map. This is helpful for visualization of the entire system. Such a map could be created electronically
within an interface or could be kept in the background out of the sight of the user.
So that these loops are manageable and more clearly defined both in the input and in the simulation,
four different loop sections can be defined in an EnergyPlus input file. In general, these four types
are in essence two pairs of loop sections that make up two distinct types of loops: a zone/air loop
and a plant loop. As of Version 7, plant loops and condenser loops have been consolidated to be
largely the same. The four loop section types are defined below.
Air Loop Supply Side: The air loop is defined by the section of the zone/air loop that starts
after the zone return streams are combined and continues on until just before any air stream(s) are
branched off to individual zones. The starting point of the air loop is fairly straightforward. The
ending point is slightly more complex but can be understood with some examples. For instance, in a
terminal reheat system, the end of the air loop would typically be considered the node following the
cooling coil. In a dual duct system, the air loop would have two ending points that would correspond
to the nodes after the cooling coil and after the heating coil/humidifier. In most cases, the air loop
has a single starting point and up to two ending points (for a 2 deck system). An outdoor air
subsystem can be included in the supply side for ventilation and relief air.
1.19. HVAC: PRIMARY AND SECONDARY SYSTEMS 755

Figure 1.88: Example Node Diagram

756 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Air Loop Zone Equipment: The zone equipment section of the input file is defined as more or
less the rest of the zone/air loop (outside air is handled separately as a subset of the air loop). This
includes everything from where the ducts are split to serve various zones up through where the return
ducts from various zones are mixed into a single return duct. Zone equipment can include dampers
and reheat coils as well as zone specific conditioning systems such as thermostatic baseboard or a
window air conditioner. Most control issues are typically dealt with in the zone equipment section
of the simulation.
Plant Loop Demand Side: One side of the plant is where energy is “demanded” by various
components that make up the air loop or zone equipment. Typically, this is the water side of
equipment such as coils, baseboard, radiant heating and cooling, etc. In the case of a condenser
loop, energy is typically “demanded” by a chiller condenser or other water source heat pump. The
demand side of this loop can also include mixers, flow splitters, and a bypass.
Plant Loop Supply Side: The other side of the plant loop is where energy is “supplied” by
various components. The components typically found on the supply side include pumps, boilers,
chillers, purchased heating and cooling, ice storage, etc. In the case of a condenser, the components
would be cooling tower, fluid cooler, or ground source heat exchanger, etc. As with the demand
side, this loop can also include mixers, flow splitters, and a bypass.
The section of the input file for describing the HVAC system tends to follow this structure presented
above. Both plant and condenser loops are defined with a master description and then branch off
into supply and demand side details. Linkage between the two sides is done using node names in the
master statement. The air loop and zone equipment descriptions are slightly more complex due to
the wide range of potential systems that are anticipated. Note that in every section controls become
a key element and must be addressed. Each of the following sections details either a loop, a portion
of a loop, or controls.

1.20 Group – Node-Branch Management

Nodes, Branch Lists and Branches define the topography of the HVAC connections.

1.20.1 NodeList
For convenience, the NodeList object can be used to identify all the nodes for a particular use. A
node list is not always required. The advantage of listing all the nodes in this manner is that input
fields in other objects that ask for a node name can refer to either a single node or a list of nodes
using this object.
There are other lines of input syntax that require the use of a NodeList as part of the input. These
syntax items include: OutdoorAir:NodeList and the SetpointManager objects. In these two cases,
the use of a NodeList statement is mandatory if there is more than one node in this particular “list”.
For example, if the outside air only has a single inlet node, then the name of that node can replace
the node list name in the input syntax. As a result of this mandatory specification of node lists for
certain types of input, nodes can, obviously, and may be members of more than one list.

1.20.1.1 Inputs

1.20.1.1.1 Field: Name

1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 757

This alpha designation must be unique among all the Node List Names. It is used as reference in
various objects (e.g. OutdoorAir:NodeList).

1.20.1.1.2 Field: Node <#> Name (up to 25 allowed)

Each unique Node identifier creates a Node structure with various attributes depending on the type
of node. Typical values include Temperature, Mass Flow Rate, and Temperature Set Point. The
alpha designators are associated with a particular node.
Though each NodeList is limited to 25 nodes, several node lists may be entered if you choose to
identify all the nodes up front. For example:
NodeList , Nodes1 -25,
NODE_1 ,NODE_2 ,NODE_3 ,NODE_4 ,NODE_5 ,NODE_6 ,NODE_7 ,NODE_8 ,NODE_9 ,NODE_10 ,
NODE_11 ,NODE_12 ,NODE_13 ,NODE_14 ,NODE_15 ,NODE_16 ,NODE_17 ,NODE_18 ,NODE_19 ,NODE_20 ,
NODE_21 ,NODE_22 ,NODE_23 ,NODE_24 ,NODE_25;
NodeList , Nodes26 -49, NODE_26 ,NODE_27 ,NODE_28 ,NODE_29 ,NODE_30 ,
NODE_31 ,NODE_32 ,NODE_33 ,NODE_34 ,NODE_35 ,NODE_36 ,NODE_37 ,NODE_38 ,NODE_39 ,NODE_40 ,
NODE_41 ,NODE_42 ,NODE_43 ,NODE_44 ,NODE_45 ,NODE_46 ,NODE_47 ,NODE_48 ,NODE_49;

1.20.1.2 Outputs

A simple detail of Nodes and numbers assigned appears in the eplusout.bnd file:
! <Node >,<NodeNumber >,<Node Name >,<Node Fluid Type >,<\# Times Node Referenced After Definition >
Node ,1, OUTSIDE AIR INLET NODE 1,Air ,2
Node ,2,VAV SYS 1 INLET NODE ,Air ,3
Node ,3,MIXED AIR NODE 1,Air ,5
Node ,4,MAIN COOLING COIL 1 OUTLET NODE ,Air ,3
Node ,5,MAIN HEATING COIL 1 OUTLET NODE ,Air ,4
Node ,6,VAV SYS 1 OUTLET NODE ,Air ,7

In addition, properties of each node is available during the simulation:

– HVAC,Average,System Node Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,System Node Last Timestep Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint High Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint Low Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint Minimum Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint Maximum Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Relative Humidity [%]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Pressure [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Enthalpy [J/kg]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Last Timestep Enthalpy [J/kg]
758 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,System Node Wetbulb Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,System Node Dewpoint Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Quality []
– HVAC,Average,System Node Height [m]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Specific Heat [J/kg-K]

The following node variable is also available for system nodes that are for “air”:

– HVAC, Average, System Node Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC, Average, System Node Current Density [kg/m3]

The following node variables are “advanced” and normally used for debugging unusual
cases:

– HVAC,Average,System Node Minimum Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,System Node Maximum Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Minimum Limit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Maximum Limit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Minimum Available Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Maximum Available Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Averge,System Node Requested Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Setpoint Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The following node variable reports node carbon dioxide concentration when carbon
dioxide is simulated (ref. ZoneAirContaminantBalance):

– HVAC,Average,System Node CO2 Concentration [ppm]

The following node variable reports node generic contaminant concentration when
generic contaminant is simulated (ref. ZoneAirContaminantBalance):

– HVAC,Average,System Node Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]

1.20.1.2.1 System Node Temperature [C]

The current temperature at a system node in degrees C. For air nodes, this is the dry-bulb temper-
ature.

1.20.1.2.2 System Node Last Timestep Temperature [C]

The temperature at a system node for the previous timestep.

1.20.1.2.3 System Node Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The current mass flow rate at a system node in kg/s.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 759

1.20.1.2.4 System Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The current humidity ratio at a system node in kg-water/kg-dry-air. Not applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.5 System Node Setpoint Temperature [C]

The current setpoint temperature at a system node in degrees C. Some controllers and equipment
types sense this single setpoint.

1.20.1.2.6 System Node Setpoint High Temperature [C]

The current upper setpoint temperature at a system node in degrees C. Some controllers and equip-
ment types use dual setpoints at a single node.

1.20.1.2.7 System Node Setpoint Low Temperature [C]

The current upper setpoint temperature at a system node in degrees C. Some controllers and equip-
ment types use dual setpoints at a single node.

1.20.1.2.8 System Node Setpoint Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The current humidity ratio setpoint at a system node in kg-water/kg-dry-air. Some controllers and
equipment types sense this single setpoint. Not applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.9 System Node Setpoint Minimum Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The current minimum desired humidity ratio at a system node in kg-water/kg-dry-air. Some con-
trollers and equipment types use the min/max values as dual setpoints at a single node. Not
applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.10 System Node Setpoint Maximum Humidity Ratio [kgWa-

ter/kgDryAir]
The current maximum desired humidity ratio at a system node in kg-water/kg-dry-air. Some con-
trollers and equipment types use the min/max values as dual setpoints at a single node. Not
applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.11 System Node Relative Humidity [%]

The current relative humidity (calculated from the node temperature, node humidity ratio and
standard barometric pressure for the location). Not applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.12 System Node Pressure [Pa]

The current pressure at a system node in Pa.
760 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.1.2.13 System Node Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
The current volume flow rate at a system node in m3 /s. This is report is calculated from the mass
flow using standardized values for density that do not vary over time (except for steam which varies
with quality). For water nodes this density is determined at a temperature of 5.05ºC. For air
nodes this density is determined for dry air at the standard barometric pressure for the location’s
elevation, and a temperature of 20.0ºC. For air nodes, also see the report “System Node Current
Density Volume Flow Rate.”

1.20.1.2.14 System Node Enthalpy [J/kg]

The current enthalpy at a system node in J/kg.

1.20.1.2.15 System Node Last Timestep Enthalpy [J/kg]

The enthalpy at the system node for the previous timestep in Joules per kilogram.

1.20.1.2.16 System Node Wetbulb Temperature [C]

The current wet-bulb temperature at a system node in degrees C. Not applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.17 System Node Dewpoint Temperature [C]

The current dewpoint temperature at a system node in degrees C. It is calculated from the System
Node Temperature, the System Node Humidity Ratio and the Site Outdoor Air Barometric Pressure.
Not applicable for liquid nodes.

1.20.1.2.18 System Node Quality []

The current system node vapor fraction/percent {0.0-1.0}.

1.20.1.2.19 System Node Height [m]

The current system node height {m}. Only applicable to outdoor air nodes.

1.20.1.2.20 System Node Specific Heat [J/kg-K]

The current specific heat capacity of the fluid at the node in units of J/kg-K. Not available for steam
nodes.
Additional Node Reporting for Air Nodes
The following system node variable is available for nodes with a fluid type of air.

1.20.1.2.21 System Node Current Density Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
The current volume flow rate at a system node in m3 /s based on the current density. This report
differs from the one called “System Node Standard Density Volume Flow Rate” in that it uses an
air density calculated for the current moist air conditions rather than a standard density.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 761

1.20.1.2.22 System Node Current Density [kg/m3]

The current air density at a system node in kg/m3. This is the density used to calculate the volume
flow rate above. The density is calculated using current outdoor air barometric pressure and the
drybulb temperature and humidity ratio at the air node.
Advanced Node Reporting
The following system node variables are available when you request “Diagnostics, DisplayAdvance-
dReportVariable;”. They are normally used for debugging unusual system cases and may not be
available for all systems. Also, their definitions may change based on the usage in the system.

1.20.1.2.23 System Node Minimum Temperature [C]

1.20.1.2.24 System Node Maximum Temperature [C]

These node variables represent the min/max of loops or branches.

1.20.1.2.25 System Node Minimum Limit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.20.1.2.26 System Node Maximum Limit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These node variables hold the maximum possible and the minimum allowable flow rates for a partic-
ular component. As such, they represent the “hardware limit” on the flow rate for the component.
By convention, these variables are stored at the component inlet node. Since components share their
nodes (the outlet node of one component is the inlet node of the next component), the protocol must
be strictly followed. These variables are set by each component based on the design flow limits of
the equipment.

1.20.1.2.27 System Node Minimum Available Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.20.1.2.28 System Node Maximum Available Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These node variables represent the loop or branch maximum and minimum flow rate for the current
configuration of the loop on which the component resides. The central plant routines manage these
variables dynamically to resolve flow rates through branches located inside splitters and mixers.

1.20.1.2.29 System Node Setpoint Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The current mass flow rate setpoint at a system node in kg/s. Some controllers and equipment types
sense this single setpoint.

1.20.1.2.30 System Node Requested Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output is the current mass flow rate request at a system node in kg/s. Only used for plant
simulations and nodes. This is the mass flow rate “requested” by a component. This is a record
of what the component wanted which can be useful for diagnostics when the actual simulated flow
is different than expected. This value is also used to determine overall loop flow rates.
762 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.1.2.31 System Node CO2 Concentration [ppm]

The average carbon dioxide concentration, in parts per million (ppm), at a system node for the
timestep being reported.

1.20.1.2.32 System Node Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]

The average generic contaminant concentration, in parts per million (ppm), at a system node for
the timestep being reported.

1.20.2 BranchList
A branch list is intended to define the branches or portions of a particular loop that are present on
an individual plant or condenser loop. Thus, the BranchList syntax simply provides a list of branch
names (see Branch syntax) that then refer to more detailed syntax in another part of the input file.
The syntax for describing a list of branches is given below.
Branches in BranchList objects should be listed in flow order: inlet branch, then parallel branches,
then outlet branch. Branches (within a splitter/mixer) are simulated in the order listed.

1.20.2.1 Inputs

1.20.2.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name to identify the branch list.

1.20.2.1.2 Field: Branch <#> Name

Branch name in the list. As noted above, Branches in BranchList objects MUST be listed in flow
order: inlet branch, then parallel branches, then outlet branch. Branches are simulated in the order
listed.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

BranchList , Cooling Supply Side Branches ,

CW Pump Branch ,
Little Chiller Branch ,
Big Chiller Branch ,
Purchased Cooling Branch ,
Supply Bypass Branch ,
Cooling Supply Outlet;

1.20.2.2 Outputs

No output directly related to Branch Lists current is presented.

1.20.3 Branch
Branches can be considered the mid-level grouping of items in the EnergyPlus HVAC loop scheme.
Components are the lowest level of information. A collection of components in series forms a branch.
Every branch must have at least one component, but it may have several components in series. The
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 763

air loop also has “unitary” objects that are compound objects that wrap components and when they
are used it is the unitary objects that appear on the Branch and not the child components. The
Branch defines the order that components appear on the branch. Moreover, a collection of branches
and their connecting information form a loop. Therefore, a branch is a collection of components
while a loop is a collection of branches. Thus, components are specified for particular HVAC loops
by assigning them to branches and then connecting those branches together to form a loop.
For hydronic plant systems, the Branch object is used on both the demand side and the supply side of
the plant loop. For HVAC air systems, the Branch object is only used to describe the components on
the supply side of an air loop. The demand side of the air loop does not use the Branch object. The
outside air system appears on a Branch object but it does not use a Branch object itself to describe
the components that included in the outside air system. So-called “ZoneHVAC:*” equipment, HVAC
equipment directly associated with a zone, do not use the Branch object.
It should be noted that each component also has at least two nodes associated with it—an inlet node
and an outlet node. These nodes, by default, are also part of the branch to which their components
are assigned. Although it may appear redundant to list the node names in both the Branch and
in the component object being referenced, this is needed because many components are connected
to more than one loop at a time and the node names are needed here to distinguish which portion
of the component is being attached to this particular branch and its loop. It should be noted that
each branch must have at least one component on it. A “null” branch such as one where the first
component on the loop is in reality a splitter or mixer should be defined as a single Pipe component
for plant, or a single Duct component for air systems.

1.20.3.1 Inputs

1.20.3.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is the unique, user-defined name that allows the branch to be referenced by other
elements such as the PlantLoop and CondenserLoop statements.

1.20.3.1.2 Field: Pressure Drop Curve Name

This is an optional field used to specify pressure drop information for this particular branch. Cur-
rently this is only available in plant/condenser fluid loops: PlantLoop and CondenserLoop. Air loops
require a full airflow network, so this field is ignored if found on an air loop. The value entered for
this field must match a pressure curve object also found in the input. This curve can be of the type:
Curve:Linear, Curve:Quadratic, Curve:Cubic, Curve:Exponent, or Curve:Functional:PressureDrop.
In order to then perform a pressure simulation for the loop that this branch is located on, a flag must
be set in the loop object. Reference the PlantLoop and CondenserLoop field “Pressure Simulation
Type” for allowable settings. See the Engineering Reference document for further information on
pressure simulation in plant loops.

1.20.3.1.3 Field Set (Branch Specifications)

Following the two introductory items, there are groups of 4 repeated items: a type, a name, inlet
and outlet node names. All of these items refer to one particular component on the branch. The
first component defined by these items will be the first component on this branch, etc. through the
end of the list. This object is extensible and can use as many field sets as needed by repeating the
last four fields.
764 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.3.1.4 Field: Component <#> Object Type

This field is the component object type (object class name). The component type refers to other
elements within the input file and specifies what kind of component this is. The objects in the Group
– Plant Equipment section are valid here when the Branch is used in Plant specifications. Fans, coils,
unitary systems, and Outside Air Systems are also valid component types for the Branch object.
Pipes or Ducts are also valid for this field. No splitter or mixer type objects are allowed.

1.20.3.1.5 Field: Component <#> Name

The component name is the unique, user-defined reference name to distinguish between potentially
multiple occurrences of a particular component type in an input file. The set of component type and
component name must be unique. (You can only have 1 Boiler object with name MYBOILER).

1.20.3.1.6 Field: Component <#> Inlet Node Name

This field references an inlet node name that will be found in the actual component specification. The
inlet node, and the outlet node specified in the next field, should correspond to component model’s
connections that are intended for the loop that this Branch is assigned to. For example a water-
cooled chiller will have two inlet nodes, one for chilled water return and one for condenser water
return and so the chiller will appear on two Branch objects accordingly.

1.20.3.1.7 Field: Component <#> Outlet Node Name

This field references an outlet node name that will be found in the actual component specification.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Branch ,
Air Loop Main Branch , !- Branch Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass , !- Comp1 Type
GasHeat CBVAV System , !- Comp1 Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name

And a more complex one:

BRANCH ,
Air Loop Main Branch , !- Branch Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
FAN:ConstantVolume , !- Comp1 Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Comp1 Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
COIL:Water:DetailedFlatCooling , !- Comp2 Type
Detailed Cooling Coil , !- Comp2 Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Comp2 Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Comp2 Outlet Node Name

1.20.3.2 Outputs

The components on a branch are in series and that list is in simulation and connection order. Each
branch must obey the rules: the outlet for component 1 has to have the same node name as the inlet
for component 2, and so forth.
Eplusout.err contains the test for “individual branch integrity”:
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 765

************* Testing Individual Branch Integrity

************* Testing Branch = AIR LOOP MAIN BRANCH
************* .... passed
************* Testing Branch = COOLING DEMAND INLET
************* .... passed
************* Testing Branch = COOLING COIL BRANCH
************* .... passed
************* Testing Branch = DEMAND BYPASS BRANCH
************* .... passed
************* Testing Branch = COOLING DEMAND OUTLET
************* .... passed
************* Testing Branch = COOLING SUPPLY OUTLET
************* .... passed

The addition of pressure simulation for branches in fluid loops brings a new output at the branch
level:

– HVAC,Average,Plant Branch Pressure Difference [Pa]

1.20.3.2.1 Plant Branch Pressure Difference [Pa]

This field allows the user to output the pressure drop of a particular branch on a plant loop or con-
denser loop. This output is only recognized if a valid pressure simulation is being performed. To do
this, the user must specify a pressure simulation type as an input in the PlantLoop or CondenserLoop
object.

1.20.4 ConnectorList
A connector list is a collection of either one or two connection devices (Connector:Mixer or Con-
nector:Splitter). Due to the definition of a loop in EnergyPlus, there is a maximum of one mixer
and one splitter allowed for each loop segment. This limitation still allows a tremendous amount of
flexibility to the user and can also still be solved within a reasonable amount of time and without a
complex solver routine. The connection list simply allows the specification of the types and names
of these devices. This allows the main loop statements to have the flexibility to have multiple lists
that can have one or more item.

1.20.4.1 Inputs

1.20.4.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an identifying name that will be referenced to main loop statements using this connector
list. The name must be unique among connector list names.

1.20.4.1.2 Field-Set: Connection Object Type and Identifying Name (up to 2

allowed)
Depending on the loop, either one or two of the connectors will be specified. If this particular
loop only has a single connector (either Connector:Mixer or Connector:Splitter), then only the first
two items (type of connection and identifying name of connector) are included. If both a mixer
and splitter are present, the additional type of connection and identifying name must be included.
Note that the order that the items appear is inconsequential—either the Connector:Mixer or the
Connector:Splitter may appear first. This will not affect the simulation.
766 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.4.1.3 Field: Connector 1 Object Type

This field contains the connector type Connector:Mixer or Connector:Splitter.

1.20.4.1.4 Field: Connector 1 Name

This field is an identifying name for the connector. It will be used by other objects in the input file.

1.20.4.1.5 Field: Connector 2 Object Type (optional)

This field contains the connector type Connector:Mixer or Connector:Splitter.

1.20.4.1.6 Field: Connector 2 Name (optional)

This field is an identifying name for the connector. It will be used by other objects in the input file.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

ConnectorList LIST , Cooling Supply Side Connectors ,

Connector:Splitter , CW Loop Splitter ,
Connector:Mixer , CW Loop Mixer;

1.20.4.2 Outputs

No output directly related to Connector Lists is currently presented.

1.20.5 Plant Loop Connectors

The connector list described in the preceding subsection determines how the branches of a particular
loop will be hooked together. These connections can be classified either as a separation of a single
stream into several outlet streams (splitter) or the merging of several streams into a single outlet
stream (mixer). Due to the limitation per branch of a single splitter and a single mixer, the connector
list can only have two pieces of equipment as a maximum. The names defined for either/both
the splitter or/and the mixer refer then to “component” definitions as described in the next two
subsections.
The format of both the Connector:Splitter and Connector:Mixer statements is similar. Both
begin with an identifying name followed by the branch name of the “single side” of the component.
In the case of the splitter, this is the inlet since the inlet stream is broken into several outlet streams.
In the case of the mixer, this is the outlet since several streams are mixed together to form a single
outlet. The remaining list of up to 50 names is simply the branch names of the outlet legs in the
case of the splitter and inlet legs in the case of the mixer. No control logic is assume in these
components—a determination of how much air to split in which direction using the splitter must be
defined by other components.

1.20.6 Connector:Splitter
A Connector:Splitter is used to take a single fluid stream or branch and split it into more than one
outlet branches. This input object is used purely to connect the inlet and outlet branches.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 767

1.20.6.1 Inputs

1.20.6.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Splitter.

1.20.6.1.2 Field: Inlet Branch Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Splitter Inlet Branch.

1.20.6.1.3 Field: Outlet Branch <x> Name

This alpha field contains the identifying names for the Splitter Outlet Branches and you enter as
many outlet branches as needed.

1.20.7 Connector:Mixer
A Connector:Mixer is used to combine or mix several inlet branches into a single outlet branch. This
input object is used purely to connect the inlet branches with the outlet branch.

1.20.7.1 Inputs

1.20.7.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Mixer.

1.20.7.1.2 Field: Outlet Branch Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Mixer Outlet Branch.

1.20.7.1.3 Field: Inlet Branch <x> Name

This alpha field contains the identifying names for the Mixer Inlet Branches and you enter as many
inlet branch names as needed..
An example of these statements in an IDF is:

Connector:Splitter ,
CW Loop Splitter ,
CW Pump Branch ,
Little Chiller Branch ,
Big Chiller Branch ,
Purchased Cooling Branch ,
Supply Bypass Branch;
Connector:Mixer ,
CW Loop Mixer ,
Cooling Supply Outlet ,
Little Chiller Branch ,
Big Chiller Branch ,
Purchased Cooling Branch ,
Supply Bypass Branch;
768 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.8 Pipe:Adiabatic
In reality, every component is connected to its closest neighbors via a pipe or a duct. At the current
time, such detail is not needed in EnergyPlus. Thus, the Pipe:Adiabatic component is currently
used more as a connection device (for branches that really do not have any components associated
with them) or as a bypass than anything else. As such, its input is very simple and its algorithm is
equally simple. The current algorithm for a pipe is simply to pass the inlet conditions to the outlet
of the pipe component.

1.20.8.1 Inputs

1.20.8.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.

1.20.8.1.2 Field: Inlet Node Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe inlet node.

1.20.8.1.3 Field: Outlet Node Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe outlet node.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Pipe:Adiabatic ,
Demand Side Inlet Pipe ,
CW Demand Inlet Node ,
CW Demand Entrance Pipe Outlet Node;

1.20.8.2 Outputs

There are no outputs directly related to Pipes.

1.20.9 Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam
To connect the various components in a steam system regardless of it being the condensate or
the steam side of the loop steam pipe needs to be used. In reality, every component is connected
to its closest neighbors via a pipe or a duct. At the current time, such detail is not needed in
EnergyPlus. Thus, the Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam component is currently used more as a connection
device (for branches that really do not have any components associated with them). As such, its
input is very simple and its algorithm is equally simple. The current algorithm for a pipe is simply
to pass the inlet conditions to the outlet of the pipe component.

1.20.9.1 Inputs

1.20.9.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the steam pipe.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 769

1.20.9.1.2 Field: Inlet Node Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the steam pipe inlet node.

1.20.9.1.3 Field: Outlet Node Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the steampipe outlet node.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Pipe:Adiabatic:Steam ,
Steam Demand 1 Steam Inlet Pipe , !- PipeName
Steam Demand 1 Steam Demand Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Steam Demand 1 Steam Demand Entrance Pipe Outlet Node; !- Outlet Node Name

1.20.9.2 Outputs

There are no outputs directly related to Steam Pipes.

1.20.10 Pipe:Indoor
This object specifies inputs which are used to simulate the heat transfer from a plant loop pipe
placed in a zone or when a user schedule is used to specify an environment.
The data definition for object is shown below.

1.20.10.1 Inputs

1.20.10.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.

1.20.10.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This alpha field references a ‘wall’ construction object that gives a layer-by-layer description of
the pipe wall and its insulation. The construction object follows standard conventions, describing
material properties for each layer beginning with the outermost insulation layer and ending with the
pipe wall layer.

1.20.10.1.3 Field: Fluid Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the pipe fluid inlet node.

1.20.10.1.4 Field: Fluid Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the pipe fluid outlet node.

1.20.10.1.5 Field: Environment Type

Environment type is the environment in which the pipe is placed. It can be either Zone or Schedule.
If specified as Zone, a zone name must be specified in the next field. If specified as Schedule, the
Ambient Temperature Zone can be left blank, while a schedule must be specified for the temperature
and air velocity.
770 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.10.1.6 Field: Ambient Temperature Zone Name

If Zone is specified as the environment type, this field is used to specify the name of the zone in
which the pipe is located. The zone temperature is used to calculate the heat transfer rate from
the pipe.

1.20.10.1.7 Field: Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

If Schedule is specified as the environment type, this field is used to specify the name of the tem-
perature schedule that gives the ambient air temperature surrounding the pipe. This temperature
is used as the outside boundary condition to calculate heat transfer from the pipe.

1.20.10.1.8 Field: Ambient Air Velocity Schedule Name

If Schedule is specified as the environment type, this field is used to specify the name of the velocity
schedule that gives the air velocity near the pipe. This velocity is used to calculate the convection
heat transfer coefficient used in the pipe heat transfer calculation.

1.20.10.1.9 Field: Pipe Inside Diameter

This field is used to enter the inside diameter of the pipe in units of m. Pipe inside diameter must
be a positive number.

1.20.10.1.10 Field: Pipe Length

This field is used to enter the length of the pipe in units of m. Pipe length must be a positive
number.
An example of this object in an IDF is:

Pipe:Indoor ,
Pipe Heat Transfer Towers , !- name of outside panel heat exchanger
Insulated Pipe , !- Construction name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
HTPipe Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
Water , !- Fluid name
Zone , !- field Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node name
0.05, !- Pipe Inside Diameter (thickness in construction data)
100.0; !- pipe length

1.20.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average, Pipe Ambient Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,SUM, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,SUM, Pipe Ambient Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 771

1.20.10.2.1 Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The output provides the total amount of heat loss/gain in the fluid from pipe inlet to outlet.

1.20.10.2.2 Pipe Ambient Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The output provides the amount of heat loss/gain from pipe wall to the environment.

1.20.10.2.3 Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]

Total energy fluid has lost/gained between pipe inlet and outlet. It is metered on EnergyTransfer
with an end use of Pipes.

1.20.10.2.4 Pipe Ambient Heat Transfer Energy [J]

Total energy lost from the external pipe surface.

1.20.10.2.5 Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Mass flow rate of the fluid in the pipe.

1.20.10.2.6 Pipe Inlet Temperature [C]

1.20.10.2.7 Pipe Outlet Temperature [C]

Temperature of fluid at entering and exiting of pipe.

1.20.10.2.8 Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

Fluid volumetric flow rate, (mass flow rate / density)

1.20.11 Pipe:Outdoor
This object specifies inputs which are used to simulate the heat transfer from a plant loop pipe
placed in an outdoor environment.

1.20.11.1 Inputs

1.20.11.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.

1.20.11.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This alpha field references a ‘wall’ construction object that gives a layer-by-layer description of
the pipe wall and its insulation. The construction object follows standard conventions, describing
material properties for each layer beginning with the outermost insulation layer and ending with the
pipe wall layer.
772 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.11.1.3 Field: Fluid Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the pipe fluid inlet node.

1.20.11.1.4 Field: Fluid Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the pipe fluid outlet node.

1.20.11.1.5 Field: Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node Name

Ambient temperature outdoor air node is a node representing outdoor air with which pipe transfers
heat. The node should be included in an outdoor air node list.

1.20.11.1.6 Field: Pipe Inside Diameter

This field is used to enter the inside diameter of the pipe in units of m. Pipe inside diameter must
be a positive quantity.

1.20.11.1.7 Field: Pipe Length

This field is used to enter the length of the pipe in units of m. Pipe length must be a positive quan-
tity.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Pipe:Outdoor ,
Pipe Heat Transfer Towers , !- name of outside panel heat exchanger
Insulated Pipe , !- Construction name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Inlet Node Name
HTPipe Outlet Node , !- Comp1 Outlet Node Name
Water , !- Fluid name
PipeHeatTransfer Inlet Node , !- field Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node name
0.05, !- Pipe Inside Diameter (thickness given in construction data)
100.0; !- pipe length

1.20.11.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– HVAC,SUM, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Inlet Temperature [T]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Outlet Temperature [T]
– HVAC,Average, Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.20.11.2.1 Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The output provides the total amount of heat loss/gain in the fluid from pipe inlet to outlet.

1.20.11.2.2 Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]

Total energy fluid has lost/gained between pipe inlet and outlet. It is metered on EnergyTransfer
with an end use of Pipes.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 773

1.20.11.2.3 Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Mass flow rate of the fluid in the pipe.

1.20.11.2.4 Pipe Inlet Temperature [C]

1.20.11.2.5 Pipe Outlet Temperature [C]

Temperature of fluid at entering and exiting of pipe.

1.20.11.2.6 Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

Fluid volumetric flow rate, (mass flow rate / density)

1.20.12 Pipe:Underground
This object specifies inputs which are used to simulate the heat transfer from a plant loop pipe
placed underground.

1.20.12.1 Inputs

1.20.12.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe.

1.20.12.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This alpha field references a basic construction object that gives a layer-by-layer description of the
pipe wall and insulation. The construction object follows standard conventions, describing material
properties for each layer beginning with the outermost layer, the insulation, if it exists, and ending
with the pipe wall layer. The construction object may have either one or two layers. If only one,
then the material must be the pipe wall. If two, then insulation is utilized.

1.20.12.1.3 Field: Fluid Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the pipe fluid inlet node.

1.20.12.1.4 Field: Fluid Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the pipe fluid outlet node.

1.20.12.1.5 Field: Sun Exposure

This alpha field allows the user to specify one of two options: NoSun or SunExposed. For SunEx-
posed, the simulation includes diffuse and beam solar effects on the ground surface. For NoSun, no
solar effects are included.

1.20.12.1.6 Field: Pipe Inside Diameter

This field is used to enter the inside diameter of the pipe in units of m. Pipe inside diameter must
be a positive quantity.
774 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.12.1.7 Field: Pipe Length

This field is used to enter the length of the pipe in units of {m}. Pipe length must be a positive
quantity.

1.20.12.1.8 Field: Soil Material Name

This references a Material object that contains the soil properties and thickness. Note that when
defining the soil layer, the thickness should be the thickness of soil between the pipe wall and the
ground surface.

1.20.12.1.9 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

This is the type of undisturbed ground temperature object that is used to determine the ground
temperature.

1.20.12.1.10 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

This is the name of the undisturbed ground temperature object that is used to determine the ground
temperature.
An example of this object in an IDF is:

Pipe:Underground ,
Pipe Heat Transfer Towers , !- Name of Pipe
Insulated Buried Pipe , !- Construction Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
HTPipe Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
Water , !- Fluid Name
SunExposed , !- Sun Exposure
0.05, !- Pipe Inside Diameter
20.0, !- Pipe Length
Buried Pipe Soil , !- Soil Material
Site:GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature
Object
KATemps; !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

Construction ,
Insulated Buried Pipe , !- Name
Buried Pipe Insulation , !- Layer #1
Buried Pipe Steel; !- Layer #2

Material ,
Buried Pipe Soil , !- Name
Smooth , !- Roughness
1.5, !- Thickness {m}
0.36, !- Conductivity {W/m-K}
2000.0 , !- Density {kg/m3}
1200.0 , !- Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
0.9, !- Thermal Absorptance
0.5, !- Solar Absorptance
0.5; !- Visible Absorptance

1.20.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC, Average, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– HVAC, SUM, Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 775

– HVAC, Average, Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC, Average, Pipe Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Outlet Temperature [C]

1.20.12.2.1 Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The output provides the total amount of heat loss/gain in the fluid from pipe inlet to outlet.

1.20.12.2.2 Pipe Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]

Total energy fluid has lost/gained between pipe inlet and outlet. It is metered on
EnergyTransfer with an end use of Pipes.

1.20.12.2.3 Pipe Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Mass flow rate of the fluid in the pipe.

1.20.12.2.4 Pipe Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

Fluid volumetric flow rate, (mass flow rate / density)

1.20.12.2.5 Pipe Inlet Temperature [C]

1.20.12.2.6 Pipe Outlet Temperature [C]

Temperature of fluid at entrance and exit of pipe.

1.20.13 PipingSystem:Underground Class Objects

Objects in this class are used to simulate the heat transfer processes of a piping system placed
underground, which may or may not be in contact with a number of zone surfaces. There are three
related objects, all of which are prefixed with PipingSystem:Underground :

– PipingSystem:Underground:Domain
– PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit
– PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment

1.20.14 PipingSystem:Underground:Domain
This section documents the domain object, which is used to specify information for the overall ground
domain, including thermal properties, mesh parameters, and surface interaction.

1.20.14.1 Inputs

1.20.14.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the ground domain.
776 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.14.1.2 Field: XMax, YMax, ZMax

These numeric fields are used to specify the overall domain size, in each of the three Cartesian
dimensions. The domain will be meshed from {x, y, z} = {0, 0, 0} to {Xmax, Ymax, Zmax}.
Note that for this object, the x-z plane lies parallel to the ground surface, such that the y-dimension
can be thought of as representing the burial depth. This is in contrast to the way building surface
coordinates are defined with the x-y plane lying parallel to the ground. Also note that any pipe
segments that end up being used in a ground domain will be placed axially in the z-dimension. Thus,
pipe flow will always be in either the positive z or negative z direction.

1.20.14.1.3 Field: X-Direction Mesh Density Parameter

This numeric integer field represents the number of cells to be placed between any two “domain par-
titions” during mesh development. A domain partition may be thought of as a basement wall/floor,
or a pipe. Once these components are laid out in the domain, this field number of cells are placed
between the partitions. Further information on this is found in the engineering reference manual.

1.20.14.1.4 Field: X-Direction Mesh Type

This alpha field represents the type of mesh to create when placing cells between “domain parti-
tions.” Two options are available: “uniform” and “symmetricgeometric.” For uniform, the cells are
placed in the region with all cells having equal size. For symmetric-geometric, the cells are com-
pressed toward the partitions so that there are more cells on either side of the mesh region. This
can help focus computational intensity on the boundary areas where it is likely more desired. For
symmetric-geometric mesh distribution, the mesh density parameter should be an even number to
provide the symmetric condition.

1.20.14.1.5 Field: X-Direction Geometric Coefficient

This numeric field represents the compression of cell distribution if the x-direction mesh type is set
to “symmetricgeometric.” If the mesh type is uniform, this field is not interpreted. For symmetric
geometric, a value in this field equal to 1 would result in a uniform distribution, while a value of 2
would provide a highly skewed distribution.

1.20.14.1.6 Field: Y-Direction Mesh Density Parameter

See Field: X-Direction Mesh Density Parameter.

1.20.14.1.7 Field: Y-Direction Mesh Type

See Field: X-Direction Mesh Type.

1.20.14.1.8 Field: Y-Direction Geometric Coefficient

See Field: X-Direction Geometric Coefficient.

1.20.14.1.9 Field: Z-Direction Mesh Density Parameter

See Field: X-Direction Mesh Density Parameter.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 777

1.20.14.1.10 Field: Z-Direction Mesh Type

See Field: X-Direction Mesh Type.

1.20.14.1.11 Field: Z-Direction Geometric Coefficient

See Field: X-Direction Geometric Coefficient.

1.20.14.1.12 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.

1.20.14.1.13 Field: Soil Density

The bulk density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.20.14.1.14 Field: Soil Specific Heat

The specific heat of dry soil, in J/kg-K. If moisture is defined in this object, moisture and freezing
effects are accounted for by varying the specific heat value.

1.20.14.1.15 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction

A nominal value of soil moisture content to be used when evaluating soil thermal properties.

1.20.14.1.16 Field: Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation

A nominal value of soil moisture content when the soil is saturated, this is used in evaluating thermal
properties of freezing soil

1.20.14.1.17 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The type of undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for the
farfield boundary conditions.

1.20.14.1.18 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The name of the undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for
the farfield boundary conditions.

1.20.14.1.19 Field: This Domain Includes Basement Surface Interaction

A yes/no field stating whether zone surfaces should be coupled to this domain.

1.20.14.1.20 Field: Width of Basement Floor in Ground Domain

If this domain does include basement interaction, this represents the width of the domain cutaway
to include the basement. In essence, this is the width of basement floor to include in the ground
simulation. This width should include the basement wall thickness.
778 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.14.1.21 Field: Width of Basement Floor in Ground Domain

If this domain does include basement interaction, this represents the depth of the domain cutaway to
include the basement. In essence, this is the burial depth of the basement to include in the ground
simulation. This depth should include the basement floor thickness.

1.20.14.1.22 Field: Shift Pipe X Coordinates By Basement Width

If this domain does include basement interaction, this flag specifies whether the pipe segment X-
values should then be shifted by the basement width. In essence, this specifies the reference point
for pipe segment x-values: if NO then the reference is domain x = 0, if YES then the reference is
the basement width point.

1.20.14.1.23 Field: Name of Basement Wall Boundary Condition Model

The name of an OtherSideConditions model defined in the input file and referenced by the surfaces
which should be included as “wall surfaces” for the basement interaction part of the ground heat
transfer model.

1.20.14.1.24 Field: Name of Basement Wall Boundary Condition Model

The name of an OtherSideConditions model defined in the input file and referenced by the surfaces
which should be included as “floor surfaces” for the basement interaction part of the ground heat
transfer model.

1.20.14.1.25 Field: Convergence Criterion for the Outer Cartesian Domain Iter-
ation Loop
The maximum temperature deviation within any cell between one iteration and another to decide
that the Cartesian domain has converged to within tolerance. A smaller value will improve accuracy
and computation time. A smaller value should be accompanied by a higher number of iterations if
maximum accuracy is desired.

1.20.14.1.26 Field: Maximum Iterations in the Outer Cartesian Domain Itera-

tion Loop
The maximum number of iterations to make when performing temperature updates of the Carte-
sian coordinate system. The actual number of iterations made will of course depend on transient
conditions and convergence tolerance.

1.20.14.1.27 Field: Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter

Numeric field specifies the ground cover effects used in the evapotranspiration model at the ground
surface heat balance. The values range from 0 (solid, nonpermeable ground surface) to 1.5 (wild
growth).

1.20.14.1.28 Field: Number of Pipe Circuits Entered for this Domain

The number of pipe circuit objects which will be defined in the following fields.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 779

1.20.14.1.29 Field: Pipe Circuit <#>

A PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit to be included in this domain. This indicates that the
pipe circuit and all of the underlying pipe segments will be included during mesh development and
heat transfer calculations within this domain. This object is extensible, so any number of pipe
circuits can be added, assuming all underlying pipe segments do not cause any conflicts for the mesh
development engine (overlapping pipes, etc.).

1.20.15 PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit
This section documents the pipe circuit object, which is used to specify information for the plant
loop topology, such as inlet and outlet connections. This object also groups together pipe segments
to define flow paths within a given pipe circuit.

1.20.15.1 Inputs

1.20.15.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe circuit.

1.20.15.1.2 Field: Pipe Thermal Conductivity

The thermal conductivity of the pipe, in W/m-K.

1.20.15.1.3 Field: Pipe Density

The bulk density of the pipe, in kg/m3.

1.20.15.1.4 Field: Pipe Specific Heat

The specific heat of the pipe, in J/kg-K.

1.20.15.1.5 Field: Pipe Inner Diameter

The inner diameter of the pipe, in m.

1.20.15.1.6 Field: Pipe Outer Diameter

The outer diameter of the pipe, in m.

1.20.15.1.7 Field: Design Flow Rate

The “design” flow in this pipe circuit, in m3/s. This is the flow which this component will request
during the simulation. Of course, other components and overall plant management will decide the
flow actually given to this component.

1.20.15.1.8 Field: Circuit Inlet Node Name

The inlet node name for this circuit, which is used when placing this circuit on a branch on a plant
or condenser loop.
780 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.15.1.9 Field: Circuit Outlet Node Name

The outlet node name for this circuit, which is used when placing this circuit on a branch on a plant
or condenser loop.

1.20.15.1.10 Field: Convergence Criterion for the Inner Radial Iteration Loop
The maximum temperature deviation within any cell between one iteration and another to decide
that the radial domain has converged to within tolerance. A smaller value will improve accuracy
and computation time. A smaller value should be accompanied by a higher number of iterations if
maximum accuracy is desired.

1.20.15.1.11 Field: Maximum Iterations in the Inner Radial Iteration Loop

The maximum number of iterations to make when performing temperature updates of the radial co-
ordinate system. The actual number of iterations made will of course depend on transient conditions
and convergence tolerance.

1.20.15.1.12 Field: Number of Soil Nodes in the Inner Radial Near Pipe Mesh
Region
The number of soil nodes to discretize pipe cells. More information on mesh development is
provided in the engineering reference manual.

1.20.15.1.13 Field: Radial Thickness of Inner Radial Near Pipe Mesh Region
The radial distance used to discretize pipe cells. More information on mesh development is provided
in the engineering reference manual.

1.20.15.1.14 Field: Number of Pipe Segments Entered for this Pipe Circuit
The number of pipe segment objects which will be defined in the following fields.

1.20.15.1.15 Field: Pipe Segment <#>

A PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment to be included in this pipe circuit. The circuit is set
up so that flow passes through the N segments in the order they are entered here. This object is
extensible, so additional fields of this type can be added to the end of this object.

1.20.16 PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment
This section documents the pipe segment object, which is used to specify information for a single
pipe segment placed at some x, y coordinate in the ground. The flow direction is also defined in
this object to allow for careful description of varying flow paths. This can be useful for accounting
for short circuiting effects if two pipes are placed in counterflow vs. parallel flow.

1.20.16.1 Inputs

1.20.16.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the pipe segment.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 781

1.20.16.1.2 Field: X Position

This numeric field represents the x-direction placement of the pipe. If no basement is included in
the simulation, this is measured from x = 0. If a basement is included, and the domain object
specifies that pipes should be shifted, this is measured from the basement wall.

1.20.16.1.3 Field: Y Position

This numeric field represents the burial depth of the pipe, measured from the ground surface. This
will always be a positive number.

1.20.16.1.4 Field: Flow Direction

This alpha field is used to define the flow direction within this pipe segment. The choices are
“increasing” or “decreasing.” These can be chosen carefully to encapsulate specific short-circuiting
effects due to varying flow configurations (circuiting).
An example of this object in an IDF is offered here for a foundation heat exchanger

PipingSystem:Underground:Domain ,
My Piping System , !- Name
12, !- Xmax
4.5, !- Ymax
36.84 , !- Zmax
2, !- XMeshCount
Uniform , !- XMeshType
, !- XGeometricCoeff
2, !- YMeshCount
Uniform , !- YMeshType
, !- YGeometricCoeff
6, !- ZMeshCount
Uniform , !- ZMeshType
, !- ZGeometricCoeff
1.08, !- GroundThermalConductivity
962, !- GroundDensity
2576, !- GroundSpecificHeat
30, !- MoistureContent
50, !- MoistureContentAtSaturation
Site:GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature
Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
Yes , !- DomainHasBasement
6, !- BasementWidthInDomain
2.5, !- BasementDepthInDomain
Yes , !- ShiftPipeXValuesByBasementWidth
BasementWallOSCM , !- BasementWallBoundaryConditionModel
BasementFloorOSCM , !- BasementFloorBoundaryConditionModel
0.005 , !- CartesianIterationConvergenceCriterion
100, !- CartesianMaxIterations
0.408 , !- EvapotranspirationGroundCoverParameter
1, !- NumPipeCircuits
My Pipe Circuit; !- PipeCircuit

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeCircuit ,
My Pipe Circuit , !- Name
0.3895 , !- PipeThermalConductivity
641, !- PipeDensity
2405, !- PipeSpecificHeat
0.016 , !- PipeInnerDiameter
0.02667 , !- PipeOuterDiameter
0.004 , !- DesignFlowRate
Piping System Inlet Node , !- InletNode
Piping System Outlet Node , !- OutletNode
0.001 , !- RadialIterationConvergenceCriterion
782 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

100, !- RadialMaxIterations
2, !- RadialMeshCount
0.03, !- RadialMeshThickness
6, !- NumSegments
Segment 1, !- Segment1
Segment 2, !- Segment2
Segment 3, !- Segment3
Segment 4, !- Segment4
Segment 5, !- Segment5
Segment 6; !- Segment6

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 1, !- Name
0.67, !- X
2.20, !- Burial Depth
IncreasingZ; !- Flow Direction

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 2, !- Name
0.95, !- X
2.20, !- Burial Depth
IncreasingZ; !- Flow Direction

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 3, !- Name
1.23, !- X
2.20, !- Burial Depth
IncreasingZ; !- Flow Direction

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 4, !- Name
1.40, !- X
1.94, !- Burial Depth
DecreasingZ; !- Flow Direction

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 5, !- Name
1.40, !- X
1.66, !- Burial Depth
DecreasingZ; !- Flow Direction

PipingSystem:Underground:PipeSegment ,
Segment 6, !- Name
1.40, !- X
1.39, !- Burial Depth
DecreasingZ; !- Flow Direction

1.20.16.2 Outputs

– HVAC, Average, Pipe Circuit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

– HVAC, Average, Pipe Circuit Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Circuit Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Segment Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Segment Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Circuit Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Average, Pipe Segment Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.20.16.2.1 Pipe Circuit Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The output provides the mass flow rate currently being sent through the pipe circuit.
1.20. GROUP – NODE-BRANCH MANAGEMENT 783

1.20.16.2.2 Pipe Circuit Inlet Temperature [C]

1.20.16.2.3 Pipe Circuit Outlet Temperature [C]

Temperature of fluid at the inlet and outlet of a given pipe circuit.

1.20.16.2.4 Pipe Segment Inlet Temperature [C]

1.20.16.2.5 Pipe Segment Outlet Temperature [C]

Temperature of fluid at the inlet and outlet of a given pipe segment.

1.20.16.2.6 Pipe Circuit Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the fluid heat gain or loss in the pipe circuit, in Watts.

1.20.16.2.7 Pipe Segment Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the fluid heat gain or loss in the pipe segment, in Watts.

1.20.17 Duct
The Duct object is a component for air systems that is a direct analogue for Pipe:Adiabatic in the
fluid loops. It is used when it is necessary (due to the HVAC system configuration) to have a branch
that has no functional components. This case most often arises for a bypass branch. Since every
branch must have at least one component, the Duct component is used for this situation. The duct
is an adiabatic, pass-through component; all of its inlet conditions are passed through unchanged to
its outlet.

1.20.17.1 Inputs

1.20.17.1.1 Field: Name

This is the unique name for this component. Any reference to this component (in a BranchList, for
instance) will refer to it by this name.

1.20.17.1.2 Field: Inlet Node Name

The name of the component’s air inlet node.

1.20.17.1.3 Field: Outlet Node Name

The name of the component’s air outlet node.
Below is an example input for Duct.

DUCT ,
VAV Sys 1 Bypass Duct , !- Name
VAV Sys 1 Bypass Duct Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node Name
VAV Sys 1 Bypass Duct Outlet Node;!- Outlet Node Name
784 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.20.17.2 Outputs

There are no outputs for Duct.

1.21 Group – Plant-Condenser Loops

1.21.1 PlantLoop
The main elements of the PlantLoop syntax are described in further detail below. A map of how
the input for this portion of the HVAC input fits together is provided in the following diagram.

Figure 1.89: Plant Loop Input Syntax Map

1.21.1.1 Inputs

1.21.1.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the plant loop.

1.21.1.1.2 Field: Fluid Type

This alpha field must be a keyword selected from the list of available fluids for an EnergyPlus plant
loop. Either Water, Steam or UserDefinedFluidType may be used. If the UserDefinedFlu-
idType keyword is used, the following input field i.e. User Defined Fluid Type must have a value
(namely the name of a FluidProperties:GlycolConcentration object).
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 785

1.21.1.1.3 Field: User Defined Fluid Type

This alpha field must be specified when the previous field is set to UserDefinedFluidType oth-
erwise it could be left blank. Water, EthyleneGlycol, PropyleneGlycol and Steam are all
“built-in” fluids for EnergyPlus (that is, all of the appropriate properties are contained within the
program). If the fluid specified here is a mixture of water and ethylene or propylene glycol, then only
FluidProperties:GlycolConcentration objects need to be specified and the name of the appropriate
one is used here. For another water/glycol mixture, a complete set of fluid property data (FluidProp-
erties:Name and FluidProperties:Temperature objects plus multiple FluidProperties:Concentration
objects for specific heat, density, etc.) must be specified (Ref dataset: GlycolPropertiesRefData.idf).

1.21.1.1.4 Field: Plant Equipment Operation Scheme Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the plant operation scheme. This field ties to the
PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes input structure, which must also be defined.

1.21.1.1.5 Field: Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name

This alpha field is used to identify the node which the Loop Manager will access the temperature
setpoint that it will try to maintain. This is typically the Plant Loop Supply Side Outlet Node so
that it will not interfere with component temperature setpoints. An associated temperature setpoint
manager will need to be defined.

1.21.1.1.6 Field: Maximum Loop Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum allowable temperature in Celsius for this loop.

1.21.1.1.7 Field: Minimum Loop Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum allowable temperature in Celsius for this loop.

1.21.1.1.8 Field: Maximum Loop Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the maximum loop flow rate in cubic meters per second. This parameter
is also used when the user chooses to autocalculate the loop volume. See Volume of the Plant Loop
below and the Engineering Manual for more details. This field is autosizable.

1.21.1.1.9 Field: Minimum Loop Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the minimum loop flow rate in cubic meters per second.

1.21.1.1.10 Field: Plant Loop Volume

Volume of the plant loop in m3 . This numeric field contains the loop volume for the entire loop,
i.e. both the demand side and the supply side. This is used for the loop capacitance calculation. Loop
volume (m3 ) could be calculated from pipe size data but this is not usually known. If zero volume
is specified the loop has no fluid heat capacity. If a very large capacitance is specified unrealistic
time delay may result and there may be poor response to changes in loop setpoint temperature. The
autocalculate option sets the loop volume to the product of the Maximum Loop Flow Rate and
the user input for Loop Circulation Time which defaults to 2 minutes (see below). This calculation
is described in the Engineering Reference manual.
786 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.21.1.1.11 Field: Plant Side Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Plant Side Inlet Node. This
node is the inlet to the supply side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.12 Field: Plant Side Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Plant Side Outlet Node. This
node is the outlet of the supply side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.13 Field: Plant Side Branch List Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Plant Side Branch List. The list
referenced here should list all the branches on the supply side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.14 Field: Plant Side Connector List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Plant Side Connector List. The list
referenced here should list the splitter and mixer on the supply side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.15 Field: Demand Side Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Inlet Node. This
node is the inlet to the demand side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.16 Field: Demand Side Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Outlet Node. This
node is the outlet of the demand side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.17 Field: Demand Side Branch List Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Branch List. The
list referenced here should list all the branches on the demand side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.18 Field: Demand Side Connector List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Connector List. The list
referenced here should list the splitter and mixer on the demand side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.19 Field: Load Distribution Scheme

The Load Distribution Scheme selects the algorithm used to sequence equipment operation in order
to meet the plant loop demand. Currently, five schemes are functional:

– Optimal operates each piece of equipment at its optimal part load ratio. Any remaining loop
demand is distributed evenly to all of the components.
– SequentialLoad loads each piece of equipment sequentially in the order specified in the
PlantEquipmentList to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last required piece
of equipment between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop
demand.
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 787

– UniformLoad evenly distributes the loop demand among all available components on the
equipment list for a given load range. If some components do not have the capacity to meet
the uniformly distributed load, the remaining load is distributed sequentially to the other
available components.
– SequentialUniformPLR loads all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList to a uniform part
load ratio (PLR). Components are loaded sequentially based on the order specified in the
PlantEquipmentList until each component is fully loaded, at which point the next subsequent
component is added and the load is distributed uniformly based on PLR between the compo-
nents.
– UniformPLR will load all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList to a uniform part load ratio
(PLR). No equipment will be loaded below its minimum PLR. If the total load is less than
the sum of all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList operating at their respective minimum
PLRs, then the last item in the equipment list is dropped and the load is distributed based on
a uniform PLR for the remaining plant equipment.

Note: For all schemes, if the load for any individual component is less than the component load
at the minimum PLR, the individual component model will false load or reduce duty cycle while
operating at the minimum part load ratio until the load is met.

1.21.1.1.20 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the System Availability Manager List.

1.21.1.1.21 Field: Plant Loop Demand Calculation Scheme There are two choices
for plant loop demand calculations schemes in EnergyPlus: SingleSetpoint and DualSetpointDead-
band.
SingleSetpoint - For the SingleSetpoint scheme, the plant loop is controlled to a single temperature
setpoint. This requires a setpoint manager with Control Variable = Temperature to place a setpoint
on the Loop Temperature Setpoint Node. The setpoint will be stored in the Node%TempSetpoint
variable which may be reported using Output:Variable ”System Node Setpoint Temperature.”
Examples of applicable setpoint managers include: SetpointManager:Scheduled, SetpointMan-
ager:OutdoorAirReset, SetpointManager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature, etc. SingleSetpoint is the
default.
DualSetpoint - For the DualSetpoint scheme, the plant loop is controlled to stay between a
pair of high and low temperature setpoints. This requires one or two setpoint managers to
place two setpoints on the Loop Temperature Setpoint Node. The setpoints will be stored in
the Node%TempSetPointHi and Node%TempSetPointLo variables which may be reported using
Output:Variable ”System Node Setpoint High Temperature” and ”System Node Setpoint Low
Temperature.” There is special setpoint manager, SetpointManager:Scheduled:DualSetpoint, which
will place both the high and low setpoints with Control Variable = Temperature. Otherwise, two set-
point managers are required, one with Control Variable = MaximumTemperature and another with
Control Variable = MinimumTemperature. The two setpoint managers may be the same kind or
different, but care should be taken so that the MinimumTemperature is not set higher than the Max-
imumTemperature. Examples of applicable setpoint managers include: SetpointManager:Scheduled,
SetpointManager:OutdoorAirReset, SetpointManager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature, etc. Note
that DualSetpoint is used only for plant loops with both heating and cooling supply equipment,
such as a water loop heat pump system. When the loop temperature rises above the MaximumTem-
perature setpoint, then the loop will request cooling, and when the loop temperature is below the
788 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

MinimumTemperature setpoint it will request heating. DualSetpoint cannot be used to control a

single-mode loop, such as a hot water heating loop between operating between high and low boiler
setpoints.
The plant loop demand calculation scheme determines the amount of heating or cooling necessary to
bring the temperature of the Plant Loop to its setpoint(s). When this value is determined then the
load distribution scheme explained in the previous section takes this value and distributes the load to
the appropriate equipment. The demand calculation scheme determines how the load is calculated.
See more information in the Engineering Document.

1.21.1.1.22 Field: Common Pipe Simulation

This field specifies a primary-secondary plant loop simulation. When a common pipe option is
specified, the plant side of the loop is the primary loop and the demand side of the loop is the
secondary loop, and a pump object must be placed on the demand side inlet branch. The three
options are “None”, “CommonPipe” and “TwoWayCommonPipe”. “None” means that there
is no secondary loop and the plant loop is modeled as a single primary loop. “CommonPipe”
means that the common pipe interface does not attempt any temperature control, it only satisfies
secondary (demand side) flow requests. “TwoWayCommonPipe” allows control of the secondary
(demand side) inlet temperature or the primary (plant side) inlet temperature by placing a setpoint
on the corresponding node. If this field is left blank, it will default to ”None”. If the field is set to
“None” and the program finds a pump on the demand side it will result in a fatal error. If the
field is set to “CommonPipe” or “TwoWayCommonPipe” and the program does not find a pump
on the demand side it will result in a fatal error. The common pipe simulation is currently limited
to simulating loop pumps, i.e. each pump should be placed on the inlet branch of the plant side or
demand side of the loop.

1.21.1.1.23 Field: Pressure Simulation Type

This field lets user to choose if this plant loop will be involved in a pressure drop calculation. This
requires that at least one branch on the loop have pressure drop data. If not, an error will be thrown
due to the input mismatch. Currently there are two pressure drop simulation types: “PumpPower-
Correction” and “LoopFlowCorrection”. In both of these methods, branch pressure drop data is used
to calculate a dynamic loop pressure drop and is used to update pumping power accordingly. The
flow correction method allows the user to enter information regarding the pressure curve of a con-
stant speed pump so that the simulation can dynamically resolve the pressure vs. flow relationship in
the plant loop. This is limited to constant speed pumps, as the variable speed pumps are expected
to resolve as if it were controlled by a variable drive, so that they can inherently meet any pressure
and flow demand required by the loop. This is also limited to “loop pumps”, where there is a single
pump on the plant loop. Common pipe simulations and “branch pump” simulations are not com-
patible with this level of pressure simulation. See the documentation for the Pump:ConstantSpeed
in order to determine required inputs for this pressure simulation method to be performed. In
the pressure drop system, parallel flow rates are not resolved (to match the pressure drop for the
parallel system). Enhancements to this calculation are planned which will allow parallel branch
flow resolution. See the Engineering Reference document for more information on how this works.

1.21.1.1.24 Field: Loop Circulation Time

This field specifies the time it takes the fluid to circulate through the entire loop. It is only used
when Plant Loop Volume is set to autocalculate. The default is 2 minutes.
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 789

An example of this statement used in an IDF is:

PlantLoop ,
Hot Water Loop , !- Plant Loop Name
Water , !- Fluid Type
, !- User Defined Fluid Type
Hot Loop Operation , !- Plant Operation Scheme List Name
HW Loop Outlet Node , !- Loop Temperature Setpoint Schedule Name
100, !- Maximum Loop Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Loop Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Maximum Loop Volumetric Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Loop Volumetric Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- volume of the plant loop {m3}
HW Supply Inlet Node , !- Plant Side Inlet Node Name
HW Supply Outlet Node , !- Plant Side Outlet Node Name
Heating Supply Side Branches , !- Plant Side Branch List Name
Heating Supply Side Connectors , !- Plant Side Connector List Name
HW Demand Inlet Node , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Name
HW Demand Outlet Node , !- Demand Side Outlet Nodes Name
Heating Demand Side Branches , !- Demand Side Branch List Name
Heating Demand Side Connectors , !- Demand Side Connector List Name
Optimal; !- Load Distribution Scheme

In the above example input there is no system availability manager specified and the Demand
Calculation Scheme will default to SingleSetpoint using a single setpoint manager. Common pipe
simulation field in the above example will default to “NONE” since it is not specified.

1.21.1.2 Outputs

In the following output variables, “Debug” denotes variables that are used primarily by the developers
and whose names and application may be cryptic to users. .

– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Not Distributed Demand Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Unmet Demand Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Plant Solver Sub Iteration Count []
– HVAC,Sum,Plant Solver Half Loop Calls Count []
– HVAC,Average,Debug Plant Loop Bypass Fraction
– HVAC,Average,Debug Plant Last Simulated Loop Side [-]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Flow Direction Status []
– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Primary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Secondary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Primary Side Common Pipe Flow Direction []
790 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Secondary Side Common Pipe Flow Direction []

– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Primary to Secondary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Common Pipe Secondary to Primary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Plant System Cycle On Off Status []
– HVAC,Average,Plant Demand Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

1.21.1.2.1 Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the net demand required to meet the cooling setpoint of the loop. If the loop
setpoint is met for the current HVAC timestep, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal
sum of the total cooling demand from the demand side coils on the loop. It will also equal the
cooling output of all chillers (or other cooling equipment) on the loop less any pump heat added to
the fluid. For example, for a chilled water loop with one chiller and one pump serving one chilled
water coil: Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal the chiller evaporator heat transfer
less the pump heat to fluid, and it will also equal the chilled water coil total cooling output.
If the plant loop setpoint is not met, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal the sum of
the total cooling demand from the demand side coils on the loop plus the additional cooling required
to bring the loop flow to setpoint. If the loop remains off setpoint for successive timesteps, the de-
mand required to return to setpoint will repeat in each timestep until the loop reaches setpoint. For
this reason, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate should not be summed over time, because it
will overstate the demand whenever the loop is off setpoint.

1.21.1.2.2 Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the net demand required to meet the heating setpoint of the loop. If the loop
setpoint is met for the current HVAC timestep, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate will equal
sum of the total heating demand from the demand side coils on the loop. It will also equal the
heating output of all boilers (or other cooling equipment) on the loop plus any pump heat added to
the fluid. For example, for a hot water loop with one boiler and one pump serving one hot water
coil: Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate will equal the boiler heat transfer plus the pump heat
to fluid, and it will also equal the hot water coil total heating output.
If the plant loop setpoint is not met, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate will equal the sum of
the total heating demand from the demand side coils on the loop plus the additional heating required
to bring the loop flow to setpoint. If the loop remains off setpoint for successive timesteps, the de-
mand required to return to setpoint will repeat in each timestep until the loop reaches setpoint. For
this reason, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate should not be summed over time, because it
will overstate the demand whenever the loop is off setpoint.

1.21.1.2.3 Plant Supply Side Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the value of the mass flow rate at the Inlet to Plant Loop on the supply side. There is not
an associated Plant Loop outlet node flow rate since continuity must be maintained in the loop and
the outlet must be the same.
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 791

1.21.1.2.4 Plant Supply Side Inlet Temperature [C]

This is the value of the temperature at the Inlet to the plant loop on the supply side.

1.21.1.2.5 Plant Supply Side Outlet Temperature [C]

This is the value of the temperature at the outlet to the plant loop on the supply side.

1.21.1.2.6 Plant Supply Side Not Distributed Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the demand that could not be distributed to the plant equipment because of some
constraint in the plant operation scheme. This is a record of the loop operation scheme supervisory
controls after attempting to distribute the load. For example it would be non-zero in situations
where the load is larger than the upper limit of capacities set for the plant equipment controls. This
output is for before the equipment has actually been simulated whereas the separate output Plant
Supply Side Unmet Demand Rate is for after the equipment has simulated.

1.21.1.2.7 Plant Supply Side Unmet Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the demand NOT provided by the plant equipment to meet the heating or cooling
setpoint of the loop. The value is positive when the plant equipment cannot meet the setpoint, and
the value is negative when the plant equipment provides more than enough heating or cooling to
meet the setpoint. A negative value can happen when the amount of demand is smaller than the
minimum capacity of the equipment using the minimum part load ratio.

1.21.1.2.8 Plant Solver Sub Iteration Count []

This is the count of iterations that the overall plant simulation used over the period of time being
reported. This high-level output is from the plant solver used for all the plant loops and condenser
loops in the model.

1.21.1.2.9 Plant Solver Half Loop Calls Count

This is the count of calls to model individual half-loops that occurred during the overall plant
simulation over the period of time being reported. This includes all the half-loops for both plant
loops and condenser loops.

1.21.1.2.10 Plant Common Pipe Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]

This output gives the magnitude of the flow through common pipe. The value is averaged over the
reporting interval.

1.21.1.2.11 Plant Common Pipe Temperature [C]

This output gives the value of the temperature of the fluid flowing through common pipe. This value
is averaged over the reporting interval.
792 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.21.1.2.12 Plant Common Pipe Flow Direction Status []

This output gives the direction of flow in common pipe. The value is an integer and can be 0, 1 or
2. Since the output value is averaged over reporting interval, a non-integer value may be shown as
an output when the reporting interval is not detailed. An output value of 0 means that there was no
flow in common pipe. An output value of 1 means that the secondary flow is greater than primary
flow, whereas a value of 2 means that primary flow is greater than secondary flow.

1.21.1.2.13 Plant Common Pipe Primary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]

This output variable gives the mass flow in the primary side common pipe leg in a Two-Way common
pipe simulation. Value is averaged over the reporting interval.

1.21.1.2.14 Plant Common Pipe Secondary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]

This output variable gives the mass flow in the secondary side common pipe leg in a Two-Way
common pipe simulation. Value is averaged over the reporting interval.

1.21.1.2.15 Primary Side Common Pipe Flow Direction []

This output variable gives the direction of flow in a primary side common pipe leg in a Two-Way
Common Pipe Simulation. A value of zero means there was no flow in the pipe. A value of 1 means
the flow was from top to bottom in EnergyPlus loop schematic. So for primary side, a value of 1
means the flow is from Primary side inlet to Primary side outlet and a value of 2 means flow is from
Primary side outlet to Primary side inlet.

1.21.1.2.16 Secondary Side Common Pipe Flow Direction []

This output variable gives the direction of flow in a Secondary side common pipe leg in a Two-Way
Common Pipe Simulation. A value of zero means there was no flow in the pipe. A value of 1 means
the flow was from top to bottom in EnergyPlus loop schematic. So for Secondary side, a value of 1
means the flow is from Secondary side outlet to Secondary side inlet and a value of 2 means flow is
from Secondary side inlet to Secondary side outlet. Note that this is opposite to the primary side
common pipe.

1.21.1.2.17 Plant Common Pipe Primary to Secondary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]

This output variable gives the mass flow from primary to secondary side in a Two-Way common
pipe simulation. Value is averaged over the reporting interval.

1.21.1.2.18 Plant Common Pipe Secondary to Primary Mass Flow Rate [Kg/s]

This output variable gives the mass flow from secondary to primary side in a Two-Way common
pipe simulation. Value is averaged over the reporting interval.
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 793

1.21.1.2.19 Plant System Cycle On Off Status

This field is the availability status of a Plant Loop. This status flag is a result of the calculations made
by the System Availability Manager(s) listed in a System Availability Manager List. When a single
availability manager is used in a System Availability Manager List, this is also the availability status
reported by the specific availability manager (Ref. System Availability Manager Outputs). When
multiple availability managers are used in a System Availability Manager List, the loop availability
status is determine by the rules associated with Plant Loops (see rules described for Group – System
Availability Managers). The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 2.. These
integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), and CycleOn (2). Since the status output is averaged,
the output result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies
other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object)
to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.21.1.2.20 Plant Demand Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

This field allows the user to output the demand side pressure drop of a plant loop. This output is
only recognized if a valid pressure simulation is being performed. To do this, the user must specify
a pressure simulation type as an input in the PlantLoop object, and input at least one pressure drop
curve on a branch of the plant loop. This particular output is only relevant if the user puts that
curve on the demand side of the loop.

1.21.1.2.21 Plant Supply Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

This field allows the user to output the supply side pressure drop of a plant loop. This output is
only recognized if a valid pressure simulation is being performed. To do this, the user must specify
a pressure simulation type as an input in the PlantLoop object, and input at least one pressure drop
curve on a branch of the plant loop. This particular output is only relevant if the user puts that
curve on the supply side of the loop.

1.21.1.2.22 Plant Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

This output is the total pressure drop of a plant loop. This output is only recognized if a valid
pressure simulation is being performed. To do this, the user must specify a pressure simulation
type as an input in the PlantLoop object, and input at least one pressure drop curve on a branch of
the plant loop. This particular output is relevant regardless of the location of pressure drop curves:
demand side, supply side, or both.
The following advanced output variables are also available for plant loops (and condenser loops)
when advanced output variables are requested (e.g. “Output:Diagnostics, DisplayAdvancedReport-
Variable;”).

– HVAC,Average,Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Transport Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Transport Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Storage Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Storage Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Excessive Storage Time [hr]
794 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Excessive Storage Time [hrW]

– HVAC,Average,Plant Component Distributed Demand Rate [W]

1.21.1.2.23 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Temperature [C]

1.21.1.2.24 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Temperature [C]

These two outputs are the temperature of the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid where the
two half-loops interface together. The program models heat capacitance in the volume of fluid inside
the plant loop itself using two simple models for “well-stirred” tanks located at each of the half-loop
inlet and outlet pairs. These tank models also receive the heat transferred to the fluid by the work
done by pumping and resulting friction heating. One output is for the point where the fluid leaves
the supply side and enters the demand side. The other output is for the point where the fluid leaves
the demand side and enters the supply side.

1.21.1.2.25 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Transport Rate [C]

1.21.1.2.26 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Transport Rate [C]
These two outputs are the heat transfer rate to the the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid in
the two half-loops. The program models heat capacitance in the volume of fluid inside the plant
loop itself using two simple models for well-stirred tanks located at each of the half-loop inlet and
outlet pairs. These tank models also receive the heat transferred to the fluid by the work done
by pumping and resulting friction heating. One output is for the point where the fluid leaves the
supply side and enters the demand side. The other output is for the point where the fluid leaves
the demand side and enters the supply side.

1.21.1.2.27 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Storage Rate [C]

1.21.1.2.28 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Heat Storage Rate [C]
These two outputs are the heat storage rate of the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid in the
two half-loops. The program models heat capacitance in the volume of fluid inside the plant loop
itself using two simple models for well-stirred tanks located at each of the half-loop inlet and outlet
pairs. These tank models also receive the heat transferred to the fluid by the work done by pumping
and resulting friction heating. One output is for the point where the fluid leaves the supply side
and enters the demand side. The other output is for the point where the fluid leaves the demand
side and enters the supply side.

1.21.1.2.29 Plant Demand Side Lumped Capacitance Excessive Storage Time [C]

1.21.1.2.30 Plant Supply Side Lumped Capacitance Excessive Storage Time [C]

These two outputs are the excess storage time of the plant (or condenser) loop’s working fluid in the
two half-loops. The excess storage time is determined by adding the time when the heat storage rate
exceeds the heat transfer rate into the two half-loops at each time step. The program models heat
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 795

capacitance in the volume of fluid inside the plant loop itself using two simple models for well-stirred
tanks located at each of the half-loop inlet and outlet pairs. These tank models also receive the heat
transferred to the fluid by the work done by pumping and resulting friction heating. One output is
for the point where the fluid leaves the supply side and enters the demand side. The other output
is for the point where the fluid leaves the demand side and enters the supply side.

1.21.1.2.31 Plant Component Distributed Demand Rate [W]

This output is available for every component on every branch in a plant (or condenser) loop and
shows the outcome of the load dispatch performed by the operation schemes. This the load in watts
passed from the supervisor routines to the equipment component models. This provides a record
of what a particular component was asked to do by the supervisory routines. This can be useful for
diagnosing issues in operation schemes when a component or loop is failing to meet the load.

1.21.2 CondenserLoop
The condenser loop input is very similar to that for the plant loop. As of version 7, the two loops are
modeled the same way and inside the program all condenser loops are just plant loops. (In future
versions of the program, this CondenserLoop object might be deprecated and these loops will be
described using the PlantLoop object.) The main differences are the applicable components and
operation schemes. This is depicted in the following diagram.

Figure 1.90: Condenser Loop Input Syntax Map

796 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.21.2.1 Inputs

1.21.2.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the condenser loop.

1.21.2.1.2 Field: Fluid Type

This alpha field must be a keyword selected from the list of available fluids for an EnergyPlus
plant loop. Either Water or UserDefinedFluidType may be used. If the UserDefinedFluidType
keyword is used, the following input field i.e. User Defined Fluid Type must have a value (namely
the name of a FluidProperties:GlycolConcentration object).

1.21.2.1.3 Field: User Defined Fluid Type

This alpha field must be specified when the previous field is set to UserDefinedFluidType oth-
erwise it could be left blank. Water, EthyleneGlycol, and PropyleneGlycol are all “built-in”
fluids for EnergyPlus (that is, all of the appropriate properties are contained within the program).
If the fluid specified here is a mixture of water and ethylene or propylene glycol, then only Fluid-
Properties:GlycolConcentration objects need to be specified and the name of the appropriate one
is used here. For another water/glycol mixture, a complete set of fluid property data (FluidProp-
erties:Name and FluidProperties:Temperature objects plus multiple FluidProperties:Concentration
objects for specific heat, density, etc.) must be specified (Ref dataset: GlycolPropertiesRefData.idf).

1.21.2.1.4 Field: Condenser Equipment Operation Scheme Name

This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the condenser operation scheme. This field ties to
the Condenser Operation Schemes input structure, which must also be defined.

1.21.2.1.5 Field: Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name

This alpha field is used to identify the node which the Loop Manager will access the temperature
setpoint that it will try to maintain. This is typically the Condenser Loop Supply Side Outlet
Node so that it will not interfere with component temperature setpoints. An associated temperature
setpoint manager will need to be defined.

1.21.2.1.6 Field: Maximum Loop Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum allowable temperature in Celsius for this loop.

1.21.2.1.7 Field: Minimum Loop Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum allowable temperature in Celsius for this loop. This
minimum loop temperature is used by the cooling towers to make sure that the minimum is not
violated to keep the equipment safe. The minimum is also used to trigger the minimum temperature
warning and will notify the user if it gets too low.

1.21.2.1.8 Field: Maximum Loop Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the maximum loop flow rate in cubic meters per second. This field is
autosizable.
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 797

1.21.2.1.9 Field: Minimum Loop Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the minimum loop flow rate in cubic meters per second.

1.21.2.1.10 Field: Condenser Loop Volume

Volume of the condenser loop in m3 . This numeric field contains the loop volume for the entire loop,
i.e., both the demand side and the supply side. This is used for the loop capacitance calculation. Loop
volume (m3 ) could be calculated from pipe size data but this is not usually known. If zero volume
is specified the loop has no fluid heat capacity. If a very large capacitance is specified unrealistic
time delay may result and there may be poor response to changes in loop setpoint temperature. The
autocalculate option sets the loop volume to the product of the Maximum Loop Flow Rate and
the user input for Loop Circulation Time which defaults to 2 minutes (see below). This calculation
is described in the Engineering Reference manual.

1.21.2.1.11 Field: Condenser Side Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Condenser Side Inlet Node. This
node is the inlet to the supply side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.12 Field: Condenser Side Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Condenser Side Outlet Node.
This node is the outlet of the supply side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.13 Field: Condenser Side Branch List Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Condenser Side Branch List.
The list referenced here should list all the branches on the supply side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.14 Field: Condenser Side Connector List Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Condenser Side Connector
List. The list referenced here should list the splitter and mixer on the supply side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.15 Field: Demand Side Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Inlet Node. This
node is the inlet to the demand side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.16 Field: Demand Side Outlet Nodes Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Outlet Node. This
node is the outlet of the demand side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.17 Field: Condenser Demand Side Branch List Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Branch List. The
list referenced here should list all the branches on the demand side of the loop.
798 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.21.2.1.18 Field: Condenser Demand Side Connector List Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Demand Side Connector List.
The list referenced here should list the splitter and mixer on the demand side of the loop.

1.21.2.1.19 Field: Load Distribution Scheme

This alpha field contains the Load Distribution Scheme Keyword. The Load Distribution Scheme
selects the algorithm used to sequence equipment operation in order to meet the plant loop demand.
Currently, five schemes are functional. Optimal operates each piece of equipment at its optimal part
load ratio and will operate the last component between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in
order to meet the loop demand. SequentialLoad loads each piece of equipment sequentially in the
order specified in the PlantEquipmentList to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last
required piece of equipment between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the
loop demand. UniformLoad evenly distributes the loop demand among all available components
on the equipment list for a given load range. SequentialUniformPLR loads all equipment on the
PlantEquipmentList to a uniform part load ratio (PLR). Components are loaded sequentially based
on the order specified in the PlantEquipmentList until each component is fully loaded, at which
point the next subsequent component is added and the load is distributed uniformly based on PLR
between the components. UniformPLR will load all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList to a
uniform part load ratio (PLR). No equipment will be loaded below its minimum PLR. If the total
load is less than the sum of all equipment on the PlantEquipmentList operating at their respective
minimum PLRs, then the last item in the equipment list is dropped and the load is distributed based
on a uniform PLR for the remaining plant equipment.
Note: For all schemes, if the load for any individual component is less than the component load
at the minimum PLR, the individual component model will false load or reduce duty cycle while
operating at the minimum part load ratio until the load is met.

1.21.2.1.20 Field: Pressure Simulation Type

This field lets user to choose if this plant loop will be involved in a pressure drop calculation. This
requires that at least one branch on the loop have pressure drop data. If not, an error will be thrown
due to the input mismatch. Currently there are two pressure drop simulation types: “PumpPower-
Correction” and “LoopFlowCorrection”. In both of these methods, branch pressure drop data is used
to calculate a dynamic loop pressure drop and is used to update pumping power accordingly. The
flow correction method allows the user to enter information regarding the pressure curve of a con-
stant speed pump so that the simulation can dynamically resolve the pressure vs. flow relationship in
the plant loop. This is limited to constant speed pumps, as the variable speed pumps are expected
to resolve as if it were controlled by a variable drive, so that they can inherently meet any pressure
and flow demand required by the loop. This is also limited to “loop pumps”, where there is a single
pump on the plant loop. Common pipe simulations and “branch pump” simulations are not com-
patible with this level of pressure simulation. See the documentation for the Pump:ConstantSpeed
in order to determine required inputs for this pressure simulation method to be performed. In
the pressure drop system, parallel flow rates are not resolved (to match the pressure drop for the
parallel system). Enhancements to this calculation are planned which will allow parallel branch
flow resolution. See the Engineering Reference document for more information on how this works.

1.21.2.1.21 Field: Loop Circulation Time

1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 799

This field specifies the time it takes the fluid to circulate through the entire loop. It is only used
when Condenser Loop Volume is set to autocalculate. The default is 2 minutes.
An example of this statement used in an IDF is:

CondenserLoop ,
Condenser Water Loop , !- Name
Water , !- Fluid Type
, !- User Defined Fluid Type
Tower Loop Operation , !- Condenser Equipment Operation Scheme Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name
80, !- Maximum Loop Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Loop Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Maximum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
autocalculate , !- Condenser Loop Volume {m3}
Condenser Supply Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Side Branches , !- Condenser Side Branch List Name
Condenser Supply Side Connectors , !- Condenser Side Connector List Name
Condenser Demand Inlet Node , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Demand Outlet Node , !- Demand Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Demand Side Branches , !- Condenser Demand Side Branch List Name
Condenser Demand Side Connectors , !- Condenser Demand Side Connector List Name
SequentialLoad; !- Load Distribution Scheme

SetpointManager:FollowOutdoorAirTemperature ,
MyCondenserControl , !- Name
Temperature , !- Control Variable
OutdoorAirWetBulb , !- Reference Temperature Type
0, !- Offset Temperature Difference {deltaC}
80, !- Maximum Setpoint Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Setpoint Temperature {C}
Condenser Supply Outlet Node; !- Setpoint Node or NodeList Name

CondenserLoop ,
Chilled Water Condenser Loop , !- Name
UserDefinedFluidType , !- Fluid Type
PropyleneGlycol15Percent ,!- User Defined Fluid Type
Tower Loop Operation , !- Condenser Equipment Operation Scheme Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name
80, !- Maximum Loop Temperature {C}
10, !- Minimum Loop Temperature {C}
0.00330000 , !- Maximum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
0, !- Minimum Loop Flow Rate {m3/s}
autocalculate , !- Condenser Loop Volume {m3}
Condenser Supply Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Supply Side Branches , !- Condenser Side Branch List Name
Condenser Supply Side Connectors , !- Condenser Side Connector List Name
Condenser Demand Inlet Node , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Demand Outlet Node , !- Demand Side Outlet Node Name
Condenser Demand Side Branches , !- Condenser Demand Side Branch List Name
Condenser Demand Side Connectors , !- Condenser Demand Side Connector List Name
SequentialLoad; !- Load Distribution Scheme

1.21.2.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Inlet Temperature [C]
800 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Outlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Cond Loop Demand Not Distributed [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Unmet Demand Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Demand Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Supply Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

1.21.2.2.1 Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the net demand required to meet the cooling setpoint of the loop. If the loop
setpoint is met for the current HVAC timestep, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal
sum of the total cooling demand from the demand side components on the loop (typically condenser
coils of chillers, etc.). It will also equal the cooling output of all condensing equipment such as
cooling towers on the loop less any pump heat added to the fluid. For example, for a condenser
loop with one tower and one pump serving one chiller, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will
equal the tower water-side heat transfer less the pump heat to fluid, and it will also equal the chiller
condenser heat transfer rate.
If the condenser loop setpoint is not met, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate will equal the
sum of the total cooling demand from the demand side components on the loop plus the additional
cooling required to bring the loop flow to setpoint. If the loop remains off setpoint for successive
timesteps, the demand required to return to setpoint will repeat in each timestep until the loop
reaches setpoint. For this reason, Plant Supply Side Cooling Demand Rate should not be summed
over time, because it will overstate the demand whenever the loop is off setpoint.

1.21.2.2.2 Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the net demand required to meet the heating setpoint of the loop. If the loop
setpoint is met for the current HVAC timestep, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate will equal
sum of the total heating demand from the demand side components on the loop. It will also equal
the heating output of all heating equipment on the supply side of the loop plus any pump heat
added to the fluid. For example, for a condenser loop with one ground loop heat exchanger and one
pump serving one water-to-water heat pump, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate will equal
the ground loop heat transfer plus the pump heat to fluid, and it will also equal the heat pump
condenser side heat transfer rate.
If the condenser loop setpoint is not met, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate will equal the
sum of the total heating demand from the demand side components on the loop plus the additional
heating required to bring the loop flow to setpoint. If the loop remains off setpoint for successive
timesteps, the demand required to return to setpoint will repeat in each timestep until the loop
reaches setpoint. For this reason, Plant Supply Side Heating Demand Rate should not be summed
over time, because it will overstate the demand whenever the loop is off setpoint.

1.21.2.2.3 Plant Supply Side Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the value of the mass flow rate at the Inlet to Condenser Loop on the supply side. There is
not an associated Condenser Loop outlet node flow rate since continuity must be maintained in the
loop and the outlet must be the same.
1.21. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER LOOPS 801

1.21.2.2.4 Plant Supply Side Inlet Temperature [C]

This is the value of the temperature at the Inlet to the condenser loop on the supply side.

1.21.2.2.5 Cond Loop OutletNode Temperature [C]

This is the value of the temperature at the outlet to the condenser loop on the supply side.

1.21.2.2.6 Cond Loop Demand Not Distributed [W]

This is the value of the demand that could not be distributed to the condenser equipment because of
some constraint in the operation scheme. This is a record of the loop operation scheme supervisory
controls after attempting to distribute the load. For example it would be non-zero in situations
where the load is larger than the upper limit of capacities set for the condenser equipment con-
trols. This output is for before the equipment has actually been simulated whereas the separate
output Plant Supply Side Unmet Demand Rate is for after the equipment has simulated.

1.21.2.2.7 Plant Supply Side Unmet Demand Rate [W]

This is the value of the demand NOT provided by the condenser equipment to meet the heating
or cooling setpoint of the loop. The value is positive when the condenser equipment cannot meet
the setpoint, and the value is negative when the condenser equipment provides more than enough
heating or cooling to meet the setpoint. A negative value can happen when the amount of demand
is smaller than the minimum capacity of the equipment using the minimum part load ratio.

1.21.2.2.8 Plant Demand Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

This field is the demand side pressure drop of a condenser loop. This output is only recognized
if a valid pressure simulation is being performed. To do this, the user must specify a pressure
simulation type as an input in the CondenserLoop object, and input at least one pressure drop curve
on a branch of the plant/condenser loop. This particular output is only relevant if the user puts
that curve on the demand side of the loop.

1.21.2.2.9 Plant Supply Side Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

This field is the supply side pressure drop of a condenser loop. This output is only recognized if a
valid pressure simulation is being performed. To do this, the user must specify a pressure simulation
type as an input in the CondenserLoop object, and input at least one pressure drop curve on a branch
of the plant/condenser loop. This particular output is only relevant if the user puts that curve on
the supply side of the loop.

1.21.2.2.10 Plant Loop Pressure Difference [Pa]

This field is the total pressure drop of a condenser loop. This output is only recognized if a valid
pressure simulation is being performed. To do this, the user must specify a pressure simulation type
as an input in the CondenserLoop object, and input at least one pressure drop curve on a branch of
the plant/condenser loop. This particular output is relevant regardless of the location of pressure
drop curves: demand side, supply side, or both.
802 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.22 Group – Plant-Condenser Control

1.22.1 Operation Schemes (Plant and Condenser)
Plants and condenser loops must have some mechanism for controlling the operation of the loop and
which equipment is available under what conditions. Since there may be multiple control schemes
that are assigned various priorities associated with each loop, an overall operation scheme must be
defined. The overall scheme consists of the object name, an identifying name that is referenced in
the main plant or condenser loop statement, and a list of operation schemes. Each operation scheme
must have the type of operation scheme, its identifying name, and the schedule that defines its
availability. Note that the order in which the individual operation schemes appear in this list defines
its priority versus the others with the same scheduled availability. The first scheme appearing in the
list is given the highest priority, the second scheme has second highest priority, etc. In other words,
if according to its schedule, the first operation scheme is available, then it is used by the simulation
to define how the plant or condenser loop operates. If it is not available, the second operation
scheme in the list is checked to see if it is available until the highest priority scheme that is also
available is found. To allow for simultaneous heating and cooling, there is one configuration where
multiple operation schemes are available at a given timestep. This is allowed if a user inputs both a
heating range based operation and a cooling range based operation with overlapping schedules. The
simulation will look at the current loop demand to determine if the cooling scheme should be used
or the heating scheme. In other cases, if two schemes overlap (are available at the same time), a
fatal error will be encountered.

1.22.2 PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes
1.22.2.1 Inputs

1.22.2.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Plant Operation Scheme. This name is
placed in the Plant Loop object to select this scheme.

1.22.2.1.2 Field Set: (Component Object Type, Name, Schedule) up to 8

Operation schemes are listed in “priority” order. Note that each scheme must address the entire
load and/or condition ranges for the simulation. The actual one selected for use will be the first that
is “Scheduled” on. That is, if control scheme 1 is not “on” and control scheme 2 is – then control
scheme 2 is selected. Only plant equipment should be listed on a Control Scheme for this item.

1.22.2.1.3 Field: Control Scheme <#> Object Type

This alpha field contains the keyword for the type of control scheme used. The options for plant
control schemes are:

– PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled
– PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad
– PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad
– PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint
1.22. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 803

– PlantEquipmentOperation:ThermalEnergyStorage
– PlantEquipmentOperation:UserDefined

1.22.2.1.4 Field: Control Scheme <#> Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the control scheme. These must be the named
versions of the referenced Control Scheme (e.g.. a Uncontrolled Loop Operation with this name or
a Cooling or Heating Load Range Based Operation with this name).

1.22.2.1.5 Field: Control Scheme <#> Schedule

This alpha field contains the schedule name for the control scheme. This schedule consists of weeks
and days, with the days containing “0 or 1” for each hour of the day. This binary schedule (0 for
off, 1 for on) determines if the control scheme is operating for that hour of day or not.
Examples of this statement in two different IDFs:

PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , ! Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Peak Operation , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
On Peak , !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , ! Control Scheme 2 Object Type
Off Peak Operation , !- Control Scheme 2 Name
Off Peak; !- Control Scheme 2 Schedule

PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , ! Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Central Chiller Only , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
PlantOnSched; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule

In the first IDF example, “PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad” is the type of control scheme.

“Peak Operation” and “Off Peak Operation” are the names of two different load range based controls
defined separately (see below – ). “On Peak” and “Off Peak” are schedules defined elsewhere in the
input file.
The load range based operation scheme has two statements associated with it: a main statement
that defines the ranges that individual priority settings are valid and the lists of equipment that may
be used for each range.

1.22.3 CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes
1.22.3.1 Inputs

1.22.3.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Condenser Operation Scheme.

1.22.3.1.2 Field Set: (Component Object Type, Name, Schedule) up to 8

Operation schemes are listed in “priority” order. Note that each scheme must address the entire
load and/or condition ranges for the simulation. The actual one selected for use will be the first that
is “Scheduled” on. That is, if control scheme 1 is not “on” and control scheme 2 is – then control
scheme 2 is selected. Only condenser equipment should be listed on a Control Scheme for this item.
804 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.22.3.1.3 Field: Control Scheme <#> Object Type

This alpha field contains the keyword for the type of control scheme used. The options for plant
control schemes are:
This alpha field contains the keyword for the type of control scheme used. Currently, the available
options are:

– PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled
– PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad
– PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulb
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulb
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpoint
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorRelativeHumidity
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulbDifference
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulbDifference
– PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpointDifference
– PlantEquipmentOperation:UserDefined

The condenser operation schemes apply to the equipment on the ‘supply side’ of the condenser loop—
pumps, cooling towers, ground coupled heat exchangers, etc. The keywords select the algorithm
that will be used to determine which equipment is available for each timestep. The Load Schemes
schemes select a user specified set of equipment for each user specified range of a particular simulation
variable. Load schemes compare the demand on the condenser supply side with specified load ranges
and associated equipment lists. Outdoor schemes compare the current value of an environmental
parameter with user specified ranges of that parameter.

1.22.3.1.4 Field: Control Scheme <#> Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the control scheme.

1.22.3.1.5 Field: Control Scheme <#> Schedule

This alpha field contains the schedule name for the control scheme. This schedule consists of weeks
and days, with the days containing “0 or 1” for each hour of the day. This binary schedule (0 for
off, 1 for on) determines which control scheme is operating for a particular hour. The schedule
facilitates daily or seasonal changes in control schemes to meet demand side management or energy
conservation goals.
Scheduling conflicts are handled by selecting the first available scheme in order of appearance in the
list.
Examples of this statement in two IDFs:

CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
Tower Loop Operation , !- CondenserOperationSchemeName
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Year Round Tower Operation , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
PlantOnSched; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule
1.22. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 805

CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes ,Tower Loop Operation ,

PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , Peak Load Operation , AFTERNOONSCHEDULE ,
PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , OffPeak Load Operation , MORNINGSCHEDULE ,
PlantEquipmentOperation :OutdoorWetBulb , NightOperation , NIGHTSCHEDULE;

Each schedule (AFTERNOONSCHEDULE, MORNINGSCHEDULE, NIGHTSCHEDULE) invokes

its associated operation scheme (Peak Load Operation, OffPeak Load Operation, NightOperation).
The type of operation scheme and its name references the input syntax associated with the range
specification and the associated equipment.

1.22.4 PlantEquipmentOperation:Uncontrolled
Uncontrolled loop operation simply specifies a group of equipment that runs ‘uncontrolled’. If the
loop runs, this equipment will run also, unless turned off by the loop flow resolver to maintain
continuity in the fluid loop.

1.22.4.1 Inputs

1.22.4.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the control scheme.

1.22.4.1.2 Field: Equipment List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List. This field ties to the Load
Range Equipment List input structure, which must also be defined.

1.22.4.1.3 Field: Equipment List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List. This field ties to the PlantE-
quipmentList or CondenserEquipmentList input structure, which must also be defined.

1.22.5 PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad
1.22.5.1 Inputs

1.22.6 PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad
The PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad and PlantEquipmentOperation:HeatingLoad objects
define the different ranges and which equipment list is valid for each range. After the keyword and
the identifying name, a series of data trios is expected. In each trio, there is a lower limit for the
load range, an upper limit for the load range, and a name that links to an equipment availability
list (the PlantEquipmentList or CondenserEquipmentList objects).

1.22.6.1 Inputs

1.22.6.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the control scheme.
806 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.22.6.1.2 Field Set: (Lower limit, Upper Limit, Equip List name) up to 10

1.22.6.1.3 Field: Load Range <#> Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the lower demand range (W) for the equipment list. If demand is below
this value, then this equipment list will not turn on to meet the demand.

1.22.6.1.4 Field: Load Range <#> Upper Limit

This numeric field contains the upper demand range (W) for the equipment list. If demand is above
this value, then this equipment list will not turn on to meet the demand.

1.22.6.1.5 Field: Range <#> Equipment List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List (i.e., the name of a PlantE-
quipmentList or CondenserEquipmentList object).
An example of these statements in an IDF is:

PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , Peak Operation ,

0,7000, Chiller Plant ,
7000 ,24500 , Chiller Plant and Purchased ,
24500 ,500000 , Purchased Only;

This particular load based operation scheme (above) has three different ranges. “Chiller Plant”,
“Chiller Plant and Purchased”, and “Purchased Only” are names which link to various PlantEquip-
mentList or CondenserEquipmentList objects as described below. Gaps may be left in the load
ranges specified, but to operate equipment over the entire range the upper limit of a given range
must equal the lower limit of the next range as shown in the example. If gaps are left in the load
ranges specified, a warning message will be issued when the load to be met falls within a load range
“gap”. If the user wishes to leave a load range “gap” for a specific reason (no equipment to operate
on this plant [or condenser] loop within this load range) and does not want the warning messages
to be generated, then specify a lower limit, upper limit and equipment list name for the gap and do
not specify any equipment in the associated equipment list, as shown below.

PlantEquipmentOperation :CoolingLoad , Peak Operation ,

0,7000, Chiller Plant ,
7000 ,7100 , NoEquipmentOperationOnThisPlantLoop ,
7100 ,24500 , Chiller Plant and Purchased ,
24500 ,500000 , Purchased Only;

PlantEquipmentList ,
Chiller Plant , !- Name
Chiller:Electric , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Big Chiller; !- Equipment 1 Name

PlantEquipmentList ,
NoEquipmentOperationOnThisPlantLoop ; !- Name

PlantEquipmentList ,
Chiller Plant and Purchased , !- Name
Chiller:Electric , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Big Chiller , !- Equipment 1 Name
DistrictCooling , !- Equipment 2 Object Type
Purchased Cooling; !- Equipment 2 Name

PlantEquipmentList ,
Purchased Only , !- Name
1.22. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 807

DistrictCooling , !- Equipment 1 Object Type

Purchased Cooling; !- Equipment 1 Name

1.22.7 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulb

1.22.8 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulb

1.22.9 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorRelativeHumidity

1.22.10 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpoint

The outdoor operation objects define the different ranges of the various environmental parameters
and which equipment list is valid for each range. After the keyword and the identifying name, a series
of data trios is expected. In each trio, there is a lower limit for the load range, an upper limit for the
load range, and a name that links to an equipment availability list (the CondenserEquipmentList).
The fields for each of these are:

1.22.10.1 Inputs

1.22.10.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the control scheme.

1.22.10.1.2 Field Set: (Lower limit, Upper Limit, Equip List name) up to 10

1.22.10.1.3 Field: <specfic type> Range <#> Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit (C for temperature operations, Percent for relative hu-
midity operations) for the equipment list. If specific value is below this value, then this equipment
list will not turn on to meet the demand.

1.22.10.1.4 Field: <specific type> Range <#> Upper Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit (C for temperature operations, Percent for relative hu-
midity operations) for the equipment list. If specific value is above this value, then this equipment
list will not turn on to meet the demand.

1.22.10.1.5 Field: Range <#> Equipment List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List (i.e., the name of a Con-
denserEquipmentList object).
808 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.22.11 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDryBulbDifference

1.22.11.1 Inputs

1.22.12 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorWetBulbDifference

1.22.12.1 Inputs

1.22.13 PlantEquipmentOperation:OutdoorDewpointDifference

The Delta Temperature based control strategies help to control any condenser equipment based
on the difference between a reference node temperature and any environmental temperature. For
example a cooling tower can be controlled by a strategy, which looks at the difference between the
tower inlet temperature and wet-bulb temperature. A difference range is specified for each equipment
list.

1.22.13.1 Inputs

1.22.13.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha value contains the identifying name of the control strategy. This name appears as ‘control
scheme name’ in Condenser Operation Scheme object.

1.22.13.1.2 Field: Reference Temperature Node Name

This alpha value specifies the reference node for the operation scheme identified in the first field.

1.22.13.1.3 Field Set: (Lower limit, Upper limit, Equipment List)

1.22.13.1.4 Field: <specfic type> Range <#> Lower Limit

This numeric field specifies the minimum temperature difference required for the equipment specified
in the equipment list to operate.

1.22.13.1.5 Field: <specfic type> Range <#> Upper Limit

This numeric field specifies the maximum temperature difference below which the equipment specified
in the equipment list is available.

1.22.13.1.6 Field: Range <#> Equipment List Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List (i.e., the name of a Con-
denserEquipmentList object).
1.22. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 809

1.22.14 PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint
In addition to load range based control on the plant loop, sequencing the plant components based
on the outlet temperature of individual equipment is allowed. This scheme is common to many
present-day Energy Management Systems sequencing. In this scheme, the sequencing is done based
on the order specified in the control object described below.
However, when sequencing a boiler and a cooling tower to control the heating and cooling set point
temperatures of a condenser loop, it is recommended that the boiler and the cooling tower be placed
in a parallel configuration. The series configuration of these two equipment, though possible to
model them, may result in simultaneous heating and cooling operation when the boiler is ON and
the cooling tower operates in free cooling mode, i.e., the cooling tower may provide free cooling that
could over cool the water below the boiler heating setpoint temperature.

1.22.14.1 Inputs

1.22.14.1.1 Field: Name

This field specifies the name of the operation scheme.

1.22.14.1.2 Field Set: Equipment Object Type, Name, Demand Calculation

Node, Setpoint Node, Flow Rate, Operation Type)

1.22.14.1.3 Field: Equipment <#> Object Type

This field specifies the type of equipment controlled by scheme.

1.22.14.1.4 Field: Equipment <#> Name

This field specifies the name of the controlled equipment.

1.22.14.1.5 Field: Demand Calculation <#> Node Name

The component demand will be calculated using the difference between the temperature at the
demand node and the component set point temperature.

1.22.14.1.6 Field: Setpoint <#> Node Name

Each component controlled under temperature based control will have its own set point different from
the loop set point. This field specifies component set point node (Generally its outlet temperatures).
This node is acted upon by a SetpointManager in order to obtain the setpoint at any simulation
timestep.

1.22.14.1.7 Field: Component <#> Flow Rate

This numeric field specifies the design flow rate for the component specified in earlier fields. This
flow rate is used to calculate the component demand. The field can be set to autosize, if the user
wants the program to calculate the design flow. This would generally be set to autosize when the
user does not know the component flow rate and does a sizing calculation for the corresponding
component.
810 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.22.14.1.8 Field: Operation<#> Type

This alpha field specifies the operation mode for the equipment. The equipment can be in any of the
three modes viz. Cooling, Heating and Dual. Dual is used when the components both as heating
and cooling equipment (for example heat pumps).
And, as an example in an IDF:

PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- PlantOperationSchemeName
PlantEquipmentOperation :ComponentSetpoint , ! Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Test Scheme , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
On; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule

PlantEquipmentOperation :ComponentSetpoint ,
Test Scheme ,
CHILLER:ELECTRIC , !- Equipment 1 Object Type
Little Chiller , !- Equipment 1 Name
Little Chiller Inlet Node , !- Demand Calculation 1 Node Name
Little Chiller Outlet Node , !- Setpoint 1 Node Name
0.0011 , !- Component 1 Flow Rate
COOLING , !- Operation 1 Type
CHILLER:ELECTRIC , !- Equipment 2 Object Type
Big Chiller , !- Equipment 2 Name
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Demand Calculation 2 Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Setpoint 2 Node Name
0.0011 , !- Component 2 Flow Rate
COOLING; !- Operation 2 Type

1.22.15 PlantEquipmentOperation:ThermalEnergyStorage
Users of thermal energy storage, particularly ice storage systems, are often faced with a challenge
of specifying input for these systems. Essentially, they have to define various setpoint managers,
temperature schedules, etc. in order to make the system functional. This plant/condenser control
type simplifies the input somewhat by eliminating both a setpoint manager and a schedule for each
piece of equipment that makes up the ice storage system. In fact, this operation scheme internally
creates the setpoint managers required by the equipment listed as operated by the scheme defined by
this syntax. While the more complex definition is possible and provides more flexibility like hourly
variation of setpoint temperatures at the outlet of each piece of equipment, this input provides the
most convenient method for making the system to work and assumes a single charging setpoint
temperature and a single discharging setpoint temperature. For most systems, this is all that is
needed.

1.22.15.1 Inputs

1.22.15.1.1 Field: Name

This field defines the name of the thermal energy (ice) storage plant equipment operation scheme
that will be referenced by the PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes list in the plant input.

1.22.15.1.2 Field: On-Peak Schedule

This field defines the name of an integer schedule that determines when on-peak electric pricing is
in effect. This value is used to determine whether or not the ice storage system should be charging
the ice storage unit. In the schedule, a value of 1 (or greater) corresponds to being in the on-peak
period while any value of 0 or less corresponds to being in the off-peak period.
1.22. GROUP – PLANT-CONDENSER CONTROL 811

1.22.15.1.3 Field: Charging Availability Schedule

This field defines the name of an integer schedule that determines whether or not the system may
enter charging mode off-peak. If the current value of the on-peak schedule is “off”, then charging can
take place if the charging availability schedule is “on”. If the on-peak schedule is “off” and charging
availability is “off”, then charging is not allowed and the chiller and ice storage units controlled by
this statement are operating to meet the non-charging chilled water temperature defined by the next
input parameter. In this schedule, a value of 1 (or greater) corresponds to “on” when charging is
available during an off-peak period while any value of 0 or less corresponds to chillers not being
allowed to charge even during off-peak.

1.22.15.1.4 Field: Non-Charging Chilled Water Temperature

This field defines the chilled water temperature when the ice storage system is NOT in charging
mode. During these times, the storage system could be discharging or dormant depending on HVAC
load conditions and ice storage controls. This value is used as the setpoint temperature for chillers
associated with this plant equipment operation scheme during non-cooling season and during cooling
season during the on-peak period. The cooling season and on-peak periods are defined by schedules
reference to input above.

1.22.15.1.5 Field: Charging Chilled Water Temperature

This field defines the chilled water temperature when the ice storage system is in charging mode.
During these times, the chiller is producing a temperature low enough to generate ice in the ice
storage unit. This value is used as the setpoint temperature for chillers associated with this plant
equipment operation scheme during the cooling season during the off-peak period. The cooling
season and on-peak periods are defined by schedules reference to input above.

1.22.15.1.6 Field Set: (Component Object Type, Name, Demand Calculation

Node, Setpoint Node, Flow Rate, Operation Type)

1.22.15.1.7 Field: Component <#> Object Type

This field specifies the type of equipment controlled by scheme. This must be a thermal energy
storage device (simple or detailed ice storage) or a chiller.

1.22.15.1.8 Field: Component <#> Name

This field specifies the name of the controlled equipment. This name must be defined in the input
as a valid ice storage device or chiller.

1.22.15.1.9 Field: Component <#> Demand Calculation Node Name

The component demand will be calculated using the difference between the temperature at the
demand node and the component set point temperature.

1.22.15.1.10 Field: Component <#> Setpoint Node Name

Each component controlled under temperature based control will have its own set point different from
the loop set point. This field specifies component set point node (Generally its outlet temperatures).
This node is acted upon by a SetpointManager in order to obtain the setpoint at any simulation
timestep.
812 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.22.15.1.11 Field: Component <#> Flow Rate

This numeric field specifies the design flow rate for the component specified in earlier fields. This
flow rate is used to calculate the component demand. The field can be set to autosize, if the user
wants the program to calculate the design flow. This would generally be set to autosize when the
user does not know the component flow rate and does a sizing calculation for the corresponding
component.

1.22.15.1.12 Field: Component <#> Operation Type

This alpha field specifies the operation mode for the equipment. The equipment can be in any of the
three modes viz. Cooling, Heating and Dual. Dual is used when the components both as heating
and cooling equipment (for example heat pumps). Ice storage units can potentially either heat or
cool the circulating fluid and thus should be defined as Dual mode.
An example IDF is shown below:

PlantEquipmentOperationSchemes ,
CW Loop Operation , !- Name
PlantEquipmentOperation :ThermalEnergyStorage , !- Control Scheme 1 Object Type
Chiller and Partial Ice Storage , !- Control Scheme 1 Name
PlantOnSched; !- Control Scheme 1 Schedule Name

PlantEquipmentOperation :ThermalEnergyStorage ,
Chiller and Partial Ice Storage , !- Name
OnPeakEnergy , !- On -Peak Schedule Name
ChargingAvail , !- Charging Availability Schedule Name
7.22, !- Non -charging Chilled Water Temperature
-5.0, !- Charging Chilled Water Temperature
Chiller:Electric , !- Component 1 Object Type
Central Chiller , !- Component 1 Name
Central Chiller Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Demand Calculation Node Name
Central Chiller Outlet Node , !- Component 1 Setpoint Node Name
autosize , !- Component 1 Flow Rate {m3/s}
COOLING , !- Component 1 Operation Type
ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed , !- Component 2 Object Type
Ice Tank , !- Component 2 Name
Ice Tank Inlet Node , !- Component 2 Demand Calculation Node Name
Ice Tank Outlet Node , !- Component 2 Setpoint Node Name
0.13506E-02, !- Component 2 Flow Rate {m3/s}
DUAL; !- Component 2 Operation Type

1.22.16 PlantEquipmentList
1.22.16.1 Inputs

1.22.17 CondenserEquipmentList
The PlantEquipmentList and CondenserEquipmentList specify available plant and condenser loop
equipment respectively for any loop operation scheme. Each statement contains the object name,
an identifying name (which links the definition back to one of the operation scheme statements)
and a variable length of data pairs. These pairs refer to a plant equipment type and an identifying
name. The type in this list of pairs must correspond to a valid plant object as described in the next
subsection.
Note: If a PlantEquipmentList or CondenserEquipmentList object is specified with no equipment
object types or equipment names, then the corresponding PlantEquipmentOperation:* object will
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 813

assume all available equipment on this plant (or condenser) loop should be OFF (not operate) within
the specified lower/upper limit.

1.22.17.1 Inputs

1.22.17.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Equipment List.

1.22.17.1.2 Field Set: (Object Type, Name)

Remember the order of equipment on this list determines operation priority. Equipment on the list
first will try to meet demand first. These fields tie to the Equipment Definition input structure,
which must also be defined.

1.22.17.1.3 Field: Equipment <#> Object Type

This alpha field contains the keyword for the type of equipment in operation. Example:
(Chiller:Electric, DistrictCooling). The full list of allowable plant equipment is valid plant objects
as described in the next subsection.

1.22.17.1.4 Field: Equipment <#> Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the equipment in operation. This distinguishes
between two different pieces of equipment of the same type.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

PlantEquipmentList , Chiller Plant and Purchased ,

Chiller:Electric , Big Chiller ,
DistrictCooling , Purchased Cooling;

Note that this list is the middle range defined in the PlantEquipmentOperation:CoolingLoad state-
ment named “Peak Operation” above. This defines the equipment available when the load encoun-
tered by the plant (chiller water demand, for example) is between 7000 W and 24500 W. EnergyPlus
will run the “Big Chiller” first up to its capacity and then attempt to meet the remaining load (while
in that range) with the next piece of equipment (in this case, “Purchased:Cooling”) in the list.

1.23 Group – Plant Equipment

1.23.1 Equipment Types

In each PlantEquipmentList described using the above syntax, various equipment types and names
must be given. Each type-name pair must then have a corresponding equipment definition. This
subsection lists the various equipment types that are available and examples from an IDF. Where
appropriate, notes and comments on the input structure are provided.
814 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.2 Generic Chiller Outputs

Many output variable names are common across all chiller types. These generic chiller output names
all begin with the word “Chiller”. Certain chiller types have additional output variables which are
specific to that type of chiller. Chiller energy use is added to the appropriate plant-level meters as
a cooling end-use.

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]

The following output is applicable only for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

The following outputs are applicable only for evap-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Drive Shaft Power [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Drive Shaft Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Energy [J]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 815

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Chiller Exhaust Recovered Heat Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Exhaust Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Total Recovered Heat Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Total Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Exhaust Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Effective Heat Rejection Temperature [C]

The following blocks of outputs are for steam and fuel-driven chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gas Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Gas Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gas Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Gas Mass [kg]

For steam absorption chillers:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Source Steam Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Chiller Source Steam Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Steam Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

For hot water absorption chillers:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Source Hot Water Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Source Hot Water Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Steam:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Hot Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The following output is applicable only for indirect absorption chillersHVAC,Average,Chiller Part
Load Ratio

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Cycling Ratio []

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Propane Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Propane Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Propane Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Diesel Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Diesel Energy [J]
816 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Diesel Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gasoline Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Gasoline Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gasoline Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo1 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller FuelOilNo1 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo1 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo2 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller FuelOilNo2 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel1 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller OtherFuel1 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel1 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel2 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller OtherFuel2 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.2.1 Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.2.2 Chiller Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller. In the case of steam or fuel-powered chillers,
this repesents the internal chiller pumps and other electric power consumption. Consumption is
metered on Cooling:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.2.3 Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]

1.23.2.4 Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]

These outputs are the evaporator heat transfer which is the cooling delivered by the chiller. Chiller
Evaporator Cooling Energy is metered on Chillers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and En-
ergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.2.5 Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.2.6 Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.2.7 Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the evaporator (chilled water) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 817

1.23.2.8 Chiller COP [W/W]

This output is the coefficient of performance for the chiller during cooling operation. It is calcu-
lated as the evaporator heat transfer rate (Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate) divided by the “fuel”
consumption rate by the chiller. For the constant COP and electric chillers, the “fuel” is electricity
so the divisor is Chiller Electricity Rate [W]. For the absorption chiller, the “fuel” is steam so the
divisor is Steam Consumption Rate [W].
Note that this variable is reported as zero when the chiller is not operating. When reported for
frequencies longer than “detailed” (such as timestep, hourly, daily, monthly or environment), this
output will only be meaningful when the chiller is operating for the entire reporting period. To
determine an average COP for a longer time period, compute the COP based on total evaporator
heat transfer divided by total electric or fuel input over the desired period.

1.23.2.9 Chiller Part Load Ratio

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the indirect absorption chiller. This output may fall
below the minimum part-load ratio specified in the input. For this case, the Chiller Cycling Ratio
is used to further define the performance of the indirect absorption chiller.

1.23.2.10 Chiller Cycling Ratio

This output is the fraction of the timestep the indirect absorption chiller operates. When the chiller
operates above the minimum part-load ratio, a Chiller Cycling Ratio of 1 is reported. When the
chiller operates below the minimum part-load ratio, the Chiller Cycling Ratio reports the fraction
of the timestep the indirect absorption chiller operates.

1.23.2.11 Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.23.2.12 Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These outputs are the condenser heat transfer which is the heat rejected from the chiller to either a
condenser water loop or through an air-cooled condenser. Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy
is metered on HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.2.13 Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

This output is the condenser (heat rejection) inlet temperature for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers.
For an air-cooled chiller, this output would be the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the
condenser coil. For an evap-cooled chiller, this output would be the wet-bulb temperature of the air
entering the evaporatively-cooled condenser coil.

1.23.2.14 Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.2.15 Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller’s basin heater (for evaporatively-cooled
condenser type). Consumption is metered on Chillers:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electric-
ity:Facility
818 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.2.16 Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.2.17 Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.2.18 Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the condenser (heat rejection) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for
water-cooled chillers.

1.23.2.19 Chiller Drive Shaft Power [W]

1.23.2.20 Chiller Drive Shaft Energy [J]

For engine-driven and turbine-driven chillers, these outputs are the shaft power produced by the
prime mover and transferred to the chiller compressor.

1.23.2.21 Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Rate [W]

1.23.2.22 Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Energy [J]

1.23.2.23 Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Rate [W]

1.23.2.24 Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Energy [J]

1.23.2.25 Chiller Exhaust Recovered Heat Rate [W]

1.23.2.26 Chiller Exhaust Recovered Heat Energy [J]

1.23.2.27 Chiller Total Recovered Heat Rate [W]

1.23.2.28 Chiller Total Recovered Heat Energy [J]

For chillers with heat recovery, such as engine-driven chillers, these outputs are the components of
recoverable energy available. For a given chiller type, one or more of the following components may be
applicable: Lube (engine lubricant), Jacket (engine coolant), Exhaust (engine exhaust), and Total.
Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Energy, Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Energy, and Chiller Exhaust
Heat Recovery Energy are metered on HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and
EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.2.29 Chiller Exhaust Temperature [C]

This is the exhaust temperature leaving an engine chiller.

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 819

1.23.2.30 Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.2.31 Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.2.32 Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for chillers with
heat recovery such as engine-driven and gas turbine chillers.

1.23.2.33 Chiller Effective Heat Rejection Temperature [C]

This output variable is available for heat recovery chillers that model split bundle condenser. The
condenser fluid temperatures used to characterize chiller performance are modified to account for
the temperature of the heat recovery fluid. This output is the resulting temperature used for
characterizing chiller performance and is a blend of the temperatures in the condenser and heat
recovery fluid streams. For the Chiller:Electric and Chiller:Electric:EIR models, this is an effective
inlet temperature while for the Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR model, this is an effective outlet
temperature.

1.23.2.34 Chiller <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.23.2.35 Chiller <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

1.23.2.36 Chiller <Fuel Type> Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.2.37 Chiller Gas Mass [kg] (Gas Turbine Chiller only)

These outputs are the steam or fuel input for steam or fuel-fired chillers. Valid fuel types depend on
the type of chiller. <Fuel Type> may be one of: Gas (natural gas), Steam, Propane, Diesel, Gasoline,
FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, OtherFuel1 and OtherFuel2. Consumption is metered on Cooling:<Fuel
Type>, <Fuel Type>:Plant, and <Fuel Type>:Facility.

1.23.2.38 Chiller Source Hot Water Rate [W]

1.23.2.39 Chiller Source Hot Water Energy [J]

1.23.2.40 Chiller Source Steam Rate [W]

1.23.3 Chiller:Absorption
1.23.3.1 Inputs

1.23.3.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the absorption chiller.

1.23.3.1.2 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts.
820 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.3.1.3 Field: Nominal Pumping Power

This numeric field contains the nominal pumping power of the absorber in Watts.

1.23.3.1.4 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the absorption chiller plant side inlet
node.

1.23.3.1.5 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the absorption chiller plant side outlet
node.

1.23.3.1.6 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the absorption chiller condenser side inlet
node.

1.23.3.1.7 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Heat Recovery Loop Component
Outlet Node.

1.23.3.1.8 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the absorption chiller’s minimum part load ratio. The expected range is
between 0 and 1. The minimum part load is not the load where the machine shuts off, but where
the amount of power remains constant to produce smaller loads than this fraction.

1.23.3.1.9 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the absorption chiller’s maximum part load ratio. This value may exceed
1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1.

1.23.3.1.10 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the absorption chiller’s optimum part load ratio. This is the part load
ratio at which the chiller performs at its maximum COP.

1.23.3.1.11 Field: Design Condenser Inlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the absorption chiller’s condenser inlet design temperature in Celsius.

1.23.3.1.12 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume chiller this is the maximum flow and for constant flow chiller this is the design
flow rate. The units are in cubic meters per second.

1.23.3.1.13 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the absorption chiller’s design condenser water flow rate in cubic meters
per second.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 821

1.23.3.1.14 Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve

The Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio
of the generator load on the absorber to the demand on the chiller. The defining equation is:

C1
SteamInputRatio = + C2 + C3 ∗ P LR (1.49)
P LR
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the equation.

1.23.3.1.15 Field: Coefficient 1 of the Steam Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C1 in the Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufac-
turers’ performance data to the curve.

1.23.3.1.16 Field: Coefficient 2 of the Steam Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C2 in the Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufac-
turers’ performance data to the curve.

1.23.3.1.17 Field: Coefficient 3 of the Steam Use Part Load Ratio Curve
C3 in the Generator Heat Input Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufac-
turers’ performance data to the curve.

1.23.3.1.18 Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve

The Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio
of the actual absorber pumping power to the nominal pumping power. The defining equation is:

ElectricInputRatio = C1 + C2 ∗ P LR + C3 ∗ P LR2 (1.50)

The following three fields contain the coefficients for the equation.

1.23.3.1.19 Field: Coefficient 1 of the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve

C1 in the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.

1.23.3.1.20 Field: Coefficient 2 of the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve

C2 in the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.

1.23.3.1.21 Field: Coefficient 3 of the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve

C3 in the Pump Electric Use Part Load Ratio Curve. This value is obtained by fitting manufacturers’
performance data to the curve.
822 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.3.1.22 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the evaporator outlet temperature. This temperature
acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesn’t get too cold.

1.23.3.1.23 Field: Generator Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Generator Inlet Node. A steam or hot
water loop is not required to simulate an absorption chiller. If a steam/hot water loop is used, enter
the name of the generator inlet node.

1.23.3.1.24 Field: Generator Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Generator Outlet Node. A steam or hot
water loop is not required to simulate an absorption chiller. If a steam/hot water loop is used, enter
the name of the generator outlet node.

1.23.3.1.25 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointMod-
ulated changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving
the chiller matches a setpoint at the evaporator outlet. For this absorption chiller, this mode also
affects the flow rate on the generator connection. In all cases the operation of the external plant
system can also impact the flow through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation
are such that flow is restricted and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is
NotModulated. This flow mode does not impact the condenser loop connection.

1.23.3.1.26 Field: Generator Fluid Type

This choice field specifies the type of fluid used to heat the generator solution. The valid choices
are HotWater or Steam. This field should be specified as Steam or left blank if the generator
inlet/outlet nodes are not specified.

1.23.3.1.27 Field: Design Generator Fluid Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the absorption chiller’s design condenser fluid flow rate in cubic meters
per second.

1.23.3.1.28 Field: Degree of Subcooling in Steam Generator

Ideally, the steam trap located at the outlet of the generator should remove all the condensate
immediately, however, there is a delay in this process in actual systems which causes the condensate
to SubCool by a certain amount before leaving the generator. This amount of subcooling is included
in the heat transferred to the solution in the generator. The minimum value is 0º Celsius and default
is 5º Celsius. This field is not used when the generator inlet/outlet node are not specified or the
generator is connected to a hot water loop.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 823

1.23.3.1.29 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity, Nominal Pumping Power,
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate, Design Condenser Water Flow Rate and Design Generator Fluid
Flow Rate. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while
continuing to use the autosizing feature.
Following is an example input for an Absorption Chiller.

Chiller:Absorption ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
50000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
250, !- Nominal Pumping Power {W}
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Plant_Side_Inlet_Node
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Plant_Side_Outlet_Node
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser_Side_Inlet_Node
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser_Side_Outlet_Node
0.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.65, !- Opt Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Temp Design Condenser Inlet {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.03303 , !- Coefficient1 of the steam use part load ratio curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient2 of the steam use part load ratio curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient3 of the steam use part load ratio curve
1.0, !- Coefficient1 of the pump electric use part load ratio curve
0, !- Coefficient2 of the pump electric part load ratio curve
0, !- Coefficient3 of the pump electric use part load ratio curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
AbsorberSteamInletNode , !- Generator Inlet Node Name
AbsorberSteamOutletNode , !- Generator Outlet Node Name
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
Steam , !- Generator Fluid Type
autosize , !- Design Generator Volumetric Fluid Flow Rate {m3/s}
2.0; !- Degree of Subcooling in Steam Generator {C}

1.23.3.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
824 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]

For Chillers with Steam Generators:

– HVAC,Average, Chiller Source Steam Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Chiller Source Steam Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Steam Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

For Chillers with Hot Water Generators:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Source Hot Water Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Source Hot Water Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Hot Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”

1.23.4 Chiller:Absorption:Indirect
The Chiller:Absorption:Indirect object is an enhanced version of the absorption chiller model found
in the Building Loads and System Thermodynamics (BLAST) program. This enhanced model is
nearly identical to the existing absorption chiller model (Ref. Chiller:Absorption) with the exceptions
that: 1) the enhanced indirect absorption chiller model provides more flexible performance curves
and 2) chiller performance now includes the impact of varying evaporator, condenser, and generator
temperatures. Since these absorption chiller models are nearly identical (i.e., the performance curves
of the enhanced model can be manipulated to produce similar results to the previous model), it is
quite probable that the Chiller:Absorption model will be deprecated in a future release of EnergyPlus.

1.23.4.1 Inputs

1.23.4.1.1 Field: Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the indirect absorption chiller.

1.23.4.1.2 Field: Nominal Capacity

This required numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts. This field
must be greater than 0 and is autosizable.

1.23.4.1.3 Field: Nominal Pumping Power

This required numeric field contains the nominal pumping power of the chiller in Watts. The
minimum value for this field is 0 and is autosizable.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 825

1.23.4.1.4 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller chilled water inlet node.

1.23.4.1.5 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller chilled water outlet node.

1.23.4.1.6 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser inlet node.

1.23.4.1.7 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name given to the chiller outlet node.

1.23.4.1.8 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s minimum part-load ratio. The expected range is between 0
and 1. The minimum part load is not the load where the machine shuts off, but where the amount
of power remains constant to produce smaller loads than this fraction.

1.23.4.1.9 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s maximum part-load ratio. This value may exceed 1, but the
normal range is between 0 and 1.1.

1.23.4.1.10 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio at which
the chiller performs at its maximum COP.

1.23.4.1.11 Field: Design Condenser Inlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s condenser inlet design temperature in Celsius. The default
value for this field is 30º C and is only used when the Design Chilled Water Flow Rate is autosized.

1.23.4.1.12 Field: Condenser Inlet Temperature Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the chiller’s lower limit for the condenser entering water temperature
in Celsius. The default value for this field is 15º C. If this limit is exceeded, a warning message
will report the incident. No correction to chiller capacity is made for low condenser entering water
temperatures.

1.23.4.1.13 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the chiller’s lower limit for the evaporator leaving water temperature
in Celsius. The default value for this field is 5º C. If this limit is exceeded, a warning message
will report the incident. No correction to chiller capacity is made for low evaporator leaving water
temperatures.
826 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.4.1.14 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

This numeric input specifies the design evaporator volumetric flow rate in cubic meters per second.
The value specified must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. For variable volume chiller
this is the maximum flow and for constant flow chiller this is the design flow rate.

1.23.4.1.15 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field specifies the chiller’s design condenser water flow rate in cubic meters per second.
The value specified must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.23.4.1.16 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointMod-
ulated changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving
the chiller matches a setpoint at the evaporator outlet. For this absorption chiller, this mode also
affects the flow rate on the generator connection. In all cases the operation of the external plant
system can also impact the flow through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation
are such that flow is restricted and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is
NotModulated. This flow mode does not impact the condenser loop connection.

1.23.4.1.17 Field: Generator Heat Input Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
Name
This required alpha field specifies the name of the curve used to determine the heat input to the
chiller. The curve is a quadratic or cubic curve which characterizes the heat input as a function of
chiller part-load ratio. The curve output is multiplied by the chiller’s nominal capacity and operating
part-load ratio or minimum part-load ratio, whichever is greater, to determine the amount of heat
input required for the given operating conditons.

1.23.4.1.18 Field: Pump Electric Input Function of Part Load Ratio Curve Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the curve used to determine the pump electrical input to the
chiller. The curve is a quadratic or cubic curve which characterizes the pump electrical power as a
function of chiller part-load ratio. The curve output is multiplied by the chiller’s nominal pumping
power and operating part-load ratio or minimum part-load ratio, whichever is greater, to determine
the amount of pumping power required for the given operating conditons.

1.23.4.1.19 Field: Generator Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Generator Inlet Node. A steam or hot
water loop is not required to simulate an indirect absorption chiller. If a steam/hot water loop is
used, enter the name of the generator inlet node.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 827

1.23.4.1.20 Field: Generator Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the Generator Outlet Node. A steam or hot
water loop is not required to simulate an indirect absorption chiller. If a steam/hot water loop is
used, enter the name of the generator outlet node.

1.23.4.1.21 Field: Capacity Correction Function of Condenser Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of a quadratic or cubic curve which correlates the chiller’s evapo-
rator capacity as a function of condenser entering water temperature. This curve is used to correct
nominal capacity at off-design condensing temperatures.

1.23.4.1.22 Field: Capacity Correction Function of Chilled Water Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of a quadratic or cubic curve which correlates the chiller’s evap-
orator capacity as a function of evaporator leaving water temperature. This curve is used to correct
nominal capacity at off-design evaporator temperatures.

1.23.4.1.23 Field: Capacity Correction Function of Generator Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of a quadratic or cubic curve which correlates the chiller’s evap-
orator capacity as a function of generator entering water temperature. This curve is used to correct
nominal capacity at off-design evaporator temperatures and is only used when the Generator Fluid
Type is specified as Hot Water.

1.23.4.1.24 Field: Generator Heat Input Correction Function of Condenser Tem-

perature Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of a quadratic or cubic curve which correlates the chiller’s heat
input as a function of condenser entering water temperature. This curve is used to correct generator
heat input at off-design condensing temperatures.

1.23.4.1.25 Field: Generator Heat Input Correction Function of Chilled Water

Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field specifies the name of a quadratic or cubic curve which correlates the chiller’s heat
input as a function of evaporator leaving water temperature. This curve is used to correct generator
heat input at off-design evaporator temperatures.

1.23.4.1.26 Field: Generator Heat Source Type

This choice field specifies the type of fluid used to heat the generator solution. The valid choices are
HotWater or Steam. This input is used to identify the method used to calculate the generator
mass flow rate. This field is not used if the generator inlet/outlet nodes are not specified. The
default value is Steam.
828 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.4.1.27 Field: Design Generator Fluid Flow Rate

This numeric field specifies the chiller’s design generator fluid flow rate in cubic meters per second.
The value specified must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. For variable flow chillers this
is the maximum generator flow rate, for constant flow chillers this is the flow rate.

1.23.4.1.28 Field: Temperature Lower Limit Generator Inlet

This numeric field specifies the lower limit of the generator’s entering water temperature. This field
is not used iif the Generator Fluid Type is specified as steam.

1.23.4.1.29 Field: Degree of Subcooling in Steam Generator

Ideally the steam trap located at the outlet of generator should remove all the condensate imme-
diately, however there is a delay in this process in actual systems which causes the condensate to
SubCool by a certain degree before leaving the generator. This amount of subcooling is included in
the heat transferred to the solution in the generator. The minimum value is 0º Celsius, the maximum
value is 20º Celsius, and the default is 1º Celsius.

1.23.4.1.30 Field: Degree of Subcooling in Steam Condensate Loop

This essentially represents the heat loss to the atmosphere due to uninsulated condensate return
piping to the boiler. Condensate return piping operates at atmospheric pressure and is not insulated.
The condensate sub cools to certain degree before it is pumped back to the boiler. The minimum
value is 0º Celsius and the default is 0º Celsius.

1.23.4.1.31 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity, Nominal Pumping Power,
Design Chilled Water Flow Rate, Design Condenser Water Flow Rate and Design Generator Fluid
Flow Rate. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while
continuing to use the autosizing feature.
Following is an example input for an Absorption Chiller.

Chiller:Absorption:Indirect ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
250, !- Nominal Pumping Power {W}
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Evaporator Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Evaporator Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
0.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.65, !- Opt Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Temp Design Condenser Inlet {C}
10.0, !- Temp Lower Limit Condenser Inlet {C}
5.0, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
SteamUseFPLR , !- Generator Heat Input function of part -load ratio curve name
PumpUseFPLR , !- Pump Electric Input function of part -load ratio curve name
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 829

AbsorberSteamInletNode , !- Generator Inlet Node Name

AbsorberSteamOutletNode , !- Generator Outlet Node Name
CAPfCOND , !- Capacity Correction function of condenser temperature curve name
CAPfEVAP , !- Capacity Correction function of evaporator temperature curve name
, !- Capacity Correction function of generator temperature curve name
SteamFCondTemp , !- Generator Heat Input Correction function of condenser temperature
curve name
SteamFEvapTemp , !- Generator Heat Input Correction function of evaporator temperature
curve name
Steam , !- Generator Heat Source Type
autosize , !- Design Generator Volumetric Fluid Flow Rate {m3/s}
30.0, !- Temp Lower Limit Generator Inlet {C}
2.0, !- Degree of Subcooling in Steam Generator {C}
12.0; !- Degree of Subcooling in Steam Condensate Loop {C}

1.23.4.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Part-Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Cycling Ratio

For Chillers with Steam Generators:

– HVAC,Average, Chiller Source Steam Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Chiller Source Steam Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Steam:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Steam [J]
830 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average, Chiller Steam Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

– HVAC,Average, Chiller Steam Heat Loss Rate [W]

For Chillers with Hot Water Generators:

– HVAC,Average, Chiller Source Hot Water Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Chiller Source Hot Water Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average, Chiller Hot Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”

1.23.5 Chiller:ConstantCOP
This chiller model is based on a simple, constant COP simulation of the chiller. In this case,
performance does not vary with chilled water temperature or condenser conditions.
Such a model is useful when the user does not have access to detailed performance data.

1.23.5.1 Inputs

1.23.5.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the constant COP chiller.

1.23.5.1.2 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts.

1.23.5.1.3 Field: Nominal COP

This numeric field contains the Chiller’s coefficient of performance.

1.23.5.1.4 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume chiller this is the maximum flow and for constant flow chiller this is the design
flow rate. The units are in cubic meters per second.

1.23.5.1.5 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s design condenser water flow rate in cubic meters
per second. This field is autosizable. This field is not used for Condenser Type = AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled.

1.23.5.1.6 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the constant COP chiller plant side inlet
node.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 831

1.23.5.1.7 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the constant COP chiller plant side outlet
node.

1.23.5.1.8 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the constant COP chiller condenser side inlet node.
This node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and a condenser inlet node
name is specified here, the node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object
where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air temperature
from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList
object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather data. If the chiller is
AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank, the program automatically creates
an outdoor air node and the air temperature information on this node is taken directly from the
weather file (no node height adjustment).

1.23.5.1.9 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the constant COP chiller condenser side outlet
node. This node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled
or EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank,
the program automatically creates a condenser side outlet air node.

1.23.5.1.10 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field determines what type of condenser will be modeled with this chiller. The 3 type of
condensers are AirCooled, WaterCooled, and EvaporativelyCooled with the default being AirCooled
if not specified. AirCooled and EvaporativelyCooled do not require a CondenserLoop to be speci-
fied, whereas the WaterCooled option requires the full specification of the CondenserLoop and its
associated equipment.

1.23.5.1.11 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow
through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted
and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.

1.23.5.1.12 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
832 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity, Design Chilled Water Flow
Rate and Design Condenser Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component to
meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.23.5.1.13 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the chiller’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. This field is used in
conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin
heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set
point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the
chiller is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must
be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.23.5.1.14 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater
is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as
the chiller is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default
value is 2˚C if this field is left blank.

1.23.5.1.15 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies
for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be
an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than
0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below
the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this field is left blank, the basin heater
is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may
only operate when the chiller is off.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Chiller:ConstantCOP , Little Chiller ,

25000 , ! Nominal Capacity [W]
2.5, ! COP
0.0011 , ! Design Chilled Water Flow Rate [m3/s]
0.0011 , ! Design Condenser Water Flow Rate [m3/s]
Little Chiller Inlet Node , Little Chiller Outlet Node ,
Little Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , Little Chiller Condenser Outlet Node ,
WaterCooled ,
VariableFlow;

Chiller:ConstantCOP ,
Little Chiller , !- Name
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.5, !- Nominal COP {W/W}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Little Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Little Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Little Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Little Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
EvaporativelyCooled , !- Condenser Type
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 833

VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode

, !- Sizing Factor
450; !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}

1.23.5.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]

Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

Water-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”
834 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.6 Chiller:Electric
This chiller model is the empirical model from the Building Loads and System Thermodynamics
(BLAST) program. Capacity, power, and full load are each defined by a set of performance curves
(quadratics). Chiller performance curves are generated by fitting catalog data to third order polyno-
mial equations. The nominal inputs and curves described below are combined as follows to calculate
the chiller power:

NominalCapacity
Power = FracFullLoadPower·FullLoadPowerRat·AvailToNominalCapacityRatio·
COP
(1.51)
where:
NominalCapacity = Nominal Capacity field
COP = COP field
AvailToNominalCapacityRatio = the result of the Capacity Ratio Curve
FullLoadPowerRat = the result of the Power Ratio Curve
FracFullLoadPower = the result of the Full Load Ratio Curve

1.23.6.1 Inputs

1.23.6.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller.

1.23.6.1.2 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field determines what type of condenser will be modeled with this chiller. The 3 type of
condensers are AirCooled, WaterCooled, and EvaporativelyCooled with the default being AirCooled
if not specified. AirCooled and EvaporativelyCooled do not require a Condenser Loop to be specified,
where the WaterCooled option requires the full specification of the Condenser Loop and its associated
equipment.

1.23.6.1.3 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts.

1.23.6.1.4 Field: Nominal COP

This numeric field contains the chiller’s coefficient of performance. For a water-cooled chiller, this
number does not include energy use due to condenser pumps and/or fans. For an air-cooled or
evap-cooled chiller, this number includes condenser fan power.

1.23.6.1.5 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller plant side inlet node.

1.23.6.1.6 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller plant side outlet node.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 835

1.23.6.1.7 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller condenser side inlet node.
This node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and a condenser inlet node
name is specified here, the node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object
where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air temperature
from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList
object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather data. If the chiller is
AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank, the program automatically creates
an outdoor air node and the air temperature information on this node is taken directly from the
weather file (no node height adjustment).

1.23.6.1.8 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller condenser side outlet node.
This node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank,
the program automatically creates a condenser side outlet air node.

1.23.6.1.9 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s minimum part load ratio. The expected range is
between 0 and 1. The minimum part load is not the load where the machine shuts off, but where
the amount of power remains constant to produce smaller loads than this fraction.

1.23.6.1.10 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s maximum part load ratio. This value may exceed 1,
but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1.

1.23.6.1.11 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s optimum part load ratio. This is the part load ratio
at which the chiller performs at its maximum COP.

1.23.6.1.12 Field: Design Condenser Inlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s condenser inlet design temperature in Celsius.

1.23.6.1.13 Field: Temperature Rise Coefficient

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s temperature rise coefficient which is defined as the
ratio of the required change in condenser water temperature to a given change in chilled water
temperature, which maintains the capacity at the nominal value. This is calculated as the following
ratio:

T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.52)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated

where:
836 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

TCEntrequired = Required entering condenser air or water temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TCEntrated = Rated entering condenser air or water temperature at rated capacity.
TELvrequired = Required leaving evaporator water outlet temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TELvrated = Rated leaving evaporator water outlet temperature at rated capacity.

1.23.6.1.14 Field: Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s evaporator outlet design temperature in Celsius.

1.23.6.1.15 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume chiller this is the maximum flow and for constant flow chiller this is the design
flow rate. The units are in cubic meters per second.

1.23.6.1.16 Field: Design Condenser Fluid Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s design condenser water flow rate in cubic meters per
second. This field is autosizable. This field is also used to enter the air flow rate if the Condenser
Type = AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and Heat Recovery is specified.

1.23.6.1.17 Capacity Ratio Curve

The Capacity Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Available Capacity
to Nominal Capacity. The defining equation is:

AvailT oN ominalCapacityRatio = C1 + C2 ∆temp + C3 ∆2temp (1.53)

Where the Delta Temperature is defined as:

TempCondIn − TempCondInDesign
∆Temp = − (TempEvapOut − TempEvapOutDesign) (1.54)
TempRiseCoefficient

TempCondIn = Temperature entering the condenser (water or air temperature depending on con-
denser type).
TempCondInDesign = Design Condenser Inlet Temperature from User input above.
TempEvapOut = Temperature leaving the evaporator.
TempEvapOutDesign = Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature from User input above.
TempRiseCoefficient = User Input from above.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.6.1.18 Field: Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.19 Field: Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 837

1.23.6.1.20 Field: Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.21 Power Ratio Curve

The Power Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Full Load Power at
Available Capacity to Full Load Power at Nominal Capacity. The defining equation is:
F ullLoadP owerRatio = C1 + C2 AvailT oN ominalCapRatio + C3 AvailT oN ominalCapRatio2 The
following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.6.1.22 Field: Coefficient1 of the power ratio curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.23 Field: Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.24 Field: Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.25 Full Load Ratio Curve

The Full Load Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the fraction of full load power.
The defining equation is:

F racF ullLoadP ower = C1 + C2 P artLoadRatio + C3 P artLoadRatio2 (1.55)

The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.6.1.26 Field: Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.27 Field: Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.28 Field: Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.6.1.29 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the evaporator outlet temperature. This temperature
acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesn’t get too cold.
838 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.6.1.30 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow
through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted
and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.

1.23.6.1.31 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This is the design flow rate used if the heat recovery option is being simulated. If this value is greater
than 0.0 then a heat recovery loop must be specified and attached to the chiller using the next 2
node fields. To determine how the heat recovery algorithm works look at the Engineering Manual
at the Chiller:Electric with Heat Recovery section. The units are in cubic meters per second. This
field is autosizable. When autosizing, the flow rate is simply the product of the design condenser
flow rate and the condenser heat recovery relative capacity fraction set in the field below. Note that
heat recovery is only available with Condenser Type = WaterCooled.

1.23.6.1.32 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller heat recovery side inlet node.
A heat recovery loop must be specified.

1.23.6.1.33 Field: Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric chiller heat recovery side outlet node.
A heat recovery loop must be specified.

1.23.6.1.34 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity, Design Chilled Water Flow
Rate and Design Condenser Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component to
meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.23.6.1.35 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the chiller’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. This field is used in
conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin
heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set
point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the
chiller is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must
be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 839

1.23.6.1.36 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater
is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as
the chiller is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default
value is 2˚C if this field is left blank.

1.23.6.1.37 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies
for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be
an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than
0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below
the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this field is left blank, the basin heater
is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may
only operate when the chiller is off.

1.23.6.1.38 Field: Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity Fraction

This field is optional. It can be used to describe the physical size of the heat recovery portion of
a split bundle condenser section. This fraction describes the relative capacity of the heat recovery
bundle of a split condenser compared to the nominal, full load heat rejection rate of the chiller. This
fraction will be applied to the full heat rejection when operating at nominal capacity and nominal
COP to model a capacity limit for the heat rejection. If this field is not entered then the capacity
fraction is set to 1.0.

1.23.6.1.39 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet High Temperature Limit Schedule Name

This field is optional. It can be used to control heat recovery operation of the chiller. The schedule
named here should contain temperature values, in C, that describe an upper limit for the return fluid
temperatures entering the chiller at the heat recovery inlet node. If the fluid temperature is too
high, then the heat recovery will not operate. This is useful to restrict the chiller lift from becoming
too high and to avoid overheating the hot water loop. This limit can be used with or without the
alternate control using leaving setpoint that is set in the next field.

1.23.6.1.40 Field: Heat Recovery Leaving Temperature Setpoint Node Name

This field is optional. It can be used to refine the model and controls for heat recovery operation
of the chiller. The node named here should have a setpoint placed on it by a setpoint manager. If
the plant loop’s demand calculation scheme is set to SingleSetpoint, then a single setpoint manager
should be used. If the plant loop’s demand calculation is set to DualSetpointDeadband then a dual
setpoint manager should be used and the upper setpoint is used for control. When this field is used,
a different model is used for determining the distribution of rejected heat between the two bundles
that is more appropriate for series bundle arrangements and for chiller’s that are able to produce
relatively higher temperature heated fluids.
840 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.6.1.41 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the chiller will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29.44 , !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.682759 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.667 , !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0005 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.94483600 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.05700880 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.00185486 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
1.907846 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.20498700 , !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.26346230 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow; !- Chiller Flow Mode

An example of an Air-Cooled Chiller:

Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
AirCooled , !- Condenser Type
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.58, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.05, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.778 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.67, !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.002 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9949 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.045954 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.0013543 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
2.333 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.975, !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.6121 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 841

0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve

5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow; !- Chiller Flow Mode

OutdoorAir:Node ,
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Node Name
-1.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}

An example of an Evaporatively-Cooled Chiller:

Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Name
EvaporativelyCooled , !- Condenser Type
100000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.58, !- Nominal COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
0.05, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.778 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.67, !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.002 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9949 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.045954 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.0013543 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
2.333 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.975, !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.6121 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
, !- Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name
, !- Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name
, !- Sizing Factor
450, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
3, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
Basin heater sch; !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

OutdoorAir:Node ,
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Name
-1.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}

An example of a Heat Recovery Chiller:

Chiller:Electric ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29.44 , !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.682759 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.667 , !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
842 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}

0.0005 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.94483600 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.05700880 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-.00185486 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
1.907846 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.20498700 , !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.26346230 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
0.00055 , !- Design heat recovery water flow rate {m3/s}
Big Chiller Heat Rec Inlet Node , !- Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Heat Rec Outlet Node; !- Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name

1.23.6.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]

Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

Water-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 843

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

HeatRecovery:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Total Recovered Heat Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Chiller Total Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Effective Heat Rejection Temperature [C]

These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”

1.23.7 Chiller:Electric:EIR
This chiller model is the empirical model used in the DOE-2.1 building energy simulation program.
The model uses performance information at reference conditions along with three curve fits for cooling
capacity and efficiency to determine chiller operation at off-reference conditions. Chiller performance
curves can be generated by fitting manufacturer’s catalog data or measured data. Performance curves
for more than 160 chillers, including the default DOE-2.1E reciprocating and centrifugal chillers, are
provided in the EnergyPlus Reference DataSets (Chillers.idf and AllDataSets.idf).
Note: Chiller:Electric:EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are developed
using performance information for a specific chiller and should normally be used together for an
EnergyPlus simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between
chillers, should be done with caution.

1.23.7.1 Inputs

1.23.7.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric EIR chiller.

1.23.7.1.2 Field: Reference Capacity

This numeric field contains the reference cooling capacity of the chiller in Watts. This should be the
capacity of the chiller at the reference temperatures and water flow rates defined below. Alternately,
this field can be autosized.

1.23.7.1.3 Field: Reference COP

This numeric field contains the chiller’s coefficient of performance. This value should not include
energy use due to pumps or cooling tower fans. This COP should be at the reference temperatures
and water flow rates defined below. This value should include evap-cooled or air-cooled condenser
fans except when the Condenser Fan Power Ratio input field defined below is used and that input
value is greater than 0. For the case when condenser fan power is modeled separately, the calculated
condenser fan energy is reported on the same electric meter as compressor power. Be careful to not
duplicate this energy use.
844 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.7.1.4 Field: Reference Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s reference leaving chilled water temperature in Celsius. The
default value is 6.67°C.

1.23.7.1.5 Field: Reference Entering Condenser Fluid Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s reference entering condenser fluid temperature in Celsius.
The default value is 29.4°C. For water-cooled chillers this is the water temperature entering the
condenser (e.g., leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled condensers this is the entering
outdoor air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature, respectively.

1.23.7.1.6 Field: Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate

For a variable flow chiller this is the maximum water flow rate and for a constant flow chiller this
is the operating water flow rate through the chiller’s evaporator. The units are in cubic meters per
second. The minimum value for this numeric input field must be greater than zero, or this field can
be autosized.

1.23.7.1.7 Field: Reference Condenser Fluid Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the chiller’s operating condenser fluid flow rate in cubic meters per sec-
ond. This field can be autosized. This field is also used to enter the air flow rate if Condenser
Type = AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and Heat Recovery is specified. If AirCooled or Evapo-
rativelyCooled and this field is autosized, the air flow rate is set to 0.000114 m3/s/W (850 cfm/ton)
multiplied by the chiller Reference Capacity. For air- and evaporatively-cooled condensers, this flow
rate is used to set condenser outlet air node conditions and used for evaporatively-cooled condensers
to calculate water use rate.

1.23.7.1.8 Field: Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name

The name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the vari-
ation of the cooling capacity as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering
condenser fluid temperature. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference capacity to give
the cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from
the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and
flow rates specified above. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures
anticipated for the simulation.
Note: The curve is evaluated at the leaving chilled water (=evaporator outlet) setpoint temperature,
not the actual leaving chilled water temperature.

1.23.7.1.9 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Tempera-

ture Curve Name
The name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the
variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving chilled
water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the
COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to
give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the
reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 845

rates specified above. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures
anticipated for the simulation.

1.23.7.1.10 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
The name of a quadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the vari-
ation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio (EIRfTPLR). The EIR is
the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chiller’s
available cooling capacity. This curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input power by
the available full-load capacity (do not divide by load) at the specific operating temperatures. The
curve output should decrease from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. The output
of this curve is multiplied by the reference full-load EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the En-
ergy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve to give the EIR at the specific
temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller is operating. This curve should have a value
of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0. An ideal chiller with the same efficiency at all part-load
ratio’s would use a performance curve that has a value of 0 when the part-load ratio equals 0 (i.;e.,
a line connecting 0,0 and 1,1 when plotted as EIRfTPLR versus PLR), however, actual systems can
have part-load EIR’s slightly above or below this line (i.e., part-load efficiency often differs from
rated efficiency). The quadratic curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated
for the simulation.

1.23.7.1.11 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s minimum part-load ratio. The expected range is between 0
and 1. Below this part-load ratio, the compressor cycles on and off to meet the cooling load. The
Minimum Part Load Ratio must be less than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio. The default
value is 0.1.

1.23.7.1.12 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s maximum part-load ratio. This value may exceed 1, but the
normal range is between 0 and 1.0. The Maximum Part Load Ratio must be greater than or equal
to the Minimum Part Load Ratio. The default value is 1.0.

1.23.7.1.13 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio at which
the chiller performs at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater than or
equal to the Minimum Part Load Ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio.
The default value is 1.0.

1.23.7.1.14 Field: Minimum Unloading Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s minimum unloading ratio. The expected range is between
0 and 1. The minimum unloading ratio is where the chiller capacity can no longer be reduced by
unloading and must be false loaded to meet smaller cooling loads. A typical false loading strategy is
hot-gas bypass. The minimum unloading ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum Part
Load Ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio. The default value is 0.2.
846 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.7.1.15 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller plant side (chilled water) inlet
node.

1.23.7.1.16 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller plant side (chilled water) outlet
node.

1.23.7.1.17 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side inlet node. This node
name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or Evapora-
tivelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and a condenser inlet node name is
specified here, the node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where
the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air temperature from the
weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where
the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather data. If the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank, the program automatically creates an outdoor air
node and the air temperature information on this node is taken directly from the weather file (no
node height adjustment).

1.23.7.1.18 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side outlet node. This
node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank,
the program automatically creates a condenser side outlet air node.

1.23.7.1.19 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field determines what type of condenser will be modeled with this chiller. Valid condenser
types are AirCooled, WaterCooled, and EvaporativelyCooled with the default being WaterCooled
if not specified. AirCooled and EvaporativelyCooled do not require a Condenser Loop to be speci-
fied, whereas the WaterCooled option requires the full specification of the Condenser Loop and its
associated equipment.

1.23.7.1.20 Field: Condenser Fan Power Ratio

This field is used to model condenser fan power associated with air-cooled or evaporatively-cooled
condensers (for cooling towers, refer to Group - Condenser Equipment). Enter the ratio of the
condenser fan power to the reference chiller cooling capacity in W/W. If this input is greater than 0,
the condenser fan power is modeled seperatly from compressor power. In addition, if condenser fan
power is modeled using this input, the reference COP and “Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio
Function of” performance curves should not include condenser fan power.

1.23.7.1.21 Field: Fraction of Compressor Electric Power Rejected by Condenser

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 847

This numeric input represents the fraction of compressor electrical energy consumption that must be
rejected by the condenser. Enter a value of 1.0 when modeling hermetic chillers. For open chillers,
enter the compressor motor efficiency. This value must be greater than 0.0 and less than or equal to
1.0, with a default value of 1.0.

1.23.7.1.22 Field: Leaving Chilled Water Lower Temperature Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the leaving chilled water temperature in Celsius. This
temperature acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesn’t get too
cold. This input field is currently unused. The default value is 2°C.

1.23.7.1.23 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow
through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted
and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.

1.23.7.1.24 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This is the design heat recovery water flow rate if the heat recovery option is being simulated. If
this value is greater than 0.0 (or Autosize), a heat recovery loop must be specified and attached to
the chiller using the next two node fields. The units are in cubic meters per second. This field is
autosizable. When autosizing, the flow rate is simply the product of the design condenser flow rate
and the condenser heat recovery relative capacity fraction set in the field below. Note that heat
recovery is only available with Condenser Type = WaterCooled.

1.23.7.1.25 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller heat recovery side inlet node. If the
user wants to model chiller heat recovery, a heat recovery loop must be specified.

1.23.7.1.26 Field: Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller heat recovery side outlet node. If the
user wants to model chiller heat recovery, a heat recovery loop must be specified.

1.23.7.1.27 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The
sizing factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the inputs
that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Reference Capacity, Reference Chilled Water Flow
848 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Rate and Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component
to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.23.7.1.28 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the chiller’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. This field is used in
conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin
heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set
point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the
chiller is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must
be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.23.7.1.29 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater
is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as
the chiller is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default
value is 2˚C if this field is left blank.

1.23.7.1.30 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies
for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be
an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than
0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below
the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this field is left blank, the basin heater
is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may
only operate when the chiller is off.

1.23.7.1.31 Field: Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity Fraction

This field is optional. It can be used to describe the physical size of the heat recovery portion of
a split bundle condenser section. This fraction describes the relative capacity of the heat recovery
bundle of a split condenser compared to the nominal, full load heat rejection rate of the chiller. This
fraction will be applied to the full heat rejection when operating at nominal capacity and nominal
COP to model a capacity limit for the heat rejection. If this field is not entered then the capacity
fraction is set to 1.0.

1.23.7.1.32 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet High Temperature Limit Schedule Name

This field is optional. It can be used to control heat recovery operation of the chiller. The schedule
named here should contain temperature values, in C, that describe an upper limit for the return fluid
temperatures entering the chiller at the heat recovery inlet node. If the fluid temperature is too
high, then the heat recovery will not operate. This is useful to restrict the chiller lift from becoming
too high and to avoid overheating the hot water loop. This limit can be used with or without the
alternate control using leaving setpoint that is set in the next field.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 849

1.23.7.1.33 Field: Heat Recovery Leaving Temperature Setpoint Node Name

This field is optional. It can be used to refine the model and controls for heat recovery operation
of the chiller. The node named here should have a setpoint placed on it by a setpoint manager. If
the plant loop’s demand calculation scheme is set to SingleSetpoint, then a single setpoint manager
should be used. If the plant loop’s demand calculation is set to DualSetpointDeadband then a dual
setpoint manager should be used and the upper setpoint is used for control. When this field is used,
a different model is used for determining the distribution of rejected heat between the two bundles
that is more appropriate for series bundle arrangements and for chiller’s that are able to produce
relatively higher temperature heated fluilds.

1.23.7.1.34 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the chiller will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

! ElectricEIRChiller DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP

! A generic centrifugal chiller from DOE -2.1E
!
Chiller:Electric:EIR ,
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50COP , !- Chiller Name
Autosize , !- Reference Capacity {W}
5.5, !- Reference COP {W/W}
6.67, !- Reference Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
29.4, !- Reference Entering Condenser Fluid Temperature {C}
Autosize , !- Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize , !- Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP CAPFT , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP EIRFT , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP EIRFPLR ,!- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part
Load
Ratio Curve
0.1, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.2, !- Minimum Unloading Ratio
Chilled Water Side Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node
Chilled Water Side Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node
Condenser Side Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node
Condenser Side Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
, !- Condenser Fan Power Ratio {W/W}
1.0, !- Fraction of Compressor Electric Power Rejected by Condenser
2.0, !- Leaving Chilled Water Lower Temperature Limit {C}
ConstantFlow; !- Chiller Evaporator Flow Mode

!
! Curve set (3 Curves):
!
! Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve for open or hermetic water -cooled centrifugal
chillers
! x = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and y = Entering Condenser Water Temperature
! Same as DOE -2.1E HERM -CENT -CAP -FT (CCAPT3) and OPEN -CENT -CAP -FT (CCAPT1)
Curve:Biquadratic ,
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP CAPFT , !- Name
0.257896E+00, !- Coefficient1 Constant
850 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.389016E-01, !- Coefficient2 x
-0.217080E-03, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.468684E-01, !- Coefficient4 y
-0.942840E-03, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-0.343440E-03, !- Coefficient6 x*y
5.0, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
24.0, !- Minimum Value of y
35.0; !- Maximum Value of y
!
! Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve for open or hermetic water -
cooled centrifugal chillers
! x = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and y = Entering Condenser Water Temperature
! Same as DOE -2.1E HERM -CENT -EIR -FT (EIRT3) and OPEN -CENT -EIR -FT (EIRT1)
Curve:Biquadratic ,
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP EIRFT , !- Name
0.933884E+00, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-0.582120E-01, !- Coefficient2 x
0.450036E-02, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.243000E-02, !- Coefficient4 y
0.486000E-03, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-0.121500E-02, !- Coefficient6x*y
5.0, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
24.0, !- Minimum Value of y
35.0; !- Maximum Value of y
!
! Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve for open or hermetic
water -cooled centrifugal chillers
! x = Part Load Ratio (load/capacity)
! Same as DOE -2.1E HERM -CENT -EIR -FPLR (EIRPLR3) and OPEN -CENT -EIR -FPLR (EIRPLR1)
Curve:Quadratic ,
DOE -2 Centrifugal /5.50 COP EIRFPLR , !- Name
0.222903 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.313387 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.463710 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !- Minimum Value of x
1.0; !- Maximum Value of x

1.23.7.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 851

– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Cycling Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller False Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller False Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]

Curve object outputs:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Capacity Temperature Modifier Multiplier []

– HVAC,Average,Chiller EIR Temperature Modifier Multiplier []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller EIR Part Load Modifier Multiplier []

Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

Air-cooled or Evap-cooled reported only when the condenser fan power ratio input field is greater
than 0:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Fan Electric Consumption [J]

Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporative Condenser Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporative Condenser Mains Supply Water Volume [m3]

Water-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

HeatRecovery:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Total Recovered Heat Rate [W]

– Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heat Recovery [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Effective Heat Rejection Temperature [C]

Most of these chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” Output
variables not described above are discussed here.
852 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.7.2.1 Chiller Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.7.2.2 Chiller Condenser Fan Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are for the electric power consumption of the chiller condenser fan and are applicable
to air- or evaporatively-cooled chillers. These reports are available only for the Chiller:Electric:EIR
and only when the Condenser Fan Power Ratio input field is greater than 0. This output is also
added to a meter object with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Chillers, Group Key =
Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.23.7.2.3 Chiller Capacity Temperature Modifier Multiplier []

This is the output of the curve object Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve.

1.23.7.2.4 Chiller EIR Temperature Modifier Multiplier []

This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temper-
ature Curve.

1.23.7.2.5 Chiller EIR Part Load Modifier Multiplier []

This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Curve.

1.23.7.2.6 Chiller Part Load Ratio []

This output is the ratio of the evaporator heat transfer rate plus the false load heat transfer rate (if
applicable) to the available chiller capacity. This value is used to determine Chiller EIR Part Load
Modifier Multiplier.

1.23.7.2.7 Chiller Cycling Ratio []

The cycling ratio is the amount of time the chiller operates during each simulation timestep. If the
chiller part-load ratio falls below the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller cycles on and off to meet
the cooling load.

1.23.7.2.8 Chiller False Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.23.7.2.9 Chiller False Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These outputs are the heat transfer rate and total heat transfer due to false loading of the chiller.
When the chiller part-load ratio is below the minimum unloading ratio, the chiller false loads (e.g. hot-
gas bypass) to further reduce capacity. The false load heat transfer output variable is not metered.

1.23.7.2.10 Chiller Evaporative Condenser Water Volume [m3]

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 853

1.23.7.2.11 Chiller Evaporative Condenser Mains Supply Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the water use for evaporatively-cooled condensers. When the chiller operates, the
water consumed by the evaporatively-cooled condenser is proportional to the chiller condenser heat
transfer. The evaporative condenser is assumed to be 100% effective where the condenser inlet air
dry-bulb temperature is equal to the outdoor wet-bulb temperature.

1.23.8 Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR
This chiller model, developed through the CoolToolsTM project sponsored by Pacific Gas and Electric
Company (PG&E), is an empirical model similar to EnergyPlus’ Chiller:Electric:EIR model. The
model uses performance information at reference conditions along with three curve fits for cooling
capacity and efficiency to determine chiller operation at off-reference conditions. The model has the
same capabilities as the Chiller:Electric:EIR model, but can potentially provide significant accuracy
improvement over the Chiller:Electric:EIR model for variable-speed compressor drive and variable
condenser water flow applications. Chiller performance curves can be generated by fitting manufac-
turer’s catalog data or measured data. Performance curves developed from manufacturer’s perfor-
mance data are provided in the EnergyPlus Reference DataSets (Chillers.idf and AllDataSets.idf).
This chiller model can be used to predict the performance of various chiller types (e.g., reciprocating,
screw, scroll, and centrifugal) with water-cooled condensers.
The main difference between this model and the Chiller:Electric:EIR model is the condenser fluid
temperature used in the associated performance curves: the Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR model
uses the LEAVING condenser water temperature while the Chiller:Electric:EIR model uses the EN-
TERING condenser water temperature.
Note: Chiller:Electric:Reformulated EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are
developed using performance information for a specific chiller and should almost always be used
together for an EnergyPlus simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance
curves between chillers, should be done with extreme caution. For example, if the user wishes to
model a chiller size that is different from the reference capacity, it is highly recommended that the
reference flow rates be scaled proportionately to the change in reference capacity. Although this
model can provide more accurate prediction than the Chiller:Electric:EIR model, it requires more
performance data to develop the associated performance curves (at least 12 points from full-load
performance and 7 points from part-load performance).

1.23.8.1 Inputs

1.23.8.1.1 Field: Chiller Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for this chiller.

1.23.8.1.2 Field: Reference Capacity

This numeric field contains the reference cooling capacity of the chiller in Watts. This should be the
capacity of the chiller at the reference temperatures and water flow rates defined below. Alternately,
this field can be autosized.

1.23.8.1.3 Field: Reference COP

854 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This numeric field contains the chiller’s coefficient of performance. This value should not include
energy use due to pumps or cooling tower fans. This COP should be at the reference temperatures
and water flow rates defined below.

1.23.8.1.4 Field: Reference Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s reference leaving chilled water temperature in Celsius. The
default value is 6.67°C.

1.23.8.1.5 Field: Reference Leaving Condenser Water Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s reference leaving condenser water temperature in Celsius.
The default value is 35°C.

1.23.8.1.6 Field: Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate

For a variable flow chiller this is the maximum water flow rate and for a constant flow chiller this
is the operating water flow rate through the chiller’s evaporator. The units are in cubic meters per
second. The minimum value for this numeric input field must be greater than zero, or this field can
be autosized.

1.23.8.1.7 Field: Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the chiller’s operating condenser water flow rate in cubic meters per
second. The units are in cubic meters per second. The minimum value for this numeric input field
must be greater than zero, or this field can be autosized.

1.23.8.1.8 Field: Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name

The name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the
variation of the cooling capacity as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the leaving
condenser water temperature. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference capacity to give
the cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from
the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and
flow rates specified above. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures
anticipated for the simulation (otherwise the program issues warning messages).

1.23.8.1.9 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Tempera-

ture Curve Name
The name of the Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve. Valid
curve object types are Curve:Quadratic or Table:Lookup. The performance curve (ref: Performance
Curves) parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function
of the leaving chilled water temperature and the leaving condenser water temperature. The EIR is
the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the
reference COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures
different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference
temperatures and flow rates specified above. The biquadratic curve or the Table:Lookup should
be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation (otherwise the program
issues warning messages).
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 855

1.23.8.1.10 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Type
This choice field determines which type of the Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function
of Part Load Ratio Curve is used in the chiller modeling. Two curve types are available: (1) Type
LeavingCondenserWaterTemperature is based on the leaving condenser water temperature. (2) Type
Lift is based on the normalized lift, which is the temperature difference between the leaving condenser
water temperature and the leaving evaporator water temperature.

1.23.8.1.11 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
The name of performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation of the
energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving condenser water temperature and the part-load
ratio (EIRfTPLR). The form of this curve is based on the input for Electric Input to Cooling Output
Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve Type.
For the type of LeavingCondenserWaterTemperature, the curve object type should be Curve:Bicubic
or Table:Lookup that parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR)
as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the leaving condenser water temperature.
For the type of Lift, the curve object type should be Curve:ChillerPartLoadWithLift or Table:Lookup
that parameterizes the variation of EIR as a function of the normalized fractional Lift, normalized
Tdev and the PLR. Tdev is the difference between Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and Ref-
erence Chilled Water Temperature. Lift is the difference between the Leaving Condenser Water
Temperature and Leaving Chilled Water Temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the
part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chiller’s available cooling capacity. This
curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input power by the available full-load capacity
(do not divide by load) at the specific operating temperatures. The curve output should decrease
from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. The output of this curve is multiplied by
the reference full-load EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the Energy Input to Cooling Output
Ratio Function of Temperature Curve to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load
ratio at which the chiller is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference leaving
condenser water temperature with the part-load ratio equal to 1.0. An ideal chiller with the same
efficiency at all part-load ratio’s would use a performance curve that has a value of 0 when the
part-load ratio equals 0 (i.;e., a line connecting 0,0 and 1,1 when plotted as EIRfTPLR versus PLR),
however, actual systems can have part-load EIR’s slightly above or below this line (i.e., part-load
efficiency often differs from rated efficiency). The bicubic curve should be valid for the range of
condenser water temperatures and part-load ratios anticipated for the simulation (otherwise the
program issues warning messages).
Note: Although a bicubic curve requires 10 coefficients (ref. Curve:Bicubic), coefficients 7, 9 and 10
are typically not used in the performance curve described here and should be entered as 0 unless
sufficient performance data and regression accuracy exist to justify the use of these coefficients.
Additionally, coefficients 2, 3, and 6 should not be used unless sufficient temperature data is available
to accurately define the performance curve (i.e., negative values may result from insufficient data).

1.23.8.1.12 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s minimum part-load ratio. The expected range is between 0
and 1. Below this part-load ratio, the compressor cycles on and off to meet the cooling load. The
Minimum Part Load Ratio must be less than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio. The default
value is 0.1.
856 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.8.1.13 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s maximum part-load ratio. This value may exceed 1, but the
normal range is between 0 and 1.0. The Maximum Part Load Ratio must be greater than or equal
to the Minimum Part Load Ratio. The default value is 1.0.

1.23.8.1.14 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio at which
the chiller performs at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater than or
equal to the Minimum Part Load Ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio.
The default value is 1.0.

1.23.8.1.15 Field: Minimum Unloading Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s minimum unloading ratio. The expected range is between
0 and 1. The minimum unloading ratio is where the chiller capacity can no longer be reduced by
unloading and must be false loaded to meet smaller cooling loads. A typical false loading strategy is
hot-gas bypass. The minimum unloading ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum Part
Load Ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum Part Load Ratio. The default value is 0.2.

1.23.8.1.16 Field: Chilled Water Side Inlet Node

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller plant side (chilled water) inlet
node.

1.23.8.1.17 Field: Chilled Water Side Outlet Node

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller plant side (chilled water) outlet
node.

1.23.8.1.18 Field: Condenser Side Inlet Node

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side inlet node.

1.23.8.1.19 Field: Condenser Side Outlet Node

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side outlet node.

1.23.8.1.20 Field: Fraction of Compressor Electric Power Rejected by Condenser

This numeric input represents the fraction of compressor electrical energy consumption that must be
rejected by the condenser. Enter a value of 1.0 when modeling hermetic chillers. For open chillers,
enter the compressor motor efficiency. This value must be greater than 0.0 and less than or equal to
1.0, with a default value of 1.0.

1.23.8.1.21 Field: Leaving Chilled Water Lower Temperature Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the leaving chilled water temperature in Celsius. This
temperature acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the water doesn’t get too
cold. This input field is currently unused. The default value is 2°C.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 857

1.23.8.1.22 Field: Chiller Flow Mode Type

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow
through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted
and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.

1.23.8.1.23 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This is the design heat recovery water flow rate if the heat recovery option is being simulated. If
this value is greater than 0.0 (or autosize), a heat recovery loop must be specified and attached to
the chiller using the next two node fields. The units are in cubic meters per second. This field is
autosizable. When autosizing, the flow rate is simply the product of the design condenser flow rate
and the condenser heat recovery relative capacity fraction set in the field below.

1.23.8.1.24 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller heat recovery side inlet node. If the
user wants to model chiller heat recovery, a heat recovery loop must be specified and it can only be
used with a water-cooled condenser.

1.23.8.1.25 Field: Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller heat recovery side outlet node. If the
user wants to model chiller heat recovery, a heat recovery loop must be specified and it can only be
used with a water-cooled condenser.

1.23.8.1.26 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The
sizing factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the inputs
that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Reference Capacity, Reference Chilled Water Flow
Rate and Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component
to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.23.8.1.27 Field: Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity Fraction

This field is optional. It can be used to describe the physical size of the heat recovery portion of
a split bundle condenser section. This fraction describes the relative capacity of the heat recovery
bundle of a split condenser compared to the nominal, full load heat rejection rate of the chiller. This
fraction will be applied to the full heat rejection when operating at nominal capacity and nominal
COP to model a capacity limit for the heat rejection. If this field is not entered then the capacity
fraction is set to 1.0.
858 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.8.1.28 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet High Temperature Limit Schedule Name

This field is optional. It can be used to control heat recovery operation of the chiller. The schedule
named here should contain temperature values, in C, that describe an upper limit for the return fluid
temperatures entering the chiller at the heat recovery inlet node. If the fluid temperature is too
high, then the heat recovery will not operate. This is useful to restrict the chiller lift from becoming
too high and to avoid overheating the hot water loop. This limit can be used with or without the
alternate control using leaving setpoint that is set in the next field.

1.23.8.1.29 Field: Heat Recovery Leaving Temperature Setpoint Node Name

This field is optional. It can be used to refine the model and controls for heat recovery operation
of the chiller. The node named here should have a setpoint placed on it by a setpoint manager. If
the plant loop’s demand calculation scheme is set to SingleSetpoint, then a single setpoint manager
should be used. If the plant loop’s demand calculation is set to DualSetpointDeadband then a dual
setpoint manager should be used and the upper setpoint is used for control. When this field is used,
a different model is used for determining the distribution of rejected heat between the two bundles
that is more appropriate for series bundle arrangements and for chiller’s that are able to produce
relatively higher temperature heated fluilds.

1.23.8.1.30 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the chiller will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR ,
Main Chiller , !- Chiller Name
50000 , !- Reference Capacity {W}
3.99, !- Reference COP
6.67, !- Reference Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
35.0, !- Reference Leaving Condenser Water Temperature {C}
0.00898 , !- Reference Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.01122 , !- Reference Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Main Chiller RecipCapFT , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve
Main Chiller RecipEIRFT , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve
LeavingCondenserWaterTemperature !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part
Load Ratio Curve Type
Main Chiller RecipEIRFPLR , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part
Load Ratio Curve Name
0.01, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
1, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.07, !- Minimum Unloading Ratio
Main Chiller ChW Inlet , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node
Main Chiller ChW Outlet , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node
Main Chiller Cnd Inlet , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node
Main Chiller Cnd Outlet , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node
1, !- Fraction of Compressor Electric Power Rejected by
Condenser
2, !- Leaving Chilled Water Lower Temperature Limit {C}
ConstantFlow; !- Chiller Flow Mode
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 859

! Cooling capacity to rated capacity function of Temperature Curve

! x = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and y = Leaving Condenser Water Temperature

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Main Chiller RecipCapFT , !- Name
0.958546443 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.035168695 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.000124662 , !- Coefficient3 x\*\*2
-0.00274551 , !-Coefficient4y
-0.00005000 , !-Coefficient5y \*\*2
-0.00017234 , !-Coefficient6x \*y
5.00, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
20.00 , !- Minimum Value of y
40.94; !- Maximum Value of y

! Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve

! x = Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and y = Leaving Condenser Water Temperature

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Main Chiller RecipEIRFT , !- Name
0.732700123 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-0.00834360 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.000638530 , !- Coefficient3 x\*\*2
-0.00303753 , !-Coefficient4y
0.000484952 , !-Coefficient5y \*\*2
-0.00083584 , !-Coefficient6x \*y
5.00, !- Minimum Value of x
10.0, !- Maximum Value of x
20.00 , !- Minimum Value of y
40.94; !- Maximum Value of y

! Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
! x = Leaving Condenser water Temperature and y = Part Load Ratio

Curve:Bicubic ,
Main Chiller RecipEIRFPLR , !- Name
0.070862846 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.002787560 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.00000891 , !- Coefficient3 x\*\*2
0.230973399 , !-Coefficient4y
1.250442176 , !-Coefficient5y \*\*2
-0.00216102 , !-Coefficient6x \*y
0.000000 , !-Coefficient7x \*\*3
-0.56300936 , !-Coefficient8y \*\*3
0.000000 , !-Coefficient9x \*\*2\*y
0.000000 , !-Coefficient10x \*y\*\*2
20.00 , !- Minimum Value of x
40.94 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.01, !- Minimum Value of y
1.0; !- Maximum Value of y

1.23.8.2 Outputs

The output variables for Chiller:Electric:ReformulatedEIR are the same as the output variables for
Chiller:Electric:EIR (ref. Electric EIR Chiller Outputs). except for the Chiller Condenser Fan
Electricity Rate and Energy reports

1.23.9 Chiller:EngineDriven
1.23.9.1 Inputs

1.23.9.1.1 Field: Name

860 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the engine driven chiller.

1.23.9.1.2 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field determines what type of condenser will be modeled with this chiller. The 3 type of
condensers are AirCooled, WaterCooled, and EvaporativelyCooled with the default being AirCooled
if not specified. AirCooled and EvaporativelyCooled do not require a Condenser Loop to be specified,
where the WaterCooled option requires the full specification of the Condenser Loop and its associated
equipment.

1.23.9.1.3 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts.

1.23.9.1.4 Field: Nominal COP

This numeric field contains the chiller’s coefficient of performance (COP).

1.23.9.1.5 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller plant side inlet node.

1.23.9.1.6 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller plant side outlet node.

1.23.9.1.7 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side inlet node. This node
name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or Evapora-
tivelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and a condenser inlet node name is
specified here, the node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where
the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air temperature from the
weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where
the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather data. If the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank, the program automatically creates an outdoor air
node and the air temperature information on this node is taken directly from the weather file (no
node height adjustment).

1.23.9.1.8 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side outlet node. This
node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is AirCooled or
EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank,
the program automatically creates a condenser side outlet air node.

1.23.9.1.9 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s minimum part load ratio. The expected range is between 0
and 1. The minimum part load is not the load where the machine shuts off, but where the amount
of power remains constant to produce smaller loads than this fraction.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 861

1.23.9.1.10 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s maximum part load ratio. This value may exceed 1, but the
normal range is between 0 and 1.1.

1.23.9.1.11 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller’s optimum part load ratio. This is the part load ratio at which
the chiller performs at its maximum COP.

1.23.9.1.12 Field: Design Condenser Inlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s condenser inlet design temperature in Celsius.

1.23.9.1.13 Field: Temperature Rise Coefficient

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s temperature rise coefficient which is defined as the
ratio of the required change in condenser water temperature to a given change in chilled water
temperature, which maintains the capacity at the nominal value. This is calculated as the following
ratio:

T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.56)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated

where:
TCEntrequired = Required entering condenser air or water temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TCEntrated = Rated entering condenser air or water temperature at rated capacity.
TELvrequired = Required leaving evaporator water outlet temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TELvrated = Rated leaving evaporator water outlet temperature at rated capacity.

1.23.9.1.14 Field: Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the chiller’s evaporator outlet design temperature in Celsius.

1.23.9.1.15 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume chiller this is the maximum flow and for constant flow chiller this is the design
flow rate. The units are in cubic meters per second.

1.23.9.1.16 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the chiller’s design condenser water flow rate in cubic meters per second.
This field can be autosized. This field is not user for Condenser Type = AirCooled or Evaporative-
lyCooled.
862 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.9.1.17 Capacity Ratio Curve

The Capacity Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Available Capacity
to Nominal Capacity. The defining equation is:

AvailT oN ominalCapacityRatio = C1 + C2 ∆temp + C3 ∆2temp (1.57)

Where the Delta Temperature is defined as:

F ullLoadtoP owerRatio = C1 + C2 AvailT oN ominalCapRatio + C3 AvailT oN ominalCapRatio2

(1.58)
TempCondIn = Temperature entering the condenser (water or air temperature depending on con-
denser type).
TempCondInDesign = Design Condenser Inlet Temperature from User input above.
TempEvapOut = Temperature leaving the evaporator.
TempEvapOutDesign = Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature from User input above.
TempRiseCoefficient = User Input from above.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.9.1.18 Field: Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.19 Field: Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.20 Field: Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.21 Power Ratio Curve

The Power Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Full Load to Power.
The defining equation is:
F racF ullLoadP ower = C1 + C2 P artLoadRatio + C3 P artLoadRatio2 The following three fields
contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.9.1.22 Field: Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.23 Field: Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.24 Field: Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the power ratio curve.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 863

1.23.9.1.25 Full Load Ratio Curve

The Full Load Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the fraction of full load power.
The defining equation is:

CoolingLoadtoFuelCurve = C1 + C2 ∗ P LR + C3 ∗ P LR2 (1.59)

The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.9.1.26 Field: Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.27 Field: Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.28 Field: Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.9.1.29 Field Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the evaporator outlet temperature. This temperature
acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesn’t get too cold.

1.23.9.1.30 Field: Fuel Use Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of the Cooling Load to Fuel Use curve. The curve itself is specified
separately using the EnergyPlus Curve Manager. The Fuel Use Curve is a quadratic equation that
determines the ratio of Cooling Load to Fuel Energy. The defining equation is:

RecoveryJacketHeatT oF uelRatio = C1 + C2 RL + C3 RL2 (1.60)

where PLR is the Part Load Ratio from the Chiller. The Part Load Based Fuel Input Curve
determines the ratio of fuel energy per unit time (J/s) / cooling load (W). This is illustrated by the
logic block in the Engine Driven Chiller algorithm.
IF (PartLoadRat = = 0) THEN
EngineDrivenFuelEnergy = 0
ELSE
ClngLoadFuelRat = CurveValue( EngineDrivenChiller(ChillerNum)%ClngLoadtoFuelCurve , PartLoadRat )
EngineDrivenFuelEnergy = QEvaporator / ClngLoadFuelRat
END IF

1.23.9.1.31 Field: Jacket Heat Recovery Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of the Recovery Jacket Heat curve. The curve itself is specified
separately using the EnergyPlus Curve Manager. The Recovery Jacket Heat Curve is a quadratic
equation that determines the ratio of recovery jacket heat to fuel energy. The defining equation is:

RecoveryLubeHeatT oF uelRatio = C1 + C2 RL + C3 RL2 (1.61)

where RL is the Ratio of Load to Diesel Engine Capacity

864 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.9.1.32 Field: Lube Heat Recovery Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of the Recovery Lube Heat curve. The curve itself is specified
separately using the EnergyPlus Curve Manager. The Recovery Lubricant Heat Curve is a quadratic
equation that determines the ratio of recovery lube heat to fuel energy. The defining equation is:

T otalExhaustT oF uelRatio = C1 + C2 RL + C3 RL2 (1.62)

where RL is the Ratio of Load to Diesel Engine Capacity

1.23.9.1.33 Field: Total Exhaust Energy Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of the Total Exhaust Energy curve. The curve itself is specified
separately using the EnergyPlus Curve Manager. The Total Exhaust Energy Curve is a quadratic
equation that determines the ratio of total exhaust energy to fuel energy. The defining equation is:

AbsoluteExhaustT emperature = C1 + C2 RL + C3 RL2 (1.63)

where RL is the Ratio of Load to Diesel Engine Capacity

1.23.9.1.34 Field: Exhaust Temperature Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of the Exhaust Temperature curve. The curve itself is specified
separately using the EnergyPlus Curve Manager. The Exhaust Temperature Curve is a quadratic
equation that determines the absolute exhaust temperature. The defining equation is:

U AT oCapacityRatio = C1 EngineCapacity C2 (1.64)

where RL is the Ratio of Load to Diesel Engine Capacity

1.23.9.1.35 U-Factor Times Area Curve

The U-Factor Times Area (UA) is an equation that determines the overall heat transfer coefficient
for the exhaust gasses with the stack. The heat transfer coefficient ultimately helps determine the
exhaust stack temperature. The defining equation is:

T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.65)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated

The following two fields contain the coefficients for the equation.

1.23.9.1.36 Field: Coefficient 1 of U-Factor Times Area Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the overall heat transfer coefficient curve.

1.23.9.1.37 Field: Coefficient 2 of U-Factor Times Area Curve

This numeric field contains the second (exponential) coefficient for the overall heat transfer coefficient
curve.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 865

1.23.9.1.38 Field: Maximum Exhaust Flow per Unit of Power Output

This numeric field contains the maximum exhaust gas mass flow rate per watt of cooling provided
by the engine driven chiller

1.23.9.1.39 Field: Design Minimum Exhaust Temperature

This numeric field contains the steam saturation temperature in Celsius that would be used to
determine the energy recovered from a water jacket heat exchanger on the engine.

1.23.9.1.40 Field: Fuel Type

This alpha value specifies the type of fuel used in the engine. The fuel type can be NaturalGas,
Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, OtherFuel1 or OtherFuel2. This field is required.

1.23.9.1.41 Field: Fuel Higher Heating Value

This numeric field contains the higher heating value of the fuel used in kJ/kg.

1.23.9.1.42 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This optional numeric field is the design heat recovery plant fluid flow rate, if the heat recovery
option is being simulated. If this value is greater than 0.0, or autosize, then a heat recovery loop
must be specified and attached to the chiller using the next two node input fields. The units are
in cubic meters per second. This field is autosizable. When autosizing, the flow rate is simply
the product of the design condenser flow rate and the Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity
Fraction set in the field below.

1.23.9.1.43 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side inlet node. If a loop is
connected, then the jacket and lubricant heat will be recovered. There is no need for an effectiveness
term, since the jacket and lubricant recovered heat energies are the actual recovered energies.

1.23.9.1.44 Field: Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side outlet node.

1.23.9.1.45 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow
through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted
and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.
866 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.9.1.46 Field: Maximum Temperature for Heat Recovery at Heat Recovery

Outlet Node
This field sets the maximum temperature that this piece of equipment can produce for heat recovery.
The idea behind this field is that the current models do not take temperatures into account for
availability and they just pass Q’s around the loop without a temperature limit. This temperature
limit puts an upper bound on the recovered heat and limits the max temperatures leaving the
component.
As temperatures in the loop approach the maximum temperature, the temperature difference between
the entering water and the surfaces in the piece of equipment becomes smaller. For the given heat
recovery flow rate and that temperature difference the amount of heat recovered will be reduced,
and eventually there will be no heat recovered when the entering water temperature is equal to the
maximum temperature specified by the user in this field. The reduced amount of heat recovered will
diminish if the temperature of the loop approach is the maximum temperature, and this will show
up in the reporting. This allows the user to set the availability or the quality of the heat recovered
for usage in other parts of the system or to heat domestic hot water supply. The temperature is
specified in degrees C.

1.23.9.1.47 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity, Design Chilled Water Flow
Rate and Design Condenser Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component to
meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.23.9.1.48 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the chiller’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. This field is used in
conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin
heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set
point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the
chiller is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must
be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.23.9.1.49 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater
is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as
the chiller is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default
value is 2˚C if this field is left blank.

1.23.9.1.50 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies
for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be
an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 867

0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below
the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this field is left blank, the basin heater
is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may
only operate when the chiller is off.

1.23.9.1.51 Field: Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity Fraction

This field is optional. It can be used to describe the physical size of the heat recovery portion of
a split bundle condenser section. This fraction describes the relative capacity of the heat recovery
bundle of a split condenser compared to the nominal, full load heat rejection rate of the chiller. This
fraction will be applied to the full heat rejection when operating at nominal capacity and nominal
COP to model a capacity limit for the heat rejection. If this field is not entered then the capacity
fraction is set to 1.0.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Chiller:EngineDriven ,
Central Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Central Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Central Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Central Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Central Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
0.0, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.778 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.67, !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9949 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.045954 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.0013543 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
2.333 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.975, !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.6121 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
Fuel Use Curve , !- the Fuel Use Curve
Jacket Heat Recovery Curve , !- the Recovery Jacket Heat curve
Lube Heat Recovery Curve ,!- the Recovery Lube Heat curve
Total Exhaust Energy Curve , !- the Total Exhaust Energy curve
Exhaust Temperature Curve , !- the Exhaust Temperature curve
0.01516 , !- Coefficient1 of UA curve
0.9, !- Coefficient2 of UA curve
0.00063 , !- Maximum Exhaust Flow per W of Power Output {(kg/s)/W}
150, !- Design Minimum Exhaust temp. (Steam Saturation Temperature) {C}
DIESEL , !- Fuel Type
45500 , !- Fuel Heating Value {kJ/kg}
0.0, !- Design heat recovery water flow rate {m3/s}
, !- Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name
, !- Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
60.0; !- Maximum Temp for Heat Recovery. This sets max availability {C}

1.23.9.2 Outputs
868 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

HVAC ,Average ,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

HVAC ,Sum ,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
Zone ,Meter ,Electricity:Plant [J]
Zone ,Meter ,Cooling:Electricity [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Sum ,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
Zone ,Meter ,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
Zone ,Meter ,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Chiller COP [W/W]
HVAC ,Average ,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy Rate [W]
HVAC ,Sum ,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
Zone ,Meter ,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]

Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

Water-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Drive Shaft Power [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Drive Shaft Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Jacket Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Total Recovered Heat Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Total Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Exhaust Temperature [C]

One of the following blocks will be applicable based on fuel type:

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 869

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gas Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Gas Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gas Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Propane Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Propane Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Propane Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Diesel Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Diesel Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Diesel Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gasoline Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Gasoline Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Gasoline Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo1 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller FuelOilNo1 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo1 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo2 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller FuelOilNo2 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller FuelOilNo2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel1 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller OtherFuel1 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel1 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel2 Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller OtherFuel2 Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller OtherFuel2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.”

1.23.10 Chiller:CombustionTurbine
This chiller model is the empirical model from the Building Loads and System Thermodynamics
(BLAST) program. Chiller performance curves are generated by fitting catalog data to third order
polynomial equations. Three sets of coefficients are required.

1.23.10.1 Inputs

1.23.10.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller.
870 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.10.1.2 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field determines what type of condenser will be modeled with this chiller. The 3 type of
condensers are AirCooled, WaterCooled, and EvaporativelyCooled with the default being AirCooled
if not specified. AirCooled and EvaporativelyCooled do not require a Condenser Loop to be specified,
where the WaterCooled option requires the full specification of the Condenser Loop and its associated
equipment.

1.23.10.1.3 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts.

1.23.10.1.4 Field: Nominal COP

This numeric field contains the chiller’s coefficient of performance (COP).

1.23.10.1.5 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller plant side inlet
node.

1.23.10.1.6 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller plant side
inlet node.

1.23.10.1.7 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller plant side
outlet node.

1.23.10.1.8 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller condenser side
inlet node. This node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller
is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and a
condenser inlet node name is specified here, the node name specified must also be specified in an
OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating
outdoor air temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an
OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather
data. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field is left blank, the program
automatically creates an outdoor air node and the air temperature information on this node is taken
directly from the weather file (no node height adjustment).

1.23.10.1.9 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the combustion turbine chiller condenser side
outlet node. This node name is required if the chiller is WaterCooled, and optional if the chiller is
AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled. If the chiller is AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled and this field
is left blank, the program automatically creates a condenser side outlet air node.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 871

1.23.10.1.10 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the combustion turbine chiller’s minimum part load ratio. The expected
range is between 0 and 1. The minimum part load is not the load where the machine shuts off, but
where the amount of power remains constant to produce smaller loads than this fraction.

1.23.10.1.11 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the combustion turbine chiller’s maximum part load ratio. This value
may exceed 1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1.

1.23.10.1.12 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the combustion turbine chiller’s optimum part load ratio. This is the
part load ratio at which the chiller performs at its maximum COP.

1.23.10.1.13 Field: Design Condenser Inlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the combustion turbine chiller’s condenser inlet design temperature in
Celsius.

1.23.10.1.14 Field: Temperature Rise Coefficient

This numeric field contains the electric chiller’s temperature rise coefficient which is defined as the
ratio of the required change in condenser water temperature to a given change in chilled water
temperature, which maintains the capacity at the nominal value. This is calculated as the following
ratio:

T CEntrequired − T CEntrated
(1.66)
T ELvrequired − T ELvrated
where:
TCEntrequired = Required entering condenser air or water temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TCEntrated = Rated entering condenser air or water temperature at rated capacity.
TELvrequired = Required leaving evaporator water outlet temperature to maintain rated capacity.
TELvrated = Rated leaving evaporator water outlet temperature at rated capacity.

1.23.10.1.15 Field: Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature

This numeric field contains the combustion turbine chiller’s evaporator outlet design temperature in
Celsius.

1.23.10.1.16 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume chiller this is the maximum flow and for constant flow chiller this is the design
flow rate. The units are in cubic meters per second.

1.23.10.1.17 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the combustion turbine chiller’s design condenser water flow rate in
cubic meters per second. This field can be autosized. This field is not used for Condenser Type =
AirCooled or EvaporativelyCooled.
872 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.10.1.18 Capacity Ratio Curve

The Capacity Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Available Capacity
to Nominal Capacity. The defining equation is:

AvailT oN ominalCapacityRatio = C1 + C2 ∆temp + C3 ∆2temp (1.67)

Where the Delta Temperature is defined as:

F ullLoadtoP owerRatio = C1 + C2 AvailT oN ominalCapRatio + C3 AvailT oN ominalCapRatio2

(1.68)
TempCondIn = Temperature entering the condenser (water or air temperature depending on con-
denser type).
TempCondInDesign = Design Condenser Inlet Temperature from User input above.
TempEvapOut = Temperature leaving the evaporator.
TempEvapOutDesign = Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature from User input above.
TempRiseCoefficient = User Input from above.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.10.1.19 Field: Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.20 Field: Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.21 Field: Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the capacity ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.22 Power Ratio Curve

The Power Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Full Load to Power.
The defining equation is:
F racF ullLoadP ower = C1 + C2 P artLoadRatio + C3 P artLoadRatio2 The following three fields
contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.10.1.23 Field: Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.24 Field: Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the power ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.25 Field: Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the power ratio curve.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 873

1.23.10.1.26 Full Load Ratio Curve

The Full Load Ratio Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the fraction of full load power.
The defining equation is:

F uelEnergyInput = P Load∗(F IC1 +F IC2 RLoad+F IC3 RLoad2 )∗(T BF IC1 +T BF IC2 ATair +T BF IC3 ATair
2
)
(1.69)
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.10.1.27 Field: Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.28 Field: Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.29 Field: Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the full load ratio curve.

1.23.10.1.30 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the evaporator outlet temperature. This temperature
acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesn’t get too cold.

1.23.10.1.31 Fuel Input Curve

The Fuel Input Curve is a polynomial equation that determines the Ratio of Fuel Input to Energy
Output. The equation combines both the Fuel Input Curve Coefficients and the Temperature Based
Fuel Input Curve Coefficients. The defining equation is:

ExhaustF lowRate = GT Capacity ∗ (C1 + C2 ATair + C3 ATair

2
) (1.70)

where FIC represents the Fuel Input Curve Coefficients, TBFIC represents the Temperature Based
Fuel Input Curve Coefficients, Rload is the Ratio of Load to Combustion Turbine Engine Capacity,
and ATair is the difference between the current ambient and design ambient temperatures.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the fuel input curve.

1.23.10.1.32 Field: Coefficient 1 of Fuel Input Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the Fuel Input Curve.

1.23.10.1.33 Field: Coefficient 2 of Fuel Input Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the Fuel Input Curve.

1.23.10.1.34 Field: Coefficient 3 of Fuel Input Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the Fuel Input Curve.
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the temperature based fuel input curve.
874 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.10.1.35 Field: Coefficient 1 of Temperature Based Fuel Input Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the Temperature Based Fuel Input Curve.

1.23.10.1.36 Field: Coefficient 2 of Temperature Based Fuel Input Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the Temperature Based Fuel Input Curve.

1.23.10.1.37 Field: Coefficient 3 of Temperature Based Fuel Input Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the Temperature Based Fuel Input Curve.

1.23.10.1.38 Exhaust Flow Curve

The Exhaust Flow Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the Ratio of Exhaust Gas Flow
Rate to Engine Capacity. The defining equation is:
ExhaustT emperature = (C1 +C2 RLoad+C3 RLoad2 )∗(T BC1 +T BC2 ATair +T BC3 ATair
2 )−273.15

where GTCapacity is the Combustion Turbine Engine Capacity, and ATair is the difference between
the current ambient and design ambient temperatures.

1.23.10.1.39 Field: Coefficient 1 of Exhaust Flow Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the Exhaust Flow Curve.

1.23.10.1.40 Field: Coefficient 2 of Exhaust Flow Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the Exhaust Flow Curve.

1.23.10.1.41 Field: Coefficient 3 of Exhaust Flow Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the Exhaust Flow Curve.

1.23.10.1.42 Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve

The Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve is a polynomial equation that determines the Exhaust Gas
Temperature. The equation combines both the Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve Coefficients (Based
on the Part Load Ratio) and the (Ambient) Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve
Coefficients. The defining equation is:
RecoveryLubeEnergy = P Load ∗ (C1 + C2 RL + C3 RL2 )
where C represents the Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve Coefficients, TBC are the Temperature
Based Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve Coefficients, RLoad is the Ratio of Load to Combustion
Turbine Engine Capacity, and ATair is the difference between the actual ambient and design ambient
temperatures.

1.23.10.1.43 Field: Coefficient 1 of Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve.

1.23.10.1.44 Field: Coefficient 2 of Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 875

1.23.10.1.45 Field: Coefficient 3 of Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the Exhaust Gas Temperature Curve.

1.23.10.1.46 Field: Coefficient 1 of Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Tempera-

ture Curve
This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temperature
Curve.

1.23.10.1.47 Field: Coefficient 2 of Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Tempera-

ture Curve
This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temper-
ature Curve.

1.23.10.1.48 Field: Coefficient 3 of Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Tempera-

ture Curve
This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temperature
Curve.

1.23.10.1.49 Recovery Lubricant Heat Curve

The Recovery Lubricant Heat Curve is a quadratic equation that determines the recovery lube energy.
The defining equation is:

U AT oCapacityRatio = C1 GasT urbineEngineCapacity C2 (1.71)

where Pload is the engine load and RL is the Ratio of Load to Combustion Turbine Engine Capacity
The following three fields contain the coefficients for the quadratic equation.

1.23.10.1.50 Field: Coefficient 1 of Recovery Lube Heat Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the Recovery Lube Heat curve.

1.23.10.1.51 Field: Coefficient 2 of Recovery Lube Heat Curve

This numeric field contains the second coefficient for the Recovery Lube Heat curve.

1.23.10.1.52 Field: Coefficient 3 of Recovery Lube Heat Curve

This numeric field contains the third coefficient for the Recovery Lube Heat curve.

1.23.10.1.53 U-Factor Times Area Curve Curve

The U-Factor Times Area Curve (UA) is an equation that determines the overall heat transfer
coefficient for the exhaust gasses with the stack. The heat transfer coefficient ultimately helps
determine the exhaust stack temperature. The defining equation is:

AvailableCoolingCapacity = N ominalCoolingCapacity ∗ CoolCapf T (Tcw,l , Tcond ) (1.72)

The following two fields contain the coefficients for the equation.
876 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.10.1.54 Field: Coefficient 1 of U-Factor Times Area Curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient for the overall heat transfer coefficient curve.

1.23.10.1.55 Field: Coefficient 2 of U-Factor Times Area Curve

This numeric field contains the second (exponential) coefficient for the overall heat transfer coefficient
curve.

1.23.10.1.56 Field: Gas Turbine Engine Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the gas turbine engine in watts. This field is autosizable.
When autosized the field below called Turbine Engine Effciency can be used to scale the resulting
size.

1.23.10.1.57 Field: Maximum Exhaust Flow per Unit of Power Output

This numeric field contains the maximum exhaust gas mass flow rate per kilowatt of power out.

1.23.10.1.58 Field: Design Steam Saturation Temperature

This numeric field contains the design steam saturation temperature in Celsius.

1.23.10.1.59 Field: Fuel Higher Heating Value

This numeric field contains the higher heating value of the fuel used in kJ/kg.

1.23.10.1.60 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This optional numeric field is the design heat recovery plant fluid flow rate, if the heat recovery
option is being simulated. If this value is greater than 0.0, or autosize, then a heat recovery loop
must be specified and attached to the chiller using the next two node input fields. The units are
in cubic meters per second. This field is autosizable. When autosizing, the flow rate is simply
the product of the design condenser flow rate and the Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity
Fraction set in the field below.

1.23.10.1.61 Field: Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side inlet. If a loop is connected,
then the jacket and lubricant heat will be recovered. There is no need for an effectiveness term,
since the jacket and lubricant recovered heat energies are the actual recovered energies.

1.23.10.1.62 Field: Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side outlet.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 877

1.23.10.1.63 Field: Chiller Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device’s evaporator. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the
intended flow behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” Not-
Modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the chiller is
passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate
at varying flow rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller’s request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow
through the chiller – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted
and the requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.

1.23.10.1.64 Field: Fuel Type

This alpha field determines the type of fuel that the chiller uses. Valid choices are: NaturalGas,
Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, OtherFuel1 or OtherFuel2. The
default is NaturalGas.

1.23.10.1.65 Field: Heat Recovery Maximum Temperature

This field sets the maximum temperature that this piece of equipment can produce for heat recov-
ery. The idea behind this field is that the current models do not take temperatures into account
for availability and they just pass Q’s around the loop without a temperature limit. This tempera-
ture limit puts an upper bound on the recovered heat and limits the max temperatures leaving the
component.
As temperatures in the loop approach the maximum temperature, the temperature difference between
the entering water and the surfaces in the piece of equipment becomes smaller. For the given heat
recovery flow rate and that temperature difference the amount of heat recovered will be reduced,
and eventually there will be no heat recovered when the entering water temperature is equal to the
maximum temperature specified by the user in this field. The reduced amount of heat recovered will
diminish if the temperature of the loop approach is the maximum temperature, and this will show
up in the reporting. This allows the user to set the availability or the quality of the heat recovered
for usage in other parts of the system or to heat domestic hot water supply.
The temperature is specified in degrees C.

1.23.10.1.66 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity, Design Chilled Water Flow
Rate and Design Condenser Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component to
meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.23.10.1.67 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the chiller’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. This field is used in
878 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin
heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set
point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the
chiller is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must
be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.23.10.1.68 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater
is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as
the chiller is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default
value is 2˚C if this field is left blank.

1.23.10.1.69 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies
for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be
an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than
0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below
the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this field is left blank, the basin heater
is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may
only operate when the chiller is off.

1.23.10.1.70 Field: Condenser Heat Recovery Relative Capacity Fraction

This field is optional. It can be used to describe the physical size of the heat recovery portion of
a split bundle condenser section. This fraction describes the relative capacity of the heat recovery
bundle of a split condenser compared to the nominal, full load heat rejection rate of the chiller. This
fraction will be applied to the full heat rejection when operating at nominal capacity and nominal
COP to model a capacity limit for the heat rejection. If this field is not entered then the capacity
fraction is set to 1.0.

1.23.10.1.71 Field: Turbine Engine Efficiency

This field is optional. It can be used to scale the size of Gas Turbine Engine Capacity. the default
is 0.35.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Chiller:CombustionTurbine ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
30000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
2.75, !- COP
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
.15, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
.65, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
35.0, !- Design Condenser Inlet Temperature {C}
2.778 , !- Temperature Rise Coefficient
6.67, !- Design Chilled Water Outlet Temperature {C}
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 879

0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}

0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9949 , !- Coefficient 1 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.045954 , !- Coefficient 2 of Capacity Ratio Curve
-0.0013543 , !- Coefficient 3 of Capacity Ratio Curve
2.333 , !- Coefficient 1 of Power Ratio Curve
-1.975, !- Coefficient 2 of Power Ratio Curve
0.6121 , !- Coefficient 3 of Power Ratio Curve
0.03303 , !- Coefficient 1 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.6852 , !- Coefficient 2 of Full Load Ratio Curve
0.2818 , !- Coefficient 3 of Full Load Ratio Curve
5, !- Chilled Water Outlet Temperature Lower Limit {C}
9.41, !- Coefficient 1 of Fuel Input curve
-9.48, !- Coefficient 2 of Fuel Input curve
4.32, !- Coefficient 3 of Fuel Input curve
1.0044 , !- Coefficient 1 of Temperature Based Fuel Input curve
-0.0008 , !- Coefficient 2 of Temperature Based Fuel Input curve
0, !- Coefficient 3 of Temperature Based Fuel Input curve
15.63518363 , !- Coefficient 1 of Exhaust Flow curve
-0.03059999 , !- Coefficient 2 of Exhaust Flow curve
-0.0002 , !- Coefficient 3 of Exhaust Flow curve
916.992 , !- Coefficient 1 of Exhaust Gas Temperature curve
307.998 , !- Coefficient 2 of Exhaust Gas Temperature curve
79.992 , !- Coefficient 3 of Exhaust Gas Temperature curve
1.005 , !- Coefficient 1 of Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temperature c
0.0018 , !- Coefficient 2 of Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temperature c
0, !- Coefficient 3 of Temperature Based Exhaust Gas Temperature c
0.223 , !- Coefficient 1 of Recovery Lube Heat curve
-0.4, !- Coefficient 2 of Recovery Lube Heat curve
0.2286 , !- Coefficient 3 of Recovery Lube Heat curve
0.01907045 , !- Coefficient 1 of UA curve
0.9, !- Coefficient 2 of UA curve
50000 , !- Gas Turbine Engine Capacity {W}
0.00000504 , !- Maximum Exhaust Flow per Unit of Power Output {(kg/s)/W}
150, !- Design Steam Saturation Temperature {C}
43500 , !- Fuel Higher Heating Value {kJ/kg}
0.0, !- Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heat Recovery Inlet Node Name
, !- Heat Recovery Outlet Node Name
VariableFlow , !- Chiller Flow Mode
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
80.0; !- Heat Recovery Maximum Temperature {C}

1.23.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy Rate [W]
880 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]

Air-cooled or Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

Water-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Drive Shaft Power [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Drive Shaft Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Lube Recovered Heat Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Exhaust Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller <Fuel Type> Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller <Fuel Type> Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]

These chiller output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” The Fuel Type
input will determine which fuel type is displayed in the output. In this example with the user choice
of NaturalGas, you will have Gas Consumption.

1.23.11 ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired
This chiller is a direct fired absorption chiller-heater which is modeled using performance curves
similar to the equivalent chiller in DOE-2.1E. This type of chiller is unusual for EnergyPlus, because
it may be used in the same plant on both a chilled water supply branch and a hot water supply
branch. The chiller has six node connections for chilled water, condenser water, and hot water, and
can provide simultaneous heating and cooling. During simultaneous operation, the heating capacity
is reduced as the cooling load increases (for more details see below). Some equations are provided
below to help explain the function of the various performance curves. For a detailed description of
the algorithm and how the curves are used in the calculations, please see the Engineering Reference.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 881

1.23.11.1 Inputs

1.23.11.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller.

1.23.11.1.2 Field: Nominal Cooling Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts.

1.23.11.1.3 Field: Heating to Cooling Capacity Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the heating capacity divided by the cooling capacity
at rated conditions. The default is 0.8.

1.23.11.1.4 Field: Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous cooling fuel used divided by the
cooling capacity at rated conditions. The default is 0.97.

1.23.11.1.5 Field: Fuel Input to Heating Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous heating fuel used divided by the
nominal heating capacity. The default is 1.25.

1.23.11.1.6 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous electricity used divided by the
cooling capacity at rated conditions. If the chiller is both heating and cooling only the greater of
the computed cooling and heating electricity is used. The default is 0.01.

1.23.11.1.7 Field: Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous electricity used divided by the
nominal heating capacity. If the chiller is both heating and cooling, the greater of the cooling
electricity and heating eletricity is used. The default is 0.0.

1.23.11.1.8 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller chilled water side inlet node.
This node name must be the same as the inlet node name for the chilled water supply branch on
which this chiller is placed.

1.23.11.1.9 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller chilled water side outlet node.
882 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.11.1.10 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side inlet node. If
the Chiller is AirCooled, the node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air dry-
bulb temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an Out-
doorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is taken directly from the
weather data.

1.23.11.1.11 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side outlet node. It is required
for WaterCooled chillers but not for AirCooled.

1.23.11.1.12 Field: Hot Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller-heater hot water side inlet
node. This node name must be the same as the inlet node name for the hot water supply branch on
which this chiller-heater is placed.

1.23.11.1.13 Field: Hot Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller-heater hot water side outlet
node.

1.23.11.1.14 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the minimum cooling or heating output possible when operated
continually at rated temperature conditions divided by the available cooling or heating capacity at
those same conditions. If the load on the chiller is below this fraction, the chiller will cycle. If the
chiller is simultaneously heating and cooling, the greater part load ratio will be used. The default is
0.1.

1.23.11.1.15 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the maximum cooling or heating output possible when operated
continually at rated temperature conditions divided by the available cooling or heating capacity at
those same conditions. If greater than 1.0, the chiller is typically thought of as capable of being
overloaded. The default is 1.0.

1.23.11.1.16 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the optimum cooling or heating output possible when operated
continually at rated temperature conditions divided by the available cooling or heating capacity at
those same conditions. It represents the most desirable operating point for the chiller. The default
is 1.0.

1.23.11.1.17 Field: Design Entering Condenser Water Temperature

The temperature in degrees C of the water entering the condenser of the chiller when operating at
design conditions. This is usually based on the temperature delivered by the cooling tower in a water
cooled application. The default is 29C.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 883

1.23.11.1.18 Field: Design Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

The temperature in degrees C of the water leaving the evaporator of the chiller when operating at
design conditions; also called the chilled water supply temperature or leaving chilled water temper-
ature. The default is 7C.

1.23.11.1.19 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume this is the max flow and for constant flow this is the chilled water flow rate in
m3 /s.

1.23.11.1.20 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

The water flow rate at design conditions through the condenser in m3 /s. This field can be autosized.
This field can be autosized. This field is not used for Condenser Type = AirCooled.

1.23.11.1.21 Field: Design Hot Water Flow Rate

The water flow rate at design conditions through the heater side in m3 /s.

1.23.11.1.22 Field: Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name

The CoolCapfT curve represents the fraction of the cooling capacity of the chiller as it varies by
temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the value of the curve should
be 1.0. The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the
leaving chilled water temperature and either the entering or leaving condenser water temperature
(see Temperature Curve Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the
condenser inlet node (outdoor air node) is used for the condenser temperature. The available cooling
capacity is computed as follows:

CoolFuelInput =
(1.73)
AvailCoolCap · RunFrac · CFIR · CFIRfT(Tcw,l , Tcond ) · CFIRfPLR(CPLR)

1.23.11.1.23 Field: Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature

Curve Name
The CFIRfT curve represents the fraction of the fuel input to the chiller at full load as it varies by
temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the value of the curve should
be 1.0. The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the
leaving chilled water temperature and either the entering or leaving condenser water temperature
(see Temperature Curve Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the
condenser inlet node (outdoor air node) is used for the condenser temperature.

1.23.11.1.24 Field: Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
The CFIRfPLR curve represents the fraction of the fuel input to the chiller as the load the chiller
varies but the operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized so that
at full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic. The
cooling fuel input to the chiller is computed as follows:
884 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

CoolElectricPower =
(1.74)
NomCoolCap · RunFrac · CEIR · CEIRfT(Tcw,l , Tcond ) · CEIRfPLR(CPLR)

1.23.11.1.25 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temper-

ature Curve Name
The ElecCoolFT curve represents the fraction of the electricity to the chiller at full load as it varies
by temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the of the curve should be 1.0.
The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the leaving chilled
water temperature and either the entering or leaving condenser water temperature (see Temperature
Curve Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the condenser inlet node
(outdoor air node) is used for the condenser temperature.

1.23.11.1.26 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part

Load Ratio Curve Name
The ElecCoolFPLR curve represents the fraction of the electricity to the chiller as the load on the
chiller varies but This operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized
so that at full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic.
The cooling electric input to the chiller is computed as follows:

AvailHeatCap = N omCoolCap · HeatCoolCapRatio · HeatCapf CP LR(CP LRh) (1.75)

1.23.11.1.27 Field: Heating Capacity Function of Cooling Capacity Curve Name

The HeatCapFCool curve represents how the heating capacity of the chiller varies with cooling
capacity when the chiller is simultaeous heating and cooling. The curve is normalized so an input of
1.0 represents the nominal cooling capacity and an output of 1.0 represents the full heating capacity
(see the Heating to Cooling Capacity Ratio input) The curve is usually linear or quadratic. The
available heating capacity is computed as follows:

HeatF uelInput = AvailHeatCap · HF IR · HF IRf HP LR(HP LR) (1.76)

1.23.11.1.28 Field: Fuel Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only Op-
eration Curve Name
When the chiller is operating as only a heater, the curve is used to represent the fraction of fuel
used as the heating load varies. It is normalized so that a value of 1.0 is the full available heating
capacity. The curve is usually linear or quadratic and will probably be similar to a boiler curve for
most chillers.

AvailCoolCap = N omCoolCap · CoolCapf T (Tcw,l , Tcond ) (1.77)

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 885

1.23.11.1.29 Field: Temperature Curve Input Variable

This field sets the second independent variable in the three temperature dependent performance
curves to either the leaving or entering condenser water temperature. Manufacturers express the
performance of their chillers using either the leaving condenser water temperature (to the tower)
or the entering condenser water temperature (from the tower). Valid choices for this field are:
LeavingCondenser or EnteringCondenser. It is important that the performance curves and this field
are consistent with each other. The default is EnteringCondenser.

1.23.11.1.30 Field: Condenser Type

The condenser can either be air cooled or connected to a cooling tower. This alpha field contains the
keyword for the type of condenser, either AirCooled, or WaterCooled. The default is WaterCooled.

1.23.11.1.31 Field: Chilled Water Temperature Lower Limit

The chilled water supply temperature in degrees C below which the chiller will shut off. The default
is 2C.

1.23.11.1.32 Field: Fuel Higher Heating Value

The fuel higher heating value in kJ/kg. This field is not currently used.

1.23.11.1.33 Field: Fuel Type

This alpha field determines the type of fuel that the chiller uses. The default is NaturalGas. Valid
values are NaturalGas, Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, OtherFuel1,
OtherFuel2.

1.23.11.1.34 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Cooling Capacity, Design Chilled
Water Flow Rate, Design Condenser Water Flow Rate and Design Hot Water Flow Rate. Sizing
Factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use
the autosizing feature.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

ChillerHeater:Absorption:DirectFired ,
Big Chiller , !- Chiller Name
100000 , !- Nominal Cooling Capacity {W}
0.8, !- Heating to Cooling capacity ratio
0.97, !- Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio
1.25, !- Fuel Input to Heating Output Ratio
0.01, !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio
0.005 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio
Big Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Big Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Purchased Heat Inlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Inlet Node Name
Purchased Heat Outlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Outlet Node Name
0.000001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
886 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio

0.6, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29, !- Design Entering Condenser Water Temperature {C}
7, !- Design Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0043 , !- Design Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
GasAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
GasAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve
Name
GasAbsLinearQuad , !- Fuel Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
GasAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature
Curve Name
GasAbsFlatQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
GasAbsInvLinearQuad , !- Heating Capacity Function of Cooling Capacity Curve Name
GasAbsLinearQuad , !- Fuel Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only Operation
Curve Name
EnteringCondenser , !- Temperature Curve Input Variable
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
2, !- Chilled Water Temperature Lower Limit {C}
0, !- Fuel Higher Heating Value {kJ/kg}
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
1.0; !- Sizing Factor

1.23.11.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller <Fuel Type> Consumption [J]
– Zone,Meter,<Fuel Type>:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling:<Fuel Type> [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]

The following output is applicable only for air-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 887

The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Outputs specific to Direct Fired Absorption Chiller

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Runtime Fraction []

Outputs specific to Direct Fired Absorption Chiller during cooling operation

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Cooling <Fuel Type> Consumption [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Part Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling COP [W/W]

Outputs specific to Direct Fired Absorption Chiller during heating operation

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Heating <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The “Chiller” output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” The specific
“Direct Fired Absorption Chiller” output variables and exceptions to the generic outputs are defined
below.

1.23.11.2.1 Chiller Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.2 Chiller Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller when operating in cooling mode, heating
mode, or both. This value is not metered, but the separate cooling and heating electric consumption
are metered (see below).
888 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.11.2.3 Chiller Heater <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.4 Chiller Heater <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

These outputs are the fuel input to the chiller when operating in cooling mode, heating mode, or
both depending on the fuel type entered. This value is not metered, but the separate cooling and
heating fuel consumption are metered (see below).

1.23.11.2.5 Chiller Heater Runtime Fraction []

This is the average fraction of the time period during which the direct fired absorption chiller-heater
was operating in either cooling mode, heating mode, or both.

1.23.11.2.6 Chiller Heater Cooling <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.7 Chiller Heater Cooling <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

These outputs are the fuel input to the direct fired absorption chiller to serve cooling operation.
Consumption is metered on Cooling:<Fuel Type>, <Fuel Type>:Plant, and <Fuel Type>:Facility.

1.23.11.2.8 Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.9 Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electricity input to the direct fired absorption chiller to serve cooling operation.
Consumption is metered on Cooling:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.11.2.10 Chiller Heater Cooling Rate [W]

This is the average available cooling capacity for the reported time period.

1.23.11.2.11 Chiller Heater Cooling Part Load Ratio

This is the average cooling load (Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]) divided by the average
available cooling capacity (Chiller Heater Cooling Rate [W]) for the reported time period.

1.23.11.2.12 Chiller Heater Cooling COP

This is the average coefficient of performance for the chiller in cooling operation, calculated as the
average cooling load (Chiller Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]) divided by the average fuel consumption
during cooling (Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]) for
the reported time period. If the chiller cooling fuel consumption rate (denominator) is zero, then
this output variable is set to zero.

1.23.11.2.13 Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.14 Chiller Heater Heating Energy [J]

These outputs are the heating delivered by the direct fired absorption chiller-heater to serve heating
operation. Energy is metered on Boilers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTrans-
fer:Facility.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 889

1.23.11.2.15 Chiller Heater Heating <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.16 Chiller Heater Heating <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

These outputs are the fuel input to the direct fired absorption chiller-heater to serve heating
operation. Consumption is metered on Heating:<Fuel Type>, <Fuel Type>:Plant, and <Fuel
Type>:Facility.

1.23.11.2.17 Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.11.2.18 Chiller Heating Heating Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the direct fired absorption chiller to serve heating
operation. Consumption is metered on Heating:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.11.2.19 Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]

This is the average available heating capacity for the reported time period.

1.23.11.2.20 Chiller Heater Heating Part Load Ratio

This is the average heating load (Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]) divided by the average available
heating capacity (Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]) for the reported time period.

1.23.11.2.21 Chiller Heater Heating Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.11.2.22 Chiller Heater Heating Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.11.2.23 Chiller Heater Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for the direct fired
absorption chiller-heater during heating mode operation.

1.23.12 ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect
This chiller is an exhaust fired absorption chiller-heater which is modeled using performance curves
similar to the direct fired absorption chiller in DOE-2.1E. The model uses the exhaust gas output
from MicroTurbine. This type of chiller is unusual for EnergyPlus, because it may be used in the
same plant on both a chilled water supply branch and a hot water supply branch. The chiller has six
node connections for chilled water, condenser water, and hot water, and can provide simultaneous
heating and cooling. During simultaneous operation, the heating capacity is reduced as the cooling
load increases (for more details see below). Some equations are provided below to help explain the
function of the various performance curves. For a detailed description of the algorithm and how the
curves are used in the calculations, please see the Engineering Reference.

1.23.12.1 Inputs

1.23.12.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller.
890 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.12.1.2 Field: Nominal Cooling Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capability of the chiller in Watts. Autosize can be
used for this field.

1.23.12.1.3 Field: Heating to Cooling Capacity Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the heating capacity divided by the cooling capacity
at rated conditions. The default is 0.8.

1.23.12.1.4 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous cooling Thermal Energy used
divided by the cooling capacity at rated conditions. The default is 0.97.

1.23.12.1.5 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Heating Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous heating Thermal Energy used
divided by the nominal heating capacity. The default is 1.25.

1.23.12.1.6 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous electricity used divided by the
cooling capacity at rated conditions. If the chiller is both heating and cooling only the greater of
the computed cooling and heating electricity is used. The default is 0.01.

1.23.12.1.7 Field: Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the ratio of the instantaneous electricity used divided by the
nominal heating capacity. If the chiller is both heating and cooling, the greater of the cooling
electricity and heating eletricity is used. The default is 0.0.

1.23.12.1.8 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller chilled water side inlet node.
This node name must be the same as the inlet node name for the chilled water supply branch on
which this chiller is placed.

1.23.12.1.9 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller chilled water side outlet node.

1.23.12.1.10 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side inlet node. If
the Chiller is AirCooled, the node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air dry-
bulb temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an Out-
doorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is taken directly from the
weather data.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 891

1.23.12.1.11 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller condenser side outlet node. It is required
for WaterCooled chillers but not for AirCooled.

1.23.12.1.12 Field: Hot Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller-heater hot water side inlet
node. This node name must be the same as the inlet node name for the hot water supply branch on
which this chiller-heater is placed.

1.23.12.1.13 Field: Hot Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the chiller-heater hot water side outlet
node.

1.23.12.1.14 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the minimum cooling or heating output possible when operated
continually at rated temperature conditions divided by the available cooling or heating capacity at
those same conditions. If the load on the chiller is below this fraction, the chiller will cycle. If the
chiller is simultaneously heating and cooling, the greater part load ratio will be used. The default is
0.1.

1.23.12.1.15 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the maximum cooling or heating output possible when operated
continually at rated temperature conditions divided by the available cooling or heating capacity at
those same conditions. If greater than 1.0, the chiller is typically thought of as capable of being
overloaded. The default is 1.0.

1.23.12.1.16 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

A positive fraction that represents the optimum cooling or heating output possible when operated
continually at rated temperature conditions divided by the available cooling or heating capacity at
those same conditions. It represents the most desirable operating point for the chiller. The default
is 1.0.

1.23.12.1.17 Field: Design Entering Condenser Water Temperature

The temperature in degrees C of the water entering the condenser of the chiller when operating at
design conditions. This is usually based on the temperature delivered by the cooling tower in a water
cooled application. The default is 29°C.

1.23.12.1.18 Field: Design Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

The temperature in degrees C of the water leaving the evaporator of the chiller when operating at
design conditions; also called the chilled water supply temperature or leaving chilled water temper-
ature. The default is 7°C.
892 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.12.1.19 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

For variable volume this is the max flow and for constant flow this is the chilled water flow rate in
m3 /s. This field can be autosized.

1.23.12.1.20 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

The water flow rate at design conditions through the condenser in m3 /s. This field can be autosized.
This field is not used for Condenser Type = AirCooled.

1.23.12.1.21 Field: Design Hot Water Flow Rate

The water flow rate at design conditions through the heater side in m3 /s. This field can be autosized.

1.23.12.1.22 Field: Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name

The CoolCapfT curve represents the fraction of the cooling capacity of the chiller as it varies with
temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the value of the curve should
be 1.0. The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the
leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser water temperature (see Temperature
Curve Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the condenser inlet
node (outdoor air node) is used for the condenser temperature. The available cooling capacity is
computed as follows:

CoolThermalEnergyInput = AvailCoolCap · RunFrac · TeFIR·

(1.78)
TeFIRfT (Tcw,l , Tcond ) · TeFIRfPLR(CPLR)

1.23.12.1.23 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of

Temperature Curve Name
The TeFIRfT curve represents the fraction of the Thermal Energy Input to the chiller at full load as it
varies with temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the value of the curve
should be 1.0. The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the
leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser water temperature (see Temperature
Curve Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the condenser inlet node
(outdoor air node) is used for the condenser temperature.

1.23.12.1.24 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of

Part Load Ratio Curve Name
The TeFIRfPLR curve represents the fraction of the Thermal Energy Input to the chiller as the
load on the chiller varies but the operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is
normalized so that at full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or
quadratic.
The cooling Thermal Energy Input to the chiller is computed as follows:

CoolElectricP ower = N omCoolCap·RunF rac·CEIR·CEIRf T (Tcw,l , Tcond )·CEIRf P LR(CP LR)

(1.79)
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 893

1.23.12.1.25 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temper-

ature Curve Name
The CEIRfT curve represents the fraction of the electricity to the chiller at full load as it varies with
temperature. The curve is normalized so that at design conditions the of the curve should be 1.0.
The curve is usually a biquadratic or bilinear curve with the input variables being the leaving chilled
water temperature and either the entering or leaving condenser water temperature (see Temperature
Curve Input Variable below). If the chiller is AirCooled, the temperature of the condenser inlet node
(outdoor air node) is used for the condenser temperature.

1.23.12.1.26 Field: Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part

Load Ratio Curve Name
The CEIRfPLR curve represents the fraction of the electricity to the chiller as the load on the chiller
varies but This operating temperatures remain at the design values. The curve is normalized so
that at full load the value of the curve should be 1.0. The curve is usually linear or quadratic.
The cooling electric input to the chiller is computed as follows:

AvailHeatCap = N omCoolCap · HeatCoolCapRatio · HeatCapf CP LR(CP LRh) (1.80)

1.23.12.1.27 Field: Heating Capacity Function of Cooling Capacity Curve Name

The HeatCapFCPLR curve represents how the heating capacity of the chiller varies with cooling
capacity when the chiller is simultaneously heating and cooling. The curve is normalized so an
input of 1.0 represents the nominal cooling capacity and an output of 1.0 represents the full heating
capacity (see the Heating to Cooling Capacity Ratio input) The curve is usually linear or quadratic.
The available heating capacity is computed as follows:

HeatT hermalEnergyInput = AvailHeatCap · HF IR · HF IRf HP LR(HP LR) (1.81)

1.23.12.1.28 Field: Thermal Energy Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating
Only Operation Curve Name
When the chiller is operating as only a heater, the curve is used to represent the fraction of Thermal
Energy used as the heating load varies. It is normalized so that a value of 1.0 is the full available
heating capacity. The curve is usually linear or quadratic and will probably be similar to a boiler
curve for most chillers.
The heating Thermal Energy Input to the chiller is computed as follows:

BoilerLoad
T heoreticalF uelU se = (1.82)
N ominalT hermalEf f iciency

1.23.12.1.29 Field: Temperature Curve Input Variable

This field sets the second independent variable in the three temperature dependent performance
curves to the entering condenser water temperature. Manufacturers express the performance of
their chillers typically using the entering condenser water temperature (from the tower). ). This
894 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

alpha field contains the keyword for the type of temperature input variable, , either Entering-
CondenserTemperature, or LeavingCondenserTemperature. The default is EnteringCon-
denserTemperature.

1.23.12.1.30 Field: Condenser Type

The condenser can either be air cooled or water cooled (connected to a cooling tower). This alpha
field contains the keyword for the type of condenser, either AirCooled, or WaterCooled. The default
is WaterCooled.

1.23.12.1.31 Field: Chilled Water Temperature Lower Limit

The chilled water supply temperature in degrees C below which the chiller will shut off. The default
is 2°C.

1.23.12.1.32 Field: Exhaust Source

This alpha field determines the type of exhaust source the chiller uses. The default is MicroTurbine.
Key Generator:MicroTurbine

1.23.12.1.33 Field: Exhaust Source Object

This alpha field shows the name of the Exhaust source object – a Generator:MicroTurbine in this
case

1.23.12.1.34 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. Min value
should not be less than 0 and here is no max. The default is 1. The sizing factor is used when the
component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are performed as usual and the
results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the inputs that would be altered by
the sizing factor are: Nominal Cooling Capacity, Design Chilled Water Flow Rate, Design Condenser
Water Flow Rate and Design Hot Water Flow Rate. Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component
to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

ChillerHeater:Absorption:DoubleEffect ,
Exh Chiller , !- Chiller Name
100000 , !- Nominal Cooling Capacity {W}
0.8, !- Heating to Cooling capacity ratio
0.97, !- Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio
1.25, !- Thermal Energy Input to Heating Output Ratio
0.01, !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio
0.005 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio
Exh Chiller Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Inlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Side Outlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Condenser Inlet Node , !- Condenser Side Inlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Condenser Outlet Node , !- Condenser Side Outlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Heating Inlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Inlet Node Name
Exh Chiller Heating Outlet Node , !- Hot Water Side Outlet Node Name
0.000001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.6, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
29, !- Design Entering Condenser Water Temperature {C}
7, !- Design Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
0.0011 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 895

0.0011 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}

0.0043 , !- Design Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
ExhAbsorb_CapFt , !- Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
ExhAbsorb_EIRFt , !- Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Temperature Curve Name
ExhAbsorb_PLR , !- Thermal Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
ExhAbsFlatBiQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature
Curve Name
ExhAbsFlatQuad , !- Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio
Curve Name
ExhAbsInvLinearQuad , !- Heating Capacity Function of Cooling Capacity Curve Name
ExhAbsLinearQuad , !- Thermal Energy Input to Heat Output Ratio During Heating Only
Operation Curve Name
EnteringCondenser , !- Temperature Curve Input Variable
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
2, !- Chilled Water Temperature Lower Limit {C}
Generator:MicroTurbine ; ! Field Exhaust Source Object Type
Capston500 ; ! Field Exhaust Source name
1.0; !- Sizing Factor

1.23.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The following output is applicable only for air-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Outputs specific to Exhaust Fired Absorption Chiller

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Runtime Fraction []

Outputs specific to Exhaust Fired Absorption Chiller during cooling operation

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Energy [J]
896 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Part Load Ratio

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Maximum Cooling Rate [W]HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cool-
ing Source Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average, Chiller Heater Cooling Source Heat COP [W/W]
– HVAC,Average, Chiller Heater Source Exhaust Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Chiller Heater Source Exhaust Inlet Temperature [C]

Outputs specific to Exhaust Fired Absorption Chiller during heating operation

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Heating:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Part Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Maximum Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Source Heat Transfer Rate
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The “Chiller” output variables are defined above under “Generic Chiller Outputs.” The specific
“Exhaust Fired Absorption Chiller” output variables and exceptions to the generic outputs are
defined below.

1.23.12.2.1 Chiller Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.12.2.2 Chiller Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller when operating in cooling mode, heating
mode, or both. This value is not metered, but the separate cooling and heating electric consumption
are metered (see below).

1.23.12.2.3 Chiller Heater Runtime Fraction []

This is the average fraction of the time period during which the Exhaust Fired absorption chiller-
heater was operating in either cooling mode, heating mode, or both.
These outputs are the electricity input to the Exhaust Fired absorption chiller heater to serve cooling
operation. Consumption is metered on Cooling:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.12.2.4 Chiller Heater Maximum Cooling Rate [W]

This is the average available cooling capacity for the reported time period.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 897

1.23.12.2.5 Chiller Heater Cooling Part Load Ratio []

This is the average cooling load (Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]) divided by the average
available cooling capacity (Chiller Heater Maximum Cooling Rate [W]) for the reported time period.

1.23.12.2.6 Chiller Heater Cooling Source Heat COP [W/W]

This is the average coefficient of performance for the chiller in cooling operation, calculated as the
average cooling load (Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]) divided by the average thermal
energy use during cooling (Chiller Heater Cooling Source Heat Transfer Rate [W]) for the reported
time period. If the chiller cooling thermal energy use rate (denominator) is zero, then this output
variable is set to zero.

1.23.12.2.7 Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]

1.23.12.2.8 Chiller Heater Heating Energy [J]

1.23.12.2.9 Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.12.2.10 Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the Exhaust Fired absorption chiller to serve heating
operation. Consumption is metered on Heating:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.12.2.11 Chiller Heater Maximum Heating Rate [W]

This is the average available heating capacity for the reported time period.

1.23.12.2.12 Chiller Heater Heating Part Load Ratio []

This is the average heating load (Chiller Heater Heating Rate [W]) divided by the average available
heating capacity (Chiller Heater Maximum Heating Rate [W]) for the reported time period.

1.23.12.2.13 Chiller Heater Heating Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.12.2.14 Chiller Heater Heating Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.12.2.15 Chiller Heater Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for the Exhaust Fired
absorption chiller-heater during heating mode operation.

1.23.12.2.16 Chiller Heater Heating Heat Recovery Potential Rate (W)

The heat recovery potential calculated based on Microturbine exhaust temperature and flow rate
during heating mode

1.23.12.2.17 Chiller Heater Heating Source Heat Transfer Rate (W)

The thermal energy consumption rate required for heating.
898 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.12.2.18 Chiller Heater Cooling Heat Recovery Potential Rate (W)

The heat recovery potential calculated based on Microturbine exhaust temperature and flow rate
during cooling mode.

1.23.12.2.19 Chiller Heater Cooling Source Heat Transfer Rate (W)

The thermal energy consumption rate required for cooling.

1.23.12.2.20 Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

The condenser (heat rejection) inlet temperature for air-cooled or water chiller heater. For an air-
cooled chiller heater, this output would be the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the condenser
coil. For a water cooled chiller heater, this output would be the wet-bulb temperature of the air
entering the condenser coil.

1.23.12.2.21 Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The condenser heat transfer energy is the heat rejected from the chiller heater to either a condenser
water loop or through an air-cooled condenser. The values are calculated for each HVAC system time
step being simulated, and the results are summed across the reporting period. Chiller Heater Con-
denser Heat Transfer Energy is metered on HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant,
and EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.12.2.22 Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The condenser heat transfer is the rate of heat rejected from the chiller heater to either a condenser
water loop or through an air-cooled condenser. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time
step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.23.12.2.23 Chiller Heater Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the condenser coil outlet water mass flow rate in kilograms per second. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.

1.23.12.2.24 Chiller Heater Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]

This is the condenser coil outlet water temperature in degrees C. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported

1.23.12.2.25 Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Energy [J]

The evaporator heat transfer is the cooling delivered by the chiller heater. The values are calcu-
lated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period. Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Energy is metered on Chillers:EnergyTransfer,
EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.12.2.26 Chiller Heater Evaporator Cooling Rate [W]

The evaporator heat transfer rate of cooling delivered by the chiller heater. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 899

1.23.12.2.27 Chiller Heater Evaporator Inlet Temperature [C]

The evaporator (chilled water) inlet temperature over the time step being reported.

1.23.12.2.28 Chiller Heater Evaporator Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The evaporator (chilled water) average mass flow rate over the time step being reported

1.23.12.2.29 Chiller Heater Evaporator Outlet Temperature [C]

The evaporator (chilled water) outlet temperature over the time step being reported

1.23.12.2.30 Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Energy [J]

The electric power input to the exhaust fired absorption chiller to serve cooling operation. The
values are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed
across the reporting period. Consumption is metered on Heating:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and
Electricity:Facility.

1.23.12.2.31 Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

The electric power input to the Exhaust Fired absorption chiller to serve cooling operation. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the time step being reported.

1.23.12.2.32 Chiller Heater Source Exhaust Inlet Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The exhaust flow rate from the Micro Turbine

1.23.12.2.33 Chiller Heater Source Exhaust Inlet Temperature [C]

The exhaust temperature from the Micro Turbine

1.23.13 Boiler:HotWater
The boiler model calculates the performance of fuel oil, gas and electric boilers. Boiler performance
is based on nominal thermal efficiency. A normailized efficiency performance curve may be used to
more accurately represent the performance of non-electric boilers but is not considered a required
input. When using the normalized efficiency performance curve, if all coefficients are not required
simply set the unused coefficients to 0. For example, an electric boiler could be modeled by setting
the nominal thermal efficiency to a value in the range of 0.96 to 1.0. Coefficient A0 in the normalized
efficiency performance curve would equal 1 and all other coefficients would be set to 0. Coefficients
for other types of non-electric boilers would set a combination of the available coefficents to non-zero
values.

1.23.13.1 Inputs

1.23.13.1.1 Field: Name

This required alpha field contains the identifying name for the boiler.
900 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.13.1.2 Field: Fuel Type

This required choice field specifies the type of fuel used by the boiler. The fuel type can be Electric-
ity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, OtherFuel1
or OtherFuel2.

1.23.13.1.3 Field: Nominal capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal operating capacity (W) of the boiler. The boiler may be
autosized and would require a heating plant sizing object.

1.23.13.1.4 Fuel Use Equation

The model is based the following two equations:

T heoreticalF uelU se
F uelU sed = (1.83)
N ormalizedBoilerEf f iciencyCurveOutput

Linear → Ef f = A0 + A1 · P LR (1.84)

1.23.13.1.5 Field: Nominal Thermal Efficiency

This required numeric field contains the heating efficiency (as a fraction between 0 and 1) of the
boiler’s burner. This is the efficiency relative to the higher heating value (HHV) of fuel at a part
load ratio of 1.0. Manufacturers typically specify the efficiency of a boiler using the higher heating
value of the fuel. For the rare occurences when a manufacturers (or particular data set) thermal
efficiency is based on the lower heating value (LHV) of the fuel, multiply the thermal efficiency by the
lower-to-higher heating value ratio. For example, assume a fuel’s lower and higher heating values are
approximately 45,450 and 50,000 kJ/kg, respectively. For a manuracturers thermal effiency rating
of 0.90 (based on the LHV), the nominal thermal efficiency entered here is 0.82 (i.e. 0.9 multiplied
by 45,450/50,000).

1.23.13.1.6 Field: Efficiency Curve Temperature Evaluation Variable

This field is used to control which value for hot water temperature is used when evaluating the
efficiency curve specified in the next field (if applicable). There are two options, EnteringBoiler
or LeavingBoiler. EnteringBoiler indicates that the efficiency curves will be evaluated using the
temperature at boiler inlet node. LeavingBoiler indicates that the efficiency curves will be evaluated
using the temperature at the boiler outlet. This field is only used if type of curve is one that uses
temperature as a independent variable.

1.23.13.1.7 Field: Normalized Boiler Efficiency Curve Name

This alpha field contains the curve name which describes the normalized heating efficiency (as a
fraction of nominal thermal efficiency) of the boiler’s burner. If this field is left blank, the nominal
thermal efficiency is assumed to be constant (i.e., Fuel Used is equal to the Theoretical Fuel Use
in the equation above). When a boiler efficiency curve is used, the curve may be any valid curve
object with 1 (PLR) or 2 (PLR and boiler outlet water temperature) independent variables. A
tri-quadratic curve object is not allowed since it uses 3 independent variables. The linear, quadratic,
and cubic curve types may be used when the boiler efficiency is solely a function of boiler part-load
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 901

ratio (PLR). When this type of curve is used, the boiler should operate at (or very near) the design
boiler water outlet temperature. Other curve types may be used when the boiler efficiency is a
function of both PLR and boiler water temperature. Examples of valid single and dual independent
variable equations are shown below. For all curve types PLR is always the x independent variable.
When using 2 independent variables, the boiler outlet water temperature (Toutlet) is always the y
independent variable.

Quadratic → Ef f = A0 + A1 · P LR + A2 · P LR2 (1.85)

Cubic → Ef f = A0 + A1 · P LR + A2 · P LR2 + A3 · P LR3 (1.86)

Cubic → Ef f = A0 + A1 · P LR + A2 · P LR2 + A3 · P LR3 (1.87)

BiQuadratic → Ef f = A0 + A1 · P LR + A2 · P LR2 + A3 · Tw + A4 · Tw 2 + A5 · P LR · Tw (1.88)

QuadraticLinear → Ef f = A0 +A1 ·P LR+A2 ·P LR2 +A3 ·Tw +A4 ·P LR·Tw +A5 ·P LR2 ·Tw (1.89)

Bicubic → Eff = A0 + A1 · PLR + A2 · PLR2 + A3 · Tw + A4 T2w + A5 PLR · Tw + A6 PLR3

(1.90)
+A7 · Tw3 + A8 · PLR2 · Tw + A9 · PLR · T2w

where
Eff = normalized boiler efficiency
PLR = boiler part-load ratio
Tw = boiler water temperature [ºC] ], this can be either entering or leaving temperature depending
on the setting in the previous field

1.23.13.1.8 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the maximum design water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec. This should
be the largest flow rate than can be heated. This field is autosizable.

1.23.13.1.9 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal
capacity is less than the minimum part load ratio, then the Min PLR will determine the operating
PLR. The expected range is between 0 and 1. If this field is left blank, the default value is 0.0.

1.23.13.1.10 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal
capacity is greater than the maximum part load ratio, then the Max PLR will determine the operating
PLR. This value may exceed 1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1. If this field is left blank,
the default value is 1.0.
902 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.13.1.11 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the optimum part load ratio. This is the part load ratio at which the
boiler performs at its maximum efficiency. If this field is left blank, the default value is 1.0.

1.23.13.1.12 Field: Boiler Water Inlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the water inlet node name.

1.23.13.1.13 Field: Boiler Water Outlet Node Name

This required alpha field contains the water outlet node name.

1.23.13.1.14 Field: Water Outlet Upper Temperature Limit

This numeric field contains the outlet temperature upper limit. If this field is left blank, the default
value is 99.9ºC.

1.23.13.1.15 Field: Boiler Flow Mode

This choice field determines how the boiler operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through
the device. There are three different choices for specifying operating modes for the intended flow
behavior: “NotModulated,” “ConstantFlow,” and “LeavingSetpointModulated.” NotModulated is
useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the boiler is passive in the
sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate it can operate at varying flow
rates. ConstantFlow is useful for constant speed pumping arrangements where the boiler’s request
for flow is more strict and can increase the overall loop flow. LeavingSetpointModulated changes
the boiler model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the boiler matches
a setpoint. In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow through
the boiler – for example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted and the
requests cannot be met. The default, if not specified, is NotModulated.

1.23.13.1.16 Field: Parasitic Electric Load

This optional numeric field contains the parasitic electric power (W) consumed by a forced draft fan or
other electrical device associated with the boiler. This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever
the boiler is operating, and the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute to
heating the water. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value is also 0.0 if the
field is left blank.

1.23.13.1.17 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity and Design Water Flow
Rate. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the design load while
continuing to use the autosizing feature.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 903

1.23.13.1.18 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the boiler will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

Boiler:HotWater ,
Condensing Boiler , !- Boiler Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
EnteringBoiler !- Efficiency Curve Temperature Evaluation Variable
0.89, !- Nominal Thermal Efficiency
CondensingBoilerEff , !- Boiler Efficiency Curve Name
0.0021 , !- Max Design Boiler Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.10, !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.00, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
1.00, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
Boiler Inlet Node , !- Boiler Water Inlet Node
Boiler Outlet Node , !- Boiler Water Outlet Node
80, !- Temp Upper Limit Water Outlet {C}
ConstantFlow , !- Boiler Flow Mode
25.0; !- Parasitic Electric Load {W}

Curve:Biquadratic ,
CondensingBoilerEff , !- Name
1.124970374 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.014963852 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.02599835 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !-Coefficient4y
-1.40464E-6, !-Coefficient5y **2
-0.00153624 , !- Coefficient6x*y
0.1, !- Minimum Value of x
1.0, !- Maximum Value of x
30.0, !- Minimum Value of y
85.0; !- Maximum Value of y

1.23.13.2 Outputs

Outputs available from the boiler:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,Boilers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Parasitic Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Part Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Efficiency
904 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

One of the following blocks will be applicable based on fuel type:

Electric:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Electricity Energy [J]

Gas:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Gas Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gas Energy [J]

Propane:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Propane Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Propane Energy [J]

FuelOilNo1:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOilNo1 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOilNo1 Energy [J]

FuelOilNo2:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOilNo2 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOilNo2 Energy [J]

Coal:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Coal Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Coal Energy [J]

Diesel:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Diesel Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Diesel Energy [J]

Gasoline:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Gasoline Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gasoline Energy [J]

OtherFuel1:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler OtherFuel1 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler OtherFuel1 Energy [J]

OtherFuel2:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler OtherFuel2 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler OtherFuel2 Energy [J]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 905

1.23.13.2.1 Boiler Heating Rate [W]

1.23.13.2.2 Boiler Heating Energy [J]

These outputs are the heating output (load) of the boiler. Energy is metered on Boil-
ers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.13.2.3 Boiler Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.13.2.4 Boiler Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.13.2.5 Boiler Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for the boiler.

1.23.13.2.6 Boiler Part Load Ratio []

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the boiler. The part-load ratio is calculated as the
boiler load divided by the boiler nominal capacity. The part-load ratio is limited by the minimum
and maximum part-load ratio inputs specified by the user.

1.23.13.2.7 Boiler Efficiency []

This output is the thermal efficiency for the boiler during heating operation. It is calculated by
multiplying the normalized output of the boiler efficiency curve and the nominal thermal efficiency.
Note that this variable is reported as zero when the boiler is not operating. When reported for
frequencies longer than “detailed” (such as timestep, hourly, daily, monthly or environment), this
output will only be meaningful when the boiler is operating for the entire reporting period. To
determine an efficiency for a longer time period, compute the efficiency based on boiler heating rate
divided by boiler gas rate over the desired period.

1.23.13.2.8 Boiler <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.23.13.2.9 Boiler <Fuel Type> Energy [J] \

1.23.13.2.10 Boiler Electricity Rate [W]

These outputs are the energy input to the boiler. Valid fuel types are: Electric, Gas (natural gas),
Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2. Consumption is
metered on Heating:<Fuel Type>, <Fuel Type>:Plant, and <Fuel Type>:Facility.

1.23.13.2.11 Boiler Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.13.2.12 Boiler Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the parasitic electric power and parasitic electric consumption associated with
the boiler. Used when simulating a forced draft fan or other electric component. Consumption is
metered on Heating:Electricity and Electricity:Plant.
906 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.14 Boiler:Steam
The steam boiler model provides a first order approximation of performance for fuel oil, gas and
electric boilers. Boiler performance is based on a “theoretical” boiler efficiency (overall efficiency at
design operating conditions) and a single quadratic fuel use/ part load ratio curve. This single curve
accounts for all combustion inefficiencies and stack losses.

1.23.14.1 Inputs

1.23.14.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Steam Boiler.

1.23.14.1.2 Field: Fuel Type

This alpha value specifies the type of fuel used by the boiler. The fuel type can be Electricity,
NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, OtherFuel1 or
OtherFuel2.

1.23.14.1.3 Field: Maximum Operating Pressure

This numeric field contains the maximum value of pressure up to which the boiler would operate, or
the maximum design pressure. (Pascal)

1.23.14.1.4 Field: Theoretical Efficiency

This numeric field contains the heating efficiency (as a fraction between 0 and 1) of the boiler’s
burner

1.23.14.1.5 Field: Design Outlet Steam Temperature

The maximum value of steam temperature the boiler can provide. (Celcius)

1.23.14.1.6 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal operating capacity (W) of the boiler.

1.23.14.1.7 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal
capacity is less than the minimum part load ratio, then the Min PLR will determine the operating
PLR. The expected range is between 0 and 1.

1.23.14.1.8 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal
capacity is greater than the maximum part load ratio, then the Max PLR will determine the operating
PLR. This value may exceed 1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 907

1.23.14.1.9 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the optimum part load ratio. This is the part load ratio at which the
boiler performs at its maximum efficiency.

1.23.14.1.10 Field: Coefficient 1 of Fuel Use Function of Part Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the fuel use / PLR coefficient1.

1.23.14.1.11 Field: Coefficient 2 of Fuel Use Function of Part Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the fuel use / PLR coefficient2.

1.23.14.1.12 Field: Coefficient 3 of Fuel Use Function of Part Load Ratio Curve

This numeric field contains the fuel use / PLR coefficient3.

1.23.14.1.13 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the water inlet node name.

1.23.14.1.14 Field: Steam Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the steam outlet node name.

1.23.14.1.15 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal Capacity. Sizing factor allows the
user to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing
feature.

1.23.14.1.16 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the boiler will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
More information on the technical aspects of steam boiler can be found in the Engineering Reference
Document.
An example of a Steam Boiler input statement from an IDF is:
908 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Boiler:Steam ,
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler , !- Boiler Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
160000 , !-Maximum Boiler Pressure Pascal
0.8, !- Theoretical Boiler Efficiency
115, !- Max Design Outlet Steam Temp
300000 , !- Nominal Capacity W
0.00001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.2, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.8,!- Coefficient 1 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 2 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 3 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Inlet Node , !- Boiler Steam Inlet Node
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Outlet Node; !- Plant Loop Outlet Node

Boiler:Steam ,
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler , !- Boiler Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
160000 , !-Maximum Boiler Pressure Pascal
0.8, !- Theoretical Boiler Efficiency
115, !- Max Design Outlet Steam Temp
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity W
0.00001 , !- Minimum Part Load Ratio
1.0, !- Maximum Part Load Ratio
0.2, !- Optimum Part Load Ratio
0.8,!- Coefficient 1 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 2 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
0.1,!- Coefficient 3 of the fuel use/part load ratio curve
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Inlet Node , !- Boiler Steam Inlet Node
Steam Boiler Plant Boiler Outlet Node; !- Plant Loop Outlet Node

1.23.14.2 Outputs

Outputs available from the steam boiler:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Steam Efficiency
– Zone,Meter,Boilers:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Steam Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Steam Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Boiler Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

One of the following blocks will be applicable based on fuel type:

Electric:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Electricity Energy [J]

Gas:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Gas Rate [W]

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 909

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gas Energy [J]

Propane:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Propane Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Propane Energy [J]

FuelOilNo1:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOilNo1 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOilNo1 Energy [J]

FuelOilNo2:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOilNo2 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOilNo2 Energy [J]

Coal:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Coal Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Coal Energy [J]

Diesel:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Diesel Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Diesel Energy [J]

Gasoline:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler Gasoline Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gasoline Energy [J]

OtherFuel1:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler OtherFuel1 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler OtherFuel1 Energy [J]

OtherFuel2:

– HVAC,Average,Boiler OtherFuel2 Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Boiler OtherFuel2 Energy [J]

1.23.14.2.1 Boiler Heating Rate [W]

1.23.14.2.2 Boiler Heating Energy [J]

These outputs are the heating output (load) of the boiler. Energy is metered on Boil-
ers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
910 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.14.2.3 Boiler Steam Efficiency []

This output is the thermal efficiency for the boiler during heating operation. It is calculated as the
boiler heat transfer rate (Boiler Heating Rate) divided by the “fuel” consumption rate by the boiler.
Note that this variable is reported as zero when the boiler is not operating. When reported for
frequencies longer than “detailed” (such as timestep, hourly, daily, monthly or environment), this
output will only be meaningful when the boiler is operating for the entire reporting period. To
determine an efficiency for a longer time period, compute the efficiency based on boiler heating rate
divided by boiler <Fuel Type> rate over the desired period.

1.23.14.2.4 Boiler Steam Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.14.2.5 Boiler Steam Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.14.2.6 Boiler Steam Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the steam inlet and outlet temperatures and steam flow rate for the boiler.

1.23.14.2.7 Boiler <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.23.14.2.8 Boiler <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

1.23.14.2.9 Boiler Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.14.2.10 Boiler Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the energy input to the boiler. Valid fuel types are: Electric, Gas (natural gas),
Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, OtherFuel1, and OtherFuel2. Consump-
tion is metered on Heating:<Fuel Type>, <Fuel Type>:Plant, and <Fuel Type>:Facility.

1.23.15 Water to Water Heat Pumps

The EnergyPlus has three water-to-water heat pump models, parameter estimation, equation fit and
an EIR-formulated version, to choose from.
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating
This model is an equation-fit model from the catalog data which resembles a black box with no usage
of heat transfer equations. The performance of the heat pump is modeled using curves fitted from
the catalog data.
HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Cooling
HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Heating
This model is a parameter estimation based model that uses physical parameters generated from
the catalog data. The physical parameters are then used to predict the performance of the heat
pump using thermodynamic laws and heat transfer equations. The heat pump has a reciprocating
compressor that serves both the hot water and the chilled water loop. Note that this model is
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 911

currently “hardwired” to fluid property R22. FluidProperties:* objects for R-22 must be included
in the idf file. These may be copied from DataSets
FluidPropertiesRefData.idf.
Descriptions and strengths of these two models are available in the following references:
Jin, Hui. 2002. Parameter Estimation Based Models of Water Source Heat Pumps. Phd. Thesis,
Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, Oklahoma State University. (downloadable
from http://www.hvac.okstate.edu/)
Tang,C. C. 2005. Modeling Packaged Heat Pumps in Quasi-Steady State Energy Simulation Pro-
gram. M.S. Thesis. Department of Mechanical and Aerospace Engineering, Oklahoma State Uni-
versity. (downloadable from http://www.hvac.okstate.edu/)
HeatPump:PlantLoop:EIR:Cooling
HeatPump:PlantLoop:EIR:Heating
Beginning with version 9.1, an EIR-formulated heat pump model was added. This heat pump can
be operated as a water-source object with the source-side connected to another plant loop, or as an
air-source object with the source-side interacting with the outdoor air. This formulation allows the
user to enter curves for specifying the capacity and energy usage in a more generic way, allowing the
curves to be applicable to a wide variety of components. With the original equation fit model, the
curve form was locked in to a specific set of linear coefficients. With the new form, the curve can be
a quadratic function of temperatures, or an even more generic lookup table.
Configuration
The Supply side of the heat pump is usually connected to a Ground Heat Exchanger for a water-
source object. The figure below shows the layout and piping diagram of the water-to-water heat
pump.

Figure 1.91: Schematic of EnergyPlus Ground Loop Heat Exchanger

First, the equation fit model objects are described. This model has two sets of coefficients, one for
the heating mode and other for the cooling mode.
912 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.16 HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling
1.23.16.1 Inputs

1.23.16.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.

1.23.16.1.2 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side inlet node name.

1.23.16.1.3 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side outlet node name.

1.23.16.1.4 Field: Load Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side inlet node name.

1.23.16.1.5 Field: Load Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side outlet node name.

1.23.16.1.6 Field: Reference Load Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volume flow rate on the load side of the heat pump in m3/s.
This corresponds to the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalog data. This field is
autosizable.

1.23.16.1.7 Field: Reference Source Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volume flow rate on the source side of the heat pump in m3/s.
This corresponds to the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalog data. This field is
autosizable.

1.23.16.1.8 Field: Reference Cooling Capacity

This numeric field contains the design cooling capacity of the heat pump in W. This corresponds to
the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalog data. This field is autosizable.

1.23.16.1.9 Field: Reference Cooling Power Consumption

This numeric field is the design electric power consumption for cooling, in W. This corresponds to
the electic power use at the Reference Cooling Capacity. This field is autosizable. When autosized,
the field called Reference Coefficient of Performance must be used.

1.23.16.1.10 Fields: Cooling Capacity Curve Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a quadlinear performance curve object (ref: Performance
Curves) for the Cooling Capacity curve. More details on how these coefficients in the curve are used
are described in the Engineering Reference.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 913

1.23.16.1.11 Field: Cooling Compressor Power Curve Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a quadlinear performance curve object (ref: Performance
Curves) for the Cooling Compressor Power curve. More details on how these coefficients in the curve
are used are described in the Engineering Reference.

1.23.16.1.12 Field: Reference Coefficient of Performance

This field is required if the Reference Cooling Power Consumption is set to autosize. The nominal
COP is defined by the Reference Cooling Capacity divided by the corresponding Reference Cooling
Power Consumption and is non-dimensional. This field is only used for sizing; if the Reference
Power Consumption is set to a fixed value then the COP of the component during simulation will
be determined by the ratio of Reference Cooling Capacity divided by the corresponding Reference
Cooling Power Consumption and not by the value in this field. This COP does not include power
for fluid circulation pumps, it is just the heat pump itself.

1.23.16.1.13 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Reference Load Side Flow Rate, Reference
Source Side Flow Rate, Reference Cooling Capacity, and Reference Cooling Power Consumption.
The Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the plant loop’s design load
while continuing to use the autosizing feature. For example if there are two heat pumps on the
supply side, each one could be sized to be half of the design load.

1.23.16.1.14 Field: Companion Heating Heat Pump Name

This optional name field allows the user to specify the companion heating water to water heat pump
for this cooling component. This should be the name of an HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating
object defined elsewhere in the input file. Because the cooling and heating models are often intended
to represent separate operating modes of one single reversible heat pump, it is useful to identify the
corresponding heating heat pump input object by name. This is currently used with autosizing so
that the sizing calculations can be coordinated so that the two companion heat pumps get the same
design reference flow rates.
An idf example:

HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling ,
GshpCLG , !- Name
GshpCLG SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
GshpCLG SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
GshpCLG LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
GshpCLG LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
1.89E-03, !- Reference Load Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.89E-03, !- Reference Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
39890.91 , !- Reference Cooling Capacity {W}
4790.00 , !- Reference Cooling Power Consumption {W}
CoolCapCurve , !- Cooling Capacity Curve Name
CoolPowCurve , !- Cooling Compressor Power Curve Name
8.32, !- Reference Coefficient of Performance
1.0, !- Sizing Factor
GshpHeating; !- Companion Heating Heat Pump Name

Curve:QuadLinear ,
914 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

CoolCapCurve , !- Curve Name

-1.52030596 , !- CoefficientC1
3.46625667 , !- CoefficientC2
-1.32267797 , !- CoefficientC3
0.09395678 , !- CoefficientC4
0.038975504 , !- CoefficientC5
-100, !- Minimum Value of w
100, !- Maximum Value of w
-100, !- Minimum Value of x
100, !- Maximum Value of x
0, !- Minimum Value of y
100, !- Maximum Value of y
0, !- Minimum Value of z
100, !- Maximum Value of z
0, !- Minimum Curve Output
38; !- Maximum Curve Output

Curve:QuadLinear ,
CoolPowCurve , !- Curve Name
-8.59564386 , !- CoefficientC1
0.96265085 , !- CoefficientC2
8.69489229 , !- CoefficientC3
0.02501669 , !- CoefficientC4
-0.20132665 , !- CoefficientC5
-100, !- Minimum Value of w
100, !- Maximum Value of w
-100, !- Minimum Value of x
100, !- Maximum Value of x
0, !- Minimum Value of y
100, !- Maximum Value of y
0, !- Minimum Value of z
100, !- Maximum Value of z
0, !- Minimum Curve Output
38; !- Maximum Curve Output

1.23.16.2 Outputs

This section describes the outputs available for the water to water heat pump, equation fit model;
both cooling and heating.

– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 915

1.23.16.2.1 Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This output variable represents the cumulative energy used by the compressor. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period.

1.23.16.2.2 Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across
the reporting period.

1.23.16.2.3 Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across
the reporting period.

1.23.16.2.4 Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This output variable represents the compressor power required to run the heat pump. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.16.2.5 Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output variable represents the heat transfer across the load side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.

1.23.16.2.6 Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output variable represents the heat transfer across the source side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.

1.23.16.2.7 Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.16.2.8 Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.16.2.9 Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.
916 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.16.2.10 Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the source side coil. The
values are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the time step being reported.

1.23.16.2.11 Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the load side coil. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.16.2.12 Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.17 HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating
1.23.17.1 Inputs

1.23.17.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.

1.23.17.1.2 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side inlet node name.

1.23.17.1.3 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side outlet node name.

1.23.17.1.4 Field: Load Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side inlet node name.

1.23.17.1.5 Field: Load Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side outlet node name.

1.23.17.1.6 Field: Reference Load Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volume flow rate on the load side of the heat pump in m3/s.
This corresponds to the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalog data. This field is
autosizable.

1.23.17.1.7 Field: Reference Source Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volume flow rate on the source side of the heat pump in m3/s.
This corresponds to the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalog data. This field is
autosizable.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 917

1.23.17.1.8 Field: Reference Heating Capacity

This numeric field contains the design heating capacity of the heat pump in W. This corresponds to
the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalog data. This field is autosizable.

1.23.17.1.9 Field: Reference Heating Power Consumption

This numeric field contains the design electric power consumption for heating, in W. This corresponds
to the electic power use at the Reference Heating Capacity. This field is autosizable. When autosized,
the field called Reference Coefficient of Performance must be used.

1.23.17.1.10 Fields: Heating Capacity Curve Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a quadlinear performance curve object (ref: Performance
Curves) for the Heating Capacity curve. More details on how these coefficients in the curve are used
are described in the Engineering Reference.

1.23.17.1.11 Field: Heating Compressor Power Curve Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a quadlinear performance curve object (ref: Performance
Curves) for the Heating Compressor Power curve. More details on how these coefficients in the
curve are used are described in the Engineering Reference.

1.23.17.1.12 Field: Reference Coefficient of Performance

This field is required if the Design Heating Power Consumption is set to autosize. The nominal COP
is defined by the Reference Heating Capacity divided by the corresponding Reference Heating Power
Consumption and is non-dimensional. This field is only used for sizing; if the Reference Heating
Power Consumption is set to a fixed value then the COP of the component during simulation will
be determined by the ratio of Reference Heating Capacity divided by the corresponding Reference
Heating Power Consumption and not by the value in this field.

1.23.17.1.13 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. For this component the
inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Reference Load Side Flow Rate, Reference
Source Side Flow Rate, Reference Heating Capacity, and Reference Heating Power Consumption.
The Sizing Factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of the plant loop’s design load
while continuing to use the autosizing feature. For example if there are two heat pumps on the
supply side, each one could be sized to be half of the design load.

1.23.17.1.14 Field: Companion Cooling Heat Pump Name

This optional name field allows the user to specify the companion cooling water to water heat pump
for this heating component. This should be the name of an HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Cooling
object defined elsewhere in the input file. Because the cooling and heating models are often intended
to represent separate operating modes of one single reversible heat pump, it is useful to identify the
corresponding cooling heat pump input object by name. This is currently used with autosizing so
918 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

that the sizing calculations can be coordinated so that the two companion heat pumps get the same
design reference flow rates.
An idf example:

HeatPump:WaterToWater:EquationFit:Heating ,
GshpHeating , !- Name
GshpHeating SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
GshpHeating SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
GshpHeating LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
GshpHeating LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
1.89E-03, !- Reference Load Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.89E-03, !- Reference Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
39040.92 , !- Reference Heating Capacity {W}
5130.00 , !- Reference Heating Power Consumption {W}
HeatCapCurve , !- Heating Capacity Curve Name
HeatPowCurve , !- Heating Compressor Power Curve Name
7.61, !- Reference Coefficient of Performance
1.0, !- Sizing Factor
GshpCLG; !- Companion Cooling Heat Pump Name

Curve:QuadLinear ,
HeatCapCurve , !- Curve Name
-3.33491153 , !- CoefficientC1
-0.51451946 , !- CoefficientC2
4.51592706 , !- CoefficientC3
0.01797107 , !- CoefficientC4
0.155797661 , !- CoefficientC5
-100, !- Minimum Value of w
100, !- Maximum Value of w
-100, !- Minimum Value of x
100, !- Maximum Value of x
0, !- Minimum Value of y
100, !- Maximum Value of y
0, !- Minimum Value of z
100, !- Maximum Value of z
0, !- Minimum Curve Output
38; !- Maximum Curve Output

Curve:QuadLinear ,
HeatPowCurve , !- Curve Name
-8.93121751 , !- CoefficientC1
8.57035762 , !- CoefficientC2
1.29660976 , !- CoefficientC3
-0.21629222 , !- CoefficientC4
0.033862378 , !- CoefficientC5
-100, !- Minimum Value of w
100, !- Maximum Value of w
-100, !- Minimum Value of x
100, !- Maximum Value of x
0, !- Minimum Value of y
100, !- Maximum Value of y
0, !- Minimum Value of z
100, !- Maximum Value of z
0, !- Minimum Curve Output
38; !- Maximum Curve Output

Next, the parameter estimation model objects are described. This model has two sets of parameters,
one for the heating mode and other for the cooling mode.

1.23.18 HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Cooling
1.23.18.1 Inputs

1.23.18.1.1 Field: Name

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 919

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.

1.23.18.1.2 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side inlet node name.

1.23.18.1.3 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side outlet node name.

1.23.18.1.4 Field: Load Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side inlet node name.

1.23.18.1.5 Field: Load Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side outlet node name.

1.23.18.1.6 Field: Nominal COP

This numeric field contains the nominal coefficient of performance of the heat pump.

1.23.18.1.7 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal capacity of the heat pump in Watts.

1.23.18.1.8 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum part load ratio of the heat pump usually set to 0.

1.23.18.1.9 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum part load ratio of the heat pump usually set to 1.

1.23.18.1.10 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the optimal part load ratio of the heat pump usually set to 1.

1.23.18.1.11 Field: Load Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the volumetric flow rate on the load side of the heat pump in m3/s

1.23.18.1.12 Field: Source Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the volumetric flow rate on the source side of the heat pump in m3/s

1.23.18.1.13 Field: Load Side Heat Transfer Coefficient

This numeric field contains Estimated parameter load side heat transfer coefficient W/K.

1.23.18.1.14 Field: Source Side Heat Transfer Coefficient

This numeric field contains Estimated parameter source side heat transfer coefficient W/K.
920 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.18.1.15 Field: Piston Displacement

This numeric field contains the Estimated parameter displacement of the reciprocating compressor
in m3/s.

1.23.18.1.16 Field: Compressor Clearance Factor

This numeric field contains the Estimated parameter clearance factor of the reciprocating compressor.

1.23.18.1.17 Field: Compressor Suction and Discharge Pressure Drop

This numeric field contains the estimated parameter the pressure drop at compressor suction and
discharge in Pascals (N/m2).

1.23.18.1.18 Field: Superheating

This numeric field contains the estimated parameter superheat at the evaporator outlet in °C.

1.23.18.1.19 Field: Constant Part of Electromechanical Power Losses

This numeric field contains the estimated parameter power loss, which accounts for the loss of work
due mechanical and electrical losses in the compressor in Watts.

1.23.18.1.20 Field: Loss Factor

This numeric field contains the factor of electromechanical loss that is proportional to the theoretical
power percentage.

1.23.18.1.21 Field: High Pressure Cut Off

This numeric field contains the design pressure limit of the compressor in Pascals (N/m2).

1.23.18.1.22 Field: Low Pressure Cut Off

This numeric field contains the design low-pressure limit of the compressor in Pascals (N/m2).
An idf example:

HeatPump:WaterToWater: ParameterEstimation :Cooling ,

GshpCLG , !- Water to Water Heat Pump Name
GshpCLG SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node
GshpCLG SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node
GshpCLG LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node
GshpCLG LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node
3.5, !- Nominal COP
45000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
0.0, !- Min PLR
1, !- Max PLR
1, !- optimum PLR
.003, !- Load side Flow Rate {m3/s}
.003, !- Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
7761, !- Load side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
3998, !- Source Side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
.012544 , !- Piston Displacement {m3/s}
.05469 , !- Compressor Clearance Factor %
92156.2 , !- Compressor Suction And Discharge Pressure Drop {Pa}
4.8907 , !- Superheating {C}
2803.9 , !- Constant Part of Electro Mechanical Power Losses {W}
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 921

.699, !- Loss Factor

0.0, !- High Pressure Cut off {Pa}
0.0; !- LowPressure Cut off {Pa}

1.23.19 HeatPump:WaterToWater:ParameterEstimation:Heating
1.23.19.1 Inputs

1.23.19.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.

1.23.19.1.2 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side inlet node name.

1.23.19.1.3 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side outlet node name.

1.23.19.1.4 Field: Load Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side inlet node name.

1.23.19.1.5 Field: Load Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side outlet node name.

1.23.19.1.6 Field: Nominal COP

This numeric field contains the nominal coefficient of performance of the heat pump.

1.23.19.1.7 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal capacity of the heat pump in Watts.

1.23.19.1.8 Field: Minimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum part load ratio of the heat pump usually set to 0.

1.23.19.1.9 Field: Maximum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum part load ratio of the heat pump usually set to 1.

1.23.19.1.10 Field: Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the optimal part load ratio of the heat pump usually set to 1.

1.23.19.1.11 Field: Load Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the volumetric flow rate on the load side of the heat pump in m3/s
922 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.19.1.12 Field: Source Side Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the volumetric flow rate on the source side of the heat pump in m3/s

1.23.19.1.13 Field: Load Side Heat Transfer Coefficient

This numeric field contains Estimated parameter load side heat transfer coefficient W/K.

1.23.19.1.14 Field: Source Side Heat Transfer Coefficient

This numeric field contains Estimated parameter source side heat transfer coefficient W/K.

1.23.19.1.15 Field: Piston Displacement

This numeric field contains the Estimated parameter displacement of the reciprocating compressor
in m3/s.

1.23.19.1.16 Field: Compressor Clearance Factor

This numeric field contains the Estimated parameter clearance factor of the reciprocating compressor.

1.23.19.1.17 Field: Compressor Suction and Discharge Pressure Drop

This numeric field contains the estimated parameter the pressure drop at compressor suction and
discharge in Pascals (N/m2).

1.23.19.1.18 Field: Superheating

This numeric field contains the estimated parameter superheat at the evaporator outlet in °C.

1.23.19.1.19 Field: Constant Part of Electromechanical Power Losses

This numeric field contains the estimated parameter power loss, which accounts for the loss of work
due mechanical and electrical losses in the compressor in Watts.

1.23.19.1.20 Field: Loss Factor

This numeric field contains the factor of electromechanical loss that is proportional to the theoretical
power percentage.

1.23.19.1.21 Field: High Pressure Cut Off

This numeric field contains the design pressure limit of the compressor in Pascals (N/m2).

1.23.19.1.22 Field: Low Pressure Cut Off

This numeric field contains the design low-pressure limit of the compressor in Pascals (N/m2).
An idf example:
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 923

HeatPump:WaterToWater: ParameterEstimation :Heating ,

GshpHeating , !- Water to Water Heat Pump Name
GshpHeating SourceSide Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node
GshpHeating SourceSide Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node
GshpHeating LoadSide Inlet Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node
GshpHeating LoadSide Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node
3.5, !- Nominal COP
50000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
0.0, !- Min PLR
1, !- Max PLR
1, !- optimum PLR
.003, !- Load side Flow Rate {m3/s}
.003, !- Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
7761, !- Load side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
3998, !- Source Side Heat Transfer Coefficient {W/K}
.012544 , !- Piston Displacement {m3/s}
.05469 , !- Compressor Clearance Factor %
92156.2 , !- Compressor Suction And Dischrage Pressure Drop {Pa}
4.8907 , !- Superheating {C}
2803.9 , !- Constant Part Of Electro Mechanical Power Losses {W}
.699, !- Loss Factor
0.0, !- High Pressure Cut off {Pa}
0.0; !- LowPressure Cut off {Pa}

1.23.19.2 Outputs

This section describes the outputs available for the water to water heat pump, parameter estimation
model; both cooling and heating.

– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.19.2.1 Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This output variable represents the compressor power required to run the heat pump. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.19.2.2 Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This output variable represents the cumulative energy used by the compressor. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across the
reporting period.
924 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.19.2.3 Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output variable represents the heat transfer across the load side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.

1.23.19.2.4 Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across
the reporting period.

1.23.19.2.5 Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output variable represents the heat transfer across the source side coil. The values are calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported.

1.23.19.2.6 Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output variable represents the cumulative heat transfer across the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed across
the reporting period.

1.23.19.2.7 Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.19.2.8 Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the load side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.19.2.9 Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature leaving the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.19.2.10 Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]

This output variable represents the average fluid temperature entering the source side coil. The
values are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the time step being reported.

1.23.19.2.11 Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the load side coil. The values are
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 925

1.23.19.2.12 Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output variable represents the average fluid flow rate through the source side coil. The values
are calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.23.20 HeatPump:PlantLoop:EIR:Cooling (and Heating)

Next, the EIR-formulated model objects are described. Although the model follows the pattern of
having a separate input object for cooling and heating, the inputs are essentially identical, so they
are described together. Note that this component is currently a constant flow device (it will always
request its full design flow from the plant), with a future addition to make it respond to outlet
setpoint in order to vary the flow request.

1.23.20.1 Inputs

1.23.20.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground source heat pump.

1.23.20.1.2 Field: Load Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side inlet node name.

1.23.20.1.3 Field: Load Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s load side outlet node name.

1.23.20.1.4 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s condenser type. Acceptable inputs are “WaterSource” or
“AirSource”.

1.23.20.1.5 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side inlet node name.

1.23.20.1.6 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the heat pump’s source side outlet node name.

1.23.20.1.7 Field: Companion Heat Pump Name

This optional alpha field contains the name of a companion heat pump object. If the current object
is heating type then this is expected to include the paired cooling object, and vice-versa. The
companion is used for sizing if plant sizing data is unavailable, and during the simulation to ensure
that any unexpected simultaneous operation of the two objects provides a warning to the user.
926 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.20.1.8 Field: Load Side Reference Flow Rate

This autosizable field defines the reference load side flow rate for the heat pump. This field is used
as the nominal flow request for this heat pump unit during the simulation. The units for this field
are [m3/s].

1.23.20.1.9 Field: Source Side Reference Flow Rate

This autosizable field defines the reference source side side flow rate for the heat pump. This field is
used as the nominal flow request for this heat pump unit during the simulation. The units for this
field are [m3/s].

1.23.20.1.10 Field: Reference Capacity

This autosizable field defines the reference load side heat capacity for the heat pump. Cooling
capacity for a cooling companion heat pump and heating capacity for a heating companion heat
pump. The units for this field are [W].

1.23.20.1.11 Field: Reference Coefficient of Performance

This field contains the reference COP for this unit, which is used when calculating the power required
for the heat pump under simulation conditions. The COP is defined as the load side energy transfer
divided by the power input, with dimensionless units of [W/W].

1.23.20.1.12 Field: Sizing Factor

This field allows the user to scale the sizing of this unit compared to the plant-determined autosized
flow and heat capacity.

1.23.20.1.13 Field: Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name

This field is the name of a bivariate curve or table that defines an available capacity modifier of the
unit as a function of the load side outlet temperature and the source side inlet temperature. The
temperatures are in degrees Celsius when used in the function and the output of the function is
multiplied by the reference capacity to get a current available capacity.

1.23.20.1.14 Field: Electric Input to Output Ratio Modifier Function of Tem-

perature Curve Name
This field is the name of a bivariate curve or table that defines an EIR (1/COP) modifier as a function
of the load side outlet temperature and the source side inlet temperature. The temperatures are in
degrees Celsius when used in the function. The output of this function and the output of the EIR
Modifier Function of PLR are multiplied by the reference EIR to get a current EIR .

1.23.20.1.15 Field: Electric Input to Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part

Load Ratio Curve Name
This field is the name of a univariate curve or table that defines an EIR modifier as a function of the
current part load ratio. The output of this function and the output of the EIR Modifier Function of
Temperature are multiplied by the reference EIR to get a current EIR .
An idf example for a water-source application:
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 927

HeatPump:PlantLoop:EIR:Heating ,
Heating Coil , !- Name
Heating Coil Load Loop Intermediate Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
Heating Coil Load Loop Supply Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
WaterSource , ! Condenser Type
Condenser Loop Demand Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Loop Demand Intermediate Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
Cooling Coil , !- Companion Heat Pump Name
0.005 , !- Load Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.002 , !- Source Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
80000 , !- Reference Capacity
3.5, !- Reference COP
, !- Sizing Factor
CapCurveFuncTemp , !- Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncTemp , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncPLR; !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part
Load Ratio Curve Name
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EIR:Cooling ,
Cooling Coil , !- Name
Cooling Coil Load Loop Intermediate Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Load Loop Supply Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
WaterSource , !- Condenser Type
Condenser Loop Demand Intermediate Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
Condenser Loop Demand Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
Heating Coil , !- Companion Heat Pump Name
0.005 , !- Load Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Source Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
75000 , !- Reference Capacity
4.0, !- Reference COP
, !- Sizing Factor
CapCurveFuncTemp2 , !- Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncTemp2 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncPLR2; !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part
Load Ratio Curve Name

An idf example for an air-source applicaiton:

HeatPump:PlantLoop:EIR:Heating ,
Heating Coil , !- Name
Heating Coil Load Loop Intermediate Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
Heating Coil Load Loop Supply Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
AirSource , ! Condenser Type
Outdoor Air HP Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
Outdoor Air HP Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
Cooling Coil , !- Companion Heat Pump Name
0.005 , !- Load Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.002 , !- Source Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
80000 , !- Reference Capacity
3.5, !- Reference COP
, !- Sizing Factor
CapCurveFuncTemp , !- Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncTemp , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncPLR; !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name
HeatPump:WaterToWater:EIR:Cooling ,
Cooling Coil , !- Name
Cooling Coil Load Loop Intermediate Node , !- Load Side Inlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Load Loop Supply Outlet Node , !- Load Side Outlet Node Name
AirSource , !- Condenser Type
Outdoor Air HP Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
Outdoor Air HP Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
Heating Coil , !- Companion Heat Pump Name
0.005 , !- Load Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Source Side Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
75000 , !- Reference Capacity
4.0, !- Reference COP
, !- Sizing Factor
928 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

CapCurveFuncTemp2 , !- Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name

EIRCurveFuncTemp2 , !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
EIRCurveFuncPLR2; !- Electric Input to Heating Output Ratio Modifier Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve Name

1.23.20.2 Outputs

This section describes the outputs available for the water to water heat pump, equation fit model;
both cooling and heating.

– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [°C]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.20.2.1 Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This output variable represents the average power usage of this coil during the specified reporting
window.

1.23.20.2.2 Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This output variable represents the summed energy usage of the heat pump over a specified reporting
window.

1.23.20.2.3 Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output variable represents the average load side heat transfer during the specified output
reporting window.

1.23.20.2.4 Heat Pump Load Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output variable represents the summed load side heat transfer during the specified output
reporting window.

1.23.20.2.5 Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output variable represents the average source side heat transfer occurring for this coil during
the specified output reporting window.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 929

1.23.20.2.6 Heat Pump Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output variable represents the summed source side heat transfer during the specified output
reporting window.

1.23.20.2.7 Heat Pump Load Side Inlet Temperature [°C]

This output variable represents the inlet temperature on the load side connection of this coil.

1.23.20.2.8 Heat Pump Load Side Outlet Temperature [°C]

This output variable represents the outlet temperature on the load side connection of this coil.

1.23.20.2.9 Heat Pump Source Side Inlet Temperature [°C]

This output variable represents the inlet temperature on the source side connection of this coil.

1.23.20.2.10 Heat Pump Source Side Outlet Temperature [°C]

This output variable represents the outlet temperature on the source side connection of this coil.

1.23.20.2.11 Heat Pump Load Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output variable represents the average load side mass flow rate during the specified reporting
window.

1.23.20.2.12 Heat Pump Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output variable represents the average source side mass flow rate during the specified reporting
window.

1.23.21 Steps to specify the Ground Source Heat Pump

Since the heat pump is defined with two separate objects (one for heating, one for cooling), the
connections to the condenser has to be done carefully. The example below shows the configuration
for parameter estimation objects. The same specifications and configuration also applies to the
equation fit model.
For the heating mode:

1. Specify a branch for the Heat pump in hot water loop .

2. Include the branch name in the splitter and mixer branches.
3. Add a branch in condenser loop and include its name in the respective splitter and mixer.

! in hot water loop

BRANCH ,
Heating GshpHeating Branch ,
,
HeatPump:WatertoWater: ParameterEstimatinon:Heating ,
GshpHeating ,
GshpHeating LoadSide Inlet Node ,
GshpHeating LoadSide Outlet Node;
930 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

!in condenser loop

BRANCH ,
GshpHeating SourceSide Branch ,
,
HeatPump:WatertoWater: ParameterEstimatinon:Heating ,
GshpHeating ,
GshpHeating SourceSide Inlet Node ,
GshpHeating SourceSide Outlet Node;

Example of Heat Pump Links

For the cooling mode:
1. Specify a branch for the Heat pump in chilled water loop .

2. Include the branch name in the splitter and mixer branches.

3. Add a branch in condenser loop and include its name in the respective splitter and mixer.
! in chilled water loop

BRANCH ,GshpCLG1 Chiller Branch ,

,
,
HeatPump:WatertoWater: ParameterEstimatinon:Cooling , GshpCLG1 ,
GshpCLG LoadSide Inlet Node1 ,
GshpCLG LoadSide Outlet Node1;

!in condenser loop

BRANCH , GshpCLG1 Condenser Branch ,

,
,
HeatPump:WatertoWater: ParameterEstimatinon:Cooling , GshpCLG1 ,
GshpCLG SourceSide Inlet Node1 ,
GshpCLG SourceSide Outlet Node1;

1.23.22 DistrictCooling
When the user is not interested in a plant simulation or there is some centralized source of chilled
water, the following object can be used in the input.

1.23.22.1 Inputs

1.23.22.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district cooling (i.e., purchased chilled water).

1.23.22.1.2 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district cooling inlet node.

1.23.22.1.3 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district cooling outlet node.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 931

1.23.22.1.4 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal demand (W) that the district cooling will meet. This field
is autosizable.

1.23.22.1.5 Field: Capacity Fraction Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule that describes how the nominal capacity varies over
time. Values must non-negative. The capacity at a given point in time is determined by the product
of the previous field and the value in this schedule. If the field is omitted or left blank, then the
program assumes a schedule value of 1.0 all the time.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

DistrictCooling , Purchased Cooling ,

NODE_35 ,NODE_49 ,
68000;

1.23.22.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, District Cooling Chilled Water Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, District Cooling Chilled Water Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter, DistrictCooling:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Cooling: DistrictCooling [J]
– HVAC,Average,District Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,District Cooling Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,District Cooling Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,District Cooling Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.22.2.1 District Cooling Chilled Water Rate [W]

1.23.22.2.2 District Cooling Chilled Water Energy [J]

These outputs are the energy taken from purchased chilled water. Consumption is metered on
Cooling:DistrictCooling, DistrictCooling:Plant, and DistrictCooling:Facility.

1.23.22.2.3 District Cooling Rate [W]

This is the useful rate of cooling energy from purchased chilled water. For the current algorithm,
this is the same as District Cooling Chilled Water Rate.

1.23.22.2.4 District Cooling Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.22.2.5 District Cooling Outlet Temperature [C]

932 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.22.2.6 District Cooling Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the supply-side plant loop chilled water inlet and outlet temperatures and mass
flow rate.

1.23.23 DistrictHeating
When the user is not interested in a plant simulation or there is some centralized source of hot water
(district heating), the following object can be used in the input.

1.23.23.1 Inputs

1.23.23.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district heating (i.e., purchased hot water).

1.23.23.1.2 Field: Hot Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district heating inlet node.

1.23.23.1.3 Field: Hot Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the district heating outlet node.

1.23.23.1.4 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal demand (W) that the district heating will meet. This field
is autosizable.

1.23.23.1.5 Field: Capacity Fraction Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule that describes how the nominal capacity varies over
time. Values must non-negative. The capacity at a given point in time is determined by the product
of the previous field and the value in this schedule. If the field is omitted or left blank, then the
program assumes a schedule value of 1.0 all the time.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

DistrictHeating ,Purchased Heating ,

NODE_30 ,NODE_29 ,
1000000;

1.23.23.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,District Heating Hot Water Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,District Heating Hot Water Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,DistrictHeating:Plant [J]
– Zone,Meter,Heating:DistrictHeating [J]
– HVAC,Average,District Heating Rate [W]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 933

– HVAC,Average,District Heating Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,District Heating Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,District Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.23.2.1 District Heating Hot Water Rate [W]

1.23.23.2.2 District Heating Hot Water Energy [J]

These outputs are the energy taken from purchased hot water. Consumption is metered on Heat-
ing:DistrictHeating, DistrictHeating:Plant, and DistrictHeating:Facility.

1.23.23.2.3 District Heating Rate [W]

This is the useful rate of heating energy from purchased hot water. For the current algorithm, this
is the same as District Heating Hot Water Rate.

1.23.23.2.4 District Heating Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.23.2.5 District Heating Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.23.2.6 District Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the supply-side plant loop hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and mass flow
rate.

1.23.24 PlantComponent:TemperatureSource
This object allows the simulation of a water (or other fluid) source at a user-specified tempera-
ture. This could include a river, well, or seawater source, or any other configuration where the fluid
temperature being supplied by the component to the plant is known. The temperature may be a
constant or scheduled. Of course, the scheduled value may also be overwritten via EMS in cases
where the specified temperature should be calculated at run-time.

1.23.24.1 Inputs

1.23.24.1.1 Field: Name

This field is the string identifier for this component.

1.23.24.1.2 Field: Inlet Node

This is the name of this component’s inlet node for the plant connection.

1.23.24.1.3 Field: Outlet Node

This is the name of this component’s outlet node for the plant connection. The source temperature
is applied to this node when the component is active.
934 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.24.1.4 Field: Design Volume Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design value for component volume flow rate in m3 /s. This field
may be autosized.

1.23.24.1.5 Field: Temperature Specification Type

This string field specifies the behavior of the source temperature. Two inputs are allowed: Constant
or Scheduled. For a constant condition, a single input value (the next field) is used as the returning
temperature (component outlet temperature) throughout the entire simulation. For a scheduled
condition, the name of a schedule (the following field) is used to allow the temperature to vary
throughout the simulation. This schedule value may be actuated via EMS to allow further flexibility
on temperature specification at run-time.

1.23.24.1.6 Field: Source Temperature

If the Temperature Specification Type field is Constant, then the value in this field is used as the
source temperature (in C) throughout the entire simulation.

1.23.24.1.7 Field: Source Temperature Schedule Name

If the Temperature Specification Type field is Scheduled, then this is the name of a schedule entered
in the IDF which specifies the dynamic temperature of this source object. The units of this schedule
should be C.
And, as shown in an IDF:

PlantComponent:TemperatureSource ,
FluidSource , !- Name
FluidSource Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node
FluidSource Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node
Autosize , !- Design Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Constant , !- Temperature Specification Type
62, !- Source Temperature {C}
; !- Source Temperature Schedule Name

1.23.24.2 Outputs

The following output variables are available for the temperature source plant components:

– HVAC,Average,Plant Temperature Source Component Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

– HVAC,Average,Plant Temperature Source Component Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Temperature Source Component Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Temperature Source Component Source Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Plant Temperature Source Component Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Plant Temperature Source Component Heat Transfer Energy [J]

1.23.24.2.1 Plant Temperature Source Component Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The current mass flow rate of this component.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 935

1.23.24.2.2 Plant Temperature Source Component Inlet Temperature [C]

The current entering fluid temperature of this component.

1.23.24.2.3 Plant Temperature Source Component Outlet Temperature [C]

The current outlet temperature of this component.

1.23.24.2.4 Plant Temperature Source Component Source Temperature [C]

The current source temperature of this component.

1.23.24.2.5 Plant Temperature Source Component Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The current heat transfer rate of this component, positive for outlet temperature > inlet temperature,
or adding heat to the loop, or absorbing heat from the source.

1.23.24.2.6 Plant Temperature Source Component Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The current heat transfer energy over the given reporting period of this component.

1.23.25 CentralHeatPumpSystem
This is a central geothermal application that contains one or more chiller-heaters centrally located
in the building; the available chilled and/or hot water is then piped to the individual zones. Chiller-
heaters used for this particular system can be of two types: 1) standard vapor-compression, non-
reversible cycle chillers designed for heat recovery or 2) reversible-cycle, water-to-water heat pump
chillers. Unlike a distributed ground source heat pump configuration where individual heat pumps
are located in each zone, a centralized geothermal configuration has one or more chiller-heaters.
Its function is to encapsulate the extra controls needed to turn individual chiller-heater modules
on/off and whether they are to operate in cooling-only, heating-only or simultaneous cooling-heating
mode and whether to connect the source water to the evaporator or condenser side. A variety of
control schemes can be designed by setting schedules for both zone control types and individual
chiller-heaters schedules.
The fluid used in this central system is usually water, and there is no sharing of condenser or
evaporator water between multiple machines. However, the control logic is such that the source
water can be delivered to individual chiller-heaters depending on their operating mode, e.g., modules
in simultaneous cooling-heating mode receive no source water, modules in heating-only mode can
have source water directed to their evaporator, or modules in cooling-only mode can have source
water directed to their condenser; the decision on which module(s) receives the source water dictated
by the ‘smart’ controls. The following figures illustrate node interconnections between this central
geothermal application and plant and condenser loops in various situations.
The order of the multiple chiller-heaters’ operation is assumed to be sequential. In other words, the
very first chiller-heater will be called at first to see if it meets all loads that the central heat pump
system should meet. If the chiller-heater meets all loads, the rest chiller-heaters are assumed to be
turned off. If not, the following chiller-heater will be called to meet the remaining loads until all
loads are met in the order as defined in the set of individual chiller-heater objects below. The order
of individual chiller-heater modules needs to be carefully arranged in case users are intended to see
the performance of various combinations of different sizes of chiller-heaters in a central heat pump
system.
936 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.92: Diagram of a central heat pump system with three chiller-heaters in cooling-only mode
(Condensers reject heat to the ground source loop)

Figure 1.93: Diagram of a central heat pump system with three chiller-heaters in heat recovery
mode (No heat is exchanged with the ground source loop)
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 937

Figure 1.94: Diagram of a central heat pump system with one chiller-heater in heat recovery mode
and two chiller-heaters in cooling-only mode

In the above example, the cooling load needs 3 chiller-heaters and the heating load needs 1 chiller
heater. Chiller 1 is in heat recovery mode and isolated from the ground source loop while chillers 2
and 3 are in cooling-only mode, their condensers rejecting heat to the ground source loop.
In the above example, the heating load needs 3 chiller-heaters and the cooling load needs two chiller-
heaters. Chillers 1 and 2 are in heat recovery mode and isolated from the ground source loop while
chiller 3 is in heating-only mode, its evaporator extracting heat from the ground source loop.
Users are required to define three different nodes such as chilled water, hot water, and source water
nodes. Only this central heat pump system will be metered, and individual chiller-heaters’ energy
will be available for reporting only, but not metered.

1.23.25.1 Inputs

1.23.25.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the central heat pump system.

1.23.25.1.2 Field: Control Method

This field must contain a keyword defines how the central heat pump system controls the interaction
between the chiller-heater modules and the water loops to meet the cooling and heating demands.
Currently, the only available option is SmartMixing.

1.23.25.1.3 Field: Cooling Loop Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the chilled water inlet node.
938 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.95: Diagram of a central heat pump system with two chiller-heaters in heat recovery mode
and one chiller-heater in heating-only mode

1.23.25.1.4 Field: Cooling Loop Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the chilled water outlet node.

1.23.25.1.5 Field: Source Loop Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the source water inlet node.

1.23.25.1.6 Field: Source Loop Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the source water outlet node.

1.23.25.1.7 Field: Heating Loop Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the hot water inlet node.

1.23.25.1.8 Field: Heating Loop Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the hot water outlet node.

1.23.25.1.9 Field: Ancillary Power

This numeric field contains the ancillary power of the central heat pump system in watts.

1.23.25.1.10 Field: Ancillary Operation Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the ancillary power schedule.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 939

1.23.25.1.11 Field Set: Individual Chiller-Heater Module Objects

The following four items are repeated up to a maximum of 20 individual chiller-heater modulesets.
At least one module set must appear in an input file. In other words, a central heat pump system
must include at least one chiller-heater module component. A set of the following four fields helps to
define the specific type of a chiller-heater module, its operation control, and the number of identical
chiller-heater module objects.

1.23.25.1.12 Field: Chiller Heater Module Performance Component Object Type

<x>
This alpha field describes the type of the chiller-heater comprising this module set. Only the chiller-
heater type ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR is currently available. Note that up to 20 sets
of chiller-heater module name, schedule, and number of identical chiller-heater may be entered for a
single central heat pump system.

1.23.25.1.13 Field: Chiller Heater Module Performance Component Name <x>

This alpha field is paired with the preceding chiller-heater module type to define the name of the
module.

1.23.25.1.14 Field: Chiller Heater Module Control Schedule Name <x>

This alpha field is paired with the preceding chiller-heater module type and name to define its on/off
control. This schedule will be used for all identical module components as defined in the next field.
Currently, this schedule only controls the module set’s availability, i.e., schedule values equal to 1
indicate that the chiller-heater set is available while schedule values equal to 0 indicate that the
chiller-heater set is off.

1.23.25.1.15 Field: Number of Chiller Heater Modules <x>

This numeric field is paired with the preceding three fields to define how many identical chiller-heaters
define this module set.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

CentralHeatPumpSystem ,
ChillerBank , !- Name
SmartMixing , !- Control Method
Chiller Inlet Node , !- Cooling Loop Inlet Node Name
Chiller Outlet Node , !- Cooling Loop Outlet Node Name
Condenser Inlet Node , !- Source Loop Inlet Node Name
Condenser Outlet Node , !- Source Loop Outlet Node Name
HWInlet , !- Heating Loop Inlet Node Name
HWOutlet , !- Heating Loop Outlet Node Name
460, !- Ancillary Power {W}
, !- Ancillary Operation Schedule Name
ChillerHeaterPerformance :Electric:EIR , !- Chiller Heater Modules Object Type 1
ChillerHeaterModule 1, !- Chiller Heater Modules Performance Component Name 1
ON , !- Chiller Heater Modules Control Schedule Name 1
2, !- Number of Chiller Heater Modules 1
ChillerHeaterPerformance :Electric:EIR , !- Chiller Heater Modules Object Type 2
ChillerHeaterModule 2, !- Chiller Heater Modules Performance Component Name 2
ON , !- Chiller Heater Modules Control Schedule Name 2
2; !- Number of Chiller Heater Modules 2
940 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.25.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater System Cooling Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Heating Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater System Heating Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater System Cooling Energy[J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater System Heating Energy[J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Source Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater System Source Heat Transfer Energy[J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Cooling Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Cooling Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Cooling Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Heating Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Heating Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Source Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Source Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater System Source Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.23.25.2.1 Chiller Heater System Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.25.2.2 Chiller Heater System Cooling Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the sums of the cooling electric power consumption of the central heat pump
system containing one or more child objects. Cooling Energy is metered on Cooling:Electricity,
Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.25.2.3 Chiller Heater System Heating Electricity Rate [W]

1.23.25.2.4 Chiller Heater System Heating Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the sums of the heating electric power consumption of the central heat pump
system. Heating Energy is metered on Heating:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.23.25.2.5 Chiller Heater System Cooling Rate [W]

1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 941

1.23.25.2.6 Chiller Heater System Cooling Energy [J]

These outputs are the evaporator heat transfer which is the cooling delivered by the central heat
pump system. These are the sums of the evaporator heat transfer of individual chiller-heater modules
included in the central heat pump system. Cooling Energy is metered on Chiller:EnergyTransfer,
EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.25.2.7 Chiller Heater System Heating Rate [W]

1.23.25.2.8 Chiller Heater System Heating Energy [J]

These outputs are the condenser heat transfer which is the heating delivered by the central heat
pump system. These are the sums of the condenser heat transfer of individual chiller-heater modules
included in the central heat pump system. Heating Energy is metered on Boiler:EnergyTransfer,
EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.

1.23.25.2.9 Chiller Heater System Source Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.23.25.2.10 Chiller Heater System Source Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These outputs are heat transfer which is the heat rejected to a ground source loop or extracted from
the source loop, depending on the operating modes of the chiller-heater modules. This is the sums
of evaporator heat transfer of the chiller-heater modules in heating-only mode or heating dominant
simultaneous cooling-heating mode while the sums of condenser heat transfer of the chiller-heater
modules in cooling-only mode or cooling dominant simultaneous cooling-heating mode. Source Heat
Transfer Energy is metered on HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and Energy-
Transfer:Facility.

1.23.25.2.11 Chiller Heater System Cooling Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.25.2.12 Chiller Heater System Cooling Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.25.2.13 Chiller Heater System Cooling Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the chilled water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.

1.23.25.2.14 Chiller Heater System Heating Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.25.2.15 Chiller Heater System Heating Outlet Temperature [C]

1.23.25.2.16 Chiller Heater System Heating Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.

1.23.25.2.17 Chiller Heater System Source Inlet Temperature [C]

1.23.25.2.18 Chiller Heater System Source Outlet Temperature [C]

942 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.25.2.19 Chiller Heater System Source Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the source water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.

1.23.26 ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR
The performance of the chiller-heater will be defined by two sets of curves meant to describe un-
loading for: 1) cooling-only mode, and 2) heating-only mode or simultaneous cooling-heating mode.
Reference conditions must be defined for both because each has its own set of three unloading
curves based on their associated reference conditions. The cooling-mode curves are typically (but
not always) based on condenser entering water temperature while the heating-only mode curves are
typically based on condenser leaving water temperature. This chiller-heater object allows the user
to specify whether to use condenser leaving or condenser entering as a dependent variable to differ-
entiate, if necessary, the condenser temperature basis used to generate the cooling- and heating-only
mode curves.

1.23.26.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name of the chiller-heater to be included in a central heat
pump system.

1.23.26.2 Field: Reference Cooling Mode Evaporator Capacity

This numeric field contains the reference cooling capacity of the evaporator in cooling mode in Watts.
This value should be based on the reference temperatures and design water flow rates defined below.
This field can be autosized.

1.23.26.3 Field: Reference Cooling Mode COP

This numeric field contains the reference coefficient of performance of the evaporator for cooling. It
must be based on the values of Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature and
Reference Cooling Mode Entering Condenser Water Temperature defined in the next two fields.

1.23.26.4 Field: Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

This numeric field contains the reference leaving chilled water temperature of the evaporator for
cooling in Celsius. The default value is 6.67°C.

1.23.26.5 Field: Reference Cooling Mode Entering Condenser Water Tempera-

ture

This numeric field contains the reference entering condenser water temperature of the condenser in
the cooling mode in Celsius. The default value is 29.4°C.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 943

1.23.26.6 Field: Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Condenser Water Tempera-

ture

This numeric field contains the reference leaving condenser water temperature of the condenser in
the cooling mode in Celsius. The default value is 35.0°C.

1.23.26.7 Field: Reference Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Ratio

This numeric field contains the evaporator’s capacity during the reference heating-only or simulta-
neous cooling-heating mode as a ratio of reference cooling capacity. For example, the ratio may be
expressed as follows:

EvapCapHtg@T chw,l=6.67C,T cond,l=51.67C

Ratio = (1.91)
EvapCapClg@T chw,l=6.67C,T cond,l=35.0C

where Tchw,l is the leaving chilled water temperature and Tcond,l is the leaving condenser water tem-
perature representing the heating-mode and cooling-mode reference temperatures defined elsewhere
in this object.
The default is 0.75. This field is used to determine evaporator capacity in heating-only mode or
simultaneous cooling-heating mode, multiplying it by the value entered in the field of the Reference
Cooling Mode Evaporator Capacity. Note that even when there is no cooling load, i.e., the machine
is in heating-only mode, the evaporator must still run and extract heat from the source water. In
heating-only mode, the leaving chilled water temperature (Tchw,l) may float depending on the
evaporator water flow rate and the source water temperature. In simultaneous cooling and heating
mode, the leaving chilled water temperature (Tchw,l) does not float but is determined by the chilled
water setpoint controls. For both heating-only and simultaneous cooling and heating mode, the
leaving condenser temperature (Tcond,l) is determined by the hot water supply setpoint controls.
This value of Tchw,l, combined with Tcond,l is plugged into the CAPFT and EIRFT curves to
determine the off-rated heating-mode evaporator capacity and associated compressor power.

1.23.26.8 Field: Reference Heating Mode Cooling Power Ratio

This numeric field contains the compressor power during simultaneous cooling-heating mode as a
ratio of reference cooling compressor power. For example, the ratio may be expressed as follows:

P ower@T chw,l=6.67C,T cond,l=51.67C

Ratio = (1.92)
P ower@T chw,l=6.67C,T cond,l=35.0C

The default value is 1.5. This field is used to determine full load compressor power at the simultaneous
cooling-heating mode’s reference chilled water leaving and condenser water leaving temperatures.
Note: In heating-only mode, the chilled water leaving temperature floats so the EIRFT curve is used
to modify the simultaneouos cooling-heating full load compressor power value.

1.23.26.9 Field: Reference Heating Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature

This numeric field contains the reference leaving chilled water temperature of the evaporator in
simultaneous cooling-heating mode in Celsius. This is typically the same as the reference cooling
mode value and is used to create the heating-only mode and simultaneous cooling-heating mode
944 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

unloading curves. The leaving chilled water temperature for the chiller-heater is not allowed to fall
below this value during the heating-only mode and simultaneous cooling-heating mode. The default
value is 6.67°C.

1.23.26.10 Field: Reference Heating Mode Leaving Condenser Water Tempera-

ture

This numeric field contains the reference leaving condenser water temperature of the condenser in
heating mode in Celsius. This field is typically controlled to the design hot water supply temperature,
and used to create the heating-only mode and simultaneous cooling-heating mode unloading curves.
The default value is 60.0°C.

1.23.26.11 Field: Reference Heating Mode Entering Condenser Water Temper-

ature

This numeric field contains the reference entering condenser water temperature of the condenser
in heating mode in Celsius. This field typically represents the upper limit of the source water
temperature. The default value is 29.44°C.

1.23.26.12 Field: Heating Mode Entering Chilled Water Temperature Low Limit

This numeric field contains the low limit of the entering chilled water temperature in heating-only
mode or simultaneous cooling-heating mode in Celsius. This field typically represents the lower limit
of the source water temperature. If necessary, auxiliary heat will be activated to prevent source water
temperature falling below the chilled water entering minimum. The default value is 12.2°C.

1.23.26.13 Field: Chilled Water Flow Mode Type

This alpha field contains the chilled water flow control mode. Valid water flow mode includes constant
flow and variable flow, and the default water flow mode is constant flow.

1.23.26.14 Field: Design Chilled Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design chilled water flow rate in m3 /s. The minimum value for this
field must be greater than zero, and this field is autosizable.

1.23.26.15 Field: Design Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design condenser water flow rate in m3 /s. The minimum value for
this field must be greater than zero, and this field is autosizable.

1.23.26.16 Field: Design Hot Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design hot water flow rate in m3 /s. The minimum value and default
value for this field are zero, and this field is autosizable.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 945

1.23.26.17 Field: Compressor Motor Efficiency

This numeric field contains the fraction of efficiency of the compressor electrical energy consumption
that must be rejected by the condenser. This value must be between 0.0 and 1.0, and the default
value is 1.0.

1.23.26.18 Field: Condenser Type

This alpha field contains the type of condenser. WaterCooled is the only valid type, and it requires
the full specification of the condenser loop and its associated equipment.

1.23.26.19 Field: Cooling Mode Temperature Curve Condenser Water Indepen-

dent Variable

This alpha field determines whether the entering or leaving condenser water temperature is used
in the cooling mode unloading performance curves that follow. Valid variables include Entering-
Condenser and LeavingCondenser, and the default variable is EnteringCondenser. The condenser
temperature used for the cooling mode unloading performance curves will be dependent on this field
input. For example, leaving condenser water temperature will be used when the LeavingCondenser
is chosen, otherwise entering condenser water temperature.

1.23.26.20 Field: Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature

Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the evaporator capacity as a function of the leaving chilled water
temperature and either the entering condenser water temperature or the leaving condenser water
temperature as defined in the previous field. It is then multiplied by the reference evaporator capac-
ity to give the cooling capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures
different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference
temperatures and flow rates specified above. The biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of
water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.

1.23.26.21 Field: Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function
of Temperature Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of
the leaving chilled water temperature and either the entering condenser water temperature or the
leaving condenser water temperature as defined by the user. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. It
is then multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the EIR at specific
temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures).
The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The
biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
946 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.26.22 Field: Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function
of Part Load Ratio Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of a performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parame-
terizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load
ratio (EIRFPLR). The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling
load divided by the available cooling capacity of the chiller-heater. This curve is generated by di-
viding the operating electric input power by the available full-load capacity at the specific operating
temperatures. The curve output should decrease from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases from
1 to 0. Note that the bi-cubic formulation is generally only valid when LeavingCondenser variable is
chosen for the field of Cooling Mode Condenser Water Temperature Curve Input Variable whereas
the quadratic curve can be used both choices, i.e., LeavingCondenser and EnteringCondenser. The
output of this curve is then multiplied by the reference full-load EIR and the EIRFT to give the
EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller-heater is operating. This
curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0. The curve should be valid for
the range of part-load ratios anticipated for the simulation.

1.23.26.23 Field: Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller-heater’s optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio
at which the chiller-heater performs at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be
greater than or equal to the minimum part-load ratio, and less than or equal to the maximum part-
load ratio. (Note: Both the minimum part-load ratio and maximum part-load ratio are taken from
the Cooling Mode EIRFPLR curve definition.) The default value is 1.0.

1.23.26.24 Field: Heating Mode Temperature Curve Condenser Water Indepen-

dent Variable

This alpha field determines whether the entering or leaving condenser water temperature is used
in the heating mode unloading performance curves that follow. Valid variables include Entering-
Condenser and LeavingCondenser, and the default variable is EnteringCondenser. The condenser
temperature used for the cooling mode unloading performance curves will be dependent on this field
input. For example, leaving condenser water temperature will be used when the LeavingCondenser
is chosen, otherwise entering condenser water temperature.

1.23.26.25 Field: Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature

Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the evaporator capacity in heating mode as a function of the
leaving chilled water temperature and either the entering condenser water temperature or the leav-
ing condenser water temperature as defined in the previous field. This curve is used to evaluate the
adjusted evaporator capacity during heating-only mode or simultaneous cooling-heating mode. This
adjusted capacity is used as part of the cooling part-load calculation for the EIRFPLR curve. It
is then multiplied by the reference evaporator capacity to give the cooling capacity at specific tem-
perature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The
curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The
biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 947

1.23.26.26 Field: Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Func-
tion of Temperature Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of
the leaving chilled water temperature and either the entering condenser water temperature or the
leaving condenser water temperature as defined by the user. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. It
is then multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the EIR at specific
temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures).
The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The
biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.

1.23.26.27 Field: Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Func-
tion of Part Load Ratio Curve Name

This alpha field contains the name of a performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parame-
terizes the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load
ratio (EIRFPLR). The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual evaporator
load divided by the available evaporator capacity of the chiller-heater at the reference heating and
simultaneous cooling-heating mode temperatures. This curve is generated by dividing the operating
electric input power by the available full-load capacity (do not divide by load) at the specific oper-
ating temperatures. The curve output should decrease from 1 towards 0 as part-load ratio decreases
from 1 to 0. Note that the bicubic formulation below can only be used when the chiller-heater uses
a variable speed compressor motor drive. It is also generally valid only when LeavingCondenser
variable is chosen for the field of Cooling Mode Condenser Water Temperature Curve Input Variable
whereas the quadratic curve can be used both choices, i.e., LeavingCondenser and EnteringCon-
denser. The output of this curve is then multiplied by the reference full-load EIR (inverse of the
reference COP) and the EIRFT to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at
which the chiller-heater is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio
equals 1.0. The curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated for the simulation.

1.23.26.28 Field: Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio

This numeric field contains the chiller-heater’s optimum part-load ratio during heating-only mode or
simultaneous cooling-heating mode. This is the part-load ratio at which the chiller-heater performs
at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater than or equal to the minimum
part-load ratio, and less than or equal to the maximum part-load ratio. (Note: Both the minimum
part-load ratio and maximum part-load ratio are taken from the Heating Mode EIRFPLR curve
definition.) The default value is 1.0.

1.23.26.29 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The Sizing
Factor is a multiplier on the design plant chilled water loop flow rate associated with the chiller-
heaters parent CentralHeatPumpSystem object. The chiller-heater’s modified chilled water flow can
then be used to autocalculate the Design Condenser Water Flow Rate and Reference Cooling Mode
Evaporator Capacity values. In general, it is best to autosize all three fields or set fixed values for
all three fields.
948 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

An example of this statement in an IDF is:

ChillerHeaterPerformance :Electric:EIR ,
ChillerHeaterModule 1, !- Name
12500 , !- Reference Cooling Mode Evaporator Capacity {W}
1.5, !- Reference Cooling Mode COP {W/W}
6.67, !- Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
29.4, !- Reference Cooling Mode Entering Condenser Fluid Temperature {C}
35.0, !- Reference Cooling Mode Leaving Condenser Water Temperature {C}
0.74, !- Reference Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Ratio
1.38, !- Reference Heating Mode Cooling Power Input Ratio
6.67, !- Reference Heating Mode Leaving Chilled Water Temperature {C}
60, !- Reference Heating Mode Leaving Condenser Water Temperature {C}
29.44 , !- Reference Heating Mode Entering Condenser Fluid Temperature {C}
5, !- Heating Mode Entering Chilled Water Temperature Low Limit {C}
VariableFlow , !- Chilled Water Flow Mode Type
0.0003525 , !- Design Chilled Water Flow Rate {m$ ^{3}$/s}
0.0005525 , !- Design Condenser Water Flow Rate {m$ ^{3}$/s}
0.0003525 , !- Design Hot Water Flow Rate {m$ ^{3}$/s}
1, !- Compressor Motor Efficiency
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
EnteringCondenser , !- Cooling Mode Temperature Curve Condenser Water Independent Variable
ChillerHeaterClgCapFT , !- Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterClgEIRFT , !- Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
!- Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterClgEIRFPLR , !- Cooling Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Part Load
!- Ratio Curve Name
1, !- Cooling Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio
LeavingCondenser , !- Heating Mode Temperature Curve Condenser Water Independent Variable
ChillerHeaterHtgCapFT , !- Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterHtgEIRFT , !- Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
!- Temperature Curve Name
ChillerHeaterHtgEIRFPLR , !- Heating Mode Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of
Part Load
!- Ratio Curve Name
1, !- Heating Mode Cooling Capacity Optimum Part Load Ratio
1; !- Sizing Factor

1.23.27 ChillerHeaterPerformance:Electric:EIR Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Operation Mode Unit <x> []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Part Load Ratio Unit <x> []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cycling Ratio Unit <x> []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Rate Unit <x> [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Energy Unit <x> [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Rate Unit <x> [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Energy Unit <x> [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Cooling Rate Unit <x> [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Cooling Energy Unit <x> [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [J]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [J]
1.23. GROUP – PLANT EQUIPMENT 949

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Inlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]

– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Outlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Evaporator Mass Flow Rate Unit <x> [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Outlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Condenser Mass Flow Rate Unit <x> [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater COP Unit <x> []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater Capacity Temperature Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater EIR Temperature Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> []
– HVAC,Average,Chiller Heater EIR Part Load Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> []

Note that much of these output variables are adapted from the definitions above under “Generic
Chiller Outputs” and “Electric EIR Chiller Outputs.” The following outputs are repeated up to the
maximum of individual chiller-heater module objects. The maximum number may be different from
the number of object defined in this object when users define two or more identical chiller-heater
modules for a single chiller heater object in the central heat pump system.

1.23.27.1 Chiller Heater Operation Mode Unit <x>

This output represents the operating mode of the chiller-heater module. Two single mode outputs
and three simultaneous cooling-heating mode outputs are possible:

0. off
1. cooling-only mode
2. heating-only mode
3. heat recovery mode
4. cooling dominant simultaneous cooling-heating mode
5. heating dominant simultaneous cooling-heating mode.

The first mode 0 is reported when the chiller-heater is turned off. The next two modes 2 and 3 are
reported when the chiller-heater provides only either cooling or heating, respectively. The last three
modes 3 to 5 indicate when the chiller-heater is in a simultaneous cooling-heating mode. Mode 3
indicates the chiller-heaters provides simultaneous cooling and heating without heat exchange with
the ground source. Mode 4 denotes that at least one of the chiller-heater modules in the central
heat pump system provides both cooling and heating, and the chiller-heater is meeting remaining
cooling demand (see Figure 1.94. Diagram of a central heat pump system with one chiller-heater in
heat recovery mode and two chiller-heaters in cooling-only mode) Similarly, mode 5 indicates that
at least one of the chiller-heater modules in the central heat pump system is in the heat recovery
mode, and the chiller-heater is meeting remaining heating demand (see Figure 1.95).
Note that the decision to operate individual chiller-heater modules is solely dependent on the chiller-
heater schedule and loads. A fraction may appear in case the chiller-heater mode varies within a zone
time step. In this particular case, users may define a detailed reporting frequency for this output
variable.
950 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.23.27.2 Chiller Heater Part Load Ratio Unit <x>

This output is the ratio of the evaporator heat transfer rate plus the false load heat transfer rate (if
applicable) to the available chiller-heater capacity. This value is used to determine ChillerEIRFPLR.

1.23.27.3 Chiller Heater Cycling Ratio Unit <x>

The cycling ratio is the amount of time the chiller-heater operates during each simulation time step.
If the chiller-heater part-load ratio falls below the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller-heater cycles
on and off to meet the loads.

1.23.27.4 Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Rate Unit <x> [W]

1.23.27.5 Chiller Heater Cooling Electricity Energy Unit <x> [J]

These outputs are the cooling electric power consumption of the chiller-heater.

1.23.27.6 Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Rate Unit <x> [W]

1.23.27.7 Chiller Heater Heating Electricity Energy Unit <x> [J]

These outputs are the heating electric power consumption of the chiller-heater.

1.23.27.8 Chiller Heater Cooling Rate Unit <x> [W]

1.23.27.9 Chiller Heater Cooling Energy Unit <x> [J]

These outputs are the evaporator heat transfer which is the cooling delivered by the chiller-heater
module.

1.23.27.10 Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [W]

1.23.27.11 Chiller Heater False Load Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [J]

These outputs are the heat transfer rate and total heat transfer due to false loading of the chiller-
heater. When the chiller-heater part-load ratio is below the minimum unloading ratio, the chiller-
heater false loads (e.g. hot-gas bypass) to further reduce capacity.

1.23.27.12 Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Rate Unit <x> [C]

1.23.27.13 Chiller Heater Condenser Heat Transfer Energy Unit <x> [C]

These outputs are the heat transfer which is the heating delivered by the chiller-heater module in
heating mode.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 951

1.23.27.14 Chiller Heater Evaporator Inlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]

1.23.27.15 Chiller Heater Evaporator Outlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]

1.23.27.16 Chiller Heater Evaporator Mass Flow Rate Unit <x> [C]

These outputs are the evaporator water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate. Note that
these represent the chilled water temperatures and flow rate in cooling mode or the source water
temperature and flow rate in heating mode.

1.23.27.17 Chiller Heater Condenser Inlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]

1.23.27.18 Chiller Heater Condenser Outlet Temperature Unit <x> [C]

1.23.27.19 Chiller Heater Condenser Mass Flow Rate Unit <x> [C]

These outputs are the condenser water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate. Note that these
represent the hot water temperatures and flow rate in heating mode or the source water temperature
and flow rate in cooling mode.

1.23.27.20 Chiller Heater COP Unit <x> [C]

This output is the coefficient of performance for the chiller-heater. It is calculated as the evaporator
heat transfer rate divided by the chiller-heater electric power.

1.23.27.21 Chiller Heater Capacity Temperature Modifier Multiplier Unit <x>

[C]

This is the output of the curve object Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve.

1.23.27.22 Chiller Heater EIR Temperature Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> [C]

This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temper-
ature Curve.

1.23.27.23 Chiller Heater EIR Part Load Modifier Multiplier Unit <x> [C]

This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load
Ratio Curve.

1.24 Group – Water Heaters and Thermal Storage

Water heater objects are components for storing and heating water. They can be coupled to a plant
loop simulation or used stand-alone. Typical water heater applications are for domestic hot water
heating, low-temperature radiant space heating, and energy storage for solar hot water systems or
waste heat recovery.
952 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

When coupled to the plant loop, the water heater has an inlet node and outlet node on the “source
side” and an inlet node and outlet node on the “use side”. The source side typically draws cold water
from the tank and returns warmer water, for instance, from solar hot water systems or waste heat
recovery systems. The use side typically draws hot water from the tank and returns cooler water from
the cold water supply mains or from the outlet of a heating system. The distinction between source
and use sides is merely a convenience for reporting. They can actually be used interchangeably. If so
desired, either source side or use side can be used by itself, without the other side being connected
to the plant loop.
However, for a water heater that is indirectly heated (e.g. with a separate boiler), the source side
can be used to provide remotely heated water to the tank. The source side is configured to operate
as a component on the demand side of a plant loop. The design flow rate through the source side
can be set by the user or autosized. If autosized, then a Plant Sizing object is needed elsewhere
in the input file for the Plant Loop serving the source side. The water heater input includes an
additional design parameter that describes how rapidly the tank can recover.

Figure 1.96: Water Heater Configuration

If the use side only consists of domestic hot water usage, a simple scheduled use flow rate can be spec-
ified in lieu of the full plant loop connections. The scheduled use flow rate can be used simultaneously
with source side plant connections, but cannot be used with use side plant connections.
For stand-alone operation, there are no node connections to the plant loop on either source or use
sides. The scheduled use flow rate determines all fluid exchange with the water tank.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 953

There are currently two water heater objects in EnergyPlus:

– WaterHeater:Mixed
– WaterHeater:Stratified

There are also compound objects that uses the WaterHeater:Mixed and/or WaterHeater:Stratified
as part of their strategy:

– WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser (WaterHeater:Mixed or WaterHeater:Stratified)

– WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser (WaterHeater:Stratified only)

The WaterHeater:Mixed object simulates a well-mixed, single-node water tank. The Water-
Heater:Stratified object simulates a stratified, multi-node water tank. Both water heater objects
can be appropriate for simulating many types of water heaters and storage tanks, including gas and
electric residential water heaters, and a variety of large commercial water heaters. Both objects
share similar features, such as stand-alone operation, on- and off-cycle parasitic loads, and thermal
losses to the zone. However, each object has its advantages which may make one water heater
object more appropriate than the other depending on the application.
Advantages of WaterHeater:Mixed:

– can simulate instantaneous/tankless water heaters

– requires less input than the stratified tank
– faster execution time than the stratified tank
– adequate for modeling gas water heaters with no source connections.

Advantages of WaterHeater:Stratified:

– better modeling of electric water heaters with two heating elements

– better modeling of thermal storage applications which rely on stratification to improve heat
transfer peformance.

1.24.1 Standard Ratings

The EIO file reports the industry standard ratings of Recovery Efficiency and Energy Factor for
water heater objects. The rating method is based on the GAMA and 10CFR430 test procedures.
Under certain input parameters, the rating method will not succeed and a warning message will be
generated. Problems occur when inputs do not allow the tank to recover to the setpoint temperature
within the test period. This can occur if the maximum heater capacity is undersized, or if the
deadband temperature difference is large enough that the first draw of the test does not trigger the
heater to come on. In either case, the Recovery Efficiency test will not compute properly because
recovery to the setpoint was not achieved.
Standard ratings for storage-only water tanks (Heater Maximum Capacity = 0) cannot be calculated
and do not report anything in the EIO file.
954 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.2 WaterHeater:Mixed
The WaterHeater:Mixed object analytically solves the differential equation governing the energy
balance of the water tank. Within a timestep, conditions are solved separately for when the heater
element or burner is “on” (on-cycle) and when it is “off” (off-cycle). This approach allows ambient
losses and parasitic loads to be divided into on-cycle and off-cycle effects and accounted for in detail.
For losses to the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule, a
zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, a fraction of the skin losses can be added to the zone
heat balance as internal heat gains.
Control options allow the heater to cycle or modulate to meet the load. When cycling, the heater
element or burner is either on or off. The heater remains fully on while heating the tank up to
the setpoint temperature. When the setpoint is reached, the heater turns off. The heater remains
off until the tank temperature falls below the “cut-in” temperature, i.e., the setpoint temperature
minus the deadband temperature difference. The heater continuously cycles on and off to maintain
the tank temperature within the deadband. Most storage-tank water heaters cycle.
When modulating, the heater power varies between the maximum and minimum heater capacities.
The heater stays on as long as the required total demand is above the minimum capacity. Below
the minimum capacity, the heater will begin to cycle on and off based on the deadband temperature
difference. Equipment is usually designed and rated to avoid this condition. Most tankless/instan-
taneous water heaters modulate.

1.24.2.1 Inputs

1.24.2.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the WaterHeater:Mixed object.

1.24.2.1.2 Field: Tank Volume

The volume of the storage tank [m3 ]. This field is autosizable if used with a Water Heater:Sizing
object. Although this field is allowed to go down to zero, even so-called “tankless” water heaters
have some volume of water that is maintained around the heating elements or in the heat exchanger,
typically around 0.00379 m3 (1 gallon).

1.24.2.1.3 Field: Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the hot water temperature setpoint [°C]. Also known
as the “cut-out” temperature.

1.24.2.1.4 Field: Deadband Temperature Difference

The delta temperature difference [Δ°C] between the setpoint and the “cut-in” temperature at which
the heater will turn on. In other words, the “cut-in” temperature is Setpoint – Deadband.

1.24.2.1.5 Field: Maximum Temperature Limit

The temperature [°C] at which the tank water becomes dangerously hot and is vented through
boiling or an automatic safety. The tank temperature will never exceed the maximum. Any extra
heat added to the tank is immediately vented. Note: The maximum temperature must be greater
than the setpoint temperature at all times.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 955

1.24.2.1.6 Field: Heater Control Type

The control type can be Cycle or Modulate. Cycle is appropriate for most storage tank-type water
heaters. Modulate is appropriate for most instantaneous/tankless water heaters.

1.24.2.1.7 Field: Heater Maximum Capacity

The maximum heat rate [W] that can be supplied to the water, probably the same as the “nominal”
capacity. This field is autosizable if used with a Water Heater:Sizing object.

1.24.2.1.8 Field: Heater Minimum Capacity

The minimum heat rate [W] that can be supplied to the water. This field is only used when the
Heater Control Type is Modulate. If the total demand rate for heating is less than the minimum,
even a modulating water heater will begin to cycle.

1.24.2.1.9 Field: Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate

NOT YET IMPLEMENTED.

1.24.2.1.10 Field: Heater Ignition Delay

NOT YET IMPLEMENTED.

1.24.2.1.11 Field: Heater Fuel Type

The type of fuel used for heating. The fuel type can be Electricity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1,
FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, Steam, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2 or DistrictHeating.

1.24.2.1.12 Field: Heater Thermal Efficiency

The thermal conversion efficiency from fuel energy to heat energy for the heater element or burner.
This is not the same as the overall efficiency of the water heater.

1.24.2.1.13 Field: Part Load Factor Curve Name

The reference to the curve object that relates the overall efficiency of the water heater to the Runtime
Fraction (if Control Type Cycle) or Part Load Ratio (if Control Type Modulate). This is an
additional multiplier applied to the Heater Thermal Efficiency to compute fuel energy use. The Part
Load Factor Curve should not have a value less than 0.1 in the domain from 0 to 1. If the Part Load
Factor Curve accounts for ambient losses and/or parasitic fuel consumption, these effects should not
also be input into the related fields in this object as that would result in double-counting.

1.24.2.1.14 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate

Off-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is off, for
example, a pilot light, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate [W] is
strictly the total fuel that is consumed by all of the off-cycle parasitics.
956 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.2.1.15 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

The type of fuel used by the off-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be Electricity, NaturalGas,
Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, Steam, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2 or Dis-
trictHeating. The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater Fuel Type.

1.24.2.1.16 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank

The fraction of off-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the
tank water. For example, a pilot light would deliver most of its heat to the tank water, as long as the
thermal conversion efficiency must be taken into account, so perhaps 0.80 is reasonable. Electronic
control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any heat to the tank and should be 0.

1.24.2.1.17 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate

On-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is on, for
example, an induction fan, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate [W] is
strictly the total fuel that is consumed by all of the on-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.1.18 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

The type of fuel used by the on-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be Electricity, NaturalGas,
Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, Steam, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2 or Dis-
trictHeating. The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater Fuel Type.

1.24.2.1.19 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank

The fraction of on-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the
tank water. For example, an induction fan might (maybe) deliver a small fraction of its energy to
the tank water for a value of 0.05. Electronic control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any
heat to the tank and should be 0.

1.24.2.1.20 Field: Ambient Temperature Indicator

The Ambient Temperature Indicator specifies how the ambient air temperature will be indicated.
The field can be Schedule, Zone, or Outdoors. If Schedule is used, the Ambient Temperature
Schedule field provides the ambient temperature. If Zone is used, the zone air temperature of
the zone specified in the Ambient Temperature Zone field provides the ambient temperature. If
Outdoors is used, the outdoor dry-bulb air temperature provides the ambient temperature.

1.24.2.1.21 Field: Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
losses. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Schedule.

1.24.2.1.22 Field: Ambient Temperature Zone Name

The reference to the zone object specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
losses. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 957

1.24.2.1.23 Field: Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the ambient conditions
surrounding the water heater tank. This field is applicable only when the Ambient Temperature
Indicator is specified as Outdoors, otherwise this field should be left blank. The node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.

1.24.2.1.24 Field: Off-Cycle Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature

The loss coefficient [W/K] to the ambient air temperature. Often this coefficient is identical to the
“UA” for skin losses. However, it can also be used to model the loss effects of the flue in a combustion
water heater, in addition to the skin losses.

1.24.2.1.25 Field: Off-Cycle Loss Fraction to Zone

If the Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the off-cycle
losses to the zone heat balance as an internal gain.

1.24.2.1.26 Field: On-Cycle Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature

The loss coefficient [W/K] to the ambient air temperature. Often this coefficient is identical to the
“UA” for skin losses. If the loss effects of the flue are being modeled in the Off-Cycle Loss Coefficient,
than this field would have a different value accounting only for the skin losses.

1.24.2.1.27 Field: On-Cycle Loss Fraction to Zone

If the Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the on-cycle
losses to the zone heat balance as an internal gain.

1.24.2.1.28 Field: Peak Use Flow Rate

The peak flow rate [m3 /s] of domestic hot water usage for stand-alone operation, i.e., without plant
loop node connections. The peak value is multiplied by the Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule. If
there are node connections, this field is not used.

1.24.2.1.29 Field: Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifiying the current fraction of Peak Volumetric Use Flow
Rate of domestic hot water usage for stand-alone operation.

1.24.2.1.30 Field: Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the cold water temperature [°C] from the supply mains
that makes up for the hot water lost down the drain. If blank, water temperatures are calculated by
the Site:WaterMainsTemperature object. This field is for stand-alone operation only. If there are
node connections, this field is not used.
958 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.2.1.31 Field: Use Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the water heater. Typically the use
side draws hot water from the tank and returns cooler water.

1.24.2.1.32 Field: Use Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the water heater. Typically the use
side draws hot water from the tank and returns cooler water.

1.24.2.1.33 Field: Use Side Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the use side water and the tank water. If
the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the use
side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the use side outlet water temperature
will not be as hot as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.

1.24.2.1.34 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the water heater. Typically the
source side draws cold water from the tank and returns warmer water. The source side volume flow
rate is obtained from the plant loop. The magnitude of the flow rates through the source side can
be controlled by setting the Maximum Branch Flow Rate field in the Branch object that connects
the source inlet node.

1.24.2.1.35 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the water heater. Typically the
source side draws cold water from the tank and returns warmer water.

1.24.2.1.36 Field: Source Side Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the source side water and the tank water.
If the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the
source side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the source side outlet water
temperature will not be as hot as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.

1.24.2.1.37 Field: Use Side Design Flow Rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Use Side of the water
heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field is needed when the Use Side
is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the input file should
include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.

1.24.2.1.38 Field: Source Side Design Flow Rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Source Side of the water
heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field is needed when the Source
Side is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the input file
should include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 959

1.24.2.1.39 Field: Indirect Water Heating Recovery Time

This field is optional and is used to provide a design parameter for autosizing design flow rates when
the water heater is connected to the demand side of a plant loop. The recovery time is expressed
in hours. This is the time that the entire volume of the tank can be heated from 14.4ºC to 57.2ºC
(58ºF to 135ºF) with an inlet temperature defined as the exit temperature in the associated Plant
Sizing object. The default is 1.5 hours. The calculation is based on log-mean temperature difference
(LMTD) and includes the heat transfer effectiveness factor entered above.

1.24.2.1.40 Field: Source Side Flow Control Mode

This field is optional and is used to provide control over the logic used by the source side of the water
heater to request flow. There are three choices for different modes: IndirectHeatPrimarySetpoint,
IndirectHeatAlternateSetpoint, or StorageTank. The mode called IndirectHeatPrimarySetpoint is
the historical behavior prior to version 8.1. In this mode the water heater will request flow at the
source side when the main setpoint, in the input field called Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name,
and deadband call for the tank to be heated. This mode is typical for a water heater indirectly
heated by a boiler. The mode called IndirectHeatAlternateSetpoint is similar but it bases its control
decisions on an alternate setpoint given in the following field. This mode is useful when the indirect
source of heat may not satisfy the load and an internal heater is used for backup. The mode called
StorageTank is for a passive tank and it always requests flow unless the tank temperature is equal
to or higher than the maximum limit given in the input field called Maximum Temperature Limit.

1.24.2.1.41 Field: Indirect Alternate Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

This field is optional and is used to provide a schedule with alternate setpoints for use with the
IndirectHeatAlternateSetpoint mode in the previous field. The input field should contain a reference
to a schedule object specifying the hot water temperature setpoint [°C] to use as the “cut-out”
temperature for control logic at the source side.

1.24.2.1.42 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the water heater will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

WaterHeater:Mixed , ! Stand -alone electric , outdoor example

Outdoor Electric Tank , !- Name
0.151 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule
2.0, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
Cycle , !- Heater Control Type {Cycle | Modulate}
11712 , !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.95, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve
15, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
15, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
960 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ELECTRICITY , !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

0, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
Outdoors , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator {Schedule | Zone | Outdoors}
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone
2.36, !- Off -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- Off -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
2.36, !- On -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- On -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
0.000379 , !- Peak Volumetric Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
Hot Water Demand Schedule , !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule
Constant Mains Temp Schedule; !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule

WaterHeater:Mixed , ! Stand -alone electric , tankless example

Tankless , !- Name
0.003785 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule
, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
Modulate , !- Heater Control Type {Cycle | Modulate}
11712 , !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
0, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.95, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve
10, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
30, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
Schedule , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator {Schedule | Zone | Outdoors}
Hot Water Ambient Temp Schedule , !- Ambient Temperature Schedule
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone
, !- Off -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- Off -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
, !- On -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- On -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
0.000379 , !- Peak Volumetric Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
Hot Water Demand Schedule , !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule
; !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule

WaterHeater:Mixed , ! Plant loop connected , gas example

Water Heater , !- Name
0.454 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule
5.0, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
Cycle , !- Heater Control Type {Cycle | Modulate}
2000, !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
NATURALGAS , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.80, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
Schedule , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator {Schedule | Zone | Outdoors}
Hot Water Ambient Temp Schedule , !- Ambient Temperature Schedule
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 961

, !- Ambient Temperature Zone

5.0, !- Off -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- Off -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
5.0, !- On -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- On -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
, !- Peak Volumetric Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule
Water Heater Use Inlet Node , !- Use Side Inlet Node
Water Heater Use Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node
1.0, !- Use Side Effectiveness
Water Heater Source Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node
Water Heater Source Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node
1.0; !- Source Side Effectiveness

WaterHeater:Mixed ,
Indirect Water Heater , !- Name
1.00, !- Tank Volume {m3}
Hot Water Setpoint Temperature Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule
5.0, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
Cycle , !- Heater Control Type
0.0, !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.8, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
Zone , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule
SPACE5 -1, !- Ambient Temperature Zone
, !- Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node
5.0, !- Off -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- Off -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
5.0, !- On -Cycle Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- On -Cycle Loss Fraction To Zone
, !- Peak Volumetric Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule
SHWSys1 Pump -SHWSys1 Water HeaterNode , !- Use Side Inlet Node
SHWSys1 Supply Equipment Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node
1.0, !- Use Side Effectiveness
Indirect Water Heater SrcSideInletNode , !- Source Side Inlet Node
Indirect Water Heater SrcSideOutletNode , !- Source Side Outlet Node
0.9, !- Source Side Effectiveness
autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate
autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate
1.0; !- Indirect Water Heating Recovery Time

1.24.2.2 Outputs

The following output variables are reported for the WaterHeater:Mixed object:

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heat Loss Rate [W]
962 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heat Loss Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average, Water Heater Use Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Side Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Side Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Use Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Total Demand Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Total Demand Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Unmet Demand Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Unmet Demand Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Venting Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Venting Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Cycle On Count []
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Runtime Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Water Volume [m3]
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 963

1.24.2.2.1 Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]

The average water tank temperature.

1.24.2.2.2 Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C]

The final water tank temperature at the end of the system timestep. If reported at the “Detailed”
interval, this output variable can be used to verify an exact energy balance on the water heater.
Also see the output variable: Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy.

1.24.2.2.3 Water Heater Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average heat loss rate due to the off- and on-cycle loss coefficients to the ambient temperature.

1.24.2.2.4 Water Heater Heat Loss Energy [J]

The heat loss energy due to the off- and on-cycle loss coefficients to the ambient temperature.

1.24.2.2.5 Water Heater Use Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The use side mass flow rate. If stand-alone, this is the scheduled use flow rate.

1.24.2.2.6 Water Heater Use Side Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the use side.

1.24.2.2.7 Water Heater Use Side Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature on the use side.

1.24.2.2.8 Water Heater Use Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.

1.24.2.2.9 Water Heater Use Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.

1.24.2.2.10 Water Heater Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The source side mass flow rate. If in stand-alone operation, this is 0.

1.24.2.2.11 Water Heater Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the source side.

1.24.2.2.12 Water Heater Source Side Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature on the source side.

1.24.2.2.13 Water Heater Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.
964 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.2.2.14 Water Heater Source Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.

1.24.2.2.15 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.16 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat gain energy to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.17 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.18 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Tank Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat gain energy to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.19 Water Heater Total Demand Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average heating rate demanded to maintain the setpoint temperature.

1.24.2.2.20 Water Heater Total Demand Energy [J]

The heating energy demanded to maintain the setpoint temperature.

1.24.2.2.21 Water Heater Heating Rate [W]

The average heating rate supplied by the heater element or burner.

1.24.2.2.22 Water Heater Heating Energy [J]

The heating energy supplied by the heater element or burner.

1.24.2.2.23 Water Heater Unmet Demand Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average heating rate unmet by the heater element or burner. The difference between the Total
Demand Rate and the Heating Rate.

1.24.2.2.24 Water Heater Unmet Demand Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The heating energy unmet by the heater element or burner. The difference between the Total
Demand Energy and the Heating Energy.

1.24.2.2.25 Water Heater Venting Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average venting rate to keep the tank below the Maximum Temperature Limit.

1.24.2.2.26 Water Heater Venting Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The venting energy to keep the tank below the Maximum Temperature Limit.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 965

1.24.2.2.27 Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average net heat transfer rate when considering all losses and gains.

1.24.2.2.28 Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The net heat transfer energy when considering all losses and gains.

1.24.2.2.29 Water Heater Cycle On Count []

The number of times that the heater turned on in the time period.

1.24.2.2.30 Water Heater Runtime Fraction []

The fraction of the time period that the heater was running.

1.24.2.2.31 Water Heater Part Load Ratio []

The fraction of the Heater Maximum Capacity.

1.24.2.2.32 Water Heater <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.24.2.2.33 Water Heater Electricity Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the heater element or burner.

1.24.2.2.34 Water Heater <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the heater element or burner.

1.24.2.2.35 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.24.2.2.36 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic Electricity Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the off-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.37 Water Heater Off Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Energy [J]
The fuel consumption energy for the off-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.38 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Rate [W]

1.24.2.2.39 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic Electricity Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the on-cycle parasitics.

1.24.2.2.40 Water Heater On Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the on-cycle parasitics.
966 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.2.2.41 Water Heater Water Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]

The water consumption rate for the use side, if in stand-alone operation.

1.24.2.2.42 Water Heater Water Volume [m3 ]

The water consumption for the use side, if in stand-alone operation.

1.24.2.2.43 Water Heater Mains Water Volume [m3]

The volume of water consumption drawn from mains water service.

1.24.3 WaterHeater:Stratified
The WaterHeater:Stratified object divides the water tank into multiple nodes of equal volume. The
nodes are coupled by vertical conduction effects, internode fluid flow, and temperature inversion
mixing. The object simultaneously solves the differential equations governing the energy balances on
the nodes using a numerical method. The system timestep is divided into many small substeps that
allow the simulation to capture events that occur on a very short time scale. This approach allows
ambient losses and parasitic loads to be divided into on-cycle and off-cycle effects and accounted for
in detail.
For losses to the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule, a
zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, a fraction of the skin losses can be added to the zone
heat balance as internal heat gains.
The WaterHeater:Stratified object allows two heating elements to be simulated. The two elements
can cycle on and off to maintain the node temperature within the deadband. The Heater Priority
Control field determines how the heaters work together. There are two options: MasterSlave or
Simultaneous. In the MasterSlave option, Heater 1 is the master and Heater 2 is the slave. That is,
both heaters are not allowed to turn on at the same time. If the thermostats ask for heat at both
Heater 1 and 2, only Heater 1 will turn on. Once Heater 1 has met the set point, it turns off and
Heater 2 can turn on, if necessary. In the Simultaneousoption, Heater 1 and Heater 2 can turn on
and off independently. Autosizing is available for only Heater 1.

1.24.3.1 Inputs

1.24.3.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the WaterHeater:Stratified object.

1.24.3.1.2 Field: End-Use Subcategory

Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Laundry”, “Dish Washing”, etc.
A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects).
Subcategories are also reported in the ABUPS table under the “Water Systems” end-use category
and also appear in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table.
If this field is omitted or blank, the water use will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 967

1.24.3.1.3 Field: Tank Volume

The actual volume [m3] of fluid in the tank. This field is autosizable if used with a Water
Heater:Sizing object. The actual volume is typically not equal to the nominal volume specified by
the manufacturer. Actual volume is almost always 10% lower for electric water heaters, and 5%
lower for gas water heaters (Burch and Erickson 2004).
Burch, J., and P. Erickson. 2004. “Using Ratings Data to Derive Simulation-Model Inputs for
Storage-Tank Water Heaters”. Proceedings of the Solar 2004 Conference, 11-14 July 2004, Portland,
Oregon, American Solar Energy Society (ASES), pp. 393-398.

1.24.3.1.4 Field: Tank Height

The height [m] of the tank. For the HorizontalCylinder shape (see below) the height of the tank
is the measure in the axial direction, i.e., the height if you were to stand the cylinder up on its end.
This field is autosizable if used with a Water Heater:Sizing object.

1.24.3.1.5 Field: Tank Shape

The tank shape determines the size and skin losses of the stratified nodes. There are three op-
tions: VerticalCylinder, HorizontalCylinder, and Other.
VerticalCylinder describes most upright residential water heaters.
HorizontalCylinder describes a few specialty water heaters and large commercial storage tanks.
HorizontalCylinder can also be used to model an outdoor storage tank located above a solar collector
in a thermosiphon configuration. HorizontalCylinder implies that the tank is divided into nodes of
equal mass, but not equal height.
Other describes water heaters or storage tanks that have a uniform horizontal cross-section, but are
not cylinders, e.g., a cuboid or other shape. The length of the perimeter is then specified by the
Tank Perimeter field.
If blank, the default shape is VerticalCylinder.

1.24.3.1.6 Field: Tank Perimeter

The length of the tank perimeter [m]. This field is only used if Tank Shape is Other.

1.24.3.1.7 Field: Maximum Temperature Limit

The temperature [°C] at which the tank water becomes dangerously hot and is vented through
boiling or an automatic safety. The tank temperature will never exceed the maximum. Any extra
heat added to the tank is immediately vented. Note: The maximum temperature must be greater
than the setpoint temperature at all times.

1.24.3.1.8 Field: Heater Priority Control

The heater priority control determines how Heater 1 and Heater 2 work together. There are two
options: MasterSlave or Simultaneous. In the MasterSlave option, Heater 1 is the master and
Heater 2 is the slave. In most residential electric water heaters, the heaters operate in a MasterSlave
relationship. That is, both heaters are not allowed to turn on at the same time. If the thermostats
ask for heat at both Heater 1 and 2, only Heater 1 will turn on. Once Heater 1 has met the set
968 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

point, it turns off and Heater 2 can turn on, if necessary. In other words, only one heater can be on
at any time, and Heater 1 is always has priority over Heater 2.
In the Simultaneous option, Heater 1 and Heater 2 can turn on and off independently.
If blank, the default is MasterSlave.

1.24.3.1.9 Field: Heater 1 Set Point Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the hot water temperature set point [°C] for Heater
1. Also known as the “cut-out” temperature.

1.24.3.1.10 Field: Heater 1 Deadband Temperature Difference

The delta temperature difference [Δ°C] between the set point and the “cut-in” temperature at which
Heater 1 will turn on. In other words, the “cut-in” temperature is Set Point – Deadband.

1.24.3.1.11 Field: Heater 1 Capacity

The heat rate [W] supplied to the water for Heater 1, probably the same as the “nominal” capacity.
For residential electric water heaters, heating elements are usually 4500 W. This field is autosizable
if used with a Water Heater:Sizing object.

1.24.3.1.12 Field: Heater 1 Height

The height [m] of Heater 1 in the tank.

1.24.3.1.13 Field: Heater 2 Set Point Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the hot water temperature set point [°C] for Heater
2. Also known as the “cut-out” temperature.

1.24.3.1.14 Field: Heater 2 Deadband Temperature Difference

The delta temperature difference [Δ°C] between the set point and the “cut-in” temperature at which
Heater 2 will turn on. In other words, the “cut-in” temperature is Set Point – Deadband.

1.24.3.1.15 Field: Heater 2 Capacity

The heat rate [W] supplied to the water for Heater 1, probably the same as the “nominal” capacity.
For residential electric water heaters, heating elements are usually 4500 W.

1.24.3.1.16 Field: Heater 2 Height

The height [m] of Heater 2 in the tank.

1.24.3.1.17 Field: Heater Fuel Type

The type of fuel used for both Heaters 1 and 2. The fuel type can be Electricity, NaturalGas, Propane,
FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, Steam, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2 or DistrictHeating.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 969

1.24.3.1.18 Field: Heater Thermal Efficiency

The thermal conversion efficiency from fuel energy to heat energy for the heater element or burner
(for both Heaters 1 and 2). This is not the same as the overall efficiency of the water heater.

1.24.3.1.19 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate

Off-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is off, for
example, a pilot light, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate [W] is
strictly the total fuel that is consumed by all of the off-cycle parasitics.

1.24.3.1.20 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

The type of fuel used by the off-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be Electricity, NaturalGas,
Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, Steam, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2 or Dis-
trictHeating. The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater Fuel Type.

1.24.3.1.21 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank

The fraction of off-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the
tank water. For example, a pilot light would deliver most of its heat to the tank water, as long as the
thermal conversion efficiency must be taken into account, so perhaps 0.80 is reasonable. Electronic
control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any heat to the tank and should be 0.

1.24.3.1.22 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Height

The height [m] where any off-cycle parasitic heat gains are added to the tank.

1.24.3.1.23 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate

On-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is on, for
example, an induction fan, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate [W] is
strictly the total fuel that is consumed by all of the on-cycle parasitics.

1.24.3.1.24 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

The type of fuel used by the on-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be Electricity, NaturalGas,
Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Coal, Diesel, Gasoline, Steam, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2 or Dis-
trictHeating. The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater Fuel Type.

1.24.3.1.25 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank

The fraction of on-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the
tank water. For example, an induction fan might (maybe) deliver a small fraction of its energy to
the tank water for a value of 0.05. Electronic control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any
heat to the tank and should be 0.

1.24.3.1.26 Field: On-Cycle Parasitic Height

The height [m] where any on-cycle parasitic heat gains are added to the tank.
970 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.3.1.27 Field: Ambient Temperature Indicator

The Ambient Temperature Indicator specifies how the ambient air temperature will be indicated.
The field can be Schedule, Zone, or Outdoors. If Schedule is used, the Ambient Temperature
Schedule value provides the ambient temperature. If Zone is used, the zone air temperature of
the zone specified in the Ambient Temperature Zone field provides the ambient temperature. If
Outdoors is used, the outdoor dry-bulb air temperature of the outdoor air node specified in the
Ambient Temperature OutdoorAir:Node field provides the ambient temperature.

1.24.3.1.28 Field: Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
losses. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Schedule.

1.24.3.1.29 Field: Ambient Temperature Zone

The reference to the zone object specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
losses. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone.

1.24.3.1.30 Field: Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node

The reference to the outdoor air node specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
losses. An outdoor air node can be defined by an OutdoorAir:Node object or OutdoorAir:NodeList
object. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Outdoors.

1.24.3.1.31 Field: Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient Per Unit Area to Ambient Tem-
perature
The uniform skin loss coefficient [W/m2-K] or U-Value of the tank to the ambient air temperature.
The uniform skin loss accounts for the tank insulation and applies during both off- and on-cycle
operation. The overall losses at any particular node can be further modified using the Additional
Loss Coefficient fields to account for thermal shorting due to pipe penetrations, water heater feet,
and any other loss effects.

1.24.3.1.32 Field: Skin Loss Fraction to Zone

If the Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the skin losses
to the zone heat balance as an internal gain.

1.24.3.1.33 Field: Off-Cycle Flue Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature

The off-cycle flue loss coefficient [W/K] to the ambient air temperature. This field mainly applies
to gas water heaters that have a flue.

1.24.3.1.34 Field: Off-Cycle Flue Loss Fraction to Zone

If the Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the off-cycle
flue losses to the zone heat balance as an internal gain.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 971

1.24.3.1.35 Field: Peak Use Flow Rate

The peak flow rate [m3 /s] of domestic hot water usage for stand-alone operation, i.e., without plant
loop node connections. The peak value is multiplied by the Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule. If
there are node connections, this field is not used.

1.24.3.1.36 Field: Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifiying the current fraction of Peak Volumetric Use Flow
Rate of domestic hot water usage for stand-alone operation. If blank, the fraction defaults to 1.0 at
all times.

1.24.3.1.37 Field: Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the cold water temperature [°C] from the supply mains
that makes up for the hot water lost down the drain. If blank, water temperatures are calculated by
the Site:WaterMainsTemperature object. This field is for stand-alone operation only. If there are
node connections, this field is not used.

1.24.3.1.38 Field: Use Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the water heater. Typically the use
side draws hot water from the tank and returns cooler water.

1.24.3.1.39 Field: Use Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the water heater. Typically the use
side draws hot water from the tank and returns cooler water.

1.24.3.1.40 Field: Use Side Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the use side water and the tank water. If
the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the use
side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is less than 1.0, then the use side outlet water
temperature will not be as hot as the tank water at the outlet node, simulating an external heat
exchanger that is indirectly coupled to the water heater tank.

1.24.3.1.41 Field: Use Side Inlet Height

The height of the use side inlet to the tank. If blank, the inlet defaults to the bottom of the tank.
The inlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.3.1.42 Field: Use Side Outlet Height

The height of the use side outlet from the tank. If blank or autocalculate, the inlet defaults to the
top of the tank. The outlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.3.1.43 Field: Source Side Inlet Node

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the water heater. Typically the
source side draws cold water from the tank and returns warmer water.
972 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.3.1.44 Field: Source Side Outlet Node

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the water heater. Typically the
source side draws cold water from the tank and returns warmer water.

1.24.3.1.45 Field: Source Side Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the source side water and the tank water.
If the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the
source side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is less than 1.0, then the source side outlet
water temperature will be higher than the tank water at the outlet node, simulating an external
heat exchanger that is indirectly coupled to the water heater tank.

1.24.3.1.46 Field: Source Side Inlet Height

The height of the source side inlet to the tank. If blank or autocalculate, the inlet defaults to the
top of the tank. The inlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.3.1.47 Field: Source Side Outlet Height

The height of the source side outlet from the tank. If blank, the inlet defaults to the bottom of the
tank. The outlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.3.1.48 Field: Inlet Mode

The inlet mode of entering fluid from the use and source sides. There are two options: Fixed or
Seeking. In Fixed mode, the fluid enters at the fixed heights specified above. In Seeking mode, the
fluid “seeks out” the stratified node that is closest to the inlet temperature and adds all flow to that
node. The Seekingbmode provides maximum stratification. The default is Fixed.

1.24.3.1.49 Field: Use Side Design Flow Rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Use Side of the water
heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field is needed when the Use Side
is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the input file should
include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.

1.24.3.1.50 Field: Source Side Design Flow Rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Source Side of the water
heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field is needed when the Source
Side is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the input file
should include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.

1.24.3.1.51 Field: Indirect Water Heating Recovery Time

This field is optional and is used to provide a design parameter for autosizing design flow rates when
the water heater is connected to the demand side of a plant loop. The recovery time is expressed
in hours. This is the time that the entire volume of the tank can be heated from 14.4ºC to 57.2ºC
(58ºF to 135ºF) with an inlet temperature defined as the exit temperature in the associated Plant
Sizing object. The default is 1.5 hours. The calculation is based on log-mean temperature difference
(LMTD) and includes the heat transfer effectiveness factor entered above.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 973

1.24.3.1.52 Field: Number Of Nodes

The number of stratified nodes in the tank. There must be at least one node. The maximum number
of nodes is 12.

1.24.3.1.53 Field: Additional Destratification Conductivity

An additional destratification conductivity [W/m-K] is added to the fluid conductivity of water (0.6
W/m-K) to account for vertical conduction effects along the inside of the tank wall, and perhaps
other vertical components such as the flue, the cold water inlet pipe (dip tube), and the anode rod.

1.24.3.1.54 Field: Node 1-12 Additional Loss Coefficient

An additional loss coefficient [W/K] added to the skin losses for a given node to account for thermal
shorting due to pipe penetrations, water heater feet, and any other loss effects.

1.24.3.1.55 Field: Source Side Flow Control Mode

This field is optional and is used to provide control over the logic used by the source side of the water
heater to request flow. There are three choices for different modes: IndirectHeatPrimarySetpoint,
IndirectHeatAlternateSetpoint, or StorageTank. The mode called IndirectHeatPrimarySetpoint is
the historical behavior prior to version 8.1. In this mode the water heater will request flow at the
source side when the main setpoint, in the input field called Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name,
and deadband call for the tank to be heated. This mode is typical for a water heater indirectly
heated by a boiler. The mode called IndirectHeatAlternateSetpoint is similar but it bases its control
decisions on an alternate setpoint given in the following field. This mode is useful when the indirect
source of heat may not satisfy the load and an internal heater is used for backup. The mode called
StorageTank is for a passive tank and it always requests flow unless the tank temperature is equal
to or higher than the maximum limit given in the input field called Maximum Temperature Limit.

1.24.3.1.56 Field: Indirect Alternate Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

This field is optional and is used to provide a schedule with alternate setpoints for use with the
IndirectHeatAlternateSetpoint mode in the previous field. The input field should contain a reference
to a schedule object specifying the hot water temperature setpoint [°C] to use as the “cut-out”
temperature for control logic at the source side.

WaterHeater:Stratified ,
Electric Water Heater , !- Name
Water Heater , !- End -Use Subcategory
0.1893 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
1.4, !- Tank Height {m}
VerticalCylinder , !- Tank Shape
, !- Tank Perimeter {m}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
MasterSlave , !- Heater Priority
Hot Water Set Point Temp Schedule , !- Heater 1 Set Point Temperature Schedule
2.0, !- Heater 1 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
4500, !- Heater 1 Capacity {W} (Master)
1.0, !- Heater 1 Height {m}
Hot Water Set Point Temp Schedule , !- Heater 2 Set Point Temperature Schedule
5.0, !- Heater 2 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
4500, !- Heater 2 Capacity {W} (Slave)
0.0, !- Heater 2 Height {m}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.98, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
974 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

10, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}

ELECTRICITY , !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
, !- Off -Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
10, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- On -Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction To Tank
, !- On -Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
SCHEDULE , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
Ambient Temp Schedule , !- Ambient Temperature Schedule
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone
, !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node
0.846 , !- Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient Per Unit Area To Ambient Temperature {W/m2 -K}
, !- Skin Loss Fraction To Zone {}
, !- Off -Cycle Flue Loss Coefficient To Ambient Temperature {W/K}
, !- Off -Cycle Flue Loss Fraction To Zone {}
, !- Peak Volumetric Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule
Water Heater Use Inlet Node , !- Use Side Inlet Node
Water Heater Use Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node
1.0, !- Use Side Effectiveness {}
, !- Use Side Inlet Height {m}
, !- Use Side Outlet Height {m}
, !- Source Side Inlet Node
, !- Source Side Outlet Node
, !- Source Side Effectiveness {}
, !- Source Side Inlet Height {m}
, !- Source Side Outlet Height {m}
FIXED , !- Inlet Mode {FIXED | SEEKING}
6, !- Number Of Nodes
0.1, !- Destratification Conductivity {W/m-K}
0.15, !- Node 1 Additional Loss Coefficient {W/K}
, !- Node 2 Additional Loss Coefficient {W/K}
, !- Node 3 Additional Loss Coefficient {W/K}
, !- Node 4 Additional Loss Coefficient {W/K}
, !- Node 5 Additional Loss Coefficient {W/K}
0.1; !- Node 6 Additional Loss Coefficient {W/K}

1.24.3.2 Outputs

All of the output variables reported for the WaterHeater:Mixed object also apply to the Water-
Heater:Stratified object, with several qualifications noted below:

1.24.3.2.1 Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]

The average water tank temperature, i.e., the average of all of the node average temperatures.

1.24.3.2.2 Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C]

The final water tank temperature at the end of the system timestep, i.e., the average of all of the
final node temperatures at the end of the system timestep. If reported at the “Detailed” interval,
this output variable can be used to verify an exact energy balance on the water heater.

1.24.3.2.3 Water Heater Heating Rate [W]

The total average heating rate supplied by Heater 1 plus Heater 2.

1.24.3.2.4 Water Heater Heating Energy [J]

The total heating energy supplied by Heater 1 plus Heater 2.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 975

1.24.3.2.5 Water Heater Cycle On Count []

The number of times that either Heater 1 or Heater 2 turned on in the time period.

1.24.3.2.6 Water Heater Runtime Fraction []

The fraction of the time period that either Heater 1 or Heater 2 was running.
In addition, the WaterHeater:Stratified object also reports the following output variables:

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heater 1 Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heater 2 Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heater 1 Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heater 2 Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heater 1 Cycle On Count []
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heater 2 Cycle On Count []
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heater 1 Runtime Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heater 2 Runtime Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Temperature Node <x> [C]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Final Temperature Node <x> [C]

1.24.3.2.7 Water Heater Heater 1 Heating Rate [W]

The average heating rate supplied by Heater 1.

1.24.3.2.8 Water Heater Heater 2 Heating Rate [W]

The average heating rate supplied by Heater 2.

1.24.3.2.9 Water Heater Heater 1 Heating Energy [J]

The heating energy supplied by Heater 1.

1.24.3.2.10 Water Heater Heater 2 Heating Energy [J]

The heating energy supplied by Heater 2.

1.24.3.2.11 Water Heater Heater 1 Cycle On Count []

The number of times that Heater 1 turned on in the time period.

1.24.3.2.12 Water Heater Heater 2 Cycle On Count []

The number of times that Heater 2 turned on in the time period.

1.24.3.2.13 Water Heater Heater 1 Runtime Fraction []

The fraction of the time period that Heater 1 was running.
976 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.3.2.14 Water Heater Heater 2 Runtime Fraction []

The fraction of the time period that Heater 2 was running.

1.24.3.2.15 Water Heater Temperature Node 1-12 [C]

The average node temperature.

1.24.3.2.16 Water Heater Final Temperature Node 1-12 [C]

The final node temperature at the end of the system timestep.

1.24.4 WaterHeater:Sizing
The WaterHeater:Sizing object is used to provide additional input data needed for designing tank
volume and/or heater capacity for either the Mixed or Stratified water heaters. This object is only
needed if volume or capacity is being automatically sized. There are no output variable associated
with this object – sizing results are reported to the EIO output file and some predefined summary
reports.
A source of design input data for use with this object can be found in the current ASHRAE Handbook
HVAC Applications chapter on Service Water Heating.

1.24.4.1 Inputs

1.24.4.1.1 Field: WaterHeater Name

This field contains the unique name of the water heater being sized. This name should match the
name of a Water Heater:Mixed or a Water Heater:Stratified input object defined elsewhere in the
input file.

1.24.4.1.2 Field: Design Mode

This field describes which of several methods are to be used for sizing the water heater. There are
six possible choices and one of the following should be selected:

– PeakDraw. This design method uses the design flow rates of all the different demands placed
on the water heater. The tank size is based on how long it can meet the demand and how
quickly it can recover. The user enters the time in hours that the water heater can meet the
demands. Only the hot water uses connected to an individual water heater, or scheduled in
the water heater object for stand-alone units, are included in that water heater’s peak draw.
– ResidentialHUD-FHAMinimum This design method is based on minimum permissible
water heater sizes (established by HUD-FHA in its Minimum Property Standards for One- and
Two-Family Living Units, No. 4900.1-1982). The user enters the number of bathrooms and
bedrooms in this input object. The smallest allowable water heater sizes are used.
– PerPerson This design method scales sizes based on the total number of people in all zones
in the building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using the total (peak, design)
number of people for the entire model. The number of people is determined from People
objects defined elsewhere in the input file
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 977

– PerFloorArea This design method scales sizes based on the total floor area in all the zones
in the building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using all the floor area in the
model. The floor areas are determined from the geometry input elsewhere in the input file.
– PerUnit This design method scales sizes based on an arbitrary number of units. This can
be used, for example, to size based on the number of rooms in a lodging building. The user
provides the number of units in an input field in this object.
– PerSolarCollectorArea This design method scales tank volume based on the collector area
for a solar hot water collector. The collector area is summed for all the collectors in the model
and each tank is sized for the total. The collector area is determined from input for Solar
Collectors defined elsewhere in the input file.

1.24.4.1.3 Field: Time Storage Can Meet Peak Draw

This field provides the time, in hours, that the tank’s volume can sustain a peak draw. It is
used to size the tank’s volume which is the simple product of peak draw volume flow rate and the
draw time. There is no assurance that the water will be at the desired temperature for the entire
draw. This field is only used if the Design Mode is “PeakDraw.” For a water heater connected to
a full plant loop, it should be on the supply side and the plant loop needs a Plant Sizing object and
the draw rate is the Use side design flow rate. For a stand-alone water heater, the draw rate is the
maximum scheduled peak use flow rate.

1.24.4.1.4 Field: Time for Tank Recovery

This field provides the the time, in hours, that tank’s heater needs to recover the volume of the tank.
The temperatures used to define recovery are a starting temperature of 14.4ºC (58ºF) and a final
temperature of 57.2ºC (135ºF). This field is only used if the Design Mode is “PeakDraw.”

1.24.4.1.5 Field: Nominal Tank Volume for Autosizing Plant Connections

This field is used in case the water heater is indirectly heated by its source side connections and they
are also autosized. Because of the complexity of such a water heater and the timing for when sizing
calculation happen inside EnergyPlus, the Source side connection flow rates need to be reported
before the tank’s volume can be sized to meet Peak Draw. This input field is used to provide a
nominal tank volume to use temporarily while the flow connections are sized. This field is only used
if the Design Mode is “PeakDraw” and the water heater has autosized plant connections on the
demand side.

1.24.4.1.6 Field: Number of Bedrooms

This field is used to enter the numer of bedrooms in the model. This field is only used if the Design
Mode is “ResidentialHUD-FHAMinimum.”

1.24.4.1.7 Field: Number of Bathrooms

This field is used to enter the number of bathrooms in the model. This field is only used if the
Design Mode is “ResidentialHUD-FHAMinimum.”

1.24.4.1.8 Field: Storage Capacity per Person

This field is used to enter the tank’s storage volume on per-person basis. The units are
m3 /person. This field is only used if the Design Mode is “PerPerson.”
978 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.4.1.9 Field: Recovery Capacity per Person

This field is used to enter the recovery capacity per person in units of m3 /person/hr. This is the
volume of water the heater can recover in one hour per person. Recovery is heating water from a
starting temperature of 14.4ºC (58ºF) to a final temperature of 57.2ºC (135ºF). This field is only
used if the Design Mode is “PerPerson.”

1.24.4.1.10 Field: Storage Capacity per Floor Area

This field is used to enter the tank’s storage volume on a per-floor-area basis. The units are m3
/m2 (water/floor area). This field is only used if the Design Mode is “PerFloorArea.”

1.24.4.1.11 Field: Recovery Capacity per Floor Area

This field is used to enter the recovery capacity per floor area in units of m3 /m2 /hr. This is the
volume water the heater can recover in an hour per floor area. Recovery is heating water from a
starting temperature of 14.4ºC (58ºF) to a final temperature of 57.2ºC (135ºF). This field is only
used if the Design Mode is “PerFloorArea.”

1.24.4.1.12 Field: Number of Units

This field is used to enter the number of Units for use in sizing on per-Unit basis with the next two
fields. This field is only used if the Design Mode is “PerUnit.” This can be used to account for
any arbitrary item such as lodging rooms, desks, water fixtures, restrooms, etc.

1.24.4.1.13 Field: Storage Capacity per Unit

This field is used to enter the tanks’ storage volume on per-Unit basis. The units are m3 /Unit. The
number of Units is entered in the previous field. This field is only used if the Design Mode is
“PerUnit.”

1.24.4.1.14 Field: Recovery Capacity per Unit

This field is used to enter the recover capacity per Unit in units of m3 /Unit/hr. This is the volume
of water the heater can recover in an hour per Unit. Recovery is heating water from a starting
temperature of 14.4ºC (58ºF) to a final temperature of 57.2ºC (135ºF). This field is only used if
the Design Mode is “PerUnit.”

1.24.4.1.15 Field: Storage Capacity per Collector Area

This field is used to enter the tank’s storage volume on per-solar-collector-area basis. The units are
m3 /m2 . This field is only used if the Design Mode is “PerSolarCollectorArea.”

1.24.4.1.16 Field: Height Aspect Ratio

This field is used to scale the height of a stratified tank to preserve relative geometry for different
size tanks. The Height Aspect Ratio is defined at the length scale in the vertical direction (height)
divided by the length scale in the horizontal direction (diameter). This field is only used if the
water heater being sized is a Water Heater:Stratified, the tank height has been set to Autosize, and
the tank shape is set to VerticalCylinder. This field can be used with any Design Mode.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 979

1.24.5 WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser
The heat pump water heater with pumped condenser (HPWH) is a compound object consisting of a
water heater tank (e.g., WaterHeater:Mixed or WaterHeater:Stratified), a direct expansion (DX) “coil” (i.e.,
an air-to-water DX compression system which includes a water heating coil, air coil, compressor, and
water pump), and a fan to provide air flow across the air coil associated with the DX compression
system. These objects work together to model a system which heats water using zone air, outdoor
air, or a combination of zone and outdoor air as the primary heat source. Numerous configurations
of tank location, inlet air source, and DX coil compressor location can be modeled, with one common
configuration shown below.

Figure 1.97: Schematic diagram for a heat pump water heater located in a zone

In this model, the heat pump water heater’s DX coil is considered the primary heat source and the
water tank’s heater (element or burner) provides supplemental heat as necessary. The model also
assumes that the heat pump’s fan and water pump cycle on and off with the compressor.
To model a heat pump water heater, the input data file must include some combination of the
following objects depending on the configuration to be modeled:

– WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser (required)
– WaterHeater:Mixed or WaterHeater:Stratified (required)
– Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped or Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:VariableSpeed (re-
quired)
– Fan:SystemModel or Fan:OnOff (required)
– ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the heat
pump water heater type and name must be in this list)
980 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
HPWH air inlet and outlet node names must be provided in this object)
– (for HPWHs that use outdoor air as all or part of the heat source, the HPWH
OutdoorAir:NodeList
outdoor air node name must be provided in this list)

The input fields for the compound object are described in detail below:

1.24.5.1 Inputs

1.24.5.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a heat pump water heater.
Any reference to this heat pump water heater by another object will use this name.

1.24.5.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat
pump compressor is available to operate during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0
denotes that the heat pump compressor is off for that time period. A value other than 0 denotes
that the heat pump compressor is available to operate during that time period. During times when
the heat pump compressor is scheduled off, the heater (element or burner) in the water tank object
operates based on its tank set point temperature schedule and the heat pump’s parasitic electric
power is also off for that time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time
periods.

1.24.5.1.3 Field: Compressor Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that specifies the set point (or
“cut-out”) temperature for the heat pump compressor. Temperature values used in this schedule
should be in degrees Celsius. The heat pump compressor cycles off when the tank water reaches this
set point temperature. Once the heat pump compressor cycles off, the tank water temperature floats
downward until it falls below the set point temperature minus the dead band temperature difference
defined below (i.e., the “cut-in” temperature). At this point, the heat pump compressor cycles on
and remains on until the heat pump compressor set point temperature is reached.

1.24.5.1.4 Field: Dead Band Temperature Difference

This numeric field contains the dead band temperature difference in degrees Celsius. The heat pump
compressor “cut-in” temperature is defined as the compressor set point temperature defined above
minus this dead band temperature difference. The heat pump compressor cycles on when the water
temperature in the tank falls below the “cut-in” temperature. The heat pump compressor remains on
until the water temperature in the tank rises above the compressor set point (“cut-out”) temperature
defined above. The dead band temperature difference must be greater than 0°C and less than or
equal to 20°C. If this field is left blank, the default value is 5°C.
In this model, the heat pump water heater’s DX compression system is considered the primary
heat source and the water tank’s heater (element or burner) provides supplemental heat as neces-
sary. Therefore, the cut-in temperature for the heat pump compressor (set point minus dead band
temperature difference) is usually higher than the set point temperature for the heater (element or
burner) in the associated water heater tank object. At times when the water heater tank set point
temperature is greater than the cut-in temperature of the heat pump compressor, the heat pump
compressor is disabled and the tank’s heater is used to heat the water.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 981

1.24.5.1.5 Field: Condenser Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the inlet water node for the heat pump’s water heating coil
(condenser). This node name must also be specified in the water heater tank object as the source
outlet node name, and in the DX coil object as the condenser water inlet node name.

1.24.5.1.6 Field: Condenser Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the outlet water node for the heat pump’s water heating coil
(condenser). This node name must also be specified in the water heater tank object as the source
inlet node name, and in the DX coil object as the condenser water outlet node name.

1.24.5.1.7 Field: Condenser Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the heat pump’s condenser water flow rate in cubic meters per
second. It is the actual condenser water flow rate to be simulated, which may differ from
the rated condenser water volumetric flow rate specified for the heat pump’s DX coil (Ref.
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump). This water flow rate must be greater than 0 or this
field is autocalculatable. If autocalculated (field value = autocalculate), the condenser water flow
rate is set equal to the rated heating capacity of the heat pump’s DX coil multiplied by 4.487E-8
m3 /s/W. When this flow rate is different from the Rated Condenser Water Volumetric Flow Rate
specified in the heat pump’s DX coil object (Ref. Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump),
the user should also specify a Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve Name (function of water
flow fraction) and a Heating COP Modifier Curve Name (function of water flow fraction) in the
associated DX coil object to account for differences in capacity and power consumption at the
off-rated water flow rate.

1.24.5.1.8 Field: Evaporator Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the air flow rate across the heat pump’s air coil (evaporator) in
cubic meters per second. It is the actual air flow rate to be simulated, which may differ
from the rated evaporator air volumetric flow rate specified for the heat pump’s DX coil (Ref.
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped). Values must be greater than 0 or this field is
autocalculatable. If autocalculated (field value = autocalculate), the evaporator air flow rate is
set equal to the rated heating capacity of the heat pump’s DX coil multiplied by 5.035E-5 m3 /s/W.
When this flow rate is different from the Rated Evaporator Air Volumetric Flow Rate specified in
the heat pump’s DX coil object (Ref. Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped), the user
should also specify a Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve Name (function of air flow fraction)
and a Heating COP Modifier Curve Name (function of air flow fraction) in the associated DX coil
object to account for differences in capacity and power consumption at the off-rated air flow rate.

1.24.5.1.9 Field: Inlet Air Configuration

This choice field defines the configuration of the air flow path through the heat pump air coil
(evaporator) and fan section. Valid entries are Schedule, ZoneAirOnly, OutdoorAirOnly, or
ZoneAndOutdoorAir. If ‘Schedule’ is selected, names for an inlet air temperature schedule and
an inlet air humidity schedule must be defined in the fields below. If ‘ZoneAirOnly’ is selected, the
corresponding zone name must be entered in the Inlet Air Zone Name field below. If ‘ZoneAndOut-
doorAir’ is selected, the corresponding Inlet Air Zone Name, Inlet Air Mixer Node Name, Outlet Air
Splitter Node Name, and an Inlet Air Mixer Schedule Name must be entered in the corresponding
fields below.
982 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.5.1.10 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node from which the heat pump water heater draws its
inlet air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAnd-
OutdoorAir’, then this node name should be the name of a zone air exhaust node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections). If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘OutdoorAirOnly’, this
node name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘Schedule’, this node
name should simply be a unique name that allows the user to receive output on conditions at this
node for verification purposes.

1.24.5.1.11 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node to which the heat pump water heater sends its
outlet air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘Zone-
AndOutdoorAir’, then this node name should be the name of a zone air inlet node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections). If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘OutdoorAirOnly’, this
node name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘Schedule’, this node
name should simply be a unique name that allows the user to receive output on conditions at this
node for verification purposes.

1.24.5.1.12 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node from which the heat pump water heater draws its
outdoor air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘Schedule’,
this node name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘ZoneAndOut-
doorAir’ or ‘OutdoorAirOnly’, this node name should be the name of an outdoor air node (Ref.
OutdoorAir:NodeList).

1.24.5.1.13 Field: Exhaust Air Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node to which the heat pump water heater sends its exhaust
air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘Schedule’, this node
name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’ or
‘OutdoorAirOnly’, then this node name should be a unique name that allows the user to receive
output on conditions at this node for verification purposes.

1.24.5.1.14 Field: Inlet Air Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule used to define the dry-bulb temperature of the
inlet air to the heat pump air coil (evaporator) and fan section. Schedule values should be in
degrees Celsius. This field is only used when the Inlet Air Configuration defined above is specified
as ‘Schedule’, otherwise leave this field blank.

1.24.5.1.15 Field: Inlet Air Humidity Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule used to define the humidity of the inlet air to the
heat pump evaporator and fan section. Schedule values must be entered as relative humidity fraction
from 0 to 1 (e.g., a schedule value of 0.5 means 50%RH). This field is only used when the Inlet Air
Configuration defined above is specified as ‘Schedule’, otherwise leave this field blank.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 983

1.24.5.1.16 Field: Inlet Air Zone Name

This alpha field contains the name of the zone from which the heat pump evaporator and fan section
draws some or all of its inlet air. This field is only used when the Inlet Air Configuration defined
above is specified as ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’.

1.24.5.1.17 Field: Tank Object Type

This alpha (choice) field contains the type of water heater tank used by this heat pump water heater.
Currently, the only valid choices are WaterHeater:Mixed or WaterHeater:Stratified.

1.24.5.1.18 Field: Tank Name

This alpha field contains the name of the specific water heater tank used by this heat pump water
heater. This must be a tank of type WaterHeater:Mixed or WaterHeater:Stratified.

1.24.5.1.19 Field: Tank Use Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the use side inlet node of the water heater tank used by this
heat pump water heater. This name must match the Use Side Inlet Node Name in the water heater
tank object (Ref. WaterHeater:Mixed). This field is required if the water heater tank use side nodes are
connected to a plant loop, otherwise leave this field blank. When used, the branch object should
reflect that this node is part of a WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser object (see branch object example
below).

1.24.5.1.20 Field: Tank Use Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the use side outlet node of the water heater tank used by
this heat pump water heater. This name must match the Use Side Outlet Node Name in the water
heater tank object (Ref. WaterHeater:Mixed). This field is required if the water heater tank use side
nodes are connected to a plant loop, otherwise leave this field blank. When used, the branch object
should reflect that this node is part of a WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser object (see branch object
example below).

1.24.5.1.21 Field: DX Coil Object Type

This alpha (choice) field contains the type of DX coil used by this heat pump water heater. Currently,
the only valid choice is Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped.

1.24.5.1.22 Field: DX Coil Name

This alpha field contains the name of the specific DX coil (Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped or
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:VariableSpeed object) used by this heat pump water heater.

1.24.5.1.23 Field: Minimum Inlet Air Temperature for Compressor Operation

This numeric field contains the minimum inlet air dry-bulb temperature entering the air coil (evapo-
rator) and fan section, in degrees Celsius, below which the heat pump compressor does not operate.
If this field is left blank, the default value is 10°C.
984 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.5.1.24 Field: Compressor Location

This alpha (choice) field contains the location of the heat pump compressor and the air temper-
ature for this location is used to control operation of the compressor’s crankcase heater in the
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped object. Valid entries are Schedule, Zone, or
Outdoors. If ‘Schedule’ is selected, a compressor ambient temperature schedule name must be
defined in the field below; otherwise, the field below should be left blank. If ‘Zone’ is selected, the
crankcase heater operation is controlled based on the air temperature in the zone defined in the
field Inlet Air Zone Name, and the Inlet Air Configuration must be ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOut-
doorAir’. If ‘Outdoors’ is selected, crankcase heater operation is controlled based on the outdoor air
temperature.

1.24.5.1.25 Field: Compressor Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule that defines the ambient air temperature surrounding
the heat pump compressor, which is used to control the compressor’s crankcase heater operation.
This field is only used when the compressor location field defined above is specified as ‘Schedule’,
otherwise it should be left blank.

1.24.5.1.26 Field: Fan Object Type

This alpha (choice) field contains the type of fan used by this heat pump water heater. Currently,
the only valid choices are Fan:SystemModel and Fan:OnOff.

1.24.5.1.27 Field: Fan Name

This alpha field contains the name of the specific fan (Fan:SystemModel or Fan:OnOff object) used by this
heat pump water heater.

1.24.5.1.28 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha (choice) field defines the placement of the fan in the heat pump water heater. Valid
choices are BlowThrough (fan upstream of the air coil) and DrawThrough (fan downstream of
the air coil). If this field is left blank, the default value is DrawThrough.

1.24.5.1.29 Field: On Cycle Parasitic Electric Load

This numeric field contains the on-cycle parasitic electric power in Watts. This is the parasitic
electric power consumed by controls or other electrical devices associated with the heat pump water
heater. This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the heat pump compressor is operating and
the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute to heating the water. This parasitic
load does, however, affect the zone air heat balance when the heat pump water heater sends some
or all of its outlet air to a zone (i.e., Inlet Air Configuration field specified as ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or
‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’) and the Parasitic Heat Rejection Location field is specified as ‘Zone’. The
minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value is also 0.0 if this field is left blank.

1.24.5.1.30 Field: Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load

This numeric field contains the off-cycle parasitic electric power in Watts. This is the parasitic electric
power consumed by controls or other electrical devices associated with the heat pump compressor.
This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the heat pump water heater is available but the
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 985

compressor is not operating, and the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute
to heating the water. This parasitic load does, however, affect the zone air heat balance when the
heat pump water heater sends some or all of its outlet air to a zone (i.e., Inlet Air Configuration
field specified as ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’) and the Parasitic Heat Rejection Location
field is specified as ‘Zone’. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value is also 0.0
if this field is left blank.

1.24.5.1.31 Field: Parasitic Heat Rejection Location

This alpha (choice) field determines where the on-cycle and off-cycle parasitic heat is rejected. Valid
choices are Zone and Exterior. If ‘Zone’ is selected, both the on-cycle and off-cycle parasitic heat
is rejected to the zone defined in the field Inlet Air Zone Name, and the Inlet Air Configuration
must be ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir. If ’Outdoors’ is selected, this parasitic heat is
rejected outdoors (does not impact the zone air heat balance) regardless of the specified Inlet Air
Configuration. If this field is left blank, the default value is ’Outdoors’.

1.24.5.1.32 Field: Inlet Air Mixer Node Name

This optional alpha field defines the name of the HVAC node which represents the mixture of outdoor
air and zone air that enters the heat pump air coil (evaporator) and fan section. The model mixes
outdoor air with zone air and places the result on this inlet air mixer node based on the Inlet Air
Mixer Schedule defined below. When the schedule value is equal to 0, 100% zone air enters the
evaporator coil and fan section of the heat pump water heater. When the schedule value is equal to
1, 100% outdoor air enters the evaporator coil and fan section. This node name must be provided
if the Inlet Air Configuration field above is specified as ‘ZoneAndOutdoor Air’, otherwise this field
should be left blank.

1.24.5.1.33 Field: Outlet Air Splitter Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the air node to which the heat pump air coil (evaporator) and
fan sends all of its outlet air. The supply air flow downstream of this node is split between the zone
and outdoors based on the Inlet Air Mixer schedule defined below. When the schedule value is equal
to 0, the entire outlet air stream is diverted to the zone. When the schedule value is equal to 1, the
entire outlet air stream is exhausted to outdoors. This node name must be provided if the Inlet Air
Configuration field above is specified as ‘Zone and Outdoor Air’, otherwise this field should be left
blank.

1.24.5.1.34 Field: Inlet Air Mixer Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat
pump draws its inlet air from the zone, outdoors, or a combination of zone and outdoor air. A
schedule value equal to 0 indicates that the heat pump draws its inlet air from the zone. A schedule
value equal to 1 denotes that the heat pump draws its inlet air from outdoors. Values between 0
and 1 denote a mixture of zone and outdoor air proportional to the schedule value. The Inlet Air
Mixer schedule controls both the inlet air mixer and outlet air splitter nodes in unison to ensure that
the operation of the heat pump does not contribute to zone pressurization or depressurization. For
example if the Inlet Air Mixer schedule value is 0.4, then the inlet air mixer node is composed of 40%
outdoor air and 60% zone air. For this same case, the outlet air splitter directs 60% of the HPWH
outlet air back to the zone and 40% of the outlet air flow is exhausted outdoors. This schedule
986 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

name must be provided if the Inlet Air Configuration field is specified as ‘Zone and Outdoor Air’,
otherwise this field should be left blank.

1.24.5.1.35 Field: Tank Element Control Logic

This alpha field defines settings for the control logic of when to run the tank element in relation to
whether the heat pump is running.

– MutuallyExclusive means that once the tank heating element(s) are active, the heat pump
is shut down until the heating element setpoint is reached.
– Simultaneous (default) means that both the tank heating element and heat pump are used
at the same time to recover the tank temperature.

1.24.5.1.36 Field: Control Sensor 1 Height In Stratified Tank

This alpha field defines where the tank temperature is sensed for heat pump control when the tank
type is WaterHeater:Stratified. The stratified tank model produces tank temperature at different nodes
in the vertical direction and various options are available for how this temperature should be sensed
to control the heat pump. This is measured in height from the bottom of the tank. Internally
the appropriate node is determined based on this height. If omitted, this defaults to the height of
Heater1.

1.24.5.1.37 Field: Control Sensor 1 Weight

The model can optionally use two control sensor locations in stratified tanks. When that is the case,
the temperature sensed at each location is weighted. This alpha input specifies the weight associated
with Control Sensor 1. It is input as a value between 0 and 1. The weight of Control Sensor 2 is
determined by subtracting this weight from 1. The default for this field is 1, indicating that only
Control Sensor 1 is used.

1.24.5.1.38 Field: Control Sensor 2 Height in Stratified Tank

This alpha field defines the optional second location where the tank temperature is sensed for heat
pump control when the tank type is WaterHeater:Stratified. If omitted, this defaults to the height of
Heater2.
Following is an example input for the WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser compound object and the
other required component objects that it references.

WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser ,
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
PlantHPWHTempSch , !- Compressor Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
2.0, !- Dead Band Temperature Difference {deltaC}
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Condenser Water Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Condenser Water Outlet Node Name
0.00115525 , !- Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.00695 , !- Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OutdoorAirOnly , !- Inlet Air Configuration
, !- Air Inlet Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Node Name
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Exhaust Air Node Name
, !- Inlet Air Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Humidity Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Zone Name
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 987

WaterHeater:Mixed , !- Tank Object Type

HPWHPlantTank , !- Tank Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Outlet Node Name
Coil:WaterHeating: AirToWaterHeatPump :Pumped , !- DX Coil Object Type
HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- DX Coil Name
11.0, !- Minimum Inlet Air Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
Outdoors , !- Compressor Location
, !- Compressor Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
Fan:SystemModel , !- Fan Object Type
HPWHPlantFan , !- Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
, !- On Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
; !- Parasitic Heat Rejection Location

NOTE: branch object required only when tank use inlet nodes are used.

Branch ,
Central HPWH Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser , !- Component 1 Object Type
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Component 1 Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name

WaterHeater:Mixed ,
HPWHPlantTank , !- Name
0.757 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
Plant Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
2.0, !- Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
82.2222 , !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
CYCLE , !- Heater Control Type
25000 , !- Heater Maximum Capacity {W}
0, !- Heater Minimum Capacity {W}
, !- Heater Ignition Minimum Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heater Ignition Delay {s}
ELECTRICITY , !- Heater Fuel Type
0.98, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
, !- Part Load Factor Curve Name
10, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
30, !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
ELECTRICITY , !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- On Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
Outdoors , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
HPWHPlantTank OA Node , !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name
0.0, !- Off Cycle Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature {W/K}
0.0, !- Off Cycle Loss Fraction to Zone
0.0, !- On Cycle Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature {W/K}
0.0, !- On Cycle Loss Fraction to Zone
, !- Peak Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
0.98, !- Use Side Effectiveness
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
0.98, !- Source Side Effectiveness
autosize; !- Use Side Design Flow Rate {m3/s}

OutdoorAir:Node ,
HPWHPlantTank OA Node; !- Name

Coil:WaterHeating: AirToWaterHeatPump:Pumped ,
988 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- Name
25000.0 , !- Rated Heating Capacity {W}
3.2, !- Rated COP {W/W}
0.736 , !- Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
29.44 , !- Rated Evaporator Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
22.22 , !- Rated Evaporator Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
55.72 , !- Rated Condenser Inlet Water Temperature {C}
1.00695 , !- Rated Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.00115525 , !- Rated Condenser Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
No , !- Evaporator Fan Power Included in Rated COP
No , !- Condenser Pump Power Included in Rated COP
No , !- Condenser Pump Heat Included in Rated Heating Capacity and Rated
COP
150.0 , !- Condenser Water Pump Power {W}
0.1, !- Fraction of Condenser Pump Heat to Water
HPPlantFanAirOutletNode , !- Evaporator Air Inlet Node Name
HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Evaporator Air Outlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Condenser Water Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Condenser Water Outlet Node Name
100.0 , !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
5.0, !- Maximum Ambient Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation {C}
WetBulbTemperature , !- Evaporator Air Temperature Type for Curve Objects
HPWHHeatingCapFTemp , !- Heating Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Heating Capacity Function of Air Flow Fraction Curve Name
, !- Heating Capacity Function of Water Flow Fraction Curve Name
HPWHHeatingCOPFTemp , !- Heating COP Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Heating COP Function of Air Flow Fraction Curve Name
, !- Heating COP Function of Water Flow Fraction Curve Name
HPWHPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name

Fan:SystemModel ,
HPWHPlantFan , !- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
HPPlantFanAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
2.2685 , !- Design Maximum Air Flow Rate
Discrete , !- Speed Control Method
0.0, !- Electric Power Minimum Flow Rate Fraction
100.0 , !- Design Pressure Rise
0.9 , !- Motor Efficiency
1.0 , !- Motor In Air Stream Fraction
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Electric Power Consumption
TotalEfficiencyAndPressure , !- Design Power Sizing Method
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Pressure
0.70; !- Fan Total Efficiency

1.24.5.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

1.24.5.2.1 Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio

This output is the average part-load ratio of the heat pump water heater’s compressor (as well as
its water pump and fan) for the timestep being reported. This output is independent of the “Water
Heater Part Load Ratio” (Ref. Water Heater Outputs) which represents the part-load ratio of the
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 989

supplemental heater (element or burner) in the water tank. When the water tank’s (supplemental)
heater set point temperature is higher than the cut-in temperature of the heat pump water heater’s
compressor, the heat pump compressor is disabled and the water tank’s heater (element or burner)
is used to heat the water. During these times the Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio is
equal to 0.

1.24.5.2.2 Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

1.24.5.2.3 Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

1.24.5.2.4 Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

1.24.5.2.5 Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the parasitic electric power and consumption associated with the heat pump water
heater. Specific outputs represent parasitic electrical usage during the compressor/fan on and off
cycles. These outputs represent electronic controls or other electric component. The model assumes
that the parasitic power does not contribute to heating the water, but it can impact the zone air
heat balance depending on user inputs. The parasitic electric consumption outputs are also added
to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = DHW, Group Key = Plant (ref.
Output:Meter objects).

1.24.6 WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser
The heat pump water heater with wrapped condenser is a compound object very similar to the
WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser object. It likewise combines a water heater tank, a direct expansion
(DX) “coil”, and a fan to provide air flow across the air coil associated with the DX compression
system. The primary difference is that instead of pumping water through an external condenser, the
heating coils are wrapped around or submerged in the tank. This type of HPWH is most common
in packaged units meant for residential applications.
To model a wrapped condenser heat pump water, the input data file must include some combination
of the following objects depending on the configuration to be modeled:

– WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser (required)
– WaterHeater:Stratified (required)
– Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped (required)
– Fan:SystemModel! or Fan:OnOff (required)
– ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the heat
pump water heater type and name must be in this list)
– ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections (when the HPWH draws some or all of its air from the zone, the
HPWH air inlet and outlet node names must be provided in this object)
– (for HPWHs that use outdoor air as all or part of the heat source, the HPWH
OutdoorAir:NodeList
outdoor air node name must be provided in this list)

The input fields for the compound object are described in detail below:
990 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.6.1 Inputs

1.24.6.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a heat pump water heater.
Any reference to this heat pump water heater by another object will use this name.

1.24.6.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat
pump compressor is available to operate during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0
denotes that the heat pump compressor is off for that time period. A value other than 0 denotes
that the heat pump compressor is available to operate during that time period. During times when
the heat pump compressor is scheduled off, the heater (element or burner) in the water tank object
operates based on its tank set point temperature schedule and the heat pump’s parasitic electric
power is also off for that time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time
periods.

1.24.6.1.3 Field: Compressor Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that specifies the set point (or
“cut-out”) temperature for the heat pump compressor. Temperature values used in this schedule
should be in degrees Celsius. The heat pump compressor cycles off when the tank water reaches this
set point temperature. Once the heat pump compressor cycles off, the tank water temperature floats
downward until it falls below the set point temperature minus the dead band temperature difference
defined below (i.e., the “cut-in” temperature). At this point, the heat pump compressor cycles on
and remains on until the heat pump compressor set point temperature is reached.

1.24.6.1.4 Field: Dead Band Temperature Difference

This numeric field contains the dead band temperature difference in degrees Celsius. The heat pump
compressor “cut-in” temperature is defined as the compressor set point temperature defined above
minus this dead band temperature difference. The heat pump compressor cycles on when the water
temperature in the tank falls below the “cut-in” temperature. The heat pump compressor remains on
until the water temperature in the tank rises above the compressor set point (“cut-out”) temperature
defined above. The dead band temperature difference must be greater than 0°C and less than or
equal to 20°C. If this field is left blank, the default value is 5°C.
In this model, the heat pump water heater’s DX compression system is considered the primary
heat source and the water tank’s heater (element or burner) provides supplemental heat as neces-
sary. Therefore, the cut-in temperature for the heat pump compressor (set point minus dead band
temperature difference) is usually higher than the set point temperature for the heater (element or
burner) in the associated water heater tank object. At times when the water heater tank set point
temperature is greater than the cut-in temperature of the heat pump compressor, the heat pump
compressor is disabled and the tank’s heater is used to heat the water.

1.24.6.1.5 Field: Condenser Bottom Location

This numeric field contains the distance from the bottom of the tank to the bottom of the wrapped
condenser.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 991

1.24.6.1.6 Field: Condenser Top Location

This numeric field contains the distance from the bottom of the tank to the top of the wrapped
condenser.

1.24.6.1.7 Field: Evaporator Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the air flow rate across the heat pump’s air coil (evaporator) in
cubic meters per second. It is the actual air flow rate to be simulated, which may differ
from the rated evaporator air volumetric flow rate specified for the heat pump’s DX coil (Ref.
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped). Values must be greater than 0 or this field is
autocalculatable. If autocalculated (field value = autocalculate), the evaporator air flow rate is
set equal to the rated heating capacity of the heat pump’s DX coil multiplied by 5.035E-5 m3 /s/W.
When this flow rate is different from the Rated Evaporator Air Volumetric Flow Rate specified in
the heat pump’s DX coil object (Ref. Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped), the user
should also specify a Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve Name (function of air flow fraction)
and a Heating COP Modifier Curve Name (function of air flow fraction) in the associated DX coil
object to account for differences in capacity and power consumption at the off-rated air flow rate.

1.24.6.1.8 Field: Inlet Air Configuration

This choice field defines the configuration of the air flow path through the heat pump air coil
(evaporator) and fan section. Valid entries are Schedule, ZoneAirOnly, OutdoorAirOnly, or
ZoneAndOutdoorAir. If ‘Schedule’ is selected, names for an inlet air temperature schedule and
an inlet air humidity schedule must be defined in the fields below. If ‘ZoneAirOnly’ is selected, the
corresponding zone name must be entered in the Inlet Air Zone Name field below. If ‘ZoneAndOut-
doorAir’ is selected, the corresponding Inlet Air Zone Name, Inlet Air Mixer Node Name, Outlet Air
Splitter Node Name, and an Inlet Air Mixer Schedule Name must be entered in the corresponding
fields below.

1.24.6.1.9 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node from which the heat pump water heater draws its
inlet air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAnd-
OutdoorAir’, then this node name should be the name of a zone air exhaust node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections). If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘OutdoorAirOnly’, this
node name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘Schedule’, this node
name should simply be a unique name that allows the user to receive output on conditions at this
node for verification purposes.

1.24.6.1.10 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node to which the heat pump water heater sends its
outlet air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘Zone-
AndOutdoorAir’, then this node name should be the name of a zone air inlet node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections). If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘OutdoorAirOnly’, this
node name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘Schedule’, this node
name should simply be a unique name that allows the user to receive output on conditions at this
node for verification purposes.
992 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.6.1.11 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node from which the heat pump water heater draws its
outdoor air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘Schedule’,
this node name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘ZoneAndOut-
doorAir’ or ‘OutdoorAirOnly’, this node name should be the name of an outdoor air node (Ref.
OutdoorAir:NodeList).

1.24.6.1.12 Field: Exhaust Air Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the node to which the heat pump water heater sends its exhaust
air. If the Inlet Air Configuration field defined above is set to ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘Schedule’, this node
name should be left blank. If the Inlet Air Configuration field is set to ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’ or
‘OutdoorAirOnly’, then this node name should be a unique name that allows the user to receive
output on conditions at this node for verification purposes.

1.24.6.1.13 Field: Inlet Air Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule used to define the dry-bulb temperature of the
inlet air to the heat pump air coil (evaporator) and fan section. Schedule values should be in
degrees Celsius. This field is only used when the Inlet Air Configuration defined above is specified
as ‘Schedule’, otherwise leave this field blank.

1.24.6.1.14 Field: Inlet Air Humidity Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule used to define the humidity of the inlet air to the
heat pump evaporator and fan section. Schedule values must be entered as relative humidity fraction
from 0 to 1 (e.g., a schedule value of 0.5 means 50%RH). This field is only used when the Inlet Air
Configuration defined above is specified as ‘Schedule’, otherwise leave this field blank.

1.24.6.1.15 Field: Inlet Air Zone Name

This alpha field contains the name of the zone from which the heat pump evaporator and fan section
draws some or all of its inlet air. This field is only used when the Inlet Air Configuration defined
above is specified as ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’.

1.24.6.1.16 Field: Tank Object Type

This alpha (choice) field contains the type of water heater tank used by this heat pump water heater.
Currently, the only valid choice is WaterHeater:Stratified.

1.24.6.1.17 Field: Tank Name

This alpha field contains the name of the specific water heater tank used by this heat pump water
heater. This must be a tank of type WaterHeater:Stratified.

1.24.6.1.18 Field: Tank Use Side Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the use side inlet node of the water heater tank used by this
heat pump water heater. This name must match the Use Side Inlet Node Name in the water heater
tank object (Ref. WaterHeater:Stratified). This field is required if the water heater tank use side nodes
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 993

are connected to a plant loop, otherwise leave this field blank. When used, the branch object should
reflect that this node is part of a WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser object (see branch object example
below).

1.24.6.1.19 Field: Tank Use Side Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the use side outlet node of the water heater tank used by
this heat pump water heater. This name must match the Use Side Outlet Node Name in the water
heater tank object (Ref. WaterHeater:Stratified). This field is required if the water heater tank use side
nodes are connected to a plant loop, otherwise leave this field blank. When used, the branch object
should reflect that this node is part of a WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser object (see branch object
example below).

1.24.6.1.20 Field: DX Coil Object Type

This alpha (choice) field contains the type of DX coil used by this heat pump water heater. Currently,
the only valid choice is Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped.

1.24.6.1.21 Field: DX Coil Name

This alpha field contains the name of the specific DX coil (Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped)
used by this heat pump water heater.

1.24.6.1.22 Field: Minimum Inlet Air Temperature for Compressor Operation

This numeric field contains the minimum inlet air dry-bulb temperature entering the air coil (evapo-
rator) and fan section, in degrees Celsius, below which the heat pump compressor does not operate.
If this field is left blank, the default value is 10°C.

1.24.6.1.23 Field: Compressor Location

This alpha (choice) field contains the location of the heat pump compressor and the air temper-
ature for this location is used to control operation of the compressor’s crankcase heater in the
Coil:WaterHeating:AirToWaterHeatPump:Wrapped object. Valid entries are Schedule, Zone, or
Outdoors. If ‘Schedule’ is selected, a compressor ambient temperature schedule name must be
defined in the field below; otherwise, the field below should be left blank. If ‘Zone’ is selected, the
crankcase heater operation is controlled based on the air temperature in the zone defined in the
field Inlet Air Zone Name, and the Inlet Air Configuration must be ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOut-
doorAir’. If ‘Outdoors’ is selected, crankcase heater operation is controlled based on the outdoor air
temperature.

1.24.6.1.24 Field: Compressor Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of a schedule that defines the ambient air temperature surrounding
the heat pump compressor, which is used to control the compressor’s crankcase heater operation.
This field is only used when the compressor location field defined above is specified as ‘Schedule’,
otherwise it should be left blank.

1.24.6.1.25 Field: Fan Object Type

This alpha (choice) field contains the type of fan used by this heat pump water heater. Currently,
the only valid choices are Fan:SystemModel and Fan:OnOff.
994 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.6.1.26 Field: Fan Name

This alpha field contains the name of the specific fan (Fan:SystemModel or Fan:OnOff object) used by
this heat pump water heater.

1.24.6.1.27 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha (choice) field defines the placement of the fan in the heat pump water heater. Valid
choices are BlowThrough (fan upstream of the air coil) and DrawThrough (fan downstream of
the air coil). If this field is left blank, the default value is DrawThrough.

1.24.6.1.28 Field: On Cycle Parasitic Electric Load

This numeric field contains the on-cycle parasitic electric power in Watts. This is the parasitic
electric power consumed by controls or other electrical devices associated with the heat pump water
heater. This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the heat pump compressor is operating and
the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute to heating the water. This parasitic
load does, however, affect the zone air heat balance when the heat pump water heater sends some
or all of its outlet air to a zone (i.e., Inlet Air Configuration field specified as ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or
‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’) and the Parasitic Heat Rejection Location field is specified as ‘Zone’. The
minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value is also 0.0 if this field is left blank.

1.24.6.1.29 Field: Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load

This numeric field contains the off-cycle parasitic electric power in Watts. This is the parasitic electric
power consumed by controls or other electrical devices associated with the heat pump compressor.
This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the heat pump water heater is available but the
compressor is not operating, and the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute
to heating the water. This parasitic load does, however, affect the zone air heat balance when the
heat pump water heater sends some or all of its outlet air to a zone (i.e., Inlet Air Configuration
field specified as ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir’) and the Parasitic Heat Rejection Location
field is specified as ‘Zone’. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value is also 0.0
if this field is left blank.

1.24.6.1.30 Field: Parasitic Heat Rejection Location

This alpha (choice) field determines where the on-cycle and off-cycle parasitic heat is rejected. Valid
choices are Zone and Exterior. If ‘Zone’ is selected, both the on-cycle and off-cycle parasitic heat
is rejected to the zone defined in the field Inlet Air Zone Name, and the Inlet Air Configuration
must be ‘ZoneAirOnly’ or ‘ZoneAndOutdoorAir. If ’Outdoors’ is selected, this parasitic heat is
rejected outdoors (does not impact the zone air heat balance) regardless of the specified Inlet Air
Configuration. If this field is left blank, the default value is ’Outdoors’.

1.24.6.1.31 Field: Inlet Air Mixer Node Name

This optional alpha field defines the name of the HVAC node which represents the mixture of outdoor
air and zone air that enters the heat pump air coil (evaporator) and fan section. The model mixes
outdoor air with zone air and places the result on this inlet air mixer node based on the Inlet Air
Mixer Schedule defined below. When the schedule value is equal to 0, 100% zone air enters the
evaporator coil and fan section of the heat pump water heater. When the schedule value is equal to
1, 100% outdoor air enters the evaporator coil and fan section. This node name must be provided
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 995

if the Inlet Air Configuration field above is specified as ‘ZoneAndOutdoor Air’, otherwise this field
should be left blank.

1.24.6.1.32 Field: Outlet Air Splitter Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the air node to which the heat pump air coil (evaporator) and
fan sends all of its outlet air. The supply air flow downstream of this node is split between the zone
and outdoors based on the Inlet Air Mixer schedule defined below. When the schedule value is equal
to 0, the entire outlet air stream is diverted to the zone. When the schedule value is equal to 1, the
entire outlet air stream is exhausted to outdoors. This node name must be provided if the Inlet Air
Configuration field above is specified as ‘Zone and Outdoor Air’, otherwise this field should be left
blank.

1.24.6.1.33 Field: Inlet Air Mixer Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat
pump draws its inlet air from the zone, outdoors, or a combination of zone and outdoor air. A
schedule value equal to 0 indicates that the heat pump draws its inlet air from the zone. A schedule
value equal to 1 denotes that the heat pump draws its inlet air from outdoors. Values between 0
and 1 denote a mixture of zone and outdoor air proportional to the schedule value. The Inlet Air
Mixer schedule controls both the inlet air mixer and outlet air splitter nodes in unison to ensure that
the operation of the heat pump does not contribute to zone pressurization or depressurization. For
example if the Inlet Air Mixer schedule value is 0.4, then the inlet air mixer node is composed of 40%
outdoor air and 60% zone air. For this same case, the outlet air splitter directs 60% of the HPWH
outlet air back to the zone and 40% of the outlet air flow is exhausted outdoors. This schedule
name must be provided if the Inlet Air Configuration field is specified as ‘Zone and Outdoor Air’,
otherwise this field should be left blank.

1.24.6.1.34 Field: Tank Element Control Logic

This alpha field defines settings for the control logic of when to run the tank element in relation to
whether the heat pump is running.

– MutuallyExclusive means that once the tank heating element(s) are active, the heat pump
is shut down until the heating element setpoint is reached.
– Simultaneous (default) means that both the tank heating element and heat pump are used
at the same time to recover the tank temperature.

1.24.6.1.35 Field: Control Sensor 1 Height In Stratified Tank

This alpha field defines where the tank temperature is sensed for heat pump control when the tank
type is WaterHeater:Stratified. The stratified tank model produces tank temperature at different nodes
in the vertical direction and various options are available for how this temperature should be sensed
to control the heat pump. This is measured in height from the bottom of the tank. Internally
the appropriate node is determined based on this height. If omitted, this defaults to the height of
Heater1.
996 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.6.1.36 Field: Control Sensor 1 Weight

The model can optionally use two control sensor locations in stratified tanks. When that is the case,
the temperature sensed at each location is weighted. This alpha input specifies the weight associated
with Control Sensor 1. It is input as a value between 0 and 1. The weight of Control Sensor 2 is
determined by subtracting this weight from 1. The default for this field is 1, indicating that only
Control Sensor 1 is used.

1.24.6.1.37 Field: Control Sensor 2 Height in Stratified Tank

This alpha field defines the optional second location where the tank temperature is sensed for heat
pump control when the tank type is WaterHeater:Stratified. If omitted, this defaults to the height of
Heater2.
Following is an example input for the WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser compound object and the
other required component objects that it references.

WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser ,
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
PlantHPWHTempSch , !- Compressor Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
3.89, !- Dead Band Temperature Difference {deltaC}
0.0664166667 , !- Condenser Bottom Location
0.8634166667 , !- Condenser Top Location
0.2279 , !- Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OutdoorAirOnly , !- Inlet Air Configuration
, !- Air Inlet Node Name
, !- Air Outlet Node Name
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Exhaust Air Node Name
, !- Inlet Air Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Humidity Schedule Name
, !- Inlet Air Zone Name
WaterHeater:Stratified , !- Tank Object Type
HPWHPlantTank , !- Tank Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Tank Use Side Outlet Node Name
Coil:WaterHeating: AirToWaterHeatPump :Wrapped , !- DX Coil Object Type
HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- DX Coil Name
7.2, !- Minimum Inlet Air Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
Outdoors , !- Compressor Location
, !- Compressor Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
Fan:SystemModel , !- Fan Object Type
HPWHPlantFan , !- Fan Name
DrawThrough , !- Fan Placement
0, !- On Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
0, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}
, !- Parasitic Heat Rejection Location
, !- Inlet Air Mixer Node Name
, !- Outlet Air Splitter Node Name
, !- Inlet Air Mixer Schedule Name
MutuallyExclusive , !- Tank Element Control Logic
1.262 , !- Control Sensor 1 Height In Stratified Tank
0.75, !- Control Sensor 1 Weight
0.464; !- Control Sensor 2 Height In Stratified Tank

NOTE: branch object required only when tank use inlet nodes are used.

Branch ,
Central HPWH Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser , !- Component 1 Object Type
PlantHeatPumpWaterHeater ,!- Component 1 Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 997

HPWH Use Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name

WaterHeater:Stratified ,
HPWHPlantTank , !- Name
Water Heater , !- End -Use Subcategory
0.287691 , !- Tank Volume {m3}
1.594 , !- Tank Height {m}
VerticalCylinder , !- Tank Shape
, !- Tank Perimeter {m}
100, !- Maximum Temperature Limit {C}
MasterSlave , !- Heater Priority Control
Plant Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Heater 1 Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
18.5, !- Heater 1 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
4500, !- Heater 1 Capacity {W}
1.129 , !- Heater 1 Height {m}
Plant Hot Water Setpoint Temp Schedule , !- Heater 2 Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
18.5, !- Heater 2 Deadband Temperature Difference {deltaC}
0, !- Heater 2 Capacity {W}
0.266 , !- Heater 2 Height {m}
Electricity , !- Heater Fuel Type
1, !- Heater Thermal Efficiency
8.3, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
Electricity , !- Off Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
1, !- Off Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
8.3, !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate {W}
Electricity , !- On Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type
0, !- On Cycle Parasitic Heat Fraction to Tank
1, !- On Cycle Parasitic Height {m}
Outdoors , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name
0.7878 , !- Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient per Unit Area to Ambient Temperature
{W/m2 -K}
1, !- Skin Loss Fraction to Zone
, !- Off Cycle Flue Loss Coefficient to Ambient Temperature {W/K}
1, !- Off Cycle Flue Loss Fraction to Zone
0.001 , !- Peak Use Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Use Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
, !- Cold Water Supply Temperature Schedule Name
HPWH Use Inlet Node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
HPWH Use Outlet Node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
1, !- Use Side Effectiveness
0, !- Use Side Inlet Height {m}
autocalculate , !- Use Side Outlet Height {m}
HPPlantWaterOutletNode , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
HPPlantWaterInletNode , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
1, !- Source Side Effectiveness
0.7, !- Source Side Inlet Height {m}
0, !- Source Side Outlet Height {m}
Fixed , !- Inlet Mode
autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.5, !- Indirect Water Heating Recovery Time {hr}
12; !- Number of Nodes

OutdoorAir:Node ,
HPWHPlantTank OA Node; !- Name

Coil:WaterHeating: AirToWaterHeatPump :Wrapped ,

HPWHPlantDXCoil , !- Name
2349.6 , !- Rated Heating Capacity {W}
2.4, !- Rated COP {W/W}
0.981 , !- Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
19.72 , !- Rated Evaporator Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
13.5, !- Rated Evaporator Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
48.89 , !- Rated Condenser Water Temperature {C}
0.189 , !- Rated Evaporator Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Yes , !- Evaporator Fan Power Included in Rated COP
998 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

HPPlantFanAirOutletNode , !- Evaporator Air Inlet Node Name

HPPlantAirOutletNode , !- Evaporator Air Outlet Node Name
0, !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
10, !- Maximum Ambient Temperature for Crankcase Heater Operation {C}
WetBulbTemperature , !- Evaporator Air Temperature Type for Curve Objects
HPWH -Htg -Cap -fT , !- Heating Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Heating Capacity Function of Air Flow Fraction Curve Name
HPWH -Htg -COP -fT , !- Heating COP Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Heating COP Function of Air Flow Fraction Curve Name
HPWH -COP -fPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name

Fan:OnOff ,
HPWHPlantFan , !- Name
PlantHPWHSch , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.1722 , !- Fan Total Efficiency
65, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.2279 , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
1, !- Motor Efficiency
0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
HPPlantAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
HPPlantFanAirOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name

1.24.6.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio

– HVAC,Average,Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

1.24.6.2.1 Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio

This output is the average part-load ratio of the heat pump water heater’s compressor (as well as
its water pump and fan) for the timestep being reported. This output is independent of the “Water
Heater Part Load Ratio” (Ref. Water Heater Outputs) which represents the part-load ratio of the
supplemental heater (element or burner) in the water tank. When the water tank’s (supplemental)
heater set point temperature is higher than the cut-in temperature of the heat pump water heater’s
compressor, the heat pump compressor is disabled and the water tank’s heater (element or burner)
is used to heat the water. During these times the Water Heater Compressor Part Load Ratio is
equal to 0.

1.24.6.2.2 Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

1.24.6.2.3 Water Heater On Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

1.24.6.2.4 Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

1.24.6.2.5 Water Heater Off Cycle Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the parasitic electric power and consumption associated with the heat pump water
heater. Specific outputs represent parasitic electrical usage during the compressor/fan on and off
cycles. These outputs represent electronic controls or other electric component. The model assumes
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 999

that the parasitic power does not contribute to heating the water, but it can impact the zone air
heat balance depending on user inputs. The parasitic electric consumption outputs are also added
to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = DHW, Group Key = Plant (ref.
Output:Meter objects).

1.24.7 Cold Thermal Storage Objects

There are four types of cold thermal storage objects that can be added to plant loops. (To model
cold thermal storage integrated with packaged air-conditioning units, see the thermal storage cooling
coil in section 1.41.40. The four cold thermal storage objects for plant loops are:

– ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple
– ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed
– ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
– ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified

These objects are typically placed on the supply side of a primary chilled water loop in series or
in parallel with one or more chillers. Using the the component set point (PlantEquipmentOper-
ation:ComponentSetpoint) plant operation scheme type, the chiller and storage tank setpoints are
used to control operation. Using a SetpointManager:Scheduled object (or other appropriate type
of set point manager), the setpoints on the chiller outlet node and the ice storage outlet node can
be used to control how the cooling load is shared and when charging of storage occurs. Example
setpoints to use for various modes of operation are shown in the table below:

Mode Chiller Setpoint Storage Setpoint

Charging ice storage tank -5C 7C

Cooling with chiller only 7C 99C
Cooling with chiller and storage (fully load 7C 7C
chiller before using storage))
Cooling with chiller and storage (chiller car- 10C 7C
ries portion of load, valid if chiller is upstream
of storage)

Example files have been developed for three common storage configurations:
1. Series – Chiller Upstream: In this configuration, a chiller is placed first on the same branch as
the storage unit.
2. Series – Chiller Downstream: In this configuration, a chiller is placed second on the same branch
as the storage unit.

3. Parallel: In this configuration, the chiller is on a branch parallel to the storage unit branch
when it is not charging. During charging mode, valves will be changed so that the chiller is in
series upstream of the storage. To accomplish this in EnergyPlus, the chiller must be modeled
using two different chiller objects to represent the same chiller. One chiller object on a parallel
branch operates only when storage is not being charged. The other chiller object, in series
upstream of the storage unit operates only during charging mode.
1000 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Other considerations for applying cold thermal storage objects include:

– In the PlantLoop object, the “Minimum Loop Temperature” must be set equal to or less than
the lowest setpoint to be used anywhere in the loop.
– To end the storage charging cycle, use a AvailabilityManager:LowTemperatureTurnOff to shut
off the primary chilled water loop when the temperature leaving the storage tank nears the
charging mode chiller setpoint indicating that the tank is fully charged. For example, if the
chiller is set to provide –5C chilled water during charging, then charging can be shut down
when the water temperature leaving the storage unit reaches –4C. When using a primary-
secondary loop arrangement, it may be necessary to schedule this availability manager to be
active only when the HVAC systems are off to avoid fighting between the demand controls and
the availability manager.

1.24.8 ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple
This thermal storage model is based on a simple simulation of an ice storage tank with a fixed
capacity. The tank is charged, or frozen, in an ice-on-coil configuration where ice builds up on the
outside of the tubes carrying the brine or glycol solution from the chiller. There are two discharge
(melt) options, internal or external. Internal melt uses the same fluid tubes for charging and dis-
charging. External melt uses a separate fluid path for discharge such that the outer layers of ice melt
first. The ice storage model includes an implied 3-way valve to control the amount of charge/dis-
charge based on the incoming water temperature and the outlet node setpoint temperature. The
storage tank is assumed to be fully charged (full of ice) at the beginning of each environment. The
tank is then allowed to charge and discharge during the warmup days of the environment. The tank
is best controlled using the PlantEquipmentOperation:ComponentSetpoint plant operation scheme,
and requires that a setpoint be placed by a set point manager on the ice storage Plant Outlet Node.
The input fields for the object are described in detail below:

1.24.8.1 Inputs

1.24.8.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ice storage tank.

1.24.8.1.2 Field: Ice Storage Type

This alpha field specifies the type of ice storage tank to be modeled. There are two op-
tions: “IceOnCoilInternal” models ice-on-coil, internal melt.“IceOnCoilExternal” models
ice-on-coil, external melt.

1.24.8.1.3 Field: Capacity

This numeric field contains the nominal capacity of the ice storage in GJ (Giga is 109 ).

1.24.8.1.4 Field: Inlet Node Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the chilled water inlet node.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1001

1.24.8.1.5 Field: Outlet Node Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the chilled water outlet node.
Following is an example input for the THERMAL STORAGE:ICE:SIMPLE object.

ThermalStorage:Ice:Simple ,
ITS , !- Ice Storage Name
IceOnCoilInternal , !- Ice Storage Type
1.5, !- Ice Storage Capacity {GJ}
ITS Inlet Node , !- Plant Loop Inlet Node
ITS Outlet Node; !- Plant Loop Outlet Node

1.24.8.2 Outputs

The following outputs are available for simple Ice Storage model:

– HVAC,Average,Ice Thermal Storage Requested Load [W]

– Zone,Average,Ice Thermal Storage End Fraction[]
– HVAC,Average,Ice Thermal Storage Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Ice Thermal Storage Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ice Thermal Storage Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Energy [J]

1.24.8.2.1 Ice Thermal Storage Requested Load [W]

The load requested by the plant control scheme. A positive value indicates a cooling load or a request
to discharge (melt) the tank. A negative value indicates a request to charge (freeze) the tank.

1.24.8.2.2 Ice Thermal Storage End Fraction []

The fraction of full ice storage which is present at the end of the current HVAC timestep. When
reported at a frequency less than detailed, this value is averaged over the reporting period.

1.24.8.2.3 Ice Thermal Storage Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The total water mass flow rate through the ice storage component. Because the component includes
an implied 3-way valve, this flow may be all through the tank, all bypassed through the valve, or a
mixture of both.

1.24.8.2.4 Ice Thermal Storage Inlet Temperature [C]

The water temperature entering the ice storage component.

1.24.8.2.5 Ice Thermal Storage Outlet Temperature [C]

The water temperature leaving the ice storage component.
1002 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.8.2.6 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Rate [W]

The rate of cooling delivered by the ice storage component. A positive value indicates the ice tank
is discharging (melting). A zero value indicates the tank is charging or dormant.

1.24.8.2.7 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Energy [J]

The cooling energy delivered by the ice storage component. A positive value indicates the ice tank
is discharging (melting). A zero value indicates the tank is charging or dormant.

1.24.8.2.8 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Rate [W]

The rate of charging delivered to the ice storage component. A positive value indicates the ice tank
is charging (freezing). A zero value indicates the tank is discharging or dormant.

1.24.8.2.9 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Energy [J]

The charging energy delivered to the ice storage component. A positive value indicates the ice tank
is charging (freezing). A zero value indicates the tank is discharging or dormant.

1.24.9 ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed
The detailed ice storage model allows the users of EnergyPlus to model more closely specific manu-
facturers’ ice storage units. This is possible due to the use of curve fits to simulate the performance
of the ice storage unit during charging and discharging. In this implementation, both charging and
discharging are a function of the fraction charged/discharged as well as the log mean temperature
difference across the storage unit. More information on the model is provided in the Engineering
Reference for EnergyPlus. The remainder of this section describes the input required for the detailed
ice storage model and the output that it can produce.

1.24.9.1 Inputs

1.24.9.1.1 Field: Name

This field is the name of the detailed ice storage system given to it by the user.

1.24.9.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that determines whether or not the ice storage
system is available during a particular time period. This allows the system to be turned off during
a particular season. A value of less than or equal to zero indicates that the ice storage system is not
available. Any value greater than zero indicates that the system is available. If this field is blank,
the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.24.9.1.3 Field: Capacity

This number is the maximum amount of latent thermal storage available in the ice storage system.
This model does not allow the removal or addition of sensible energy from the tank. Thus, it is
always assumed to be at the freezing temperature of the storage material. The capacity is expressed
in units of GJ.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1003

1.24.9.1.4 Field: Inlet Node Name

This is the name of the node that connects the ice storage system to the plant loop. It is the inlet
node to the ice storage component. The next field defines the outlet node. Due to presence of
an internal bypass in this model, there are other “nodes” that are handled internally within the
program. Users do not need to define any nodes other than the inlet and outlet nodes.

1.24.9.1.5 Field: Outlet Node Name

This is the name of the other node that connects the ice storage system to the plant loop. It is the
outlet node to the ice storage component.

1.24.9.1.6 Field: Discharging Curve Variable Specifications

The detailed ice storage model in EnergyPlus takes advantage of the Curve feature of the program.
The discharging curve can use any curve that has two independent variables. This field controls
which two parameters are the independent variables in modeling the performance of the detailed ice
storage model during discharging. There are four different independent variable specifications:

– FractionChargedLMTD (where Fraction Charged is the first independent variable and LMTD
is the second independent variable)
– FractionDischargedLMTD (where Fraction Discharged is the first independent variable and
LMTD is the second independent variable)
– LMTDMassFlow (where LMTD is the first independent variable and Mass Flow rate is the
second independent variable)
– LMTDFractionCharged (where LMTD is the first independent variable and Fraction Charged
is the second independent variable)

More information on curve types can be found in the section on Curves. For additional information
on how these curves are used in the Detailed Ice Storage model, please consult the Engineering
Reference.

1.24.9.1.7 Field: Discharging Curve Name

This field specifies the name of the actual curve fit to be used to model the discharging process of
the detailed ice storage system. Note that this must be a curve that has two independent variables.

1.24.9.1.8 Field: Charging Curve Variable Specifications

The detailed ice storage model in EnergyPlus takes advantage of the Curve feature of the program.
The charging curve can use any curve that has two independent variables. This field controls which
two parameters are the independent variables in modeling the performance of the detailed ice storage
model during charging. There are four different independent variable specifications:

– FractionChargedLMTD (where Fraction Charged is the first independent variable and LMTD
is the second independent variable)
– FractionDischargedLMTD (where Fraction Discharged is the first independent variable and
LMTD is the second independent variable)
– LMTDMassFlow (where LMTD is the first independent variable and Mass Flow rate is the
second independent variable)
1004 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– LMTDFractionCharged (where LMTD is the first independent variable and Fraction Charged
is the second independent variable)

More information on curve types can be found in the section on Curves. For additional information
on how these curves are used in the Detailed Ice Storage model, please consult the Engineering
Reference.

1.24.9.1.9 Field: Charging Curve Name

This field specifies the name of the actual curve fit to be used to model the charging process of the
detailed ice storage system. Note that this must be a curve that has two independent variables.

1.24.9.1.10 Field: Timestep of the Curve Data

This field defines what timestep was used to produce the curve fits named in the previous inputs.
This parameter is important because the curve fit is non-dimensional. Thus, the data used to develop
the curve fits were based on a specific length of time. In many cases, this is probably one hour or
1.0. The units for this parameter are hours.

1.24.9.1.11 Field: Parasitic Electric Load During Discharging

This field defines the amount of parasitic electric consumption (for controls or other miscellaneous
electric consumption associate with the ice storage unit itself) during the discharge phase. This
parameter is dimensionless and gets multiplied by the current load on the tank.

1.24.9.1.12 Field: Parasitic Electric Load During Charging

This field defines the amount of parasitic electric consumption (for controls or other miscellaneous
electric consumption associate with the ice storage unit itself) during the charge phase. This param-
eter is dimensionless and gets multiplied by the current load on the tank.

1.24.9.1.13 Field: Tank Loss Coefficient

This field defines the loss of ice stored during a particular hour. This field is dimensionless (per
hour). It is not multiplied by any temperature difference between the tank and the environment in
which it might be located.

1.24.9.1.14 Field: Freezing Temperature of Storage Medium

This parameter defines the freezing/melting temperature of the ice storage medium in degrees Cel-
sius. For most tanks, this is simply 0.0°C (the default value). However, some tanks may use other
materials or salts which would change the freezing temperature. This can be changed using this
parameter.

1.24.9.1.15 Field: Thaw Process Indicator

This input field assists in more accurate modeling of the charging process by defining how the thawing
of ice takes place. There are two options for this input: InsideMelt and OutsideMelt. Some ice
storage systems, by their nature, start the charging process with a bare coil or no ice left on the
charging surface even though there is still ice stored in the tank. An example of such a system
is sometimes referred to as an ice-on-coil inside melt system, and these systems would define this
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1005

parameter using the “InsideMelt” option for this field. Other systems melt the ice from the outside,
leaving ice still on the charging surface when charging begins. These systems are modeled using the
“OutsideMelt” option. For systems that have a charging process that does not vary significantly
with fraction charged can ignore this input by accepting the default value. The default value for
this field is “OutsideMelt”.
An IDF example:

ThermalStorage:Ice:Detailed ,
Ice Tank , !- Ice Storage Name
ON , !- Ice Storage availability schedule
0.5, !- Ice Storage Capacity {GJ}
Ice Tank Inlet Node , !- Plant Loop Inlet Node
Ice Tank Outlet Node , !- Plant Loop Outlet Node
FractionDischargedLMTD , !- Discharging Curve Fit Type
DischargeCurve , !- Discharging Curve Name
FractionChargedLMTD , !- Charging Curve Fit Type
ChargeCurve , !- Charging Curve Name
1.0, !- Timestep of Curve Fit Data
0.0001 , !- Parasitic electric load during discharging
0.0002 , !- Parasitic electric load during charging
0.0003 , !- Tank loss coefficient
0.0; !- Freezing temperature [C]

1.24.9.2 Outputs

Current detailed ice storage output variables are:

– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Rate [W]

– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Change Fraction []
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage End Fraction []
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Bypass Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Tank Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Fluid Inlet Temperature [C]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Blended Outlet Temperature [C]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Tank Outlet Temperature [C]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Rate [W]
– System, Sum, Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Energy [J]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Rate [W]
– System, Sum, Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Energy [J]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– System, Sum, Ice Thermal Storage Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– System, Average, Ice Thermal Storage On Coil Fraction []

1.24.9.2.1 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Rate [W]

The actual load (absolute value) provided by the ice storage system during the current timestep
1006 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.9.2.2 Ice Thermal Storage Change Fraction []

The change in the ice tank’s charge fraction charged during the current timestep (positive for charg-
ing, negative for discharging).

1.24.9.2.3 Ice Thermal Storage End Fraction []

The fraction charge of the ice storage system at the end of the timestep

1.24.9.2.4 Ice Thermal Storage On Coil Fraction []

The fraction of ice that is actually on the freezing surface at the end of the timestep. This can be
different for an “inside melt” system than the end fraction (see previous output parameter).

1.24.9.2.5 Ice Thermal Storage Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow through the ice storage component

1.24.9.2.6 Ice Thermal Storage Bypass Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow through the ice storage component bypass (bypasses the actual unit)

1.24.9.2.7 Ice Thermal Storage Tank Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow through the ice storage unit itself

1.24.9.2.8 Ice Thermal Storage Fluid Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature to the ice storage component

1.24.9.2.9 Ice Thermal Storage Blended Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature of the component after mixing any bypass flow with flow through the ice
storage unit

1.24.9.2.10 Ice Thermal Storage Tank Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature of the ice storage unit itself below mixing with any bypass flow

1.24.9.2.11 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Rate [W]

The cooling done (as a rate) by the ice storage unit or its discharge rate

1.24.9.2.12 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Discharge Energy [J]

The total cooling done by the ice storage unit or its discharge rate

1.24.9.2.13 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Rate [W]

The charging done (as a rate) to the ice storage unit
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1007

1.24.9.2.14 Ice Thermal Storage Cooling Charge Energy [J]

The total charging done to the ice storage unit

1.24.9.2.15 Ice Thermal Storage Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

The electric power as a result of parasitic loads on the ice storage unit for things like controls or
other miscellaneous parts of the ice storage unit itself

1.24.9.2.16 Ice Thermal Storage Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

The electric consumption as a result of parasitic loads on the ice storage unit for things like controls
or other miscellaneous parts of the ice storage unit itself

1.24.10 ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed
The ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed object analytically solves the differential equation govern-
ing the energy balance of the water tank. The chilled water is “used” by drawing from the “Use
Side” of the water tank. The tank is indirectly charged by circulating cold water through the
“Source Side” of the water tank.
Control is based on cycling flow through the source side. When the tank temperature rises above a
“cut-in” temperature, source side flow is requested. Source side flow will continue until the tank is
cooled to below the tank set point or “cut-out” temperature.
For heat gains from the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a
schedule, a zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, the skin gains are removed from the zone
heat balance as negative internal heat gains.

1.24.10.1 Inputs

1.24.10.1.1 Field: Name

The unique name of the ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed object.

1.24.10.1.2 Field: Tank Volume

The volume of the thermal storage tank [m3 ].

1.24.10.1.3 Field: Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the chilled water temperature setpoint [°C]. Also
known as the “cut-out” temperature.

1.24.10.1.4 Field: Deadband Temperature Difference

The delta temperature difference [Δ°C] between the setpoint and the “cut-in” temperature at which
the storage tank will request cooling. In other words, the “cut-in” temperature is Setpoint + Dead-
band.
1008 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.10.1.5 Field: Minimum Temperature Limit

The temperature [°C] at which the tank water becomes too cold. No source side flow is allowed
when the tank temperature is below this limit. The minimum temperature must be lower than the
setpoint temperature at all times.

1.24.10.1.6 Field: Nominal Cooling Capacity

This field describes the typical cooling capacity that the chilled water tank will provide. Since this is
a passive device, the actual cooling capacity depends on water temperatures and flow rates. However,
this field is used to describe the chilled water tank’s nominal cooling capacity for supervisory control
where plant operation schemes require a cooling capacity to model how equipment is dispatched.

1.24.10.1.7 Field: Ambient Temperature Indicator

The Ambient Temperature Indicator specifies how the ambient air temperature will be indicated.
The field can be “Schedule”, “Zone”, or “Exterior.” If Schedule is used, the Ambient Tempera-
ture Schedule Name field provides the values for ambient temperature. If Zone is used, the zone
air temperature of the zone specified in the Ambient Temperature Zone field provides the ambi-
ent temperature. If Exterior is used, the outdoor dry-bulb air temperature provides the ambient
temperature.

1.24.10.1.8 Field: Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

The field contains the name of a schedule object specifying the ambient air temperature around the
tank for skin gains. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Schedule.

1.24.10.1.9 Field: Ambient Temperature Zone Name

The reference to the zone object specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
gains. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone.

1.24.10.1.10 Field: Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node (OutdoorAir:Node) name used to define
the ambient conditions surrounding the chilled water tank. This field is applicable only when the
Ambient Temperature Indicator is specified as Exterior, otherwise this field should be left blank.
The node name specified must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of
the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data.
Alternately, the node name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor
air conditions are taken directly from the weather data.

1.24.10.1.11 Field: Heat Gain Coefficient from Ambient Temperature

The gain coefficient [W/K] from the ambient air temperature. This coefficient is often referred to as
the “UA” for the overall tank thermal performance with respect to heat gains from the tank’s skin..

1.24.10.1.12 Field: Use Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the use side draws chilled water from the tank and returns warmer water.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1009

1.24.10.1.13 Field: Use Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the use side chilled water from the tank and returns warmer water.

1.24.10.1.14 Field: Use Side Heat Transfer Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the use side water and the tank water. If
the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the use
side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the use side outlet water temperature
will not be as cold as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.

1.24.10.1.15 Field: Use Side Availability Schedule Name

This field contains the name of an availability schedule for the use side of the water tank. If the
schedule’s value is 0.0, then the use side is not available and flow will not be requested. If the
schedule’s value is note equal to 0.0 (usually 1 is used), the use side is available. If this field is blank,
the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.24.10.1.16 Field: Use Side Design Flow Rate

This field is used to specify the design flow rate through the Use Side of the chilled water tank. The
volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the
input file should include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop connected to the Use side. Sizing
results are reported in the EIO file.

1.24.10.1.17 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the source side draws somewhat warm water from the tank and returns colder water. The
source side volume flow rate is obtained from the plant loop. The magnitude of the flow rates
through the source side can be controlled by setting the Maximum Branch Flow Rate field in the
BRANCH object that connects the source inlet node.

1.24.10.1.18 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the source side draws somewhat warm water from the tank and returns colder water.

1.24.10.1.19 Field: Source Side Heat Transfer Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the source side water and the tank water.
If the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the
source side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the source side outlet water
temperature will not be as cold as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.

1.24.10.1.20 Field: Source Side Availability Schedule Name

This field contains the name of an availability schedule for the source side of the water tank. If the
schedule’s value is 0.0, then the source side is not available and flow will not be requested. If the
schedule’s value is not equal to 0.0 (usually 1 is used), the source side is available. If this field is
blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
1010 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.10.1.21 Field: Source Side Design Flow Rate

This field is used to specify the design flow rate through the Source Side of the chilled water tank. The
volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the
input file should include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the
EIO file.

1.24.10.1.22 Field: Tank Recovery Time

This field is used to autosize the Source Side Design Flow Rate. The field is used if the previous
field is set to autosize and the water tank’s source side is on the demand side of a plant loop. This
the the time, in hours, that the chilled water tank is to be indirectly cooled from 14.4ºC to 9.0ºC
using the exit temperature of in the associated Plant Sizing object.
An example input object follows.

ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Mixed ,
Chilled Water Storage Tank 1 , !- Name
4.0 , !- Tank Volume
CW -Tank -Temp -Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
3.5, !- Deadband Temperature Difference
1.0 , !- Minimum Temperature Limit
25000 , !- Nominal Cooling Capacity
Zone , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_5 , !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
, !- Ambient Temperature Outdoor Air Node Name
5.0 , !- Heat Gain Coefficient from Ambient Temperature
CW Tank Discharge Inlet node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Discharge Outlet node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
1.0 , !- Use Side Effectiveness
TES Use Schedule , !- Use Side Availability Schedule Name
Autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate
CW Tank Charge Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Charge Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
1.0, !- Source Side Effectiveness
TES Charge Schedule , !- Source Side Availability Schedule Name
Autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate
4.0; !- Tank Recovery Time

1.24.10.2 Outputs

The following output variables are reported for chilled water thermal storage tanks.

– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]

– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Tank Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1011

– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average
[W]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]

1.24.10.2.1 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Temperature [C]

The average water tank temperature.

1.24.10.2.2 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Tank Temperature [C]

The final water tank temperature at the end of the system timestep. If reported at the “Detailed”
interval, this output variable can be used to verify an exact energy balance on the water storage
tank.

1.24.10.2.3 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate [W]
The average heat exchange rate to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually
positive with surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.

1.24.10.2.4 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy [J]
The energy exchange to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually positive
with surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.

1.24.10.2.5 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The use side mass flow rate.

1.24.10.2.6 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature [C]
The inlet temperature on the use side.

1.24.10.2.7 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature [C]
The outlet temperature on the use side.

1.24.10.2.8 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.

1.24.10.2.9 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.

1.24.10.2.10 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The source side mass flow rate.

1012 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.10.2.11 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the source side.

1.24.10.2.12 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature

[C]
The outlet temperature on the source side.

1.24.10.2.13 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.

1.24.10.2.14 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.

1.24.11 ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified
The ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified object divides the water tank into multiple nodes of
equal volume. The nodes are coupled by vertical conduction effects, internode fluid flow, and tem-
perature inversion mixing. The object simultaneously solves the differential equations governing
the energy balances on the nodes using a numerical method. The system timestep is divided into
many small substeps that allow the simulation to capture events that occur on a very short time
scale. The chilled water is “used” by drawing from the “Use Side” of the water tank. The tank is
indirectly charged by circulating cold water through the “Source Side” of the water tank.
Control is based on cycling flow through the source side. When the tank temperature rises above a
“cut-in” temperature, source side flow is requested. Source side flow will continue until the tank is
cooled to below the tank set point or “cut-out” temperature.
For heat gains from the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a
schedule, a zone, or the exterior. When used with a zone, the skin gains are removed from the zone
heat balance as negative internal heat gains.

1.24.11.1 Inputs

1.24.11.1.1 Field: Name

The unique name of the ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified object.

1.24.11.1.2 Field: Tank Volume

The volume of the thermal storage tank [m3 ].

1.24.11.1.3 Field: Tank Height

The height [m] of the tank. For the HorizontalCylinder shape (see below) the height of the tank is
the measure in the axial direction, i.e., the height if you were to stand the cylinder up on its end.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1013

1.24.11.1.4 Field: Tank Shape

The tank shape determines the size and skin losses of the stratified nodes. There are three op-
tions: “VerticalCylinder,” “HorizontalCylinder,” and “Other.”
VerticalCylinder describes most upright cylindrical water tanks.
HorizontalCylinder describes a few specialty water tanks and some large commercial storage tanks.
HorizontalCylinder implies that the tank is divided into nodes of equal mass, but not equal height.
Other describes water storage tanks that have a uniform horizontal cross-section, but are not cylin-
ders, e.g., a cuboid or other shape. The length of the perimeter is then specified by the Tank
Perimeter field.
If blank, the default shape is VerticalCylinder.

1.24.11.1.5 Field: Tank Perimeter

The length of the tank perimeter [m]. This field is only used if Tank Shape is Other.

1.24.11.1.6 Field: Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

The reference to the schedule object specifying the chilled water temperature setpoint [°C]. Also
known as the “cut-out” temperature.

1.24.11.1.7 Field: Deadband Temperature Difference

The delta temperature difference [Δ°C] between the setpoint and the “cut-in” temperature at which
the storage tank will request cooling. In other words, the “cut-in” temperature is Setpoint + Dead-
band.

1.24.11.1.8 Field: Temperature Sensor Height

This field is used to describe the location in the tank where the temperature is sensed for control
descisions. The program will associate one of the nodes with this height and use that node’s
temperature for control decisions. The location is described in meters from the bottom of the tank.

1.24.11.1.9 Field: Minimum Temperature Limit

The temperature [°C] at which the tank water becomes too cold. No source side flow is allowed
when the tank temperature is below this limit. The minimum temperature must be lower than the
setpoint temperature at all times.

1.24.11.1.10 Field: Nominal Cooling Capacity

This field describes the typical cooling capacity that the chilled water tank will provide. Since this is
a passive device, the actual cooling capacity depends on water temperatures and flow rates. However,
this field is used to describe the chilled water tank’s nominal cooling capacity for supervisory control
where plant operation schemes require a cooling capacity to model how equipment is dispatched.
1014 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.11.1.11 Field: Ambient Temperature Indicator

The Ambient Temperature Indicator specifies how the ambient air temperature will be indicated.
The field can be “Schedule”, “Zone”, or “Exterior.” If Schedule is used, the Ambient Tempera-
ture Schedule Name field provides the values for ambient temperature. If Zone is used, the zone
air temperature of the zone specified in the Ambient Temperature Zone field provides the ambi-
ent temperature. If Exterior is used, the outdoor dry-bulb air temperature provides the ambient
temperature.

1.24.11.1.12 Field: Ambient Temperature Schedule Name

The field contains the name of a schedule object specifying the ambient air temperature around the
tank for skin gains. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Schedule.

1.24.11.1.13 Field: Ambient Temperature Zone Name

The reference to the zone object specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin
gains. This field is only used if Ambient Temperature Indicator is Zone.

1.24.11.1.14 Field: Ambient Temperature Outside Air Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the ambient conditions
surrounding the chilled water tank. This field is applicable only when the Ambient Temperature
Indicator is specified as Exterior, otherwise this field should be left blank. The node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.

1.24.11.1.15 Field: Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient per Unit Area to Ambient
Temperature
The uniform skin loss coefficient [W/m2 -K] or U-Value of the tank to the ambient air temperature.
The uniform skin loss accounts for the tank insulation. The overall losses at any particular tank node
can be further modified using the Additional Loss Coefficient fields to account for thermal shorting
due to pipe penetrations, tank feet, and any other loss effects.

1.24.11.1.16 Field: Use Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the use side draws chilled water from the tank and returns warmer water.

1.24.11.1.17 Field: Use Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the use side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the use side chilled water from the tank and returns warmer water.

1.24.11.1.18 Field: Use Side Heat Transfer Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the use side water and the tank water. If
the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the use
side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the use side outlet water temperature
will not be as cold as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1015

1.24.11.1.19 Field: Use Side Availability Schedule Name

This field contains the name of an availability schedule for the use side of the water tank. If the
schedule’s value is 0.0, then the use side is not available and flow will not be requested. If the
schedule’s value is not equal to 0.0 (usually 1 is used), then the use side is available. If this field is
blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.24.11.1.20 Field: Use Side Inlet Height

The height of the use side inlet to the tank. If blank, the inlet defaults to the top of the tank. The
inlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.11.1.21 Field: Use Side Outlet Height

The height of the use side outlet from the tank. If blank or autocalculate, the inlet defaults to the
bottom of the tank. The outlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.11.1.22 Field: Use Side Design Flow Rate

This field is used to specify the design flow rate through the Use Side of the water tank. The
volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field is needed when the Use Side is connected
to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the input file should include a Plant
Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.

1.24.11.1.23 Field: Source Side Inlet Node Name

The inlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the source side draws somewhat warm water from the tank and returns colder water. The
source side volume flow rate is obtained from the plant loop. The magnitude of the flow rates
through the source side can be controlled by setting the Maximum Branch Flow Rate field in the
BRANCH object that connects the source inlet node.

1.24.11.1.24 Field: Source Side Outlet Node Name

The outlet node connection to the plant loop for the source side of the chilled water storage tank.
Typically the source side draws somewhat warm water from the tank and returns colder water.

1.24.11.1.25 Field: Source Side Heat Transfer Effectiveness

This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the source side water and the tank water.
If the effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the
source side water and the tank water. If the effectiveness is less than 1.0, then the source side outlet
water temperature will be less than the tank water at the outlet node, simulating a heat exchanger.

1.24.11.1.26 Field: Source Side Availability Schedule Name

This field contains the name of an availability schedule for the source side of the water tank. If the
schedule’s value is 0.0, then the source side is not available and flow will not be requested. If the
schedule’s value is not equal to 0.0 (usually 1 is used), then the source side is available. If this field
is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
1016 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.11.1.27 Field: Source Side Inlet Height

The height of the source side inlet to the tank. If blank or autocalculate, the inlet defaults to the
bottom of the tank. The inlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.11.1.28 Field: Source Side Outlet Height

The height of the source side outlet from the tank. If blank, the inlet defaults to the top of the tank.
The outlet height cannot be higher than the tank height.

1.24.11.1.29 Field: Source Side Design Flow Rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Source Side of the water
heater. The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3 /s. The field is needed when the Source
Side is connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. If autosized, then the input file
should include a Plant Sizing object for the plant loop. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.

1.24.11.1.30 Field: Tank Recovery Time

This field is used to autosize the Source Side Design Flow Rate. The field is used if the previous
field is set to autosize and the water tank’s source side is on the demand side of a plant loop. This
the the time, in hours, that the chilled water tank is to be indirectly cooled from 14.4C to 9.0C using
the exit temperature of in the associated Plant Sizing object.

1.24.11.1.31 Field: Inlet Mode

The inlet mode of entering fluid from the use and source sides. There are two options: “Fixed” or
“Seeking.” In Fixed mode, the fluid enters at the fixed heights specified above. In Seeking mode, the
fluid “seeks out” the stratified node that is closest to the inlet temperature and adds all flow to that
node. The Seeking mode provides maximum stratification.

1.24.11.1.32 Field: Number of Nodes

The number of stratified nodes in the tank. There must be at least one node. The maximum number
of nodes is 10.

1.24.11.1.33 Field: Additional Destratification Conductivity

An additional destratification conductivity [W/m-K] is added to the fluid conductivity of water (0.6
W/m-K) to account for vertical conduction effects along the inside of the tank wall, and perhaps
other vertical components such as a dip tube pipe or anode rod.

1.24.11.1.34 Field: Node 1-10 Additional Loss Coefficient

An additional heat gain coefficient [W/K] added to the skin gains for a given node to account for
thermal shorting due to pipe penetrations, tank feet, and any other loss effects.
An example input object follows.

ThermalStorage:ChilledWater:Stratified ,
Chilled Water Storage Tank 1 , !- Name
4.0 , !- Tank Volume
2.0 , !- Tank Height
1.24. GROUP – WATER HEATERS AND THERMAL STORAGE 1017

VerticalCylinder , !- Tank Shape

, !- Tank Perimeter
CW -Tank -Temp -Schedule , !- Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name
3.5 , !- Deadband Temperature Difference
1.4 , !- Temperature Sensor Height
1.0 , !- Minimum Temperature Limit
2500, !- Nominal Cooling Capacity
Zone , !- Ambient Temperature Indicator
, !- Ambient Temperature Schedule Name
ZN_1_FLR_1_SEC_5 , !- Ambient Temperature Zone Name
, !- Ambient Temperature OutdoorAir:Node Name
4.2, !- Uniform Skin Loss Coefficient Per Unit Area To Ambient
Temperature
CW Tank Discharge Inlet node , !- Use Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Discharge Outlet node , !- Use Side Outlet Node Name
1.0, !- Use Side Effectiveness
ALWAYS_ON , !- Use Side Availability Schedule Name
1.85 , !- Use Side Inlet Height
0.15 , !- Use Side Outlet Height
autosize , !- Use Side Design Flow Rate
CW Tank Charge Inlet Node , !- Source Side Inlet Node Name
CW Tank Charge Outlet Node , !- Source Side Outlet Node Name
1.0, !- Source Side Effectiveness
TES Charge Schedule , !- Source Side Availability Schedule Name
0.15, !- Source Side Inlet Height
1.85, !- Source Side Outlet Height
autosize , !- Source Side Design Flow Rate
2.0, !- Tank Recovery Time
Seeking , !- Inlet Mode
6, !- Number Of Nodes
0.0; !- Additional Destratification Conductivity

1.24.11.2 Outputs

The following output variables are reported for stratified chilled water thermal storage tanks.

– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]

– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Tank Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate !- HVAC Average [W]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average
[W]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate !- HVAC Average [kg/s]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate !- HVAC Average
[W]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy !- HVAC Sum [J]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Temperature Node <1 - 10> !- HVAC Average [C]
– Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Temperature Node <1 – 10> !- HVAC Average [C]
1018 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.24.11.2.1 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Temperature [C]

The average water tank temperature, i.e., the average of all of the node average temperatures.

1.24.11.2.2 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Final Temperature [C]

The final water tank temperature at the end of the system timestep, i.e., the average of all of the
final node temperatures at the end of the system timestep. If reported at the “Detailed” interval,
this output variable can be used to verify an exact energy balance on the water storage tank.

1.24.11.2.3 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Rate [W]
The average heat exchange rate to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually
positive with surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.

1.24.11.2.4 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Tank Heat Gain Energy [J]
The energy exchange to the storage tank from the surrounding ambient. This is usually positive
with surrounding ambient heating the storage tank.

1.24.11.2.5 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The use side mass flow rate.

1.24.11.2.6 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Inlet Temperature [C]
The inlet temperature on the use side.

1.24.11.2.7 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Outlet Temperature [C]
The outlet temperature on the use side.

1.24.11.2.8 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]
The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.

1.24.11.2.9 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Use Side Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.

1.24.11.2.10 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The source side mass flow rate.

1.24.11.2.11 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the source side.

1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1019

1.24.11.2.12 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Outlet Temperature

[C]
The outlet temperature on the source side.

1.24.11.2.13 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.

1.24.11.2.14 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Source Side Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.

1.24.11.2.15 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Temperature Node 1-10 [C]

The average node temperature.

1.24.11.2.16 Chilled Water Thermal Storage Final Temperature Node 1-10 [C]

The final node temperature at the end of the system timestep.

1.25 Group – Condenser Equipment

1.25.1 Equipment Types
In each CondenserEquipmentList, various equipment types and names must be given. Each type-
name pair must then have a corresponding equipment definition. This subsection lists the various
equipment types that are available and examples from an IDF. Where appropriate, notes and com-
ments on the input structure are provided.

1.25.2 CoolingTower:SingleSpeed
Cooling towers are components that may be assigned to condenser loops. The cooling tower is mod-
eled as a counterflow heat exchanger with a single-speed fan (induced draft configuration) based
on Merkel’s theory. The user must define tower performance via one of two methods: design heat
transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal tower capacity at a
specific rating point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the design airflow rate and correspond-
ing fan power must be specified. The model will also account for tower performance in the “free
convection” regime, when the tower fan is off but the water pump remains on and heat transfer still
occurs (albeit at a low level). If the user wants the model to account for “free convection”, they
must specify the corresponding airflow rate and heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA), or the
nominal tower capacity during this mode of operation.
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or
below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temper-
ature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks to
1020 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

determine the impact of “free convection”, if specified by the user, on the tower exiting water tem-
perature. If the exiting water temperature based on “free convection” is at or below the set point,
then the tower fan is not turned on. If the exiting water temperature based on “free convection” is
below the set point, the tower will operate in FluidBypass mode – portion of the water goes through
the tower media and gets cooled while the remaining water flow gets bypassed, two water flows
then mix together trying to meet the water setpoint temperature. If the exiting water temperature
remains above the set point after “free convection” is modeled, then the tower fan is turned on to
reduce the exiting water temperature to the set point. If the capacity control is FanCycling, the
model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between two
steady-state regimes (i.e., tower fan on for the entire simulation timestep and tower fan off for the
entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken into account. If the capacity control is
FluidBypass, the model determines the fraction of water flow to be bypassed while the remaining
water goes through the tower cooling media and gets cooled, then the two water flows mix to meet
the setpoint temperature. In this case, the fan runs at full speed for the entire timestep.
Cooling towers here are “wet” and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The
model can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. The last six input fields are optional and
provide methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The user can specify
connections to the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a water storage tanks
(i.e. WaterUse:Storage objects).
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate
based on the cell control method – between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum
water flow rate fraction per cell, and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow
rate fraction per cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating
to help meet the loads. Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:

– Design Water Flow Rate; Design Air Flow Rate; Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
– Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime; Nominal Capacity; Free Convection Capacity
– BASIN HEATER (we assume that there is a common basin)

1.25.2.1 Inputs

1.25.2.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower.

1.25.2.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water inlet node.

1.25.2.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water outlet node.

1.25.2.1.4 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the tower in m3 /s. This value is the
flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the tower (not the flow rate of water being
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1021

sprayed on the outside of the heat exchange coil). If the input field “Performance Input Method” is
specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a water flow rate greater than zero
must be defined or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and
the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and
the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing
sections). If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must
be left blank since the model automatically assumes a water flow rate of 5.382E-8 m3/s per watt (3
gpm/ton) of tower capacity specified in the field “Nominal Capacity”.

1.25.2.1.5 Field: Design Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design air flow rate induced by the tower fan in m3 /s. A value greater
than zero must be defined regardless of the tower performance input method. Alternately, this field
can be autosized. If autosized, the design air flow rate is calculated as follows:

0.5ρair (F an power at Design Air F low Rate)

Design Air F low Rate = (1.93)
190.
where a fan pressure rise of 190 Pascals and total fan efficiency of 0.5 are assumed.

1.25.2.1.6 Field: Design Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in watts) at the design air flow rate specified in the
previous field. A value greater than zero must be specified regardless of the tower performance input
method, or this field can be autosized. If autosized, the fan power is calculated as follows:
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then

F an power = 0.0105 · ρwater · Cp,water · Design W ater F low Rate · Design Loop∆T (1.94)

is used.
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then

F an power = 0.0105 · T ower N ominal Capacity (1.95)

is used.

1.25.2.1.7 Field: Design U-Factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin cor-
responding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Performance
Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA value
greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be autosized. If
autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the design tower UA value is derived from the
design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input
for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections), assuming a tower water inlet temper-
ature of 35C and tower inlet air at 35C drybulb/25.6C wetbulb. If “Performance Input Method”
is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be left blank since the model automatically
calculates the tower UA based on the tower capacity specified in the field “Nominal Capacity”.
1022 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.2.1.8 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the air flow rate (m3 /s) when the tower is in the “free convection”
regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value
specified for the field “Design Air Flow Rate”. This field may be autocalculated, in which case
it is set to a fraction of the “Design Air Flow Rate” determined in the following input field. If
the user does not wish to model “free convection” and is using the Performance Input Method
“UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then this field should be set to 0.0. If the user
specifies the U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate or Free Convection
Capacity as a value greater than zero, then the free convection air flow rate must be specified greater
than 0.0.

1.25.2.1.9 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime air
flow rate. The default is 0.1.

1.25.2.1.10 Field: Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (W/K) when the tower is in the
“free convection” regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than
the value specified for the field “U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate”. This field may
be autosized, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow
Rate” determined in the following input field. If the user does not wish to model “free convection”
and is using the Performance Input Method “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then
this field should be set to 0.0. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”,
then this field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on
the tower capacity specified in the field “Free Convection Capacity”.\

1.25.2.1.11 Field: Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime
U-Factor times area value. The default is 0.1.

1.25.2.1.12 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify tower performance:
“UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “NominalCapacity”. If this
field is left blank in the input data file, the default input method is assumed to be
“UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”. If the method “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWate
is selected, then the user must enter design UA values, design water flow rates and air flow rates as
described for the previous input fields. If the method “NominalCapacity” is selected then the fields
“Design Water Flow Rate”, “U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate” and “U-Factor
Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate” must be left blank, but the fields “Nominal
Capacity” and “Free Convection Capacity” must be entered as described below.

1.25.2.1.13 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio

This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1023

at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at
1.25 based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every
what of heat removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.

1.25.2.1.14 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in
watts, with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F)
wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8
m3 /s per watt of nominal capacity (3 gpm/ton). The value in the previous field times this nominal
tower capacity gives the actual tower heat rejection at these operating conditions (based on historical
assumption that the tower must dissipate additional heat from the compressor heat for heat removed
at the evaporator).

1.25.2.1.15 Field: Free Convection Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in watts
when the tower is in the “free convection” regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off),
with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb
and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s
per watt of nominal tower capacity (input field above). The heat rejection capacity and nominal
capacity sizing ratio is applied tof this free convection tower capacity to give the actual tower heat
rejection at these operating conditions (typical value is 1.25 based on historical assumption that the
tower must dissipate 0.25W of compressor heat for every watt of heat removed by the evaporator).
The value specified for this field must be less than the value specified for the field “Tower Nominal
Capacity”. If the user does not wish to model “free convection”, then this field should be set to 0.0.
If the user specifies a value greater than zero, then the “Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime”
field must contain a value greater than zero. This field can be automatically calculated using the
sizing factor in the following field.

1.25.2.1.16 Field: Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Free Convection Capacity.
The default is 0.1.

1.25.2.1.17 Field: Design Inlet Air Dry-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design inlet air dry-bulb temperature of the tower. The default is
35.0 ◦C.

1.25.2.1.18 Field: Design Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design inlet air wet-bulb temperature of the tower. The default is
25.6 ◦C.

1.25.2.1.19 Field: Design Approach Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design approach temperature of the tower corresponding to the design
inlet air wet-bulb temperature and the design temperature range. The approach temperature should
be the outlet water temperature minus the inlet air wet-bulb temperature at design conditions. This
parameter is autosizable and when autosized it is set to 3.9 ◦C.
1024 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.2.1.20 Field: Design Temperature Range

This numeric field specifies the design temperature range of the tower corresponding to the design
inlet air wet-bulb temperature and the design approach temperature. The design range should be the
inlet water temperature minus the outlet water temperature at design conditions. This parameter
is autosizable and when autosized it is set to 5.5 ◦C.

1.25.2.1.21 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the tower’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in
the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference
between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin
heater only operates when the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless
of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or
equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.25.2.1.22 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (°C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below
this setpoint temperature, as long as the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower.
This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default value is 2˚C if
this field is left blank.

1.25.2.1.23 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. The basin heater operating
schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the
schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor
air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this
field is left blank, the basin heater is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of
this schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the cooling tower fan is off and water is not
flowing through the tower.

1.25.2.1.24 Field: Evaporation Loss Mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by the
cooling tower. There are two options: LossFactor or SaturatedExit. The default is SaturatedExit.
The user-defined loss factor is entered in the following field. By assuming that the air leaving the
tower is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using moist air engineering calculations
with data available within the cooling tower model (and does not require additional user input).

1.25.2.1.25 Field: Evaporation Loss Factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the cooling tower and lost to the outside
air [percent/K]. This field is only used if the Evaporation Calculation Mode is set to LossFactor.
The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and
varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here is in units of
percent-per-degree Kelvin. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin of
temperature drop in the condenser water. Typical values are from 0.15 to 0.27 [percent/K]. The
default is 0.2.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1025

1.25.2.1.26 Field: Drift Loss Percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets [%]. The drift
loss is a percent of the condenser water flow. Typical values for towers with efficient drift eliminators
are between 0.002 and 0.2% of the condenser water flow rate. The default value is 0.008%.

1.25.2.1.27 Field: Blowdown Calculation Mode

This field specifies which method is used to determine blowdown rates. There two options Con-
centrationRatio or ScheduledRate. The choice will determine which of the two models below is
used. The default is ConcentrationRatio.

1.25.2.1.28 Field: Blowdown Concentration Ratio

This field is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blowdown in the cooling tower as a function of
the rate of evaporation. Blowdown is water intentionally drained from the tower in order to offset
the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because of evaporation. The value
entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blowdown water
to solids in the make up water. Typical values for tower operation are 3 to 5. The default value is 3.

1.25.2.1.29 Field: Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule used to define the amount of water (m3 /s)
flushed from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the tower of mineral scale build-up and other
contaminants. This schedule is only used if the Blowdown Calculation Mode is set to ScheduledRate.
The amount of water use due to blowdown depends on the makeup water quality and is specific to
each geographical location. Typical values range from 0.0002 to 0.0013 m3 /s (17.3 to 112.3 m3 /day).
This water usage is in addition to the amount of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation
and/or drift. Since blowdown occurs when the basin water contaminant concentration is high,
blowdown only occurs when the cooling tower is active and water is flowing through the tower
(regardless of the water usage defined by this schedule).

1.25.2.1.30 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the tower obtains water used for evaporative
cooling. If blank or omitted, then the tower will obtain water directly from the mains. If the name
of a WaterUse:Storage object is used here, then the tower will obtain its water from that tank. If a
tank is specified, the tower will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from the tank. However if
the tank cannot provide all the water the tower needs, then the tower will still operate and obtain
the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’ water).

1.25.2.1.31 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the cooling tower. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the cooling
tower are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.
1026 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.2.1.32 Field:Capacity Control

This alpha field contains the cooling capacity control for the cooling tower. Two choices are available:
FanCycling and FluidBypass. During part-load conditions, there are two ways to maintain the
exiting water temperature at the setpoint: either cycling the tower fan, or bypassing portion of the
tower water with a three-way valve. For FluidBypass, the tower fan still runs at full speed for the
entire timestep, but only portion of the water flow goes through the cooling tower media to get
cooled while the remaining portion of the water flow gets bypassed. Two water flows then mix at
the common water sump to meet the setpoint temperature.

1.25.2.1.33 Field: Number of Cells

This integer field contains the number of cells in the multi-cell cooling tower. If not entered, the
program will assume it is a single-cell cooling tower

1.25.2.1.34 Field: Cell Control

This alpha field specifies the method used to control the number of cells used to meet the load, the
two choices are:
MinimalCell : the program will use minimal number of cells needed, all other cells will be shut
down with no water flow. It will attempt to use as few cells as possible to cool the fluid. In no case,
however, will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Maximum
Water Flow Rate Fraction.
MaximalCell: As many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow
per cell be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Minimum Water Flow Rate
Fraction.

1.25.2.1.35 Field: Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable smallest fraction of the design water flow rate. Flows less
than this value will commonly result in fluid distribution problems; the pressure at each nozzle will
be too weak for the fluid to be sprayed out in the correct pattern, not all the fill would be wet. If
this field is left blank, the default value is 0.33.

1.25.2.1.36 Field: Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable largest fraction of the design water flow rate. If this field
is left blank, the default value is 2.5.

1.25.2.1.37 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user
to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
For this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are:
1. Design Water Flow Rate;
2. Design Air Flow Rate;
3. Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1027

4. U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate;

5. Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime;
6. U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate.
Note that the U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate is not multiplied by the Sizing
Factor. Instead the design tower load is multiplied by the sizing factor and the design UA then
calculated as usual. The U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate is set to 10%
of the new design Tower UA.

1.25.2.1.38 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the cooling tower will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
Three examples of an IDF specification for this object are shown below:

CoolingTower:SingleSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
.0011 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
16.0, !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
10000. , !- Design Fan Power {W}
3500. , !- Design U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.0, !- Free Convection Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Free Convection Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
0.0, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
, !- Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Free Convection Capacity {W}
, !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
, !- Design Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Approach Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Design Range Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
, !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor {percent/K}
, !- Drift Loss Percent {percent}
, !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
, !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
, !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
FluidBypass , !- Capacity Control
4, !- Number of Cells
MinimalCell , !- Cell Control
, !- Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction
, !- Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.0000; !- Sizing Factor

CoolingTower:SingleSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node ,!- Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1028 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Autosize , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}

1000. , !- Design Fan Power {W}
, !- Design U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Free Convection Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
95250. , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
9525.; !- Free Convection Capacity {W}

CoolingTower:SingleSpeed ,
TowerWaterSys CoolTower , !- Name
TowerWaterSys Pump -TowerWaterSys CoolTowerNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
TowerWaterSys Supply Equipment Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Fan Power {W}
AUTOSIZE , !- Design U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Free Convection Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
, !- Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Free Convection Capacity {W}
, !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
, !- Design Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Approach Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Design Range Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor {percent/K}
0.0080 , !- Drift Loss Percent {percent}
ConcentrationRatio , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
3.0000 , !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
TowerWaterSys CoolTower OA ref Node , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
FanCycling , !- Capacity Control
4, !- Number of Cells
MinimalCell , !- Cell Control
, !- Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction
, !- Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.0000; !- Sizing Factor

OutdoorAir:Node ,
TowerWaterSys CoolTower OA ref Node; !- Name

1.25.2.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1029

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Bypass Fraction []

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Cycling Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []

A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

When storage tank water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

IF specified:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

1.25.2.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.2.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower fans. Consumption is metered on HeatRe-
jection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.2.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the tower.
1030 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.2.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.2.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

1.25.2.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the tower water inlet and outlet temperatures, and mass flow rate of the circulating
condenser water loop.

1.25.2.2.7 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.2.2.8 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower basin heater. Consumption is metered on
HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility

1.25.2.2.9 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.2.2.10 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the water consumed by the wet cooling tower for external water sprays used to
augment heat transfer. This is the total of evaporation, drift, and blowdown.

1.25.2.2.11 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.2.2.12 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]

1.25.2.2.13 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.2.2.14 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]

1.25.2.2.15 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.2.2.16 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

These outputs provide the breakdown of the different components of water use during cooling tower
operation.

1.25.2.2.17 Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the volume of water drawn from mains service to feed the cooling tower.
If a water storage tank is used to provide water to the tower, then the following output variables
will also be available.

1.25.2.2.18 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1031

1.25.2.2.19 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water provided by the Water Storage Tank.

1.25.2.2.20 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.25.2.2.21 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water the Storage Tank connections was not able to provide. The
starved water is assumed to come from the mains. The tower’s operation is not affected by a lack of
storage tank water.

1.25.2.2.22 Cooling Tower Fan Cycling Ratio []

This represents the fraction of a time-step when tower fan is on.

1.25.2.2.23 Cooling Tower Bypass Fraction []

This represents the fraction of a fluid bypassing the tower when a mixture of the tower fluid and
tower return water is able to meet the set point temperature.

1.25.2.2.24 Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []

This represents the number of cells operating at each time step.

1.25.3 CoolingTower:TwoSpeed
The two-speed cooling tower is modeled in a similar fashion to the single-speed tower. The cooling
tower is modeled as a counterflow heat exchanger with a two-speed fan (induced draft configuration)
based on Merkel’s theory. The user must define tower performance via one of two methods: heat
transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal tower capacity at a
specific rating point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the airflow rate and corresponding fan
power at both high and low fan speed must be specified. The model will also account for tower
performance in the “free convection” regime, when the tower fan is off but the water pump remains
on and heat transfer still occurs (albeit at a low level). If the user wants the model to account for
“free convection”, they must specify the corresponding air flow rate and heat transfer coefficient-area
product (UA), or the nominal tower capacity during this mode of operation.
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or
below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temper-
ature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks
to determine the impact of “free convection”, if specified by the user, on the tower exiting water
temperature. If the exiting water temperature based on “free convection” is at or below the set
point, then the tower fan is not turned on. If the exiting water temperature remains above the set
point after “free convection” is modeled, then the tower fan is turned on at low speed to reduce the
exiting water temperature. If operating the tower fan at low speed does not reduce the exiting water
temperature to the set point, then the tower fan is increased to its high speed.
The model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between
two steady-state regimes (i.e., tower fan at high speed for the entire simulation timestep and tower fan
1032 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

at low speed for the entire simulation timestep, or tower fan at low speed for the entire simulation
timestep and tower fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken into
account.
Cooling towers here are “wet” and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The
model can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. The last six input fields are optional and
provide methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The user can specifiy
connections to the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a WaterUse:Storage
object.
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate
based on the cell control method – between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum
water flow rate fraction per cell, and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow
rate fraction per cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating
to help meet the loads. Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:

– Design Water Flow Rate; Design Air Flow Rate; Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
– Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime; Nominal Capacity; Free Convection Capacity
– BASIN HEATER (we assume that there is a common basin)

1.25.3.1 Inputs

1.25.3.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower.

1.25.3.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water inlet node.

1.25.3.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water outlet node.

1.25.3.1.4 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the tower in m3 /s. This value is the
flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the tower (not the flow rate of water being
sprayed on the outside of the heat exchange coil). If the input field “Performance Input Method” is
specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a water flow rate greater than zero
must be defined or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and
the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and
the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing
sections). If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must
be left blank since the model automatically assumes a design water flow rate of 5.382E-8 m3/s per
watt (3 gpm/ton) of tower capacity specified in the field “Tower High-Speed Nominal Capacity”.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1033

1.25.3.1.5 Field: High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the tower air flow rate at high fan speed in m3 /s. A value greater than
zero must be defined regardless of the tower performance input method. Alternately, this field can
be autosized. If autosized, the design air flow rate is calculated as follows:

0.5ρair (F an P ower at High F an Speed )

Air F low Rate at High F an Speed = (1.96)
190.

where a fan pressure rise of 190 Pascals and total fan efficiency of 0.5 are assumed.
Field: High Fan Speed Fan Power
This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the high-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. A value greater than zero must be specified regardless of the tower performance input
method, or this field can be autosized. If autosized, the fan power is calculated as follows:
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then

F an powerHigh F an Speed = 0.0105 · ρwater · Cp,water · Design W ater F low Rate · Design Loop∆T
(1.97)
is used.
If“Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then

F an powerHigh F an Speed = 0.0105 · T ower High − Speed N ominal Capacity (1.98)

is used.

1.25.3.1.6 Field: High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per degree Celsius
corresponding to the high-speed air flow rate and design water flow rate specified above. If the input
field “Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”,
then a UA value greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field
can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the tower UA value at
high fan speed is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design
loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections),
assuming a tower water inlet temperature of 35C and tower inlet air at 35C drybulb/25.6C wetbulb.
If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be left blank
since the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on the capacity specified in the field
“High-Speed Nominal Capacity”.

1.25.3.1.7 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the tower air flow rate at low fan speed in m3 /s. This value must be
greater than zero, less than the value specified for the field “Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed”,
and greater than the value specified for the field “Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime”. This
field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “Air Flow Rate at High Fan
Speed” determined in the next field.
1034 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.3.1.8 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the low fan speed air flow
rate. The default is 0.5.

1.25.3.1.9 Field: Low Fan Speed Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the low-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. This value must be specified greater than zero or the field may be autocalculated, in
which case it is set to a fraction of the “Fan Power at High Fan Speed” determined in the next field.

1.25.3.1.10 Field: Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the low speed fan power. The
default is 0.16.

1.25.3.1.11 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per degree Cel-
sius corresponding to the design water flow rate and low-speed air flow rate specified above. If
the input field “Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWater-
FlowRate”, this value must be greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000, less than the
value specified for the field “U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed”, and greater than the
value specified for the field “U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate”. This
field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “U-Factor Times Area Value
at High Fan Speed” determined in the following field. If “Performance Input Method” is specified
as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates
the tower UA based on the tower capacity specified in the field “Low Speed Nominal Capacity”.

1.25.3.1.12 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the low speed heat transfer
coefficient-area product (UA). The default is 0.6.

1.25.3.1.13 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the air flow rate (m3 /s) when the tower is in the “free convection” regime
(water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value specified for
the field “Air Flow Rate at Low Fan Speed”. This field may be autocalculated, in which case it
is set to a fraction of the “Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed” determined in the following field.
If the user does not wish to model “free convection” and is using the Performance Input Method
“UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then this field should be set to 0.0. If the user
specifies the U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate or Free Convection
Capacity as a value greater than zero, then the free convection air flow rate must be specified greater
than 0.0.

1.25.3.1.14 Field: Free Convection Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime air
flow rate. The default is 0.1.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1035

1.25.3.1.15 Field: Free ConvectionU-Factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (W/°C) when the tower is in
the “free convection” regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less
than the value specified for the field “U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed”. This field may
be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “U-Factor Times Area Value at High
Fan Speed” determined in the following field. If the user does not wish to model “free convection”
and is using the Performance Input Method “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then
this field should be set to 0.0. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”,
then this field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on
the tower capacity specified in the field “Free Convection Capacity”.

1.25.3.1.16 Field: Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime
U-Factor times area value. The default is 0.1.

1.25.3.1.17 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify tower performance: “UFactor-
TimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “NominalCapacity”. If this field is left blank in the input
data file, the default input method is assumed to be “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”.
If the method “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” is selected, then the user must enter
UA values, design water flow rate and air flow rates as described for the previous input fields. If
the method “NominalCapacity” is selected then the fields “Design Water Flow Rate”, “U-Factor
Times Area Value at High Fan Speed”, “U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed” and “U-
Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate” must be left blank, but the fields “High
Speed Nominal Capacity”, “Low Speed Nominal Capacity” and “Free Convection Capacity” must
be entered as described below.

1.25.3.1.18 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio

This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air
at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at
1.25 based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every
what of heat removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.

1.25.3.1.19 Field: High Speed Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in watts
under high-speed fan operation, with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F),
entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow
rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s per watt of high-speed nominal capacity (3 gpm/ton). The
Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio set in the previous field is applied to
this nominal tower capacity to give the actual tower heat rejection at these operating.
1036 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.3.1.20 Field: Low Speed Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in watts
under low-speed fan operation, with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F),
entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow
rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s per watt of high-speed nominal tower capacity (input field
above). The Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio is applied to this nominal
tower capacity to give the actual tower heat rejection at these operating conditions. The value
specified for this field must be greater than zero but less than the value specified for the field “High-
Speed Nominal Capacity”. This field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of
the High Speed Nominal Capacity determined in the following field.

1.25.3.1.21 Field: Low Speed Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Speed Nominal Capacity.
The default is 0.5.

1.25.3.1.22 Field: Free Convection Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in watts
when the tower is in the “free convection” regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off), with
entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and
35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s per
watt of high-speed nominal tower capacity (input field above). The Heat Rejection Capacity and
Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio is applied to this free convection tower capacity to give the actual
tower heat rejection at these operating conditions.The value specified for this field must be less than
the value specified for the field “Tower Low-Speed Nominal Capacity”. If the user does not wish to
model “free convection”, then this field should be set to 0.0. If the user specifies a value greater
than zero, then the “Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime” field must contain a value greater
than zero. This field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the High Speed
Nominal Capacity determined in the following field.

1.25.3.1.23 Field: Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Free Convection Capacity.
The default is 0.1.

1.25.3.1.24 Field: Design Inlet Air Dry-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design inlet air dry-bulb temperature of the tower. The default is
35.0 ◦C.

1.25.3.1.25 Field: Design Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design inlet air wet-bulb temperature of the tower. The default is
25.6 ◦C.

1.25.3.1.26 Field: Design Approach Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design approach temperature of the tower corresponding to the design
inlet air wet-bulb temperature and the design temperature range. The approach temperature should
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1037

be the outlet water temperature minus the inlet air wet-bulb temperature at design conditions. This
parameter is autosizable and when autosized it is set to 3.9 ◦C.

1.25.3.1.27 Field: Design Temperature Range

This numeric field specifies the design temperature range of the tower corresponding to the design
inlet air wet-bulb temperature and the design approach temperature. The design range should be the
inlet water temperature minus the outlet water temperature at design conditions. This parameter
is autosizable and when autosized it is set to 5.5 ◦C.

1.25.3.1.28 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the tower’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in
the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference
between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin
heater only operates when the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless
of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or
equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.25.3.1.29 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below
this setpoint temperature, as long as the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower.
This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default value is 2˚C if
this field is left blank.

1.25.3.1.30 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. The basin heater operating
schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the
schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor
air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this
field is left blank, the basin heater is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of
this schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the cooling tower fan is off and water is not
flowing through the tower.

1.25.3.1.31 Field: Evaporation Loss Mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by the
cooling tower. There are two options: ‘LossFactor’ or ‘SaturatedExit’. The default is SaturatedExit.
The user-defined loss factor is entered in the following field. By assuming that the air leaving the
tower is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using moist air engineering calculations
with data available within the cooling tower model (and does not require additional user input).

1.25.3.1.32 Field: Evaporation Loss Factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the cooling tower and lost to the outside
air [percent/K]. This field is only used if the Evaporation Calculation Mode is set to LossFactor.
1038 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and
varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here is in units of
percent-per-degree Kelvin. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin of
temperature drop in the condenser water. Typical values are from 0.15 to 0.27 [percent/K]. The
default is 0.2.

1.25.3.1.33 Field: Drift Loss Percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets [%]. The drift
loss is a percent of the condenser water flow. Typical values for towers with efficient drift eliminators
are between 0.002 and 0.2% of the condenser water flow rate. The default value is 0.008%.

1.25.3.1.34 Field: Blowdown Calculation Mode

This field specifies which method is used to determine blowdown rates. There two options Concen-
trationRatio or ScheduledRate. The choice will determine which of the two models below is used.
The default is ConcentrationRatio

1.25.3.1.35 Field: Blowdown Concentration Ratio

This field is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blowdown in the cooling tower as a function of
the rate of evaporation. Blowdown is water intentionally drained from the tower in order to offset
the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because of evaporation. The value
entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blowdown water
to solids in the make up water. Typical values for tower operation are 3 to 5. The default value is 3.

1.25.3.1.36 Field: Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule used to define the amount of water (m3 /s)
flushed from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the tower of mineral scale build-up and other
contaminants. This schedule is only used if the Blowdown Calculation mode is set to ScheduledRate.
The amount of water use due to blowdown depends on the makeup water quality and is specific to
each geographical location. Typical values range from 0.0002 to 0.0013 m3 /s (17.3 to 112.3 m3 /day).
This water usage is in addition to the amount of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation
and/or drift. Since blowdown occurs when the basin water contaminant concentration is high,
blowdown only occurs when the cooling tower is active and water is flowing through the tower
(regardless of the water usage defined by this schedule).

1.25.3.1.37 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the tower obtains water used for evaporative
cooling. If blank or omitted, then the tower will obtain water directly from the mains. If the name
of a WaterUse:Storage object is used here, then the tower will obtain its water from that tank. If a
tank is specified, the tower will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from the tank. However if
the tank cannot provide all the water the tower needs, then the tower will still operate and obtain
the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’ water).
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1039

1.25.3.1.38 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the cooling tower. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the cooling
tower are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.

1.25.3.1.39 Field: Number of Cells

This integer field contains the number of cells in the multi-cell cooling tower. If not entered, the
program will assume it is a single-cell cooling tower

1.25.3.1.40 Field: Cell Control

This alpha field specifies the method used to control the number of cells used to meet the load, the
two choices are:
MinimalCell: the program will use minimal number of cells needed, all other cells will be shut
down with no water flow. It will attempt to use as few cells as possible to cool the fluid. In no case,
however, will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Maximum
Water Flow Rate Fraction.
MaximalCell: As many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow
per cell be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Minimum Water Flow Rate
Fraction.

1.25.3.1.41 Field: Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable smallest fraction of the design water flow rate. Flows less
than this value will commonly result in fluid distribution problems; the pressure at each nozzle will
be too weak for the fluid to be sprayed out in the correct pattern, not all the fill would be wet. If
this field is left blank, the default value is 0.33.

1.25.3.1.42 Field: Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable largest fraction of the design water flow rate. If this field
is left blank, the default value is 2.5.

1.25.3.1.43 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user
to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.For
this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are:
1. Design Water Flow Rate;
2. Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed;
3. Fan Power at High Fan Speed;
1040 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

4. U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed;

5. Air Flow Rate at Low Fan Speed;
6. Fan Power at Low Fan Speed;
7. U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed;
8. Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime;
9. U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate.
Note that the U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed is not multiplied by the Sizing Factor.
Instead the design tower load is multiplied by the sizing factor and the design UA then calculated as
usual. The U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed is set to a fraction of the full load design
UA determined by the field Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor. The U-Factor Times
Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate is set to a fraction of the design Tower UA determined
by the field Free Convection Air U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor.

1.25.3.1.44 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the cooling tower will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
Four examples of an IDF specification for this object are shown below:

CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
.0011 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
16.0, !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
10000. , !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
3500. , !- High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
8.0, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
1600. , !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor
2100. , !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
1.6, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
350., !- Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate ; !- Performance Input Method

CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
My Tower , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
8.0, !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
500, !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
, !- High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
4.0, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
125, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
0.8, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1041

, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor

, !- Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
20000.0 , !- High Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
10000.0 , !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
2000.0 , !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity {W}
; !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor

CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
Big Tower1 , !- Name
Condenser Tower Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
8.0, !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
500, !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
, !- High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
4.0, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
125, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
0.8, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
, !- Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
20000.0 , !- High Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
10000.0 , !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
2000.0 , !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity {W}
; !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
, !- Design Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Approach Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Design Range Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor {percent/K}
0.0080 , !- Drift Loss Percent {percent}
ConcentrationRatio , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
3.0000 , !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name
Recovery Tank; !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name

CoolingTower:TwoSpeed ,
TowerWaterSys CoolTower , !- Name
TowerWaterSys Pump -TowerWaterSys CoolTowerNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
TowerWaterSys Supply Equipment Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
AUTOSIZE , !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
AUTOSIZE , !- High Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
autocalculate , !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
1042 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor

UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
, !- High Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
, !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity {W}
, !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
, !- Design Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Approach Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Design Range Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor {percent/K}
0.0080 , !- Drift Loss Percent {percent}
ConcentrationRatio , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
3.0000 , !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
TowerWaterSys CoolTower OA ref Node , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
4, !- Number of Cells
MinimalCell , !- Cell Control
, !- Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction
, !- Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.0000; !- Sizing Factor

1.25.3.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Cycling Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Speed Level []
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Bypass Fraction []

A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

When storage tank water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1043

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

IF specified:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

1.25.3.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.3.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower fans. Consumption is metered on HeatRe-
jection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.3.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the tower.

1.25.3.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.3.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

1.25.3.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the tower water inlet and outlet temperatures, and mass flow rate.

1.25.3.2.7 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.3.2.8 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower basin heater. Consumption is metered on
HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility
1044 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.3.2.9 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.3.2.10 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the water consumed by the wet cooling tower for external water sprays used to
augment heat transfer. This is the total of evaporation, drift, and blowdown.

1.25.3.2.11 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.3.2.12 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]

1.25.3.2.13 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.3.2.14 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]

1.25.3.2.15 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.3.2.16 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

These outputs provide the breakdown of the different components of water use during cooling tower
operation.

1.25.3.2.17 Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the volume of water drawn from mains service to feed the cooling tower. If a water storage
tank is used to provide water to the tower, then the following output variables will also be available.

1.25.3.2.18 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.3.2.19 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water provided by the Water Storage Tank.

1.25.3.2.20 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.25.3.2.21 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water the Storage Tank connections was not able to provide. The
starved water is assumed to come from the mains. The tower’s operation is not affected by a lack of
storage tank water.

1.25.3.2.22 Cooling Tower Fan Cycling Ratio []

This represents the fraction of a time-step when tower fan is on. The fan can cycle at both speeds.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1045

1.25.3.2.23 Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []

This represents the number of cells operating at each time step.

1.25.3.2.24 Cooling Tower Fan Speed Level []

This represents the fan speed operating at each time step: 2 for High Speed, 1 for Low Speed, and
0 when the fan is OFF.

1.25.4 CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel
This variable speed tower model is based on Merkel’s theory and is similar to the single-speed and
two-speed tower models. The open wet cooling tower is modeled as a counter flow heat exchanger
with a variable-speed fan drawing air through the tower (induced-draft configuration). The model
also includes a “free convection” regime where cooling tower performance is modeled with the fan
off.
For this model, Merkel’s theory is modified to include adjustments developed by Scheier to alter the
heat transfer effectiveness based on current wetbulb, air flow rates, and water flow rates. The input
requires performance curves or lookup tables to describe these three adjustment factors.
For a multi-cell tower, the capacity and air/water flow rate inputs are for the entire tower.

1.25.4.1 Inputs

1.25.4.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower.

1.25.4.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water inlet node.

1.25.4.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water outlet node.

1.25.4.1.4 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify tower performance:
“UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “NominalCapacity”. If this field is left
blank in the input data file, the default input method is assumed to be “NominalCapacity”. If the
method “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” is selected, then the user must enter design
UA values, design water flow rates and air flow rates as described for the previous input fields. If the
method “NominalCapacity” is selected then the fields “Design Water Flow Rate”, “U-Factor Times
Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate” and “U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air
Flow Rate” must be left blank, but the fields “Nominal Capacity” and “Free Convection Capacity”
must be entered as described below.
1046 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.4.1.5 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air
at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at
1.25 based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every
what of heat removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.

1.25.4.1.6 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in watts
under full-speed fan operation, with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F),
entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The Heat Rejection
Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio set in the previous field is applied to this nominal
tower capacity to give the actual tower heat rejection at these operating conditions. This field can
be autosized, in which case a Sizing:Plant object is needed for the condenser loop.

1.25.4.1.7 Field: Free Convection Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower in watts
when the tower is in the “free convection” regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off),
with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb
and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing
Ratio is applied to this free convection tower capacity to give the actual tower heat rejection at these
operating conditions.The value specified for this field must be less than the value specified for the
field “Tower Low-Speed Nominal Capacity”. If the user does not wish to model “free convection”,
then this field should be set to 0.0. If the user specifies a value greater than zero, then the “Air Flow
Rate in Free Convection Regime” field must contain a value greater than zero. This field may be
autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the High Speed Nominal Capacity determined
in the following field.

1.25.4.1.8 Field: Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Free Convection Capacity.
The default is 0.1.

1.25.4.1.9 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the tower in m3 /s. This value is the
flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the tower. If the input field “Performance
Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a water flow rate
greater than zero must be defined or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Sizing:Plant object
must be defined and the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by
the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and
Component Autosizing sections). If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”,
then this field can be autocalculated using the sizing factor in the following field.

1.25.4.1.10 Field: Design Water Flow Rate per Unit of Nominal Capacity
This numeric field contains a scalable sizing factor for design water flow rate that scales with nominal
capacity, in units of m3 /s/W. The default value is 5.382*10−8 . This field is only used if the previous
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1047

field is set to autocalculate and performance input method is NominalCapacity. (If the performance
input method is set to UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate then the design water flow rate
is obtained from the plant sizing result.)

1.25.4.1.11 Field: Design Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the tower air flow rate at full fan speed, in m3 /s. The value can be
autocalculated, in which case the air flow rate is based off of the scalable sizing factor in the following
input field.

1.25.4.1.12 Field: Design Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Nominal Capacity
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the design air flow rate from the
nominal capacity, in units of m3 /s/W. The default is 2.76316*10−5 . When this field is left blank,
then the default value is used but the flow rate is also scaled to account for elevation (with larger
volume flow rates at higher altitudes). When a hard value is entered, even if it is the same as the
default, then the design air flow rate is not also adjusted for elevation and the scaling factor is used
directly.

1.25.4.1.13 Field: Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum air flow rate ratio. The tower fan is allowed to operate
between the ratio defined here and a maximum air flow rate ratio of 1.0 (which corresponds to the
design [maximum] tower air flow rate). Below this value the tower is assumed to operate in the “free
convection” regime with the tower fan off. The minimum air flow rate ratio must be greater than or
equal to 0.1 and less than or equal to 0.5, with a default value of 0.2 if the field is left blank.

1.25.4.1.14 Field: Design Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power in watts at the design (maximum) air flow rate through
the tower. A value greater than zero must be specified or this field can be autocalculated. When
the field is autocalculated the following input field is used to size the fan power based on nominal
capacity.

1.25.4.1.15 Field: Design Fan Power Per Unit of Nominal Capacity

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the design fan power from
the nominal capacity, in units of Watts per Watt. This field is only used if the previous is set to
autocalculate. The default values is 0.0105.

1.25.4.1.16 Field: Fan Power Modifier Function of Air Flow Rate Ratio Curve
Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes fan power ratio (fan
power/design fan power) as a function of air flow rate ratio (air flow rate/design air flow rate).
The curve or table object must be for one independent variable, typically a cubic, and should be
normalized to 1.0 at an air flow rate ratio of 1.0. This field is required.
1048 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.4.1.17 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the air flow rate (m3 /s) when the tower is in the “free convection”
regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value
specified for the field “Design Air Flow Rate”. This field may be autocalculated, in which case
it is set to a fraction of the “Design Air Flow Rate” determined in the following input field. If
the user does not wish to model “free convection” and is using the Performance Input Method
“UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then this field should be set to 0.0. If the user
specifies the U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow Rate or Free Convection
Capacity as a value greater than zero, then the free convection air flow rate must be specified greater
than 0.0.

1.25.4.1.18 Field: Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime air
flow rate. The default is 0.1.

1.25.4.1.19 Field: Design Air Flow Rate U-Factor Times Area Value
This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin cor-
responding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Performance
Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA value
greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be autosized. If
autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the design tower UA value is derived from the
design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input
for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections), assuming a tower water inlet temper-
ature of 35C and tower inlet air at 35C drybulb/25.6C wetbulb. If “Performance Input Method”
is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be left blank since the model automatically
calculates the tower UA based on the tower capacity specified in the field “Nominal Capacity”.

1.25.4.1.20 Field: Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (W/K) when the tower is in the
“free convection” regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than
the value specified for the field “U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate”. This field may
be autosized, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow
Rate” determined in the following input field. If the user does not wish to model “free convection”
and is using the Performance Input Method “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then
this field should be set to 0.0. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”,
then this field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates the tower UA based on
the tower capacity specified in the field “Free Convection Capacity”.

1.25.4.1.21 Field: Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the free convection regime U-
Factor times area value. The default is 0.1. This field is only used if the previous field is set to
autocalculate and the performance input method is UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1049

1.25.4.1.22 Field: U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Air Flow Ratio
Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes how the UA value varies
as a function of air flow rate ratio (air flow rate/design air flow rate). The result of this curve is
multiplied by the design UA value to adjust for air flow rate, along with the two other modifiers
discussed below. The curve or table object must be for one independent variable and should be
normalized to 1.0 at an air flow rate ratio of 1.0. This field is required.

1.25.4.1.23 Field: U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Wetbulb Temper-

ature Difference Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes how the UA value varies
as a function of the current wetbulb temperature. The result of this curve is multiplied by the
design UA value to adjust for wetbulb temperatures that differ from design conditions at 25.56°C
(78°F), along with the two other modifiers discussed in the previous and following fields. The
independe variable is the design wetbulb minus the current outdoor air wetbulb, in units of degrees
Celsius. The curve or table object must be for one independent variable and should be normalized
to 1.0 at a wetbulb temperature difference of 0.0. This field is required.

1.25.4.1.24 Field: U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Water Flow Ratio
Curve Name
This alpha field contains the name of a curve or table object that describes how the UA value varies
as a function of the current water flow rate ratio (water flow rate/design water flow rate). The result
of this curve is multiplied by the design UA value to adjust for water flow rates that differ from
design level, along with the other two modifiers discussed above. The curve or table object must be
for one independent variable and should be normalized to 1.0 at a water flow ratio of 1.0. This field
is required

1.25.4.1.25 Field: Design Inlet Air Dry-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design inlet air dry-bulb temperature of the tower. The default is
35.0 ◦C.

1.25.4.1.26 Field: Design Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design inlet air wet-bulb temperature of the tower. The default is
25.6 ◦C.

1.25.4.1.27 Field: Design Approach Temperature

This numeric field specifies the design approach temperature of the tower corresponding to the design
inlet air wet-bulb temperature and the design temperature range. The approach temperature should
be the outlet water temperature minus the inlet air wet-bulb temperature at design conditions. This
parameter is autosizable and when autosized it is set to 3.9 ◦C.

1.25.4.1.28 Field: Design Temperature Range

This numeric field specifies the design temperature range of the tower corresponding to the design
inlet air wet-bulb temperature and the design approach temperature. The design range should be the
1050 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

inlet water temperature minus the outlet water temperature at design conditions. This parameter
is autosizable and when autosized it is set to 5.5 ◦C.

1.25.4.1.29 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the tower’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in
the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference
between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin
heater only operates when the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless
of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or
equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.25.4.1.30 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below
this setpoint temperature, as long as the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower.
This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default value is 2˚C if
this field is left blank.

1.25.4.1.31 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. The basin heater operating
schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the
schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor
air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this
field is left blank, the basin heater is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of
this schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the cooling tower fan is off and water is not
flowing through the tower.

1.25.4.1.32 Field: Evaporation Loss Mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by the
cooling tower. There are two options: LossFactor or SaturatedExit. The default is SaturatedExit.
The user-defined loss factor is entered in the following field. By assuming that the air leaving the
tower is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using moist air engineering calculations
with data available within the cooling tower model (and does not require additional user input).

1.25.4.1.33 Field: Evaporation Loss Factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the cooling tower and lost to the outside
air [percent/K]. This field is only used if the Evaporation Calculation Mode is set to LossFactor.
The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and
varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here is in units of
percent-per-degree Kelvin. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin of
temperature drop in the condenser water. Typical values are from 0.15 to 0.27 [percent/K]. The
default is 0.2.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1051

1.25.4.1.34 Field: Drift Loss Percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets [%]. The drift
loss is a percent of the condenser water flow. Typical values for towers with efficient drift eliminators
are between 0.002 and 0.2% of the condenser water flow rate. The default value is 0.008%.

1.25.4.1.35 Field: Blowdown Calculation Mode

This field specifies which method is used to determine blowdown rates. There two options Con-
centrationRatio or ScheduledRate. The choice will determine which of the two models below is
used. The default is ConcentrationRatio.

1.25.4.1.36 Field: Blowdown Concentration Ratio

This field is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blowdown in the cooling tower as a function of
the rate of evaporation. Blowdown is water intentionally drained from the tower in order to offset
the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because of evaporation. The value
entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blowdown water
to solids in the make up water. Typical values for tower operation are 3 to 5. The default value is 3.

1.25.4.1.37 Field: Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule used to define the amount of water (m3 /s)
flushed from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the tower of mineral scale build-up and other
contaminants. This schedule is only used if the Blowdown Calculation Mode is set to ScheduledRate.
The amount of water use due to blowdown depends on the makeup water quality and is specific to
each geographical location. Typical values range from 0.0002 to 0.0013 m3 /s (17.3 to 112.3 m3 /day).
This water usage is in addition to the amount of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation
and/or drift. Since blowdown occurs when the basin water contaminant concentration is high,
blowdown only occurs when the cooling tower is active and water is flowing through the tower
(regardless of the water usage defined by this schedule).

1.25.4.1.38 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the tower obtains water used for evaporative
cooling. If blank or omitted, then the tower will obtain water directly from the mains. If the name
of a WaterUse:Storage object is used here, then the tower will obtain its water from that tank. If a
tank is specified, the tower will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from the tank. However if
the tank cannot provide all the water the tower needs, then the tower will still operate and obtain
the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’ water).

1.25.4.1.39 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the cooling tower. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the cooling
tower are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.
1052 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.4.1.40 Field: Number of Cells

This integer field contains the number of cells in the multi-cell cooling tower. If not entered, the
program will assume it is a single-cell cooling tower

1.25.4.1.41 Field: Cell Control

This alpha field specifies the method used to control the number of cells used to meet the load, the
two choices are:
MinimalCell : the program will use minimal number of cells needed, all other cells will be shut
down with no water flow. It will attempt to use as few cells as possible to cool the fluid. In no case,
however, will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Maximum
Water Flow Rate Fraction.
MaximalCell: As many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow
per cell be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Minimum Water Flow Rate
Fraction.

1.25.4.1.42 Field: Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable smallest fraction of the design water flow rate. Flows less
than this value will commonly result in fluid distribution problems; the pressure at each nozzle will
be too weak for the fluid to be sprayed out in the correct pattern, not all the fill would be wet. If
this field is left blank, the default value is 0.33.

1.25.4.1.43 Field: Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable largest fraction of the design water flow rate. If this field
is left blank, the default value is 2.5.

1.25.4.1.44 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user
to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.

1.25.4.1.45 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the cooling tower will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example IDF specification follows.

CoolingTower:VariableSpeed:Merkel ,
Big Tower1 , !- Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
1.25, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
20000.0 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1053

autocalculate , !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity {W}

0.1, !- Free Convection Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
autocalculate , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
5.382E-8, !- Design Water Flow Rate per Unit of Nominal Capacity {m3/s-W}
autocalculate , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
2.76316E-5, !- Design Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Nominal Capacity {m3/s-W}
0.2, !- Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio
autocalculate , !- Design Fan Power {W}
0.0105 , !- Design Fan Power Per Unit of Nominal Capacity {dimensionless}
VS tower fan power mod func air flow ratio , !- Fan Power Modifier Function of Air Flow Rate
Ratio Curve Name
autocalculate , !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.1, !- Free Convection Regime Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
, !- Design Air Flow Rate U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection Regime U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Free Convection U-Factor Times Area Value Sizing Factor
VS tower UA mod func air flow ratio , !- U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Air Flow
Ratio Curve Name
VS tower UA mod func wetbulb difference , !- U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Wetbulb
Temperature Difference Curve Name
VS tower UA mod func water flow ratio , !- U-Factor Times Area Modifier Function of Water Flow
Ratio Curve Name
, !- Design Inlet Air Dry -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
, !- Design Approach Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Design Range Temperature {deltaC}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature {C}
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
, !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor {percent/K}
, !- Drift Loss Percent {percent}
, !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
, !- Blowdown Concentration Ratio
, !- Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
, !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
, !- Number of Cells
, !- Cell Control
, !- Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction
, !- Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.0; !- Sizing Factor

Curve:Cubic ,
VS tower fan power mod func air flow ratio , !- Name
0.02 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.0 , !- Coefficient2 x
0.0 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.98 , !- Coefficient4 x**3
0.2, !- Minimum Value of x
1.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.0 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.0 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Quadratic ,
VS tower UA mod func air flow ratio , !- Name
0.0 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.3 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.3 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.2 , !- Minimum Value of x
1.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.0 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.0 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type
1054 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Curve:Linear ,
VS tower UA mod func wetbulb difference , !- Name
1.0 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.0081 , !- Coefficient2 x
-10 , !- Minimum Value of x
25.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.85 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.3 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Quadratic ,
VS tower UA mod func water flow ratio , !- Name
0.1082 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.667 , !- Coefficient2 x
-0.7713 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.3 , !- Minimum Value of x
1.0 , !- Maximum Value of x
0.5 , !- Minimum Curve Output
1.1 , !- Maximum Curve Output
Dimensionless , !- Input Unit Type for X
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

1.25.4.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Speed Ratio []

A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

When storage tank water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1055

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

IF specified:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

1.25.4.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.4.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower fans. Consumption is metered on HeatRe-
jection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.4.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the tower.

1.25.4.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.4.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

1.25.4.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the tower water inlet and outlet temperatures, and mass flow rate.

1.25.4.2.7 Cooling Tower Fan Speed Ratio

This output is the air flow ratio. The current air flow rate divided by the design air flow rate with
values from 0.0 to 1.0.

1.25.4.2.8 Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []

This represents the number of cells operating at each time step.

1.25.4.2.9 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.4.2.10 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower basin heater. Consumption is metered on
HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility
1056 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.4.2.11 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.4.2.12 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the water consumed by the wet cooling tower for external water sprays used to
augment heat transfer. This is the total of evaporation, drift, and blowdown.

1.25.4.2.13 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.4.2.14 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]

1.25.4.2.15 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.4.2.16 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]

1.25.4.2.17 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.4.2.18 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

These outputs provide the breakdown of the different components of water use during cooling tower
operation.

1.25.4.2.19 Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the volume of water drawn from mains service to feed the cooling tower. If a water storage
tank is used to provide water to the tower, then the following output variables will also be available.

1.25.4.2.20 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.4.2.21 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water provided by the Water Storage Tank.

1.25.4.2.22 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.25.4.2.23 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water the Storage Tank connections was not able to provide. The
starved water is assumed to come from the mains. The tower’s operation is not affected by a lack of
storage tank water.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1057

1.25.5 CoolingTower:VariableSpeed
The variable speed tower model is based on empirical curve fits of manufacturer’s performance data
or field measurements. The user specifies tower performance at design conditions, and empirical
curves are used to determine the approach temperature and fan power at off-design conditions. The
user defines tower performance by entering the inlet air wet-bulb temperature, tower range, and
tower approach temperature at the design conditions. The corresponding water flow rate (within
±25% of the tower’s rated water mass flow rate), air flow rate, and fan power must also be specified.
The model will account for tower performance in the “free convection” regime, when the tower fan is
off but the water pump remains on and heat transfer still occurs (albeit at a low level). Basin heater
operation and makeup water usage (due to evaporation, drift, and blowdown) are also modeled.
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or
below) a set point. The set point schedule is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature
Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model first checks to deter-
mine the impact of “free convection” on the tower exiting water temperature. If the exiting water
temperature based on “free convection” is at or below the set point, then the variable-speed tower
fan is not turned on. If the exiting water temperature is above the set point after “free convection”
is modeled, then the variable-speed tower fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature.
Tower fan power is calculated based on the tower air flow rate required to achieve the exiting water
set point temperature.
Cooling towers here are “wet” and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The
model can be used to predict water consumed by the towers. The last six input fields are optional and
provide methods of controlling details of the water consumption calculations. The user can specifiy
connections to the rest of the buildings water system by providing the name of a WaterUse:Storage
object.
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate
based on the cell control method – between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum
water flow rate fraction per cell, and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow
rate fraction per cell. If the calculated cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating
to help meet the loads. Inside each cell, the existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:

– Design Water Flow Rate; Design Air Flow Rate; Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
– Air Flow Rate in Free Convection Regime; Nominal Capacity; Free Convection Capacity
– BASIN HEATER (we assume that there is a common basin)

1.25.5.1 Inputs

1.25.5.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the variable speed cooling tower.

1.25.5.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water inlet node.

1.25.5.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the cooling tower’s water outlet node.
1058 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.5.1.4 Field: Model Type

This alpha field contains the type of empirical model used to simulate the tower’s thermal perfor-
mance (approach temperature). Valid choices for this field are “CoolToolsCrossFlow”, “CoolTool-
sUserDefined”, “YorkCalc”, or “YorkCalcUserDefined”. “CoolToolsCrossFlow” and “YorkCalc” are
empirical models with the equation form and model coefficients already defined within Energy-
Plus. If “CoolToolsUserDefined” or “YorkCalcUserDefined” is selected, the user must specify a
valid Model Coefficient Name in the next input field to reference an appropriate CoolingTowerPer-
formance:CoolTools or CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc object. If a user-defined model type is
selected and the specified Model Coefficient Name is not found in the input data file (idf), then a
severe message is issued and the simulation will terminate.

1.25.5.1.5 Field: Model Coefficient Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the object(s) CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools
or CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc. A single model coefficient object may be used to define
coefficients for multiple variable speed cooling tower objects (i.e., the same name may be used in
this input field for more than one variable speed tower). This field is only used when the field
Tower Model Type described above is set to “CoolToolsUserDefined” or “YorkCalcUserDefined”,
and should be left blank otherwise.

1.25.5.1.6 Field: Design Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field specifies the inlet air wet-bulb temperature (˚C) at design conditions. This design
temperature should correspond with the design values for range temperature, approach temperature,
water flow rate, and air flow rate specified in the following fields. The minimum value for this field
is 20˚C and the default value is 25.6˚C if this field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.7 Field: Design Approach Temperature

This numeric field specifies the tower approach temperature (˚C) at design conditions. The approach
temperature is the outlet water temperature minus the inlet air wet-bulb temperature. The design
approach temperature should correspond with the design values for inlet air wet-bulb temperature,
range temperature, water flow rate, and air flow rate specified for this tower. The value for this field
must be greater than 0˚C and the default value is 3.9˚C if this field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.8 Field: Design Range Temperature

This numeric field specifies the range temperature (˚C) at design conditions. The range temperature
is defined as the inlet water temperature minus the outlet water temperature. The design range
temperature should correspond with the design values for inlet air wet-bulb temperature, approach
temperature, water flow rate, and air flow rate specified for this tower. The value for this field must
be greater than 0˚C and the default value is 5.6˚C if this field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.9 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the tower in m3 /s. The value entered
should be within ±25% of the tower’s rated water mass flow rate as specified by the manufacturer
if Model Type is “CoolToolsCrossFlow” or “YorkCalc”. This constraint may be different for Model
Type “CoolToolsUserDefined” or “YorkCalcUserDefined” (ref. CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools
or CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc).
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1059

This value is the flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the tower. A value greater
than zero must be specified or this field can be autosized. A Plant Sizing object must be defined if
the field is autosized and the design water flow rate is then derived from the design load to be rejected
by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations
and Component Autosizing sections). The design water flow rate should correspond with the design
values specified for the inlet air wet-bulb temperature, approach temperature, range temperature,
and air flow rate. When this field is not autosized, the condenser loop flow rate specified in other
objects should be within ±25% of the tower’s rated water flow rate (different range is permissible if
Model Type is “User Defined”).

1.25.5.1.10 Field: Design Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design (maximum) air flow rate through the tower in m3 /s. A value
greater than zero must be specified or this field can be autosized. Autosizing of this field does not
require a Plant Sizing object since the design air flow rate is assumed to be the design fan power
multiplied by a total fan efficiency of 0.5 and divided by a fan pressure rise of 190 Pascals. A
correction for altitude is also included as follows:

 
0.5(F an power at Design Air F low Rate) 101325.
Design Air F low Rate = (1.99)
190. Patm

1.25.5.1.11 Field: Design Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power in watts at the design (maximum) air flow rate through
the tower. A value greater than zero must be specified or this field can be autosized. If autosized, a
Plant Sizing object must be defined and the fan power is calculated as follows:

Design f an power = 0.0105 · ρwater · Cp,water · Design W ater F low Rate · Design Loop∆T (1.100)

1.25.5.1.12 Field: Fan Power Ratio Function of Air Flow Rate Ratio Curve Name

This alpha field contains the curve object name for fan power ratio (fan power/design fan power)
as a function of air flow rate ratio (air flow rate/design air flow rate) [ref. Performance Curves].
The curve object must be a cubic curve and should be normalized to 1.0 at an air flow rate ratio of
1.0. If this field is left blank, a theoretical fan curve is assumed where fan power ratio is directly
proportional to the air flow rate ratio cubed.

1.25.5.1.13 Field: Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum air flow rate ratio. The tower fan is allowed to operate
between the ratio defined here and a maximum air flow rate ratio of 1.0 (which corresponds to the
design [maximum] tower air flow rate). Below this value, the tower is assumed to operate either in
the “free convection” regime with the tower fan off, or the tower fan is cycled on/off to maintain the
exiting water set point temperature. The minimum air flow rate ratio must be greater than or equal
to 0.2 and less than or equal to 0.5, with a default value of 0.2 if the field is left blank.
1060 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.5.1.14 Field: Fraction of Tower Capacity in Free Convection Regime

This numeric field contains the fraction of tower capacity available in the free convection regime (i.e.,
when the tower fan is off but water continues to flow through the tower). The tower fan does not
operate when the free convection tower capacity is able to meet or exceed the exiting water set point
temperature. The air flow rate through the tower in the free convection regime is assumed to be
this same fraction of the tower design air flow rate. The fraction of tower capacity in free convection
regime must be greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to 0.2, with a default value of 0.125
if this field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.15 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the tower’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in
the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference
between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin
heater only operates when the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless
of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or
equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.16 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below
this setpoint temperature, as long as the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower.
This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the default value is 2˚C if
this field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.17 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. The basin heater operating
schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the
schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor
air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this
field is left blank, the basin heater is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of
this schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the cooling tower fan is off and water is not
flowing through the tower.

1.25.5.1.18 Field: Evaporation Loss Mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by the
cooling tower. There are two options: ‘LossFactor’ or ‘SaturatedExit’. The default is SaturatedExit.
The user-defined loss factor is entered in the following field. By assuming that the air leaving the
tower is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using moist air engineering calculations
with data available within the cooling tower model (and does not require additional user input).

1.25.5.1.19 Field: Evaporation Loss Factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the cooling tower and lost to the outside
air [percent/K]. This field is only used if the Evaporation Calculation Mode is set to LossFactor.
The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1061

varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here is in units of
percent-per-degree Kelvin. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin of
temperature drop in the condenser water. Typical values are from 0.15 to 0.27 [percent/K]. The
default is 0.2.

1.25.5.1.20 Field: Drift Loss Percent

This numeric field contains the percent (%) of design water flow rate lost to the atmosphere at the
design air flow rate due to drift, which is water droplets that are entrained in the airstream as it
passes through the tower. Drift is assumed to vary directly with tower air flow rate ratio, and is
in addition to the amount of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation and/or blowdown.
Typical values for water usage due to drift are from 0.05 to 0.2% of the total water circulation rate
with currently-available drift eliminators from tower manufacturers. The value entered in this field
must be greater than or equal to zero, and the default is zero if the field is left blank.

1.25.5.1.21 Field: Blowdown Calculation Mode

This field specifies which method is used to determine blowdown rates. There two options ‘Concen-
trationRatio’ or ‘ScheduledRate’. The choice will determine which of the two models below is used.
The default is ConcentrationRatio.

1.25.5.1.22 Field: Blowdown Concentration Ratio

This field is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blowdown in the cooling tower as a function of
the rate of evaporation. Blowdown is water intentionally drained from the tower in order to offset
the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because of evaporation. The value
entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blowdown water
to solids in the make up water. Typical values for tower operation are 3 to 5. The default value is 3.

1.25.5.1.23 Field: Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule used to define the amount of water (m3 /s) flushed
from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the condenser loop of mineral scale build-up and other
contaminants. The amount of water use due to blowdown depends on the makeup water quality and
is specific to each geographical location. Typical values range from 0.0002 to 0.0013 m3 /s (17.3 to
112.3 m3 /day). This water usage is in addition to the amount of water lost to the atmosphere due to
evaporation and/or drift. Since blowdown occurs when the basin water contaminant concentration
is high, blowdown only occurs when the cooling tower is active and water is flowing through the
tower (regardless of the water usage defined by this schedule).

1.25.5.1.24 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the tower obtains water used for evaporative
cooling. If blank or omitted, then the tower will obtain water directly from the mains. If the name
of a WaterUser:Storage object is used here, then the tower will obtain its water from that tank. If
a tank is specified, the tower will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from the tank. However if
the tank cannot provide all the water the tower needs, then the tower will still operate and obtain
the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’ water).
1062 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.5.1.25 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the cooling tower. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the cooling
tower are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.

1.25.5.1.26 Field: Number of Cells

This integer field contains the number of cells in the multi-cell cooling tower. If not entered, the
program will assume it is a single-cell cooling tower

1.25.5.1.27 Field: Cell Control

This alpha field specifies the method used to control the number of cells used to meet the load, the
two choices are:
MinimalCell: the program will use minimal number of cells needed, all other cells will be shut
down with no water flow. It will attempt to use as few cells as possible to cool the fluid. In no case,
however, will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Maximum
Water Flow Rate Fraction.
MaximalCel : As many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow
per cell be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Minimum Water Flow Rate
Fraction.

1.25.5.1.28 Field: Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable smallest fraction of the design water flow rate. Flows less
than this value will commonly result in fluid distribution problems; the pressure at each nozzle will
be too weak for the fluid to be sprayed out in the correct pattern, not all the fill would be wet. If
this field is left blank, the default value is 0.33.

1.25.5.1.29 Field: Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable largest fraction of the design water flow rate. If this field
is left blank, the default value is 2.5.

1.25.5.1.30 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user
to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.For
this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are:
1. Design Water Flow Rate;
2. Design Air Flow Rate;
3. Design Fan Power.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1063

1.25.5.1.31 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This optional field allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., “Process”. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter objects). Any text
may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses by Subcategory
table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance table. If this
field is omitted or blank, the cooling tower will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
An example IDF specification for this object is shown below:

CoolingTower:VariableSpeed ,
Big Tower1 , !- Tower Name
Condenser 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
YorkCalc , !- Tower Model Type
, !- Tower Model Coefficient Name
25.5556 , !- Design Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
3.8889 , !- Design Approach Temperature {C}
5.5556 , !- Design Range Temperature {C}
0.0015 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.6435 , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
275, !- Design Fan Power {W}
FanRatioCurve , !- Fan Power Ratio - function of Air Flow Rate Curve Name
0.2, !- Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio
0.125 , !- Fraction of Tower Capacity in Free Convection Regime
450.0 , !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
4.5, !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature {C}
BasinSchedule , !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
SaturatedExit , !- Evaporation Loss Mode
, !- Evaporation Loss Factor
0.05, !- Makeup Water Usage due to Drift {percent}
ScheduledRate , !- Blowdown Calculation Mode
BlowDownSchedule , !- Schedule Name for Makeup Water Usage due to Blowdown
, !- Name of Water Storage Tank for Supply
, !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
4, !- Number of Cells
MinimalCell , !- Cell Control
, !- Cell Minimum Water Flow Rate Fraction
, !- Cell Maximum Water Flow Rate Fraction
1.000 ; !- Sizing Factor

1.25.5.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Part Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Air Flow Rate Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count

A tower uses either mains water or storage tank for make-up water.
When mains water is used:
1064 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

When storage tank water is used:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

IF specified:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

1.25.5.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.5.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower fan. Consumption is metered on HeatRe-
jection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.5.2.3 Cooling Tower Fan Part Load Ratio []

This is the on/off cycling rate of the tower fan when free convection cannot meet the set point
temperature and the tower capacity at the minimum air flow rate ratio drives the tower exiting water
temperature below the set point temperature. The fan part-load ratio is calculated as the ratio of
the exiting water temperature in the free convection regime minus the exiting water temperature
set point divided by the exiting water temperature in the free convection regime minus the exiting
water temperature at the minimum air flow rate ratio. If tower air flow is at or above the minimum
air flow rate ratio, then the tower fan part-load ratio is 1.0.

1.25.5.2.4 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the tower.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1065

1.25.5.2.5 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.5.2.6 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

1.25.5.2.7 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

These outputs are the tower water inlet and outlet temperatures, and mass flow rate of the circulating
condenser water loop.

1.25.5.2.8 Cooling Tower Air Flow Rate Ratio []

This is the ratio of air flow through the tower to the design air flow rate. During times when the
tower can maintain the condenser loop set point temperature using free convection (when the fan in
not operating), the air flow rate ratio is assumed to be equal to the field Fraction of Tower Capacity
in Free Convection Regime. During times when the fan cycles on/off to maintain the outlet water
set point temperature, the air flow rate ratio is calculated as the summation of Fan Part-Load Ratio
multiplied by the Minimum Air Flow Rate Ratio and (1.0 - Fan Part-Load Ratio) multiplied by the
fraction of Tower Capacity in Free Convection Regime.

1.25.5.2.9 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

1.25.5.2.10 Cooling Tower Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the tower basin heater. Consumption is metered on
HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.5.2.11 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.5.2.12 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the water consumed by the wet cooling tower for external water sprays used to
augment heat transfer. This is the total of evaporation, drift, and blowdown.

1.25.5.2.13 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.5.2.14 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]

1.25.5.2.15 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.5.2.16 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]

1.25.5.2.17 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.5.2.18 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

These outputs provide the breakdown of the different components of water use during cooling tower
operation.
1066 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.5.2.19 Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

This is the volume of water drawn from mains service to feed the cooling tower. If a water storage
tank is used to provide water to the tower, then the following output variables will also be available.

1.25.5.2.20 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.5.2.21 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water provided by the Water Storage Tank.

1.25.5.2.22 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.25.5.2.23 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water the Storage Tank connections was not able to provide. The
starved water is assumed to come from the mains. The tower’s operation is not affected by a lack of
storage tank water.

1.25.5.2.24 Cooling Tower Operating Cells Count []

This represents the number of cells operating at each time step.

1.25.6 CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools
Variable speed cooling towers can be modeled by EnergyPlus with user-selectable performance
based on the CoolTools correlation, YorkCalc correlation, or user-defined coefficients for either the
CoolTools or YorkCalc correlations.The empirical CoolTools tower correlation uses a set of 35 co-
efficients to model the thermal performance (approach temperature) of a cooling tower based on
four independent variables. If the user specifies Model Type = CoolToolsCrossFlow in the Cooling-
Tower:VariableSpeed object, then the 35 coefficients derived for the CoolTools simulation model are
used and these coefficients are already defined within EnergyPlus. If the user specifies Model Type
= CoolToolsUserDefined, then the user must enter a CoolingTowerPerformance:CoolTools object to
define the 35 coefficients that will be used by the CoolTools correlation.
The user must specify a name for the model coefficient object, and this name must be used in
the CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object (field Model Coefficient Name) to tell the program to use
these coefficients. Next, the user enters the minimum and maximum values for inlet air wet-bulb
temperature, range temperature, approach temperature, and water mass flow rate ratio to specify
the valid range for which the model coefficients were derived. For all of these variables, the program
issues warnings if the actual values are beyond the minimum/maximum values specified. For inlet
air wet-bulb temperature and water mass flow rate ratio, the values of these variables used in the
calculation of approach temperature are limited to be within the valid minimum/maximum range
specified. For approach and range, the warnings are issued if the values are beyond the specified
minimum/maximum range but the actual values are still used.
The CoolTools correlation has four independent variables: inlet air wet-bulb temperature (Twb),
tower range temperature (Tr), water flow rate ratio (FRwater), and air flow rate ratio (FRair).
Temperatures are in units of ˚C and flow rate ratios are dimensionless (actual flow rate divided by
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1067

design flow rate). Using these independent variables, tower approach temperature (˚C) is calculated
as follows:
Approach = Coeff(1) + Coeff(2)•FRair + Coeff(3)•(FRair)2 +
Coeff(4)•(FRair)3 + Coeff(5)•FRwater +
Coeff(6)•FRair•FRwater + Coeff(7)•(FRair)2 •FRwater +
Coeff(8)•(FRwater)2 + Coeff(9)•FRair•(FRwater)2 +
Coeff(10)•(FRwater)3 + Coeff(11)•Twb + Coeff(12)•FRair•Twb +
Coeff(13)•(FRair)2 •Twb + Coeff(14)•FRwater•Twb +
Coeff(15)•FRair•FRwater•Twb + Coeff(16)•(FRwater)2 •Twb +
Coeff(17)•(Twb)2 + Coeff(18)•FRair•(Twb)2 +
Coeff(19)•FRwater•(Twb)2 + Coeff(20)•(Twb)3 + Coeff(21)•Tr +
Coeff(22)•FRair•Tr + Coeff(23)•FRair•FRair•Tr +
Coeff(24)•FRwater•Tr + Coeff(25)•FRair•FRwater•Tr +
Coeff(26)•(FRwater)2 •Tr + Coeff(27)•Twb•Tr +
Coeff(28)•FRair•Twb•Tr + Coeff(29)•FRwater•Twb•Tr +
Coeff(30)•(Twb)2 •Tr + Coeff(31)•(Tr)2 + Coeff(32)•FRair•(Tr)2 +
Coeff(33)•FRwater•(Tr)2 + Coeff(34)•Twb•(Tr)2 + Coeff(35)•(Tr)3
This object allows the user to specify model coefficients for use with the CoolTools correlation shown
above. It is recommended that a broad set of cooling tower performance data be used to generate
these model coefficients. The data set used to create the model coefficients should cover the entire
range of water and air flow rate ratios and inlet air wet-bulb, range, and approach temperatures
expected during the simulation.

1.25.6.1 Inputs

1.25.6.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the variable speed cooling tower model coefficients.

1.25.6.1.2 Field: Minimum Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum inlet air wet-bulb temperature to be used by the model
(approach temperature correlation). Inlet air wet-bulb temperatures less than this value will not
be used; instead, the minimum inlet air wet-bulb temperature specified here will be used by the
correlation and a warning will be issued.

1.25.6.1.3 Field: Maximum Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum inlet air wet-bulb temperature to be used by the model
(approach temperature correlation). Inlet air wet-bulb temperatures greater than this value will not
be used; instead, the maximum inlet air wet-bulb temperature specified here will be used by the
correlation and a warning will be issued.
1068 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.6.1.4 Field: Minimum Range Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum range temperature (inlet water temperature minus outlet
water temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the range temperature is less than this
value the actual range temperature is still passed to the empirical model but a warning will be issued.

1.25.6.1.5 Field: Maximum Range Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum range temperature (inlet water temperature minus outlet
water temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the range temperature is greater than
this value the actual range temperature is still passed to the empirical model but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.6.1.6 Field: Minimum Approach Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum approach temperature (outlet water temperature minus
inlet air wet-bulb temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the calculated approach
temperature is less than this value then the calculated value is still used but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.6.1.7 Field: Maximum Approach Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum approach temperature (outlet water temperature minus
inlet air wet-bulb temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the calculated approach
temperature is greater than this value then the calculated value is still used but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.6.1.8 Field: Minimum Water Flow Rate Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum water flow rate ratio (ratio of actual water flow rate to
rated water flow rate) to be used by the empirical model. Water flow rate ratios less than this value
will not be used; instead, the minimum water flow rate ratio specified here will be used by the model
and a warning will be issued.

1.25.6.1.9 Field: Maximum Water Flow Rate Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum water flow rate ratio (ratio of actual water flow rate to
rated water flow rate) to be used by the empirical model. Water flow rate ratios greater than this
value will not be used; instead, the maximum water flow rate ratio specified here will be used by the
model and a warning will be issued.

1.25.6.1.10 Field: Coefficient 1 to 35

These numeric fields contain the coefficients to be used by the CoolTools approach temperature
correlation shown above.
An example IDF specification for this object is shown below:

CoolingTowerPerformance :CoolTools ,
CoolTools CrossFlow Default Model , !- Tower Model Coefficient Name
-1.0, !- Minimum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
26.6667 , !- Maximum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Range Temperature {C}
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1069

11.1111 , !- Maximum Range Temperature {C}

1.1111 , !- Minimum Approach Temperature {C}
11.1111 , !- Maximum Approach Temperature {C}
0.75, !- Minimum Water Flow Rate Ratio
1.25, !- Maximum Water Flow Rate Ratio
0.52049709836241 , !- Coefficient 1
-10.617046395344 , !- Coefficient 2
10.7292974722538 , !- Coefficient 3
-2.74988377158227 , !- Coefficient 4
4.73629943913743 , !- Coefficient 5
-8.25759700874711 , !- Coefficient 6
1.57640938114136 , !- Coefficient 7
6.51119643791324 , !- Coefficient 8
1.50433525206692 , !- Coefficient 9
-3.2888529287801 , !- Coefficient 10
0.0257786145353773 , !- Coefficient 11
0.182464289315254 , !- Coefficient 12
-0.0818947291400898 , !- Coefficient 13
-0.215010003996285 , !- Coefficient 14
0.0186741309635284 , !- Coefficient 15
0.0536824177590012 , !- Coefficient 16
-0.00270968955115031 , !- Coefficient 17
0.00112277498589279 , !- Coefficient 18
-0.00127758497497718 , !- Coefficient 19
0.0000760420796601607 , !- Coefficient 20
1.43600088336017 , !- Coefficient 21
-0.5198695909109 , !- Coefficient 22
0.117339576910507 , !- Coefficient 23
1.50492810819924 , !- Coefficient 24
-0.135898905926974 , !- Coefficient 25
-0.152577581866506 , !- Coefficient 26
-0.0533843828114562 , !- Coefficient 27
0.00493294869565511 , !- Coefficient 28
-0.00796260394174197 , !- Coefficient 29
0.000222619828621544 , !- Coefficient 30
-0.0543952001568055 , !- Coefficient 31
0.00474266879161693 , !- Coefficient 32
-0.0185854671815598 , !- Coefficient 33
0.00115667701293848 , !- Coefficient 34
0.000807370664460284; !- Coefficient 35

1.25.6.2 Outputs

No additional cooling tower output variables are output when this object is used.

1.25.7 CoolingTowerPerformance:YorkCalc
Variable speed cooling towers can be modeled by EnergyPlus with user-selectable performance
based on the CoolTools correlation, YorkCalc correlation, or user-defined coefficients for either the
CoolTools or YorkCalc correlations.The empirical YorkCalc tower correlation uses a set of 27 co-
efficients to model the thermal performance (approach temperature) of a variable speed cooling
tower based on three independent variables. If the user specifies Tower Model Type = YorkCalc
in the CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object, then the 27 coefficients derived for the YorkCalc sim-
ulation model are used and these coefficients are already defined within EnergyPlus. If the user
specifies Tower Model Type = YorkCalcUserDefined, then the user must enter a CoolingTowerPer-
formance:YorkCalc object to define the 27 coefficients that will be used by the YorkCalc correlation.
The user must specify a name for the model coefficient object, and this name must be used in
the CoolingTower:VariableSpeed object (field Model Coefficient Name) to tell the program to use
these coefficients. Next, the user enters the minimum and maximum values for inlet air wet-bulb
1070 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

temperature, range temperature, approach temperature, and water mass flow rate ratio to specify
the valid range for which the model coefficients were derived. The user also specifies the maximum
valid liquid-to-gas ratio. For all of these variables, the program issues warnings if the actual values
are beyond the minimum/maximum values specified. For inlet air wet-bulb temperature and water
mass flow rate ratio, the values of these variables used in the calculation of approach temperature
are limited to be within the valid minimum/maximum range specified. For approach, range, and
liquid-to-gas ratio the warnings are issued if the values are beyond the specified minimum/maximum
range but the actual values are still used.
The YorkCalc correlation has three independent variables: inlet air wet-bulb temperature (Twb),
tower range temperature (Tr), and the liquid-to-gas ratio (ratio of water flow rate ratio to air flow
rate ratio = LGRatio). Temperatures are in units of ˚C and liquid-to-gas ratio is dimensionless.
Using these independent variables, an approach temperature (˚C) is calculated as follows:
Approach = Coeff(1) + Coeff(2)•Twb + Coeff(3)•Twb2 + Coeff(4)•Tr +
Coeff(5)•Twb•Tr + Coeff(6)•Twb2 •Tr + Coeff(7)•Tr2 +
Coeff(8)•Twb•Tr2 + Coeff(9)•Twb2 •Tr2 + Coeff(10)•LGRatio +
Coeff(11)•Twb•LGRatio + Coeff(12)•Twb2 •LGRatio +
Coeff(13)•Tr•LGRatio + Coeff(14)•Twb•Tr•LGRatio +
Coeff(15)•Twb2 •Tr•LGRatio + Coeff(16)•Tr2 •LGRatio +
Coeff(17)•Twb•Tr2 •LGRatio + Coeff(18)•Twb2 •Tr2 •LGRatio +
Coeff(19)•LGRatio2 + Coeff(20)•Twb•LGRatio2 +
Coeff(21)• Twb2 •LGRatio2 + Coeff(22)•Tr•LGRatio2 +
Coeff(23)•Twb•Tr•LGRatio2 + Coeff(24)•Twb2 •Tr•LGRatio2 +
Coeff(25)•Tr2 •LGRatio2 + Coeff(26)•Twb•Tr2 •LGRatio2 +
Coeff(27)•Twb2 •Tr2 •LGRatio2
This object allows the user to specify model coefficients for use with the YorkCalc correlation shown
above. It is recommended that a broad set of cooling tower performance data be used to generate
these model coefficients. The data set used to create the model coefficients should cover the entire
range of water and air flow rate ratios and inlet air wet-bulb, range, and approach temperatures
expected during the simulation.

1.25.7.1 Inputs

1.25.7.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the variable speed cooling tower model coefficients.

1.25.7.1.2 Field: Minimum Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum inlet air wet-bulb temperature to be used by the model
(approach temperature correlation). Inlet air wet-bulb temperatures less than this value will not
be used; instead, the minimum inlet air wet-bulb temperature specified here will be used by the
correlation and a warning will be issued.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1071

1.25.7.1.3 Field: Maximum Inlet Air Wet-Bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum inlet air wet-bulb temperature to be used by the model
(approach temperature correlation). Inlet air wet-bulb temperatures greater than this value will not
be used; instead, the maximum inlet air wet-bulb temperature specified here will be used by the
model and a warning will be issued.

1.25.7.1.4 Field: Minimum Range Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum range temperature (inlet water temperature minus outlet
water temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the range temperature is less than this
value the actual range temperature is still passed to the empirical model but a warning will be issued.

1.25.7.1.5 Field: Maximum Range Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum range temperature (inlet water temperature minus outlet
water temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the range temperature is greater than
this value the actual range temperature is still passed to the empirical model but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.7.1.6 Field: Minimum Approach Temperature

This numeric field contains the minimum approach temperature (outlet water temperature minus
inlet air wet-bulb temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the calculated approach
temperature is less than this value then the calculated value is still used but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.7.1.7 Field: Maximum Approach Temperature

This numeric field contains the maximum approach temperature (outlet water temperature minus
inlet air wet-bulb temperature) to be used by the empirical model. If the calculated approach
temperature is greater than this value then the calculated value is still used but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.7.1.8 Field: Minimum Water Flow Rate Ratio

This numeric field contains the minimum water flow rate ratio (ratio of actual water flow rate to
rated water flow rate) to be used by the empirical model. Water flow rate ratios less than this value
will not be used; instead, the minimum water flow rate ratio specified here will be used by the model
and a warning will be issued.

1.25.7.1.9 Field: Maximum Water Flow Rate Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum water flow rate ratio (ratio of actual water flow rate to
rated water flow rate) to be used by the empirical model. Water flow rate ratios greater than this
value will not be used; instead, the maximum water flow rate ratio specified here will be used by the
model and a warning will be issued.
1072 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.7.1.10 Field: Maximum Liquid to Gas Ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum liquid-to-gas ratio (ratio of actual water flow rate ratio
[capped to be within the minimum/maximum water flow rate ratio defined above as necessary] to
actual air flow rate ratio) to be used by the empirical model. If the liquid-to-gas ratio is greater than
this value the actual liquid to gas ratio is still passed to the empirical model but a warning will be
issued.

1.25.7.1.11 Field: Coefficient 1 to 27

These numeric fields contain the coefficients to be used by the YorkCalc approach temperature
correlation shown above.

An example IDF specification for this object is shown below:

CoolingTowerPerformance :YorkCalc
YorkCalc Default Tower Model , !- Tower Model Coefficient Name
-34.4, !- Minimum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
26.6667 , !- Maximum Inlet Air Wet -Bulb Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Range Temperature {C}
22.2222 , !- Maximum Range Temperature {C}
1.1111 , !- Minimum Approach Temperature {C}
40.0, !- Maximum Approach Temperature {C}
0.75, !- Minimum Water Flow Rate Ratio
1.25, !- Maximum Water Flow Rate Ratio
8.0, !- Maximum Liquid to Gas Ratio
-0.359741205 , !- Coefficient 1
-0.055053608 , !- Coefficient 2
0.0023850432 , !- Coefficient 3
0.173926877 , !- Coefficient 4
-0.0248473764 , !- Coefficient 5
0.00048430224 , !- Coefficient 6
-0.005589849456 , !- Coefficient 7
0.0005770079712 , !- Coefficient 8
-0.00001342427256 , !- Coefficient 9
2.84765801111111 , !- Coefficient 10
-0.121765149 , !- Coefficient 11
0.0014599242 , !- Coefficient 12
1.680428651 , !- Coefficient 13
-0.0166920786 , !- Coefficient 14
-0.0007190532 , !- Coefficient 15
-0.025485194448 , !- Coefficient 16
0.0000487491696 , !- Coefficient 17
0.00002719234152 , !- Coefficient 18
-0.0653766255555556 , !- Coefficient 19
-0.002278167 , !- Coefficient 20
0.0002500254 , !- Coefficient 21
-0.0910565458 , !- Coefficient 22
0.00318176316 , !- Coefficient 23
0.000038621772 , !- Coefficient 24
-0.0034285382352 , !- Coefficient 25
0.00000856589904 , !- Coefficient 26
-0.000001516821552; !- Coefficient 27

1.25.7.2 Outputs

No additional cooling tower output variables are output when this object is used.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1073

1.25.8 EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Evaporative fluid coolers are components that may be assigned to condenser loops. The Evapora-
tive fluid cooler is modeled as a counter flow heat exchanger with single-speed fans (induced draft
configuration). The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of three methods: design heat
transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or standard fluid cooler design
capacity at a specific rating point or design capacity at non standard conditions. Regardless of which
method is chosen, the design airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be specified.
The evaporative fluid cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the evaporative
fluid cooler at (or below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser
Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model
first checks to see whether inlet water temperature is at or below the set point. If so, then the fluid
cooler fan is not turned on and all the flow goes through bypass. If the inlet water temperature is
above the set point then the fluid cooler fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature
to the set point. If the capacity control is FanCycling, the model assumes that part-load operation
is represented by a simple linear interpolation between two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler
fan on for the entire simulation timestep and fluid cooler fan off for the entire simulation timestep).
Cyclic losses are not taken into account. If the capacity control is FluidBypass, the model determines
the fraction of water flow to be bypassed while the remaining water goes through the fluid cooler
cooling media and gets cooled, then the two water flows mix to meet the setpoint temperature. In
this case, the fan runs at full speed for the entire timestep.
Evaporative fluid coolers consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model can
be used to predict water consumed by the fluid coolers. For this purpose, the last seven input
fields can either be provided in the input or if nothing is specified then the default values for these
fields will be used. These fields provide the methods of controlling details of the water consumption
calculations. The user can specify connections to the rest of the building’s water system by providing
the name of a water storage tanks (i.e. WaterUse:Storage objects). The schematic of the system is
shown below:
Where,

– h = Enthalpy (j/kg-K)
– m = mass flow rate (kg/s)
– Subscripts
– a = air
– w = water
– wb = wet-bulb
– in = inlet
– out = outlet

1.25.8.1 Inputs

1.25.8.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler.

1.25.8.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler’s water inlet node.
1074 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.98: Schematic diagram for evaporative fluid cooler

1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1075

1.25.8.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler’s water outlet node.

1.25.8.1.4 Field: Design Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design air flow rate induced by the fluid cooler fan in m3 /s. The
field must contain a value greater than zero regardless of the fluid cooler performance input method.
Alternately, this field can be autosized. See Engineering Reference document for autosizing calcula-
tions.

1.25.8.1.5 Field: Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in watts) at the design air flow rate specified in the previous
field. The field must contain a value greater than zero regardless of the fluid cooler performance
input method. Alternately, this field can be autosized. See Engineering Reference document for
autosizing calculations.

1.25.8.1.6 Field: Design Spray Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design spray water flow rate through the fluid cooler in m3 /s. A
value greater than zero must be specified regardless of the performance input method,

1.25.8.1.7 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify fluid cooler performance: “UFac-
torTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “StandardDesignCapacity” or “UserSpecifiedDesignCa-
pacity”.

1.25.8.1.8 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the fluid cooler. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the fluid cooler
are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must also
be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration
when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be
specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken directly from
the weather data.

1.25.8.1.9 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air
at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at
1.25 based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every
what of heat removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.
1076 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.8.1.10 Field: Standard Design Capacity

This numeric input field contains the heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts, with entering
water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C
(95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s per watt
of nominal capacity (3 gpm/ton). 125% of this capacity gives the actual fluid cooler heat rejection
at these operating conditions (based on historical assumption that the evaporative fluid cooler must
dissipate 0.25W of compressor heat for every watt of heat removed by the evaporator). This field
is only used for performance input method = ”StandardDesignCapacity”. For other input methods
this field is ignored. The standard conditions mentioned above for “standard design capacity” are
already specified in the EnergyPlus. So the input fields such as design entering water temp., design
entering air wet-bulb and dry-bulb temp. and design water flow rate, if provided in the input, will be
ignored for the StandardDesignCapacity performance input method. Also, the standard conditions
are for water as a fluid type so this performance input method can only be used with water as a
fluid type (ref. CondenserLoop object).

1.25.8.1.11 Field: Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin cor-
responding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Performance
Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA value
greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be autosized. If
autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the design fluid cooler UA value is derived from
the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and
Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections), the fluid cooler inlet air dry-bulb
and wetbulb temperature are taken from the input. This field is only used for performance input
method = ” UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”. For other performance input methods,
this field is ignored.

1.25.8.1.12 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the fluid cooler in m3 /s. This value
is the flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the fluid cooler. This field is ignored
for the “StandardDesignCapacity” performance input method. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object
must be defined and the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by
the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and
Component Autosizing sections).

1.25.8.1.13 Field: User Specified Design Capacity

This numeric input field contains the heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts. Design
conditions for this capacity i.e. entering air dry-bulb temperature, entering air wet-bulb temperature
and entering water temperature must be provided in the input. Only used for Performance Input
Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.8.1.14 Field:Design Entering Water Temperature

This numeric field contains entering water temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Celsius.
The design entering water temperature must be greater than the design entering air temperature.
Only used for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance
input methods this field is ignored.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1077

1.25.8.1.15 Field:Design Entering Air Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air dry-bulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees
Celsius. The design entering air temperature must be greater than the design entering air wet-bulb
temperature. Only used for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other
performance input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.8.1.16 Field:Design Entering Air Wet-bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air wetbulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Cel-
sius. The design entering air wet-bulb temperature must be less than the design entering air (dry-
bulb) temperature. Only used for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for
other performance input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.8.1.17 Field: Capacity Control

This alpha field contains the cooling capacity control for the evaporative fluid cooler. Two choices are
available: FanCycling and FluidBypass. During part-load conditions, there are two ways to maintain
the exiting water temperature at the setpoint: either cycling the evaporative fluid cooler fan, or
bypassing portion of the evaporative fluid cooler water with a three-way valve. For FluidBypass, the
evaporative fluid cooler fan still runs at full speed for the entire timestep, but only portion of the
water flow goes through the evaporative fluid cooler media to get cooled while the remaining portion
of the water flow gets bypassed. Two water flows then mix at the common water sump to meet the
setpoint temperature.

1.25.8.1.18 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user
to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
For this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are:
1. Design Water Flow Rate;
2. Design Air Flow Rate;
3. Fan Power at Design Air Flow Rate;
4. U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate;
Note that the U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate is not multiplied by the Sizing
Factor. Instead the design evaporative fluid cooler load is multiplied by the sizing factor and the
design UA then calculated as usual.

1.25.8.1.19 Field: Evaporation Loss Mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by
the evaporative fluid cooler. There are two options: LossFactor or SaturatedExit. The default is
SaturatedExit. The user-defined loss factor is entered in the following field. By assuming that the
air leaving the evaporative fluid cooler is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using
moist air engineering calculations with data available within the evaporative fluid cooler model (and
does not require additional user input).
1078 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.8.1.20 Field: Evaporation Loss Factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the evaporative fluid cooler and lost
to the outside air [percent/K]. This field is only used if the Evaporation Calculation Mode is set
to LossFactor. The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser
water flow and varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here
is in units of percent-per-kelvin. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin
of temperature drop in the condenser water. Empirical correlation is used to calculate default loss
factor if it not explicitly specified in the input file.

1.25.8.1.21 Field: Drift Loss Percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets [%]. The
drift loss is a percent of the condenser water flow. Default value is under investigation for now
cooling tower’s evaporation loss factor is taken as default value.

1.25.8.1.22 Field: Blowdown Calculation Mode

This field specifies which method is used to determine blowdown rates. There two options Concen-
trationRatio or ScheduledRate. The choice will determine which of the two models below is used.
The default is ConcentrationRatio.

1.25.8.1.23 Field: Blowdown Concentration Ratio

This field is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blowdown in the evaporative fluid cooler as a
function of the rate of evaporation. Blowdown is water intentionally drained from the evaporative
fluid cooler in order to offset the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because
of evaporation. The value entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids
in the blowdown water to solids in the make up water. Default value is under investigation for now
cooling tower’s evaporation loss factor is taken as default value.

1.25.8.1.24 Field: Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule used to define the amount of water (m3/s) flushed
from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the evaporative fluid cooler of mineral scale build-up
and other contaminants. This schedule is only used if the Blowdown Calculation Mode is set to
ScheduledRate. The amount of water use due to blowdown depends on the makeup water quality
and is specific to each geographical location. Default value is under investigation for now cooling
tower’s evaporation loss factor is taken as default value.This water usage is in addition to the amount
of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation and/or drift. Since blowdown occurs when the
basin water contaminant concentration is high, blowdown only occurs when the evaporative fluid
cooler is active and water is flowing through the evaporative fluid cooler (regardless of the water
usage defined by this schedule).

1.25.8.1.25 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the evaporative fluid cooler obtains water used
for evaporative cooling. If blank or omitted, then the evaporative fluid cooler will obtain water
directly from the mains. If the name of a WaterUse:Storage object is used here, then the evaporative
fluid cooler will obtain its water from that tank. If a tank is specified, the evaporative fluid cooler
will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from the tank. However if the tank cannot provide all
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1079

the water the evaporative fluid cooler needs, then the evaporative fluid cooler will still operate and
obtain the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’ water).
An IDF specification for this object is shown below:

EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed ,
Big EvaporativeFluidCooler , !- Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
3.02, !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
2250, !- Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power {W}
0.002208 , !- Design Spray Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
1.25, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
, !- Standard Design Capacity {W}
, !- Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.001703 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
87921 , !- User Specified Design Capacity {W}
46.11 , !- Design Entering Water Temperature {C}
35, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
25.6; !- Design Entering Air Wet -bulb Temperature {C}

1.25.8.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Bypass Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Evaporative Fluid Cooler Water Drift [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

If Supply Water Storage Tank Name is specified:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
1080 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.8.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

The average electric power consumption of the fluid cooler fan in Watts for the timestep being
reported.

1.25.8.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

Fan energy use in Joules. Consumption is metered on HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant,
and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.8.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the average rate, in Watts, at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the
fluid cooler for the time step being reported.

1.25.8.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

The fluid temperature at the fluid cooler inlet in degrees Celsius.

1.25.8.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

The fluid temperature at the fluid cooler outlet in degrees Celsius.

1.25.8.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The average fluid mass flow rate through the fluid cooler in kg/s for the time step being reported.

1.25.8.2.7 Cooling Tower Bypass Fraction []

This output is the average fluid bypass fraction for the time step being reported. See Capacity
Control input field.

1.25.8.2.8 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.8.2.9 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the external spray water consumed by the evaporative fluid cooler. This is the
total of evaporation, drift, and blowdown.

1.25.8.2.10 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.8.2.11 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]

1.25.8.2.12 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.8.2.13 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]

1.25.8.2.14 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1081

1.25.8.2.15 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

These outputs provide the breakdown of the different components of water use during fluid cooler
operation.

1.25.8.2.16 Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

The volume of make up water provided by the mains in cubic meters. If no Supply Water Storage
Tank is specified, then all fluid cooler make up water is provided by the mains (same as Cooling
Tower Make Up Water Volume). If a Supply Water Storage Tank is specified, then the make up
from the mains only occurs when sufficient water supply is not available from the tank (same as
Evaporative Fluid Cooler Water Starved by Storage Tank). This output variable is metered on
HeatRejection:MainsWater, MainsWater:Plant and MainsWater:Facility.

1.25.8.2.17 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.8.2.18 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water provided by the Supply Water Storage Tank.

1.25.8.2.19 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.25.8.2.20 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water the Supply Water Storage Tank was not able to provide.
The starved water is assumed to come from the mains. The fluid cooler’s operation is not affected
by a lack of storage tank water.

1.25.9 EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed
The two-speed evaporative fluid cooler is modeled in a similar fashion to the single-speed evaporative
fluid cooler. The evaporative fluid cooler is modeled as a counter flow heat exchanger with two-speed
fan (induced draft configuration. See schematic diagram in EvaporativeFluidCooler:SingleSpeed
section). The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of the three methods: design heat
transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or standard fluid cooler design
capacity at a specific rating point or design capacity at non standard conditions. Regardless of which
method is chosen, the design airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be specified.
The evaporative fluid cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the evaporative
fluid cooler at (or below) a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser
Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model
first checks to see whether inlet water temperature is at or below the set point. If so, then the fluid
cooler fan is not turned on and all the flow goes through bypass. If the inlet water temperature is
above the set point then the fluid cooler fan is turned on at low speed to reduce the exiting water
temperature to the set point. If operating the fluid cooler fan at low speed does not reduce the
exiting water temperature to the set point, then the fluid cooler fan is increased to its high speed.
The model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between
two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler fan at high speed for the entire simulation timestep and
1082 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

fluid cooler fan at low speed for the entire simulation timestep, or fluid cooler fan at low speed for
the entire simulation timestep and fluid cooler fan off for the entire simulation timestep). Cyclic
losses are not taken into account.
Evaporative fluid coolers consume water through evaporation, drift, and blowdown. The model can
be used to predict water consumed by the evaporative fluid coolers. For this purpose, the last seven
input fields can either be provided in the input or if nothing is specified then the default values for
these fields will be used. These fields provide methods of controlling details of the water consumption
calculations. The user can specify connections to the rest of the buildings water system by providing
the name of a water storage tanks (i.e. WaterUse:Storage objects).

1.25.9.1 Inputs

1.25.9.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler.

1.25.9.1.2 Field: WaterInlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler’s water inlet node.

1.25.9.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler’s water outlet node.

1.25.9.1.4 Field: High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the fluid cooler air flow rate at high fan speed in m3 /s. A value greater
than zero must be defined regardless of fluid cooler performance input method. Alternately, this
field can be autosized. See Engineering Reference document for fluid cooler autosizing.

1.25.9.1.5 Field: High Fan Speed Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the high-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. A value greater than zero must be specified regardless of fluid cooler performance
input method, or this field can be autosized. See Engineering Reference document for fluid cooler
autosizing.

1.25.9.1.6 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the fluid cooler air flow rate at low fan speed in m3 /s. This value must
be greater than zero, less than the value specified for the field “Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed”.
This field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “Air Flow Rate at High
Fan Speed” determined in the following field.

1.25.9.1.7 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor for calculating the low fan speed air flow rate as a
fraction of the high fan speed air flow rate. The default is 0.5.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1083

1.25.9.1.8 Field: Low Fan Speed Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the low-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. This value must be specified greater than zero or the field may be autocalculated, in
which case it is set to a fraction of the “Fan Power at High Fan Speed” determined in the following
field.

1.25.9.1.9 Field: Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor for calculating the low fan speed fan power as a fraction
of the high fan speed fan power. The default is 0.16.

1.25.9.1.10 Field: Design Spray Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design spray water flow rate through the fluid cooler in m3 /s. This
input field must be specified for all the performance input methods.

1.25.9.1.11 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify fluid cooler performance: “UFac-
torTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “StandardDesignCapacity” or “UserSpecifiedDesignCa-
pacity”.

1.25.9.1.12 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the fluid cooler. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the fluid cooler
are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must also
be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration
when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be
specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken directly from
the weather data.

1.25.9.1.13 Field: Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio

This numeric field contains the value for the ratio of actual tower heat rejection to nominal capac-
ity. This ratio is defined at entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air
at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. Historically this ratio has been set at
1.25 based on the assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25 W of compressor power for every
what of heat removed at the chiller evaporator. The default is 1.25.

1.25.9.1.14 Field: High Speed Standard Design Capacity

This numeric input field contains the heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts, with
entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb
and 35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s
per watt of nominal capacity (3 gpm/ton). The Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity
Sizing Ratio set in the previous field is applied to this capacity to give the actual fluid cooler heat
rejection at these operating conditions. This field is only used for performance input method =
”StandardDesignCapacity”. For other input methods this field is ignored. The standard conditions
1084 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

mentioned above for “standard design capacity” are already specified in the EnergyPlus. So the
input fields such as design entering water temp., design entering air wet-bulb and dry-bulb temp.
and design water flow rate, if provided in the input, will be ignored for the StandardDesignCapacity
performance input method. Also, the standard conditions are for water as a fluid type so this
performance input method can only be used with water as a fluid type (ref. CondenserLoop object).

1.25.9.1.15 Field: Low Speed Standard Design Capacity

This numeric input field contains the heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts, with
entering water at 35C (95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wetbulb and
35C (95F) drybulb temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3 /s per
watt of nominal capacity (3 gpm/ton). The Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing
Ratio is applied to this capacity to give the actual fluid cooler heat rejection at these operating
conditions. This field is only used for performance input method = ”StandardDesignCapacity”. For
other input methods this field is ignored. The standard conditions mentioned above for “standard
design capacity” are already specified in the EnergyPlus. So the input fields such as design entering
water temp., design entering air wet-bulb and dry-bulb temp. and design water flow rate, if provided
in the input, will be ignored for the StandardDesignCapacity performance input method. Also, the
standard conditions are for water as a fluid type so this performance input method can only be
used with water as a fluid type (ref. CondenserLoop object). The value specified for this field must
be greater than zero but less than the value specified for the field “High-Speed Standard Design
Capacity”. This field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the High-Speed
Standard Design Capacity determined in the following field.

1.25.9.1.16 Field: Low Speed Standard Capacity Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Speed Standard Design
Capacity. The default is 0.5.

1.25.9.1.17 Field: High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin
corresponding to the high speed design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field
“Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then
a UA value greater than zero but less than or equal to 2,100,000 must be defined, or the field can
be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the design fluid cooler UA
value is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta
T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections), the fluid
cooler inlet air dry-bulb and wetbulb temperature are taken from the input. This field is only used
for performance input method = ” UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”. For other input
methods this field is ignored.

1.25.9.1.18 Field: Low Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per degree Kelvin
corresponding to the low speed design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field
“Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then
a UA value greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 and less than the value specified
for the field “U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed” must be defined. This field may be
autocalculated, in which case it is set to a factor of the “U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1085

Speed” determined in the following field. This field is only used for performance input method = ”
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”. For other input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.9.1.19 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
This field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area
Value. The default is 0.6.

1.25.9.1.20 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the fluid cooler in m3 /s. This value
is the flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the fluid cooler. This field is ignored
for the “StandardDesignCapacity” performance input method. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object
must be defined and the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by
the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and
Component Autosizing sections).

1.25.9.1.21 Field: High Speed User Specified Design Capacity

This numeric input field contains the heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts. Design
conditions for this capacity i.e. entering air dry-bulb temperature, entering air wet-bulb temperature
and entering water temperature must be provided in the input. Only used for Performance Input
Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.9.1.22 Field: Low Speed User Specified Design Capacity

This numeric input field contains the heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts. Design
conditions for this capacity i.e. entering air dry-bulb temperature, entering air wet-bulb temperature
and entering water temperature must be provided in the input. Only used for Performance Input
Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance input methods this field is ignored.
This field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “High Speed User
Specified Design Capacity” determined in the following field.

1.25.9.1.23 Field: Low Speed User Specified Design Capacity Sizing Factor
This field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low-Speed User Specified Design
Capacity. The default is 0.5.

1.25.9.1.24 Field:Design Entering Water Temperature

This numeric field contains entering water temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Celsius.
The design entering water temperature must be greater than the design entering air temperature.
Only used for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other performance
input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.9.1.25 Field:Design Entering Air Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air dry-bulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees
Celsius. The design entering air temperature must be greater than the design entering air wet-bulb
temperature. Only used for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for other
performance input methods this field is ignored.
1086 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.9.1.26 Field:Design Entering Air Wet-bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air wetbulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Cel-
sius. The design entering air wet-bulb temperature must be less than the design entering air (dry-
bulb) temperature. Only used for Performance Input Method = UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity; for
other performance input methods this field is ignored.

1.25.9.1.27 Field: High Speed Sizing Factor

This optional numeric field allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing
factor is used when the component design inputs are autosized: the autosizing calculations are
performed as usual and the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user
to size a component to meet part of the design load while continuing to use the autosizing feature.
For this component the inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are:
1. Design Water Flow Rate;
2. Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed;
3. Fan Power at High Fan Speed;
4. U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed;
5. Air Flow Rate at Low Fan Speed;
6. Fan Power at Low Fan Speed;
7. U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed;
Note that the U-Factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed is not multiplied by the Sizing Factor.
Instead the design evaporative fluid cooler load is multiplied by the sizing factor and the design UA
then calculated as usual. The U-Factor Times Area Value at Low Fan Speed is set to Low Fan Speed
U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor times the full load design UA.

1.25.9.1.28 Field: Evaporation Loss Mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by
the evaporative fluid cooler. There are two options: LossFactor or SaturatedExit. The default is
SaturatedExit. The user-defined loss factor is entered in the following field. By assuming that the
air leaving the evaporative fluid cooler is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated using
moist air engineering calculations with data available within the evaporative fluid cooler model (and
does not require additional user input).

1.25.9.1.29 Field: Evaporation Loss Factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the evaporative fluid cooler and lost
to the outside air [percent/K]. This field is only used if the Evaporation Calculation Mode is set
to LossFactor. The evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser
water flow and varies with the temperature change in the condenser water. The value entered here
is in units of percent-per-kelvin. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree Kelvin
of temperature drop in the condenser water. Empirical correlation is used to calculate default loss
factor if it not explicitly specified in the input file.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1087

1.25.9.1.30 Field: Drift Loss Percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets [%]. The
drift loss is a percent of the condenser water flow. Default value is under investigation for now
cooling tower’s evaporation loss factor is taken as default value.

1.25.9.1.31 Field: Blowdown Calculation Mode

This field specifies which method is used to determine blowdown rates. There two options Concen-
trationRatio or ScheduledRate. The choice will determine which of the two models below is used.
The default is ConcentrationRatio.

1.25.9.1.32 Field: Blowdown Concentration Ratio

This field is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blowdown in the evaporative fluid cooler as a
function of the rate of evaporation. Blowdown is water intentionally drained from the evaporative
fluid cooler in order to offset the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise occur because
of evaporation. The value entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids
in the blowdown water to solids in the make up water. Default value is under investigation for now
cooling tower’s evaporation loss factor is taken as default value.

1.25.9.1.33 Field: Blowdown Makeup Water Usage Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the schedule used to define the amount of water (m3/s) flushed
from the basin on a periodic basis to purge the evaporative fluid cooler of mineral scale build-up
and other contaminants. This schedule is only used if the Blowdown Calculation Mode is set to
ScheduledRate. The amount of water use due to blowdown depends on the makeup water quality
and is specific to each geographical location. Default value is under investigation for now cooling
tower’s evaporation loss factor is taken as default value.This water usage is in addition to the amount
of water lost to the atmosphere due to evaporation and/or drift. Since blowdown occurs when the
basin water contaminant concentration is high, blowdown only occurs when the evaporative fluid
cooler is active and water is flowing through the evaporative fluid cooler (regardless of the water
usage defined by this schedule).

1.25.9.1.34 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to describe where the evaporative fluid cooler obtains water used
for evaporative cooling. If blank or omitted, then the evaporative fluid cooler will obtain water
directly from the mains. If the name of a WaterUse:Storage object is used here, then the evaporative
fluid cooler will obtain its water from that tank. If a tank is specified, the evaporative fluid cooler
will attempt to obtain all the water it uses from the tank. However if the tank cannot provide all
the water the evaporative fluid cooler needs, then the evaporative fluid cooler will still operate and
obtain the rest of the water it needs from the mains (referred to as ‘Starved’ water).
Examples of an IDF specification for this object are shown below:

EvaporativeFluidCooler:TwoSpeed ,
Big EvaporativeFluidCooler , !- Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser EvaporativeFluidcooler Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
9.911 , !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
4.911 , !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1088 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.5, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor

autosize , !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
0.16, !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor
0.002208 , !- Design Spray Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
UserSpecifiedDesignCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
1.25, !- Heat Rejection Capacity and Nominal Capacity Sizing Ratio
, !- High Speed Standard Design Capacity {W}
, !- Low Speed Standard Design Capacity {W}
0.5, !- Low Speed Standard Capacity Sizing Factor
, !- High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.6, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
0.001703 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
87921 , !- High Speed User Specified Design Capacity {W}
47921 , !- Low Speed User Specified Design Capacity {W}
0.5, !- Low Speed User Specified Design Capacity Sizing Factor
46.11 , !- Design Entering Water Temperature {C}
35, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
25.6; !- Design Entering Air Wet -bulb Temperature {C}

1.25.9.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

If Supply Water Storage Tank Name is specified:

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

1.25.9.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

The average electric power consumption of the fluid cooler fan in Watts for the timestep being
reported.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1089

1.25.9.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

Fan energy use in Joules. Consumption is metered on HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant,
and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.9.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the average rate, in Watts, at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the
fluid cooler for the time step being reported.

1.25.9.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

The fluid temperature at the fluid cooler inlet in degrees Celsius.

1.25.9.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

The fluid temperature at the fluid cooler outlet in degrees Celsius.

1.25.9.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The average fluid mass flow rate through the fluid cooler in kg/s for the time step being reported.

1.25.9.2.7 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.9.2.8 Cooling Tower Make Up Water Volume [m3]

These outputs are the external spray water consumed by the evaporative fluid cooler. This is the
total of evaporation, drift, and blowdown.

1.25.9.2.9 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.9.2.10 Cooling Tower Water Evaporation Volume [m3]

1.25.9.2.11 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.9.2.12 Cooling Tower Water Drift Volume [m3]

1.25.9.2.13 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.9.2.14 Cooling Tower Water Blowdown Volume [m3]

These outputs provide the breakdown of the different components of water use during fluid cooler
operation.
1090 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.9.2.15 Cooling Tower Make Up Mains Water Volume [m3]

The volume of make up water provided by the mains in cubic meters. If no Supply Water Storage
Tank is specified, then all fluid cooler make up water is provided by the mains (same as Cooling
Tower Make Up Water Volume). If a Supply Water Storage Tank is specified, then the make up
from the mains only occurs when sufficient water supply is not available from the tank (same as
Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume). This output variable is metered on HeatRe-
jection:MainsWater, MainsWater:Plant and MainsWater:Facility.

1.25.9.2.16 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.25.9.2.17 Cooling Tower Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water provided by the Supply Water Storage Tank.

1.25.9.2.18 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]

1.25.9.2.19 Cooling Tower Starved Storage Tank Water Volume [m3]

These are the rate and volume of water the Supply Water Storage Tank was not able to provide.
The starved water is assumed to come from the mains. The fluid cooler’s operation is not affected
by a lack of storage tank water.

1.25.10 FluidCooler:SingleSpeed
Fluid coolers are components that may be assigned to condenser loops. The Fluid cooler is mod-
eled as a cross flow heat exchanger (both streams unmixed) with single-speed fans (induced draft
configuration). The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of the two methods: design
heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal fluid cooler ca-
pacity at a specific rating point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the design airflow rate and
corresponding fan power must be specified.
The fluid cooler seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the fluid cooler at (or below)
a set point. The set point schedule value is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature
Setpoint Node Name or Reference” for the CondenserLoop object. The model assumes that part-
load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between two steady-state regimes (i.e.,
fluid cooler fan on for the entire simulation timestep and fluid cooler fan off for the entire simulation
timestep). Cyclic losses are not taken into account.

1.25.10.1 Inputs

1.25.10.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Fluid Cooler.

1.25.10.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Fluid Cooler’s water inlet node.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1091

1.25.10.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the Fluid Cooler’s water outlet node.

1.25.10.1.4 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify fluid cooler performance: “UFac-
torTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “NominalCapacity”.

1.25.10.1.5 Field: Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value
This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin
corresponding to the design air and water flow rates specified above. If the input field “Perfor-
mance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”, then a UA
value greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can be au-
tosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the design fluid cooler UA value is
derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T (Ref.
Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections), the fluid cooler inlet
air dry-bulb and wetbulb temperature are taken from the input. If “Performance Input Method”
is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be left blank since the model automatically
calculates the fluid cooler UA based on the fluid cooler capacity and nominal conditions specified in
input file.

1.25.10.1.6 Field: Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts,
Nominal conditions i.e. entering air dry-bulb temperature, entering air wet-bulb temperature and
Entering water temperature should be provided in the input.

1.25.10.1.7 Field:Design Entering Water Temperature

This numeric field contains entering water temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Celsius.
This field must be specified for both the performance input methods. The design entering water
temperature must be greater than the design entering air temperature.

1.25.10.1.8 Field:Design Entering Air Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air dry-bulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees
Celsius. This field must be specified for both the performance input methods. The design entering
air temperature must be greater than the design entering air wet-bulb temperature.

1.25.10.1.9 Field:Design Entering Air Wet-bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air wetbulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Cel-
sius. This field must be specified for both the performance input methods. The design entering air
wet-bulb temperature must be less than the design entering air (dry-bulb) temperature.
1092 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.10.1.10 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the fluid cooler in m3 /s. This value is
the flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the fluid cooler. A water flow rate greater
than zero must be defined or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be
defined and the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser
loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component
Autosizing sections).

1.25.10.1.11 Field: Design Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design air flow rate induced by the fluid cooler fan in m3 /s. A value
greater than zero must be defined regardless of the fluid cooler performance input method. Alter-
nately, this field can be autosized. See Engineering Reference document for fluid cooler autosizing.

1.25.10.1.12 Field: Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in watts) at the design air flow rate specified in the
previous field. A value greater than zero must be specified regardless of the performance input
method, or this field can be autosized. See Engineering ref. for fluid cooler autosizing.

1.25.10.1.13 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the fluid cooler. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the fluid cooler
are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must also
be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration
when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be
specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken directly from
the weather data.
An IDF specification for this object is shown below:

FluidCooler:SingleSpeed ,
Big FLUIDCOOLER1 , !- Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- Design Air Flow Rate U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
58601. , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
51.67 , !- Design Entering Water Temperature {C}
35, !- Design Entering Air Temperature {C}
25.6, !- Design Entering Air Wetbulb Temperature {C}
0.001388 , !- Design Water Flow Rate{m3/s}
9.911 , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize; !- Design Air Flow Rate Fan Power {W}

1.25.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:Electricity [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1093

– HVAC,Average, Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average, Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.25.10.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

The electric power consumption of the fluid cooler fans.

1.25.10.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

Fan energy use. Consumption is metered on HeatRejection:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Elec-
tricity:Facility.

1.25.10.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the fluid cooler.

1.25.10.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

The loop temperature at the fluid cooler inlet.

1.25.10.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

The loop temperature at the fluid cooler outlet.

1.25.10.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The loop mass flow rate of the circulating condenser water loop.

1.25.11 FluidCooler:TwoSpeed
The two-speed fluid cooler is modeled in a similar fashion to the single-speed fluid cooler. The fluid
cooler is modeled as a cross flow heat exchanger (both stream unmixed) with two-speed fans (induced
draft configuration). The user must define fluid cooler performance via one of two methods: heat
transfer coefficient-area product (UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal fluid cooler capacity
at a specific rating point. Regardless of which method is chosen, the airflow rate and corresponding
fan power at both high and low fan speed must be specified. The Fluid Cooler seeks to maintain
the temperature of the water exiting the Fluid Cooler at (or below) a set point. The set point
schedule is defined by the field “Condenser Loop Temperature Setpoint Node Name or Reference”
for the CondenserLoop object. The model first runs at low speed and calculates the fluid cooler
exiting water temperature. If the exiting water temperature based on “low speed” is at or below
the set point, then the fluid cooler fan runs at this speed or below this speed. If the exiting water
temperature remains above the set point after “low speed” is modeled, then the fluid cooler fan runs
at high speed to reduce the exiting water temperature.
The model assumes that part-load operation is represented by a simple linear interpolation between
two steady-state regimes (i.e., fluid cooler fan at high speed for the entire simulation timestep and
fluid cooler fan at low speed for the entire simulation timestep,). Cyclic losses are not taken into
account.
1094 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.11.1 Inputs

1.25.11.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler.

1.25.11.1.2 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler’s water inlet node.

1.25.11.1.3 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the fluid cooler’s water outlet node.

1.25.11.1.4 Field: Performance Input Method

This alpha field contains the method by which the user will specify fluid cooler performance: “UFac-
torTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate” or “NominalCapacity”.

1.25.11.1.5 Field: High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per degree Celsius
corresponding to the high-speed air flow rate and design water flow rate specified above. If the input
field “Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”,
then a UA value greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 must be defined, or the field can
be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be defined and the fluid cooler UA value at
high fan speed is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design
loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component Autosizing sections),
fluid cooler water inlet temperature, fluid cooler inlet air drybulb and wetbulb are provided in the
input. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this field must be left
blank since the model automatically calculates the fluid cooler UA based on the capacity specified
in the field “High Speed Nominal Capacity” and nominal conditions.

1.25.11.1.6 Field: Low Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value

This numeric field contains the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) in watts per Kelvin
corresponding to the design water flow rate and low-speed air flow rate specified above. If the input
field “Performance Input Method” is specified as “UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate”,
this value must be greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000, less than the value specified
for the field “U-factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed”. This field may be autocalculated, in
which case it is set to a factor of the “U-factor Times Area Value at High Fan Speed” determined
in the following field. If “Performance Input Method” is specified as “NominalCapacity”, then this
field must be left blank since the model automatically calculates the fluid cooler UA based on the
fluid cooler capacity specified in the field “Low Speed Nominal Capacity”.

1.25.11.1.7 Field: Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Fan Speed U-factor
Times Area Value. The default is 0.6.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1095

1.25.11.1.8 Field: High Speed Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the fluid cooler in watts
under high-speed fan operation, with nominal (design) inputs entering water temperature, entering
air temperature and entering air wet-bulb temperature. The design water flow rate is also provided
in the input.

1.25.11.1.9 Field: Low Speed Nominal Capacity

This numeric input field contains the “nominal” heat rejection capacity of the Fluid Cooler in watts
under low-speed fan operation, with nominal (design) inputs entering water temperature, entering
air temperature and entering air wet-bulb temperature. The design water flow rate is also provided
in the input. The value specified for this field must be greater than zero but less than the value
specified for the field “High Speed Nominal Capacity”. This field may be autocalculated, in which
case it is set to a fraction of the “High Speed Nominal Capacity” determined in the following field.

1.25.11.1.10 Field: Low Speed Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Speed Nominal Capac-
ity. The default is 0.5.

1.25.11.1.11 Field:Design Entering Water Temperature

This numeric field contains entering water temperature at nominal conditions in degrees Celsius.
This field must be specified for both the performance input methods. The design entering water
temperature must be greater than the design entering air temperature.

1.25.11.1.12 Field:Design Entering Air Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air dry-bulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees
Celsius. This field must be specified for both the performance input methods. The design entering
air temperature must be greater than the design entering air wet-bulb temperature.

1.25.11.1.13 Field:Design Entering Air Wet-bulb Temperature

This numeric field contains entering air wet-bulb temperature at nominal conditions in degrees
Celsius. This field must be specified for both the performance input methods. The design entering
air wet-bulb temperature must be less than the design entering air (dry-bulb) temperature.

1.25.11.1.14 Field: Design Water Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design water flow rate through the fluid cooler in m3 /s. This value is
the flow rate of the condenser loop water being cooled by the fluid cooler. A water flow rate greater
than zero must be defined or the field can be autosized. If autosized, a Plant Sizing object must be
defined and the design water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser
loop and the design loop delta T (Ref. Sizing and Input for Design Calculations and Component
Autosizing sections).

1.25.11.1.15 Field: High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the fluid cooler air flow rate at high fan speed in m3 /s. A value greater
than zero must be defined regardless of the fluid cooler performance input method. Alternately, this
field can be autosized. See Engineering ref. for fluid cooler autosizing.
1096 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.11.1.16 Field: High Fan Speed Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the high-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. A value greater than zero must be specified regardless of the fluid cooler performance
input method, or this field can be autosized. See Engineering ref. for fluid cooler autosizing.

1.25.11.1.17 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the fluid cooler air flow rate at low fan speed in m3 /s. This value must
be greater than zero, less than the value specified for the field “Air Flow Rate at High Fan Speed”.
This field may be autocalculated, in which case it is set to a fraction of the “Air Flow Rate at High
Fan Speed” determined in the following field.

1.25.11.1.18 Field: Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use when calculating the Low Fan Speed Air Flow
Rate. The default is 0.5.

1.25.11.1.19 Field: Low Fan Speed Fan Power

This numeric field contains the fan power (in Watts) at the low-speed air flow rate specified in the
previous field. This value must be specified greater than zero or the field may be autocalculated,
in which case it is set to set to a fraction of the “Fan Power at High Fan Speed” determined in the
following field.

1.25.11.1.20 Field: Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor

This numeric field contains the sizing factor to use whe calculating the Low Fan Speed Fan
Power. The default is 0.16.

1.25.11.1.21 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field specifies the outdoor air node name used to define the conditions of the air
entering the Fluid Cooler. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air conditions entering the Fluid
Cooler are taken directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified
must also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into
consideration when calculating outdoor air conditions from the weather data. Alternately, the node
name may be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air conditions are taken
directly from the weather data.
Examples of an IDF specification for this object are shown below:

FluidCooler:TwoSpeed ,
Big FLUIDCOOLER1 , !- Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser FLUIDCOOLER 1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
NominalCapacity , !- Performance Input Method
, !- High Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-factor Times Area Value {W/K}
, !- Low Fan Speed U-Factor Times Area Sizing Factor
58601. , !- High Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
28601. , !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity {W}
. 0.6, !- Low Speed Nominal Capacity Sizing Factor
51.67 , !- Design Entering Water tempereture {C}
35, !- Design Entering Air tempereture {C}
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1097

25.6, !- Design Entering Air Wet -bulb tempereture {C}

0.001388 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
9.911 , !- High Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- High Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
autosize , !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.5, !- Low Fan Speed Air Flow Rate Sizing Factor
autosize , !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power {W}
0.16; !- Low Fan Speed Fan Power Sizing Factor

1.25.11.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average, Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.25.11.2.1 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Rate [W]

Average fan electric power consumed.

1.25.11.2.2 Cooling Tower Fan Electricity Energy [J]

Total energy used by the fan. Consumption is metered on HeatRejection:Electricity, Electric-
ity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.

1.25.11.2.3 Cooling Tower Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate at which heat is removed from the condenser water loop by the fluid cooler.

1.25.11.2.4 Cooling Tower Inlet Temperature [C]

Loop temperature at the fluid cooler inlet.

1.25.11.2.5 Cooling Tower Outlet Temperature [C]

Loop temperature at the fluid cooler outlet.

1.25.11.2.6 Cooling Tower Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Loop mass flow rate through the fluid cooler.
1098 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.12 GroundHeatExchanger:System
The EnergyPlus ground loop heat exchanger is a condenser component which serves the condenser
supply side in addition to the cooling towers and other condensing components. Figure 1.99 shows
the Ground Heat Exchanger in the simulation environment.
The heat exchanger response is defined by a g-function which is a non-dimensional function that is
used to calculate the response to square heat pulses of different duration. (This function is not the
same as ‘G-factors’ referred to in the ASHRAE Applications Handbook). This continuous function
is specified by a series of data pairs (LNTTSi, GFNCi) where,

– LNTTSi is the non-dimensional time: ln(T/Ts )

– GFNCi is the g-function value

The g-function is different for each borehole field configuration (i.e. a 4 × 4 field has a different
response than a 80 × 80 field). It is also dependent on the ratio of borehole spacing to depth.
g-function values, for accurate simulation, have to be computed for each specific heat exchanger
design. The GroundHeatExchanger:System object will accept three different types of input in order
to define the g-functions necessary for the ground heat exchanger calculations.

1. Use the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Array object to define a rectangular borehole field.

EnergyPlus will compute and cache the g-functions for reuse again in future simulations.
2. Use one or more GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single objects to define a vertical borehole
field with the boreholes located arbitrarily. EnergyPlus will compute and cache the g-functions
for reuse again in future simulations.
3. Use a third-party tool, such as GLHEPro, to compute the g-functions and pass them to Ener-
gyPlus using the GroundHeatExchanger:ResponseFactors object.

A small number of reference datasets containing example input data for 1 × 2, 4 × 4 and 8 × 8
configurations and for both standard and thermally enhanced grout are provided as well.
Definitions for the input fields are provided below.

1.25.12.1 Inputs

1.25.12.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground heat exchanger (GHE).

1.25.12.1.2 Field: Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the ground heat exchanger inlet node name.

1.25.12.1.3 Field: Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the ground heat exchanger outlet node name.

1.25.12.1.4 Field: Design Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the GHE design flow rate in cubic meters per second {m3 /s}. The flow
rate specified is the total flow rate for the entire borehole field. Flow will be assumed to be evenly
distributed across all boreholes.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1099

Figure 1.99: Schematic of EnergyPlus Ground Loop Heat Exchanger

1100 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.12.1.5 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The type of undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for the
farfield boundary conditions.

1.25.12.1.6 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The name of the undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for
the farfield boundary conditions.

1.25.12.1.7 Field: Ground Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field contains the thermal conductivity of the ground in W/m-K.

1.25.12.1.8 FieldSet: Ground Thermal Heat Capacity

This numeric field contains the thermal heat capacity of the ground in J/m3 -K.

1.25.12.1.9 Field: GHE:ResponseFactors object name

The unique name of the GroundHeatExchanger:ResponseFactors object used to define the third-
party response factors. If present, the GHE:Vertical:Array and GHE:Vertical:Single objects defined
will be ignored.

1.25.12.1.10 Field: g-Function Calculation Method

If the GHE:ResponseFactors object is not provided, this input will be relevant to the calculation
method used to generate the g-function values. There are two options for this input: “UHFcalc”
or “UBHWTcalc”. The default is UHFcalc, where a g-function is computed with the uniform heat
flux boundary condition. The UBHWTcalc option computes the g-function with a uniform borehole
wall temperature boundary condition. The g-function computed with a uniform borehole wall tem-
perature boundary condition is expected to be a better approximation of the borehole physics and
is also expected to be faster to compute.

1.25.12.1.11 Field: GHE:Vertical:Array object name

The unique name of the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Array object used to define a rectangular
borehole field. If present, the GHE:Vertical:Single objects will be ignored.

1.25.12.1.12 Field: GHE:Vertical:Single names

The unique names of all single, vertical GLHE objects which are used to define and arbitrarily shaped
GHE array. This field is exensible.
The following is are example inputs corresponding to the input variations allowed which were de-
scribed previously. The first example uses the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Array object. The
g-functions will be generated automatically by EnergyPlus and cached for later use.
GroundHeatExchanger :System ,
Vertical GHE 1x4 Std , !- Name
GLHE Inlet , !- Inlet Node Name
GLHE Outlet , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00100944 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model
Type
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1101

KATemps , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Name

2.5, !- Ground Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
2.5E+06, !- Ground Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
, !- Response Factors Object Name
UBHWTcalc , !- g-Function Calculation Method
GHE -Array; !- GHE:Vertical:Array Object Name

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Array ,
GHE -Array , !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
2, !- Number of Boreholes in X Direction
2, !- Number of Boreholes in Y Direction
5; !- Borehole Spacing {m}

The second example uses the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single object. The g-functions will be
generated automatically by EnergyPlus and cached for later use.
GroundHeatExchanger :System ,
Vertical GHE 1x4 Std , !- Name
GLHE Inlet , !- Inlet Node Name
GLHE Outlet , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00100944 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model
Type
KATemps , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Name
2.5, !- Ground Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
2.5E+06, !- Ground Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
, !- Response Factors Object Name
UBHWTcalc , !- g-Function Calculation Method
, !- GHE Array Object Name
GHE -1, !- GHE Borehole Definition 1
GHE -2, !- GHE Borehole Definition 2
GHE -3, !- GHE Borehole Definition 3
GHE -4; !- GHE Borehole Definition 4

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -1, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
0, !- X Location {m}
0; !- Y Location {m}

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -2, !- Name
1102 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties

5, !- X Location {m}
0; !- Y Location {m}

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -3, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
0, !- X Location {m}
5; !- Y Location {m}

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -4, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
5, !- X Location {m}
5; !- Y Location {m}

The final example uses the ResponseFactors object to provide third-party g-functions.
GroundHeatExchanger :System ,
Vertical GHE 1x4 Std , !- Name
GLHE Inlet , !- Inlet Node Name
GLHE Outlet , !- Outlet Node Name
0.00100944 , !- Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model
Type
KATemps , !- Undisturbed Ground Temperature Model Name
2.5, !- Ground Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
2.5E+06, !- Ground Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
GHE -1 g-functions; !- Response Factors Object Name

GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}

GroundHeatExchanger :ResponseFactors ,
GHE -1 g-functions , !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
4, !- Number of Boreholes
0.00043 , !- G-Function Reference Ratio {dimensionless}
-15.585075 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 1
-2.672011 , !- G-Function G Value 1
-15.440481 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 2
-2.575897 , !- G-Function G Value 2
-15.295888 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 3
-2.476279 , !- G-Function G Value 3
-15.151295 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 4
-2.372609 , !- G-Function G Value 4
...,
12.365217 , !- G-Function G Value 70
1.112000 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 71
12.469007 , !- G-Function G Value 71
1.335000 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 72
12.547123 , !- G-Function G Value 72
1.679000; !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 73

1.25.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Average Borehole Temperature [C]

1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1103

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Average Fluid Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Farfield Ground Temperature [C]

1.25.12.2.1 Ground Heat Exchanger Average Borehole Temperature [C]

This is the model result for the average temperature of the borehole heat exchanger.

1.25.12.2.2 Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate of heat transfer between the working fluid and the ground heat exchanger, in Watts.

1.25.12.2.3 Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the working fluid entering the ground heat exchanger.

1.25.12.2.4 Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the working fluid leaving the ground heat exchanger.

1.25.12.2.5 Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the mass flow rate of the working fluid through the heat exchanger.

1.25.12.2.6 Ground Heat Exchanger Average Fluid Temperature [C]

This is the average temperature of the working fluid inside the heat exchanger.

1.25.12.2.7 Ground Heat Exchanger Farfield Ground Temperature

This is the farfield temperature used by the object which is provided by the undisturbed ground
temperature object. The temperature is the average of the 5 evenly spaced points between the top
of the borehole and the bottom of the borehole.

1.25.13 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Properties
This object defines several borehole parameters.

1.25.13.1 Inputs

1.25.13.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.
1104 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.13.1.2 Field: Depth of Top of Borehole

This numeric field indicates the depth of the top of the borehole below the ground surface, in meters.
The depth measured from the ground surface downward is positive.

1.25.13.1.3 Field: Borehole Length

This numeric field indicates the active length of the borehole, referenced from the starting location
(potentially below the ground surface), to the end of the borehole, in meters.

1.25.13.1.4 Field: Borehole Diameter

This numeric field indicates the diameter of the borehole, in meters.

1.25.13.1.5 Field: Grout Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field contains the thermal conductivity of the filler material in W/m-K.

1.25.13.1.6 Field: Grout Thermal Heat Capacity

This numeric field contains the thermal heat capacity of the grout in J/m3 -K.

1.25.13.1.7 Field: Pipe Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field contains the thermal conductivity of the pipe in W/m-K.

1.25.13.1.8 Field: Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity

This numeric field contains the thermal heat capacity of the pipe in J/m3 -K.

1.25.13.1.9 Field: Pipe Outer Diameter

This numeric field contains the outer diameter of the U-tube (pipe) in meters {m}.

1.25.13.1.10 Field: Pipe Thickness

This numeric field contains the outer diameter of the U-tube (pipe) in meters.

1.25.13.1.11 Field: U-Tube Distance

This numeric field contains the distance between the two legs of the U-tube in meters {m}. Distance
is measured from the u-tube pipe center.
An example object is shown below.
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Properties ,
GHE -1 Props , !- Name
1, !- Depth of Top of Borehole {m}
100, !- Borehole Length {m}
0.114 , !- Borehole Diameter {m}
0.7443 , !- Grout Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
3.90E+06, !- Grout Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.77E+06, !- Pipe Thermal Heat Capacity {J/m3 -K}
0.03341 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter {m}
0.002984 , !- Pipe Thickness {m}
0.04913; !- U-Tube Distance {m}
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1105

1.25.14 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Array
This object defines the borehole locations for a rectangular array of boreholes.

1.25.14.0.1 Field: Name

This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.

1.25.14.0.2 Field: Properties

This alpha field indicates the name of the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Properties object refer-
enced by the boreholes in the array.

1.25.14.0.3 Field: Number of Boreholes in the X-Direction

This numeric field indicates the number of boreholes in one axis of the rectangular borehole field.

1.25.14.0.4 Field: Number of Boreholes in the Y-Direction

This numeric field indicates the number of boreholes in the other axis of the rectangular borehole
field.

1.25.14.0.5 Field: Borehole Spacing

This numeric field indicates the center-to-center borehole spacing, in meters, which is applied to the
rectangular borehole field.
An example object is shown below.
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Array ,
GHE -Array , !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
2, !- Number of Boreholes in X Direction
2, !- Number of Boreholes in Y Direction
5; !- Borehole Spacing {m}

1.25.15 GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Single
This object defines a single borehole heat exchanger.

1.25.15.1 Inputs

1.25.15.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.

1.25.15.1.2 Field: Properties

This alpha field indicates the name of the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Properties object refer-
enced by the borehole.

1.25.15.1.3 Field: X-Location

This numeric field indicates the x-location of this borehole.
1106 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.15.1.4 Field: Y-Location

This numeric field indicates the y-location of this borehole.
GroundHeatExchanger :Vertical:Single ,
GHE -1, !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
0, !- X Location {m}
0; !- Y Location {m}

1.25.16 GroundHeatExchanger:ResponseFactors
This object is used to provide third-party g-functions which are generated by other tools.

1.25.16.1 Inputs

1.25.16.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field indicates the unique name of the object.

1.25.16.1.2 Field: Properties

This alpha field indicates the name of the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical:Properties object refer-
enced g-function response factors.

1.25.16.1.3 Field: G-Function Reference Ratio

The G-Functions may be formulated slightly differently based on the program which generated them.
The original g-functions as defined by Eskilson are based on an borehole radius to active length ratio
of 0.0005. If the physical ratio is different from this, a correction must be applied. EnergyPlus
will apply the correction, based on the reference ratio entered in this field. Therefore, therefore two
possible input configurations.

– If the g-functions have not had a correction applied, then the g-functions are still based on a
reference of 0.0005, so use a value of 0.0005 in this field. EnergyPlus will adjust the g-functions
internally to create the properly referenced g-function.
– If the correction has already been applied, then the input g-functions are based on a reference
to the actual (physical) radius/length ratio, so enter the physical radius/length in this field.
Entering the actual value will nullify any internal corrections, which will avoid re-basing the
g-function set.

The software GLHEPro has been making this “pre-correction” to the data sets since version 3.1 of
that software, so this input field should match the actual (physical) radius/length ratio.

1.25.16.1.4 Field: g-function Ln(t/ts) Value <x>

This numeric field contains the natural log of time/steady state time: ln(t/ts ).
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1107

1.25.16.1.5 Field: g-function ‘g’ Value <x>

This numeric field contains the g-function value of the corresponding LNTTS.
This object is extensible, so additional pairs of these last two fields can be added to the end of this
object.
An example object is shown below.
GroundHeatExchanger :ResponseFactors ,
GHE -1 g-functions , !- Name
GHE -1 Props , !- GHE Properties
4, !- Number of Boreholes
0.0005 , !- G-Function Reference Ratio {dimensionless}
-15.585075 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 1
-2.672011 , !- G-Function G Value 1
-15.440481 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 2
-2.575897 , !- G-Function G Value 2
-15.295888 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 3
-2.476279 , !- G-Function G Value 3
-15.151295 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 4
-2.372609 , !- G-Function G Value 4
...,
12.365217 , !- G-Function G Value 70
1.112000 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 71
12.469007 , !- G-Function G Value 71
1.335000 , !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 72
12.547123 , !- G-Function G Value 72
1.679000; !- G-Function Ln(T/Ts) Value 73

1.25.17 GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky
The GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky use the g-functions to calculate the GHX temperature response,
similar to the GroundHeatExchanger:Vertical model, however for this model g-functions are auto-
matically calculated by EnergyPlus without the need of external software or data.
Horizontal slinky-loop ground heat exchangers (GHXs) consist of coiled tubing, with the individual
rings spread out along the direction of the trench either horizontally or vertically, as shown in
Figure. A schematic of a slinky GHX can be seen in Figure. Compared to conventional straight
tube horizontal GHXs, slinky loops have a higher tube density; hence, with the same cooling/heating
loads, slinky-loop GHXs require less land area and excavation work than straight tube HGHXs.
Figure: Slinky Ground Heat Exchanger Configurations.
Figure: Schematic of Slinky HX.
An example GroundHeatExchanger:Slinky object is shown below.

GroundHeatExchanger :Slinky ,
Slinky GHX , !- Name
GHE Inlet Node , !- Inlet Node
GHE Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node
0.0033 , !- Design Flow Rate [m3/s]
1.2, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity [W/m-K]
3200, !- Soil Density [kg/m3]
850, !- Soil Specific Heat [J/kg -K]
1.8, !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity [W/m-K]
920, !- Pipe Density [kg/m3]
2200, !- Pipe Specific Heat [J/kg -K]
0.02667 , !- Pipe Outside Diameter [m]
0.002413 , !- Pipe Wall Thickness [m]
Vertical , !- Heat Exchanger Configuration (Vertical , Horizontal)
1, !- Coil Diameter [m]
0.2, !- Coil Pitch [m]
1108 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.100: slinky heat exchanger

Figure 1.101: slinky heat exchanger

1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1109

2.5, !- Trench Depth [m]

40, !- Trench Length [m]
15, !- Number of Parallel Trenches
2, !- Trench Spacing [m]
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature
Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
10; !- Maximum length of simulation [years]

1.25.17.1 Inputs

1.25.17.1.1 Field: Name

Alpha field used as identifying field for heat exchanger

1.25.17.1.2 Field: Inlet Node

This alpha field is the name of the inlet node of the component on a plant loop.

1.25.17.1.3 Field: Outlet Node

This alpha field is the name of the outlet node of the component on a plant loop.

1.25.17.1.4 Field: Design Flow Rate

This numeric field is the design flow rate in m3/s for the heat exchanger. The plant loop will attempt
to meet this request based on loop and flow conditions.

1.25.17.1.5 Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field is the thermal conductivity of the soil, in W/m-K.

1.25.17.1.6 Field: Soil Density

This numeric field is the density of the soil, in kg/m3.

1.25.17.1.7 Field: Soil Specific Heat

This numeric field is the specific heat of the soil, in J/kg-K.

1.25.17.1.8 Field: Pipe Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field is the thermal conductivity of the heat exchanger pipe.

1.25.17.1.9 Field: Pipe Density

This numeric field is the density of the heat exchanger pipe, in kg/m3.

1.25.17.1.10 Field: Pipe Specific Heat

This numeric field is the specific heat of the heat exchanger pipe, in J/kg-K.
1110 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.17.1.11 Field: Pipe Outside Diameter

This numeric field is the outside pipe diameter, in meters.

1.25.17.1.12 Field: Pipe Wall Thickness

This numeric field is the pipe wall thickness, in meters.

1.25.17.1.13 Field: Heat Exchanger Configuration

This alpha field is heat exchanger configuration, either Vertical or Horizontal.

1.25.17.1.14 Field: Coil Diameter

This numeric is the diameter of the slinky coil, in meters.

1.25.17.1.15 Field: Coil Pitch

This numeric field is the center-to-center distance between heat exchanger coils, in meters.

1.25.17.1.16 Field: Trench Depth

This numeric field is the distance from the bottom of the trench to the ground surface, in meters.

1.25.17.1.17 Field: Trench Length

This numeric field is the length of the heat exchanger trench, in meters. This assumes the heat
exchanger runs the full length of the trench.

1.25.17.1.18 Field: Number of Parallel Trenches

This numeric field is the number of parallel trenches. Design flow rate will be equally divided among
all parallel trenches.

1.25.17.1.19 Field: Trench Spacing

This numeric field is the center-to-center distance in between parallel trenches, in meters.

1.25.17.1.20 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The type of undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for the
farfield boundary conditions.

1.25.17.1.21 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The name of the undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for
the farfield boundary conditions.

1.25.17.1.22 Field: Maximum Length of Simulation

This numeric field contains the maximum number of years of simulation to be carried out.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1111

1.25.17.2 Outputs

The following output variables are available.

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Average Borehole Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Average Fluid Temperature [C]

1.25.17.2.1 Ground Heat Exchanger Average Borehole Temperature [C]

This is the model result for the average temperature of the borehole heat exchanger.

1.25.17.2.2 Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate of heat transfer between the working fluid and the ground heat exchanger, in Watts.

1.25.17.2.3 Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the working fluid entering the ground heat exchanger.

1.25.17.2.4 Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the working fluid leaving the ground heat exchanger.

1.25.17.2.5 Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the mass flow rate of the working fluid through the heat exchanger.

1.25.17.2.6 Ground Heat Exchanger Average Fluid Temperature [C]

This is the average temperature of the working fluid inside the heat exchanger.

1.25.18 GroundHeatExchanger:Pond
The pond heat exchanger model represents a shallow pond with submerged hydronic tubes through
which the heat transfer fluid is circulated. The model represents a ‘shallow’ pond in that no attempt
is made to model any stratification effects that may be present in deeper ponds.
This type of heat exchanger is intended to be connected to the supply side of a condenser loop, and
can be used with any type of plant loop. The pond may be specified as the only heat exchanger
on the condenser loop (as shown in Figure 1.102) or it may be connected in parallel with other
condenser loop heat exchangers (such as cooling towers, ground surface heat exchangers) as shown
in the second figure below.
1112 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.102: Example of Pond Ground Heat Exchanger as only heat exchanger on condenser loop

Figure 1.103: Pond Ground Heat Exchanger with other heat exchangers on condenser loop
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1113

1.25.18.1 Inputs

1.25.18.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the outside pond heat exchanger.

1.25.18.1.2 Field: Fluid Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the fluid inlet node name.

1.25.18.1.3 Field: Fluid Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the fluid outlet node name.

1.25.18.1.4 Field: Pond Depth

This numeric field contains the pond depth {m}.

1.25.18.1.5 Field: Pond Area

This numeric field contains the pond area m2 .

1.25.18.1.6 Field: Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing inside diameter {m}.

1.25.18.1.7 Field: Hydronic Tubing Outside Diameter

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing outside diameter {m}.

1.25.18.1.8 Field: Hydronic Tubing Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing thermal conductivity in W/mK.

1.25.18.1.9 Field: Ground Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field contains the ground thermal conductivity in W/m2 K.

1.25.18.1.10 Field: Number of Tubing Circuits

This numeric field contains the number of hydronic tubing circuits, total in parallel in this pond..

1.25.18.1.11 Field: Length of Each Tubing Circuit

This numeric field contains length {m} of each hydronic tubing circuit.
An example of the IDF is shown below.

GroundHeatExchanger :Pond ,
Pond 1, !- Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Fluid Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Fluid Outlet Node Name
2.0, !- Pond Depth {m}
1000.0 , !- Pond Area {m2}
0.02, !- Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter {m}
1114 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.025 , !- Hydronic Tubing Outside Diameter {m}

0.4, !- Hydronic Tubing Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
1.0, !- Ground Thermal Conductivity {W/m2 -K}
10, !- Number of Tubing Circuits
50.0; !- Length of Each Tubing Circuit {m}

1.25.18.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Pond Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Pond Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Pond Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Pond Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Pond Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Pond Heat Exchanger Bulk Temperature [C]

1.25.18.2.1 Pond Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.25.18.2.2 Pond Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These outputs are the pond ground heat exchanger heat transfer rate and total energy exchange for
the timestep.

1.25.18.2.3 Pond Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.25.18.2.4 Pond Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.18.2.5 Pond Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]

These outputs are the pond fluid inlet and outlet temperatures and mass flow rate.

1.25.18.2.6 Pond Heat Exchanger Bulk Temperature [C]

This output is the pond bulk temperature.

1.25.19 GroundHeatExchanger:Surface
The surface heat exchanger model is to simulate hydronic surface ground heat exchangers. This
includes pavement surfaces with embedded pipes for snow-melting or heat rejection from hybrid
ground source heat pump systems.
The heat exchanger may be ground coupled or not. In the latter case the bottom surface is exposed
to the wind but not solar gains. This type of heat exchanger is intended to be connected to the
supply side of a condenser loop, and can be used with any type of plant loop. The surface heat
exchanger may be specified as the only heat exchanger on the condenser loop (as shown in the first
figure below) or it may be connected in parallel with other condenser loop heat exchangers (such as
cooling towers, ground surface heat exchangers) as shown in the second figure below.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1115

Figure 1.104: Example of Surface Ground Heat Exchanger as only heat exchanger on condenser
loop

Figure 1.105: Surface Ground Heat Exchanger with other heat exchangers on condenser loop
1116 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.19.1 Inputs

1.25.19.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the outside panel heat exchanger.

1.25.19.1.2 Field: Construction Name

This alpha field contains the construction name. It must contain a valid “Construction” name that
is usual for Surfaces. (Ref: Group – Surface Construction Elements).

1.25.19.1.3 Field: Fluid Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the fluid inlet node name.

1.25.19.1.4 Field: Fluid Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the fluid outlet node name.

1.25.19.1.5 Field: Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing inside diameter in m.

1.25.19.1.6 Field: Number of Tubing Circuits

This numeric field contains the number of hydronic tubing circuits.

1.25.19.1.7 Field: Hydronic Tube Spacing

This numeric field contains the hydronic tube spacing in m.

1.25.19.1.8 Field: Surface Length

This numeric field contains the surface length in m.

1.25.19.1.9 Field: Surface Width

This numeric field contains the surface width in m.

1.25.19.1.10 Field: Lower Surface Environment

This alpha field expresses the lower surface exposure: Exposed or Ground.
An example of this statement in an IDF is shown below:

GroundHeatExchanger :Surface ,
SURFACE 1, !- Name
Outside Surface Construction , !- Construction Name
Condenser Tower 1 Inlet Node , !- Fluid Inlet Node Name
Condenser Tower 1 Outlet Node , !- Fluid Outlet Node Name
0.02, !- Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter {m}
10.0, !- Number of Tubing Circuits
0.3, !- Hydronic Tube Spacing {m}
100.0 , !- Surface Length {m}
100.0 , !- Surface Width {m}
GROUND; !- Lower Surface Environment
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1117

1.25.19.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Surface Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Top Surface Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average Ground Heat Exchanger Bottom Surface Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Top Surface Heat Transfer Energy per Area [J/m2]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Bottom Surface Heat Transfer Energy per Area[J/m2]
– HVAC,Sum,Ground Heat Exchanger Surface Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Source Temperature [C]

1.25.19.2.1 Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.25.19.2.2 Ground Heat Exchanger Surface Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.25.19.2.3 Ground Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These outputs are the source heat transfer rate, surface heat transfer rate and the total source energy
input for the timestep.

1.25.19.2.4 Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.25.19.2.5 Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.19.2.6 Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]

These outputs are the surface heat exchanger fluid inlet and outlet temperatures and mass flow rate.

1.25.19.2.7 Ground Heat Exchanger Top Surface Temperature [C]

1.25.19.2.8 Ground Heat Exchanger Bottom Surface Temperature [C]

These outputs are the surface heat exchanger top and bottom surface temperatures.

1.25.19.2.9 Ground Heat Exchanger Top Surface Heat Transfer Energy per
Area [J/m2 ]

1.25.19.2.10 Ground Heat Exchanger Bottom Surface Heat Transfer Energy per
Area [J/m2 ]
These outputs are the surface heat exchanger top and bottom surface flux.
1118 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.19.2.11 Ground Heat Exchanger Surface Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total surface energy exchange for the timestep.

1.25.19.2.12 Ground Heat Exchanger Source Temperature [C]

This is the surface heat exchanger source temperature.

1.25.20 GroundHeatExchanger:HorizontalTrench
The horizontal trench ground heat exchanger object provides an alternate interface to the detailed
PipingSystem:Underground:* objects. The same underlying simulation algorithm is utilized, pro-
viding a transient numerical simulation of soil with buried pipes and a detailed surface heat bal-
ance. The input syntax is much smaller and useful for simple applications. For full flexibility,
use the PipingSystem:Underground:* objects to build a detailed simulation domain and piping cir-
cuit. For information regarding the simulation algorithms, see the engineering reference document
section covering the buried piping system objects.
Field: Name
This alpha field is used as an identifying field for the ground heat exchanger.
Field: Inlet Node Name
This alpha field is the name of the inlet node of this component on a plant loop, and must match
other topology definitions such as branch objects.
Field: Outlet Node Name
This alpha field is the name of the outlet node of this component on a plant loop, and must match
other topology definitions such as branch objects.
Field: Design Flow Rate [m3/s]
This numeric field is the designed flow rate for this heat exchanger; the plant loop solver will attempt
to meet this request based on flow and loop conditions.
Field: Trench Length in Pipe Axial Direction [m]
This numeric field represents the axial length of each pipe trench. Each pipe defined for this ground
heat exchanger will have the same length. If different pipes have different lengths, they must use
separate GroundHeatExchanger:HorizontalTrench objects with different lengths.
Field: Number of Trenches
This integer field is the number of trenches for this heat exchanger. Since each trench has a single
pipe, this defines the number of “pipe segments” for this overall heat exchanger. The total piping
length is then calculated as the trench length times the number of trenches.
Field: Horizontal Spacing Between Pipes [m]
This numeric field represents the horizontal spacing (pipe centroid to pipe centroid) between
pipes/trenches.
Field: Pipe Inner Diameter [m]
This numeric field is the inner diameter of the pipe. The same pipe properties are used for all pipes
in this heat exchanger.
Field: Pipe Outer Diameter [m]
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1119

This numeric field is the outer diameter of the pipe. The same pipe properties are used for all pipes
in this heat exchanger.
Field: Burial Depth [m]
This numeric field is the burial depth of each pipe, from ground surface to pipe cross section centroid.
The same pipe depth is used for all pipes in this heat exchanger.
Field: Soil Thermal Conductivity [W/mK]
This numeric field is the soil thermal conductivity.
Field: Soil Density [kg/m3]
This numeric field is the soil density.
Field: Soil Specific Heat [J/kgK]
This numeric field is the nominal soil specific heat, but is corrected for moisture content and in
freezing conditions.
Field: Pipe Thermal Conductivity [W/mK]
This numeric field is the pipe thermal conductivity.
Field: Pipe Density [kg/m3]
This numeric field is the pipe density.
Field: Pipe Specific Heat [J/kgK]
This numeric field is the pipe specific heat.
Field: Soil Moisture Content Percent [%]
This numeric field represents the volume fraction, in percent, of water content in the soil.
Field: Soil Moisture Content Percent at Saturation [%]
This numeric field represents the volume fraction, in percent, of water content in the soil which
results in saturation.

1.25.20.1 Inputs

1.25.20.1.1 Field: Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The type of undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for the
farfield boundary conditions.

1.25.20.1.2 Field: Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object

The name of the undisturbed ground temperature object used to determine ground temperature for
the farfield boundary conditions.
Field: Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter [-]
This numeric field specifies the ground cover effects used in the evapotranspiration model at the
ground surface heat balance. The values range from 0 (solid, non-permeable ground surface) to 1.5
(wild growth).
An example of this statement in an IDF is shown below:
1120 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

GroundHeatExchanger :HorizontalTrench ,
My Pipe Circuit , !- Name
Plant Supply Intermediate Node , !- Inlet Node Name
Plant Supply Outlet Node , !- Outlet Node Name
0.004 , !- Design Flow Rate
75, !- Trench Length in Pipe Axial Direction
2, !- Number of Trenches
2.0, !- Horizontal Spacing Between Pipes
0.016 , !- Pipe Inner Diameter
0.02667 , !- Pipe Outer Diameter
1.25, !- Burial Depth
1.08, !- Soil Thermal Conductivity
962, !- Soil Density
2576, !- Soil Specific Heat
0.3895 , !- Pipe Thermal Conductivity {W/m-K}
641, !- Pipe Density {kg/m3}
2405, !- Pipe Specific Heat {J/kg -K}
30, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction {percent}
50, !- Soil Moisture Content Volume Fraction at Saturation {percent}
Site: GroundTemperature :Undisturbed:KusudaAchenbach , !- Type of Undisturbed Ground Temperature
Object
KATemps , !- Name of Undisturbed Ground Temperature Object
0.408; !- Evapotranspiration Ground Cover Parameter

1.25.20.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Ground Heat Exchanger Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.25.20.2.1 Ground Heat Exchanger Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The output provides the mass flow rate currently being sent through the heat exchanger.

1.25.20.2.2 Ground Heat Exchanger Inlet Temperature [C]

1.25.20.2.3 Ground Heat Exchanger Outlet Temperature [C]

Temperature of fluid at the inlet and outlet of the heat exchanger.

1.25.20.2.4 Ground Heat Exchanger Fluid Heat Transfer Rate [W]

Heat transfer rate for the heat exchanger, defined as positive for fluid heat loss.

1.25.21 HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid
A fluid-to-fluid heat exchanger designed to couple the supply side of one plant or condenser loop to
the demand side of another plant or condenser loop. This heat exchanger is fairly general and can
be configured for use in any application where any two loops need to be connected together. The
only constraints are that that one side must be connected to the supply side of one loop and the
other side connected to the demand side of a different loop.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1121

Because the heat exchanger is intended to be generic, its two sides are distinguished by the nature
of loop side being connected. One side is called Loop Supply Side to indicate the heat exchanger
is situated on the supply side of a loop. The other side is called Loop Demand Side to indicate
it is on the demand side of a loop. The heat exchanger is intended to act as a supply component
for the loop connected to it as the “Loop Supply Side” and as a demand component for the loop
connected to it as the “Loop Demand Side.” From the point of view of the heat exchanger model
itself, the Loop Demand Side fluid serves as the source/sink to supply heating/cooling to the fluid
in the Loop Supply Side.
This heat exchanger can be used for a wide variety of applications including chilled water, hot water,
condenser, ground source, primary-secondary systems, etc. Heat transfer is calculated and reported
using a sign convention from chilled water applications where positive heat transfer indicates
energy was extracted from the Loop Supply Side and added to the Loop Demand Side.
Note: Only hydronic “plant” fluids are allowed (excepting Fluid Type ”Steam”), no air-side con-
nections are possible with this heat exchanger.

Figure 1.106: Plant Fluid-to-Fluid Heat Exchanger

Various options are available for the heat exchanger model.

– The heat transfer between the two sides can be modeled using one of seven different models
for different types of heat exchangers.
– There are also eleven options for different ways to control the heat exchanger.
1122 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

∗ One general type of control is OnOff where the flow through the heat exchanger is either
fully on or fully off.
∗ Another type of control is Modulated where the flow through the Loop Demand Side is
controlled to try and meet a target setpoint or load on the Loop Supply Side.

As of Version 8.0, this object replaces three separate objects that were available prior to
version 8.0 of EnergyPlus.

– The former HeatExchanger:Hydronic object corresponds to a situation where the Loop

Demand Side is the demand side of condenser loop, the Loop Supply Side is a the supply side
of a chilled water loop, the control type is “CoolingSetpointOnOffWithComponentOverride”,
and the remote override component is a chiller.
– The former HeatExchanger:WatersideEconomizer object corresponds to a situation where
the Loop Demand Side is the demand side of condenser loop, the Loop Supply Side is a the
supply side of a chilled water loop, and the control type is “CoolingDifferentialOnOff.”
– The former HeatExchanger:Plate object corresponds to a situation where the Loop Demand
Side is the demand side of a condenser loop, the Loop Supply Side is the supply side of a second
condenser loop, and the control type is “UncontrolledOn.”

1.25.21.1 Inputs

1.25.21.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field provides the unique identifying name for this heat exchanger.

1.25.21.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field specifies the name of an availability schedule that can be used for supervisory control
of the device. If blank, the default is that heat exchanger is always available. If a scheduled is
named here, then the heat exchanger is available for use whenever the schedule value is greater than
zero. The heat exchanger is not available whenever the schedule value is zero or less.

1.25.21.1.3 Field: Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name

This field specifies the name of a plant system node that connects an inlet of the heat exchanger to
the demand side of a loop. This node must be on a branch located on the demand side of a plant
or condenser loop.

1.25.21.1.4 Field: Loop Demand Side Outlet Node Name

This field specifies the name of a plant system node that connects an outlet of the heat exchanger to
the demand side of a loop. This node must be on a branch located on the demand side of a plant
or condenser loop.

1.25.21.1.5 Field: Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate

This field specifies the design flow rate, in m3 /s, of the hydronic fluid passing through the heat
exchanger on the Loop Demand Side. This field is autosizable. When autosized, this design flow
rate is set to equal the design flow rate for the Loop Supply Side.
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1123

1.25.21.1.6 Field: Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name

This field specifies the name of a plant system node that connects an inlet of the heat exchanger to
the supply side of a loop. This node must be on a branch located on the supply side of a plant or
condenser loop.

1.25.21.1.7 Field: Loop Supply Side Outlet Node Name

This field specifies the name of a plant system node that connects an outlet of the heat exchanger
to the supply side of a loop. This node must be on a branch located on the supply side of a plant
or condenser loop.

1.25.21.1.8 Field: Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate

This field specifies the design flow rate, in m3 /s, of the fluid passing through the heat exchanger on
the Loop Supply Side. This field is autosizable. When autosized, this design flow rate is set equal
to the overall design flow rate of the loop that is connected. If a sizing factor is entered in the field
below, then it is multiplied to modify the design flow rate.

1.25.21.1.9 Field: Heat Exchange Model Type

This alpha field identifies the nature of heat exchanger. Heat exchanger model type is specified by
one of the following four key word choices:

CrossFlowBothUnMixed Specifies a single-pass, cross-flow heat exchanger. The effectiveness

will be calculated using a cross-flow heat exchanger correlation for both streams unmixed.
CrossFlowBothMixed Specifies a single-pass, cross-flow heat exchanger. The effectiveness will
be calculated using a cross-flow heat exchanger correlation for both streams mixed.
CrossFlowSupplyMixedDemandUnMixed Specifes a single-pass, cross-flow heat exchanger.
The effectiveness will be calculated using a cross-flow heat exchanger correlation for flow mixed
on the Loop Supply side and flow unmixed on the Loop Demand Side.
CrossFlowSupplyUnMixedDemandMixed Specifes a single-pass, cross-flow heat exchanger.
The effectiveness will be calculated using a cross-flow heat exchanger correlation for flow un-
mixed on the Loop Supply side and flow mixed on the Loop Demand Side.
CounterFlow Specifies a counter-flow shell and tube heat exchanger (one fluid has the opposite
direction to the other fluid). The effectiveness will be calculated using a counter-flow shell and
tube heat exchanger correlation.
ParallelFlow Specifies a parallel-flow shell and tube heat exchanger (both fluids have the same di-
rection). The effectiveness will be calculated using a parallel-flow shell and tube heat exchanger
correlation.
Ideal Specifies an ideal heat exchanger. The effectiveness will be set to ‘1.0’ and the specified UA
will be ignored. The heat transfer rate will be calculated as the maximum possible heat transfer
rate.

For effectiveness of each heat exchanger model type in detail, See ”Heat Exchangers: Plant Loop
Fluid-to-Fluid Heat Exchanger” Section in Engineering Reference.
1124 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25.21.1.10 Field: Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value

This numerical field is used to specify the overall U-Factor Times Area (UA) {W/K} for use in the
calculation of the heat exchanger effectiveness using the appropriate D-NTU correlation. If Ideal is
specified as the heat exchanger type, the effectiveness will be set to 1.0. When set to autosize Heat
Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value is calculated based on an effectiveness of 1.0 where capacity
is such that the temperatures in the Sizing:Plant objects for the two loops can be maintained.

1.25.21.1.11 Field: Control Type

This field is used to specify how the heat exchanger is to be controlled during operation. Different
applications for connecting two loops will require different control behavior and different control
options are needed depending on the desired behavior. There are the following eleven key choice
options to choose from:

– UncontrolledOn. This control mode is applicable to situations where the heat exchanger
is passively running all the time and always transfers as much heat as possible between the
fluid streams. However there is one aspect of control in that it will only request flow on the
Loop Demand Side when there is non-zero flow into the heat exchanger on the Loop Supply
Side. This control mode corresponds to that available in the HeatExchanger:Plate object prior
to version 8.0.
– OperationSchemeModulated. This control mode is applicable to situations where the
heat exchanger is controlled by an operation scheme (see objects called PlantEquipmentOp-
erationScheme or CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes). When using this control mode
the heat exchanger must be listed in PlantEquipmentList or a CondenserEquipmentList and it
serves as a supply component. The operation scheme will dispatch a load request to the heat
exchanger which it will try meet by conditioning the fluid stream connected as the Loop Supply
Side. If the heat exchanger could exceed the load request, then the flow through the fluid
stream connected as the Loop Demand Side will be modulated to just meet the load request.
– OperationSchemeOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the heat
exchanger is controlled by an operation scheme (see objects called PlantEquipmentOpera-
tionScheme or CondenserEquipmentOperationSchemes). When using this control mode the
heat exchanger must be listed in PlantEquipmentList or a CondenserEquipmentList and it
serves as a supply component. The operation scheme will dispatch a load request to the heat
exchanger which it will use as an on/off signal to decide if the heat exchange should run or
not. If it runs, it will run at full capacity and may exceed the load request.
– HeatingSetpointModulated. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop
Demand Side can provide useful heating to the Loop Supply Side. A heating setpoint is
obtained from a node named in the following field. If the setpoint and inlet temperatures are
such that heat exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Demand Side to the Loop Supply
Side to meet the heating setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures
must differ by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference
to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. If the heat exchanger could
overshoot the setpoint, then the flow through the fluid stream connected as the Loop Demand
Side will be modulated to just meet the setpoint.
– HeatingSetpointOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop De-
mand Side can provide useful heating to the Loop Supply Side. A heating setpoint is obtained
from a node named in the following field. If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such that
heat exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Demand Side to the Loop Supply Side to
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1125

meet the heating setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must differ
by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate
Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. If it runs, it will run at full capacity and
may overshoot the setpoint.
– CoolingSetpointModulated. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop
Demand Side can provide useful cooling to the Loop Supply Side. A cooling setpoint is
obtained from a node named in the following field. If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are
such that heat exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand
Side to meet the cooling setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures
must differ by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference
to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. If the heat exchanger could
undershoot the setpoint, then the flow through the fluid stream connected as the Loop Demand
Side will be modulated to just meet the setpoint.
– CoolingSetpointOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop De-
mand Side can provide useful cooling to the Loop Supply Side. A cooling setpoint is obtained
from a node named in the following field. If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such
that heat exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand Side
to meet the cooling setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must
differ by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature Difference to Acti-
vate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. If it runs, it will run at full capacity
and may undershoot the setpoint. This control mode corresponds to that available in the
HeatExchanger:WatersideEconomizer object prior to version 8.0.
– DualDeadbandSetpointModulated. This control mode is applicable to situations where
the Loop Demand Side can provide either useful cooling or heating to the Loop Supply Side. A
dual deadband setpoint is obtained from a node named in the following field. If the setpoints
and inlet temperatures are such that heat exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Demand
Side to the Loop Supply Side to meet the lower setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run.
If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such that heat exchanger could transfer heat from
the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand Side to meet the high setpoint, then the heat
exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must differ by more than the value set in the field
called Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to
operate. If the heat exchanger could overshoot the lower setpoint, or undershoot the higher
setpoint, then the flow through the fluid stream connected as the Loop Demand Side will be
modulated to just meet the deadband setpoint.
– DualDeadbandSetpointOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the
Loop Demand Side can provide either useful cooling or heating to the Loop Supply Side. A
dual deadband setpoint is obtained from a node named in the following field. If the setpoints
and inlet temperatures are such that heat exchanger could transfer heat from the Loop Demand
Side to the Loop Supply Side to meet the lower setpoint, then the heat exchanger will run.
If the setpoints and inlet temperatures are such that heat exchanger could transfer heat from
the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand Side to meet the high setpoint, then the heat
exchanger will run. The inlet temperatures must differ by more than the value set in the field
called Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to
operate. If the heat exchanger runs, it will run at full capacity and may overshoot the lower
setpoint or undershoot the higher setpoint.
– CoolingDifferentialOnOff. This control mode is applicable to situations where the Loop
Demand Side can provide useful cooling to the Loop Supply Side. This mode is similar to
1126 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

CoolingSetpointOnOff except that it ignores any cooling setpoint and its control is based only
on the temperature difference between Loop Demand Side and the Loop Supply Side. The inlet
temperatures must differ by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature
Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. This control
mode corresponds to that available in the HeatExchanger:WatersideEconomizer object prior
to version 8.0.
– CoolingSetpointOnOffWithComponentOverride. This control mode is applicable to sit-
uations where the heat exchanger operation is integrated with the operation of a specific chiller.
Typically the heat exchanger and chiller are in parallel on separate branches. When conditions
are favorable for the heat exchanger to provide cooling to the Loop Supply Side, the heat ex-
changer is run and the integrated chiller is turned off. When conditions are not favorable, the
heat exchanger is competely off and the chiller is allowed to run as usual. A cooling setpoint is
obtained from a node named in the following field. If it runs it will run at full capacity and may
undershoot the setpoint. The chiller that is integrated with the heat exchanger is identified by
entering the names of the chiller’s inlet nodes in the input fields below. The control decision
can be based on one of three different temperature signals selected in the field below called
Component Override Cooling Control Temperature Mode. The setpoint and control signal
temperatures must differ by more than the value set in the field called Minimum Temperature
Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger for the heat exchanger to operate. This control mode
corresponds to that available in the HeatExchanger:Hydronic object prior to version 8.0.

1.25.21.1.12 Field: Heat Exchanger Setpoint Node Name

This field specifies the name of a plant system node located on loop attached to the Loop Supply
Side. This field is used and required when the previous field is set to one of the “Setpoint” control
types. The node must have a temperature setpoint placed on it by a setpoint manager (or EMS
actuator).
If the previous field is set to DualDeadbandSetpointModulated or DeadbandSetpointOnOff then
there must be a setpoint manager that places both a high and low setpoint on the node named in
this field. (see SetpointManager:Scheduled:DualSetpoint).

1.25.21.1.13 Field: Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Ex-

changer
This field specifies the value of a temperature tolerance used in control decisions, in deg. Cel-
sius. Whenever the control logic needs to compare two temperatures, the value entered in this field
is used as a threshold for comparisons.

1.25.21.1.14 Field: Heat Transfer Metering End Use Type

This field specifies how the metering for heat transfer will be accounted with respect to end uses. Al-
though the heat exchanger consumes no energy that needs to be metered, there are also meters for
heat transfers that apply to the model. The nature of the end use may vary depending on the applica-
tion that the heat exchanger is being used for. The available choices are FreeCooling, HeatRecovery,
HeatRejection, HeatRecoveryForCooling, HeatRecoveryForHeating, and LoopToLoop.

1.25.21.1.15 Field: Component Override Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name
This field specifies the name of an inlet node for the remote component that will be integrated with
this heat exchanger. This inlet should be on the supply side of a loop – typically chilled water
1.25. GROUP – CONDENSER EQUIPMENT 1127

inlet or return for a chiller. This field and the next two are only used for the control type called
CoolingSetpointOnOffWithComponentOverride.

1.25.21.1.16 Field: Component Override Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name
This field specifies the name of an inlet node for the remote component that will be integrated
with this heat exchanger. This inlet should be on the demand side of a loop – typically condenser
water inlet or return for a water-cooled chiller. This field is only used for the control type called
CoolingSetpointOnOffWithComponentOverride.

1.25.21.1.17 Field: Component Override Cooling Control Temperature Mode

This field specifies which type of temperature is used to control a heat exchanger that uses the con-
trol type called CoolingSetpointOnOffWithComponentOverride. There are three options: Loop,
WetBulbTemperature, and DryBulbTemperature. The option called “Loop” directs the program to
use the inlet fluid temperature at the Loop Demand Side connection of heat exchanger for the tem-
perature used as a signal to be compared with the setpoint. The option call “WetBulbTemperature”
uses the outdoor air wetbulb temperature as the signal. The option called “DryBulbTemperature”
uses the outdoor air drybulb temperature as the signal.

1.25.21.1.18 Field: Sizing Factor

This optional field can be used to modify the results of autosize calculations. This sizing factor is
used for this heat exchanger and modifies sizing results by multiplying them by the factor entered
here. This factor is applied to the Loop Supply Side Design Flow rate and in turn affects the heat
exchanger UA and the loop demand side flow rate which are derived from that flow rate. This
allows fine control over the size of the heat exchanger when using autosize in those fields.

1.25.21.1.19 Field: Operation Minimum Temperature Limit

This optional field can be used to provide supervisory control of the heat exchanger. If either of the
inlet temperatures are below this limit (°C), the heat exchanger will not operate.

1.25.21.1.20 Field: Operation Maximum Temperature Limit

This optional field can be used to provide supervisory control of the heat exchanger. If either of the
inlet temperatures are above this limit (°C), the heat exchanger will not operate.
Some example IDF input objects follow.

HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid ,
CondenserLoop HX ,!- Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Availability Schedule Name
CondenserLoop HX HX Inlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name
CondenserLoop HX HX Outlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate
CondenserLoop Pump - HXNode , !- Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name
CondenserLoop HX - ChillerNode ,!- Loop Supply Side Outlet Node Name
autosize , !- Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate
CounterFlow , !- Heat Exchange Model Type
autosize , !- Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value
CoolingDifferentialOnOff , !- Control Type
, !- Heat Exchanger Setpoint Node Name
2.0, !- Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger
FreeCooling; !- Heat Transfer Metering End Use Type
1128 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

HeatExchanger:FluidToFluid ,
SOURCE to TRANSFER HX , !- Name
AlwaysOnSchedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
SOURCE Demand HX Inlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Inlet Node Name
SOURCE Demand HX Outlet Node , !- Loop Demand Side Outlet Node Name
0.003 , !- Loop Demand Side Design Flow Rate
TRANSFER HX Supply Inlet Node , !- Loop Supply Side Inlet Node Name
TRANSFER HX Supply Outlet Node , !- Loop Supply Side Outlet Node Name
0.003 , !- Loop Supply Side Design Flow Rate
CrossFlow , !- Heat Exchange Model Type
15000 , !- Heat Exchanger U-Factor Times Area Value
DualDeadbandSetpointModulated , !- Control Type
TRANSFER Supply Outlet Node , !- Heat Exchanger Setpoint Node Name
0.2 , !- Minimum Temperature Difference to Activate Heat Exchanger
LoopToLoop; !- Heat Transfer Metering End Use Type

1.25.21.2 Outputs

1.25.21.2.1 Fluid Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.25.21.2.2 Fluid Heat Exchanger Heat Transfer Energy [J]

These outputs are the rate and energy transferred from the Loop Supply Side to the Loop Demand
Side. The sign convention is taken from cooling or heat rejection applications such that positive
values indicate cooling of the Loop Supply Side.

1.25.21.2.3 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Supply Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is the system mass flow of fluid through the heat exchanger side connected as the Loop Supply
Side, in kg/s.

1.25.21.2.4 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Supply Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid entering the heat exchanger on the side
connected as the Loop Supply Side.

1.25.21.2.5 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Supply Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid leaving the heat exchanger on the side
connected as the Loop Supply Side.

1.25.21.2.6 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Demand Side Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is the system mass flow of fluid through the heat exchanger side connected as the Loop Demand
Side, in kg/s.

1.25.21.2.7 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Demand Side Inlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid entering the heat exchanger on the side
connected as the Loop Demand Side.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1129

1.25.21.2.8 Fluid Heat Exchanger Loop Demand Side Outlet Temperature [C]
This is the temperature, in degrees Celsius, of the fluid leaving the heat exchanger on the side
connected as the Loop Demand Side.

1.25.21.2.9 Fluid Heat Exchanger Operation Status [0 = off, 1 = on]

This output is a numeric flag that indicates whether or not the heat exchanger was operating or
not. If the value is 0, then the heat exchanger was not operating. If the value is 1, then the heat
was operating.

1.25.21.2.10 Fluid Heat Exchanger Effectiveness []

This output is the calculated heat exchanger effectiveness (non-dimensional). It is an intermediate
value in the NTU model calculations for heat flow rate. Values range between 0 and 1.0. A value
of 1.0 indicates ideal heat transfer.

1.26 Group – Air Distribution

1.26.1 AirLoopHVAC
Air loops along with zone equipment form the entire forced air heating and cooling system (air side).
The main statement for defining an air loop is the AirLoopHVAC object described here. As with the
main plant and condenser statements, several of the items in the AirLoopHVAC object definition are
actually names that refer to other objects in the input file. After the AirLoopHVAC object name,
four such list pointers are encountered: for controllers, system availability, branches, and connectors.
The Controller List defines how the air loop will respond due to various inputs (control signals). The
Availability Manager List refers to methods for controlling when a system is operational. This may
be as simple as a schedule to define when the system is shutdown. The Branch List lists the branches
that comprise the primary air system. Finally, the Connector List lists the connections between the
branches. The branches and connections together define the primary air system topology.
The only numeric input is the design primary air flow rate. This item is input just before the
BranchList name.
The next series of names refer to nodes for the various inlet and outlet points of the air loop. The
air loop starts where the zone equipment ends. This is a single point consisting of the return air
duct once all of the zone return air streams have been collected (if the loop has a return path).
While in reality, there is really only one point, for clarity within the simulation components and
consistency with the other HVAC loop sections, this point in the systems is defined as two points:
one that resides with the zone equipment simulation and one that is acted upon by the air loop
simulation. Both node names must be entered into the input file (if the loop has a return path), and
both nodes must have unique names. Similarly, the end points of the air loop that also correspond
to the beginning points of the zone equipment loop must also be defined. These consist of names
referencing lists of up to three pairs of node names as shown below. Up to three air loop outlets are
allowed to accommodate the simulation of three duct systems.

1.26.1.0.1 Schedules And Availability Manager Regarding component schedules, the

general rule is don’t schedule any components except the supply fan and the corresponding avail-
ability manager(s). Beyond that, every component should always be available and let the controls
1130 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

determine what runs or doesn’t run. If a component other than the supply fan is scheduled off, then
it will remain off even if the night cycle manager turns on the system.

1.26.1.1 Inputs

1.26.1.1.1 Field: Name

This field is a unique, user assigned name for a single instance of an AirLoopHVAC object. Any
other object referencing this AirLoopHVAC will use this name.

1.26.1.1.2 Field: Controller List Name

This field is the name of a ControllerList object. A Controller List is simply a list of controllers
giving both controller name and type. This Controller List specifies all the controllers that will
act on this primary air loop. The order of the controllers in the list is significant: controllers are
simulated sequentially in the order given in the Controller List.

1.26.1.1.3 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This field is the name of a AvailabilityManagerList object. An Availability Manager List is a list of
Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type and name. The availability managers
in the list apply to this primary air loop. That is, they determine when and if this air loop is on or
off, overriding the control provided by the central fan on/off schedule.

1.26.1.1.4 Field: Design Supply Air Flow Rate

This is the system primary air design volumetric flow rate in cubic meters per second.

1.26.1.1.5 Field: Branch List Name

This field is the object name of a BranchList object (see BranchList and Branch). The BranchList
named here specifies all the branches composing the primary air system. These branches, together
with the Connectors listed in the ConnectorList, define the primary air system topology.

1.26.1.1.6 Field: Connector List Name

This field is the name of ConnectorList object. This ConnectorList object lists all the Connectors
(by type and name) that are included in this primary air system. These Connectors, together with
the Branches in the BranchList, define the topology of the primary air system.

1.26.1.1.7 Field: Supply Side Inlet Node Name

The name of the air entrance node of this primary air system. If this air loop has a return path,
then this is the inlet node for return air for this air system. If this air loop does not have a return
path, then this node is where outdoor air or other air enters the supply side.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1131

1.26.1.1.8 Field: Demand Side Outlet Node Name

The name of the air outlet node for the zone equipment group (ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
objects) attached to the primary air system. This should be the outlet node of a AirLoopH-
VAC:ZoneMixer or AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum in the AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPath for the zone
equipment group attached to this primary air system. Leave this field blank if this air loop does not
have a return path.

1.26.1.1.9 Field: Demand Side Inlet Node Names

This field can be the name of a node which is the air inlet node for the zone equipment group
(see ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections objects) attached to this primary air system. Or, this field
can be the name of a node list containing one or more nodes (up to 3). These nodes should be
the inlet nodes to the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter or AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum in each of the
AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPaths for the zone equipment groups attached to this primary air system. For
single duct systems, there is only one node name in this list. For two and three duct systems, the
order of the nodes in this list must correspond with the order of the nodes in the Supply Side Outlet
Node Names list.

1.26.1.1.10 Field: Supply Side Outlet Node Names

This field can be the name of a node which is the air outlet node for each supply duct of this primary
air system. Or, this field can be the name of a node list containing one or more nodes (up to 3).
The list can contain the names of up to three nodes. For single duct systems, there is only one node
name in this list. For two and three duct systems, the order of the nodes in this list must correspond
with the order of the nodes in the Demand Side Inlet Node Names list.

1.26.1.1.11 Field: Design Return Air Flow Fraction of Supply Air Flow
This field specifies the design air loop return air flow rate as a fraction of the supply flow rate when
there is no exhaust flow. It may be used to set zero return air flow for a DOAS system or to model
a pressurized system where the return flow is a fraction of the supply flow. The return air flow rate
will never be greater than the current supply air flow rate multiplied by this fraction. It may be less
if there is unbalanced exhaust from any zones served by this airloop. The default is 1.0. If the air
loop has no return path, then this field is ignored.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

AirLoopHVAC ,
Main Dual Duct Air Loop , !- Name
Dual Duct System 1 Controllers , !- Controller List Name
Dual Duct System 1 Schedule List , !- Availability Manager List Name
1.3 , !- Design Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Dual Duct Air Loop Branches , !- Branch List Name
Dual Duct Connectors , !- Connector List Name
Supply Fan Inlet Node , !- Supply Side Inlet Node Name
Return Air Mixer Outlet , !- Demand Side Outlet Node Name
Zone Equipment Inlet Node List , !- Demand Side Inlet Node Names
Air Loop Outlet Node List , !- Supply Side Outlet Node Names
1.0; !- Design Return Air Flow Fraction of Supply Air Flow

1.26.1.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Air System Simulation Cycle On Off Status

1132 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,HVAC System Solver Iteration Count []

– HVAC,Sum,Air System Solver Iteration Count []
– HVAC,Sum,Air System Simulation Maximum Iteration Count []
– HVAC,Sum,Air System Simulation Iteration Count []
– HVAC,Sum,Air System Component Model Simulation Calls []

1.26.1.2.1 Air System Simulation Cycle On Off Status

This field is the availability status of an AirLoopHVAC. This status flag is a result of the calcu-
lations made by the System Availability Manager(s) listed in a System Availability Manager List.
When a single availability manager is used in a System Availability Manager List, this is also the
availability status reported by the specific availability manager (Ref. System Availability Manager
Outputs). When multiple availability managers are used in a System Availability Manager List,
the loop availability status is determined by the rules associated with AirLoopHVACs (see rules
described for Group – System Availability Managers). The control status outputs are represented
using integers 0 through 3.. These integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and
CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged, the output result may not corre-
spond to the values described here when output variable frequencies other than detailed are used.
Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the availability status
at each simulation timestep.

1.26.1.2.2 HVAC System Solver Iteration Count [] This field reports the total number
of HVAC System solver iterations in the current system time step or the maximum iterations possible
for this solver if the simulation has not yet converged before it reached the maximum iterations.

1.26.1.2.3 Air System Solver Iteration Count [] This field reports the total number of
Air System solver iterations in the current system time step or the maximum iterations possible for
this solver if the simulation has not yet converged before it reached the maximum iterations.

1.26.1.2.4 Air System Simulation Maximum Iteration Count [] This field reports
the maximum number of iterations possible for an Air System simulation.

1.26.1.2.5 Air System Simulation Iteration Count [] This field reports the total num-
ber of Air System iterations in the current system time step or the maximum iterations possible for
this solver if the simulation has not yet converged before it reached the maximum iterations.

1.26.1.2.6 Air System Component Model Simulation Calls []

These variables are simply counters of how many iterations were executed. The count for any given
HVAC time step will be the iterations executed before convergence was achieved, or the max allowed
in which case the simulation throws a warning and proceeds to the next time step.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1133

1.26.1.3 Outputs

This section provides more detailed information on the reporting available for outdoor air ventila-
tion. Sixteen cooling and heating load variables and eight energy summary variables are available
that report the impact of system outdoor air on zone loads, system demand and total energy use.
The representative air system shown in the diagram below shows outdoor air (OA), return air (RA),
supply air (SA) and mixed air (MA).

Figure 1.107: Example System for Ventilation Loads Report

The overall effect of outdoor air on the system shown above can be summarized by considering the
mixing box. In this system, part or all of the return air is replaced by outdoor air. The presence
of any heat recovery will already be taken into account and thus will automatically be accounted
for by using the outdoor air inlet conditions to the mixing box (point OA in the diagram) rather
than actual outdoor air conditions. Thus, the overall energy impact of outdoor air (ventilation) on
a particular system can be evaluated by multiplying the outdoor air mass flow rate by the enthalpy
difference between the outdoor air entering the mixing box (OA) and the return air entering the
mixing box (RA’) as shown in the following equation.
1134 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

q̇OA = ṁOA (hOA − hRA′ ) = ṁsys (hM A − hRA′ ) (1.101)

1.26.1.3.1 Ventilation Flow Outputs

The fresh air flow into each zone are reported using the ventilation flow output variables. The total
outdoor air flow in a primary air system is divided to each zone based on the fraction of flow each
zone is supplied. There are six variables which deals with the mechanical ventilation flow reporting.
Those six variables are:

1.26.1.3.2 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

Reports the average outdoor air mass flow rate to any zone over the reporting interval.

1.26.1.3.3 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Mass [kg]

Reports the total outdoor air mass that has been supplied to any zone over the reporting interval.

1.26.1.3.4 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Standard Density Volume Flow Rate

[m3/s]
Reports the average outdoor air volume flow rate to any zone over the reporting interval, calculated
using a standard density for air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC drybulb, dry
air, and nominally adjusted for elevation.

1.26.1.3.5 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Standard Density Volume [m3]

Reports the total outdoor air volume that has been supplied to a zone over the reporting interval,
calculated using a standard density for air. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to 20ºC
drybulb, dry air, and nominally adjusted for elevation.

1.26.1.3.6 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Current Density Volume Flow Rate

[m3/s]
Reports the average outdoor air volume flow rate to any zone over the reporting interval, calculated
using the current density for zone air.

1.26.1.3.7 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Current Density Volume [m3]

Reports the total outdoor air volume that has been supplied to a zone over the reporting interval,
calculated using the current density for zone air.

1.26.1.3.8 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Air Changes per Hour [ach]

Reports the air changes per hour in the zone due to the outside fresh air supplied by mechanical
ventilation system.

1.26.1.3.9 Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate [m3/s] The target ventilation flow
rate Voz−dyn at standard density at the current timestep as defined by the zone Design Specification
Outdoor Air Object (DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir:SpaceList).
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1135

1.26.1.3.10 Zone Ventilation Below Target Voz Time [hr] The time that the zone
total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is more than 1% below the
Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.11 Zone Ventilation At Target Voz Time [hr] The time that the zone total
ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is within 1% of the Zone Target
Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.12 Zone Ventilation Above Target Voz Time [hr] The time that the zone
total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is more than 1% above the
Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.13 Zone Ventilation When Unoccupied Time [hr] The time that the zone
total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is greater than zero when the
zone is unoccupied.

1.26.1.3.14 Facility Any Zone Ventilation Below Target Voz Time [hr] The time
that any zone’s total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is more than
1% below the Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.15 Facility All Zones Ventilation At Target Voz Time [hr] The time that
every zone’s total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is within 1% of
the Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.16 Facility Any Zone Ventilation Above Target Voz Time [hr] The time
that any zone’s total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is more than
1% above the Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.17 Facility Any Zone Ventilation When Unoccupied Time [hr] The time
that any zone’s total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is greater than
zero when the zone is unoccupied.

1.26.1.3.18 Air System Mechanical Ventilation Flow Rate [m3/s] The current
airloop mechanical ventilation flow rate at standard density.

1.26.1.3.19 Air System Natural Ventilation Flow Rate [m3/s] The sum of the nat-
ural ventilation flow rate at standard density at the current timestep for each zone on the airloop.
If any zone terminal unit has a Design Specification Air Terminal Sizing Object (DesignSpecifica-
tion:AirTerminal:Sizing) then the natural ventilation rate for that zone is scaled by the Fraction of
Minimum Outdoor Air Flow value.

1.26.1.3.20 Air System Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate [m3/s] The sum of
the target ventilation flow rates Voz−dyn at standard density at the current timestep for each zone
on the airloop. If any zone terminal unit has a Design Specification Air Terminal Sizing Object
(DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing) then the target ventilation rate for that zone is scaled by
the Fraction of Minimum Outdoor Air Flow value.
1136 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.26.1.3.21 Air System Ventilation Below Target Voz Time [hr] The time that the
airloop total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is more than 1% below
the Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.22 Air System Ventilation At Target Voz Time [hr] The time that the
airloop total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is within 1% of the
Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.23 Air System Ventilation Above Target Voz Time [hr] The time that
the airloop total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is more than 1%
above the Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate.

1.26.1.3.24 Air System Ventilation When Unoccupied Time [hr] The time that
the airloop total ventilation rate (mechanical ventilation plus natural ventilation) is greater than
zero when all of the zones on the airloop are unoccupied.
The example syntax below shows the basic ventilation flow variables reported on an hourly basis.

– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Mass Flow Rate,Hourly;

– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Mass,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Standard Density Volume Flow Rate,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Standard Density Volume,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Current Density Volume Flow Rate,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Current Density Volume,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Zone Mechanical Ventilation Air Changes per Hour,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Zone Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Zone Ventilation Below Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Zone Ventilation At Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Zone Ventilation Above Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Zone Ventilation When Unoccupied Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Facility Any Zone Ventilation Below Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Facility All Zones Ventilation At Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Facility Any Zone Ventilation Above Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Facility Any Zone Ventilation When Unoccupied Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Mechanical Ventilation Flow Rate,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Natural Ventilation Flow Rate,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Target Voz Ventilation Flow Rate,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Ventilation Below Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Ventilation At Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Ventilation Above Target Voz Time,Hourly;
– Output:Variable,*, Air System Ventilation When Unoccupied Time,Hourly;
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1137

1.26.1.3.25 Ventilation Load Reports

The impact of system outdoor air on a particular zone may be calculated by summing the mass flow
weighted q̇OA over the supply air paths (both cooling and heating) serving the zone as follows:

AirPX
athN um
ṁn
q̇OA,Zone 1 = q̇OA (1.102)
ṁsys
n=1

Four output variables each for cooling and heating report the impact of the ventilation air on the
zone load in the absence of ventilation air system interactions. The ventilation load output variables
are:

1.26.1.3.26 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Due to Over-

heating Energy [J]

1.26.1.3.27 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Due to Over-

cooling Energy [J]
The cooling/heating load that would occur once ventilation air met the zone cooling/heating load
and continued to overcool/overheat the zone. No system effects are accounted for.

1.26.1.3.28 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Decrease Energy [J]

1.26.1.3.29 Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Decrease[J]

The decrease in zone cooling/heating load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced
directly into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.

1.26.1.3.30 Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Removal Energy [J]

1.26.1.3.31 Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Addition Energy [J]

The addition or removal of heat to a zone with no load. The heat addition or removal is due to
mechanical ventilation while the zone thermostat is in the deadband.
To summarize:
Cooling:
1. Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Removal Energy [J]
Cooling that would be provided directly to zone by ventilation air. Ventilation occurred with no
zone load.
2. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Energy [J]
The increase in zone cooling load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced directly
into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
3. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Due to Overheating Energy
[J]
The cooling load that would occur once ventilation air met the zone heating load and continued to
overheat the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
1138 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

4. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Decrease Energy [J]

The decrease in zone cooling load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced directly
into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
Heating:
1. Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Addition Energy [J]
Heating that would be provided directly to zone by ventilation air. Ventilation occurred with no
zone load.
2. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Energy [J]
The increase in zone heating load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced directly
into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
3. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Due to Overcooling Energy
[J]
The heating load that would occur once ventilation air met the zone cooling load and continued to
overcool the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
4. Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Decrease Energy [J]
The decrease in zone heating load that would occur as a result of ventilation air introduced directly
into the zone. No system effects are accounted for.
The output variables are calculated by comparing the zone ventilation load with the zone cooling
or heating load. ‘Ventilation cooling’ decreases the zone cooling load until the cooling load has
been eliminated. The remaining ‘ventilation cooling’ is reported as ‘overcooling’. ‘Overheating’ is
calculated in the same manner. The actual system operation, which determines whether or not an
‘overcooling’ or ‘overheating’ load actually results in increased energy consumption, is not considered
in the calculation of these output variables.
The ventilation zone load output variables are shown in Table 1.43. The variables report the maxi-
mum potential “cost” or “benefit” of ventilation air introduced directly into the zone.

Table 1.43: Ventilation Load Output Variables

No Zone Load Zone Cooling Load Zone Heating Load

Ventilation Cooling Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation No Load Heat tilation Cooling Load tilation Heating Load
Removal Energy Decrease Energy Increase Energy
Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation Heating Load
Increase Due to Over-
cooling Energy
Ventilation Heating Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven- Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation No Load Heat tilation Cooling Load tilation Heating Load
Addition Energy Increase Energy Decrease Energy
Zone Mechanical Ven-
tilation Cooling Load
Increase Due to Over-
heating Energy
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1139

The example syntax below shows the basic ventilation load variables reported on a monthly basis.

– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Energy,monthly;

– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Decrease Energy,monthly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Addition Energy,monthly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Energy,monthly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Decrease Energy,monthly;
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Removal Energy,monthly;

Reporting on a timestep or hourly level would produce a detailed report with variables intermingled
with the other output variables that might be requested in the input file.
Another method will more easily encapsulate the report:

OutputControl:Table:Style , HTML; !- ColumnSeparator

Output:Table:Monthly ,
Ventilation Loads , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Removal Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Due to Overheating Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Decrease Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Cooling Load Increase Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation No Load Heat Addition Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Due to Overcooling Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Decrease Energy ,
SumOrAverage ,
Zone Mechanical Ventilation Heating Load Increase Energy ,
SumOrAverage;

This combination will report the ventilation loads on a monthly basis in a HTML style report that
can be easily read in a web browser. Review the Output:Table:Monthly object for other methods of
display or further options on this report item.

1.26.2 Systems Level Reporting

Most output variables are a single entity reporting. Meters are a combination of like variables –
specifically for Energy Consumption. This section introduces a slightly different concept – where
output variables described herein are a combination of several similar items – specifically targeted
at HVAC/System level reporting. This reporting is coupled with an Air Loop (ref: AirLoopHVAC)
All items shown in this section are typical “output variables” and can be reported with the Out-
put:Variable object.
Or, as is shown by example here, perhaps a more readable form is to generate them in Tabular Form
with the “Output:Table:Monthly” object.
1140 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.108: View of System Level Reporting

1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1141

1.26.3 System Loads Outputs

In this category, the total system load is reported. Two aspects are reported here: Heating and
Cooling. The following two variables report the heat energy that system components (including
packaged equipment, fans, main coils, reheat coils, humidifiers, desiccant dehumidifiers, evaporative
coolers and heat exchangers) add or remove from the air loop. Each variable within these grouping
wil

1.26.3.1 Air System Total Heating Energy

Heat Addition to the Air Loop (Sum of all components) in Joules

1.26.3.2 Air System Total Cooling Energy

Heat Removal from the Air Loop (Sum of all components) in Joules
In ‘Output:Table:Monthly’ format shown below.

OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;

Output:Table:Monthly ,
System Loads , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage;

1.26.4 System Energy Use Outputs

System Energy Use consists of six output variables that report the total energy (in Joules) and water
consumption (in m3 ) for all system components and including packaged equipment, fans, main coils,
reheat coils, humidifiers, desiccant dehumidifiers, and evaporative coolers. The output variables
shown below show hot and cold water, steam, electric and gas energy. Hot and cold water energy
includes all ‘district cooling’ and ‘district heating’ energy.

1.26.4.1 Air System Hot Water Energy

Hot Water Consumption for the system (Joules).

1.26.4.2 Air System Steam Energy

Steam Consumption for the system (Joules).

1.26.4.3 Air System Chilled Water Energy

Chilled Water Consumption for the system (Joules).

1.26.4.4 Air System Electricity Energy

Electric Consumption for the system (Joules).

1142 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.26.4.5 Air System NaturalGas Energy

Natural Gas Consumption for the system (Joules).

1.26.4.6 Air System Propane Energy

Propane Consumption for the system (Joules).

1.26.4.7 Air System Water Volume

Water Consumption for the system (humidifiers and evaporative coolers) (m3).
The Standard reports file includes these variables reporting in the Tabular report form as “Air Loop
System Energy and Water Use”.

OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;

Output:Table:Monthly ,
Air Loop System Energy and Water Use , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Hot Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Steam Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Chilled Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System NaturalGas Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Water Volume , SumOrAverage;

1.26.5 System Component Loads Outputs

Reporting System Component Loads shows the energy transferred to or extracted from the air
loop by system component type. Fans, Cooling Coils, Heating Coils, Heat exchangers, humidifiers,
evaporative coolers, and desiccant dehumidifiers show heat transfer rates in Joules. The components
may be located in outdoor air systems bundled with packaged equipment or specified as stand-alone
components. The reporting accounts for both main branch and reheat coils.
The Standard reports file includes these variables reporting in the Tabular report form as “Air Loop
System Component Loads”.

OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;

Output:Table:Monthly ,
Air Loop System Component Loads , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Fan Air Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Cooling Coil Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heat Exchanger Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heat Exchanger Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Humidifier Total Heating Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Evaporative Cooler Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Desiccant Dehumidifier Total Cooling Energy , SumOrAverage;

1.26.5.1 Air System Fan Air Heating Energy

Energy added to the air loop by Fans (Joules)

1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1143

1.26.5.2 Air System Cooling Coil Total Cooling Energy

Energy removed from air loop by Cooling Coils (Joules)

1.26.5.3 Air System Heating Coil Total Heating Energy

Energy added to air loop by Heating Coils (Joules)

1.26.5.4 Air System Heat Exchanger Total Heating Energy

Energy added to air loop by air-to-air heat recovery heat exchangers (Joules)

1.26.5.5 Air System Heat Exchanger Total Cooling Energy

Energy removed from air loop by air-to-air heat recovery heat exchangers (Joules)

1.26.5.6 Air System Humidifier Total Heating Energy

Energy added to air loop by humidifiers (Joules)

1.26.5.7 Air System Evaporative Cooler Total Cooling Energy

Energy removed from air loop by evaporative coolers (Joules)

1.26.5.8 Air System Desiccant Dehumidifier Total Cooling Energy

Energy removed from air loop by desiccant dehumidifiers (Joules)

1.26.5.9 Air System Solar Collector Total Heating Energy

Energy added to air loop by solar collectors (Joules)

1.26.5.10 Air System Solar Collector Total Cooling Energy

Energy removed from air loop by solar collectors (Joules)

1.26.5.11 Air System User Defined Air Terminal Total Heating Energy

Energy added to air loop by user defined air terminal units (Joules)

1.26.5.12 Air System User Defined Air Terminal Total Cooling Energy

Energy removed from air loop by user defined air terminal units (Joules)
1144 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.26.6 System Component Energy Use Outputs

Reporting System Component Energy Use consists of eleven output variables that report the total
energy consumption (in Joules) of system components by energy type and coil type. Electric en-
ergy consumption is reported for fans, heating and cooling coils in packaged (DX) systems, electric
resistance heating coils, humidifiers, evaporative coolers and desiccant dehumidifiers.

1.26.6.1 Air System Fan Electricity Energy

Electric consumption for fans. (Joules)

1.26.6.2 Air System Heating Coil Hot Water Energy

Consumption for heating coil hot water (both purchased and plant supplied) (Joules)

1.26.6.3 Air System Cooling Coil Chilled Water Energy

Consumption for cooling coil chilled water (both purchased and plant supplied) (Joules)

1.26.6.4 Air System DX Heating Coil Electricity Energy

Compressor plus condenser fan electricity use. (Joules)

1.26.6.5 Air System DX Cooling Coil Electricity Energy

Compressor plus condenser fan electricity use. (Joules)

1.26.6.6 Air System Heating Coil Electricity Energy

Electricity consumption for the heating coil. (Joules)

1.26.6.7 Air System Heating Coil NaturalGas Energy

Natural Gas consumption for the heating coil. (Joules)

1.26.6.8 Air System Heating Coil Propane Energy

Propane consumption for the heating coil. (Joules)

1.26.6.9 Air System Heating Coil Steam Energy

Steam consumption for the heating coil (steam coils). (Joules)

1.26.6.10 Air System Humidifier Electricity Energy

Electricity consumption for the humidifiers. (Joules)

1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1145

1.26.6.11 Air System Evaporative Cooler Electricity Energy

Electricity consumption for the evaporative coolers. (Joules)

1.26.6.12 Air System Desiccant Dehumidifier Electricity Energy

Electricity consumption for the desiccant dehumidifiers. (Joules)

The Standard reports file includes these variables reporting in the Tabular report form as “Air Loop
System Component Energy Use”.

OutputControl:Table:Style ,HTML;

Output:Table:Monthly ,
Air Loop System Component Energy Use , !- Name
, !- DigitsAfterDecimal
Air System Fan Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Hot Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Cooling Coil Chilled Water Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System DX Heating Coil Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System DX Cooling Coil Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Gas Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Heating Coil Steam Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Humidifier Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Evaporative Cooler Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage ,
Air System Desiccant Dehumidifier Electricity Energy , SumOrAverage;

1.26.7 Overall Air Loop Syntax

A map for Air Loop input syntax is shown in the following diagram.

1.26.8 AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList
The syntax for the AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList definition is shown below. As with other lists in
EnergyPlus input, the object title and identifying name are followed by type-name pairs. In this
case, the types are controller types. The order in which controllers appear on this list also define
the priority as described below. The identifying name refers back to the name recorded in the
AirLoopHVAC statement.

1.26.8.1 Inputs

1.26.8.1.1 Field: Name

The user designated unique name of an instance of a Controller List. Any object referencing this
Controller List will do so using this name.

1.26.8.1.2 Field Set (Object Type, Controller Name) up to 8

After the identifying name, input for the controller list consists of up to 8 pairs of data items: a
controller type and a controller name. The first controller listed has the highest priority, the second
the second highest priority, and so forth.
1146 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.109: Air Loop Input Syntax Map

1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1147

1.26.8.1.3 Field: Controller <x> Object Type

The type of controller. This should be a key word defining a class of controllers such as Con-
troller:WaterCoil.

1.26.8.1.4 Field: Controller <x> Name

The name of a controller object (such as a Controller:WaterCoil) defined elsewhere in the input file.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList ,
Dual Duct System 1 Controllers ,
Controller:WaterCoil , Main Cooling Coil Controller ,
Controller:WaterCoil , Main Heating Coil Controller;

1.26.9 AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList defines the applicable managers used for an AirLoopHVAC
or PlantLoop. The priority of availability managers is based on a set of rules and are specific to the
type of loop. The output from each Availability Manager is an availability status flag. This flag can
have the values NoAction, ForceOff, CycleOn, or CycleOnZoneFansOnly (used only for air loops).
The availability status flags for the Availability Managers referenced by an air or plant loop are used
to set the availability status flag for each loop. For the air loops, ForceOff takes precedence: if any
of the loop’s availability managers are showing status ForceOff, the loop status will be ForceOff.
Next in precedence is CycleOnZoneFansOnly, followed by CycleOn, and NoAction. For the plant
loops, there is no precedence among the Availability Manager status flag values. Instead, the first
availability manager giving a status flag value other than NoAction sets the status for the loop. The
Availability Managers are executed in Availability Manager List order.
Special rules also apply for which managers may be listed in an Availability Manager list. The Hybrid
Ventilation Control Manager (object: AvailabilityManager:HybridVentilation) is a special type of
manager and is never specified in an Availability Manager List (it is used stand-alone for a specific
air loop). All other types of availability managers may be listed in the Availability Manager List
used for AirLoopHVACs. For Plant Loops, the Night Cycle and Night Ventilation managers (objects:
AvailabilityManager:NightCycle and AvailabilityManager:NightVentilation) are not allowed in the
Availability Manager List.

1.26.9.1 Inputs

1.26.9.1.1 Field: Name

The name of the AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. This is referenced by AirLoopHVAC
and PlantLoop objects.

1.26.9.1.2 Field Set (Availability Manager Object Type, Name)

Managers are listed by pairs of data items: Availability Manager Object Type and Availability
Manager Name. The managers are simulated down the list and calculate a control status for use by
the AirLoopHVAC or PlantLoop. The priority of each manager used for a specific loop is based on
the rules described above. Availability managers are not currently used for condenser loops. The
availability managers, along with the AirLoopHVAC and PlantLoop object, report the control status
1148 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

calculated each simulation timestep. These output variables can be used to prioritize the managers
according to the required control strategy. Six managers are accomodated in the list by default.
This object is extensible, so additional pairs of the next two fields may be added.

1.26.9.1.3 Field: Availability Manager <x> Object Type

The key word defining the type of manager, e.g. AvailabilityManager:NightCycle.

1.26.9.1.4 Field: Availability Manager<x> Name

The name of a AvailabilityManager object defined elsewhere in the input file.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList ,
Collector Loop Availability Manager List , !- Name
AvailabilityManager :HighTemperatureTurnOff , !- System Availability Manager Type 1
High Temperature Turn Off Availability Manager , !- System Availability Manager Name 1
AvailabilityManager : LowTemperatureTurnOn , !- System Availability Manager Type 2
Low Temperature Turn On Availability Manager , !- System Availability Manager Name 2
AvailabilityManager :DifferentialThermostat , !- System Availability Manager Type 3
Differential Thermostat Availability Manager; !- System Availability Manager Name 3

1.26.10 AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem
The Outside Air System (object AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem) is a subsystem of an AirLoopH-
VAC. It handles the mixed air portion of the primary air system: the system relief air, the outside
air inlet, and any components and controllers associated with the system relief air and outside air
streams. From the perspective of the primary air loop the Outside Air System is treated as a single
component. As a subsystem, it can contain one or more components and controllers.
The input for the Outside Air System consists of a system name, a controller list name, and an
equipment list name. The controller list simply lists, by type and unique name, all the controllers
in the subsystem. The controllers will be simulated in list order. The equipment list lists all the
components in the subsystem, by type and name. The equipment is simulated in list order.
The equipment inlet/outlet must be sequential with no loops - the simulation can only handle a
straight-through air path, both on the primary air side and on the secondary air side, if any. Heat
exchanger secondary air inlets need to be independent of the primary air stream – usually relief air
is used.
The Outside Air System (object AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem) can also be defined as a
subsystem of an AirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem. When this subsystem is referred
in AirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem, the Controller:OutdoorAir can not be listed in
the AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList, because the outdoor air flow rate will not be determined
by Controller:OutdoorAir. Instead, the outdoor air flow rate will be specified by AirLoopH-
VAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem. In addition, the OutdoorAir:Mixer will not be allowed in the
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList as a component, because no mix is needed due to
100% outdoor incoming airflow determined by AirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem.

1.26.10.1 Inputs

1.26.10.1.1 Field: Name

1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1149

The unique, user assigned name for a single instance of an Outside Air System. Any other object
referencing this Outside Air System will use this name.

1.26.10.1.2 Field: Name: Controller List Name

This field is the name of a AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList object. A AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList is
simply a list of controllers giving both controller name and type. This Controller List specifies all
the controllers that will act on this outside air system. The order of the controllers in the list is
significant: controllers are simulated sequentially in the order given in the Controller List. Typically
the Controller List would contain a Controller:OutdoorAir. If there are chilled water or hot water
coils in the outdoor air system, each such coil will need a Controller:WaterCoil.
When this object is referred in AirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem, the Controller:OutdoorAir
will not be allowed in the list, becauseAirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem does not need
Controller:OutdoorAir to determine the amount of outdoor air flow rate.

1.26.10.1.3 Field: Outdoor Air Equipment List Name

This field is the name of an AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList object. An AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList is simply a list of components giving both component name
and type. This Outdoor Air Equipment List specifies all the components that will be simulated in
this outside air system. The order of the components in the list is significant: components are sim-
ulated sequentially in the order given in the Outdoor Air Equipment List. Typically the equipment
list would contain at least an OutdoorAir:Mixer. If there is more than one component, the compo-
nents must be listed in order from the outside air to the OutdoorAir:Mixer (the OutdoorAir:Mixer
is last).
When this object is referred in AirLoopHVAC:DedicatedOutdoorAirSystem, the OutdoorAir:Mixer
will not be allowed as a component, because all the incoming airflow is from outdoor, and no mixing
is needed.
An IDF example, including the AirLoopHVAC, and the controller and equipment lists.

AirLoopHVAC ,Typical Terminal Reheat 1,

Reheat System 1 Controllers ,
Reheat System 1 Avail List ,
1.3,
Air Loop Branches ,
Air Loop Inlet Node , Return Air Mixer Outlet ,
Zone Equipment Inlet Node , Air Loop Outlet Node;

AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList ,
Reheat System 1 Controllers ,
Controller:WaterCoil , Main Cooling Coil Controller;

BranchList , Air Loop Branches ,

Air Loop Main Branch;

Branch , Air Loop Main Branch ,

1.3,
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem , OA Sys 1,
Air Loop Inlet Node , Mixed Air Node ,PASSIVE
Fan:ConstantVolume , Supply Fan 1,
Mixed Air Node , Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , ACTIVE ,
Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry , Detailed Cooling Coil ,
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , Air Loop Outlet Node;

AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList , Reheat System 1 Avail List ,

AvailabilityManager :Scheduled , Reheat System 1 Avail;
1150 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AvailabilityManager :Scheduled , Reheat System 1 Avail ,

FanAndCoilAvailSched ;

AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem ,
OA Sys 1,
OA Sys 1 Controllers ,
OA Sys 1 Equipment;

AirLoopHVAC:ControllerList ,
OA Sys 1 Controllers ,
Controller:OutdoorAir , OA Controller 1;

AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList ,
OA Sys 1 Equipment ,
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate ,OA Heat Recovery 1,
OutdoorAir:Mixer , OA Mixing Box 1;

1.26.10.2 Outputs

The impact of using outside air/mechanical ventilation is described in the section: Outdoor Air
Ventilation Outputs.

1.26.11 AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList
Used to specify the components in the outdoor air system. The components will be simulated in the
order in which they occur in the list.
The following HVAC equipment types are allowed as outdoor air system equipment. The component
matrix (Figure 1.110) shows which coils and fans are allowed with which equipment models.

Figure 1.110: Outdoor Air System Component Matrix

1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1151

1.26.11.1 Inputs

1.26.11.1.1 Field: Name

The user designated unique name of an instance of an Air Loop Equipment List. Any object
referencing this Air Loop Equipment List will do so using this name.

1.26.11.1.2 Field Set (Component Object Type„ Component Name) up to 8

After the identifying name, the list consists of up to 8 pairs of data items:

1.26.11.1.3 Field: Component <x> Object Type

This field specifies the keyword for the type of component used.

1.26.11.1.4 Field: Component <x> Name

This field is the unique name of the component specified in the previous field. This named object
must appear in the IDF.
An example from an IDF:

AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList ,
OA Sys 1 Equipment ,
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate ,OA Heat Recovery 1,
OutdoorAir:Mixer , OA Mixing Box 1;

1.26.12 OutdoorAir:Node
The OutdoorAir:Node object declares an HVAC system node for outdoor air conditions. The program
automatically sets the air conditions at these nodes to correspond to the ambient environmental
conditions at the beginning of every timestep. The outdoor air node is typically used as the inlet
air node to an HVAC component such as the OutdoorAir:Mixer object. Multiple OutdoorAir:Node
objects can be used in an input file, however, duplicate node names are not allowed.
The Height Above Ground field is used to adjust the weather file air conditions, e.g., outdoor dry-
bulb and wet-bulb air temperatures, for atmospheric variation with height. This variation can
become a significant factor when modeling tall buildings. See the Engineering Reference section on
Atmospheric Variation for a description of the algorithm for variation of atmospheric properties with
height. A blank entry or a value less than zero for this field indicates that the height will be ignored
and the weather file conditions will be used.
OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList both set a node to outdoor air conditions.
OutdoorAir:Node modifies the weather file conditions if a height has been specified. Out-
doorAir:NodeList does not have a height input and always uses the weather file conditions
without modification. The same node name may not be used with both of these objects.
When declared in surface property objects SurfaceProperty:LocalEnvironment, in zone prop-
erty objects ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment, or as an external node in the airflow network
calculation linking to a surface node AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface, the object can also be
used to define local outdoor air conditions for surfaces, zones or air loop components. The local
outdoor air conditions would be used in the EnergyPlus calculations for:
1152 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1. Convection coefficients used in the exterior surface heat balance

If the user declares a local surface outdoor air node to overwrite the surface level environmental
data, the convection coefficients would be calculated based on the local outdoor air node data
accordingly based on surface level outdoor dry-bulb temperature, humidity ratio and wind
speed.
2. Zone air infiltration and simple ventilation
If the user declares a local zone outdoor air node to overwrite zone level environmental data,
global environmental variables used in the subroutines for infiltration and ventilation calcula-
tion, including outdoor air temperature, humidity ratio, enthalpy, wind speed and direction,
would be overwritten accordingly with zone level data.
3. External air nodes used in the AirFlowNetwork
When used in the airflow network for wind pressure calculation, global environmental vari-
ables used in the subroutines for wind pressure calculation, including outdoor air temperature,
humidity ratio, air density, wind speed and direction, would be overwritten accordingly with
local data.

When used in these cases, optional schedule inputs of local ambient air conditions, including dry-
bulb temperature, wet-bulb temperature, wind velocity, and wind direction, can be defined in the
optional fields. When used in the airflow network for wind pressure calculation, the wind pressure
coefficient curve name and calculation details should also be defined.

1.26.12.1 Inputs

1.26.12.1.1 Field: Name

The unique name for this outdoor air node.

1.26.12.1.2 Field: Height Above Ground

The height [m] of the node above ground level. A value greater than zero allows the weather
file conditions, e.g., outdoor dry-bulb and wet-bulb air temperatures, to be adjusted according to
atmospheric variation with height.
A blank entry or value less than zero indicates that the height will be ignored and the weather file
conditions will be used.

1.26.12.1.3 Field: Drybulb Temperature Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the local dry bulb temperature of this node. When
the field is left blank, global values would be used in calculation.

1.26.12.1.4 Field: Wetbulb Temperature Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the local wet bulb temperature of this node. When
the field is left blank, global values would be used in calculation.

1.26.12.1.5 Field: Wind Speed Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the local wind speed of this node. When the field is
left blank, global values would be used in calculation.
1.26. GROUP – AIR DISTRIBUTION 1153

1.26.12.1.6 Field: Wind Direction Schedule Name

This field is used to supply a schedule name of the local wind direction of this node. When the field
is left blank, global values would be used in calculation.

1.26.12.1.7 Field: Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name

The name of a specific AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues object
(which gives wind pressure coefficients for the façade as a function of angle of wind incident on the
façade).

1.26.12.1.8 Field: Symmetric Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve

This field is used to specify whether the pressure curve is symmetric or not. Yes for curves that
should be evaluated from 0 to 180 degrees. No for curves that should be evaluated from 0 to 360
degrees.

1.26.12.1.9 Field: Wind Angle Type

This field is used to specify whether the angle used to compute the wind pressure coefficient is
absolute or relative. Relative for computing the angle between the wind direction and the surface
azimuth. Absolute for using the wind direction angle directly.
An example IDF:

OutdoorAir:Node ,
OA Node 1; !- Name

OutdoorAir:Node ,
Floor 10 Outdoor air Inlet Node , !- Name
30.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}

OutdoorAir:Node ,
LocalOutdoorAirNode :0001 , !- Name
, !- Height Above Ground
OutdoorAirNodeDryBulb :0001 , !- Drybulb Temperature Schedule Name
OutdoorAirNodeWetBulb :0001 , !- Wetbulb Temperature Schedule Name
OutdoorAirNodeWindSpeed :0001 , !- Wind Speed Schedule Name
OutdoorAirNodeWindDir :0001; !- Wind Direction Schedule Name
NFacade_WPCValue , !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
No , !- Symmetric Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve
Absolute; !- Wind Angle Type

1.26.13 Outdoor Air Node outputs:

The ambient dry-bulb, wet-bulb air temperature, wind speed and direction, and flow rate at the
outdoor air node can be monitored using the system node output variables:

– HVAC,Average,System Node Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,System Node Wetbulb Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Wind Speed [m/s]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Wind Direction [degree]
– HVAC,Average,System Node Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1154 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

e.g.

Output:Variable ,
Floor 10 Outdoor air Inlet Node ,
System Node Temperature ,
Hourly;

1.26.14 OutdoorAir:NodeList
The program needs to know which HVAC system nodes are inlets for outdoor air. Knowing this, the
program can set the conditions at these nodes to the outdoor conditions at the start of each major
timestep. The OutdoorAir:NodeList provides the means for specifying which nodes are outdoor air
nodes.
The input is flexible: there may be one or more OutdoorAir:NodeList in each input file. Each list
contains up to 25 names. The names can be the name of a unique HVAC system node, or the name
of a Node List which will contain the actual node names. Duplicate node names are ignored.
OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList both set a node to outdoor air conditions.
OutdoorAir:Node modifies the weather file conditions if a height has been specified. Out-
doorAir:NodeList does not have a height input and always uses the weather file conditions
without modification. The same node name may not be used with both of these objects.

1.26.14.1 Inputs

1.26.14.1.1 Field: Node or NodeList name

The name of an HVAC system node or of a NodeList object. There can be up to 25 names.
An example IDF:

OutdoorAir:NodeList ,
OutsideAirInletNodes ;

NodeList ,OutsideAirInletNodes ,
Outdoor air Inlet Node;

1.26.15 OutdoorAir:Mixer
The OutdoorAir:Mixer is the most common component used in an outdoor air system. The outdoor
air mixer has 2 inlet air streams: the system return air and the outdoor air. It has 2 outlet air
streams: the system relief air and the mixed air. This is a passive component. It takes the inlet
mass flows and conditions plus the relief air mass flow and calculates the mixed air flow rate and
conditions (as well as the relief air conditions). The inlet and relief mass flow must be set outside
the component – most commonly by an outdoor air controller. The OutdoorAir:Mixer can also be
used in compound components such as a fan coil unit.
Input for this object is very simple: a unique name plus the node names of the 2 inlet nodes and the
2 outlet nodes.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1155

1.26.15.1 Inputs

1.26.15.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular outdoor air mixer component. Any reference to this
component by another object will use this name.

1.26.15.1.2 Field: Mixed Air Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node which is the outlet for the mixed air stream.

1.26.15.1.3 Field: Outdoor Air Stream Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node which is the inlet for the outdoor air stream.

1.26.15.1.4 Field: Relief Air Stream Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node which is the outlet for the system relief air.

1.26.15.1.5 Field: Return Air Stream Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node which is the inlet for the return air stream.
An IDF example:

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone1WindACOAMixer , ! name
Zone1WindACOAMixerOutletNode , ! mixer outlet node
Zone1WindACOAInNode , ! mixer OA node
Zone1WindACExhNode , ! mixer relief node
Zone1WindACAirInletNode ; ! mixer inlet node

1.27 Group – Airflow Network

1.27.1 Overview
The Airflow Network model provides the ability to simulate multizone airflows driven by wind and
also by forced air distribution systems. The model can also simulate the heat and moisture gains
or losses from the air distribution system itself (e.g., ductwork). When modeling air distribution
systems, the current version of the Airflow Network model is allowed to simulate multiple forced air
systems (i.e., AirLoopHVAC object). Each forced air system allows a constant volume supply air fan
(Fan:ConstantVolume or Fan:OnOff), a VAV supply air fan (Fan:VariableVolume), or a fan system
model (Fan:SystemMode). The capabilities of the model are to:

– Simulate zone pressures due to envelope leakage and forced air distribution during HVAC
system fan operation
– Simulate node pressures in a forced air distribution system during HVAC system fan operation
– Calculate multizone airflows due to forced air, wind, and surface leakage, including adjacent
zones and outdoors, during HVAC system fan operation
1156 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Simulate distribution system airflows, including supply and return air leaks, during HVAC
system fan operation
– Simulate air distribution system node temperatures and humidity ratios during HVAC system
fan operation
– Calculate duct conduction losses during HVAC system fan operation
– Calculate vapor diffusion losses of ducts during HVAC system fan operation
– Calculate sensible and latent loads on the surrounding zones due to supply and return air leaks
in the air distribution system during HVAC system fan operation
– Simulate zone pressures due to envelope leakage driven by wind when the HVAC system fan
is off or if no air distribution system is specified
– Calculate multizone airflows due to wind and surface leakage, including adjacent zones and
outdoors when the HVAC system fan is off or if no air distribution system is specified
– Allow zone exhaust fans to be included as part of the airflow network
– For airflow networks with a forced air distribution system, calculate zone sensible and la-
tent loads for two different supply air fan operation modes as required: cycling fan, cycling
compressor (CyclingFanAndCompressor) and continuous fan, cycling compressor (Continuous-
FanWithCyclingCompressor)
– When multiple forced air systems (AirloopHVAC) are present in the idf, all systems must be
used in the Airflow Network model.

1.27.2 Summary of Objects

Before describing the Airflow Network input objects in detail, we list all of the objects and then give
a short description of what the objects do.
The Airflow Network input objects are:
AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SpecifiedFlowRate
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1157

AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage

– AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl defines basic run parameters for the air flow calcula-
tions and specifies whether wind pressure coefficients are input by the user or, for rectangular
buildings, calculated by the program.
– The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object specifies the ventilation control that applies
to all of the openable exterior and interior windows and doors in the corresponding thermal
zone. Surface-level ventilation control can be used to override the zone-level ventilation control
if required (see AirflowNetwork: MultiZone:Surface object below).
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object indicates whether a heat transfer surface (wall,
window, etc.) has a crack or opening and references an object in the list below that gives
the air flow characteristics of that crack, opening, or zone exhaust fan. The AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface object can also be used to specify individual ventilation control for
openable exterior and interior windows and doors.
∗ AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
∗ AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
∗ AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SpecifiedFlowRate
∗ AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
∗ AirflowNetwork:Multi-Zone:Component:DetailedOpening
∗ AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
∗ AirflowNetwork:Multi-Zone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions is used to normalize crack in-
formation that is based on measurements of crack air flow.
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node represents air distribution system nodes for the Air-
flowNetwork model. A set of an AirLoopHVAC and ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList nodes is a
subset of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Nodes.
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component objects consist of Leak, LeakageRatio,
Duct, ConstantPressureDrop, Fan, Coil, TerminalUnit, OutdoorAirFlow and
ReliefAirFlow. The components provide a relationship between pressure and airflow. The
1158 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Leak and Leakage components can be used to simulate supply and/or return leaks in an air
distribution system. The Duct and ConstantPressureDrop components can be used to
deliver forced air into conditioned spaces. The components Fan, Coil, and TerminalUnit
reference normal EnergyPlus objects. OutdoorAirFlow, and ReliefAirFlow specify the
outdoor air flow rate set by the Controller:OutdoorAir object in the model. The Airflow
Network model gets information from these objects to perform an airflow network simulation.
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object represents a connection between two
node objects and an AirflowNetwork component. The node objects can be an Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Node, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode or AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone.

If you input wind pressure coefficients, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface also has an associ-

ated AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode, that, via the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Wind-
PressureCoefficientArray and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues
objects, gives the wind pressure distribution vs. wind direction for that node and, implicitly, for
the cracks and openings in the exterior surfaces associated with that node.
Figure 1.111 shows the relationships among AirflowNetwork:MultiZone objects and between Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone objects and regular EnergyPlus objects. In this figure an arrow from object
A to object B means A references B, i.e., one of the inputs in A is the name of object B. For example,
one input for AirflowNetwork: MultiZone:Surface is the name of a heat transfer surface, and another
is the name of a crack or opening object. The arrow between AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface and
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode is shown dashed to indicate that this reference is not used
when wind pressure coefficients are calculated by the program rather than being input by the user.
Figure 1.111 also shows the relationships among AirflowNetwork:Distribution objects and
between AirflowNetwork:Distribution objects and regular EnergyPlus objects. The AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects link two nodes from AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node and/or
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone objects with a component defined in the object AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Component. The solid arrows show a reference from object A to object B. The
dashed arrows indicate the components which can be used in a linkage object. The red arrows
pointing to the Zone object indicate the components that interact with the zone air. For example,
the temperature in a zone where a supply leak terminates is used to calculate duct leakage energy
loss. The temperature in a zone where a duct component is located is also used to calculate duct
conduction loss.
Much of the information needed for the air flow calculation is automatically extracted from the
building description for thermal modeling. This includes things like the volume and neutral height
of the zones, and the orientation and location of the building surfaces that contain cracks or openings
through which air flows. From all of this information the program creates a “pressure-flow network”
that is solved each timestep using iterative solution methods to obtain the unknown pressures and
air flows.
Figure 1.112 shows a plan view of a very simple air flow network that you can construct using
the above AirflowNetwork objects. There are three thermal zones, Zone-1, Zone-2 and Zone-3.
There are openable exterior windows—Window-1, Window-2 and Window-3—and openable interior
doors—Door-12 and Door-23. Two External Nodes are indicated. ExternalNode-1 is associated with
the façade that contains Window-1 and Window-2. ExternalNode-2 is associated with the façade
containing Window-3.
One possible air flow pattern is shown in this figure. The actual air flow pattern in a particular
timestep, and the size of the flows, depends on many factors, such as (1) What is the wind pressure
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1159

Figure 1.111: Relationships among AirflowNetwork objects (right-hand side) and between Air-
flowNetwork objects and regular EnergyPlus objects. An arrow from object A to object B means
that A references B.
1160 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

distribution seen by the exterior windows? (2) Are the exterior windows open or closed, and if open,
how far are they open? (3) Are the interior doors open or closed? (4) What are the air temperature
differences between zones and between zones and the outdoor air (which affect buoyancy flows)?

Figure 1.112: Plan view of a simple air flow network showing a possible air flow pattern in which
all of the windows and doors are open.

Figure 1.112 shows a possible air flow pattern in which all of the windows and doors are
open. Associated with the external nodes are wind pressure coefficient distributions as a
function of wind direction that are input using two AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Wind Pres-
sure Coefficient objects. The nature of the air flows through the windows and doors
is specified using AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening objects. The Airflow Network model calculates the
flows each system timestep depending on various factors, including wind direction and speed, size
and vertical position of openings, outdoor air temperature, and zone air temperatures.

1.27.3 Airflow Network Example Files (included in the installation)

– AirflowNetwork3zVent.idf
– AirflowNetwork3zVentAutoWPC.idf
– AirflowNetworkOccupantVentilationControl.idf
– AirflowNetwork_Attic_Duct.idf
– AirflowNetwork_Simple_House.idf
– AirflowNetwork_Simple_SmallOffice.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiAirLoops.idf
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1161

– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_House.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_House_OvercoolDehumid.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_House_TwoSpeed.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_LocalNode.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_CoilHXAssistedDX.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_GenericContam.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_HeatRecoveryHXSL.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_SmallOffice_VAV.idf
– AirflowNetwork_MultiZone_HorizontalOpening.idf
– AirflowNetwor_PressureControl.idf
– CrossVent_1Zone_AirflowNetwork.idf
– CrossVent_1Zone_AirflowNetwork_with2CrossflowJets.idf
– DisplacementVent_Nat_AirflowNetwork.idf
– DisplacementVent_Nat_AirflowNetwork_AdaptiveComfort.idf
– EMSAirflowNetworkOpeningControlByHumidity.idf
– HybridVentilationControl.idf
– RoomAirflowNetwork.idf

1.27.4 What the Airflow Network Model Can and Cannot Do

Here is a list of some of the things that the Airflow Network calculation can and cannot model.

1.27.4.1 Can Do

1. Air flow through cracks in exterior or interzone surfaces.

2. Air flow through cracks around windows and doors when closed.
3. Natural ventilation (i.e., air flow through open or partially open exterior windows and doors).
4. Zone level control of natural ventilation (all windows/doors in a zone that are defined with a
component opening object have identical controls).
5. Individual surface control of natural ventilation for a subsurface (window, door, or glassdoor).
6. Modulation of natural ventilation to prevent large zone air temperature swings.
7. Interzone air flow (i.e., air flow through open interzone windows and doors, and through cracks
in interzone surfaces).
8. Dependence of air flow on buoyancy effects and wind pressure.
9. Dependence of wind pressure on wind speed, wind direction and surface orientation.
10. Supply and return air leaks in an air distribution system.
11. Account for the effect of supply-air and/or return-air leakage on zone pressure when a forced
air distribution system is present and is operating.
1162 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

12. When duct leakage is modeled and the HVAC system is on, interzone airflow or infiltration/ex-
filtration can occur due to changes in zone pressure.
13. Bi-directional flow through large openings. See discussion below under AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening,
and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening.
14. Calculate air flows and pressures in ducts or other components of a forced air distribution
system.
15. Calculate zone loads when the supply air fan cycles on and off during a system timestep using
the CyclingFanAndCompressor fan operation mode (Fan:OnOff).
16. Determine the impact of zone exhaust fans on air flows, pressures, air temperatures/humidity
levels and energy consumption.

1.27.4.2 Cannot Do or Restricted

1. The model is restricted to using a constant volume or variable volume fan (Fan:ConstantVolume,
Fan:OnOff, and Fan:VariableVolume).
2. Air circulation and/or air temperature stratification within a thermal zone. For example, you
should not try to divide a high space, such as an atrium, into subzones separated by artificial
horizontal surfaces that have cracks or openings with the expectation that AirflowNetwork will
give you a realistic temperature in each subzone and/or a realistic air flow between subzones.
3. The model is restricted to eleven types of coils that can be in the air distribution system
(Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed,
Coil:Cooling:Water, Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry, Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStag
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed, Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed, and Coil:Heating:Desuperheater).
4. The model is restricted to two types of air distribution equipment terminal units (AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat and AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat).
5. Supply and return leaks are not allowed in an AirLoopHVAC. They can only be modeled in
the Zone Equipment portion of the air loop (i.e., return leaks may be modeled between the
zone return node and the zone mixer inlet or the zone mixer outlet and the zone equipment
loop outlet; and supply leaks may be modeled between the zone equipment loop inlet and the
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter inlet node or the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter outlet node and the
zone supply node).
6. An air distribution system must be located inside the building (i.e., the ducts must pass through
zones within the building).
7. Zone exhaust fans must be defined in ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections objects.

The input specifications consist of five main sections: AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl ob-

ject, AirflowNetwork multizone data objects, AirflowNetwork distribution node objects,
AirflowNetwork distribution component objects, and AirflowNetwork distribution link-
age objects. Each of these object types is described in detail below.

1.27.5 AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
The basic run parameters for this model are defined in this unique object which has the following
input specifications:
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1163

1.27.5.1 Inputs

1.27.5.1.1 Field: Name

This is a unique character string associated with this instance of the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
object. At this time, only one AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object can be specified in an input
data file (idf).

1.27.5.1.2 Field: AirflowNetwork Control

The following selections are available to control the Airflow Network simulation:
MultiZoneWithDistribution: MultiZone air flow calculations are performed during all simula-
tion timesteps, including the impacts of the air distribution system when a HVAC system fan is
operating. Any ZoneInfiltration:*, ZoneVentilation:*, ZoneMixing and ZoneCrossMixing
objects specified in the input data file are not simulated.
MultiZoneWithoutDistribution: MultiZone air flow calculations are performed during all simu-
lation timesteps, but the air distribution system portion of the network is not modeled even if it is
specified in the input data file. Any ZoneInfiltration:*, ZoneVentilation:*, ZoneMixing and
ZoneCrossMixing objects specified in the input data file are not simulated.
MultiZoneWithDistributionOnlyDuringFanOperation: MultiZone air flow calculations, in-
cluding the impacts of the air distribution system, are only performed when the HVAC system fan is
operating. Any ZoneInfiltration:*, ZoneVentilation:*, ZoneMixing and ZoneCrossMixing
objects specified in the input data file are used when the HVAC system fan is OFF (if none are
specified, then no air flow calculations are performed when the fan is OFF).
NoMultiZoneOrDistribution: No multizone air flow calculations (with or without the air dis-
tribution system portion of the network) are performed during the simulation. Any ZoneInfiltra-
tion:*, ZoneVentilation:*, ZoneMixing and ZoneCrossMixing objects specified in the input
data file are simulated (if none are specified, then no air flow calculations are performed). Note:
Having an input data file with no AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl objects gives the same impact
– no multizone air flow calculations. However, this choice is provided as a convenience to the user
to easily disable the multizone air flow calculations for an input data file that already contains
AirflowNetwork objects.
Note: A ZoneInfiltration:* object indicates any one of ZoneInfiltration:DesignFlowRate,
ZoneInfiltration:EffectiveLeakageArea,and ZoneInfiltration:FlowCoefficient objects.A ob-
ject ofZoneVentilation:* indicates any one of ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate and Zon-
eVentilation:WindandStackOpenArea objects.

1.27.5.1.3 Field: Wind Pressure Coefficient Type

Determines whether the wind pressure coefficients are input by the user or calculated. The choices
are Input or SurfaceAverageCalculation, with the default being SurfaceAverageCalculation.
If INPUT, you must enter an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray object,
one or more AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects, and one or more AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects.
The second choice, SurfaceAverageCalculation, should only be used for rectangular buildings. In
this case surface-average wind pressure coefficients vs. wind direction are calculated by the pro-
gram for the four vertical façades and the roof based on user entries for “Building Type,” “Azimuth
Angle of Long Axis of Building,” and “Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along
1164 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Long Axis” (see description of these fields below). With this choice you do not have to enter any
of the following objects: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone: Wind Pressure Coefficient Array, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:ExternalNode and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues.

1.27.5.1.4 Field: Height Selection for Local Wind Pressure Calculation

Determines whether the local wind pressure is calculated based on either given external node heights
or surface opening heights. The choices are ExternalNode or OpeningHeight, with the default
being OpeningHeight. The local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is given in the section of
“Local Wind Speed Calculation” in the Engineering Reference. The calculation procedure requires
the height input.
If ExternalNode, the heights given in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects are
used to calculate local wind pressures based on the given height local wind speed. Used only if
Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = INPUT (see description of previous field).
If OpeningHeight, the number of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects has to be
equal to the number of external surfaces defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects.
The centroids in the z direction of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects are the heights
used in the local wind pressure calculation with the given height wind speed. The input is required
if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = INPUT (see description of previous field).
If Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation, a value in this field is not
required and a blank may be entered. The default choice is used internally to generate the Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects

1.27.5.1.5 Field: Building Type

Used only if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation. The choices for Building
Type are LowRise and HighRise, with the default being LowRise.
LowRise corresponds to a rectangular building whose height is less than three times the width of
the footprint (wshort in Figure 1.113) and is less than three times the length of the footprint (wlong
in the same figure).
HighRise corresponds to a rectangular building whose height is more than three times the width of
the footprint (wshort in Figure 1.113) or is more than three times the length of the footprint (wlong
in the same figure).

1.27.5.1.6 Field: Maximum Number of Iterations

The maximum number of iterations allowed in finding an AirflowNetwork solution. If the number
of iterations at each simulation timestep is above the maximum number of iterations defined by
this field, the program could not find the solution and a Severe error is issued and the program is
aborted. The default value is 500.

1.27.5.1.7 Field: Initialization Type

Designates which method is used for AirflowNetwork initialization. The choices for Initialization
Type are LinearInitializationMethod and ZeroNodePressures, with the default being ZeroNodePres-
sures.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1165

1.27.5.1.8 Field: Relative Airflow Convergence Tolerance

 
 P •  P  • 
The solution is assumed to have converged when  mi 
 mi  is less than the value specified for
this input field. This convergence
P •  criteria is equivalent to the ratio of the absolute value of the sum
  P  • 
of all network airflows ( mi  ) to the sum of network airflow magnitudes ( mi  ). The default
value is 1.0x10−4 .

1.27.5.1.9 Field: Absolute Airflow Convergence Tolerance

The solution
P is assumed
 to have converged when the summation of the absolute value of all network
 • 
airflows ( mi  ) is less than the value specified for this input field. The default value is 1.0x10−6 .

1.27.5.1.10 Field: Convergence Acceleration Limit

If the ratio of successive pressure corrections is less than this limit, use Steffensen acceleration
algorithm (Ref. AirflowNetwork Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference). The range for
this field is -1 to 1, with the default value being -0.5.

1.27.5.1.11 Field: Azimuth Angle of Long Axis of Building

Gives the orientation of a rectangular building for calculating wind pressure coefficients. This is
the smaller of the angles, measured clockwise, between North and the long axis of the building (see
Figure 1.113). Used only if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation. The
range for this input is 0 to 180, with the default value being 0.

1.27.5.1.12 Field: Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along
Long Axis
This is the aspect ratio of a rectangular footprint. It is given by the width of the footprint along its
short axis divided by the width along the long axis (see Figure 1.113). If the footprint is square, the
value of this field is 1.0. Used only if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation.
The range for this input is > 0 to 1, with the default value being 1.

1.27.5.1.13 Field: Height Dependence of External Node Temperature

This is an optional field. Input is Yes or No. The default is No. Yes is that external node temperature
is dependent on node height. No means that external node temperature is calculated with zero height.

1.27.5.1.14 Field: Allow Unsupported Zone Equipment

This is an optional field. Input is Yes or No. The default is No. Set this input to Yes to have
zone equipment that are currently unsupported in the AirflowNetwork model allowed in the
simulation. Setting this field to Yes, allows the following equipment to be modeled along an
AirflowNetwork model: ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier, ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator, Water-
Heater:HeatPump:*. The AirflowNetwork model will exclude mass balance in these equipment
objects and assume the mass flows are self-balanced in the equipment objects.
An IDF example is shown below:
1166 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.113: Footprint of a rectangular building showing variables used by the program to calculate
surface-average wind pressure coefficients. The angle a is the “Azimuth Angle of Long Axis of
Building.” wshort /wlong is the “Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along Long
Axis.”
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1167

AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl ,
AirflowNetwork_All , !- Name
MultiZoneWithDistribution , !- AirflowNetwork Control
Input , !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Type
Every 30 Degrees , !- AirflowNetwork Wind Pressure Coefficient Array Name
OpeningHeight , !- Height Selection for Local Wind Speed Calculation
LowRise , !- Building Type
500, !- Maximum Number of Iterations {dimensionless}
ZeroNodePressures , !- Initialization Type
1.0E-05, !- Relative Airflow Convergence Tolerance {dimensionless}
1.0E-06, !- Absolute Airflow Convergence Tolerance {kg/s}
-0.5, !- Convergence Acceleration Limit {dimensionless}
0.0, !- Azimuth Angle of Long Axis of Building {deg}
1.0; !- Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along Long Axis

If the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object is not provided in an input file, the default input
object will be created by the program internally, as long as following conditions are satisfied:

– The number of AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone objects >= 1

– The number of AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects >= 2

The default input object is shown below:

AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl ,
AFNDefaultControl , !- Name
MultizoneWithoutDistribution , !- AirflowNetwork Control
SurfaceAverageCalculation , !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Type
OpeningHeight , !- Height Selection for Local Wind Pressure Calculation
LOWRISE , !- Building Type
500, !- Maximum Number of Iterations {dimensionless}
ZeroNodePressures , !- Initialization Type
1.0E-04, !- Relative Airflow Convergence Tolerance {dimensionless}
1.0E-06, !- Absolute Airflow Convergence Tolerance {kg/s}
-0.5, !- Convergence Acceleration Limit {dimensionless}
0.0, !- Azimuth Angle of Long Axis of Building {deg}
1.0; !- Ratio of Building Width Along Short Axis to Width Along Long Axis

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone data objects are used to calculate multizone airflows. This section de-
scribes the input requirements for the following objects:

– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone data objects are used to calculate multizone airflows. This section de-
scribes the input requirements for the following objects:

– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
1168 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues

A detailed description for each of these objects is provided below.

1.27.6 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
This object allows control of natural ventilation through exterior and interior openings in
a zone, where “opening” is defined as an openable window or door. (Note that only
window, door or glass door subsurfaces in a zone that are specified using AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening and have an associated AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface object are considered to be openings). The control will be applied in the
same way to all of the openings in the zone.
This object is required to perform Airflow Network calculations. Note that ventilation control for
all openings is provided at the zone level as default and individual ventilation control of a surface
opening can be used to override the zone-level control (see the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
object description below).

1.27.6.1 Field: Zone Name

The name of the EnergyPlus thermal zone corresponding to the AirflowNetwork zone.

1.27.6.2 Field: Ventilation Control Mode

Specifies the type of zone-level natural ventilation control.

Let Tout equal the outdoor air temperature, Tzone equal the previous timestep’s zone air temperature,
Tset equal the Vent Temperature Schedule value, Hzone equal the specific enthalpy of zone air from
the previous timestep, and Hout equal the specific enthalpy of outdoor air. Then the four allowed
choices for Ventilation Control Mode are:
NoVent: All of the zone’s openable windows and doors are closed at all times independent of indoor
or outdoor conditions. The Venting Availability Schedule is ignored in this case. This is the default
value for this field.
Temperature: All of the zone’s openable windows and doors are opened if Tzone > Tout and Tzone
> Tset and Venting Availability Schedule (see below) allows venting.
Enthalpy: All of the zone’s openable windows and doors are opened if Hzone > Hout and Tzone >
Tset and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
Constant: Whenever this object’s Venting Availability Schedule allows venting, all of the zone’s
openable windows and doors are open, independent of indoor or outdoor conditions. Note that
“Constant” here means that the size of each opening is fixed while venting; the air flow through each
opening can, of course, vary from timestep to timestep.
ASHRAE55Adaptive: All of the zone’s operable windows and doors are opened if the operative
temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from the ASHRAE
Standard 55-2010 adaptive comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1169

CEN15251Adaptive: All of the zone’s operable windows and doors are opened if the operative
temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from the CEN15251
adaptive comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.

1.27.6.3 Field: Ventilation Control Zone Temperature Setpoint Schedule Name

The name of a schedule of zone air temperature set points that controls the opening of windows and
doors in the thermal zone to provide natural ventilation. This setpoint is the temperature above
which all the openable windows and doors in the zone will be opened if the conditions described in
the previous field Ventilation Control Mode are met.
The Ventilation Control Zone Temperature Setpoint Schedule Name applies only to windows and
doors in the zone that are specified using AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening,
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOp
and have an associated AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
(The discussion under the field Window/Door Opening Factor in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
object describes how the actual opening area of a window or door in a particular timestep is deter-
mined.)
Modulation of Openings
The following five fields can be used to modulate the window/door openings when Ventilation Control
Mode = Temperature or Enthalpy. These fields determine a factor between 0 and 1 that multiplies
the opening factor of each window and door in the zone according to the control action shown
in Figure 1.115 for Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature and in Figure 1.116 for Ventilation
Control Mode = Enthalpy. Modulation of the openings can reduce the large temperature swings
that can occur if the windows/doors are open too far when they are venting, especially when there
is a large inside-outside temperature difference.
The modulation takes the following form when Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature:
if Tzone - Tout < = [Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the
Venting Open Factor] then Multiplication factor = 1.0
if [Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the Venting Open Factor]
< Tzone - Tout < [Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the Venting
Open Factor] then Multiplication factor varies linearly from 1.0 to [Limit Value on Multiplier for
Modulating Venting Open Factor]
if Tzone - Tout > = [Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating
the Venting Open Factor] then Multiplication factor = [Limit Value on Multiplier for Modulating
Venting Open Factor]
One way of “tuning” the following modulation control parameters is to perform a sensitivity analysis
for winter and/or summer design days to determine what combination of values causes the biggest
reduction in zone air temperature fluctuations due to venting.
Note that the default values for the following fields are such that, if none of the fields are specified,
the default values are assigned.

1.27.6.4 Field: Minimum Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.115 or Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature
or Enthalpy. This value may be from zero to 1.0, with the default being 0.0.
1170 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.6.5 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Lower Limit For
Maximum Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.115. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value
may be from zero to less than 100 ◦C, with the default being 0 ◦C. The value for this field must be
less than the value specified for the following field.

1.27.6.6 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Upper Limit for
Minimun Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.115. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value
must be greater than 0 ◦C, with the default being 100 ◦C. The value for this field must be greater
than the value specified for the previous field..

1.27.6.7 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Lower Limit For Max-
imum Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value may
be from zero to less than 300,000 J/kg, with the default being 0 J/kg. The value for this field must
be less than the value specified for the following field.

1.27.6.8 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Upper Limit for Min-
imun Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value must
be greater than zero, with the default being 300,000 J/kg. The value for this field must be greater
than the value specified for the previous field.

1.27.6.9 Field: Venting Availability Schedule Name

The name of a schedule that specifies when venting is available. A zero or negative schedule value
means venting is not allowed. A value greater than zero means venting can occur if other venting
control conditions (specified by Ventilation Control Mode and Vent Temperature Schedule Name)
are satisfied. This schedule name should not be confused with Vent Temperature Schedule Name.
If a Venting Availability Schedule Name is not specified, it is assumed that venting is always available.
Using Venting Availability Schedule allows you to turn off venting at certain times of the day (at
night, for example), of the week (on weekends, for example), or of the year (during the winter, for
example).
If used with Ventilation Control Mode = Constant, the ventilation rate is constant only when this
schedule allows venting; otherwise the ventilation rate is set to zero.
If Ventilation Control Mode = NoVent, this schedule has no effect.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1171

1.27.6.10 Field: Single Sided Wind Pressure Coefficient Algorithm

Specifies the type of single sided wind pressure coefficient algorithm to be used for the zone. This field
is optional and is only used if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type is set to SurfaceAverageCalculation.
The default is Standard and the two valid choices are:

Standard: A single wind pressure coefficient is applied to all openings in the zone, as calculated
using SurfaceAverageCalculation.

Advanced: EnergyPlus calculates modified wind pressure coefficients for the two openings in the
zone. This model is only valid for zones with two openings, both of which are on a single façade (i.e.
are coplanar). For zones with more than two openings, consider combining the openings into two.
The modified wind pressure coefficients account for wind direction and turbulence effects on single
sided ventilation rates. See the Engineering Reference for a detailed description of the Advanced
algorithm. When the Advanced algorithm is selected, the difference between the two modified wind
pressure coefficients are output to the .eio file.

1.27.6.11 Field: Façade Width

This is the whole building width along the direction of the facade of this zone, or WF in Figure 1.114.
This field is used in the Single Sided Wind Pressure Coefficient Algorithm. This field is optional and
is only used if the Single Sided Wind Pressure Coefficient Algorithm is set to Advanced. The value
must be greater than 0.0 m, with the default being 10 m.

Figure 1.114: Footprint of a rectangular building showing WF , the “Façade Width”, used by the
Single Sided Wind Pressure Coefficient Algorithm.
1172 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.6.12 Field: Occupant Ventilation Control Name

The name of an AirlowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl object. The object is used to perform

advanced window opening control based on occupant conditions. When an object name is given,
advanced window opening control is performed and, the ventilation control defined in the Ventilation
Control Mode field will be overridden.
Note: The Occupant Ventilation Control object can be assigned to a zone (AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone) or a surface (AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface). When the object
is assigned to a zone, the Occupant Ventilation Control is assigned to the surfaces belong-
ing to the zone automatically. The surface objects must have an associated AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening,
or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening component specified in the field of Leak-
age Component Name. All output variables will be shown under surface names only, and not under
zone names.

Figure 1.115: Modulation of venting area according to inside-outside temperature difference.

Note: In order to establish an airflow network, each AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object must

have at least two surfaces defined with AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects, so that air can
flow from one zone into other zones (or to outdoors) through the network (air mass flow conserved).
In addition, for all AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects facing the same Zone (ref. Building-
Surface:Detailed), at least two different environments must be defined for the other side of these
surfaces (e.g., an external node and an adjacent zone, two adjacent zones, or two external nodes).
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone ,
RESISTIVE ZONE , !- Name of Associated Thermal Zone
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1173

Figure 1.116: Modulation of venting area according to inside-outside enthalpy difference.

1174 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Temperature , !- Ventilation Control Mode

WindowVentSched , !- Vent Temperature Schedule Name
0.3, !- Limit Value on Multiplier for Modulating Venting Open Factor
!- {dimensionless}
5.0, !- Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
10.0, !- Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
0.0, !- Lower Value on Inside/Outside Enthalpy Difference for Modulating
!- the Venting Open Factor {J/kg}
300000.0 , !- Upper Value on Inside/Outside Enthalpy Difference for Modulating
!- the Venting Open Factor {J/kg}
VentingSched; !- Venting Availability Schedule Name

1.27.7 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object specifies the properties of a surface “linkage” through
which air flows. This linkage is always associated with a building surface (wall, roof, floor, or a
ceiling) or subsurface (door, glass door, or window) with both faces exposed to air. The linkage
specifies two connected nodes: two zone nodes defined in AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone objects
based on inside and outside face environment for an interior surface, or a zone node defined in
an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object based on inside face environment and an external node
defined in an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode object for an exterior surface. The associated
leakage component for this surface can be a crack (or surface effective leakage area) in an exterior
or interior heat transfer surface or subsurface, or an exterior or interior window, door or glass door
(heat transfer subsurface) that can be opened to allow air flow. The allowed surface air leakage
components are:

– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SpecifiedFlowRate
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan

The three “opening” components are used to modulate openness based on required conditions.
The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object allows a heat transfer surface or subsurface to have
one crack (or one surface effective leakage area object), or a subsurface (i.e., window, door or glass
door) to have one opening (detailed, simple, or horizontal).
An interior heat transfer surface (BuildingSurface:Detailed) whose surface name is used as
the input for the Outside Boundary Condition Object field is adiabatic and is not allowed
as an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface. A heat transfer surface defined in the BuildingSur-
face:Detailed:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity is also not allowed.
When a non-rectangular subsurface is used, the model will automatically convert it into a rectan-
gular subsurface using equivalent width and height based on an entered choice from the Equivalent
Rectangle Method field or a default choice.
When an air boundary surface or subsurface is used (Construction:AirBoundary), all types of leakage
component are allowed except AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan. The only
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1175

allowed venting control type for an air boundary surface is Constant, and the venting schedule
is ignored (which means the opening is always fully open at the specified Window/Door Opening
Factor, or Crack Factor). EnergyManagementSystem:Actuator “AirFlow Network Window/Door
Opening” is available for special applications where control of the air boundary opening is required.

1.27.7.1 Field: Surface Name

This is the name of the corresponding surface (wall, roof, ceiling, floor, window, door or glass door).
Information on this surface is used by the program as follows:

– For a linkage associated with an exterior heat transfer surface: air flow through this linkage is
between the outside environment and the thermal zone to which the surface belongs.
– For a linkage associated with an interior (i.e., interzone) heat transfer surface: air flow through
this linkage is between the thermal zones separated by the surface (i.e., the thermal zone
associated with the inside face environment and the thermal zone associated with the outside
face environment).
– This heat transfer surface determines the height of the linkage, which is used in calculating
buoyancy-related flow through the linkage.
– The surface may be an air boundary surface or subsurface (Construction:AirBoundary).

Note: It is possible to define an interzone surface twice in EnergyPlus, once in each of the zones
that the surface separates. Previously this was a requirement of EnergyPlus (prior to version 2.0),
but now it is optional and the user also has the option of only defining the surface once (EnergyPlus
defines the second surface automatically within the program). For each interzone surface, use only
one (of possible two) interzone surface names in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object for
“Surface Name.” Do not enter two AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects corresponding to the
two possible interzone names. This would cause the air flow through the surface to be counted twice.

1.27.7.2 Field: Leakage Component Name

The name of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageA

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpen
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaus
object associated with this air flow linkage.
If the name of an opening component (i.e. AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening, or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOp
is given here, then the Surface Name in the previous field must be that of a window, door or glass
door heat transfer subsurface or a building surface which is an air boundary. Otherwise an error
message will be reported.
If the name of an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Effective
object is given here, the program will position the crack at the average height of the associated heat
transfer surface or subsurface. The user can define multiple heat transfer surfaces (e.g., split a wall
into several surfaces) to be more precise in establishing the crack location. Similarly, the user can
define multiple heat transfer surfaces if a wall, for example, has multiple cracks or openings that
need to be defined individually.
If the name of an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan is given here, then the
Surface Name in the previous field must be that of an exterior heat transfer surface. The zone name
1176 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

defined in the Zone Name field for this heat transfer surface must be the same zone name defined in
the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object (which references a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList con-
taining the name of the corresponding zone exhaust fan).Otherwise an error message will be reported.
When this zone exhaust fan is operating for a simulation timestep, all surface-level controls described
below are ignored for that timestep.

1.27.7.3 Field: External Node Name

The name of the associated AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode object, which determines the

wind pressure coefficients for the heat transfer surface. Used only if Surface Name is for an exterior
surface.
If Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
object, this field is not used and a blank may be entered. If the surface is an interior (i.e., interzone)
surface, leave this field blank.
When there is an input object of either ZoneProperty:LocalEnvironment or SurfaceProp-
erty:LocalEnvironment, LocalEnvironment is enable, so that entered names of OutdoorAir:Node
can be used as inputs for this field. More descrption of use can be found in OutdoorAir:Node.

1.27.7.4 Field: Window/Door Opening Factor, or Crack Factor

If this linkage is associated with an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening or Air-

flowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening object (which means it is an openable window
or door), then this field is called “Window/Door Opening Factor” and represents the value of the
Opening Factor that is in effect when the Vent Temperature Schedule (defined in the AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone object) indicates that this window or door is open.
The AirflowNetwork model uses a combination of factors to determine the actual opening area for
a window or door when it is venting. For example, consider a window that is 1.5m high and 2.0m
wide (excluding frame). Assume that the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
for this window has Type of Large Vertical Opening = 1 (non-pivoting window), Height Factor = 0.5
and Width Factor = 0.8. Then when the window is fully open, the opening area = height of opening
(0.5x1.5) times width of opening (0.8x2.0) = 0.75x1.6 = 1.2 m2 . If the Window/Door Opening
Factor is 0.75, then the opening area = 0.75x1.2 = 0.9 m2 .
If, in addition, the window is in a thermal zone for which opening modulation has been specified
(ref: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone) and the multiplication factor due to modulation is 0.3 in a
particular timestep, then the actual opening factor that timestep = 0.3x0.75 = 0.225 and the actual
opening area that timestep = 0.3x0.9 = 0.27 m2 .
If this linkage is associated with an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object, the following
crack air flow equation is used.

Q = (Crack F actor) ∗ CT ∗ CQ (∆P )n (1.103)

Where
Q is the air mass flow (kg/s)
CQ is the air mass flow coefficient (kg/s @ 1 Pa)
CT is the reference condition temperature correction factor (dimensionless). See AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1177

∆P is the pressure difference across crack (Pa)

n is the air flow exponent (dimensionless)
The following fields control venting. They are used only when Name of Associated Heat Transfer
Surface is that of an openable exterior or interior window, door or glass door. They only apply to
openings, and do not apply to surface cracks, effective leakage area or zone exhaust fans. If none
of these fields is specified, or if Ventilation Control Mode = ZoneLevel, venting is controlled by
the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object for the thermal zone containing the window or door (ref:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone Data).

1.27.7.5 Field: Ventilation Control Mode

Specifies the type of surface-level natural ventilation control.

Let Tout equals the outdoor air temperature, Tzone equals the previous timestep’s zone air temper-
ature, Tset equals the Vent Temperature Schedule value, Hzone equals the specific enthalpy of zone
air from the previous timestep, and Hout equals the specific enthalpy of outdoor air. Then the four
allowed choices for Ventilation Control Mode are:
NoVent: The openable window or door associated with this surface is closed at all times independent
of indoor or outdoor conditions. The Venting Availability Schedule is ignored in this case.
Temperature: The openable window or door associated with this surface is opened if Tzone > Tout
and Tzone > Tset and Venting Availability Schedule (see below) allows venting.
Enthalpy: The openable window or door associated with this surface is opened if Hzone > Hout
and Tzone > Tset and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
Constant: Whenever this object’s Venting Availability Schedule allows venting, the openable win-
dow or door associated with this surface is open, independent of indoor or outdoor conditions. Note
that “Constant” here means that the size of this opening is fixed while venting; the air flow through
this opening can, of course, vary from timestep to timestep. If the surface is an air boundary (Con-
struction:AirBoundary) then Constant is the only valid option (other options will throw a warning
and be reset to Constant).
ASHRAE55Adaptive: The openable window or door associated with this surface is opened if
the operative temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from
the ASHRAE Standard 55-2010 adaptive comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows
venting.
CEN15251Adaptive: The openable window or door associated with this surface is opened if the
operative temperature is greater than the comfort temperature (central line) calculated from the
CEN15251 adaptive comfort model and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting.
ZoneLevel: Venting of the window or door is not controlled individually, but is controlled instead
at the zone level. This means that the venting is determined by the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
object for the thermal zone containing the window or door (ref: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone
object). This is the default value for this field.
AdjacentTemperature: This choice is used for an interior surface only. The openable interior
window or door associated with this surface is opened if Tzone > Tadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and
Venting Availability Schedule (see below) allows venting, where Tadjacent zone is the adjacent zone
temperature.
AdjacentEnthalpy: This choice is also used for an interior surface only. The interior openable
window or door associated with this surface is opened if Hzone > Hadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset
1178 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

and Venting Availability Schedule allows venting, where Hadjacent zone is the adjacent zone specific
enthalpy.

1.27.7.6 Field: Ventilation Control Zone Temperature Setpoint Schedule Name

The name of a schedule of zone air temperature set points that controls the opening of a window
or door associated with this surface to provide natural ventilation. This setpoint is the temperature
above which this openable window or door will be opened if the conditions described in the previous
field Ventilation Control Mode are met.
The Ventilation Control Zone Temperature Setpoint Schedule applies only to a window or door at-
tached to this surface that is specified using AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
or AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening.
(The discussion under the field Window/Door Opening Factor in this object describes how the actual
opening area of a window or door in a particular timestep is determined.)
Modulation of Openings
The following five fields can be used to modulate this window/door opening when Ventilation Control
Mode = Temperature or Enthalpy. These fields determine a factor between 0 and 1 that multiplies
the opening factor of this window or door according to the control action shown in Figure 1.115
for Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature and in Figure 1.116 for Ventilation Control Mode =
Enthalpy. Modulation of this opening can reduce the large temperature swings that can occur if
the window/door is open too far when it is venting, especially when there is a large inside-outside
temperature difference.
The modulation takes the following form when Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature:
if Tzone - Tout < = [Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the
Venting Open Factor] then Multiplication factor = 1.0
if [Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the Venting Open Factor]
< Tzone - Tout < [Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the Venting
Open Factor] then Multiplication factor varies linearly from 1.0 to [Limit Value on Multiplier for
Modulating Venting Open Factor]
if Tzone - Tout > = [Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for Modulating the
Venting Open Factor] then Multiplication factor = [Limit Value on Multiplier for Modulating
Venting Open Factor]
One way of “tuning” the following modulation control parameters is to perform a sensitivity analysis
for winter and/or summer design days to determine what combination of values causes the biggest
reduction in zone air temperature fluctuations due to venting.
Note that the default values for the following fields are such that, if none of the fields are specified,
modulation will not occur.

1.27.7.7 Field: Minimum Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.115 or Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature
or Enthalpy. This value may be from zero to 1.0, with the default being 0.0.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1179

1.27.7.8 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Lower Limit For
Maximum Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.115. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value
may be from zero to less than 100°C, with the default being 0°C. The value for this field must be
less than the value specified for the following field.

1.27.7.9 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Temperature Difference Upper Limit for
Minimun Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.115. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Temperature. This value
must be greater than 0°C, with the default being 100°C. The value for this field must be greater
than the value specified for the previous field.

1.27.7.10 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Lower Limit For Max-
imum Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value may
be from zero to less than 300,000 J/kg, with the default being 0 J/kg. The value for this field must
be less than the value specified for the following field.

1.27.7.11 Field: Indoor and Outdoor Enthalpy Difference Upper Limit for Min-
imun Venting Open Factor

See Figure 1.116. This field applies only if Ventilation Control Mode = Enthalpy. This value must
be greater than zero, with the default being 300,000 J/kg. The value for this field must be greater
than the value specified for the previous field.

1.27.7.12 Field: Venting Availability Schedule Name

The name of a schedule that specifies when venting is available. A zero or negative schedule value
means venting is not allowed. A value greater than zero means venting can occur if other venting
control conditions (specified by Ventilation Control Mode and Vent Temperature Schedule Name)
are satisfied. This schedule name should not be confused with Vent Temperature Schedule Name.
If the surface is an air boundary (Construction:AirBoundary) then this field is ignored and venting
is always available.
If a Venting Availability Schedule Name is not specified, it is assumed that venting is always available.
Using Venting Availability Schedule allows you to turn off venting at certain times of the day (at
night, for example), week (on weekends, for example), or year (during the winter, for example).
If used with Ventilation Control Mode = Constant, the ventilation rate is constant only when this
schedule allows venting; otherwise the ventilation rate is set to zero.
If Ventilation Control Mode = NoVent, this schedule has no effect.
Note: In order to establish an airflow network, each AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object must
have at least two surfaces defined with AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects, so that air can
flow from one zone into other zones (or to outdoors) through the network (air mass flow conserved).
1180 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

In addition, for all AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects facing the same Zone Name (ref. Build-
ingSurface:Detailed), at least two different environments must be defined for the other side of these
surfaces (e.g., an external node and an adjacent zone, two adjacent zones, or two external nodes).

1.27.7.13 Field: Occupant Ventilation Control Name

The name of an AirlowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl object. The object is used to perform

advanced window opening control based on occupant conditions. When an object name is given,
advanced window opening control is performed and, the Ventilation Control defined in the Ventilation
Control Mode field will be overridden.

1.27.7.14 Field: Equivalent Rectangle Method

This field is applied to a non-rectangular window or door. The equivalent rectangular surface has
the same area as the non-rectangular one. The valid choices are: PolygonHeight, BaseSurfaceAspec-
tRatio, and UserDefinedAspectRatio, with the default of PolygonHeight. When PolygonHeight is
entered, the equivalent width is equal to the area divided by the PolygonHeight for a non-horizontal
surface. When a surface is horizontal with the same height for all vertices, the model will automati-
cally switch a choice to BaseSurfaceAspectRatio if a base surface is rectangular, or UserDefinedAspec-
tRatio with the default value if a base surface is non-rectangular. When BaseSurfaceAspectRatio is
entered for a rectangular base surface, the equivalent height is equal to Square Root of Area divided
by the base surface aspect ratio. The equivalent width is equal to the equivalent height times the
base surface aspect ratio. When a base surface is non-rectangular, the model will automatically
switch the choice to PolygonHeight for a non-horizontal base surface, and UserDefinedAspectRatio
with the default value if a base surface is horizontal. When UserDefinedAspectRatio is entered,
the equivalent height is equal to Square Root of Area divided by UserDefinedAspectRatio. The
equivalent width is equal to the equivalent height times the user-defined aspect ratio.

1.27.7.15 Field: Equivalent Rectangle Aspect Ratio

This field applies only if Equivalent Rectangle Method = UserDefinedAspectRatio. This value must
be greater than zero, with the default being 1.0.
IDF examples are provided below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn001:Wall001 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
CR -1, !- Leakage Component Name
SFacade , !- External Node Name
1.0; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win001 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
WiOpen1 , !- Leakage Component Name
SFacade , !- External Node Name
0.5; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn003:Wall003 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
Zone3 Exhaust Fan , !- Leakage Component Name
EFacade , !- External Node Name
1.0; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface ,
Zn001:Wall001:Win002 , !- Name of Associated Heat Transfer Surface
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1181

WiOpen2 , !- Leakage Component Name

WFacade , !- External Node Name
0.5; !- Window/Door Opening Factor , or Crack Factor {dimensionless}
Temperature , !- Ventilation Control Mode
WindowVentSched , !- Vent Temperature Schedule Name
0.3, !- Limit Value on Multiplier for Modulating Venting Open Factor
!- {dimensionless}
5.0, !- Lower Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
10.0, !- Upper Value on Inside/Outside Temperature Difference for
!- Modulating the Venting Open Factor {deltaC}
0.0, !- Lower Value on Inside/Outside Enthalpy Difference for Modulating
!- the Venting Open Factor {J/kg}
300000.0 , !- Upper Value on Inside/Outside Enthalpy Difference for Modulating
!- the Venting Open Factor {J/kg}
VentingSched; !- Venting Availability Schedule Name

1.27.8 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions
This object specifies the reference conditions for temperature, humidity, and pressure which corre-
spond to the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object.

1.27.8.1 Inputs

1.27.8.1.1 Field: Name

The name of this Reference Crack Conditons object. This name is referenced by an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object.

1.27.8.1.2 Field: Reference Temperature

The reference temperature in °C under which the Surface Crack Data were obtained. The default
value is 20°C.

1.27.8.1.3 Field: Reference Barometric Pressure

The reference barometric pressure in Pa under which the Surface Crack Data were obtained. The
default value is 101325 Pa.

1.27.8.1.4 Field: Reference Humidity Ratio

The reference humidity ratio in kgWater/kgDryAir under which the Surface Crack Data were ob-
tained. The default value is 0 kgWater/kgDryAir.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions ,
ReferenceCrackConditions , !- Name of Reference Crack Conditions
20.0, !- Reference Temperature for Crack Data {C}
101325 , !- Reference Barometric Pressure for Crack Data {Pa}
0.0; !- Reference Humidity Ratio for Crack Data {kgWater/kgDryAir}
1182 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.9 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack
This object specifies the properties of air flow through a crack and the associated measurement
conditions. The following power law form is used that gives air flow through the crack as a function
of the pressure difference across the crack:

Q = (Crack F actor) ∗ CT ∗ CQ (∆P )n (1.104)

Where
Q = air mass flow (kg/s)
CQ = air mass flow coefficient (kg/s-Pan @ 1 Pa)
CT = reference condition temperature correction factor (dimensionless)
∆P = pressure difference across crack (Pa)
n = air flow exponent (dimensionless)

 n−1 h
ρo νo i2n−1
CT = (1.105)
ρ ν

where
ρ = Air density at the specific air temperature and humidity ratio conditions [kg/m3 ]
ν = Air kinetic viscosity at the specific air temperature condition [m2 /s]
ρo = Air density at the reference air conditions provided by the object AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:-
ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [kg/m3 ]
νo = Air kinetic viscosity at the reference air temperature provided by the object AirflowNetwork:-
MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [m2 /s]
Note: The correction factor shown above is use for this particular component as specified.

1.27.9.1 Inputs

1.27.9.1.1 Field: Name

This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object. It is referenced by an
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.

1.27.9.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient at Reference Conditions

The value of the air mass flow coefficient,CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s at
1Pa. This value must be greater than zero.

1.27.9.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent

The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with the
default value being 0.65.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1183

1.27.9.1.4 Field: Reference Crack Conditions

The name of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object which specifies the
conditions under which the air mass flow coefficient was measured. If the user omits this field and
only one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object is defined in the input data
file, then those reference crack conditions will be used. If the user omits this field and either zero or
more than one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions objects are defined in the input
data file, then the default conditions for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone: Reference Crack Conditions
object will be used.
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack ,
CR -1, !- Name of Surface Crack Component
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient at Reference Conditions {kg/s}
0.667 , !- Air Mass Flow Exponent {dimensionless}
ReferenceCrackConditions ; !- Reference Crack Conditions

1.27.10 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
The effective leakage area (ELA) object is used to define surface air leakage. It has
five fields. The relationship between pressure and airflow may be expressed as:

p
ṁ = ELA ∗ Cd 2ρ ∗ (∆Pr )0.5−n (∆P )n (1.106)

where
ṁ = Air mass flow rate [kg/s]
ELA = Effective leakage area [m2 ]
ρ = Air density [kg/m3 ]
∆Pr = Reference pressure difference [Pa]
∆P = Pressure difference across this component [Pa]
Cd = Discharge coefficient [dimensionless]
n = Air mass flow exponent [dimensionless]

1.27.10.1 Inputs

1.27.10.1.1 Field: Name

This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea object. It is refer-
enced by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.

1.27.10.1.2 Field: Effective Leakage Area

This numeric field is used to input the effective leakage area in square meters. The effective
leakage area is used to characterize openings for infiltration calculations (ASHRAE Handbook of
Fundamentals, 1997, pp 25.18). This value must be greater than zero.
1184 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.10.1.3 Field: Discharge Coefficient

This numeric field is used to input the discharge coefficient. This value must be greater than zero,
with a default value of 1.0.

1.27.10.1.4 Field: Reference Pressure Difference

This numeric field is used to input the reference pressure difference [Pa]. This value must be greater
than zero, with a default value of 4.0 Pa.

1.27.10.1.5 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent

This numeric field is used to input the pressure difference exponent. The valid range of the exponent
is from 0.5 to 1.0, with a default value of 0.65.

Note: There are two common sets of reference conditions: Cd = 1.0 and ∆P = 4 Pa, or Cd =
0.6 and ∆P = 10 Pa

An IDF example is shown below:

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea ,
SurfaceELR , !- Name of surface effective leakage area component
0.07, !- Effective leakage area {dimensionless}
1.00, !- Discharge coefficient {dimensionless}
4.0, !- Reference pressure difference {Pa}
0.65; !- Air mass flow exponent {dimensionless}

1.27.11 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SpecifiedFlowRate
The specified flow object is used to specify flow through a surface. The object has three fields and
will cause the mass flow ṁ to be set appropriately as

ṁ = F (1.107)

when the mass flow rate F is specified or as

ṁ = ρQ (1.108)

when the volume flow rate Q is specified. A positive value of the flow directs the flow from node 1
of the linkage to node 2, and a negative value directs the flow from node 2 to node 1 of the linkage.
For surface linkages that are part of the building envelope, a positive value means flow from inside
to the outdoors (exfiltration) and a negative value is a flow from the outside to inside (infiltration).

1.27.11.1 Inputs

1.27.11.1.1 Field: Name

This is a name for this object. It is referenced by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.

1.27.11.1.2 Field: Air Flow Value

This numeric field is used to input the flow rate F or Q. The units of the value are determined by
the following field.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1185

1.27.11.1.3 Field: Air Flow Units

This choice field determines the units of the air flow value. Two options are available, “kg/s” and
“m3/s”.
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SpecifiedFlowRate ,
SpecMassFlow , !- Name of specified flow component
0.0001 , !- Air flow rate
kg/s; !- Air flow units

1.27.12 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
This object specifies the properties of air flow through windows and doors (window, door and glass
door heat transfer subsurfaces) when they are closed or open. The fields are similar to those for
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:SurfaceCrack object when the window or door is closed, but additional
fields are required to describe the air flow characteristics when the window or door is open. These
additional fields include opening type, opening dimensions, degree of opening, and opening schedule.
The AirflowNetwork model assumes that open windows or doors are vertical or close to vertical;
for this reason they are called “Large Vertical Openings.” Such openings can have air flow moving
simultaneously in two different directions depending on stack effects and wind conditions (for exam-
ple, flow from inside to outside at the top of a window and from outside to inside at the bottom).
AirflowNetwork models such two-directional flow, but only for vertical openings.
It is assumed that the air flow through a window opening is unaffected by the presence of a shading
device such as a shade or blind on the window. Also, the calculation of conductive heat transfer and
solar gain through a window or door assumes that the window or door is closed.
The AirflowNetwork model does not have a model for bi-directional flow through large horizon-
tal openings in exterior surfaces. For this reason, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:-
DetailedOpening should not be used for exterior horizontal openings. The best modeling
technique in this case is to put an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object in a horizontal
surface and use a large air mass flow coefficient. Crack flow is assumed to be uni-directional in any
given timestep (but can reverse flow direction from timestep to timestep).
For large horizontal openings in interior surfaces, see AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:-
HorizontalOpening.
A subsurface multiplier may be used to represent multiple subsurfaces and calculates total air flow
when the subsurface (window, glassdoor, or door) is either closed or open. The total airflow across the
surface is equal to the airflow based on the surface geometry multiplied by the subsurface multiplier.

1.27.12.1 Inputs

1.27.12.1.1 Field: Name

The name of this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening object. It is referenced
by an AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface object.

1.27.12.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When Opening is Closed

Crack flow is assumed when the window or door is closed. The units for this air mass flow coefficient
(CQ, unit length ) are different from the units for CQ (kg/s at 1 Pa pressure difference) defined in an
1186 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object. There is no default but the entered value must be

greater than zero. The program will automatically generate four cracks around the perimeter of the
window or door–one along the bottom, one along the top, and one on each side. The temperature
correction factor used in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack object is not used for this
component to calculate air mass flow rate.

1.27.12.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When Opening Is Closed

Crack flow is assumed when the window or door is closed. In this case, the value of this field is the
exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range for this exponent is 0.5 to 1.0, with
the default value being 0.65. Mass Flow Rate = Air Mass Flow Coefficient (deltaP) Air Mass Flow
Exponent.

1.27.12.1.4 Field: Type of Rectanguler Large Vertical Opening (LVO)

This alpha field specifies the type of rectangular window or door. (Open windows or doors are
also called Large Vertical Openings (LVOs). The choices for the opening type are NonPivoted
(LVO Type 1) and HorizontallyPivoted (LVO Type 2) with the default being NonPivoted. The
NonPivoted type represents a regular window or door. The HorizontallyPivoted type represents a
window with a horizontal axis (i.e., a horizontally-pivoting window) and cannot be used for a door.

1.27.12.1.5 Field: Extra Crack Length or Height of Pivoting Axis

Specifies window or door characteristics that depend on the LVO type.
For LVO Type 1 (rectangular non-pivoted windows and doors) this field is the extra crack length
in meters due to multiple openable parts, if present. “Extra” here means in addition to the length,
calculated by the program, of the cracks on the top, bottom and sides of the window/door.
For LVO Type 2 (rectangular horizontally-pivoted windows) this field gives the height of the pivoting
axis measured from the bottom of the glazed part of the window (m).

1.27.12.1.6 Field: Number of Sets of Opening Factor Data

This is the number of the following sets of data for opening factor, discharge coefficient, width factor,
height factor, and start height factor. From two to four of these sets must be defined. The first
set should be for Opening Factor = 0.0 and the last set should be for Opening Factor = 1.0. For
example, if only two sets are defined, the first set should be for Opening Factor = 0.0 and the second
set should be for Opening Factor = 1.0, as shown below in the IDF example below.
An “opening factor” refers to the amount that a window or door is opened. The program linearly
interpolates each timestep between the values of discharge coefficient, width factor, etc., in these
sets using the opening factor for the window or door for the timestep. (See discussion under the
field Window/Door Opening Factor in the AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Zone object for a description
of how the AirflowNetwork model determines the time-step value of the opening factor.)

1.27.12.1.7 Field Group: Opening Factor, Discharge Coefficient, Width Factor,

Height Factor, Start Height Factor
Each field is described for as many groups as required in the previous field (number of sets of opening
factor data). As the final field has specific requirements, this field (n) will be described.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1187

1.27.12.1.8 Field: Opening Factor 11

The first opening factor of a window or door. This value must be 0.0. The default value is also 0.0.
For LVO Type 1 (rectangular non-pivoted window or door), the Opening Factor corresponds to the
fraction of window or door that is opened.
For LVO Type 2 (rectangular horizontally-pivoted windows), the Opening Factor is determined by
the window opening angle. For example, an opening angle of 45° corresponds to an Opening Factor
of 0.50 since the maximum opening angle is 90°.

1.27.12.1.9 Field: Discharge Coefficient for Opening Factor 1

The discharge coefficient of the window or door for Opening Factor 1. The range is greater than
0.0 to less than or equal to 1.0. The default value is 0.001. The Discharge Coefficient indicates the
fractional effectiveness for air flow through a window or door at that Opening Factor.
Note: In the following, “window width” and “window height” are glazing dimensions; they do not
include the frame, if present.

1.27.12.1.10 Field: Width Factor for Opening Factor 1

The Width Factor of the rectangular window or door for Opening Factor 1. The Width Factor is
the opening width divided by the window or door width (see Figure 1.117). The range is 0.0 to 1.0.
The default value is 0.0. Note that the width factor applies to rectangular windows or doors where
the width is assumed constant along the entire height of the opening.

1.27.12.1.11 Field: Height Factor for Opening Factor 1

The Height Factor of the rectangular window or door for Opening Factor 1. The Height Factor is
the opening height divided by the window or door height (see Figure 1.117). The range is 0.0 to 1.0.
The default value is 0.0. Note that the height factor applies to rectangular windows or doors where
the height is assumed constant along the entire width of the opening.

1.27.12.1.12 Field: Start Height Factor for Opening Factor 1

The Start Height Factor of the window or door for Opening Factor 1. The Start Height Factor is
the Start Height divided by the window or door height (see Figure 1.117). The range is 0.0 to 1.0.
The default is 0. Start Height is the distance between the bottom of the window or door and the
bottom of the window or door opening. The sum of the Height Factor and the Start Height Factor
must be less than 1.0 in order to have the opening within the window or door dimensions.

1.27.12.1.13 Field: Opening Factor <n>

When Number of Sets of Opening Factor Data = n, the value of Opening Factor n must be set to
1.0.

1.27.12.1.14 Field: Discharge Coefficient for Opening Factor <n>

The discharge coefficient of the window or door for Opening Factor n. The range is greater than 0.0
to less than or equal to 1.0. The default value is 1.0.
1188 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.117: Window (or door) showing geometrical factors associated with an opening through
which air flows.

1.27.12.1.15 Field: Width Factor for Opening Factor <n>

The Width Factor of the rectangular window or door for Opening Factor n. The Width Factor is
the opening width divided by the window or door width (see Figure 1.117). The range is 0.0 to 1.0.
The default value is 1.0.

1.27.12.1.16 Field: Height Factor for Opening Factor <n>

The Height Factor of the rectangular window or door for Opening Factor n. The Height Factor is
the opening height divided by the window or door height (see Figure 1.117). The range is 0.0 to 1.0.
The default value is 1.0.

1.27.12.1.17 Field: Start Height Factor for Opening Factor <n>

The Start Height Factor of the window or door for Opening Factor n. The Start Height Factor is
the Start Height divided by the window or door height (see Figure 1.117). The range is 0.0 to 1.0.
The default is 0.
When the opening factor value (as described under the field Window/Door Opening Factor in the
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object) is between two Opening Factor field values, the values of
Discharge Coefficient, Width Factor, Height Factor, and Start Height Factor are linearly interpolated.
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening ,
WiOpen1 , !- Detailed Opening Name
0.001 , !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When Opening is Closed {kg/s-m}
0.667 , !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When Opening is Closed {dimensionless}
NonPivoted , !- Type of Large Vertical Opening (LVO)
0.0, !- Extra crack length for LVO type 1 with multiple openable parts ,
!- or Height of pivoting axis for LVO type 2 {m}
2, !- Number of Sets of Opening Factor Data
0.0, !- Opening factor 1 {dimensionless}
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1189

0.5, !- Discharge coefficient for opening factor 1 {dimensionless}

0.0, !- Width factor for opening factor 1 {dimensionless}
1.0, !- Height factor for opening factor 1 {dimensionless}
0.0, !- Start height factor for opening factor 1 {dimensionless}
1.0, 0.6, 1.0, 1.0, 0.0; !- Set of values for opening factor 2

1.27.13 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
This object specifies the properties of air flow through windows, doors and glass doors (heat trans-
fer subsurfaces defined as a subset of FenestrationSurface:Detailed objects) when they are closed or
open. This AirflowNetwork model assumes that these openings are horizontal or close to horizontal
and are interzone surfaces. The second and third input fields are similar to those for AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:Crack, when the window or door is closed, but additional information is
required to describe the air flow characteristics when the window or door is open. This additional
information is specified in the last two input fields. The airflow across the opening consists of two
types of flows: forced and buoyancy. The forced flow is caused by the pressure difference between
two zones, while the buoyancy flow only occurs when the air density in the upper zone is greater
than the air density in the lower zone. This opening also allows for the possibility of two-way flow
when forced and buoyancy flows co-exist. This object’s openness can also be modulated based on the
same opening factor control as an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening object.
However, the opening factor is only applied to the subsurface width. The opening width is equal to
opening factor multiplied by the subsurface width.
A subsurface multiplier may be used to represent multiple subsurfaces and calculates total air flow
when the subsurface (window, glassdoor, or door) is either closed or open. The total airflow across the
surface is equal to the airflow based on the surface geometry multiplied by the subsurface multiplier.

1.27.13.1 Inputs

1.27.13.1.1 Field: Name

This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening object. It is ref-
erenced by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.

1.27.13.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When Opening is Closed

The value of the air mass flow coefficient, CQ, unit length , in the horizontal opening air flow equation.
It has units of kg/s-m at 1Pa. The temperature correction factor is not applied to the mass flow
calculation. This is a required input field and the entered value must be greater than zero.

1.27.13.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When Opening is Closed

The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with the
default value being 0.65.

1.27.13.1.4 Field: Sloping Plane Angle

This numeric field is used to represent the angle between the horizontal plane and a sloped plane
under the horizontal opening. Sloping plane angle = 90 is equivalent to fully open. The valid range
is >0 to 90, with the default value being 90.
1190 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.13.1.5 Field: Discharge Coefficient

This numeric field is used to input the discharge coefficient. This is a required field and the entered
value must be greater than zero.
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening ,
HrOpen , !- Name
0.001 , !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When Opening is Closed {kg/s-m}
0.667 , !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When Opening is Closed {dimensionless}
90.0, !- Sloping Plane Angle
0.2; !- Discharge Coefficient

1.27.14 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening
This object specifies the properties of air flow through windows, doors and glass doors (heat transfer
subsurfaces) when they are closed or open. The AirflowNetwork model assumes that open win-
dows or doors are vertical or close to vertical. The second and third fields are similar to those
for AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack, when the window or door is closed, but additional
information is required to describe the air flow characteristics when the window or door is open.
This additional information is specified in the last two fields. Compared to the object AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, which requires more inputs at different opening fac-
tors, this object needs comparatively less inputs. For this reason it is called a simple opening. This
opening also allows for the possibility of two-way flow due to temperature and resulting density dif-
ferences. Therefore, it is possible to have a positive pressure difference at the top of the opening, and
a negative pressure difference at the bottom (or vice versa) when the neutral height is between the
bottom and top heights of the associated surface. This object’s openness can also be modulated based
on the same opening factor control as an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening
object. However, the opening factor is only applied to the subsurface width. The opening width is
equal to opening factor multiplied by the subsurface width.
A subsurface multiplier may be used to represent multiple subsurfaces and calculates total air flow
when the subsurface (window, glassdoor, or door) is either closed or open. The total airflow across the
surface is equal to the airflow based on the surface geometry multiplied by the subsurface multiplier.

1.27.14.1 Inputs

1.27.14.1.1 Field: Name

This is a name for this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening object. It is referenced
by an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.

1.27.14.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When Opening is Closed

The value of the air mass flow coefficient, CQ, unit length , in the simple opening air flow equation.
It has units of kg/s-m at 1Pa. The temperature correction factor is not applied for mass flow
calculation.

1.27.14.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When Opening is Closed

The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with
the default value being 0.65. Mass Flow Rate = Air Mass Flow Coefficient (deltaP)^Air Mass Flow
Exponent.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1191

1.27.14.1.4 Field: Minimum Density Difference for Two-Way Flow

This numeric field is used to input the minimum density difference above which two-way or one way
flow may occur due to stack effect with the window being open. Two-way flow occurs only when the
neutral plane is within the opening. Density differences less than this value result in one-way flow
only with the window being closed. The minimum value for this field is greater than zero.

1.27.14.1.5 Field: Discharge Coefficient

This numeric field is used to input the discharge coefficient. This value must be greater than zero.
An IDF example is shown below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening ,
WiOpen2 , !- Simple Opening Name
0.001 , !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When Opening Is Closed {kg/s-m}
0.650 , !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When Opening Is Closed {dimensionless}
0.0001 , !- Minimum density difference for two -way flow (kg/m3)
1.0; !- Discharge coefficient (dimensionless)

1.27.15 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
This object specifies the properties of air flow through an exterior heat transfer surface with a zone
exhaust fan. The zone exhaust fan turns on or off based on the availability schedule defined in the
corresponding Fan:ZoneExhaust object. When the exhaust fan mass flow rate is greater than zero,
the airflow network model treats this object as a constant volume fan. When the fan is off based on
the availability schedule, the model treats this object as a crack.
When the fan is on, the air mass flow rate modeled for the airflow network is based on the value
defined in the MaximumFlow Rate field of the Fan:ZoneExhaust object. The airflow direction is
from the corresponding zone to outdoors.
When the fan is off, the following power law form is used that gives air flow through the crack as a
function of the pressure difference across the crack:

Q = (Crack F actor) ∗ CT ∗ CQ (∆P )n (1.109)

Where
Q = air mass flow (kg/s)
CQ = air mass flow coefficient (kg/s-Pan @ 1 Pa)
CT = reference condition temperature correction factor (dimensionless)
∆P = pressure difference across crack (Pa)
n = air flow exponent (dimensionless)

 n−1 h
ρo νo i2n−1
CT = (1.110)
ρ ν

where
ρ = Air density at the specific air temperature and humidity ratio conditions [kg/m3 ]
ν = Air kinetic viscosity at the specific air temperature condition [m2 /s]
1192 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ρo = Air density at the reference air conditions provided by the object AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:-
ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [kg/m3 ]
νo = Air kinetic viscosity at the reference air temperature provided by the object AirflowNetwork:-
MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions specified in the field Reference Crack Conditions [m2 /s]
Note: The correction factor shown above is used when the exhaust fan is off. The airflow direction
is based on the pressure difference between the zone and outdoors.

1.27.15.1 Inputs

1.27.15.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name for this instance of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan
object. This name must be the same name defined in the Fan:ZoneExhaust object. It is referenced
by an AirflowNetwork:Multizone:Surface object.

1.27.15.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off
at Reference Conditions
The value of the air mass flow coefficient,CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s at
1Pa. This value must be greater than zero. The value is used when the fan is off.

1.27.15.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off

The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with the
default value being 0.65. The value is used when the fan is off.

1.27.15.1.4 Field: Reference Crack Conditions

The name of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object which specifies the
conditions under which the air mass flow coefficient was measured. If the user omits this field and
only one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object is defined in the input data
file, then those reference crack conditions will be used. If the user omits this field and either zero or
more than one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions objects are defined in the input
data file, then the default conditions for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone: Reference Crack Conditions
object will be used.
An IDF example is shown below:

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan ,
Zone3 Exhaust Fan , !- Name
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off at Reference
Conditions {kg/s}
0.667; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When the Zone Exhaust Fan is Off{dimensionless}
ReferenceCrackConditions ; !- Reference Crack Conditions

1.27.16 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
External nodes in the AirflowNetwork model define environmental conditions outside of the building.
These conditions include wind pressure coefficients that vary from façade to façade and can be highly
dependent on the building geometry.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1193

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects do not have to be entered if Wind Pressure Coef-

ficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object.

1.27.16.1 Inputs

1.27.16.1.1 Field: Name

The external node name is associated with a particular building façade. This name is referenced by
the External Node Name field of an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.

1.27.16.1.2 Field: External Node Height

Designates the reference height, in meters, used to calculate relative pressure. The default value is
0 meters.

1.27.16.1.3 Field: Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name

The name of a specific AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues object, curve, or
table (which gives wind pressure coefficients for the façade as a function of angle of wind incident
on the façade). Curves or tables should have the domain of 0 to 180 degrees or 0 to 360 degrees,
depending upon the symmetry field (see below).

1.27.16.1.4 Field: Symmetric Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Specifies the sym-
metry of the above named curve. The default is No, meaning that the curve will be evaluated from
0 to 360 degrees. Specify Yes for a curve that is symmetric about zero and is evaluated only up to
180 degrees. For this type of curve, an angle of 270 degrees is passed to the curve as 90 degrees.

1.27.16.1.5 Field: Wind Angle Type Specifies which wind angle should be used to calcu-
late the wind pressure coefficient. The default is Absolute, meaning that the absolute wind direction
angle will be used. Specifying Relative means that the angle will be relative to the surface normal.
For a surface facing due east, the angle 0 corresponds to wind blowing perpendicular to and at the
surface with absolute direction 90 degrees, while 90 degrees corresponds to wind blowing parallel to
the surface from the right (facing outward) with an absolute direction of 180 degrees.
IDF examples are provided below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
NFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
NFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
EFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
EFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
SFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
SFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
WFacade , !- Name
1.524 , !- External Node Height {m}
WFacade_WPCValue; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name
1194 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode ,
Horizontal , !- Name
3.028 , !- External Node Height {m}
Horizontal_WPCValue ; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Curve Name

1.27.17 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray
The reference height and wind directions are first specified under the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCo
object. The user may specify up to 36 different wind directions in ascending order. These are then
referenced by AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects defined for each
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode.
The AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray object is unique and needs to be en-
tered only if Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = INPUT in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
object. If Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation, this object is not required.

1.27.17.1 Inputs

1.27.17.1.1 Field: Name

The name of this AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray object. This name is
referenced by each AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues object which, for each
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode, gives the wind pressure coefficients at each of the wind
directions listed in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray. This name is
also referenced by the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object, indicating that this AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray and the pressure coefficients in the associated Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects will be used in the air flow simula-
tion.

1.27.17.1.2 Field: Wind Direction 1-Wind Direction N

Each field references the wind direction corresponding to the first through the Nth WPC value in
each of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects. N can be as high as
36.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray ,
Every 30 Degrees , !- WPC Array Name
0, !- Wind Direction #1 {deg}
30, !- Wind Direction #2 {deg}
60, !- Wind Direction #3 {deg}
90, !- Wind Direction #4 {deg}
120, !- Wind Direction #5 {deg}
150, !- Wind Direction #6 {deg}
180, !- Wind Direction #7 {deg}
210, !- Wind Direction #8 {deg}
240, !- Wind Direction #9 {deg}
270, !- Wind Direction #10 {deg}
300, !- Wind Direction #11 {deg}
330; !- Wind Direction #12 {deg}
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1195

1.27.18 AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues
This object specifies up to 36 wind pressure coefficients (WPCs) for an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode.
These coefficients are defined for each of the wind directions defined in the unique AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray object. In the air flow calculation, interpolation of
the specified WPC values is done for time-step values of wind direction.
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects need to be entered only if the
Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = INPUT in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object. If Wind
Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverageCalculation, this object is not required and is not used.

1.27.18.1 Inputs

1.27.18.1.1 Field: Name

The name of this WindPressureCoefficientValues object. This name can be referenced by multiple
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode objects.

1.27.18.1.2 Field: WindPressureCoefficientArray Name

Name of the associated AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray, which lists
the wind direction corresponding to each wind pressure coefficient value in this AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues object.

1.27.18.1.3 Field: Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 1 to Wind Pressure Coeffi-

cient Value N
The WPC (wind pressure coefficient) value for the building façade indicated by the External Node
Name field above. This WPC value corresponds to the first wind direction in the AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientArray. Note that WPC values can be positive, negative or
zero.

1.27.18.1.4 Obtaining WPC values

WPC values can be obtained from wind tunnel measurements, CFD calculations, or from published
values for different building shapes.
For rectangular buildings EnergyPlus will automatically calculate surface-averaged Cp values for
the walls and roof of the building if you specify Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = SurfaceAverage-
Calculation in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object. In this case you do not have to enter
any AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues objects.
Wind pressure coefficients are reported in the eplusout.eio either from inputs using “INPUT” as the
choice for the Wind Pressure Coefficient Type field defined in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
object, or from internal calculation using SurfaceAverageCalculation as the choice for the Wind
Pressure Coefficient Type field defined in the same object. Below is an output example from the
eplusout.eio file:
AirflowNetwork Model:Wind Direction ,
0.0 ,30.0 ,60.0 ,90.0 ,120.0 ,150.0 ,180.0 ,210.0 ,240.0 ,270.0 ,300.0 ,330.0
! <AirflowNetwork Model:Wind Pressure Coefficients , WPC Name , Wind Pressure Coefficients #1 to n (
dimensionless)>
AirflowNetwork Model:Wind Pressure Coefficients , NFACADE , 0.60 ,0.48 ,4.00E
-002 , -0.56 , -0.56 , -0.42 , -0.37 , -0.42 , -0.56 , -0.56 ,4.00E -002 ,0.48
1196 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirflowNetwork Model:Wind Pressure Coefficients , EFACADE , -0.56 ,4.00E -002 ,0.48 ,0.60 ,0.48 ,4.00E
-002 , -0.56 , -0.56 , -0.42 , -0.37 , -0.42 , -0.56
AirflowNetwork Model:Wind Pressure Coefficients , SFACADE , -0.37 , -0.42 , -0.56 , -0.56 ,4.00E
-002 ,0.48 ,0.60 ,0.48 ,4.00E-002 , -0.56 , -0.56 , -0.42
AirflowNetwork Model:Wind Pressure Coefficients , WFACADE ,
-0.56 , -0.56 , -0.42 , -0.37 , -0.42 , -0.56 , -0.56 ,4.00E -002 ,0.48 ,0.60 ,0.48 ,4.00E -002

An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:WindPressureCoefficientValues ,
NFacade_WPCValue , !- Name
Every 30 Degrees , !- AirflowNetwork:MultiZone: WindPressureCoefficientArray Name
0.60, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 1 {dimensionless}
0.48, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 2 {dimensionless}
0.04, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 3 {dimensionless}
-0.56, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 4 {dimensionless}
-0.56, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 5 {dimensionless}
-0.42, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 6 {dimensionless}
-0.37, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 7 {dimensionless}
-0.42, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 8 {dimensionless}
-0.56, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 9 {dimensionless}
-0.56, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 10 {dimensionless}
0.04, !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 11 {dimensionless}
0.48; !- Wind Pressure Coefficient Value 12 {dimensionless}

1.27.19 AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl
The AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl object provides control options with minimum
opening and closing time checks and opening and closing probability values. In general, the proba-
bility values could be a constant or a specific function. Due to lack of real data, two schedules are
selected to represent probability values. If real data are available, this object may be modified to
adopt new data.

1.27.19.1 Inputs

1.27.19.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name of the object.

1.27.19.1.2 Field: Minimum Opening Time

The field represents the minimum time that windows will remain open. If a window has been open
for a time less than this value, the window will remain open.

1.27.19.1.3 Field: Minimum Closing Time

The field represents the minimum time that windows will remain closed. If a window has been closed
for a time less than this value, the window will remain closed.

1.27.19.1.4 Field: Thermal Comfort Low Temperature Curve Name

This alpha field defines the name of a curve to be used for thermal comfort temperature calculation
at low outdoor dry-bulb temperature. This curve is a linear or quadratic equation using outdoor
dry-bulb temperatures as an independent variable. This performance curve can be used to describe
the thermal comfort temperature at low outdoor dry-bulb temperature. It allows maximum two
curves to describe the thermal comfort temperature in two different outdoor dry-bulb temperature
regions. If a single curve is used, blanks are entered in the following two fields.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1197

1.27.19.1.5 Field: Thermal Comfort Temperature Boundary Point

When there are two piecewise curves to represent thermal comfort temperature calculation, this field
represents a boundary point of outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The low temperature curve and the
high temperature curve should have the same values at the boundary point. If a single curve is used,
this field may be left blank.

1.27.19.1.6 Field: Thermal Comfort High Temperature Curve Name

This alpha field defines the name of a curve to be used for thermal comfort temperature calculation
at high outdoor dry-bulb temperature. This curve is a linear or quadratic equation using outdoor
dry-bulb temperatures as an independent variable. This performance curve can be used to describe
the thermal comfort temperature at high outdoor dry-bulb temperature. It allows maximum two
curves to describe the thermal comfort temperature in two different outdoor dry-bulb temperature
regions. If a single curve is used, blanks are entered in this field.

1.27.19.1.7 Field: Maximum Threshold for Persons Dissatisfied PPD

This field is used to calculate the comfort band as a function of predicted percentage of dissatisfied
(PPD). The default value is 10%. The equation is based on curve fit and is valid between 0% and
35%.

Θ = −0.0028(100 − P P D)2 + 0.3419(100 − P P D) − 6.6275 (1.111)

where

– Θ is the comfort band (degC)

– PPD is predicted percentage person of dissatisfied (%)

1.27.19.1.8 Field: Occupancy Check

Input is Yes or No. The default is No. If Yes, an occupancy check is performed used in the opening
probability check. If No, the occupancy check is bypassed.

1.27.19.1.9 Field: Opening Probability Schedule Name

The name of a schedule of opening probability that controls the opening of windows and doors in the
thermal zone to provide natural ventilation. If the probability value is greater a random number,
windows are allowed to open. Otherwise, the output will be false. This control will occur when
minimum time checks for both opening and closing are satisfied.

1.27.19.1.10 Field: Closing Probability Schedule Name

The name of a schedule of closing probability that controls the closing of windows and doors in the
thermal zone to reduce natural ventilation. If the probability value is greater a random number,
windows are allowed to be closed. Otherwise, the output will be false. This control will occur when
minimum time checks for both opening and closing are satisfied.
An IDF example is provided below:
1198 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirlowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl ,
VentilationControl , !- Name
5.0, !- Minimum Opening Time
5.0, !- Minimum Opening Time
ComfortLowTempCurve , !- Thermal Comfort Low Temperature Curve Name
10.0, !- Thermal Comfort Temperature Boundary Point
ComfortHighTempCurve , !- Thermal Comfort High Temperature Curve Name
10.0, !- Maximum Threshold for Persons Dissatisfied PPD
Yes , !- Occupancy Check
OpeningProbabilitySch , !- Opening Probability Schedule Name
ClosingProbabilitySch; !- Closing Probability Schedule Name

1.27.20 AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController
The AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController object is used to control a zone to a specified
indoor level of pressure using the AirflowNetwork model. The specified pressure setpoint is used to
calculate the required zone exhaust fan flow rate in a controlled zone or relief air flow rate in an
AirLoop.
The object has a similar function as ZoneControl:Thermostat. When an AirLoop serves multiple
zones, the controlled zone will reach the specified setpoint, while other zones will not be controlled
precisely.

1.27.20.1 Inputs

1.27.20.1.1 Field: Name

Unique identifying name for the AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController.

1.27.20.1.2 Field: Control Zone Name

Name of the zone that is being controlled.

1.27.20.1.3 Field: Control Object Type

This field specifies the control type to be used for pressure control. Available control types are: Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan and AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlo

1.27.20.1.4 Field: Control Object Name

The corresponding control object name.

1.27.20.1.5 Field: Pressure Control Availability Schedule Name

This field contains the name of a schedule that determines whether or not the AirflowNet-
work:ZoneControl:PressureController is available. When the schedule value is zero, the AirflowNet-
work:ZoneControl:PressureController is bypassed (not available to operate). When the schedule
value is greater than zero, the AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController is available to per-
form pressure control. When AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ZoneExhaustFan in entered
in the Control Object Type field, the model will calculate the required zone exhaust fan airflow rate
to reach the pressure setpoint. When an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow
is entered in the Control Object Type field, the model will calculate the central relief flow rate in
an outdoor air mixer. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
Schedule values must be between 0 and 1.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1199

1.27.20.1.6 Field: Pressure Setpoint Schedule Name

This field contains the name of a schedule that contains the zone air pressure setpoint as a function
of time. The units for pressure setpoint are Pascal. The setpoint values in the schedule must be
between -50 and 100 Pascal.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController ,
Pressure Controller1 , !- Name
EAST ZONE , !- Controlled Zone Name
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ZoneExhaustFan , !- Control Object type
East Zone Exhaust Fan , !- Control Object Name
PressureAvailSchedule , !- Pressure Control Availability Schedule Name
PressureSetpointSchedule ; !- Pressure Setpoint Schedule Name

1.27.21 AirflowNetwork with RoomAir Models

The next two objects of AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node and AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage are
used with RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork objects together to simulate multiple internal airflows via
multiple intrazone nodes and linkages in a thermal zone. The mixed-air assumption for zone air
conditions is not always appropriate. EnergyPlus includes several RoomAir models that can model
the implications for different flow patterns on variations in temperature within the zone. However
none of them are generalized enough for different types of air flow situations and none are coupled
tightly with AirflowNetwork. A general RoomAir model based on pressure network solver will allow
modeling a variety of spaces types not currently covered by existing models such as tall spaces.
Recent advancements have been made to AirflowNetwork to model large horizontal openings. This
new development makes AirflowNetwork useful for not only modeling air movement between zones
(and outdoors), but also within individual thermal zones.
The possible combination will allow the EnergyPlus to simulate a thermal zone using a network
approach by assuming internal nodes connected by user-defined patterns of temperatures and air-
flows. It should be pointed out that the new model works when the MultiZoneWithoutDistribution
is selected in the field of AirflowNetwork Control of the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object.
The model cannot work with other choices.

1.27.22 AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node
This object allows users to input multiple nodes in a zone. A single object represent a node. If there
is only one node per zone, then use the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone input object. The zone node
is not defined in this object.

1.27.22.1 Field: Name

The name identifies the node for later reference and in the output listing. Each node should have a
unique name. This name can be referenced as AirflowNetworkNodeNames.

1.27.22.2 Field: RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork Name

The name of a RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork object, which is also defined in a RoomAirSet-

tings:AirflowNetwork object (zone based).
1200 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.22.3 Field: Zone Name

The name of a zone object, which is also defined in a AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object (zone
based).

1.27.22.4 Field: Node Height

This field requires input of node height in meters.

An IDF example is provided below:
VentilationControl, !- Name
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node ,
LeftUpper , !- Name
LeftUpper , !- RoomAir:Node:AirflowNetwork Name
NORTH_ZONE , !- Zone Name
4.572; !- Node Height {m}

1.27.23 AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage

The input object specifies a connection between two AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node objects and
an AiflowNetwork component defined elsewhere. The object also allow users to specify a connec-
tion between an AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node and an adjacent zone defined in an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone object. This object provides flexibility to define a linkage either in the same
zone or in two different zones.

1.27.23.1 Field: Name

The name identifies the linkage for later reference and in the output listing. Each linkage should
have a unique name.

1.27.23.2 Field: Node 1 Name

The input designates a node name where airflow starts. The node name should be defined in an
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node object or an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object.

1.27.23.3 Field: Node 2 Name

The input designates a node name where airflow ends. The node name should be defined in an
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node object or an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object.
Note: One of Node 1 and Node 2 should be defined as an AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Node object.
In other words, both nodes cannot be defined as AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone object. This type
of connection should be defined as an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1201

1.27.23.4 Field: Component Name

The input designates an AirflowNetwork component name associated with the two nodes. The
component name should be one of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component object names. The
component is used for intrazone node connection only. If the next field is specified, the input of this
field could be a blank.
It should be pointed out that an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object allows following five
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component objects:

– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening,
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening,
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack,
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea,
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening

However, an AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage object without a surface connection has connection

with two intrazone nodes in the same zone and allows two AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component
objects due to lack of geometry inputs.

– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack,
– AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea,

1.27.23.5 Field: Connection Surface

The input specifies an AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object name, when the nodes defined above
are not located in the same zone. The surface linkage will be connected by the above two nodes,
instead of zone nodes in normal definition. In other words, the connection defined in an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface is removed. Instead, this new connection replaces the the connection spec-
ified before. A warning message is issued to let users be aware of the changes. Since each Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object has its own component defined in the Leakage Component
Name field, the input of the Component Name field in this object will be ignored.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage ,
IntraZoneMiddleUpperLink , !- Name
LeftUpper , !- Node 1 Name
CentralUpper , !- Node 2 Name
CR -1; !- Component Name

AirflowNetwork:IntraZone:Linkage ,
IntraZoneLeftUpperLink ,
LeftUpper , !- Node 1 Name
EAST_ZONE_T , !- Node 2 Name
CR -1, !- Component Name
Surface_11_T; !- Surface Name

The previous sections of this AirflowNetwork model discussion describe input objects used for mul-
tizone airflow calculations. The following sections describe input objects used for air distribution
system simulations. These objects work when control option “MultiZone with Distribution” or “Mul-
tiZone with Distribution Only During Fan Operation” is defined in the AirflowNetwork Control field
in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object.
The first section presents the input object for distribution system nodes. Although thermal zones
are required to perform air distribution system simulations, the thermal zones are already defined
1202 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

in the multizone input section (described previously), so that there is no need to repeat the inputs
for thermal zones when modeling an air distribution system. The same is also true for surface air
leakage. This section has only one object: AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node.

1.27.24 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:DuctViewFactors
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:DuctViewFactors object is used to represent the information
needed for simplified surface-to-duct radiation heat transfer. View factors from each duct object to
each referenced surface are provided by the user. EnergyPlus calculates the heat gain to the duct
from the referenced surfaces. If the object is included, radiation is calculated for the referenced
duct; radiation is neglected of the object is omitted.

1.27.24.0.1 Field: Name of Linkage Name of the linkage object in which the view factors
are applied.

1.27.24.0.2 Field: Surface Exposure Fraction The fraction, range 0 to 1, of the duct
surface that is exposed to the zone for a partially buried duct (dimensionless).

1.27.24.0.3 Field: Surface Emittance The air duct surface emittance factor in the range
0 to 1 based on the material properties (dimensionless).

1.27.24.0.4 Field: Surface <#> Name This field specifies the name of the surface seen
by the duct.

1.27.24.0.5 Field: View Factor <#> This field specifies the view factor from the duct
to the surface.
This object is extensible, so additional pairs of the last two fields can be added to the end of this
object.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:DuctViewFactors ,
Main Link 1, !- Name of linkage
0.5, !- Surface exposure fraction
0.9, !- Duct surface emittance
Lshaped Zone:Wall 1, !- To Surface 1
0.2, !- View Factor 1
Lshaped Zone:Wall 2, !- To Surface 2
0.05, !- View Factor 2
Lshaped Zone:Wall 3, !- To Surface 3
0.5, !- View Factor 3
Lshaped Zone:Wall 4, !- To Surface 4
0.25; !- View Factor 4

1.27.25 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node object is used to represent air distribution system nodes for
the AirflowNetwork model. The EnergyPlus nodes defined in an AirLoopHVAC are a subset of the
nodes used to simulate the distribution system using the AirflowNetwork model. For example, the
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1203

inlet node of a fan and the outlet node of a coil defined in an AirLoopHVAC must be defined as
nodes using the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node object. A set of EnergyPlus Zone Equipment
nodes is also a subset of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Nodes. For example, zone inlet and outlet
nodes must be defined as nodes using the AirflowNetwork:Distribution: Node object. In addition,
although mixers and splitters are defined as objects with inlet and outlet nodes within EnergyPlus,
the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node object treats mixers and splitters as single nodes. The node
objects are referenced by AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage objects.
In summary, all nodes used to define an AirLoopHVAC (except splitters, mixers, and outdoor
air systems which are treated as single nodes) and its connections to a thermal zone must
be specified as AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Nodes. If distribution system air leaks are to be
modeled, additional AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Nodes may be defined along with AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Components (e.g., leak or leak ratio) to define the air leakage characteristics.
Note: Supply and return leaks are not allowed in an AirLoopHVAC. They can only be modeled in
the Zone Equipment Loop (i.e., return leaks may be modeled between the zone return node and the
zone mixer inlet or the zone mixer outlet and the zone equipment loop outlet; and supply leaks may
be modeled between the zone equipment loop inlet and the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter inlet node
or the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter outlet node and the zone supply node).

1.27.25.1 Inputs

1.27.25.1.1 Field: Name

The name of an air distribution system node. This node name is referenced by an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage and in the output listing. Each node should have a unique name within
the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects (however, the node name may be used elsewhere as
regular EnergyPlus node names such as the fan inlet node or coil outlet node).

1.27.25.1.2 Field:Component Name or Node Name

Designates node names defined in another EnergyPlus object, so that the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Node object is able to get input parameters and node conditions from the
associated EnergyPlus node or object. The actual node name is entered here and represents a
node already defined in an AirLoopHVAC or zone equipment loop. This field is left blank if the
EnergyPlus Node Type field below is entered as Mixer, Splitter, Outdoor air System, or Other.

1.27.25.1.3 Field: Component Object Type or Node Type

This choice field distinguishes the node type for the EnergyPlus node or object name defined above.
Five node types are available:

– AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer: Represents an AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer object defined in En-

ergyPlus
– AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter: Represents an AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter object defined in
EnergyPlus
– AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem: Represents an AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem ob-
ject used in EnergyPlus
– OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode: Represents an external node name specified as an
Outdoor Air Stream Node Name in the OutdoorAir:Mixer object when the AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem object is used.
1204 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– OutdoorAir:NodeList: Represents an external node name defined in the Out-

doorAir:NodeList object when the AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem object and an exhaust
energy recovery system (air-to-air heat exchanger) are used.
– OutdoorAir: Represents an external node name defined in the OutdoorAir:Node object when
the AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem and an exhaust energy recovery system (air-to-air heat
exchanger) are used.
– Other: Represents a type not already defined above.

Note: Both the OutdoorAir:NodeList and OutdoorAir:Node node types represent a node to out-
door air conditions. Either one of these node types can be used to represent an external node
when an air-to-air heat exchanger is used to recover energy from the exhaust air stream as part of
an AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem object. Node type OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode does not
represent an external node when an OutdoorAir:NodeList or OutdoorAir:Node object is specified.
If no exhaust heat recovery system (i.e., air-to-air heat exchanger) is specified in the AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem, the node type OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode represents an external
node.

1.27.25.1.4 Field: Node Height

Designates the reference height in meters used to calculate relative pressure. The default value is 0
meters.
IDF examples are provided below:
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
EquipmentInletNode , !- Name
Zone Equipment Inlet Node , !- Component Name or Node Name
Other , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
SupplyMainNode , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
Other , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
MainSplitterNode , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
MainSplitterNode , !- Name of Node
, !- Name of Associated EnergyPlus Node or Object
AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter , !- EnergyPlus Object or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}

The next section describes AirflowNetwork Distribution Components, with 7 available types listed
below. All required fields for each component represent a relationship between pressure difference
and airflow. The components are referenced in AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage objects.

– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1205

– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
– AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop

1.27.26 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak
This component may be also called a power law component and is used to represent a supply or
return air leak in an air distribution system. Its relationship between pressure difference and airflow
may be expressed as:

ṁ = CT C(∆P )n (1.112)

where
ṁ = Air mass flow rate through the component [kg/s]
C = Air mass flow coefficient (kg/s at 1 Pa pressure difference)
∆P = Total pressure loss across the element [Pa]
n = Air mass flow exponent
CT = Temperature correction factor
 n−1 h
ρo νo i2n−1
CT = (1.113)
ρ ν

where
ρ = Air density at the specific air temperature and humidity ratio conditions [kg/m3 ]
ν = Air kinetic viscosity at the specific air temperature condition [m2 /s]
ρo = Air density at air conditions of 20°C, 0 kg/kg and 101325 Pa [kg/m3 ]
νo = Air kinetic viscosity at an air temperature of 20°C [m2 /s]
Note: The correction factor shown above is use for this particular component as specified.

1.27.26.1 Inputs

1.27.26.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name identifying a supply or return air leak in an air distribution system. This unique
name will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component
leak.

1.27.26.1.2 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient

This numeric field is defined as the air mass flow coefficient at 1 Pa pressure difference across this
component. Valid entries must be greater than zero.
1206 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.26.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent

This numeric field is defined as the pressure difference exponent across the component. Valid entries
are from 0.5 to 1.0, with the default value being 0.65.
An IDF example is provided below:
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak ,
MainSupplyLeak , !- Name of Supply or Return Leak
0.0001 , !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient {kg/s}
0.65; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent {dimensionless}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Leak ,
ZoneSupplyLeak , !- Name of Supply or Return Leak
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient {kg/s}
0.65; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent {dimensionless}

1.27.27 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
The leakage ratio component is generally used to define supply and return leaks with respect to a
constant fan flow. This object requires 5 inputs. The relationship between pressure and airflow may
be expressed as a power law element:

ṁ = Cequ (∆P )n (1.114)

where
ρ = Air density [kg/m3 ]
∆P = Total pressure loss across the element [Pa]
n = Air mass flow exponent
Cequ = Equivalent air mass flow coefficient

Cequ = r ∗ Qr ∗ ρ ∗ (∆Pr )−n (1.115)

where
ρ = Effective leakage ratio [dimensionless]
Qr = Maximum airflow rate [m3 /s]
∆Pr = Reference pressure difference [Pa]
n = Air mass flow exponent [dimensionless]
The above calculation is valid only for a HVAC system using a constant volume supply fan:
Fan:ConstantVolume or Fan:OnOff.

1.27.27.1 Inputs

1.27.27.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name identifying a supply or return air leak (ratio with respect to the constant volume
fan flow rate) in an air distribution system. This unique name will be referenced in an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1207

1.27.27.1.2 Field: Effective Leakage Ratio

This numeric field is used to input the effective leakage ratio. This value must be greater than
zero and less than or equal to 1. The effective leakage ratio is used to characterize supply and
return leaks with respect to the constant fan flow (supply or return air leak flow rate divided by
the maximum air flow rate for the fan). When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan Object Type
= Fan:VariableVolume in the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan object, the ratio for a
supply leak is defined as the value of supply air leak flow rate divided by the supply fan air flow rate
at the current time step. The inputs of the rest of 3 fields are not used.

1.27.27.1.3 Field: Maximum Flow Rate

This numeric field is used to input the maximum flow rate for a constant volume fan [m3 /s]. This
value must be greater than 0 m3 /s. When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan Object Type
= Fan:VariableVolume in the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan object, this input is not
used, because the real supply fan flow rate at the current time step is used to calculate the amount
of a supply leak.

1.27.27.1.4 Field: Reference Pressure Difference

This numeric field is used to input the reference pressure difference [Pa]. This value must be greater
than 0 Pa. When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan Object Type = Fan:VariableVolume in the
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan object, this input is not used, because the real supply
fan flow rate at the current time step is used to calculate the amount of a supply leak.

1.27.27.1.5 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent

This numeric field is used to input the pressure difference exponent. The value of the exponent can
be from 0.5 to 1.0, with the default value being 0.65. When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan
Object Type = Fan:VariableVolume in the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan object, this
input is not used, because the real supply fan flow rate at the current time step is used to calculate
the amount of a supply leak.
Note: The reference pressure difference is defined as the difference between pressures of originate
and terminate nodes for supply and return leaks. In general, it may require that a simulation
be performed with an initial guess for reference pressure difference using design day conditions.
After obtaining pressures at the leakage nodes, more realistic reference pressure differences can be
entered. It should be pointed out that since pressures at the nodes vary with temperature and other
conditions, the effective leakage ratio is only an estimate. In other words, the exact leakage ratio
may not be available.
When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan Object Type = Fan:VariableVolume in the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Component:Fan object, the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio
object has to be used to define a supply leak. The other components cannot be used. In addition,
the first node in a AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage to define a supply leak has to be the node
in the duct to originate a supply leak, and the second node has to be the node of a zone to terminate
a supply leak. In other words, the supply leak has to flow from node 1 to node 2. When this object
is used to define a return leak, the first node in a AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage has to be a
thermal zone to originate a leak, and the second node has to be the node of a duct to terminate a
leak.
An IDF example is provided below:
1208 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:LeakageRatio ,
Zone1SupplyLeakELA , !- Name of Effective Leakage Ratio
0.043527 , !- Effective Leakage Ratio {dimensionless}
1.0, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
20.0, !- Reference Pressure Difference {Pa}
0.65; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent {dimensionless}

1.27.28 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct
This object represents a duct component and requires 9 input fields, one alpha field and 8 numeric
fields. An additional two fields can be used to define the convection coefficients on the inner and
outer surfaces of the duct. The relationship between pressure and airflow across the component may
be expressed as (2001 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 34):
s
2ρA2 ∆P
ṁ = P (1.116)
f L/D + Cd

where
ṁ = Mass flow rate of air through the component [kg/s]
r = Air density [kg/m3 ]
A = Cross sectional area [m2 ]
∆P = Total pressure loss across the component [Pa]
L = Duct length [m]
D = Hydraulic diameter [m]
Cd = Dynamic loss coefficient due to fitting [dimensionless]
f = Friction factor
The friction factor can be calculated using the nonlinear Colebrook equation (ASHRAE Handbook
of Fundamentals, 1997. p. 2.9, Eq. 29b)
   
1 D 9.3
√ = 1.44 + 2 ∗ log − 2 ∗ log 1 + √ (1.117)
f ε Re ∗ ε/D ∗ f
where
e = Surface roughness [m]
ρV D
Re = Reynolds number = µ

1.27.28.1 Inputs

1.27.28.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name for an AirflowNetwork duct component in an air distribution system. This unique
name will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.

1.27.28.1.2 Field: Duct Length

This numeric field is used to input duct length [m]. This value must be greater than zero.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1209

1.27.28.1.3 Field: Hydraulic Diameter

This numeric field is used to input hydraulic diameter, which is defined as:

4A
Dh = (1.118)
P

where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross sectional area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]

1.27.28.1.4 Field: Cross Section Area

This numeric field is used to input cross section area [m2 ]. The model assumes that this element has
no area change along its length. Otherwise, effective cross sectional area is required.

1.27.28.1.5 Field: Surface Roughness

This numeric field is used to input surface roughness [m]. This value must be greater than zero, and
the default value is 0.0009 m.

1.27.28.1.6 Field: Coefficient for Local Dynamic Loss Due to fitting

This numeric field is defined as a coefficient for dynamic loss [dimensionless]. It represents dynamic
loss due to fittings (such as an elbow).

1.27.28.1.7 Field: Heat Transmittance Coefficient (U-Factor) for Duct Wall Con-
struction
This numeric field is defines the heat transmittance coefficient (U value, W/m2 -K) for the duct wall
construction. Film coefficents are calculated automatically, unless directly specified below.

1.27.28.1.8 Field: Overall Moisture Transmittance Coefficient from Air to Air

This numeric field is defined as the overall moisture transmittance coefficient (kg/m2 ) from air to
air, including film coefficients at both surfaces.

1.27.28.1.9 Field: Outside Convection Coefficient

This numeric field defines the outside convection coefficient (W/m2 -K). If the field is omitted, the
film coeffient is calculated automatically as described in ASTM C1340.

1.27.28.1.10 Field: Inside Convection Coefficient

This numeric field defines the inside convection coefficient (W/m2 -K). If the field is omitted, the film
coeffient is calculated automatically as described in ASTM C1340.
An IDF example is provided below:
1210 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct ,
MainTruck1 , !- Name of Duct Component
3.0, !- Duct Length {m}
0.6, !- Hydraulic Diameter {m}
0.2827 , !- Cross Section Area {m2}
0.0009 , !- Surface Roughness {m}
0.01, !- Coefficient for local dynamic loss due to fitting {dimensionless}
0.772 , !- Heat Transmittance Coefficient (U-Factor) for Duct Wall
Construction {W/m2 -K}
0.0001; !- Overall moisture transmittance coefficient from air to air {kg/m2
}

1.27.29 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan
This component represents a constant or variable volume fan in the air distribution system (Air-
LoopHVAC). The air flow rate and air conditions (temperature and humidity) are obtained from the
associated Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:OnOff, Fan:VariableVolume, or Fan:SystemModel object.

1.27.29.1 Inputs

1.27.29.1.1 Field: Fan Name

The name identifying an AirflowNetwork constant volume fan in an air distribution system.
This name must be the same as the name of the associated Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:OnOff,
Fan:VariableVolume, or Fan:SystemModel object. This name will be referenced by an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.

1.27.29.1.2 Field: Supply Fan Object Type

This choice field defines the type of fan. The only valid choices are Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume,
Fan:VariableVolume, and Fan:SystemModel with the default being Fan:ConstantVolume. Both cy-
cling and continuous fan operating modes are allowed for Fan:OnOff. Only the continuous fan
operating mode is allowed for Fan:ConstantVolume with constant volume and Fan:VariableVolume
with variable volume, respectively. An advanced fan model for Fan:SystemModel is also allowed.
Note: Make sure that the volumetric air flow rates for the fan, coils, and parent components (e.g.,
unitary system or furnace) are the same so that fan energy and air distribution system losses/gains
are properly calculated.
An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Name of Constant Volume Fan
Fan:ConstantVolume; !- Supply fan type

1.27.30 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil
This component represents a cooling or heating coil. The main purpose for this object is to get
calculated values (air flow and temperature/humidity conditions) from the associated coil models.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1211

1.27.30.1 Inputs

1.27.30.1.1 Field: Coil Name

The name identifying an AirflowNetwork cooling coil or heating coil defined in an air loop. This
name must be the same name as the associated coil object. This unique name will be referenced by
an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.

1.27.30.1.2 Field: Coil Object Type

This field requires input of the coil type used in the AirflowNetwork model. The available choices
are:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:Water
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
– Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
– Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
– Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
– Coil:Heating:Desuperheater

1.27.30.1.3 Field: Air Path Length

This numeric field is used to input air path length for the coil [m]. This value must be greater than
0 meters.

1.27.30.1.4 Field: Air Path Hydraulic Diameter

This numeric field is used to input hydraulic diameter of a coil’s air path, which is defined as:

4A
Dh = (1.119)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross section area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
For this component, the relationship between airflow and pressure is similar to the component Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct. However, the model assumes very small surface rough-
ness (10−4 ) and no local dynamic loss due to fittings for this component. Therefore, this component
only requires two numerical fields. Heat and moisture exchange from surroundings is ignored.
1212 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Note: Make sure that the volumetric air flow rates for the fan, coils, and parent components (e.g.,
unitary system or furnace) are the same so that fan energy and air distribution system losses/gains
are properly calculated.
An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil ,
ACDXCoil 1, !- Name of Associated EnergyPlus Coil
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- EnergyPlus Coil Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Coil ,
HP Heating Coil 1, !- Name of Associated EnergyPlus Coil
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed , !- EnergyPlus Coil Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}

1.27.31 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger
This component represents an air-to-air heat exchanger typically used in combination with a cool-
ing coil to enhance dehumidification or in an outside air system to recover energy from exhaust
air to pretreat incoming outdoor ventilation air. The cooling coils with enhanced dehumidifica-
tion are defined in the two objects CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted and CoilSys-
tem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted using one of three heat exchanger objects specified be-
low. The exhaust air energy recovery system also has the same restriction using the one of three
heat exchanger objects. The main purpose for this object is to obtain calculated values (air flow
and temperature/humidity conditions) from the associated heat exchanger models for the airflow
network calculations.

1.27.31.1 Inputs

1.27.31.1.1 Field: Heat Exchanger Name

The name identifying an AirflowNetwork heat exchanger defined in an air loop. This name must
be the same name that is used in the associated heat exchanger object. This unique name will be
referenced by an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.

1.27.31.1.2 Field: Heat Exchanger Object Type

This field requires input of the heat exchanger type. The available choices are:

– HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate
– HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
– HeatExchanger:Desiccant:BalancedFlow

1.27.31.1.3 Field: Air Path Length

This numeric field is used to input air path length for the heat exchanger coil [m]. This value must
be greater than 0 meters.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1213

1.27.31.1.4 Field: Air Path Hydraulic Diameter

This numeric field is used to input hydraulic diameter of a heat exchanger coil’s air path, which is
defined as:

4A
Dh = (1.120)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross section area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
For this component, the relationship between airflow and pressure is similar to the component Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct. However, the model assumes very small surface rough-
ness (10−4 ) and no local dynamic loss due to fittings for this component. Therefore, this component
only requires two numerical fields. Heat and moisture exchange from surroundings are ignored.
Note: When a heat exchanger is used as a component of either CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
or CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted, the heat exchanger acts as two components
in an air primary loop. For example, an air-to-air heat exchanger has a component connected
to the supply air side (equivalent to a supply coil) and a component connected to exhaust air
side (equivalent to an exhaust coil). The desiccant heat exchanger has a component connected to
regeneration air side (equivalent to a regeneration air coil) and a component connected to process
air side (equivalent to a process air coil). Therefore, each air-to-air heat exchanger used in this
configuration requires two linkage objects (instead of only one linkage object as required for other
AirflowNetwork components).
When a heat exchanger is used in an exhaust air energy recovery system (i.e., in an AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem object to recover waste heat from exhaust air to pretreat incoming outdoor
ventilation air), the heat exchanger is treated as a single component. The AirflowNetwork model
only connects the two nodes associated with the incoming outdoor ventilation air, while the two
exhaust nodes are not defined as part of the AirflowNetwork model. Therefore, each heat exchanger
component used in an exhaust air energy recovery system has only one linkage object, similar to
AirflowNetwork coil components.
An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger ,
OA Heat Recovery 1, !- HeatExchanger Name
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent , !- HeatExchanger Object Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:HeatExchanger ,
Desiccant Heat Exchanger 1, !- HeatExchanger Name
HeatExchanger:Desiccant:BalancedFlow , !- HeatExchanger Object Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
1.00; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}

1.27.32 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
This component represents a terminal unit for reheating the incoming supply air. The main purpose
is to get calculated values from the terminal unit models.
1214 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.32.1 Inputs

1.27.32.1.1 Field: Terminal Unit Name

A name identifying an AirflowNetwork terminal unit defined in a zone equipment list. This name
must be the same as the associated terminal unit object. This unique name will be referenced by an
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object to represent a component.

1.27.32.1.2 Field: Terminal Unit Object Type

This field requires input of the terminal unit type used in the AirflowNetwork model.
The available types are AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat and AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat. The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat type is used
when the Supply Fan Object Type in the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan is either
Fan:ConstantVolume or Fan:OnOff. The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat type is used when the
Supply Fan Object Type in the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan is Fan:VariableVolume
only.

1.27.32.1.3 Field: Air Path Length

This numeric field is used to input the air path length for the terminal unit [m]. This value must be
greater than 0 meters.

1.27.32.1.4 Field: Air Path Hydraulic Diameter

This numeric field is used to input hydraulic diameter for the terminal unit’s air path, which is
defined as:

4A
Dh = (1.121)
P
where
Dh = Hydraulic diameter [m]
A = Duct cross section area [m2 ]
P = Perimeter of cross section [m]
It should be noted that the relationship for this component between airflow and pressure is simi-
lar to the component AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct. However, the model assumes
very small surface roughness (10−4 ) and no local dynamic loss due to fittings for this component.
Therefore, this component only requires two numerical fields. Heat and moisture exchange from
surroundings is ignored.
Note: The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit object is used to represent an
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat or an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat object
in an AirflowNetwork simulation. The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit
should not be used to represent any other air terminal unit types. When the Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentList object specifies an Air:Terminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat
object, the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct object should be used instead.
The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat object has two components: a damper and a reheat
coil. When the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat type is used, two objects of AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage have to be used to make two links, one of which is a link to connect two
nodes for a damper, and the other is a link to connect two nodes for a reheat coil.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1215

When a VAV system is used with Supply Fan Object Type = Fan:VariableVolume in the Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Fan object, the type of all terminals has to be AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat. The object of Air:Terminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat is
not allowed.
An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:TerminalUnit ,
Reheat Zone 1, !- Name of Associated Energyplus Terminal Unit
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat , !- EnergyPlus Terminal Unit Type
0.1, !- Air Path Length {m}
0.44; !- Air Path Hydraulic Diameter {m}

1.27.33 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop
This component represents a constant pressure drop component. It is generally used to simulate a
constant pressure drop filter. The mathematical equation may be written as:

∆P = const (1.122)

1.27.33.1 Inputs

1.27.33.1.1 Field: Name

A unique name identifying an AirflowNetwork constant pressure drop component in an air distri-
bution system. This unique name will be referenced by an AirflowNetwork: Distribution:Linkage
object to represent a component.

1.27.33.1.2 Field: Pressure Difference across the Component

This numeric field is used to input the pressure difference across the element [Pa].
Note: This object should be used with caution. Each node connected to this object cannot be a
node for a mixer or splitter, a node in an AirLoopHVAC, or a node in a zone configuration loop. It
is recommended that duct components be specified at both ends of this object.
An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ConstantPressureDrop ,
SupplyCPDComp , ! Name of Constant Pressure Drop Component
1.0; ! Pressure Difference Across the Component [Pa]

1.27.34 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow object is used to allow the Air-
flowNetwork model to include the outdoor air flow rate in the airflow network. When the outdoor
air mass flow rate is greater than zero, the airflow network model treats this object as a constant
volume fan and the flow rate is provided by the Controller:OutdoorAir object. When there is no
outdoor air flow rate, the model treats this object as a crack and a power law is assumed.
1216 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.34.1 Inputs

1.27.34.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name for this instance of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:OutdoorAirFlow
object.

1.27.34.1.2 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

The name identifying an AirflowNetwork OutdoorAirFlow defined in an air loop as an Out-
doorAir:Mixer object. This name must be the same name as the associated OutdoorAir:Mixer
object.

1.27.34.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at
Reference Conditions
The value of the air mass flow coefficient, CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s
at 1Pa. This value must be greater than zero. The value is used when when the outdoor mass flow
rate is zero from the Controller:OutdoorAir object.

1.27.34.1.4 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow
The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with
the default value being 0.65. The value is used when the outdoor mass flow rate is zero from the
Controller:OutdoorAir object.

1.27.34.1.5 Field: Reference Crack Conditions

The name of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object which specifies the
conditions under which the air mass flow coefficient was measured. If the user omits this field and
only one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object is defined in the input data
file, then those reference crack conditions will be used. If the user omits this field and either zero or
more than one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions objects are defined in the input
data file, then the default conditions for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone: Reference Crack Conditions
object will be used.
IDF examples are provided below:

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:OutdoorAirFlow ,
OAFlow , !- Name
OA Mixer 1, !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at Reference
Conditions {kg/s}
0.667; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow {dimensionless}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA System Node , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA Inlet Node , !- Name
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Component Name or Node Name
OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
1.5; !- Node Height {m}
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1217

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage ,
OASystemFanLink , !- Name
OA Inlet Node , !- Node 1 Name
OA System Node , !- Node 2 Name
OAFlow; !- Component Name

1.27.35 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow object is used to allow the AirflowNet-
work model to perform pressure control by varying the amount of relief air flow rate between 0 and
the flow rate specified by the Controller:OutdoorAir object. When the outdoor air mass flow rate is
greater than zero, the airflow network model treats this object as a constant volume fan and the flow
rate is varied to reach pressure control. When there is no outdoor air flow rate, the model treats
this object as a crack and a power law is assumed.

1.27.35.1 Inputs

1.27.35.1.1 Field: Name

This is the name for this instance of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow
object.

1.27.35.1.2 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

The name identifying an AirflowNetwork OutdoorAirFlow defined in an air loop as an Out-
doorAir:Mixer object. This name must be the same name as the associated OutdoorAir:Mixer
object.

1.27.35.1.3 Field: Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at
Reference Conditions
The value of the air mass flow coefficient, CQ , in the crack air flow equation. It has units of kg/s at
1Pa. This value must be greater than zero. The value is used when the outdoor mass flow rate is
zero from the Controller:OutdoorAir object.

1.27.35.1.4 Field: Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow
The value of the exponent, n, in the crack air flow equation. The valid range is 0.5 to 1.0, with
the default value being 0.65. The value is used when the outdoor mass flow rate is zero from the
Controller:OutdoorAir object.

1.27.35.1.5 Field: Reference Crack Conditions

The name of the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object which specifies the
conditions under which the air mass flow coefficient was measured. If the user omits this field and
only one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions object is defined in the input data
file, then those reference crack conditions will be used. If the user omits this field and either zero or
more than one AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ReferenceCrackConditions objects are defined in the input
data file, then the default conditions for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone: Reference Crack Conditions
object will be used.
IDF examples are provided below:
1218 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirflowNetwork:ZoneControl:PressureController ,
Pressure Controller1 , !- Name
EAST ZONE , !- Controlled Zone Name
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component:ReliefAirFlow , !- Control Object type
ReliefFlow , !- Control Name
PressureAvailSchedule , !- Pressure Control Availability Schedule Name
PressureSetpointSchedule ; !- Pressure Setpoint Schedule Name

AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:ReliefAirFlow ,
ReliefFlow , !- Name
OA Mixer 1, !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
0.01, !- Air Mass Flow Coefficient When No Outdoor Air Flow at
Reference Conditions {kg/s}
0.667; !- Air Mass Flow Exponent When No Outdoor Air Flow {dimensionless
}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA System Node , !- Name
, !- Component Name or Node Name
AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
3.0; !- Node Height {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node ,
OA Inlet Node , !- Name
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Component Name or Node Name
OAMixerOutdoorAirStreamNode , !- Component Object Type or Node Type
1.5; !- Node Height {m}

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage ,
OASystemFanLink , !- Name
OA System Node , !- Node 1 Name
OA Inlet Node , !- Node 2 Name
ReliefFlow; !- Component Name

1.27.36 AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage
The AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage represents a connection between two AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Node objects and an AirflowNetwork component defined above. In addition, the
relative height from node height to linkage height for each node is required.

1.27.36.1 Inputs

1.27.36.1.1 Field: Name

The name identifies the linkage for later reference and in the output listing. Each linkage should
have a unique name.

1.27.36.1.2 Field: Node 1 Name

Designates a node name where airflow starts. The node name should be defined in an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Node object.

1.27.36.1.3 Field: Node 2 Name

Designates a node name where airflow ends. The node name should be defined in an AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Node object.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1219

1.27.36.1.4 Field: Component Name

Designates an AirflowNetwork component name associated with the two nodes. The component
name should be one of the AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Component… object names.

1.27.36.1.5 Field: Thermal Zone Name

Designates a thermal zone where the linkage is located. The information provides the ambient
conditions for duct elements to calculate duct conduction losses (only used if component is Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Component:Duct).
An IDF example is provided below:

AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage ,
Main Link 1, !- Name of Linkage
EquipmentInletNode , !- Node 1 Name
SupplyMainNode , !- Node 2 Name
MainTruck1 , !- Component Name
Attic Zone; !- Thermal Zone Name

1.27.36.2 Outputs

The AirflowNetwork nodes in the following output variables includes zones defined in AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone objects, external nodes defined in AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode
objects, and nodes defined in AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects.
The AirflowNetwork linkage used in following output variables includes surfaces defined in Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects, and linkages defined in AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage
objects. The surface linkages represent airflows through surface cracks or openings between two
zones or between a zone and outdoors. The distribution linkages represent airflows in an air
distribution system.

– HVAC,Average,AFN Node Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,AFN Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Node Total Pressure [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Node Wind Pressure [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Node CO2 Concentration [ppm]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Node Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Factor []
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Modulation Multiplier []
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Venting Inside Setpoint Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Venting Availability Status []
1220 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1221

– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Distribution Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Distribution Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Distribution Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Distribution Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Infiltration Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Infiltration Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Infiltration Air Change Rate [ach]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Ventilation Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Ventilation Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Ventilation Air Change Rate [ach]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Mixing Volume [m3]
– HVAC,Sum,AFN Zone Mixing Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Exfiltration Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Exfiltration Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Exfiltration Latent Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The following output variables are reported only when a Fan:OnOff object is used:

– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Average Pressure [Pa]

– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone On Cycle Pressure [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Zone Off Cycle Pressure [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 1 to 2 Average Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 2 to 1 Average Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 1 to 2 Average Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Linkage Node 2 to 1 Average Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Average Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface On Cycle Pressure Difference [Pa]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Off Cycle Pressure Difference [Pa]

The following output variables are reported only when an AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationCon

object is used:
1222 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Factor at Previous Time Step
[]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Opening Elapsed Time [min]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Closing Elapsed Time [min]
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Opening Status at Previous Time Step []
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Opening Status []
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Opening Probability Status []
– HVAC,Average,AFN Surface Closing Probability Status []

The following are reported only when an integrated model of RoomAir and AirflowNet-
work is used:

– HVAC,Average, RoomAirflowNetwork Node Total Pressure [Pa]

– HVAC,Average, RoomAirflowNetwork Node Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, RoomAirflowNetwork Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

1.27.36.2.1 AFN Node Temperature [C]

This is the AirflowNetwork node temperature output in degrees C. When a Fan:OnOff object is
used and is scheduled to operate in the cycling fan operation mode, this value for AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Node objects reflects the temperature when the fan is operating (ON).

1.27.36.2.2 AFN Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

This is the AirflowNetwork node humidity ratio output in kgWater/kgDryAir. When a Fan:OnOff
object is used and is scheduled to operate in the cycling fan operation mode, this value for Air-
flowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects reflects the humidity ratio when the fan is operating (ON).

1.27.36.2.3 AFN Node Total Pressure [Pa]

This is the AirflowNetwork node total pressure in Pa with respect to outdoor barometric pressure.
The total pressure is the sum of static pressure, dynamic pressure, and elevation impact at the
node’s relative height. When a Fan:OnOff object is used and is scheduled to operate in the cy-
cling fan operation mode, the value for AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects reflects the total
pressure when the fan is operating (ON). The total pressures for nodes associate with AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone objects are reported in different output variables (below).

1.27.36.2.4 AFN Node CO2 Concentration [ ppm]

This is the AirflowNetwork node carbon dioxide concentration level in parts per million (ppm).
When a Fan:OnOff object is used and is scheduled to operate in the cycling fan operation mode,
this value for AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects reflects the carbon dioxide when the fan is
operating (ON).

1.27.36.2.5 AFN Node Generic Air Contaminant Concentration [ppm]

This is the AirflowNetwork node generic contaminant concentration level in parts per million (ppm).
When a Fan:OnOff object is used and is scheduled to operate in the cycling fan operation mode,
this value for AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Node objects reflects the carbon dioxide when the fan is
operating (ON).
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1223

1.27.36.2.6 AFN Zone Average Pressure [Pa]

This is the AirflowNetwork average zone total pressure in Pa with respect to outdoor barometric
pressure. This output is only available when a Fan:OnOff object is used in the air distribution system.
The average zone pressure is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the calculated zone
pressures during the fan on and off periods for the system timestep. The system fan part-load
ratio is defined as the ratio of the air distribution system mass flow rate (average for the simulation
timestep) to the system design mass flow rate.
Average zone pressure = (Zone pressure during on cycle * Part-load ratio) + Zone pressure during
off cycle * (1.0 – Part-load ratio)

1.27.36.2.7 AFN Zone On Cycle Pressure [Pa]

This is the AirflowNetwork zone total pressure in Pa with respect to outdoor barometric pres-
sure when the air distribution system fan is operating (ON). This output is only available when a
Fan:OnOff object is used in the air distribution system. When the fan part-load ratio is equal to
0.0, this pressure value will be zero because the air distribution system is not simulated when the
fan is off for the entire timestep.

1.27.36.2.8 AFN Zone Off Cycle Pressure [Pa]

This is the AirflowNetwork zone total pressure in Pa with respect to outdoor barometric pressure
when the air distribution system fan is not operating (OFF). This output is only available when a
Fan:OnOff object is used in the air distribution system. Even if the fan part-load ratio is equal to
1.0, the pressure calculated as if the fan were not operating (OFF) is reported.

1.27.36.2.9 AFN Node Wind Pressure [Pa]

This is the AirflowNetwork wind pressure output in Pa. The wind pressure depends on several
factors, including wind speed, wind direction, the wind-pressure coefficient (Cp) values for the Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:ExternalNode associated with the heat transfer surface and the site wind
conditions.
When Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = “Input” in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl
object, the output represents external node pressures driven by wind defined in an AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:ExternalNode object. When Wind Pressure Coefficient Type = “SurfaceAv-
erageCalculation” in AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl, the program assumes five external
nodes:

– FACADE1 Representing north orientation

– FACADE2 Representing east orientation
– FACADE3 Representing south orientation
– FACADE4 Representing west orientation
– ROOF Representing horizontal orientation

In this case, the output represents the wind pressures for the five external nodes defined above.
1224 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.10 AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the AirflowNetwork linkage mass flow rate output in kg/s in the direction from Node 1 to
Node 2. It reports surface airflows through a crack or opening, and through linkages defined in
an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object. The surface linkage is divided into two types of
surfaces, exterior surface and interior surface. Node 1 for an exterior surface linkage is a thermal
zone and Node 2 is an external node. The value of AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Mass Flow Rate
represents the flow rate from a thermal zone to outdoors. The flow direction through an interior
surface crack or opening is defined from a thermal zone defined by a surface’s Zone Name (Node
1) to an adjacent thermal zone defined by a surface’s OutsideFaceEnvironment (Node 2). For an
AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object, the value represents the air mass flow rate flowing from
Node 1 to Node 2.
It should be pointed out that in general, each linkage has one directional flow at any given time, either
from Node 1 to 2 or from Node 2 to 1. However, there are three components which may have flows
in both directions simultaneously: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpe
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the air mass flow rates reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values when the fan is operating (ON). It is assumed that
the air mass flow rates when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage objects.
The air mass flow rates for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are reported in different
output variables (below).

1.27.36.2.11 AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the AirflowNetwork linkage mass flow rate output in kg/s in the direction from Node 2 to
Node 1. It reports airflows from surfaces through a crack or opening, and from linkages defined in
an AirflowNetwork:Distribution:Linkage object. Node 1 and Node 2 for a surface or subsurface are
defined in the same manner as AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Mass Flow Rate.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the air mass flow rates reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values when the fan is operating (ON). It is assumed that
the air mass flow rates when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage objects.
The air mass flow rates for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are reported in different
output variables (below).

1.27.36.2.12 AFN Linkage Node 1 to 2 Average Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the AirflowNetwork linkage average mass flow rate in kg/s in the direction from Node 1 to
Node 2 defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects. This output is only available when
a Fan:OnOff object is used in the air distribution system. The average mass flow rate is weighted
by the system fan part-load ratio using the calculated air mass flow rates during the fan on and off
periods for the system timestep. The system fan part-load ratio is defined as the ratio of the air
distribution system mass flow rate (average for the simulation timestep) to the system design mass
flow rate.
Average surface mass flow rate = (Surface mass flow rate during on cycle * Part-load ratio) + Surface
mass flow rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Part-load ratio)

1.27.36.2.13 AFN Linkage Node 2 to 1 Average Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1225

This is the AirflowNetwork linkage average mass flow rate in kg/s in the direction from Node 2 to
Node 1 defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects. This output is only available when
a Fan:OnOff object is used in the air distribution system. The average mass flow rate is weighted
by the system fan part-load ratio using the calculated air mass flow rates during the fan on and off
periods for the system timestep. The system fan part-load ratio is defined as the ratio of the air
distribution system mass flow rate (average for the simulation timestep) to the system design mass
flow rate.

1.27.36.2.14 AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage volume flow rate output in m3 /s in the direction from the Node
1 to Node 2. It is defined in the same manner as AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Mass Flow Rate.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the air volume flow rates reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values when the fan is operating (ON). It is assumed that
the air volume flow rates when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage objects.
The air volume flow rates for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are reported in different
output variables (below).

1.27.36.2.15 AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage volume flow rate output in m3 /s in the direction from Node 2 to
Node 1. It is defined in the same manner as AFN Linkage Node 2 to Node 1 Mass Flow Rate.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the air volume flow rates reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values when the fan is operating (ON). It is assumed that
the air volume flow rates when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system air linkage objects.
The air volume flow rates for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface object are reported in different
output variables (below).

1.27.36.2.16 AFN Linkage Node 1 to 2 Average Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage average volume flow rate in m3 /s in the direction from Node 1 to
Node 2 defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects. This output is only available when
a Fan:OnOff object is used. The average volume flow rate is weighted by the system fan part-load
ratio using the calculated air volume flow rates during the fan on and off periods for the system
timestep.
Average surface volume flow rate = (Surface volume flow rate during on cycle * Part-load ratio) +
Surface volume flow rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Part-load ratio)

1.27.36.2.17 AFN Linkage Node 2 to 1 Average Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
This is the AirflowNetwork linkage average volume flow rate in m3 /s in the direction from Node 2 to
Node 1 defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface objects. This output is only available when
a Fan:OnOff object is used. The average volume flow rate is weighted by the system fan part-load
ratio using the calculated air volume flow rates during the fan on and off periods for the system
timestep.
1226 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.18 AFN Linkage Node 1 to Node 2 Pressure Difference [Pa]

This is the pressure difference across a linkage in Pa. The linkage includes both objects: AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface and AirflowNetwork: Distribution:Linkage.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the pressure differences reported for the AirflowNet-
work:Distribution:Linkage objects are the values calculated when the fan is operating (ON).
It is assumed that the pressure differences when the fan is off are zero for the distribution system
air linkage objects. The pressure differences defined in the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface are
reported in different output variables (below).

1.27.36.2.19 AFN Surface Average Pressure Difference [Pa]

This is the average pressure difference across a linkage in Pa for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
objects only when a Fan:OnOff object is used. The average pressure difference is weighted by the
system fan part-load ratio using the calculated pressure differences during the fan on and off periods
for the system timestep. The system fan part-load ratio is defined as the ratio of the air distribution
system mass flow rate (average for the simulation timestep) to the system design mass flow rate.
Surface Average Pressure Difference = (Surface Average Pressure Difference during on cycle * Part-
load ratio) + Surface Average Pressure Difference during off cycle * (1.0 - Part-load ratio)

1.27.36.2.20 AFN Surface On Cycle Pressure Difference [Pa]

This is the pressure difference across a linkage in Pa for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
objects only when the air distribution system fan is operating (ON). This output is only available
when a Fan:OnOff object is used. When the fan part-load ratio is equal to 0.0, this pressure difference
value will be zero because the air distribution system is not simulated when the fan is off for the
entire timestep.

1.27.36.2.21 AFN Surface Off Cycle Pressure Difference [Pa]

This is the pressure difference across a linkage in Pa for the AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface
objects only when the air distribution system fan is not operating (OFF). This output is only
available when a Fan:OnOff object is used. Even if the fan part-load ratio is equal to 1.0, the
pressure difference calculated as if the fan were not operating (OFF) is reported.

1.27.36.2.22 AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Factor []

The current time-step value of the venting opening factor for a particular window or door. When
the window or door is venting, this is the input value of the opening factor (see AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface, Window/Door Opening Factor) times the multiplier for venting modulation
(see description of next output variable, “Opening Factor Multiplier for AirflowNetwork Venting
Modulation”). For example, if the input Window/Door opening factor is 0.5 and the modulation
multiplier is 0.7, then the value of this output variable will be 0.5x0.7 = 0.35.

1.27.36.2.23 AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Modulation Mul-

tiplier []
This is the multiplier on a window or door opening factor when venting modulation is in effect.
See “Modulation of Openings” under AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone for a description of how the
multiplier is determined.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1227

When modulation is in effect the value of the multiplier is between 0.0 and 1.0. When modulation
does not apply the value of the multiplier may be –1.0. When modulation applies but the surface
is not venting, the value is –1.0. This is summarized in the following table. In this table, “Zone”
means a thermal zone for which AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone has been specified. See object
AirflowNetwork: MultiZone:Zone for definition of “Ventilation Control Mode.”

Table 1.44: Value of opening factor multiplier for different

venting conditions

Is surface in a Zone? Ventilation Control Is surface venting? Value of opening factor

Mode multiplier

Yes 0.0 to 1.0

Temperature
No -1.0

Yes 0.0 to 1.0

Enthalpy
Yes No -1.0

Constant Yes 1.0

NoVent No -1.0

1.27.36.2.24 AFN Surface Venting Inside Setpoint Temperature [C]

The time-step value of the venting setpoint temperature for the zone to which the surface be-
longs. This setpoint is determined from the Vent Temperature Schedule input (ref: AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Zone).

1.27.36.2.25 AFN Surface Venting Availability Status []

A value of 1.0 means venting through the surface can occur if venting control conditions are satisfied.
A value of 0.0 means venting through the surface cannot occur under any circumstances. This value
is determined by the Venting Availability Schedule input (ref: AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Zone or
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface).

1.27.36.2.26 AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]

The average convective sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to
the Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period. This value
is calculated for each timestep when the outdoor dry-bulb temperature is higher than the zone
temperature; otherwise, the sensible gain rate is set to 0.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, this reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration sensible gain rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Sensible Gain Rate = (Infiltration Sensible Gain Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction)
+ Infiltration Sensible Gain Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)
1228 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.27 AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The average convective sensible heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period. This value
is calculated for each timestep when the outdoor dry-bulb temperature is higher than the zone
temperature; otherwise, the sensible gain rate is set to 0.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration sensible gain during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Sensible Gain = (Infiltration Sensible Gain during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Infiltration Sensible Gain during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.28 AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average convective sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration sensible loss rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Sensible Loss Rate = (Infiltration Sensible Loss Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction)
+ Infiltration Sensible Loss Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.29 AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

The average convective sensible heat loss, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration sensible loss rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Sensible Loss = (Infiltration Sensible Loss during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Infil-
tration Sensible Loss during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.30 AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]

The average convective latent heat gain rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period, when the
outdoor humidity ratio is higher than the zone air humidity ratio.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration latent gain rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Latent Gain Rate = (Infiltration Latent Gain Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction)
+ Infiltration Latent Gain Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1229

1.27.36.2.31 AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total convective latent heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration latent gain during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Latent Gain = (Infiltration Latent Gain during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Infiltra-
tion Latent Gain during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.32 AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average convective latent heat loss rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration latent loss rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Latent Loss Rate = (Infiltration Latent Gain Loss Rate during on cycle * Run time
fraction) + Infiltration Latent Loss Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.33 AFN Zone Infiltration Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total convective latent heat loss, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Infiltration flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated infiltration latent loss during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Infiltration Latent Loss = (Infiltration Latent Gain Loss during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Infiltration Latent Loss during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.34 AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]

The average convective sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period. This value is calculated for each timestep when the
outdoor dry-bulb temperature is higher than the zone temperature; otherwise, the sensible gain
rate is set to 0.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, this reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated ventilation sensible gain rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Sensible Gain Rate = (Ventilation Sensible Gain Rate during on cycle * Run time
fraction) + Ventilation Sensible Gain Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)
1230 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.35 AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The average convective sensible heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period. This value is calculated for each timestep when the
outdoor dry-bulb temperature is higher than the zone temperature; otherwise, the sensible gain
rate is set to 0.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated ventilation sensible gain during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Sensible Gain = (Ventilation Sensible Gain during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Ventilation Sensible Gain during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.36 AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average convective sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated ventilation sensible loss rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Sensible Loss Rate = (Ventilation Sensible Loss Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction)
+ Ventilation Sensible Loss Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.37 AFN Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

The average convective sensible heat loss, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated Ventilation sensible loss rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Sensible Loss = (Ventilation Sensible Loss during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Ven-
tilation Sensible Loss during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.38 AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]

The average convective latent heat gain rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period, when the outdoor humidity ratio is higher than the zone
air humidity ratio.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated Ventilation latent gain rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1231

Ventilation Latent Gain Rate = (Ventilation Latent Gain Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction)
+ Ventilation Latent Gain Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.39 AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total convective latent heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone
Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated ventilation latent gain during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Latent Gain = (Ventilation Latent Gain during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Venti-
lation Latent Gain during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.40 AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average convective latent heat loss rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the
Zone Ventilation flows from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated Ventilation latent loss rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Latent Loss Rate = (Ventilation Latent Gain Loss Rate during on cycle * Run time
fraction) + Ventilation Latent Loss Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.41 AFN Zone Ventilation Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total convective latent heat loss, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone
Ventilation flows from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated Ventilation latent loss during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Ventilation Latent Loss = (Ventilation Latent Gain Loss during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Ventilation Latent Loss during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.42 AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]

The average convective sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone
Mixing Volume averaged over the reporting period. The mixing-volume is defined as incoming
volume flow from other adjacent zones where the air temperature is higher than the temperature in
this zone. For example, there are two zones (Zone 2 and Zone 3) adjacent to this zone (Zone 1).
Zone 1 receives airflows from both Zone 2 and Zone 3. The air temperature is 21°C in Zone 1. The
air temperatures are 20°C in Zone 2 and 22°C in Zone 3. The sensible gain rate only includes heat
1232 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

gain from Zone 3 with respect to Zone 1. The energy received from Zone 2 is considered as a sensible
loss, instead of a gain, because the air temperature in Zone 2 is lower than in Zone 1.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing sensible gain rate during the system on and off cycles for the reporting
period:
Mixing Sensible Gain Rate = (Mixing Sensible Gain Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Mixing Sensible Gain Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.43 AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average convective sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone
Mixing Volume averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing sensible loss rate during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Sensible Loss Rate = (Mixing Sensible Loss Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Mixing Sensible Loss Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.44 AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total convective sensible heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Mixing
Volume summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing sensible gain during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Sensible Gain = (Mixing Sensible Gain during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Mixing
Sensible Gain during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.45 AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total convective sensible heat loss, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Mixing
Volume summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing sensible loss during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Sensible Loss = (Mixing Sensible Loss during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Mixing Sensible
Loss during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.46 AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]

The average convective latent heat gain rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone
Mixing Volume averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing latent gain rate during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Latent Gain Rate = (Mixing Latent Gain Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction) +
Mixing Latent Gain Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1233

1.27.36.2.47 AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total convective latent heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Mixing
Volume summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing latent gain during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Latent Gain = (Mixing Latent Gain during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Mixing Latent
Gain during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.48 AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]

The average convective latent heat loss rate, in Watts, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone
Mixing Volume averaged over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing latent loss rate during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Latent Loss Rate = (Mixing Latent Loss Rate during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Mixing
Latent Loss Rate during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.49 AFN Zone Mixing Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total convective latent heat loss, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Mixing
Volume summed over the reporting period.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system run time fraction
using the calculated mixing latent loss during the on and off cycles for the reporting period:
Mixing Latent Loss = (Mixing Latent Loss during on cycle * Run time fraction) + Mixing Latent
Loss during off cycle * (1.0 – Run time fraction)

1.27.36.2.50 AFN Zone Mixing CO2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones multiplied by the corresponding zone carbon
dioxide concentration level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the mixing mass flow rate calculated during
the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.51 AFN Zone Mixing Generic Air Contaminant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones multiplied by the corresponding zone generic
contaminant concentration level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the mixing mass flow rate calculated during
the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.52 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from
the forced air distribution system. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat
gain occurs when duct air is warmer than zone air. It should be pointed out that when multiple
supply air leaks are present in a single zone, the output value is the summation of all the supply air
leak gains in this zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.
1234 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.53 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed
over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.54 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from
the forced air distribution system. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat
loss occurs when duct air is cooler than zone air. It should be pointed out that when multiple supply
air leaks are present in this zone, the output value is the summation of all the supply air leak losses
in this zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.55 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.56 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat gain rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from
the forced air distribution system for the reported time period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used,
the reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.57 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.58 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat loss rate, in Watts, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks from the
forced air distribution system for the reported time period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the
reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.59 AFN Zone Duct Leaked Air Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to supply air leaks summed over
the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.60 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, of duct conduction to a specific zone where
the ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat gain occurs
when duct air is warmer than the zone air. It should be pointed out that when ducts are located in
different zones, the total duct conduction loss should be the summation of the duct conduction losses
in these zones. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1235

1.27.36.2.61 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct conduction summed
over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.62 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, of duct conduction to a specific zone where the
ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting period. A sensible heat loss occurs when
duct air is cooler than the zone air. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the
system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.63 AFN Zone Duct Conduction Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct conduction summed
over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.64 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat gain rate, in Watts, of vapor diffusion through the walls of the air
distribution system to a specific zone where the ducts are located. This value is averaged over the
reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.65 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat gain, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct vapor diffusion summed
over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.66 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]
This is the average latent heat loss rate, in Watts, of duct vapor diffusion to a specific zone where
the ducts are located. This value is averaged over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object
is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.67 AFN Zone Duct Diffusion Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat loss, in Joules, to a specific zone due to duct vapor diffusion summed
over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on
cycle.

1.27.36.2.68 AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Gain Rate [W]

This is the average total sensible heat gain rate, in Watts, in a specific zone caused by the forced air
distribution system. The total sensible gain rate is the sum of duct leakage sensible gain rate and
duct conduction sensible gain rate. This value is averaged over the reporting period. The multizone
airflow sensible gain rate is excluded in this output variable. The output of multizone airflow sensible
gain is reported in the previously-described output variables AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat
Gain Rate and AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Gain Rate. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the
reported value is for the system on cycle.
1236 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.69 AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

This is the total sensible heat gain, in Joules, in a specific zone caused by the forced air distribution
system. The total sensible gain is the sum of duct leakage sensible gain and duct conduction sensible
gain. This value is summed over the reporting period. The multizone airflow sensible gain is excluded
in this output variable. The output of multizone airflow sensible gain is reported in the previously-
described output variables AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy and AFN Zone Mixing
Sensible Heat Gain Energy. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system
on cycle.

1.27.36.2.70 AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Loss Rate [W]

This is the average total sensible heat loss rate, in Watts, in a specific zone caused by the forced air
distribution system. The total sensible loss rate is the sum of duct leakage sensible loss rate and
duct conduction sensible loss rate. This value is averaged over the reporting period. The multizone
airflow sensible loss rate is excluded in this output variable. The output of multizone airflow sensible
loss rate is reported in the previously-described output variables AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat
Loss Rate and AFN Zone Mixing Sensible Heat Loss Rate. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the
reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.71 AFN Distribution Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

This is the total sensible heat loss, in Joules, in a specific zone caused by the forced air distribution
system. The total sensible loss is the sum of duct leakage sensible loss and duct conduction sensible
loss. This value is summed over the reporting period. The multizone airflow sensible loss is excluded
in this output variable. The output of multizone airflow sensible loss is reported in the previously-
described output variables AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy and AFN Zone Mixing
Sensible Heat Loss Energy. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system
on cycle.

1.27.36.2.72 AFN Distribution Latent Heat Gain Rate [W]

This is the average total latent heat gain rate, in Watts, in a specific zone caused by the forced air
distribution system. The total latent gain rate is the sum of duct leakage latent gain rate and duct
conduction latent gain rate. This value is averaged over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff
object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.73 AFN Distribution Latent Heat Gain Energy [J]

This is the total latent heat gain, in Joules, in a specific zone caused by the forced air distribution
system. The total latent gain is the sum of duct leakage latent gain and duct diffusion latent gain.
This value is summed over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.74 AFN Distribution Latent Heat Loss Rate [W]

This is the average total latent heat loss rate, in Watts, in a specific zone caused by the forced air
distribution system. The total latent loss rate is a sum of duct leakage latent loss rate and duct
diffusion latent loss rate. This value is averaged over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object
is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1237

1.27.36.2.75 AFN Distribution Latent Heat Loss Energy [J]

This is the total latent heat loss, in Joules, in a specific zone caused by the forced air distribution
system. The total latent loss is the sum of duct leakage latent loss and duct diffusion latent loss.
This value is summed over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported
value is for the system on cycle.
NOTE: The following output variables should not be confused with similar output variables for
the infiltration, mixing, and cross mixing objects (Ref. Infiltration Output, Mixing Output, or
Cross Mixing Output). The output variables described below refer to infiltration, mixing, and
cross-mixing when an Airflow Network Simulation is performed. The following output variables are
always used to describe infiltration, mixing, and cross mixing when the AirflowNetwork Control
field in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object is set to “MultiZoneWithoutDistribution” or
“MultiZoneWithDistribution”. In this case the output variables for the infiltration, mixing, and cross
mixing objects will always be 0.
In contrast, the following output variables are only used to describe infiltration, mixing, and cross
mixing when the AirflowNetwork Control field in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object is set
to “MultiZoneAirflowWithDistributionOnlyDuringFanOperation” and the fan is operating. When
the fan is not operating, the output variables for the infiltration, mixing, and cross mixing objects
are used.
In the case where the AirflowNetwork Control field in the AirflowNetwork:SimulationControl object
is set to “NoMultiZoneOrDistribution”, the following output variables are not used and the output
variables for the infiltration, mixing, and cross mixing objects are used instead.

1.27.36.2.76 AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain Energy [J]

The total convective sensible heat gain, in Joules, to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Infil-
tration Volume summed over the reporting period. This value is calculated for each timestep when
the outdoor dry-bulb temperature is higher than the zone temperature, otherwise the sensible gain
is set to 0. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.77 AFN Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss Energy [J]

The total convective sensible heat loss, in Joules to the zone air corresponding to the Zone Infiltration
Volume summed over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is
for the system on cycle.

1.27.36.2.78 AFN Zone Infiltration Volume [m3]

The volume of outdoor air flow into the zone from window/door cracks in the exterior
surfaces of the zone from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period (i.e., the
sum of infiltration and crack flows from the exterior into the zone). The zone air density is used to
calculate the zone infiltration volume based on the mass flow rate. Note that AirflowNetwork Zone
Infiltration Volume will be zero if all of the flows through the zone’s exterior surfaces are out of the
zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load
ratio using the infiltration volume calculated during the fan on and off periods for the simulation
timestep.
1238 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.79 AFN Zone Infiltration Mass [kg]

The mass of air corresponding to the AirflowNetwork Zone Infiltration Volume from both Air-
flowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea
only averaged over the reporting period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is
weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the infiltration mass calculated during the fan on
and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.80 AFN Zone Infiltration Air Change Rate [ach]

The number of air changes per hour produced by outdoor air flow into the zone from window/door
cracks in the exterior surfaces of the zone from both AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:Crack and
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Surface:EffectiveLeakageArea only averaged over the reporting period
(i.e. the sum of infiltration and crack flows from the exterior into the zone). The target zone air
density is used to calculate the zone infiltration air change rate based on the mass flow rate Note
that, like Zone Infiltration Volume, Zone Infiltration Air Change Rate will be zero if all flows through
the zone’s exterior surfaces are out of the zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value
is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the infiltration air change rate calculated during
the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.81 AFN Zone Ventilation Volume [m3]

The volume of outdoor air flow into the zone from window/door openings in the exterior
surfaces of the zone from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening
only averaged over the reporting period (i.e., the sum of ventilation and opening flows from the
exterior into the zone). The zone air density is used to calculate the zone ventilation volume based
on the mass flow rate. Note that AirflowNetwork Zone Ventilation Volume will be zero if all of the
flows through the zone’s exterior surfaces are out of the zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the
reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the ventilation volume calculated
during the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.82 AFN Zone Ventilation Mass [kg]

The mass of air corresponding to the AirflowNetwork Zone Ventilation Volume from AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening, AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening,
and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalOpening only averaged over the reporting
period. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load
ratio using the ventilation mass calculated during the fan on and off periods for the simulation
timestep.

1.27.36.2.83 AFN Zone Ventilation Air Change Rate [ach]

The number of air changes per hour produced by outdoor air flow into the zone from window/door
openings in the exterior surfaces of the zone from AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening,
AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:SimpleOpening, and AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:HorizontalO
only averaged over the reporting period (i.e. the sum of ventilation and opening flows from the
exterior into the zone). The target zone air density is used to calculate the zone ventilation air
change rate based on the mass flow rate Note that, like Zone Ventilation Volume, Zone Ventilation
Air Change Rate will be zero if all flows through the zone’s exterior surfaces are out of the zone.
When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio
1.27. GROUP – AIRFLOW NETWORK 1239

using the ventilation air change rate calculated during the fan on and off periods for the simulation
timestep.

1.27.36.2.84 AFN Zone Mixing Volume [m3]

This is a measure of interzone air flow for each thermal zone. It is the volume of air flow into the
zone from adjacent zones through window/door openings and cracks in the interior heat transfer
surfaces of the zone. The target zone air density is used to calculate the zone mixing volume based
on the mass flow rate. This variable does not include flows that are from the zone to adjacent zones.
Note that Zone Mixing Volume will be zero if all flows through the zone’s interior surfaces are out of
the zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-
load ratio using the mixing volume calculated during the fan on and off periods for the simulation
timestep.

1.27.36.2.85 AFN Zone Mixing Mass [kg]

The mass of air corresponding to the AFN Zone Mixing Volume. When a Fan:OnOff object is used,
the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the mixing mass calculated
during the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.86 AFN Zone Mixing Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object
is used, the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the mixing mass flow
rate calculated during the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.87 AFN Zone Outdoor Air CO2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This is a sum of mass flow rates from outdoors multiplied by the outdoor carbon dioxide concentration
level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is weighted by the
system fan part-load ratio using the outdoor mass flow rate calculated during the fan on and off
periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.88 AFN Zone Outdoor Air Generic Air Contaminant Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
This is a sum of mass flow rates from outdoors multiplied by the outdoor generic air contaminant
concentration level to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is used, the reported value is
weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the outdoor mass flow rate calculated during the
fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep

1.27.36.2.89 AFN Zone Outdoor Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is a sum of mass flow rates from outdoors to the receiving zone. When a Fan:OnOff object is
used, the reported value is weighted by the system fan part-load ratio using the outdoor mass flow
rate calculated during the fan on and off periods for the simulation timestep.

1.27.36.2.90 AFN Zone Total CO2 Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones or outdoors multiplied by the carbon dioxide
concentration differences between the corresponding zone and the receiving zone.
1240 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.27.36.2.91 AFN Zone Total Generic Air Contaminant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is a sum of mass flow rates from adjacent zones or outdoors multiplied by the generic contam-
inant concentration differences between the corresponding zone and the receiving zone.
The following output variables are reported only when an AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl
object is used:

1.27.36.2.92 AFN Surface Venting Window or Door Opening Factor at Previous

Time Step []
The value of the venting opening factor for a particular window or door at the previous time step.
When the window or door is venting, this is the input value of the opening factor (see AirflowNet-
work:MultiZone:Surface, Window/Door Opening Factor) times the multiplier for venting modulation
(see description of next output variable, “Opening Factor Multiplier for AirflowNetwork Venting
Modulation”). For example, if the input Window/Door opening factor is 0.5 and the modulation
multiplier is 0.7, then the value of this output variable will be 0.5*0.7 = 0.35.

1.27.36.2.93 AFN Surface Opening Elapsed Time [min]

This output is the opening elapsed time in the units of minutes since the window opened.

1.27.36.2.94 AFN Surface Closing Elapsed Time [min]

This output is the opening elapsed time in the units of minutes since the windows closed.

1.27.36.2.95 AFN Surface Opening Status at Previous Time Step []

This is the window or door opening factor control status at the previous time step using an Air-
flowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl object, which can have three integer values: 0, 1, and 2.
A 0 value indicates no occupant ventilation control. The opening factor is determined by the Ven-
tilation Control Mode field. A value of 1 indicates that a window or door is allowed to open. The
value of 1 is determined when the opening elapsed time is less than the minimum opening time. A
value of 2 denotes that a window or door is forced to close. The value of 2 is determined when the
closing elapsed time is less than the minimum closing time.

1.27.36.2.96 AFN Surface Opening Status []

This is the window or door opening factor control status at the current time step using an Air-
flowNetwork:OccupantVentilationControl object, which can have three integer values: 0, 1, and 2.
A 0 value indicates no occupant ventilation control. The opening factor is determined by the Ven-
tilation Control Mode field. A value of 1 indicates that a window or door is allowed to open. The
value of 1 is determined when the opening elapsed time is less than the minimum opening time. A
value of 2 denotes that a window or door is forced to close. The value of 2 is determined when the
closing elapsed time is less than the minimum closing time.

1.27.36.2.97 AFN Surface Opening Probability Status []

This is the opening probability status at the current time step using an AirflowNet-
work:OccupantVentilationControl object, which can have three integer values: 0, 1, and 2.
A 0 value indicates no opening probability control action. A value of 1 indicates that a window or
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1241

door is forced to open when the opening status is 0. A value of 2 denotes that the status at the
previous time step will be kept.

1.27.36.2.98 AFN Surface Closing Probability Status []

This is the closing probability status at the current time step using an AirflowNetwork:OccupantVentilationContro
object, which can have three integer values: 0, 1, and 2. A 0 value indicates no closing probability
control action. A value of 1 indicates that a window or door is forced to close when the opening
status is 0. A value of 2 denotes that the status at the previous time step will be kept.

1.27.36.2.99 RoomAirflowNetwork Node Temperature [C]

This is the RoomAirflowNetwork node temperature output in degrees C.

1.27.36.2.100 RoomAirflowNetwork Node Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

This is the RoomAirflowNetwork node humidity ratio output in kgWater/kgDryAir.

1.27.36.2.101 RoomAirflowNetwork Node Total Pressure [Pa]

This is the RoomAirflowNetwork node total pressure in Pa with respect to outdoor barometric
pressure. The total pressure is the sum of static pressure, dynamic pressure, and elevation impact
at the node’s relative height.

1.27.36.2.102 AFN Zone Exfiltration Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.27.36.3 AFN Zone Exfiltration Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]

1.27.36.4 AFN Zone Exfiltration Latent Heat Transfer Rate [W]

These output variables represent the heat emitted to ambient from exfiltration in Watts. The
exfiltration rate is calculated by solving a mass flow balance on the zone airflow network including
infiltration, ventilation, outdoor air mixing, zone-to-zone mixing, and all of the zone inlet, exhaust,
and return nodes. The latent parts are determined by taking the difference between the total and
the sensible rate. Positive values indicate the zone injects heat to the environment, while negative
values indicate the building extracts heat from the environment.

1.28 Group - Zone Equipment

There are five main zone equipment statements that must be used to describe a block of zone
equipment as shown in Figure 1.118 - “Zone Equipment Input Syntax Map” below:
Types of Zone equipment are listed below and shown below in figure “Zone Equipment”.
1242 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.118: Zone Equipment Input Syntax Map

1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1243

Table 1.45: Available Zone Equipment Types

Air Distribution AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat AirTer-

Equipment minal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan AirTer-
minal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV
Powered Induction Units (Series and Parallel)

Zone Forced Air Units ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil

ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner Zone-
HVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet Unit Ventilator/Heater Air-to-Air
Heat Pumps Unitary Systems (heat only and heat/cool) Furnaces
(heat only and heat/cool) Energy Recovery Ventilator:Stand Alone
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX
Radiative/Convective Baseboard Heaters Low Temp Radiant Systems High Temp Radiant
Units System

Figure 1.119: Representative Zone Equipment

The following Figure 1.120 “Air Loop/Zone Equipment Node Diagram” illustrates the connection
between the zone equipment and the air loop systems.
1244 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.120: Air Loop/Zone Equipment Node Diagram

Each zone served by an HVAC system must have three additional statements to complete the
zone equipment specification. An ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit allows equipment typically found
within the zone inlet ductwork (such as dampers, reheat coils, etc.) to be attached to the supply
air stream for a particular zone. A ZoneControl statement will allow the conditions in the zone to
be managed. Finally, a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement describes all of the pertinent
information about the zone from an HVAC perspective. Each of these statements is described in
more detail below.

1.28.1 ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit
The ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit object gives further information on what air loop equipment
(air terminal units) will be serving a particular zone. The ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit is the part
of the system that is supplied from a common main air handler simulated in the Air Loop Simulation
and includes the equipment that controls or tempers the air going to each individual zone according to
the desired thermostatic control. The current options for ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit terminal
unit types are:

– AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
– AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV
– AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1245

– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:UserDefined
– AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer

Connections between the air distribution unit, the supply air duct, and the zone are specified in the
input syntax for the air distribution unit and the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter. The input syntax
also explicitly defines an outlet identifier. This implies a connection to a zone through a NodeList
for zone inlets (see the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement). Each air distribution unit
is essentially a combined component-controller. Since controls are normally based on the zone
thermostat, they can work in parallel or series in complex fashion. Each air distribution unit operates
to meet all or part of the remaining thermostat load as specified in ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList.
The Air Distribution unit also allows the user to specify leaks in the supply air duct system. These
inputs are used in the EnergyPlus Simplified Duct Leakage Model (SDLM). This model simulates
a specific configuration: supply leaks to a return plenum in a commercial VAV or CV system. The
system must have a constant static pressure setpoint. Within these limitations SDLM allows the
user to easily evaluate the energy penalty due to duct leakage.

1.28.1.1 Inputs

1.28.1.1.1 Field: Name

Unique identifying name of the air distribution unit.

1.28.1.1.2 Field: Air Distribution Unit Outlet Node Name

Outlet node name for the air distribution unit to the attached zone.

1.28.1.1.3 Field: Air Terminal Object Type

Single combined component/controller unit for that attached zone. Selection of components as listed
above.

1.28.1.1.4 Field: Air Terminal Name

The unique identifying component name.

1.28.1.1.5 Field: Nominal Upstream Leakage Fraction

This is the leakage upstream of the terminal unit as a fraction of the design flow rate through the
unit. It is the leakage fraction at the design flow rate. It is used to calculate a leakage flow rate
which is then held constant while the system air flow varies. This input is optional; the default is
zero.
1246 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.28.1.1.6 Field: Constant Downstream Leakage Fraction

This is the leakage downstream of the terminal unit as a fraction of the current flow rate through
the terminal unit. This fraction is held constant, so the leakage flow rate will vary proportinally
with the supply air flow rate. This input is optional; the default is zero.

1.28.1.1.7 Field: Design Specification Air Terminal Sizing Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing object which spec-
ifies sizing adjustments to be made for the air terminal unit referenced by this object. The terminal
unit is initially sized according to the inputs in the corresponding Sizing:Zone object. Then the
adjustment factors in the DesignSpecification:AirTerminal:Sizing object are applied. See Design-
Specification:AirTerminal:Sizing for more details. If left blank, then no adjustments are made.

1.28.1.2 Outputs
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.28.1.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Heating Rate [W]

1.28.1.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Heating Energy [J]

These outputs are the sensible heating rate and energy provided to the zone by the single duct
constant volume no reheat air terminal unit.

1.28.1.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

1.28.1.2.4 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

These outputs are the sensible cooling rate and energy provided to the zone by the single duct
constant volume no reheat air terminal unit.

1.28.1.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume
flow rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
Two example IDF excerpts (one with duct leakage, one without):

ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit ,
SPACE1 -1 ATU , !- Air Distribution Unit Name
SPACE1 -1 In Node , !- Air Dist Unit Outlet Node Name
AIRTERMINAL:SINGLEDUCT:VAV:REHEAT , !- KEY --System Component Type 1
SPACE1 -1 VAV Reheat; !- Component Name 1

ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit ,
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1247

SPACE4 -1 ATU , !- Air Distribution Unit Name

SPACE4 -1 In Node , !- Air Dist Unit Outlet Node Name
AIRTERMINAL:SINGLEDUCT:VAV:REHEAT , !- KEY --System Component Type 1
SPACE4 -1 VAV Reheat , !- Component Name 1
0.05, !- upstream nominal leakage fraction
0.07; !- downstream constant leakage fraction

1.28.2 ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
Finally, the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement defines the remaining details about each
thermal zone from an HVAC perspective (besides the controls which were defined above). As with
other statements, the first two items in this object are the keyword and an identifying name which
links the zone back to its geometrical input, internal gains, etc. and other statements in the HVAC
section of the input. The next three items are names of lists (equipment, air inlet nodes, and air
exhaust nodes) that are described in more detail below. Note that if there are no air exhaust nodes
from the zone that field is left blank. And if there are no air inlet nodes, that field is left blank.
Finally, two node names are necessary to complete the zone-HVAC description. The first node is the
main air node for the zone upon which the air heat balance is performed. The other node(s) begins
the return air path(s) from the zone.
Note that all nodes mentioned in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections input must be
unique. That is, all nodes in all the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statements refer-
enced by the “Zone Air Inlet Nodes”, “Zone Air Exhaust Nodes”, “Zone Air Node Name” and
“Zone Return Air Node Name” cannot have any node name appearing more than once.

1.28.2.1 Inputs

1.28.2.1.1 Field: Zone Name

Name links this equipment list back to the heat balance for the zone.

1.28.2.1.2 Field: Zone Conditioning Equipment List Name

List of zone equipment for this zone in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object. This list will consist of
air distribution units or other direct convection or radiant equipment, i.e. window air conditioner,
baseboard, fan coils, etc.

1.28.2.1.3 Field: Zone Air Inlet Node or NodeList Name

There can be more than one air inlet node depending on how many pieces of equipment are in
the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList. Generally there will be one air inlet node for each piece of zone
equipment that delivers conditioned air to the zone. Components such as electric or hot water
baseboards and radiant systems do not require zone air inlet nodes. If there is only one node – its
name can be put in this field. If there is more than one node, this must be the name of a node list
object (a node list object can also contain only one node name). If this field is not required (as in
the baseboard system), it should be blank.

1.28.2.1.4 Field: Zone Air Exhaust Node or NodeList Name

List of exhaust nodes leaving the zone for exhaust fans, zone energy recovery, etc. However these
nodes are also used as sources of zone air for zone components such as fan coil units, unit heaters
1248 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

and ventilators, and window air conditioners. For each such component attached to a zone there
should be a unique zone exhaust node acting as the inlet node to the component. If there is only
one node – its name can be put in this field. If there is more than one node, this must be the name
of a node list object (a node list object can also contain only one node name). If there are no air
exhaust nodes, this field should be blank.

1.28.2.1.5 Field: Zone Air Node Name

The conditions at this node represent the average state of the air in the zone. For zones modeled
as fully mixed the conditions at this node are assumed to represent the air in the entire zone. This
field is required for all ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statements.

1.28.2.1.6 Field: Zone Return Air Node or NodeList Name

The name of one or more return air nodes which attach the zone to an air loop return air path.
Even if there is no return air or no return air path, a unique name must be entered in this field. The
conditions at each return node represent the state of the air leaving the zone including any heat gain
assigned to that return node from Lights, refrigeration equipment or airflow windows.

1.28.2.1.7 Field: Zone Return Air Node 1 Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name
The name of a schedule to specify the return air flow rate for the first return air node as a fraction
of the base return air. If the next field is blank, then the return air flow rate is the total supply inlet
flow rate to the zone less the total exhaust node flow rate from the zone multiplied by this schedule
name. If this field is left blank, the schedule defaults to 1.0 at all times.

1.28.2.1.8 Field: Zone Return Air Node 1 Flow Rate Basis Node or NodeList
Name
The name of a node or list of nodes (NodeList) that is used to calculate the return air flow rate for
the first return air node in this zone. The sum of the current flow rates for this node(s) multiplied
by the Zone Return Air Node 1 Flow Rate Fraction Schedule determines the return air flow rate.
If this field is blank, then the base return air flow rate is the total supply inlet flow rate to the
zone less the total exhaust node flow rate from the zone in the case of a single air loop serving this
zone. If there are multiple air loops serving this zone, the base return air flow rate is governed by
the corresponding supply inlet flow rate and the AirloopHVAC Design Return Air Flow Fraction of
Supply Air Flow.
An example of this statement in an IDF is:

ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections ,
SPACE3 -1, !- Zone Name
SPACE3 -1 Eq , !- List Name: Zone Equipment
SPACE3 -1 In Nodes , !- List Name: Zone Air Inlet Nodes
, !- List Name: Zone Air Exhaust Nodes
SPACE3 -1 Node , !- Zone Air Node Name
SPACE3 -1 Out Node; !- Zone Return Air Node or NodeList Name

The following HVAC equipment types are allowed as zone equipment. The component matrix shows
which coils and fans are allowed with which equipment models.
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1249

Figure 1.121:
1250 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.28.3 ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
The first list encountered in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections statement is the Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentList. This object lists all HVAC equipment serving the zone. Each item in the list
has four fields associated with it: Object Type, Name, Cooling Sequence and Heating or No-Load
Sequence The Object Type and Name identify the specific equipment object. Cooling Sequence and
Heating or No-Load Sequence specify the order of simulation for zones with more than one type of
HVAC equipment.
Note that a ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit must be listed in this statement if there is a forced air
system serving the zone from an air loop.

1.28.3.1 Inputs

1.28.3.1.1 Field: Name

Unique identifying name.

1.28.3.1.2 Field: Load Distribution Scheme

The Load Distribution Scheme selects the algorithm used to allocate the current zone load across
the zone equipment. There are four choices: SequentialLoad, UniformLoad, UniformPLR, and
SequentialUniformPLR. The default is SequentialLoad. In all cases, the equipment operates in the
order specifed by the Zone Equipment Cooling Sequence and Heating or No-Load Sequence fields.

– SequentialLoad loads each piece of available equipment sequentially with the full remaining
load.
– UniformLoad evenly distributes the total load equally among all available components on the
equipment list for the current load type.
– UniformPLR evenly distributes the total load among all available components on the equipment
list for the current load type at a uniform part load ratio (PLR).
– SequentialUniformPLR determines how many of the available components are required to meet
the current load, then distributes the load at a uniform part load ratio (PLR).

1.28.3.1.3 Field Set (Zone Equipment: Object Type, Name, Cooling Sequence,
Heating or No-Load Sequence, Sequential Cooling Fraction Schedule, Sequential
Heating Fraction Schedule)
This set is used together in order to sequence the equipment for heating and cooling. The #1
sequence equipment will try to meet the entire demand with its capacity and then pass the results
on to the #2 and so on for both heating and cooling. This object is extensible, so additional groups
of the following four fields can be added to the end of this object.
Equipment is simulated in the order specified by Zone Equipment Cooling Sequence and Zone Equip-
ment Heating or No-Load Sequence, depending on the current thermostat request. For equipment
of similar type, assign sequence 1 to the first system intended to serve that type of load, assign
sequence 2 to the next system, and so on. For situations where one or more equipment types has
limited capacity or limited control capability, order the sequence so that the most controllable piece
of equipment runs last. For example, with a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS), the air terminal
for the DOAS should be assigned Heating Sequence = 1 and Cooling Sequence = 1. Any other
equipment should be assigned sequence 2 or higher so that it will see the net load after the DOAS
air is added to the zone.
1.28. GROUP - ZONE EQUIPMENT 1251

1.28.3.1.4 Field: Zone Equipment <x> Object Type

Type of zone equipment such as air distribution unit, baseboard, window air conditioner, etc. The
current legal types are listed in the following table:

Table 1.46: Legal Zone Equipment Types (Zone-

HVAC:EquipmentList)

Legal Zone Equipment Types

Fan:ZoneExhaust
WaterHeater:HeatPump:PumpedCondenser
WaterHeater:HeatPump:WrappedCondenser
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX
ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet
ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab

1.28.3.1.5 Field: Zone Equipment <x> Name

Name of the zone equipment used in the object definition of its type.

1.28.3.1.6 Field: Zone Equipment <x> Cooling Sequence

Specifies the zone equipment simulation order when the zone thermostat requests cooling.
1252 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.28.3.1.7 Field: Zone Equipment <x> Heating or No-Load Sequence

Specifies the zone equipment simulation order when the zone thermostat requests heating or no load.

1.28.3.1.8 Field: Zone Equipment <x> Sequential Cooling Fraction Schedule

Name
References a schedule that specifies the fraction of the remaining cooling load this equipment will
attempt to serve. Only applies if the load distribution scheme is SequentialLoad. Leaving this blank
indicates a constant schedule of 1.0.

1.28.3.1.9 Field: Zone Equipment <x> Sequential Heating Fraction Schedule

Name
References a schedule that specifies the fraction of the remaining heating load this equipment will
attempt to serve. Only applies if the load distribution scheme is SequentialLoad. Leaving this blank
indicates a constant schedule of 1.0.
Examples of this statement in an IDF are:

ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList ,
Zone1Equipment , !- Name
SequentialLoad , !- Load Distribution Scheme
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit , !- Zone Equipment 1 Object Type
Zone1TermReheat , !- Zone Equipment 1 Name
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Cooling Sequence
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Heating or No -Load Sequence
, !- Zone Equipment 1 Sequential Cooling Fraction Schedule Name
; !- Zone Equipment 1 Sequential Heating Fraction Schedule Name

ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList ,
Zone1Equipment , !- Name
SequentialLoad , !- Load Distribution Scheme
ZoneHVAC:AirDistributionUnit , !- Zone Equipment 1 Object Type
Zone1TermReheat , !- Zone Equipment 1 Name
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Cooling Sequence
1, !- Zone Equipment 1 Heating or No -Load Sequence
0.5, !- Zone Equipment 1 Sequential Cooling Fraction
0.5, !- Zone Equipment 1 Sequential Heating Fraction
ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump , !- Zone Equipment 2 Object Type
Zone1WTAHP , !- Zone Equipment 2 Name
2, !- Zone Equipment 2 Cooling Sequence
2, !- Zone Equipment 2 Heating or No -Load Sequence
0.5, !- Zone Equipment 2 Sequential Cooling Fraction
0.5; !- Zone Equipment 2 Sequential Heating Fraction

1.29 Group – Zone HVAC Air Loop Terminal Units

The systems described in the Air Distribution Units (ADU’s) are shown below. A variety of air
terminal units are available for connecting air systems to thermal zones. These single description
ADU’s contain the reference to the components and the actual controls in one block of input. The idea
is that the control volume is drawn tightly around the controls and loosely around the components.
This allows complex interactions to take place between all of the components that respond to the
Zone Thermostatic Control output. The coils that are referenced in the ADU’s are explained fully
in the “Coils” section of this manual.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1253

1.29.1 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat
The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat or terminal reheat system is a constant volume
reheat system. The systems cooling capabilities are provided by way of cooling coil that supplies
cooling to the entire supply air volume. The cooling coil is controlled by a controller setpoint specified
for the cooling coil. Zone control is accomplished by heating (reheating) the airflow into each zone
as determined by the zone thermostat. Currently the reheat can be supplied by a electric, gas, or
hot water coil that tries to meet the zone demand.

1.29.1.1 Inputs

1.29.1.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name for the terminal reheat Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.1.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Schedule that this component will operate or is available to operate. A schedule value greater than
0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the time period. A value less
than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be off for the time period.
If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.1.1.3 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The outlet node from the ADU to the zone. This is the same node as the reheat component air
outlet node.

1.29.1.1.4 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The air-inlet node name that connects the air splitter to the individual zone ADU. This is the same
node as the reheat component air inlet node.

1.29.1.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

The design constant volume flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for the terminal reheat ADU.

1.29.1.1.6 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

The valid reheat component objects currently available are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.29.1.1.7 Field: Reheat Coil Name

Reheat Coil Object name being simulated with this ADU. Applicable for all coils.
1254 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.1.1.8 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field is zero for gas and electric coils. Set to the maximum design hot water or steam volumetric
flow rate in m3 /s for the hot water or steam heating coil. The steam volumetric flow rate is calculated
at 100C and 101325 Pa.

1.29.1.1.9 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field is zero for gas and electric coils. Set to the minimum design hot water or steam volumetric
flow rate in m3 /s for the hot water or steam coil, normally set to be a shut off valve that is set to
zero. The steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa.

1.29.1.1.10 Field: Convergence Tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting
the outlet conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since the
coil model solution can be inverted. With the hot water coil that uses an effectiveness-NTU method,
the solution cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the
hot water the solution is solved for by iteration. The iterative solution uses an interval halving
routine and needs a termination criterion that is set with the Convergence Tolerance parameter.
This control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone demand as the criteria, i.e. 0.001. The
default for the field is 0.001.

1.29.1.1.11 Field: Maximum Reheat Air Temperature

This is the upper limit on the temperature in degrees C of the air leaving the terminal unit – reheat
coil (and being delivered to the zone). If the user leaves this field blank, no maximum reheat air
temperature is enforced.

1.29.1.2 Outputs
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.1.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:Reheat ,
Reheat Zone 1, !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule for VAV System
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- Unit Air Outlet Node
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- Unit Air Inlet Node
0.59, !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
COIL:Gas:Heating , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1255

1.29.2 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat
The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat object creates the capability of supplying
central system air directly to a zone without any zone level thermostat control. The supply air
temperature is controlled by the central system controller. It is typically used with a unitary system
and furnaces which controls the system supply temperature and flow rate with continuous or cycling
fan. When used without the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name, the terminal unit is
passive and accepts any flow rate supplied by the central system, but will never exceed the maximum
air flow rate.
This object allows the program to know what zone this branch of the air system is attached to,
and input fields for availability schedule, air inlet and outlet nodes, the maximum air flow rate, and
other two optional input fields. The air inlet node should be the same as one of the AirLoopH-
VAC:ZoneSplitter or AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum component outlet nodes. The air outlet node
name should be same as zone air inlet node name and the air distribution unit air outlet node name.
The last two optional input fields: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name, and Per Person
Ventilation Rate Mode are used for modulating the outdoor air requirement of an air terminal unit
depending on the method.

1.29.2.1 Inputs

1.29.2.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for the single duct constant volume no reheat air terminal unit.

1.29.2.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Availability schedule name for this system. Schedule value > 0 means the system is available or else
the system is off. If this field is blank, the system is always available.

1.29.2.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The air inlet node name that connects the air splitter to the individual zone air distribution unit.
This node should also be one of the outlet air node of an AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter or AirLoopH-
VAC:SupplyPlenum component.

1.29.2.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This is an air outlet node from the air distribution unit. This node name should be one of the supply
air inlet node names of the zone served by this component.

1.29.2.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (m3 /sec). This field is autosizable.

1.29.2.1.6 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This field is used to modulate the terminal unit flow rate based on the specified outdoor
air requirement. When the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecifica-
tion:OutdoorAir:SpaceList object is entered, the terminal unit will adjust flow to meet this outdoor
air requirement and no more. Load is still ”Uncontrolled.” If Outdoor Air Flow per Person is
1256 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

non-zero, then the outdoor air requirement will be computed based on either the current or design
occupancy as specified in the Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode input field below. At no time will
the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum Air Flow Rate. The requested flow rate
may not be fully met if the system is operating with cycling fan. The volume flow rate is converted
to mass flow rate using the standard density of air at Pressure = 101325 Pa, Temperature = 20C,
and Humidity Ratio = 0.0. If this field is blank, then the terminal unit will not be controlled for
outdoor air flow. This field is optional.

1.29.2.1.7 Field: Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode

This field specifies the occupancy level to use when calculating the ventilation rate per person when
a Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name has been specified. CurrentOccupancy uses the
current number of people in the zone which may vary. DesignOccupancy uses the total Number of
People specified for the zone which is constant.

1.29.2.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.2.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
NoReheat Zone 1, !- Name of System
AlwaysOnFanAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Unit Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Unit Air Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.60, !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
; !- Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode

1.29.3 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat - Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb tem-
perature inside a zone by varying the supply air volume instead of the air temperature. At full
cooling the VAV damper is fully open supplying the specified maximum air flow rate. As the cooling
load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop specified by the zone minimum
air flow fraction. The zone minimum supply air flow can be further adjusted using scheduled fraction
values specified in the field Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system, air temperature
control, and reheating devices. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations,
air temperature controls and types of heating elements. Heating can usually be provided by use of
reheat coils or thermostatic baseboard.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1257

1.29.3.1 Inputs

1.29.3.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name for the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.3.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Schedule that this component will operate or is available to operate. A schedule value greater than
0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the time period. A value less
than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be off for the time period.
If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.3.1.3 Field: Damper Air Outlet Node Name

The VAV damper outlet node. This is the outlet node of the damper and the inlet node of the reheat
coil.

1.29.3.1.4 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The air inlet node name that connects the air splitter to the individual zone ADU. This is not the
same as the air inlet node of the reheat component: it is upstream of that node. This is the inlet
node to the terminal unit and the damper

1.29.3.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for VAV ADU.

1.29.3.1.6 Field: Zone Minimum Air Flow Method

This field is used to select how the program will determine the minimum flow rate to the zone while
the system is operating. The minimum flow rate is modeled as a fraction of the maximum flow
rate. There are three choices for selecting how the minimum flow rate is specified: Constant,
FixedFlowRate, and Scheduled. If Constant is entered, then the program will use the value for the
constant minimum air flow fraction entered in the following field. If FixedFlowRate is entered, then
the program will use the value for minimum flow rate entered in the field below called Fixed Minimum
Air Flow Rate. If Scheduled is entered, then the program will obtain the value for minimum flow
fraction from the schedule named in the field below called Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule
Name. The default is Constant.

1.29.3.1.7 Field: Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the
maximum air flow rate. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum
ventilation requirement for the occupants. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this
minimum flow rate when Damper Heating Action is set to Normal. This field is used if the previous
field is set to Constant. If the previous field is set to Scheduled (and the field Maximum Hot Water
or Steam Flow Rate is set to autosize), then this field is optional and can be used to separately
control the air flow rate used for sizing normal-action reheat coils. If this field and the following field
have values, the greater of the two is used for sizing.
1258 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This field is autosizable and defaulted to autosize. The autosized flow fraction is calculated using
the maximum flow rate derived from the design outdoor air flow (including VRP adjustments) and
the Sizing:Zone input fields “Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area”, “Cooling Minimum
Air Flow”, and “Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction”. If there is no sizing calculation the defaults
of 0.000762 cubic meters per second per square meter of zone floor area (0.15 cfm/ft2) and 0.2 are
used. The autosized flow fraction is calculated according to the ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Simplified
Procedure if the Sizing:System’s “System Outdoor Air Method” associated with this terminal is
set to Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure, see the System Outdoor Air Method of the Sizing:System
object.

1.29.3.1.8 Field: Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fixed minimum air
flow rate in meters cubed per second. The minimum air flow rate is normally specified to meet the
minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. The reheat coil operates only when the damper
is at this minimum flow rate when Damper Heating Action is set to Normal (the default). This field
is used if the Zone Minimum Air Flow Method field is set to FixedFlowRate. If the Zone Minimum
Air Flow Method field is set to Scheduled (and the field Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate
is set to autosize), then this field is optional and can be used to separately control the air flow rate
used for sizing normal-action reheat coils. Only one of these two minimum air flow fields (i.e., this
field and the previous field) should be used at any time. If this field and the previous field have
values, the greater of the two is used for sizing.
This field is autosizable and defaulted to autosize. The autosized flow rate is the maximum flow
rate derived from the design outdoor air flow (including VRP adjustments) and the Sizing:Zone
input fields “Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area”, “Cooling Minimum Air Flow”, and
“Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction”. If there is no sizing calculation the defaults of 0.000762
cubic meters per second per square meter of zone floor area (0.15 cfm/ft2) and 0.2 flow fraction
are used. The autosized flow rate is calculated according to the ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Simplified
Procedure if the Sizing:System’s “System Outdoor Air Method” associated with this terminal is
set to Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure, see the System Outdoor Air Method of the Sizing:System
object.

1.29.3.1.9 Field: Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule Name

The name of a schedule that determines the value of the minimum air flow fraction. The schedule
should contain fractions from 0.0 to 1.0. These values will define the minimum flow rate to the zone
while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The reheat coil
operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Damper Heating Action is set to
Normal (the default). This field is used if the previous field is set to Scheduled. If the previous field
is left blank (and the field Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate is set to autosize), then the
air flow rate used for sizing normal-action reheat coils is the average of the minimum and maximum
values in this schedule. The air flow rate used for reheat coil sizing is reported with other component
sizing information as “Reheat Coil Sizing Air Volume Flow Rate.”

1.29.3.1.10 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

The valid reheat component objects currently available are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1259

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

If there is no reheat coil, use AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat instead of this object.

1.29.3.1.11 Field: Reheat Coil Name

Reheat Coil Object name being simulated with this ADU. Applicable for all coils. If there is no
reheat coil, use object AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat instead of this object.

1.29.3.1.12 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field is zero for gas and electric coils. Set to the maximum design hot water or steam volumetric
flow rate in m3 /s for the hot water or steam heating coil. The steam volumetric flow rate is calculated
at 100C and 101325 Pa. This field is autosizable. If there is no reheat coil, this is left blank.

1.29.3.1.13 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field is zero for gas and electric coils. Set to the minimum design hot water or steam volumetric
flow rate in m3 /s for the hot water or steam heating coil, normally set to be a shut off valve that
is set to zero. The steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. If there is no
reheat coil, this is left blank.

1.29.3.1.14 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The terminal unit outlet node. This is the outlet node of the reheat coil and the zone inlet node.

1.29.3.1.15 Field: Convergence Tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting
the outlet conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since the
coil model solution can be inverted. With the hot water coil that uses an effectiveness-NTU method,
the solution cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the
hot water the solution is solved for by iteration. The iterative solution uses an interval halving
routine and needs a termination criteria that is set with the Convergence Tolerance parameter. This
control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone demand as the criteria, i.e. 0.001. The default
for the field is 0.001.

1.29.3.1.16 Field: Damper Heating Action

During heating operation, there are three control options for the damper controlling the air flow in
the VAV terminal unit as the zone moves above or below the zone setpoint. With all three control
options, the damper is at the minimum air flow rate whenever the zone temperature is between the
cooling and heating setpoints (deadband condition).
With Normal action, the damper will remain at the minimum air flow rate during heating operation.
As the heating load increases, the water flow rate in the reheat coil will be increased to maintain
temperature in the zone until the maximum water flow rate is reached or the user-specified maximum
reheat air temperature is reached. This is sometimes called the single maximum control logic as
illustrated below.
1260 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.122: The Single Maximum Control Logic

With Reverse and ReverseWithLimits (the default) action, as the heating load increases, the
unit starts at minimum air flow and minimum hot water flow. The hot water flow is increased until
it reaches maximum flow or the user-specified maximum reheat air temperature is reached, then the
air damper starts to open to meet the load. For Reverse the damper can open all the way. For
ReverseWithLimitss the damper can only partially open to a maximum flow rate given by the
following two fields. These options are used if the minimum air flow rate is not adequate to serve
the peak heating load. This is sometimes called the dual maximum control logic as illustrated in
following figure. For heating coil types other than the hot-water coil, e.g. electric, steam, and gas,
the reverse action works the same as the normal action – always keeping the air flow at the minimum
during heating.
The dual-max control currently applies to the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat objects with
reverse acting dampers and hot-water coils.

1.29.3.1.17 Control Fields for Maximum Flow During Reheat:

The following two fields are used only when Reheat Coil Object Type = Coil:Heating:Water and
Damper Heating Action = ReverseWithLimits. Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Reheat
and Maximum Flow Fraction During Reheat are two optional methods to calculate the maximum
allowable air flow rate during reheat operation. If both are entered, the greater resulting flow rate is
used. If Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name is also specified, it may increase this limit
to meet the outdoor air flow rate requirement. At no time will the maximum flow rate calculated
here exceed the value for Maximum Air Flow Rate.
This limit is active only when the zone thermostat requests heating and the VAV box damper is
reverse acting (i.e., ReverseWithLimits).
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1261

Figure 1.123: The Dual Maximum Control Logic

1.29.3.1.18 Field: Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Reheat
This factor (m3 /s-m2 ) is multiplied by the zone area, to determine the maximum volume flow rate
(m3 /s) allowed during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field is autosizable
and its default is autosize. If autosize is selected or the field is blank, the value is filled from the
similar inputs in Sizing:Zone. If there is no sizing calculation the value is set to 0.002032 m3 /s-m2
(0.4 cfm/ft2 ). If this field and the following field are entered, the greater of the two inputs is used.
This field and the following field are only used if Damper Heating Action = ReverseWithLimits.

1.29.3.1.19 Field: Maximum Flow Fraction During Reheat

This fraction is multiplied by the Maximum Air Flow Rate to determine the maximum volume
flow rate (m3 /s) allowed during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field is
autosizeable and is defaulted to autosize. If autosizeable is selected or the field is blank, the value
is set to 0.002032 m3 /s-m2 (0.4 cfm/ft2 ) multiplied by the zone floor area divided by the Maximum
Air Flow Rate. If this field and the previous field are entered, the greater of the two inputs is used.
This field and the following field are only used if Damper Heating Action = ReverseWithLimits.

1.29.3.1.20 Field: Maximum Reheat Air Temperature

This field specifies a maximum supply air temperature (°C) leaving the reheat coil in a VAV terminal
unit during heating operation. If leaving blank, the temperature of the supply air to the space in
heating operation may get unrealistic high.

1.29.3.1.21 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

1262 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This alpha field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecifica-

tion:OutdoorAir:SpaceList object. When this field is used, the terminal unit will increase flow as
needed to meet this outdoor air requirement. If Outdoor Air Flow per Person is non-zero, then the
outdoor air requirement will be computed based on the current number of occupants in the zone.
At no time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum Air Flow Rate. If this field
is blank, then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow. See documentation for
the zone HVAC outdoor air object for further information (Ref DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir).

1.29.3.1.22 Field: Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

This field adjusts the Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction, Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate, or
Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule value by multiplying it using this schedule. Schedule values
are fractions, 0.0 to 1.0. This field adjusts the minimum airflow turndown value below the zone
design minimum air flow and is intended for use with ASHRAE Standard 170. This field can also be
used to adjust the design minimum air flow sizing calculation by applying a desired fraction values
to summer and winter design days turndown schedule. If this field is left blank, then the turndown
minimum air flow fraction value is set to 1.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat ,
SPACE2 -1 VAV Reheat , !- Name of System
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule for VAV System
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Damper Air Outlet Node
SPACE2 -1 ATU In Node , !- Unit Air Inlet Node
autosize , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
Constant , !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Input Method
0.3, !- Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
, !- Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule Name
COIL:Gas:Heating , !- Reheat Component Object
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil , !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Unit Air Outlet Node
0.001 , !- Convergence Tolerance
ReverseWithLimits , !- Damper Heating Action
, !- Maximum Flow per Zone Floor Area During Reheat
, !- Maximum Flow Fraction During Reheat
35.0, !- Maximum Reheat Air Temperature {C}
, !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
TurndownMinAirFlowSch ; !- Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
ZoneMinOARequirements , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00472 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.000508 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
Min OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
Min OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 9
Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 10

COIL:Heating:Fuel ,
SPACE1 -1 Zone Coil , !- Coil Name
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1263

ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name

NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
SPACE1 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE1 -1 In Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node

Schedule:Compact ,
TurndownMinAirFlowSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays , !- Field 2
Until: 7:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,0.75 , !- Field 4
Until: 24:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 5
For: SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 6
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: Weekends Holidays CustomDay1 CustomDay2 , !- Field 8
Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 9

1.29.3.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Minimum Air Flow Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.3.2.1 Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

This output is the variable air volume damper position required to meet the zone load. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal
unit air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum air mass flow rate.

1.29.3.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Minimum Air Flow Fraction []

This output is the value for the minimum air flow fraction setting on a VAV terminal. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The minimum air flow fraction is defined as the
lower limit on the terminal unit air mass flow rate divided by the terminal units maximum air mass
flow rate.

1.29.3.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.4 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan
The VAV terminal unit with variable-speed fan and reheat coil is an air system terminal unit con-
sisting of a variable speed fan in series with a heating coil. These units are usually employed in
underfloor air distribution (UFAD) systems where the air is supplied at low static pressure through
an underfloor plenum. The fan is used to control the flow of conditioned air that enters the space.
When the fan is off the plenum pressure drives the minimum air flow through the terminal unit. At
maximum cooling the fan runs at its maximum speed. At full heating the fan runs at its heating
1264 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

maximum – usually less than the cooling maximum flow rate. Thus this unit has two separate
maximum flow rates – one for heating and one for cooling.
For cooling, control is maintained simply by varying the fan speed. For heating, the unit first tries
to meet the heating load by varying the heating coil output while keeping the air flow at minimum
(fan off). If this is not adequate the fan turns on and operates in variable flow mode up to the
heating maximum flow rate. The zone fan-off minimum supply air flow can be further adjusted
using scheduled fraction values specified in the field Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name.
This unit is modeled in EnergyPlus as a compound component – a variable speed fan and a heating
coil in series in the air stream. The unit is blow through – the fan is upstream of the heating coil.

1.29.4.1 Inputs

1.29.4.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular VS fan VAV reheat terminal unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.29.4.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the unit can run during a given time
period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during
the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.4.1.3 Field: Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate through the unit in cubic meters per second when the ther-
mostat is calling for cooling. Normally this is the same as the unit’s fan maximum volumetric flow
rate.

1.29.4.1.4 Field: Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate through the unit in cubic meters per second when the ther-
mostat is calling for heating.

1.29.4.1.5 Field: Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the
maximum air flow rate. For this unit this is the flow rate when the fan is off.

1.29.4.1.6 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node that is the air inlet node for the terminal unit. This is also the
air inlet node for the unit’s fan.

1.29.4.1.7 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node that is the air outlet node of the unit. This same node will be
the unit heating coil’s air outlet node. This node is also a zone inlet node.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1265

1.29.4.1.8 Field: Fan Object Type

The type of fan in the terminal unit. At this time the only type of fan allowed is Fan:SystemModel
or Fan:VariableVolume.

1.29.4.1.9 Field: Fan Name

The name of the particular fan object in this terminal unit.

1.29.4.1.10 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

The type of heating coil in the terminal unit. The valid choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.29.4.1.11 Field: Heating Coil Name

The name of the heating coil object contained in this terminal unit.

1.29.4.1.12 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

The maximum hot water or steam volumetric flow rate in m3 /s through the unit’s heating coil. The
steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. If the heating coil is not a hot
water or steam coil this field should be left blank.

1.29.4.1.13 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

The minimum hot water or steam volumetric flow rate in m3 /s through the unit’s heating coil. The
steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. If the heating coil is not a hot
water or steam coil this field should be left blank.

1.29.4.1.14 Field: Heating Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output
to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The
convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure.
Basically, this is the fraction:

|Qunit,out − Qzoneload |
≤ ConvergenceTolerance (1.123)
Qzoneload

The default is 0.001.

1266 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.4.1.15 Field: Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

This field adjusts Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction by multiplying it using this schedule. Schedule
values are fractions, 0.0 to 1.0. This field adjusts the minimum airflow turndown value below the zone
design minimum air flow and is intended for use with ASHRAE Standard 170. This field can also be
used to adjust the design minimum air flow sizing calculation by applying a desired fraction values
to summer and winter design days turndown schedule. If this field is left blank, then the turndown
minimum air flow fraction value is set to 1 and the VAV air terminal uses the fixed fraction specified
in in the field Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction.
An IDF example:
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat:VariableSpeedFan ,
SPACE2 -1 VAV Reheat , !- Name of System
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
autosize , !- Maximum cooling air volume flow rate
autosize , !- Maximum heating air volume flow rate
0.05, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
SPACE2 -1 ATU In Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
FAN:VariableVolume , !- Fan object
SPACE2 -1 Zone Fan , !- Fan name
COIL:Water:SimpleHeating , Heating coil object
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil , !- Heating coil name
autosize , !- Max hot water flow
0.0, !- Min hot water flow
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence Tolerance
TurndownMinAirFlowSch; !- Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

Coil:Heating:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- UA of the Coil {W/K}
autosize , !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil Air In Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 In Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node

Fan:VariableVolume ,
SPACE2 -1 Zone Fan , !- Fan Name
FanAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
125.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
autosize , !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
0.00153028 , !- FanCoefficient 1
0.00520806 , !- FanCoefficient 2
1.1086242 , !- FanCoefficient 3
-.11635563 , !- FanCoefficient 4
0.000 , !- FanCoefficient 5
SPACE2 -1 ATU In Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 Zone Coil AirIn Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node

Schedule:Compact ,
TurndownMinAirFlowSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays , !- Field 2
Until: 7:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,0.75 , !- Field 4
Until: 24:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 5
For: SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 6
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: Weekends Holidays CustomDay1 CustomDay2 , !- Field 8
Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 9
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1267

1.29.4.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.4.2.1 Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position

This output is the variable air volume flow fraction required to meet the zone load. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The flow fraction is defined as the terminal unit
air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum air mass flow rate.

1.29.4.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.5 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
Variable air volume (VAV) systems typically control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone
by varying the supply air volume instead of the supply air temperature (ref: AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat). Reheat coils may be required to avoid overcooling (ref:
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat).
This terminal unit is slightly different from the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat terminal unit.
Both operate the same in cooling mode: the damper opens as needed to provide additional sensible
cooling to the zone. The difference between the two is in heating mode. For the Single Duct VAV
Reheat terminal unit, the air flow rate is reduced to the minimum value (max air flow rate x zone
minimum air flow fraction) when zone heating is required and the reheat coil output is modulated
to meet the zone heating load. The zone minimum supply air flow can be further adjusted using
scheduled fraction values specified in the field Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name. For
the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat terminal unit, the air flow rate in heating
mode is increased to meet higher zone heating loads (similar to what is done in cooling mode). If
additional heat is required (beyond what the terminal unit can provide with its damper fully open),
then the reheat coil is modulated as needed to meet the additional heating load.
This terminal unit model was originally developed and tested for use with the changeover-bypass
VAV unitary system.

1.29.5.1 Inputs

1.29.5.1.1 Field: Name

Unique user-defined name for this Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.5.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether or not this
component is available to operate during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0
(usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the time period. A value less than
or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be off for the time period. If this
field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
1268 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.124: Single Duct VAV Heat and Cool Reheat Schematic

1.29.5.1.3 Field: Damper Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the VAV damper air outlet node. This is the outlet node of the
damper and the inlet node of the reheat coil.

1.29.5.1.4 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the air inlet node that connects the air splitter to the individual
zone ADU. This is not the same as the air inlet node of the reheat component: it is upstream of
that node. This is the inlet node to the terminal unit and the damper.

1.29.5.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the design maximum volumetric flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for this VAV
ADU. This flow rate must be greater than 0 or can be autosized.

1.29.5.1.6 Field: Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction

This numeric field defines the minimum air volumetric flow rate to the zone while the system is
operating, specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The minimum zone fraction is
normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. The reheat coil
operates as needed to maintain the heating set point specified in the Zone Control:Thermostatic
object. This value must be between 0 and 1.

1.29.5.1.7 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

The valid reheat component objects currently available are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

If no reheat coil is required, use AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat instead of

this object.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1269

1.29.5.1.8 Field: Reheat Coil Name

Unique coil name being simulated with this ADU. Applicable for all coils. If there is no reheat coil,
use AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat instead of this object.

1.29.5.1.9 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field is ignored for gas or electric reheat coils. If using a hot water or steam reheat coil, set to
the maximum design water or steam volumetric flow rate in m3 /s for the hot water or steam heating
coil. The steam volume flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. This volumetric flow rate
can be autosized.

1.29.5.1.10 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field is ignored for gas and electric coils. Set to the minimum design water or steam volumetric
flow rate in m3 /s for the hot water or steam heating coil, normally set to be a shut-off valve that is
set to zero. The steam volume flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa.

1.29.5.1.11 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This is the air outlet node for the ADU and is then connected to the zone. This is the same node as
the air outlet node of the reheat component.

1.29.5.1.12 Field: Convergence Tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting
the outlet conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since
the coil model solution can be inverted and this field is not used. With the hot water coil that uses
an effectiveness-NTU method, the solution cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the
correct mass flow rate for the hot water the solution is solved by iteration. The iterative solution
uses an interval-halving routine and needs a termination criterion that is set with this Convergence
Tolerance parameter. This control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone demand. The default
value for this field is 0.001.

1.29.5.1.13 Field: Maximum Reheat Air Temperature

This is the upper limit on the temperature in degrees C of the air leaving the terminal unit – reheat
coil (and being delivered to the zone). If the user leaves this field blank, no maximum reheat air
temperature is enforced.

1.29.5.1.14 Field: Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

This field adjusts the Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction by multiplying it using this schedule.
Schedule values are fractions, 0.0 to 1.0. This field adjusts the minimum airflow turndown value
below the zone design minimum air flow and is intended for use with ASHRAE Standard 170. This
field can also be used to adjust the design minimum air flow sizing calculation by applying a desired
fraction values to summer and winter design days turndown schedule. If this field is left blank, then
the turndown minimum air flow fraction value is set to 1 and uses the fixed fraction specified in the
field Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction.
An IDF example is provided below:
1270 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat ,
Zone 1 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- DAMPER Air Outlet Node
Zone 1 VAV Inlet Node , !- UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.583 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance

Coil:Heating:Electric ,
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.0, !- Efficiency of the Coil
3000.0 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node

1.29.5.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.5.2.1 Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

This output is the damper position required to meet the zone load. This is the average value over
the simulation timestep being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal unit air
mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum air mass flow rate.

1.29.5.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.6 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat
Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the
supply air volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV damper is fully open
supplying the specified maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until
it reaches the minimum stop specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction. The zone minimum
supply air flow can be adjusted using scheduled fraction values specified in the field Minimum Air
Flow Turndown Schedule Name.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system and air temper-
ature control. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations and air temperature
controls. Heating can be provided if necessary by use of baseboard.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1271

1.29.6.1 Inputs

1.29.6.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name for the VAV Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.6.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Schedule that this component will operate or is available to operate. A schedule value greater than
0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the time period. A value less
than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be off for the time period.
If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.6.1.3 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The VAV damper and Unit outlet node.

1.29.6.1.4 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The air inlet node name that connects the air splitter to the individual zone ADU.

1.29.6.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for VAV ADU. This is autosizable.

1.29.6.1.6 Field: Zone Minimum Air Flow Method

This field is used to select how the program will determine the minimum flow rate to the zone while
the system is operating. The minimum flow rate is modeled as a fraction of the maximum flow
rate. There are three choices for selecting how the minimum flow rate is specified: Constant,
FixedFlowRate, and Scheduled. If Constant is entered, then the program will use the value for the
constant minimum air flow fraction entered in the following field. If FixedFlowRate is entered, then
the program will use the value for minimum flow rate entered in the field below called Fixed Minimum
Air Flow Rate. If Scheduled is entered, then the program will obtain the value for minimum flow
fraction from the schedule named in the field below called Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule
Name. The default is Constant.

1.29.6.1.7 Field: Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the
maximum air flow rate. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum
ventilation requirement for the occupants. This field is only used if the Zone Minimum Air Flow
Method field is set to Constant.
This field is autosizable and defaulted to autosize. If a Sizing:System System Outdoor Air Method
other than Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure is specified, the autosized flow fraction is calculated
using the maximum flow rate derived from the design outdoor air flow (including VRP adjustments)
and the Sizing:Zone input fields “Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area”, “Cooling Min-
imum Air Flow”, and “Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction”. If there is no sizing calculation the
defaults of 0.000762 cubic meters per second per square meter of zone floor area (0.15 cfm/ft2) and
0.2 are used. The autosized flow fraction is calculated according to the ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Sim-
plified Procedure if the Sizing:System’s “System Outdoor Air Method” associated with this terminal
is set to Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure.
1272 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.6.1.8 Field: Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fixed minimum air
flow rate in meters cubed per second. The minimum air flow rate is normally specified to meet the
minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. This field is only used if the Zone Minimum
Air Flow Method field is set to FixedFlowRate.
This field is autosizable and defaulted to autosize. The autosized flow rate is the maximum flow
rate derived from the design outdoor air flow (including VRP adjustments) and the Sizing:Zone
input fields “Cooling Minimum Air Flow per Zone Floor Area”, “Cooling Minimum Air Flow”, and
“Cooling Minimum Air Flow Fraction”. If there is no sizing calculation the defaults of 0.000762
cubic meters per second per square meter of zone floor area (0.15 cfm/ft2) and 0.2 flow fraction
are used. The autosized flow rate is calculated according to the ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Simplified
Procedure if the Sizing:System’s “System Outdoor Air Method” associated with this terminal is set
to Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure.

1.29.6.1.9 Field: Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule Name

The name of a schedule that determines the value of the minimum air flow fraction. The schedule
should contain fractions from 0.0 to 1.0. These values will define the minimum flow rate to the zone
while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. This field is only
used if the Zone Minimum Air Flow Method field is set to Scheduled.

1.29.6.1.10 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecifica-
tion:OutdoorAir:SpaceList object. When this field is used, the terminal unit will increase flow as
needed to meet this outdoor air requirement. If Outdoor Air Flow per Person is non-zero, then the
outdoor air requirement will be computed based on the current number of occupants in the zone.
At no time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum Air Flow Rate. If this field
is blank, then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow. See documentation for
the zone HVAC outdoor air object for further information (Ref DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir).

1.29.6.1.11 Field: Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

This field adjusts the Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction, Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate, or
Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule value by multiplying it using this schedule. Schedule values
are fractions, 0.0 to 1.0. This field adjusts the minimum airflow turndown value below the zone
design minimum air flow and is intended for use with ASHRAE Standard 170. This field can also be
used to adjust the design minimum air flow sizing calculation by applying a desired fraction values
to summer and winter design days turndown schedule. If this field is left blank, then the turndown
minimum air flow fraction value is set to 1.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat ,
Zone 1 VAV System , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Zone 1 Damper Inlet Node ,!- Air Inlet Node Name
0.47, !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Constant , !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Input Method
0.3, !- Constant Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Fixed Minimum Air Flow Rate
, !- Minimum Air Flow Fraction Schedule Name
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1273

ZoneOAData , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

TurndownMinAirFlowSch ; !- Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
ZoneOAData , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00236 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.00305 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone {m3/s}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , 1.0, !- Field 4
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 5
Until: 24:00 , 0.5; !- Field 7

Schedule:Compact ,
TurndownMinAirFlowSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays , !- Field 2
Until: 7:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,0.75 , !- Field 4
Until: 24:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 5
For: SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 6
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: Weekends Holidays CustomDay1 CustomDay2 , !- Field 8
Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 9

1.29.6.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.6.2.1 Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

This output is the damper position required to meet the zone load. This is the average value over
the simulation timestep being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal unit air
mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum air mass flow rate.

1.29.6.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.7 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat
Variable air volume (VAV) systems typically control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone
by varying the supply air volume instead of the supply air temperature (ref: AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat). Reheat coils may be required to avoid overcooling (ref:
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:Reheat).
1274 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This terminal unit is slightly different from the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:NoReheat terminal

unit. Both operate the same in cooling mode: the damper opens as needed to provide additional
sensible cooling to the zone. The difference between the two is in heating mode. For the Single Duct
VAV NoReheat terminal unit, the air flow rate is reduced to the minimum value (max air flow rate
x zone minimum air flow fraction) when zone heating is required. The zone minimum supply air
flow can be further adjusted using scheduled fraction values specified in the field Minimum Air Flow
Turndown Schedule Name. For the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat terminal
unit, the air flow rate in heating mode is increased to meet higher zone heating loads (similar to
what is done in cooling mode).
This terminal unit model was originally developed and tested for use with the changeover-bypass
VAV unitary system. This object may be used when the central heating coil is sufficient to maintain
the heating set point temperature. Additional heating may be provided, if necessary, by use of
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat or ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:* objects.

Figure 1.125: Single Duct VAV Heat and Cool NoReheat Schematic

1.29.7.1 Inputs

1.29.7.1.1 Field: Name

Unique user-defined name for this Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.7.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether or not this
component is available to operate during a given time period. If a schedule value is greater than zero
then the system is available to operate; otherwise, the system is unavailable for that time period. If
this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.7.1.3 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the VAV damper air outlet node.

1.29.7.1.4 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the air inlet node that connects the air splitter to the individual
zone ADU.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1275

1.29.7.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the design maximum volume flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for this VAV
ADU. This flow rate must be greater than 0 or can be autosized.

1.29.7.1.6 Field: Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction

This numeric field defines the minimum air volume flow rate to the zone while the system is operating,
specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified
to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants. This value must be between 0 and
1.

1.29.7.1.7 Field: Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

This field adjusts the Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction by multiplying it using this schedule.
Schedule values are fractions, 0.0 to 1.0. This field adjusts the minimum airflow turndown value
below the zone design minimum air flow and is intended for use with ASHRAE Standard 170. This
field can also be used to adjust the design minimum air flow sizing calculation by applying a desired
fraction values to summer and winter design days turndown schedule. If this field is left blank, then
the turndown minimum air flow fraction value is set to 1 and uses the fixed fraction specified in the
field Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction.
An IDF example is provided below:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat ,
Zone 3 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 3 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
Zone 3 VAV Inlet Node , !- UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.584 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25; !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction

1.29.7.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.7.2.1 Zone Air Terminal VAV Damper Position []

This output is the damper position required to meet the zone load. This is the average value over
the simulation timestep being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal unit air
mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum air mass flow rate.

1.29.7.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
1276 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.8 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat
The series powered induction unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of
secondary (recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a fixed flow of air to
a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for
heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The fan runs at a constant volume flow rate whenever
the unit is on (and the fan’s availability schedule is on or it is activated by an availability manager).
The fan is downstream of the primary and secondary air inlets. The variable mixing is accomplished
by a damper in the unit’s primary air supply inlet duct. This damper can move from fully open
(100% primary air. 0% secondary air) to a minimum stop that is specified in the input description.
At full cooling the damper will be fully open. At minimum cooling and for heating the damper will
be at the minimum stop and the secondary air flow will be at its maximum. During night cycle
operation, if the availability manager status is CycleOnZoneFansOnly, then the fan will run only
if there is a heating load. If the status is CycleOn, then the fan will run according to the normal
controls.
The EnergyPlus model of the series PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a zone
mixer, a constant volume fan, and a heating coil (hot water, electric, or gas).

Figure 1.126: Series PIU Terminal Unit

1.29.8.1 Inputs

1.29.8.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular series powered induction terminal unit. Any reference
to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.29.8.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the unit can run during a given time
period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during
the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.8.1.3 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate through the unit in cubic meters per second. Since this is a
constant air volume unit, this is also the design, rated air flow rate of the unit.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1277

1.29.8.1.4 Field: Maximum Primary Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit in cubic meters per second.
This is the primary air flow rate at full cooling load when the primary air damper is fully open.
Usually this quantity is the same as the total unit flow rate, but it can be less.

1.29.8.1.5 Field: Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction

The minimum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit expressed as a fraction
of the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air. This input can be 0.0. When set to
autosize and the Sizing:System’s System Outdoor Air Method associated with this terminal is set
to Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure, the autosized air flow fraction is calculated according to the
ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Simplified Procedure.

1.29.8.1.6 Field: Supply Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its primary or supply air

1.29.8.1.7 Field: Secondary Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its secondary or recirculated air.
The unit can draw secondary air from its conditioned zone directly or from a return air plenum.
Thus this node should be one of the zones exhaust air nodes (see Zone Air Exhaust Node in Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections) or an induced air node outlet of a return plenum (see Induced
Air Outlet Node in AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum).

1.29.8.1.8 Field: Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node to which the unit sends its outlet air. This should be one of
the inlet air nodes of the zone which is being served.

1.29.8.1.9 Field: Reheat Coil Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node which is the inlet node of the unit’s heating coil. This is also
the outlet node of the unit’s fan.

1.29.8.1.10 Field: Zone Mixer Name

The name of a zone mixer component (object: AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer) which composes part
of the unit. Note that some of the input for the mixer will duplicate input fields of the powered
induction unit. One of the zone mixer inlet nodes should be the same as the supply air inlet node of
the PIU; the other inlet node of the zone mixer should be the same as the secondary air inlet node
of the PIU. The outlet node of the zone mixer should be the same as the inlet node of the PIU fan.

1.29.8.1.11 Field: Fan Name

The name of a fan component which composes part of the unit. Note that the fan’s maximum flow
rate should be the same as the maximum air flow rate of the PIU and the type of fan object must
be Fan:SystemModel or Fan:ConstantVolume. The fan’s inlet node should be the same as the zone
mixer’s outlet node. The fan’s outlet node should be the same as the heating coil’s air inlet node.
The secondary fan will run only when the Availability Schedule specified in the fan object is >0 or
when it is overridden by an availability manager (ref. AvailabilityManager:NightCycle and others).
1278 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.8.1.12 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

The type of coil in the PIU. The valid choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

In other words, the PIU may have a hot water, gas, electric or steam reheat coil.

1.29.8.1.13 Field: Reheat Coil Name

The name of the heating coil component which composes part of the unit. Note that the heating
coil’s air inlet node is the same as the fan outlet node and the heating coil’s air outlet node is the
same as the PIU outlet node.

1.29.8.1.14 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec through the unit’s heating coil. If the
heating coil is gas or electric this field should be blank.

1.29.8.1.15 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec through the unit’s heating coil. If the heating
coil is gas or electric this field should be blank.

1.29.8.1.16 Field: Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output
to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a
specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical
inversion procedure. Basically, this is the fraction:

|QP IU,out − Qzone load |

≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.124)
Qzone load
For gas or electric heating coils, this input should be left blank. The default is 0.001.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:SeriesPIU:Reheat ,
Zone 1 SPIU ATU , ! Name of air terminal unit
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule for series PIU ATU
0.47, ! Total volume flow rate through ATU
0.47, ! Maximum primary air flow rate through terminal unit
0.3, ! Minimum primary air flow rate (fraction of max)
Zone 1 PIU Pri Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit supply air inlet node
Zone 1 PIU Sec Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit secondary air inlet node
Zone 1 PIU Air Outlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit outlet node
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , ! Reheat coil air inlet node (fan outlet node)
Zone 1 PIU Mixer , ! Air terminal unit mixer name
Zone 1 PIU Fan , ! Air terminal unit fan name
COIL:Heating:Water , ! type of air terminal unit reheat coil
Reheat Coil Zone 1, ! name of air terminal unit reheat coil
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1279

0.0013 , ! Max Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}

0.0, ! Min Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.001; ! Convergence tolerance

1.29.8.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Primary Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.8.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Primary Damper Position []

This output is the variable air volume primary damper position required to meet the zone load.
This is the average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the
terminal unit primary air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum primary air mass
flow rate.

1.29.8.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the dry air heating addition rate of the series PIU terminal unit to the zone it
is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate
through the terminal unit.

1.29.8.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the dry air heat addition of the series PIU terminal unit to the zone it is serving
in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions,
the mass flow rate through the terminal unit, and the timestep.

1.29.8.2.4 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the dry air sensible heat extraction rate of the series PIU terminal unit from the
zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow
rate through the terminal unit.

1.29.8.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the dry air sensible heat extraction of the series PIU terminal unit from the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the terminal unit, and the timestep.

1.29.8.2.6 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.
1280 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.9 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat
The parallel powered induction unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts of
secondary (recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a variable total flow
of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating
coil for heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The secondary and primary air streams enter
the unit in parallel. The fan sits in the secondary air stream and runs only when the primary air
flow is below the Fan On Flow Fraction and the fan’s availability schedule is on or it is activated
by an availability manager. The primary air inlet contains a damper that can move from fully open
(maximum primary air) to a minimum stop (minimum primary air).
At full cooling load the primary air damper is fully open and the fan is off. The primary air flow is
at maximum and there is little or no secondary air flow. As the cooling load decreases, the primary
air damper gradually closes and the secondary air flow remains close to zero. At some point, usually
when the primary air flow has reached the minimum, the fan switches on and secondary air is
induced. The heating coil will switch on as needed to meet any heating demand. The Fan On Flow
Fraction field controls the fan operation; see this field description for more details.
The EnergyPlus model of the parallel PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a constant
volume fan, a zone mixer, and a heating coil (hot water, electric, or gas).

Figure 1.127: Parallel PIU Terminal Unit

1.29.9.1 Inputs

1.29.9.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular parallel powered induction terminal unit. Any reference
to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.29.9.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the unit can run during a given time
period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during
the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1281

1.29.9.1.3 Field: Maximum Primary Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit in cubic meters per second.
This is the primary air flow rate at full cooling load when the primary air damper is fully open.

1.29.9.1.4 Field: Maximum Secondary Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate of secondary air through the unit in cubic meters per second.
This flow rate can be any amount but is commonly less than the maximum primary air flow rate.

1.29.9.1.5 Field: Minimum Primary Air Flow Fraction

The minimum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit expressed as a fraction
of the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air. This input can be 0.0. When set to
autosize and the Sizing:System’s System Outdoor Air Method associated with this terminal is set
to Standard62.1SimplifiedProcedure, the autosized air flow fraction is calculated according to the
ASHRAE Standard 62.1 Simplified Procedure.

1.29.9.1.6 Field: Fan On Flow Fraction

This is the fraction of the primary air flow at or below which the secondary fan turns on. In the
parallel PIU the fan operation is intermittent. If the primary air flow is above this fraction of the
maximum, the fan is off unless reheat is required. The fan will only operate if the Availability
Schedule specified in the Fan:ConstantVolume object (see Fan Name below) is >0 or when it is
overridden by an availability manager (ref. AvailabilityManager:NightCycle and others). If the
availability manager status is CycleOnZoneFansOnly, then the fan will run only if there is a heating
load. If the status is CycleOn, then the fan will run according to the normal controls (low flow or
reheat required).

1.29.9.1.7 Field: Supply Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its primary or supply air

1.29.9.1.8 Field: Secondary Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its secondary or recirculated air.
The unit can draw secondary air from its conditioned zone directly or from a return air plenum.
Thus this node should be one of the zones exhaust air nodes (see Zone Air Exhaust Node in Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections) or an induced air node outlet of a return plenum (see Induced
Air Outlet Node in AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum).

1.29.9.1.9 Field: Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node to which the unit sends its outlet air. This should be one of
the inlet air nodes of the zone which is being served.

1.29.9.1.10 Field: Reheat Coil Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node which is the inlet node of the unit’s heating coil. This is also
the outlet node of the unit’s zone mixer.
1282 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.9.1.11 Field: Zone Mixer Name

The name of an zone mixer component (object: AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer) which composes part
of the unit. Note that some of the input for the mixer will duplicate input fields of the powered
induction unit. One of the zone mixer inlet nodes should be the same as the supply air inlet node
of the PIU; the other inlet node of the zone mixer should be the same as the air outlet node of the
fan. The outlet node of the zone mixer should be the same as the inlet node of the heating coil.

1.29.9.1.12 Field: Fan Name

The name of a fan component which composes part of the unit. Note that the fan’s maximum
flow rate should be the same as the maximum secondary air flow rate of the PIU and the type of
fan object must be Fan:SystemModel or Fan:ConstantVolume. The fan’s inlet node should be the
same as the PIU secondary air inlet node. The fan’s outlet node should be the same as one of the
zone mixer’s inlet nodes. The secondary fan will run only when the Availability Schedule specified
in the Fan:ConstantVolume object is >0 or when it is overridden by an availability manager (ref.
AvailabilityManager:NightCycle and others). See description of fan controls under Fan On Flow
Fraction above.

1.29.9.1.13 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

The type of coil in the PIU. The valid choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

In other words, the PIU may have a hot water, gas, electric or steam reheat coil.

1.29.9.1.14 Field: Reheat Coil Name

The name of the heating coil component which composes part of the unit. Note that the heating
coil’s air inlet node is the same as the zone mixer’s outlet node and the heating coil’s air outlet node
is the same as the PIU outlet node.

1.29.9.1.15 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

The maximum hot water or steam volumetric flow rate in m3 /s through the unit’s heating coil. The
steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. If the heating coil is gas or electric
this field should be blank.

1.29.9.1.16 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

The minimum hot water or steam volumetric flow rate in m3 /s through the unit’s heating coil. The
steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. If the heating coil is gas or electric
this field should be blank.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1283

1.29.9.1.17 Field: Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output
to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a
specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical
inversion procedure. Basically, this is the fraction:

|QP IU,out − Qzone load |

≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.125)
Qzone load
For gas or electric heating coils, this input should be left blank. The default is 0.001.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ParallelPIU:Reheat ,
Zone 3 PPIU ATU , ! Name of air terminal unit
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule for series PIU ATU
0.47, ! Maximum primary air flow rate through terminal unit
0.375 , ! Maximum secondary air flow rate through the terminal unit
0.1, ! Minimum primary air flow rate (fraction of max)
0.1, ! fan on flow fraction
Zone 3 PIU Pri Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit supply air inlet node
Zone 3 PIU Sec Air Inlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit secondary air inlet node
Zone 3 PIU Air Outlet Node , ! Air Terminal unit outlet node
Zone 3 Reheat Air Inlet Node , ! Reheat coil air inlet node (fan outlet node)
Zone 3 PIU Mixer , ! Air terminal unit mixer name
Zone 3 PIU Fan , ! Air terminal unit fan name
Coil:Heating:Water , ! type of air terminal unit reheat coil
Reheat Coil Zone 3, ! name of air terminal unit reheat coil
0.0013 , ! Max Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.0, ! Min Reheat Water Flow {Flow: m3/sec}
0.001; ! Convergence tolerance

1.29.9.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Primary Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.9.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Primary Damper Position []

This output is the variable air volume primary damper position required to meet the zone load.
This is the average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the
terminal unit primary air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum primary air mass
flow rate.

1.29.9.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the dry air heating addition rate of the parallel PIU terminal unit to the zone it
is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate
through the terminal unit.
1284 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.9.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the dry air heat addition of the parallel PIU terminal unit to the zone it is serving
in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions,
the mass flow rate through the terminal unit, and the timestep.

1.29.9.2.4 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the sensible heat extraction rate of the parallel PIU terminal unit from the zone
it is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate
through the terminal unit.

1.29.9.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the dry air sensible heat extraction of the parallel PIU terminal unit from the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the terminal unit, and the timestep.

1.29.9.2.6 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.10 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction

The four pipe induction terminal unit provides local hot water heating or chilled water cooling of
induced zone air which then mixes with centrally conditioned supply air. An air conditioning system
consisting of these terminal units is effectively a mixed central air / local hydronic system. The
centrally conditioned air supplied to the induction terminal units is constant volume at quite high
pressure. The central air is discharged through a nozzle in the terminal unit, inducing a flow of room
air over a hydronic heating/cooling coil. The coil is connected either to a single inlet and outlet pipe
(2 pipe unit) or to 2 inlets and 2 outlets (4 pipe unit). The heated or cooled induced air mixes with
the centrally conditioned air before being discharged into the zone. The terminal units are usually
expected to do only sensible cooling – any dehumidification is done by the central air conditioning
system.
The EnergyPlus model of the four pipe induction terminal unit is a compound component consisting
of a hot water heating coil, a chilled water cooling coil, and an air mixer. The unit has two inlet air
streams: the centrally conditioned supply air and the induced air from the zone. The induced air
passes first through the heating coil, then through the cooling coil and finally through the mixer.
The central supply air goes directly into the mixer. The water flow through the hot or cold water coil
is varied to meet the zone air conditioning requirement. Note that EnergyPlus models the four pipe
induction terminal unit as having separate heating and cooling coils whereas real units have only a
single coil used for both heating and cooling. Note also that the four pipe induction unit model can
be used to model a two pipe unit by simply adjusting the heating and cooling coil schedules so that
the heating coil is off when the cooling coil is on and vice versa.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1285

1.29.10.1 Inputs

1.29.10.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular four pipe induction terminal unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.29.10.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the unit can run during a given time
period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during
the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.10.1.3 Field: Maximum Total Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate discharged from the unit in cubic meters per second. Since
this is a constant air volume unit, this is also the design, rated air flow rate of the unit. Note that
this is the total discharge flow rate – including both central supply and induced air.

1.29.10.1.4 Field: Induction Ratio

The ratio of induced air flow rate to primary supply air flow rate. The default is 2.5 the supply air
induces zone air flow at 2.5 times the primary supply air flow rate.

1.29.10.1.5 Field: Supply Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its primary or supply air

1.29.10.1.6 Field: Induced Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its secondary or recirculated air.
This should be the same node as one of the zone exhaust nodes.

1.29.10.1.7 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node to which the unit sends its outlet air. This should be one of
the inlet air nodes of the zone which is being served.

1.29.10.1.8 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

The type of heating coil in the terminal unit. The choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Water

In other words, the unit may have a hot water coil only.

1.29.10.1.9 Field: Heating Coil Name

The name of the heating coil component which composes part of the unit. Note that the heating
coil’s air inlet node is the same as the terminal unit’s induced air inlet node. The heating coil’s air
outlet node is the same as the cooling coil’s air inlet node.
1286 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.10.1.10 Field: Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec through the unit’s heating coil.

1.29.10.1.11 Field: Minimum Hot Water Flow Rate

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec through the unit’s heating coil.

1.29.10.1.12 Field: Heating Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output
to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The
convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure.
Basically, this is the fraction:

|Qunit,out − Qzone load |

≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.126)
Qzone load
The default is 0.001.

1.29.10.1.13 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

The type of cooling coil in the terminal unit. The choices are:

– Coil:Cooling:Water
– Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry

In other words, the unit must use only the water cooling coils.

1.29.10.1.14 Field: Cooling Coil Name

The name of the cooling coil component which composes part of the unit. Note that the cooling
coil’s air inlet node is the same as the heating coil’s air outlet node. The cooling coil’s air outlet
node is the same as one of the zone mixer’s inlets.

1.29.10.1.15 Field: Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate

The maximum cold water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec through the unit’s cooling coil.

1.29.10.1.16 Field: Minimum Cold Water Flow Rate

The minimum cold water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec through the unit’s cooling coil.

1.29.10.1.17 Field: Cooling Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit cooling output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output
to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The
convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure.
Basically, this is the fraction:

|Qunit,out − Qzone load |

≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.127)
Qzone load
The default is 0.001.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1287

1.29.10.1.18 Field: Zone Mixer Name

The name of an zone mixer component (object: AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer) which composes part of
the terminal unit. Note that some of the zone mixer’s inputs will duplicate some of the terminal
units’s inputs. One of the zone mixer inlet nodes should be the same as the supply air inlet node
of the terminal unit; the other inlet node of the zone mixer should be the same as the cooling coil
air outlet node. The outlet node of the zone mixer should be the same as the outlet node of the
terminal unit.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction ,
SPACE2 -1 FPIU , !- Name of System
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
autosize , !- Maximum total air volume flow rate
1.0, !- Induction ratio
SPACE2 -1 ATU Supply Node , !- Terminal unit supply air inlet node
SPACE2 -1 ATU Induc Node , !- Terminal unit induced air inlet node
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Terminal unit air outlet node
COIL:Heating:Water , !- Heating coil object
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil , !- Heating coil name
autosize , !- Max hot water flow
0.0, !- Min hot water flow
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence Tolerance
COIL:Cooling:Water , !- Cooling coil object
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil , !- Cooling coil name
autosize , !- Max cold water flow
0.0, !- Min cold water flow
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance
SPACE2 -1 ATU Mixer; !- Zone mixer component name

COIL:Heating:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil , !- Coil Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- UA of the Coil {W/K}
autosize , !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil {m3/s}
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 ATU Induc Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Air Out Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node

COIL:Cooling:Water ,
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil , !- Coil Name
CWCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- UA of the Coil
autosize , !- Max Water Flow Rate of Coil
, !- Leaving Relative Humidity of Coil
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water In Node , !- Coil_Water_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water Out Node , !- Coil_Water_Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 HW Coil Air Out Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Air Out Node; !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node

AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer ,
SPACE2 -1 ATU Mixer , !- Mixer Name
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Outlet_Node
SPACE2 -1 ATU Supply Node , !- Inlet_Node_1
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Air Out Node; !- Inlet_Node_2

1.29.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.10.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
1288 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.11 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeBeam

The four-pipe beam air terminal system is a mixed air-hydronic system. A central, single-duct
forced-air system that supplies conditioned air to the zones. Chilled water circulates through ceiling-
mounted fin-tube convector units to provide sensible cooling. Hot water circulates through the
same convectors to provide heating. Water flow rate through the beam unit is varied to meet
the zone sensible cooling or heating load. Any dehumidification is done by the central forced-
air system. Thermodynamically, the cooled beam system resembles the four-pipe induction unit
(AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeInduction).

To model a typical four-pipe beam system the user will need to define a conventional central constant
volume forced air system in order to deliver primary air to the beam. This central system (usually)
provides outside air for ventilation. Primary air is normally delivered at a fixed temperature but
could be reset by a schedule or using an outdoor air reset setpoint manager. On the supply side of
this air loop there will be the usual central conditioning equipment: outside air mixer, fan, heating
and cooling coil. On the zone equipment (demand) side of the loop, the four-pipe beams will be
represented as air terminal units. Because the four-pipe beam can provide heating the system can
avoid over-cooling zones during times of low load with cool primary air temperatures, similar to the
action of a reheat coil in a VAV terminal. Therefore, it is not necessary to have additional zone
equipment (such as baseboard heaters) to handle heating (or reheating) loads.

Although the four-pipe beam equipment in a zone is treated by the program as a single terminal
unit, the actual installation will often have multiple beam units in each zone. In this model, it is
only the total length of all the beams and the total air flow of all the units that are described, not
the number of individual beam units.

If needed, the program (in its sizing calculation for the system) determines the total length of beams
and primary supply air flow that is needed to meet the zone design loads. The four pipe beam air
terminal sizing differs from other air terminals in that the primary supply air flow rate is sized using
the entire performance model and the flow rate is not the direct result from the Sizing:Zone and
Sizing:System calculations. The flow rates will be somewhere between what an air terminal would
size out using VentilationRequirement or Sensible in the Sizing:System object (either setting can be
used).

The model includes two different types of inputs for flow rates, “design” and “rated … per-meter.”
The design values are the actual sizes of the flow rates as viewed from the zone and central air
handler (but before zone multipliers). The design values include all the individual beam units and
their lengths. The rated per-meter values are used to characterize product performance at nominal
rating conditions in such a way that it can be scaled to match the size of a zone. The performance
characteristics at the rating point are not fixed in the program and can be entered by the user when
they differ from default values. The rated per meter values are normalized by the linear dimensions
of the beam and are generally obtained from product catalog data by dividing by the length of the
beam. The rated primary air flow rate is assumed to be for sea level conditions while the design
primary air flow rate is modeled for the location elevation above sea level.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1289

1.29.11.1 Inputs

1.29.11.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for a particular beam unit. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.

1.29.11.1.2 Field: Primary Air Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule that denotes whether the terminal unit is operating to provide primary
air during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that
the unit is on and requesting primary air flow during the time period. A value less than or equal to
0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the
schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.11.1.3 Field: Cooling Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule that denotes whether the terminal unit is operating to provide cooling
during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the
unit is on and available for beam cooling during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0
(usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the
schedule has values of 1 for all time periods. The primary air availability schedule named in the
previous input field must have a value that is “on” during times that cooling is available.

1.29.11.1.4 Field: Heating Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule that denotes whether the terminal unit can operate to provide heating
during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the
unit is on and available for beam heating during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0
(usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the
schedule has values of 1 for all time periods. The primary air availability schedule named in the
input field above must have a value that is “on” during times that heating is available.

1.29.11.1.5 Field: Primary Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system air node from which the unit draws its primary air.

1.29.11.1.6 Field: Primary Air Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system air node that connects this terminal unit to the zone. The will be
the same as one of the zone inlet nodes.

1.29.11.1.7 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

The name of the chilled water inlet node. If desired, the chilled water node connections can be
omitted and the model will assume the intent is to model a two-pipe heating only beam.

1.29.11.1.8 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

The name of the chilled water outlet node.
1290 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.11.1.9 Field: Design Primary Air Volume Flow Rate

This is the air flow rate (m3/s) of the primary air entering the air terminal unit from the central air
handling unit. This input can be autosized.

1.29.11.1.10 Field: Design Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate

The maximum chilled water flow rate (m3/s) for the unit(s) serving the entire zone. This input can
be autosized based on the zone design load.

1.29.11.1.11 Field: Design Hot Water Volume Flow Rate

The maximum hot water flow rate (m3/s) for the unit(s) serving the entire zone. This input can be
autosized based on the zone design load.

1.29.11.1.12 Field: Zone Total Beam Length (m)

The total length of all the beams in the zone (m). The real spaces may actually have a number of
individual beam units of a specific length and this is the length of individual beams times the total
number of beams in the thermal zone. It need not be an even multiple of actual unit’s beam length
but it can be if desired. This field is autosizable.

1.29.11.1.13 Field: Rated Primary Air Flow Rate per Beam Length (m3/s-m)
This is the primary air volume flow rate at rating conditions divided by the length of the beam,
in m3/s-m. This “catalog” value for volume flow rate input is converted to a mass flow rate using
standard air density at sea level. This value will be used for sizing the design primary air volume
flow rate if the total beam length is not also autosized. The default is 0.035 m3/s-m.

1.29.11.1.14 Field: Beam Rated Cooling Capacity per Beam Length (W/m)
This is the beam cooling capacity at rating conditions divided by the length of the beam, in W/m.
This is only the cooling contributed by the chilled water circulating through the convector and is
separate from any cooling (or heating) that may also be provided by the primary air. The default is
600 W/m.

1.29.11.1.15 Field: Beam Rated Cooling Room Air Chilled Water Temperature
Difference (Delta C)
This input defines the value of the temperature difference between the room air and entering chilled
water at the rating point, in delta Celsius. This “catalog” input helps to define the operating
conditions that correspond with Rated Beam Cooling Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize
the independent variable in the input field called Beam Cooling Capacity Temperature Difference
Modification Factor Curve or Table Name. The default is 10.0 delta C.

1.29.11.1.16 Field: Beam Rated Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam
Length (m3/s-m)
This input defines the value of the chilled water flow rate per meter length of beam at the rating
point, in m3/s-m. This input helps to define the operating conditions that correspond with Rated
Beam Cooling Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent variable in the input
field called Beam Cooling Capacity Chilled Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table Name.
The default is 0.00005 m3/s-m.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1291

1.29.11.1.17 Field: Beam Cooling Capacity Temperature Difference Modifica-

tion Factor Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s cooling
capacity varies as a function of the temperature difference between the zone air and the entering
chilled water. The single independent variable is the ratio of the current simulation results for the
difference between the air and entering water and the difference at the rating point. The result of
the curve or table is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the cooling capacity.

1.29.11.1.18 Field: Beam Cooling Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve
Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s cooling
capacity varies as a function of the primary air flow rate. The single independent variable is the
ratio of the current primary air flow rate and the primary air flow rate at the rating point. The
result of the curve or table is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the cooling capacity. The
factor is useful to adjust for a range of primary air flow rates that a given product can accommodate.
However, since this is a constant volume air terminal, the modification does not typically vary during
the simulation and the range of independent variable does not need to be all that broad in practice.

1.29.11.1.19 Field: Beam Cooling Capacity Chilled Water Flow Modification

Factor Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s cooling
capacity varies as a function of the water flow rate. The single independent variable is the ratio of
the current fluid flow rate to the fluid flow rate at the rating point. The result of the curve or table
is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the cooling capacity. The model will adjust the chilled
water flow rate to vary cooling power to meet the zone load, so for control purposes, the range of the
independent variable must include all the way down to zero flow, with zero capacity at zero flow.

1.29.11.1.20 Field: Beam Rated Heating Capacity per Beam Length (W/m)
This is the beam heating capacity at rating conditions divided by the length of the beam, in W/m.
This is only the heating contributed by the hot water circulating through the convector and is
separate from any heating (or cooling) that may also be provided by the primary air. The default is
1.200 W/m.

1.29.11.1.21 Field: Beam Rated Heating Room Air Hot Water Temperature
Difference (Delta C)
This input defines the value of the temperature difference between the entering hot water and the
room air at the rating point, in delta Celsius. This input helps to define the operating conditions that
correspond with Rated Beam Heating Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent
variable in the input field called Beam Heating Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor
Curve or Table Name. The default is 27.8 delta C.

1.29.11.1.22 Field: Beam Rated Hot Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
(m3/s-m)
This input defines the value of the hot water flow rate per meter length of beam at the rating
point, in m3/s/m, or more strictly m3/s-m. This input helps to define the operating conditions that
1292 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

correspond with Rated Beam Heating Capacity per Meter. It is used to normalize the independent
variable in the input field called Beam Heating Capacity Hot Water Flow Modification Factor Curve
or Table Name. The default is 0.00005 m3/s-m.

1.29.11.1.23 Field: Beam Heating Capacity Temperature Difference Modifica-

tion Factor Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s heating
capacity varies as a function of the temperature difference between the entering hot water and
the zone air. The single independent variable is the ratio of the current simulation results for the
difference between the water and air and the difference at the rating point. The result of the curve
or table is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the heating capacity.

1.29.11.1.24 Field: Beam Heating Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve
Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convectors heating
capacity varies as a function of the primary air flow rate. The single independent variable is the
ratio of the current primary air flow rate and the primary air flow rate at the rating point. The
result of the curve or table is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the heating capacity. The
factor is useful to adjust for a range of primary air rates that a given product can accommodate.
However, since this is a constant volume air terminal, the modification does not typically vary during
the simulation and the range of independent variable does not need to be all that broad in practice.

1.29.11.1.25 Field: Beam Heating Capacity Hot Water Flow Modification Factor
Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve or table object that describes how the beam convector’s heating
capacity varies as a function of the water flow rate. The single independent variable is the ratio of
the current fluid flow rate to the fluid flow rate at the rating point. The result of the curve or table
is multiplied by the rated capacity to adjust the heating capacity. The model will adjust the hot
water flow rate to vary heating power to meet the zone load, so for control purposes, the range of
the independent variable must include all the way down to zero flow, with zero capacity at zero flow.
An example input follows:
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:FourPipeBeam ,
Zone One 4pipe Beam , !- Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Primary Air Availability Schedule Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Cooling Availability Schedule Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Heating Availability Schedule Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam Inlet Node Name , !- Primary Air Inlet Node Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam Outlet Node Name , !- Primary Air Outlet Node Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam CW Inlet Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
Zone One 4pipe Beam CW Outlet Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Primary Air Volume Flow Rate
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Hot Water Volume Flow Rate
AUTOSIZE , !- Zone Total Beam Length
0.036 , !- Rated Primary Air Flow Rate per Beam Length
597 , !- Rated Beam Cooling Capacity per Beam Length
10.0 , !- Rated Cooling Room Air Chilled Water Temperature Difference
5.2E-5 , !- Rated Chilled Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
CapModFuncOfTempDiff , !- Beam Cooling Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor Curve
or Table Name
CoolCapModFuncOfSAFlow , !- Beam Cooling Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table
Name
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1293

CapModFuncOfWaterFlow , !- Beam Cooling Capacity Chilled Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or
Table Name
1548 , !- Rated Beam Heating Capacity per Beam Length
27.8, !- Rated Heating Room Air Hot Water Temperature Difference
5.2E-5, !- Rated Hot Water Volume Flow Rate per Beam Length
CapModFuncOfTempDiff , !- Beam Heating Capacity Temperature Difference Modification Factor Curve
or Table Name
HeatCapModFuncOfSAFlow , !- Beam Heating Capacity Air Flow Modification Factor Curve or Table
Name
CapModFuncOfWaterFlow ; !- Beam Heating Capacity Hot Water Flow Modification Factor Curve or
Table Name

1.29.11.2 Outputs

1.29.11.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

1.29.11.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

These are the sensible cooling power and energy delivered by the beams to the zone, exclusive of
any cooling or heating done by the primary air.

1.29.11.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Heating Rate [W]

1.29.11.2.4 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Heating Energy [J]

These are the sensible heating power and energy delivered by the beams to the zone, exclusive of
any cooling or heating done by the primary air.

1.29.11.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
Sensible cooling by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the
beams.

1.29.11.2.6 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
Sensible cooling by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the
beams.

1.29.11.2.7 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
Heating by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the beams.

1.29.11.2.8 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
Heating by the primary air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the beams.

1.29.11.2.9 Zone Air Terminal Primary Air Flow Rate [m3/s]

Air flow rate from the central air handler into the zone in m3/s. Note that this does not include
any of the secondary air flow that is induced by the convector and nozzle action (the model does not
resolve secondary air flow rate and the result are not available).
1294 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.11.2.10 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.12 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam

The Cooled Beam system is a mixed air-hydronic system. A central, single-duct forced-air system
supplies conditioned ventilation air to the zones. Sensible cooling is done by chilled water circulating
through ceiling mounted cooled beam units. Chilled water flow rate through the cooled beam units is
varied to meet the zone sensible cooling load. Any dehumidification is done by the central ventilation
air system. Heating is usually accomplished with hot water radiators. Thermodynamically, the
cooled beam system resembles the four-pipe induction unit.
To model a typical cooled beam system the user will need to define a conventional central constant
volume forced air system. This system will normally be 100% outside air delivered at a fixed supply
temperature (which could be reset by schedule or by outside air temperature). On the supply side
of this air loop there will be the usual central AC equipment: outside air mixer, fan, heating and
cooling coil. On the zone equipment (demand) side of the loop, the chilled beams will be represented
as terminal units. Additional zone equipment (such as baseboard heaters) will be needed to handle
heating loads.
Although the cooled beam equipment in a zone is treated by the program as a single terminal unit,
the actual installation will have multiple beams in each zone. The program (in its sizing calculation
for the system) figures out how many beams of what length are needed to meet the zone design load.

1.29.12.1 Inputs

1.29.12.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular chilled beam unit. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.

1.29.12.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the unit can run during a given time
period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during
the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.12.1.3 Field: Cooled Beam Type

Two types of units are modeled: Active or Passive. In the active unit, primary air is supplied through
the beam, inducing some secondary zone air into contact with the coil. This unit acts as an active
convector. The passive unit is simply a passive, finned convector. Primary air is supplied through a
normal diffuser.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1295

1.29.12.1.4 Field: Supply Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the unit draws its primary or supply air. Note that
this field should be specified for both types of unit, even though supply air does not pass through
the passive unit.

1.29.12.1.5 Field: Supply Air Outlet Node Name

The name of the air node that connects this terminal unit to the zone. The will be the same as one
of the zone inlet nodes. The name of this node must be entered even if the actual beams are passive
and is not actually supplying air to the zone.

1.29.12.1.6 Field: Chilled Water Inlet Node Name

The name of the chilled water inlet node.

1.29.12.1.7 Field: Chilled Water Outlet Node Name

The name of the chilled water outlet node.

1.29.12.1.8 Field: Supply Air Volumetric Flow Rate

This is the air flow rate in cubic meters per second of the supply air entering the zone. This input
would normally be autosized based on the ventilation requirement (see Zone Sizing).

1.29.12.1.9 Field: Maximum Total Chilled Water Volumetric Flow Rate

The maximum chilled water flow rate (in cubic meters per second) for the unit. This input would
normally be autosized based on the zone design load.

1.29.12.1.10 Field: Number of Beams

The number of individual cooled beam units in the zone. Normally this unit would be autocalculated
by the program based upon the previous field and the nominal flow rate for a single beam unit (set
by the program to 0.07 kg/s).

1.29.12.1.11 Field: Beam Length

The length of an individual beam in meters. Normally this will be autocalculated by the program
based upon the number of beam units and the zone design sensible cooling load. 1 to 4 meters is a
typical length range.

1.29.12.1.12 Field: Design Inlet Water Temperature

The nominal or design inlet water temperature in degrees Celsius. The default is 15°C.
1296 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.12.1.13 Field: Design Outlet Water Temperature

The nominal or design outlet water temperature in degrees Celsius. The default is 17°C.
The following inputs are parameters used to characterize the performance of the chilled beam units.
Values for a given unit can be obtained from the manufacturer. The parameters are used in the
following equations.
Pbeam = A·K·DT beam cooling output per unit length W/m
K = a·DTn1 ·vrn2 ·wn3 coil heat transfer coefficient W/(m2 K)
vr = (qin /a0 )·rair room air mass flow rate across coil kg/(m2 s)
qin = K1 ·DTn +Kin ·qpr room air volumetric flow rate across coil per
unit length m3 /(s-m)
DT is the room air –water temperature difference (average water temperature is used) in degrees C.
w is the water velocity in m/s.
qpr is the supply air flow rate per unit length m3 /(s-m)

1.29.12.1.14 Field: Coil Surface Area per Coil Length

Surface area on the air side of the beam per unit beam length. The units are square meters per
meter. The default is 5.422. This is A in the above equations.

1.29.12.1.15 Field: Model Parameter a (a)

This is ain the above equations. The default is 15.3

1.29.12.1.16 Field: Model Parameter n1

This is n1 in the above equations. The default is 0.

1.29.12.1.17 Field: Model Parameter n2

This is n2 in the above equations. The default is 0.84.

1.29.12.1.18 Field: Model Parameter n3

This is n3 in the above equations. The default is 0.12.

1.29.12.1.19 Field: Model Parameter a0 (a)

This is a0 in the above equations. It is the free area of the coil in plan view (for the air flow) per
unit beam length. The units are square meters per meter. The default is 0.171.

1.29.12.1.20 Field: Model Parameter K1 (K1)

This is K1 in the above equations. The default is 0.005.

1.29.12.1.21 Field: Model Parameter n

This is n in the above equations. The default is 0.4.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1297

1.29.12.1.22 Field: Coefficient of Induction Kin (Kin)

The coefficient of induction Kin in the above equations. The default is 2.0 for active beams and 0.0
for passive beams.

1.29.12.1.23 Field: Pipe Inside Diameter

The water pipe inside diameter in meters. The default is 0.0145.
An example input is:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:CooledBeam ,
SPACE2 -1 CB , !- Name
CWCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Active , !- Cooled Beam Type
SPACE2 -1 ATU Supply Node ,!- Supply Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 In Node , !- Supply Air Outlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water In Node , !- Chilled Water Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 CW Coil Water Out Node , !- Chilled Water Outlet Node Name
, !- Supply Air Volumetric Flow Rate
, !- Maximum Total Chilled Water Volumetric Flow Rate
, !- Number of Beams
, !- Beam Length
, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature
, !- Design Outlet Water temperature
, !- Coil Surface Area per Coil Length
, !- Model Parameter a
, !- Model Parameter n1
, !- Model Parameter n2
, !- Model Parameter n3
, !- Model Parameter a0
, !- Model Parameter K1
, !- Model Parameter n
, !- Coefficient of Induction Kin
; !- Leaving Pipe Inside Diameter

1.29.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Air Terminal Beam Chilled Water Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.12.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

Sensible cooling by the beams in the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the supply
air.

1.29.12.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Beam Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

Sensible cooling by the beams in the zone, exclusive of any cooling or heating done by the supply
air.
1298 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.12.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
Sensible cooling by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.

1.29.12.2.4 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
Sensible cooling by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.

1.29.12.2.5 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
Heating by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.

1.29.12.2.6 Zone Air Terminal Supply Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
Heating by the supply air to the zone, exclusive of any cooling done by the beams.

1.29.12.2.7 Zone Air Terminal Beam Chilled Water Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy for the chilled water serving the beams, in Joules.

1.29.12.2.8 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outside air system.

1.29.13 AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
The air terminal mixer provides a means of supplying central system air either to air inlet or supply
side of a ZoneHVAC equipment such as a four pipe fan coil. Normally the central air would be
ventilation air from a dedicated outside air system (DOAS).
This terminal mixer object mixes conditioned outdoor air (primary air) from DOAS air loop and
recirculating (secondary air) and deliver it either to inlet or supply side of a local ZoneHVAC equip-
ment. The terminal mixer can be connected either to the inlet or supply side of the local ZoneHVAC
equipment and the connection type is specified in the input field Mixer Connection Type. If the
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object is connected to the supply side, a mix of conditioned outdoor
air from a central dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) with conditioned recirculation air from the
local ZoneHVAC equipment is supplied as a single stream to the conditioned zone at its inlet node.
If the AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object is connected to the inlet side, a mix of outdoor air from
the a central dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS) with un-conditioned recirculation air from a
zone exhaust node is supplied to the ZoneHVAC equipment inlet node. The mixer model will sum
the two air streams and average the air properties. The AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer is used with:

– ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
– ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
– ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
– ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
– ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
– ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
– AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1299

The AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem object must be specified as a ZoneHVAC equipment. Since the

ZoneHVAC equipment gets the outdoor air or ventilation air from central dedicated OA system,
the design outdoor air flow rate input fields in the ZoneHVAC equipment are set to zero and the
OutdoorAir:Mixer object type and object name input fields are left blank.

Figure 1.128: Inlet Side Mixer Air Terminal Unit with ZoneHVAC Equipment

1.29.13.1 Inputs

1.29.13.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for a particular terminal mixer unit. Any reference to this unit by
another object will use this name.

1.29.13.1.2 Field: ZoneHVAC Unit Object Type

The type of ZoneHVAC equipment to which this terminal mixer will be connected. This is a choice
input field. Valid ZoneHVAC choices are:

– ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
– ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
– ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
– ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
1300 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.129: Supply Side Mixer Air Terminal Unit with ZoneHVAC equipment
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1301

– ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
– ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
– AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem

1.29.13.1.3 Field: ZoneHVAC Unit Object Name

The name of ZoneHVAC equipment to which this mixer will be connected.

1.29.13.1.4 Field: Mixer Outlet Node Name

The outlet air node name of the mixer. This will be an inlet air node name of the conditioned zone
if the connection type specified in the input field Mixer Connection Type below is SupplySide, or
else this will be the inlet air node name of the ZoneHVAC equipment if the connection type in the
input field Mixer Connection Type below is InletSide.

1.29.13.1.5 Field: Mixer Primary Air Inlet Node Name

The primary air (treated outdoor air) inlet node name of the mixer. This will be the outlet air node
name of an AirLoopHVAC:ZoneSplitter or AirLoopHVAC:SupplyPlenum, providing the connection
to the DOAS system.

1.29.13.1.6 Field: Mixer Secondary Air Inlet Node Name

The secondary air (recirculating air) inlet node name of the mixer. This will be the outlet air node
name of the ZoneHVAC equipment if the connection type in the input field Mixer Connection Type
below is SupplySide, or else this will be either an exhaust air node name of the conditioned zone
(Ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections to draw air from a zone directly or an induced air outlet
node (Ref. AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum) to draw air from a return plenum when the zone return
node is connected to a return plenum. The induced air outlet node will be the outlet air node name
when the mixer connection type is SupplySide. If the mixer connection type is InletSide, then the
induced air outlet node will be the mixer secondary air inlet node.

1.29.13.1.7 Field: Mixer Connection Type

This input field allows user to specify the mixer connection type. Valid choices are InletSide or
SupplySide. This is a required input field. If the mixer connection type selected is InletSide,
then the mixer is connected on the inlet side of the ZoneHVAC equipment, or else if the mixer
connection type selected is SupplySide, then the mixer is connected at the outlet side of the
ZoneHVAC equipment.

1.29.13.1.8 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This field allows modifying the behavior of this air terminal so that it is modulated to supply
the required outdoor air to the zone. This field is optional. When the name of an DesignSpec-
ification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir:SpaceList object is entered, the model is
changed to adjust the flow rate to provide the volume of outdoor air described by that object. This
feature allows modeling demand controlled ventilation on a zone-by-zone basis using the Outdoor
Air Flow per Person rate (specified in the DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object) and the number
of occupants (specified in the People object schedules). If the outdoor air fraction of the supply air is
1302 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.0, as for a dedicated outdoor air system, the air flow rate will match the outdoor air requirement.
When the outdoor air fraction is less than 1.0, as for a recirculating air system, the terminal air
flow will be modulated upward to account for the increased total air flow needed to provide the
required flow rate of outdoor air. The total air flow rate will not exceed the Maximum Air Flow
Rate specified above. The volume flow rate is converted to mass flow rate using the standard density
of air at Pressure = 101325 Pa, Temperature = 20C, and Humidity Ratio = 0.0.

1.29.13.1.9 Field: Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode

This field specifies how the outdoor air ventilation rates are calculated when based on a rate per
person. It can be either based on the current number of people as affected by time-varying oc-
cupancy schedules, or on the constant value for the maximum number of people. Enter the key
CurrentOccupancy for the former and DesignOccupancy for the later.
An IDF examples for InletSide and SupplySide connection type:

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer ,
SPACE2 -1 DOAS Air Terminal , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Type
SPACE2 -1 Fan Coil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Name
SPACE2 -1 Fan Coil Inlet , !- Mixer Outlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 ATM Primary Inlet , !- Mixer Primary Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE2 -1 ATM Secondary Inlet ,!- Mixer Secondary Air Inlet Node Name
InletSide; !- Mixer Connection Type

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer ,
SPACE1 -1 DOAS Air Terminal , !- Name
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Type
SPACE1 -1 Fan Coil , !- ZoneHVAC Unit Object Name
SPACE1 -1 Supply Inlet , !- Mixer Outlet Node Name
SPACE1 -1 ATM Primary Inlet , !- Mixer Primary Air Inlet Node Name
SPACE1 -1 Fan Coil Outlet , !- Mixer Secondary Air Inlet Node Name
SupplySide; !- Mixer Connection Type

1.29.14 AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume
The AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume simulation or the typical Multizone is described by
this Air Distribution Unit (ADU). Multizone systems condition all the air in a central apparatus
and distribute it to the conditioned zones through two parallel ducts. One duct carries cold air
and the other warm air, providing air sources for both heating and cooling at all times. In each
conditioned zone, a mixing valve responsive to a room thermostat mixes the warm and cold air in
proper proportions to satisfy the prevailing heating or cooling load of the space. The Multizone ADU
is the specific component that leads to the zone containing the mixer and the mixing damper and
then connecting to the zone. The total airflow to each room is kept constant while the proportion
of hot air to cold air is adjusted to maintain the temperature in each zone at the desired level.

1.29.14.1 Inputs

1.29.14.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name for the Multizone ADU.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1303

1.29.14.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Schedule that this component will operate or is available to operate for a given time period. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the
time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.14.1.3 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The outlet node from the ADU to the zone.

1.29.14.1.4 Field: Hot Air Inlet Node Name

The air-inlet node name that connects the hot air splitter to the individual zone ADU.

1.29.14.1.5 Field: Cold Air Inlet Node Name

The air-inlet node name that connects the cold air splitter to the individual zone ADU.

1.29.14.1.6 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

The design constant volume flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for that Multizone ADU.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:DualDuct:ConstantVolume ,
Zone2MixDamp , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
Zone 2 Dual Duct Outlet , !- Unit Air Outlet Node
Zone 2 Dual Duct Hot Inlet , !- Unit Hot Air Inlet Node
Zone 2 Dual Duct Cold Inlet , !- Unit Cold Air Inlet Node
0.36; !- Max Air Flow Rate {m3/s}

1.29.14.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Cold Supply Duct Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Hot Supply Duct Damper Position []

1.29.14.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Cold Supply Duct Damper Position

This output is the damper position of the cold air stream in a dual duct air terminal. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal
unit cold air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum cold air mass flow rate. This
output is dimensionless and ranges from 0.0 to 1.0.

1.29.14.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Hot Supply Duct Damper Position

This output is the damper position of the hot air stream in a dual duct air terminal. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal
unit hot air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum hot air mass flow rate. This
output is dimensionless and ranges from 0.0 to 1.0.
1304 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.29.15 AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV (i.e., Dual duct variable air volume (DDVAV)) systems are used to
obtain zone temperature control by mixing the cold and warm air in various volume combinations.
The fan is sized for the anticipated maximum coincident hot or cold volume, not the sum of the
instantaneous peaks. This system has an advantage of a true single path VAV system, except for
warm port leakage. When cold air is modulated for control before mixing, it operates similar to the
VAV induction when mixing occurs without hot deck reheat. It is similar to a reheat system when
mixing occurs while the hot deck is using the reheat coil. It uses more energy than a true VAV
system, but less than a constant volume dual duct system.
The zone minimum supply air flow can be further adjusted using scheduled fraction values specified
in the field Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name.

1.29.15.1 Inputs

1.29.15.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name for the AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.15.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Schedule that this component will operate or is available to operate for a given time period. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the
time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.15.1.3 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The outlet node from the ADU to the zone.

1.29.15.1.4 Field: Hot Air Inlet Node Name

The air-inlet node name that connects the hot air splitter to the individual zone ADU.

1.29.15.1.5 Field: Cold Air Inlet Node Name

The air-inlet node name that connects the cold air splitter to the individual zone ADU.

1.29.15.1.6 Field: Maximum Damper Air Flow Rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (m3 /sec) specified for DDVAV ADU.

1.29.15.1.7 Field: Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the Max
Damper Air Flow Rate. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum
ventilation requirement for the occupants.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1305

1.29.15.1.8 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecifica-
tion:OutdoorAir:SpaceList object. When this field is used, the terminal unit will increase flow as
needed to meet this outdoor air requirement. If Outdoor Air Flow per Person is non-zero, then the
outdoor air requirement will be computed based on the current number of occupants in the zone.
At no time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum Air Flow Rate. If this field
is blank, then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow. See documentation for
the zone HVAC outdoor air object for further information (Ref DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir).

1.29.15.1.9 Field: Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

This field adjusts Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction by multiplying it using this schedule. Schedule
values are fractions, 0.0 to 1.0. This field adjusts the minimum airflow turndown value below the zone
design minimum air flow and is intended for use with ASHRAE Standard 170. This field can also be
used to adjust the design minimum air flow sizing calculation by applying a desired fraction values
to summer and winter design days turndown schedule. If this field is left blank, then the turndown
minimum air flow fraction value is set to 1 and the VAV air terminal uses the fixed fraction specified
in in the field Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction.
An IDF example:

AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV ,
Zone1MixDamp , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Dual Duct Outlet , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Zone 1 Dual Duct Hot Inlet , !- Hot Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Dual Duct Cold Inlet , !- Cold Air Inlet Node Name
autosize , !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.1, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
ZoneMinOARequirements , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
TurndownMinAirFlowSch ; !- Minimum Air Flow Turndown Schedule Name

! Outdoor air specification should be consistent with Sizing:Zone object inputs.

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
ZoneMinOARequirements , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.00944 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s}
0.000508 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone
, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
Min OARequirements Sched; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
Min OARequirements Sched , !- Name
Any Number , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: AllOtherDays , !- Field 9
Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 10

Schedule:Compact ,
TurndownMinAirFlowSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: Weekdays , !- Field 2
Until: 7:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 3
Until: 17:00 ,0.75 , !- Field 4
Until: 24:00 ,0.50 , !- Field 5
For: SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay , !- Field 6
Until: 24:00 ,1.0 , !- Field 7
For: Weekends Holidays CustomDay1 CustomDay2 , !- Field 8
1306 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Until: 24:00 ,0.25; !- Field 9

1.29.15.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Cold Supply Duct Damper Position []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Hot Supply Duct Damper Position []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.29.15.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Cold Supply Duct Damper Position []

This output is the damper position of the cold air stream in a dual duct air terminal. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal
unit cold air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum cold air mass flow rate.

1.29.15.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Hot Supply Duct Damper Position []

This output is the damper position of the hot air stream in a dual duct air terminal. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal
unit hot air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum hot air mass flow rate.

1.29.15.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
This output is the amount of outdoor air entering the zone. This is the average value over the
frequency being reported. The amount of outdoor air is defined as the terminal unit air volume flow
rate multiplied by the fraction of outdoor air entering the air loop’s outdoor air system.

1.29.16 AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir
AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir provides a model for a type of dual duct air system in which
one duct provides outdoor air ventilation and the other provides VAV cooling. The Outdoor Air
stream and the Recirculated Air stream are conditioned and supplied through separate air streams as
part of a centralized dedicated outdoor air (DOAS) distribution system. The dual duct arrangement
allows the ventilation air to be controlled separately using schedules or occupancy demand while the
recirculated air is controlled to meet the dry-bulb zone temperature setpoint. The two airstreams
remain decoupled until the terminal box where they are mixed. The terminal unit is meant for
systems regulating outdoor air based only on demand control or code minimum settings and not on
economizer operation.
This air terminal does not have heating coils and is not configured for conditions zones that need
heat. Additional ZoneHVAC equipment, such as baseboards or fan coil units, are needed to provide
heating to the zone when using this air terminal.
Although this air terminal is primarily for dual duct system, it is allowed to use just the outdoor air
side in a single duct system. This can be useful for modeling single duct DOAS when the required
volume of outdoor air varies over time.
1.29. GROUP – ZONE HVAC AIR LOOP TERMINAL UNITS 1307

1.29.16.1 Inputs

1.29.16.1.1 Field: Name

Unique name for the AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir Air Distribution Unit (ADU).

1.29.16.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

Schedule that this component will operate or is available to operate for a given time period. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can be on during the
time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the component must be
off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.29.16.1.3 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The outlet node of the terminal unit. This is the node leaving the unit and serving as the inlet to
the zone. It is for the mixed flow leaving from both of the inlet node.

1.29.16.1.4 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

The inlet node of the Outdoor Air (OA) stream deck of the Dual Duct system.

1.29.16.1.5 Field: Recirculated Air Inlet Node Name

The inlet node of the Recirculated Air (RA) stream deck of the Dual Duct system. This input is
optional. If no node name is entered here, then the recirculation duct is disabled and the model
functions as a single duct terminal and no second cooling deck is needed.

1.29.16.1.6 Field: Maximum Zone Total Airflow Rate

Max total airflow rate (in m3/s) at the terminal unit outlet including both the Outdoor Air stream
and the Recirculated stream. Can be autosized based on the Design Outdoor Airflow Rate and the
zone thermal cooling load. The autosized flow rate will be the sum of the maximum outdoor air
requirement and the flow for cooling. When autosizing, this maximum and the individual inlet flow
rate sizes are reported to the eio file.

1.29.16.1.7 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir or DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir:SpaceList
object. This field is required for this object. The terminal unit will modulate the Outdoor Air
stream to meet this outdoor air requirement. If Outdoor Air Flow per Person is applied, then the
outdoor air required will be based on either the current number of occupants in the zone, as for
demand controlled ventilation, or the design level of occupants depending on the setting in the next
field.

1.29.16.1.8 Field: Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode

This field specifies how the outdoor air ventilation rates are calculated when based on a rate per
person. It can be either based on the current number of people as affected by time-varying oc-
cupancy schedules, or on the constant value for the maximum number of people. Enter the key
CurrentOccupancy for the former and DesignOccupancy for the later.
An example input object follows.
1308 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

AirTerminal:DualDuct:VAV:OutdoorAir ,
Media_Center Dual Duct Box Component , !- Name
ALWAYS_ON , !- Availability Schedule Name
Media_Center Dual Duct Box Outlet Node Name , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Media_Center Dual Duct Box Inlet Node Name , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
RC Media_Center Dual Duct Box Inlet Node Name , !- Recirculated Air Inlet Node Name
AUTOSIZE , !- Maximum Terminal Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Media_Center Dual Duct Box OA Design Spec , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object
Name
CurrentOccupancy; !- Per Person Ventilation Rate Mode

DesignSpecification :OutdoorAir ,
Media_Center Dual Duct Box OA Design Spec , !- Name
Sum , !- Outdoor Air Method
0.004719 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Person {m3/s-person}
0.00061 , !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
0.0, !- Outdoor Air Flow per Zone {m3/s}
0.0, !- Outdoor Air Flow Air Changes per Hour
MinOA_Sched; !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate Fraction Schedule Name

1.29.16.2 Outputs

– Output:Variable,*,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Duct Damper Position,hourly; !- HVAC

Average []
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Air Terminal Recirculated Air Duct Damper Position,hourly; !- HVAC
Average []
– Output:Variable,*,Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Fraction,hourly; !- HVAC Average []

1.29.16.2.1 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Duct Damper Position []

This output is the damper position of the outdoor air stream in a dual duct air terminal. This is the
average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the terminal unit
outdoor air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum outdoor air mass flow rate. This
output is dimensionless and ranges from 0.0 to 1.0.

1.29.16.2.2 Zone Air Terminal Recirculated Air Duct Damper Position []

This output is the damper position of the recirculated cool air stream in a dual duct air terminal.
This is the average value over the frequency being reported. The damper position is defined as the
terminal unit cool air mass flow rate divided by the terminal unit’s maximum cool air mass flow
rate. This output is dimensionless and ranges from 0.0 to 1.0.

1.29.16.2.3 Zone Air Terminal Outdoor Air Fraction []

This output is the current fraction of outdoor air contained in the combined flow of air entering
the zone from the terminal unit. This is the average value over the frequency being reported. The
outdoor air fraction is defined as the terminal unit outdoor air mass flow rate divided by the total
air mass flow rate. This output is dimensionless and ranges from 0.0 to 1.0.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1309

1.30 Group – Zone Forced Air Units

1.30.0.0.1 Schedules And Availability Manager Regarding component schedules, the
general rule is don’t schedule any components except the supply fan and the corresponding avail-
ability manager(s). Beyond that, every component should always be available and let the controls
determine what runs or doesn’t run. If a component other than the supply fan is scheduled off, then
it will remain off even if the night cycle manager turns on the system.

1.30.1 ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
The simplest piece of zone equipment is the ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem component. Zone-
HVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem is used in situations where the user wishes to study the performance
of a building without modeling a full HVAC system. In such a case, the Ideal Loads Air System is
usually the sole conditioning component: the user does not need to specify air loops, water loops,
etc. All that is needed for the ideal system are zone controls, zone equipment configurations, and
the ideal loads system component. The use of a return plenum is optional and will require use of
the AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum object.
This component can be operated with infinite or finite heating and cooling capacity. For either mode
– infinite or limited capacity – the user can also specify on/off schedules for heating and cooling
and outdoor air controls. There are also optional controls for dehumidification, humidification,
economizer, and heat recovery. This component may be used in combination with other HVAC
equipment serving the same zone.
This component can be thought of as an ideal unit that mixes air at the zone exhaust condition (or
plenum outlet condition when a plenum is attached) with the specified amount of outdoor air and
then adds or removes heat and moisture at 100% efficiency in order to produce a supply air stream
at the specified conditions. The energy required to condition the supply air is metered and reported
as DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling.
Notes: The ideal loads system uses the zone return node or an optional zone exhaust node to extract
air from the zone. When the AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum is used the inlet of the ideal loads system
is connected to the plenum outlet air node while the outlet of the ideal loads system is connected to
a zone inlet node. The node name connected between the zone exhaust air node and plenum inlet
air node must match in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections and AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum
objects. Every zone served by an HVAC component must have a return air node, even though this
node may not be connected to anything. If more than one ideals loads air systems are connected to
the same AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum then one of the ideal loads air systems will connect to the
ZoneHVAC:ReturnPlenum outlet air node and the remaining ideal loads air systems connected to
the same return plenum will connect to the ZoneHVAC:ReturnPlenum induced air outlet nodes.
The ideal loads system was significantly expanded in version 7.0 (October 2011). As part of this
upgrade, any change in the moisture content of the supply air stream results in a latent cooling
(dehumidification) or latent heating (humidification) load which is metered as DistrictCooling and
DistrictHeating energy consumption. Prior to version 7.0, when the ideal loads system was in heat-
ing mode, only the energy for sensible heating was metered. This results in significant changes in
reported energy use compared to earlier versions, especially when using the ConstantSupplyHu-
midityRatio option for Humidification Control Type.
Older idf files which are transitioned to version 7.0 will automatically be set to use the ConstantSup-
plyHumidityRatio option for both dehumidification and humidification controls, because this is
1310 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

equivalent to the controls used in the older version of this system. However, the user should review
all of the humidity control options and select the one which best reflects the goal of the simulation.

1.30.1.1 Inputs

1.30.1.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for each ideal loads air system component. This name is referenced
in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object.

1.30.1.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether or not this
component is available to operate during a given time period. If the schedule value is greater than
zero then the system is available to operate; otherwise, the system is unavailable for that time period.
If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.30.1.1.3 Field: Zone Supply Air Node Name

The name of the outlet air node of the ideal loads object. This should be the same as one of the
zone air inlet nodes for the zone the ideal loads component is serving.

1.30.1.1.4 Field: Zone Exhaust Air Node Name

The name of the zone exhaust air node of the ideal loads object. This should be the same as one
of the zone air exhaust nodes for the zone this component is serving. This node name is required if
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem is used in a zone which also has other forced air HVAC equipment.
Otherwise this node name is optional but recommended.

1.30.1.1.5 Field: System Inlet Air Node Name

The optional name of the return plenum outlet node (or induced air outlet node) connected to the
ideal loads object. When a return plenum is used, the previous fields for Zone Supply Air Node
Name and Zone Exhaust Air Node Name are also required. When an AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum
is connected to the Ideal Loads Air System the Zone Supply Air Node Name must match a zone air
inlet node name and the Zone Exhaust Air Node Name must match a zone air exhaust node (see
ZoneHAVC:EquipmentConnections object). The Zone Exhaust Air Node Name must also match an
AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum inlet node name. In the AirloopHVAC:ReturnPlenum object, when
more than one ideal loads air systems are connected to the same return plenum, the System Inlet
Air Node Name for one of the ideal loads air systems must match the return plenum Outlet Node
Name while all remaining ideal loads air systems, if more than one are connected, would enter the
System Inlet Air Node Name in the return plenum Induced Air Outlet Node or NodeList Name field
(see Engineering Reference for schematic).

1.30.1.1.6 Field: Maximum Heating Supply Air Temperature

The maximum air temperature (◦C) of the air used for heating the zone. The default is 50◦C (122F).

1.30.1.1.7 Field: Minimum Cooling Supply Air Temperature

The minimum air temperature (◦C) of the air used for cooling the zone. The default is 13◦C (55.4F).
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1311

1.30.1.1.8 Field: Maximum Heating Supply Air Humidity Ratio

The maximum humidity ratio (kg of water per kg of dry air) of the hot supply air. The default is
0.0156 kgWater/kgDryAir which corresponds to a 20%RH at 50◦C (122F) dry bulb.

1.30.1.1.9 Field: Minimum Cooling Supply Air Humidity Ratio

The minimum humidity ratio (kg of water per kg of dry air) of the cool supply air. The default is
0.0077 kgWater/kgDryAir which corresponds to a 10◦C (50F) dew point.

1.30.1.1.10 Field: Heating Limit

The input must be either LimitFlowRate, LimitCapacity, LimitFlowRateAndCapacity or
NoLimit. LimitFlowRate means that the heating supply air flow rate will be limited to the value
specified in the next input field. LimitCapacity means that the sensible heating capacity will be
limited to the value specified in the Maximum Sensible Heating Capacity field. LimitFlowRate-
AndCapacity means that both flow rate and capacity will be limited. NoLimit (the default) means
that there will not be any limit on the heating supply air flow rate or capacity and the subsequent
two fields will be ignored.

1.30.1.1.11 Field: Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate

The maximum heating supply air flow rate in cubic meters per second if heating limit is set to
LimitFlowRate or LimitFlowRateAndCapacity . This field may be autosized. This field is
ignored if heating limit is set to NoLimit or LimitCapacity. If blank, there is no limit.

1.30.1.1.12 Field: Maximum Sensible Heating Capacity

The maximum allowed sensible heating capacity in Watts if Heating Limit is set to LimitCapacity
or LimitFlowRateAndCapacity. This field may be autosized. If blank, there is no limit. If
Heating Limit is set to NoLimit or LimitFlowRate, this field is ignored.

1.30.1.1.13 Field: Cooling Limit

The input must be either LimitFlowRate, LimitCapacity, LimitFlowRateAndCapacity or
NoLimit. LimitFlowrate means that the cooling supply air flow rate will be limited to the value
specified in the next input field. LimitCapacity means that the total cooling capacity will be limited
to the value specified in the Maximum Total Cooling Capacity field. LimitFlowRateAndCapacity
means that both flow rate and capacity will be limited. NoLimit (the default) means that there
will not be any limit on the cooling supply air flow rate or capacity and the subsequent two fields
will be ignored.

1.30.1.1.14 Field: Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate

The maximum cooling supply air flow rate in cubic meters per second if Cooling Limit is set to
LimitFlowRate or LimitFlowRateAndCapacity. This field may be autosized. This field is
ignored if cooling limit is set to NoLimit or LimitCapacity. If blank, there is no limit. If Cooling
Limit is set to NoLimit, this field is ignored. This field is required if Outdoor Air Control Type
is TemperatureEconomizer in order to establish an upper limit on outdoor air flow when the
economizer is active.
1312 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.1.1.15 Field: Maximum Total Cooling Capacity

The maximum allowed total (sensible plus latent) cooling capacity in Watts if Cooling Limit is set
to LimitCapacity or LimitFlowRateAndCapacity. This field may be autosized. If blank, there
is no limit. If Cooling Limit is set to NoLimit or LimitFlowRate, this field is ignored.

1.30.1.1.16 Field: Heating Availability Schedule Name

The name of a schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether heating is available. A schedule value
greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that heating and humidification are available. A value
less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that heating and humidification are not available.
If blank, heating and humidification are always available.

1.30.1.1.17 Field: Cooling Availability Schedule Name

The name of a schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether cooling is available. A schedule value
greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that cooling and dehumidification are available. A value
less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that cooling and dehumidification is not available.
If blank, cooling and dehumidification are always available.

1.30.1.1.18 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

Select from ConstantSensibleHeatRatio, Humidistat, None, or ConstantSupplyHumidi-
tyRatio. ConstantSensibleHeatRatio (the default) means that the ideal loads system will be
controlled to meet the sensible cooling load, and the latent cooling rate will be computed using a
constant sensible heat ratio (SHR) (see next field). Humidistat means that there is a ZoneCon-
trol:Humidistat for this zone and the ideal loads system will attempt to meet the humidistat request
(i.e. will dehumidify according to the Dehumidifying Relative Humidity Schedule in the ZoneCon-
trol:Humidistat object). None means that there is no dehumidification. ConstantSupplyHumid-
ityRatio means that during cooling the supply air will always be at the Minimum Cooling Supply
Humidity Ratio. For ConstantSensibleHeatRatio and Humidistat, if the mixed air humidity
ratio is less than the target humidity ratio, then the mixed air humidity ratio will be used. For all
options, the supply air humidity ratio will never be allowed to exceed saturation at the supply dry
bulb temperature.
The selected dehumidification control type is always applied when the unit is in cooling mode. If
the unit is in deadband mode (not actively heating the supply air) control type Humidistat will be
active. If the unit is in heating mode, control type Humidistat will be active if the Humidification
Control Type field below is set to Humidistat or None.
This allows the ideal loads system to heat and dehumidify at the same time.

1.30.1.1.19 Field: Cooling Sensible Heat Ratio

When the Dehumidification Control Type is set to ConstantSensibleHeatRatio the ideal loads
system will be controlled to meet the sensible cooling load, and the latent cooling rate will be
computed using the value of Cooling Sensible Heat Ratio (SHR), where SHR = Sensible Cooling
divided by Total Cooling (sensible plus latent). The default is 0.7. If Dehumidification Control Type
is set to something other than ConstantSensibleHeatRatio then this field will be ignored.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1313

1.30.1.1.20 Field: Humidification Control Type

Select from None, Humidistat, or ConstantSupplyHumidityRatio. None means that there
is no humidification. Humidistat means that there is a ZoneControl:Humidistat for this zone
and the ideal loads system will attempt to meet the humidistat request (i.e., humidify according
to the Humidifying Relative Humidity Setpoint Schedule in the ZoneControl:Humidistat object).
ConstantSupplyHumidityRatio means that during heating the supply air will always be at the
Maximum Heating Supply Humidity Ratio. The default is None. For Humidistat, if the mixed
air humidity ratio is greater than the target humidity ratio, then the mixed air humidity ratio will
be used. For all options, the supply air humidity ratio will never be allowed to exceed saturation at
the supply dry bulb temperature.
The selected humidification control type is always applied when the unit is in heating mode. If the
unit is in deadband mode (not actively heating the supply air) control type Humidistat will be
active. If the unit is in cooling mode, control type Humidistat will be active if the Dehumidification
Control Type field above is set to Humidistat or None.
This allows the ideal loads system to cool and humidify at the same time.

1.30.1.1.21 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name

This alpha field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object which specifies the
outdoor air requirements and schedule for this system. The outdoor air flow rate may also be affected
by the next two fields, Demand Controlled Ventilation Type and Outdoor Air Economizer Type. If
this field is blank, this system will have no outdoor air, and all outdoor air control and heat recovery
options will be ignored..

1.30.1.1.22 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field specifies the node name of the outdoor air inlet node. This node name is also
specified in an OutdoorAir:Node or OutdoorAir:NodeList object. If this field is blank, a node name
will be created internally.

1.30.1.1.23 Field: Demand Controlled Ventilation Type

This field, along with the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object (if used) specifies how the
minimum outdoor air flow rate is calculated. The choices are: None, OccupancySchedule or
CO2Setpoint. The default is None.

– None means that the design occupancy level will be used when computing the minimum
outdoor air flow rate based on the inputs in the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object (see
previous field).
– OccupancySchedule means that the current occupancy level will be used when computing
the minimum outdoor air flow rate based on the inputs in the Design Specification Outdoor
Air Object (see previous field).
– CO2Setpoint means that the design occupancy level will be used when computing the mini-
mum outdoor air flow rate based on the inputs in the Design Specification Outdoor Air Object
(see previous field). In addition, the minimum outdoor air flow rate may be increased if nec-
essary to maintain the level of indoor air carbon dioxide at or below the setpoint defined in a
ZoneControl:ContaminantController object.
1314 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.1.1.24 Field: Outdoor Air Economizer Type

This field specifies if there is an outdoor air economizer. The choices are: NoEconomizer, Differ-
entialDryBulb, or DifferentialEnthalpy. The default is NoEconomizer. DifferentialDry-
Bulb and DifferentialEnthalpy mean that the economizer will increase the outdoor air flow rate
above the minimum outdoor air flow (see fields Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name and
Demand Controlled Ventilation Type) when there is a cooling load and the outdoor air temperature
or enthalpy is below the zone exhaust air temperature or enthalpy. The DifferentialDryBulb
and DifferentialEnthalpy options require that the Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate be specified
which will be used as the limit for maximum outdoor air flow rate.

1.30.1.1.25 Field: Heat Recovery Type

Select from None, Sensible, or Enthalpy. None means that there is no heat recovery. Sensi-
ble means that there is sensible heat recovery whenever the zone exhaust air temperature is more
favorable than the outdoor air temperature. Enthalpy means that there is latent and sensible heat
recovery whenever the zone exhaust air enthalpy is more favorable than the outdoor air enthalpy.
The default is None.

1.30.1.1.26 Field: Sensible Heat Recovery Effectiveness

The sensible heat recovery effectiveness, where effectiveness is defined as the change in supply tem-
perature divided by the difference in entering supply and relief air temperatures. The default is
0.70.

1.30.1.1.27 Field: Latent Heat Recovery Effectiveness

The latent heat recovery effectiveness, where effectiveness is defined as the change in supply humidity
ratio divided by the difference in entering supply and relief air humidity ratios. The default is 0.65.

1.30.1.1.28 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate and Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate in a Ideal Load Air System
zone HVAC object. The scaled maximum heating and cooling air flow rates are used to size the
heating and cooling capacities.
An example of this object in an IDF is:

ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem ,
Zone1 Ideal Loads System , !- Name
AlwaysOn , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone1 Ideal Loads Supply Node , !- Zone Supply Air Node Name
Zone1 Ideal Loads Return Node , ! Zone Exhaust Air Node Name
50, !- Maximum Heating Supply Air Temperature {C}
13, !- Minimum Cooling Supply Air Temperature {C}
0.0156 , !- Maximum Heating Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
0.0077 , !- Minimum Cooling Supply Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
NoLimit , !- Heating Limit
, !- Maximum Heating Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Maximum Sensible Heating Capacity {W}
NoLimit , !- Cooling Limit
, !- Maximum Cooling Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Maximum Total Cooling Capacity {W}
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1315

, !- Heating Availability Schedule Name

, !- Cooling Availability Schedule Name
ConstantSensibleHeatRatio , !- Dehumidification Control Type
0.7, !- Cooling Sensible Heat Ratio
None , !- Humidification Control Type
Office OA Specification , !- Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name
Zone1 Ideal Loads OA Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
None , !- Demand Controlled Ventilation Type
NoEconomizer , !- Outdoor Air Economizer Type
Enthalpy , !- Heat Recovery Type
0.70, !- Sensible Heat Recovery Effectiveness
0.65; !- Latent Heat Recovery Effectiveness

1.30.1.2 Outputs

The Ideal Loads air system outdoor air load variables are only calculated when there is active heating
or cooling (or humidification/dehumidification).

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
1316 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Economizer Active Time [hr]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Active Time [hr]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Hybrid Ventilation Available Status []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Temperature [◦C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Mixed Air Temperature [◦C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ideal Loads Mixed Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1317

1.30.1.2.1 Ideal Loads Output Variable Overview

All of the ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem loads and energy use are reported for Sensible Heating,
Latent Heating, Total Heating, Sensible Cooling, Latent Cooling, and Total Cooling. To explain the
relationship between the various outputs, Total Cooling Energy will be used. Note that the outdoor
air load variables are only calculated when there is active heating or cooling (or humidification/de-
humidification).
Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Energy is the district cooling energy consumed by the
ideal loads system “cooling coil” to cool and dehumidify the supply air.
Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Energy is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling energy delivered
to the zone. If there is no outdoor air, then Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Energy =
Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Energy.
Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Energy is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling energy
required to cool the outdoor air to the zone exhaust air temperature and humidity ratio.
Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Energy is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling energy
supplied by heat recovery. This offsets a portion of the Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling
Energy.
When the economizer is not active, these values are related by the following equation:
Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Energy + Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling
Energy = Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Energy+ Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling
Energy

1.30.1.2.2 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.3 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
The sensible heating energy (or rate) added to raise the temperature of the mixed air stream to the
temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “heating coil” load.

1.30.1.2.4 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.5 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Heating Rate [W]
The latent heating energy (or rate) added to raise the humidity ratio of the mixed air stream to the
temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “humidifier” load.

1.30.1.2.6 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.7 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) added to raise the mixed air stream to the
temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream. Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Heating
Energy is metered as DistrictHeating energy.

1.30.1.2.8 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1318 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.1.2.9 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
The sensible cooling energy (or rate) removed to lower the temperature of the mixed air stream to
the temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “cooling coil” sensible load.

1.30.1.2.10 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.11 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Latent Cooling Rate [W]
The latent cooling energy (or rate) removed to lower the humidity ratio of the mixed air stream to
the temperature of the supply air stream. This is the ideal “cooling coil” latent load.

1.30.1.2.12 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.13 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total Cooling Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) removed to lower the mixed air stream to
the temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream. Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Total
Cooling Energy is metered as DistrictCooling energy. This is the ideal “cooling coil” total load.

1.30.1.2.14 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.15 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]

The sensible heating energy (or rate) added to the zone.

1.30.1.2.16 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.17 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Heating Rate [W]

The latent heating energy (or rate) added to the zone.

1.30.1.2.18 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.19 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Heating Rate [W]

The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) added to the zone.

1.30.1.2.20 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.21 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

The sensible cooling energy (or rate) removed from the zone.

1.30.1.2.22 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.23 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Latent Cooling Rate [W]

The latent cooling energy (or rate) removed from the zone.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1319

1.30.1.2.24 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.25 Zone Ideal Loads Zone Total Cooling Rate [W]

The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) removed from the zone.

1.30.1.2.26 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.27 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
The sensible heating energy (or rate) required to raise the temperature of the outdoor air to the
zone exhaust air temperature. This value will be calculated only when heating is active.

1.30.1.2.28 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.29 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Heating Rate [W]
The latent heating energy (or rate) required to raise the humidity ratio of the outdoor air to the
zone exhaust air humidity ratio. This value will be calculated only when humidification is active.

1.30.1.2.30 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.31 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Heating Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) required to raise the temperature and hu-
midity ratio of the outdoor air to the zone exhaust air humidity ratio. This value will be calculated
only when heating or humidification is active.

1.30.1.2.32 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.33 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
The sensible cooling energy (or rate) required to lower (or raise) the temperature of the outdoor air
to the zone exhaust air temperature. This value will be calculated only when cooling is active.

1.30.1.2.34 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.35 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Latent Cooling Rate [W]
The latent cooling energy (or rate) required to lower (or raise) the humidity ratio of the outdoor air
to the zone exhaust air humidity ratio. This will be calculated only when dehumidification is active.

1.30.1.2.36 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.37 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Total Cooling Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) required to lower the temperature and
humidity ratio of the outdoor air to the zone exhaust air temperature and humidity ratio. This
value will be calculated only when cooling or dehumidification is active.
1320 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.1.2.38 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.39 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Heating Rate [W]
The sensible heating energy (or rate) added to the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.

1.30.1.2.40 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.41 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Heating Rate [W]
The latent heating energy (or rate) added to the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.

1.30.1.2.42 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Heating Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.43 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Heating Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) heating energy (or rate) added to the outdoor air stream from heat
recovery.

1.30.1.2.44 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.45 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
The sensible cooling energy (or rate) removed from the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.

1.30.1.2.46 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.47 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Latent Cooling Rate [W]
The latent cooling energy (or rate) removed from the outdoor air stream from heat recovery.

1.30.1.2.48 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.1.2.49 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Total Cooling Rate [W]
The total (sensible and latent) cooling energy (or rate) removed from the outdoor air stream from
heat recovery.

1.30.1.2.50 Zone Ideal Loads Economizer Active Time [hr]

Hours when the Ideal Loads economizer increased the outdoor air flow rate above the minimum.

1.30.1.2.51 Zone Ideal Loads Heat Recovery Active Time [hr]

Hours when the Ideal Loads heat recovery was actively heating or cooling the outdoor air stream.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1321

1.30.1.2.52 Zone Ideal Loads Hybrid Ventilation Available Status []

This is the availability status of the ideal loads object as set by the hybrid ventilation manager.
Rules to determine the availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability
Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 and 1. These integers
represent NoAction (0) and ForceOff (1). When the availability status is ForceOff, the unit is turned
off regardless of its availability schedule. The other status flag i.e. NoAction does not control the
unit and the controls of the unit turn it back on. Since the status output is averaged, the output
result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies other than
detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the
availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.1.2.53 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The mass flow rate of the outdoor air stream in kg/s.

1.30.1.2.54 Zone Ideal Loads Outdoor Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
The volume flow rate of the outdoor air stream in m3/s using the standard density. The standard
density is determined for dry air at the standard barometric pressure for the location’s elevation and
a temperature of 20.0◦C. The standard density does not vary over time.

1.30.1.2.55 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
The mass flow rate of the supply air stream in kg/s.

1.30.1.2.56 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate
[m3/s]
The volume flow rate of the supply air stream in m3/s using the standard density. The standard
density is determined for dry air at the standard barometric pressure for the location’s elevation and
a temperature of 20.0◦C. The standard density does not vary over time.

1.30.1.2.57 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Temperature [◦C]

The dry bulb temperature of the supply air stream in ◦C.

1.30.1.2.58 Zone Ideal Loads Supply Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The humidity ratio of the supply air stream in kgWater/kgDryAir.

1.30.1.2.59 Zone Ideal Loads Mixed Air Temperature [◦C]

The dry bulb temperature of the mixed air stream after mixing the recirculation air stream and
outdoor air stream (if present), in ◦C.

1.30.1.2.60 Zone Ideal Loads Mixed Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]

The humidity ratio of the mixed air stream after mixing the recirculation air stream and outdoor
air stream (if present) in kgWater/kgDryAir.
1322 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.2 ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
What is a fan coil unit? Like many HVAC terms, “fan coil unit” is used rather loosely. Sometimes
it is used for terminal units that would be better described as powered induction units. Carrier and
others use the term for the room side of refrigerant-based split systems. Here we are modeling in-room
forced-convection hydronic units. The hydronic heating coil may be replaced with an electric heating
coil. Typically these units are small (200 – 1200 cfm) and self-contained. They are mostly used in
exterior zones, usually in hotels, apartments, or offices. They may be connected to ducted outside
air, or have a direct outside air vent, but they do not have outside air economizers. Units with outside
air economizers are marketed (in the United States) as unit ventilators. Unit ventilators are typically
bigger than fan coils and are widely used in classrooms or other applications where ventilation is a
priority. If a zonal unit with an outside economizer is desired, ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator should be
used.
The heating or cooling output of the fan coil unit is controlled by varying the air flow rate, the
water flow rate, or both. Air flow rate can be controlled by cycling the fan on/off or with a variable
speed fan drive. The most common setup is a two or three speed fan with the speed selected by
hand. The fan then cycles on/off to control heating / cooling output. The controls are often a wall
mounted thermostat with hand selection of heating/cooling and fan speed (off/low/medium/high).
These controls may also be mounted on the unit.
Carrier offers a retrofit VSD motor for fan coil units. It claims up to 45% energy savings from such
a retrofit, as well as increased comfort and less noise compared to a cycling fan (fan coil fans are
typically noisy and inefficient). Some other manufacturers are also offering units with VSD fans.
Variable speed fans appear to offer an easy way to significantly increase the efficiency of what have
typically been very inefficient units.
EnergyPlus provides 6 capacity control methods for this unit:

1. multi-speed cycling fan with constant water flow rate

2. constant speed continuous fan with variable water flow rate
3. variable-speed fan with constant water flow rate
4. variable-speed fan with variable water flow rate
5. multi-speed fan with cycling between speeds and constant water flow.
6. fan speed control based on ASHRAE 90.1

In EnergyPlus the fan coil units are modeled as compound components. That is, they are assembled
from other components. Fan coils contain an outdoor air mixer, a fan, a heating coil and a cooling
coil. These components are described elsewhere in this document. The fan coil input simply requires
the names of these four components, which have to be described elsewhere in the input. The input
also requires the name of an availability schedule, maximum airflow rate, outdoor airflow rate, and
maximum and minimum hot (for hydronic heating coil only) and cold water volumetric flow rates.
The unit is connected to the zone inlet and exhaust nodes and the outdoor air by specifying unit
inlet, and outlet air node names and the outdoor air mixer object name. The outdoor air mixer
child object provides the outdoor air and relief air nodes names. Note that the unit air inlet node
should be the same as a zone exhaust node and the unit outlet node should be the same as a zone
inlet node. The fan coil unit is connected to a hot water loop through its hot water coil or with no
hot water loop when using an electric coil (demand side) and to a chilled water loop (demand side)
through its cooling coil.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1323

Note that the type of fan component associated with the fan coil unit depends on the type of capacity
control method chosen. For ConstantFanVariableFlow a Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume should
be used. For CyclingFan, a Fan:OnOff should be used, for VariableFanVariableFlow or Variable-
FanConstantFlow a Fan:VariableVolume, for MultiSpeedFan a Fan:OnOff should be used, and for
ASHRAE90VariableFan, a Fan:OnOff or Fan:VariableVolume should be chosen.
Fan coil units can be 4-pipe or 2-pipe. For 4-pipe units there are 2 supply pipes and 2 return pipes.
For 2-pipe units there is a single supply pipe and a single return pipe and the supply is switched
between hot and chilled water depending on the season. EnergyPlus models 4-pipe units, but the
4-pipe model can be used to model 2-pipe units by using the coil availability schedules to make sure
that either hot or chilled water is exclusively available. Fan coil units with hydronic heat can instead
be modeled using an electric heating coil if desired (i.e., replace the hydronic heating coil with an
electric heating coil).

1.30.2.1 Inputs

1.30.2.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a Fan Coil unit. Any reference to this Fan Coil unit
by another object will use this name.

1.30.2.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the fan coil unit can run during a
given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component
can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that
the component must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for
all time periods.

1.30.2.1.3 Field: Capacity Control Method

This input denotes how the unit’s output is controlled in order to meet zone heating or cooling
requirement. The choices are ConstantFanVariableFlow, CyclingFan, VariableFanVariable-
Flow, VariableFanConstantFlow, MultiSpeedFan, or ASHRAE90VariableFan. For Con-
stantFanVariableFlow, the fan speed is held constant to produce a fixed air flow rate whenever the
unit is scheduled on. The hot water or chilled flow rate is varied so that the unit output matches
the zone heating or cooling requirement. For CyclingFan, the fan speed is chosen so that the unit
capacity is greater than or equal to the heating / cooling load and the fan is cycled to match unit
output with the load. For VariableFanVariableFlow both air and water flow rates are varied to
match the load. For VariableFanConstantFlow, the water flow rate is at full flow and the fan speed
varies to meet the load. For MultiSpeedFan the water flow rate is at full flow when there is load or
fully closed when there is no load and the supply air flow rate is varied by varying the fan speed in
order to match the load. For ASHRAE90VariableFan, the fan air flow rate is reduced according to
the low speed supply air flow ratio when the zone sensible load is less than the zone sensible load
multiplied by the low speed supply air flow ratio. The water coil water flow rate, or the electric
heating coil part-load ratio, is modulated to meet the zone load. If the zone sensible load is greater
than the zone sensible load multiplied by the low speed supply air flow ratio, then the air and water
flow rate is increased to meet the load. If the zone load is greater than the design sensible load, the
fan air flow rate is maintained at the maximum value while the water flow rate is further increased
to the maximum available while electric heating coils are maintained at the maximum output.
1324 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Note: when ASHRAE90VariableFan is selected, if the the Minimum Supply Air Tem-
perature in Cooling/Heating Mode inputs are not specified, the simulation must include
zone sizing to calculate the zone design sensible cooling and heating load used to modu-
late the fan speed and, for water coils, the water flow rate or for electric heating coils,
the part load ratio.
MultiSpeedFan: for a given load, the fan cycles between speeds when fan speed selected is higher
than the minimum speed or the fan cycles on-off when the fan speed selected is the minimum and
the fan operating schedule is cycling fan. When the fan is operating as a continuous fan, then the fan
runs at minimum speed even when there is no load to meet. When the speed selected is higher than
the minimum speed, then the fan cycles between consecutive speed regardless of the fan operating
schedule type. The model selects at what fan speed to run depending on cooling or heating load.

1.30.2.1.4 Field: Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric airflow rate (m3 /sec) through the fan coil unit. This is also the design,
rated airflow rate of the unit.

1.30.2.1.5 Field: Low Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio

This numerical field specifies the ratio of the low speed flow rate to the maximum supply air flow rate.
This value should be less than the Medium Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio. If left blank, the default
value is 0.33. Leave this field blank if the capacity control method selected is not CyclingFan or
ASHRAE90VariableFan. The suggested value is 0.5 when using the ASHRAE90VariableFan capacity
control method.

1.30.2.1.6 Field: Medium Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio

This numerical field specifies the ratio of the medium speed flow rate to the maximum supply air
flow rate. Its value should be greater than the Low Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio but less than 1. If
left blank, the default value is 0.66. Leave this field blank if the capacity control method selected is
not CyclingFan or MultiSpeedFan.

1.30.2.1.7 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate

If the fan coil unit uses outdoor air, this field specifies the outdoor air volumetric flow rate (m3 /sec).
This flow rate should be less than or equal to the maximum airflow rate. A value of zero speci-
fies no outdoor air. This field is set to zero flow when the FanCoil is connected to an AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.2.1.8 Field: Outdoor Air Schedule Name

The name of a schedule whose values (0.0 to 1.0) are used as multipliers to alter the outdoor air flow
rate. If this field is left blank, the values will default to 1.0.

1.30.2.1.9 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node from which the fan coil unit draws its indoor air. This should
be either one of zone exhaust nodes (Ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections) for the zone which
the fan coil unit is serving or an induced air outlet node (Ref. AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum) to
draw air from a return plenum, when the zone return node is connected to a return plenum.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1325

1.30.2.1.10 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node to which the fan coil unit sends its outlet air. This should be
one of the inlet air nodes of the zone which is being served.

1.30.2.1.11 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This field specifies the type of outdoor air mixer used by this fan coil unit. The outdoor air mixer
component is part of the fan coil compound object. The only available outdoor air mixer type is:

– OutdoorAir:Mixer

This input field should be left blank when the FanCoil is connected to an AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not
simulated.

1.30.2.1.12 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

The name of an outdoor air mixer component (object:OutdoorAir:Mixer) which composes part of
the fan coil unit. Note that the return air node of the outdoor air mixer should be the same node
as the air inlet node of the fan coil unit. In addition, the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node should
be the same as the inlet air node of the fan coil unit’s fan. This field should be left blank when the
FanCoil is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.2.1.13 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This field specifies the type of supply air fan object used by this fan coil. The supply air fan is part
of the fan coil compound object. The only valid supply air fan types are:

– Fan:SystemModel
– Fan:OnOff
– Fan:ConstantVolume
– Fan:VariableVolume

Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.6 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, and Fan:VariableVolume may be deprecated in a future version.

1.30.2.1.14 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

The name of a fan component that composes part of the fan coil unit. Note that the fan’s maximum
flow rate should be the same as the maximum airflow rate of the fan coil unit and the type of fan
object should correspond to the capacity control method. Namely, for ConstantFanVariableFlow a
Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:ConstantVolume should be used. For CyclingFan, a Fan:OnOff
or Fan:SystemModel should be used. For VariableFanVariableFlow or VariableFanConstantFlow a
Fan:SystemModel or Fan:VariableVolume should be chosen. For MultiSpeedFan a Fan:SystemModel
or Fan:OnOff should be used. And for ASHRAE90VariableFan, a Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or
Fan:VariableVolume should be chosen.
The fan 's inlet node should be the same as the outdoor air mixer 's mixed air node.
The fan 's outlet node should be the same as the cooling coil 's air inlet node.
1326 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.2.1.15 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This field specifies the type of chilled water cooling coil to be modeled for this fan coil unit. Only
the following coil types can be used:

– Coil:Cooling:Water
– Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
– CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted

The input requirements for these chilled water coil objects are described elsewhere in this document.

1.30.2.1.16 Field: Cooling Coil Name

The name of the cooling coil component that composes part of the fan coil unit. The cooling coil
air inlet node should be the same as the fan outlet node. The cooling coil air outlet node should be
the same as the heating coil air inlet node.
Only the following coil types can be used:

– Coil:Cooling:Water
– Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
– CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted

1.30.2.1.17 Field: Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate

The maximum cold water volumetric flow rate (m3 /sec) through the fan coil unit’s cooling coil.

1.30.2.1.18 Field: Minimum Cold Water Flow Rate

The minimum cold water volumetric flow rate (m3 /sec) through the fan coil unit’s cooling coil.

1.30.2.1.19 Field: Cooling Convergence Tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the control of the unit cooling output. The unit is controlled by
matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be
numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error
tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:

|Qf ancoil,out − Qzoneload |

≤ CoolingConvergenceT olerance (1.128)
Qzoneload

1.30.2.1.20 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This field is the type of coil that is used for heating in the fan coil system. It is used in conjunction
with the heating coil name (see next field) to specify the heating coil present within the system. The
only allowable heating coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1327

1.30.2.1.21 Field: Heating Coil Name

The name of the heating coil component that composes part of the fan coil unit. The heating coil
air inlet node should be the same as the cooling coil outlet node. The heating coil air outlet node
should be the same as the fan coil air outlet node.
Only the following coil types can be used:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric

1.30.2.1.22 Field: Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (m3 /sec) through the fan coil unit’s heating coil. This
field is not used with an electric heating coil.

1.30.2.1.23 Field: Minimum Hot Water Flow Rate

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (m3 /sec) through the fan coil unit’s heating coil. This
field is not used with an electric heating coil.

1.30.2.1.24 Field: Heating Convergence Tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the control of the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by
matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be
numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The heating convergence tolerance is the error
tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:

|Qf ancoil,out − Qzoneload |

≤ HeatingConvergenceT olerance (1.129)
Qzoneload

1.30.2.1.25 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Availabil-
ity Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type
and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this object’s fan. If the fan coil is available
(per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this input field has a valid availability
manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in the list determine when and if the
fan of this object should be on or off.

1.30.2.1.26 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Maximum Air Flow Rate in this Four Pipe FanCoil zone HVAC object. The scaled Maximum Air
Flow Rate in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the unit.
1328 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.2.1.27 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This input field is the name of a schedule that controls fan operation. Schedule Name values of 0
denote cycling fan operation (fan cycles with heating or cooling coil). Schedule values greater than 0
denote constant fan operation (fan runs continually regardless of coil operation). The fan operating
mode defaults to cycling fan operation if this field is left blank. This input field is currently used
with MultiSpeedFan capacity control method only.

1.30.2.1.28 Field: Minimum Supply Air Temperature in Cooling Mode

This optional input is used only when Capacity Control Method = ASHRAE90VariableFan. Specify
the minimum supply air temperature in cooling mode. When the fan coil capacity is greater than
the zone load, the fan speed will modulate down to the minimum fan speed, based on the Low Speed
Supply Air Flow Ratio input field, and the water flow rate will also be reduced to maintain the zone
thermostat set point temperature. When the zone load is one-half the fan coil capacity, the fan will
operate at the minimum speed. When these fields are not entered, a zone sizing simulation must
be performed. Both the cooling and heating supply air temperature must be entered or blank in
unison. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. A value of 0 (in both fields) will
disregard these fields.

1.30.2.1.29 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature in Heating Mode

This optional input is used only when Capacity Control Method = ASHRAE90VariableFan. Specify
the maximum supply air temperature in heating mode. When the fan coil capacity is greater than
the zone load, the fan speed will modulate down to the minimum fan speed, based on the Low Speed
Supply Air Flow Ratio input field, and the water flow rate will also be reduced to maintain the zone
thermostat set point temperature. When the zone load is one-half the fan coil capacity, the fan will
operate at the minimum speed. When these fields are not entered, a zone sizing simulation must
be performed. Both the cooling and heating supply air temperature must be entered or blank in
unison. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. A value of 0 (in both fields) will
disregard these fields.
An example input for a fan coil unit, including its constituent components, is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil ,
Zone1FanCoil , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
ConstantFanVariableFlow , !- Capacity Control Method
autosize , !- Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Low Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio
, !- Medium Speed Supply Air Flow Ratio
autosize , !- Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OUTAIRFANCOILSCHEDULE , !- Outdoor Air Schedule Name
Zone1FanCoilAirInletNode ,!- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone1FanCoilOAMixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone1FanCoilFan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Cooling:Water , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone1FanCoilCoolingCoil , !- Cooling Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Cold Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance
Coil:Heating:Water , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone1FanCoilHeatingCoil , !- Heating Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Hot Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1329

0.001; !- Heating Convergence Tolerance

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone1FanCoilOAMixer , ! name
Zone1FanCoilOAMixerOutletNode , !Mixed Air Node Name
Zone1FanCoilOAInNode , !Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone1FanCoilExhNode , !Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone1FanCoilAirInletNode ; !Return Air Stream Node Name

Fan:OnOff ,
Zone1FanCoilFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone1FanCoilOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilFanOutletNode , !-Air Outlet Node Name
FanPowerRatioCurve , !- Fan Power Ratio Function of Speed Ratio Curve Name
FanEffRatioCurve; !- Fan Efficiency Ratio Function of Speed Ratio Curve Name

Coil:Cooling:Water ,
Zone1FanCoilCoolingCoil , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
autosize , !- Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
autosize , !- Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
Zone1FanCoilChWInletNode ,!- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilChWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilFanOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilCCOutletNode ,!-Air Outlet Node Name
SimpleAnalysis , !- Type of Analysis
CrossFlow; !- Heat Exchanger Configuration

Coil:Heating:Water ,
Zone1FanCoilHeatingCoil , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
autosize , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone1FanCoilHWInletNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilHWOutletNode ,!- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilCCOutletNode ,!- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1FanCoilAirOutletNode , !-Air Outlet Node Name
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
82.2, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
16.6, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
71.1, !- Design Outlet Water Temperature {C}
32.2; !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}

Curve:Exponent ,
FanPowerRatioCurve , !- Name
0.0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.0, !- Coefficient2 Constant
3.0, !- Coefficient3 Constant
0.0, !- Minimum Value of x
1.5, !- Maximum Value of x
0.01, !- Minimum Curve Output
1.5; !- Maximum Curve Output

Curve:Cubic ,
FanEffRatioCurve , !- Name
0.33856828 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
1.72644131 , !- Coefficient2 x
-1.49280132 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
1330 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.42776208 , !- Coefficient4 x**3

0.5, !- Minimum Value of x
1.5, !- Maximum Value of x
0.3, !- Minimum Curve Output
1.0; !- Maximum Curve Output

1.30.2.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Runtime Fraction []
– HVAC,Average, Fan Coil Fan Speed Level []
– HVAC,Average, Fan Coil Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average, Fan Coil Availability Status []
– HVAC,Average, Fan Coil Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average, Fan Coil Speed Ratio []

1.30.2.2.1 Fan Coil Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the dry air heating addition rate of the fan coil unit to the zone it is serving in
Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the
unit.

1.30.2.2.2 Fan Coil Heating Energy [J]

This field is the dry air heat addition of the fan coil unit to the zone it is serving in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate
through the unit, and the timestep.

1.30.2.2.3 Fan Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction rate of the fan coil unit from the zone it
is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate
through the unit.

1.30.2.2.4 Fan Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction of the fan coil unit from the zone it
is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit, and the timestep.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1331

1.30.2.2.5 Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the dry air sensible heat extraction rate of the fan coil unit from the zone it is
serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate
through the unit.

1.30.2.2.6 Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the dry air sensible heat extraction of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions, the
mass flow rate through the unit, and the timestep.

1.30.2.2.7 Fan Coil Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the electricity consumption rate of the fan coil unit in Watts.

1.30.2.2.8 Fan Coil Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the fan coil unit in Joules over the timestep being reported.

1.30.2.2.9 Fan Coil Runtime Fraction[]

This field is the fraction of the system timestep the fan coil unit is running for the CyclingFan
capacity control method. This variable is defined only for the CyclingFan capacity control method.

1.30.2.2.10 Fan Coil Fan Speed Level []

This field is indicates the speed chosen for the fan in the CyclingFan and MultiSpeedFan capacity
control methods. A value of ‘0’ means that the unit is off, ‘1’ the fan is running at its low speed,
‘2’ medium speed, and ‘3’ high speed (maximum). This variable is defined only for the CyclingFan
and MultiSpeedFan capacity control methods.

1.30.2.2.11 Fan Coil Part Load Ratio []

When the capacity control method is VariableFanVariableFlow or VariableFanConstantFlow, this
output variable reports the unit part load ratio (ratio of unit heating / cooling output to the
maximum heating / cooling output). This variable is defined only for VariableFanVariableFlow,
VariableFanConstantFlow or MultiSpeedFan capacity control methods. The unit part load ratio is
applicable to MultiSpeedFan only when the fan speed level selected is the minimum (Speed 1).

1.30.2.2.12 Fan Coil Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the fan coil unit fan. This status flag is a result of the calculations
made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object and/or
calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
is an optional input in the fan coil unit object. When a single availability manager is used in an
Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported by the specific
availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availability managers in an
Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Ventilation Manager), rules to deter-
mine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability Managers’. The
control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction
1332 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

(0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged,
the output result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies
other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object)
to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.2.2.13 Fan Coil Speed Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of time in a system timestep that the fan coil unit is at rated speed
between two consecutive speed levels ( [load – Capacity at Fan Speed i-1] / [Capacity at Fan Speed i
– Capacity at Fan Speed i-1]). The fan speed ratio has minimum value of 0.0, and a maximum value
of 1.0 and any value in between as it is averaged over the timestep. The value is 0.0 during Speed
Level 1 operation. Hydronic FanCoil units speed ratio depends on the fan speed and current load.
The speed ratio represents how long the higher speed runs as a fraction of the system timestep, and
the lower speed runs in the rest of the system timestep.

1.30.3 ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator
Unit ventilators are zone equipment units which are assembled from other components. They contain
a built-in outdoor air mixer, a fan, a heating coil, and a cooling coil. These components are described
elsewhere in this document, except the built-in outdoor air mixer which is contained within the unit
ventilator statement. The unit ventilator input simply requires the names of these other three
components, which have to be described elsewhere in the input. The input also requires the name
of an availability schedule, maximum airflow rate, outdoor air control information (control type and
schedules), an outdoor airflow rate, and maximum and minimum hot and cold water mass flow rates.
The unit is connected to the zone inlet and exhaust nodes and the outdoor air by specifying unit
inlet, outlet, outdoor air and exhaust (relief) air node names. Note that if the Unit Ventilator is
not connected to central dedicated outdoor air (DOA), then the unit air inlet node should be the
same as a zone exhaust air node and the unit air outlet node should be the same as a zone air
inlet node. The three node name input fields: Outdoor Air Node Name, Exhaust Air Node Name,
and Mixed Air Node Name are required fields only when the built-in outdoor air mixer is used to
provide outdoor air. If the Unit Ventilator is connected to a central dedicated outdoor air (DOA)
via AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer, then the above three node name input fields are not required and
must be left blank. In the later case the Unit Ventilator node connection to the zone air exhaust
node and the zone air inlet node are described in AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. In general,
the unit ventilator input is very similar to the fan coil unit input, and the unit is connected to a
hot water loop (demand side) through its hot water coil and to a chilled water loop (demand side)
through its cooling coil.
The main difference between the fan coil and unit ventilator input is that the unit ventilator has a
built-in outdoor air mixer with its own specialized controls. The outdoor air control type can be
selected from one of the following options: “variable percent”, “fixed temperature” or “fixed amount”.
In fixed temperature control, the amount of outdoor air is varied between the minimum outdoor air
fraction (specified by a schedule) and 100% outdoor air to obtain a mixed air temperature as close as
possible to the temperature schedule defined in the input. Variable percent control will also vary the
amount of outdoor air between the minimum and maximum fractions (both specified in input by the
user) to meet the load without the use of a coil if possible. In fixed amount control, the outdoor air
flow rate is fixed to the specified value by the user. In this control strategy, the maximum outdoor air
flow rate and schedule are automatically set to be equal to the minimum outdoor air flow rate and
schedule. These control types are based on the 2004 ASHRAE Systems and Equipment Handbook
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1333

(pp. 31.1-31.3) description of unit ventilator systems. The three outdoor air control strategies are
also valid and available when the Unit Ventilator is connected to central DOA.
The unit is controlled to meet the zone (remaining) heating or cooling demand. If there is a heating
demand, the cooling coil is off and the hot water flow through the heating coil is throttled to meet
the demand. The hot water control node must be specified (same as the hot water coil inlet node). If
there is a cooling demand from the zone, the hot water coil is off and the chilled water flow through
the cooling coil is throttled to meet the load. The cooling coil control node must be specified (same
as the cooling coil inlet node). Finally both heating and cooling require a convergence tolerance,
which is the tolerance denoting how closely the fan coil unit will meet the heating or cooling load.
The tolerance is always relative to the zone load.
Overall, control of the unit must consider the outdoor air. Here is a more detailed description of the
overall unit control:
Off: Unit is schedule off or there is no load on it. All flow rates are set to zero and the temperatures
are set to zone conditions (except for the outdoor air inlet). Outdoor air requirements will not
override this condition.
Heating/No Coil/VariablePercent: The unit is on, there is a heating load, no heating coil
is present or it has been scheduled off, and variable percent outdoor air control type has been
specified. In this case, the variable percent outdoor air controls what happens with the outdoor air.
If the outside temperature is greater than the return temperature, then the outdoor air is set to
the maximum as defined by the user input. If the outdoor air temperature is less than the return
temperature from the zone, then the outdoor air is set to the minimum outdoor air flow rate as
defined by the user. Since a coil is not present to further condition the supply air, the zone simply
receives whatever temperature air results from the outdoor air controls.
Heating/No Coil/FixedTemperature: The unit is on, there is a heating load, no heating coil is
present or it has been scheduled off, and fixed temperature has been specified. The unit ventilator
tries to use outdoor air as best as possible to meet the temperature goal. If it cannot meet this
goal because the temperature goal is not between the zone return temperature and the outdoor air
temperature, then the unit ventilator will either use the maximum or minimum outdoor air flow
rate.
Heating/No Coil/FixedAmount: The unit is on, there is a heating load, no heating coil is present
or it has been scheduled off, and fixed amount control has been specified. The unit ventilator fixes
the outdoor air flow rate as defined by the user and sets the maximum and minimum outdoor air
flow rate to be equal in order to avoid the variation of outdoor air flow rate between the maximum
and minimum values. Since a coil is not present to further condition the supply air, the zone simply
receives whatever temperature air results from the outdoor air controls.
Heating /With Coil/VariablePercent: The unit is on, there is a heating load, and variable
percent control is specified. The outdoor air fraction is set to the minimum outdoor air fraction
(schedule based), and the heating coil is activated. The heating coil attempts to meet the remaining
load on the zone being served by the unit ventilator.
Heating /With Coil/FixedAmount: The unit is on, there is a heating load, a heating coil is
present and is scheduled on, and fixed amount control has been specified. The unit ventilator fixes
the outdoor air flow rate as defined by the user and sets the maximum and minimum outdoor air
flow rate to be equal in order to avoid the variation of outdoor air flow rate between the maximum
and minimum values. The heating coil then attempts to meet any remaining zone heating load.
Cooling/No Coil/VariablePercent: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, no coil is present or
it has been scheduled off, and variable percent outdoor air control type has been specified. In this
1334 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

case, the variable percent outdoor air controls what happens with the outdoor air. If the outside
temperature is greater than the return temperature, then the outdoor air is set to the minimum
as defined by the user input. If the outdoor air temperature is less than the return temperature
from the zone, then the outdoor air is varied up to the maximum flow rate to try to meet whatever
cooling load is present. Since a coil is not present to further condition the supply air, the zone simply
receives whatever temperature air results from the outdoor air controls.
Cooling/No Coil/FixedTemperature: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, no cooling coil is
present or it has been scheduled off, and fixed temperature has been specified. The unit ventilator
tries to use outdoor air as best as possible to meet the temperature goal. If it cannot meet this
goal because the temperature goal is not between the zone return temperature and the outdoor air
temperature, then the unit ventilator will either use the maximum or minimum outdoor air flow rate
in the same fashion as the variable percent outdoor air control.
Cooling/No Coil/FixedAmount: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, no cooling coil is present
or it has been scheduled off, and fixed amount control has been specified. The unit ventilator fixes
the outdoor air flow rate as defined by the user and sets the maximum and minimum outdoor air
flow rate to be equal in order to avoid the variation of outdoor air flow rate between the maximum
and minimum values. Since a coil is not present to further condition the supply air, the zone simply
receives whatever temperature air results from the outside air controls.
Cooling/With Coil/VariablePercent: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, a coil is present and
is scheduled on, and variable percent outdoor air control type has been specified. In this case, the
variable percent outdoor air controls what happens with the outdoor air. If the outside temperature
is greater than the return temperature, then the outdoor air is set to the minimum as defined by
the user input. If the outdoor air temperature is less than the return temperature from the zone,
then the outdoor air is varied up to the maximum flow rate to try to meet whatever cooling load is
present. The coil then attempts to meet any remaining zone load.
Cooling/With Coil/FixedTemperature: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, a cooling coil is
present and is scheduled on, and fixed temperature has been specified. The unit ventilator tries to
use outdoor air as best as possible to meet the temperature goal. If it cannot meet this goal because
the temperature goal is not between the zone return temperature and the outdoor air temperature,
then the unit ventilator will either use the maximum or minimum outdoor air flow rate in the same
fashion as the fixed temperature outdoor air control for the “no coil” conditions. The cooling coil
then attempts to meet any remaining zone load.
Cooling/With Coil/FixedAmount: The unit is on, there is a cooling load, a cooling coil is
present and is scheduled on, and fixed amount control has been specified. The unit ventilator fixes
the outdoor air flow rate as defined by the user and sets the maximum and minimum outdoor air
flow rate to be equal in order to avoid the variation of outdoor air flow rate between the maximum
and minimum values. The cooling coil then attempts to meet any remaining zone cooling load.
Note: the unit ventilator controls are strictly temperature based and do not factor humidity into
the equation (not an enthalpy economy cycle but rather a simple return air economy cycle). In
addition, temperature predictions are not strict energy balances here in the control routine though
in the mixing routine an energy balance is preserved.

1.30.3.1 Inputs

1.30.3.1.1 Field: Name

This field is simply the identifying name that distinguishes one particular unit ventilator from another
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1335

in the input data file. Like all other names in EnergyPlus, it is assumed that this is a unique character
string and that no other unit ventilators use this same name.

1.30.3.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that determines whether the unit ventilator is available
to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can
be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the
component must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all
time periods.

1.30.3.1.3 Field: Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the maximum volumetric flow rate of air through the unit ventilator
system in m3 /sec. This parameter should be some real number greater than zero.

1.30.3.1.4 Field: Outdoor Air Control Type

This field allows the user to control how outdoor air is used in the unit ventilator system. The unit
ventilator system described by this syntax has its own outdoor air handler. The three options for
outdoor air control are “VariablePercent”, “FixedTemperature” and “FixedAmount”. Those
keys are the only allowed choices for this parameter. In general, the variable percent control will
attempt to vary the amount of outdoor air between some minimum and maximum schedules of
fractions (see next two fields) to best meet the current heating or cooling load. The fixed temperature
control will vary the amount of outdoor air between the minimum schedule (fraction of maximum,
see next field) and 100% available outdoor air to come as close as possible to a desired mixed air
temperature (see 2 fields down) that can be scheduled. The fixed amount control will fix the outdoor
air flow rate as minimum outdoor air flow rate and schedule specified by the user and automatically
set the maximum and minimum outside flow rate to be equal by ignoring the maximum outdoor air
flow rate. More information on the controls and operation of the unit ventilator are given in the
introductory section above. For cycling fan operating mode, the outdoor air mass rate is capped by
the actual supply air flow rate if the former is greater than the latter; otherwise, uses the amount
calculated by the outdoor air control.

1.30.3.1.5 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the minimum volumetric flow rate of outdoor air (in m3 /sec) that
will be brought in to the unit ventilator. The actual minimum outdoor air flow rate will be this num-
ber multiplied by the schedule value from the minimum outdoor air schedule. If “FixedAmount”
type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, the outdoor air flow rate will be fixed as this
field and the unit ventilator will automatically set the maximum and minimum outside flow rate to
be equal by ignoring the maximum outdoor air flow rate.

1.30.3.1.6 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Schedule Name

This field contains a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that should contain values for the minimum
outdoor air used by the unit ventilator system for IAQ or other reasons. Note that if the unit
ventilator is scheduled off or if there is no load sensed in the zone that the system will not operate
even to achieve the minimum air fraction. However, if the system is operating, it will always bring in
this fraction of the minimum air flow rate (see minimum air flow rate field above). If “FixedAmount”
1336 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, the actual outdoor air flow rate will be this
number multiplied by the minimum outdoor air flow rate in the field above. The unit ventilator
will automatically set the maximum and minimum outdoor air schedule to be equal by ignoring the
maximum outdoor air schedule.

1.30.3.1.7 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the maximum volumetric flow rate of outdoor air that can be
brought into the unit ventilator system in m3 /sec. This parameter should be some real number
greater than zero. Note that the value for this parameter may be less than the maximum air flow
rate of the unit ventilator and this may affect the maximum fraction of outdoor air within the control
strategy defined above. This parameter is an absolute maximum and will supercede any scheduled
fraction of the unit ventilator maximum airflow rate. If “FixedAmount” type is selected as the
outdoor air control strategy, this field will be ignored and be automatically set to be equal to the
minimum outdoor air flow rate specified in the field above.

1.30.3.1.8 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction or Temperature Schedule

Name
This field can have one of two meanings depending the type of control selected in the outdoor air
control type parameter above. If “VariablePercent” or “FixedAmount” was selected, then this field
is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) corresponding to a maximum air fraction schedule. Furthermore,
if “FixedAmount” type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, this field will be ignored and
be automatically set to be equal to the minimum outdoor air fraction specified in the field below.
Note that this is a fraction of the maximum airflow rate field (see parameter above) for the unit
ventilator. If “FixedTemperature” control was selected, then this field is still a schedule name (ref:
Schedule), but it corresponds to a schedule of mixed air temperatures that the outdoor air control
will try to attain.

1.30.3.1.9 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the inlet (air side) to the unit
ventilator. In a unit ventilator, the air inlet node name must be zone exhaust node name if there is
no DOA Mixer, or if the unit ventilator is connected to DOA, then the air inlet node name must be
the DOA mixer outlet node name for InletSide mixer connection. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent
points between components or at various points in the loops. While a node name may be referenced
more than once in an input data file, each node must have a unique name. In addition, the air inlet
node name can be the name of an induced air outlet node (Ref. AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum) to
draw air from a return plenum, when the zone return node is connected to a return plenum.

1.30.3.1.10 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the outlet (air side) to the unit
ventilator. In a unit ventilator, the air outlet node name must be zone inlet node name if there is
no DOA Mixer, or if the unit ventilator is connected to DOA, then the air outlet node name must
be the DOA mixer secondary air inlet node name for SupplySide mixer connection. In EnergyPlus,
nodes represent points between components or at various points in the loops. While a node name
may be referenced more than once in an input data file, each node must have a unique name.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1337

1.30.3.1.11 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with fresh air brought into the
unit ventilator from the outdoor environment. You should also have defined an OutdoorAir:Node
object with the same name and assign it an optional height (above ground). This input field must
be left blank if the Unit ventilator is connected to a central dedicated outdoor air (DOA) via
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.3.1.12 Field: Exhaust Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with air exhausted out of the unit
ventilator to the outdoor environment. While from a simulation standpoint this name is arbitrary
and not a “necessity”, assigning a name to this node allows the user to receive output on conditions
at this node to verify the correct operation of the unit ventilator. This input field must be left
blank if the Unit ventilator is connected to a central dedicated outdoor air (DOA) via AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.3.1.13 Field: Mixed Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with the “mixed” air of the unit
ventilator. These conditions are post-“mixing box” since they are the conditions of the fraction of
return air combined with the outdoor air. Since this is a simple system, this can also be viewed
as the conditions of the air being sent to the coils. While from a simulation standpoint this name
is arbitrary and not a “necessity”, assigning a name to this node allows the user to receive output
on conditions at this node to verify the correct operation of the unit ventilator. This input field
must be left blank if the Unit ventilator is connected to a central dedicated outdoor air (DOA) via
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.3.1.14 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This field specifies the type of supply air fan used by this unit ventilator. The supply air fan is part
of the unit ventilator compound object. The only valid supply air fan types are:

– Fan:SystemModel
– Fan:OnOff
– Fan:ConstantVolume
– Fan:VariableVolume

Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, and Fan:VariableVolume may be deprecated in a future version.

1.30.3.1.15 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This field is the name of a fan (ref: Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume,
Fan:VariableVolume) that is part of the unit ventilator system. This name links the unit ventilator
to particular fan data entered elsewhere in the input data file. A fan name is required since it is the
prime mover of air in the unit ventilator system.
1338 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.3.1.16 Field: Coil Option

This field allows the user to specify the coil operating options as one of the following options: None,
Heating, Cooling or HeatingAndCooling. If None is selected, the unit ventilator does not have
any coils, and any other input will be ignored. If either Heating or Cooling is selected, only a
heating or cooling coil, respectively, is present. Thus, only four more inputs will be expected. If
HeatingAndCooling is selected, both heating and cooling coil input must be entered, and the unit
ventilator will have both a heating and a cooling coil.

1.30.3.1.17 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This field is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that determines the operating modes of the unit
ventilator’s On:Off fan. A schedule value of 0 indicates cycling fan operation (fan cycles with
cooling/heating coil). A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates constant fan
operation (fan runs continually regardless of the coils operation). If this input field is left blank,
then the operating mode of the On:Off fan type defaults to cycling operation.

1.30.3.1.18 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This field is the type of coil that is used for heating in the unit ventilator system. It is used in
conjunction with the heating coil name (see next field) to specify the heating coil present within the
system. Allowable heating coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.30.3.1.19 Field: Heating Coil Name

This field is the name of the heating coil that is part of the unit ventilator system. It is assumed
that there is always some sort of heating coil associated with a unit ventilator system. This name
links the unit ventilator to particular heating coil data entered elsewhere in the input data file.

1.30.3.1.20 Field: Heating Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit heating output. This field allows the user some control over how
closely the heating coil will control the air side conditions. The relative size of this parameter relates
directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight control and
will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will result in looser
controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in supply conditions (that could in turn result
in excessive iterations). Initial experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using
0.001 as a starting point. This field is ignored for gas and electric heating coils.
The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils,
the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The heating convergence
tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this
is the fraction:

|QU nitV entilator,Out − QZoneLoad |

≤ HeatingConvergenceT olerance (1.130)
QZoneLoad
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1339

1.30.3.1.21 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This field is the type of coil that is used for cooling in the unit ventilator system. It is used in
conjunction with the cooling coil name (see next field) to specify the cooling coil present within the
system.
Only the following coil types can be used:

– Coil:Cooling:Water
– Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
– CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted

1.30.3.1.22 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This field is the name of the cooling coil that is part of the unit ventilator system. This name links
the unit ventilator to particular cooling coil data entered elsewhere in the input data file. Note that
a cooling coil is not a required part of a unit ventilator system. If no cooling coil is present, the
previous field may be followed by a semi-colon and the remaining parameters in this statement may
be ignored.

1.30.3.1.23 Field: Cooling Convergence Tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the unit cooling output. This field allows the user some control over
how closely the cooling coil will control the air side conditions. The relative size of this parameter
relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight
control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will
result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in supply conditions (that
could in turn result in excessive iterations). Initial experience with this parameter lends to the
recommendation of using 0.001 as a starting point.
The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water
coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The cooling convergence
tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this
is the fraction:

|QU nitV entilator,Out − QZoneLoad |

≤ CoolingConvergenceT olerance (1.131)
QZoneLoad

1.30.3.1.24 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Avail-
ability Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager
type and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this unit ventilator object’s fan. If
the unit ventilator is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this input
field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in the list
determine when and if the fan of this unit ventilator object should be on or off.

1.30.3.1.25 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
1340 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Maximum Air Flow Rate in this Unit Ventilator zone HVAC object. The scaled Maximum Air Flow
Rate in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the unit.
An example input for a unit ventilator, including its constituent components, is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator ,
Zone1UnitVent , !- Name
UnitVentAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.84, !- Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VariablePercent , !- Outdoor Air Control Type
0.168 , !- Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
UnitVentMinOA , !- Minimum Outdoor Air Schedule Name
0.84, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
UnitVentMaxOA , !- Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction or Temperature Schedule Name
Zone1UnitVentAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentOAInNode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
Zone1UnitVentExhNode , !- Exhaust Air Node Name
Zone1UnitVentOAMixerOutletNode , !- Mixed Air Node Name
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone1UnitVentFan , !- Fan Name
HeatingAndCooling , !- Coil Option
Coil:Heating:Water , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone1UnitVentHeatingCoil ,!- Heating Coil Name
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence Tolerance
Coil:Cooling:Water , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone1UnitVentCoolingCoil ,!- Cooling Coil Name
0.001; !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance

OutdoorAir:Node ,
Zone1UnitVentOAInNode , !- Name
-1.0; !- Height Above Ground {m}

Fan:ConstantVolume ,
Zone1UnitVentFan , !- Name
UnitVentAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.84, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone1UnitVentOAMixerOutletNode , !- Fan Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentFanOutletNode ; !- Fan Outlet Node Name

Coil:Cooling:Water ,
Zone1UnitVentCoolingCoil ,!- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.0010 , !- Design Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.84, !- Design Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
6.67, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
30, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
12, !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}
0.013 , !- Design Inlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
0.008 , !- Design Outlet Air Humidity Ratio {kgWater/kgDryAir}
Zone1UnitVentChWInletNode , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentChWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentFanOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentCCOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
SimpleAnalysis , !- Type of Analysis
CrossFlow; !- Heat Exchanger Configuration

Coil:Heating:Water ,
Zone1UnitVentHeatingCoil ,!- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
400., !- U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.0005 , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone1UnitVentHWInletNode ,!- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentHWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitVentCCOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1341

Zone1UnitVentAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name

UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
82.2, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
16.6, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
71.1, !- Design Outlet Water Temperature {C}
32.2; !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}

1.30.3.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Ventilator Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Unit Ventilator Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Ventilator Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Unit Ventilator Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Ventilator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Unit Ventilator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Availability Status []
– HVAC,Average, Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Part Load Ratio []

1.30.3.2.1 Zone Unit Ventilator Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the heating output rate of the unit ventilator system to the zone it is serving in
Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit
ventilator.

1.30.3.2.2 Zone Unit Ventilator Heating Energy [J]

This field is the heating output of the unit ventilator system to the zone it is serving in Joules over
the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow
rate through the unit ventilator, and the timestep.

1.30.3.2.3 Zone Unit Ventilator Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the total cooling (sensible plus latent) output rate of the unit ventilator system to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass
flow rate through the unit ventilator.

1.30.3.2.4 Zone Unit Ventilator Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) output of the unit ventilator system to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit ventilator, and the timestep.
1342 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.3.2.5 Zone Unit Ventilator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the sensible cooling output rate of the unit ventilator system to the zone it is
serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate
through the unit ventilator.

1.30.3.2.6 Zone Unit Ventilator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the sensible cooling output of the unit ventilator system to the zone it is serving in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the
mass flow rate through the unit ventilator, and the timestep.

1.30.3.2.7 Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the electric power consumption rate of the fan of the unit ventilator in Watts.

1.30.3.2.8 Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the electric power consumed by the fan of the unit ventilator over the timestep in
Joules.

1.30.3.2.9 Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the unit ventilator fan. This status flag is a result of the calculations
made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object and/or
calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
is an optional input in the unit ventilator object. When a single availability manager is used in
an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported by the specific
availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availability managers in an
Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Ventilation Manager), rules to deter-
mine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability Managers’. The
control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction
(0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged,
the output result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies
other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object)
to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.3.2.10 Zone Unit Ventilator Fan Part Load Ratio []

This is the fan’s part load ratio for the report timestep during which the fan had operated. This
variable is available for OnOff supply air fan type only.

1.30.4 ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater
Unit heaters are zone equipment units which are assembled from other components and are a sim-
plification of unit ventilators. They contain only a fan and a heating coil. These components are
described elsewhere in this document. The unit heater input simply requires the names of these
components, which have to be described elsewhere in the input. The input also requires the name of
an availability schedule, maximum airflow rate, and maximum and minimum hot water volumetric
flow rates. The unit is connected to the zone inlet and exhaust nodes by specifying unit inlet and
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1343

outlet node names. Note that the unit air inlet node should be the same as a zone exhaust node and
the unit outlet node should be the same as a zone inlet node.
While the control of the heating coil is similar to the fan coil units and the unit ventilator, the overall
control of the unit heater is much different. There are four different modes in which a unit heat can
operate based on the user input:
Off: Unit is schedule off. All flow rates are set to zero and the temperatures are set to zone
conditions.
NoLoad OR Cooling/”No” is specified in input field “Supply Air Fan Operation During No
Heating”: Unit is available, but there is no heating load. With “No” specified for “Supply Air Fan
Operation During No Heating” and the supply fan operating mode set to 0, the fan will be off
since there is no heating load. All flow rates are set to zero and the temperatures are set to zone
conditions.
NoLoad OR Cooling/”Yes” is specified in input field “Supply Air Fan Operation During No
Heating”: Unit is available, the supply fan operating mode schedule value is greater than 0 (for
OnOff Fan) and the fan is running (if it is scheduled to be available also). No heating is provided,
only air circulation via the fan running. However, any heat added by the fan is introduced into the
space with the circulation of the air.
Heating: The unit is on/available and there is a heating load. The heating coil is modulated
(constant fan speed) to meet the heating load. When the fan type is not an OnOff fan then the control
of the heating coil and its flow rate is identical to the fan coil unit. In the case of OnOff fan, the
fan cycles with heating coil if the current timestep supply fan operating mode is schedule value is 0,
or else if the current timestep supply fan operating mode schedule value is greater than 0, then the
supply fan runs continuously for the entire timestep.

1.30.4.1 Inputs

1.30.4.1.1 Field: Name

This field is simply the identifying name that distinguishes one particular unit heater from another in
the input data file. Like all other names in EnergyPlus, it is assumed that this is a unique character
string and that no other unit heaters use this same name.

1.30.4.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that determines whether the unit heater is available
to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the component can
be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the
component must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all
time periods.

1.30.4.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the inlet (air side) to the unit
heater. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at various points in the loops.
In a unit heater, the air inlet node to the system will typically be the same node as a zone outlet
node. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input data file, each node must
have a unique name.
1344 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.4.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the outlet (air side) to the unit
heater. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at various points in the loops.
In a unit heater, the air outlet node from the system will typically be the same node as a zone inlet
node. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input data file, each node must
have a unique name.

1.30.4.1.5 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This field specifies the type of supply air fan used by this unit heater. The supply air fan is part of
the unit heater compound object. The only valid supply air fan types are:

– Fan:SystemModel
– Fan:OnOff
– Fan:ConstantVolume
– Fan:VariableVolume

Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, and Fan:VariableVolume may be deprecated in a future version.

1.30.4.1.6 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This field is the name of a fan (ref: FanSystemModel, Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:VariableVolume)
that is part of the unit heater system. This name links the unit heater to particular fan data entered
elsewhere in the input data file. A fan name is required since it is the prime mover of air in the unit
heater system.

1.30.4.1.7 Field: Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the maximum volumetric flow rate of air through the unit heater
system in m3 /s. This parameter should be some real number greater than zero.

1.30.4.1.8 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This field is the type of coil that is used for heating in the unit heater system. It is used in
conjunction with the heating coil name (see next field) to specify the heating coil present within the
system. Allowable heating coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.30.4.1.9 Field: Heating Coil Name

This field is the name of the heating coil that is part of the unit heater system. It is assumed that
there is always some sort of heating coil associated with a unit heater system. This name links the
unit ventilator to particular heating coil data entered elsewhere in the input data file.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1345

1.30.4.1.10 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This field is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that determines the operating modes of the unit heater’s
On:Off fan. A schedule value of 0 indicates cycling fan operation (fan cycles with cooling/heating
coil). A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates constant fan operation (fan runs
continually regardless of the coils operation). If this input field is left blank, then the operating
mode of the On:Off fan type defaults to cycling operation.

1.30.4.1.11 Field: Supply Air Fan Operation During No Heating

This choice field allows the user to define how the unit heater will operate under “no heating load”
or cooling conditions. The user may select from two options (“Yes”, “No”). If the “No” control
is selected, then the fan will not run unless there is a heating load. If the fan does not run, this
effectively shuts the unit heater system off. If the “Yes” control is selected, the unit heater is
available, and the fan is continuous, then the fan will always run. This will produce air movement in
the zone but also add some amount of heat to the energy balance since the fan generates some heat.
But if the “Yes” control is selected and the “Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule” values is 0
(for OnOff fan), then the fan will NOT run. This allows the user to schedule the operation of the
fan when there is no load.

1.30.4.1.12 Field: Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter a maximum hot water or steam volumetric flow rate through
the heating coil in m3 /s. The steam volume flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. This
number should be some number greater than zero and greater than the minimum hot water or steam
volumetric flow rate (see next field). Note that this parameter has no meaning for either an electric
or a gas heating coil.

1.30.4.1.13 Field: Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter a minimum hot water or steam volumetric flow rate through the
heating coil in m3 /s. The steam volume flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. This number
should be some number greater than zero and less than the maximum hot water or steam volumetric
flow rate (see previous field). Note that this parameter has no meaning for either an electric or a
gas heating coil.

1.30.4.1.14 Field: Heating Convergence Tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the unit heating output. This field allows the user some control over
how closely the heating coil will control the air side conditions. The relative size of this parameter
relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight
control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will
result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in supply conditions (that
could in turn result in excessive iterations). Initial experience with this parameter lends to the
recommendation of using 0.001 as a starting point. This field is ignored for gas and electric heating
coils.
The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils,
the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The heating convergence
tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this
is the fraction:
1346 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

|Qunit heater,out − Qzoneload |

≤ HeatingConvergenceT olerance (1.132)
Qzoneload

1.30.4.1.15 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Availabil-
ity Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type
and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this unit heater object’s fan. If the unit
heater is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this input field has a
valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in the list determine
when and if the fan of this unit heater object should be on or off.

1.30.4.1.16 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields Maximum
Supply Air Flow Rate in this Unit Heater zone HVAC object. The scaled maximum supply air flow
rates is used to size Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate if specified as autosize. The scaled
Maximum Air Flow Rate in turn is used to size heating capacity of the unit.
An example input for a unit heater, including its constituent components, is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:UnitHeater ,
Zone1UnitHeat , !- Name
UnitHeatAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone1UnitHeatAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone1UnitHeatFan , !- Fan Name
0.84, !- Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Continuous , !- Fan Control Type
Coil:Heating:Water , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone1UnitHeatHeatingCoil ,!- Heating Coil Name
0.0005 , !- Maximum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Minimum Hot Water or Steam Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001; !- Heating Convergence Tolerance

Fan:ConstantVolume ,
Zone1UnitHeatFan , !- Name
UnitHeatAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
0.84, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone1UnitHeatAirInletNode , !- Fan Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatFanOutletNode ; !- Fan Outlet Node Name

Coil:Heating:Water ,
Zone1UnitHeatHeatingCoil ,!- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
400., !- U-Factor Times Area Value {W/K}
0.0005 , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone1UnitHeatHWInletNode ,!- Water Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatHWOutletNode , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatFanOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone1UnitHeatAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
UFactorTimesAreaAndDesignWaterFlowRate , !- Performance Input Method
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1347

autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}

82.2, !- Design Inlet Water Temperature {C}
16.6, !- Design Inlet Air Temperature {C}
71.1, !- Design Outlet Water Temperature {C}
32.2; !- Design Outlet Air Temperature {C}

1.30.4.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Heater Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Unit Heater Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Unit Heater Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Unit Heater Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Unit Heater Fan Availability Status []
– HVAC,Average, Zone Unit Heater Fan Part Load Ratio []

1.30.4.2.1 Zone Unit Heater Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the heating output rate of the unit heater system to the zone it is serving in Watts.
This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit heater.

1.30.4.2.2 Zone Unit Heater Heating Energy [J]

This field is the heating output of the unit heater system to the zone it is serving in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate
through the unit heater, and the timestep.

1.30.4.2.3 Zone Unit Heater Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the electric power consumption rate of the fan of the unit heater in Watts.

1.30.4.2.4 Zone Unit Heater Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the electric power consumed by the fan of the unit heater over the timestep in
Joules.

1.30.4.2.5 Zone Unit Heater Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the unit heater fan. This status flag is a result of the calculations
made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object and/or
calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
is an optional input in the unit heater object. When a single availability manager is used in an
Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported by the specific
availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availability managers in an
Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Ventilation Manager), rules to deter-
mine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability Managers’. The
control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction
(0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged,
the output result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies
other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object)
to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.
1348 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.4.2.6 Zone Unit Heater Fan Part Load Ratio []

This is the fan’s part load ratio for the report timestep during which the fan had operated. This
variable is available for OnOff supply air fan type only.

1.30.5 ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit
The zone evaporative cooler unit is a compound object made up of a fan and one or two evaporative
cooler components. This unit serves a single thermal zone as a forced-convection, cooling-only unit
with supply fan. It always draws 100% of its supply air from the outside, passes the air through a
supply fan and evaporative cooler(s) and then into the zone. The fan can be positioned upstream
of the cooler(s) for a blow through placement. Or it can be positioned downstream of the cooler(s)
for a draw through placement. If there is more than one evaporative cooler, then should be in series
with the first cooler immediately upstream of the second cooler. There is an option to include a
relief zone exhaust node to balance the air in the zone.
The unit can have either constant or variable speed fans. When a constant speed fan is specified and
the Cooler Unit Control Method is either ZoneTemperatureDeadbandOnOffCycling or ZoneCoolin-
gLoadOnOffCycling, this zone unit runs just like other constant speed forced-air zone units in that
its controls allow the unit to cycle based on a part-load formulation with averaged air flow rates.
When a variable speed fan is specified and the Cooler Unit Control Method is ZoneCoolingLoad-
VariableSpeedFan, then the unit can modulate fan speed to meet cooling loads just like other zone
HVAC units with variable speed fan.

1.30.5.1 Inputs

1.30.5.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a zone evaporative cooler
unit. References to this unit by other objects will use this name.

1.30.5.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule that denotes whether the unit operates during a given
time period. A schedule value equal to 0.0 denotes that the cooler unit must be off for that time
period. A schedule value greater than 0.0 denotes that the cooler is available to operate during that
time period. If this field is left blank, then the program assumes that the unit is always available as
if the schedule was always set to 1.0.

1.30.5.1.3 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional alpha input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An
Availability Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability
Manager type and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this evaporative cooler
unit’s operation. If this field is used and the cooler unit is scheduled to be available, based on the
previous input field, then the unit will operate based on the result of the availability managers in
the list.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1349

1.30.5.1.4 Field: Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha input field defines the name of the HVAC system node from which the evaporative
cooler unit draws its supply air. This node is usually declared to be an outdoor air node using
OutdoorAir:Node or OutdoorAir:NodeList.

1.30.5.1.5 Field: Cooler Outlet Node Name

This alpha input field defines the name of the HVAC system node to which the evaporative cooler
sends its outlet air. This node name must be the name of a zone air inlet node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.5.1.6 Field: Zone Relief Air Node Name

This optional alpha input field defines the name of an HVAC system node which can extract air
from the zone to balance the air supplied to the zone by the cooler outlet node. This node name
would match the name of a zone exhaust air node.

1.30.5.1.7 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha input field defines the type of fan used by the zone evaporative cooler unit. There are
five valid choices: Fan:SystemModel, Fan:ComponentModel, Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:OnOff, or
Fan:VariableVolume. (Note that Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:OnOff, and Fan:VariableVolume may be
deprecated in a future version and as of version 8.7 these are being replaced by Fan:SystemModel.)
However the type of fan must be consistent with the control method defined below and a variable
speed fan is needed with ZoneCoolingLoadVariableSpeedFan.

1.30.5.1.8 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This alpha input field defines the user-defined name of the fan used by this cooler unit. The fan itself
is defined elsewhere. Note that the fan’s maximum flow rate should be greater than or equal to the
Design Supply Air Flow Rate defined in the following field. For a blow-through fan placement, the
fan’s inlet node should be the same as the Outlet Air Inlet Node Name. For a draw-through fan
placement, the fan’s outlet node should be the same as the Cooler Outlet Node Name.

1.30.5.1.9 Field: Design Supply Air Flow Rate [m3 /s]

This numeric input field defines the evaporative cooler unit’s design supply air flow rate, in cubic
meters per second. This value must be less than or equal to the maximum air flow rate of the fan.

1.30.5.1.10 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha input field defines how the supply fan is arranged. There are two choices, BlowThrough
or DrawThrough. The BlowThrough choice indicates that the fan is located upstream of the
evaporative cooler(s). The DrawThrough choice indicates that the fan is located downstream of the
evaporative cooler(s). These are the only configurations that are available and the HVAC system
nodes used as inlets and outlet in the components must be arranged consistent with the flow path.
1350 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.5.1.11 Field: Cooler Unit Control Method

This alpha field is used to determine how the unit is to be controlled. There are three possible
choices:

– ZoneTemperatureDeadbandOnOffCycling. This control method determines whether or

not to operate the cooler based on the thermostat setpoint and the zone air temperature. This
thermostatic control method uses a throttling temperature range, determined in the following
input field, to model hysteresis-type control to avoid excessive short-cycling. If the zone air
temperature is warmer than the cooling setpoint temperature plus one-half of the throttling
range, then the unit is operated for the entire timestep at the design air mass flow rate. If
the zone air temperature is cooler than the cooling setpoint temperature minus one-half of the
throttling range, then the unit is off for the entire timestep. When the zone air temperatures
are within the throttling range, then the unit will stay off if it was not running during the
previous timestep and will stay on if it was already running. If the unit is On, then the unit is
cycled such that it meets the current cooling load and avoids over-cooling the zone.
– ZoneCoolingLoadOnOffCycling. This control method determines whether or not to oper-
ate the cooler based on the predicted zone load to cooling setpoint. If there is a cooling load
(and the unit is available), then the unit is operated for the entire timestep at the design air
mass flow rate. If there is no cooling load, then the unit is cycled at the design air mass flow
rate such that it meets the current cooling load. The magnitude of the cooling load that will
trigger the unit to operate can be controlled using the field below called Cooling Load Control
Threshold Heat Transfer Rate.
– ZoneCoolingLoadVariableSpeedFan. This control method determines whether or not to
operate the cooler based on the predicted zone load to cooling setpoint. If there is a cooling
load (and the unit is available), then the unit is operated for the entire timestep at a fan speed
that is controlled to meet the sensible cooling load (if possible). The magnitude of the cooling
load that will trigger the unit to operate can be controlled using the field below called Cooling
Load Control Threshold Heat Transfer Rate. This control method requires a variable speed
fan and cannot be used with Fan:ConstantVolume or Fan:OnOff.

1.30.5.1.12 Field: Throttling Range Temperature Difference [DeltaC]

This numeric input field defines the throttling range to use for zone-temperature based control, in
degrees Celsius. This value is used when the unit’s control method is ZoneTemperatureDeadban-
dOnOffCycling. This temperature range is used for hysteresis thermostatic control. It is modeled
as symmetric about the cooling setpoint. The default is 1.0◦C.

1.30.5.1.13 Field: Cooling Load Control Threshold Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This numeric input field defines the magnitude, in Watts, of a significant zone cooling load to use
with zone-load-to-setpoint based control. This value is used when the unit’s control method is
ZoneCoolingLoadOnOffCycling or ZoneCoolingLoadVariableSpeedFan. This is a sensible cooling
load that is used as a threshold to determine when the cooling load is significant. When the predicted
zone load to cooling setpoint is less than this threshold, the cooler unit’s control will consider the
load to be too small to trigger operation. The default is 100W.

1.30.5.1.14 Field: First Evaporative Cooler Object Type

1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1351

This alpha input field defines the type of evaporative cooler used in the unit. The zone
evaporative cooler unit can have one or two separate cooler components and this field
is for the first cooler. There are five types of evaporative cooler component models to
choose from: EvaporativeCooler:Direct:CelDekPad, EvaporativeCooler:Direct:ResearchSpecial,
EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:CelDekPad, EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:WetCoil, or Evaporative-
Cooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial.

1.30.5.1.15 Field: First Evaporative Cooler Object Name

This alpha input field defines the user-defined name of the first evaporative cooler component used by
this zone unit. The cooler component itself is defined elsewhere. For a blow through fan placement,
the inlet node for the evaporative cooler should be the same as the fan’s outlet node. For a draw
through fan placement, the inlet node for the evaporative cooler should be the same as the unit’s
Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name.

1.30.5.1.16 Field: Second Evaporative Cooler Object Type

This optional alpha input field defines the type of evaporative cooler used in the unit. This field is
used when the zone evaporative cooler unit has two separate evaporative cooler sections arranged
in series. For example, some coolers are arranged with both direct and indirect evaporative coolers.
If the unit has only one type of cooler, this field should be left blank. There are five types
of evaporative cooler component models to choose from: EvaporativeCooler:Direct:CelDekPad,
EvaporativeCooler:Direct:ResearchSpecial, EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:CelDekPad, Evaporative-
Cooler:Indirect:WetCoil, or EvaporativeCooler:Indirect:ResearchSpecial

1.30.5.1.17 Field: Second Evaporative Cooler Name

This optional alpha input field defines the user-defined name of the second evaporative cooler com-
ponent used by this zone unit. The cooler component itself is defined elsewhere. The inlet node
for the second evaporative cooler should be the same as the outlet node for the first evaporative
cooler. For a draw through fan placement, the outlet node for the second evaporative cooler should
be the same as the unit’s fan inlet node.

1.30.5.1.18 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object defined elsewhere.
A Design Sepcification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input field
Design Supply Air Flow Rate in Evaportaive Cooler zone HVAC object. The scaled design supply
air flow rates in turn is used to size capacity of the unit.
An example input object follows.

ZoneHVAC:EvaporativeCoolerUnit ,
Zone Evap Unit , !- Name
System Availability Schedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
, !- Availability Manager List Name
Cooler Unit OA inlet , !- Outdoor Air Inlet Node Name
Main Zone Inlet Node , !- Cooler Outlet Node Name
Main Zone Relief Node , !- Zone Relief Air Node Name
Fan:SystemModel , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Supply Fan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
2.0, !- Design Supply Air Flow Rate
DrawThrough , !- Fan Placement
1352 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

ZoneCoolingLoadOnOffCycling , !- Cooler Unit Control Method

1.1, !- Throttling Range Temperature Difference
100.0 , !- Cooling Load Control Threshold Heat Transfer Rate
EvaporativeCooler :Direct:CelDekPad , !- First Evaporative Cooler Object Type
Evaporative Cooler , !- First Evaporative Cooler Object Name
, !- Second Evaporative Cooler Object Type
; !- Second Evaporative Cooler Name

1.30.5.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Total Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Fan Speed Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Fan Availability Status []

1.30.5.2.1 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the zone evaporative cooler unit from the
zone it is serving, in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the unit outlet
air node and the zone air node and the air mass flow rate entering the zone.

1.30.5.2.2 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Total Cooling Energy [J]

This output is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the zone evaporative cooler unit from the zone
it is serving, in Joules. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the unit outlet air
node and the zone air node and the air mass flow rate entering the zone.

1.30.5.2.3 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the moist air sensible-only heat extraction rate of the zone evaporative cooler unit
from the zone it is serving, in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the
unit outlet air node and the zone air node based on a single, minimum humidity ratio along with
the air mass flow rate entering the zone.

1.30.5.2.4 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This output is the moist air sensible-only heat extraction of the zone evaporative cooler unit from
the zone it is serving, in Joules. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the unit
outlet air node and the zone air node based on a single, minimum humidity ratio along with the air
mass flow rate entering the zone.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1353

1.30.5.2.5 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Heating Rate [W]

This output is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the zone evaporative cooler unit to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total cooling
rate and the sensible cooling rate. Because an evaporative cooler can provide sensible cooling while
adding moisture the zone air, a unit can operate with both a positive sensible cooling load and a
positive latent heating rate.

1.30.5.2.6 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Heating Energy [J]

This output is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the zone evaporative cooler unit to the
zone it is serving in Joules. This value is calculated as the difference between the total cooling
energy and the sensible cooling energy.

1.30.5.2.7 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the zone evaporative cooler unit
to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total cooling
rate and the sensible cooling rate.

1.30.5.2.8 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This output is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the zone evaporative cooler unit to
the zone it is serving in Joules. This value is calculated as the difference between the total cooling
energy and the sensible cooling energy.

1.30.5.2.9 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Fan Speed Ratio []

This output is the speed ratio of the fan for the zone evaporative cooler unit. The speed ratio is
defined as the current supply air mass flow rate divided by the design air mass flow rate.

1.30.5.2.10 Zone Evaporative Cooler Unit Fan Availability Status []

This output is the availability status of the zone evaporative cooler unit’s fan. This status flag
is a result of the calculations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityMan-
agerAssignmentList object and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The
AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList is an optional input in the zone evaporative cooler object. When
a single availability manager is used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the avail-
ability status reported by the specific manager. For multiple availability managers in an Availability
Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Ventilation Manager)), rules to determine fan
availability status are described in the section on system availability managers. The control status
outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff
(1), CycleOn(2), and CycleOneZoneFansOnly (3). It is recommend to report this output at the
“Detailed” frequency because the integer status flags do not average out to meaningful values.

1.30.6 ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit
The zone outdoor air unit (ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit) in EnergyPlus is intended to model dedi-
cated outdoor air systems (DOAS) and other similar systems which aim to provide either additional
outside air or some limited amount of sensible and/or latent conditioning. The zone outdoor air
1354 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

unit is a piece of zone equipment that can consist of a supply fan, an exhaust fan (optional), heat-
ing and cooling coils, and heat recovery. The outdoor air unit input simply requires information
about flow rates, schedules, node names, and a list of component that are part of the unit. These
components require additional input as per the requirements for these components. In addition,
the input includes information about controls for the unit. It should be noted that the components
that make up the zone outdoor air unit do not require additional controls or setpoints. The unit
input defines how the unit outlet temperature is controlled as described below.

Figure 1.130: Zone Outdoor Air Unit Schematic

When an AirloopHVAC serves the same zone, it is strongly recommended that the outdoor and
exhaust air flow rates are balanced. In addition, the exhaust airflow rate and air schedule should
be the same as outdoor air flow rate and outdoor air schedule, respectively. Otherwise, possible
unbalanced flows will cause improper return airflow unless ZoneAirMassFlowConservation is active.
The full input for zone outdoor air units is described below using a variety of fields.

1.30.6.1 Inputs

1.30.6.1.1 Field: Name

This field is simply the identifying name that distinguishes one particular outdoor air unit from
another in the input data file. Like all other names in EnergyPlus, it is assumed that this is a unique
character string and that no other zone outdoor air units use this same name.

1.30.6.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that determines whether the zone outdoor air unit is
available to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the outdoor
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1355

air unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes
that the outdoor air unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has
values of 1 for all time periods. For any schedule value greater than zero, the outdoor air unit is
considered available and will operate at the supply and exhaust flow rates defined by input field
described below.

1.30.6.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) in which the outdoor air unit is located and intended
to affect. Zone outdoor air units impact only a single zone.

1.30.6.1.4 Field: Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the volumetric flow rate of outdoor air (in m3 /sec) that will be
brought in through the outdoor air unit. The actual outdoor air flow rate will be this number
multiplied by the schedule value from the outdoor air schedule. This field is autosizable. When
autosized, the unit’s outdoor air flow rate will match the minimum outdoor air requirements specified
through the Sizing:Zone object.

1.30.6.1.5 Field: Outdoor Air Schedule Name

This field contains a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that contains values for modifying the outdoor
air flow rate. The supply air flow rate is the product of the outdoor air flow rate and the outdoor
air schedule value for the time of interest. Note that if the outdoor air unit is scheduled off that
the system will not operate regardless of the outdoor air schedule value. However, if the system is
operating, it will always bring in this fraction of the outdoor air flow rate.

1.30.6.1.6 Field: Supply Fan Name

This field is the name of a fan (ref: Fan:SystemModel, Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:VariableVolume)
that is part of the zone outdoor air unit. This name links the outdoor air unit to particular fan data
entered elsewhere in the input data file. A fan name is required since it is the prime mover of air in
the outdoor air control unit.

1.30.6.1.7 Field: Fan Placement

This field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for “blow
through fan”. It means that the unit consists of outdoor air node followed by a supply fan followed
by the equipment that are part of the system. The second choice stands for “draw through fan”.
It means that the supply fan placed at the end of supply air stream and supply fan outlet node is
identified with the air outlet node. The fan “draws air through” the equipment system.

– BlowThrough
– DrawThrough

If the user does not select a fan placement type, DrawThrough is assumed as default by EnergyPlus.

1.30.6.1.8 Field: Exhaust Fan Name

This field is the name of a fan (ref: Fan:SystemModel, Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:VariableVolume)
that is part of the outdoor air unit. This name links the outdoor air unit to particular fan data
entered elsewhere in the input data file. This field is optional.
1356 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.6.1.9 Field: Exhaust Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the volumetric flow rate of air (in m3 /sec) that will be exhausted
to the outdoors. The actual exhaust air flow rate will be this number multiplied by the schedule
value from the exhaust air schedule. If the exhaust fan name is left blank, this field will be ignored
and automatically set to be equal to zero.

1.30.6.1.10 Field: Exhaust Air Schedule Name

This field contains a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that should contain values for modifying the
exhaust air flow rate. The actual exhaust air flow rate equals the exhaust air flow rate input
(previous field) multiplied by the exhaust air schedule value. If the exhaust fan name is left blank,
this field will be ignored and automatically set to be equal to zero.

1.30.6.1.11 Field: Unit Control Type

The unit control type field determines with conditions in the zone being served what the response of
the zone outdoor air system will be. It is important to note that this only controls the temperature of
the air being delivered to the space not whether or not the system will operate. There are two options
for this field: Neutral or Temperature. Neutral control tries to have no energy impact on the zone
by delivering air at the temperature of the zone. This allows air to be delivered to the zone without
affecting the zone air heat balance and thus provides outside air without impacting any other system
providing conditioning to this zone. The temperature control option will supply air to the zone
based on the high and low air control temperature schedules (see next two fields). For temperature
control, when the outside air temperature is less than the low air control temperature, the zone
outdoor air unit will provide whatever heating is available from its components to achieve the low
air temperature value. When the outside air temperature is above the high air control temperature,
the zone outdoor air unit will provide whatever cooling is available from its components to achieve
the high air temperature value. When the outdoor air temperature is between the high and low
air control temperatures, the unit will simply provide air at whatever the outdoor air conditions
are, modified by any fan heat added by the supply fan. In summary, the user must select from the
following two options:

– NeutralControl
– TemperatureControl

If the user does not select a unit control type, NeutralControl is assumed as the default by
EnergyPlus.

1.30.6.1.12 Field: High Air Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the dry-bulb air temperature in degrees Celsius for the supply air temperature
to the zone. When the outdoor air temperature or post-supply fan outlet temperature in the case
of blow through is above the high air control temperature, a cooling coil, if available and specified
by the user, is tuned on to conditioning the outdoor air to the high control temperature. This field
only applies to zone outdoor air units that use Temperature Control (see previous field).
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1357

1.30.6.1.13 Field: Low Air Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the dry-bulb air temperature in degrees Celsius for the supply air temperature
to the zone. When the outdoor air temperature or post-supply fan outlet temperature is below the
low air control temperature, a heating coil, if available and specified by the user, is tuned on to
conditioning the outdoor air to the low control temperature. This field only applies to zone outdoor
air units that use Temperature Control (see two previous fields).

1.30.6.1.14 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with fresh air brought into the outdoor
air unit from the outdoor environment. It should also be defined in an OutdoorAir:Node object with
the same name and assigned an optional height (above ground).

1.30.6.1.15 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the outlet (air side) from the zone
outdoor air unit. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at various points
in the loops. In an outdoor air unit, the air outlet node from the system will typically be the same
node as a zone inlet node. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input data
file, each node must have a unique name.

1.30.6.1.16 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the inlet (air side) to the exhaust
side of the outdoor air unit. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at various
points in the loops. In an outdoor air unit, the air inlet node of the system will typically be the
same node as a zone outlet node. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input
data file, each node must have a unique name.

1.30.6.1.17 Field: Supply Fan Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the outlet (air side) of the supply
fan for the zone outdoor air unit. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at
various points in the loops. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input data
file, each node must have a unique name.

1.30.6.1.18 Field: Outdoor Air Unit List Name

This field is the name of an ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList object. An Zone-
HVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList is simply a list of components giving both component name
and type. This equipment list specifies all the components that will be simulated in this unit. The
order of the components in the list is significant: components are simulated sequentially in the
order given in the Equipment List.

1.30.6.1.19 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Availabil-
ity Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type
and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this outdoor air unit object’s fan. If the
outdoor air unit is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this input
1358 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in the list
determine when and if the fan of this outdoor air unit object should be on or off.
An example of this object defined in an input data file is shown below:

ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit ,
Zone5DXOutAir , !- Name
OAUnitOASched , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone Name
0.42, !- Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
OAUnitOASched , !- Outdoor Air Schedule Name
Zone5OAUFan1 , !- Supply Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Supply Fan Placement
, !- Exhaust Fan Name
, !- Exhaust Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Exhaust Air Schedule Name
TemperatureControl , !- Unit Control Type
OAUHitemp2 , !- High Air Control Temperature Schedule Name
OAULotemp2 , !- Low Air Control Temperature Schedule Name
Zone5OAUOANode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
Zone5OAUZoneInletNode , !- AirOutlet Node Name
Zone5OAUZoneOutletNode , !- AirInlet Node Name
Zone5OAUFanOutletNode , !- Supply FanOutlet Node Name
Zone5OAUEquip1; !- Outdoor Air Unit List Name

1.30.6.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Outdoor Air Unit Fan Availability Status []
– Zone Outdoor Air Unit Latent Cooling Energy

1.30.6.2.1 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the heating output rate of the outdoor air unit system to the zone it is serving
in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the
zone outdoor air unit.

1.30.6.2.2 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Heating Energy [J]

This field is the heating output of the outdoor air unit system to the zone it is serving in Joules over
the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow
rate through the zone outdoor air unit, and the time step.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1359

1.30.6.2.3 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the total cooling (sensible plus latent) output rate of the outdoor air unit system
to the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass
flow rate through the zone outdoor air unit.

1.30.6.2.4 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) output of the outdoor air unit system to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the zone outdoor air unit, and the time step.

1.30.6.2.5 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.6.2.6 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

These reports are the sensible cooling output rate of the outdoor air unit system to the zone it is
serving in Joules or Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow
rate through the zone outdoor air unit.

1.30.6.2.7 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.30.6.2.8 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Sensible Heating Rate [W]

These are the sensible heating output of the outdoor air unit system to the zone it is serving in Joules
or Watts over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions,
the mass flow rate through the zone outdoor air unit, and the time step.

1.30.6.2.9 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Latent Cooling Energy [J]

1.30.6.2.10 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Latent Cooling Rate [W]

These are the latent cooling output of the outdoor air unit system to the zone it is serving, in Joules
and Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate through the
zone outdoor air unit, and the time step.

1.30.6.2.11 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Latent Heating Energy [J]

1.30.6.2.12 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Latent Heating Rate [W]

These are the latent heating output of the outdoor air unit system to the zone it is serving, in Joules
and Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate through the
zone outdoor air unit, and the time step.

1.30.6.2.13 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the electric power consumption rate of the fan of the outdoor air unit in Watts.
1360 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.6.2.14 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the electric power consumed by the fan of the outdoor air unit over the time step
in Joules.

1.30.6.2.15 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This field reports the air mass flow rate of the zone outdoor air unit Outdoor Air Unit in kilograms
per second.

1.30.6.2.16 Zone Outdoor Air Unit Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the outdoor air unit fan. This status flag is a result of the calculations
made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object and/or
calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
is an optional input in the outdoor air unit object. When a single availability manager is used in
an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported by the specific
availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availability managers in an
Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Ventilation Manager), rules to deter-
mine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability Managers’. The
control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction
(0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged,
the output result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies
other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object)
to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.7 ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList

This input syntax is used to specify the components in a zone outdoor air unit. The components
will be simulated in the order in which they occur in this list.

1.30.7.1 Inputs

1.30.7.1.1 Field: Name

The user designated unique name of an instance of a zone outdoor air unit equipment list.

1.30.7.1.2 Field Set (Component Object Type, Component Name, Control Node
Name) up to 8
After the identifying name, the list consists of up to 8 pairs of data items.

1.30.7.1.3 Field: Component <x> Object Type

This field specifies the keyword for the type of component used.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1361

1.30.7.1.4 Field: Component <x> Name

This field is the unique name of the component specified in the previous field. This named object
must appear in the IDF.
Note: If any of the components use the autosized option at the component level, input data for
zone sizing purposes are required for the proper sizing of the components. Please refer to the Siz-
ing:Zone object for more information.
An example from an IDF:

ZoneHVAC:OutdoorAirUnit:EquipmentList ,
Zone5OAUEquip1 , !- Name
Dehumidifier:Desiccant:NoFans , !- Component 1 Object Type
Z5Dessicant , !- Component 1 Name
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:FlatPlate , !- Component 2 Object Type
Zone5A2AHeat Recovery , !- Component 2 Name
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX , !- Component 3 Object Type
DX Cooling Coil System 5,!- Component 3 Name
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Component 4 Object Type
Zone5DESHCoil; !- Component 4 Name

1.30.8 ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner
The Window Air Conditioner is a unit of zone equipment made up of other components. Each window
air conditioner consists of an outdoor air mixer, a fan, and a direct expansion (DX) cooling coil.
These components are described elsewhere in this document. The input for a window air conditioner
requires the names of these three pieces of equipment, which are then specified individually elsewhere
in the input. The input for a window air conditioner also requires the name of an availability
schedule, the maximum unit airflow rate, and the maximum outdoor airflow rate for the unit.
The unit is connected to a zone by specifying an air inlet node, which must be the same as a
zone exhaust node; and an air outlet node, which must be the same as a zone inlet node (ref.
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).
A supply air fan operating mode schedule must also be specified. The supply air fan operating
mode schedule value determines if the supply air fan can run continuously with the DX coil cycling
on/off to match the zone cooling demand or the fan and DX coil can cycle on/off together to meet
the cooling demand. The placement of the supply air fan, in relation to the DX coil, must also
be specified (blow through or draw through). The cooling convergence tolerance is required, which
is the tolerance denoting how closely the window air conditioner will meet the cooling load. The
tolerance is always relative to the zone load (i.e., the unit will operate to meet the zone load to
within the tolerance value times the zone load for each simulation timestep). Finally, the DX cooling
coil type must be specified.

1.30.8.1 Inputs

1.30.8.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a window air conditioner unit. Any reference to this
window air conditioner by another object will use this name.

1.30.8.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

1362 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the window air conditioner unit can
run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that
the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes
that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for
all time periods.

1.30.8.1.3 Field: Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate

The maximum volumetric airflow rate through the window air conditioner in cubic meters per second.
Since the unit operates by cycling on/off, this is also the design, rated airflow rate of the unit.

1.30.8.1.4 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate

If the window air conditioner uses outdoor air, this field specifies the outdoor air volumetric flow
rate in cubic meters per second. This flow rate should be less than or equal to the maximum airflow
rate. A value of zero specifies no outdoor air. Note that the outdoor airflow rate is fixed: it cannot
change during the simulation

1.30.8.1.5 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node (see Node) from which the window air conditioner draws
its indoor air. This should be one of the zone exhaust nodes for the zone which the window air
conditioner is cooling.

1.30.8.1.6 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

The name of the HVAC system node (see Node) to which the window air conditioner sends its outlet
air. This should be one of the inlet air nodes for the zone which is being cooled.

1.30.8.1.7 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This field specifies the type of outdoor air mixer used by this window air conditioner unit. The
outdoor air mixer component is part of the window air conditioner compound object. The only
available outdoor air mixer type is:
OutdoorAir:Mixer

1.30.8.1.8 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

The name of an outdoor air mixer component which composes part of the window air conditioner
unit. Note that the return air node of the outdoor air mixer should be the same node as the air inlet
node of the window air conditioner. In addition, the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node should be
the same as the window air conditioner’s fan inlet air node (for blow through) or the air conditioner’s
DX coil inlet node (for draw through)

1.30.8.1.9 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This field specifies the type of supply air fan used by window air conditioner. The supply air fan is
part of the window air conditioner compound object. The only valid supply air fan types are:

– Fan:SystemModel
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1363

– Fan:OnOff
– Fan:ConstantVolume

Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for use in new models.
Fan:OnOff and Fan:ConstantVolumemay be deprecated in a future version.

1.30.8.1.10 Field:Supply Air Fan Name

The name of the fan component that composes part of the window air conditioner. Note that the fan’s
maximum flow rate should be the same as the maximum airflow rate of the window air conditioner.
A fan of type Fan:SystemModel or Fan:OnOff may be used with either cycling or continuous fan, and
a fan of type Fan:ConstantVolume is used only with continuous fan (see Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule field below). The fan’s inlet node should be the same as the outdoor air mixer’s mixed
air node (for blow through) or the DX coil’s outlet node (for draw through). The fan’s outlet node
should be the same as the DX coil’s air inlet node (for blow through) or the window air conditioner’s
air outlet node (for draw through).

1.30.8.1.11 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This field specifies the type of cooling coil to be modeled for this window air conditioner. The input
requirements for these cooling coil objects are described elsewhere in this document. If the user
wants to control the enhanced dehumidification performance of the Heat Exchanger Assisted coil
type based on zone air humidity level, then the input file must include a humidistat object (ref.
ZoneControl:Humidistat) for the zone being served by this air conditioner and a high humidity set
point manager (ref. SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Maximum) with the high humidity set
point placed on the outlet node of the heat exchanger assisted cooling coil. Only allowable coil types
are:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted

1.30.8.1.12 Field: DX Cooling Coil Name

The name of a DX cooling coil component that composes part of the window air conditioner unit.
The DX coil air inlet node should be the same as the fan outlet node (for blow through) or the
outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node (for draw through). The DX coil air outlet node should be the
same as the window air conditioner’s air outlet node (for blow through) or the fan’s inlet node (for
draw through).

1.30.8.1.13 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote
that the supply air fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
If this field is left blank, the model assumes the supply air fan cycles with the heating or cooling coil
throughout the simulation.
1364 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.8.1.14 Field: Fan Placement

This input field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan
followed by a DX coil. The fan “blows through” the DX coil. The second choice stands for “draw
through fan”. This means that the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a DX coil
followed by a fan. The fan “draws air through” the coil.

1.30.8.1.15 Field: Cooling Convergence Tolerance

This input field defines the convergence tolerance for the unit’s cooling output. This field allows
the user some control over how closely the air conditioner will control the air-side conditions. The
relative size of this parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in
this field will result in tight control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large
value in this field will result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone
air temperature. Initial experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001
as the starting point.
The window air conditioner is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) cooling output to
the zone sensible load (demand). Because the performance of the DX coil is frequently non-linear,
the air conditioner model must call the DX coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper
run time fraction to meet the zone load. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance
used to terminate the iteration procedure when the following equation is satisfied:

|QZoneLoad − QW indowAirConditioner,out )|
≤ Cooling ConvergenceT olerance (1.133)
QZoneLoad
The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above
equation is not satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.

1.30.8.1.16 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Availabil-
ity Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type
and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this window air conditioner or object’s fan.
If the window air conditioner is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and
this input field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers
in the list determine when and if the fan of this window air conditioner object should be on or off.

1.30.8.1.17 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Maximum Air Flow Rate in this Window Air Conditioner zone HVAC object. The scaled Maximum
Air Flow Rate in turn is used to size cooling capacity of the unit.
Following is an example input for the cycling window air conditioner, along with its constituent
components.

ZoneHVAC:WindowAirConditioner ,
Zone3WindAC , ! name of window AC unit
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability Schedule Name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1365

0.6, ! Maximum Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}

0.05, ! Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone3WindACAirInletNode , ! Air Inlet Node Name
Zone3WindACAirOutletNode , ! Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , ! Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone3WindACOAMixer , ! Outdoor Air Mixer Name
Fan:SystemModel , ! Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone3WindACFan , ! Fan Name
Zone3WindACDXCoil , ! DX Cooling Coil Name
CyclingFanSch , ! Supply Air Fan Operation Mode Schedule Name
DrawThrough , ! Fan Placement
0.001 , ! Cooling Convergence Tolerance
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed; ! Cooling Coil Object Type

Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#7
0.0; !- Complex Field \#8

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone3WindACOAMixer , ! Name
Zone3WindACOAMixerOutletNode , ! Mixed Air Node Name
Zone3WindACOAInNode , ! Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone3WindACExhNode , ! Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone3WindACAirInletNode ; ! Return Air Stream Node Name

Fan:SystemModel ,
Zone3WindACFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone3WindACDXOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone3WindACAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.6 , !- Design Maximum Air Flow Rate
Discrete , !- Speed Control Method
0.0, !- Electric Power Minimum Flow Rate Fraction
75.0, !- Design Pressure Rise
0.9 , !- Motor Efficiency
1.0 , !- Motor In Air Stream Fraction
AUTOSIZE , !- Design Electric Power Consumption
TotalEfficiencyAndPressure , !- Design Power Sizing Method
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate
, !- Electric Power Per Unit Flow Rate Per Unit Pressure
0.5; !- Fan Total Efficiency

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone3WindACDXCoil , !- Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
autosize , !- Rated Sensible Heat Ratio
3.0, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone3WindACOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone3WindACDXOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
WindACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve Name
WindACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
WindACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Temperature Curve Name
WindACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Function of Flow Fraction Curve Name
WindACPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name

1.30.8.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Window Air Conditioner Total Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Window Air Conditioner Total Cooling Energy [J]
1366 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Zone Window Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Window Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Window Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Window Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Window Air Conditioner Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Window Air Conditioner Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Window Air Conditioner Fan Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average, Zone Window Air Conditioner Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Window Air Conditioner Fan Availability Status []

1.30.8.2.1 Zone Window Air Conditioner Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction rate of the window air conditioner unit
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the
mass flow rate through the unit.

1.30.8.2.2 Zone Window Air Conditioner Total Cooling Energy [J]

This is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction of the window air conditioner unit from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone
air conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit, and the timestep.

1.30.8.2.3 Zone Window Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the window air conditioner unit from
the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass
flow rate through the unit.

1.30.8.2.4 Zone Window Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the window air conditioner unit from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by the outlet and
zone conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.

1.30.8.2.5 Zone Window Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the latent heat extraction rate of the window air conditioner unit from the zone it
is serving in Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate
through the unit.

1.30.8.2.6 Zone Window Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This is the latent heat extraction of the window air conditioner unit from the zone it is serving in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and
the mass flow rate through the unit.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1367

1.30.8.2.7 Zone Window Air Conditioner Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate of the window air conditioner unit in Watts. The
consumption includes electricity used by the compressor and the fans (indoor supply air fan and the
condenser fan).

1.30.8.2.8 Zone Window Air Conditioner Electricity Energy [J]

This output is the electricity consumption of the window air conditioner unit in Joules for the time
period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor and the fans
(indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan).

1.30.8.2.9 Zone Window Air Conditioner Fan Part Load Ratio []

This is the fan’s part load ratio for the report timestep during which the fan had operated.

1.30.8.2.10 Zone Window Air Conditioner Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This is the part load ratio of the report timestep during which the DX unit compressor had operated.
Zone Window Air Conditioner Fan Availability Status []
This is the availability status of the window air conditioner fan. This status flag is a result of the cal-
culations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object
and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssign-
mentList is an optional input in the window air conditioner object. When a single availability
manager is used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status
reported by the specific availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple
availability managers in an Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Venti-
lation Manager), rules to determine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group –
System Availability Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through
3. These integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3).
Since the status output is averaged, the output result may not correspond to the values described
here when output variable frequencies other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting
frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.9 ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
The packaged terminal air conditioner (PTAC) is a compound object made up of other components.
Each PTAC consists of an outdoor air mixer, direct expansion (DX) cooling coil, heating coil (gas,
electric, hot water, or steam) and a supply air fan. While the figure below shows the PTAC with
draw through fan placement, blow through fan placement can also be modeled by positioning the
supply air fan between the outdoor air mixer and the DX cooling coil. The packaged terminal
air conditioner coordinates the operation of these components and is modeled as a type of zone
equipment (Ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList and ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).
Links to the PTAC’s supply air fan, DX cooling coil, heating coil, and outdoor air mixer specifications
are provided in the air conditioner’s input syntax. Additional inputs include supply and outdoor
air flow rates during cooling operation, heating operation, and when neither cooling or heating is
required. A description of each input field for the packaged terminal air conditioner compound
object is provided below.
1368 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.131: Schematic of a packaged terminal air conditioner with draw through fan placement

1.30.9.1 Inputs

1.30.9.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal air
conditioner. Any reference to this air conditioner by another object will use this name.

1.30.9.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the air
conditioner operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the air
conditioner must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the air conditioner
is available to operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the
air conditioner (all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required. If this field is blank, the schedule
has values of 1 for all time periods.

1.30.9.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node from which the air conditioner draws
its inlet air. This node name must be either the name of a zone air exhaust node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections) to draw air from a zone directly or the name of an induced air outlet
node (Ref. AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum) to draw air from a return plenum, when the zone return
node is connected to a return plenum.

1.30.9.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1369

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node to which the air conditioner
sends its outlet air. This node name must be the name of a zone air inlet node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.9.1.5 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This field specifies the type of outdoor air mixer used by this PTAC. The outdoor air mixer compo-
nent is part of the PTAC unit. The only available outdoor air mixer type is:

– OutdoorAir:Mixer

This input field should be left blank when the PTAC is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not simulated.

1.30.9.1.6 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

This alpha field defines the name of an outdoor air mixer component which composes part of the
PTAC. The return air node of the outdoor air mixer should also be the same node as the air inlet
node of the PTAC. Furthermore, the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node should be the same as the
PTAC’s fan inlet air node (for blow through fan placement) or the PTAC’s DX cooling coil inlet
node (for draw through fan placement). This field should be left blank when the PTAC is connected
to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.9.1.7 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner in cubic meters per
second when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosiz-
able.

1.30.9.1.8 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner in cubic meters per
second when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.30.9.1.9 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner in cubic meters per
second when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., DX coil and heater are off but the supply
air fan operates). This field is only used when the air conditioner’s supply air fan operating mode
schedule specifies continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field
is autosizable. If the air conditioner’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous
fan operation and this value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the
supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the
cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).

1.30.9.1.10 Field: Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner in cubic meters per
second when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this
field is autosizable. Note that the Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate is fixed; it cannot change during
the simulation. In addition, the Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot be greater than the air
1370 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

conditioner’s supply air volumetric flow rate during cooling operation. This field is set to zero flow
when the PTAC is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.9.1.11 Field: Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner in cubic meters per
second when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field
is autosizable. Note that the Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate is fixed; it cannot change during
the simulation. In addition, the Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot be greater than the air
conditioner’s supply air volumetric flow rate during heating operation. This field is set to zero flow
when the PTAC is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.9.1.12 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner in cubic meters per
second when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., cooling and heating coils are off but the
supply air fan operates). Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note
that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is fixed; it cannot change during
the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed cannot be
greater than the air conditioner’s supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed.
This field is only used when the air conditioner’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies
continuous fan operation. If the air conditioner’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies
continuous fan operation and the field ‘Supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating
is needed’ is set to zero or is left blank, then the model assumes that the outdoor air flow rate when
no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil
was last operating (for cooling operation [i.e., Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate] or heating operation
[i.e., Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate]) and this field is not used. This input field is set to zero flow
when the PTAC is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.9.1.13 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of fan used by this PTAC. The only valid choices are
Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, and Fan:ConstantVolume. A fan of type Fan:SystemModel
or Fan:OnOff is used with cycling fan operating mode, and a fan of type Fan:SystemModel or
Fan:ConstantVolume is used with continuous fan operating mode (see Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule field below). The input requirements for these fan objects are described elsewhere
in this document. Note that Fan:SystemModel was added as of version 8.7 and is recommended for
use in new models. Fan:OnOff and Fan:ConstantVolume may be deprecated in a future version.

1.30.9.1.14 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

The name of a constant volume fan component that composes part of the PTAC. Note that the fan’s
maximum flow rate should be greater than or equal to the maximum supply air flow rate for the
PTAC. The fan’s inlet node should be the same as the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node (for blow
through fan placement) or the heating coil’s outlet node (for draw through fan placement). The
fan’s outlet node should be the same as the DX cooling coil’s air inlet node (for blow through fan
placement) or the PTAC’s air outlet node (for draw through fan placement).
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1371

1.30.9.1.15 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of heating coil to be used by this PTAC. The input requirements
for this heating coil object are described elsewhere in this document. The hot water flow modulation
through the heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The
parent object (PTAC) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating water flow. Allowable
heating coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.30.9.1.16 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the heating coil used by this PTAC, and this name should match
the name specified in the corresponding heating coil object.

1.30.9.1.17 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of DX cooling coil used by this PTAC. The input requirements for
these DX cooling coil objects are described elsewhere in this document. Only allowable coil types
are:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed

1.30.9.1.18 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the cooling coil used by this PTAC, and this name should match
the name specified in the corresponding DX cooling coil object.

1.30.9.1.19 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan
followed by the DX cooling coil and heating coil. The fan “blows through” the DX cooling coil and
the heating coil. The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the unit consists
of an outdoor air mixer followed by the DX cooling coil and heating coil with the fan located at the
outlet of the PTAC. The fan “draws air through” the DX cooling coil and the heating coil. If this
field is left blank, the default is draw through.
Note: the packaged terminal air conditioner’s supply air fan, cooling coil and heating coil must
be connected according to the configuration shown above (Figure 1.131) for the draw through fan
configuration. The only other valid configuration is with a blow through fan placement, where the
fan is located between the outdoor air mixer and the DX cooling coil.
1372 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.9.1.20 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote
that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.

1.30.9.1.21 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Avail-
ability Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager
type and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this packaged terminal air conditioner
or object’s fan. If the packaged terminal air conditioner is available (per the Availability Schedule
Name input field above) and this input field has a valid availability manager assignment list name,
then the availability managers in the list determine when and if the fan of this packaged terminal
air conditioner object should be on or off.

1.30.9.1.22 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate in this Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner zone HVAC object. The
scaled Supply Air Flow Rate in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the unit.

1.30.9.1.23 Field: Capacity Control Method

This input denotes how the unit’s output is controlled in order to meet zone heating or cooling
requirement. The choices are None or SingleZoneVAV . For None, the unit varies the fan and/or
coil speed to meet the load. If constant fan operating mode is selected the fan operates at the design
cooling or heating air flow rate while the coil modulates to meet the load. If cycling fan operating
mode is selected the fan and coil modulate in unison to meet the load. For SingleZoneVAV, the
fan air flow rate is reduced to the no load supply air flow rate when the zone sensible load is low
such that the maximum supply air temperature limit is not exceeded. If the unit cannot meet the
load at this lower air flow rate, the fan speed increases while maintaining the maximum supply air
temperature. If the unit still cannot meet the load the unit will operate at the maximum supply air
flow rate and the maximum supply air temperature limit can be exceeded. Supply air temperature
limits are identified in the input fields for Minimum Supply Air Temperature in Cooling Mode and
Maximum Supply Air Temperature in Heating Mode. Additionally, specific coil types are required for
the SingleZoneVAV capacity control method. The cooling coil type is Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
while the heating coil types are Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Heating:Fuel and Coil:Heating:Electric. If
alternate coil types are used they are modeled using the load based control method.

1.30.9.1.24 Field: Minimum Supply Air Temperature in Cooling Mode

When Capacity Control Method = SingleZoneVAV, enter the minimum air temperature limit for
reduced fan speed in cooling mode. For SingleZoneVAV, this field’s minimum supply air temperature
is 0.0◦C. This field is autosizable and the default is autosize.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1373

1.30.9.1.25 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature in Heating Mode

When Capacity Control Method = SingleZoneVAV, enter the maximum air temperature limit for
reduced fan speed in heating mode. For SingleZoneVAV, this field’s minimum supply air temperature
is 0.0◦C. This field is autosizable and the default is autosize.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the packaged terminal air conditioner requires
the following objects in addition to the compound object itself:

1) Fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)

2) DX cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted)
3) Heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:Water, or Coil:Heating:Steam)
4) OutdoorAir:Mixer

ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner ,
Zone2PTAC , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone2PTACAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTACAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone2PTACOAMixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
autosize , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate operation {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone2PTACFan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone2PTACHeatCoil , !- Heating Coil Name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone2PTACDXCoolCoil , !- Cooling Coil Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
SupplyFanSch; !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
SupplyFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 7:00, !- Complex Field \#3
0.0, !- Complex Field \#4
Until: 18:00 , !- Complex Field \#5
1.0, !- Complex Field \#6
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#7
0.0; !- Complex Field \#8

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone2PTACOAMixer , !- Name
Zone2PTACOAMixerOutletNode , !-Mixed Air Node Name
Zone2PTACOAInNode , !-Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTACExhNode , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTACAirInletNode ; !- Return Air Stream Node Name

Fan:OnOff ,
Zone2PTACFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate{m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
1374 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zone2PTACOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name

Zone2PTACFanOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone2PTACDXCoolCoil , !- Coil Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
autosize , !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone2PTACFanOutletNode , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone2PTACCoolCoilOutletNode , !-Coil Air Outlet Node
HPACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of
temperature)
HPACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow
fraction)
HPACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
HPACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)

Coil:Heating:Electric ,
Zone2PTACHeatCoil , !- Coil Name
HeatingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.0, !- Efficiency
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
Zone2PTACCoolCoilOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTACAirOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name

1.30.9.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Availability Status []
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1375

1.30.9.2.1 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner
to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air
conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy
addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.2 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to
the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using
the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate
through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for
the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.3 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air
conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy
extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.4 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using
the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate
through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for
the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.5 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner
outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the
air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results (heating only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.6 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the
air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are
summed for the timestep being reported.
1376 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.9.2.7 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air
conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass
flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.8 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal air condi-
tioner from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated
using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant hu-
midity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling
only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.9 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal air
conditioner to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the
total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent
heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.10 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal air conditioner
to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the
difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the
zone by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.

1.30.9.2.11 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal air
conditioner from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between
the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent
heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.12 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal air condi-
tioner from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1377

as the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to
the zone by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.

1.30.9.2.13 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner in Watts.
The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans
(indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the heating coil (includes electricity consumption
rate for electric heating coil or parasitic electricity consumption rate for non-electric coils). This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for
the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.14 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the packaged terminal air conditioner in Joules
for the time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor
(including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the heating
coil (includes electricity consumption for electric heating coil or parasitic electricity consumption for
non-electric coils). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and
the results are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.15 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average
supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply
air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during
the timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.9.2.16 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Compressor Part Load Ra-
tio []
This output field is the part-load ratio used by the coils (cooling and heating). Part-load ratio is
defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported.

1.30.9.2.17 Zone Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the packaged terminal air conditioner fan. This status flag is a
result of the calculations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAs-
signmentList object and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The Avail-
abilityManagerAssignmentList is an optional input in the packaged terminal air conditioner object.
When a single availability manager is used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also
the availability status reported by the specific availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:*
Outputs). For multiple availability managers in an Availability Manager Assignment List (with or
without Hybrid Ventilation Manager), rules to determine fan availability status are described in the
section ‘Group – System Availability Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using
1378 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and Cy-
cleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged, the output result may not correspond
to the values described here when output variable frequencies other than detailed are used. Use the
“detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the availability status at each
simulation timestep.

1.30.10 ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
The packaged terminal heat pump (PTHP) is a compound object made up of other components.
Each PTHP consists of an outdoor air mixer, direct expansion (DX) cooling coil, DX heating coil,
supply air fan, and a supplemental heating coil as shown in the figure below. These individual
components are described elsewhere in this document. The packaged terminal heat pump coordi-
nates the operation of these components and is modeled as a type of zone equipment (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentList and ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

Figure 1.132: Schematic of a packaged terminal heat pump (draw through fan placement)

Links to the PTHP’s supply air fan, DX coils, supplemental heating coil, and outdoor air mixer
specifications are provided in the heat pump’s input syntax. Additional inputs include supply and
outdoor air flow rates during cooling operation, heating operation, and when neither cooling or
heating is required. A description of each input field for the packaged terminal heat pump compound
object is provided below.

1.30.10.1 Inputs

1.30.10.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal heat
pump. Any reference to this heat pump by another object will use this name.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1379

1.30.10.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat
pump operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump
must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the heat pump is available to
operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the heat pump
(all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1
for all time periods.

1.30.10.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node from which the heat pump draws
its inlet air. This node name must be either the name of a zone air exhaust node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections) to draw air from a zone directly or the name of an induced air outlet
node (Ref. AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum) to draw air from a return plenum, when the zone return
node is connected to a return plenum.

1.30.10.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node to which the heat pump sends
its outlet air. This node name must be the name of a zone air inlet node (Ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.10.1.5 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This field specifies the type of outdoor air mixer used by this PTHP. The outdoor air mixer compo-
nent is part of the PTHP compound object. The only available outdoor air mixer type is:

– OutdoorAir:Mixer

This input field should be left blank when the PTHP is connected to an AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not
simulated.

1.30.10.1.6 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

This alpha field defines the name of an outdoor air mixer component which composes part of the
PTHP. Note that the return air node of the outdoor air mixer should also be the same node as the
air inlet node of the PTHP. Furthermore, the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node should be the same
as the PTHP’s fan inlet air node (for blow through fan placement) or the PTHP’s DX cooling coil
inlet node (for draw through fan placement). This field should be left blank when the PTHP is
connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.10.1.7 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.30.10.1.8 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0
or this field is autosizable.
1380 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.10.1.9 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode
schedule specifies continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this
field is autosizable. If the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous
fan operation and this value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the
supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the
cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).

1.30.10.1.10 Field: Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per
second when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this
field is autosizable. Note that the Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate is fixed; it cannot change during
the simulation. In addition, the Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot be greater than the heat
pump’s supply air volumetric flow rate during cooling operation. This field is set to zero flow when
the PTHP is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.10.1.11 Field: Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per
second when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater
than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate is fixed;
it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot be
greater than the heat pump’s supply air volumetric flow rate during heating operation. This field is
set to zero flow when the PTHP is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.10.1.12 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note
that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is fixed; it cannot change during
the simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed cannot be
greater than the heat pump’s supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed. This
field is only used when the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous
fan operation. If the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan
operation and the field ‘Supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed’ is set to
zero or is left blank, then the model assumes that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating
is needed is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for
cooling operation [i.e., Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate] or heating operation [i.e., Heating Outdoor
Air Flow Rate]) and this field is not used. This field is set to zero flow when the heat pump is
connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.10.1.13 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of fan used by this PTHP. The only valid choices are Fan:OnOff and
Fan:ConstantVolume. A fan of type Fan:OnOff may be used with either cycling or continuous fan
operating mode, and a fan of type Fan:ConstantVolume is used only with continuous fan operating
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1381

mode (see Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule field below). The input requirements for these
fan objects are described elsewhere in this document.

1.30.10.1.14 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

The name of a constant volume fan component that composes part of the PTHP. Note that the fan’s
maximum flow rate should be greater than or equal to the maximum supply air flow rate for the
PTHP. The fan’s inlet node should be the same as the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node (for blow
through fan placement) or the DX heating coil’s outlet node (for draw through fan placement). The
fan’s outlet node should be the same as the DX cooling coil’s air inlet node (for blow through fan
placement) or the supplemental heater’s air inlet node (for draw through fan placement).

1.30.10.1.15 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of DX heating coil to be used by this PTHP. The only valid
choice are Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed and Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed. The input
requirements for this DX heating coil object are described elsewhere in this document.

1.30.10.1.16 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the DX heating coil used by this PTHP, and this name should
match the name specified in the corresponding DX heating coil object.

1.30.10.1.17 Field: Heating Convergence Tolerance

This numeric field defines the convergence tolerance for the unit’s heating output. This field allows
the user some control over how closely the heat pump will control the air-side conditions. The
relative size of this parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in
this field will result in tight control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large
value in this field will result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone
air temperature. Initial experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001
as the starting point.
The heat pump is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) heating output to the zone
sensible load (demand). Because the performance of the DX heating coil is frequently non-linear,
the heat pump model must call the DX heating coil model several times (iterate) to determine the
proper run time fraction to meet the zone load. The heating convergence tolerance is the error
tolerance used to terminate the iteration procedure when the following equation is satisfied:

|(QZoneLoad − QHeatP ump,out )|

≤ Heating ConvergenceT olerance (1.134)
QZoneLoad

The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above
equation is not satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.

1.30.10.1.18 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of DX cooling coil used by this PTHP. The input requirements for
these DX cooling coil objects are described elsewhere in this document. Only allowable coil types
are:
1382 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed

1.30.10.1.19 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the cooling coil used by this PTHP, and this name should match
the name specified in the corresponding DX cooling coil object.

1.30.10.1.20 Field: Cooling Convergence Tolerance

This numeric field defines the convergence tolerance for the unit’s cooling output. This field allows
the user some control over how closely the heat pump will control the air-side conditions. The
relative size of this parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in
this field will result in tight control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large
value in this field will result in looser controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone
air temperature. Initial experience with this parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001
as the starting point.
The heat pump is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) cooling output to the zone
sensible load (demand). Because the performance of the DX cooling coil is frequently non-linear, the
heat pump model must call the DX cooling coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper
run time fraction to meet the zone load. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance
used to terminate the iteration procedure when the following equation is satisfied:

|(QZoneLoad − QHeatP ump,out )|

≤ Cooling ConvergenceT olerance (1.135)
QZoneLoad
The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above
equation is not satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.

1.30.10.1.21 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of supplemental heating coil to be used by this PTHP. The input
requirements for these heating coil objects are described elsewhere in this document. The hot water
and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to support the
heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation
through the supplemental heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil
object. The parent object (PTHP) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating water flow.
Allowable coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.30.10.1.22 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the supplemental heating coil used by this PTHP, and this name
should match the name specified in the corresponding heating coil object.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1383

1.30.10.1.23 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental

Heater
This numeric field defines the maximum supply air temperature in degrees Celsius exiting the heat
pump supplemental heater coil. The supplemental heater will be controlled so that its supply air
temperature does not exceed this value. This field is autosizable.

1.30.10.1.24 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature in degrees Celsius for PTHP
supplemental heater operation. The supplemental heater will not operate when the outdoor dry-bulb
temperature is above this value. The maximum value must be less than or equal to 21◦C. If this
field is left blank, the default value is 21◦C.

1.30.10.1.25 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan
followed by the DX coils and supplemental heating coil. The fan “blows through” the cooling and
heating coils. The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the unit consists
of an outdoor air mixer followed by the DX coil(s) followed by a fan, with the supplemental heater
located at the outlet of the fan. The fan “draws air through” the DX coil(s). If this field is left
blank, the default is draw through.
Note: the packaged terminal heat pump’s supply air fan, cooling coil, heating coil and supplementary
heating coil must be connected according to the configuration shown above (Figure 1.132) for the
draw through fan configuration. The only other valid configuration is with a blow through fan
placement, where the fan is located between the outdoor air mixer and the DX cooling coil.

1.30.10.1.26 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote
that the supply air fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
If this field is left blank, the model assumes the supply air fan cycles with the heating or cooling coil
throughout the simulation.

1.30.10.1.27 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Avail-
ability Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager
type and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this packaged terminal heat pump or
object’s fan. If the packaged terminal heat pump is available (per the Availability Schedule Name
input field above) and this input field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then
the availability managers in the list determine when and if the fan of this packaged terminal heat
pump object should be on or off.
1384 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.10.1.28 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate in this PTHP zone HVAC object. The scaled Supply Air Flow Rate
in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the unit.

1.30.10.1.29 Field: Capacity Control Method

This input denotes how the unit’s output is controlled in order to meet zone heating or cooling
requirement. The choices are None or SingleZoneVAV . For None, the unit varies the fan and/or
coil speed to meet the load. If constant fan operating mode is selected the fan operates at the design
cooling or heating air flow rate while the coil modulates to meet the load. If cycling fan operating
mode is selected the fan and coil modulate in unison to meet the load. For SingleZoneVAV, the
fan air flow rate is reduced to the no load supply air flow rate when the zone sensible load is low
such that the maximum supply air temperature limit is not exceeded. If the unit cannot meet the
load at this lower air flow rate, the fan speed increases while maintaining the maximum supply air
temperature. If the unit still cannot meet the load the unit will operate at the maximum supply air
flow rate and the maximum supply air temperature limit can be exceeded. Supply air temperature
limits are identified in the input fields for Minimum Supply Air Temperature in Cooling Mode and
Maximum Supply Air Temperature in Heating Mode. Additionally, specific coil types are required for
the SingleZoneVAV capacity control method. The cooling coil type is Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
while the heating coil type is Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed.

1.30.10.1.30 Field: Minimum Supply Air Temperature in Cooling Mode

When Capacity Control Method = SingleZoneVAV, enter the minimum air temperature limit for
reduced fan speed in cooling mode. For SingleZoneVAV, this field’s minimum supply air temperature
is 0.0◦C. This field is autosizable and the default is autosize.

1.30.10.1.31 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature in Heating Mode

When Capacity Control Method = SingleZoneVAV, enter the maximum air temperature limit for
reduced fan speed in heating mode. For SingleZoneVAV, this field’s minimum supply air temperature
is 0.0◦C. This field is autosizable and the default is autosize.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the packaged terminal heat pump requires
the following objects in addition to the compound object itself:

1) Fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)

2) DX cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted)
3) DX heating coil (Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed)
4) Supplemental heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel or Coil:Heating:Electric)
5) OutdoorAir:Mixer

ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump ,
Zone2PTHP , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone2PTHPAirInletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1385

Zone2PTHPAirOutletNode , !- Air Outlet Node Name

OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Zone2PTHPOAMixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
autosize , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone2PTHPFan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoil , !- Heating Coil Name
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence Tolerance {dimensionless}
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Zone2PTHPDXCoolCoil , !- Cooling Coil Name
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence Tolerance {dimensionless}
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Zone2PTHPSupHeater , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater {C}
10.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater
Operation {C}
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
CyclingFanSch; !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- ScheduleType
Through: 12/31 , !- Complex Field \#1
For: AllDays , !- Complex Field \#2
Until: 24:00 , !- Complex Field \#7
0.0; !- Complex Field \#8

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone2PTHPOAMixer , !- Name
Zone2PTHPOAMixerOutletNode , !-Mixed Air Node Name
Zone2PTHPOAInNode , !-Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTHPExhNode , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone2PTHPAirInletNode ; !- Return Air Stream Node Name

Fan:OnOff ,
Zone2PTHPFan , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Zone2PTHPOAMixerOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTHPFanOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Zone2PTHPDXCoolCoil , !- Coil Name
CoolingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
autosize , !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone2PTHPFanOutletNode , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone2PTHPCoolCoilOutletNode , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
HPACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of
temperature)
HPACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow
fraction)
HPACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
HPACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACPLFFPLR; !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)

COIL:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed ,
1386 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoil , !- Coil Name

HeatingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
autosize , !- Rated Total Heating Capacity {W}
2.75, !- Rated COP
autosize , !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
Zone2PTHPCoolCoilOutletNode , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoilOutletNode , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
HPACHeatCapFT , !- Total heating capacity modifier curve (function of temperature
)
HPACHeatCapFFF , !- Total heating capacity modifier curve (function of flow
fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT , !- Energy input ratio modifier curve (function of temperature)
HPACHeatEIRFFF , !- Energy input ratio modifier curve (function of flow fraction)
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR , !- Part load fraction correlation (function of part load ratio)
, !- Defrost energy input ratio modifier curve (function of
temperature)
2.0, !- Minimum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation
{C}
5.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation {C}
200.0 , !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
10.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater
Operation {C}
Resistive , !- Defrost Strategy
TIMED , !- Defrost Control
0.166667 , !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
20000; !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}

Coil:Heating:Electric ,
Zone2PTHPSupHeater , !- Name
HeatingCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
1.0, !- Efficiency
autosize , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
Zone2PTHPDXHeatCoilOutletNode , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone2PTHPAirOutletNode ; !- Air Outlet Node Name

1.30.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Availability Status []
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1387

1.30.10.2.1 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat
pump outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.2 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.

1.30.10.2.3 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat pump
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat
pump outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.4 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump from
the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.

1.30.10.2.5 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone
it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet
air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat
pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(heating only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.6 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it
is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air
mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the
timestep being reported.
1388 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.10.2.7 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat
pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass
flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.8 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using
the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity
ratio, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are
summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.9 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat
pump to the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total
energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.10 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump
to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the
difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone
by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.11 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat
pump from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the
total energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat
extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.12 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as
the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the
zone by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep
being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being
reported.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1389

1.30.10.2.13 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the packaged terminal heat pump in Watts.
The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans
(indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for
the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.14 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the packaged terminal heat pump in Joules for the
time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including
crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating
coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.15 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average
supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply
air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during
the timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.16 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part Load Ratio
[]
This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating).
Compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the timestep being reported.

1.30.10.2.17 Zone Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the packaged terminal heat pump fan. This status flag is a result of
the calculations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
object and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAs-
signmentList is an optional input in the packaged terminal heat pump object. When a single
availability manager is used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availabil-
ity status reported by the specific availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For
multiple availability managers in an Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid
Ventilation Manager), rules to determine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group –
System Availability Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through
3. These integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3).
Since the status output is averaged, the output result may not correspond to the values described
here when output variable frequencies other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting
frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.
1390 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.11 ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet
The ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet object works in conjunction with one or multiple air
chillers, compressor racks, refrigeration systems, or refrigeration secondary system objects
(Ref. Refrigeration:AirChiller Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigeration:System, or Refrigera-
tion:SecondarySystem) to simulate the performance of a group of air chillers cooling a single zone.
The chiller set model passes information about the zone conditions to determine the performance
of individual chiller coils within the set, thus providing the sensible and latent heat exchange with
the zone environment.
The refrigeration chiller set object inputs include a name, an availability schedule name, the name
of the zone cooled by the chiller set, the air inlet node name, the air outlet node name, and an
extensible list of air chiller names (Ref. Refrigeration:AirChiller).

1.30.11.1 Inputs

1.30.11.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration chiller. Any reference to this refrig-
eration chiller by another object (may be listed in a Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList, Refrigera-
tion:System, Refrigeration:SecondarySystem, or Refrigeration:CompressorRack) will use this name.

1.30.11.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigeration chiller can operate
during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (maximum schedule value of 1.0 is
typically used) indicates that the refrigeration chiller will operate during a given time period. A
value equal to 0 denotes that the case does not operate (everything is OFF: refrigeration, fans,
lights, anti-sweat, etc.). Typically the refrigeration chiller will operate throughout the day (i.e.,
the schedule will contain 1 for all time periods); however, refrigeration chillers require maintenance
and/or cleaning and this can be modeled accordingly using this schedule if desired. If this field is
left blank, the default schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.30.11.1.3 Field: Zone Name

A unique user-assigned name for the zone cooled by this refrigeration chiller. This zone must
represent a conditioned space, that is, it must appear in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object.

1.30.11.1.4 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

Not used, reserved for future use. Current version exchanges energy directly with the zone, external
of any air system. (Future: The name of the zone exhaust node (see Node) from which the refriger-
ation chiller draws its indoor air. This should be one of the zone exhaust nodes for the zone cooled
by the chiller set.)

1.30.11.1.5 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

Not used, reserved for future use. Current version exchanges energy directly with the zone, external
of any air system. (Future: The name of the node where the chiller coil sends its outlet air, which
must be one of the inlet air nodes for the zone which is being cooled.)
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1391

1.30.11.1.6 Field: Air Chiller #1 Name

The name of the first air chiller that will be used to meet the zone cooling load.

1.30.11.1.7 Field: Air Chiller #2 Name

The name of the second air chiller that will be used to meet the zone cooling load.

1.30.11.1.8 Field: Air Chiller #3 Name

The name of the third air chiller that will be used to meet the zone cooling load.

1.30.11.1.9 Field: Air Chiller #n Name

The name of the nth air chiller that will be used to meet the zone cooling load. This object is
extensible, so additional fields of this type can be added to the end of this object.
The following is an example input for a refrigeration chiller set.

ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet ,
SubFreezerChillerSet , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
SubFreezer , !- Zone Name
NODE_142 , !- Air Inlet Node Name
NODE_141 , !- Air Outlet Node Name
SubFreezerAirChiller_1 , !- Air Chiller \#1 Name
SubFreezerAirChiller_2 , !- Air Chiller \#2 Name
SubFreezerAirChiller_3 ; !- Air Chiller \#3 Name

There are no outputs variables for a ZoneHVAC:RefrigerationChillerSet. Outputs for the refrigera-
tion impact on any zone are listed in the Group:Refrigeration.

1.30.12 ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump
The zone water-to-air heat pump is a compound component consisting of a fan, water-to-air cooling
and heating coils, and a supplemental heating coil. Links to the fan, WaterToAirHeatPump cooling
coil, WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil, and supplementary heating coil specifications are provided
in the heat pump’s input data syntax. The heat pump switches between cooling and heating de-
pending on the zone’s demand. The load side (air) of the zone water-to-air heat pump consists of an
On/Off fan component, a WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil component, a WaterToAirHeatPump
heating coil component, and a Gas or Electric supplemental heating coil component. The source
side (water) of the heat pump is connected to a condenser loop with a heat exchanger (ground
heat exchanger or other type) or a plant loop with a heating source such as a boiler and a cooling
source such as a chiller or cooling tower. The diagram below shows the setup and connection of
the heat pump for the source side and load side for a ground heat exchanger configuration. Note
that on the load side, the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil must always be placed before the
WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil.
For this zone heat pump,there are two types of WaterToAirHeatPump coil model allowed:

– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
1392 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.133: Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Schematic for a DrawThrough Configuration with
Ground Heat Exchanger
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1393

1.30.12.1 Inputs

1.30.12.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the zone system heat pump.

1.30.12.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat
pump operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump
must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the heat pump is available to
operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the heat pump
(all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1
for all time periods.

1.30.12.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node from which the heat pump draws its
inlet air. This node must be a zone exhaust node as specified in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
object.

1.30.12.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node to which the heat pump sends its
outlet air. This node must be a zone inlet node as specified in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
object.

1.30.12.1.5 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This field specifies the type of outdoor air mixer used by this WaterToAirHeatPump unit. The
outdoor air mixer component is part of the WaterToAirHeatPump compound object. The only
available outdoor air mixer type is:

– OutdoorAir:Mixer

This input field should be left blank when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to an AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is not simulated.

1.30.12.1.6 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

This alpha field defines the name of an outdoor air mixer component which composes part of the
zone WaterToAirHeatPump. The return air stream node of the outdoor air mixer should also be the
same node as the air inlet node of the WaterToAirHeatPump. Furthermore, the outdoor air mixer’s
mixed air node should be the same as the WaterToAirHeatPump’s fan inlet air node (for blow
through fan placement) or the WaterToAirHeatPump’s cooling coil inlet node (for draw through fan
placement). This input field should be left blank when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to
an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer object is
not simulated.

1.30.12.1.7 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.
1394 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.12.1.8 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0
or this field is autosizable.

1.30.12.1.9 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode
schedule specifies continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this
field is autosizable. If the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous
fan operation and this value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the
supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the
cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).

1.30.12.1.10 Field: Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per
second when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this
field is autosizable. Note that the outside air flow rate during cooling operation is fixed; it cannot
change during the simulation. In addition, the outside air flow rate during cooling operation cannot
be greater than the heat pump’s supply air flow rate during cooling operation. This input field is
set to zero flow when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object.

1.30.12.1.11 Field: Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per
second when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater
than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the outside air flow rate during heating
operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the outside air flow rate
during heating operation cannot be greater than the heat pump’s supply air flow rate during heating
operation. This input field is set to zero flow when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to an
AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.12.1.12 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heat-
ing is Needed
This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note
that the no load outdoor air flow rate cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the no load
outdoor air flow rate cannot be greater than the heat pump’s no load supply air flow rate. This
field is only used when the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous
fan operation. If the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan
operation and the field “No Load Supply Air Flow Rate” is set to zero or is left blank, then the
model assumes that the no load outdoor air flow rate is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the
cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation [i.e., Cooling outdoor air flow rate]
or heating operation [i.e., Heating outdoor air flow rate]) and this field is not used. This input field
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1395

is set to zero flow when the WaterToAirHeatPump is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer

object.

1.30.12.1.13 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified in the heat pump. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff.

1.30.12.1.14 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump supply air fan, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding fan object.

1.30.12.1.15 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the heat pump. The only
valid types are Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSp

1.30.12.1.16 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil, and
should match the name specified in the corresponding WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil object.

1.30.12.1.17 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the heat pump. The only valid
types are Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit and Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpe

1.30.12.1.18 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil, and
should match the name specified in the corresponding WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil object.

1.30.12.1.19 Field: Maximum Cycling Rate

This numeric field contains the maximum on-off cycling rate for the compressor, which occurs at
50% run time fraction. Suggested values are shown below (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.134:

1.30.12.1.20 Field: Heat Pump Time Constant

This numeric field contains the time constant for the cooling coil’s capacity to reach steady state
after startup. Suggested values are shown below (Henderson et al. 1999):
1396 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.135:

1.30.12.1.21 Field: Fraction of On-Cycle Power Use

This numeric field contains the fraction of on-cycle power use to adjust the part load fraction based
on the off-cycle power consumption due to crankcase heaters, controls, fans, and etc. Suggested
value values are below (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.136:

1.30.12.1.22 Field: Heat Pump Fan Delay Time

This numeric field contains the time delay in seconds for the heat pump supply air fan to shut off after
compressor cycle off. This value can be obtained from the manufacturer or the heat pump catalog.
Suggested value is 60 seconds. This value is disregared at times when the WaterToAirHeatPump’s
fan operating mode schedule value is greater than 0 (i.e., continuous fan mode).

1.30.12.1.23 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This is the object type of the supplemental heating coil. The hot water and steam heating coils
require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to support the heating coils, and are
placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation through the supplemental
heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The parent object
(Zone Water to Air Heat Pump) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating water flow.
The valid choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1397

– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.30.12.1.24 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the supplemental heating coil, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding supplemental heating coil object.

1.30.12.1.25 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental

Heater
This numeric field defines the maximum allowed supply air temperature exiting the heat pump
supplemental heating coil in degrees Celsius. If this input field is left blank, the value defaults to
autosize.

1.30.12.1.26 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature in degrees Celsius above which the
heat pump supplemental heating coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less
than or equal to 21◦C. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 21◦C.

1.30.12.1.27 Field: Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the outdoor node which controls the operation of the supple-
mental heating coil. If this field is left blank, the outdoor temperature is based solely on the weather
data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must also be listed in an OutdoorAir:Node
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor temperature
from the weather data. Alternately, the node name must be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList
object where the outdoor temperature is taken directly from the weather data.

1.30.12.1.28 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice represents a
blow through system where the supply air fan is before the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling/heating
coil and the supplementary heating coil. The second choice represents a draw through system where
the supply fan is between the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling/heating coil and the supplementary
heating coil. If this input field is left blank, the default is blow through.

1.30.12.1.29 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote
that the supply air fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
If this field is left blank, the model assumes the supply air fan cycles with the heating or cooling coil
throughout the simulation.
As shown in the example below, correct specifications of the WatertoAirHeatPump requires specifi-
cation of the following objects in addition to the ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump object:
1398 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– On/Off fan
– WatertoAirHeatPump cooling coil (EquationFit only)
– WatertoAirHeatPump heating coil (EquationFit only)
– Supplementary heating coil
– Outdoor air mixer
– Condenser loop or plant loop demand branches

1.30.12.1.30 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Availabil-
ity Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type
and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this WatertoAirHeatPump or object’s fan.
If the WatertoAirHeatPump is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and
this input field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers
in the list determine when and if the fan of this WatertoAirHeatPump object should be on or off.

1.30.12.1.31 Field: Heat Pump Coil Water Flow Mode

This field specifies the way in which water flow through the heat pump coils will be modeled. This
field is only used when WatertoAirHeatPump:EquationFit coils are used. There are three options:

– Cycling
– Constant
– CyclingOnDemand

Cycling varies water flow through the coil based on the heat pump Part Load Ratio. This control
method is appropriate for modeling heat pumps that are outfitted with a soleniod valve which allows
water to flow through the coil only when the compressor is active. This is the default for EnergyPlus
V8 and later.
Constant provides a constant water flow regardless of heat pump operation. Remember that En-
ergyPlus has two coils (a heating coil and a cooling coil) to approximate the operation of one coil
that can operate in either heating mode or cooling mode. Therefore, when the water flow mode is
constant, there will be full flow through either the heating coil or the cooling coil, but not both at
the same time.
ConstantOnDemand provides full flow through the coil whenever there is a load. When there is
no load, there is zero flow through the coil. This control strategy represents the way EnergyPlus
modeled heat pump water flow prior to Version 8.

1.30.12.1.32 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate in this Water To Air Heat Pump zone HVAC object. The scaled
Supply Air Flow Rate in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the unit.
Examples of IDF use:
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1399

ZoneHVAC:WaterToAirHeatPump ,
Zone1WTAHP , !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor air mixer object type
Zone 1 Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Name
Autosize , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Zone 1 Fan , !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump :EquationFit , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Sys 1 Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Heating Coil Name
Coil:Cooling: WaterToAirHeatPump :EquationFit , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Sys 1 Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Cooling Coil Name
2.5, !- Maximum Cycling Rate
60.0, !- Heat Pump Time Constant
0.01, !- Fraction of On -Cycle Power Use
60, !- Heat Pump Fan Delay Time
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
60.0, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater {C}
20.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater Operation
{C}
Sys 1 Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
CyclingFanSch; !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , !- Field 3
0.0; !- Field 4

Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump :EquationFit ,

Sys 1 Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Name
Sys 1 Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Sys 1 Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Sys 1 Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Sys 1 SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
Autosize , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize , !- Rated Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
Autosize , !- Rated Heating Capacity {W}
4.75, !- Rated Heating Coefficient of Performance
-1.361311959 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 1
-2.471798046 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 2
4.173164514 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 3
0.640757401 , !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 4
0.0, !- Heating Capacity Coefficient 5
-2.176941116 , !- Heating Power Consumption Coefficient 1
0.832114286 , !- Heating Power Consumption Coefficient 2
1.570743399 , !- Heating Power Consumption Coefficient 3
0.690793651 , !- Heating Power Consumption Coefficient 4
0.0; !- Heating Power Consumption Coefficient 5

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Zone 1 Mixer , !- Name
Sys 1 Mixed Air Node , !- Mixed Air Node Name
Sys 1 Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Air Stream Node Name
Sys 1 Relief Air Outlet Node , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node; !- Return Air Stream Node Name

Fan:OnOff ,
1400 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zone 1 Fan , !- Name

FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
300.0 , !- Pressure Rise {Pa}
Autosize , !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Sys 1 Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Sys 1 Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Air Outlet Node Name

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency
32000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
Sys 1 SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Inlet Node; !-Air Outlet Node Name

BRANCH ,
Gshp Cooling Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Cooling: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name

BRANCH ,
Gshp Heating Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name

1.30.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Fan Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Fan Availability Status []
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1401

1.30.12.2.1 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump
outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only)
are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.2 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat
pump, and the HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time
step being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the time step being
reported.

1.30.12.2.3 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump from
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat
pump outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction
only) are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.4 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Total Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the Water to Air Heat Pump from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through
the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
time step being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the time step
being reported.

1.30.12.2.5 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone it
is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet
air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat
pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results
(heating only) are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.6 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the sensible heat addition of the Water to Air Heat Pump to the zone it is serving
in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow
rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation time step. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the time
step being reported.
1402 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.12.2.7 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the
heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate
through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated,
and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.8 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the Water to Air Heat Pump from
the zone it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated using the
enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio,
the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation time step. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are
summed for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.9 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Heating Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy
rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are
averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.10 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Heating Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the Water to Air Heat Pump to
the zone it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated as the
difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the
zone by the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step
being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the time step being
reported.

1.30.12.2.11 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Cooling Rate [W]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total
energy rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction
only) are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.12 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the Water to Air Heat Pump
from the zone it is serving in Joules over the time step being reported. This value is calculated as
the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the
zone by the WaterToAirHP heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step
being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the time step being
reported.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1403

1.30.12.2.13 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the Water to Air Heat Pump in Watts. The
consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor
supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value is
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.14 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the Water to Air Heat Pump in Joules for the
time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including
crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating
coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the
results are summed for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.15 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Fan Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average
supply air mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply
air mass flow rate depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during
the time step. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the
results are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.16 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Compressor Part Load Ratio []
This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating).
Compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the time step being reported.

1.30.12.2.17 Zone Water to Air Heat Pump Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the zone water source heat pump fan. This status flag is a result of
the calculations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
object and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAs-
signmentList is an optional input in the zone water source heat pump object. When a single avail-
ability manager is used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status
reported by the specific availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple
availability managers in an Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Venti-
lation Manager), rules to determine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group –
System Availability Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through
3. These integers represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3).
Since the status output is averaged, the output result may not correspond to the values described
here when output variable frequencies other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting
frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object) to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.13 ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX
This object can be used for modeling conventional mechanical dehumidifiers. These systems use a
direct expansion (DX) cooling coil to cool and dehumidify an airstream. Heat from the DX system’s
1404 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

condenser section is rejected into the cool/dehumidified airstream, resulting in warm dry air being
supplied from the unit. In EnergyPlus, this object is modeled as a type of zone equipment (ref.
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList and ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

Figure 1.137: Schematic of a mechanical dehumidifier

The model has inputs for water removal, energy factor and air flow rate at rated conditions (26.7◦C,
60% RH). Curve objects must be specified to describe performance at off-rated conditions. A part-
load cycling curve input must also be specified to account for inefficiencies due to cycling. Other
inputs including minimum and maximum operating temperatures for dehumidifier operation, off-
cycle parasitic load, and an input to direct the removed water to a storage tank.
The model assumes that this equipment dehumidifies and heats the air. If used in tandem with an-
other system that cools and dehumidifies the zone air, then the zone dehumidifier should be specified
as the lowest cooling priority in the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object for best control of zone tem-
perature and humidity levels (e.g., if there are 3 pieces of equipment in ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList,
then the zone dehumidifier should have Cooling Priority = 3). With this zone equipment prioriti-
zation, the other cooling and dehumidification system would operate first to meet the temperature
setpoint (and possibly meet the high humidity setpoint as well). If additional dehumidification is
needed, then the zone dehumidifier would operate. The sensible heat generated by the dehumidifier
is carried over to the zone air heat balance for the next HVAC time step.

1.30.13.1 Inputs

1.30.13.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a zone DX dehumidifier unit. Any reference to this
dehumidifier by another object will use this name.

1.30.13.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1405

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the dehumid-
ifier operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the dehumidifier
will not operate for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the dehumidifier is avail-
able to operate during that time period. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for
all time periods.

1.30.13.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node from which the dehumidifier
draws its inlet air. This node name must be the name of a zone air exhaust node (ref.
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.13.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node to which the dehumidifier sends
its outlet air. This node name must be the name of a zone air inlet node (ref. Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.13.1.5 Field: Rated Water Removal

This numeric input is the full load water removal rate, in liters per day, at rated conditions (air
entering the dehumidifier at 26.7◦C [80°F] dry-bulb and 60% relative humidity, and air flow rate as
defined by field “Rated Air Flow Rate” below). This is a required input field and the entered value
must be greater than zero.

1.30.13.1.6 Field: Rated Energy Factor

This numeric input is the energy factor (liters of water removed per kWh of electricity consumed) at
rated conditions (air entering the dehumidifier at 26.7◦C [80°F] dry-bulb and 60% relative humidity,
and air flow rate as defined by field “Rated Air Flow Rate” below). This is a required input field
and the entered value must be greater than zero.

1.30.13.1.7 Field: Rated Air Flow Rate

This numeric input is the volumetric air flow rate through the dehumidifier, in m3 per second, at
rated conditions (air entering the dehumidifier at 26.7◦C [80°F] dry-bulb and 60% relative humidity).
This is a required input field and the entered value must be greater than zero.

1.30.13.1.8 Field: Water Removal Curve Name

This alpha field defines the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that
parameterizes the variation of water removal as a function of the dry-bulb temperature (◦C) and rel-
ative humidity (%) of the air entering the dehumidifier. The output of this curve is multiplied by the
Rated Water Removal to give the water removal of the dehumidifier at specific operating conditions
(i.e., at temperatures and relative humidity levels different from the rating point conditions). The
curve should be normalized to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point (air entering the dehumidifier
at 26.7◦C [80°F] dry-bulb and 60% relative humidity, and air flow rate as defined by field “Rated
Air Flow Rate” above).
1406 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.13.1.9 Field: Energy Factor Curve Name

This alpha field defines the name of a biquadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that
parameterizes the variation of the energy factor as a function of the dry-bulb temperature (◦C) and
relative humidity (%) of the air entering the dehumidifier. The output of this curve is multiplied by
the Rated Energy Factor to give the energy factor of the dehumidifier at specific operating conditions
(i.e., at temperatures and relative humidity levels different from the rating point conditions). The
curve should be normalized to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point (air entering the dehumidifier
at 26.7◦C [80°F] dry-bulb and 60% relative humidity, and air flow rate as defined by field “Rated
Air Flow Rate” above).

1.30.13.1.10 Field: Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name

This alpha field defines the name of a quadratic or cubic performance curve (ref: Performance
Curves) that parameterizes the variation of electrical power input to the dehumidifier as a function
of the part load ratio (PLR, defined as the water removal load to be met (kg/s) divided by the
dehumidifier’s water removal rate (kg/s) at the current operating conditions). The part load fraction
(PLF) correlation accounts for efficiency losses due to compressor cycling.
The part load fraction correlation should be normalized to a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio
equals 1.0 (i.e., no efficiency losses when the dehumidifier runs continuously for the simulation
timestep). For PLR values between 0 and 1 (0 < = PLR < 1), the following rules apply:
0.7 < = PLF < = 1.0 and PLF > = PLR
If PLF < 0.7 a warning message is issued, the program resets the PLF value to 0.7, and the simulation
proceeds. The runtime fraction of the dehumidifier is defined as PLR/PLF. If PLF < PLR, then a
warning message is issued and the runtime fraction of the dehumidifier is set to 1.0.
Mechanical dehumidifier typically have long runtimes with minimal compressor cycling. So, a typical
part load fraction correlation might be:
PLF = 0.95 + 0.05(PLR)
If the user wishes to model no efficiency degradation due to compressor cycling, the part load fraction
correlation should be defined as follows:
PLF = 1.0 + 0.0(PLR)

1.30.13.1.11 Field: Minimum Dry-Bulb Temperature for Dehumidifier Opera-

tion
This numeric field defines the minimum inlet air dry-bulb temperature for dehumidifier operation.
The dehumidifier will not operate if the inlet air temperature is below this value. This input value
must be less than the Maximum Dry-Bulb Temperature for Dehumidifier Operation, and the default
value is 10◦C.

1.30.13.1.12 Field: Maximum Dry-Bulb Temperature for Dehumidifier Opera-

tion
This numeric field defines the maximum inlet air dry-bulb temperature for dehumidifier operation.
The dehumidifier will not operate if the inlet air temperature is above this value. This input value
must be greater than the Minimum Dry-Bulb Temperature for Dehumidifier Operation, and the
default value is 35◦C.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1407

1.30.13.1.13 Field: Off-Cycle Parasitic Electric Load

This numeric field contains the off-cycle parasitic electric power in Watts. This is the parasitic
electric power consumed by controls or other electrical devices associated with the dehumidifier.
This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the dehumidifier is available to operate, but is not
operating. The model assumed that this parasitic power contributes to heating the zone air (i.e.,
affects the zone air heat balance). The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value is
also 0.0 if this field is left blank.

1.30.13.1.14 Field: Condensate Collection Water Storage Tank Name

This field is optional. It is used to specify where condensate from the dehumidifier is collected. If
blank or omitted, then any water (condensate) removed is discarded. Enter the name of a Water
Storage Tank (ref. WaterUse:Storage) object defined elsewhere and the condensate will then be
collected in that tank.
Following is an example input for a zone DX dehumidifier object. A ZoneControl:Humidistat object
must also be specified for the zone to which the dehumidifier is connected (connect via a zone air
exhaust node and a zone air inlet node, ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

ZoneHVAC:Dehumidifier:DX ,
North Zone Dehumidifier , !- Name
ON , !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone3DehumidifierInlet , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Dehumidifier Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
50.16 , !- Rated Water Removal {L/day} (106 pints/day)
3.412 , !- Rated Energy Factor {L/kWh} (7.21 pints/kWh)
0.12036 , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s} (255 cfm)
ZoneDehumidWaterRemoval , !- Water Removal Curve Name
ZoneDehumidEnergyFactor , !- Energy Factor Curve Name
ZoneDehumidPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
10.0, !- Minimum Dry -Bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
32.0, !- Maximum Dry -Bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
0.0; !- Off Cycle Parasitic Electric Load {W}

ZoneControl:Humidistat ,
Zone 3 Humidistat , !- Name
NORTH ZONE , !- Zone Name
Seasonal Relative Humidity Sch; !- Relative Humidity Setpoint Schedule Name

1.30.13.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Sensible Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Dehumidifier Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Removed Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Dehumidifier Removed Water Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Dehumidifier Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Off Cycle Parasitic Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Dehumidifier Off Cycle Parasitic Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Part Load Ratio []
1408 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Runtime Fraction []

– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Outlet Air Temperature [◦C]

If Condensate Collection Water Storage Tank Name is specified:

– HVAC,Average,Zone Dehumidifier Condensate Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Dehumidifier Condensate Volume [m3]

1.30.13.2.1 Zone Dehumidifier Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the sensible heating rate output of the dehumidifier in Watts. This is determined
by the water removal rate, enthalpy of water evaporation, and the zone dehumidifier electric power.
To reduce simulation time, this heating is carried over to the zone air heat balance for the next
HVAC time step (i.e., it is reported here for the current time step but actually impacts the zone
air heat balance on the following HVAC time step). This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.2 Zone Dehumidifier Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the sensible heating output of the dehumidifier in Joules over the timestep being
reported. This is determined by the water removal rate, enthalpy of water evaporation, and the zone
dehumidifier electric power. To reduce simulation time, this heating is carried over to the zone air
heat balance for the next HVAC time step (i.e., it is reported here for the current time step but
actually impacts the zone air heat balance on the following HVAC time step). This value is calculated
for each HVAC system timestep, and the results are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.3 Zone Dehumidifier Removed Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output field is the water removal rate by the dehumidifier in kg/s. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.4 Zone Dehumidifier Removed Water Mass [kg]

This output field is the water removed by the dehumidifier in kg. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep, and the results are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.5 Zone Dehumidifier Electricity Rate [W]

1.30.13.2.6 Zone Dehumidifier Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the electric power and electric consumption of the dehumidifier for the time period
being reported. They include all electricity used by the dehumidifier (including off-cycle electric
parasitics). These values are calculated for each HVAC system timestep, and the results are averaged
(power) or summed (consumption) for the timestep being reported. The electric consumption output
is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key =
System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.30.13.2.7 Zone Dehumidifier Off Cycle Parasitic Electricity Rate [W]

1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1409

1.30.13.2.8 Zone Dehumidifier Off Cycle Parasitic Electricity Energy [J]

These outputs are the parasitic electric power and electric consumption for controls or other electrical
devices associated with the dehumidifier. This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the
dehumidifier is available to operate, but is not operating. The model assumes that this parasitic
power contributes to heating the zone air (i.e., affects the zone air heat balance). These outputs
values are included in the Zone Dehumidifier Electric Power and Zone Dehumidifier Electricity
Energy output variables.

1.30.13.2.9 Zone Dehumidifier Part Load Ratio []

This output field is the part-load ratio for the dehumidifier. Part-load ratio is defined as the water
removal load to be met (kg/s) divided by the dehumidifier’s water removal rate (kg/s) at the current
operating conditions. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep, and the results are
averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.10 Zone Dehumidifier Runtime Fraction []

This output field is the runtime fraction for the dehumidifier. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.11 Zone Dehumidifier Outlet Air Temperature [◦C]

This output field is dry-bulb temperature of the air leaving the dehumidifier in Celsius. This value
represents the dry-bulb temperature of the air leaving the dehumidifier when it is operating. For
periods when the dehumidifier is not operating, the outlet air temperature is set equal to the inlet air
temperature. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep, and the results are averaged
for the timestep being reported.

1.30.13.2.12 Zone Dehumidifier Condensate Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

1.30.13.2.13 Zone Dehumidifier Condensate Volume [m3]

These outputs are the rate and volume of water removed as condensate by the dehumidifier. These
reports only appear if a water storage tank is named in the input object. The condensate volume
output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = OnSiteWater, End Use Key = Condensate,
Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.30.14 ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
The ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator - stand alone energy recovery ventilator (ERV) is a single-
zone HVAC component used for exhaust air heat recovery (Figure 1.138). This compound object
consists of 3 required components: a generic air-to-air heat exchanger (see object Heat Exchanger:Air
to Air:Generic), a supply air fan, and an exhaust air fan (see object Fan:OnOff).
An optional controller (see object ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator:Controller) may be used to
simulate economizer (free cooling) operation, modify air flow rates based on high indoor humidity,
or simulate a “push-button” type economizer controller.
This compound object models the basic operation of supply and exhaust air fans and an air-to-
air heat exchanger. The stand alone ERV operates whenever the unit is scheduled to be available
1410 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.138: ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator compound object Schematic

(Availability schedule). The stand alone ERV object can be used in conjunction with an economizer
feature whereby heat exchange is suspended whenever free cooling is available (i.e., air flow is fully
bypassed around a fixed-plate heat exchanger or the rotation of a rotary heat exchanger is stopped).
The economizer feature may also be activated based on a time-of-day schedule. Heat exchange is
also suspended when air flow rates through the heat exchanger are modified in response to a zone
humidistat. When an economizer is used in conjunction with high humidity control, high humidity
control has the priority.
To model a stand alone ERV connected to a single zone, the input data file should include the
following objects:

– ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator
– HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent
– Fan:OnOff (supply air)
– Fan:OnOff (exhaust air)
– ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator:Controller (if economizer [free cooling] mode or high hu-
midity control operation is desired)
– ZoneControl:Humidistat (required for high humidity control option)
– SetpointManager:Scheduled (if supply air outlet temperature control is used, Ref. Heat Ex-
changer:Air to Air:Generic for additional guidance)
– ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
– ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList
– OutdoorAir:NodeList

A description of each input field for this compound object is provided below.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1411

1.30.14.1 Inputs

1.30.14.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for the stand alone ERV unit. Any reference to this unit by another
object will use this name.

1.30.14.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the unit can operate during a given
time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can operate
during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit will
not operate. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.30.14.1.3 Field: Heat Exchanger Name

The user-assigned name corresponding to the air-to-air heat exchanger used in this compound object.
The only allowable type is:.
HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent

1.30.14.1.4 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate

The supply air flow rate through the ERV unit in cubic meters per second at standard temperature
and pressure (dry air at 20◦C drybulb). The program uses local barometric pressure to account for
altitude using the equation for “standard atmospheric” pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF
(SI edition) to initialize the air systems being simulated.
p = 101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559
where p = pressure in Pa and Z = altitude in m
Note that this flow rate must be within the valid air flow range for the heat exchanger (ref: Hea-
tExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent in the Engineering Document). In addition, this flow rate
must be less than or equal to the supply fan air flow rate (Fan:OnOff). If the supply air flow rate
is less than the exhaust air flow rate, the zone infiltration (ref: ZoneInfiltration) should be specified
accordingly (the infiltration induced by imbalanced air flows is not accounted for automatically).
The ERV supply air flow rate may also be autosized using the ventilation rate per floor area and/or
ventilation rate per occupant fields below. When autosizing, the heat exchanger and fan air flow
rates should also be autosized.
Note: The supply air inlet node specified in the generic heat exchanger object must be an outdoor air
node (ref: OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList). The supply air outlet node specified in the
generic heat exchanger object must be a zone air inlet node (ref: ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.14.1.5 Field: Exhaust Air Flow Rate

The exhaust air flow rate through the ERV unit in cubic meters per second at standard temperature
and pressure (dry air at 20◦C drybulb). The program uses local barometric pressure to account for
altitude using the equation for “standard atmospheric” pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF
(SI edition) to initialize the air systems being simulated.
p = 101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559
where p = pressure in Pa and Z = altitude in m
1412 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Note that this flow rate must be within the valid air flow range for the heat exchanger (ref: Hea-
tExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent in the Engineering Document). In addition, this flow rate
must be less than or equal to the exhaust fan air flow rate (Fan:OnOff). If the exhaust air flow rate is
greater than the supply air flow rate, the zone infiltration (ref: ZoneInfiltration) should be specified
accordingly (the infiltration induced by imbalanced air flows is not accounted for automatically).
The ERV exhaust air flow rate may also be autosized using the ventilation rate per floor area and/or
ventilation rate per occupant fields below. When autosizing, the heat exchanger and fan air flow
rates should also be autosized.
Note: The exhaust air inlet node specified in the generic heat exchanger object must be a zone air
exhaust node (ref: ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.14.1.6 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

The name of the supply air fan used in this object. Fan type must be Fan:OnOff.

1.30.14.1.7 Field: Exhaust Air Fan Name

The name of the exhaust air fan used in this object. Fan type must be Fan:OnOff.

1.30.14.1.8 Field: Controller Name

This optional field specifies the name of the controller used by this compound component if econ-
omizer (free cooling) mode or high humidity control operation is desired. Controller type must be
ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator:Controller.

1.30.14.1.9 Field: Ventilation Rate per Unit Floor Area

This optional numeric field defines the ventilation rate per unit floor area in cubic meters per second
per square meter. This field is only used when the supply and exhaust air flow rates are autosized.

1.30.14.1.10 Field: Ventilation Rate per Occupant

This optional numeric field defines the ventilation rate per occupant in cubic meters per second per
occupant. This field is only used when the supply and exhaust air flow rates are autosized.

1.30.14.1.11 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Avail-
ability Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager
type and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this Stand Alone ERV object’s fan.
If the Stand Alone ERV is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this
input field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in
the list determine when and if the fan of this Stand Alone ERV object should be on or off.
Following is an example input for this compound object and associated objects that may be defined:

ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator ,
Stand Alone ERV 1, !- Stand alone ERV name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule name
OA Heat Recovery 1, !- Heat exchanger name
0.05, !- Supply air flow rate {m3/s}
0.05, !- Exhaust air flow rate {m3/s}
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan , !- Supply air fan name
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1413

Stand Alone ERV Exhaust Fan , !- Exhaust air fan name

ERV OA Controller 1; !- ERV controller name

OutdoorAir:NodeLine ,
OutsideAirInletNodes ; !- 1st Node name or node list name

NodeList ,
OutsideAirInletNodes , !- Node List Name
ERV Outdoor air Inlet Node; !- Node_ID_1

ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections ,
RESISTIVE ZONE , !- Zone Name
Zone1Equipment , !- List Name: Zone Equipment
Zone1Inlets , !- List Name: Zone Inlet Nodes
Zone1Exhausts , !- List Name: Zone Exhaust Nodes
Zone 1 Node , !- Zone Air Node Name
Zone 1 Outlet Node; !- Zone Return Air Node Name

ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList ,
Zone1Equipment , !-Name
ZoneHVAC:EnergyRecoveryVentilator , !- KEY --Zone Equipment Type 1
Stand Alone ERV 1, !- Type Name 1
1, !- Cooling Priority
1; !- Heating Priority

NodeList ,
Zone1Inlets , !- Node List Name
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan Outlet Node; !- Node_ID_1

NodeList ,
Zone1Exhausts , !- Node List Name
Zone 1 Exhaust Node; !- Node_ID_1

ZoneHVAC: EnergyRecoveryVentilator :Controller ,

ERV OA Controller 1, !- ERV controller name
0.05, !- Outdoor air flow rate {m3/s}
19., !- Temperature high limit {C}
14., !- Temperature low limit {C}
0.0, !- Enthalpy high limit {J/kg}
NoExhaustAirTemperatureLimit , !- Exhaust air temperature limit
NoExhaustAirEnthalpyLimit ; !- Exhaust air enthalpy limit

HeatExchanger:AirToAir:SensibleAndLatent ,
OA Heat Recovery 1, !- Heat exchanger name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule name
0.05, !- Nominal supply air flow rate {m3/s}
.76, !- Sensible effectiveness at 100% airflow heating condition
.68, !- Latent effectiveness at 100% airflow heating condition
.81, !- Sensible effectiveness at 75% airflow heating condition
.73, !- Latent effectiveness at 75% airflow heating condition
.76, !- Sensible effectiveness at 100% airflow cooling condition
.68, !- Latent effectiveness at 100% airflow cooling condition
.81, !- Sensible effectiveness at 75% airflow cooling condition
.73, !- Latent effectiveness at 75% airflow cooling condition
ERV Outdoor air Inlet Node , !- Supply air inlet node name
Heat Recovery Outlet Node , !- Supply air outlet node name
Zone 1 Exhaust Node , !- Exhaust air inlet node name
Heat Recovery Secondary Outlet Node , !- Exhaust air outlet node name
1414 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

50.0, !- Nominal electric power {W}

Yes , !- Supply air outlet temperature control
Rotary , !- Heat exchanger type
MinimumExhaustTemperature , !- Frost control type
1.7; !- Threshold temperature

Fan:OnOff ,
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan , !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
0.05, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Heat Recovery Outlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Stand Alone ERV Supply Fan Outlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node

Fan:OnOff ,
Stand Alone ERV Exhaust Fan , !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.5, !- Fan Total Efficiency
75.0, !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
0.05, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Heat Recovery Secondary Outlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Stand Alone ERV Exhaust Fan Outlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node

SetpointManager:Scheduled ,
Heat Exhchanger Supply Air Temp Manager , !- Name
Temperature , !- Control variable
Heat Exchanger Supply Air Temp Sch , !- Schedule Name
Heat Exchanger Supply Air Nodes; !- Name of the set point Node List

NodeList ,
Heat Exchanger Supply Air Nodes , !- Node List Name
Heat Recovery Outlet Node; !- Node_ID_1

1.30.14.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Latent Cooling Rate [W]
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1415

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Latent Cooling Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilator Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilator Supply Fan Availability Status []

1.30.14.2.1 Zone Ventilator Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electric consumption rate of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator in
Watts. This rate includes the electric consumption by the supply air fan, exhaust air fan and the
generic air-to-air heat exchanger.

1.30.14.2.2 Zone Ventilator Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electric consumption of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator in Joules
for the timestep being reported. This value includes the electric consumption by the supply air fan,
exhaust air fan and the generic air-to-air heat exchanger.

1.30.14.2.3 Zone Ventilator Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the stand alone energy recovery
ventilator from the zone in Watts. This value is calculated using the supply air outlet mass flow
rate, and the enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.4 Zone Ventilator Total Cooling Energy [J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator
from the zone in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the supply
air outlet mass flow rate, the enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams,
and the HVAC system timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.5 Zone Ventilator Total Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the stand alone energy recovery ventila-
tor to the zone in Watts. This value is calculated using the supply air outlet mass flow rate, and the
enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged
for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.6 Zone Ventilator Total Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator
to the zone in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the supply
air outlet mass flow rate, the enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams,
and the HVAC system timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1416 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.14.2.7 Zone Ventilator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator
from the zone in Watts. This value is calculated using the supply air outlet mass flow rate, and the
enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.8 Zone Ventilator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This output is the moist air sensible heat extraction of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator
from the zone in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the supply
air outlet mass flow rate, the enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams at
a constant humidity ratio, and the HVAC system timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep being
reported.

1.30.14.2.9 Zone Ventilator Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output is the sensible heat addition rate of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator to the
zone in Watts. This value is calculated using the supply air outlet mass flow rate, and the enthalpy
difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are
averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.10 Zone Ventilator Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This output is the sensible heat addition of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator to the zone in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the supply air outlet mass flow
rate, the enthalpy difference of the supply outlet and exhaust inlet air streams at a constant humidity
ratio, and the HVAC system timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.11 Zone Ventilator Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the stand alone energy recovery
ventilator from the zone in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy
rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the stand alone ERV. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged
for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.12 Zone Ventilator Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This output is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the stand alone energy recovery
ventilator from the zone in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as
the difference between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to
the zone by the stand alone ERV. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1417

1.30.14.2.13 Zone Ventilator Latent Heating Rate [W]

This output is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the stand alone energy recovery
ventilator to the zone in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy
rate and the sensible energy rate provided by the stand alone ERV. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for
the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.14 Zone Ventilator Latent Heating Energy [J]

This output is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the stand alone energy recovery ventilator
to the zone in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference
between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the
stand alone ERV. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.30.14.2.15 Zone Ventilator Supply Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the Stand Alone ERV fan. This status flag is a result of the calcu-
lations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object
and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssign-
mentList is an optional input in the Stand Alone ERV object. When a single availability manager is
used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported by the
specific availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availability man-
agers in an Availability Manager Assignment List (with or without Hybrid Ventilation Manager),
rules to determine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability
Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers
represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status
output is averaged, the output result may not correspond to the values described here when out-
put variable frequencies other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref.
Output:Variable object) to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.30.15 ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Terminal units with variable refrigerant flow compound HVAC object are used exclusively with vari-
able refrigerant flow (VRF) air conditioning systems (Ref. AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
objects). The VRF terminal unit may be used as zone, air loop or outside air system equipment.
The VRF terminal unit compound object contains an optional outdoor air mixer, a DX cooling coil,
a DX heating coil, a supply fan (optional for air loop and outdoor air system equipment), and an
optional supplemental heating coil object.

Note: The terminal unit may be used in the air loop and/or outdoor air system, however, at
this time only constant flow (or limited variation within the limits allowed for DX coils) through
the unit is allowed. Using a wide range of outdoor air flow rates will cause the DX coil model
to fail. For example, if the minimum outdoor air flow rate is allowed to fall near 0, the DX
coil model will calculate very low, even very negative, coil outlet temperatures. This can cause
psychrometric warnings to occur and cause the simulation to end prematurely.
1418 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

For zone equipment the terminal units are connected to a zone using the inlet and exhaust node
names specified in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object. The zone exhaust node has the
same name as the terminal unit air inlet node. The zone inlet node has the same name as the
terminal unit air outlet node. The zone terminal unit is also listed in a zone’s equipment list and
will typically be the first equipment operating for both cooling and heating (i.e., Sequence = 1 in
the ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList). Other ZoneHVAC equipment may be used in the same zone and
should be sequenced to operate after the zone terminal units (i.e., sequence = 2 or higher).
For air loop equipment and outdoor air system equipment the VRF terminal unit inlet and outlet
nodes define the location of the system in the air loop and outdoor air system. The node names
must define the path of the air stream in order from the beginning of the air loop or outdoor air
system to the outlet of that system.
This VRF terminal unit can be controlled based on a load or set point. When the system is used
as zone equipment, load control is always used. When the VRF terminal unit is used in an air loop
and the control zone name or thermostat location is specified, the system is controlled based on zone
load. If the control zone name or thermostat location is not specified the VRF terminal unit will be
controlled based on termninal unit or coil outlet node set point temperature. When set point based
control is used the node temperature set points may be placed at the outlet of the terminal unit or
at individual coil outlet nodes. If the VRF terminal unit is used in an air loop’s outdoor air system,
control is always based on a termninal unit or coil outlet node temperature set point.
The terminal units operate to satisfy a heating or cooling load in a zone based on a zone thermostat
temperature set point. A direct-expansion (DX) cooling and/or DX heating coil is specified depend-
ing on the operating mode required. Both a DX cooling and DX heating coil will typically be installed
in the terminal unit, however only one may be used if desired. An optional supplemental heating coil
can also be added to the terminal unit to provide additional heating when the main DX heating coil
could not meet the entire heating load of a zone during cold outdoor conditions. The Supplemental
Heating Coil Object Type must be Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Water, or
Coil:Heating:Steam. Outdoor ventilation air is modeled with the use of an optional outside air mixer
object. Outside air may be provided to the zone only when the coil is operating or can be supplied
continuously even when the coil is not operating.
A supply air fan can be modeled as either draw through or blow through. The supply air fan is
required for zone equipment and optional for air loop and outdoor air system equipment. The Supply
Air Fan Object Type must be Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:ConstantVolume if AirCondi-
tioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow is used to model the VRF outdoor unit. The Supply Air Fan Object
Type must be Fan:SystemModel or Fan:VariableVolume if AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:-
FluidTemperatureControl or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl:HR
is used to model the VRF outdoor unit.

1.30.15.1 Inputs

1.30.15.1.1 Field: Zone Terminal Unit Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
zone terminal unit. Any reference to this terminal unit by another object will use this name. The
zone terminal unit name must be specified in a ZoneTerminalUnitList object to connect this terminal
unit to an AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.

1.30.15.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1419

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the terminal
unit operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the terminal unit
must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the terminal unit is available
to operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the terminal
unit as required. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.30.15.1.3 Field: Terminal Unit Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the terminal unit air inlet node. This node name should be the
same as a zone exhaust node (ref: ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.15.1.4 Field: Terminal Unit Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the terminal unit air outlet node. This node name should be
the same as a zone inlet node (ref: ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections).

1.30.15.1.5 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the terminal unit’s operating volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per
second. This volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in cooling mode.

1.30.15.1.6 Field: No Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the terminal unit’s operating volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per
second. This volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit’s cooling coil is not operating
and the previous mode was cooling.

1.30.15.1.7 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the terminal unit’s operating volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per
second. This volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in heating mode.

1.30.15.1.8 Field: No Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the terminal unit’s operating volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per
second. This volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit’s heating coil is not operating
and the previous mode was heating.

1.30.15.1.9 Field: Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This
volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in cooling mode. This input field
is set to zero flow when the VRF terminal unit is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object.

1.30.15.1.10 Field: Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This
volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in heating mode. This input field
is set to zero flow when the VRF terminal unit is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer
object.
1420 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.15.1.11 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air volumetric air flow rate in cubic meters per second. This
volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is not operating in cooling or heating mode.
This input field is set to zero flow when the VRF terminal unit is connected to an AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.

1.30.15.1.12 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. Schedule values
equal to 0 denote cycling fan/cycling coil operation. All other schedule values denote constant
fan/cycling coil operation.

1.30.15.1.13 Field: Supply Air Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. If this field is left blank, the default
is blow through.
The first choice stands for “blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed
by the DX coils. The fan “blows through” the cooling and heating coils. If an outside air mixer is
used, the fan inlet connects to the outdoor air mixer’s mixed air node. If an outdoor air mixer is not
used, the fan inlet connects to the zone exhaust node. For this configuration, the fan outlet always
connects to the DX cooling coil inlet node (or if a DX cooling coil is not used, the DX heating coil
inlet node).
The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the unit consists of the DX coil(s)
followed by a fan. The fan “draws air through” the DX coil(s). In this case the fan inlet always
connects to the DX heating coil outlet node (or if a DX heating coil is not use, the DX cooling coil
outlet node) and the fan outlet node always connects to the zone inlet node.

1.30.15.1.14 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This choice field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the furnace. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:SystemModel or Fan:VariableVolume. The Supply
Air Fan Object Type must be Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:ConstantVolume if AirCondi-
tioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow is used to model the VRF outdoor unit. The Supply Air Fan Object
Type must be Fan:SystemModel or Fan:VariableVolume if AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:-
FluidTemperatureControl or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl:HR
is used to model the VRF outdoor unit.
Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are never
0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff is used when the fan cycles on and off with the
cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are at times 0). The
Fan:SystemModel may be used to model either of these fan operating characteristics.
This field may be left blank when the VRF terminal unit is used as air loop or outdoor air system
equipment.

1.30.15.1.15 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Name

This alpha field defines the name of the terminal unit’s supply air fan. This field may be left blank
when the VRF terminal unit is used as air loop or outdoor air system equipment.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1421

1.30.15.1.16 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of outdoor air mixer specified for the terminal unit.
Outdoor air mixer type must be OutdoorAir:Mixer. This input field should be left blank when the
VRF terminal unit is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object. If this field is left blank,
an outdoor air mixer is not simulated. If the VRF terminal unit is used as air loop equipment and
this terminal unit’s outdoor air flow rates are autosized then the autosized flow rates will be set to
0 when an outdoor air system is used in the air loop (ref AirloopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem).

1.30.15.1.17 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Name

This alpha field defines the name of the terminal unit’s outdoor air mixer. This input field should
be left blank when the VRF terminal unit is connected to an AirTerminal:SingleDuct:Mixer object.
If this field is left blank, an outdoor air mixer is not simulated.

1.30.15.1.18 Field: DX Cooling Coil Object Type

This choice field contains the identifying type of the terminal unit’s DX cooling coil. The only valid
DX cooling coil type is Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow. This field should be left blank
when a DX cooling coil is not simulated.

1.30.15.1.19 Field: DX Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the terminal unit’s DX cooling coil. If this field is left blank, a
DX cooling coil is not simulated.

1.30.15.1.20 Field: DX Heating Coil Object Type

This choice field contains the identifying type of the terminal unit’s DX heating coil. The only valid
DX heating coil type is Coil:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow. This field should be left blank
when a DX heating coil is not simulated.

1.30.15.1.21 Field: DX Heating Coil Object Name

This alpha field defines the name of the terminal unit’s DX heating coil. This field should be left
blank when a DX heating coil is not simulated.

1.30.15.1.22 Field: Zone Terminal Unit On Parasitic Electric Energy Use

This numeric field defines the parasitic electrical energy use of the zone terminal unit when either
terminal unit coil is operating. When in cooling mode, this electric energy use is reported in a zone
terminal unit cooling electric consumption output variable. When in heating mode, this electric
energy use is reported in a zone terminal unit heating electric consumption output variable.

1.30.15.1.23 Field: Zone Terminal Unit Off Parasitic Electric Energy Use
This numeric field defines the parasitic electrical energy use of the zone terminal unit when the
terminal unit coil(s) is not operating. When the previous mode was cooling, this electric energy
use is reported in a zone terminal unit cooling electric consumption output variable. When the
previous mode was heating, this electric energy use is reported in a zone terminal unit heating
electric consumption output variable.
1422 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.15.1.24 Field: Rated Total Heating Capacity Sizing Ratio

This numeric field defines the ratio of the heating coil to cooling coil size when autosizing is used.
The model assumes that when used, this value will be greater than 1. This field supersedes the
Rated Total Heating Capacity Sizing Ratio entered in the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
object. If this field is left blank, the value entered in the parent object is used for sizing. If neither
field is used, the sizing ratio is assumed to be 1.

1.30.15.1.25 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Availabil-
ity Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager type
and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this Zone Terminal Unit object’s fan. If
the Zone Terminal Unit is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this
input field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in
the list determine when and if the fan of this Zone Terminal Unit object should be on or off.

1.30.15.1.26 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate in this VRF terminal unit zone HVAC object. The scaled Supply Air
Flow Rate in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the unit.

1.30.15.1.27 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of supplemental heating coil to be used by this VRF terminal
unit. The input requirements for these heating coil objects are described elsewhere in this docu-
ment. The hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector
objects to support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The
hot water flow modulation through the supplemental heating coil does not require additional con-
troller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The parent object (VRF terminal unit) itself provides the
“controller” function of modulating water flow. Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type must be
Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Water, or Coil:Heating:Steam.

1.30.15.1.28 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the supplemental heating coil used by this VRF terminal unit,
and this name should match the name specified in the corresponding heating coil object.

1.30.15.1.29 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental

Heater
This numeric field defines the maximum supply air temperature in degrees Celsius leaving the VRF
terminal unit supplemental heater coil. The supplemental heater will be controlled so that its supply
air temperature does not exceed this value. This field is autosizable. If this input field is left blank,
the value defaults to autosize.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1423

1.30.15.1.30 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature in degrees Celsius for this
VRF terminal unit supplemental heating coil operation. The supplemental heater will not operate
when the outdoor dry-bulb temperature is above this value. The maximum value must be less than
or equal to 21◦C. If this field is left blank, the default value of 21◦C will be used.

1.30.15.1.31 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field is only used when this VRF terminal unit is used as air loop equipment with load
based operational control. When the terminal unit is used in an air loop and this terminal unit is
load controlled, this zone’s thermostat will control operation. When this terminal unit is used in an
air loop and is set point controlled, this field must be blank (i.e., when the controlling zone name is
present the system will be load controlled).
Following is an example input for a ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.

ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow ,
Zone 1 TU , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name
TU Availability Schedule ,!- Terminal Unit Availability schedule
TU1 Inlet Node , !- Terminal Unit Air Inlet Node Name
TU1 Outlet Node , !- Terminal Unit Air Outlet Node Name
0.005 , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0, !- No Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.005 , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0, !- No Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.001 , !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate
0.001 , !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate
0, !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate
TU1 Fan Op Schedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
drawthrough , !- Supply Air Fan placement
Fan:ConstantVolume , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
TU1 SA Fan , !- Supply Air Fan Object Name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outside Air Mixer Object Type
TU1 OA Mixer , !- Outside Air Mixer Object Name
COIL:Cooling:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
TU1 VRF DX Cooling Coil , !- Cooling Coil Object Name
COIL:Heating:DX:VariableRefrigerantFlow , !- Heating Coil Object Type
TU1 VRF DX Heating Coil , !- Heating Coil Object Name
30, !- Zone Terminal Unit On Parasitic Electric Energy Use {W}
20, !- Zone Terminal Unit Off Parasitic Electric Energy Use {W}
, !- Rated Total Heating Capacity Sizing Ratio {W/W}
, !- Availability Manager List Name
, !- Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
TU1 Supp Heating Coil , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
autosize , !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater
Operation
; !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

1.30.15.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1424 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average, Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone VRF Air Terminal Cooling Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone VRF Air Terminal Cooling Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone VRF Air Terminal Heating Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone VRF Air Terminal Heating Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone VRF Air Terminal Fan Availability Status []

1.30.15.2.1 Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) cooling rate output of the terminal unit in Watts. This is
determined by terminal unit inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the
unit. This value describes the total energy rate delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.2 Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Cooling Energy [J]

This is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling output of the terminal unit in Joules over the time
step being reported. This is determined by the terminal unit inlet and outlet air conditions and the
air mass flow rate through the unit. This value describes the total cooling energy delivered to the
zone.

1.30.15.2.3 Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the moist air sensible cooling rate output of the terminal unit in Watts. This is de-
termined by enthalpy difference between the inlet and outlet air temperature at a constant humidity
ratio, using the minimum of the inlet and outlet air node humidity ratios, and the air mass flow rate
through the unit. This value describes the sensible cooling energy rate delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.4 Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This is the moist air sensible cooling output of the terminal unit in Joules for the time step being
reported. This is determined by enthalpy difference between the inlet and outlet air temperature at
a constant humidity ratio, using the minimum of the inlet and outlet air node humidity ratios, and
the air mass flow rate through the unit. This value describes the sensible cooling energy delivered
to the zone.

1.30.15.2.5 Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This is the latent cooling rate output of the terminal unit in Watts. This is determined by the inlet
and outlet air humidity ratios and the air mass flow rate through the unit. This value describes the
latent cooling energy rate delivered to the zone.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1425

1.30.15.2.6 Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This is the latent cooling output of the terminal unit in Joules for the time step being reported.
This is determined by the inlet and outlet air humidity ratios and the air mass flow rate through
the unit. This value describes the latent cooling energy delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.7 Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Heating Rate [W]

This field is the total enthalpic heating rate output of the terminal unit in Watts. This is determined
by the terminal unit inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the unit. This
value describes the total heating energy rate delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.8 Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Heating Energy [J]

This is the total enthalpic heating output of the terminal unit in Joules over the time step being
reported. This is determined by the terminal unit inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass
flow rate through the unit. This value describes the total heating energy delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.9 Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output is the moist air sensible heating rate output of the terminal unit in Watts. This
is determined by enthalpy difference between the inlet and outlet air temperature at a constant
humidity ratio, using the minimum of the inlet and outlet air node humidity ratios, and the air mass
flow rate through the unit. This value describes the sensible heating energy rate delivered to the
zone.

1.30.15.2.10 Zone VRF Air Terminal Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This is the moist air sensible heating output of the terminal unit in Joules for the time step being
reported. This is determined by enthalpy difference between the inlet and outlet air temperature at
a constant humidity ratio, using the minimum of the inlet and outlet air node humidity ratios, and
the air mass flow rate through the unit. This value describes the sensible heating energy delivered
to the zone.

1.30.15.2.11 Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Heating Rate [W]

This is the latent heating rate output of the terminal unit in Watts. This is determined by the
inlet and outlet air specific humidity ratios and the air mass flow rate through the unit. This value
describes the latent heating energy rate delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.12 Zone VRF Air Terminal Latent Heating Energy [J]

This is the latent heating output of the terminal unit in Joules for the time step being reported.
This is determined by the inlet and outlet air specific humidity ratios and the air mass flow rate
through the unit. This value describes the latent heating energy delivered to the zone.

1.30.15.2.13 Zone VRF Air Terminal Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the parasitic electricity consumption rate of the zone terminal unit in Watts.
The consumption rate includes parasitic electricity used by the zone terminal unit’s transformers,
controls, or other electricity consuming devices. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time
1426 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported. The terminal
unit parasitic on and off electricity is reported in this cooling output variable when the unit operates
in cooling mode or the most recent operation was for cooling.

1.30.15.2.14 Zone VRF Air Terminal Cooling Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the zone terminal unit in Joules for the time
period being reported. The consumption includes parasitic electricity used by the zone terminal
unit’s transformers, controls, or other electricity consuming devices. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed for the time step being
reported. The terminal unit parasitic on and off electricity consumption is reported in this cooling
output variable when the unit operates in cooling mode or the most recent operation was for cooling.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling,
Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.30.15.2.15 Zone VRF Air Terminal Heating Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the parasitic electricity consumption rate of the zone terminal unit in Watts.
The consumption rate includes parasitic electricity used by the zone terminal unit’s transformers,
controls, or other electricity consuming devices. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time
step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported. The terminal
unit parasitic on and off electricity is reported in this heating output variable when the unit operates
in heating mode or the most recent operation was for heating.

1.30.15.2.16 Zone VRF Air Terminal Heating Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the zone terminal unit in Joules for the time
period being reported. The consumption includes parasitic electricity used by the zone terminal
unit’s transformers, controls, or other electricity consuming devices. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are summed for the time step being
reported. The terminal unit parasitic on and off electricity consumption is reported in this heating
output variable when the unit operates in heating mode or the most recent operation was for heating.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Heating,
Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.30.15.2.17 Zone VRF Air Terminal Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the Zone Terminal Unit fan. This status flag is a result of the calcu-
lations made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object
and/or calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssign-
mentList is an optional input in the Zone Terminal Unit object. When a single availability manager
is used in an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported
by the specific availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availabil-
ity managers in an Availability Manager Assignment List along with Hybrid Ventilation Manager,
rules to determine fan availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability
Managers’. The control status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers
represent NoAction (0), ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status
output is averaged, the output result may not correspond to the values described here when out-
put variable frequencies other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref.
Output:Variable object) to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1427

1.30.16 ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC
ZoneHVAC:Hybrid UnitaryHVAC is a black-box model for packaged forced air equipment with
multiple discrete operating modes. Generally, a ”hybrid“ is any system that exhibits both continuous
and discrete dynamic behavior – a system that can both flow (as could be described by a differential
equation) and jump (as must be described by distinct modes). Equipment in this category may utilize
a wide variety technologies including, but not limited to: indirect evaporative cooling, desiccant
dehumidification, heat recovery, vapor compression, adsorption, or ventilation cooling. Each hybrid
system packages multiple technologies into a single integrated system. There are a multitude of
unique hybrid system architectures, and each unique system may have numerous unique operating
modes.

Figure 1.139: Schematic of object links for ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC

ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC is a black-box model designed to allow empirical representation of

a wide variety of hybrid unitary systems. The model does not require information about internal
system architecture, however it requires extensive data to describe the performance of a product in
every operating mode. The model is intended for packed forced air equipment and can represent
unitary systems that consume electricity, water, and up to two additional fuel types.
Uncontrolled independent variables include outdoor and indoor air temperature and humidity ratio.
Controlled independent variables include: operating mode, supply air flow rate, outdoor air fraction,
and part runtime fraction. Dependent variables include supply air temperature, supply air humidity,
electricity use, fuel uses, water use, fan electricity use, and external static pressure. Empirical data
1428 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

tables (see Table:Lookup) are required to map each dependent variable in each discrete operating
mode. The model can accommodate up to 26 discrete operating modes, including a standby mode.
Each mode is limited to operate within independently specified ranges of indoor and outdoor psy-
chrometric conditions. The standby mode is not limited by either indoor or outdoor psychrometric
conditions.

Figure 1.140: Schematic explanation of the architecture and function of Zone-

HVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC

ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC is structured as a constrained optimization problem – in each time

step the model will choose one or more combinations of the controlled independent variables so as to
best provide the predicted sensible load, the predicted latent load, and the scheduled zone ventilation
requirement, with the least amount of resource consumption.
A setting is defined as any unique combination of mode, outdoor air fraction, and supply air flow
rate. The system may operate with multiple settings in each time step. The portion of each time
step spent in a setting is described as the part runtime fraction for that setting. During any time step
that the combination of settings can satisfy all of the soft constraints with part runtime fractions
that sum to less than one, the system will operate in a standby mode (Mode 0) for the remainder
of the timestep. If no combination of settings will satisfy all of the soft constraints the system will
choose the combination of settings that most nearly satisfies all soft constraints. If the indoor and
outdoor psychrometric conditions are beyond the constraints that limit each operating mode, or if
no setting will satisfy all constraints on supply air temperature and absolute humidity, the system
will operate in standby mode (Mode 0).
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1429

1.30.16.1 Inputs

1.30.16.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha input field specifies a unique user-assigned name for one ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC
unit. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name. The name must be specified
in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object to connect this unit to a zone.

1.30.16.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name This alpha input field specifies the name
of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies when the ZoneHVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC
unit can operate. A schedule value greater than 0 means the unit can be available. A schedule value
equal to zero means the unit cannot operate. Availability of the unit is governed by the availability
schedule and by availability managers. The availability schedule may be used to completely disable
the unit. If this field is blank, the unit can always be available. If the unit is available but there is
no sensible load, no latent load, and no need for ventilation, the unit will operate in a standby mode
(mode 0).

1.30.16.1.3 Field: Availability Manager List Name This optional alpha input field is
the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. (ref: Group - Air Distribution, Availabil-
ityManagerAssignmentList, and Group - System Availability Managers). Availability of the unit is
governed by the availability schedule and by availability managers specified in the list named here.
If the unit is available but there is no sensible load, no latent load, and no need for ventilation, the
unit will operate in a standby mode (mode 0).

1.30.16.1.4 Field: Minimum Supply Air Temperature Schedule Name This op-
tional alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies the
minimum supply air temperature allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used as a
constraint in choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in each
operating mode. If this field is blank, no minimum is imposed.

1.30.16.1.5 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature Schedule Name This op-
tional alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies the
maximum supply air temperature allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used as a
constraint in choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in each
operating mode. If this field is blank, no maximum is imposed.

1.30.16.1.6 Field: Minimum Supply Air Humidity Ratio Schedule Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies
the minimum supply air humidity ratio allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used
as a constraint in choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in
each operating mode. If this field is blank, no minimum is imposed.

1.30.16.1.7 Field: Maximum Supply Air Humidity Ratio Schedule Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of the schedule (ref: Group – Schedules) that specifies
the maximum supply air humidity raio allowed in each time step. Values in this schedule are used
as a constraint in choosing the feasible settings for supply air flow rate and outdoor air fraction in
each operating mode. If this field is blank, no maximum is imposed.
1430 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.1.8 Field: Method to Choose Controlled Inputs and Part Runtime Frac-
tion This alpha input field specifies the method that will be used to choose operating mode(s),
supply air flow rate(s), outdoor air fraction(s) and part runtime fraction(s) in each time step. The
only valid choices are ”Automatic“ and ”User Defined“, ”Automatic“ chooses the controlled inde-
pendent variables to minimize resource use within each time step, subject to constraints, while best
satisfying zone sensible loads, latent loads, and the scheduled ventilation rate. ”User Defined“ indi-
cates that the user will provide a custom control sequence, using Energy Management System objects
or other means, to choose the controlled independent variables and determine system outputs in each
time step.

1.30.16.1.9 Field: Return Air Node Name This alpha input field specifies the
name of the HVAC system node from which the hybrid unit draws return air. This node
name must also be specified as a zone return air node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
object. It may also be included in NodeList object that is specified as a zone return air
node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object. (Ref. Group - Zone Equipment Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections and Group - Node-Branch Management NodeList).

1.30.16.1.10 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name This alpha input field specifies the name
of the HVAC system node from which the hybrid unit draws outdoor air. This node name must also
be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node or OutdoorAir:NodeList object. (Ref. Group - Node-Branch
Management OutdoorAir:Node and OutdoorAir:NodeList).

1.30.16.1.11 Field: Supply Air Node Name This alpha input field specifies the name
of the HVAC system node to which the hybrid unit sends supply air. This node name must also be
specified as zone inlet node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections object. It may also be included
in NodeList object that is specified as a zone inlet node in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections
object. (Ref. Group - Zone Equipment ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections and Group - Node-
Branch Management NodeList).

1.30.16.1.12 Field: Relief Node Name This optional alpha input field specifies the name
of an HVAC system node which can extract air from the zone to balance the air supplied to the zone
by the unit. This node name would match the name of a zone exhaust air node.

1.30.16.1.13 Field: System Maximum Supply Air Volume Flow Rate This nu-
meric input field specifies the maximum standard density supply air volume flow rate among all
operating modes. The field allows custom resizing of the hybrid unit. The values specified in each
Table:Lookup object associated with a hybrid unit represent performance data for a specific product
of a particular size, but the value output from each Table:Lookup object is augmented by a nor-
malization reference (Ref: Group - Performance Tables Table:Lookup). The normalization reference
specified for all Table:Lookup objects associated with a hybrid unit should be the maximum supply
air mass flow rate for the real hybrid unit that was used to create the performance data included
in each table object. The value in this field is used to rescale the normalized values output from
tables for extensive dependent variables. If the standard density supply air volume flow rate input
to this field is equivalent to the system maximum supply air mass flow rate used as the normaliza-
tion reference – given appropriate unit conversions – then the resulting output from the model will
exactly match the original performance data specified in each table. If the value in this field is larger
or smaller, the values for extensive dependent variables will be scaled proportionally. The values
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1431

of intensive dependent variables are rescaled by the normalization reference value, so will always
match the original performance data specified in each table object. The value in this field should be
specified as standard density volume flow rate. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to dry
air at 20◦C drybulb, and 101,325 Pa.

1.30.16.1.14 Field: External Static Pressure at System Maximum Supply Air

Flow Rate This optional numeric input field specifies the external static pressure at the system
maximum supply air flow rate specified in the previous field. Fan affinity laws are used to scale supply
fan power from the scenario used to create the performance data included in each Table:Lookup
object, to a scenario that corresponds to the value specified in this field. The result is also used to
adjust the system electric power accordingly. If this field is blank, the supply fan power is not scaled
from the values specified in lookup tables.

1.30.16.1.15 Field: Fan Heat Included in Lookup Tables This alpha field specifies if
the fan heat gain was taken into account in the lookup tables specified for each mode. Valid choices
are Yes and No. If No, the fan heat is calculated based on the fan power and the next two fields
specify the location and fraction of the fan heat gain to the air stream, otherwise the fan heat gain
is not calculated.

1.30.16.1.16 Field: Fan Heat Gain Location This optional alpha field specifies the
location that the fan heat gain should be applied if not included in the lookup tables. Valid choices
include: MixedAirStream and SupplyAirStream. MixedAirStream is upstream of the cooling
medium while SupplyAirStream is downstream of the cooling medium.

1.30.16.1.17 Field: Fan Heat Gain in Airstream Fraction This optional numeric field
is the fraction of the fan heat that is added to the air stream if not included in the lookup tables. A
value of 0 means that the fan heat is completely outside the air stream. A value of 1 means that all
of the fan heat loss will go into the air stream and act to cause a temperature rise. Must be between
0 and 1. The default is 1.0.

1.30.16.1.18 Field: Scaling Factor This optional numeric field scales all extensive depen-
dent variables including: supply air mass flow rate, electricity use, fuel uses, and water use. The
value in this field acts together with the value in field System Maximum Standard Density Supply
Air Volume Flow Rate to allow custom resizing of the hybrid unit.

1.30.16.1.19 Field: Minimum Time Between Mode Change This numeric field spec-
ifies the minimum time that must pass before the hybrid unit can change mode. If the value in this
field is larger than each timestep, the mode selected in one time step will persist in later time steps
until the minimum time between mode change is satisfied. If the value in this field is smaller than
each timestep, it will determine the minimum part runtime fraction allowed for any mode. Supply
air mass flow rate and outdoor air fraction within a mode are not subject to minimum runtime and
may change in every time step, or with any part runtime fraction. Mode 0 does not have a minimum
time. If this field is blank, the default minimum time between mode change is 10 minutes.
1432 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.1.20 Field: First Fuel Type This alpha field specifies the fuel type associated
with the Table:Lookup object specified in field ”System Electric Power Power Lookup Table“. Valid
choices include: None, Electricity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Diesel, Gasoline,
Coal, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2, Steam, DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling. If this field is blank, the
default first fuel type is Electricity.

1.30.16.1.21 Field: Second Fuel Type This alpha field specifies the fuel type associated
with the Table:Lookup object specified in field ”System Second Fuel Consumption Lookup Table“.
Valid choices include: None, Electricity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Diesel,
Gasoline, Coal, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2, Steam, DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling. If this field is
blank, the default second fuel type is None.

1.30.16.1.22 Field: Third Fuel Type This alpha field specifies the fuel type associated
with the Table:Lookup object specified in field ”System Third Fuel Consumption Lookup Table“.
Valid choices include: None, Electricity, NaturalGas, Propane, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2, Diesel,
Gasoline, Coal, OtherFuel1, OtherFuel2, Steam, DistrictHeating and DistrictCooling. If this field is
blank, the default second fuel type is None.

1.30.16.1.23 Field: Objective Function to Minimize In each time step Zone-

HVAC:HybridUnitaryHVAC will choose one or more combinations of the controlled independent
variables, subject to constraints, so as to best satisfy sensible load, latent load, and scheduled
ventilation with the least amount of resource consumption. This alpha field specifies which resource
will be minimized by the optimization. Valid choices include: Electricity Use, Second Fuel Use,
Third Fuel Use, and Water Use. If this field is blank, the objective function will minimize electricity
use.

1.30.16.1.24 Field: Design Specification Outdoor Air Object Name This alpha
field specifies the name of a DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir object which specifies the a schedule for
the required standard density volume of outdoor air. If this field is blank, the system may still supply
outdoor air, if it is capable, when doing so is the most efficient way to satisfy other constraints.

1.30.16.1.25 Field: Mode 0 Name This alpha input field specifies a unique user-assigned
descriptive name for Mode 0. Mode 0 describes performance when the hybrid unit is in standby.
Mode 0 is usually characterized by electricity use for controls and crankcase heaters, or other standby
resource consumption. Mode 0 will be chosen for any timestep, or portion of timestep, when the
unit is available, but there is no sensible load, latent load, or scheduled ventilation. Mode 0 is not
constrained by limits on indoor or outdoor conditions.

1.30.16.1.26 Field: Mode 0 Supply Air Temperature Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes supply air
temperature for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and
outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 will not be considered for any period that requires
ventilation, heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification. If this field is blank, when Mode 0
is chosen (during standby periods) the supply air temperature will equal the return air temperature.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1433

1.30.16.1.27 Field: Mode 0 Supply Air Humidity Ratio Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes supply
air humidity ratio for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow
rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 will not be considered for any period
that requires ventilation, heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification. If this field is blank,
when Mode 0 is chosen (during standby periods) the supply air humidity ratio will equal the return
air humidity ratio.

1.30.16.1.28 Field: Mode 0 System Electric Power Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes electric power
consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and
outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume electricity.

1.30.16.1.29 Field: Mode 0 Supply Fan Electric Power Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes supply
fan electric power consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air
temperature, outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply
air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume electricity
for supply fan.

1.30.16.1.30 Field: Mode 0 External Static Pressure Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes external static
pressure for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and
outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, external static pressure will not be reported.

1.30.16.1.31 Field: Mode 0 System Second Fuel Consumption Lookup Table

Name This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes
second fuel consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temper-
ature, outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass
flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume a second fuel.

1.30.16.1.32 Field: Mode 0 System Third Fuel Consumption Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes third
fuel consumption for Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow
rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume a third fuel.

1.30.16.1.33 Field: Mode 0 System Water Use Lookup Table Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes water consumption for
Mode 0 as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air humidity
ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air
fraction. If this field is blank, Mode 0 does not consume water.
1434 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.1.34 Field: Mode 0 Outdoor Air Fraction This optional numeric input field
specifies the outdoor air fraction for Mode 0. Outdoor air fraction is not a controlled independent
variable in Mode 0, it must be set to a particular value for all times that Mode 0 operates. Typically
Mode 0 would have zero supply air, in which case this value would be irrelevant. If this field is blank,
the outdoor air fraction for Mode 0 will be 0.00.

1.30.16.1.35 Field: Mode 0 Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio This optional nu-
meric field specifies the supply air mass flow rate ratio for Mode 0. Mass flow rate is not a controlled
independent variable in Mode 0, it must be set to a particular value for all times that Mode 0
operates. Supply air mass flow rate ratio describes supply air mass flow rate as a fraction of the
mass flow rate associated with the value in field: ”System Maximum Standard Density Supply Air
Volume Flow Rate“. If this field is blank, the supply air mass flow rate ratio for Mode 0 will be 0.00.

1.30.16.1.36 Field-Set: Mode Definition (extensible object) The definition of each

operating mode is given as inputs to 25 fields. The first field specifies a unique name for the
mode. The following eight fields specify the names of Table:Lookup objects that describe hybrid unit
performance parameters. The remaining sixteen fields specify constraints on controlled independent
variables, and constraints to describe the indoor and outdoor psychrometric conditions at which the
mode is allowed. The definition of operating modes is extensible. To define multiple modes, repeat
the following 25 fields with appropriate input values for each mode. The object does not require
that modes be defined in a particular order. This object is extensible, so additional groups of these
25 fields can be added to the end of this object.

1.30.16.1.37 Field: Mode # Name This alpha input field specifies a unique user-assigned
descriptive name for Mode #. Each desired mode must have a mode name in order for that mode
to be included in the simulation.

1.30.16.1.38 Field: Mode # Supply Air Temperature Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes supply air
temperature for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and
outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # will not be considered for any time step that
requires ventilation, heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification.

1.30.16.1.39 Field: Mode # Supply Air Humidity Ratio Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes supply
air humidity ratio for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow
rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # will not be considered for any period
that requires ventilation, heating, cooling, humidification, or dehumidification.

1.30.16.1.40 Field: Mode # System Electric Power Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes system electric
power consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature,
outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow
rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume electricity.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1435

1.30.16.1.41 Field: Mode # Supply Fan Electric Power Lookup Table Name
This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes supply
fan electric power consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air
temperature, outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air
mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume electricity
for supply fan.

1.30.16.1.42 Field: Mode # External Static Pressure Lookup Table Name This
optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes external static
pressure for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor
air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and
outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, external static pressure will not be reported for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.43 Field: Mode # System Second Fuel Consumption Lookup Table

Name This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes
second fuel consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air tem-
perature, outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air
mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume a second
fuel.

1.30.16.1.44 Field: Mode # System Third Fuel Consumption Lookup Table

Name This optional alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that de-
scribes third fuel consumption for Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air
temperature, outdoor air humidity ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply
air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume a third
fuel.

1.30.16.1.45 Field: Mode # System Water Use Lookup Table Name This optional
alpha input field specifies the name of a Table:Lookup object that describes water consumption for
Mode # as a function of six independent variables: outdoor air temperature, outdoor air humidity
ratio, return air temperature, return air humidity ratio, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air
fraction. If this field is blank, Mode # does not consume water.

1.30.16.1.46 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature This optional

numeric input field specifies the minimum outdoor air temperature at which Mode # is allowed.
When outdoor air temperature is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the
feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this
field is blank, there will be no lower constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.47 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature This optional

numeric input field specifies the maximum outdoor air temperature at which Mode # is allowed.
When outdoor air temperature is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the
feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this
field is blank, there will be no upper constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.
1436 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.1.48 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the minimum outdoor air humidity ratio at which Mode # is allowed.
When outdoor air humidity ratio is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the
feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this
field is blank, there will be no lower constraint on outdoor air humidity ratio for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.49 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio This op-
tional numeric input field specifies the maximum outdoor air humidity ratio at which Mode # is
allowed. When outdoor air humidity ratio is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded
from the feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects
associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table.
If this field is blank, there will be no upper constraint on outdoor air humidity ratio for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.50 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Relative Humidity This

optional numeric input field specifies the minimum outdoor air relative humidity at which Mode #
is allowed. When outdoor air relative humidity is below this value all settings in Mode # will be
excluded from the feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup
objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the
data table. If this field is blank, the lower constraint on outdoor air relative humidity will be 0.00

1.30.16.1.51 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Relative Humidity This

optional numeric input field specifies the maximum outdoor air relative humidity at which Mode #
is allowed. When outdoor air relative humidity is above this value all settings in Mode # will be
excluded from the feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup
objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the
data table. If this field is blank, the upper constraint on outdoor air relative humidity will be 100

1.30.16.1.52 Field: Mode # Minimum Return Air Temperature This optional

numeric input field specifies the minimum return air temperature at which Mode # is allowed.
When return air temperature is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from
the feasible set. This value may be beyond than the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects
associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table.
If this field is blank, there will be no lower constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.53 Field: Mode # Maximum Return Air Temperature This optional

numeric input field specifies the maximum return air temperature at which Mode # is allowed.
When return air temperature is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the
feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this
field is blank, there will be no upper constraint on outdoor air temperature for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.54 Field: Mode # Minimum Return Air Humidity Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the minimum return air humidity ratio at which Mode # mode one is
allowed. When return air humidity ratio is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded
from the feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1437

associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table.
If this field is blank, there will be no lower constraint on return air humidity ratio for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.55 Field: Mode # Maximum Return Air Humidity Ratio This optional
numeric input field specifies the maximum return air humidity ratio at which Mode # is allowed.
When return air humidity ratio is above this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded from the
feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated
with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this
field is blank, there will be no upper constraint on return air humidity ratio for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.56 Field: Mode # Minimum Return Air Relative Humidity This op-
tional numeric input field specifies the minimum return air relative humidity at which Mode # is
allowed. When return air relative humidity is below this value all settings in Mode # will be excluded
from the feasible set. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects
associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table.
If this field is blank, the lower constraint on return air relative humidity will be 0.00

1.30.16.1.57 Field: Mode # Maximum Return Air Relative Humidity This op-
tional numeric input field specifies the maximum return air relative humidity at which Mode # is
allowed. When return air relative humidity is above this value all settings in Mode # will be ex-
cluded from the feasible set. This value may be beyond than the extents of the data in Table:Lookup
objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data
table. If this field is blank, the upper constraint on return air relative humidity will be 100

1.30.16.1.58 Field: Mode # Minimum Outdoor Air Fraction This optional numeric
input field specifies the minimum outdoor air fraction allowed in Mode #. Outdoor air fractions
below this value will be excluded from the feasible set within Mode #. This value may be beyond
than the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value
sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, the lower constraint on
outdoor air fraction will be 0.00 for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.59 Field: Mode # Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction This optional numeric
input field specifies the maximum outdoor air fraction allowed in Mode #. Outdoor air fractions
above this value will be excluded from the feasible set within Mode #. This value may be beyond
than the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated with Mode1, in which case this value
sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is blank, the upper constraint on
outdoor air fraction will be 1.00 for Mode #.

1.30.16.1.60 Field: Mode # Minimum Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio This
optional numeric input field specifies the minimum supply air mass flow rate ratio allowed in Mode
#. Supply air mass flow rate ratios below this value will be excluded from the feasible set within
Mode #. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated with
Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, the lower constraint on supply air mass flow rate ratio will be 0.00 for Mode #.
1438 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.1.61 Field: Mode # Maximum Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio This
optional numeric input field specifies the maximum supply air mass flow rate ratio allowed in Mode
#. Supply air mass flow rate ratios above this value will be excluded from the feasible set within
Mode #. This value may be beyond the extents of the data in Table:Lookup objects associated with
Mode1, in which case this value sets the limit for extrapolation from the data table. If this field is
blank, the upper constraint on supply air mass flow rate ratio will be 1.00 for Mode #.

1.30.16.2 Outputs
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Energy [J]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Latent Load to Humidistat Setpoint Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Moisture Load to Humidistat Setpoint Moisture
Transfer Rate [kgWater/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Temperature [C]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWater/kgDryAir]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Relative Humidity [%]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Relative Humidity [%]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Air Standard Density Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electricity Rate [W]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electricity Energy [J]
Water use
Second Fuel Use
Third Fuel Use
Supply Fan Electricity Rate
External Static Pressure
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Requested Outdoor Air Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Availability Status []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Dehumidification Load to Humidistat Setpoint Moisture
Transfer Rate [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 2 []
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1439

HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 3 []

HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting 4 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting 4 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting 4 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 0 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 1 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 2 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 3 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting 4 [kg/s]
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 0 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 1 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 2 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 3 []
HVAC ,Average ,Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in Setting 4 []

1.30.16.2.1 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which enthalpy is removed by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air and the enthalpy of the supply air.
This output is positive when enthalpy is removed by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is
an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.2 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of enthalpy removed by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the enthalpy of the supply
air. This output is positive when enthalpy is removed by the system, otherwise the output is zero.
This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.3 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
This output reports the rate at which sensible heat is removed by the system. It is calculated as
the difference between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive
when sensible heat is removed by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate
over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.4 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This output reports the amount of sensible heat removed by the system. It is calculated as the
difference between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive
when sensible heat is removed by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the
reporting period.

1.30.16.2.5 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which latent heat is removed by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy
difference associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated
1440 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

with moisture removed by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is removed by the
system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.6 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of latent heat removed by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy
difference associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated
with moisture removed by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is removed by the
system, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.7 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which enthalpy is removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive
when enthalpy is removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over
the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.8 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of enthalpy removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive
when enthalpy is removed from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting
period.

1.30.16.2.9 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which sensible heat is removed from the zone. It is calculated as the
difference between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of
dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is removed
from the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.10 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of sensible heat removed from the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at
the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is removed from the
zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.11 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which latent heat is removed from the zone. It is calculated as the
enthalpy difference associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air,
and the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture
removed from the zone. This output is positive when latent heat is removed from the zone, otherwise
it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.12 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Cooling Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of latent heat removed from the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy
difference associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the
absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture
removed from the zone. This output is positive when latent heat is removed from the zone, otherwise
it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1441

1.30.16.2.13 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which enthalpy is added by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air and the enthalpy of the supply
air. This output is positive when enthalpy is added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output
is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.14 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Total Heating Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of enthalpy added by the system. It is calculated as the difference between
the enthalpy of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and the enthalpy of the supply air. This
output is positive when enthalpy is added by the system, otherwise the output is zero. This output
is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.15 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
This output reports the rate at which sensible heat is added by the system. It is calculated as
the difference between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive
when sensible heat is added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over
the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.16 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output reports the amount of sensible heat added by the system. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the mixture of return air and outdoor air, and
the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible
heat is added by the system, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.17 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which latent heat is added by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy
difference associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated
with moisture added by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is added by the system,
otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.18 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC System Latent Heating Energy [J]
This output reports the amount of latent heat added by the system. It is calculated as the enthalpy
difference associated with the difference between absolute humidity of the mixture of return air and
outdoor air, and the absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated
with moisture added by the system. This output is positive when latent heat is added by the system,
otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.19 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which enthalpy is added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive
when enthalpy is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the
reporting period.
1442 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.2.20 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Total Heating Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of enthalpy added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference between
the enthalpy of the return air and the enthalpy of the supply air. This output is positive when
enthalpy is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.21 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which sensible heat is added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at
the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is added to the zone,
otherwise it is zero. This output is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.22 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
This output reports the amount of sensible heat added to the zone. It is calculated as the difference
between the enthalpy of dry air at the temperature of the return air and the enthalpy of dry air at
the temperature of the supply air. This output is positive when sensible heat is added to the zone,
otherwise it is zero. This output is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.23 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Rate [W] This
output reports the rate at which latent heat is added to the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy
difference associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the
absolute humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture added
to the zone. This output is positive when latent heat is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This
output is an average rate over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.24 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Zone Latent Heating Energy [J] This
output reports the amount of latent heat added to the zone. It is calculated as the enthalpy difference
associated with the difference between the absolute humidity of the return air, and the absolute
humidity of the supply air. This is the phase change energy associated with moisture added to the
zone. This output is positive when latent heat is added to the zone, otherwise it is zero. This output
is a sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.25 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint

Heat Transfer Rate [W] This output reports the predicted sensible heat transfer rate re-
quired to meet the current zone thermostat setpoint. A positive value indicates a heating load, a
negative value indicates a cooling load. For a dual setpoint thermostat, the value is zero when the
controlled zone’s temperature is between the defined heating and cooling setpoints. See ZoneCon-
trol:Thermostat for further information. This value is used as a soft inequality constraint in the
constrained optimization problem that determines system settings in each time step. The output is
the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.26 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Latent Load to Humidistat

Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W] This output reports the predicted latent heat transfer
rate required to meet the current zone humidistat setpoint. A positive value indicates a humidifi-
cation load, a negative value indicates a dehumidification load. For a dual setpoint humidistat, the
value is zero when the controlled zone’s relative humidity is between the defined humidifying and
dehumidifying setpoint. See ZoneControl:Humidistat for further information. This value is used as
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1443

a soft inequality constraint in the constrained optimization problem that determines system settings
in each time step. The output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.27 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Predicted Moisture Load to Humidi-

stat Setpoint Moisture Transfer Rate [kgWater/s] This output reports the predicted
moisture transfer rate required to meet the current zone humidistat setpoint. A positive value indi-
cates a humidification load, a negative value indicates a dehumidification load. For a dual setpoint
humidistat, the value is zero when the controlled zone’s relative humidity is between the defined hu-
midifying and dehumidifying setpoints. See ZoneControl:Humidistat for further information. This
value is used as a soft inequality constraint in the constrained optimization problem that determines
system settings in each time step. The output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.28 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Temperature [◦C] This
output reports the supply air temperature. For each timestep the value is calculated as a supply air
mass weighted average of the supply air temperature for each of the settings selected for the time
step. For example, if the system operates for half of the timestep with supply air mass flow rate of
1 kg/s and supply air temperature of 16◦C, and for half of the timestep at 2 kg/s and 10◦C, the
supply air temperature calculated for the time step would be 12 ◦C. The output is the average over
the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.29 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Temperature [◦C] This out-
put reports the return air temperature. The return air temperature is inherited from the associated
zone outlet node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.30 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Temperature [◦C] This
output reports the outdoor air temperature. The outdoor air temperature is inherited from the
associated outdoor air node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.31 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Humidity Ratio [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir] This output reports the supply air humidity ratio. For each timestep the value
is calculated as a supply air mass weighted average of the supply air humidity ratio for each of the
settings selected for the time step. For example, if the system operates for half of the timestep with
supply air mass flow rate of 1 kg/s and supply air humidity ratio of 0.016 kgWater/kgDryAir, and for
half of the timestep at 2 kg/s and 0.010 kgWater/kgDryAir, the supply air humidity ratio calculated
for the time step would be 0.012 kgWater/kgDryAir. The output is the average over the reporting
period.

1.30.16.2.32 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Humidity Ratio [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir] This output reports the return air humidity ratio. The return air humidity
ratio is inherited from the associated zone outlet node in each timestep. The output is the average
over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.33 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Humidity Ratio [kgWa-
ter/kgDryAir] This output reports the outdoor air humidity ratio. The outdoor air humidity
ratio is inherited from the associated outdoor air node in each timestep. The output is the average
over the reporting period.
1444 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.30.16.2.34 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Relative Humidity [%]
This output reports the supply air relative humidity. For each timestep the value is calculated
from the supply air temperature and supply air humidity ratio according to standard psychrometric
relationships. The output is the time weighted average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.35 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Return Air Relative Humidity [%]
This output reports the return air relative humidity. The return air relative humidity is inherited
from the associated zone outlet node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting
period.

1.30.16.2.36 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Relative Humidity [%]
This output reports the outdoor air relative humidity. The outdoor air relative humidity is inherited
from the associated outdoor air node in each timestep. The output is the average over the reporting
period.

1.30.16.2.37 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output reports the supply air mass flow rate. For each timestep the value is calculated as a
time weighted average of the supply air mass flow rate for each of the settings selected for the time
step. The output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.38 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Standard Density Volume
Flow Rate [m3/s] This output reports the supply air flow as a standard density volume flow
rate. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to dry air at 20◦C drybulb, and 101,325 Pa. The
output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.39 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Air Standard Density Vol-
ume Flow Rate [m3/s] This output reports the outdoor air (ventilation) flow as a standard
density volume flow rate. Standard density in EnergyPlus corresponds to dry air at 20◦C drybulb,
and 101,325 Pa. The output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.40 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electricity Rate [W] This output reports
the electric power input to the system. For each timestep the value is calculated as a time weighted
average of the electric power for each of the settings selected for the time step. The output is the
average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.41 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Electricity Energy [J] This output re-
ports the electric energy consumed by the system. For each timestep the value is calculated from
the average electric power. The output is the sum over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.42 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Requested Outdoor Air Ventilation

Mass Flow Rate [kg/s] This output reports the mass flow rate of outdoor air (ventilation)
that would be required to meet the standard density volume flow rate of ventilation air scheduled
by DesignSpecification:OutdoorAir. This value is used as a soft constraint in the constrained opti-
mization problem that determines system settings in each time step. The output is the average over
the reporting period.
1.30. GROUP – ZONE FORCED AIR UNITS 1445

1.30.16.2.43 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Ventilation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output reports the mass flow rate of outdoor air (ventilation) supplied by the system. The
output is the average over the reporting period.

1.30.16.2.44 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Availability Status [] This output reports
whether or not the system is available. A value of 1.0 means the system will operate in an attempt to
satisfy the predicted sensible load, latent load, and requested ventilation rate. For standby periods
– when the system is available, but there are no loads, and no request for ventilation – the system
operates in Mode 0. A value of 0.0 means the system will not operate under any circumstance.

1.30.16.2.45 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction [] This output
reports the outdoor air fraction – the portion of the supply air mass flow rate that is composed of
ventilation air. For each timestep the value is calculated as a time weighted average of the outdoor
air fraction for each of the settings selected for the time step. The output is the average over the
reporting period.

1.30.16.2.46 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Runtime Fraction in Setting X []

Thy hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents a
combination of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination
associated with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the
fraction of the time step that the system operates in each setting in each time step.

1.30.16.2.47 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Mode in Setting X [] Thy hybrid system
may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents a combination of
operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination associated
with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the mode number
associated with each setting in each time step.

1.30.16.2.48 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Outdoor Air Fraction in Setting X []

Thy hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting represents a
combination of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The combination
associated with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs report the
outdoor air fraction associated with each setting in each time step.

1.30.16.2.49 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate in Setting
X [kg/s] Thy hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each setting
represents a combination of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air fraction. The
combination associated with each setting number may be unique in each time step. These outputs
report the supply air mass flow rate associated with each setting in each time step.

1.30.16.2.50 Zone Hybrid Unitary HVAC Supply Air Mass Flow Rate Ratio in
Setting X [] Thy hybrid system may operate in multiple settings within each time step. Each
setting represents a combination of operating mode, supply air mass flow rate, and outdoor air
fraction. The combination associated with each setting number may be unique in each time step.
These output reports the supply air mass flow rate ratio associated with each setting in each time
step. The supply air mass flow rate ratio is the ratio of the current supply air mass flow rate to the
system maximum supply air flow rate.
1446 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31 Group – Unitary Equipment

1.31.1 Furnace and Unitary Systems
The components

– AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
– AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
– AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
– AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly
– AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool
– AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
– AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed

are compound components usually placed in the primary air loop as the sole component. On the
zone equipment side they are usually connected to one or more zones through uncontrolled terminal
units (i.e., AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat objects). The maximum or design
air flow rate through the furnace or unitary system should usually be set equal to the sum of the
maximum air flow rates through the terminal unit objects. However, the simulation program can
usually account for unequal air flows if the user wishes to model this scenario.
The following HVAC equipment types are allowed in the air loop. The component matrix shows
which coils and fans are allowed with which equipment models.

1.31.2 AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
The AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem object is intended to replace all other air loop equipment,
although other system types are still available. This system is unique in that it can accommo-
date all fan and coil types whereas other system types are specific to the type of fan and coil
available for simulation. Additionally, although the AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem is intended
for use in the primary airloop, this object can be modeled as zone equipment (i.e., listed in a
ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList) or as an outside air system component (i.e., listed in a AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList). Water coil controllers are not required when these coil
types are used with the AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem object (i.e., leave the controller list name
blank in the AirLoopHVAC object if water coils are used exclusively within the Unitary System).
The AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem object is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component
(OnOff, ConstantVolume, VariableVolume, or ComponentModel), a cooling coil component, a heat-
ing coil component, and a reheat coil as shown in Figure 1.142. When a draw through configuration
is desired, the fan is placed directly after the heating coil. If dehumidification control is selected, a
reheat coil component is also required. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification control
type input is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active. All of the fan and coil
components are optional which allows the AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem object to be configured for
fan-only, heating-only, cooling-only, or both heating and cooling. It may also be applied without a
fan, controlling one or more coils, similar to the function of CoilSystem:Cooling:DX.
Links to the fan, cooling coil, heating coil and reheat coil specifications are provided in the unitary
system input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name and the system design operating
conditions are specified by the unitary system inputs.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1447

Figure 1.141:
1448 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.142: Schematic of the EnergyPlus Unitary System

1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1449

1.31.2.0.1 Schedules And Availability Manager

For unitary systems, don’t use the night cycle manager. Use a scheduled availability manager and
let the system be always on. Then use the Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name in
the unitary system to switch between continuous fan (for ventilation) during occupied periods and
switch to cycling fan for unoccupied. The system will cycle on as the thermostat requests, and this
way it will run just enough to meet the load - no need for a minimum cycle time.
Multi-speed fan chilled and hot water coils Air Handling Unit (AHU) can be modeled using Airloop
Unitary System HVAC object (AirloopHVAC:UnitarySystem). AHU with chilled and hot water coils
is setup by specifying Fan:OnOff and DesignSpecificationPerformance:MultiSpeed objects in Unitary
System. The design specification performance object allows running the chilled and hot water coils
capacity control using a multi-speed supply air fan. The multi-speed fan capacity control for chilled
and hot water coil AHU is performed by modulating the supply air flow rate while maintaining a
constant water flow rate. The chilled or hot water flow rates is set at maximum fixed flow rate
when there is cooling or heating load and the water flow rate is set to zero when there is no load.
Such control strategy is called two-position cooling or heating coil control. The fan speed selection
depends on the current load, at lower load the fan is operated at minimum speed (Speed = 1) and the
fan speed level increases progressively as the load increases until it reaches the maximum speed level
specified. The multi-speed fan operation is modulated between the speeds to meet the current load.
When the supply air fan is cycling between consecutive speeds levels, the speed ratio is calculated
that indicates what fraction of the time step that the system run at the higher of the two speeds.
At lower load, the fan may cycle on-off or run continuously depending the fan operating schedule
specified. When the fan is cycling a part-load ratio is calculated to reflect the proportion of the
system timestep the fan and coils were operating. In continuous fan operating mode only the coil
cycles on-off and the part-load ratio applies to the coil only. Multi-speed fan capacity control is
allowed with load based control type only.

1.31.2.1 Inputs

1.31.2.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system.

1.31.2.1.2 Field: Control Type

This alpha field contains control type i.e. load based or setpoint based for the unitary system. Valid
choices are Load, SetPoint and SingleZoneVAV. Load and SingleZoneVAV control requires a Con-
trolling Zone name. SetPoint control requires set points at each coil outlet node. A single set point at
the outlet of the system is allowed but not recommended. If setpoint control is used and the system
represents a heat pump (i.e., cooling and heating coils are both DX coils) then only one of these coils
may operate at a time. SingleZoneVAV requires two distinct fan flow rates, namely the Cooling and
Heating Supply Air Flow Rate and a lower No Load Supply Air Flow Rate which is used during times
of reduced cooling or heating loads. SingleZoneVAV allows load control at low speed fan until the
load exceeds available capacity or the outlet air temperature exceeds the specified limits where the
fan speed is then increased. For the SingleZoneVAV control type, temperature limits are identified
in the input fields for Minimum and Maximum Supply Air Temperature. Additionally, specific coil
types are required for the SingleZoneVAV control type. The cooling coil types are Coil:Cooling:Water,
Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry and Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed while the heating coil types
are Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric and Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed.
If alternate coil types are used they are modeled using the load based control method.
1450 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.2.1.3 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the unitary
system is located. This field is required when Load or SingleZoneVAV control type is selected.

1.31.2.1.4 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

This alpha field contains the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid for
this field:
None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control. None is required when Control
Type = SingleZoneVAV.
Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load.
This option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting
the DX cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type =
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humid-
ity setpoint. If cooling coil type = CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then the heat
exchanger is assumed to always transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and outlet airstreams
when the cooling coil is operating.
The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is used. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidification
is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not
adequate. If the dehumidification control type is specified as CoolReheat, then two additional
inputs (reheat coil type and name) are also required as shown below. Although the reheat coil is
required only when CoolReheat is selected, the optional reheat coil may be present for any of
the allowed Dehumidification Control Types. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification
control type is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active,

1.31.2.1.5 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name which contains information on the availability of the
unitary system to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the unitary system must be off
for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unitary system is available to operate
during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the unitary system as
required. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.2.1.6 Field: Unitary System Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the unitary system air inlet node name.
When the UnitarySystem is used to serve a zone as a zone equipment unit, this node name must be
either the name of a zone air exhaust node (Ref. ZoneHVAC:EquipmentConnections) to draw air
from a zone directly or an induced air outlet node (Ref. AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum) to draw air
from a return plenum, when the zone return node is connected to a return plenum.

1.31.2.1.7 Field: Unitary System Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the unitary system air outlet node name.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1451

1.31.2.1.8 Field: Supply Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the unitary sys-
tem. Fan type must be Fan:OnOff, Fan:ConstantVolume, Fan:VariableVolume, or
Fan:ComponentModel. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply Air Fan Operating Mode
Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff is used when the fan
cycles on and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule
values are at times 0). Fan:VariableVolume is used for variable air volume systems or multi- or
variable-speed coils. The Fan:ComponentModel may be used in place of the ConstantVolume or
VariableVolume fan types to more accurately represent fan performance.

1.31.2.1.9 Field: Supply Fan Name

This alpha field contains the unique identifying name given to the unitary system fan.

1.31.2.1.10 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed by the main cooling and
heating coils and supplemental heating coil. The fan “blows through” the cooling and heating coils.
The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the unit consists of the main
cooling/heating coil(s) followed by a fan, with the supplemental heater located at the outlet of the
fan. The fan “draws air through” the cooling/heating coil(s). If this field is left blank, the default is
blow through.

1.31.2.1.11 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil
cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values
other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles
to meet the load. The SingleZoneVAV control type is only active when the supply air fan runs
continuously (i.e., during cycling fan operation the Control Type = Load model is used).

1.31.2.1.12 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the unitary system. The
hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to
support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. Only specific coil
types are allowed when Control Type = SingleZoneVAV as noted. Allowable coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Heating:DX:TwoSpeed
– Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed
– Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
1452 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage
– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam
– Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
– Coil:UserDefined

1.31.2.1.13 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system heating coil.

1.31.2.1.14 Field: DX Heating Coil Sizing Ratio

This numeric field is used to adjust heat pump heating capacity with respect to DX cooling capacity.
It is used only for DX heat pump configurations (i.e., a DX cooling and heating coil is used).

1.31.2.1.15 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the unitary system. Allowable
coil types are:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed:ThermalStorage
– Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
– Coil:Cooling:Water
– Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry
– CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:UserDefined

1.31.2.1.16 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system cooling coil.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1453

1.31.2.1.17 Field: Use DOAS DX Cooling Coil

This input field enables DX Cooling coils to be used for 100% outdoor air dedicated outdoor air
system applications. There are two choices Yes or No. If Yes, the DX coil is used as 100% outdoor
DX coil. If No, the DX coil is used as regular DX coil. This input field is optional and the default
is No. No should be specified when selecting the SingleZoneVAV control type.

1.31.2.1.18 Field: Minimum Supply Air Temperature

When Use DOAS DX Cooling Coil is specified as Yes, this input field is the DX Cooling coils leaving
minimum air temperature for frost control. The DX cooling coil leaving air temperature is not
allowed to exceed this minimum air temperature. The DX cooling coil frost controller adjusts or
limits the desired coil outlet air setpoint temperature when the coil outlet temperature exceeds this
minimum temperature limit specified. The minimum and maximum values of this input field are
0.0o C and 7.5o C, and the default value is 2.0o C. This field is not autosizable when the input for
Use DOAS DX Cooling Coil = Yes. When Control Type = SingleZoneVAV, enter the minimum air
temperature limit for reduced fan speed in cooling mode. For SingleZoneVAV, the maximum limit
for the minimum supply air temperature is 20.0o C. Additionally, for the SingleZoneVAV model this
input does not limit the minimum supply air temperature resulting from cooling coil operation at
high fan speed.

1.31.2.1.19 Field: Latent Load Control

This alpha field defines the latent load control method. Available choices are SensibleOnlyLoadCon-
trol, LatentOnlyLoadControl, LatentWithSensibleLoadControl, or LatentOrSensibleLoadControl.
The default choice is SensibleOnlyLoadControl. The SensibleOnlyLoadControl choice will operate
to meet only a sensible load and is also required when SingleZoneVAV control is selected. The Laten-
tOnlyLoadConrol will operate to meet only a latent load. The LatentWithSensibleLoadControl will
operate to meet the latent load only if there is a sensible load. The LatentOrSensibleLoadControl
will operate to meet either a latent or sensible load.

1.31.2.1.20 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supplemental heating coil specified in the unitary
system. The hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector
objects to support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plant loop. The
Coil:UserDefined object must be configured as a heating coil. Supplemental heating type must be
one of:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam
– Coil:UserDefined
1454 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.2.1.21 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system supplemental or reheat
coil object. This coil provides supplemental heat during heating mode operation, or reheats the
supply air during dehumidification mode operation. For set point based control, all coils will control
to their respective outlet air temperature set point.

1.31.2.1.22 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method

This alpha field defines the supply air flow method during cooling operation. Available choices are
SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosizedCoolingValue, FlowPerCoolingCapac-
ity. For each of the choices, a corresponding air flow rate for cooling must be specified. If the system
does not have a cooling coil a 0 may be entered for cooling air flow rate and/or no load supply air
flow rate to turn the fan off when cooling is not required.

1.31.2.1.23 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system in cubic meters per
second when the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is
present or this field is autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
SupplyAirFlowRate.

1.31.2.1.24 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per floor area leaving the unitary system in meters
per second when the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is
present or this field is autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
FlowPerFloorArea.

1.31.2.1.25 Field: Cooling Fraction of Autosized Design Cooling Supply Air Flow
Rate
This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system
when the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is present or this
field is autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAu-
tosizedCoolingValue.

1.31.2.1.26 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system
when the cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the cooling coil is present or this
field is autosizable. Required field when Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerCool-
ingCapacity.

1.31.2.1.27 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method

This alpha field defines the supply air flow method during heating operation. Available choices are
SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosizedHeatingValue, FlowPerHeatingCapac-
ity. For each of the choices, a corresponding air flow rate for heating must be specified. If the system
does not have a heating coil a 0 may be entered for heating air flow rate and/or no load supply air
flow rate to turn the fan off when heating is not required.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1455

1.31.2.1.28 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system in cubic meters per
second when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is
present or this field is autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
SupplyAirFlowRate.

1.31.2.1.29 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per floor area leaving the unitary system in meters
per second when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is
present or this field is autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
FlowPerFloorArea.

1.31.2.1.30 Field: Heating Fraction of Autosized Design Heating Supply Air

Flow Rate
This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system
when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is present or
this field is autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionO-
fAutosizedHeatingValue.

1.31.2.1.31 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system
when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 if the heating coil is present or
this field is autosizable. Required field when Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPer-
HeatingCapacity.

1.31.2.1.32 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method

This alpha field defines the supply air flow method when neither cooling or heating is required. Avail-
able choices are SupplyAirFlowRate, FlowPerFloorArea, FractionOfAutosizedCoolingValue, Frac-
tionOfAutosizedHeatingValue, FlowPerCoolingCapacity, FlowPerHeatingCapacity. For each of the
choices, a corresponding air flow rate must be specified. The following fields are also used to specify
the lower air flow rate for the SingleZoneVAV control method with recommendations of greater than
or equal to 67% of the Cooling or Heating Supply Air Flow Rate when any DX coil is used and 50%
for other coil types.

1.31.2.1.33 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system in cubic meters per
second when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., main cooling/heating coils and supplemental
heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the unitary system
operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation or when the Control Type is specified as
SingleZoneVAV. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. If this field is
autosized, then it is sized to the minimum of the heating and cooling lowest speed supply air flow
rate. If the Control Type is specified as SingleZoneVAV and this field is autosized, then the no load
supply air flow rate is set equal to 0.5 or 0.667 times the maximum flow rate for water or coils,
respectively. If the unitary system operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this
value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate
1456 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was
last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation). This field should not be set to 0 when
Control Type is specified as SingleZoneVAV.

1.31.2.1.34 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per floor area leaving the unitary system in meters
per second when neither cooling or heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal
to 0 or this field is autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method During
is FlowPerFloorArea.

1.31.2.1.35 Field: No Load Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system
when neither cooling or heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this
field is autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FractionOfAu-
tosizedCoolingValue.

1.31.2.1.36 Field: No Load Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the fraction of autosized supply air flow rate leaving the unitary sys-
tem when the neither cooling or heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal
to 0 or this field is autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingValue.

1.31.2.1.37 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity During
Cooling Operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system
when neither cooling or heating is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this field
is autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerCooling-
Capacity.

1.31.2.1.38 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity During
Heating Operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate per unit of capacity leaving the unitary system
when neither cooling or heating is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0 or this field
is autosizable. Required field when No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method is FlowPerHeating-
Capacity.

1.31.2.1.39 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature

This numeric field contains the design operating air outlet temperature in degrees C when the uni-
tary system is heating. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 80 C. When Control
Type = SingleZoneVAV, enter the maximum air temperature limit for reduced fan speed in heating
model. For the SingleZoneVAV model this input does not limit the maximum supply air tempera-
ture resulting from heating or supplemental heating coil operation at high fan speed. This field is
autosizable.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1457

1.31.2.1.40 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which the heat pump supple-
mental heating coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less than or equal to
21 C. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 21 C.

1.31.2.1.41 Field: Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the outdoor node which controls the operation of the supple-
mental heating coil. If this field is left blank, the outdoor temperature is based solely on the weather
data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must also be listed in an OutdoorAir:Node
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor temperature
from the weather data. Alternately, the node name must be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList
object where the outdoor temperature is taken directly from the weather data.

1.31.2.1.42 Field: Maximum Cycling Rate

This numeric field contains the maximum on-off cycling rate for the compressor, which occurs at
50% run time fraction. Suggested values are shown in Figure 1.143. (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.143: Suggested values for maximum cycling rate

1.31.2.1.43 Field: Heat Pump Time Constant

This numeric field contains the time constant for the cooling coil’s capacity to reach steady state
after startup. Suggested values are shown in Figure 1.144. (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.144: Suggested values for heat pump time constant

1458 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.2.1.44 Field: Fraction of On-Cycle Power Use

This numeric field contains the fraction of on-cycle power use to adjust the part load fraction based
on the off-cycle power consumption due to crankcase heaters, controls, fans, and etc. Suggested
value values are shown in Figure 1.145. (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.145: Suggested values for fraction of on cycle power use

1.31.2.1.45 Field: Heat Pump Fan Delay Time

This numeric field contains the time delay for the heat pump supply air fan to shut off after the
compressor cycles off in seconds. This value can be obtained from the manufacturer or the heat pump
catalog. Enter a value of zero when the heat pump’s fan operating mode is continuous. Suggested
value is 60 seconds.

1.31.2.1.46 Field: Ancillary On-Cycle Electric Power

This field defines ancillary electrical power (W) consumed during the on-cycle period (i.e., when
the cooling or heating coil is operating). The model assumes that this ancillary power does not
contribute to heating the supply air. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value
is also 0.0 if the field is left blank.

1.31.2.1.47 Field: Ancillary Off-Cycle Electric Power

This field defines ancillary electrical power (W) consumed during the off-cycle period (i.e., when the
cooling and heating coil are not operating). The model assumes that this ancillary power does not
contribute to heating the supply air. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value
is also 0.0 if the field is left blank.

1.31.2.1.48 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This optional input field defines the design water flow rate used if the heat recovery option is being
simulated. If this value is greater than 0.0 then a heat recovery loop must be specified and attached
to the multispeed heat pump using the next 2 node fields. To determine how the heat recovery
algorithm works, refer to the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference in the AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem
with Heat Recovery section. The units for this input value are cubic meters per second.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1459

1.31.2.1.49 Field: Maximum Temperature for Heat Recovery

This field sets the maximum temperature (in degrees C) that this heat pump can produce for heat
recovery. The idea behind this field is that the current models do not take temperatures into
account for availability and they just pass Q’s around the loop without a temperature limit. This
temperature limit puts an upper bound on the recovered heat and limits the max temperature leaving
the component.
As temperatures in the loop approach the maximum temperature, the temperature difference between
the entering water and the surfaces in the piece of equipment becomes smaller. For the given heat
recovery flow rate and that temperature difference the amount of heat recovered will be reduced,
and eventually there will be no heat recovered when the entering water temperature is equal to the
maximum temperature specified by the user in this field. The reduced amount of heat recovered will
diminish if the temperature of the loop approach is the maximum temperature, and this will show
up in the reporting. This allows the user to set the availability or the quality of the heat recovered
for usage in other parts of the system or to heat domestic hot water supply.

1.31.2.1.50 Field: Heat Recovery Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side inlet node.

1.31.2.1.51 Field: Heat Recovery Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side outlet node.

1.31.2.1.52 Field: Design Specification Multispeed Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type for the design specification multispeed object. This
field is only needed when multispeed cooling or heating coil is specified.

1.31.2.1.53 Field: Design Specification Multispeed Object Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the design specification multispeed object. This
field is only needed when multispeed cooling or heating coil is specified.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the heat/cool unitary system requires spec-
ification of the following objects in addition to the unitary system object:

1) Fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)

2) Cooling coil
3) Heating coil
4) Reheat coil
5) Direct air unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat) for each zone served by
the unitary system when used in an air loop

AirLoopHVAC:UnitarySystem ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, !- Name
Load , !- Control Type
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
, !- Dehumidification Control Type
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
1460 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name

Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
FanModeSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, !- Heating Coil Name
, !- DX Heating Coil Sizing Ratio
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling Coil Name
, !- Use DOAS DX Cooling Coil
, !- Minimum Supply Air Temperature {C}
, !- Latent Load Control
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Supp Gas Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Method
1.7, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Cooling Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Method
1.7, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- Heating Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity {m3/s-W}
SupplyAirFlowRate , !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Method
0.2, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Floor Area {m3/s-m2}
, !- No Load Fraction of Autosized Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- No Load Fraction of Autosized Heating Supply Air Flow Rate
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity during Cooling
Operation {m3/s-W}
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Per Unit of Capacity during Heating
Operation {m3/s-W}
50, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature {C}
21, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater
Operation {C}
, !- Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name
, !- Maximum Cycling Rate {cycles/hr}
, !- Heat Pump Time Constant {s}
, !- Fraction of On -Cycle Power Use
, !- Heat Pump Fan Delay Time {s}
, !- Ancillary On -Cycle Electric Power {W}
, !- Ancillary Off -Cycle Electric Power {W}
, !- Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Maximum Temperature for Heat Recovery {C}
, !- Heat Recovery Water Inlet Node Name
, !- Heat Recovery Water Outlet Node Name
UnitarySystemPerformance :Multispeed , !- Design Specification Multispeed Object Type
MyMultispeedHPSpec; !- Design Specification Multispeed Object Name

UnitarySystemPerformance :Multispeed ,
MyMultispeedHPSpec , !- Name
4, !- Number of Speeds for Heating
4, !- Number of Speeds for Cooling
No , !- Single Mode Operation
, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Ratio
0.235294118 , !- Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.235294118 , !- Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.470588235 , !- Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.470588235 , !- Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.705882353 , !- Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Ratio
0.705882353 , !- Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Ratio
1.0, !- Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Ratio
1.0; !- Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Ratio
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1461

1.31.2.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Cooling Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Heating Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

Load based and SingleZoneVAV control outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Predicted Moisture Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate [W]

Two speed coil outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Cycling Ratio []

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Compressor Speed Ratio []

Multi speed coil outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System DX Coil Cycling Ratio []

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System DX Coil Speed Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System DX Coil Speed Level []

Multi speed coil outputs(If heat recovery is specified)

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum, Unitary System Heat Recovery Energy [J]

Variable speed coils

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Latent Cooling Rate [W]
1462 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Water to air heat pump outputs

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Water Coil Cycling Ratio []
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Water Coil Speed Ratio []
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Water Coil Speed Level []

Subcool reheat coil outputs under Coil:Cooling:DX

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Zone Load Sensible Heat Ratio []

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Cooling Coil Load Sensible Heat Ratio []

1.31.2.2.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the unitary system to the
unitary system’s design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass
flow rate). For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the unitary system
is available (based on the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the
actual air mass flow rate is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating (or cooling) load to
the steady-state unitary system heating (or cooling) capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the runtime
fraction for the unitary system fan may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here due
the part-load performance of the unitary system’s heating (or cooling) coil (delay at start-up to
reach steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components
where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff). When the speed number is greater than 1, the value is 1.0.

1.31.2.2.2 Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the unitary system’s DX heating or cooling coil at Speed 1. The runtime fraction for the unitary
system compressor may be different from the compressor part-load ratio reported here due the part-
load performance of the heating/cooling coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output). In
general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components where appropriate. When the
speed number is greater than 1, the value is 1.0.

1.31.2.2.3 Unitary System DX Coil Cycling Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the unitary system’s DX heating or cooling coil (Speed 1) for the entire system timestep. The
value is between 0.0 and 1.0 when the unitary system is cycling on and off its lowest speed (Speed
1) and 1.0 when the unitary system operates at speeds above 1.
When Single Mode Operation is specified, the value is between 0.0 and 1.0 when the heat pump is
cycling on at any given speed.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1463

1.31.2.2.4 Unitary System DX Coil Speed Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of time in a system timestep that the compressor is at rated speed
between two consecutive speed numbers ( [Compressor Speed - Compressor speed at Speed i-1] /
[Compressor speed at Speed i - Compressor speed at Speed i-1]). The compressor speed ratio reports
(1.0 is max, 0.0 is min) and any value in between as it is averaged over the timestep. The value is
0.0 during Speed 1 operation.
The physical meaning of the speed ratio is dependent on the compressor configuration defined in the
field of child coil object: Apply Part Load Fraction to Speeds greater than 1. The allowed choice is
either Yes or No. When No is entered, one compressor is assumed for all speeds. The speed ratio
represents how long the higher speed runs as a fraction of the system timestep, and the lower speed
runs in the rest of the system timestep. When Yes is entered, multiple compressors are assumed,
and each compressor has associated speed. The speed ratio represents how long the higher speed
runs as a fraction of the system timestep, and the low speed runs in a whole system timestep.
When Single Mode Operation is specified, the speed ratio is set to 0 at Speed 1 and 1 at Speed > 1.

1.31.2.2.5 Unitary System DX Coil Speed Level []

This output variable reports the maximum speed needed when the unitary system operates to meet
the sensible load (heating or cooling) in a system timestep. When the value is 1, the unitary system
operates at Speed 1 (lowest speed). For this case the cycling ratio is between 0.0 and 1.0, while
the speed ratio is 0.0. When the speed number output variable is above one, such as i, the unitary
system operation is determined by the speed ratio through linear interpolation. For example, when
the speed ratio is 0.4 and the speed number is 3, the unitary system operates at Speed 3 for 40% of
a system timestep and at Speed 2 for 60% of a system timestep for a single compressor. For multiple
compressors, the unitary system operates at Speed 3 in the 40% of a system timestep and at Speed
2 in the whole system timestep.

1.31.2.2.6 Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the unitary system to the zones it
is serving in Watts. For set point control, this value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of
the unitary system outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the unitary
system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported. For load or single zone VAV
control this value is calculated using the outlet air and zone air conditions.

1.31.2.2.7 Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the unitary system from the zones
it is serving in Watts. For set point control, this value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of
the unitary system outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the unitary
system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported. For load or single zone VAV
control this value is calculated using the outlet air and zone air conditions.

1.31.2.2.8 Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output field reports the sensible heat addition rate of the unitary system to the zones it is
serving in Watts. For set point control, this value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the
1464 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

unitary system outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow
rate through the unitary system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (heating only) are averaged for the timestep being reported. For load or
single zone VAV control this value is calculated using the outlet air and zone air conditions.

1.31.2.2.9 Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the unitary system from the
zones it is serving in Watts. For set point control, this value is calculated using the enthalpy difference
of the unitary system outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass
flow rate through the unitary system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported. For load or
single zone VAV control this value is calculated using the outlet air and zone air conditions.

1.31.2.2.10 Unitary System Latent Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the unitary system in Watts.
This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate
provided by the unitary system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.2.2.11 Unitary System Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the unitary system in Watts.
This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate
provided by the unitary system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.2.2.12 Unitary System Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the unitary system in Watts. The consumption
includes electricity used by the DX coils (including crankcase heater if the fuel type is electricity),
fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fans associated with the DX coil[s]), auxiliary power
during on and off period, and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported. Any non-electric energy use is not reported by the unitary system object but is reported
in the associated coil objects as appropriate.

1.31.2.2.13 Unitary System Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the unitary system in Joules for the timestep being
reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the DX compressor (including crankcase
heater if the fuel type is electricity), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fans associated
with the DX coil[s]), auxiliary power during on and off period, and the supplemental heating coil (if
electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
are summed for the timestep being reported. Any non-electric energy use is not reported by the
unitary system object but is reported in the associated coil objects as appropriate.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1465

1.31.2.2.14 Unitary System Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the average auxiliary electricity consumption rate (including both on-cycle and
off-cycle) in Watts for the timestep being reported.

1.31.2.2.15 Unitary System Cooling Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

This is the auxiliary electricity consumption in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is the
auxiliary electricity consumption during periods when the unitary system is providing cooling (DX
cooling coil is operating). This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.31.2.2.16 Unitary System Heating Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

This is the auxiliary electricity consumption in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is the
auxiliary electricity consumption during periods when the unitary system is providing heating (DX
heating coil is operating). This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Heating, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.31.2.2.17 Unitary System Predicted Sensible Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This output variable is available only for load based and single zone VAV control and is the adjusted
sensible load requested from the zone thermostat in watts. This value is calculated by adjusting
the zone predicted sensible load to setpoint heat transfer rate based on the controlling zone air flow
fraction and the impact of fan heat and outdoor air so that the thermostat setpoints are met. This
value is used for control purposes within the Unitary System model. Positive values denote a heating
load while negative valued denote a cooling load. Positive and negative values do not necessarily
represent which coil type is active (e.g., a positive heating load does not necessarily mean the heating
coil will turn on). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.2.2.18 Unitary System Predicted Moisture Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This output variable is available only for load based control and is the adjusted moisture load
requested from the zone humidistat in watts. This value is calculated by adjusting the zone predicted
moisture load to setpoint heat transfer rate based on the heat of vaporization of water, controlling
zone air flow fraction and the dehumidification control type (i.e., the moisture load is set to 0 for
non-dehumidification systems). When this value is non-zero and dehumidification is requested, the
Unitary System Predicted Moisture Load to Setpoint Heat Transfer Rate is compared to the result
of sensible only control and if the coil does not provide sufficient dehumidification the coil capacity
is increased to meet this moisture load. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep
being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.2.2.19 Unitary System Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]

1.31.2.2.20 Unitary System Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]

1466 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.2.2.21 Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and water mass flow rate for
unitary systems with heat recovery.

1.31.2.2.22 Unitary System Heat Recovery Rate [W]

1.31.2.2.23 Unitary System Heat Recovery Energy [J]

For multispeed unitary systems with heat recovery, these outputs are the recoverable energy rate (in
Watts) and energy (in Joules).

1.31.2.2.24 Unitary System Requested Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output variable is the sensible cooling requested from the zone thermostat in watts. This value
is calculated using the unitary system outlet air and zone conditions, the specific heat of the zone
air, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported.

1.31.2.2.25 Unitary System Requested Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output variable is the latent cooling requested from the zone humidistat in watts. This value is
calculated using the unitary system outlet air and zone conditions, the heat of vaporization of water
at the current zone conditions, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for
the timestep being reported.

1.31.2.2.26 Unitary System Requested Heating Rate [W]

This output variable is the sensible heating requested from the zone thermostat in watts. This value
is calculated using the unitary system outlet air and zone conditions, the specific heat of the zone
air, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported.

1.31.2.2.27 Unitary System Water Coil Cycling Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the multispeed fan chilled water or hot water coil for the entire system timestep. The value is
between 0.0 and 1.0 when the AHU is cycling on and off its lowest speed (fan speed 1) and 1.0 when
the multispeed fan chilled water or hot water AHU operates at speed levels above 1.

1.31.2.2.28 Unitary System Water Coil Speed Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of time in a system timestep that the AHU fan is at rated speed
between two consecutive speed levels ( [System Load – Capacity at Fan Speed i-1] / [Capacity at Fan
Speed i – Capacity at Fan Speed i-1]). The fan speed ratio reports (1.0 is max, 0.0 is min) and any
value in between as it is averaged over the timestep. The value is 0.0 during Speed 1 operation. AHU
speed ratio depends on the system load and the supply air fan speed. The speed ratio represents
how long the higher speed runs as a fraction of the system timestep, and the lower speed runs in the
rest of the system timestep.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1467

1.31.2.2.29 Unitary System Water Coil Speed Level []

This output variable reports the maximum speed needed when the system operates to meet the
sensible load (heating or cooling) in a system timestep. When the value is 1, the AHU operates at
Speed 1 (lowest speed). For this case the cycling ratio is between 0.0 and 1.0, while the speed ratio
is 0.0. When the speed level is above the minimum (speed = 1), the system operation is determined
by the speed ratio. For example, when the speed ratio is 0.4 and the speed lever is 3, then the supply
air fan and water coil operate at Speed 3 for 40% of a system timestep and at Speed 2 for 60% of a
system timestep.

1.31.2.2.30 Unitary System Zone Load Sensible Heat Ratio []

This output variable reports the load sensible heat ratio, defined as sensible load / (sensible load +
latent load) for a subcool reheat coil. The value is used to determine required coil output sensible
heat ratio.

1.31.2.2.31 Unitary System Cooling Coil Load Sensible Heat Ratio []

This output variable reports the cooling coil load sensible heat ratio, defined as sensible output /
(sensible output + latent output) for a subcool reheat coil. The value is used to determine mode
ratio between coil normal operation mode and subcool or reheat operation mode.

1.31.3 UnitarySystemPerformance:Multispeed

1.31.3.1 Inputs

1.31.3.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the multispeed performance specification.

1.31.3.1.2 Field: Number of Speeds for Heating

This field defines the number of heating speeds for the heat pump, and must match the number
of heating speeds defined in the associated heating coil. The value for this input field defines the
number of airflow rate ratios that must be defined for heating in the fields below. The minimum
value for this field is one and the maximum value is the number specified in the coil object. If the
heating coil type used in the unitary system object is not a multispeed coil type, then this field
should be 1.

1.31.3.1.3 Field: Number of Speeds for Cooling

This field defines the number of cooling speeds for the heat pump, and must match the number of
cooling speeds defined in the associated DX cooling coil. The value for this input field defines the
number of airflow rate ratios that must be defined for cooling in the fields below. The minimum
value for this field is one and the maximum value is the number specified in the coil object. If the
cooling coil type used in the unitary system object is not a multispeed coil type, then this field
should be 1.
1468 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.3.1.4 Field: Single Mode Operation

This field specifies the coil operation mode for multiple speed DX cooling and heating coils during
each HVAC timestep. The allowed choice is Yes or No. The No choice allows a coil works between
two adjacent speeds when a system load is greater than the coil capacity at speed 1. The Yes choice
allows a coil works with a single capacity at a different speed. The speed number is determined by
a system load.
The allowed cooling and heating coil types are restricted to the following combinations:
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed and Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed or Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed and
Coil:Heating:Fuel.

1.31.3.1.5 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate Ratio

This field defines the no load operating air flow rate when the system fan is specified to operate
continuously. The allowed fractions are between 0 and 1 with a default value of 1. This fraction is
usually set to the mimumum of heating and cooling operation lowest speed supply air flow fraction.
The no load air flow rate will be calculated as this fraction multiplied by the minimum of the cooling
and heating high speed supply air flow rate. If the cooling or heating coil is not present, this fraction
is multiplied by the operating supply air flow rate.

1.31.3.1.6 Field Group: Heating and Cooling Speeds 1 to 10

The air flow through a multispeed coil system is specified as a group of two air flow ratio inputs,
one each for heating and cooling. If the number of speeds for heating and cooling are different,
inputs for both heating and cooling are still required for a given speed yet one input may be blank.
The maximum of the inputs for Number of Speeds for Cooling and Number of Speeds for Heating
specified above determines how many groups of heating and cooling supply air flow ratio inputs are
required. Both inputs for Speed 1 are required and specify the air flow ratio for the lowest speed,
followed by the inputs for Speed 2, Speed 3, etc. up to a maximum of 10 speeds. These inputs are
applicable only to multispeed or variable speed coils.

1.31.3.1.7 Field: Heating Speed <x> Supply Air Flow Ratio

This numeric field defines the ratio of supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system to the maximum
air flow rate specified in the coil object at maximum speed when the heating coil is operating at
Speed <x>. Values must be greater than 0. The entered value must be greater or equal to the flow
rate ratio specified for the previous heating speed. If the ‘Number of Speeds for Heating’ is less than
<x>, then this field can be left blank.

1.31.3.1.8 Field: Cooling Speed <x> Supply Air Flow Ratio

This numeric field defines the ratio of supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system to the maximum
air flow rate specified in the coil object at maximum speed when the cooling coil is operating at Speed
<x>. Values must be greater than 0. The entered value must be greater or equal to the flow rate
ratio specified for the previous cooling speed. If the ‘Number of Speeds for Cooling’ is less than
<x>, then this field can be left blank.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1469

1.31.4 AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool
The heat/cool furnace is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff or Con-
stantVolume), a DX cooling coil component, and a Gas or Electric heating coil component. The
blow through furnace configuration is shown in Figure 1.146 below. When a draw through furnace
configuration is desired, the fan is placed directly after the heating coil. If the dehumidification
control type is specified as CoolReheat, a reheat coil component is also required. If the reheat coil is
present and the dehumidification control type input is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil
will not be active,

Figure 1.146: Schematic of EnergyPlus Heat/Cool Furnace

Note: the coil order shown here has been revised from previous versions (prior to V4.0) of Energyplus
to configure the cooling coil upstream of the heating coil. This configuration provides uniformity
with all unitary equipment. However, for unitary HeatCool systems that do not use a reheat coil,
the heating coil can also be placed upstream of the cooling coil. This optional coil placement is
retained to allow compatibility with previous versions of Energyplus. For input files developed using
1470 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

previous versions of Energyplus, it is recommended that the coil order be revised according to the
figure above.
Links to the fan, heating coil, DX cooling coil and optional reheat coil specifications are provided in
the furnace input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name and the furnace design operating
conditions are specified by the furnace inputs.

1.31.4.1 Inputs

1.31.4.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unit.

1.31.4.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name which contains information on the availability of the
furnace to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the furnace must be off for that time
period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the furnace is available to operate during that time
period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the furnace as required. If this field is left
blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.4.1.3 Field: Furnace Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the furnace inlet node name.

1.31.4.1.4 Field: Furnace Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the furnace outlet node name.

1.31.4.1.5 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the furnace supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on
and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than
0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the
load.

1.31.4.1.6 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature

This numeric field contains the design operating furnace air outlet temperature in degrees C when
the furnace is heating. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 80 C.

1.31.4.1.7 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the furnace in cubic meters per second
when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.31.4.1.8 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the furnace in cubic meters per second
when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0
or this field is autosizable.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1471

1.31.4.1.9 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the furnace in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the furnace operating mode is specified as
continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable.
If the furnace operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or
this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating
is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling
operation or heating operation).

1.31.4.1.10 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the furnace is
located.

1.31.4.1.11 Field: Supply Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the furnace. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply Air
Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff is
used when the fan cycles on and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule values are at times 0).

1.31.4.1.12 Field: Supply Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the furnace fan.

1.31.4.1.13 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed by the DX coils and
supplemental heating coil. The fan “blows through” the cooling and heating coils. The second
choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the unit consists of the DX coil(s) followed
by a fan, with the supplemental heater located at the outlet of the fan. The fan “draws air through”
the DX coil(s). If this field is left blank, the default is blow through.

1.31.4.1.14 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the furnace. The hot water
and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to support the
heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation
through the heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The
parent object (Unitary Heat and Cool Furnace) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating
water flow. Allowable coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam
1472 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.4.1.15 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the furnace heating coil.

1.31.4.1.16 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the furnace. Only allowable
coil types are:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed

1.31.4.1.17 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the furnace cooling coil.

1.31.4.1.18 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

This alpha field contains the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid for
this field:

– None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control

– Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load.
This option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting the
DX cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type = Coil-
System:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
– CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high
humidity setpoint. If cooling coil type = CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then
the heat exchanger is assumed to always transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and
outlet airstreams when the cooling coil is operating.

The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is used. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidification
is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not
adequate. If the dehumidification control type is specified as CoolReheat, then two additional
inputs (reheat coil type and name) are also required as shown below. Although the reheat coil
is required only when CoolRheat is selected, the optional reheat coil may be present for any of
the allowed Dehumidification Control Types. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification
control type is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active,

1.31.4.1.19 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of reheat coil specified in the furnace. The hot water
and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to support the
heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation
through the reheat coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The
parent object (Unitary Heat and Cool Furnace) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating
water flow. Reheat coil type must be one of:
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1473

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.4.1.20 Field: Reheat Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the furnace reheat coil.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the heat/cool furnace requires specification
of the following objects in addition to the furnace object:

1) fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)

2) cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted)
3) heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel or Coil:Heating:Electric)
4) reheat coil (optional, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric, or Coil:Heating:Desuperheater)
5) terminal unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat) for each zone served by the
furnace

Note: the furnace’s fan, cooling coil, heating coil and optional reheat coil must be connected in the
air loop according to the configuration shown above (Figure 1.146) when CoolReheat is selected as
the dehujmidificaiton control type. In addition, the volumetric air flow rate specified in the terminal
air unit for the controlling zone should properly reflect the fractional volumetric air flow rate specified
in the furnace object.

AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool ,
GasHeat DXAC Furnace 1, !- Name of furnace
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Furnace inlet node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Furnace outlet node name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum supply air temperature from furnace heater {C}
1.3, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply fan name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating coil type
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling coil type
Furnace ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling coil name
None; !- Dehumidificatioin Control Type

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node
1474 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Furnace ACDXCoil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
25000 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
1.3, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
WindACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
CyclingFanAndCompressor ; !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.3, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

Example of Heat/Cool Furnace Specification

1.31.4.2 Outputs

HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

HVAC,Average,Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

1.31.4.2.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the furnace to the furnace’s
design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass flow rate).
For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the furnace is available (based
on the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the actual air mass flow
rate is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating (or cooling) load to the steady-state
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1475

furnace heating (or cooling) capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the runtime fraction for the furnace
fan may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance of
the furnace’s heating (or cooling) coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output). In general,
runtime fractions are reported by individual components where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff).
Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

1.31.5 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool
The AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool object is the identical model to the AirLoopHAVC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCo
object. The heat/cool unitary system is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component
(OnOff or ConstantVolume), a DX cooling coil component and a Gas or Electric heating coil
component as shown in Figure 1.147. When a draw through configuration is desired, the fan is
placed directly after the heating coil. If dehumidification control is selected, a reheat coil component
is also required. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification control type input is not
specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active,
Note: the coil order shown here has been revised from previous versions (prior to V4.0) of Energyplus
to configure the cooling coil upstream of the heating coil. This configuration provides uniformity
with all unitary equipment. However, for unitary HeatCool systems that do not use a reheat coil,
the heating coil can also be placed upstream of the cooling coil. This optional coil placement is
retained to allow compatibility with previous versions of Energyplus. For input files developed using
previous versions of Energyplus, it is recommended that the coil order be revised according to the
figure above.
Links to the fan, DX cooling coil, heating coil and optional reheat coil specifications are provided
in the unitary system input data syntax. In addition, the control zone name and the system design
operating conditions are specified by the unitary system inputs.

1.31.5.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system.

1.31.5.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name which contains information on the availability of the
unitary system to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the unitary system must be off
for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unitary system is available to operate
during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the unitary system as
required. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.5.3 Field: Unitary System Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the unitary system inlet node name.

1.31.5.4 Field: Unitary System Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the unitary system outlet node name.
1476 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.147: Schematic of Blow Through Heat/Cool Unitary System

1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1477

1.31.5.5 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil
cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values
other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to
meet the load.

1.31.5.6 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature

This numeric field contains the design operating air outlet temperature in degrees C when the unitary
system is heating. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 80 C.

1.31.5.7 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system in cubic meters per
second when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosiz-
able.

1.31.5.8 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system in cubic meters per
second when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater
than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.31.5.9 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the unitary system in cubic meters per
second when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off
but the supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the unitary system operating mode is
specified as continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is
autosizable. If the unitary system operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this
value is set to zero or this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate
when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last
operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).

1.31.5.10 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the unitary
system is located.

1.31.5.11 Field: Supply Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the unitary system. Fan
type must be Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply
Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff
1478 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

is used when the fan cycles on and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule values are at times 0).

1.31.5.12 Field: Supply Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system fan.

1.31.5.13 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed by the DX coils and
supplemental heating coil. The fan “blows through” the cooling and heating coils. The second
choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the unit consists of the DX coil(s) followed
by a fan, with the supplemental heater located at the outlet of the fan. The fan “draws air through”
the DX coil(s). If this field is left blank, the default is blow through.

1.31.5.14 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the unitary system. The
hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to
support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow
modulation through the heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil
object. The parent object (Unitary Heat and Cool System) itself provides the “controller” function
of modulating water flow. Allowable coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.5.15 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system heating coil.

1.31.5.16 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the unitary system. Only
allowable coil types are:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed

1.31.5.17 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system cooling coil.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1479

1.31.5.18 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

This alpha field contains the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid for
this field:

– None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control

– Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load.
This option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting the
DX cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type = Coil-
System:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
– CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high
humidity setpoint. If cooling coil type = CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then
the heat exchanger is assumed to always transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and
outlet airstreams when the cooling coil is operating.

The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is used. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidification
is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is not
adequate. If the dehumidification control type is specified as CoolReheat, then two additional
inputs (reheat coil type and name) are also required as shown below. Although the reheat coil is
required only when CoolReheat is selected, the optional reheat coil may be present for any of
the allowed Dehumidification Control Types. If the reheat coil is present and the dehumidification
control type is not specified as CoolReheat, the reheat coil will not be active,

1.31.5.19 Field: Reheat Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of reheat coil specified in the unitary system. The
hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to
support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow
modulation through the reheat coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil
object. The parent object (Unitary Heat and Cool System) itself provides the “controller” function
of modulating water flow. Reheat coil type must be one of:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Desuperheater
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.5.20 Field: Reheat Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system reheat coil.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the heat/cool unitary system requires spec-
ification of the following objects in addition to the unitary system object:
1) Fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)
2) Cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted)
1480 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

3) Heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel or Coil:Heating:Electric)

4) Reheat coil (optional, Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric, or Coil:Heating:Desuperheater)
5) Direct air unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat) for each zone served by the
unitary system
Note: the unitary system’s fan, cooling coil, heating coil and optional reheat coil must be connected in
the air loop according to the configuration shown above (Figure 1.147). In addition, the volumetric
air flow rate specified in the direct air unit for the controlling zone should properly reflect the
fractional volumetric air flow rate specified in the unitary system object.

AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatCool ,
GasHeat DXAC Unitary System 1, !- Name of unitary system
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Unitary system inlet node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Unitary system outlet node name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum supply air temperature from unitary system heater {C}
1.3, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply fan name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating coil type
Unitary System Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil name
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , !- Cooling coil type
Unitary System ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling coil name
None; !- High humidity control

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Unitary System Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
25000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Unitary System ACDXCoil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
25000 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR
3.0, !- Rated COP
1.3, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
WindACCoolCapFT , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACCoolCapFFF , !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACEIRFT , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
WindACEIRFFF , !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of flow fraction)
WindACPLFFPLR , !- Part Load Fraction Correlation (function of part load ratio)
CyclingFanAndCompressor ; !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.3, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1481

DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

Example of Heat/Cool Unitary System Specification

1.31.6 Unitary System Heat and Cool (AirLoopHVAC) Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio

1.31.6.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the unitary system to the
system’s design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass flow
rate). For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the unitary system is
available (based on the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the actual
air mass flow rate is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating (or cooling) load to the
steady-state unitary system heating (or cooling) capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the runtime
fraction for the unitary system fan may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here
due the part-load performance of the system’s heating (or cooling) coil (delay at start-up to reach
steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components where
appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff).

1.31.6.2 Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible cooling load to the steady-state cooling capacity
of the unitary system’s DX cooling coil. The runtime fraction for the DX cooling coil compressor
may be different from the compressor part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance
of the cooling coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are
reported by individual components where appropriate.
1482 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.7 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir
The unitary air-to-air heat pump is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff
or ConstantVolume), a DX cooling coil component, a DX heating coil component, and a Gas or
Electric supplementary heating coil component as shown in the Figure below.

Figure 1.148: Schematic of EnergyPlus Unitary Air-to-Air Heat Pump (Blow Through Configura-
tion)

Links to the fan, DX cooling coil, DX heating coil, and supplementary heating coil specifications are
provided in the heat pump’s input data syntax. In addition the control zone name and the system
design operating conditions are specified by the heat pump inputs.

1.31.7.1 Inputs

1.31.7.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system heat pump.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1483

1.31.7.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name (ref. Schedule objects) that contains information on
the availability of the heat pump to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used)
indicates that the unit can be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used)
denotes that the unit must be off for the hour. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of
1 for all time periods.

1.31.7.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node from which the heat pump draws its
inlet air.

1.31.7.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node to which the heat pump sends its
outlet air.

1.31.7.1.5 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.31.7.1.6 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0
or this field is autosizable.

1.31.7.1.7 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the heat pump operating mode is specified as
continuous fan operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. If
the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or
this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating
is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling
operation or heating operation).

1.31.7.1.8 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the heat pump
is located.

1.31.7.1.9 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the heat pump. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply Air
Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff is
used when the fan cycles on and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule values are at times 0).
1484 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.7.1.10 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump supply air fan, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding fan object.

1.31.7.1.11 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the heat pump. Heating
coil type must be either Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed or Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed.

1.31.7.1.12 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump DX heating coil, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding DX heating coil object.

1.31.7.1.13 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the heat pump. There are
three valid choices for this field:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed

1.31.7.1.14 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump cooling coil, and should match
the name specified in the corresponding DX cooling coil object.

1.31.7.1.15 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supplemental heating coil specified in the heat
pump. The hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector
objects to support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot
water flow modulation through the supplemental heating coil does not require additional controller
or Controller:WaterCoil object. The parent object (Airloop Air to Air Heat Pump) itself provides
the “controller” function of modulating water flow. Heating coil type must be:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.7.1.16 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump supplemental heating coil,
and should match the name specified in the corresponding heating coil object.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1485

1.31.7.1.17 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater

This numeric field defines the maximum allowed supply air temperature exiting the heat pump
supplemental heating coil.

1.31.7.1.18 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which the heat pump supple-
mental heating coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less than or equal to
21 C. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 21 C.

1.31.7.1.19 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice represents
a blow through system where the supply air fan is before the DX cooling/heating coil and the
supplementary heating coil. The second choice represents a draw through system where the supply
air fan is between the DX cooling/heating coil and the supplementary heating coil. If this input field
is left blank, the default is blow through.
Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil
cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values
other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to
meet the load.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the air-to-air heat pump requires specification
of the following objects in addition to the heat pump object:
1) Fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)
2) Heating coil (Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed)
3) Cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted)
4) Supplemental heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel or Coil:Heating:Electric)
5) Direct air unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat)for each zone served by the
unitary system

1.31.7.1.20 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

This alpha input field contains the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid
for this field:

– None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control

– Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible cooling
load. This option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting
the DX cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type =
CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted.
1486 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet
the high humidity setpoint. The excess cooling beyond the cooling set point tem-
perature is offset by the supplemental heating coil. If cooling coil type = CoilSys-
tem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, then the heat exchanger is assumed to always
transfer energy between the cooling coil’s inlet and outlet airstreams when the cooling coil is
operating.

The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
is required. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra dehumidifi-
cation is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full capacity is
not adequate. Supplemental heating coil (supplemental heating coil type and name) is a required
input in AirToAir HeatPumps. The supplemental heating coil capacity must be adequate enough to
meet the heating coil load and offset the excess cooling load due to extra dehumidification required
to meet the high relative humidity setpoint.
Note: the air-to-air heat pump’s fan, cooling coil, heating coil and supplementary heating coil must
be connected in the air loop according to the configuration shown above (Figure 118) for the blow-
through fan configuration. The only other valid configuration is with a draw-through fan placement,
where the fan is located between the DX heating coil and the supplementary heating coil.

1.31.7.1.21 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir Example Specification

AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, ! Heat Pump name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Heat Pump availability schedule
Mixed Air Node , ! Heat Pump air inlet node
Air Loop Outlet Node , ! Heat Pump air outlet node
1.3, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.0, !- No Load Suuply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , ! Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , ! Supply air fan type
Supply Fan 1, ! Supply air fan name –- same name used in fan object
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed , ! Heating coil type
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, ! Heating coil name –- same name used in DX heating coil
object
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed , ! Cooling coil type
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, ! Cooling coil name –- same name used in DX cooling coil
object
Coil:Heating:Fuel , ! Supplemental heating coil type
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, ! Supplemental heating coil –name - same as in heating
coil object
50, ! Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater [C]
21, ! Maximum outdoor dry -bulb temp for supplemental heating coil
operation [C]
BlowThrough , ! Fan placement
CycFanSchedule , ! Supply air fan operating mode schedule name
CoolReheat; !- Dehumidification Control Type

Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, ! Name of heating coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Heating coil schedule
35000 , ! Rated total heating capacity [W] (at 21.11C/8.33C)
2.75, ! Rated heating COP
1.7, ! Rated air flow rate [m3/s]
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air inlet node
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air outlet node
HPACHeatCapFT , ! Heating capacity modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACHeatCapFFF , ! Heating capacity modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (temperature ,C)
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1487

HPACHeatEIRFFF , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (flow fraction)

HPACCoolPLFFPLR , ! Part load fraction modifier curve (function of part -load
ratio)
, ! defrost EIR modifier curve (temp , C) not required for resistive
defrost
CyclingFanAndCompressor , ! Operation mode (cycling fan , cycling
compressor)
-5.0, ! Minimum OAT for heat pump compressor operation [C]
5.0, ! Maximum outdoor dry -bulb temp for defrost operation [C]
200.0 , ! Crankcase heater capacity[W]
10.0, ! Maximum OAT for crankcase heater operation [C]
resistive , ! Defrost strategy (resistive or reverse -cycle)
timed , ! Defrost control (timed or on -demand)
0.166667 , !Defrost time period fraction (used for timed defrost
control only)
20000; ! Resistive defrost heater capacity [W]

Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed ,
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, ! Name of cooling coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule
32000 , ! Rated total cooling capacity [W]
0.75, ! Rated sensible heat ratio
3.0, ! Rated COP
1.7, ! Rated air flow rate [m3/s]
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air inlet node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Coil air outlet node
HPACCoolCapFT , ! Cooling capacity modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACCoolCapFFF , ! Cooling capacity modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACCoolEIRFT , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (temperature ,C)
HPACCoolEIRFFF , ! Energy input ratio modifier curve (flow fraction)
HPACCoolPLFFPLR , ! Part load factor modifier curve (function of part -load
ratio)
CyclingFanAndCompressor ; ! Operation mode (cycling fan , cycling
compressor)

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, ! Name of heating coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Availability schedule
NaturalGas , ! Fuel Type
0.8 , ! Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
32000 , ! Nominal Capacity of the Coil [W]
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , ! Supplementary heating coil air side inlet node
Air Loop Outlet Node; ! Supplementary heating coil air side outlet node

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, ! Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , ! Fan Schedule
0.7, ! Fan Total Efficiency
300.0 , ! Delta Pressure [N/M^2]
1.7, ! Max Vol Flow Rate [m^3/ Sec]
0.9, ! motor efficiency
1.0, ! motor in air stream fraction
Mixed Air Node , ! fan inlet node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; ! fan outlet node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.612; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.476; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
1488 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.612; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

1.31.7.2 Outputs

– HVAC, Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

– HVAC, Average, Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC, Average, Unitary System Dehumidification Induced Heating Demand Rate [W]

1.31.7.2.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the heat pump to the heat
pump’s design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass flow
rate). For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the furnace is available
(based on the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the actual air mass
flow rate is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating (or cooling) load to the steady-
state heat pump heating (or cooling) capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the runtime fraction for
the heat pump fan may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here due the part-load
performance of the heat pump’s heating (or cooling) coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state
output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components where appropriate
(e.g., Fan:OnOff).

1.31.7.2.2 Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the heat pump’s DX heating or cooling coil. The runtime fraction for the heat pump compressor
may be different from the compressor part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance
of the heating/cooling coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output). In general, runtime
fractions are reported by individual components where appropriate.

1.31.7.2.3 Unitary System Dehumidification Induced Heating Demand Rate [W]

This output variable is the additional heating demand rate of the supplemental heating coil of an Air-
to-Air heat pumps in Watts. This additional heating demand is induced when zone air overshoots
the heating setpoint due to extra dehumidification requirement to meet the high humidity setpoint.
This value is always positive. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep, and the
results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.8 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed
The multispeed air-to-air heat pump is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component
(On/Off or ConstVolume), a DX multispeed cooling coil component, a DX multispeed heating coil
component, and a Gas or Electric supplemental heating coil component. This system also includes the
option to use available waste energy to heat water. A schematic diagram of the air-to-air multispeed
heat pump is shown below. The component connection sequence for the blow through option (shown
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1489

below) from inlet to outlet is fan, cooling coil, heating coil, and supplemental heater. The connection
sequence for the draw through option is cooling coil, heating coil, fan, and supplemental heater.
The main difference between this heat pump object and other EnergyPlus heat pump objects is that
this object allows from two to four discrete compressor speeds for heating and cooling operation
(instead of a single speed for each mode). The lowest speed is called Speed 1, and the highest speed
is called Speed n (2, 3 or 4 as specified in the input syntax). This object allows a different number of
speeds for cooling and heating, and each speed has an associated airflow rate. The airflow rates for
the various heating speeds can be different from the airflow rates for the cooling speeds. In addition,
the airflow rate when no cooling or heating is needed can also be defined. The number of cooling
and heating speeds defined by the user in this heat pump object must equal the number of speeds
defined in the associated coils (child objects). For example, the number of speeds for cooling defined
in this heat pump object must be equal to the number of speeds defined in the associated cooling
coil object.
Links to the fan, DX multispeed cooling coil, DX multispeed heating coil, and supplementary heating
coil specifications are provided in the heat pump’s input data syntax. In addition, the control zone
name and airflow rates at the corresponding compressor speeds are specified by the heat pump
syntax.
If the ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint object and other zone control thermostat and
humidistat are assigned to the same controlled zone in the Controlling Zone or Thermostat Loca-
tion field, the ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint object takes precedence and the stage
number provided by the the ZoneControl:Thermostat:StagedDualSetpoint object is used to set the
speed number.

1.31.8.1 Inputs

1.31.8.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the multispeed heat pump.

1.31.8.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name (ref. Schedule objects) that contains information on
the availability of the heat pump to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used)
indicates that the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0
is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is left blank, the schedule
has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.8.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node from which the heat pump draws its
inlet air.

1.31.8.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node to which the heat pump sends its
outlet air.
1490 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.149: Schematic of EnergyPlus Unitary Air-to-Air Multi Speed Heat Pump
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1491

1.31.8.1.5 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the multispeed
heat pump is located.

1.31.8.1.6 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the heat pump. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume can only be used when the supply
air fan operating mode is continuous (see field ‘Supply air fan operating mode schedule name).

1.31.8.1.7 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump supply air fan, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding fan object.

1.31.8.1.8 Field: Supply Air Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed by a DX multispeed cooling
coil, DX multispeed heating coil, and a supplemental heating coil. The fan “blows through” the
cooling and heating coils. The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means that the
unit consists of the DX cooling and heating coils followed by a fan, with the supplemental heater
located at the outlet of the fan. The fan “draws” air through the DX coils.
Note: the multispeed heat pump’s supply air fan, cooling coil, heating coil and supplemental heating
coil must be connected according to the configuration shown above (Figure 1.149) for the ‘blow
through’ fan configuration. For the ‘draw through’ fan configuration the fan must be located between
the DX heating coil and the supplemental heater, whose outlet node is the system outlet node. In
addition, the DX cooling coil and DX heating coil operation mode must be specified consistently
with the heat pump’s supply air fan operating mode (e.g., with the heat pump’s supply air fan set
to cycle on and off with the cooling/heating load, the DX cooling and heating coil operation mode
must be CyclingFanAndCompressor). If the operation modes in the parent (heat pump) and child
(coil) objects are specified differently, the operation mode in the parent object prevails.

1.31.8.1.9 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name (ref. Schedule objects) that contains information to
control the supply air fan. Schedule values of zero mean that the supply air fan will cycle off if there
is no cooling or heating load in the control zone. Non-zero schedule values mean that the supply air
fan will operate continuously even if there is no cooling or heating load in the control zone. If this
field is left blank, the supply air fan will operate continuously for the entire simulation period.

1.31.8.1.10 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the heat pump. Allowable
choices for Heating coil type are Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed, Coil:Heating:Electric:MultiStage,
Coil:Heating:Gas:MultiStage, Coil:Heating:Water, and Coil:Heating:Steam.

1.31.8.1.11 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the DX heating coil, and should match the
name specified in the corresponding DX heating coil object.
1492 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.8.1.12 Field: Minimum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Compressor

Operation
Deprecated field. The Minimum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation is
now controlled by the Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed and Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed (if used) coil
objects.

1.31.8.1.13 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the heat pump. Cooling
coil type must be Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed.

1.31.8.1.14 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump cooling coil, and should match
the name specified in the corresponding DX cooling coil object.

1.31.8.1.15 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supplemental heating coil specified in the heat pump.
The hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connectors objects
to support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water
flow modulation through the supplemental heating coil does not require additional controller or
Controller:WaterCoil object. The parent object (Unitary MultiSpeed Air to Air Heat Pump) itself
provides the “controller” function of modulating water flow. Heating coil type must be:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.8.1.16 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump supplemental heating coil,
and should match the name specified in the corresponding heating coil object.

1.31.8.1.17 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater

This numeric field defines the maximum allowed supply air temperature (in degrees C) exiting
the heat pump supplemental heating coil. If the calculated supply air temperature exiting the
supplemental heater exceeds this value, then it is reset to this maximum temperature. This field is
autosizable.

1.31.8.1.18 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which the heat pump supple-
mental heating coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less than or equal to
21 C. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 21 C.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1493

1.31.8.1.19 Field: Auxiliary On-Cycle Electric Power

This field defines auxiliary electrical power (W) consumed during the on-cycle period (i.e., when
the cooling or heating coil is operating). The model assumes that this auxiliary power does not
contribute to heating the supply air. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value
is also 0.0 if the field is left blank.

1.31.8.1.20 Field: Auxiliary Off-Cycle Electric Power

This field defines auxiliary electrical power (W) consumed during the off-cycle period (i.e., when the
cooling and heating coil are not operating). The model assumes that this auxiliary power does not
contribute to heating the supply air. The minimum value for this field is 0.0, and the default value
is also 0.0 if the field is left blank.

1.31.8.1.21 Field: Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate

This optional input field defines the design water flow rate used if the heat recovery option is
being simulated. If this value is greater than 0.0 then a heat recovery loop must be specified
and attached to the multispeed heat pump using the next 2 node fields. To determine how the
heat recovery algorithm works, refer to the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference in the AirLoopH-
VAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed with Heat Recovery section. The units for this input
value are cubic meters per second.

1.31.8.1.22 Field: Maximum Temperature for Heat Recovery

This field sets the maximum temperature (in degrees C) that this heat pump can produce for heat
recovery. The idea behind this field is that the current models do not take temperatures into
account for availability and they just pass Q’s around the loop without a temperature limit. This
temperature limit puts an upper bound on the recovered heat and limits the max temperature leaving
the component.
As temperatures in the loop approach the maximum temperature, the temperature difference between
the entering water and the surfaces in the piece of equipment becomes smaller. For the given heat
recovery flow rate and that temperature difference the amount of heat recovered will be reduced,
and eventually there will be no heat recovered when the entering water temperature is equal to the
maximum temperature specified by the user in this field. The reduced amount of heat recovered will
diminish if the temperature of the loop approach is the maximum temperature, and this will show
up in the reporting. This allows the user to set the availability or the quality of the heat recovered
for usage in other parts of the system or to heat domestic hot water supply.

1.31.8.1.23 Field: Heat Recovery Water Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side inlet node.

1.31.8.1.24 Field: Heat Recovery Water Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the heat recovery side outlet node.
1494 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.8.1.25 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the
supply air fan operates). This field is only used when the heat pump supply air fan is scheduled to
operate continuously regardless of DX coil operation (ref. field “Supply Air Fan Operating Mode
Schedule). Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. If the heat pump
supply air fan is scheduled to operate continuously and the input value for this field is set to zero or
this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating
is needed is equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling
operation or heating operation).

1.31.8.1.26 Field: Number of Speeds for Heating

This field defines the number of heating speeds for the heat pump, and must match the number
of heating speeds defined in the associated heating coil. The value for this input field defines the
number of airflow rates that must be defined for heating in the field below. The minimum value
for this field is one and the maximum value is four. If the Heating Coil Object Type above are
Coil:Heating:Water or Coil:Heating:Steam, then this field should be 1.

1.31.8.1.27 Field: Number of Speeds for Cooling

This field defines the number of cooling speeds for the heat pump, and must match the number of
cooling speeds defined in the associated DX cooling coil. The value for this input field defines the
number of airflow rates that must be defined for cooling in the field below. The minimum value for
this field is two and the maximum value is four.

1.31.8.1.28 Field: Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate

This required numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters
per second when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating at Speed 1 (lowest
speed). Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.31.8.1.29 Field: Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate

This required numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters
per second when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating at Speed 2. Values
must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. If not autosized, the entered value must be greater
or equal to the flow rate specified for heating Speed 1.

1.31.8.1.30 Field: Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating at Speed 3. Values must be
greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. If not autosized, the entered value must be greater or
equal to the flow rate specified for heating Speed 2. If the ‘Number of Speeds for Heating’ is less
than 3, then this field can be left blank.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1495

1.31.8.1.31 Field: Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating at Speed 4 (high speed). Values
must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable. If not autosized, the entered value must be greater
or equal to the flow rate specified for heating Speed 3. If the ‘Number of Speeds for Heating’ is less
than 4, then this field can be left blank.
Note: When autosizable is selected for any of the supply air volumetric flow rate fields, all supply
air flow fields at the different speeds must be specified as autosizable. Otherwise, a fatal error will
be issued and the simulation will terminate.

1.31.8.1.32 Field: Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate

This required numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters
per second when the DX cooling coil is operating at Speed 1 (lowest speed). Values must be greater
than 0 or this field is autosizable.

1.31.8.1.33 Field: Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate

This required numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters
per second when the DX cooling coil is operating at Speed 2. Values must be greater than 0 or this
field is autosizable. If not autosized, the entered value must be greater or equal to the flow rate
specified for cooling Speed 1.

1.31.8.1.34 Field: Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX cooling coil is operating at Speed 3. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is
autosizable. If not autosized, the entered value must be greater or equal to the flow rate specified
for cooling Speed 2. If the ‘Number of Speeds for Cooling’ is less than 3, then this field can be left
blank.

1.31.8.1.35 Field: Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump in cubic meters per second
when the DX cooling coil is operating at Speed 4 (highest speed). Values must be greater than 0 or
this field is autosizable. If not autosized, the entered value must be greater or equal to the flow rate
specified for cooling Speed 3. If the ‘Number of Speeds for Cooling’ is less than 4, then this field can
be left blank.
Following is an example input for the object and its associated components.

AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:AirToAir:MultiSpeed ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, !- Name of multispeed heat pump
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
Mixed Air Node , !- Heat pump air inlet node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Heat pump air outlet node name
East Zone , !- Controlling zone or thermostat location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply air fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply air fan name
BlowThrough , !- Supply air fan placement
FanModeSchedule , !- Supply air fan operating mode schedule name
Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed , Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil type & name
-8.0, !- Minimum outdoor dry -bulb temperature for compressor operation
Coil:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed , Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, !- Cooling coil type & name
1496 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental heating coil type

Supp Gas Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental heating coil name
50.0, !- Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater
21, !- Maximum outdoor dry -bulb temperature for supplemental heater
operation
0, !- Auxiliary On -Cycle Electric Power {W}
0, !- Auxiliary Off -Cycle Electric Power {W}
0.00, !- Design Heat Recovery Water Flow Rate {m3/s}
80.0,,, !- Maximum Temp for Heat Recovery {C} & Node names (none)
0.2, !- Supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed
4, !- Number of speeds for heating
4, !- Number of speeds for cooling
0.4, !- Heating Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate
0.8, !- Heating Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.2, !- Heating Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.7, !- Heating Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate
0.4, !- Cooling Speed 1 Supply Air Flow Rate
0.8, !- Cooling Speed 2 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.2, !- Cooling Speed 3 Supply Air Flow Rate
1.7; !- Cooling Speed 4 Supply Air Flow Rate

Coil:Heating:DX:MultiSpeed ,
Heat Pump DX Heating Coil 1, !- Name of heat pump heating coil
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
CyclingFanAndCompressor , !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode
-8.0, !- Minimum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Compressor Operation {C}
200.0 , !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
10.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater
!- Operation {C}
HPACDefrostCAPFT , !- Defrost energy input ratio modifier curve (temperature)
7.22, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation
reverse -cycle , !- Defrost Strategy
timed , !- Defrost Control
0.058333 , !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
2000.0 , !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}
No , !- Apply Part Load Fraction to Speeds greater than 1
NaturalGas , !- Fuel type
4, !- Number of speeds
7500, !- Rated Total Heating Capacity , Speed 1 {W}
2.75, !- Rated COP , Speed 1
0.45, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 1 {m3/s}
HPACHeatCapFT Speed 1, !- Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 1 (temperature)
HPACHeatCapFF Speed 1, !- Total Heating capacity modifier curve , Speed 1 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT Speed 1, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 1 (temperature)
HPACHeatEIRFF Speed 1, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 1 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatPLFFPLR Speed 1, !- Part load fraction correlation , Speed 1 (part load ratio)
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 1
HAPCHeatWHFT Speed 1, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 1 (temperature)
17500 , !- Rated Total Heating Capacity , Speed 2 {W}
2.75, !- Rated COP , Speed 2
0.85, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 2 {m3/s}
HPACHeatCapFT Speed 2, !- Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 2 (temperature)
HPACHeatCapFF Speed 2, !- Total Heating capacity modifier curve , Speed 2 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT Speed 2, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 2 (temperature)
HPACHeatEIRFF Speed 2, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 2 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatPLFFPLR Speed 2, !- Part load fraction correlation , Speed 2 (part load ratio)
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 2
HAPCHeatWHFT Speed 2, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 2 (temperature)
25500 , !- Rated Total Heating Capacity , Speed 3 {W}
2.75, !- Rated COP , Speed 3
1.25, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 3 {m3/s}
HPACHeatCapFT Speed 3, !- Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 3 (temperature)
HPACHeatCapFF Speed 3, !- Total Heating capacity modifier curve , Speed 3 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT Speed 3, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 3 (temperature)
HPACHeatEIRFF Speed 3, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 3 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatPLFFPLR Speed 3, !- Part load fraction correlation , Speed 3 (part load ratio)
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 3
HAPCHeatWHFT Speed 3, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 3 (temperature)
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1497

35500 , !- Rated Total Heating Capacity , Speed 4 {W}

2.75, !- Rated COP , Speed 4
1.75, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 4 {m3/s}
HPACHeatCapFT Speed 4, !- Total Heating Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 4 (temperature)
HPACHeatCapFF Speed 4, !- Total Heating capacity modifier curve , Speed 4 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatEIRFT Speed 4, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 4 (temperature)
HPACHeatEIRFF Speed 4, !- Energy input ratio modifier curve , Speed 4 (flow fraction)
HPACHeatPLFFPLR Speed 4, !- Part load fraction correlation , Speed 4 (part load ratio)
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 4
HAPCHeatWHFT Speed 4; !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 4 (temperature)

COIL:Cooling:DX:MultiSpeed ,
Heat Pump ACDXCoil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
CyclingFanAndCompressor , !- Supply Air Fan Operation Mode
Outdoor Condenser Air Node , !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
AirCooled , !- Condenser Type
, !- Name of Water Storage Tank for Supply
, !- Name of Water Storage Tank for Condensate Collection
No , !- Apply Part Load Fraction to Speeds greater than 1
No , !- Apply Latent Degradation to Speeds greater than 1
200.0 , !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
10.0, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater
Operation {C}
NaturalGas , !- Fuel type
4, !- Number of speeds
7500, !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity , Speed 1 (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR , Speed 1
3.0, !- Rated COP , Speed 1
0.40, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 1 {m3/s}
HPACCoolCapFT Speed 1, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 1 (temperature)
HPACCoolCapFF Speed 1, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 1 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLEIRFT Speed 1, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 1 (temperature)
HPACCOOLEIRFF Speed 1, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 1 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR Speed 1, !- Part Load Fraction Correlation , Speed 1 (part load ratio)
1000.0 , !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin , Speed 1 {s}
1.5, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady -state
Latent Capacity , Speed 1 {dimensionless}
3.0, !- Maximum ON/OFF Cycling Rate , Speed 1 {cycles/hr}
45.0, !- Latent Capacity Time Constant , Speed 1 {s}
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 1 {dimensionless}
HAPCCoolWHFT Speed 1, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 1 (temperature)
0.9, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness , Speed 1 {dimensionless}
0.05, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 1 {m3/s}
50, !- Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption , Speed 1 {W}
17500 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity , Speed 2 (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR , Speed 2
3.0, !- Rated COP , Speed 2
0.85, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 2 {m3/s}
HPACCoolCapFT Speed 2, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 2 (temperature)
HPACCoolCapFF Speed 2, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 2 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLEIRFT Speed 2, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 2 (temperature)
HPACCOOLEIRFF Speed 2, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 2 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR Speed 1, !- Part Load Fraction Correlation , Speed 2 (part load ratio)
1000.0 , !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin , Speed 2 {s}
1.5, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady -state
Latent Capacity , Speed 2 {dimensionless}
3.0, !- Maximum ON/OFF Cycling Rate , Speed 2 {cycles/hr}
45.0, !- Latent Capacity Time Constant , Speed 2 {s}
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 2 {dimensionless}
HAPCCoolWHFT Speed 2, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 2 (temperature)
0.9, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness , Speed 2 {dimensionless}
0.1, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 2 {m3/s}
60, !- Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption , Speed 2 {W}
25500 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity , Speed 3 (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR , Speed 3
3.0, !- Rated COP , Speed 3
1498 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.25, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 3 {m3/s}

HPACCoolCapFT Speed 3, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 3 (temperature)
HPACCoolCapFF Speed 3, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 3 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLEIRFT Speed 3, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 3 (temperature)
HPACCOOLEIRFF Speed 3, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 3 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR Speed 1, !- Part Load Fraction Correlation , Speed 3 (part load ratio)
1000.0 , !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin , Speed 3 {s}
1.5, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady -state
Latent Capacity , Speed 3 {dimensionless}
3.0, !- Maximum ON/OFF Cycling Rate , Speed 3 {cycles/hr}
45.0, !- Latent Capacity Time Constant , Speed 3 {s}
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 3 {dimensionless}
HAPCCoolWHFT Speed 3, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 3 (temperature)
0.9, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness , Speed 3 {dimensionless}
0.2, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 3 {m3/s}
80, !- Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption , Speed 3 {W}
35500 , !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity , Speed 4 (gross) {W}
0.75, !- Rated SHR , Speed 4
3.0, !- Rated COP , Speed 4
1.75, !- Rated Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 4 {m3/s}
HPACCoolCapFT Speed 4, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 4 (temperature)
HPACCoolCapFF Speed 4, !- Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve , Speed 4 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLEIRFT Speed 4, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 4 (temperature)
HPACCOOLEIRFF Speed 4, !- Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve , Speed 4 (flow fraction)
HPACCOOLPLFFPLR Speed 1, !- Part Load Fraction Correlation , Speed 4 (part load ratio)
1000.0 , !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin , Speed 4 {s}
1.5, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady -state
Latent Capacity , Speed 4 {dimensionless}
3.0, !- Maximum ON/OFF Cycling Rate , Speed 4 {cycles/hr}
45.0, !- Latent Capacity Time Constant , Speed 4 {s}
0.2, !- Rated waste heat fraction of power input , Speed 4 {dimensionless}
HAPCCoolWHFT Speed 4, !- Waste heat modifier curve , Speed 4 (temperature)
0.9, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness , Speed 4 {dimensionless}
0.3, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate , Speed 4 {m3/s}
100; !- Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption , Speed 4 {W}

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Supp Gas Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
45000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
300.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.7, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Mixed Air Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.612; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.476; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1499

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.612; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

1.31.8.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System DX Coil Cycling Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System DX Coil Speed Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System DX Coil Speed Level []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Cooling Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Heating Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

If heat recovery is specified:

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum, Unitary System Heat Recovery Energy [J]

1.31.8.2.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the multispeed heat pump to
the heat pump’s design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass
flow rate) at Speed 1. For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the heat
pump is available (based on the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode,
the actual air mass flow rate is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating (or cooling)
load to the steady-state heat pump heating (or cooling) capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the
runtime fraction for the heat pump fan may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here
due the part-load performance of the heat pump’s heating (or cooling) coil (delay at start-up to
reach steady-state output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components
where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff). When the speed number is greater than 1, the value is 1.0.
1500 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.8.2.2 Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the multispeed heat pump’s DX heating or cooling coil at Speed 1. The runtime fraction for the
heat pump compressor may be different from the compressor part-load ratio reported here due the
part-load performance of the heating/cooling coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state output).
In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual components where appropriate. When the
speed number is greater than 1, the value is 1.0.

1.31.8.2.3 Unitary System DX Coil Cycling Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of the sensible load (heating or cooling) to the steady-state capacity
of the multispeed heat pump’s DX heating or cooling coil (Speed 1) for the entire system timestep.
The value is between 0.0 and 1.0 when the heat pump is cycling on and off its lowest speed (Speed
1) and 1.0 when the multispeed heat pump operates at speeds above 1.
When Single Mode Operation is specified, the value is between 0.0 and 1.0 when the heat pump is
cycling on at any given speed.

1.31.8.2.4 Unitary System DX Coil Speed Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of time in a system timestep that the compressor is at rated speed
between two consecutive speed numbers ( [Compressor Speed - Compressor speed at Speed i-1] /
[Compressor speed at Speed i - Compressor speed at Speed i-1]). The compressor speed ratio reports
(1.0 is max, 0.0 is min) and any value in between as it is averaged over the timestep. The value is
0.0 during Speed 1 operation.
The physical meaning of the speed ratio is dependent on the compressor configuration defined in the
field of child coil object: Apply Part Load Fraction to Speeds greater than 1. The allowed choice is
either Yes or No. When No is entered, one compressor is assumed for all speeds. The speed ratio
represents how long the higher speed runs as a fraction of the system timestep, and the lower speed
runs in the rest of the system timestep. When Yes is entered, multiple compressors are assumed,
and each compressor has associated speed. The speed ratio represents how long the higher speed
runs as a fraction of the system timestep, and the low speed runs in a whole system timestep.
When Single Mode Operation is specified, the speed ratio is set to 0 at Speed 1, and 1 at Speed > 1

1.31.8.2.5 Unitary System DX Coil Speed Level []

This output variable reports the maximum speed needed when the heat pump operates to meet the
sensible load (heating or cooling) in a system timestep. When the value is 1, the heat pump operates
at Speed 1 (lowest speed). For this case the cycling ratio is between 0.0 and 1.0, while the speed ratio
is 0.0. When the speed number output variable is above one, such as i, the heat pump operation
is determined by the speed ratio through linear interpolation. For example, when the speed ratio
is 0.4 and the speed number is 3, the heat pump operates at Speed 3 for 40% of a system timestep
and at Speed 2 for 60% of a system timestep for a single compressor. For multiple compressors, the
heat pump operates at Speed 3 in the 40% of a system timestep and at Speed 2 in the whole system
timestep.

1.31.8.2.6 Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the multispeed heat pump to the
zones it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1501

outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only)
are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.8.2.7 Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the multispeed heat pump from the
zones it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump
outlet air and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.8.2.8 Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output field reports the sensible heat addition rate of the multispeed heat pump to the zones
it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet
air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat
pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(heating only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.8.2.9 Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the multispeed heat pump
from the zones it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the
heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate
through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated,
and the results (cooling only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.8.2.10 Unitary System Latent Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the multispeed heat pump in
Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible
energy rate provided by the multispeed heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.

1.31.8.2.11 Unitary System Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the multispeed heat pump
in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible
energy rate provided by the multispeed heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.

1.31.8.2.12 Unitary System Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the multispeed heat pump in Watts. The
consumption includes electricity used by the DX coils (including crankcase heater if the fuel type
is electricity), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fans associated with the DX coil[s]),
auxiliary power during on and off period, and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value
1502 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
timestep being reported. Any non-electric energy use is not reported by the heat pump object but
is reported in the associated coil objects as appropriate.

1.31.8.2.13 Unitary System Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the multispeed heat pump in Joules for the
timestep being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the DX compressor (including
crankcase heater if the fuel type is electricity), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fans
associated with the DX coil[s]), auxiliary power during on and off period, and the supplemental
heating coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated,
and the results are summed for the timestep being reported. Any non-electric energy use is not
reported by the heat pump object but is reported in the associated coil objects as appropriate.

1.31.8.2.14 Unitary System Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the average auxiliary electricity consumption rate (including both on-cycle and
off-cycle) in Watts for the timestep being reported.

1.31.8.2.15 Unitary System Cooling Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

This is the auxiliary electricity consumption in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is
the auxiliary electricity consumption during periods when the heat pump is providing cooling (DX
cooling coil is operating). This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.31.8.2.16 Unitary System Heating Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

This is the auxiliary electricity consumption in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is
the auxiliary electricity consumption during periods when the heat pump is providing heating (DX
heating coil is operating). This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Heating, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.31.8.2.17 Unitary System Heat Recovery Inlet Temperature [C]

1.31.8.2.18 Unitary System Heat Recovery Outlet Temperature [C]

1.31.8.2.19 Unitary System Heat Recovery Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and water mass flow rate for
multispeed heat pumps with heat recovery.

1.31.8.2.20 Unitary System Heat Recovery Rate [W]

1.31.8.2.21 Unitary System Heat Recovery Energy [J]

For multispeed heat pumps with heat recovery, these outputs are the recoverable energy rate (in
Watts) and energy (in Joules).
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1503

1.31.9 AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
The EnergyPlus furnace is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component (OnOff or Con-
stantVolume) and a Gas or Electric heating coil component. The blow through furnace configuration
is shown in the Figure below.

Figure 1.150: Schematic of Blow Through Furnace Model

Links to the fan and heating coil specifications are provided in the furnace input data syntax. In
addition the control zone name and the furnace design operating conditions are specified by the
furnace inputs.

1.31.9.1 Inputs

1.31.9.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the furnace.
1504 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.9.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name which contains information on the availability of the
furnace to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the furnace must be off for that time
period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the furnace is available to operate during that time
period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the unitary system as required. If this field
is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.9.1.3 Field: Furnace Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the furnace inlet node name.

1.31.9.1.4 Field: Furnace Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the furnace outlet node name.
Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the furnace supply air fan and the heating coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote that the
supply fan runs continuously while the heating coil cycles to meet the load.

1.31.9.1.5 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature

This numeric field contains the design operating furnace air outlet temperature in degrees C when
the furnace is heating. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 80 C.

1.31.9.1.6 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volumetric flow rate of the furnace in cubic meters per second.
This volumetric flow rate should match the flow rate specified for the furnace fan.

1.31.9.1.7 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the furnace is
located.

1.31.9.1.8 Field: Supply Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the furnace. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply Air
Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff is
used when the fan cycles on and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule values are at times 0).

1.31.9.1.9 Field: Supply Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the furnace fan.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1505

1.31.9.1.10 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed by the heating coil. The
fan “blows through” the heating coil. The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means
that the unit consists of the heating coil followed by a fan. The fan “draws air through” the heating
coil. If this field is left blank, the default is blow through.

1.31.9.1.11 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the furnace. The hot water
and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connectors objects to support
the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation
through the heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The
parent object (Unitary Heat Only Furnace) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating
water flow. Heating coil type must be:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.9.1.12 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the furnace heating coil.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the furnace requires specification of the
following objects in addition to the furnace object:
1) fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)
2) heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel or Coil:Heating:Electric)
3) direct air unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat) for each zone served by the
furnace
Note: the furnace’s fan and heating coil must be connected in the air loop according to the config-
uration shown above (Figure 1.150) when a blow through fan configuration is specified. If a draw
through fan is used, the fan is located down stream of the heating coil. In addition, the volumetric air
flow rate specified in the direct air unit for the controlling zone should properly reflect the fractional
volumetric air flow rate specified in the furnace object.

AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly ,
Gas Furnace 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Furnace Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Furnace Air Outlet Node Name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature {C}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Fan Fame
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Furnace Coil; !- Heating Coil Name
1506 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Furnace Coil , !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
20000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
, !- Coil_Temp_Setpoint_Node
100, !- Parasitic Electric Load {W}
PLFCurveforGasFurnace , !- Part load fraction correlation (function of part load ratio)
10; !- Parasitic Gas Load {W}

Curve:Cubic ,
PLFCurveforGasFurnace , !- Name
0.8, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.2, !- Coefficient2 x
0.0, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !- Coefficient4 x**3
0, !- Minimum Value of x
1; !- Maximum Value of x

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.3, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

Example of Heat-Only Furnace Specification

1.31.9.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

1.31.9.2.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1507

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the furnace to the furnace’s
design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass flow rate). For
continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the furnace is available (based on
the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the actual air mass flow rate
is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating load to the furnace heating capacity. For the
cycling fan mode, the runtime fraction for the furnace fan may be different from the fan part-load
ratio reported here due the part-load performance of the furnace’s heating coil (delay at start-up
to reach steady-state heating output). In general, runtime fractions are reported by individual
components where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff).

1.31.10 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly
The AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly is identical to the AirLoopHVAC:Unitary:Furnace:HeatOnly
model. The heat-only unitary system is a “virtual” component that consists of a fan component
(OnOff or ConstantVolume) and a Gas or Electric heating coil component. The blow through
unitary system configuraion is shown in the Figure below.
Links to the fan and heating coil specifications are provided in the unitary system input data syntax.
In addition, the control zone name and the unitary system design operating conditions are specified
by the unitary system syntax.

1.31.10.1 Inputs

1.31.10.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system.

1.31.10.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name which contains information on the availability of the
unitary system to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the unitary system must be off
for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unitary system is available to operate
during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the unitary system as
required. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.10.1.3 Field: Unitary System Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the unitary system inlet node name.

1.31.10.1.4 Field: Unitary System Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the unitary system outlet node name.
Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the furnace supply air fan and the heating coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote that the
supply fan runs continuously while the heating coil cycles to meet the load.
1508 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.151: Schematic of Blow Through Heat-Only Unitary System

1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1509

1.31.10.1.5 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature

This numeric field contains the design air outlet temperature in degrees C when the unitary system
is heating. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 80 C.

1.31.10.1.6 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volumetric flow rate of the unitary system in cubic meters per
second. This volumetric flow rate should match the flow rate specified for the unitary system fan.

1.31.10.1.7 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the unitary
system is located.

1.31.10.1.8 Field: Supply Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the unitary system. Fan
type must be Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply
Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff
is used when the fan cycles on and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating
Mode Schedule values are at times 0).

1.31.10.1.9 Field: Supply Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system fan.

1.31.10.1.10 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice stands for
“blow through fan”. This means that the unit consists of a fan followed by the heating coil. The
fan “blows through” the heating coil. The second choice stands for “draw through fan”. This means
that the unit consists of the heating coil followed by a fan. The fan “draws air through” the heating
coil. If this field is left blank, the default is blow through.

1.31.10.1.11 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the unitary system. The
hot water and steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connectors objects to
support the heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow
modulation through the heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil
object. The parent object (Unitary Heat Only) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating
water flow. Heating coil type must be:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam
1510 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.10.1.12 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the unitary system heating coil.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the heat-only unitary system requires spec-
ification of the following objects in addition to the unitary system object:
1) fan (Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume)
2) heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel or Coil:Heating:Electric)
3) direct air unit (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat) for each zone served by the
furnace
Note: the unitary system’s fan and heating coil must be connected in the air loop according to the
configuration shown above (Figure 1.151) when a blow through fan configuration is specified. If
a draw through fan is used, the fan is located down stream of the heating coil. In addition, the
volumetric air flow rate specified in the direct air unit for the controlling zone should properly reflect
the fractional volumetric air flow rate specified in the unitary system object.

AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatOnly ,
Gas Unitary System 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Unitary System Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Unitary System Air Outlet Node Name
CycFanSchedule , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
80, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature {C}
1.3, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Fan Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Unitary System Heating Coil; !- Heating Coil Name

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Unitary System Heating Coil , !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
20000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Inlet_Node
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Coil_Air_Outlet_Node
, !- Coil_Temp_Setpoint_Node
100, !- Parasitic Electric Load {W}
PLFCurveforUnitarySystem , !- Part load fraction correlation (function of part load ratio)
10; !- Parasitic Gas Load {W}

Curve:Cubic ,
PLFCurveforUnitarySystem , !- Name
0.8, !- Coefficient1 Constant
0.2, !- Coefficient2 x
0.0, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0.0, !- Coefficient4 x**3
0, !- Minimum Value of x
1; !- Maximum Value of x

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.3, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1511

1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction

Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Fan_Inlet_Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan_Outlet_Node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.36; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.47; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

Example of Heat-Only Unitary System Specification

1.31.10.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

1.31.10.2.1 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the unitary system to the
unitary system’s design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass
flow rate). For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the unitary system
is available (based on the availability schedule). For cycling fan/cycling coil operation mode, the
actual air mass flow rate is calculated based on the ratio of the sensible heating load to the unitary
system heating capacity. For the cycling fan mode, the runtime fraction for the unitary system fan
may be different from the fan part-load ratio reported here due the part-load performance of the
unitary system’s heating coil (delay at start-up to reach steady-state heating output). In general,
runtime fractions are reported by individual components where appropriate (e.g., Fan:OnOff).

1.31.11 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir
The unitary water-to-air heat pump is similar to the unitary air-to-air heat pump except water is
used on the source side. Links to the fan, WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil, WaterToAirHeatPump
heating coil, and supplementary heating coil specifications are provided in the heat pump’s input
data syntax. The heat pump switches between cooling and heating depending on the zone’s demand.
The load side (air) of the unitary water-to-air heat pump consists of an On/Off fan component, a
WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil component, a WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil component, and
a Gas, Electric, Steam, or Hot Water supplemental heating coil component. The source side (water)
of the heat pump is connected to a condenser loop with a heat exchanger (ground heat exchanger
or other type) or a plant loop with a heating source such as a boiler and a cooling source such as a
chiller or cooling tower. The diagram below shows the setup and connection of the heat pump for the
1512 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

source side and load side for a ground heat exchanger configuration. Note that on the load side, the
WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil must always be placed before the WaterToAirHeatPump heating
coil.
There are three type of WaterToAirHeatPump coil models available:

– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Cooling:WatertoAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WatertoAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit

In addition, the control zone name and the system design operating conditions are specified by the
heat pump inputs.

1.31.11.1 Inputs

1.31.11.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name for the unitary system heat pump.

1.31.11.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the schedule name (ref. Schedule objects) that contains information on
the availability of the heat pump to operate. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used)
indicates that the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0
is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is left blank, the schedule
has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.31.11.1.3 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node from which the heat pump draws its
inlet air.

1.31.11.1.4 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field contains the name of the HVAC system node to which the heat pump sends its
outlet air.

1.31.11.1.5 Field: Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field contains the design volumetric flow rate through the heat pump in cubic meters
per second. This volume flow rate is only used when the cooling and heating coil object type
is Coil:*:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation. Although a value greater than 0 is required
(input cannot be blank or 0), this input is not used for the EquationFit model. Instead, the supply air
flow rate is determined by the input in the corresponding Coil:*:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
objects.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1513

Figure 1.152: Water to Air Heat Pump Schematic for a BlowThrough Configuration with Ground
Heat Exchanger
1514 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.11.1.6 Field: Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location

This alpha field contains the identifying zone name where the thermostat controlling the heat pump
is located.

1.31.11.1.7 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified in the heat pump. Fan type
must be Fan:OnOff.

1.31.11.1.8 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the heat pump supply air fan, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding fan object.

1.31.11.1.9 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of heating coil specified in the heat pump. Heating
coil types are:

– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit

1.31.11.1.10 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil, and
should match the name specified in the corresponding WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil object.

1.31.11.1.11 Field: Heating Convergence

This numeric value allows the user to determine how close the air side has to be controlled. Lower
the value of convergence better the control of air side conditions and less the zone temperature
fluctuations. However in a poorly designed system, a lower convergence might result in warning
errors which are caused due to the iteration limit for run time fraction calculation is limited to 20.

1.31.11.1.12 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field contains the identifying type of cooling coil specified in the heat pump. Cooling coil
types are:

– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:VariableSpeedEquationFit

1.31.11.1.13 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil, and
should match the name specified in the corresponding WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil object.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1515

1.31.11.1.14 Field: Cooling Convergence

This numeric value allows the user to determine how close the air side has to be controlled. Lower
the value of convergence better the control of air side conditions and less the zone temperature
fluctuations. However in a poorly designed system, a lower convergence might result in warning
errors which are caused due to the iteration limit for run time fraction calculation is limited to 20.

1.31.11.1.15 Field: Maximum Cycling Rate

This numeric field contains the maximum on-off cycling rate for the compressor, which occurs at
50% run time fraction. Suggested values are shown below (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.153:

1.31.11.1.16 Field: Heat Pump Time Constant

This numeric field contains the time constant for the cooling coil’s capacity to reach steady state
after startup. Suggested values are shown below (Henderson et al. 1999):

Figure 1.154:

1.31.11.1.17 Field: Fraction of On-Cycle Power Use

This numeric field contains the fraction of on-cycle power use to adjust the part load fraction based
on the off-cycle power consumption due to crankcase heaters, controls, fans, and etc. Suggested
value values are below (Henderson et al. 1999):
1516 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.155:

1.31.11.1.18 Field: Heat Pump Fan Delay Time

This numeric field contains the time delay for the heat pump supply air fan to shut off after the
compressor cycles off in seconds. This value can be obtained from the manufacturer or the heat pump
catalog. Enter a value of zero when the heat pump’s fan operating mode is continuous. Suggested
value is 60 seconds.

1.31.11.1.19 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type

This is the object type of the supplemental heating coil. The hot water and steam heating coils
require specifying plant loop, branches, and connectors objects to support the heating coils, and are
placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation through the supplemental
heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The parent object
(AirLoop Unitary Water to Air Heat Pump) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating
water flow. The valid choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

1.31.11.1.20 Field: Supplemental Heating Coil Name

This alpha field contains the identifying name given to the supplemental heating coil, and should
match the name specified in the corresponding supplemental heating coil object.

1.31.11.1.21 Field: Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental

Heater
This numeric field defines the maximum allowed supply air temperature exiting the heat pump
supplemental heating coil in degrees Celsius.

1.31.11.1.22 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Supplemental

Heater Operation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature in degrees Celsius above which the
heat pump supplemental heating coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less
than or equal to 21°C. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 21°C.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1517

1.31.11.1.23 Field: Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the outdoor node which controls the operation of the supple-
mental heating coil. If this field is left blank, the outdoor temperature is based solely on the weather
data. If this field is not blank, the node name specified must also be listed in an OutdoorAir:Node
object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating outdoor temperature
from the weather data. Alternately, the node name must be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList
object where the outdoor temperature is taken directly from the weather data.

1.31.11.1.24 Field: Fan Placement

This alpha field has two choices: BlowThrough or DrawThrough. The first choice represents a
blow through system where the supply air fan is before the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling/heating
coil and the supplementary heating coil. The second choice represents a draw through system where
the supply fan is between the WaterToAirHeatPump cooling/heating coil and the supplementary
heating coil. If this input field is left blank, the default is blow through.

1.31.11.1.25 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air
fan operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season.
Schedule values of 0 denote that the supply air fan and the heating/cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote
that the supply air fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
If this field is left blank, the model assumes the supply air fan cycles with the heating or cooling coil
throughout the simulation period.
As shown in the example below, correct specification of the water-to-air heat pump requires spec-
ification of the following objects in addition to the AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir
object:

– On/Off fan
– WaterToAirHeatPump cooling coil
– WaterToAirHeatPump heating coil
– Supplementary heating coil
– Direct air unit for each zone served by the heat pump
– Condenser demand branches

It should be noted that the volumetric air flow rate specified in the direct air unit for the controlling
zone should properly reflect the fractional volumetric air flow rate specified in the heat pump object.

1.31.11.1.26 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

This alpha input field contains the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid
for this field:
None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control
CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humidity
setpoint. The excess cooling beyond the cooling set point temperature is offset by the supplemental
heating coil.
1518 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The default is None. For CoolReheat dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity
setpoint is required. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat object. When extra
dehumidification is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full
capacity is not adequate. Supplemental heating coil (supplemental heating coil type and name) is
a required input in WaterToAir HeatPumps. When dehumidification control is active the heating
and the reheat load due to extra dehumidification are met with supplemetal heating coil. The
supplemental heating coil capacity must be adequate enough to meet the heating coil load and offset
the excess cooling load due to extra dehumidification. The dehumidification control type CoolReheat
works only with Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit cooling coil type.

1.31.11.1.27 Field: Heat Pump Coil Water Flow Mode

This field specifies the way in which water flow through the heat pump coils will be modeled. This
field is only used when WatertoAirHeatPump:EquationFit coils are used. There are three options:

– Cycling
– Constant
– CyclingOnDemand

Cycling varies water flow through the coil based on the heat pump Part Load Ratio. This control
method is appropriate for modeling heat pumps that are outfitted with a soleniod valve which allows
water to flow through the coil only when the compressor is active. This is the default for EnergyPlus
V8 and later.
Constant provides a constant water flow regardless of heat pump operation. Remember that
EnergyPlus has two coils (a heating coil and a cooling coil) to approximate the operation of one coil
that can operate in either heating mode or cooling mode. Therefore, when the water flow mode is
constant, there will be full flow through either the heating coil or the cooling coil, but not both at
the same time.
ConstantOnDemand provides full flow through the coil whenever there is a load. When there is
no load, there is zero flow through the coil. This control strategy represents the way EnergyPlus
modeled heat pump water flow prior to Version 8.
Following is an example of IDF usage:

AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatPump:WaterToAir ,
DXAC Heat Pump 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
2, !- Supply Air Flow Fate {m3/s}
East Zone , !- Controlling Zone or Thermostat Location
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply Air Fan Object Type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply Air Fan Name
Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Heating Coil Name
0.001 , !- Heating Convergence
Coil:Cooling: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Cooling Coil Name
0.001 , !- Cooling Convergence
2.5, !- Maximum Cycling Rate {cycles/hr}
60, !- Heat Pump Time Constant {s}
0.01, !- Fraction of On -Cycle Power Use
60, !- Heat Pump Fan Delay Time {s}
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Supplemental Heating Coil Object Type
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Supplemental Heating Coil Name
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1519

50, !- Maximum Supply Air Temperature from Supplemental Heater {C}

21, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature for Supplemental Heater
Operation {C}
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Dry -Bulb Temperature Sensor Node Name
BlowThrough , !- Fan Placement
CyclingFanSch , !- Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name
CoolReheat; !- Dehumidification Control Type

Schedule:Compact ,
CyclingFanSch , !- Name
Fraction , !- Schedule Type Limits Name
Through: 12/31 , !- Field 1
For: AllDays , !- Field 2
Until: 24:00 , !- Field 3
0.0; !- Field 4

Coil:Cooling: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation ,

Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Name
Scroll , !- Compressor Type
R22 , !- Refrigerant Type
0.0015 , !- Design Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
38000 , !- Nominal Cooling Coil Capacity {W)
0, !- Nominal Time for Condensate Removal to Begin {s}
0, !- Ratio of Initial Moisture Evaporation Rate and Steady State Latent Capacity
3000000 , !- High Pressure CutOff {Pa}
0, !- Low Pressure CutOff {Pa}
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
3.78019E+03,!- Parameter 1 {W/K}
2.80303E+03,!- Parameter 2 {W/K}
7.93591E-01,!- Parameter 3 {C}
1.91029E+03,!- Parameter 4 {W}
2.66127E+00,!- Parameter 5
1.06009E-02,!- Parameter 6
1.65103E+00,!- Parameter 7
9.73887E-03,!- Parameter 8
1.04563E+03;! - Parameter 9

Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation ,

Heat Pump HEATING Mode , !- Name
Scroll , !- Compressor Type
R22 , !- Refrigerant Type
0.0015 , !- Design Source Side Flow Rate {m3/s}
38000 , !- Nominal Heating Coil Capacity {W}
3000000 , !- High Pressure CutOff
0, !- Low Pressure CutOff {Pa}
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet Node Name
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
3.91379E+03, !-Parameter 1 {W/K}
5.94753E-01, !- Parameter 2 {C}
2.49945E+03, !- Parameter 3 {W}
8.68734E-01, !- Parameter 4
7.23595E-03, !- Parameter 5
3.69126E+00, !- Parameter 6
1.75701E-05, !- Parameter 7
3.65348E+03; !-Parameter 8
1520 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Heat Pump DX Supp Heating Coil 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency
32000 , !- Nominal Capacity {W}
SuppHeating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Air Loop Outlet Node; !- Air Outlet Node Name

BRANCH ,
Gshp Cooling Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Cooling: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Cooling Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side1 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name

BRANCH ,
Gshp Heating Condenser Branch , !- Name
, !- Pressure Drop Curve Name
Coil:Heating: WaterToAirHeatPump :ParameterEstimation , !- Component 1 Object Type
Heat Pump Heating Mode , !- Component 1 Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Inlet Node , !- Component 1 Inlet Node Name
Water to Air Heat Pump Source Side2 Outlet Node; !- Component 1 Outlet Node Name

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- FanTotal Efficiency
300.0 , –! Pressure Rise {Pa}
2.0, !- Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Mixed Air Node , !- Air Inlet_Node Name
Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Air Outlet Node Name

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone1DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 1 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.7; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone2DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 2 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 2 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.6; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:ConstantVolume:NoReheat ,
Zone3DirectAir , !- Name
, !- Availability Schedule Name
Zone 3 Terminal Inlet Node , !- Air Inlet Node Name
Zone 3 Supply Node , !- Air Outlet Node Name
0.7; !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1521

1.31.11.2 Outputs

Energy use reporting for the water-to-air heat pump is documented under the heat pump coil object
types:

– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:ParameterEstimation
– Coil:Cooling:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit
– Coil:Heating:WaterToAirHeatPump:EquationFit

The heat pump demand as well as the compressor and fan part-load ratios may be obtained with
the output variables shown below.

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Requested Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio
– HVAC,Average, Unitary System Dehumidification Induced Heating Demand Rate [W]

1.31.11.2.1 Unitary System Requested Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output variable is the sensible cooling requested from the zone thermostat in watts. This value
is calculated using the unitary heat pump outlet air and zone conditions, the specific heat of the
zone air, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported.

1.31.11.2.2 Unitary System Requested Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output variable is the latent cooling requested from the zone humidistat in watts. This value
is calculated using the unitary heat pump outlet air and zone conditions, the heat of vaporization of
water at the current zone conditions, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system.
This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged
for the timestep being reported.

1.31.11.2.3 Unitary System Requested Heating Rate [W]

This output variable is the sensible heating requested from the zone thermostat in watts. This value
is calculated using the unitary heat pump outlet air and zone conditions, the specific heat of the
zone air, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported.

1.31.11.2.4 Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual load on the unitary system to the unitary system’s steady
state output. This ratio is based on the nominal capacity of the unit.
1522 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.11.2.5 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output variable is the ratio of actual air mass flow rate through the unitary system to the
unitary system’s design air mass flow rate (i.e., design volumetric flow rate converted to dry air mass
flow rate). For continuous fan operation mode, this variable is always 1.0 when the unitary system
is available (based on the availability schedule).

1.31.11.2.6 Unitary System Dehumidification Induced Heating Demand Rate

[W]
This output variable is the additional heating demand rate of the supplemental heating coil of
a Water-to-Air heat pumps in Watts. This additional heating demand is induced when zone air
overshoots the heating setpoint due to extra dehumidification requirement to meet the high humidity
setpoint. This value is always positive. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep,
and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12 AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
The changeover-bypass variable air volume (CBVAV) unitary system is a compound object made
up of other components. Each CBVAV system consists of an outdoor air mixer, direct expansion
(DX) cooling coil, heating coil, and a supply air fan as shown in the figures below. Zone thermostats
and terminal units are required in each zone served by this system. The terminal units are specific
to this system type and are either AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat or AirTermi-
nal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat. A zone humidistat and single zone max humidity set
point manager may also be specified to help control high humidity levels. These individual com-
ponents are described elsewhere in this document. The system may also be connected to an inlet
node of either the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer or AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum to more accurately
model the AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem. The CBVAV unitary system object coordinates the
operation of these components and is modeled as a type of air loop equipment (Ref. AirLoopHVAC).
Links to the CBVAV system’s supply air fan, coils, and outdoor air mixer specifications are provided
in the object’s input syntax. Additional inputs include system and outdoor air flow rates during
heating and cooling operation, the priority control mode, and dehumidification control type. A
description of each input field for the CBVAV unitary system compound object is provided below.

1.31.12.1 Inputs

1.31.12.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a changeover-bypass VAV
system. Any reference to this system by another object will use this name.

1.31.12.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the system
operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the system must be
off for that time period, and a schedule value greater than 0 denotes that the system is available to
operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the system (all
of its coils and the supply air fan) as required. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of
1 for all time periods.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1523

Figure 1.156: Schematic of a CBVAV unitary system (draw through fan placement)

Figure 1.157: Schematic of a CBVAV unitary system (blow through fan placement)
1524 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.158: Schematic of a CBVAV unitary system used with outdoor air system

1.31.12.1.3 Field: Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the fan and heating/-
cooling coils) in cubic meters per second when the DX cooling coil is operating. Values must be
greater than 0, or this field is autosizable.

1.31.12.1.4 Field: Heating Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the fan and heating/-
cooling coils) in cubic meters per second when the heating coil is operating. Values must be greater
than 0, or this field is autosizable.

1.31.12.1.5 Field: No Load Supply Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the fan and heating/-
cooling coils) in cubic meters per second when neither cooling nor heating is required (i.e., the DX
cooling coil and heating coil are off but the supply air fan operates). Values must be greater than or
equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. This field is only used when the unitary system’s supply
air fan operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation (Ref. Field: Supply air fan operating
mode schedule name). If the system’s supply air fan operating mode is specified as continuous fan
operation and this value is set to zero or the field is left blank, then the model assumes that the
system air flow rate when no heating/cooling is needed is equal to the system air flow rate when the
coils were last operating (for cooling operation or heating operation).

1.31.12.1.6 Field: Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the Outdoor
air Mixer’s Outside_Air_Stream_Node) in cubic meters per second when the DX cooling coil is
operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the Cool-
ing Outdoor Air Flow Rate can be changed during the simulation using a multiplier schedule (Ref.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1525

Field: Outdoor air volumetric flow rate multiplier schedule name). For any simulation timestep, the
Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot exceed the system air volumetric flow rate during cooling
operation.

1.31.12.1.7 Field: Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the Outdoor air
Mixer’s Outside_Air_Stream_Node) in cubic meters per second when the heating coil is operating.
Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the Heating
Outdoor Air Flow Rate can be changed during the simulation using a multiplier schedule (Ref.
Field: Outdoor air volumetric flow rate multiplier schedule name). For any simulation timestep, the
Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate cannot exceed the system air volumetric flow rate during heating
operation.

1.31.12.1.8 Field: No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate When No Cooling or Heating
is Needed
This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the system (i.e., through the Outdoor air
Mixer’s Outside_Air_Stream_Node) in cubic meters per second when neither cooling nor heating
is required (i.e., the DX cooling coil and heating coil are off but the supply air fan operates). Values
must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the no load outdoor air
flow rate can be changed during the simulation using a multiplier schedule (Ref. Field: Outdoor air
volumetric flow rate multiplier schedule name). For any simulation timestep, the no load outdoor
air flow rate cannot exceed the no load supply air flow rate. This field is only used when the unitary
system’s supply air fan operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation (Ref. Field: Supply
air fan operating mode schedule name). If the system’s supply air fan operating mode is specified
as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or the field is left blank, then the model
assumes that the no load outdoor air flow rate is equal to the outdoor air flow rate when the coils
were last operating (for cooling operation [i.e. Cooling outdoor air flow rate] or heating operation
[i.e. Heating outdoor air flow rate]) and this field is not used.

1.31.12.1.9 Field: Outdoor Air Flow Rate Multiplier Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule (ref: Schedule) that contains multipliers for the
outdoor air volume flow rates (heating, cooling, no heating/cooling). Schedule values must be from
zero to 1. If this field is left blank, then the model assumes that the outdoor air multiplier is 1 for
the entire simulation period.

1.31.12.1.10 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node from which the system draws its inlet
air.

1.31.12.1.11 Field: Bypass Duct Mixer Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node where the bypass air mixes with the
unitary system’s inlet air. This name should match the name of the Return Air Stream Node Name
for the OutdoorAir:Mixer associated with this system. This node name must be different from the
system’s air inlet node name.
1526 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.12.1.12 Field: Bypass Duct Splitter Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node where the conditioned air is split into
bypass air and supply air leaving the system (e.g., delivered to the terminal units). This splitter
air node name should match the outlet node name for the last component (furthest downstream) in
this unitary system. For blow through fan placement, the splitter air node is the outlet node of the
heating coil. For draw through fan placement, the splitter node is the outlet node of the supply air
fan.

1.31.12.1.13 Field: Air Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node to which the system sends its outlet air.

1.31.12.1.14 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type

This field specifies the type of outdoor air mixer used by this CBVAV unitary system. The outdoor
air mixer component is part of the CBVAV unitary compound object. The only available outdoor
air mixer type is:

– OutdoorAir:Mixer

1.31.12.1.15 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Name

This alpha field defines the name of an outdoor air mixer component that composes part of the
CBVAV system. The name of the outdoor air mixer’s Return_Air_Stream_Node should match the
bypass duct mixer node name, and be different from the CBVAV system’s air inlet node name. The
Mixed Air Node Name of the outdoor air mixer should be the same as the CBVAV system’s supply
fan inlet air node (for blow through fan placement) or the system’s DX cooling coil inlet node (for
draw through fan placement).

1.31.12.1.16 Field: Supply Air Fan Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of fan used by this unitary system. The only valid choices are
Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, and Fan:ConstantVolume. The input requirements for these
fan objects are described elsewhere in this document.

1.31.12.1.17 Field: Supply Air Fan Name

This alpha field defines the name of the fan component that composes part of this unitary system.
Note that the fan component’s maximum flow rate should be greater than or equal to the largest
system air volumetric flow rate specified for this unitary system (heating, cooling, and no heating/-
cooling). In addition, the fan’s inlet air node should be the same as the outdoor air mixer’s Mixed
Air Node (for blow through fan placement) or the heating coil’s outlet node (for draw through fan
placement). The fan outlet air node should be the same as the DX cooling coil’s air inlet node
(for blow through fan placement) or the system’s bypass duct splitter node (for draw through fan
placement).
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1527

1.31.12.1.18 Field: Supply Air Fan Placement

This alpha field defines the placement of the supply air fan within this unitary system. The only
valid choices are BlowThrough and DrawThrough. With blow through placement, the supply
air fan is located immediately upstream of the system’s cooling coil. With draw through placement,
the supply air fan is located immediately downstream of the heating coil.

1.31.12.1.19 Field: Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of a schedule that specifies the supply air fan operating mode
during the simulation. A schedule value of 0 denotes the fan cycles off when no cooling or heating
is required, and any other value denotes that the fan runs continuously regardless of the need for
heating or cooling. If this field is left blank, the model assumes continuous supply air fan operation
for the entire simulation period.

1.31.12.1.20 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of cooling coil used by this unitary system. There are three valid
choices for this field:

– Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Cooling:DX:VariableSpeed
– CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted
– Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode

The input requirements for these cooling coil objects are described elsewhere in this document.

1.31.12.1.21 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the cooling coil used by this unitary system, and this name
should match the name specified in the corresponding cooling coil object.

1.31.12.1.22 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This alpha field defines the type of heating coil used by this unitary system. The hot water and
steam heating coils require specifying plant loop, branches, and connector objects to support the
heating coils, and are placed on the demand side of the plantloop. The hot water flow modulation
through the heating coil does not require additional controller or Controller:WaterCoil object. The
parent object (CBVAV Unitary System) itself provides the “controller” function of modulating water
flow. The valid choices are:

– Coil:Heating:Electric
– Coil:Heating:Fuel
– Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
– Coil:Heating:DX:VariableSpeed
– Coil:Heating:Water
– Coil:Heating:Steam

The input requirements for these heating coil objects are described elsewhere in this document.
1528 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.31.12.1.23 Field: Heating Coil Name

This alpha field defines the name of the heating coil used by this unitary system, and this name
should match the name specified in the corresponding heating coil object.

1.31.12.1.24 Field: Priority Control Mode

This choice field defines the cooling or heating priority control mode for the unitary system. Valid
choices are:

– CoolingPriority
– HeatingPriority
– ZonePriority
– LoadPriority

If CoolingPriority is selected, the system operates to meet the cooling load if any zone served by
this system (air loop) requires cooling. If no zones require cooling, then the system operates in
heating mode if needed. If HeatingPriority is selected, the system operates to meet the heating
load if any zone requires heating. If no zones require heating, then the system operates in cooling
mode if needed. If ZonePriority is selected, the system operates based on the maximum number of
zones requiring either heating or cooling. If the number of zones requiring cooling is greater than the
number of zones requiring heating, then the system operates in cooling mode. If the number of zones
requiring heating is greater than the number of zones requiring cooling, then the system operates
in heating mode. If the number of zones requiring cooling equals the number of zones requiring
heating, then the largest combined load (i.e., the sum of the cooling loads for zones requiring cooling
compared to the sum of the heating loads for zones that require heating) sets the cooling or heating
operating mode for the system during that simulation timestep. If LoadPriority is selected, the
system operates based on the largest combined load (i.e., the sum of the cooling loads for zones
requiring cooling compared to the sum of the heating loads for zones that require heating). If the
toal load for zones requiring cooling is greater than the toal load for zones requiring heating, then
the system operates in cooling mode. Similar logic is used for heating mode selection. If the toal
cooling load equals the toal heating load, then cooling or heating operation reverts to the total
number of zones requiring cooling or heating (and if equal reverts to cooling mode if the cooling load
is non-zero, otherwise, heating mode.

1.31.12.1.25 Field: Minimum Outlet Air Temperature During Cooling Operation

This numeric field defines the minimum outlet air temperature leaving the system when the unit is
operating to provide cooling. Values are specified in degrees Celsius and must be greater than 0. The
default value is 8°C. This value must be less than or equal to the maximum outlet air temperature
during heating operation.

1.31.12.1.26 Field: Maximum Outlet Air Temperature During Heating Opera-

tion
This numeric field defines the maximum outlet air temperature leaving the system when the unit
is operating to provide heating. Values are specified in degrees Celsius and must be greater than
0. The default value is 50°C. This value must be greater than or equal to the minimum outlet air
temperature during cooing operation.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1529

1.31.12.1.27 Field: Dehumidification Control Type

This alpha field contains the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid for
this field:
None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control
Multimode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load.
This option is used to model DX equipment with a controllable heat exchanger assisting
the DX cooling coil for improved dehumidification. It is valid only with cooling coil type =
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode.
CoolReheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humidity
setpoint. It is valid only with cooling coil type = Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode.
The default is None. For the other dehumidification control modes, the maximum humidity setpoint
on the CBVAV system’s air outlet node is used. This must be set using a ZoneControl:Humidistat
and one of:

– SetpointManager:SingleZone:Humidity:Maximum
– SetpointManager:MultiZone:Humidity:Maximum
– SetpointManager:MultiZone:MaximumHumidity:Average

objects. When extra dehumidification is required, the system may not be able to meet the humidity
setpoint if its full capacity is not adequate.

1.31.12.1.28 Field: Plenum or Mixer Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the HVAC system node where the bypass air enters the zone
mixer or return plenum. This node name must be different from the system’s Air Outlet Node
Name and Bypass Duct Splitter Node Name. This name should match the name of the inlet
node in the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer or AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum associated with this system.

1.31.12.1.29 Field: Minimum Runtime Before Operating Mode Change

This numeric field defines the amount of time, in hours, the HVAC system operates before a mode
change is allowed. The value entered must be greater than or equal to 0. The default value is 0.25
hours if this input is present and blank. If this field is not present the minimum runtime is 0 hours
(i.e., immediate change over as needed).

As shown in the example below, correct specification of the CBVAV unitary system requires specifica-
tion of the following objects in addition to the AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass
object:
1) outdoor air mixer (OutdoorAir:Mixer)
2) fan (Fan:SystemModel, Fan:OnOff, or Fan:ConstantVolume)
3) cooling coil (Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed, CoilSystem:Cooling:DX:HeatExchangerAssisted, or
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode)
4) heating coil (Coil:Heating:Fuel, Coil:Heating:Electric, or Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed)
5) terminal unit for each zone being served by this system (AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat
or AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat)
1530 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

6) When the Plenum or Mixer Inlet Node Name is specified, this node name must connect
to either the AirLoopHVAC:ZoneMixer or AirLoopHVAC:ReturnPlenum and the AirLoopH-
VAC:OutdoorAirSystem may then be used to control the outdoor air flow rates. When using
the AirloopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem it is recommended that the Cooling, Heating and No Load
Outdoor Air Flow Rate inputs are set to 0, otherwise the amount of outdoor air is increased and
the coils may not autosize properly.
Note: The fan, heating coil, cooling coil, and outdoor air mixer must be connected in the air loop
according to the configurations shown above (Figure 1.156, Figure 1.157 or Figure 1.158).

AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool:VAVChangeoverBypass ,
GasHeat CBVAV System , !- Name of unitary system
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability schedule name
1.8, !- Cooling Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.7, !- Heating Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
1.6, !- No Load Supply Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.32, !- Cooling Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.3, !- Heating Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.27, !- No Load Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
Outdoor Air Multiplier Schedule , !- Outdoor air volumetric flow rate multiplier schedule name
Air Loop Inlet Node , !- Air inlet node name
Mixer Inlet Node , !- Bypass duct mixer node name
Heating Coil Air Outlet Node , !- Bypass duct splitter node name
Air Loop Outlet Node , !- Air outlet node name
OutdoorAir:Mixer , !- Outdoor Air Mixer Object Type
Outdoor air Mixer , !- Outdoor air mixer name
Fan:OnOff , !- Supply air fan type
Supply Fan 1, !- Supply air fan name
BlowThrough , !- Supply air fan placement
Fan OpMode Schedule , !- Supply air fan operating mode schedule name
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode , !- Cooling coil type
ACDXCoil 2, !- Cooling coil name
Coil:Heating:Fuel , !- Heating coil type
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Heating coil name
CoolingPriority , !- Priority control mode
10.0, !- Minimum outlet air temperature during cooling operation {C}
50.0, !- Maximum outlet air temperature during heating operation {C}
None; !- Dehumidification control type

OutdoorAir:Mixer ,
Outdoor air Mixer , !- Name
Mixed Air Node , !- Mixed Air Node Name
Outdoor air Inlet Node , !- Outdoor Air Stream Node
Relief Air Outlet Node , !- Relief Air Stream Node Name
Mixer Inlet Node; !- Return Air Stream Node Name

Fan:OnOff ,
Supply Fan 1, !- Fan Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
0.7, !- Fan Total Efficiency
600.0 , !- Delta Pressure {Pa}
1.8, !- Max Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.9, !- Motor Efficiency
1.0, !- Motor In Airstream Fraction
Mixed Air Node , !- Fan\_Inlet\_Node
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node; !- Fan\_Outlet\_Node

Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode ,
ACDXCoil 2, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule
DX Cooling Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Inlet Node
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil Air Outlet Node
, !- Crankcase Heater Capacity {W}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater
Operation {C}
2, !- Number of Capacity Stages
0, !- Number of Enhanced Dehumidification Modes
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1531

CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance Object Type

ACDXCoil 2 Standard Mode -Stage 1, !- Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance Object Name
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling , !- Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Type
ACDXCoil 2 Standard Mode -Stage 1&2; !- Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance Object Name

Coil:Heating:Fuel ,
Furnace Heating Coil 1, !- Coil Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
NaturalGas , !- Fuel Type
0.8, !- Gas Burner Efficiency of the Coil
35000 , !- Nominal Capacity of the Coil {W}
Heating Coil Air Inlet Node , !- Coil\_Air\_Inlet\_Node
Heating Coil Air Outlet Node; !- Coil\_Air\_Outlet\_Node

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat ,
Zone 1 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 1 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- DAMPER Air Outlet Node
Zone 1 VAV Inlet Node , !-UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.583 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Control node
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 1, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
Zone 1 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:Reheat ,
Zone 2 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 2 Reheat Air Inlet Node , !- DAMPER Air Outlet Node
Zone 2 VAV Inlet Node , !-UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.583 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25, !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction
, !- Control node
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Reheat Component Object
Reheat Coil Zone 2, !- Name of Reheat Component
0.0, !- Max Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
0.0, !- Min Reheat Water Flow {m3/s}
Zone 2 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
0.001; !- Convergence Tolerance

AirTerminal:SingleDuct:VAV:HeatAndCool:NoReheat ,
Zone 3 VAV System , !- Name of System
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- System Availability schedule
Zone 3 Reheat Air Outlet Node , !- UNIT Air Outlet Node
Zone 3 VAV Inlet Node , !-UNIT Air Inlet Node
0.584 , !- Maximum air flow rate {m3/s}
0.25; !- Zone Minimum Air Flow Fraction

1.31.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
1532 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Latent Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Latent Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Unitary System Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Bypass Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Air Outlet Setpoint Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Unitary System Operating Mode Index []

1.31.12.2.1 Unitary System Total Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the CBVAV system in Watts. This
value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air and inlet air streams, and the
supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the
timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.2 Unitary System Total Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the CBVAV system in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air
and inlet air streams, the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system, and the HVAC
simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and
the results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.3 Unitary System Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the CBVAV system in Watts. This
value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air and inlet air streams, and the
supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for the
timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.4 Unitary System Total Cooling Energy [J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the CBVAV system in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air
and inlet air streams, the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system, and the HVAC
simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and
the results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
1.31. GROUP – UNITARY EQUIPMENT 1533

1.31.12.2.5 Unitary System Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the CBVAV system in Watts. This value is
calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity
ratio, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are averaged for the
timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.6 Unitary System Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the sensible heat addition of the CBVAV system in Joules over the timestep
being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air and inlet air
streams at a constant humidity ratio, the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system,
and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.7 Unitary System Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the CBVAV system in Watts.
This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air and inlet air streams at a
constant humidity ratio, and the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the system. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are
averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.8 Unitary System Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the CBVAV system in Joules over
the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the outlet air
and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the supply air mass flow rate entering/leaving the
system, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep
being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.9 Unitary System Latent Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the CBVAV system in Watts.
This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate
provided by the system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated,
and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.10 Unitary System Latent Heating Energy [J]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the CBVAV system in Joules over
the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy
and the sensible energy delivered by the system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.

1.31.12.2.11 Unitary System Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the CBVAV system in Watts.
This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the sensible energy rate
1534 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

provided by the system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated,
and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.12 Unitary System Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the CBVAV system in Joules
over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy
and the sensible energy delivered by the system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep
being reported.

1.31.12.2.13 Unitary System Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the CBVAV system in Watts. The consump-
tion includes electricity used by the DX compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply
air fan and the condenser fans associated with the DX coil[s]), and the heating coil (if electric). This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for
the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.14 Unitary System Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the CBVAV system in Joules for the time period be-
ing reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the DX compressor (including crankcase
heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fans associated with the DX coil[s]), and the
heating coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated,
and the results are summed for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.15 Unitary System Fan Part Load Ratio []

This output field is the part-load ratio of the supply air fan, which will be either zero or 1 for each
simulation timestep. For this system, the fan will operate continuously for the simulation timestep
if the system is available (ref. Field: Availability schedule name) and there is a cooling or heating
load to be met (i.e., fan part-load ratio will equal 1). When the system is available but there is no
cooling or heating load to be met, the fan will either be off for the entire timestep or on for the
entire timestep depending on the supply air fan operating mode schedule (ref. Field: Supply Air Fan
Operating Mode Schedule Name). This value is set for each HVAC system timestep being simulated,
and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.16 Unitary System Compressor Part Load Ratio []

This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating).
The compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state
capacity (steady-state capacity of first stage for multi-mode coils). This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.

1.31.12.2.17 Unitary System Bypass Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output field is the mass flow rate of air, in kg/s, being bypassed from the supply air path and
blended with the air entering the CBVAV system. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1535

1.31.12.2.18 Unitary System Air Outlet Setpoint Temperature [C]

This output field is the dry-bulb set point temperature in degrees Celsius. This set point temperature
is calculated by the model based on the zone cooling/heating loads calculated by EnergyPlus, and
the priority control mode and the dehumidification control type specified for this unitary system.
The CBVAV system attempts to achieve the outlet air set point temperature to the extent possible.

1.31.12.2.19 Unitary System Operating Mode Index []

This output field is the current operating mode, either cooling, heating or no cooling or heating. A
value of 0 represents no cooling or heating is required, a value of 1 represents cooling and a value
of 2 represents heating. These specific values can be seen using the detailed time step reporting
frequency. If longer reporting frequencies are used (e.g., timestep, hourly, etc.) then this output is
averaged over the reporting interval and the result is dependent on the value selected for Minimum
Runtime Before Operating Mode Change.

1.32 Group – Variable Refrigerant Flow Equipment

This group of EnergyPlus input objects describes the configurations of Variable Refrigerant Flow
(VRF, or Variable Refrigerant Volume) air-conditioning systems.
A VRF system is an air-conditioning system that varies the refrigerant flow rate using variable
speed compressor(s) in the outdoor unit, and the electronic expansion valves (EEVs) located in each
terminal unit. For zone equipment the system meets the space cooling or heating load requirements
by maintaining the zone air temperature at the setpoint or in the case of air loop equipment can
meet a control zone load or maintain a terminal unit or coil outlet air temperature set point. The
terminal unit may also be used in the air loop’s outdoor air system where a terminal unit or coil
outlet air temperature set point must be used. The ability to control the refrigerant mass flow rate
according to the cooling and/or heating load enables the use of as many as 20 or more terminal units
with differing capacities in conjunction with one single outdoor unit. This unlocks the possibility of
having individualized comfort control, simultaneous heating and cooling in different zones, and heat
recovery from one zone to another.
There are two alternative VRF models in EnergyPlus:

1. System curve based model (VRF-SysCurve). In this model, a number of system level
curves are used to describe the VRF system performance. This model corresponds to the
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.
2. Physics based model (VRF-FluidTCtrl). This model is able to consider the dynamics
of more operational parameters and is applicable for fluid temperature control. This model
corresponds to the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object.

(Please refer to the engineering reference for more technical details of the two models).
In the VRF system model, direct-expansion cooling and/or heating coils with an optional sup-
plemental heating coil are configured in a zone terminal unit, which is connected to a zone via
the zone inlet and exhaust nodes, connected to an air loop main branch or installed in the air
loop’s outdoor air system. The terminal units are identified in a ZoneTerminalUnitList object, the
name of which is entered as an input to the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow or AirCondi-
tioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object.
1536 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The EnergyPlus connection methodology is shown as dashed and greyed arrows in Figure 1.159
according to the following rules:

– For zone equipment the zone inlet and zone exhaust node names are defined in a Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections object (bottom of figure) and the terminal unit type and name
are specified in a ZoneHVAC:EquipmentList object. For air loop equipment the terminal unit
type and name and inlet and outlet node names are defined in the AirloopHVAC branch (top
left of figure). For outside air system equipment the terminal unit type and name are defined
in the AirLoopHVAC:OutdoorAirSystem:EquipmentList (top right of figure) and the terminal
unit inlet node will typically (but not necessarily) be an outside air node and the terminal unit
outlet node will typically connect to the OutdoorAir:Mixer object.
– A ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object will specify the terminal unit’s air
inlet and air outlet node names. For zone equipment the zone exhaust node is the terminal unit
inlet node and the zone inlet node is the terminal unit outlet node. For air loop and outdoor
air system equipment the terminal unit inlet and outlet node names identify the order of the
equipment in the air loop.
– All zone terminal units that are connected to the same AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object are listed in a
ZoneTerminalUnitList object.
– The name of the ZoneTerminalUnitList object is an input to the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
or AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object.
– The AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl or AirConditioner:Variable-
RefrigerantFlow object is not listed in an AirloopHVAC object, and therefore, can only be
simulated if the terminal units are connected to the AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow or
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl object using the ZoneTer-
minalUnitList.
– Secondary ZoneHVAC equipment objects may be used in the same zones as the terminal units
for other purposes (e.g., code compliance)

The following schematic demonstrates these connection rules.

EnergyPlus object type and object name, and node name relationships are also shown in the following
figure to aid in the assembly of this HVAC system type.

1.32.1 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
1.32.1.1 Inputs

1.32.1.1.1 Field: Heat Pump Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
heat pump. Any reference to this heat pump will use this name. Since this object is not listed in an
AirloopHVAC object, the most likely use of this name would be for reporting purposes.

1.32.1.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat pump
operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump must
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1537

Figure 1.159: Variable Refrigerant Flow Schematic

1538 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

(a) VRF model based on system curves

(VRF-SysCurve) (b) VRF model based on

physics (VRF-FluidTCtrl)

Figure 1.160: Variable Refrigerant Flow Object Links

1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1539

be off for that time period. A value other than 0 denotes that the heat pump is available to operate
during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the heat pump (and all
of its terminal units) as required. If this field is blank, the unit is enabled the entire simulation.

1.32.1.1.3 Field: Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity

This numeric field defines the total cooling capacity (sensible + latent) of the heat pump at rated
conditions in watts. The cooling capacity must be greater than 0 or set to autosize.

1.32.1.1.4 Field: Gross Rated Cooling COP

This numeric field defines the cooling coefficient of performance (COP) at rated conditions. The
cooling COP includes compressor power and condenser fan power. This COP value does not account
for impacts due to the supply air fan. The nominal heat pump cooling COP must be greater than
0. If this field is left blank, a default COP of 3.3 is assumed.

1.32.1.1.5 Field: Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Cooling Mode

This numeric field defines the minimum source inlet temperature allowed for cooling operation. For
air-cooled equipment outdoor dry-bulb temperature is used. For water-cooled equipment inlet water
temperature is used. Below this temperature, cooling is disabled. If this field is left blank, the
default value is -6ºC.

1.32.1.1.6 Field: Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Cooling Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum source inlet temperature allowed for cooling operation. For
air-cooled equipment outdoor dry-bulb temperature is used. For water-cooled equipment inlet water
temperature is used. Above this temperature, cooling is disabled. If this field is left blank, the
default value is 43ºC.

1.32.1.1.7 Field: Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling capacity ratio modifier at low outdoor dry-bulb temperatures.
This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature (i.e.,
the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air dry-bulb
temperature as the independent variables. If the Condenser Type is WaterCooled, then the cooling
capacity modifier curve will be function of weighted average indoor air wet-bulb temperature and
outdoor condenser entering water temperature. This performance curve can be used to describe the
cooling capacity ratio at low outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are used) or can be
used to describe the performance for all outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are not
used). For this system type it is likely that all three of these performance curves will be required.
See the Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.

1.32.1.1.8 Field: Cooling Capacity Ratio Boundary Curve Name

This alpha field defines the cooling capacity ratio boundary curve name. This curve is a linear,
quadratic or cubic curve that defines a change in cooling capacity at a specific condenser entering
1540 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

air dry-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air wet-bulb temperature. This curve is used when
the trend in cooling capacity changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the cooling
capacity does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left
blank. See the Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.

1.32.1.1.9 Field: Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling capacity ratio modifier at high outdoor temperatures. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and condenser
entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables. This curve is used when the trend
in cooling capacity changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the cooling capacity
does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank. See
the Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.

1.32.1.1.10 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Tem-
perature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier at low outdoor temperatures. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and con-
denser entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables. If the Condenser Type is
WaterCooled, then the cooling energy input ratio modifier curve will be function of weighted average
indoor air wet-bulb temperature and outdoor condenser entering water temperature. This perfor-
mance curve can be used to describe the cooling energy input ratio at low outdoor temperatures
(i.e., the following two curves are used) or can be used to describe the performance for all outdoor
temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are not used). For this system type it is likely that all
three of these performance curves will be required. See the Engineering Reference for more discussion
on using this input field.

1.32.1.1.11 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Boundary Name

This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio boundary curve name. This curve is a linear,
quadratic or cubic curve that defines a change in cooling energy at a specific condenser entering air
dry-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air wet-bulb temperature. This curve is used when the
trend in cooling energy changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the cooling energy
does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank. See
the Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.

1.32.1.1.12 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Tem-
perature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier at high outdoor temperatures. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and condenser
entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables. This curve is used when the trend
in cooling energy changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the cooling energy does
not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank. See the
Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1541

1.32.1.1.13 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part-
Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when
PLR is less than or equal to 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation with
cooling part-load ratio used as the independent variable. The cooling energy input ratio modifier
curve is normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the operating part-load ratio
is less than or equal to 1. This curve’s minimum PLR value must be less or equal to the value in
the field Minimum Heat Pump Part-Load Ratio.

1.32.1.1.14 Field: Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of HIgh Part-
Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when
PLR is greater than 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation with cooling
part-load ratio used as the independent variable. The cooling energy input ratio modifier curve is
normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the operating part-load ratio is
greater than 1.

1.32.1.1.15 Field: Cooling Combination Ratio Correction Factor Curve Name

This alpha field defines the cooling combination ratio (CR) correction factor curve name for combi-
nation ratios greater than or equal to 1. The combination ratio is defined as the total rated indoor
terminal unit cooling capacity divided by this heat pump’s gross rated total cooling capacity. The
curve is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation and uses the minimum value of x in the curve object to
determine the maximum part-load ratio which is linearly proportional to capacity (i.e., the minimum
value of x [CR] in the curve object must be �1). The output of this curve provides a multiplier (>1)
which is applied to this heat pump’s Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity. Between a combination
ratio of 1 and the curve’s minimum value of x, the multiplier is linearly interpolated. For combi-
nation ratio’s less than 1 (i.e., the total indoor terminal unit capacity is less than this heat pump’s
rated total capacity), capacity is directly proportional to part-load ratio and this curve will not be
used.

1.32.1.1.16 Field: Cooling Part-Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name

This alpha field defines the cooling part-load fraction correlation curve name. This curve is used to
define the cycling losses when the condenser’s compressors cycle on and off. The compressor cycles
when the cooling part-load ratio is less than the Minimum Heat Pump Part-Load Ratio specified
later in this object’s inputs.

1.32.1.1.17 Field: Gross Rated Heating Capacity

This numeric field defines the gross total heat pump heating capacity at rated conditions in watts.
The nominal heat pump heating capacity must be greater than 0 or set to autosize.

1.32.1.1.18 Field: Rated Heating Capacity Sizing Ratio

This numeric field defines the ratio of gross heating to gross cooling capacity. The model as-
sumes that when used, this value will be greater than 1. A similar input is available in the Zone-
HVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object. When the heating capacity is autosized, if this
field is non-blank, this ratio is used to scale the heating capacity to the gross rated total cooling
1542 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

capacity regardless of the value entered in the terminal unit objects. When the heating capacity
is not autosized, the gross rated heating capacity will be equal to the value specified in the Gross
Rated Heating Capacity input field and this value will be compared to the sum of the terminal
unit heating coil size. If these values are more than 10% different, a warning will be issued when
Output:Diagnostics, DisplayExtraWarnings; is included in the input file. If this field is blank and
the terminal unit sizing ratio input is also blank, then the heating capacity sizing ratio is assumed
to be 1. If this field is not blank and the heating capacity sizing ratio in the terminal unit object(s)
is blank, then this ratio also applies to each heating coil. If this field is not blank and the heating
capacity sizing ratio in the terminal units is also not blank, then the terminal unit heating coil
capacity sizing ratio input applies to each heating coil.

1.32.1.1.19 Field: Gross Rated Heating COP

This numeric field defines the heating coefficient of performance (COP) at rated conditions. The
heating COP includes compressor power and condenser fan power. This gross COP value does NOT
account for impacts due to the supply air fan. The nominal heat pump heating COP must be greater
than 0. If this field is left blank, a COP of 3.4 is assumed.

1.32.1.1.20 Field: Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heating

Mode
This numeric field defines the minimum source inlet temperature allowed for heating operation. For
air-cooled equipment outdoor dry-bulb temperature is used. For water-cooled equipment inlet water
temperature is used. Below this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the
default value is -20ºC.

1.32.1.1.21 Field: Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heating

Mode
This numeric field defines the maximum source inlet temperature allowed for heating operation.
For air-cooled equipment outdoor dry-bulb temperature is used. For water-cooled equipment inlet
water temperature is used. Above this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank,
the default value is 16ºC. This default temperature will likely disable water-cooled equipment and a
more reasonable value should be entered. Check manufacturers specifications.

1.32.1.1.22 Field: Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Low Tempera-

ture Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating capacity ratio modifier at low temperature curve name. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature (i.e., the
indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air dry-bulb or
wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers may provide performance
data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these temperature types may
be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating Performance Curve Outdoor
Temperature Type input field below. This performance curve can be used to describe the heating
capacity ratio at low outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are used) or can be used to
describe the performance for all outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two curves are not used).
For this system type it is likely that all three of these performance curves will be required. See the
Engineering Reference for more discussion on using this input field.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1543

1.32.1.1.23 Field: Heating Capacity Ratio Boundary Curve Name

This alpha field defines the heating capacity ratio boundary curve name. This curve is a quadratic
or cubic curve that defines a change in heating capacity at a specific condenser entering air dry-bulb
or wet-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air dry-bulb temperature. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of
these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating
Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type input field below. This curve is used when the
trend in heating capacity changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the heating
capacity does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left
blank.

1.32.1.1.24 Field: Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of High Tempera-

ture Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating capacity ratio modifier at high temperature curve name. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser
entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of
these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating
Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type input field below. This curve is used when the
trend in heating capacity changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the heating
capacity does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left
blank.

1.32.1.1.25 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Tem-
perature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier at low temperature curve name. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser
entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of
these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating
Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type input field below. This performance curve can be
used to describe the heating energy input ratio at low outdoor temperatures (i.e., the following two
curves are used) or can be used to describe the performance for all outdoor temperatures (i.e., the
following two curves are not used).

1.32.1.1.26 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Boundary Curve Name

This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio boundary curve name. This curve is a quadratic
or cubic curve that defines a change in heating energy at a specific condenser entering air dry-bulb
or wet-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air dry-bulb temperature. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of
these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating
Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type input field below. This curve is used when the
trend in heating energy changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the heating energy
does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank.
1544 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.1.27 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Tem-
perature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier at high temperature curve name. This
curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser
entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of
these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in the Heating
Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type input field below. This curve is used when the
trend in heating energy changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. If the heating energy
does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions, this field may be left blank.

1.32.1.1.28 Field: Heating Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type

This choice field defines the outdoor temperature type used for all performance curves. The valid
choices are DryBulbTemperature and WetBulbTemperature. The default value is WetBulbTemper-
ature. Manufacturers will typically provide heating performance data as a function of outdoor air
wet-bulb temperatures. This means that the performance (e.g., capacity and energy input ratio)
curves will use outdoor wet-bulb temperature as one of the independent variables. At times, manu-
facturers will only provide performance data as a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperatures. In this
case, all performance curves shall be developed using outdoor dry-bulb temperature and this field
shall be selected as DryBulbTemperature. If the Condenser Type specified is WaterCooled, then the
value of this field should be DryBulbTemperature.

1.32.1.1.29 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part-
Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when
PLR is less than or equal to 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic, or cubic equation with
heating part-load ratio used as the independent variable. The heating energy input ratio modifier
curve is normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the part-load ratio is less
than or equal to 1. This curve’s minimum PLR value must be less or equal to the value in the field
Minimum Heat Pump Part-Load Ratio.

1.32.1.1.30 Field: Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Part-
Load Ratio Curve Name
This alpha field defines the heating energy input ratio modifier (function of part-load ratio when
PLR is greater than 1) curve name. This curve is a linear, quadratic, or cubic equation with heating
part-load ratio used as the independent variable. The heating energy input ratio modifier curve is
normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when the part-load ratio is greater than 1.

1.32.1.1.31 Field: Heating Combination Ratio Correction Factor Curve Name

This alpha field defines the heating combination ratio (CR) correction factor curve name for combi-
nation ratios greater than or equal to 1. The combination ratio is defined as the total rated indoor
heating capacity divided by the rated heat pump heating capacity. The curve is either quadratic
or cubic and uses the minimum value of x in the curve object to determine the maximum part-load
ratio which is linearly proportional to capacity (i.e., the minimum value of x in the curve object
must be �1). The output of this curve provides a multiplier (>1) which is applied to the Nominal
Heat Pump Heating Capacity. Between a combination ratio of 1 and the curve’s minimum value
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1545

of x, the multiplier is linearly interpolated. For combination ratio’s less than 1, capacity is directly
proportional to part-load ratio and this curve will not be used. If this field is left blank, the Cooling
Combination Ratio Correction factor will be used.

1.32.1.1.32 Field: Heating Part-Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name

This alpha field defines the heating part-load fraction correlation curve name. This curve is used to
define the cycling losses when the condenser’s compressors cycle on and off. The compressor cycles
when the indoor to outdoor heating capacity ratio is less than the Minimum Heat Pump Part-Load
Ratio specified in the following field.

1.32.1.1.33 Field: Minimum Heat Pump Part-Load Ratio

This numeric field specifies the minimum operating part-load ratio (PLR) of the heat pump. When
the heat pump operates at a PLR below this value, the heat pump’s compressor will cycle to meet
the cooling or heating demand. Above this value, the heat pump’s compressor operates the entire
time step to meet the cooling or heating demand. The minimum value for this field is 0. If this field
is left blank, the default value is 0.15. When the heat pump compressor cycles, the previous field is
used to determine cycling losses.

1.32.1.1.34 Field: Zone Name for Master Thermostat Location

This alpha field defines the name of the zone where the “master” thermostat is located. When the
heat pump is connected to multiple zone terminal units, one terminal unit must be selected as the
master thermostat. The remaining thermostats are slaves and can operate only in the same mode
as the master thermostat.

1.32.1.1.35 Field: Master Thermostat Priority Control Type

This choice field determines the logic used to simulate the “master” thermostat. Valid choices are
LoadPriority, ZonePriority, ThermostatOffsetPriority, MasterThermostatPriority, and Scheduled.
The default value is MasterThermostatPriority. When LoadPriority is selected, the total zone load
is used to choose the operating mode as either cooling or heating. When ZonePriority is selected, the
number of zones requiring cooling or heating determines the operating mode. When ThermostatOff-
setPriority is selected, the zone farthest from the thermostat set point determines the operating
mode. The MasterThermostatPriority choice operates the system according the zone load where the
master thermostat is located. The heat pump can also be scheduled to operate in either cooling or
heating mode. For scheduled operation, a schedule name is entered in the following field. When all
terminal units connected to this system are set point controlled (set point control is only allowed in
air loops and outdoor air systems) this field is not used.

1.32.1.1.36 Field: Thermostat Priority Schedule Name

This alpha field identifies the schedule used when the previous field is set to Scheduled. Schedule
values of 0 denote heating mode while values of 1 denote cooling mode. Any other values will force
the system off.
1546 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.1.37 Field: Zone Terminal Unit List Name

This alpha field defines the name of the zone terminal unit list. The name specified here should
match the name of a valid ZoneTerminalUnitList object. In addition, each name specified in this
list should match the name of a valid ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object. All
terminal units connected to this heat pump must be listed in this ZoneTerminalUnitList object.
Note: the previous field is designated at the last field necessary to simulate the variable refrigerant
flow heat pump. The following fields do not have to be entered, however, piping loses, defrost
operation, crankcase heater operation, and basin heater operation will not be modeled. Defaults for
fields not entered may also not apply. These remaining fields must be entered if that portion of the
model is to be simulated.

1.32.1.1.38 Field: Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery

This choice field defines the configuration of the heat pump refrigeration system. Valid choices are
Yes and No. If Yes is selected, heat recovery is enabled and the heat pump can independently cool
and heat different zones. If No is selected, the heat pump is only able to cool or heat for any given
time step.

1.32.1.1.39 Field: Equivalent Piping Length used for Piping Correction Factor
in Cooling Mode
This numeric field defines the equivalent pipe length in meters between the farthest terminal unit and
the heat pump condenser. This value includes the gas refrigerant line length (for both horizontal and
vertical distances), fitting losses, pipe bends, and other connections that contribute to piping losses.
This field is used to calculate the piping correction factor in cooling mode. This value defines the
head losses due to the pipe length between the farthest terminal unit and the heat pump condenser
and impacts the maximum available capacity in cooling mode.

1.32.1.1.40 Field: Vertical Height used for Piping Correction Factor

This numeric field defines the vertical pipe height in meters between the highest or lowest terminal
unit and the heat pump condenser. This value defines the gravitational losses due to a change in
height between the highest (positive value), or lowest (negative value) terminal unit and the heat
pump condenser. The distance specified here is applied to the piping correction factor calculation
for both cooling and heating. If the distance between the highest terminal unit above the heat pump
condenser is greater than the distance between the lowest terminal unit below the condenser enter
the difference between the highest and lowest terminal units as a positive distance, otherwise enter
this difference as a negative distance. Example: if the distance from the heat pump condenser to the
highest terminal unit above the condenser is 10 m and the distance from the heat pump condenser
to the lowest terminal unit below the condenser is -15 m, then enter a value of -5 m in this field.
This head loss impacts the maximum available capacity in cooling mode.

1.32.1.1.41 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Length in Cooling Mode Curve
Name
This alpha field defines the linear, quadratic, or cubic curve name used to calculate the piping
correction factor for length in cooling mode. Piping losses are a function of piping length. If
sufficient piping loss information is available where piping losses are also a function of combination
ratio (i.e., in addition to length), a biquadratic performance curve may be used.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1547

1.32.1.1.42 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Height in Cooling Mode Coeffi-
cient
This numeric field defines the coefficient used to calculate the piping correction factor for height in
cooling mode.

1.32.1.1.43 Field: Equivalent Piping Length used for Piping Correction Factor
in Heating Mode
This numeric field defines the equivalent pipe length in meters between the farthest terminal unit and
the heat pump condenser. This value includes the liquid refrigerant line length (for both horizontal
and vertical distances), fitting losses, pipe bends, and other connections that contribute to piping
losses. This field is used to calculate the piping correction factor in heating mode. This value
defines the head losses due to the pipe length between the farthest terminal unit and the heat pump
condenser and impacts the maximum available capacity in heating mode.

1.32.1.1.44 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Length in Heating Mode Curve
Name
This alpha field defines the linear, quadratic, or cubic curve name used to calculate the piping
correction factor for length in heating mode. Piping losses are a function of piping length. If
sufficient piping loss information is available where piping losses are also a function of combination
ratio (i.e., in addition to length), a biquadratic performance curve may be used.

1.32.1.1.45 Field: Piping Correction Factor for Height in Heating Mode Coeffi-
cient
This numeric field defines the coefficient used to calculate the piping correction factor for height in
heating mode.

1.32.1.1.46 Field: Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor

This numeric field defines the electrical power consumed by the crankcase heater in watts for each
compressor. This crankcase heater power is consumed when the outdoor temperature is below the
maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for
this field is 0. If this field is left blank, the default value is 33 watts. Crankcase heater electrical
consumption is applied only when the compressor is off or is applied during the off cycle when the
compressor is cycling below the Minimum Heat Pump Part-Load Ratio. This field is only used to
calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.1.1.47 Field: Number of Compressors

This numeric field defines the number of compressors in the heat pump condensing unit and is used
exclusively to determine the operating characteristics of the crankcase heater. For example, if the
number of compressors is 3, one crankcase heater will operate when the heat pump condensing unit’s
part-load ratio is less than or equal to 0.67 (when the ratio of compressor size to total compressor
capacity input is 0.33) and the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor temperature
for crankcase heater operation. Similarly, two crankcase heaters will operate when the heat pump
condensing unit’s PLR is less than or equal to 0.33 and the outdoor temperature is below the
maximum outdoor temperature for crankcase heater operation. If the heat pump condensing unit is
off, all 3 crankcase heaters will operate if the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor
1548 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

temperature for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 1. If this field is
left blank, the default value is 2. This field is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has
no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.1.1.48 Field: Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity

This numeric field defines the size of the first stage compressor to the total compressor capacity and
is used exclusively for calculating crankcase heater energy. If this field and the previous field are
left blank, the default value is 0.5. If this field is left blank and the previous field is not blank, the
compressors are assumed to be equally sized. When the number of compressors is greater than 2,
the 2nd stage compressor and all additional compressors are assumed to be equally sized. This field
is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.1.1.49 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase

Heater
This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature, in degrees Celsius, below which the
crankcase heater will operate. If this field is left blank, the default value is 0°C. This field is only
used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.1.1.50 Field: Defrost Strategy

This alpha field has two choices: reverse-cycle or resistive. If the reverse-cycle strategy is selected,
the heating cycle is reversed periodically to provide heat to melt frost accumulated on the outdoor
coil. If a resistive defrost strategy is selected, the frost is melted using an electric resistance heater.
If this input field is left blank, the default defrost strategy is reverse-cycle. Defrost can be disabled
by entering a resistive defrost strategy using a timed defrost control, a 0 defrost time period fraction
and a 0 resistive defrost heater capacity in the following inputs fields. This method is used when
the Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation field value is greater than the
expected minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature simulated in the weather file.

1.32.1.1.51 Field: Defrost Control

This alpha field has two choices: timed or on-demand. If timed control is selected, the defrost
time period is calculated based on a fixed value of compressor runtime whether or not frost has
actually accumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit is in defrost
is entered in the input field “Defrost Time Period Fraction” described below. If on-demand defrost
control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio)
conditions. Regardless of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user
specified outdoor temperature entered in the input field “Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature
for Defrost Operation” described above. If this input field is left blank, the default defrost control
is timed.

1.32.1.1.52 Field: Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a bi-quadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) during reverse-cycle defrost periods
as a function of the weighted average wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor terminal
units (variable x) and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (variable y). The output of this curve
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1549

is multiplied by the coil capacity, the fractional defrost time period and the runtime fraction of the
heating coil to give the defrost power at the specific temperatures at which the indoor and outdoor
coils are operating. The curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rating point conditions.

1.32.1.1.53 Field: Defrost Time Period Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of compressor runtime when the defrost cycle is active. For
example, if the defrost cycle is active for 3.5 minutes for every 60 minutes of compressor runtime,
then the user should enter 3.5/60 = 0.058333. The value for this input field must be greater than
or equal to 0. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 0.058333.

1.32.1.1.54 Field: Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity

This numeric field defines the capacity of the resistive defrost heating element in Watts. This input
field is used only when the selected defrost strategy is ‘resistive’ (see input field “Defrost Strategy”
above). The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. If this input field is left
blank, the default value is 0.

1.32.1.1.55 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Defrost Oper-

ation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which outdoor coil defrosting
is disabled. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 5 C. Defrost can be completely
eliminated by selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected outdoor temperature found
in the weather file.

1.32.1.1.56 Field: Condenser Type

This choice field defines the configuration of the heat pump condenser. Valid choices are AirCooled,
EvaporativelyCooled, and WaterCooled.

1.32.1.1.57 Field: Condenser Inlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the condenser inlet air or water node. For Condenser type =
AirCooled, this node name should also be listed in an OutdoorAir:Node or OutdoorAir:NodeList
object. If this field is blank, the model assumes an air-cooled condenser and the weather file is used
to define the outdoor conditions entering the condenser. If this field is not blank, the node conditions
are used to define the outdoor air or inlet water conditions entering the condenser. A node name is
typically entered here for air-cooled systems when conditions other than those found in the weather
file should be used (ref. OutdoorAir:Node related to height above ground).

1.32.1.1.58 Field: Condenser Outlet Node Name

This alpha field defines the name of the condenser outlet water node. This field is only used for
water-cooled systems.

1.32.1.1.59 Field: Water Condenser Volume Flow Rate

This numeric field defines the condenser water volume flow rate in cubic meters per second. This
field is autosizable and only used for water-cooled systems.
1550 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.1.60 Field: Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness

The effectiveness of the evaporative condenser, which is used to determine the temperature of the
air entering the outdoor condenser coil as follows:

T cond inlet = (T wb, o) + (1 − EvapCondEf f ectiveness) (T db, o − T wb, o) (1.136)

where
Tcondinlet = the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (C)
Twb,o = the wet-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
Tdb,o = the dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Curve
(function of temperature) and the Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of tem-
perature). The default value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0.
This field is not used when Condenser Type = Air Cooled and the simulation is calculating heating
performance.
If the user wants to model an air-cooled condenser, they should simply specify AirCooled in the field
Condenser Type. In this case, the Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
and the Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this
object should reference performance curves that are a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature.
If the user wishes to model an evaporative-cooled condenser AND they have performance curves that
are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil, then the user should
specify Condenser Type = EvapCooled and the evaporative condenser effectiveness value should be
entered as 1.0. In this case, the Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature)
and the Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this
object should reference performance curves that are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air
entering the condenser coil.
If the user wishes to model an air-cooled condenser that has evaporative media placed in front
of it to cool the air entering the condenser coil, then the user should specify Condenser Type =
EvapCooled. The user must also enter the appropriate evaporative effectiveness for the media. In
this case, the Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Cooling
Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should
reference performance curves that are a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature. Be aware that
the evaporative media will significantly reduce the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the
condenser coil, so the Cooling Capacity and Cooling EIR Modifier Curves must be valid for the
expected range of dry-bulb temperatures that will be entering the condenser coil.

1.32.1.1.61 Field: Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate

The air volume flow rate, in m3 per second, entering the evaporative condenser. This value is used to
calculate the amount of water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The minimum value
for this field must be greater than zero, and this input field is autosizable (equivalent to 0.000144
m3 /s per watt of rated total cooling capacity [850 cfm/ton]). This field is not used when Condenser
Type = AirCooled.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1551

1.32.1.1.62 Field: Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption

The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump in Watts. This value is used to calculate
the power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The default
value for this input field is zero, but it is autosizable (equivalent to 0.004266 W per watt [15 W/ton]
of rated total cooling capacity). This field is not used when Condenser Type = AirCooled.

1.32.1.1.63 Field: Supply Water Storage Tank Name

This alpha field defines the name of the water storage tank when an evaporatively-cooled condenser
is used.

1.32.1.1.64 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This numeric field contains the capacity of the heat pump’s electric basin heater in watts per degree
Kelvin. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. This field is used in
conjunction with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin
heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set
point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the
heat pump compressor(s) is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule described below. The basin
heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of zero if this field is left
blank.

1.32.1.1.65 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (˚C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater
is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long
as the heat pump is off. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2˚C, and the
default value is 2˚C if this field is left blank.

1.32.1.1.66 Field: Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies
for Condenser Type = EvaporativelyCooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be
an on/off schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than
0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below
the set point temperature described in the previous field. If this field is left blank, the basin heater
is available to operate throughout the simulation. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may
only operate when the heat pump is off.

1.32.1.1.67 Field: Fuel Type

This alpha field determines the type of fuel that this variable refrigerant flow system uses. This
field has seven choices: Electricity, NaturalGas, Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOilNo1, FuelOilNo2,
OtherFuel1, and OtherFuel2. The default is Electricity. The use of alternate fuel types assumes an
engine drives the variable speed compression system and also accounts for condenser air flow (i.e., a
fan attached to the engine provides air flow through the outdoor condenser.
1552 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.1.68 Field: Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heat Recov-

ery Mode
This numeric field defines the minimum source inlet temperature allowed for heat recovery operation.
For air-cooled equipment outdoor dry-bulb temperature is used. For water-cooled equipment inlet
water temperature is used. Below this temperature, heat recovery is disabled. This input must
be greater than the larger of the minimum condenser inlet node temperature in cooling or heating
mode. If this field is left blank, the default value is the higher of the Minimum Condenser Inlet Node
Temperature in Cooling Mode or Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heating Mode
inputs. This system may still operate in cooling or heating only mode when source inlet temperatures
are below the minimum condenser inlet node temperature in heat recovery mode. This input is only
used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes.

1.32.1.1.69 Field: Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heat Recov-

ery Mode
This numeric field defines the maximum source inlet temperature allowed for heat recovery operation.
For air-cooled equipment outdoor dry-bulb temperature is used. For water-cooled equipment inlet
water temperature is used. Above this temperature, heat recovery is disabled. This input must
be less than the smaller of the maximum condenser inlet node temperature in cooling or heating
mode. If this field is left blank, the default value is the lower of the Maximum Condenser Inlet
Node Temperature in Cooling Mode or Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heating
Mode inputs.. This system may still operate in cooling or heating only mode when source inlet
temperatures are above the maximum condenser inlet node temperature in heat recovery mode.
This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes.

1.32.1.1.70 Field: Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve Name

This alpha field defines the cooling capacity modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This
modifier is used as a multiplier for available cooling capacity, and when in heat recovery mode,
this modifier is usually less than 1. This curve is either a bi-quadratic equation using weighted
average indoor temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures)
and condenser entering air temperature as the independent variables or a cubic curve based on
part-load ratio. This performance curve can be used to describe the cooling capacity modifier as
either a constant (e.g., temperature or part-load ratio term coefficients are 0), a cooling modifier
that varies with either indoor temperature and/or outdoor temperature, or part-load ratio (e.g.,
one or more temperature or part-load ratio term coefficients are 0), or varies with both indoor and
outdoor temperatures or part-load ratio (e.g., all temperature or part-load ratio term coefficients
are non-zero). If this field is left blank, and heat recovery operating mode is selected, the default
constant modifier is 0.9. This modifier is applied only when heat recovery mode is active. To model
a heat recovery system which has no degradation in cooling performance when heat recovery mode
is active, or if the degradation is not constant at different operating conditions, a performance curve
object must be used. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as
Yes and the system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode.

1.32.1.1.71 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of cooling capacity available when the system transitions from
cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. It is common for the cooling capacity
to decrease before the system recovers. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.5 is used (50%
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1553

reduction in cooling capacity at the start of heat recovery mode). The system will recovery according
to the time constant entered in Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Time Constant input field. If the
transition period will not be modeled, this input field must be set to 1. This input is only used
when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from cooling only
mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the engineering reference document discussion on the variable
refrigerant flow heat pump model section for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery
mode for a more detailed description.

1.32.1.1.72 Field: Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Time Constant

This numeric field defines the cooling capacity time constant, in hours, used to model the time it
takes for the system to change from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating.
Total response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.083
is used. If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity
Fraction field must be set to 1. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is
selected as Yes and the system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the
engineering reference document discussion on the variable refrigerant flow heat pump model section
for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode for a more detailed description.

1.32.1.1.73 Field: Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Modifier Curve Name

This alpha field defines the cooling energy modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier
is used as a multiplier for operating cooling energy, and when in heat recovery mode, this modifier
is usually greater than 1. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor
temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser
entering air temperature as the independent variables. This performance curve can be used to
describe the cooling energy modifier as either a constant (e.g., temperature term coefficients are 0),
a cooling energy modifier that varies with indoor and/or outdoor temperatures (e.g., one or more
temperature term coefficients are 0), or varies with both indoor and outdoor temperatures (e.g.,
temperature term coefficients are non-zero). If this field is left blank, and heat recovery operating
mode is selected, the default constant modifier is 1.1. This modifier is applied only when heat
recovery mode is active. To model a heat recovery system which has no degradation in cooling
performance when heat recovery mode is active, or if the degradation is not constant at different
operating conditions, a performance curve object must be used. This input is only used when Heat
Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from cooling only mode to
heat recovery mode.

1.32.1.1.74 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of cooling energy consumed when the system transitions from
cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. It is common for the cooling energy to
drop before the system recovers. If this field is left blank, a default value of 1 is used (no change
in energy at the start of heat recovery mode). If the transition period will not be modeled, this
input field must be set to 1. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is
selected as Yes and the system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the
engineering reference document discussion on the variable refrigerant flow heat pump model section
for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode for a more detailed description.

1.32.1.1.75 Field: Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Time Constant

1554 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This numeric field defines the cooling energy time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes
for the system to transition from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total
response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.0 is used.
If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Fraction field
must be set to 1. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes
and the system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the engineering
reference document discussion on the variable refrigerant flow heat pump model section for transition
from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode for a more detailed description.

1.32.1.1.76 Field: Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Modifier Curve Name

This alpha field defines the heating capacity modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This
modifier is used as a multiplier for available heating capacity, and when in heat recovery mode, this
modifier is usually less than 1. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor
temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser
entering air temperature as the independent variables. This performance curve can be used to
describe the heating capacity modifier as either a constant (e.g., temperature term coefficients are
0), a heating modifier that varies with indoor and/or outdoor temperatures (e.g., one or more
temperature term coefficients are 0), or varies with both indoor and outdoor temperatures (e.g.,
temperature term coefficients are non-zero). If this field is left blank, and heat recovery operating
mode is selected, the default constant modifier is 0.9. This modifier is applied only when heat
recovery mode is active. To model a heat recovery system which has no degradation in heating
performance when heat recovery mode is active, or if the degradation is not constant at different
operating conditions, a performance curve object must be used. This input is only used when Heat
Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only mode to
heat recovery mode.

1.32.1.1.77 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of heating capacity available when the system changes from
heating only operation to simultaneous heating and cooling. It is common for the heating capacity
to decrease before the system recovers. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.5 is used (50%
reduction in heating capacity at the start of heat recovery mode). The system will recovery according
to the time constant entered in Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Time Constant input field. If the
transition period will not be modeled, this input field must be set to 1. This input is only used
when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only
mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the engineering reference document discussion on the variable
refrigerant flow heat pump model section for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery
mode for a more detailed description.

1.32.1.1.78 Field: Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Time Constant

This numeric field defines the heating capacity time constant, in hours, used to model the time it
takes for the system to transition from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating.
Total response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.083
is used. If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity
Fraction field must be set to 1. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is
selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the
engineering reference document discussion on the variable refrigerant flow heat pump model section
for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode for a more detailed description.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1555

1.32.1.1.79 Field: Heat Recovery Heating Energy Modifier Curve Name

This alpha field defines the heating energy modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier
is used as a multiplier for operating heating energy, and when in heat recovery mode, this modifier
is usually greater than 1. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor
temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser
entering air temperature as the independent variables. This performance curve can be used to
describe the heating energy modifier as either a constant (e.g., temperature term coefficients are 0),
a heating energy modifier that varies with indoor and/or outdoor temperatures (e.g., one or more
temperature term coefficients are 0), or varies with both indoor and outdoor temperatures (e.g.,
temperature term coefficients are non-zero). If this field is left blank, and heat recovery operating
mode is selected, the default constant modifier is 1.1. This modifier is applied only when heat
recovery mode is active. To model a heat recovery system which has no degradation in heating
performance when heat recovery mode is active, or if the degradation is not constant at different
operating conditions, a performance curve object must be used. This input is only used when Heat
Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only mode to
heat recovery mode.

1.32.1.1.80 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Heating Energy Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of heating energy consumed when the system changes from
heating only operation to simultaneous heating and cooling. It is common for the heating energy
to decrease before the system recovers. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.5 is used (50%
reduction in heating energy at the start of heat recovery mode). The system will recovery according
to the time constant entered in Heat Recovery Heating Energy Time Constant input field. If the
transition period will not be modeled, this input field must be set to 1. This input is only used
when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only
mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the engineering reference document discussion on the variable
refrigerant flow heat pump model section for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery
mode for a more detailed description.

1.32.1.1.81 Field: Heat Recovery Heating Energy Time Constant

This numeric field defines the heating energy time constant, in hours, used to model the time it
takes for the system to change from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating.
Total response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.0
is used. If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Heating Energy
Fraction field must be set to 1. This input is only used when Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery is
selected as Yes and the system changes from heating only mode to heat recovery mode. Refer to the
engineering reference document discussion on the variable refrigerant flow heat pump model section
for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode for a more detailed description.
Following is an example input for a AirConditioner: VariableRefrigerantFlow system.

AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow ,
VRF Heat Pump , !- Heat Pump Name
VRFCondAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
autosize , !- Gross Rated Total Cooling Capacity {W}
3.16038 , !- Gross Rated Cooling COP {W}
-5, !- Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
43, !- Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
VRFCoolCapFT , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature Curve Name
VRFCoolCapFTBoundary , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Boundary Curve Name
VRFCoolCapFTHi , !- Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature Curve
Name
1556 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

VRFCoolEIRFT , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature Curve
Name
VRFCoolEIRFTBoundary , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Boundary Curve Name
VRFCoolEIRFTHi , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature Curve
Name
CoolingEIRLowPLR , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part -Load Ratio
Curve Name
CoolingEIRHiPLR , !- Cooling Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Part -Load Ratio
Curve Name
CoolingCombRatio , !- Cooling Combination Ratio Correction Factor Curve Name
VRFCPLFFPLR , !- Cooling Part -Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
autosize , !- Gross Rated Heating Capacity {W}
, !- Rated Heating Capacity Sizing Ratio (W/W)
3.40909 , !- Gross Rated Heating COP
-20, !- Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heating Mode {C}
15.5, !- Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heating Mode {C}
VRFHeatCapFT , !- Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature Curve Name
VRFHeatCapFTBoundary , !- Heating Capacity Ratio Boundary Curve Name
VRFHeatCapFTHi , !- Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature Curve
Name
VRFHeatEIRFT , !- Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Temperature Curve
Name
VRFHeatEIRFTBoundary , !- Heating Energy Input Ratio Boundary Curve Name
VRFHeatEIRFTHi , !- Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Temperature Curve
Name
WetBulbTemperature , !- Heating Performance Curve Outdoor Temperature Type
HeatingEIRLowPLR , !- Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Low Part -Load Ratio
Curve Name
HeatingEIRHiPLR , !- Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of High Part -Load Ratio
Curve Name
HeatingCombRatio , !- Heating Combination Ratio Correction Factor Curve Name
VRFCPLFFPLR , !- Heating Part -Load Fraction Correlation Curve Name
0.25, !- Minimum Heat Pump Part -Load Ratio
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone Name for Master Thermostat Location
LoadPriority , !- Master Thermostat Priority Control Type
, !- Thermostat Priority Schedule Name
VRF Heat Pump TU List , !- Zone Terminal Unit List Name
No , !- Heat Pump Waste Heat Recovery
30, !- Equivalent Piping Length used for Piping Correction Factor in Cooling
Mode {m}
10, !- Vertical Height used for Piping Correction Factor {m}
CoolingLengthCorrectionFactor , !- Piping Correction Factor for Length in Cooling Mode Curve
Name
-0.000386 , !- Piping Correction Factor for Height in Cooling Mode Coefficient
30, !- Equivalent Piping Length used for Piping Correction Factor in Heating
Mode {m}
, !- Piping Correction Factor for Length in Heating Mode Curve Name
, !- Piping Correction Factor for Height in Heating Mode Coefficient
15, !- Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor {W}
3, !- Number of Compressors
0.33, !- Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity
7, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater {C}
Resistive , !- Defrost Strategy
Timed , !- Defrost Control
, !- Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature Curve Name
, !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
autosize , !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}
7, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation {C}
EvaporativelyCooled , !- Condenser Type
MyVRFOANode , !- Condenser Inlet Node Name
, !- Condenser Outlet Node Name
, !- Water Condenser Volume Flow Rate
, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness {dimensionless}
autosize , !- Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
autosize , !- Evaporative Condenser Pump Rated Power Consumption {W}
, !- Supply Water Storage Tank Name
200, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature (C)
, !- Basin Heater Operating Schedule Name
, !- Fuel Type
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1557

, !- Minimum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode (C)

, !- Maximum Condenser Inlet Node Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode (C)
, !- Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve
Name
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Fraction
, !- Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Time Constant (hr)
, !- Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Modifier Function of Temperature Curve
Name
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Fraction
, !- Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Time Constant (hr)
, !- Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Modifier Function of Temperature Curve
Name
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Fraction
, !- Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Time Constant (hr)
, !- Heat Recovery Heating Energy Modifier Function of Temperature Curve
Name
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Heating Energy Fraction
; !- Heat Recovery Heating Energy Time Constant (hr)

1.32.1.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Cooling COP []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Heating COP []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump COP []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Part Load Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Runtime Fraction []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Cycling Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Operating Mode []
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Maximum Capacity Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Maximum Capacity Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Crankcase Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Crankcase Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Terminal Unit Heating Load Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Terminal Unit Cooling Load Rate [W]

Heat Recovery:

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Status Change Multiplier []

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Simultaneous Cooling and Heating Efficiency [Btu/h/W]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Energy [J]

Evap-cooled:

– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Water Use Volume [m3]

1558 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Pump Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Status Change Multiplier []

Water-cooled:

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, VRF Heat Pump Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

Electric Fuel type (default):

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Cooling Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Heating Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Heating Electricity Energy [J]

Electric defrost always used for Defrost Strategy = Resistive regardless of fuel type

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

Alternate Fuel types (e.g., FuelType = NaturalGas):

– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Cooling <FuelType> Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Cooling <FuelType> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Heating <FuelType> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Heating <FuelType> Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,VRF Heat Pump Defrost <FuelType> Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,VRF Heat Pump Defrost <FuelType> Energy [J]

Note: refer to the rdd file after a simulation for exact output variable names

1.32.1.2.1 VRF Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the operating total cooling capacity of the variable refrigerant flow heat pump
in Watts. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results
are averaged for the time step being reported. This value should match the sum of the individual
zone terminal unit output variables for Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Cooling Rate.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1559

1.32.1.2.2 VRF Heat Pump Total Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the operating total heating capacity of the variable refrigerant flow heat pump
in Watts. The capacity includes any degradation due to defrost mode. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported. This value should match the sum of the individual zone terminal unit output variables for
Zone VRF Air Terminal Total Heating Rate.

1.32.1.2.3 VRF Heat Pump Cooling Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the cooling mode electricity consumption rate of the variable refrigerant flow heat
pump in Watts. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor and the condenser
fan. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are
averaged for the time step being reported. The choice of an alternate fuel type (see Fuel Type input)
will result in a change in the output variable name (e.g., Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump
Cooling NaturalGas Consumption Rate).

1.32.1.2.4 VRF Heat Pump Cooling Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the cooling mode electricity consumption of the variable refrigerant flow heat
pump in Joules for the time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the
compressor and the condenser fan. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being
simulated, and the results are summed for the time step being reported. This output is also added
to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (Ref.
Output:Meter objects). The choice of an alternate fuel type (see Fuel Type input) will result in a
change in the output variable name (e.g., Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump Cooling NaturalGas
Consumption). The resource type meter will also be modified to reflect the chosen fuel type (e.g.,
Resource Type = NaturalGas).

1.32.1.2.5 VRF Heat Pump Heating Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the heating mode electricity consumption rate of the variable refrigerant flow
heat pump in Watts. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor and the condenser
fan. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are
averaged for the time step being reported. The choice of an alternate fuel type (see Fuel Type input)
will result in a change in the output variable name (e.g., Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump
Heating NaturalGas Consumption Rate).

1.32.1.2.6 VRF Heat Pump Heating Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the heating mode electricity consumption of the variable refrigerant flow heat
pump in Joules for the time period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the
compressor and the condenser fan. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being
simulated, and the results are summed for the time step being reported. This output is also added
to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Heating, Group Key = System (Ref.
Output:Meter objects). The choice of an alternate fuel type (see Fuel Type input) will result in a
change in the output variable name (e.g., Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump Heating NaturalGas
Consumption). The resource type meter will also be modified to reflect the chosen fuel type (e.g.,
Resource Type = NaturalGas).
1560 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.2.7 VRF Heat Pump Cooling COP[]

This is the operating cooling coefficient of performance (COP) for the heat pump. This value is
calculated using the ratio of VRF Heat Pump Total Cooling Rate and Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat
Pump Cooling Electric Consumption Rate output variables. Crankcase heater (usually 0 in cooling
mode), evaporative condenser water pump, and defrost (usually 0 in cooling mode) consumption rate
output variables are included in this calculation. This value is specific to outdoor unit performance
in cooling mode, is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are
averaged for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.8 VRF Heat Pump Heating COP[]

This is the operating heating coefficient of performance (COP) for the heat pump. This value is
calculated using the ratio of VRF Heat Pump Total Heating Rate and Variable Refrigerant Flow
Heat Pump Heating Electric Consumption Rate output variables. Crankcase heater, evaporative
condenser water pump (usually 0 in heating mode), and defrost consumption rate output variables
are included in this calculation. This value is specific to outdoor unit performance in heating mode,
is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.9 VRF Heat Pump COP[]

This is the operating coefficient of performance (COP) for the heat pump. This value is calculated
using the ratio of the total terminal unit coil capacity (cooling plus heating and accounts for pip-
ing losses) and total system electric consumption rate (compressor, crankcase heater, evaporative
condenser water pump, defrost, and terminal unit parasitic electric consumption rate). This output
variable does not include pump power for a water-cooled system. This value is specific to overall
system performance, is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results
are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.10 VRF Heat Pump Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

This is the electricity consumption rate of the heat pump defrost in Watts when the unit is in defrost
mode (timed, reverse-cycle). . The choice of an alternate fuel type (see Fuel Type input) will result
in a change in the output variable name (e.g., Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat Pump NaturalGas
Defrost Consumption Rate).

1.32.1.2.11 VRF Heat Pump Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the heat pump in Joules for the time step being reported.
This consumption is applicable when the unit is in defrost mode (reverse-cycle or resistive). This
output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Heating, Group
Key = System (Ref. Output:Meter objects). The choice of an alternate fuel type (see Fuel Type
input) will result in a change in the output variable name (e.g., Variable Refrigerant Flow Heat
Pump NaturalGas Defrost Consumption). The resource type meter will also be modified to reflect
the chosen fuel type (e.g., Resource Type = NaturalGas).

1.32.1.2.12 VRF Heat Pump Part Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the heat pump condenser. Heat pump part-load ratio is
defined as the total coil load divided by the heat pump’s maximum available capacity at the current
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1561

operating conditions. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and
the results are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.13 VRF Heat Pump Runtime Fraction []

This output field is the runtime fraction of the heat pump condenser’s first stage compressor. Heat
pump runtime fraction is defined as the fraction of time the first stage compressor is on during a
given time period and includes cycling losses. This value is calculated as the ratio of the VRF Heat
Pump Cycling Ratio and the output of the Cooling Part-Load Fraction Correlation Curve object as
the specific cycling ratio. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated,
and the results are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.14 VRF Heat Pump Cycling Ratio []

This output field is the cycling ratio of the heat pump condenser’s first stage compressor. Heat pump
cycling ratio is defined as the fraction of time the first stage compressor is on during a given time
period. This value is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results
are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.15 VRF Heat Pump Operating Mode []

This output field is an integer representation of the operating mode of the variable refrigerant flow
heat pump. The operating mode for cooling mode is indicated by a 1 and heating mode is indicated
by a 2. A value of 0 is reported if the heat pump is off. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.16 VRF Heat Pump Condenser Inlet Temperature [C]

This is the inlet air temperature entering the condenser coil in degrees C. This value can represent
the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature, wet-bulb temperature, or somewhere in between from the
weather data being used, depending on the value used in the input field “Evaporative Condenser
Effectiveness”. The temperature reported here is used in the various modifier curves related to
temperature (e.g., Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve [function of temperature]). (The use of
the word Condenser here is taken from cooling operation – the same device can also be an evaporator
during heating operation.)

1.32.1.2.17 VRF Heat Pump Condenser Outlet Temperature [C]

This is the condenser coil outlet water temperature in degrees C. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported. This value is only reported for water-cooled systems. (The use of the word Condenser
here is taken from cooling operation – the same device can also be an evaporator during heating
operation.)

1.32.1.2.18 VRF Heat Pump Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the condenser coil outlet water mass flow rate in kilograms per second. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being
reported. This value is only reported for water-cooled systems. (The use of the word Condenser
here is taken from cooling operation – the same device can also be an evaporator during heating
operation.)
1562 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.2.19 VRF Heat Pump Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the condenser coil heat transfer rate in Watts. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step being reported. This value
is only reported for water-cooled systems. (The use of the word Condenser here is taken from cooling
operation – the same device can also be an evaporator during heating operation.)

1.32.1.2.20 VRF Heat Pump Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the condenser coil heat transfer in Joules. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
time step being simulated, and the results are summed for the time step being reported. This value
is only reported for water-cooled systems. (The use of the word Condenser here is taken from cooling
operation – the same device can also be an evaporator during heating operation.)

1.32.1.2.21 VRF Heat Pump Maximum Capacity Cooling Rate [W]

This output field is the maximum available terminal unit cooling capacity in Watts allowed for
the current time step being reported. If the terminal units request more capacity than is actually
available from the variable refrigerant flow heat pump, the individual terminal units will be limited
to this value. A maximum limit of 1E+20 is reported when there is sufficient capacity available to
meet all requests from the terminal units. This output variable easily identifies times when the total
terminal unit cooling load exceeds the heat pump’s available cooling capacity.

1.32.1.2.22 VRF Heat Pump Maximum Capacity Heating Rate [W]

This output field is the maximum available terminal unit heating capacity in Watts allowed for
the current time step being reported. If the terminal units request more capacity than is actually
available from the variable refrigerant flow heat pump, the individual terminal units will be limited
to this value. A maximum limit of 1E+20 is reported when there is sufficient capacity available to
meet all requests from the terminal units. This output variable easily identifies times when the total
terminal unit heating load exceeds the heat pump’s available heating capacity.

1.32.1.2.23 VRF Heat Pump Terminal Unit Cooling Load Rate [W]
This output field is the sum of the terminal unit cooling coil loads in Watts for the current time
step being reported. This value is derived directly from the cooling coils and represents the total
cooling load on the VRF system after piping losses have been accounted for. The total cooling load
will be less than the variable refrigerant flow total cooling capacity reported when piping losses are
modeled (i.e., when piping losses are < 1).

1.32.1.2.24 VRF Heat Pump Terminal Unit Heating Load Rate [W]
This output field is the sum of the terminal unit heating coil loads in Watts for the current time
step being reported. This value is derived directly from the heating coils and represents the total
heating load on the VRF system after piping losses have been accounted for. The total heating load
will be less than the variable refrigerant flow total heating capacity reported when piping losses are
modeled (i.e., when piping losses are < 1).

1.32.1.2.25 VRF Heat Pump Crankcase Heater Electricity Rate [W]

This output field is the average electricity consumption rate of the heat pump’s crankcase heaters
in Watts for the time step being reported.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1563

1.32.1.2.26 VRF Heat Pump Crankcase Heater Electricity Energy [J]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the heat pump’s crankcase heaters in Joules
for the time step being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type =
Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.32.1.2.27 VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Water Use Volume [m3]
This output is the amount of water used to evaporatively cool the condenser coil inlet air, in cubic
meters. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Water, End Use Key = Cooling,
Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.32.1.2.28 VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This is the average electricity consumption rate of the evaporative condenser water pump in Watts
for the time step being reported.

1.32.1.2.29 VRF Heat Pump Evaporative Condenser Pump Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption rate of the evaporative condenser water pump in Joules for the
time step being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.32.1.2.30 VRF Heat Pump Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric consumption rate of the heat pump’s basin heater (for evaporatively-
cooled condenser type) in Watts. This basin heater only operates when the variable refrigerant flow
heat pump’s compressor(s) is off and therefore is reported as 0 anytime the compressor operates.
If the compressor is cycling (see VRF Heat Pump Cycling Ratio output variable above), the basin
heater electric power is proportional to one minus the cycling ratio of the compressor (i.e., the basin
heater is on when the compressor is off).

1.32.1.2.31 VRF Heat Pump Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]

This output is the electric consumption of the heat pump’s basin heater (for evaporatively-cooled
condenser type) in Joules. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.32.1.2.32 VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Status Change Multiplier []

This output applies only when heat recovery is used and represents the multiplier used to derate
the capacity of the system when transitioning from cooling or heating mode to heat recovery mode.
This value is 1 when derating does not apply (i.e., the system has not recently changed modes to
provide heat recovery). Derating during a transition period is applied according to the inputs for
Heat Recovery Fraction and Heat Recovery Time Constant. To turn transition derating off, set
Heat Recovery Fraction to 1. Refer to the engineering reference document discussion on the variable
refrigerant flow heat pump model section for transition from cooling only mode to heat recovery
mode for a more detailed description.
1564 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.1.2.33 VRF Heat Pump Simultaneous Cooling and Heating Effi-

ciency[Btu/h/W]
The ratio of the total capacity of the system (heating and cooling capacity) to the effective power
when operating in the heat recovery mode. This value is specific to overall system performance, is
calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported.

1.32.2 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl
1.32.2.1 Inputs

1.32.2.1.1 VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Rate [W]

The rate of heat recovered by the system in watts. This value represents the amount of heat recovered
at the terminal units while in heat recovery operating mode. If the VRF system is in cooling mode
and recovers heat then that amount of heat was recovered from terminal units in zone(s) requiring
heating. If the VRF system is in heating mode and recovers heat then that amount of heat was
recovered from terminal units in zone(s) requiring cooling. The results are averaged for the time
step being reported. Reports at the detailed time frequency should match the corresponding coil
total cooling/heating rate since piping losses are not included.

1.32.2.1.2 VRF Heat Pump Heat Recovery Energy [J]

The rate of heat recovered by the system in joules. This value represents the amount of heat
energy recovered at the terminal units while in heat recovery operating mode. If the VRF system
is in cooling mode and recovers heat then that amount of heat was recovered from terminal units in
zone(s) requiring heating. If the VRF system is in heating mode and recovers heat then that amount
of heat was recovered from terminal units in zone(s) requiring cooling. The results are summed for
the time step being reported. Reports at the detailed time frequency should match the corresponding
coil total cooling/heating energy since piping losses are not included.

1.32.2.1.3 Field: Heat Pump Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
heat pump. Any reference to this heat pump will use this name. Since this object is not listed in an
AirloopHVAC object, the most likely use of this name would be for reporting purposes.

1.32.2.1.4 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the heat pump
operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump must
be off for that time period. A value other than 0 denotes that the heat pump is available to operate
during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the heat pump (and all
of its terminal units) as required. If this field is blank, the unit is enabled the entire simulation.

1.32.2.1.5 Field: Zone Terminal Unit List Name

This alpha field defines the name of the zone terminal unit list. The name specified here should
match the name of a valid ZoneTerminalUnitList object. In addition, each name specified in this
list should match the name of a valid ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object. All
terminal units connected to this heat pump must be listed in this ZoneTerminalUnitList object.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1565

1.32.2.1.6 Field: Refrigerant Type

This alpha field defines the name of the refrigerant used in the VRF system. The name specified
here should match the name of a valid FluidProperties:Name object.

1.32.2.1.7 Field: Rated Evaporative Capacity

This numeric field defines the total evaporative capacity in watts at rated conditions. This is the
capacity corresponding to the max compressor speed at rated conditions. The actual evaporative
capacity is obtained by multiplying the rated capacity with the modification factor calculated by
Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve. The value must be greater than
0. This filed is autosizable.

1.32.2.1.8 Field: Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Ca-
pacity
This numeric field defines the rated compressor power per Watt of rated evaporative capacity. Rated
compressor power corresponds to the max compressor speed at rated conditions. The actual com-
pressor power is obtained by multiplying the rated power with the modification factor calculated by
Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve. The value must be greater than 0. If
this field is left blank, a default value of 0.35 W/W is assumed.

1.32.2.1.9 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Mode

This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor temperature allowed for cooling operations. Below
this temperature, cooling is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is -6ºC. If this field
is left blank, the default value is -20ºC.

1.32.2.1.10 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for cooling operations. Above
this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is 16ºC.

1.32.2.1.11 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Mode

This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor temperature allowed for heating operation. Below
this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is -20ºC.

1.32.2.1.12 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for heating operation. Above
this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is 16ºC.

1.32.2.1.13 Field: Outdoor Unit Reference Superheating

This numeric field defines the reference superheating degrees of the outdoor unit. If this field is
blank, the default value of 3.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.14 Field: Outdoor Unit Reference Subcooling

This numeric field defines the reference subcooling degrees of the outdoor unit. If this field is blank,
the default value of 3.0ºC is used.
1566 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.2.1.15 Field: Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm for Indoor Unit

This alpha field specifies the algorithm for the refrigerant temperature control. Two choices are
available: ConstantTemp or VariableTemp. The indoor unit evaporating temperature at cooling
mode or condensing temperature at heating are fixed in the ConstantTemp algorithm, while in
VariableTemp algorithm they can be varied.

1.32.2.1.16 Field: Reference Evaporating Temperature for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the reference evaporating temperature for the indoor unit when VRF runs
at cooling mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Constant-
Temp. If this field is blank, the default value of 6.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.17 Field: Reference Condensing Temperature for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the reference condensing temperature for the indoor unit when VRF runs at
heating mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is ConstantTemp.
If this field is blank, the default value of 44.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.18 Field: Variable Evaporating Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the minimum evaporating temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at cooling mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 4.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.19 Field: Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the maximum evaporating temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at cooling mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 13.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.20 Field: Variable Condensing Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the minimum condensing temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at heating mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 42.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.21 Field: Variable Condensing Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the maximum condensing temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at heating mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 46.0ºC is used.

1.32.2.1.22 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Ca-
pacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan power per watt of rated evaporative capacity. If this
field is blank, the default value of 4.25E-3 W/W is used.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1567

1.32.2.1.23 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative
Capacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan volumetric flow rate per watt of rated evaporative
capacity. If this field is blank, the default value of 7.50E-5 m3 /s-W is used.

1.32.2.1.24 Field: Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature Function of Super-

heating Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation
of outdoor unit evaporating temperature as a function of superheating degrees. The output of this
curve is the temperature difference between the coil surface air temperature and the evaporating
temperature.

1.32.2.1.25 Field: Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature Function of Subcool-

ing Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation
of outdoor unit condensing temperature as a function of subcooling degrees. The output of this
curve is the temperature difference between the condensing temperature and the coil surface air
temperature.

1.32.2.1.26 Field: Diameter of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the First
Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the diameter of main pipe connecting the outdoor unit to the first branch
joint. This value is used to calculate the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through the main
pipe, including the heat loss and pressure drop. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.0254m is
used.

1.32.2.1.27 Field: Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the First
Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the length of main pipe connecting the outdoor unit to the first branch
joint. This value is used to calculate the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main
pipe. The value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 30m is used.

1.32.2.1.28 Field: Equivalent Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to

the First Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the equivalent length of main pipe connecting the outdoor unit to the first
branch joint. This value is used to calculate the pressure drop of the refrigerant when going through
the main pipe. The value should be greater than the real pipe length specified in the above field. If
this field is blank, the default value of 36m is used.

1.32.2.1.29 Field: Height Difference Between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Units
This numeric field defines the height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node
of the main pipe. This value is used to calculate the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through
the main pipe. The value can be positive, zero, or negative. Positive means outdoor unit is higher
than indoor unit, while negative means outdoor unit is lower than indoor unit.
1568 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.2.1.30 Field: Main Pipe Insulation Thickness

This numeric field defines the insulation thickness of the main pipe. This value is used to calculate
the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe. The value should be greater than
0. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.02m is used.

1.32.2.1.31 Field: Main Pipe Insulation Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field defines the thermal conductivity of the main pipe insulation material. This value
is used to calculate the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe. The value
should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.032 W/m-K is used.

1.32.2.1.32 Field: Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor

This numeric field defines the electrical power consumed by the crankcase heater in watts for each
compressor. This crankcase heater power is consumed to warm the refrigerant and oil when the
compressor is off when the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature
for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 0. If this field is left blank,
the default value is 33 watts. Crankcase heater electrical consumption is applied only when the
compressor is off or is applied during the off cycle when the compressor is cycling below the Minimum
Heat Pump Part-Load Ratio. This field is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no
impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.2.1.33 Field: Number of Compressors

This numeric field defines the number of compressors in the heat pump condensing unit and is used
exclusively to determine the operating characteristics of the crankcase heater. For example, if the
number of compressors is 3, one crankcase heater will operate when the heat pump condensing unit’s
part-load ratio is less than or equal to 0.67 (when the ratio of compressor size to total compressor
capacity input is 0.33) and the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor temperature
for crankcase heater operation. Similarly, two crankcase heaters will operate when the heat pump
condensing unit’s PLR is less than or equal to 0.33 and the outdoor temperature is below the
maximum outdoor temperature for crankcase heater operation. If the heat pump condensing unit is
off, all 3 crankcase heaters will operate if the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor
temperature for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 1. If this field is
left blank, the default value is 2. This field is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has
no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.2.1.34 Field: Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity

This numeric field defines the size of the first stage compressor to the total compressor capacity and
is used exclusively for calculating crankcase heater energy. If this field and the previous field are
left blank, the default value is 0.5. If this field is left blank and the previous field is not blank, the
compressors are assumed to be equally sized. When the number of compressors is greater than 2,
the 2nd stage compressor and all additional compressors are assumed to be equally sized. This field
is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.2.1.35 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase

Heater
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1569

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature, in degrees Celsius, below which the
crankcase heater will operate. If this field is left blank, the default value is 5°C. This field is only
used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.

1.32.2.1.36 Field: Defrost Strategy

This alpha field has two choices: reverse-cycle or resistive. If the reverse-cycle strategy is selected,
the heating cycle is reversed periodically to provide heat to melt frost accumulated on the outdoor
coil. If a resistive defrost strategy is selected, the frost is melted using an electric resistance heater.
If this input field is left blank, the default defrost strategy is reverse-cycle. Defrost can be disabled
by entering a resistive defrost strategy using a timed defrost control, a 0 defrost time period fraction
and a 0 resistive defrost heater capacity in the following inputs fields. This method is used when
the Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation field value is greater than the
expected minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature simulated in the weather file.

1.32.2.1.37 Field: Defrost Control

This alpha field has two choices: timed or on-demand. If timed control is selected, the defrost
time period is calculated based on a fixed value of compressor runtime whether or not frost has
actually accumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit is in defrost
is entered in the input field “Defrost Time Period Fraction” described below. If on-demand defrost
control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio)
conditions. Regardless of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user
specified outdoor temperature entered in the input field “Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature
for Defrost Operation” described above. If this input field is left blank, the default defrost control
is timed.

1.32.2.1.38 Field: Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a bi-quadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) during reverse-cycle defrost periods
as a function of the weighted average wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor terminal
units (variable x) and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (variable y). The output of this curve
is multiplied by the coil capacity, the fractional defrost time period and the runtime fraction of the
heating coil to give the defrost power at the specific temperatures at which the indoor and outdoor
coils are operating. The curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rating point conditions.

1.32.2.1.39 Field: Defrost Time Period Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of compressor runtime when the defrost cycle is active. For
example, if the defrost cycle is active for 3.5 minutes for every 60 minutes of compressor runtime,
then the user should enter 3.5/60 = 0.058333. The value for this input field must be greater than
or equal to 0. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 0.058333.

1.32.2.1.40 Field: Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity

This numeric field defines the capacity of the resistive defrost heating element in Watts. This input
field is used only when the selected defrost strategy is ‘resistive’ (see input field “Defrost Strategy”
above). The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. If this input field is left
blank, the default value is 0.
1570 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.2.1.41 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Defrost Oper-

ation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which outdoor coil defrosting
is disabled. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 5°C. Defrost can be completely
eliminated by selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected outdoor temperature found
in the weather file.

1.32.2.1.42 Field: Compressor maximum delta Pressure

This numeric field defines the maximum pressure increase that the compressor can provide. The
value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 4,500,000 Pa is used.

1.32.2.1.43 Field: Number of Compressor Loading Index Entries

This numeric field defines the number of compressor loading index entries. Loading index specifies
the VRF operational modes at various load conditions. In a single compressor system, loading index
reflects the compressor speed. The model requires at least two loading indices. The first index
represents the minimal capacity operation, while the last index represents full capacity operation.

1.32.2.1.44 Field: Compressor Speed at Loading Index i

This numeric field defines the compressor speed at the i-th loading index. The value must be greater
than 0.

1.32.2.1.45 Field: Loading Index i Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of

Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a BiQuadratic curve for the VRF operational mode corresponding
to the i-th loading index. It parameterizes the variation of VRF evaporating capacity as a function
of operating conditions, i.e., evaporating and condensing temperatures. The output of this curve is
a dimensionless multiplier to be applied on the rated evaporative capacity to calculate the actual
capacity.

1.32.2.1.46 Field: Loading Index i Compressor Power Multiplier Function of

Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a BiQuadratic curve for the VRF operational mode corresponding
to the i-th loading index. It parameterizes the variation of compressor power as a function of
operating conditions, i.e., evaporating and condensing temperatures. The output of this curve is
a dimensionless multiplier to be applied on the rated compressor power to calculate the actual
compressor power.

Following is an example input for a AirConditioner: VariableRefrigerantFlow : FluidTemperatureControl

system.

AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow :FluidTemperatureControl ,
VRF Heat Pump , !- Heat Pump Name
VRFCondAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
VRF Heat Pump TU List , !- Zone Terminal Unit List Name
R410A , !- Refrigerant Type
41300 , !- Rated Evaporative Capacity {W}
0.344 , !- Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {W/W}
, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1571

, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Mode {C}

, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Mode {C}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Mode {C}
3, !- Reference Outdoor Unit Superheating Degrees {C}
3, !- Reference Outdoor Unit Subcooling Degrees {C}
VariableTemp , !- Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm for Indoor Unit
, !- Reference Evaporating Temperature for Indoor Unit {C}
, !- Reference Condensing Temperature for Indoor Unit {C}
6, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit {C}
13, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit {C}
42, !- Variable Condensing Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit {C}
46, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit {C}
4.12E-3, !- Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {W/W}
7.26E-5, !- Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {m3
/s-W}
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature Function of Superheating Curve
Name
OUCondTempCurve , !- Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature Function of Subcooling Curve Name
0.0508 , !- Diameter of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch
joint {m}
30, !- Length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch joint
{m}
36, !- Equivalent length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first
branch joint {m}
5, !- Height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node
of the main pipe {m}
0.02, !- Insulation thickness of the main pipe {m}
0.032 , !- Thermal conductivity of the main pipe insulation material {W/m-K}
33, !- Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor {W}
1, !- Number of Compressors
0.33, !- Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity
7, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater {C}
, !- Defrost Strategy
, !- Defrost Control
, !- Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature Curve
Name
, !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
, !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation {C}
4500000 , !- Compressor maximum delta Pressure {Pa}
3, !- Number of Compressor Loading Index Entries
1500, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 1 {rev/min}
MinSpdCooling , !- Loading Index 1 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
MinSpdPower , !- Loading Index 1 Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
3600, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 2 {rev/min}
Spd1Cooling , !- Loading Index 2 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
Spd1Power , !- Loading Index 2 Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
6000, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 3 {rev/min}
Spd2Cooling , !- Loading Index 3 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
Spd2Power; !- Loading Index 3 Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name

Curve:Quadratic ,
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
6.05E-1, !- Coefficient2 x
2.50E-2, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
15, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Quadratic ,
1572 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

OUCondTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.91, !- Coefficient2 x
1.180 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
5, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdCooling , !- Name
3.19E-01, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.26E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-2.15E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.20E-02, !- Coefficient4 y
1.05E-04, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-8.66E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdPower , !- Name
8.79E-02 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.72E-04, !- Coefficient2 x
6.93E-05 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
-3.38E-05, !- Coefficient4 y
-8.10E-06, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.04E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Cooling , !- Name
8.12E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-4.23E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-4.11E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.97E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.67E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-2.23E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Power , !- Name
3.26E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
1.42E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1573

2.82E-03 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.86E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.50E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Cooling , !- Name
1.32E+00 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-6.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-7.10E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
4.89E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
4.59E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.67E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Power , !- Name
6.56E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-3.71E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
2.07E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.05E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
7.36E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.57E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

1.32.2.2 Outputs

In addition to the output variables described for the VRF-SysCurve model in Section 1.32.1, the
VRF-FluidTCtrl model also provides the following output variables:

– VRF Heat Pump Compressor Rotating Speed [rev/min]

– VRF Heat Pump Compressor Electricity Rate [W]
– VRF Heat Pump Indoor Unit Evaporating Temperature [C]
– VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature [C]
– VRF Heat Pump Indoor Unit Condensing Temperature [C]
– VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature [C]
1574 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Fan Power [W]

– VRF Heat Pump Cooling Capacity at Max Compressor Speed [W]
– VRF Heat Pump Heating Capacity at Max Compressor Speed [W]
– VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Evaporator Heat Extract Rate [W]
– VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Condenser Heat Release Rate [W]

Note: refer to the rdd file after a simulation for exact output variable names

1.32.2.2.1 VRF Heat Pump Compressor Rotating Speed [rev/min]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the rotating speed of the compressor,
which indicates the loading index.

1.32.2.2.2 VRF Heat Pump Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the electric power of the compressor
running. This value is related with the compressor speed as well as the operational conditions, i.e.,
evaporating and condensing temperatures of the system.

1.32.2.2.3 VRF Heat Pump Indoor Unit Evaporating Temperature [C]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the evaporating temperature of the
VRF system operating at cooling mode. This value is manipulated by the VRF system considering
the load conditions of all the zones it serves. It affects the indoor unit cooling coil surface temperature
and thus the cooling capacity of the indoor unit. It also affects the compressor operating conditions
and thus the compressor energy consumption.

1.32.2.2.4 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature [C]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the condensing temperature of the
VRF system operating at cooling mode. This value is related with the outdoor air conditions as
well as the system operational mode. It affects the condensing capacity of the outdoor unit. It also
affects the compressor operating conditions and thus the compressor energy consumption.

1.32.2.2.5 VRF Heat Pump Indoor Unit Condensing Temperature [C]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the condensing temperature of the
VRF system operating at heating mode. This value is manipulated by the VRF system considering
the load conditions of all the zones it serves. It affects the indoor unit heating coil surface temperature
and thus the heating capacity of the indoor unit. It also affects the compressor operating conditions
and thus the compressor energy consumption.

1.32.2.2.6 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature [C]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the evaporating temperature of
the VRF system operating at heating mode. This value is related with the outdoor air conditions
as well as the system operational mode. It affects the evaporating capacity of the outdoor unit. It
also affects the compressor operating conditions and thus the compressor energy consumption.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1575

1.32.2.2.7 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Fan Power [W]

This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This is the power consumed by the fan
located in the VRF outdoor unit.

1.32.2.2.8 VRF Heat Pump Cooling Capacity at Max Compressor Speed [W]
This output field is the maximum cooling capacity of the variable refrigerant flow system at particular
operational conditions, corresponding to the maximum compressor speed. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported. This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.

1.32.2.2.9 VRF Heat Pump Heating Capacity at Max Compressor Speed [W]
This output field is the maximum heating capacity of the variable refrigerant flow system at particular
operational conditions, corresponding to the maximum compressor speed. This value is calculated
for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the time step
being reported. This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.

1.32.2.2.10 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Evaporator Heat Extract Rate [W]

This output field is the heat extract rate of the VRF outdoor unit evaporator in Watts. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported. This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.

1.32.2.2.11 VRF Heat Pump Outdoor Unit Condenser Heat Release Rate [W]
This output field is the heat release rate of the VRF outdoor unit condenser in Watts. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system time step being simulated, and the results are averaged for the
time step being reported. This output only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model. This output
only applies for the VRF-FluidTCtrl model.

1.32.3 AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl:
1.32.3.1 Inputs

1.32.3.1.1 Field: Name

This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a variable refrigerant flow
heat recovery system. Any reference to this system will use this name. Since this object is not listed
in an AirloopHVAC object, the most likely use of this name would be for reporting purposes.

1.32.3.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This alpha field defines the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the VRF
system operates during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the VRF
system must be off for that time period. A value other than 0 denotes that the VRF system is
available to operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable the
VRF system (and all of its terminal units) as required. If this field is blank, the unit is enabled the
entire simulation.
1576 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.3.1.3 Field: Zone Terminal Unit List Name

This alpha field defines the name of the zone terminal unit list. The name specified here should
match the name of a valid ZoneTerminalUnitList object. In addition, each name specified in this
list should match the name of a valid ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow object. All
terminal units connected to this VRF system must be listed in this ZoneTerminalUnitList object.

1.32.3.1.4 Field: Refrigerant Type

This alpha field defines the name of the refrigerant used in the VRF system. The name specified
here should match the name of a valid FluidProperties:Name object.

1.32.3.1.5 Field: Rated Evaporative Capacity

This numeric field defines the total evaporative capacity in watts at rated conditions. This is the
capacity corresponding to the max compressor speed at rated conditions. The actual evaporative
capacity is obtained by multiplying the rated capacity with the modification factor calculated by
Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve. The value must be greater than
0. This filed is autosizable.

1.32.3.1.6 Field: Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Ca-
pacity
This numeric field defines the rated compressor power per Watt of rated evaporative capacity. Rated
compressor power corresponds to the max compressor speed at rated conditions. The actual com-
pressor power is obtained by multiplying the rated power with the modification factor calculated by
Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve. The value must be greater than 0. If
this field is left blank, a default value of 0.35 W/W is assumed.

1.32.3.1.7 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Only Mode

This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor temperature allowed for cooling only mode. Below
this temperature, cooling is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is -6ºC.

1.32.3.1.8 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Only Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for cooling only mode. Above
this temperature, cooling is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is 43ºC.

1.32.3.1.9 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Only Mode

This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor temperature allowed for heating only mode. Below
this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is -20ºC.

1.32.3.1.10 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Only Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for heating only mode. Above
this temperature, heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is 16ºC.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1577

1.32.3.1.11 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for heat recovery operations.
Below this temperature, heat recovery operations is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default
value is -20ºC.

1.32.3.1.12 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode

This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for heat recovery operations.
Above this temperature, heat recovery operations is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default
value is 43ºC.

1.32.3.1.13 Field: Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm for Indoor Unit

This alpha field specifies the algorithm for the refrigerant temperature control. Two choices are
available: ConstantTemp or VariableTemp. The indoor unit evaporating temperature at cooling
mode or condensing temperature at heating are fixed in the ConstantTemp algorithm, while in
VariableTemp algorithm they can be varied.

1.32.3.1.14 Field: Reference Evaporating Temperature for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the reference evaporating temperature for the indoor unit when VRF runs
at cooling mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Constant-
Temp. If this field is blank, the default value of 6.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.15 Field: Reference Condensing Temperature for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the reference condensing temperature for the indoor unit when VRF runs at
heating mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is ConstantTemp.
If this field is blank, the default value of 44.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.16 Field: Variable Evaporating Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the minimum evaporating temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at cooling mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 4.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.17 Field: Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the maximum evaporating temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at cooling mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 13.0ºC is used.
1578 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.3.1.18 Field: Variable Condensing Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the minimum condensing temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at heating mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 42.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.19 Field: Variable Condensing Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit

This numeric field defines the maximum condensing temperature for the indoor unit when VRF
runs at heating mode. This field is required if Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm is Vari-
ableTemp. If this field is blank, the default value of 46.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.20 Field: Outdoor Unit Evaporator Reference Superheating

This numeric field defines the reference superheating degrees of the outdoor unit evaporator. If this
field is blank, the default value of 3.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.21 Field: Outdoor Unit Condenser Reference Subcooling

This numeric field defines the reference subcooling degrees of the outdoor unit condenser. If this
field is blank, the default value of 5.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.22 Field: Outdoor Unit Evaporator Rated Bypass Factor

This numeric field defines the Rated Bypass Factor of the outdoor unit evaporator. If this field is
blank, the default value of 0.4 is used.

1.32.3.1.23 Field: Outdoor Unit Condenser Rated Bypass Factor

This numeric field defines the Rated Bypass Factor of the outdoor unit condenser. If this field is
blank, the default value of 0.2 is used.

1.32.3.1.24 Field: Difference between Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature

and Outdoor Air Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode
This numeric field defines the difference between Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature and Out-
door Air Temperature in the Heat Recovery Mode. This is a key operational parameter that is used
in the mode determinations. If this field is blank, the default value of 5.0ºC is used.

1.32.3.1.25 Field: Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger Capacity Ratio

This numeric field defines the rated capacity ratio between the main and supplementary outdoor
unit heat exchangers. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.3 is used.

1.32.3.1.26 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Ca-
pacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan power per watt of rated evaporative capacity. If this
field is blank, the default value of 4.25E-3 W/W is used.
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1579

1.32.3.1.27 Field: Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative
Capacity
This numeric field defines the outdoor unit fan volumetric flow rate per watt of rated evaporative
capacity. If this field is blank, the default value of 7.50E-5 m3 /s-W is used.

1.32.3.1.28 Field: Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature Function of Super-

heating Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation
of outdoor unit evaporating temperature as a function of superheating degrees. The output of this
curve is the temperature difference between the coil surface air temperature and the evaporating
temperature.

1.32.3.1.29 Field: Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature Function of Subcool-

ing Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation
of outdoor unit condensing temperature as a function of subcooling degrees. The output of this
curve is the temperature difference between the condensing temperature and the coil surface air
temperature.

1.32.3.1.30 Field: Diameter of Main Pipe for Suction Gas

This numeric field defines the diameter of main pipe for Suction Gas. This value is used to calculate
the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe, including the heat absorbed
and pressure drop. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.0762m is used.

1.32.3.1.31 Field: Diameter of Main Pipe for Discharge Gas

This numeric field defines the diameter of main pipe for Suction Gas. This value is used to calculate
the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe, including the heat loss and
pressure drop. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.0762m is used.

1.32.3.1.32 Field: Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to the First
Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch joint.
This value is used to calculate the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe.
The value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 30m is used.

1.32.3.1.33 Field: Equivalent Length of Main Pipe Connecting Outdoor Unit to

the First Branch Joint
This numeric field defines the equivalent length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first
branch joint. This value is used to calculate the pressure drop of the refrigerant when going through
the main pipe. The value should be greater than the real pipe length specified in the above field. If
this field is blank, the default value of 36m is used.
1580 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.3.1.34 Field: Height Difference Between Outdoor Unit and Indoor Units
This numeric field defines the height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node
of the main pipe. This value is used to calculate the piping loss of the refrigerant when going through
the main pipe. The value can be positive, zero, or negative. Positive means outdoor unit is higher
than indoor unit, while negative means outdoor unit is lower than indoor unit.

1.32.3.1.35 Field: Main Pipe Insulation Thickness

This numeric field defines the insulation thickness of the main pipe. This value is used to calculate
the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe. The value should be greater than
0. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.02m is used.

1.32.3.1.36 Field: Main Pipe Insulation Thermal Conductivity

This numeric field defines the thermal conductivity of the main pipe insulation material. This value
is used to calculate the heat loss of the refrigerant when going through the main pipe. The value
should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.032 W/m-K is used.

1.32.3.1.37 Field: Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor

This numeric field defines the electrical power consumed by the crankcase heater in watts for each
compressor. This crankcase heater power is consumed to warm the refrigerant and oil when the
compressor is off when the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature
for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 0. If this field is left blank,
the default value is 33 watts. Crankcase heater electrical consumption is applied only when the
compressor is off or is applied during the off cycle when the compressor is cycling below the Minimum
VRF system Part-Load Ratio. This field is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has
no impact on VRF system performance.

1.32.3.1.38 Field: Number of Compressors

This numeric field defines the number of compressors in the VRF system condensing unit and is used
exclusively to determine the operating characteristics of the crankcase heater. For example, if the
number of compressors is 3, one crankcase heater will operate when the VRF system condensing unit’s
part-load ratio is less than or equal to 0.67 (when the ratio of compressor size to total compressor
capacity input is 0.33) and the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor temperature
for crankcase heater operation. Similarly, two crankcase heaters will operate when the VRF system
condensing unit’s PLR is less than or equal to 0.33 and the outdoor temperature is below the
maximum outdoor temperature for crankcase heater operation. If the VRF system condensing unit
is off, all 3 crankcase heaters will operate if the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor
temperature for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 1. If this field is
left blank, the default value is 2. This field is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has
no impact on VRF system performance.

1.32.3.1.39 Field: Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity

This numeric field defines the size of the first stage compressor to the total compressor capacity and
is used exclusively for calculating crankcase heater energy. If this field and the previous field are
left blank, the default value is 0.5. If this field is left blank and the previous field is not blank, the
compressors are assumed to be equally sized. When the number of compressors is greater than 2,
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1581

the 2nd stage compressor and all additional compressors are assumed to be equally sized. This field
is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on VRF system performance.

1.32.3.1.40 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase

Heater
This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor temperature, in degrees Celsius, below which the
crankcase heater will operate. If this field is left blank, the default value is 5°C. This field is only
used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on VRF system performance.

1.32.3.1.41 Field: Defrost Strategy

This alpha field has two choices: reverse-cycle or resistive. If the reverse-cycle strategy is selected,
the heating cycle is reversed periodically to provide heat to melt frost accumulated on the outdoor
coil. If a resistive defrost strategy is selected, the frost is melted using an electric resistance heater.
If this input field is left blank, the default defrost strategy is reverse-cycle. Defrost can be disabled
by entering a resistive defrost strategy using a timed defrost control, a 0 defrost time period fraction
and a 0 resistive defrost heater capacity in the following inputs fields. This method is used when
the Maximum Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation field value is greater than the
expected minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature simulated in the weather file.

1.32.3.1.42 Field: Defrost Control

This alpha field has two choices: timed or on-demand. If timed control is selected, the defrost
time period is calculated based on a fixed value of compressor runtime whether or not frost has
actually accumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit is in defrost
is entered in the input field “Defrost Time Period Fraction” described below. If on-demand defrost
control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio)
conditions. Regardless of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user
specified outdoor temperature entered in the input field “Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature
for Defrost Operation” described above. If this input field is left blank, the default defrost control
is timed.

1.32.3.1.43 Field: Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature

Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a bi-quadratic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves)
that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) during reverse-cycle defrost periods
as a function of the weighted average wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the indoor terminal
units (variable x) and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (variable y). The output of this curve
is multiplied by the coil capacity, the fractional defrost time period and the runtime fraction of the
heating coil to give the defrost power at the specific temperatures at which the indoor and outdoor
coils are operating. The curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rating point conditions.

1.32.3.1.44 Field: Defrost Time Period Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of compressor runtime when the defrost cycle is active. For
example, if the defrost cycle is active for 3.5 minutes for every 60 minutes of compressor runtime,
then the user should enter 3.5/60 = 0.058333. The value for this input field must be greater than
or equal to 0. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 0.058333.
1582 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.3.1.45 Field: Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity

This numeric field defines the capacity of the resistive defrost heating element in Watts. This input
field is used only when the selected defrost strategy is ‘resistive’ (see input field “Defrost Strategy”
above). The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. If this input field is left
blank, the default value is 0.

1.32.3.1.46 Field: Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Defrost Oper-

ation
This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which outdoor coil defrosting
is disabled. If this input field is left blank, the default value is 5°C. Defrost can be completely
eliminated by selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected outdoor temperature found
in the weather file.

1.32.3.1.47 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of cooling capacity available when the system transitions from
cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. It is common for the cooling capacity
to decrease before the system recovers. The system will recovery according to the time constant
entered in Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Time Constant input field. If the transition period will
not be modeled, this input field must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.48 Field: Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Time Constant

This numeric field defines the cooling capacity time constant, in hours, used to model the time it
takes for the system to change from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating.
Total response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.0
is used. If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity
Fraction field must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.49 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of cooling energy consumed when the system transitions from
cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. It is common for the cooling energy to
drop before the system recovers. If the transition period will not be modeled, this input field must
be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.50 Field: Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Time Constant

This numeric field defines the cooling energy time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes
for the system to transition from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total
response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.0 is used.
If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Fraction field
must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.51 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of heating capacity available when the system changes from
heating only operation to simultaneous heating and cooling. It is common for the heating capacity
to decrease before the system recovers. The system will recovery according to the time constant
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1583

entered in Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Time Constant input field. If the transition period will
not be modeled, this input field must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.52 Field: Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Time Constant

This numeric field defines the heating capacity time constant, in hours, used to model the time it
takes for the system to transition from heating only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating.
Total response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.0
is used. If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity
Fraction field must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.53 Field: Initial Heat Recovery Heating Energy Fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of heating energy consumed when the system changes from
heating only operation to simultaneous heating and cooling. It is common for the heating energy
to decrease before the system recovers. If the transition period will not be modeled, this input field
must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.54 Field: Heat Recovery Heating Energy Time Constant

This numeric field defines the heating energy time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes
for the system to change from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total
response time is defined as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.0 is used.
If the transition period will not be modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Heating Energy Fraction field
must be set to 1.

1.32.3.1.55 Field: Compressor maximum delta Pressure

This numeric field defines the maximum pressure increase that the compressor can provide. The
value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 4,500,000 Pa is used.

1.32.3.1.56 Field: Compressor Inverter Efficiency

This numeric field defines the efficiency of compressor inverter. It is the ratio between the output
of Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve and the actual compressor power
consumption. The value should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.95 is
used.

1.32.3.1.57 Field: Compressor Evaporative Capacity Correction Factor

This numeric field defines the evaporative capacity difference because of system configuration dif-
ference between test bed and real system. It is the ratio between output of Evaporative Capacity
Multiplier Function of Temperature Curve and the actual system evaporative capacity. The value
should be greater than 0. If this field is blank, the default value of 1 is used.

1.32.3.1.58 Field: Number of Compressor Loading Index Entries

This numeric field defines the number of compressor loading index entries. Loading index specifies
the VRF operational modes at various load conditions. In a single compressor system, loading index
reflects the compressor speed. The model requires at least two loading indices. The first index
represents the minimal capacity operation, while the last index represents full capacity operation.
1584 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.32.3.1.59 Field: Compressor Speed at Loading Index i

This numeric field defines the compressor speed at the i-th loading index. The value must be greater
than 0.

1.32.3.1.60 Field: Loading Index i Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of

Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a BiQuadratic curve for the VRF operational mode corresponding
to the i-th loading index. It parameterizes the variation of VRF evaporating capacity as a function
of operating conditions, i.e., evaporating and condensing temperatures. The output of this curve is
a dimensionless multiplier to be applied on the rated evaporative capacity to calculate the actual
capacity.

1.32.3.1.61 Field: Loading Index i Compressor Power Multiplier Function of

Temperature Curve Name
This alpha field defines the name of a BiQuadratic curve for the VRF operational mode corresponding
to the i-th loading index. It parameterizes the variation of compressor power as a function of
operating conditions, i.e., evaporating and condensing temperatures. The output of this curve is
a dimensionless multiplier to be applied on the rated compressor power to calculate the actual
compressor power.
Following is an example input for a AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow:FluidTemperatureControl
system.
Following is an example input for a AirConditioner: VariableRefrigerantFlow system.

AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow : FluidTemperatureControl :HR ,

VRF Heat Recovery , !- Name
VRFCondAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
VRF HR TU List , !- Zone Terminal Unit List Name
R410A , !- Refrigerant Type
autosize , !- Rated Evaporative Capacity {W}
0.214 , !- Rated Compressor Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {W/W}
-6, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Only Mode {C}
43, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Cooling Only Mode {C}
-20, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Only Mode {C}
26, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heating Only Mode {C}
-20, !- Minimum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode {C}
26, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode {C}
VariableTemp , !- Refrigerant Temperature Control Algorithm for Indoor Unit
, !- Reference Evaporating Temperature for Indoor Unit {C}
, !- Reference Condensing Temperature for Indoor Unit {C}
5, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit {C}
14, !- Variable Evaporating Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit {C}
36, !- Variable Condensing Temperature Minimum for Indoor Unit {C}
46, !- Variable Condensing Temperature Maximum for Indoor Unit {C}
3, !- Outdoor Unit Evaporator Reference Superheating {C}
3, !- Outdoor Unit Condenser Reference Subcooling {C}
0.28, !- Outdoor Unit Evaporator Rated Bypass Factor
0.05, !- Outdoor Unit Condenser Rated Bypass Factor
, !- Difference between Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature and Outdoor
Air Temperature in Heat Recovery Mode {C}
0.3, !- Outdoor Unit Heat Exchanger Capacity Ratio
2.67E-2, !- Outdoor Unit Fan Power Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {W/W}
1.13E-4, !- Outdoor Unit Fan Flow Rate Per Unit of Rated Evaporative Capacity {m3
/s-W}
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Outdoor Unit Evaporating Temperature Function of Superheating Curve
Name
OUCondTempCurve , !- Outdoor Unit Condensing Temperature Function of Subcooling Curve Name
0.0349 , !- Diameter of Main Pipe for Suction Gas {m}
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1585

0.0286 , !- Diameter of Main Pipe for Discharge Gas {m}

30, !- Length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first branch joint
{m}
36, !- Equivalent length of main pipe connecting outdoor unit to the first
branch joint {m}
5, !- Height difference between the outdoor unit node and indoor unit node
of the main pipe {m}
0.02, !- Insulation thickness of the main pipe {m}
0.032 , !- Thermal conductivity of the main pipe insulation material {W/m-K}
33, !- Crankcase Heater Power per Compressor {W}
3, !- Number of Compressors
0.33, !- Ratio of Compressor Size to Total Compressor Capacity
7, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater {C}
, !- Defrost Strategy
, !- Defrost Control
, !- Defrost Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function of Temperature Curve
Name
, !- Defrost Time Period Fraction
, !- Resistive Defrost Heater Capacity {W}
, !- Maximum Outdoor Dry -bulb Temperature for Defrost Operation {C}
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Fraction {W/W}
, !- Heat Recovery Cooling Capacity Time Constant {hr}
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Fraction {W/W}
, !- Heat Recovery Cooling Energy Time Constant {hr}
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Fraction {W/W}
, !- Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Time Constant {hr}
, !- Initial Heat Recovery Heating Energy Fraction {W/W}
, !- Heat Recovery Heating Energy Time Constant {hr}
4500000 , !- Compressor maximum delta Pressure {Pa}
0.95, !- Compressor Inverter Efficiency
, !- Compressor Evaporative Capacity Correction Factor
3, !- Number of Compressor Loading Index Entries
1500, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 1 {rev/min}
MinSpdCooling , !- Loading Index 1 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
MinSpdPower , !- Loading Index 1 Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
3600, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 2 {rev/min}
Spd1Cooling , !- Loading Index 2 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
Spd1Power , !- Loading Index 2 Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name
6000, !- Compressor Speed at Loading Index 3 {rev/min}
Spd2Cooling , !- Loading Index 3 Evaporative Capacity Multiplier Function of
Temperature Curve Name
Spd2Power; !- Loading Index 3 Compressor Power Multiplier Function of Temperature
Curve Name

Curve:Quadratic ,
OUEvapTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
6.05E-1, !- Coefficient2 x
2.50E-2, !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
15, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Quadratic ,
OUCondTempCurve , !- Name
0, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.91, !- Coefficient2 x
1.180 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
0, !- Minimum Value of x
5, !- Maximum Value of x
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
1586 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Temperature; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdCooling , !- Name
3.19E-01, !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.26E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-2.15E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.20E-02, !- Coefficient4 y
1.05E-04, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-8.66E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
MinSpdPower , !- Name
8.79E-02 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-1.72E-04, !- Coefficient2 x
6.93E-05 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
-3.38E-05, !- Coefficient4 y
-8.10E-06, !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.04E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Cooling , !- Name
8.12E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-4.23E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-4.11E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.97E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.67E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-2.23E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd1Power , !- Name
3.26E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-2.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
1.42E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
2.82E-03 , !- Coefficient4 y
2.86E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.50E-05, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
1.32. GROUP – VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW EQUIPMENT 1587

Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X

Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Cooling , !- Name
1.32E+00 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-6.20E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
-7.10E-05, !- Coefficient3 x**2
4.89E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
4.59E-04 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-3.67E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

Curve:Biquadratic ,
Spd2Power , !- Name
6.56E-01 , !- Coefficient1 Constant
-3.71E-03, !- Coefficient2 x
2.07E-04 , !- Coefficient3 x**2
1.05E-02 , !- Coefficient4 y
7.36E-05 , !- Coefficient5 y**2
-1.57E-04, !- Coefficient6 x*y
15, !- Minimum Value of x
65, !- Maximum Value of x
-30, !- Minimum Value of y
15, !- Maximum Value of y
, !- Minimum Curve Output
, !- Maximum Curve Output
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for X
Temperature , !- Input Unit Type for Y
Dimensionless; !- Output Unit Type

1.32.4 ZoneTerminalUnitList
The zone terminal unit list defines the names of the terminal units connected to a single variable
refrigerant flow air-conditioning system. The zone terminal unit list is used exclusively in the variable
refrigerant flow (VRF) air conditioner object (ref: AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow). Up to
20 terminal units may be connected to a single VRF outdoor condensing unit. This list is extensible
if additional indoor terminal units are required. The name of this zone terminal unit list object
is then input into the corresponding variable refrigerant flow air conditioner object. The following
figure demonstrates this concept.

1.32.4.1 Inputs

1.32.4.1.1 Field: Zone Terminal List Name

This alpha field specifies the name of the zone terminal unit list. This name must be specified in the
AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow object.

1.32.4.1.2 Field: Zone Terminal Unit Name <x>

1588 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.161: Zone Terminal Unit List Diagram

This alpha field defines the name of the zone terminal unit used in a variable refrigerant
air conditioner. The zone terminal unit must be connected to a zone using the Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections object. The terminal unit air inlet node is the same name as
a zone exhaust node. The terminal unit air outlet node is the same name as a zone inlet node. This
object is extensible, so additional fields of this type can be added to the end of this object.
Following is an example input for a ZoneTerminalUnitList object.

ZoneTerminalUnitList ,
VRF Heat Pump TU List , !- Zone Terminal Unit List Name
TU3 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 1
TU4 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 2
TU1 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 3
TU2 , !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 4
TU5; !- Zone Terminal Unit Name 5

1.33 Group – Radiative / Convective Units

This section describes the radiative/convective zone equipment units. The following units are
included in this section:

– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1589

– ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water
– ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
– ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
– ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow
– ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
– ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow

1.33.1 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water
The objective of this model is to calculate the convective and radiant heat transfer from water
baseboard heaters to the people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can
take into account the radiant heat transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal
comfort predictions within the space. The radiant heat gains are distributed to the surfaces by
fractions defined by user input.

1.33.1.1 Inputs

1.33.1.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a hot water baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.1.1.2 Field: Design Object

The name of the object that holds design data for this instance of hot water baseboard heater unit.
Multiple input data values are taken from this object.

1.33.1.1.3 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the hot water baseboard heater unit
can run during a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the unit must be off
for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unit is available to operate during that
time period. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.1.1.4 Field: Inlet Node Name

This field is the name of the hot water inlet node for the baseboard heater.

1.33.1.1.5 Field: Outlet Node Name

This field is the name of the hot water outlet node for the baseboard heater.

1.33.1.1.6 Field: Rated Average Water Temperature

This field is the rated average water temperature for the baseboard heater which is published in the
manufacturer’s literature in degree Celsius. It typically ranges from 65.56°C to 115.36°C in the I
= B = R rating document while the lowest allowable temperature is 32.22°C. The default value is
87.78°C. If the user does not enter this field, the default value is assumed.
1590 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.1.1.7 Field: Rated Water Mass Flow Rate

This field is the rated standard water flow rate in kg/s which is published as part of the manufacturer’s
literature. It is used by the manufacturers when determining the rated capacity (see next field). The
default value is 0.063kg/s. If it is blank or zero, the default values is assumed.

1.33.1.1.8 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is the radiant-convective water baseboard rated capacity in watts at a rated water mass flow
rate (see input field Rated Mass Flow Rate). Almost all publications from manufacturers indicate
it as W/m (Btuh per linear foot). The user thus must multiply it by the active length of the unit.
The active length is available in the literature. Manufacturers are required to publish the difference
between active and total length of the unit (I = B = R rating for boilers baseboard radiation, 2009).If
it is blank or zero, autosizing is assumed. Design day sizing run must be specified for autosizing.

1.33.1.1.9 Field: Maximum Water Flow Rate

This field is the maximum water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec. It can be autosized by EnergyPlus.

1.33.1.1.10 Field Set: Surface Name, Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface

The following two items are repeated up to a maximum of 20 surface/fraction pairs. At least one
surface/fraction pair must appear in an input file. In other words, at least one surface must be
identified as a recipient of radiant energy from the baseboard heater.

1.33.1.1.11 Field: Surface <x> Name

This field is the name of the first surface to which radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is
distributed. Used in conjunction with the next field, it helps to define the distribution of the radiant
energy on the surfaces within the zone. Note that up to 20 pairs of surface names and corresponding
fractions may be entered for a single radiant heater system.

1.33.1.1.12 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface <x>

This field is paired with the preceding surface name (previous field) to define the fraction of radiant
heat transfer leaving the baseboard heater that is incident on a particular surface. Users should take
into account the directionality of baseboard heaters and their location when defining the value for
this input field.
Note on Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People and to Surfaces
The radiant energy from the baseboard heater is defined by the total energy input to the baseboard
heater from the water loop times the fraction radiant field shown above. This radiant energy is
distributed to surfaces and people using the surface and fraction pairs and the fraction to people
input by the user. These fractions to people and surfaces must add up to 1.0. In other words, in an
input file, the following relation should be maintained by the user input:

X
F ractionIndicentOnP eople + F ractionT oSurf aces = 1 (1.137)

An example IDF for the water baseboard is shown below.

1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1591

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water ,
SPACE4 -1 Baseboard , !- Name
SPACE4 -1 Baseboard Design , !- Design Object Name
ReheatCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE4 -1 Zone Coil Water In Node , !- Inlet Node Name
SPACE4 -1 Zone Coil Water Out Node , !- Outlet Node Name
82.22 , !- Rated Average Water Temperature
0.063 , !- Rated Water Mass Flow Rate
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity
autosize , !- Maximum Water Flow Rate
LEFT -1, !- Surface 1 Name
0.4, !- fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 1
C4 -1, !- Surface 2 Name
0.2, !- fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 2
SB45 , !- Surface 3 Name
0.1; !- fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 3
SB23 , !- Surface 4 Name
0.1, !- fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 4
SB25 , !- Surface 5 Name
0.1, !- fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 5
WR -1, !- Surface 6 Name
0.1; !- fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 6

1.33.1.2 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water:Design

This object contains the design fields for ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water. The in-
formation from one ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water:Design object can be shared
with several ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water objects.

1.33.1.2.1 Field: Design Object Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a hot water baseboard heater unit design object.
Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.1.2.2 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity or the method for scalable sizing.
Input allowed is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeat-
ingCapacity. If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. HeatingDesignCa-
pacity means user specifies the magnitude of heating capacity or the program calculates the design
heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the
design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the
zone served by the radiant baseboard unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means the program
calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design heating
capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.33.1.2.3 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the rated heating capacity per unit floor area of radiant-convective water baseboard unit in
m3/s-m2. This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPer-
FloorArea. The program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the
1592 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

radiant baseboard unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This
field may be left blank.

1.33.1.2.4 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity of radiant-convective water
baseboard. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is FractionO-
fAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design autosized
heating capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This field may
be left blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.1.2.5 Field: Convergence Tolerance

This field is the control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the
unit output to the zone demand. For hot water baseboards, the model must be numerically inverted
to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the
numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:

|(Qbb,out − QZoneLoad )|
≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.138)
QZoneLoad

The default is 0.001.

1.33.1.2.6 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the baseboard heater is actually transferred
to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total
power that is modeled as radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard
heater is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields. Note that the sum
of the fractions in the remaining fields (people and surfaces) must equal 1.0 so that all the radiant
power is distributed properly. For more information on the specification of this parameter, please
see the Engineering Reference for EnergyPlus.

1.33.1.2.7 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People

This field specifies the fraction of radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the baseboard
heater that is incident directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted
thermal comfort of the zone occupants. Note that although this energy is “radiant” it is actually
modeled in the zone heat balance as convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assumption
here is that most radiant energy falling on people will most likely be rereleased to the zone air by
convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it maintains the overall energy balance.
An example IDF for the water baseboard design object is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water:Design ,
SPACE2 -1 Baseboard Design , !- Design Object Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity
0.001 , !- Convergence Tolerance
0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0.3; !- Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1593

1.33.1.3 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]

1.33.1.3.1 Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

This is the actual convective heat addition rate of the baseboard to the zone in Watts. This value
includes the heat convected to the zone air from the baseboard unit, the heat radiated to people
in the zone from the baseboard unit, and the additional convection from surfaces within the zone
that have been heated by radiation from the baseboard unit. This value will be different from (and
almost always more than) the next field (convective heating rate).

1.33.1.3.2 Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which convective heat addition is transferred from the baseboard to the
zone in Watts. This field in combination with the baseboard radiant heating rate (the next field)
equals the total heat addition to the space by the baseboard unit.

1.33.1.3.3 Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which radiant heat addition is transferred from the baseboard to the
people and the surfaces within the zone in Watts. This field in combination with the baseboard con-
vective heating rate (the previous field) equals the total heat addition to the space by the baseboard
unit.

1.33.1.3.4 Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

This is the actual, total convective energy transferred directly and indirectly from the baseboard to
the zone it is serving in Joules. Direct convective heat transfer includes the convective portion of
the baseboard unit. Indirect convective heat transfer includes heat radiated to people that is then
convected to the zone air and heat that is radiated to the surfaces and then convected to the zone
air.

1.33.1.3.5 Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of convective energy transferred from the baseboard directly to the
zone air in Joules.

1.33.1.3.6 Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of radiant energy transferred from the baseboard to the zone in Joules.
1594 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.1.3.7 Baseboard Hot Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the water mass flow rate at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.1.3.8 Baseboard Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the air mass flow rate at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.1.3.9 Baseboard Water Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the water temperatures at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.1.3.10 Baseboard Water Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the water temperatures at the outlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.1.3.11 Baseboard Air Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the air temperatures at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.1.3.12 Baseboard Air Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the air temperatures at the outlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.2 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam
The objective of this model is to calculate the convective and radiant heat transfer from steam
baseboard heaters to the people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can
take into account the radiant heat transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal
comfort predictions within the space. The radiant heat gains are distributed to the surfaces by
fractions defined by the user. Users are requested to provide degree of sub cooling to estimate the
outlet conditions of the condensate.

1.33.2.1 Inputs

1.33.2.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a steam baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.2.1.2 Field: Design Object Name

The name of the object that holds design data for this instance of steam baseboard heater unit.
Multiple input data values is taken from this object.

1.33.2.1.3 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the steam baseboard heater unit can
run duringhot water a given time period. A schedule value equal to 0 denotes that the unit must be
off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes that the unit is available to operate during
that time period. If this field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1595

1.33.2.1.4 Field: Inlet Node Name

This field is the name of the steam inlet node for the baseboard heater.

1.33.2.1.5 Field: Outlet Node Name

This field is the name of the steam outlet node for the baseboard heater.

1.33.2.1.6 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the a radiant/convective steam baseboard unit heating capacity in watts. This field
can be autosized by EnergyPlus. When the Heating Design Capacity Method is HeatingDesignCa-
pacity and this input is blank, autosizing is assumed. Design day sizing run must be specified.

1.33.2.1.7 Field: Degree of SubCooling

This field is the temperature drop of the condensate in the coil of the baseboard heater. The steam
condensates in the coil and changes the phase to the water, giving up the latent heat of steam to
the air in the steam to air heat exchanger. The condensate due to the phase change then cools by
certain degree in the coil, so that this amount of heat is added to the zone. The minimum value is
1.0° Celsius and default is 5.0° Celsius.

1.33.2.1.8 Field: Maximum Steam Flow Rate

This field is the maximum steam volumetric flow rate in m3 /s through the steam baseboard
heater. The steam volumetric flow rate is calculated at 100C and 101325 Pa. It can be autosized
by EnergyPlus.

1.33.2.1.9 Field Set: Surface Name, Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface

The following two items are repeated up to a maximum of 20 surface/fraction pairs. At least one
surface/fraction pair must appear in an input file. In other words, at least one surface must be
identified as a recipient of radiant energy from the baseboard heater.

1.33.2.1.10 Field: Surface <x> Name

This field is the name of the first surface to which radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is
distributed. Used in conjunction with the next field, it helps to define the distribution of the radiant
energy on the surfaces within the zone. Note that up to 20 pairs of surface names and corresponding
fractions may be entered for a single radiant heater system.

1.33.2.1.11 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface <x>

This field is paired with the preceding surface name (previous field) to define the fraction of radiant
heat transfer leaving the baseboard heater that is incident on a particular surface. Users should take
into account the directionality of baseboard heaters and their location when defining the value for
this input field.
Note on Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People and to Surfaces
The radiant energy from the baseboard heater is defined by the total energy input to the baseboard
heater from the steam loop times the fraction radiant field shown above. This radiant energy is
distributed to surfaces and people using the surface and fraction pairs and the fraction to people
1596 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

input by the user. These fractions to people and surfaces must add up to 1.0. In other words, in an
input file, the following relation should be maintained by the user input:

X
F ractionIndicentOnP eople + F ractionT oSurf aces = 1 (1.139)

An example IDF for the steam baseboard is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam ,
SPACE1 -1 Baseboard , !- Name
SPACE1 -1 Baseboard Design , !- Design Object Name
REHEATCOILAVAILSCHED , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE1 -1 Reheat Coil Steam Inlet , !- Inlet Node Name
SPACE1 -1 Reheat Coil Steam Outlet , !- Outlet Node Name
Autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity
5, !- Degree of SubCooling
autosize , !- Maximum Steam Flow Rate
FRONT -1, !- Surface 1 Name
0.4, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 1
C1 -1, !- Surface 2 Name
0.2, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 2
SB15 , !- Surface 3 Name
0.1; !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 3
Floor , !- Surface 4 Name
0.1; !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to
surface 4

1.33.2.2 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam:Design

This object contains the design fields for ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam. The

information from one ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam:Design object can be shared
with several ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam objects.

1.33.2.2.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a steam baseboard heater unit design object. Any
reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.2.2.2 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed
is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity.
If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. HeatingDesignCapacity means
user specifies the magnitude of maximum heating capacity or the program calculates the maximum
design heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates
the design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the
zone served by the radiant baseboard unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means the program
calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design heating
capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1597

1.33.2.2.3 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of radiant/convective steam baseboard.
This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. The
program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the steam baseboard
unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This field may be left
blank.

1.33.2.2.4 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity of a radiant/convective
steam baseboard unit. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design
autosized heat capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This
field may be left blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.2.2.5 Field: Convergence Tolerance

This field is the control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching
the unit output to the zone demand. For steam baseboards, the model must be numerically inverted
to obtain a specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the
numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:

|(Qbb,out − QZoneLoad )|
≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.140)
QZoneLoad

The default is 0.001.

1.33.2.2.6 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the baseboard heater is actually transferred
to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total
power that is modeled as radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard
heater is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields. Note that the sum
of the fractions in the remaining fields (people and surfaces) must equal 1.0 so that all the radiant
power is distributed properly.

1.33.2.2.7 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People

This field specifies the fraction of radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the baseboard
heater that is incident directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted
thermal comfort of the zone occupants. Note that although this energy is “radiant” it is actually
modeled in the zone heat balance as convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assumption
here is that most radiant energy falling on people will most likely be rereleased to the zone air by
convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it maintains the overall energy balance.
An example IDF for the steam baseboard design object is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Steam:Design ,
SPACE1 -1 Baseboard Design , !- Design Object Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity
1598 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.001 , !- Convergence Tolerance

0.3, !- Fraction Radiant
0.3; !- Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People

1.33.2.3 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Steam Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Steam Inlet temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Steam Outlet temperature [C]

1.33.2.3.1 Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

This is the actual convective heat addition rate of the baseboard to the zone in Watts. This value
includes the heat convected to the zone air from the baseboard unit, the heat radiated to people
in the zone from the baseboard unit, and the additional convection from surfaces within the zone
that have been heated by radiation from the baseboard unit. This value will be different from (and
almost always more than) the next field.

1.33.2.3.2 Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which convective heat addition is transferred from the baseboard to the
zone in Watts. This field in combination with the baseboard radiant heating rate (the next field)
equals the total heat addition to the space by the baseboard unit.

1.33.2.3.3 Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which radiant heat addition is transferred from the baseboard to the
people and the surfaces within the zone in Watts. This field in combination with the baseboard con-
vective heating rate (the previous field) equals the total heat addition to the space by the baseboard
unit.

1.33.2.3.4 Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

This is the actual, total convective energy transferred directly and indirectly from the baseboard to
the zone it is serving in Joules. Direct convective heat transfer includes the convective portion of
the baseboard unit. Indirect convective heat transfer includes heat radiated to people that is then
convected to the zone air and heat that is radiated to the surfaces and then convected to the zone
air.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1599

1.33.2.3.5 Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of convective energy transferred from the baseboard directly to the
zone air in Joules.

1.33.2.3.6 Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of radiant energy transferred from the baseboard to the zone in Joules.

1.33.2.3.7 Baseboard Steam Energy [J]

1.33.2.3.8 Baseboard Steam Rate [W]

These are the total heat addition energy and rate of steam used by the baseboard to heat the zone
it is serving in Joules and Watts.

1.33.2.3.9 Baseboard Steam Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the steam mass flow rate at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.2.3.10 Baseboard Steam Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the steam temperatures at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.2.3.11 Baseboard Steam Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the steam temperatures at the outlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.3 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric
The electric baseboard heater is a component in the zone equipment simulation. Heat from this
device is radiated to people and surfaces and also convected to the surrounding air. The electric
baseboard model includes the impact of the radiant heat addition to people and surfaces so that the
thermal comfort and surface heat balances are impacted. The component is controlled to meet any
remaining zone load not met by other equipment baseboard operates to meet the remaining zone
load and the total electric consumption is calculated by dividing by the efficiency of the baseboard.

1.33.3.1 Inputs

1.33.3.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of an electric baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.3.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the electric baseboard heater unit
can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates
that the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used)
denotes that the unit will be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of
1 for all time periods.
1600 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.3.1.3 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed
is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity.
If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. HeatingDesignCapacity means
user specifies the magnitude of maximum or nominal heating capacity or the program calculates the
maximum or nominal design heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means
the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area
and floor area of the zone served by the radiant baseboard unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity
means the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-
sized design heating capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.33.3.1.4 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the radiant-convective electric baseboard unit nominal heating capacity in watts.
This field can be autosized by EnergyPlus. This input field is autosizable. When the Heating Design
Capacity Method is HeatingDesignCapacity and this input is blank, autosizing is assumed. Design
day sizing run must be specified.

1.33.3.1.5 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of radiant/convective electric baseboard.
This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. The
program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the radiant baseboard
unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This field may be left
blank.

1.33.3.1.6 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity for radiant/convective
electric baseboard. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is Frac-
tionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design au-
tosized heat capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This field
may be left blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.3.1.7 Field: Efficiency

This is the overall electrical efficiency of the electric baseboard unit. The zone load met by this unit
is divided by the electrical efficiency to obtain the total electric energy used.

1.33.3.1.8 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the baseboard heater is actually transferred
to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total
power that is modeled as radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard
heater is distributed to people and specific surfaces using the remaining fields. Note that the sum
of the fractions in the remaining fields (people and surfaces) must equal 1.0 so that all the radiant
power is distributed properly.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1601

1.33.3.1.9 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People

This field specifies the fraction of the radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the baseboard
heater that is incident directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted
thermal comfort of the zone occupants. Note that although this energy is “radiant” it is actually
modeled in the zone heat balance as a convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assump-
tion here is that radiant energy falling on people will most likely be rereleased to the zone air by
convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it maintains the overall energy balance.

1.33.3.1.10 Field Set: Surface Name, Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface

The following two items are repeated up to a maximum of 20 surface/fraction pairs. At least one
surface/fraction pair must appear in an input file. In other words, at least one surface must be
identified as a recipient of radiant energy from the baseboard heater.

1.33.3.1.11 Field Set: Surface <x> Name

This field is the name of the first surface to which radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is
distributed. Used in conjunction with the next field, it helps to define the distribution of the radiant
energy on the surfaces within the zone. Note that up to 20 pairs of surface names and corresponding
fractions may be entered for a single radiant heater system.

1.33.3.1.12 Field Set: Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface <x>

This field is paired with the preceding surface name (previous field) to define the fraction of radiant
heat transfer leaving the baseboard heater that is incident on a particular surface. Users should take
into account the directionality of baseboard heaters and their location when defining the value for
this input field.
Note on Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People and to Surfaces
The radiant energy from the baseboard heater is defined by the total energy input to the baseboard
heater times the fraction radiant field shown above. This radiant energy is distributed to surfaces
and people using the surface and fraction pairs and the fraction to people input by the user. These
fractions to people and surfaces must add up to 1.0. In other words, in an input file, the following
relation should be maintained by the user input:
X
F ractionIndicentOnP eople + F ractionT oSurf aces = 1 (1.141)

Below is an example input for an Electric Baseboard Heater.

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Electric ,
Baseboard 1, !- Name
BB Schedule , !- Availability Schedule Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
5000, !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
0.97, !- Efficiency of the baseboard
0.3, !- Fraction radiant
0.3, !- Fraction of radiant energy that is incident directly on people
EastWall , !- Surface 1 name
0.3, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 1
WestWall , !- Surface 2 name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 2
NorthWall , !- Surface 3 name
1602 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 3

SouthWall , !- Surface 4 name
0.1, !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 4
Ceiling , !- Surface 5 name
0.1; !- Fraction of radiant energy from heater distributed to surface 5

1.33.3.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Meter,Heating:Electricity[J]

1.33.3.2.1 Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

This is the actual convective heat addition rate of the baseboard to the zone in Watts. This value
includes the heat convected to the zone air from the baseboard unit, the heat radiated to people
in the zone from the baseboard unit, and the additional convection from surfaces within the zone
that have been heated by radiation from the baseboard unit. This value will be different from (and
almost always more than) the next field.

1.33.3.2.2 Baseboard Convective Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which convective heat addition is transferred from the baseboard to the
zone in Watts. This field in combination with the baseboard radiant heating rate (the next field)
equals the total heat addition to the space by the baseboard unit.

1.33.3.2.3 Baseboard Radiant Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which radiant heat addition is transferred from the baseboard to the
people and the surfaces within the zone in Watts. This field in combination with the baseboard con-
vective heating rate (the previous field) equals the total heat addition to the space by the baseboard
unit.

1.33.3.2.4 Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electric energy used by the baseboard in Joules.

1.33.3.2.5 Baseboard Electricity Rate [J]

This is the electric power required by the baseboard to heat the zone it is serving in Watts
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1603

1.33.3.2.6 Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

This is the actual convective energy transferred directly and indirectly from the baseboard heater
to the zone it is serving in Joules. Direct convective heat transfer includes the convective portion of
the baseboard unit. Indirect convective heat transfer includes heat radiated to people that is then
convected to the zone air and heat that is radiated to the surfaces and then convected to the zone
air.

1.33.3.2.7 Baseboard Radiant Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of radiant energy transferred from the baseboard to the zone in Joules.

1.33.3.2.8 Baseboard Convective Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of convective energy transferred from the baseboard directly to the
zone air in Joules.

1.33.4 ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel:RadiantConvective:Water
The radiant/convective cooling panel is a type of zone equipment. Chilled water is supplied by
the plant and circulated through the panel. Through radiation and convective heat transfer, the
panel absorbs energy contained within the zone to provide cooling. Control of the panel is achieved
using the methodology used for low temperature radiant systems—a piecewise linear control profile
that varies the flow rate to the panel based on a control parameter defined by the user. This is
different than being controlled to meet any remaining load like the air-based systems. However,
due to the radiant nature of these devices, it is not possible to control precisely on a zone air-based
load since this will result in overcooling at the next time step. Despite this, in addition to the
piecewise linear controls that have been used with low temperature radiant systems in the past, two
new controls are available for this simple model: one that varies the convective output of the system
to meet the remaining zone load and one that varies the total convective output of the system to
meet the remaining zone load. In these two zone load control types, the user must enter the typical
zone thermostat object to replace the setpoint and throttling range input in this object. In this
component, control is accomplished by throttling the chilled water flow to the device. Capacity
rating information is required as input and is used to calculate a UA value of the unit. The unit
is connected to a chilled water loop (demand side) with an inlet and outlet node. The input data
dictionary definition of the unit is as follows.

1.33.4.1 Inputs

1.33.4.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for this instance of a radiant cooling panel. Any reference to this unit
by another object will use this name.

1.33.4.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the radiant cooling panel can run
during a given hour. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can
be on during the hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is
off for the hour.
1604 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.4.1.3 Field: Inlet Node Name

The name of the water inlet node for the radiant cooling panel.

1.33.4.1.4 Field: Outlet Node Name

The name of the water outlet node for the radiant cooling panel.

1.33.4.1.5 Field: Rated Inlet Water Temperature

This field is the inlet temperature to the panel under conditions used to rate the capacity of the
panel. This value along with the other rating condition parameters is used to calculate the overall
heat transfer coefficient (U-Value) that will be used to characterize the heat transfer between the
water being circulated through the panel and the air in the zone. The default value is 5°C (41°F).

1.33.4.1.6 Field: Rated Space Temperature

This field is the combined space temperature (air and surface) that the panel is exposed to during
the rating process to obtain a rated capacity. This value along with the other rated conditions is
used to calculate the overall heat transfer coefficient (U-Value) that will be used to characterize the
heat transfer between the water being circulated through the panel and the air in the zone. The
default value is 24°C (75.2°F).

1.33.4.1.7 Field: Rated Water Mass Flow Rate

This field is the rated standard water flow rate in kg/s that was used to obtain the design cooling
capacity under rated temperature conditions. This value along with the rated space and water inlet
temperatures as well as the cooling capacity (whether autosized or entered by the user) is used to
calculate the overall heat transfer coefficient (U-Value) that will be used to characterize the heat
transfer between the water being circulated through the panel and the air in the space. Users should
note that if this value is too low in comparison to the cooling design capacity that the program
will produce an error message and the user must adjust one of these two parameters or the rated
temperature values. The default value is 0.063kg/s (1 gpm). If it is blank or zero, the default value
is assumed.

1.33.4.1.8 Field: Cooling Design Capacity Method

This field defines the method used to determine the cooling design capacity for scalable sizing.
The inputs that are allowed for this field include: CoolingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, or
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. If this input field is left blank, then the CoolingDesignCapacity
method is assumed to be valid for this unit. CoolingDesignCapacity means the user specifies the
magnitude of maximum or nominal cooling capacity or the program calculates the maximum or
nominal design cooling capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program
calculates the design cooling capacity from the user specified cooling capacity per floor area and the
floor area of the zone served by the cooling panel unit. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity means
the program calculates the design cooling capacity from a user specified fraction and the auto-sized
design cooling capacity.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1605

1.33.4.1.9 Field: Cooling Design Capacity

This field contains the cooling panel unit nominal cooling capacity in Watts at the rated flow rate of
water through the unit (see Rated Water Mass Flow Rate field above). This field can be autosized by
EnergyPlus. When the Cooling Design Capacity Method is CoolingDesignCapacity and this input
is blank, autosizing is assumed. A design day sizing run must be specified for this to be autosized.

1.33.4.1.10 Field: Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area

This field is used to enter the cooling capacity per unit floor area in W/m2 for the cooling panel unit.
This field is a required field when the Cooling Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea.
The program calculates the cooling capacity from floor area of the zone served by the cooling panel
unit and the cooling capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This field may be left
blank.

1.33.4.1.11 Field: Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity

This field is used to enter the cooling capacity as a fraction of the autosized cooling capacity for the
cooling panel. This input field is required when the Cooling Design Capacity Method is FractionO-
fAutosizedCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the cooling capacity from the design autosized
cooling capacity and the user specified fraction. A design day sizing run must be specified. This
field may be left blank, and the default value is 1.0.

1.33.4.1.12 Field: Maximum Chilled Water Flow Rate

This field specifies the maximum chilled water volumetric flow rate in m3/sec. This field can also
be autosized.

1.33.4.1.13 Field: Control Type

This field specifies two different types of control categories: temperature or zone load. For one
of the temperature based controls, this field along with the throttling range and setpoint schedules
determines how the user wishes to control the radiant cooling panel. The temperature denoted in the
setpoint schedule can refer to one of five different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the
zone mean radiant temperature, the zone operative temperature, the outdoor dry-bulb temperature,
or the outdoor wet-bulb temperature. The current field controls the choice of temperature. For
controls that are based more on zone load, the user can make one of two choices based on whether
the zone load is met by only the convective output of the unit or the total output of the unit.
These zone load controls will not perform as precisely as air-based systems. The convective zone
load control will come close to meeting the current setpoint temperature (defined by the typical
zone thermostat input by the user) since the convective output of the unit will be set to match
the remaining zone load. However, in the long run, this will likely overcool the space since radiant
energy is being absorbed by surfaces and this will impact the zone conditions at later time steps.
The total zone load control will likely undercool the space in the short term since the total output
(radiant and convective) of the unit will be set to meet the remaining zone load. However, this will
not fully impact the zone air temperature immediately since some of the energy is being absorbed
from surfaces rather than the zone air. The user must select from the following options:

– MeanAirTemperature
– MeanRadiantTemperature
– OperativeTemperature
1606 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
– OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
– ZoneConvectiveLoad
– ZoneTotalLoad

Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and
Mean Radiant Temperature. If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control
is assumed by EnergyPlus. See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below
for more information.

1.33.4.1.14 Field: Cooling Control Throttling Range

This field specifies the range of temperature in degrees Celsuis over which the radiant cooling panel
throttles from zero flow rate up to the maximum defined by the maximum chilled water flow rate field
described above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the control temperature
to define the response of the system to various zone conditions. The cooling control temperature
schedule specifies the “setpoint” temperature where the flow rate to the system is at half of the
maximum flow rate. For example, if the cooling control temperature setpoint is currently 25 C and
the cooling throttling range is 2 C, the water flow rate to the radiant system will be zero when the
controlling temperature (MAT, MRT, Operative Temperature, ODB, or OWB; see control type field
above) is at or below 24 C and the maximum flow rate when the controlling temperature is at or
above 26 C. This represents a throttling range of 2 C around the setpoint of 25 C. In between 24 C
and 26 C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied linearly. Note that this field is ignored when
the control type is either ZoneLoadConvective or ZoneLoadTotal. For the two zone load controls, the
user must use a typical zone thermostat and the system output will be dependent on the remaining
zone load.

1.33.4.1.15 Field: Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the cooling setpoint or control temperature for the radiant cooling panel in degrees
Celsius. Used in conjunction with the previous field (cooling control throttling range), it will define
whether or not the system is running and the current flow rate. Water flow rate to the system is varied
linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the throttling range and the maximum cooling
flow rate parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will allow different
setpoint temperatures throughout the year for cooling. The control of the radiant cooling panel is
based solely on the cooling control throttling range listed above, the cooling control temperature
schedule, and the control temperature type listed above. The radiant cooling panel will not use any
zone thermostat that might be used by other systems serving the zone in which this radiant cooling
panel resides. Note that this field is ignored when the control type is either ZoneLoadConvective or
ZoneLoadTotal. For the two zone load controls, the user must use a typical zone thermostat and the
system output will be dependent on the remaining zone load.

1.33.4.1.16 Field: Condensation Control Type

Since radiant cooling panels provide a cold surface in what could be a humid zone, there is the
possibility that condensation will occur on the surface of the panel. This is due to the fact that the
surface temperature may drop below the dew-point temperature of the space. When this occurs,
condensation on the surface will occur. Since there is no direct calculation of the surface temperature
of the radiant cooling panel, the condensation check will be made at the inlet water temperature
to the panel. Since the user can utilize the next parameter to adjust the differential between the
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1607

dewpoint temperature and the inlet water temperature, this will allow some flexibility in controlling
when the panel will shutdown to avoid condensation. There are three options for handling potential
condensation: Off, SimpleOff, and VariableOff. This parameter is optional and will default to
SimpleOff.

– Off - EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation
is predicted to occur. The program will simply continue on; no moisture will be removed from
the zone air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the
condensation.
– SimpleOff - the program will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the
radiant system to avoid this situation. With this option, the user also has the option to adjust
when the system will shut down. This is specified with the next parameter (field: Condensation
Differential Parameter).
– VariableOff - the program will attempt to reduce the inlet temperature to the panel by locally
recirculating some of the water leaving the panel and mixing it with water from the overall
demand side flow. This also means that some of the demand side water will bypass the panel.
In reality, this would require a pump to achieve such mixing and recirculation, but due to the
simple nature of this model, no pump definition will be required. Like the SimpleOff option,
the VariableOff option uses the condensation dewpoint offset parameter to adjust when the
system will try to adjust for the possibility of condensation.

1.33.4.1.17 Field: Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset

This optional parameter is only valid with the SimpleOff and VariableOff condensation handling
algorithm (see previous input parameter). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-
point temperature of the space and the allowed inlet water temperature to the radiant cooling panel
before the system shuts down in degrees Celsius. This parameter can be any positive, negative, or
zero value. When this parameter is zero, the radiant system will shut down or recirculate water
(depending on whether SimpleOff or VariableOff is used) when the inlet temperature drops to the
dew-point temperature or below. When this parameter is positive, the radiant system will shut down
or recirculate water when the inlet water temperature is the number of degrees Celsius above the
dew-point temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter
is negative, the radiant system will shut down or recirculate water when the inlet water temperature
is the number of degrees Celsius below the dew-point temperature. This strategy allows the user to
simulate a situation where small amounts of condensation are tolerable or the resistance of the panel
from the water loop to the panel surface is being taken into account as condensation would likely
happen at the panel surface. The default value for this parameter is 1°C.

1.33.4.1.18 Field: Fraction Radiant

This field allows the user an opportunity to characterize the heat tranfser at the surface of the panel
as either purely radiative, purely convective, or some combination of radiant and convective. As a
result, through this parameter, EnergyPlus gives the user an opportunity to characterize the zone
temperature as a function of the zone mean radiant temperature and the mean air temperature.
The performance of the unit is proportional to the difference between the water inlet temperature
and the zone temperature where the zone temperature is found using a weighted average of zone
mean radiant temperature and mean air temperature. The weighting factor is this parameter, and
it is multiplied by the zone mean radiant temperature. The remainder of the zone temperature
calculation is made up of the zone mean air temperature. During modeling, it is likewise used to
1608 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

calculate how much of the energy being absorbed by the unit is radiant energy. This parameter can
be difficult to quantify as the fraction radiant can vary with zone conditions. However, by definition,
a radiant system like this radiant cooling panel exchanges at least half of its energy to the zone
via radiation. One study has shown that a fraction radiant between 0.6 and 0.7 is a reasonable
estimation. For more information, see the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference in section Radiant
System Models, subsection Simple Radiant Cooling Panel.

1.33.4.1.19 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People

This field allows the user to direct some of the radiant energy to be absorbed from people rather
than surfaces within the space. This has a direct impact on thermal comfort and depends on the
location of the people with respect to the radiant cooling panel. All energy absorbed by the panel
would have a cooling effect on people and is subtracted from the total radiant energy absorbed by
the panel defined by the previous term.

1.33.4.1.20 Field Set: Surface Name, Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface

These two fields are repeated for up to 100 surface/fraction pairs. At least one surface/fraction pair
must appear in an input file. In other words, at least one surface must be identified as a recipient of
radiant energy from the baseboard heater.
The radiant energy from the cooling panel is defined by the total energy input to the cooling panel
from the chilled water loop times the fraction radiant field shown above. This radiant energy is
received from surfaces and people using the surface and fraction pairs and the fraction to people
input by the user. These fractions from people and surfaces must add up to 1.0. In other words, in
an input file, the following relation should be maintained by the user input:
X
F ractionIndicentOnP eople + F ractionT oSurf aces = 1 (1.142)

1.33.4.1.21 Field Set: Surface <x> Name

The radiant energy absorbed by the radiant cooling panel can be specified to be received from
particular surfaces within the space. The next series of pairs of inputs (surface name and fraction
of radiant energy) specify where this radiant energy is coming from. In essense, the fraction radiant
terms for each surface are similar to a view factor. These pairs can be repeated for up to 100 surfaces
giving the user plenty of flexibility to have the radiant cooling panel interact with many potential
surfaces. This first parameter in the pair is the name of the surface defined by user input elsewhere
in the input file. Note that the surface must reside in the same zone as all of the other surfaces in
the following list (that is, all surfaces listed must be in the same zone).

1.33.4.1.22 Field Set: Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface <x>

In combination with the previous field, this defines what fraction of the radiant energy being absorbed
by the radiant cooling panel comes from the surface named by the previous field. These pairs of
surface names and fractions of radiant energy from the surface can be repeated up to 100 times in
the input for a particular radiant cooling panel. Note that the sum of all of the surface radiant
energy fractions plus the radiant fraction from people must add up to unity just like in the radiant-
convective baseboard models. Note that there is a small possibility that a particular surface listed
in these pairs is actually lower than the temperature of the panel. This probably will not happen
unless there is another cooling surface within the zone. In reality, absorbing net radiant energy from
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1609

a colder surface would violate the Second Law of Thermodynamics. However, in keeping with the
simple nature of this model, EnergyPlus will monitor the inlet water temperature to the panel and
produce a warning message if this temperature is lower than any of the surface temperature of the
surfaces with which this system is interacting.
An example input for the radiant cooling panel is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:CoolingPanel: RadiantConvective:Water ,
Radiant Cooling Panel 1, !- Name
RCP Schedule 1, !- Availability schedule
RCP Water Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet node name
RCP Water Outlet Node , !- Water Outlet node name
5.0, !- Rated Water Inlet Temperature {C}
24.0, !- Rated Space Temperature {C}
0.063 , !- Rated Water Mass Flow Rate {kg/s}
5000.0 , !- Rated cooling capacity {W}
0.1, !- Maximum water flow rate {m3/s}
MeanAirTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type
1.0, !- Cooling Control Throttling Range
RCP Temp Schedule , !- Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name
SimpleOff , !- Condensation Control Type
1.0, !- Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset
0.65, !- Fraction Radiant
0.2, !- Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People
Zone 1 Floor , !- Surface 1 Name
0.5, !- Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface 1
Zone 1 West Wall , !- Surface 2 Name
0.25, !- Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface 2
Zone 1 South Wall , !- Surface 3 Name
0.25; !- Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface 3

1.33.4.2 Outputs

– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Total System Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Convective Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Radiant Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Cooling Panel Total System Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC, Sum, Cooling Panel Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC, Sum, Cooling Panel Convective Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC, Sum, Cooling Panel Radiant Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC, Meter, CoolingPanel:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Water Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC, Average, Cooling Panel Water Outlet Temperature [C]

1.33.4.2.1 Cooling Panel Total System Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total rate of cooling achieved by the radiant cooling panel in Watts. This is the
impact of the cooling panel on the space and is the actual impact the system has on the zone. It
includes the convective heat transfer rate as well as the decreased convection from zone surfaces as
a result of the operation of the unit and the radiation associated with the panel that is absorbed
from people.
1610 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.4.2.2 Cooling Panel Total Cooling Rate [W]

This variable is the total rate of cooling achieved by the radiant cooling panel on the zone in Watts.
This value includes the sum of both the convective and the radiant energy absorbed by the panel.

1.33.4.2.3 Cooling Panel Convective Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which convective heat is removed by the radiant cooling panel from the
zone in Watts.

1.33.4.2.4 Cooling Panel Radiant Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which radiant heat is removed from people and the surfaces of the zone
being served by the radiant cooling panel in Watts.

1.33.4.2.5 Cooling Panel Total System Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total cooling achieved by the radiant cooling panel on the zone in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This is the impact of the cooling panel on the space and is the actual
impact the system has on the zone. It includes the convective heat transfer rate as well as the
decreased convection from zone surfaces as a result of the operation of the unit and the radiation
associated with the panel that is absorbed from people.

1.33.4.2.6 Cooling Panel Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the total heat removal from the zone by the radiant cooling panel in Joules over
the timestep being reported.

1.33.4.2.7 Cooling Panel Convective Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the convective heat removal from the zone by the radiant cooling panel in Joules
over the timestep being reported.

1.33.4.2.8 Cooling Panel Radiant Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of radiant heat removal from people and the surfaces of the zone being
served by the radiant cooling panel in Joules over the timestep being reported.

1.33.4.2.9 CoolingPanel:EnergyTransfer [J]

This meter report variable is the sum of the total heat removal being accomplished by all radiant
cooling panels in the HVAC systems in the simulation.

1.33.4.2.10 Cooling Panel Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the water mass flow rate at the inlet node of the radiant cooling panel. The water
mass flow rate at the inlet and outlet node of the radiant cooling panel is the same value.

1.33.4.2.11 Cooling Panel Water Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the water temperature at the inlet node of the radiant cooling panel.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1611

1.33.4.2.12 Cooling Panel Water Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the water temperature at the outlet node of the radiant cooling panel.

1.33.5 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water
The hot water baseboard heater is a component of zone equipment. The component is controlled
to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the zone that have higher heating
priority. The control is accomplished by throttling the hot water flow. Input resembles that for the
simple heating coil: there is an availability schedule, an overall UA, and a maximum hot water mass
flow rate. The unit is connected to a hot water loop (demand side) with an inlet and outlet node.
Finally, there is the convergence tolerance, which is the tolerance on how closely the baseboard outlet
will meet the zone load. Of course, this tolerance is relative to the zone load.

1.33.5.1 Inputs

1.33.5.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a hot water baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.5.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the hot water baseboard heater unit
can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates
that the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used)
denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values
of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.5.1.3 Field: Inlet Node Name

The name of the hot water inlet node for the baseboard heater.

1.33.5.1.4 Field: Outlet Node Name

The name of the hot water outlet node for the baseboard heater.

1.33.5.1.5 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed
is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity.
If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. HeatingDesignCapacity means
user specifies the magnitude of maximum or nominal heating capacity or the program calculates the
maximum or nominal design heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means
the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor
area and floor area of the zone served by the hot water baseboard heater. FractionOfAutosizedHeat-
ingCapacity means the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction
and the auto-sized design heating capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.
1612 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.5.1.6 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the hot water baseboard heater design heating capacity in watts. This field can
be autosized by EnergyPlus. This input field is autosizable. When the Heating Design Capacity
Method is HeatingDesignCapacity and this input is blank, autosizing is assumed. Design day sizing
run must be specified id autosize is specified.

1.33.5.1.7 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of hot water baseboard heater. This field
is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. The program
calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by hot water baseboard heater and
the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This field may be left blank.

1.33.5.1.8 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity for the hot water baseboard
heater. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is FractionOfAuto-
sizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design autosized heat
capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This field may be left
blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.5.1.9 Field: U-Factor Times Area Value

The overall heat transfer coefficient for the baseboard heater in watts per degree Celsius at design
conditions. The U-Factor Times Area Value (UA) is used in an NTU - effectiveness calculation. An
estimate of the UA can be obtained from:

q = U A × (Twater,avg − Tair,avg ) (1.143)

where q is the heat transferred from water to the air in watts; Twater,avg is the average water
temperature in degrees C; and Tair,avg is the average air temperature in degrees C. Or the LMTD
temperature difference can be used.

1.33.5.1.10 Field: Maximum Water Flow Rate

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in m3 /sec.

1.33.5.1.11 Field Convergence Tolerance

The control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output
to the zone demand. For hot water baseboards, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a
specified output. The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical
inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:

|(Qbb,out − QZoneLoad )|
≤ ConvergenceT olerance (1.144)
QZoneLoad

The default is 0.001.

An example IDF for the hot water convective baseboard is shown below.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1613

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Water ,
Zone3Baseboard , !- name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- on/off schedule
Zone 3 Reheat Water Inlet Node , !- water inlet node
Zone 3 Reheat Water Outlet Node , !- water outlet node
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
autosize , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
500., !- UA
0.0013 , !- maximum water flow rate m3/s
0.001; !- tolerance

1.33.5.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Hot Water Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Hot Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Air Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Air Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Water Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Water Outlet Temperature [C]

1.33.5.2.1 Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

This is the heat addition rate of the convective baseboard to the zone it is serving in Watts.

1.33.5.2.2 Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

This is the heat addition of the convective baseboard to the zone it is serving in Joules over the
timestep being reported.

1.33.5.2.3 Baseboard Hot Water Energy [J]

This is the energy in the hot water used by the baseboard to heat the zone, in Joules.

1.33.5.2.4 Baseboard Hot Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the water mass flow rate at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.5.2.5 Baseboard Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the air mass flow rate at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.5.2.6 Baseboard Water Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the water temperatures at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.
1614 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.5.2.7 Baseboard Water Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the water temperatures at the outlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.5.2.8 Baseboard Air Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the air temperatures at the inlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.5.2.9 Baseboard Air Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the air temperatures at the outlet node of a baseboard unit.

1.33.6 ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric
The electric baseboard heater is a component in the zone equipment simulation. The component is
controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the zone that have higher
heating priority. The control is accomplished by taking the remaining zone load and dividing by the
efficiency of the baseboard.

1.33.6.1 Inputs

1.33.6.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user assigned name for an instance of a electric baseboard heater unit. Any reference to
this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.6.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the electric baseboard heater unit
can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates
that the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used)
denotes that the unit must be off for the time period. If this field is blank, the schedule has values
of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.6.1.3 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity or enter the method for scalable
sizing of heating capacity of electric baseboard unit. Input allowed is either HeatingDesignCapacity,
CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. If this input field is left blank or
zero, then autosizing is assumed. HeatingDesignCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of
maximum or nominal heating capacity or the program calculates the maximum or nominal design
heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the
design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the
zone served by the electric convective baseboard unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means
the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized
design heating capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.33.6.1.4 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the convective electric baseboard nominal heating capacity in watts. This field can
be autosized by EnergyPlus. This input field is autosizable. Design day sizing run must be specified.
This input field may be left blank.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1615

1.33.6.1.5 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of electric convective baseboard unit.
This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. The
program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the electric convective
baseboard unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This field
may be left blank.

1.33.6.1.6 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity for convective electric
baseboard unit. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is FractionO-
fAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design autosized
heating capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing must be specified. This field may be
left blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.6.1.7 Field: Efficiency

This is the overall electrical efficiency of the electric baseboard. The zone load met by this unit is
divided by the electrical efficiency to obtain the total electric energy used.
An example IDF for the electric convective baseboard is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric ,
Zone1Baseboard , !- Baseboard Name
FanAndCoilAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
5000, !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
0.97; !- Efficiency of the BaseBoard

1.33.6.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Meter,Baseboard:EnergyTransfer [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Meter,Heating:Electricity[J]

1.33.6.2.1 Baseboard Total Heating Rate [W]

This is the heat addition rate of the electric convective baseboard to the zone it is serving in Watts.

1.33.6.2.2 Baseboard Total Heating Energy [J]

This is the heat addition of the convective baseboard to the zone it is serving in Joules over the
timestep being reported.
1616 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.6.2.3 Baseboard Electricity Energy [J]

This is the total electric consumption of the baseboard for the zone it is serving in Joules over the
timestep being reported.

1.33.6.2.4 Baseboard Electricity Rate [W]

This is the electric power required by the baseboard to the zone it is serving in Watts.

1.33.7 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
This low temperature radiant system (hydronic) is a component of zone equipment that is intended
to model any “radiant system” where water is used to supply/remove energy to/from a building
surface (wall, ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not
met by other equipment in the zone that have higher priority. The control is accomplished by
throttling the hot or chilled water flow to the unit. Note that this system will only control based on
the radiant system controls defined by this input syntax and not via a zone thermostat such as is
used for forced air systems. Note also that because this unit does not require a thermostat that in
cases where no other systems are serving the zone in which this system resides that it will use the
heating equipment priority to determine which system will run first. If the radiant system is serving
a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order established by the
zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the radiant
system.
This model covers a wide range of low temperature radiant systems: heating and/or cooling, panel or
embedded pipes, etc. It is not intended to simulate high temperature electric or gas radiant heaters.
Those devices will be handled by a separate model and different input syntax. Low temperature
radiant systems that use electric resistance heating should also be defined using separate input
syntax (ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric). The key characteristic of this variable
flow low temperature radiant system is that the actual fluid flow rate being supplied to the radiant
system changes as conditions within the zone change. While the fluid temperature is determined
by the plant loops defined by other user input, this type of radiant system will control fluid flow
in an attempt to meet the remaining zone heating or cooling load based on the controls outlined
below. Low temperature radiant systems that vary the inlet temperature while keeping the fluid
flow rate through the radiant system constant should also be defined using separate input syntax
(ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow).

1.33.7.1 Inputs

1.33.7.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of a hydronic low temperature radiant
system. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.7.1.2 Field: Design Object

The name of the object that holds design data for this instance of hydronic low temperature radiant
system. Multiple input data values is taken from this object.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1617

1.33.7.1.3 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the hydronic low tem-
perature radiant system can run during a given time period. A schedule value less than or equal to
0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0
(usually 1 is used) denotes that the unit is available to operate during that time period. If this field
is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.7.1.4 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) in which the hydronic low temperature radiant system
is principally located and intended to affect. A system that is between two zones will still act upon
each zone; however, the zone name referenced here should be the zone that controls the radiant
system response.

1.33.7.1.5 Field: Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name

This field is the name of the surface (Ref: BuildingSurface) or surface list (Ref: Zone-
HVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:SurfaceGroup) in which the hydronic tubing is embedded/con-
tained. This specification attaches the source or sink from the radiant system to a particular surface
and the contribution of the system to the heat balances of that surface. If this field is a surface list,
then the source or sink is attached to all of the surfaces in the list with the radiant system surface
group defining the breakdown of how flow rate is split between the various surfaces. Note also that
surfaces in a list do not need to be in the same zone or in the zone being served by this system (see
previous field). Base surfaces (e.g., BuildingSurface:Detailed), door surfaces and internal mass are
valid. Window surfaces are not valid surface types for embedded radiant systems.

1.33.7.1.6 Field: Hydronic Tubing Length

This field is the total length of pipe embedded in the surface named above in the surface name field.
The length of the tube should be entered in meters and is used to determine the effectiveness of
heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer tubing
lengths result in more heat will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.
Note that if the user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would
be used for a forced air system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone
thermostat value and not on the radiant system control values. In addition, when the user opts
to autosize this calculation, the tube spacing from the construction of each surface associated with
this system is used along with each individual surface area to make an approximation of the tubing
length.

1.33.7.1.7 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the low temperature radiant variable flow unit design heating capacity in watts.
This field can be autosized by EnergyPlus. This input field is autosizable. When the Heating Design
Capacity Method is HeatingDesignCapacity and this input is blank, autosizing is assumed. Design
day sizing run must be specified if autosized.

1.33.7.1.8 Field: Maximum Hot Water Flow

This field is the maximum flow rate of hot water through the radiant system in m3 /sec. The controls
for the radiant system will vary the flow rate of hot water through the surface using zero flow and
1618 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

the maximum flow rate specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively. Note that
if the user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would be used for a
forced air system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone thermostat value
and not on the radiant system control values.

1.33.7.1.9 Field: Heating Water Inlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the hot water inlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a heating coil.

1.33.7.1.10 Field: Heating Water Outlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the hot water oulet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a heating coil.

1.33.7.1.11 Field: Cooling Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the low temperature radiant variable flow unit design cooling capacity in watts. This
field can be autosized by EnergyPlus. This input field is autosizable. When the Cooling Design
Capacity Method is CoolingDesignCapacity and this input is blank, autosizing is assumed. Design
day sizing run must be specified if autosized.

1.33.7.1.12 Field: Maximum Cold Water Flow

This field is the maximum flow rate of cold water through the radiant system in m3 /sec. The controls
for the radiant system will vary the flow rate of cold water through the surface using zero flow and
the maximum flow rate specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively. Note that
this field is optional and not required for a heating only system. Note also that if the user elects to
autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would be used for a forced air system
must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone thermostat value and not on the
radiant system control values.

1.33.7.1.13 Field: Cooling Water Inlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the cold water inlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a cooling coil. As with the maximum cold water flow rate, this field
is optional and not required for a heating only system.

1.33.7.1.14 Field: Cooling Water Outlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the cold water oulet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a cooling coil. As with the maximum cold water flow rate, this field
is optional and not required for a heating only system.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1619

1.33.7.1.15 Field: Number of Circuits

This optional input allows the user to choose between modeling each surface in the radiant system as
a single hydronic circuit or to allow the program to divide the surface into multiple parallel hydronic
circuits based on the next input field Circuit Length. To model as a single circuit choose OnePer-
Surface. To model as multiple circuits choose CalculateFromCircuitLength. It is recommended that
CalculateFromCircuitLength be chosen. The default is OnePerSurface for backward compatibility
with older versions of EnergyPlus.

1.33.7.1.16 Field: Circuit Length

The length in meters of each parallel hydronic circuit in a surface. Used when the previous input field
is set to CalculateFromCircuitLength. The default is 106.7 meters (350 feet), which is the maximum
circuit length allowed in Title 24.
An example IDF with a hydronic low temperature radiant system is shown below.

ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant :VariableFlow ,

West Zone Radiant Floor , !- Name
West Zone Radiant Floor Design , !- Design_Object_Name
RadiantSysAvailSched , !- Availability_Schedule_Name
West Zone , !- Zone_Name
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Surface_Name_or_Radiant_Surface_Group_Name
Autosize , !- Hydronic_Tubing_Length
Autosize , !- Heating_Design_Capacity
Autosize , !- Maximum_Hot_Water_Flow
West Zone Radiant Water Inlet Node , !- Heating_Water_Inlet_Node_Name
West Zone Radiant Water Outlet Node , !- Heating_Water_Outlet_Node_Name
Autosize , !- Cooling_Design_Capacity
Autosize , !- Maximum_Cold_Water_Flow
Zone 1 Cooling Water Inlet Node , !- Cooling_Water_Inlet_Node_Name
Zone 1 Cooling Water Outlet Node , !- Cooling_Water_Outlet_Node_Name
, !- Number_of_Circuits
; !- Circuit_Length

1.33.7.2 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow:Design

This object contains the design fields for ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow. The in-
formation from one ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow:Design object can be shared
with several ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow objects.

1.33.7.2.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of a hydronic low temperature radiant
system design object. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.7.2.2 Field: Fluid to Radiant Surface Heat Transfer Model

This field is provides the opportunity to control how the heat transfer between the fluid circulating
through this radiant system and the radiant system itself. There are two options for this parameter:
ConvectionOnly or ISOStandard. The default value is ConvectionOnly. More information on each
of these options is provided below.

– ConvectionOnly - This is the default mode and the method that was implemented when the
radiant model was first introduced into EnergyPlus. In this modeling option, it is assumed
1620 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

that the impact of the tube material on heat exchange between the fluid and the radiant
system and that only the convection between the fluid and the radiant system is the only
critical heat transfer mechanism to take into account. The reasoning behind this included the
fact that there are other simplifications in the method for calculating heat transfer and that
this simplification would not result in any significant difference in the simulated heat transfer
performance of the system. Convection between the fluid and the pipe wall of the system is
related to physical parameters of the system (pipe/tube inner diameter and length) as well as
the flow characteristics.
– ISOStandard - This method is based on the ISO Standard 11855, Part 2 (2012) document
entitled “Building environment design — Design, dimensioning, installation and control of
embedded radiant heating and cooling systems — Part 2: Determination of the design heating
and cooling capacity”, Reference Number ISO 11855-2:2012(E). This standard recommends
equations (see Appendix B of this document) to include the effects of convective heat transfer
between the fluid and the inside of the piping and conduction through the pipe wall. This model
requires both the inner and outer diameter of the pipe/tube, the length of the pipe/tube, and
the thermal conductivity of the pipe/tube material. Note that as part of the implementation
of this model in EnergyPlus, flow within the piping/tubing is always assumed to be turbulent.

1.33.7.2.3 Field: Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter

This field is the inside diameter of the tubes through which the fluid is circulated for the system
being defined by this statement. The inner diameter should be recorded in meters and is used to
determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.
The default for this parameter is 0.013 which is approximately equivalent to the inner diameter of a
typical 1/2” PEX pipe size.

1.33.7.2.4 Field: Hydronic Tubing Outside Diameter

This field is the outside diameter of the tubes through which the fluid is circulated for the system
being defined by this statement. The outer diameter should be recorded in meters and is used
to determine the conduction through the hydronic tubing and the contact resistance between the
tube/pipe and the radiant system itself in the ISOStandard option for the Fluid to Radiant Surface
Heat Transfer Model (see above). The default for this parameter is 0.016 which is approximately
equivalent to the outer diameter a typical 1/2” PEX pipe size.

1.33.7.2.5 Field: Hydronic Tubing Conductivity

This field is the thermal conductivity of the pipe/tube that is used in this radiant system in Watts per
meter-Kelvin (W/m-K). It is used to calculate the resistance to heat transfer through the pipe/tube
wall in the ISOStandard option for the Fluid to Radiant Surface Heat Transfer Model (see above).
The default for this parameter is 0.35 which is the value given for PEX piping in ISO Standard
11855-2(2012).

1.33.7.2.6 Field: Temperature Control Type

This field specifies along with setpoint (control) and water schedules how the user wishes to control
the constant flow radiant system. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one
of seven different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature,
the zone operative temperature, the outdoor dry-bulb temperature, the outdoor wet-bulb temper-
ature, the radiant surface inside face temperature, or the radiant surface interior temperture. The
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1621

choice of temperature is controlled by the current field–temperature control type. The user must
select from the following options:

– MeanAirTemperature - The mean air temperature of the zone being controlled by this radiant
system.
– MeanRadiantTemperature - The mean radiant temperature of the zone being controlled by
this radiant system.
– OperativeTemperature - The operative temperature of the zone being controlled by the radint
system. Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Tem-
perature and Mean Radiant Temperature.
– OutdoorDryBulbTemperature - The outdoor dry-bulb temperature of the current outdoor en-
vironment.
– OutdoorWetBulbTemperature - The outdoor wet-bulb temperature of the current outdoor
environment.
– SurfaceFaceTemperature - This option allows the user to control the radiant system using the
inside face surface temperature of the radiant system (the inside surface temperature).
– SurfaceInteriorTemperature - This option will allow the user to control the radiant system
using a surface temperature that is calculated inside the radiant system. This point will
be defined by the ConstructionProperty:InternalHeatSource description for the system. In
that input, the user has the option to calculate a temperature at a particular point in the
construction. The radiant system will then use this information for controlling the slab not
just producing temperatures for outputting at that point. Users should consult the input for
Field: Temperature Calculation Requested After Layer Number for more information. Note
that for the SurfaceFaceTemperature and SurfaceInteriorTemperature the surface being used
for control is the surface listed above in the field for Surface Name. If the user enters a group of
surfaces for that input, the first surface in the radiant group is the surface for control purposes.

If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more information on how
the setpoint temperature is established for this particular radiant system.

1.33.7.2.7 Field: Setpoint Control Type

This field has two options (ZeroFlowPower and HalfFlowPower) and is used to determine the re-
sponse of the low temperature radiant system at the setpoint temperature. The Heating Control
Temperature Schedule Name and Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name (both listed below)
define a schedule for a temperature setpoint. The previous field (Temperature Control Type) defines
which temperature is being controlled to that setpoint. This field determines the response of the
system when the temperature being controlled is at the temperature setpoint. When ZeroFlowPower
is chosen for this field, then the system will assume that it should shut off when the temperature
controlled arrives at the setpoint. So, if Mean Air Temperature control is used and it becomes equal
to the setpoint temperature, then the system will turn off. When HalfFlowPower is chosen for this
field, then the system will assume that it should be at half of the maximum water flow when it
achieves the setpoint condition.
1622 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.7.2.8 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the heating design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed
is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity.
If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. HeatingDesignCapacity means
user specifies the magnitude of maximum or nominal heating capacity or the program calculates the
design heating capacity if autosize is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates
the design heating capacity from user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the
zone served by the low temperature radiant variable flow unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity
means the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-
sized design heating capacity. The default method is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.33.7.2.9 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of low temperature radiant variable flow
unit. This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea.
The program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the low temperature
radiant variable flow unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user.
This field may be left blank.

1.33.7.2.10 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity for low temperature
radiant variable flow unit. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design
autosized heat capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This
field may be left blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.7.2.11 Field: Heating Control Throttling Range

This field specifies the range of temperature in degrees Celsuis over which the radiant system throttles
from zero flow rate up to the maximum defined by the maximum hot water flow rate field described
above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the control temperature and the
setpoint type to define the response of the system to various conditions. The Heating Control Tem-
perature Schedule specifies the “setpoint” temperature that is to be met. This is used in conjunction
with the Setpoint Type which defines whether the flow rate of the system is at zero flow or half flow
when the parameter defined by the Temperature Control Type is equal to the setpoint temperature
defined by the Heating Control Temperature Schedule. See these other input parameters of this
radiant system for more information on these different parameters. Note that when the throttling
range is set to zero that this approximates an on-off system that is either fully on or totally off.
For clarity, here is an example of how the flow rate to the system will be set. In this example, it is
assumed that heating control temperature setpoint is currently 15°C, the heating throttling range is
2°C, and that the setpoint type is HalfFlowPower. The water flow rate to the radiant system will be
zero when the controlling temperature (MAT, MRT, Operative Temperature, etc.; see control type
field above) is at or above 16°C and the maximum flow rate when the controlling temperature is at
or below 14°C. This represents a throttling range of 2°C around the setpoint of 15°C. In between
14°C and 16°C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied linearly from full flow at a control
temperature of 14°C to half flow at 15°C to zero flow at 16°C. If the throttling range is changed to
0°C or on-off control, then the system will be off above 15°C and on below 15°C. However, if the
throttling range is kept at 2°C and the setpoint type is changed to ZeroFlowPower, then the system
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1623

will vary the flow linearly between zero for when the control temperature is at 15°C to full flow at
13°C.

1.33.7.2.12 Field: Heating Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the heating setpoint or control temperature for the radiant system in degrees
Celsius. Used in conjunction with the previous field (heating control throttling range), it will define
whether or not the system is running and the current flow rate. Water flow rate to the system is
varied linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the throttling range and the maximum
heating flow rate parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will allow
different setpoint temperatures throughout the year for heating. The control of the radiant system is
based solely on the heating control temperature schedule, the cooling control temperature schedule
(see below), and the control temperature type listed above. The radiant system will not use any
zone thermostat that might be used by other systems serving the zone in which the radiant system
resides.

1.33.7.2.13 Field: Cooling Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the cooling design capacity for scalable sizing. Input allowed is
either CoolingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. If
this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. CoolingDesignCapacity means user
specifies the design cooling capacity or the program calculates the design cooling capacity if autosize
is specified. CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the design cooling capacity from
user specified heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the zone served by the low temperature
radiant variable flow unit. FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity means the program calculates the
design cooling capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design cooling capacity. The
default method is CoolingDesignCapacity.

1.33.7.2.14 Field: Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the cooling capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of low temperature radiant variable flow
unit. This field is required field when the Cooling Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea.
The program calculates the cooling capacity from floor area of the zone served by the low temperature
radiant variable flow unit and the cooling capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user.
This field may be left blank.

1.33.7.2.15 Field: Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity

Enter the cooling capacity as a fraction of the autosized cooling capacity for low temperature ra-
diant variable flow unit. This input field is required when the Cooling Design Capacity Method is
FractionOfAutosizedCoolingCapacity. The program calculates the cooling capacity from the design
autosized cooling capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This
field may be left blank. Default value is 1.0.

1.33.7.2.16 Field: Cooling Control Throttling Range

This field specifies the range of temperature in degrees Celsuis over which the radiant system throt-
tles from zero flow rate up to the maximum defined by the maximum cold water flow rate field
described above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the control tempera-
ture and the setpoint type to define the response of the system to various conditions. The Cooling
1624 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Control Temperature Schedule specifies the “setpoint” temperature that is to be met. This is used
in conjunction with the Setpoint Type which defines whether the flow rate of the system is at zero
flow or half flow when the parameter defined by the Temperature Control Type is equal to the
setpoint temperature defined by the Cooling Control Temperature Schedule. See these other input
parameters of this radiant system for more information on these different parameters. Note that
when the throttling range is set to zero that this approximates an on-off system that is either fully
on or totally off.
For clarity, here is an example of how the flow rate to the system will be set. In this example, it is
assumed that cooling control temperature setpoint is currently 25°C, the cooling throttling range is
2°C, and that the setpoint type is HalfFlowPower. The water flow rate to the radiant system will be
zero when the controlling temperature (MAT, MRT, Operative Temperature, etc.; see control type
field above) is at or below 24°C and the maximum flow rate when the controlling temperature is at
or above 26°C. This represents a throttling range of 2°C around the setpoint of 25°C. In between
24°C and 26°C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied linearly from zero flow at a control
temperature of 24°C to half flow at 15°C to full flow at w6°C. If the throttling range is changed to
0°C or on-off control, then the system will be on above 25°C and off below 25°C. However, if the
throttling range is kept at 2°C and the setpoint type is changed to ZeroFlowPower, then the system
will vary the flow linearly between zero for when the control temperature is at 25°C to full flow at
27°C.

1.33.7.2.17 Field: Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the cooling setpoint or control temperature for the radiant system in degrees
Celsius. Used in conjunction with the previous field (cooling control throttling range), it will define
whether or not the system is running and the current flow rate. Water flow rate to the system is varied
linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the throttling range and the maximum cooling
flow rate parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will allow different
setpoint temperatures throughout the year for cooling. The control of the radiant system is based
solely on the heating control temperature schedule listed above, the cooling control temperature
schedule, and the control temperature type listed above. The radiant system will not use any zone
thermostat that might be used by other systems serving the zone in which the radiant system resides.

1.33.7.2.18 Field: Condensation Control Type

When radiant systems do cooling, there is the possibility that condensation will occur on the surface
that is being cooled. This is due to the fact that the surface temperature may drop below the dew-
point temperature of the space. When this happens, condensation on the surface will occur. There
are three options for handling this situation: Off, SimpleOff, and VariableOff. This parameter is
optional and will default to SimpleOff.

– Off - EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation
is predicted to occur. The program will simply continue on, no moisture will be removed from
the zone air, and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the
condensation.
– SimpleOff - the program will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the
radiant system to avoid this situation. With this option, the users also have the opportunity
to adjust when the system will shut down. This is specified with the next parameter (field:
Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset).
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1625

– VariableOff - the program will determine whether condensation is predicted for the flow rate
determined by the unit control scheme. If condensation is predicted, the unit makes one
attempt to reduce the flow rate using linear interpolation between the controlled flow rate and
a zero flow rate to achieve a surface temperature that would match the dew-point temperature
modified by the condensation control dew-point offset (field: Condensation Control Dewpoint
Offset). For example, if the controlled flow rate results in a surface temperature of 10°C, a zero
flow rate results in a surface temperature of 12°C, and the modified condensation dew-point
temperature is 11°C, then the reduced flow rate would be half of the controlled flow rate. If
this reduced flow approximation does not result in condensation, then this reduced flow is used
for the unit. If the reduced flow approximation still results in condensation, then the unit is
turned off to avoid excessive iterations.

1.33.7.2.19 Field: Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset

This optional parameter is only valid with the SimpleOff and VariableOff condensation handling
algorithm (see previous input parameter). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-
point temperature of the space and the allowed surface temperature to which the surface can drop
before the radiant system shuts down (SimpleOff) or reduces its flow rate (VariableOff) to avoid
condensation in degrees Celsius. This parameter can be any positive, negative, or zero value. When
this parameter is zero, the radiant system will shut down or reduce the flow rate when the surface
temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below. When this parameter is positive, the
radiant system will shut down or reduce the flow rate when the surface is the number of degrees
Celsius above the dew-point temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation.
When this parameter is negative, the radiant system will shut down or reduce the flow rate when
the surface temperature is the number of degrees Celsius below the dew-point temperature. While
not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small amounts of
condensation are tolerable. The default value for this parameter is 1°C.

1.33.7.2.20 Field: Changeover Delay Time Period Schedule

This field defines a schedule which should be populated with values for the amount of time in hours
that is required before this low temperature radiant system can switch between either heating or
cooling and the opposite conditioning mode. If this schedule value is set to 1 (hour) at a particular
time and the system was previously in heating mode, then it will be locked out from switching into
cooling mode until at least one hour of time has passed in the simulation with the system “not
operating”. This helps avoid systems bouncing back and forth between the two conditioning modes
in successive time steps. This parameter can be set to any positive value, and a zero or negative
value will be assumed to have no delay (equivalent to a delay of zero). If the user leaves this field
blank, EnergyPlus will assume that no changeover delay is requested (also equivalent to a delay of
zero).
An example IDF with a design object for a hydronic low temperature radiant system is shown below.

ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant :VariableFlow:Design ,

West Zone Radiant Floor Design , !- Design Object Name
ConvectionOnly , !- Fluid to Radiant Surface Heat Transfer Model
0.013 , !- Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter
0.016 , !- Hydronic Tubing Outside Diameter
0.35, !- Hydronic Tubing Conductivity
MeanAirTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type
HalfFlowPower , !- Setpoint Control Type
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
1626 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area Control

Temperature Schedule Name
CoolingDesignCapacity , !- Cooling Design Capacity Method
, !- Cooling Design Capacity Per Floor Area
, !- Fraction of Autosized Cooling Design Capacity
2.0, !- Cooling Control Throttling Range
Radiant Cooling Setpoints , !- Cooling Control Temperature Schedule Name
Off , !- Condensation Control Type
; !- Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset

1.33.7.3 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Outlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Moisture Condensation Time[s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Fluid Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Fluid Energy [J]

1.33.7.3.1 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the heating input rate to the low temperature radiant system in Watts. This is
the heat source to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The heating rate is determined
by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user input.

1.33.7.3.2 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the heating input to the low temperature radiant system in Joules. This is the
heat source to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The heating rate is determined by
the zone conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and the timestep.

1.33.7.3.3 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the cooling input rate to the low temperature radiant system in Watts. This is
the heat sink to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The cooling rate is determined by
the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user input.

1.33.7.3.4 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the cooling input to the low temperature radiant system in Joules. This is the
heat sink to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The cooling rate is determined by the
zone conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and the timestep.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1627

1.33.7.3.5 Zone Radiant HVAC Mass Flow Rate Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the mass flow rate of water through the low temperature radiant system in kilo-
grams per second.

1.33.7.3.6 Zone Radiant HVAC Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of water entering the low temperature radiant system in Celsius.

1.33.7.3.7 Zone Radiant HVAC Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of water leaving the low temperature radiant system in Celsius.

1.33.7.3.8 Zone Radiant HVAC Moisture Condensation Time[s]

This field reports the amount of time when condensation is occurring. When using the Off conden-
sation control, this simply reports the amount of time when condensation occurs. When using the
SimpleOff condensation control, this indicates the amount of time when the system has been shut
off because of the potential danger of condensation.

1.33.7.3.9 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Fluid Energy [J]

This is the demand placed on the hot fluid plant loop connection serving the low temperature radiant
system, in Joules.

1.33.7.3.10 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Fluid Energy [J]

This is the demand placed on the cooling fluid plant loop connection serving the low temperature
radiant system, in Joules.

1.33.8 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow
This low temperature radiant system (hydronic) is a component of zone equipment that is intended
to model any “radiant system” where water is used to supply/remove energy to/from a building
surface (wall, ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled via control schedules as described in
the syntax below and does not require a zone thermostat. Note that because this unit does not
require a thermostat that in cases where no other systems are serving the zone in which this system
resides that it will use the heating equipment priority to determine which system will run first. If
the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the
priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls
defined by the user for the radiant system.
The constant flow system differs from the variable flow system describe above in what it controls.
The variable flow system varies the flow rate through the radiant system based on some control
temperature. The constant flow system keeps flow rate through the radiant system constant. In
order to meet the zone load, the constant flow system will varies the water temperature that is
sent to the radiant system. This is accomplished with a mixing valve that is controlled by a sensor
and a local recirculation pump. This model covers a wide range of low temperature radiant systems:
heating and/or cooling, panel or embedded pipes, etc. It is not intended to simulate high temperature
electric or gas radiant heaters. Those devices will be handled by a separate model and different input
syntax. Low temperature radiant systems that use electric resistance heating should also be defined
1628 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

using separate input syntax (ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric). Low temperature

radiant systems that vary the flow rate through the radiant system should also be defined using
separate input syntax (ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow).
One of the other differences between this model and the variable flow low temperature radiant system
is that the constant flow system has a built-in local secondary loop. It will recirculate flow coming
out of the system and mix this with flow from the loop to arrive at the desired inlet temperature to
the radiant system (note that this model has the temperature sensor AFTER the pump to insure
proper inlet temperature to the radiant system). The local loop also contains a pump which is
assumed to be upstream of the radiant system and after the mixing valve. So, the local loop can
have some recirculation. The flow from the main loop may also bypass the radiant system if more
than enough flow is available and the main loop is also a constant flow system.

1.33.8.1 Inputs

1.33.8.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of a constant flow low temperature radiant
system. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.8.1.2 Field: Design Object

The name of the object that holds design data for this instance of constant flow low temperature
radiant system. Multiple input data values is taken from this object.

1.33.8.1.3 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the constant flow low
temperature radiant system can run during a given time period. A schedule value less than or equal
to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for that time period. A value greater than
0 (usually 1 is used) denotes that the unit is available to operate during that time period. If this
field is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.8.1.4 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) in which the constant flow low temperature radiant
system is principally located and intended to affect. A system that is between two zones will still
act upon each zone; however, the zone name referenced here should be the zone that controls the
radiant system response.

1.33.8.1.5 Field: Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name

This field is the name of the surface (Ref: BuildingSurface:Detailed) or surface list (Ref:
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:SurfaceGroup) in which the hydronic tubing is embedded/-
contained. This specification attaches the source or sink from the radiant system to a particular
surface and the contribution of the system to the heat balances of that surface. If this field is a
surface list, then the source or sink is attached to all of the surfaces in the list with the radiant
system surface group defining the breakdown of how flow rate is split between the various surfaces.
Note also that surfaces in a list do not need to be in the same zone or in the zone being served by
this system (see previous field). Base surfaces (e.g., BuildingSurface:Detailed), door surfaces and
internal mass are valid. Window surfaces are not valid surface types for embedded radiant systems.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1629

1.33.8.1.6 Field: Hydronic Tubing Length

This field is the total length of pipe embedded in the surface named above in the surface name field.
The length of the tube should be entered in meters and is used to determine the effectiveness of
heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer tubing
lengths result in more heat will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.
Note that if the user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would
be used for a forced air system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone
thermostat value and not on the radiant system control values. In addition, when the user opts
to autosize this calculation, the tube spacing from the construction of each surface associated with
this system is used along with each individual surface area to make an approximation of the tubing
length.

1.33.8.1.7 Field: Rated Flow Rate

This field is the maximum flow rate of water through the radiant system in m3 /sec. This flow rate
is held constant by the local component pump, but the user has the option of varying this flow rate
via a schedule (see next input field). The constant flow system will accept this flow rate and control
the inlet temperature based on the control and water temperature schedules defined below. This
field is autosizable.

1.33.8.1.8 Field: Pump Flow Rate Schedule Name

This field modifies the maximum flow rate of water through the radiant system in m3 /sec. This
input is “optional”. If the user does not enter a schedule, the flow rate through the radiant system
is assumed to be constant during all hours that it is operating based on the value entered in the
previous input field. Note that the values for this schedule must be between zero and one. The
values in this schedule are multipliers on the previous field – Rated Flow Rate.

1.33.8.1.9 Field: Rated Pump Head

This numeric field contains the pump’s rated head in Pascals.

1.33.8.1.10 Field: Rated Power Consumption

This numeric field contains the pump’s rated power consumption in Watts.

1.33.8.1.11 Field: Heating Water Inlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the hot water inlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a heating coil.

1.33.8.1.12 Field: Heating Water Outlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the hot water outlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a heating coil.
1630 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.8.1.13 Field: Heating High Water Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high water temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow radiant heating system. Water and control temperatures for heating work together
to provide a linear function that determines the water temperature sent to the radiant system.
The current control temperature (see Temperature Control Type above) is compared to the high
and low control temperatures at the current time. If the control temperature is above the high
temperature, then the system will be turned off and the water mass flow rate will be zero. If the
control temperature is below the low temperature, then the inlet water temperature is set to the
high water temperature. If the control temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet
water temperature is linearly interpolated between the low and high water temperature values. For
more information and a graph of how the water and control schedules affect the system operation,
please consult the Engineering Reference document.

1.33.8.1.14 Field: Heating Low Water Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low water temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow heating radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating High
Water Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.8.1.15 Field: Heating High Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow heating radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating High
Water Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.8.1.16 Field: Heating Low Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow heating radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating High
Water Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.8.1.17 Field: Cooling Water Inlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the cold water inlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a cooling coil. As with the maximum cold water flow rate, this field
is optional and not required for a heating only system.

1.33.8.1.18 Field: Cooling Water Outlet Node Name

This field contains the name of the cold water outlet node to the radiant system. Note that this node
name must also show up in the branch description when defining the plant demand side network in
a manner identical to defining a cooling coil. As with the maximum cold water flow rate, this field
is optional and not required for a heating only system.

1.33.8.1.19 Field: Cooling High Water Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high water temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow radiant cooling system. Water and control temperatures for heating work together to
provide a linear function that determines the water temperature sent to the radiant system. The
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1631

current control temperature (see Temperature Control Type above) is compared to the high and low
control temperatures at the current time. If the control temperature is above the high temperature,
then the inlet water temperature is set to the low water temperature. If the control temperature
is below the low temperature, then system will be turned off and the water mass flow rate will be
zero. If the control temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet water temperature
is linearly interpolated between the low and high water temperature values. For more information
and a graph of how the water and control schedules affect the system operation, please consult the
Engineering Reference document.

1.33.8.1.20 Field: Cooling Low Water Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low water temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow cooling radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High
Water Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.8.1.21 Field: Cooling High Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow cooling radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High
Water Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.8.1.22 Field: Cooling Low Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow cooling radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High
Water Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.8.1.23 Field: Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset

This optional parameter is only valid with the SimpleOff and VariableOff condensation handling
algorithm (see previous input parameter). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-
point temperature of the space and the allowed surface temperature to which the surface can drop
before the radiant system shuts down (SimpleOff) or tries to adjust the inlet water temperature
(VariableOff) in degrees Celsius. This parameter can be any positive, negative, or zero value. When
this parameter is zero, the radiant system will shut down or adjust the inlet water temperature
when the surface temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below. When this parameter
is positive, the radiant system will shut down or increase the inlet water temperature when the
surface is the number of degrees Celsius above the dew-point temperature. This allows some extra
safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter is negative, the radiant system will shut down or
increase the inlet water temperature when the surface temperature is the number of degrees Celsius
below the dew-point temperature. While not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate
a situation where small amounts of condensation are tolerable. The default value for this parameter
is 1°C.

1.33.8.1.24 Field: Number of Circuits

This optional input allows the user to choose between modeling each surface in the radiant system as
a single hydronic circuit or to allow the program to divide the surface into multiple parallel hydronic
circuits based on the next input field Circuit Length. To model as a single circuit choose OnePer-
Surface. To model as multiple circuits choose CalculateFromCircuitLength. It is recommended that
1632 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

CalculateFromCircuitLength be chosen. The default is OnePerSurface for backward compatibility

with older versions of EnergyPlus.

1.33.8.1.25 Field: Circuit Length

The length in meters of each parallel hydronic circuit in a surface. Used when the previous input field
is set to CalculateFromCircuitLength. The default is 106.7 meters (350 feet), which is the maximum
circuit length allowed in Title 24.
An example IDF with a constant flow low temperature radiant system is shown below.

ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant :ConstantFlow ,

West Zone Radiant Floor , !- Name
West Zone Radiant Floor Design , !- Design Object Name
RadiantSysAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
West Zone , !- Zone Name
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name
400.0 , !- Hydronic Tubing Length
0.0004 , !- Rated Flow Rate
, !- Pump Flow Rate Schedule Name
75000 , !- Rated Pump Head
50, !- Rated Power Consumption
West Zone Radiant Water Inlet Node , !- Heating Water Inlet Node Name
West Zone Radiant Water Outlet Node , !- Heating Water Outlet Node Name
RadHeatHighWaterTemp , !- Heating High Water Temperature Schedule Name
RadHeatLowWaterTemp , !- Heating Low Water Temperature Schedule Name
RadHeatHighControlTemp , !- Heating High Control Temperature Schedule Name
RadHeatLowControlTemp , !- Heating Low Control Temperature Schedule Name
Zone 1 Cooling Water Inlet Node , !- Cooling Water Inlet Node Name
Zone 1 Cooling Water Outlet Node , !- Cooling Water Outlet Node Name
RadCoolHighWaterTemp , !- Cooling High Water Temperature Schedule Name
RadCoolLowWaterTemp , !- Cooling Low Water Temperature Schedule Name
RadCoolHighControlTemp , !- Cooling High Control Temperature Schedule Name
RadCoolLowControlTemp , !- Cooling Low Control Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Number_of_Circuits
; !- Circuit Length {m}

1.33.8.2 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow:Design

This object contains the design fields for ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow. The

information from one ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow:Design object can be
shared with several ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow objects.

1.33.8.2.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of a constant flow low temperature radiant
system design object. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.8.2.2 Field: Fluid to Radiant Surface Heat Transfer Model

This field is provides the opportunity to control how the heat transfer between the fluid circulating
through this radiant system and the radiant system itself. There are two options for this parameter:
ConvectionOnly or ISOStandard. The default value is ConvectionOnly. More information on each
of these options is provided below.

– ConvectionOnly - This is the default mode and the method that was implemented when the
radiant model was first introduced into EnergyPlus. In this modeling option, it is assumed
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1633

that the impact of the tube material on heat exchange between the fluid and the radiant
system and that only the convection between the fluid and the radiant system is the only
critical heat transfer mechanism to take into account. The reasoning behind this included the
fact that there are other simplifications in the method for calculating heat transfer and that
this simplification would not result in any significant difference in the simulated heat transfer
performance of the system. Convection between the fluid and the pipe wall of the system is
related to physical parameters of the system (pipe/tube inner diameter and length) as well as
the flow characteristics.
– ISOStandard - This method is based on the ISO Standard 11855, Part 2 (2012) document
entitled “Building environment design — Design, dimensioning, installation and control of
embedded radiant heating and cooling systems — Part 2: Determination of the design heating
and cooling capacity”, Reference Number ISO 11855-2:2012(E). This standard recommends
equations (see Appendix B of this document) to include the effects of convective heat transfer
between the fluid and the inside of the piping and conduction through the pipe wall. This model
requires both the inner and outer diameter of the pipe/tube, the length of the pipe/tube, and
the thermal conductivity of the pipe/tube material. Note that as part of the implementation
of this model in EnergyPlus, flow within the piping/tubing is always assumed to be turbulent.

1.33.8.2.3 Field: Temperature Control Type

This field specifies along with setpoint (control) and water schedules how the user wishes to control
the constant flow radiant system. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to
one of eight different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant tem-
perature, the zone operative temperature, the outdoor dry-bulb temperature, the outdoor wet-bulb
temperature, the radiant surface inside face temperature, the radiant surface interior temperture,
or the running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the
current field–temperature control type. The user must select from the following options:

– MeanAirTemperature - The mean air temperature of the zone being controlled by this radiant
system.
– MeanRadiantTemperature - The mean radiant temperature of the zone being controlled by
this radiant system.
– OperativeTemperature - The operative temperature of the zone being controlled by the radint
system. Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Tem-
perature and Mean Radiant Temperature.
– OutdoorDryBulbTemperature - The outdoor dry-bulb temperature of the current outdoor en-
vironment.
– OutdoorWetBulbTemperature - The outdoor wet-bulb temperature of the current outdoor
environment.
– SurfaceFaceTemperature - This option allows the user to control the radiant system using the
inside face surface temperature of the radiant system (the inside surface temperature).
– SurfaceInteriorTemperature - This option will allow the user to control the radiant system
using a surface temperature that is calculated inside the radiant system. This point will be
defined by the Construction:InternalSource description for the system. In that input, the user
has the option to calculate a temperature at a particular point in the construction. The radiant
system will then use this information for controlling the slab not just producing temperatures
for outputting at that point. Users should consult the input for Field: Temperature Calculation
1634 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Requested After Layer Number for more information. Note that for the SurfaceFaceTemper-
ature and SurfaceInteriorTemperature the surface being used for control is the surface listed
above in the field for Surface Name. If the user enters a group of surfaces for that input, the
first surface in the radiant group is the surface for control purposes.
– RunningMeanOutdoorDryBulbTemperature - This option will allow the user to control the inlet
water temperature to the system as a function of the running mean outdoor air temperature.
The next field (Running Mean Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature Weighting Factor) will define
how this temperature is actually calculated within EnergyPlus.

If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more information on how
the setpoint temperature is established for this particular radiant system.

1.33.8.2.4 Field: Running Mean Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature Weighting Fac-

tor
This field specifies the weighting factor that is used to calculate the running mean outdoor dry-bulb
temperature. The running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature is determined using the following
equation:

Θrm = (1 − α)Θed−1 + αΘrm−1 (1.145)

where:
Θrm is the current running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature that is used to control the radiant
system
Θed−1 is the average outdoor dry-bulb temperature from the previous day
Θrm−1 is the running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature from the previous day
α is the user defined weighting factor that is defined by this field. It controls the weighting of the
running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature from the previous day and the average outdoor dry-
bulb temperature from the previous day for the purposes of calculating the running mean outdoor
dry-bulb temperature for the current day. The value for this weighting factor must be between zero
and 1.

1.33.8.2.5 Field: Hydronic Tubing Inside Diameter

This field is the inside diameter of the tubes through which the fluid is circulated for the system
being defined by this statement. The inner diameter should be recorded in meters and is used to
determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.
The default for this parameter is 0.013 which is approximately equivalent to the inner diameter of a
typical 1/2” PEX pipe size.

1.33.8.2.6 Field: Hydronic Tubing Outside Diameter

This field is the outside diameter of the tubes through which the fluid is circulated for the system
being defined by this statement. The outer diameter should be recorded in meters and is used
to determine the conduction through the hydronic tubing and the contact resistance between the
tube/pipe and the radiant system itself in the ISOStandard option for the Fluid to Radiant Surface
Heat Transfer Model (see above). The default for this parameter is 0.016 which is approximately
equivalent to the outer diameter a typical 1/2” PEX pipe size.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1635

1.33.8.2.7 Field: Hydronic Tubing Conductivity

This field is the thermal conductivity of the pipe/tube that is used in this radiant system in Watts per
meter-Kelvin (W/m-K). It is used to calculate the resistance to heat transfer through the pipe/tube
wall in the ISOStandard option for the Fluid to Radiant Surface Heat Transfer Model (see above).
The default for this parameter is 0.35 which is the value given for PEX piping in ISO Standard
11855-2(2012).

1.33.8.2.8 Field: Motor Efficiency

This numeric field contains the pump motor’s efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

1.33.8.2.9 Field: Fraction of Motor Inefficiencies to Fluid Stream

This numeric field contains the pump motor’s fraction of power loss to the fluid.

1.33.8.2.10 Field: Condensation Control Type

When radiant systems do cooling, there is the possibility that condensation will occur on the surface
that is being cooled. This is due to the fact that the surface temperature may drop below the dew-
point temperature of the space. When this happens, condensation on the surface will occur. There
are three options for handling this situation: Off, SimpleOff, and VariableOff. This parameter is
optional and will default to SimpleOff.

– Off - EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when condensation
is predicted to occur. The program will simply continue on; no moisture will be removed from
the zone air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the
condensation.
– SimpleOff - the program will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the
radiant system to avoid this situation. With this option, the users also have the opportunity
to adjust when the system will shut down. This is specified with the next parameter (field:
Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset).
– VariableOff - the program will determine whether condensation is predicted for the flow rate
determined by the unit control scheme. If condensation is predicted, the unit makes one attempt
to avoid condensation by increasing the water inlet temperature to the system to match the dew-
point temperature modified by the condensation control dew-point offset (field: Condensation
Control Dewpoint Offset). For example, if a surface in the space is predicted to be 15°C and the
modified condensation dew-point temperature is 17°C, then the inlet water temperature to the
unit is reset to 17°C and the system is simulated again with this new inlet water temperature.
If this increased inlet water temperature does not result in condensation, then the simulation
continues using this operating condition for the system. If the increased inlet water temperature
still results in condensation, then the unit is turned off to avoid excessive iterations.

1.33.8.2.11 Field: Condensation Control Dewpoint Offset

This optional parameter is only valid with the SimpleOff and VariableOff condensation handling
algorithm (see previous input parameter). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-
point temperature of the space and the allowed surface temperature to which the surface can drop
before the radiant system shuts down (SimpleOff) or reduces its flow rate (VariableOff) to avoid
condensation in degrees Celsius. This parameter can be any positive, negative, or zero value. When
1636 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

this parameter is zero, the radiant system will shut down or reduce the flow rate when the surface
temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below. When this parameter is positive, the
radiant system will shut down or reduce the flow rate when the surface is the number of degrees
Celsius above the dew-point temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation.
When this parameter is negative, the radiant system will shut down or reduce the flow rate when
the surface temperature is the number of degrees Celsius below the dew-point temperature. While
not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small amounts of
condensation are tolerable. The default value for this parameter is 1°C.

1.33.8.2.12 Field: Changeover Delay Time Period Schedule

This field defines a schedule which should be populated with values for the amount of time in hours
that is required before this low temperature radiant system can switch between either heating or
cooling and the opposite conditioning mode. If this schedule value is set to 1 (hour) at a particular
time and the system was previously in heating mode, then it will be locked out from switching
into cooling mode until at least one hour of time has passed in the simulation with the system“not
operating”. This helps avoid systems bouncing back and forth between the two conditioning modes
in successive time steps. This parameter can be set to any positive value, and a zero or negative
value will be assumed to have no delay (equivalent to a delay of zero). If the user leaves this field
blank, EnergyPlus will assume that no changeover delay is requested (also equivalent to a delay of
zero).
An example IDF with a design object for constant flow low temperature radiant system is shown
below.

ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant :ConstantFlow:Design ,

West Zone Radiant Floor Design , !- Design_Object_Name
ConvectionOnly , !- Fluid_to_Radiant_Surface_Heat_Transfer_Model
MeanAirTemperature , !- Temperature_Control_Type
0.8, !-
Running_Mean_Outdoor_DryBulb_Temperature_Weighting_Factor
0.012 , !- Hydronic_Tubing_Inside_Diameter
0.016 , !- Hydronic_Tubing_Outside_Diameter
0.35, !- Hydronic_Tubing_Conductivity
0.87, !- Motor_Efficiency
0.1, !- Fraction_of_Motor_Inefficiencies_to_Fluid_Stream
Off , !- Condensation_Control_Type
1.0, !- Condensation_Control_Dewpoint_Offset
ChangeoverSchedW; !- Changeover delay schedule

1.33.8.3 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Injection Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Recirculation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Inlet Temperature [C]
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1637

– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Outlet Temperature [C]

– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Inlet Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Moisture Condensation Time [s]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Constant Flow Running Mean Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Constant Flow Previous Day Running Mean Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature
[C]
– HVAC,Average,Constant Flow Previous Day Average Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature [C]

1.33.8.3.1 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the heating input rate to the low temperature radiant system in Watts. This is
the heat source to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The heating rate is determined
by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user input.

1.33.8.3.2 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the heating input to the low temperature radiant system in Joules. This is the
heat source to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The heating rate is determined by
the zone conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and the timestep.

1.33.8.3.3 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the cooling input rate to the low temperature radiant system in Watts. This is
the heat sink to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The cooling rate is determined by
the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user input.

1.33.8.3.4 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the cooling input to the low temperature radiant system in Joules. This is the
heat sink to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The cooling rate is determined by the
zone conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and the timestep.

1.33.8.3.5 Zone Radiant HVAC Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the mass flow rate of water through the low temperature radiant system in kilo-
grams per second. This should be identical to the pump flow rate for the system.
1638 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.8.3.6 Zone Radiant HVAC Injection Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the mass flow rate of water that is injected into the radiant system from the main
loop. A valve will control the injection and recirculation mass flow rates (see next field) to match
the temperature controls specified by the user and dictated by the current simulation conditions.

1.33.8.3.7 Zone Radiant HVAC Recirculation Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the mass flow rate of water that is recirculated from the radiant system outlet and
mixed with the injection flow from the main loop. A valve will control the injection and recirculation
mass flow rates (see next field) to match the temperature controls specified by the user and dictated
by the current simulation conditions.

1.33.8.3.8 Zone Radiant HVAC Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of water entering the low temperature radiant system in Celsius.
This may differ from the inlet node temperature for the component since this component has its own
local secondary loop.

1.33.8.3.9 Zone Radiant HVAC Outlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of water leaving the low temperature radiant system in Celsius.
This may differ from the outlet node temperature for the component since this component has its
own local secondary loop.

1.33.8.3.10 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Inlet Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of water entering the low temperature radiant system pump in
Celsius. This may differ from the inlet node temperature for the component since this component
has its own local secondary loop. It is assumed that the pump is upstream of the radiant system.

1.33.8.3.11 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the rate of electric power consumption for the pump which supplies flow to the
constant flow radiant system in Watts.

1.33.8.3.12 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the electric power consumption for the pump which supplies flow to the constant
flow radiant system in Joules.

1.33.8.3.13 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the mass flow rate of water through the low temperature radiant system pump in
kilograms per second. This should be identical to the flow rate for the system.

1.33.8.3.14 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Rate [W]
This field reports the rate at which heat is added to the fluid stream as it passes through the pump
in Watts. This heat is reflected in the radiant system inlet temperature which will be different from
the pump inlet temperature if this field has a non-zero value.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1639

1.33.8.3.15 Zone Radiant HVAC Pump Fluid Heat Gain Energy [J]
This field reports the amount of heat energy added to the fluid stream as it passes through the pump
in Joules. This heat is reflected in the radiant system inlet temperature which will be different from
the pump inlet temperature if this field has a non-zero value.

1.33.8.3.16 Zone Radiant HVAC Moisture Condensation Time [s]

This field reports the amount of time when condensation is occurring. When using the Off conden-
sation control, this simply reports the amount of time when condensation occurs. When using the
SimpleOff condensation control, this indicates the amount of time when the system has been shut
off because of the potential danger of condensation.

1.33.8.3.17 Zone Radiant HVAC Cooling Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy for the cooling fluid connection, in Joules.

1.33.8.3.18 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Fluid Heat Transfer Energy [J]
The heat transfer energy for the heating fluid connection, in Joules.

1.33.8.3.19 Zone Radiant HVAC Running Mean Outdoor Dry-Bulb Temperature

[C]
This field reports the current running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature in Celsius. This value
is used to control the constant flow low temperature radiant system when the user opts to use the
RunningMeanOutdoorDryBulbTemperature control type.

1.33.8.3.20 Zone Radiant HVAC Previous Day Running Mean Outdoor Dry-
Bulb Temperature [C]
This field reports the running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature of the previous day in Celsius.
This value is used to calculate the running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature when the user opts
to use the RunningMeanOutdoorDryBulbTemperature control type.

1.33.8.3.21 Zone Radiant HVAC Previous Day Average Outdoor Dry-Bulb Tem-
perature [C]
This field reports the average of the outdoor dry-bulb temperature for the previous day in Celsius.
This value is used to calculate the running mean outdoor dry-bulb temperature when the user opts
to use the RunningMeanOutdoorDryBulbTemperature control type.

1.33.9 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:Electric
This low temperature radiant system (electric) is a component of zone equipment that is intended
to model any “radiant system” where electric resistance heating is used to supply energy (heat) to a
building surface (wall, ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled by the radiant system controls
that are defined in the syntax below and this control does not require the use of a zone thermostat
unless the unit is being autosized. Note also that because this unit does not require a thermostat
that in cases where no other systems are serving the zone in which this system resides that it will
1640 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

use the heating equipment priority to determine which system will run first. If the radiant system is
serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order established
by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the
radiant system.
The control is accomplished by varying the electrical power supplied to the unit. This model covers
either a radiant panel system or wires embedded in entire walls, floors, or ceilings. It is not intended to
simulate high temperature electric or gas radiant heaters. Those devices will be handled by a separate
model (ref: ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant) and different input syntax. Low temperature
radiant systems that use water flowing through tubes to provide heat to the system should also
be defined using separate input syntax (ref: ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow or
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:ConstantFlow).

1.33.9.1 Inputs

1.33.9.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of an electric low temperature radiant
system. Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.

1.33.9.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the electric low temper-
ature radiant system can operate during a given time period. A schedule value less than or equal to
0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0
(usually 1 is used) denotes that the unit is available to operate during that time period. If this field
is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.9.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) in which the electric low temperature radiant system
is principally located and intended to affect. A system that is between two zones will still act upon
each zone; however, the zone name referenced here should be the zone that controls the radiant
system response.

1.33.9.1.4 Field: Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name

This field is the name of the surface (Ref: BuildingSurface) or surface list (Ref: Zone-
HVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:SurfaceGroup) in which the heating element is embedded/con-
tained. This specification attaches the source or sink from the radiant system to a particular surface
and the contribution of the system to the heat balances of that surface. If this field is a surface
list, then the source or sink is attached to all of the surfaces in the list with the radiant system
surface group defining the breakdown of how energy flow is split between the various surfaces.
Note also that surfaces in a list do not need to be in the same zone or in the zone being served
by this system (see previous field). Base surfaces (e.g., BuildingSurface:Detailed, Wall:Detailed,
RoofCeiling:Detailed, etc.), door surfaces and internal mass are valid. Window surfaces are not
valid surface types for embedded radiant systems.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1641

1.33.9.1.5 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the maximum electrical power (heating design capacity ) or en-
ter the method for scalable sizing the maximum electrical power of low temperature radiant electric
unit. Input allowed is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionOfAuto-
sizedHeatingCapacity. If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed. Heat-
ingDesignCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of maximum or nominal heating capacity or
the program calculates the maximum or nominal design heating capacity if autosize is specified.
CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified
heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the zone served by the low temperature radiant
electric unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means the program calculates the design heating
capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design heating capacity. The default method
is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.33.9.1.6 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the maximum amount of electric energy rate (electric power) converted into heat
in low temperature radiant electric unit in watts. This input field is autosizable. The controls for
the radiant system will vary the amount of power supplied to the surface between zero input and
the maximum power specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively. Note that
if the user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would be used for a
forced air system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone thermostat value
and not on the low temperature radiant electric unit control values. The default input for this input
field is autosize.

1.33.9.1.7 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of low temperature radiant electric system.
This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. The
program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the low temperature
radiant electric unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This
field may be left blank.

1.33.9.1.8 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity of low temperature radiant
electric unit. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is FractionO-
fAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design autosized
heating capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing must be specified. This field may be
left blank. The default value is 1.0.

1.33.9.1.9 Field: Temperature Control Type

This field specifies along with setpoint (control) and water schedules how the user wishes to control
the constant flow radiant system. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one
of seven different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature,
the zone operative temperature, the outdoor dry-bulb temperature, the outdoor wet-bulb temper-
ature, the radiant surface inside face temperature, or the radiant surface interior temperture. The
choice of temperature is controlled by the current field–temperature control type. The user must
select from the following options:
1642 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– MeanAirTemperature - The mean air temperature of the zone being controlled by this radiant
system.
– MeanRadiantTemperature - The mean radiant temperature of the zone being controlled by
this radiant system.
– OperativeTemperature - The operative temperature of the zone being controlled by the radint
system. Operative temperature for radiant system controls is the average of Mean Air Tem-
perature and Mean Radiant Temperature.
– OutdoorDryBulbTemperature - The outdoor dry-bulb temperature of the current outdoor en-
vironment.
– OutdoorWetBulbTemperature - The outdoor wet-bulb temperature of the current outdoor
environment.
– SurfaceFaceTemperature - This option allows the user to control the radiant system using the
inside face surface temperature of the radiant system (the inside surface temperature).
– SurfaceInteriorTemperature - This option will allow the user to control the radiant system
using a surface temperature that is calculated inside the radiant system. This point will
be defined by the ConstructionProperty:InternalHeatSource description for the system. In
that input, the user has the option to calculate a temperature at a particular point in the
construction. The radiant system will then use this information for controlling the slab not
just producing temperatures for outputting at that point. Users should consult the input for
Field: Temperature Calculation Requested After Layer Number for more information. Note
that for the SurfaceFaceTemperature and SurfaceInteriorTemperature the surface being used
for control is the surface listed above in the field for Surface Name. If the user enters a group of
surfaces for that input, the first surface in the radiant group is the surface for control purposes.

If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
See the throttling range and control temperature schedule fields below for more information on how
the setpoint temperature is established for this particular radiant system.

1.33.9.1.10 Field: Setpoint Control Type

This field has two options (ZeroFlowPower and HalfFlowPower) and is used to determine the re-
sponse of the low temperature radiant system at the setpoint temperature. The Heating Setpoint
Temperature Schedule Name (see below) defines a schedule for a temperature setpoint. The previous
field (Temperature Control Type) defines which temperature is being controlled to that setpoint.
This field determines the response of the system when the temperature being controlled is at the
temperature setpoint. When ZeroFlowPower is chosen for this field, then the system will assume
that it should shut off when the temperature controlled arrives at the setpoint. So, if Mean Air
Temperature control is used and it becomes equal to the setpoint temperature, then the system will
turn off. When HalfFlowPower is chosen for this field, then the system will assume that it should
be at half of the maximum water flow when it achieves the setpoint condition.

1.33.9.1.11 Field: Heating Throttling Range

This field specifies the range of temperature in degrees Celsuis over which the radiant system throttles
from zero flow heat input via the electric resistance wires up to the maximum defined by the maximum
electrical power field described above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the
control temperature and the setpoint type to define the response of the system to various conditions.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1643

The Heating Setpoint Temperature Schedule specifies the “setpoint” temperature that is to be met.
This is used in conjunction with the Setpoint Type which defines whether the flow rate of the system
is at zero heat input or half heat input when the parameter defined by the Temperature Control
Type is equal to the setpoint temperature defined by the Heating Control Temperature Schedule.
See these other input parameters of this radiant system for more information on these different
parameters. Note that when the throttling range is set to zero that this approximates an on-off
system that is either fully on or totally off.
For clarity, here is an example of how the heat input fraction (of the unit capacity) to the system will
be set. In this example, it is assumed that heating control temperature setpoint is currently 15°C,
the heating throttling range is 2°C, and that the setpoint type is HalfFlowPower. The heat input
rate to the radiant system will be zero when the controlling temperature (MAT, MRT, Operative
Temperature, etc.; see control type field above) is at or above 16°C and the maximum heat input
when the controlling temperature is at or below 14°C. This represents a throttling range of 2°C
around the setpoint of 15°C. In between 14°C and 16°C, the heat input rate to the radiant system
is varied linearly from full heat input at a control temperature of 14°C to half heat input at 15°C
to zero heat input at 16°C. If the throttling range is changed to 0°C or on-off control, then the
system will be off above 15°C and on below 15°C. However, if the throttling range is kept at 2°C and
the setpoint type is changed to ZeroFlowPower, then the system will vary the heat input linearly
between zero for when the control temperature is at 15°C to full heat input at 13°C.

1.33.9.1.12 Field: Heating Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the heating setpoint or control temperature for the radiant system in degrees
Celsius. Used in conjunction with the previous field (heating throttling range), it will define whether
or not the system is running and the current power input to the radiant surface. Power input to
the system is varied linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the throttling range and the
maximum electrical power parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will
allow different setpoint temperatures throughout the year for heating. In addition, this schedule may
be different that the thermostatic control schedule defined for overall operation of components serving
the zone in which the radiant system is located. The thermostatic control determines whether or not
there is a heating or cooling load in the space and thus whether the systems should be operating.
This field simply controls the flow rate to the radiant system.
An example IDF with an electric low temperature radiant system is shown below.

ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant :Electric ,

Zone 2 Radiant Floor , !- Name
RadiantPanelAvailSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
EAST ZONE , !- Zone name (name of zone system is serving)
Zn002:Flr001 , !- Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name
HeatingDesignCapacity , !- Heating Design Capacity Method
10000 , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W/m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ - }
MeanAirTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type (control on mean air temperature
)
HalfFlowPower , !- Setpoint Control Type
2.0 , !- Heating Throttling Range { deltaC }
Radiant Heating Setpoints ; !- Heating Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

1.33.9.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Rate [W]

1644 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum, Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Energy [J]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

1.33.9.2.1 Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which electric energy is “burned” in the low temperature radiant system
in Watts. This is the heat source to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The heating
rate is determined by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user input.

1.33.9.2.2 Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of electric energy “burned” in the low temperature radiant system in
Joules. This is the heat source to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The heating rate
is determined by the zone conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and the timestep.

1.33.9.2.3 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]

1.33.9.2.4 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

These outputs are the heating provided by the low temperature radiant system to the zone, in Watts
or Joules.

1.33.10 ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:SurfaceGroup
A low temperature radiant system (hydronic or electric) may consist of multiple active surfaces that
serve to condition the space. Surfaces that act serially can be specified as multiple radiant systems
using the standard radiant system input described above. However, if the multiple surfaces act in
parallel, the Radiant System Surface Group input line is used to specify which surfaces are acting
in a coordinated fashion and how energy flow is split between the surfaces. This list of surfaces
(the name it is assigned) replaces the name of a single surface in the radiant system input described
above. Note that all of the surfaces within a single list do not need to be in the same zone so the
zones of these surfaces do not need to match the zone the radiant system is attempting to condition.
Keep in mind, however, that if the surfaces within a single surface group do not reside in the zone
that these zones must all have the same zone multipliers.

1.33.10.1 Inputs

1.33.10.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for the list of surfaces that are acting in coordination
with one another. Any reference to this list by a radiant system will use this name.

1.33.10.1.2 Field Set: Surface Name, Flow Fraction to Surface

The pairs of Surface Name, Flow Fraction to Surface are used in several objects. There can be up
to 10 specified. This object is extensible, so additional pairs of these fields can be added to the end
of this object.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1645

1.33.10.1.3 Field: Surface <x> Name

This field is the name of a surface being conditioned by the radiant system. It should be noted that
the surfaces listed in this field do not need to be present in the zone being served by the radiant
system to which this surface is related. This allows radiant systems to span more than one zone and
have surfaces controlled by conditions in another zone. When the user does select surfaces that are
in different zones than the zone being served by the radiant system, a warning message is generated
to alert the user that the surface is not in the same zone as the zone being served by the radiant
system. If this is the intent of the user, this warning message can be ignored. Base surfaces (e.g.,
BuildingSurface:Detailed), door surfaces and internal mass are valid. Window surfaces are not valid
surface types for embedded radiant systems.

1.33.10.1.4 Field: Flow Fraction for Surface <x>

This field is the fraction of the total radiant system flow rate that is being sent to this particular
surface. Note that the Surface Name/Surface Flow Fraction pair can be repeated up to 10 times.
Flow rate fractions must sum to unity, otherwise the program will not accept the input as valid.
An example IDF with an electric low temperature radiant system is shown below.

ZoneHVAC: LowTemperatureRadiant :SurfaceGroup ,

Zone 1 Radiant Surfaces , !- name of surface list
Zn001:Flr001 , !- Surface name 1
0.75, !- Flow fraction for surface 1
Zn002:Flr002 , !- Surface name 2
0.25; !- Flow fraction for surface 2

1.33.11 ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant
The high temperature radiant system (gas-fired or electric) is a component of zone equipment that
is intended to model any “high temperature” or “high intensity” radiant system where electric
resistance or gas-fired combustion heating is used to supply energy (heat) to a building occupants
directly as well as the building surfaces (wall, ceiling, or floor). The component is controlled by
the radiant system controls defined in the syntax below and this control does not require the use
of a zone thermostat unless the unit is being autosized. Note also that because this unit does not
require a thermostat that in cases where no other systems are serving the zone in which this system
resides that it will use the heating equipment priority to determine which system will run first. If
the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the
priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls
defined by the user for the radiant system.
The control is accomplished by varying the electrical power supplied to or gas consumed by the unit.
It is not intended to simulate low temperature electric or hydronic radiant systems. Those devices
will be handled by a separate model and different input syntax (ref: the low temperature systems
described elsewhere).

1.33.11.1 Inputs

1.33.11.1.1 Field: Name

This field is an unique user assigned name for an instance of the high temperature radiant system.
Any reference to this unit by another object will use this name.
1646 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.11.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the high temperature
radiant system can operate during a given time period. A schedule value less than or equal to 0
(usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0
(usually 1 is used) denotes that the unit is available to operate during that time period. If this field
is left blank, the schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.11.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) in which the high temperature radiant system is
principally located and intended to affect.

1.33.11.1.4 Field: Heating Design Capacity Method

Enter the method used to determine the maximum electrical power (heating design capacity ) or
enter the method for scalable sizing the maximum electrical power of high temperature radiant
system unit. Input allowed is either HeatingDesignCapacity, CapacityPerFloorArea, and FractionO-
fAutosizedHeatingCapacity. If this input field is left blank or zero, then autosizing is assumed.
HeatingDesignCapacity means user specifies the magnitude of maximum or nominal heating capac-
ity or the program calculates the maximum or nominal design heating capacity if autosize is specified.
CapacityPerFloorArea means the program calculates the design heating capacity from user specified
heating capacity per floor area and floor area of the zone served by the high temperature radiant
electric unit. FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity means the program calculates the design heating
capacity from user specified fraction and the auto-sized design heating capacity. The default method
is HeatingDesignCapacity.

1.33.11.1.5 Field: Heating Design Capacity {W}

This field is for the maximum amount of electric energy rate (electric power) converted into heat in
high temperature radiant electric unit in watts. This input field is autosizable. The controls for the
radiant system will vary the amount of power supplied to the surface between zero input and the
maximum power specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively. Note that if the
user elects to autosize this field that a standard zone thermostat such as would be used for a forced
air system must be defined as autosizing calculations are based on the zone thermostat value and
not on the radiant system control values. The default input for this field is autosize.

1.33.11.1.6 Field: Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area {W/m2}

Enter the heating capacity per unit floor area in m3/s-m2 of high temperature radiant electric unit.
This field is required field when the Heating Design Capacity Method is CapacityPerFloorArea. The
program calculates the heating capacity from floor area of the zone served by the high temperature
radiant electric unit and the heating capacity per unit floor area value specified by the user. This
field may be left blank.

1.33.11.1.7 Field: Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity

Enter the heating capacity as a fraction of the autosized heating capacity for high temperature
radiant electric unit. This input field is required when the Heating Design Capacity Method is
FractionOfAutosizedHeatingCapacity. The program calculates the heating capacity from the design
autosized heating capacity and user specified fraction. Design day sizing run must be specified. This
field may be left blank. The default value is 1.0.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1647

1.33.11.1.8 Field: Fuel Type

This field denotes the type of high temperature radiant heater: gas or electric. The user must specify
this by inputting either the keyword “NaturalGas” or “Electricity” for this field.

1.33.11.1.9 Field: Combustion Efficiency

This field is the combustion efficiency for a gas high temperature radiant heater. This value should
be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1. It is intended to take into account any potential
inefficiencies in the combustion process inside the radiant heater. The heater gas consumption is the
ratio of heater output over the combustion efficiency. This parameter has no meaning for an electric
high temperature radiant heater and is ignored when the previous field is equal to “Electric”.

1.33.11.1.10 Field: Fraction of Input Converted to Radiant Energy

This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the high temperature radiant heater is actually
radiant heat transfer. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. In conjunction with the next two
parameters, it defines the breakdown of how the power input to the heater is distributed to the rest
of the zone. The sum of these fractions must be less than or equal to 1. If the fractions are less
than one, the remaining energy is added to the zone as convective heat transfer. The radiant heat
transfer from the heat is distributed to people and surfaces using the distribution fractions listed
below.

1.33.11.1.11 Field: Fraction of Input Converted to Latent Energy

This field specifies the fraction of the power input to the high temperature radiant heater that is
converted to a latent heat gain within the space. This may be appropriate when a combustion
process produces moisture that is transferred into the space. The latent heat addition from a high
temperature radiant heater is handled as any other latent heat gain within the space, affecting the
moisture balance on the zone air.

1.33.11.1.12 Field: Fraction of Input that Is Lost

This field specifies the fraction of power input to the high temperature radiant heater that is “lost”.
This energy is a loss term, and this fraction of the input power has no effect on the zone heat
balances.

1.33.11.1.13 Field: Temperature control type

This field specifies along with the throttling range and setpoint schedules how the user wishes to
control the high temperature radiant system. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can
refer to one of three different temperatures: a mean air temperature, a mean radiant temperature, or
an operative temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the current field—temperature
control type. The user must select from the following options:

– MeanAirTemperature
– MeanRadiantTemperature
– OperativeTemperature
– MeanAirTemperatureSetpoint
– MeanRadiantTemperatureSetpoint
1648 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– OperativeTemperatureSetpoint

If the user does not select a control type, OperativeTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
For the setpoint control strategies (those ending in Setpoint above), EnergyPlus will attempt to find
the correct heater output to meet the heating setpoint temperature (see below) through iteration and
interpolation. This will more closely match the operation of an actual thermostat, but it will require
significantly longer execution times. For more information on the standard piecewise linear control
algorithm used by the Mean Air Temperature, Mean Radiant Temperature, and Operative Temper-
ature control types (the “non-Setpoint” controls), see the throttling range and control temperature
schedule fields below for more information.

1.33.11.1.14 Field: Heating Throttling Range

This field specifies the range of temperature in degrees Celsuis over which the radiant system throttles
from zero heat input via the electric resistance wires up to the maximum defined by the maximum
electrical power field described above. The throttling range parameter is used in conjunction with the
control temperature (see below) to define the response of the system to various zone conditions. The
heating control temperature schedule specifies the “setpoint” temperature where the power input to
the system is at half of the maximum power input. For example, if the heating control temperature
setpoint is currently 15°C and the heating throttling range is 2°C, the electrical power supplied to
the radiant system will be zero when the controlling temperature (Mean Air Temperature, Mean
Radiant Temperature, and Operative Temperature; see control type field above) is at or above 16°C
and the maximum power input when the controlling temperature is at or below 14°C. This represents
a throttling range of 2°C around the setpoint of 15°C. In between 14°C and 16°C, the power input
to the radiant system is varied linearly.

1.33.11.1.15 Field: Heating Setpoint Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the heating setpoint or control temperature for the radiant system in degrees
Celsius. Used in conjunction with the previous field (heating throttling range), it will define whether
or not the system is running and the current power input to the radiant surface. Power input to
the system is varied linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the throttling range and the
maximum electrical power parameters (see above). It should be noted that this control schedule will
allow different setpoint temperatures throughout the year for heating. In addition, this schedule may
be different that the thermostatic control schedule defined for overall operation of components serving
the zone in which the radiant system is located. The thermostatic control determines whether or not
there is a heating or cooling load in the space and thus whether the systems should be operating.
This field simply controls the flow rate to the radiant system.

1.33.11.1.16 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy Incident on People

This field specifies the fraction of radiant heat transfer to the zone from the radiant heater that is
incident directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted thermal comfort
of the zone occupants. Note that since the thermal comfort models only use the results of the zone
heat balances this energy is accounted for within the heat balance as convective energy, directly
affecting the zone air heat balance. The basic assumption here is that most radiant energy falling
on people will most likely be convected to the surroundings. This is a simplification of reality, but
it maintains the overall energy balance.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1649

1.33.11.1.17 Field Set: Surface Name, Fraction of radiant energy to Surface

The pairs of Surface Name, Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface are used in several objects. There
can be up to 20 specified.

1.33.11.1.18 Field: Surface <x> Name

This field is the name of the first surface to which radiant heat transfer from the high temperature
radiant heater is distributed. Used in conjunction with the next field, it helps to define the distri-
bution of the radiant energy on the surfaces within the zone. Note that up to 20 pairs of surface
names and corresponding fractions may be entered for a single radiant heater system.

1.33.11.1.19 Field: Fraction of Radiant Energy to Surface <x>

This field is paired with the preceding surface name (previous field) to define the fraction of radiant
heat transfer leaving the high temperature radiant system that is incident on a particular surface.
Users should take into account the directionality of high temperature radiant heaters and their
location when defining the value for this input field. Note that the sum of all fractions plus the
fraction of radiant energy incident on people must add up to 1 so that all radiant energy is taken
into account and none of it is ”lost”.
An example IDF with a high temperature radiant system is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant , Zone 2 Radiant Heater ,

RadiantPanelAvailSched , !- Availability schedule
EAST ZONE , !- Zone name (name of zone system is serving)
10000 , !- Heating Design Capacity{ W }
, !- Heating Design Capacity Per Floor Area{ W / m2 }
, !- Fraction of Autosized Heating Design Capacity{ -}
Gas , !- type of heater (either gas or electric)
0.8, !- combustion efficiency (ignored for electric radiant
heaters)
0.80, !- fraction radiant
0.00, !- fraction latent
0.00, !- fraction lost
OperativeTemperature , !- temperature control type (controls on operative
temperature)
2.0 , !- heating throttling range (in C)
Radiant Heating Setpoints , !- heating setpoint temperatures
0.04, !- fraction of radiant energy that is incident directly on
people
Zn002:Flr001 , 0.80, !- fraction of radiant energy that is incident on the surface
indicated
Zn002:Wall001 , 0.04, !- fraction of radiant energy that is incident on the surface
indicated
Zn002:Wall002 , 0.04, !- fraction of radiant energy that is incident on the surface
indicated
Zn002:Wall003 , 0.04, !- fraction of radiant energy that is incident on the surface
indicated
Zn002:Wall004 , 0.04; !- fraction of radiant energy that is incident on the surface
indicated

1.33.11.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Gas Rate [W]
1650 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum, Zone Radiant HVAC Gas Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average, Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Energy [J]

1.33.11.2.1 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which energy is transferred from the high temperature radiant system
to the zone in Watts. This rate is determined by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined
in the user input. Note that this amount takes into account any combustion inefficiency and thus
could be different that the gas consumption rate in a high temperature gas radiant system.

1.33.11.2.2 Zone Radiant HVAC Heating Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of energy transferred from the high temperature gas radiant system
to the zone in Joules. This amount is determined by the zone conditions, the control scheme defined
in the user input, and the timestep. Note that this amount takes into account any combustion
inefficiency and thus could be different that the gas consumption in a high temperature gas radiant
system.

1.33.11.2.3 Zone Radiant HVAC Gas Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which gas is “burned” in a high temperature gas radiant system in
Watts. This rate is determined by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user
input.

1.33.11.2.4 Zone Radiant HVAC Gas Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of gas “burned” in a high temperature gas radiant system in Joules.
This amount is determined by the zone conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and
the timestep.

1.33.11.2.5 Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the rate at which electric energy is “burned” in a high temperature electric radiant
system in Watts. This rate is determined by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in
the user input.

1.33.11.2.6 Zone Radiant HVAC Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the amount of electric energy “burned” in a high temperature electric radiant
system in Joules. This amount is determined by the zone conditions, the control scheme defined in
the user input, and the timestep.

1.33.12 ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab
Ventilated slab systems in general use outdoor air to “precool” slabs with colder nighttime air. This
method of precooling the thermal mass of a space can be very effective when nighttime temperatures
are low and the mass of the system is high enough to provide a significant amount of cooling potential
during the day to counteract internal heat gains within a zone. Nearly all ventilated slabs are simple
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1651

systems such as that shown in the right side of Figure 1.162. The fan is shown in a blow through
position, but the model will allow either a blow or draw through configuration.

Figure 1.162: Ventilated Slab model - basic system

1.33.12.1 Inputs

1.33.12.1.1 Field: Name

This field is a unique user assigned name for an instance of a ventilated slab system. Any reference
to this unit by another object will use this name. Other objects that use this ventilated slab system
will reference it by this name.

1.33.12.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

This field is the name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the ventilated slab system
can run during a given time period. A schedule value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used)
denotes that the unit must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used)
denotes that the unit is available to operate during that time period. If this field is left blank, the
schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.33.12.1.3 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone (Ref: Zone) in which the ventilated slab system is principally
located and intended to affect. A system that is between two zones will still act upon each zone;
however, the zone name referenced here should be the zone that controls the system response.

1.33.12.1.4 Field: Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name

This field is the name of the surface (Ref: Surface) or surface list (Ref: ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup)
in which the hollow cores are embedded/contained. This specification attaches the source or sinks
from the radiant system to a particular surface and the contribution of the system to the heat
balances of that surface. If this field is a surface list, then the source or sink is attached to all
of the surfaces in the list with the radiant system surface group defining the breakdown of how
flow rate is split between the various surfaces. Only base surfaces (Walls, Roofs, Floors) are valid.
Window/Door surfaces and Internal Mass are not valid surface types for embedded radiant systems.
1652 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Figure 1.163: Example operating schedule for Ventilated Slab

1.33.12.1.5 Field: Maximum Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the maximum volumetric flow rate of air through the ventilated
slab system in m3 /sec. This parameter should be some real number greater than zero.

1.33.12.1.6 Field: Outdoor Air Control Type

This field allows the user to control how outdoor air is used in the ventilated slab system. The
ventilated slab system described by this syntax has its own outdoor air handler. The three options for
outdoor air control are “VariablePercent”, “FixedTemperature” and “FixedAmount”. Those
keywords are the only allowed choices for this parameter. In general, the variable percent control
will attempt to vary the amount of outdoor air between some minimum and maximum schedules of
fractions (see next two fields) to best meet the current heating or cooling load. The fixed temperature
control will vary the amount of outdoor air between the minimum schedule (fraction of maximum,
see next field) and 100% available outdoor air to come as close as possible to a desired mixed
air temperature (see two fields down) that can be scheduled. The fixed amount control will fix
the outdoor air flow rate as minimum outdoor air flow rate and schedule specified by the user and
automatically set the maximum and minimum outside flow rate to be equal by ignoring the maximum
outdoor air flow rate. More information on the controls and operation of the ventilated slab are given
in the section above (preceding the IDF description).

1.33.12.1.7 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the minimum volumetric flow rate of outdoor air (in m3 /sec) that
will be brought in to the ventilated slab. The actual minimum outdoor air flow rate will be this
number multiplied by the schedule value from the minimum outdoor air schedule. If “FixedAmount”
type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, the outdoor air flow rate will be fixed at the
value of this field and the ventilated slab will automatically set the maximum and minimum outside
flow rate to be equal by ignoring the maximum outdoor air flow rate.

1.33.12.1.8 Field: Minimum Outdoor Air Schedule Name

1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1653

This field contains a schedule name (ref: Schedule) that should contain values for the minimum
outdoor air used by the ventilated slab system for IAQ or other reasons. Note that if the ventilated
slab is scheduled off or if there is no load sensed in the zone that the system will not operate even
to achieve the minimum air fraction. However, if the system is operating, it will always bring
in at least this fraction of the minimum air flow rate (see minimum air flow rate field above). If
“FixedAmount” type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, the actual outdoor air flow
rate will be this number multiplied by the minimum outdoor air flow rate in the field above. The
ventilated slab will automatically set the maximum and minimum outdoor air schedule to be equal
by ignoring the maximum outdoor air schedule.

1.33.12.1.9 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate

This field allows the user to enter the maximum volumetric flow rate of outdoor air that can be
brought into the ventilated slab in m3 /sec. This parameter should be some real number greater
than zero. Note that the value for this parameter may be less than the maximum air flow rate of the
ventilated slab and this may affect the maximum fraction of outdoor air within the control strategy
defined above. This parameter is an absolute maximum and will supercede any scheduled fraction
of the ventilated slab maximum airflow rate. If “FixedAmount” type is selected as the outdoor air
control strategy, this field will be ignored and be automatically set to be equal to the minimum
outdoor air flow rate specified in the field above.

1.33.12.1.10 Field: Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction or Temperature Schedule

Name
This field can have one of two meanings depending the type of control selected in the outdoor air
control type parameter above. If “VariablePercent” or “FixedAmount” was selected, then this field
is a schedule name (ref: Schedule) corresponding to a maximum air fraction schedule. Furthermore,
if “FixedAmount” type is selected as the outdoor air control strategy, this field will be ignored and be
automatically set to be equal to the minimum outdoor air fraction specified in the field below. Note
that this is a fraction of the maximum airflow rate field (see parameter above) for the ventilated slab.
If “FixedTemperature” control was selected, then this field is still a schedule name (ref: Schedule),
but it corresponds to a schedule of mixed air temperatures that the outdoor air control will try to
attain.

1.33.12.1.11 Field: System Configuration Type

This field allows the user to control how the air is circulated using the ventilated slab system. The
options for system configuration are

– SlabOnly
– SlabAndZone
– SeriesSlabs

In the SlabOnly, the ventilation air is sent to the slab only and does not enter the zone. In
the SlabAndZone, the air first enters the slab and then is delivered to the zone before
returning to the system. With the SeriesSlabs option, the user specifies a list of slabs (Zone-
HVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup). This list determines the order of slabs through which the air
passes. In this option, air is not delivered to any zone.
1654 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.12.1.12 Field: Hollow Core Inside Diameter

This field is the inside diameter of the cores through which air is circulated for the system being
defined by this statement. The inside diameter should be recorded in meters and is used to determine
the convective heat transfer from the circulated air to the inside surface of the ventilated slab.

1.33.12.1.13 Field: Hollow Core Length

This field is the length of core embedded in the surface named above in the surface name field. In
other words, this should be the distance that air travels as it through the slab. The length of the
hollow core in the slab should be entered in meters and is used to determine the effectiveness of heat
transfer from the air being circulated through the cores and the core inside surface. Longer core
lengths result in more heat transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.

1.33.12.1.14 Field: Number of Cores

This field allows the user to specify how many cores there are in the ventilated slab. Air flow will
be divided equally among the different cores.

1.33.12.1.15 Field: Temperature Control Type

This field specifies along with the throttling range and setpoint schedules how the user wishes to
control the ventilated slab system. The temperature denoted in the set temperature schedule can
refer to one of seven different temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant
temperature, the zone operative temperature, the surface temperature of the ventilated slab, the
outdoor dry-bulb temperature, the outdoor wet-bulb temperature, or the dewpoint temperature
of zone mean air temperature. The choice of temperature is controlled by the current field—
temperature control type. The user must select from the following options:

– MeanAirTemperature
– MeanRadiantTemperature
– OperativeTemperature
– OutdoorDryBulbTemperature
– OutdoorWetBulbTemperature
– SurfaceTemperature
– ZoneAirDewPointTemperature

If the user does not select a control type, MeanAirTemperature control is assumed by EnergyPlus.
See the control temperature schedule fields below for more information.

1.33.12.1.16 Field: Heating High Air Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high air temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
ventilated slab system. Air and control temperatures for heating work together to provide a lin-
ear function that determines the air temperature sent to the ventilated slab. The current control
temperature (see Temperature Control Type above) is compared to the high and low control tem-
peratures at the current time. If the control temperature is above the high temperature, then
the inlet air temperature is set to the low air temperature. If the control temperature is below the
low temperature, then the inlet air temperature is set to the high air temperature. If the control
temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet air temperature is linearly interpolated
between the low and high air temperature values.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1655

1.33.12.1.17 Field: Heating Low Air Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low air temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
ventilated slab. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating High Air Temperature
Schedule above.

1.33.12.1.18 Field: Heating High Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of
a ventilated slab. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating High Air Temperature
Schedule above.

1.33.12.1.19 Field: Heating Low Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of
a ventilated slab. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating High Air Temperature
Schedule above.

1.33.12.1.20 Field: Cooling High Air Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high air temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
ventilated slab system. Air and control temperatures for cooling work together to provide a linear
function that determines the air temperature sent to the ventilated slab system. The current con-
trol temperature (see Temperature Control Type above) is compared to the high and low control
temperatures at the current time. If the control temperature is above the high temperature, then
the inlet air temperature is set to the low air temperature. If the control temperature is below the
low temperature, then the inlet air temperature is set to the high air temperature. If the control
temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet air temperature is linearly interpolated
between the low and high air temperature values.

1.33.12.1.21 Field: Cooling Low Air Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low air temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow cooling radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High
Air Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.12.1.22 Field: Cooling High Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the high control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
constant flow cooling radiant system. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High
Air Temperature Schedule above.

1.33.12.1.23 Field: Cooling Low Control Temperature Schedule Name

This field specifies the low control temperature in degrees Celsius for the temperature control of a
ventilated slab system. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling High Air Temperature
Schedule above.
1656 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.12.1.24 Field: Return Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the zone return air inlet to the
ventilated slab system. This node is one of the inlets to the outdoor air mixer which is implicit in the
ventilated slab system model. For “SlabAndZone” configuration, the Return Air Node will typically
be the same node as a zone exhaust node. For “SlabOnly” or “SeriesSlabs” configuration, this node
name is required but will have zero flow.

1.33.12.1.25 Field: Slab In Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the inlet of the ventilated slab or
series of slabs, after the outdoor air mixer, fan, and optional coils.

1.33.12.1.26 Field: Zone Supply Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the outlet from the ventilated slab
system to the zone when using the “SlabAndZone” configuration. It is the node exiting the slab
section of the system. This node will typically be the same node as a zone inlet node. In the case of
“SlabOnly” or “SeriesSlabs” configuration, this field will be ignored and it should be left BLANK.

1.33.12.1.27 Field: Outdoor Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with fresh outdoor air brought into the
ventilated slab system outdoor air mixer. This node should also be specified in an OutdoorAir:Node
or OutdoorAir:NodeList object.

1.33.12.1.28 Field: Relief Air Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with air exhausted out of the ventilated
slab system to the outdoor environment.

1.33.12.1.29 Field: Outdoor Air Mixer Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node associated with the “mixed” air of the ventilated
slab. These conditions are post-“mixing box” since they are the conditions of the fraction of return
air combined with the outdoor air. Since this is a simple system, this can also be viewed as the
conditions of the air being sent to the coils.

1.33.12.1.30 Field: Fan Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name used to identify the node that serves as the air outlet from the fan.

1.33.12.1.31 Field: Fan Name

This field is the name of a fan (ref: Fan:SystemModel or Fan:ConstantVolume) that is part of the
ventilated slab system. This name links the ventilated slab to particular fan data entered elsewhere
in the input data file. A fan name is required since it is the prime mover of air in the ventilated slab
system.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1657

1.33.12.1.32 Field: Coil Option Type

This field allows the user to specify the coil operating options as one of the following options:

– None
– Heating
– Cooling
– HeatingAndCooling

If None is selected, the ventilated slab does not have any coils, and any other input will be ignored. If
either Heating or Cooling is selected, only a heating or cooling coil, respectively, is present. Thus,
only four more inputs will be expected. If HeatingAndCooling is selected, both heating and
cooling coil input must be entered, and the ventilated slab will have both a heating and a cooling
coil.

1.33.12.1.33 Field: Heating Coil Object Type

This field is the type of coil (ref: Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:Fuel,
Coil:Heating:Steam) that is used for heating in the ventilated slab system. This field must
be one of the following keywords: Coil:Heating:Water, Coil:Heating:Electric, Coil:Heating:Fuel,
Coil:Heating:Steam. It is used in conjunction with the heating coil name (see next field) to specify
the heating coil present within the system.

1.33.12.1.34 Field: Heating Coil Name

This field is the name of the heating coil that is part of the ventilated slab system. It is assumed
that there is always some sort of heating coil associated with a ventilated slab system. This name
links the ventilated slab to particular heating coil data entered elsewhere in the input data file.

1.33.12.1.35 Field: Hot Water or Steam Inlet Node Name

This field corresponds to the water inlet node to the heating coil for a water coil. The water inlet
node controls how a water heating coil operates. This field is ignored/not needed for gas and electric
heating coils.

1.33.12.1.36 Field: Cooling Coil Object Type

This field is the name of the cooling coil (ref: Coil:Cooling:Water, Coil:Cooling:Water:DetailedGeometry,
CoilSystem:Cooling:Water:HeatExchangerAssisted) that is part of the ventilated slab system. This
name links the ventilated slab system to particular cooling coil data entered elsewhere in the input
data file. If no cooling coil is present, the previous field may be followed by a semi-colon and the
remaining parameters in this statement may be ignored.

1.33.12.1.37 Field: Cooling Coil Name

This field is the name of the cooling coil that is part of the ventilated slab system. It is assumed
that there is always some sort of cooling coil associated with a ventilated slab system. This name
links the ventilated slab to particular cooling coil data entered elsewhere in the input data file.
1658 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.12.1.38 Field: Cold Water Inlet Node Name

This field corresponds to the water inlet node to the cooling coil. The water inlet node controls
how a water cooling coil operates and is required for the ventilated slab system that has a cooling
coil associated with it to function properly.

1.33.12.1.39 Field: Availability Manager List Name

This optional input field is the name of an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object. An Avail-
ability Manager Assignment List is a list of Availability Managers giving both Availability Manager
type and name. The availability managers in the list apply to this ventilated slab object’s fan. If
the ventilated slab is available (per the Availability Schedule Name input field above) and this input
field has a valid availability manager assignment list name, then the availability managers in the list
determine when and if the fan of this ventilated slab object should be on or off.

1.33.12.1.40 Field: Design Specification ZoneHVAC Sizing Object Name

This optional input field is the name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. The name
must correspond to unique name of a DesignSpecification:ZoneHVAC:Sizing object. A Design Sep-
cification Zone HVAC Sizing object defines scalable sizing methods for sizing input fields such as
Maximum Air Flow Rate in this Ventilated Slab zone HVAC object. The scaled Maximum Air Flow
Rate in turn is used to size cooling and heating capacity of the coils.
An example IDF with a ventilated slab is shown below.

ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab ,
Zone4VentSlab , !- Name
VentSlabAvailability , !- Availability Schedule Name
SPACE4 -1, !- Zone Name
F4 -1, !- Surface Name or Radiant Surface Group Name
0.84, !- Maximum Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VariablePercent , !- Outdoor Air Control Type
0.168 , !- Minimum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
U2MinOASched , !- Minimum Outdoor Air Schedule Name
0.84, !- Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
VentSlabMaxOA , !- Maximum Outdoor Air Fraction or Temperature Schedule Name
SlabAndZone , !- System Configuration Type
0.050 , !- Hollow Core Inside Diameter {m}
15.0, !- Hollow Core Length {m}
50.0, !- Number of Cores
MeanRadiantTemperature , !- Temperature Control Type
VentSlabHotHighAir , !- Heating High Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabHotLowAir , !- Heating Low Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabHotHighControl , !- Heating High Control Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabHotLowControl , !- Heating Low Control Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabCoolHighAir , !- Cooling High Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabCoolLowAir , !- Cooling Low Air Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabCoolHighControl , !- Cooling High Control Temperature Schedule Name
VentSlabCoolLowControl , !- Cooling Low Control Temperature Schedule Name
Zone4VentSlabReturnAirNode , !- Return Air Node Name
Zone4VentslabSlabInNode , !- Slab In Node Name
Zone4Inlets , !-Zone Supply Air Node Name
Zone4VentSlabOAInNode , !- Outdoor Air Node Name
Zone4VentSlabExhNode , !- Relief Air Node Name
Zone4VentSlabOAMixerOutletNode , !-Outdoor Air Mixer Outlet Node Name
Zone4VentSlabFanOutletNode , !- Fan Outlet Node Name
Zone4VentSlabFan , !- Fan Name
HeatingAndCooling , !- Coil Option Type
Coil:Heating:Electric , !- Heating Coil Object Type
Zone4VentSlabHeatingCoil ,!- Heating Coil Name
, !- Hot Water or Steam Inlet Node Name
Coil:Cooling:Water , !- Cooling Coil Object Type
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1659

Zone4VentSlabCoolingCoil ,!- Cooling Coil Name

Zone4VentSlabChWInletNode ; !- Cold Water Inlet Node Name

1.33.12.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Heating Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Ventilated Slab Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average, Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Inlet Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Outlet Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Zone Inlet Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Return Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Outlet Air Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Availability Status []

1.33.12.2.1 Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the radiant heating input rate of the ventilated slab system to the zone it is serving
in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the
ventilated slab system.

1.33.12.2.2 Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Heating Energy [J]

This field is the heating radiant input of the ventilated slab system to the zone it is serving in Joules
over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass
flow rate through the ventilated slab system, and the timestep.

1.33.12.2.3 Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the radiant cooling input rate to the ventilated slab system in Watts. This is the
heat sink to the surface that is defined as the ventilated slab system. The cooling rate is determined
by the zone conditions and the control scheme defined in the user input.
1660 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.33.12.2.4 Zone Ventilated Slab Radiant Cooling Energy [J]

This field reports the radiant cooling input to the ventilated slab system in Joules. This is the heat
sink to the surface that is defined as the radiant system. The cooling rate is determined by the zone
conditions, the control scheme defined in the user input, and the timestep.

1.33.12.2.5 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Heating Rate [W]

This field reports the heating input rate of the heating coil of ventilated slab system the zone it is
serving in Watts. This is determined by return air and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate
through the ventilation slab system.

1.33.12.2.6 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Heating Energy [J]

This field is the heating output of the heating coil of the ventilated slab system the zone it is serving
in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by return air and zone air conditions,
the mass flow rate through the ventilation slab system, and the timestep.

1.33.12.2.7 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the total cooling (sensible plus latent) output rate of the cooling coil of the
ventilated slab system to the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions and the mass flow rate through the ventilation slab system.

1.33.12.2.8 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) output of the cooling coil of the ventilated slab
system to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined
by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate through the ventilation slab system, and the
timestep.

1.33.12.2.9 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the sensible cooling output rate of the cooling coil of the ventilated slab system to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass
flow rate through the ventilation slab system.

1.33.12.2.10 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the sensible cooling output of the cooling coli of the ventilated slab system to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the ventilation slab system, and the timestep.

1.33.12.2.11 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This field reports the latent cooling output rate of the cooling coil of the ventilated slab system to
the zone it is serving in Watts. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass
flow rate through the ventilation slab system.
1.33. GROUP – RADIATIVE / CONVECTIVE UNITS 1661

1.33.12.2.12 Zone Ventilated Slab Coil Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the latent cooling output of the cooling coli of the ventilated slab system to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air
conditions, the mass flow rate through the ventilation slab system, and the timestep.

1.33.12.2.13 Zone Ventilated Slab Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This field reports the mass flow rate of air through the ventilated slab system in kilograms per
second.

1.33.12.2.14 Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field reports the electric power consumption rate of the fan of the ventilated slab system in
Watts.

1.33.12.2.15 Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field reports the electric power consumed by the fan of the ventilated slab system over the
timestep in Joules.

1.33.12.2.16 Zone Ventilated Slab Inlet Air Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of air entering the ventilated slab system in Celsius.

1.33.12.2.17 Zone Ventilated Slab Outlet Air Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of air leaving the ventilated slab system in Celsius.

1.33.12.2.18 Zone Ventilated Slab Zone Inlet Air Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of air entering the zone in Celsius.

1.33.12.2.19 Zone Ventilated Slab Return Air Temperature [C]

This field reports the temperature of air leaving the zone in Celsius. When system does not circulate
air to zone(“SlabOnly” Configuration), the slab outlet temperature and return air temperature will
be the same.

1.33.12.2.20 Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Outlet Air Temperature [C]

This field reports the fan outlet air temperature for the ventilated slab system in Celsius.

1.33.12.2.21 Zone Ventilated Slab Fan Availability Status []

This is the availability status of the ventilated slab fan. This status flag is a result of the calculations
made by the Availability Manager(s) listed in an AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList object and/or
calculations made by Hybrid Ventilation Manager object. The AvailabilityManagerAssignmentList
is an optional input in the ventilated slab object. When a single availability manager is used in
an Availability Manager Assignment List, this is also the availability status reported by the specific
availability manager (Ref. AvailabilityManager:* Outputs). For multiple availability managers in an
Availability Manager Assignment List along with Hybrid Ventilation Manager, rules to determine fan
1662 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

availability status are described in the section ‘Group – System Availability Managers’. The control
status outputs are represented using integers 0 through 3. These integers represent NoAction (0),
ForceOff (1), CycleOn (2), and CycleOnZoneFansOnly (3). Since the status output is averaged, the
output result may not correspond to the values described here when output variable frequencies
other than detailed are used. Use the “detailed” reporting frequency (Ref. Output:Variable object)
to view the availability status at each simulation timestep.

1.33.13 ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup
A ventilated slab system may consist of multiple active slabs that are serving to condition the zone.
Slabs that act serially can be specified as multiple radiant systems using the standard ventilated slab
input described above. This list of surfaces (the name it is assigned) replcaces the name of a single
surface in the ventilated slab system input described above.

1.33.13.1 Inputs

1.33.13.1.1 Field : Name of Ventilated Slab Surface Group

This field is a unique user assigned name for the list of surfaces that are acting in coordination with
one another. Any reference to this list by a ventilated slab system will use this name.

1.33.13.1.2 Field: Zone Name

This field is the name of the zone in which the surface is principally located and intended to affect.

1.33.13.1.3 Field: Surface Name

This field is the name of a surface in the zone being conditioned by the ventilated slab system. Only
base surfaces like walls, floors and roofs are valid. Door/Window Surface and Internal Mass are not
valid surface types for the ventilated slab system.

1.33.13.1.4 Field: Core Diameter

This field is the inside diameter of the cores through which air is circulated for the surface being
defined by this statement. The inside diameter should be recorded in meters and is used to determine
the convective heat transfer from the circulated air to the inside surface of the ventilated slab.

1.33.13.1.5 Field: Core length

This field is the length of core embedded in the surface named above in the surface name field. In
other words, this should be the distance that air travels as it through the slab. The length of the
hollow core in the surface should be entered in meters and is used to determine the effectiveness of
heat transfer from the air being circulated through the cores and the core inside surface. Longer
core lengths result in more heat transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.

1.33.13.1.6 Field: Number of Cores

This field allows the user to specify how many cores there are in the ventilated slab. Air flow will
be divided equally among the different cores.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1663

1.33.13.1.7 Field: Slab Inlet Node Name

This field is a node name (character string) used to identify the node that serves as the inlet (air
side) to the surface. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at various points
in the loops. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input data file, each node
must have a unique name.

1.33.13.1.8 Field: Slab Outlet Node Name

This field is a node name (character string) used to identify the node that serves as the outlet (air
side) of the surface. In EnergyPlus, nodes represent points between components or at various points
in the loops. While a node name may be referenced more than once in an input data file, each node
must have a unique name.
An Example IDF with a ventilated slab system is shown below

ZoneHVAC:VentilatedSlab:SlabGroup ,
Z125 , !- Name
SPACE1 -1, !- Zone 1 Name
C1 -1, !- Surface 1 Name
0.05, !- Core Diameter for Surface 1
30, !- Core Length for Surface 1
20, !- Core Numbers for Surface 1
Z1VentslabIn , !- Slab In Node Name for Surface 1
Z1VentSlabout , !- Slab Outlet Node Name for Surface 1
SPACE2 -1, !- Zone 2 Name
C2 -1, !- Surface 2 Name
0.05, !- Core Diameter for Surface 2
15, !- Core Length for Surface 2
20, !- Core Numbers for Surface 2
Z2VentSlabIn , !- Slab In Node Name for Surface 2
Z2VentSlabOut , !- Slab Outlet Node Name for Surface 2
SPACE5 -1, !- Zone 3 Name
C5 -1, !- Surface 3 Name
0.05, !- Core Diameter for Surface 3
30, !- Core Length for Surface 3
20, !- Core Numbers for Surface 3
Z5VentSlabIn , !- Slab In Node Name for Surface 3
Z5VentSlabOut; !- Slab Outlet Node Name for Surface 3

1.34 Group – Refrigeration

There are two ways to model a supermarket refrigeration system. The first, and simplest, approach
models the combination of compressor(s) and condenser as a single refrigeration compressor rack
object. (A list is used to enter multiple case or walk-in names.)
For the first approach, the input objects needed are:

– One Refrigeration:CompressorRack object

– At least one refrigeration load, which may be any combination of:
∗ Refrigeration:Case or
∗ Refrigeration:WalkIn or
∗ Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList objects .
1664 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

The second approach requires more input objects but also allows the user to model more complex
systems. This detailed approach must be used whenever loads are transferred from one system to
another, such as with secondary loops, cascade condensers, or mechanical subcoolers. Again lists are
used to enter multiple load or compressor names.
For the detailed approach, the input objects needed are:

– One Refrigeration:System object

– At least one refrigeration load object which may include any combination of:
∗ Refrigeration:Case,
∗ Refrigeration:WalkIn,
∗ Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList (may include any combination of cases and walk in
cooler names, OR, a list of air chiller names)
∗ Refrigeration:SecondarySystem,
∗ Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade (as a load, cooling a lower-temperature system) objects,
∗ Refrigeration:TransferLoadList (may include cascade condenser loads and/or secondary
loop loads)
∗ Refrigeration:AirChiller
– At least one Refrigeration:Compressor object (multiple compressors are entered using a Refrig-
eration:CompressorList),
– One condenser object which may be either:
∗ Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled,
∗ Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled,
∗ Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled, or
∗ Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade (rejecting heat from this system)
– The object Refrigeration:Subcooler may optionally be included to describe either a liquid suc-
tion or mechanical subcooler.

Output variables are also available to describe the total heat exchange between all refrigeration
objects and the zones containing these objects. These variables are described at the end of this
section after all the refrigeration objects.

1.34.1 Refrigeration:CompressorRack
The refrigeration compressor rack object works in conjunction with the refrigeration case and walkin
objects (Ref. Refrigeration:Case and Refrigeration:WalkIn) to simulate the performance of a re-
frigerated case system. This object models the electric consumption of the rack compressors and
the condenser fans. Heat removed from the refrigerated cases, walkins, and compressor/condenser
fan heat can be rejected either outdoors or to a zone. Compressor rack waste heat can also be
reclaimed for use by an optional air- or water-heating coil (Ref. Coil:Heating:Desuperheater and
Coil:WaterHeating:Desuperheater).
If heat is rejected outdoors, condenser cooling can either be accomplished by direct air flow, evap-
orative water cooling, or a by water-cooled condenser with appropriate plant loop piping. With
evaporative cooling, water is sprayed through the air stream to effectively lower the air temperature
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1665

experienced by the condenser coil as a result of water evaporation. The use of a water-cooled con-
denser requires the definition of a plant loop to supply cooling to the condenser. Waste heat can
be reclaimed and stored using a water storage device.
The inputs for the compressor rack object include a name, the heat rejection location, the compressor
rack coefficient of performance (COP) at design conditions, the design condenser fan power, and the
type of condenser cooling. The model requires two curve objects to describe performance at off-design
conditions. If the condenser is water-cooled, the inlet and outlet node names as well as the water
outlet temperature schedule name are required. If the condenser has evaporative cooling, additional
inputs for evaporative condenser effectiveness, condenser air flow rate, basin heater parameters,
water pump power, water source, and an evaporative cooling availability schedule are available. The
names of refrigerated cases and walkins connected to the compressor rack are the final inputs to the
model.

1.34.1.1 Inputs

1.34.1.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration compressor rack. Any reference to
this compressor rack by another object will use this name.

1.34.1.1.2 Field: Heat Rejection Location

The location of the compressor rack’s condenser. The compressor rack condenser heat can be directed
“Outdoors” to model an outdoor air or water-cooled condenser or “Zone” to model a condenser
located in a zone (e.g., a stand-alone packaged refrigerated case with integral condenser located in
a conditioned zone). The default for this field is “Outdoors”. If the heat rejection location is “Zone”
and no walk-in coolers are served by this compressor rack, then all refrigerated cases connected to
this compressor rack must be located in the same zone. If however, walk-in coolers are also served
by this compressor rack, then the heat rejection zone name must be specified (see Heat Rejection
Zone Name field below) and cases and walk-ins can be located in multiple zones.
NOTE: When modeling a heat reclaim coil, the heat rejection location must be “Outdoors”. If the
heat rejection location is “Zone”, the total amount of waste heat available for reclaim (e.g., by a
desuperheater heating coil) is set to zero by this compressor rack object and the simulation proceeds.

1.34.1.1.3 Field: Design Compressor Rack COP

The coefficient of performance (COP) for the compressor rack at design conditions (compressors
only, excluding condenser fan power). This value must be greater than zero, with a default value of
2.0 if this field is left blank. This value should represent the compressor rack COP corresponding to
the lowest evaporating temperature of any case or walkin served by the rack.

1.34.1.1.4 Field: Compressor Rack COP Function of Temperature Curve Name

The name of the curve object defining the change in compressor rack COP as a function of the
temperature of air entering the condenser. The curve object will be evaluated using the zone air
dry-bulb temperature when rack heat rejection location equals “Zone” and the outdoor air dry-bulb
temperature when rack heat rejection location equals “Outdoors” and the condenser type is air-
cooled. As explained below, if the condenser is cooled by evaporative or water loop cooling, the
1666 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

curve object is evaluated using an effective temperature. The output from this curve is multiplied by
the design compressor rack COP to yield the actual COP at the specific air temperature entering the
condenser. This curve must be cubic or quadratic (Curve:Cubic or Curve:Quadratic), and should
be normalized to 1.0 at the condenser entering air temperature at which the design compressor rack
COP occurs. This curve should represent the compressor rack COP corresponding to the lowest
evaporating temperature of any case served by the rack.

1.34.1.1.5 Field: Design Condenser Fan Power

This field defines the design power for the condenser fan(s) in Watts. This field is applicable for
air or evaporative cooling only. If the condenser is water-cooled, the fan power is captured in the
cooling object (e.g., cooling tower). If applicable, this value must be greater than 0.0, with a default
value of 250 Watts if this field is left blank.

1.34.1.1.6 Field: Condenser Fan Power Function of Temperature Curve Name

This field is the name of the curve object defining the change in condenser fan power as a function
of the temperature of air entering the condenser. This curve is used to simulate the modulation
of air flow by the condenser fans (e.g., staging, multi-speed, or variable speed) as a function of
temperature. The curve object will be evaluated using the zone air dry-bulb temperature when
rack heat rejection location equals “Zone” and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature when rack
heat rejection location equals “Outdoors” and the condenser type is air-cooled. As explained below,
if the condenser is cooled by evaporative cooling, the curve object is evaluated using an effective
temperature. The output from this curve is multiplied by the design condenser fan power to yield
the actual fan power at the specific air temperature entering the condenser. This curve must be cubic
or quadratic (Curve:Cubic or Curve:Quadratic), and should be normalized to 1.0 at the condenser
entering air temperature at which the design condenser fan power occurs. The actual condenser fan
power is not allowed to exceed the design condenser fan power defined in the previous input field or
go below zero (i.e., the output of the curve object is limited to values from 0.0 to 1.0). If this field
is left blank, then the model assumes the condenser fan power is at the design power level when any
of the refrigerated cases connected to this rack are operating.

1.34.1.1.7 Field: Condenser Type

When the heat rejection location is “Outdoors”, the condenser may be either cooled by dry air by
specifying “AirCooled”, by wet evaporative cooling by specifying “EvaporativelyCooled”, or by a
water loop by specifying “WaterCooled”. If the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, then a plant
cooling loop will need to be defined using other EnergyPlus objects, e.g., plant loop, pump, cooling
tower, etc. The default value is “AirCooled”.

1.34.1.1.8 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Inlet Node Name

When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, a node name for the water-side condenser inlet must
be provided.

1.34.1.1.9 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Outlet Node Name

When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, a node name for the water-side condenser outlet must
be provided.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1667

1.34.1.1.10 Field: Water-cooled Loop Flow Type

When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, the type of flow loop should be specified. The two
choices are VariableFlow, in which a Pump:VariableSpeed needs to be included in the plant loop,
or ConstantFlow, in which the loop circuit has a constant flow rate, typically associated with
a Pump:ConstantSpeed object. If the flow type is VariableFlow, the flow needed to remove the
condenser heat energy will be calculated and requested of the pump. If the flow type is Constant
Flow, the outlet water temperature will be determined based on the fixed loop flow rate and heat
energy to be removed. The default type is VariableFlow. Refer to additional discussion in the
Engineering Reference.

1.34.1.1.11 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Outlet Temperature Schedule Name

When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, and when the water-cooled loop flow type is “Variable
Flow”, the name of a schedule (Ref: Schedule) that defines the desired condenser water outlet
temperature must be provided. The schedule may define an outlet temperature that varies through
time.

1.34.1.1.12 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Design Flow Rate

When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, and when the water-cooled loop flow type is “Constant
Flow”, this is the design water flow rate in m3 /s that will be requested initially. This requested flow
will be passed to the loop simulation, and resulting actual flow will be dependent upon supply system
capabilities (e.g., pump capability). The design flow rate must always be less than the maximum
flow rate, defined below.

1.34.1.1.13 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Maximum Flow Rate

When the condenser type is “Water Cooled”, this is the maximum water flow rate in m3 /s that will
be allowed through the condenser. When the loop flow type is Variable Flow, if the calculated flow
rate is higher than the maximum flow rate, an error message will be generated, and the flow rate
will be reset to the maximum flow rate.

1.34.1.1.14 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Maximum Water Outlet Tempera-

ture
When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, this field specifies the maximum allowed water temper-
ature in degrees C leaving the compressor rack condenser. The default value is 55 degrees C.

1.34.1.1.15 Field: Water-cooled Condenser Minimum Water Inlet Temperature

When the condenser type is “WaterCooled”, this field specifies the minimum allowed water temper-
ature in degrees C entering the compressor rack condenser. The default value is 10 degrees C. Refer
to additional discussion in the Engineering Reference.

1.34.1.1.16 Field: Evaporative Condenser Availability Schedule Name

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, the name of the optional schedule (Ref: Sched-
ule) that specifies the time periods that evaporative cooling is available/unavailable. In some colder
1668 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

climates, evaporative cooling is periodically discontinued and the basin sumps drained to avoid freez-
ing. In these times, the condenser runs as a typical dry air cooled condenser, and related evaporative
cooling systems (e.g., water pump, basin heaters) do not operate. Use of this optional schedule
permits modeling of planned, seasonal interruptions of evaporative cooling. All schedule values must
be greater than or equal to zero. Typically, an ON/OFF schedule type is used with values being
either 0 or 1. A schedule value of 1 indicates that evaporative cooling is available during the defined
time period, and a value of 0 denotes that evaporative cooling is not available during the defined
time period. If the schedule name is omitted (blank) and Condenser Type = “Evap Cooled”, then
the model assumes that evaporative cooling of the condenser is available for the entire simulation
period.

1.34.1.1.17 Field: Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, this field specifies the effectiveness of the evap-
orative system in modifying the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil. The resulting
effective temperature is determined as

Tef f ective = Towb + (1 − ε) ∗ [Todb − Towb ] (1.146)

where:
Tef f ective = effective dry-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser cooling coil (°C)
Towb = outdoor air wet-bulb temperature (°C)
Todb = outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (°C)
ε = evaporative condenser effectiveness.
The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Compressor Rack COP as a Function of
Temperature Curve and the Condenser Fan Power as a Function of Temperature Curve. The default
value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0.
If the two function-of-temperature curves (i.e., Compressor Rack COP as a Function of Tempera-
ture Curve and Condenser Fan Power as a Function of Temperature Curve) are based on wet-bulb
temperature rather than dry-bulb temperature, the evaporative condenser effectiveness should be
set to 1.0 for consistency.

1.34.1.1.18 Field: Evaporative Condenser Air Flow Rate

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, the air volume flow rate, in m3 per second,
entering the evaporative condenser. This value is used to calculate the amount of water evaporated
when evaporatively cooling the condenser inlet air. The value for this field must be greater than
zero. This input field is also autocalculatable, equivalent to 0.000144 m3 /s per watt of total cooling
capacity [850 cfm/ton] where the total cooling capacity is the sum of the rated total cooling capacities
for the refrigerated cases connected to this compressor rack (Ref. Refrigeration:Case).

1.34.1.1.19 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, this field defines the power level of the basin
heater, if applicable, used to avoid water freezing in an outdoor evaporative cooler basin. This
numeric field contains the capacity of the electric basin heater in Watts per degree Kelvin. This field
is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Set Point Temperature described in the following field.
The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1669

heater set point temperature and the dry-bulb temperature of the condenser coil inlet air. The basin
heater only operates when the condenser fan is off (i.e., no compressor heat rejection). The basin
heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero, with a default value of 200 W/K if this field
is left blank.

1.34.1.1.20 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, this numeric field contains the set point tem-
perature (°C) for the basin heater described in the previous field. The basin heater is active when
the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this set point temperature, as long as the condenser
fan is off. The default value is 2°C if this field is left blank.

1.34.1.1.21 Field: Design Evaporative Condenser Water Pump Power

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, the rated power of the evaporative condenser
water pump in Watts. This value is used to calculate the power required to pump the water used to
evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The value for this field must be greater than or equal to 0,
with a default value of 1000 Watts if this field is left blank. This input field is also autocalculatable,
equivalent to 0.004266 W per watt [15 W/ton] of total cooling capacity where the total cooling
capacity is the sum of the rated total cooling capacities for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins
connected to this compressor rack (Ref. Refrigeration:Case and Refrigeration:WalkIn)).

1.34.1.1.22 Field: Evaporative Water Supply Tank Name

When the condenser type is “EvaporativelyCooled”, this field is used to define where the compressor
rack obtains water used for evaporative cooling of its condenser. If this field is left blank, the unit
will obtain water directly from the mains (Ref. Water Mains Temperatures). If the name of a Water
Storage Tank object is used here, then the unit will obtain its water from that tank.

1.34.1.1.23 Field: Condenser Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field contains the name of the node from which the outdoor compressor rack
condenser draws its outdoor air. This field is applicable only when the heat rejection location is
“Outdoors” (if the heat rejection location is “Zone”, this field is disregarded). If this field is left
blank, the outdoor air temperature entering the condenser (dry-bulb or wet-bulb) is taken directly
from the weather data. If this field is not blank, this node name must also be specified in an
OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating
outdoor air temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an
OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather
data.

1.34.1.1.24 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
Rack”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
1670 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.1.1.25 Field: Refrigeration Case Name or WalkIn Name or CaseAnd-

WalkInList Name
This alpha field is the name of a single refrigerated case, a single walk in cooler, the name of
a CaseAndWalkInList for multiple refrigerated cases and/or walk-ins, the name of a refrigeration
chiller, or the name of a CaseAndWalkInList for multiple refrigeration chillers connected to this
compressor rack. Note that if a CaseAndWalkInList contains the name(s) of refrigeration chillers, it
CANNOT have the name(s) or any refrigerated cases or walkins . This field is required.

1.34.1.1.26 Field: Heat Rejection Zone Name

If the Heat Rejection Location is “Zone” and any walk-in coolers are connected to this compressor
rack, then this field is required. The compressor rack heat rejection will impact the air heat balance
in this zone.
The following is an example input for a Refrigeration Compressor Rack with water cooled condenser.

Refrigeration:CompressorRack ,
MediumTempRack , !- Name
Outdoors , !- Heat Rejection Location
1.7, !- Design Compressor Rack COP {W/W}
RackCOPfTCurve , !- Compressor Rack COP as a Function of Temperature Curve Name
1025.0 , !- Design Condenser Fan Power {W}
RackCondFanCurve , !- Condenser Fan Power as a Function of Temperature Curve Name
WaterCooled , !- Condenser Type
Condenser Inlet Node , !- Water -cooled Condenser Inlet Node Name
Condenser Outlet Node , !- Water -cooled Condenser Outlet Node Name
VariableFlow , !- Water -cooled Loop Flow Type
Cond Outlet Temp Sch , !- Water -cooled Condenser Outlet Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Water -cooled Condenser Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Water -cooled Condenser Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
55, !- Water -cooled Condenser Maximum Water Outlet Temperature {C}
, !- Water -cooled Condenser Minimum Water Inlet Temperature {C}
, !- Evaporative Condenser Availability Schedule Name
, !- Evaporative Condenser Effectiveness {dimensionless}
, !- Evaporative Condenser Air Volume Flow Rate {m3/s}
, !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/K}
, !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature {C}
, !- Design Evaporative Condenser Water Pump Power {W}
, !- Evaporative Water Supply Tank Name
, !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
, !- End -Use Subcategory
MediumTempCaseList; !- Refrigeration Case Name or WalkIn Name or CaseAndWalkInList Name

1.34.1.2 Outputs

If Condenser Type = Water Cooled:

– System,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– System,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– System,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

IF THE RACK SERVES CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Electricity Energy [J]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1671

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack COP [W/W]

If Condenser Type = Evap Cooled:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Electricity Rate

[W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Electricity Energy
[J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater Electricity
Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater Electricity
Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Volume Flow Rate
[m3 /s]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Volume [m3 ]

If Heat Rejection Location = Zone:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]

IF THE RACK SERVES REFRIGERATION CHILLERS

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Runtime Fraction []
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electricity Rate
[W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack COP [W/W]

If Condenser Type = Evap Cooled:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Elec-
tricity Rate [W]
1672 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Elec-
tricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin
Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Electric PowerRefrigeration Air Chiller
Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Vol-
ume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Volume
[m3]

If Heat Rejection Location = Zone:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Rate
[W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]

1.34.1.2.1 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

When condenser type is Water Cooled, this is the mass flow rate of water flowing through the water
cooled condenser.

1.34.1.2.2 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

When condenser type is Water Cooled, this is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e.,
compressor energy and case cooling).

1.34.1.2.3 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

When condenser type is Water Cooled, this is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for
the timestep being reported.

1.34.1.2.4 IF THE RACK SERVES CASES AND OR WALKINS:

1.34.1.2.5 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric power input to the rack compressor(s) in Watts.

1.34.1.2.6 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the rack compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1673

1.34.1.2.7 Refrigeration Compressor Runtime Fraction []

This is the runtime operating ratio for the compressor.

1.34.1.2.8 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric input to the rack condenser fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.1.2.9 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the rack condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.10 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the total heat transfer rate of the refrigeration compressor rack in Watts. It is the
sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected to this
rack. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat.

1.34.1.2.11 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total heat transfer of the refrigeration compressor rack in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key
= Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.12 Refrigeration Compressor Rack COP [W/W]

This field is the refrigeration compressor rack coefficient of performance. It is the actual compressor
rack COP for the timestep being reported, accounting for the COP variation as a function of tem-
perature. It is calculated as the Design Compressor Rack COP times the Compressor Rack COP as
a Function of Temperature Curve evaluated at the effective condenser entering air temperature for
the timestep being reported.

1.34.1.2.13 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Elec-

tricity Rate [W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water pump
used with evaporative cooling of the compressor rack condenser.

1.34.1.2.14 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Pump Elec-

tricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water pump used with evaporative cooling of the
compressor rack condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter
with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an
optional subkey category is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref.
Output:Meter objects).
1674 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.1.2.15 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater

Electricity Rate [W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water heater
in the basin of the evaporative system used to cool the compressor rack condenser.

1.34.1.2.16 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Basin Heater

Electricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water heater used to prevent freezing of the
evaporative cooling system for the compressor rack condenser for the timestep being reported. This
output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also available, with default to the General
end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.17 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Vol-

ume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volumetric flow rate in m3 /s of water consumed while providing evaporative cooling of the
compressor rack condenser.

1.34.1.2.18 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser Water Vol-

ume [m3]
This is the water consumed by evaporation in m3 while providing evaporative cooling of the com-
pressor rack condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with
Resource Type = Water, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional sub-
key category is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter
objects).

1.34.1.2.19 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible heating in Watts provided to the zone by condenser waste heat
rejection, which impacts the zone air heat balance.

1.34.1.2.20 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This field is the sensible heating energy in Joules provided to the zone by condenser waste heat
rejection for the timestep being reported.

1.34.1.2.21 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Rate

[W]
This field is the rate of sensible heating in Watts provided by condenser waste heat rejection to the
HVAC return air (zone return air path outlet node), which impacts the HVAC return air temperature.
If the HVAC system is off for a simulation timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible
heating is actually provided to the zone air instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1675

1.34.1.2.22 Refrigeration Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible Heating Energy

[J]
This field is the sensible heating energy in Joules provided by condenser waste heat rejection to the
HVAC return air (zone return air path outlet node) for the timestep being reported. If the HVAC
system is off for a simulation timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible heating is actually
provided to the zone air instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).

1.34.1.2.23 IF THE RACK SERVES CHILLERS

1.34.1.2.24 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric power input to the rack compressor(s) in Watts.

1.34.1.2.25 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the rack compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.26 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Runtime Fraction []

This is the runtime fraction for the compressor serving air chillers.

1.34.1.2.27 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electric-

ity Rate [W]
This output is the electric input to the rack condenser fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.1.2.28 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Condenser Fan Electric-

ity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the rack condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.29 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the refrigeration compressor rack in Watts. It is the
sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected to this
rack. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat.

1.34.1.2.30 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Total Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the refrigeration compressor rack in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key
= Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1676 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.1.2.31 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack COP [W/W]

This field is the refrigeration compressor rack coefficient of performance. It is the actual compressor
rack COP for the timestep being reported, accounting for the COP variation as a function of tem-
perature. It is calculated as the Design Compressor Rack COP times the Compressor Rack COP as
a Function of Temperature Curve evaluated at the effective condenser entering air temperature for
the timestep being reported.

1.34.1.2.32 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser

Pump Electricity Rate [W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water pump
used with evaporative cooling of the compressor rack condenser.

1.34.1.2.33 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser

Pump Electricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water pump used with evaporative cooling of the
compressor rack condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter
with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an
optional subkey category is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref.
Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.34 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser

Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water heater
in the basin of the evaporative system used to cool the compressor rack condenser.

1.34.1.2.35 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser

Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water heater used to prevent freezing of the
evaporative cooling system for the compressor rack condenser for the timestep being reported. This
output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also available, with default to the General
end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.1.2.36 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser

Water Volume Flow Rate [m3 /s]
The volumetric flow rate in m3 /s of water consumed while providing evaporative cooling of the
compressor rack condenser.

1.34.1.2.37 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Evaporative Condenser

Water Volume [m3 ]
This is the water consumed by evaporation in m3 while providing evaporative cooling of the com-
pressor rack condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with
Resource Type = Water, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional sub-
key category is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter
objects).
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1677

1.34.1.2.38 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating

Rate [W]
This field is the rate of sensible heating in Watts provided to the zone by condenser waste heat
rejection, which impacts the zone air heat balance.

1.34.1.2.39 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Zone Sensible Heating

Energy [J]
This field is the sensible heating energy in Joules provided to the zone by condenser waste heat
rejection for the timestep being reported.

1.34.1.2.40 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible

Heating Energy [J]

1.34.1.2.41 Refrigeration Air Chiller Compressor Rack Return Air Sensible

Heating Rate [W]
These are the sensible heating energy, in Joules or Watts, provided to the HVAC system return air
node by condenser heat rejection at the compressor rack.

1.34.2 Refrigeration:Case
The Refrigeration Case object works in conjunction with a compressor rack, a refrigeration sys-
tem, or a secondary loop object (Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigeration:System, or Refriger-
ation:SecondarySystem) to simulate the performance of a refrigerated case system. The refrigerated
case model uses performance information at rated conditions along with performance curves for la-
tent case credits and defrost heat load to determine performance at off-rated conditions. Energy use
for lights, fans and anti-sweat heaters is modeled based on inputs for nominal power, schedules, and
control type. The refrigerated case model accounts for the sensible and latent heat exchange with
the surrounding environment (termed “case credits”) which impacts the temperature and humidity
in the zone where the case is located.
A dataset has been provided containing refrigerated case input data for a large number
of refrigerated cases from multiple manufacturers. See RefrigerationCases.idf.
The Refrigeration Case object inputs include a case name, an availability schedule name, the zone
name for the location of the case, and the temperature and relative humidity of the ambient (zone)
air surrounding the refrigerated case at the rating conditions for case performance. Additional inputs
include the total cooling capacity, latent heat ratio, and run time fraction of the refrigerated case at
rated conditions. The case length and operating temperature (average temperature of air/products
within the case) must also be specified.
The refrigerated case model requires two curves to describe performance at off-rated conditions (i.e.,
at different zone temperature and humidity levels): the latent case credit curve and the defrost energy
correction curve. The user must enter cubic performance curves with the independent variable being
user selectable (case temperature, zone relative humidity, or zone dewpoint temperature).
The user can select from eight case defrost types, with additional inputs being required depending
on the type selected. The user must enter a defrost schedule (unless Case Defrost Type = None),
and an optional defrost drip-down schedule can be specified to allow additional time for melted frost
to drain from the cooling coil following the regular defrost period.
1678 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Inputs are required for case fans, lights, and anti-sweat heaters. Case lighting can be controlled by
the user through entering a schedule. The case fans operate whenever the cooling coil is operating
and during defrost periods for certain case defrost types. Anti-sweat heater power can be controlled
by several methods which are user selectable. The model assumes that the fans are contained within
the thermal envelope of the case and provide a direct heat load on the case cooling coil. For lighting
and anti-sweat heaters, the user can specify the fraction of their respective heat loads that directly
impact the case cooling coil (with the remainder of their heat load impacting the surrounding zone
air).
The user has the option of specifying a case restocking schedule and a schedule for modifying the
case credits if needed. Finally, the user can specify the under case HVAC return air fraction which
determines the portion of the case credits that directly impact the HVAC return air conditions (with
the remainder of the case credits impacting the zone sensible and latent loads).

1.34.2.1 Inputs

1.34.2.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigerated case. Any reference to this case by
another object will use this name.

1.34.2.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigerated case can operate
during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (maximum schedule value of 1.0 is
typically used) indicates that the case will operate during a given time period. A value equal to
0 denotes that the case does not operate (everything is OFF: refrigeration, fans, lights, anti-sweat,
etc.). Typically the refrigerated case will operate throughout the day (i.e., the schedule will contain
1 for all time periods); however, cases require maintenance and/or cleaning and this can be modeled
accordingly using this schedule if desired. If this field is left blank, the case is assumed to be available
at all time periods.

1.34.2.1.3 Field: Zone Name

The name of the zone where the refrigerated case is located. The refrigerated case will impact the
air heat balance in this zone. When modeling multiple refrigerated cases connected to a single com-
pressor rack where the condenser heat is rejected to the zone (ref: Refrigeration:CompressorRack),
all of the refrigerated cases connected to that compressor rack must be located in the same zone.

1.34.2.1.4 Field: Rated Ambient Temperature

Dry-bulb temperature of the ambient (zone) air surrounding the refrigerated case at the rating
conditions for refrigerated case performance. The default value for this field is 23.9˚C (75˚F). This
temperature must be greater than 0˚C and greater than the case operating temperature.

1.34.2.1.5 Field: Rated Ambient Relative Humidity

Relative humidity of the ambient (zone) air surrounding the refrigerated case at the rating conditions
for refrigerated case performance. The default value for this field is 55% RH.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1679

1.34.2.1.6 Field: Rated Total Cooling Capacity per Unit Length

The total, full load cooling capacity (sensible plus latent) in watts per unit length of refrigerated
case (W/m) at rated conditions (i.e., at the Rated Ambient Temperature, Rated Ambient Relative
Humidity, Case Operating Temperature, and with the Standard Case Fan Power per Unit Length
and the Standard Case Lighting Power per Unit Length). The value entered for this field must be
greater than zero, with a default value of 1900 W/m if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.7 Field: Rated Latent Heat Ratio

The latent heat ratio (LHR = latent capacity divided by total cooling capacity) of the refrigerated
case at rated conditions (i.e., at the Rated Ambient Temperature, Rated Ambient Relative Humidity,
Case Operating Temperature, and with the Standard Case Fan Power per Unit Length and the
Standard Case Lighting Power per Unit Length). The value for this field can range from zero to 1.0,
with a default value of 0.3 if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.8 Field: Rated Runtime Fraction

The runtime fraction of the refrigerated case at rated conditions (i.e., at the Rated Ambient Tem-
perature, Rated Ambient Relative Humidity, and Case Operating Temperature). Even at rated
conditions, refrigerated cases typically include additional cooling capacity to account for product
stocking and recovery from defrost. The rated runtime fraction for refrigerated cases typically
ranges from 0.8 to 0.9. The entered value for this field must be greater than 0.0 and less than or
equal to 1.0, and the default value is 0.85 if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.9 Field: Case Length

The length of the refrigerated case in meters. The entered value for this field must be greater than
0.0, and the default value is 3 meters if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.10 Field: Case Operating Temperature

The average temperature of the air and products within the refrigerated case in ˚C. The refrigerated
case manufacturer typically provides this information in the product literature. Typical operating
temperatures for medium temperature cases are 1.6˚C to 7.2˚C (35˚F to 45˚F). Typical operating
temperatures for low temperatures cases are -28.9˚C to -17.8˚C (-20˚F to 0˚F). The entered
value for this field must be less than 20˚C and lower than the Rated Ambient Temperature. The
default value is 1.1˚C if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.11 Field: Latent Case Credit Curve Type

This alpha field defines the form of the curve used to modify the latent case credits (latent heat
removed from the zone where the refrigerated case is located) at off-rated conditions. The valid
choices for this field are:

– CaseTemperatureMethod

This method defines the variation in latent case credits as a cubic function of Case Operating Tem-
perature. The result from the cubic curve is multiplied by the difference between the rated ambient
relative humidity and the actual zone relative humidity, and one minus this value is multiplied by
the Rated LHR to give the operating LHR at the actual zone humidity condition. (Representative
1680 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

cooefficient values for single-shelf horizontal and multi-shelf vertical display cases are given in the
EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.)

– RelativeHumidityMethod

This method defines the variation in latent case credits as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air
relative humidity.

– DewpointMethod

This method defines the variation in latent case credits as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air
dewpoint temperature.
The default curve type is the Case Temperature Method. Refer to the Engineering Reference for
further information on how latent case credits are modeled.

1.34.2.1.12 Field: Latent Case Credit Curve Name

The name of a cubic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation
of the latent case credits at off-rated conditions. The curve should be normalized to have a value of
1.0 at the rated ambient air conditions defined above.

1.34.2.1.13 Field: Standard Case Fan Power per Unit Length

The total standard fan power in Watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m). This value
represents the fan power included in the field Rated Total Cooling Capacity per Unit Length, and
is used to determine the sensible case credits. The entered value for this field must be greater than
or equal to zero, and the default value is 75.0 W/m if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.14 Field: Operating Case Fan Power per Unit Length

The total operating fan power in Watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m). Enter the actual
power for the installed fans. The entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero,
and the value is set equal to the standard case fan powers if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.15 Field: Standard Case Lighting Power per Unit Length

The total standard lighting power in Watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m). This value
should represent the lighting power provided by the case manufacturer and included in the “Rated
Total Cooling Capacity per Unit Length” field and is used to determine the sensible case credits.
For cases where the manufacturer does not include the lights in the Rated Total Cooling Capacity,
this value should be zero (0.0). The entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to
zero, and the default value is 90.0 W/m if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.16 Field: Installed Case Lighting Power per Unit Length

The total installed lighting power in Watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m). Enter the
actual power for the installed lights. This number may be greater or less than the standard lighting
power value, depending upon the manufacturer’s practice in specifying the case rated cooling capacity
and whether or not energy-efficient lights are being modeled. The next field (i.e. Case Lighting
Schedule Name) may be used to specify the name of a schedule that contains the fraction of the
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1681

Installed Case Lighting Power per Unit Length to be modeled for each timestep of the simulation
period. The entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero, and the value is set
equal to the standard case lighting power if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.17 Field: Case Lighting Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of installed refrigerated case
lights that operate during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 indicates that the
lights will operate during that time period (maximum schedule value of 1.0 means lights are fully on
at the Installed Case Lighting Power per Unit Length level). A schedule value of zero denotes that
the lights are off. The refrigerated case lights will typically operate only when the store is open for
business and can be scheduled off as desired via this schedule. If this field is left blank, the default
schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.34.2.1.18 Field: Fraction of Lighting Energy To Case

The fraction of the lighting energy that directly contributes to the case heat load. The remainder of
the lighting energy (1 – fraction) is a heating load to the zone where the case is located. This field
can be used to model lighting ballasts and bulbs located outside the air curtain of the refrigerated
case. The value for this field can range from zero to 1.0, with a default value of 1.0 if the field is
blank.

1.34.2.1.19 Field: Case Anti-Sweat Heater Power per Unit Length

The electric anti-sweat heater power in watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m). The
entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero, and the default value is 0 W/m if
the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.20 Field: Minimum Anti-Sweat Heater Power per Unit Length

The minimum electric anti-sweat heater power in watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m).
Anti-sweat heater power will remain at or above this value for anti-sweat heater control types linear,
dewpoint method, or heat balance method. Other anti-sweat heater control types disregard this
field. The entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero, and the default value is
0 W/m if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.21 Field: Anti-Sweat Heater Control Type

The type of anti-sweat heater control used for this refrigerated case. Valid choices are None, Con-
stant, Linear, DewpointMethod, or HeatBalanceMethod. The default is None if the field is blank.
Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on how the different anti-sweat heater
controls are modeled.

1.34.2.1.22 Field: Humidity at Zero Anti-Sweat Heater Energy

The value of this numeric field is only used when the Linear anti-sweat heater control type is selected.
Enter the zone relative humidity where anti-sweat heater energy use is zero. Negative values for
relative humidity may be entered. Other anti-sweat heater control types disregard this field. The
value entered for this field must be less than the Rated Ambient Relative Humidity specified above.
The default for this field is -10.0.
1682 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.2.1.23 Field: Case Height

The value of this numeric field is used when Heat Balance Method anti-sweat heater control is
selected. Enter the case height in meters. Other anti-sweat heater control types disregard this field.
The entered value for this field must be greater than zero when Heat Balance Method anti-sweat
heater control is selected, and the default value is 1.5 meters if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.24 Field: Fraction of Anti-Sweat Heater Energy To Case

This value denotes the fraction of anti-sweat heater energy that results in a direct heat load to the
refrigerated case. The remainder of the anti-sweat heater energy (1-fraction) is a heating load to the
zone where the refrigerated case is located. The value for this field can range from zero to 1.0, with
a default value of 1.0 if the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.25 Field: Case Defrost Power per Unit Length

The defrost power in watts per unit length of refrigerated case (W/m). This input is required for
hot-gas, hot-fluid, or electric defrost types and is used to evaluate the load on the case as well as
power or heat consumption. Refrigerated case manufacturers do not typically provide information
on the heat input for hot-gas and hot-fluid defrost. Information provided for electric defrost power
can be substituted here for refrigerated cases using hot-gas or hot-fluid defrost if other information
is not available. Only electric Case Defrost Types consume electricity during the defrost period. The
entered value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero, and the default value is 0 W/m if
the field is blank.

1.34.2.1.26 Field: Case Defrost Type

The type of defrost used for this refrigerated case. Valid choices are None, OffCycle, HotGas,
HotGaswithTemperatureTermination, Electric, ElectricwithTemperatureTermination, HotFluid,
and HotFluidwithTemperatureTermination. The default defrost type is OffCycle if the field is
blank. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on how the different case defrost
types are modeled. In particular, hot-fluid defrost systems may be effective with much shorter
defrost times than other systems, which should be reflected in the defrost and drip-down schedules.

1.34.2.1.27 Field: Case Defrost Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigerated case requires defrost-
ing. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that defrost will be on during a given time period. A value
equal to 0 denotes that the defrost is off. Defrost schedules normally repeat the duration and number
of defrost cycles for each day of the year. The refrigerated case manufacturer typically provides this
information with the product literature. The use of Compact Schedules (ref. Schedules) are ideal
for this purpose. In a typical supermarket with many cases, it is important to diversify the defrost
schedules in order to avoid large swings in the load placed upon the remainder of the refrigeration
system.

1.34.2.1.28 Field: Case Defrost Drip-Down Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigerated case requires addi-
tional time for draining condensate after the defrost period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that
the defrost drip-down period is on during a given time period. A value equal to 0 denotes that
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1683

the defrost drip-down period is over. The refrigerated case manufacturer typically provides this
information with the product literature.
Each defrost drip-down period specified in this schedule should start at the same time as the cor-
responding defrost period specified in the schedule for Case Defrost Schedule, and the drip-down
schedule defrost period should always be longer than or equal to the length of the defrost schedule
time period. For example, if the case defrost schedule contains a defrost period from 7:00 to 7:15,
you would specify a case defrost drip-down period from 7:00 to 7:20 if you wanted to model a 5
minute condensate drip-down period after the regular defrost period. If no drip-down schedule is
entered, then the case defrost schedule (specified for the previous input field) will be used. The use
of Compact Schedules (ref. Schedules) are ideal for this purpose.

1.34.2.1.29 Field: Defrost Energy Correction Curve Type

This alpha field defines the form of the correction curve used to modify the defrost energy use (and
the associated load on the case cooling coil) at off-rated conditions. The valid choices for this field
are:

– None

This choice specifies that a defrost energy correction curve will not be used.

– CaseTemperatureMethod

This method defines the variation in defrost energy as a cubic function of Case Operating Temper-
ature. The result from the cubic curve is multiplied by the difference between the rated ambient
relative humidity and the actual zone relative humidity, and one minus this value is multiplied by
the Case Defrost Power to give the (average) operating defrost power at the actual zone humid-
ity condition. (Representative cooefficient values for single-shelf horizontal and multi-shelf vertical
display cases are given in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.)

– RelativeHumidityMethod

This method defines the variation in defrost energy as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air relative
humidity.

– DewpointMethod

This method defines the variation in defrost energy as a cubic function of ambient (zone) air dewpoint
temperature.
The default curve type is None. The methods described here (e.g. Case Temperature, Relative
Humidity, and Dewpoint) are applicable only to Electric with Temperature Termination, Hot-Gas
with Temperature Termination, and Hot-Brine with Temperature Termination case defrost types.
Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on how the defrost energy correction
types are modeled.
1684 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.2.1.30 Field: Defrost Energy Correction Curve Name

The name of a cubic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation
of the defrost energy (and the associated load on the case cooling coil) at off-rated conditions. The
curve should be normalized to have the value of 1.0 at the rated ambient air conditions defined above.
The defrost energy correction curve name is used only for the Electric with Temperature Termination,
Hot-Gas with Temperature Termination, and Hot-Brine with Temperature Termination case defrost
types.

1.34.2.1.31 Field: Under Case HVAC Return Air Fraction

This field denotes the fraction of HVAC system (air loop) return air that passes beneath the refriger-
ated case, if any. At times it is necessary to design HVAC systems with under case returns to avoid
overcooling the area around the refrigerated case, thus providing a more comfortable environment
for the zone occupants. This return air fraction affects the portion of the case credits (sensible and
latent) that are applied to the air returning to the HVAC system, while the remainder of the case
credits directly impacts the zone air heat balance. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further
information on how this is modeled. The sum of the Under Case HVAC Return Air Fractions for all
refrigerated cases located in a single zone must be less than or equal to 1.0. The value for this field
can range from zero to 1.0, with a default value of 0 if the field is blank. The return air node name
may be specified below.

1.34.2.1.32 Field: Refrigerated Case Restocking Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigerated case is being restocked
with product. The schedule should contain values in units of Watts per unit length of refrigerated
case (W/m). This field can be used to denote the additional load imposed on the refrigerated case
from stocking the case with product that is warmer than the refrigerated case temperature. This
information is difficult to find and may require additional research for proper modeling; however,
this schedule is available for this purpose if desired. If restocking of the refrigerated case will not be
simulated, enter a schedule with values of zero for all time periods or leave this field blank.

1.34.2.1.33 Field: Case Credit Fraction Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes a fraction of both the sensible and latent case
credits to be applied to the zone and/or the HVAC system return air. Schedule values must be from
0 to 1. This allows correction of the case credits for various refrigerated case types. For instance, if
glass door refrigerated display cases are installed in a store that is operated 12 hours per day, then
the doors will remain closed during the unoccupied times and would therefore reduce the sensible
and latent case credits during the unoccupied time. Leaving this field blank will result in no case
credit fraction being applied during the simulation.

1.34.2.1.34 Field: Design Evaporator Temperature or Brine Inlet Temperature

The value of this numeric field is used only with the detailed refrigeration system and is not read
for the compressor-rack system. For the refrigeration system, it is used to evaluate compressor
performance and is also used when the evaporator pressure and temperature are allowed to float
at loads less than the design load. If the case is cooled by a secondary system (ref: Refrigera-
tion:SecondarySystem), this value is the brine inlet temperature. The minimum value is -70C and
the maximum value is 40C. The default value is 5C less than the case temperature.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1685

1.34.2.1.35 Field: Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory

The value of this optional field is the refrigerant inventory present in the refrigerated case during
ordinary operation. The value is used to produce an estimate of the total refrigerant present in the
refrigeration system. The value is entered in kg/m.

1.34.2.1.36 Field: Under Case HVAC Return Air Node Name

Name of the return air node for this case. If left blank, it defaults to the first return air node for
this zone.
The following is an example input for a refrigerated case.

Refrigeration:Case ,
Multi -Deck Dairy/Deli Merchandiser with Synergy -E, !- Name [Based on Hill Phoenix 6DMLH -NRG]
, !- Availability Schedule [Used to turn case on/off including all power draws (ie fans ,
lights , etc)]
UserProvideZoneName , !- Zone Name [Location of Fixture]
23.89 , !- Rated Ambient Temperature {C} [75øF]
55, !- Rated Ambient Relative Humidity {percent}
1394, !- Rated Total Cooling Capacity per Unit length {W/m} [1 ,450 Btu/hr/ft = 11 ,600
Btu/hr]
0.30, !- Rated Latent Heat Ratio [ Rated Latent Capacity]
0.85, !- Rated Runtime Fraction
2.4, !- Case Length {m} [8 ft]
3.33, !- Case Operating Temperature {C} [38øF]
CaseTemperatureMethod , !- Latent Case Credit Curve Type
Multi_Shelf_Vertical_Latent_Case_Credit_Curve , !- Latent Case Credit Curve Name
27.3, !- Standard Case Fan Power per Unit Length {W/m} [8.3 W/ft]
27.3, !- Operating Case Fan Power per Unit Length {W/m} [8.3 W/ft = 67 W]
0.0, !- Standard Case Lighting Power per Unit Length {W/m} [0.0 W/ft]
114.8 , !- Installed Case Lighting Power per Unit Length {W/m} [35.0 W/ft =
280 W]
, !- Case Lighting Schedule Name
1.0, !- Fraction Of Lighting Energy To Case
0.0, !- Case Anti -Sweat Heater Power per Unit Length {W/m} [0.0 W/ft = 0 W]
, !- Minimum Anti -Sweat Heater Power per Unit Length {W/m} []
None , !- Anti -Sweat Heater Control Type
, !- Humidity At Zero Anti -Sweat Heater Energy {%}
, !- Case Height {m} []
1.0, !- Fraction of Anti -Sweat Heater Energy To Case
0.0, !- Case Defrost Power per Unit Length {W/m} [0.0 W/ft 0 W]
Off Cycle , !- Case Defrost Type
UserProvideDefSched6PerDay45MinEa , !- Case Defrost Schedule Name
UserProvideDefSched4PerDay42MinEa , !- Case Defrost Drip -Down Schedule
CaseTemperatureMethod , !- Defrost Energy Correction Curve Type
Multi Shelf Vertical , !- Defrost Energy Correction Curve Name
0.00, !- Under Case HVAC Return Air Fraction
, !- Refrigerated Case Restocking Schedule Name [Not modeling any
restocking]
, !- Case Credit Fraction Schedule Name
-3.33, !- Design Evaporator Temperature or Brine Inlet Temperature {C} [26øF]
; !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg/m} [ = ]

1.34.2.2 Outputs

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Total Cooling Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Total Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
1686 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Case Evaporator Latent Cooling Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Case Evaporator Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Zone Latent Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Zone Latent Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Return Air Latent Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Return Air Latent Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Evaporator Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Lighting Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Lighting Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Latent Credit Curve Value []

If case defrost type is Electric, Hot-Gas, or Hot-Brine with Temperature Termination

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Defrost Energy Correction Curve Value

If anti-sweat heater control type is not equal to None:

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Anti Sweat Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Anti Sweat Electricity Energy [J]

If case defrost type is Electric or Electric with Temperature Termination:

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Case Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Case Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

1.34.2.2.1 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling rate of the refrigerated case evaporator coil in
Watts.

1.34.2.2.2 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling of the refrigerated case evaporator coil in Joules
over the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type =
EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1687

1.34.2.2.3 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the sensible cooling rate of the refrigerated case evaporator coil in Watts.

1.34.2.2.4 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the sensible cooling of the refrigerated case evaporator coil in Joules over the timestep
being reported.

1.34.2.2.5 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the latent cooling (dehumidification) rate of the refrigerated case evaporator coil in
Watts.

1.34.2.2.6 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the latent cooling (dehumidification) of the refrigerated case evaporator coil in Joules
over the timestep being reported.

1.34.2.2.7 Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible cooling case credits delivered to the zone in Watts. If an under
case return duct is simulated, only a portion of the sensible case credits are applied to the zone.
A positive value is reported when the zone is cooled by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is
reported.

1.34.2.2.8 Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the amount of sensible cooling case credit energy delivered to the zone in Joules. If an
under case return duct is simulated, only a portion of the sensible case credits are applied to the
zone. A positive value is reported when the zone is cooled by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero
is reported.

1.34.2.2.9 Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible heating case credits delivered to the zone in Watts. If an under
case return duct is simulated, only a portion of the sensible case credits are applied to the zone.
A positive value is reported when the zone is heated by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is
reported.

1.34.2.2.10 Refrigeration Case Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This field is the amount of sensible heating case credit energy delivered to the zone in Joules. If an
under case return duct is simulated, only a portion of the sensible case credits are applied to the
zone. A positive value is reported when the zone is heated by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero
is reported.

1.34.2.2.11 Refrigeration Case Zone Latent Rate [W]

This field is the rate of latent cooling (dehumidification) case credits delivered to the zone in Watts.
If an under case return duct is simulated, only a portion of the latent case credits are applied to the
zone. A negative value (or zero) will be reported when the refrigerated case provides dehumidification
(thereby reducing the zone latent load).
1688 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.2.2.12 Refrigeration Case Zone Latent Energy [J]

This field is the amount of latent cooling (dehumidification) case credit energy delivered to the zone
in Joules. If an under case return duct is simulated, only a portion of the latent case credits are
applied to the zone. A negative value (or zero) will be reported when the refrigerated case provides
dehumidification (thereby reducing the zone latent load).

1.34.2.2.13 Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible cooling case credits delivered to the return air duct (zone return air
node) in Watts. If an under case return duct is simulated, a portion of the sensible case credits are
applied to the HVAC (zone) return air. A positive value is reported when the return air is cooled
by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is reported. If the HVAC system is off for a simulation
timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible cooling is actually provided to the zone air
instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).

1.34.2.2.14 Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the amount of sensible cooling case credit energy delivered to the return air duct (zone
return air node) in Joules. If an under case return duct is simulated, a portion of the sensible case
credits are applied to the HVAC (zone) return air. A positive value is reported when the return
air is cooled by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is reported. If the HVAC system is off for a
simulation timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible cooling is actually provided to the
zone air instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).

1.34.2.2.15 Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible heating case credits delivered to the return air duct (zone return air
node) in Watts. If an under case return duct is simulated, a portion of the sensible case credits are
applied to the HVAC (zone) return air. A positive value is reported when the return air is heated
by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is reported. If the HVAC system is off for a simulation
timestep (no return air mass flow), then this sensible heating is actually provided to the zone air
instead (even though a non-zero value is reported here).

1.34.2.2.16 Refrigeration Case Return Air Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This field is the amount of sensible heating case credit energy delivered to the return air duct (thereby
reducing the zone latent load). If the HVAC system is off for a simulation timestep (no return air
mass flow), then this latent energy is actually provided to the zone air instead (even though a
non-zero value is reported here).

1.34.2.2.17 Refrigeration Case Return Air Latent Energy [J]

1.34.2.2.18 Refrigeration Case Return Air Latent Rate [W]

These are the amount of latent cooling (dehumidification) case credit energy delivered to the return
air duct (zone return air node) in Joules or Watts. If an under case return duct is simulated, only
a portion of the latent case credits are applied to the HVAC (zone) return air. A negative value (or
zero) will be reported since the refrigerated case provides dehumidification (thereby reducing the
zone latent load). If the HVAC system is off for a simulation timestep (no return air mass flow),
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1689

then this latent energy is actually provided to the zone air instead (even though a non-zero value is
reported here).

1.34.2.2.19 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the refrigerated case fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.2.2.20 Refrigeration Case Evaporator Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the refrigerated case fan(s) in Joules over the timestep
being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use
Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.2.2.21 Refrigeration Case Lighting Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the refrigerated case lights in Watts.

1.34.2.2.22 Refrigeration Case Lighting Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the refrigerated case lights in Joules over the timestep
being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use
Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.2.2.23 Refrigeration Case Defrost Energy Correction Curve Value

This field is the output of the Defrost Energy Correction Curve which denotes the variation in defrost
energy at off-rated conditions. The output of the defrost energy correction curve directly impacts
the energy used during the defrost time period. It does not, however, impact the duration of the
defrost period. This output is available only for Electric with Temperature Termination, Hot-Gas
with Temperature Termination, or Hot-Brine with Temperature Termination case defrost types.

1.34.2.2.24 Refrigeration Case Latent Credit Curve Value []

This field is the output of the Latent Case Credit Curve which denotes the variation in latent case
credits at off-rated conditions. The output of the latent case credit curve directly impacts the amount
of frost formation on the refrigerated case evaporator coil and the requirement for defrost.

1.34.2.2.25 Refrigeration Case Anti Sweat Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the refrigerated case anti-sweat heater in Watts. This output
is available unless anti-sweat heater control type is specified as NONE.

1.34.2.2.26 Refrigeration Case Anti Sweat Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the total electricity consumption of the refrigerated case anti-sweat heater in Joules over
the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is
available unless anti-sweat heater control type is specified as NONE.
1690 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.2.2.27 Refrigeration Case Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the refrigerated case electric defrost heater(s) in Watts. This
output is available if case defrost type is Electric or Electric with Temperature Termination.

1.34.2.2.28 Refrigeration Case Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the total electricity consumption of the refrigerated case electric defrost heater(s) in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type
= Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
This output is available if case defrost type is Electric or Electric with Temperature Termination.

1.34.3 Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList
This object provides a list of all the refrigerated cases and/or walk in coolers cooled by a single refrig-
eration system (ref: Refrigeraion:CompressorRack and Refrigeration:System). This list is extensible.
Note that the names of all cases, walk-ins,air chillers, and caseandwalkinlists must be unique. That
is, you cannot give a list the same name as one of the cases. Similarly, a walkin cannot have the
same name as a case.This list may contain a combination of case and walk-in names OR a list of air
chiller names. Air chillers may not be included in any list that also includes cases or walk-ins.

1.34.3.1 Inputs

1.34.3.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a CaseAndWalkInList. Any reference to this list by
another object will use this name.

1.34.3.1.2 Field: Case or WalkIn or Air Chiller <x> Name

Identifies a particular refrigerated case or walk-in. The name will be validated against the Re-
frigeration Case, Refrigeration WalkIn, and Air Chiller names (ref: Refrigeration:Case, Refrigera-
tion:WalkIn, and Refrigeration:AirChiller) in the input file. This object is extensible, so additional
fields of this type can be added to the end of this object.
The following is an example input for a CaseAndWalkInList.

Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList ,
MediumTempCaselist , !- Name
UprightDairyCase , !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#1
LunchmeatCase , !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#2
MeatWalkIn , !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#3
DeliCaseOne; !- Refrigeration Case or WalkIn Name \#4

1.34.4 Refrigeration:WalkIn
The Refrigeration WalkIn object works in conjunction with a compressor rack, a refrigeration sys-
tem, or a refrigeration secondary system object (Ref. Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigera-
tion:System, or Refrigeration:SecondarySystem) to simulate the performance of a walk-in cooler.
The walk-in cooler model uses information at rated conditions along with input descriptions for heat
transfer surfaces facing multiple zones to determine performance. Energy use for lights, fans, and
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1691

floor and anti-sweat heaters is modeled based on inputs for nominal power, schedules, and control
type. The walk-in cooler model accounts for the sensible and latent heat exchange with the sur-
rounding environment (termed “case credits”) which impacts the temperature and humidity in each
zone adjacent to the walk-in.
The walk-in cooler object inputs include a name, an availability schedule name, the rated cooling
capacity, the rated operating temperature, the rated cooling source temperature, the rated total
heating power and heating power schedule, the rated fan and lighting power and schedules, defrost
type, defrost control type, defrost schedule name, drip-down schedule name, defrost power, the
portion of the defrost energy used to melt ice (only for temperature termination control type),
restocking schedule, refrigerant inventory, and the floor area and U-value.
For each zone adjacent to the walk-in, the user must input the zone name and the insulated surface
area and U-value facing that zone. The user must also specify, for two types of doors, the door area,
height, U-value, door opening schedule name, and any door opening protection.
Under case HVAC return air fraction, available for refrigerated cases, is not available for walk-in
coolers.

1.34.4.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigerated walk-in. Any reference to this walk-in
by another object will use this name.

1.34.4.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the walk in can operate during a
given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (maximum schedule value of 1.0 is typically used)
indicates that the walkin will operate during a given time period. A value equal to 0 denotes that
the case does not operate (everything is OFF: refrigeration, fans, lights, anti-sweat, etc.). Typically
the walkin will operate throughout the day (i.e., the schedule will contain 1 for all time periods);
however, walkins require maintenance and/or cleaning and this can be modeled accordingly using
this schedule if desired. If this field is left blank, the default schedule has a value of 1 for all time
periods.

1.34.4.3 Field: Rated Coil Cooling Capacity

The total, full load cooling capacity (sensible plus latent) in watts (W) at rated conditions The value
entered for this field must be greater than zero, with no default value.

1.34.4.4 Field: Operating Temperature

The rated average temperature of the air and products within the walk-in cooler in ˚C. The entered
value for this field must be less than 20˚C. There is no default value.

1.34.4.5 Field: Rated Cooling Source Temperature

For a DX evaporator coil, enter the saturated evaporating temperature in ˚C. For a fluid coil, enter
the fluid coil entrance temperature in ˚C. There is no default value. This number is used, with
1692 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

temperatures for other refrigeration loads on any one system, to set that system’s minimum suction
pressure or minimum circulating fluid temperature. (This value is not used if the walkin is cooled
by a compressor rack object.)

1.34.4.6 Field: Rated Total Heating Power

The total heating power in watts including all anti-sweat, door, drip-pan, and floor heaters (W).
This value is required and has no default value.

1.34.4.7 Field: Heating Power Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of heater power that operates
during a given time period. A schedule value of zero denotes that all heaters are off. A schedule
value greater than 0 indicates that some portion of the total heater power will operate during that
time period (maximum schedule value of 1.0 means all heaters are fully on). For example, if door
and floor heaters represent 50% of the total heater power and are on all the time, the minimum
schedule value would be 0.5. If anti-sweat heaters represent 40% of the total heater power and are
only on during certain hours, the schedule value during those hours would be increased by 0.4. If
this field is left blank, the default schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.34.4.8 Field: Rated Cooling Coil Fan Power

The cooling coil fan power in watts (W). This value has a default value of 375W. This fan is assumed
to run continuously except during electric, hot brine, or hot gas defrost periods.

1.34.4.9 Field: Rated Circulation Fan Power

The circulation fan power in watts (W). This value has a default value of 0 W. This fan is assumed
to run continuously.

1.34.4.10 Field: Rated Total Lighting Power

The total lighting power in watts including both display and task lighting (W). This value is required
and has no default value.

1.34.4.11 Field: Lighting Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of walk-in lights that operate
during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 indicates that the lights will operate
during that time period (maximum schedule value of 1.0 means lights are fully on). A schedule value
of zero denotes that the lights are off. If this field is left blank, the default schedule has a value of 1
for all time periods.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1693

1.34.4.12 Field: Defrost Type

The type of defrost used for this walk-in. Valid choices are None, Off-Cycle, HotFluid, and Electric.
The default defrost type is Electric if the field is blank. HotFluid includes both hot gas and hot
brine defrost systems. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on how the different
defrost types are modeled.

1.34.4.13 Field: Defrost Control Type

The type of defrost control used for this walkin. Valid choices are TimeSchedule and TemperatureTer-
mination. The default is TimeSchedule if the field is blank. Refer to the Engineering Reference for
further information on how the different defrost controls are modeled.

1.34.4.14 Field: Defrost Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes when the walkin requires defrosting. A
schedule value of 1.0 indicates that defrost will be on during a given time period if the defrost
control type is “TimeSchedule”. For the TemperatureTermination defrost control type, the defrost
will start with the schedule value changes from 0 to 1, but will end when the ice is melted. A
value equal to 0 denotes that the defrost is off. Defrost schedules normally repeat the duration
and number of defrost cycles for each day of the year. The walkin manufacturer typically provides
this information with the product literature. If TemperatureTermination control type is used, the
defrost schedule is used for the defrost cycle start time and the defrost cycle end time is not allowed
to extend beyond the scheduled off time. The use of Compact Schedules (ref. Schedules) are ideal
for this purpose.

1.34.4.15 Field: Defrost Drip-Down Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the walkin requires additional time
for draining condensate after the defrost period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that the defrost
drip-down period is on during a given time period. A value equal to 0 denotes that the defrost drip-
down period is over. The walkin manufacturer typically provides this information with the product
literature.
Each defrost drip-down period specified in this schedule should start at the same time as the corre-
sponding defrost period specified in the schedule for Defrost Schedule, and the drip-down schedule
defrost period should always be longer than or equal to the length of the defrost schedule time period.
For example, if the defrost schedule contains a defrost period from 7:00 to 7:15, you would specify
a case defrost drip-down period from 7:00 to 7:20 if you wanted to model a 5 minute condensate
drip-down period after the regular defrost period. If no drip-down schedule is entered, then the
defrost schedule (specified for the previous input field) will be used. The use of Compact Schedules
(ref. Schedules) are ideal for this purpose.

1.34.4.16 Field: Defrost Power

The defrost power in watts. This input is required for hot-fluid (hot gas or hot brine), or electric
defrost types. Walkin manufacturers do not typically provide information on the heat input for hot
gas and hot brine defrost. Information provided for electric defrost power can be substituted here
1694 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

for walkins using hot-gas or hot-brine defrost if other information is not available. Only electric
Defrost Types consume electricity during the defrost period. The entered value for this field must
be greater than or equal to zero.

1.34.4.17 Field: Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice

When cooling coils go through a defrost cycle, only a portion of the defrost energy is actually used to
melt the ice. The rest of the defrost energy goes to increasing the temperature of the coils themselves
and to the walkin environment. The Temperature Termination defrost control type calculates the
end of the defrost cycle that corresponds to melting all the ice. Therefore, the user must input this
fractional value. The default value is 0.7 for electric defrost and 0.3 for hot fluid defrost. Refer to the
Engineering Reference for further information on how the defrost energy control types are modeled.

1.34.4.18 Field: Restocking Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the walkin is being restocked with
product. The schedule should contain values in units of Watts (note this is different from the
restocking schedule values for cases that are entered per unit length). This field can be used to denote
the additional load imposed on the walkin from stocking the walkin with product that is warmer than
the walkin temperature. This information is difficult to find and may required additional research
for proper modeling; however, this schedule is available for this purpose if desired. If restocking of
the refrigerated walkin will not be simulated, enter a schedule with values of zero for all time periods
or leave this field blank.

1.34.4.19 Field: Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory

The value of this optional field is the refrigerant inventory present in the walkin during ordinary
operation. The value is used to produce an estimate of the total refrigerant present in the refrigeration
system. The value is entered in kg.

1.34.4.20 Field: Insulated Floor Surface Area

The floor area in square meters. This value is required and has no default value.

1.34.4.21 Field: Insulated Floor U-Value

The floor themal transmittance (in W/m2 -K). This value has a default value of 0.3154. (This
corresponds to R18 in Archaic American Insulation Units. To convert other R-values to thermal
transmittance, divide 5.678 by the R-value. For example, R15 is 0.3785 W/m2 -K and R5 is 1.136
W/m2 -K.)
THE REMAINING 12 FIELDS FOR THE WALK-IN COOLER MUST BE RE-
PEATED FOR EACH ZONE WHICH IS IN CONTACT WITH A WALK-IN WALL,
CEILING, OR DOOR. This object is extensible, so additional fields of this type can be
added to the end of this object by repeating the last 12 fields in the object.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1695

1.34.4.22 Field: Zone <x> Name

The name of a zone adjoining the walkin. The walkin will impact the air heat balance in
this zone. This zone must represent a conditioned space, that is, it must appear in a Zone-
HVAC:EquipmentConnections object.

1.34.4.23 Field: Total Insulated Surface Area Facing Zone <x>

The total surface area (walls and ceilings) facing this particular zone in square meters. This value
is required and has no default value.

1.34.4.24 Field: Insulated Surface U-Value Facing Zone <x>

The surface (walls and ceilings) themal transmittance (in W/m2 -K). This value has a default value of
0.3154. (This corresponds to R18 in Archaic American Insulation Units. To convert other R-values
to thermal transmittance, divide 5.678 by the R-value. For example, R15 is 0.3785 W/m2 -K and
R5 is 1.136 W/m2 -K.)

1.34.4.25 Field: Area of Glass Reach In Doors Facing Zone <x>

The total area of glass doors facing this particular zone in square meters. The default is 0.0.

1.34.4.26 Field: Height of Glass Reach In Doors Facing Zone <x>

The glass reach in door height in meters. The default is 1.5.

1.34.4.27 Field: Glass Reach In Door U-Value Facing Zone <x>

The glass door themal transmittance (in W/m2 -K). This field has a default value of 1.136. (This
corresponds to R5 in Archaic American Insulation Units.)

1.34.4.28 Field: Glass Reach In Door Opening Schedule Name Facing Zone <x>

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of time glass doors are open
during a given time period. The schedule values should be between 0 and 1.0. If no schedule is
specified, the doors are assumed to be open 5% of the time (corresponding to a schedule value of
0.05).

1.34.4.29 Field: Area of Stocking Doors Facing Zone <x>

The total area of stock doors facing this particular zone in square meters. The default is 0.0.

1.34.4.30 Field: Height of Stocking Doors Facing Zone <x>

The stocking door height in meters. The default is 2.0.

1696 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.4.31 Field: Stocking Door U-Value Facing Zone <x>

The stocking door themal transmittance (in W/m2 -K). This value has a default value of 0.3785.
(This corresponds to R15 in Archaic American Insulation Units.)

1.34.4.32 Field: Stocking Door Opening Schedule Name Facing Zone <x>

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of time stocking doors are open
during a given time period. The schedule values should be between 0 and 1.0. If no schedule is
specified, the doors are assumed to be open 5% of the time (corresponding to a schedule value of
0.05).

1.34.4.33 Field: Stocking Door Opening Protection Type Facing Zone <x>

The type of stocking door opening protection used for this walkin. Valid choices are None, AirCur-
tain, and StripCurtain. The default is AirCurtain if the field is blank. Use the type, StripCurtain,
for both hanging strips and airlock vestibules. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further infor-
mation on how the door protection types are modeled.
The following is an example input for a refrigeration walkin.

Refrigeration:WalkIn ,
WalkInFreezer , !- Name
CaseOperatingSched , !- Availability Schedule Name
4690. , !- Rated Coil Cooling Capacity {W}
-2.22, !- Operating Temperature {C}
-6.67, !- Rated Cooling Source Temperature {C}
0.0, !- Rated Total Heating Power {W}
CaseOperatingSched , !- Heating Power Schedule Name
735., !- Rated Cooling Coil Fan Power {W}
0.0, !- Rated Circulation Fan Power {W}
120., !- Rated Total Lighting Power {W}
CaseLightingSched2 , !- Lighting Schedule Name
Electric , !- Defrost Type
TimeSchedule , !- Defrost Control Type
CaseDefrostSched3 , !- Defrost Schedule Name
CaseDripDownSched3 , !- Defrost Drip -Down Schedule Name
5512. , !- Defrost Power {W}
, !- Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice {dimensionless}
WalkInStockingSched , !- Restocking Schedule Name
, !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg}
13.0, !- Insulated Floor Surface Area {m2}
0.207 , !- Insulated Floor U-Value {W/m2 -C}
BackRoom , !- Zone Name
43.4, !- Total Insulated Surface Area Facing this Zone {m2}
.235, !- Insulated Surface U-Value Facing this Zone {W/m2 -C}
, !- Area of Glass Reach In Doors Facing this Zone {m2}
, !- Height of Glass Reach In Doors Facing this Zone {m}
, !- Glass Reach In Door U Value Facing this Zone {W/m2 -C}
, !- Glass Reach In Door Opening Schedule Name Facing this Zone
2.0, !- Area of Stocking Doors Facing this Zone {m2}
2.0, !- Height of Stocking Doors Facing this Zone {m}
, !- Stocking Door U Value Facing this Zone {W/m2 -C}
WIStockDoorOpenSch , !- Stocking Door Opening Schedule Name Facing this Zone
StripCurtain; !- Stocking Door Opening Protection Type Facing this Zone

1.34.5 Refrigeration Case and WalkIn Outputs

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Total Cooling Rate [W]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1697

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Total Cooling Energy [J]

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Lighting Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Lighting Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Heater Electricity Energy [J]

Report only for WalkIns using electric defrost

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

Report for each Zone exchanging energy with the WalkIn

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Zone,Average,Refrigeration Walk In Zone Latent Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Walk In Zone Latent Energy [J]

1.34.5.1 Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling rate of the WalkIn evaporator coil in Watts.

1.34.5.2 Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Total Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling of the WalkIn evaporator coil in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer,
End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.5.3 Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the sensible cooling rate of the WalkIn evaporator coil in Watts.
1698 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.5.4 Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the sensible cooling of the WalkIn evaporator coil in Joules over the timestep being
reported.

1.34.5.5 Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the latent cooling (dehumidification) rate of the WalkIn evaporator coil in Watts.

1.34.5.6 Refrigeration Walk In Evaporator Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the latent cooling (dehumidification) of the WalkIn evaporator coil in Joules over the
timestep being reported.

1.34.5.7 Refrigeration Walk In Ancillary Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the total electricity (fan, heaters, lights, and electric defrost) used by the walkin in
Watts.

1.34.5.8 Refrigeration Walk In Ancillary Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the electricity (fan, heaters, lights, and electric defrost)used by the WalkIn in Joules
over the timestep being reported.

1.34.5.9 Refrigeration Walk In Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the WalkIn fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.5.10 Refrigeration Walk In Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the WalkIn fan(s) in Joules over the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.5.11 Refrigeration Walk In Lighting Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the WalkIn lights in Watts.

1.34.5.12 Refrigeration Walk In Lighting Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the WalkIn lights in Joules over the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.5.13 Refrigeration Walk In Heater Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the WalkIn heaters in Watts.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1699

1.34.5.14 Refrigeration Walk In Heater Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the total electricity consumption of the WalkIn heaters in Joules over the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.5.15 Refrigeration Walk In Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

This field is the electric power input to the WalkIn electric defrost heater(s) in Watts. This output
is available if case defrost type is Electric.

1.34.5.16 Refrigeration Walk In Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

This field is the total electricity consumption of the WalkIn electric defrost heater(s) in Joules over
the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Building (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is
available if case defrost type is Electric.
The following output variables are available for each zone adjacent to the walkin. An output variable
identification is created for each zone exchanging energy with the walkin. For example if the walkin,
“DairyWalkIn”, were exchanging energy with the zone, “SalesArea”, the output variable identification
would be “DairyWalkInInZoneSalesArea”.

1.34.5.17 Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible cooling case credits delivered to the zone in Watts. A positive value
is reported when the zone is cooled by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is reported.

1.34.5.18 Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This field is the amount of sensible cooling case credit energy delivered to the zone in Joules. A
positive value is reported when the zone is cooled by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is reported.

1.34.5.19 Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]

This field is the rate of sensible heating case credits delivered to the zone in Watts. A positive value
is reported when the zone is heated by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is reported.

1.34.5.20 Refrigeration Walk In Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]

This field is the amount of sensible heating case credit energy delivered to the zone in Joules. A
positive value is reported when the zone is heated by sensible case credits, otherwise a zero is
reported.

1.34.5.21 Refrigeration Walk In Zone Latent Rate [W]

This field is the rate of latent cooling (dehumidification) case credits delivered to the zone in Watts.
A negative value (or zero) will be reported when the WalkIn provides dehumidification (thereby
reducing the zone latent load).
1700 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.5.22 Refrigeration Walk In Zone Latent Energy [J]

This field is the amount of latent cooling (dehumidification) case credit energy delivered to the zone
in Joules. A negative value (or zero) will be reported when the WalkIn provides dehumidification
(thereby reducing the zone latent load).

1.34.6 Refrigeration:System

The refrigeration system object simulates the performance of a supermarket refrigeration system
when used along with other objects to define the refrigeration load(s), the compressor(s), and the
condenser.
At least one refrigeration load object must be defined which may be one of four types of load, a
refrigerated case, a walk-in cooler, a chiller providing refrigeration to a secondary loop, or a cascade
condenser which absorbs heat rejected by a lower-temperature system (Ref. Refrigeration:Case, Re-
frigeration:WalkIn, Refrigeration:SecondarySystem, and Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade) If multi-
ple loads are served by the same system , the user should use one or both of the list objects available
to assign loads to the system. The first list includes all cases and walkins cooled directly by this
system (Ref. Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList). The second list includes any ‘transfer’ loads, that
is refrigeration loads borne by this system that are transferred from another refrigeration system via
either a secondary loop chiller or a cascade condenser (Ref. Refrigeration:TransferLoadList, see the
Engineering Reference for more information about these types of systems).
The refrigeration system object is capable of modeling both single-stage and two-stage compression
refrigeration systems. The name of at least one compressor must be defined and a list object is
available if the system is served by more than one compressor (Ref. Refrigeration:Compressor and
Refrigeration:CompressorList).
Heat is rejected outdoors in a condenser by direct air flow, evaporative water cooling,
by a water-cooled condenser with appropriate plant loop piping, or to a cascade con-
denser cooled by another refrigeration system(ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled, Re-
frigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled, Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled, Refrigera-
tion:Condenser:Cascade). With evaporative cooling, water is sprayed through the air stream
to effectively lower the air temperature experienced by the condenser coil as a result of water
evaporation. The use of a water-cooled condenser requires the definition of a plant loop to supply
cooling to the condenser. If a cascade condenser is specified, the refrigeration system absorbing the
rejected heat must also be defined.
The refrigeration system may also include a liquid suction and/or mechanical subcooler (Ref. Re-
frigeration:Subcooler).
The system object coordinates the energy flows between the other refrigeration objects and is used
to set system parameters. Compressor waste heat can also be reclaimed for use by an optional air-
or water-heating coil (Ref. Coil:Heating:Desuperheater and Coil:WaterHeating:Desuperheater).
The inputs for the refrigeration system object, in addition to the names of the other refrigeration
objects described above, include a name for this system, the minimum condensing temperature, the
refrigeration system working fluid, and the type of saturated suction temperature control. Optional
input fields are also provided for users seeking to keep track of refrigerant inventory and suction pipe
heat gains.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1701

1.34.6.1 Inputs

1.34.6.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration system. Any reference to this refrig-
eration system by another object will use this name.

1.34.6.1.2 Field: Refrigerated Case or WalkIn or CaseAndWalkInList Name

Identifies a single case, a single walkin, single air chiller, or a particular list of refrigerated cases
and walkins or air chillers, that is cooled by this refrigeration system. The name will be vali-
dated against the case, walkin, air chiller and CaseAndWalkInList names (ref: Refrigeration:Case,
Refrigeration:WalkIn, Refrigeration:AirChiller, and Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList) in the input
file. Only cases and walkins or air chillers served directly by the system should be included in this
list. Any cases, walkins, or air chillers served indirectly via a secondary loop should NOT be included
in this list. Note that any system that serves an air chiller cannot also serve a case or walkin.

1.34.6.1.3 Field: Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name

Identifies a single SecondarySystem, a single Cascade Condenser, OR or a list of Transfer Loads
(where the list is comprised of SecondarySystems and/or Cascade Condensers) that are cooled by this
refrigeration system. The name will be validated against the secondary system, cascade condenser,
and TransferLoad list names (ref: Refrigeration:SecondarySystem, Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade,
and Refrigeration:TransferLoadList) in the input file. Only secondary systems and cascade con-
densers served directly by the system should be included in this list. (NOTE – this entry is for a
cascade condenser cooled by this system, not a condenser absorbing heat rejected by this system.)

1.34.6.1.4 Field: Condenser Name

The name of the condenser that is used to reject heat from this refrigeration system. The
name will be validated against the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled,
Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled, Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled, and Refrigera-
tion:Condenser:Cascade) in the input file.

1.34.6.1.5 Field:Compressor or Compressor List Name

Identifies a single compressor, or a particular list of compressors, that provide cooling energy to
this refrigeration system. The name will be validated against the compressor list names (ref:
List:Refrigeration:Compressors) in the input file. If the refrigeration systems contains two stages of
compression, this field identifies the low-stage compressors connected to the two-stage system.

1.34.6.1.6 Field: Minimum Condensing Temperature

This numeric field specifies the minimum condensing temperature (C), which is usually determined
by the temperature required to maintain acceptable thermal expansion valve performance.

1.34.6.1.7 Field: Refrigeration System Working Fluid Type

The type of refrigerant used by the system. Valid choices are R11, R123, R134A, R12, R22, R404A,
R507A, or R410A. This name will be validated against Fluid Names (ref: Fluid Properties section) in
the input file. Note that the corresponding property data, available in FluidPropertiesRefData.idf,
must by supplied in the input file.
1702 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.6.1.8 Field: Suction Temperature Control Type

The type of saturated suction temperature control used by the system. Valid choices are Float-
SuctionTemperature and ConstantSuctionTemperature. If the field is blank, the default will
be ConstantSuctionTemperature. See the Engineering Reference section, Variable Evaporator
Temperature, for a discussion of this option.

1.34.6.1.9 Field: Mechanical Subcooler Name

This optional field identifies a mechanical subcooler that absorbs heat from this refrigeration system.
This field should not be used for a mechanical subcooler that absorbs heat from another system.
The name will be validated against the subcooler names (ref: Refrigeration:Subcooler) in the input
file.

1.34.6.1.10 Field: Liquid Suction Heat Exchanger Subcooler Name

This optional field Identifies a particular liquid suction heat exchanger (LSHX) subcooler present in
this refrigeration system. The name will be validated against the subcooler names (ref: Refrigera-
tion:Subcooler) in the input file.

1.34.6.1.11 Field: Sum UA Suction Piping

This optional field is typically used when trying to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on
system performance and zone heat balance, particularly in comparing a DX system to a secondary
system. Enter the value for suction piping heat gain (in W/C). That is, sum up the product of
the pipe wall insulation conductance times the outer surface area of the pipe insulation. Please see
the Engineering Reference for guidance in calculating this value. If the Sum UA Suction Piping is
entered, the Suction Piping Zone Name is also required.

1.34.6.1.12 Field: Suction Piping Zone Name

This optional field is typically used when trying to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on system
performance, particularly in comparing a DX system to a secondary system. (If the previous field,
Sum UA Suction Piping, is blank, this field will not be used.) Enter the name of the zone where
the suction piping is located. The suction piping heat gains will be calculated based upon the air
temperature within this zone. The heat balance of this zone will also be affected by the piping heat
exchange. Additional output variables are described at the end of this “Group-Refrigeration” section
for the total impact of refrigeration on zones, including suction pipe heat exchange.

1.34.6.1.13 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
Rack”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.34.6.1.14 Field: Number of Compressor Stages

This field determines whether the refrigeration system contains one or two stages of compression. In
this field, enter either “1” for single-stage compression systems or “2” for two-stage compression
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1703

systems. If two stages of compression are selected, then an intercooler will be used between the
compressor stages to cool the discharge of the low-stage compressors. The default value is “1”.

1.34.6.1.15 Field: Intercooler Type

This field determines the type of intercooler which is used for two-stage compression systems. Valid
choices for this field include “None”, “Flash Intercooler” or “Shell-and-Coil Intercooler”. Single-stage
systems require “None” while two-stage systems require either “Flash Intercooler” or “Shell-and-Coil
Intercooler”. The default selection is “None”, corresponding to a single-stage compression system.

1.34.6.1.16 Field: Shell-and-Coil Intercooler Effectiveness

When a shell-and-coil intercooler is selected for two-stage compression systems, this field allows the
specification of the shell-and-coil intercooler effectiveness. Values in this field will only be valid if
“Shell-and-Coil Intercooler” is selected in the “Intercooler Type” field above. The valid range of
values for this field is between 0.0 and 1.0. A default value of 0.80 will be used if none is specified.

1.34.6.1.17 Field: High-Stage Compressor or CompressorList Name

Identifies a single compressor, or a particular list of compressors, that comprise the high-stage
compression of a two-stage compression refrigeration system. The name will be validated against
the compressor list names (ref: List:Refrigeration:Compressors) in the input file. Names in this field
are only valid if two compressor stages have been specified in the “Number of Compressor Stages”
field above.
The following is an example input for a single-stage compression refrigeration system.

Refrigeration:System ,
MediumTempSystem , !- Refrigeration System Name
MediumTempCaselist , !- Refrigeration Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
, !- Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name
AirCooledCondenserA , !- Refrigeration Condenser Name
MediumTempCompressorlist , !- Refrigeration Compressor or CompressorList Name
25.0, !- Minimum Condensing Temperture {C}
R134a , !- Refrigeration System Working Fluid
ConstantSuctionTemperature , !- Suction Temperature Control Type
, !- Optional mechanical subcooler name
, !- Optional LSHX subcooler name
, !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/K}
, !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
MedTempRefrig; !- End -Use Subcategory

The following is an example input for a two-stage compression refrigeration system.

Refrigeration:System ,
LowTempSystem , !- Refrigeration System Name
LowTempCaselist , !- Refrigeration Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
, !- Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name
AirCooledCondenserB , !- Refrigeration Condenser Name
LowStageCompressorList , !- Refrigeration Compressor or CompressorList Name
25.0, !- Minimum Condensing Temperture {C}
R404A , !- Refrigeration System Working Fluid
ConstantSuctionTemperature , !- Suction Temperature Control
, !- Optional mechanical subcooler name
, !- Optional LSHX subcooler name
, !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/K}
, !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
LowTempRefrig , !- End -Use Subcategory
2, !- Number of Compressor Stages
1704 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Shell -and -Coil Intercooler , !- Intercooler Type

0.7, !- Shell -and -Coil Intercooler Effectiveness
HiStageCompressorList !- High -Stage Compressor or CompressorList Name

1.34.6.2 Outputs

THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE CASES
AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Average Compressor COP [W/W]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass [kg]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory [kg]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Estimated Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condensing Temperature [C]’
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Evaporating Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Suction Pipe Suction Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Thermostatic Expansion Valve Liquid Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total Low and High Stage Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Electricity Rate [W]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1705

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE AIR
CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Average Compressor COP [W/W]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Air Chiller Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Case and Walk In Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Intercooler Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Intercooler Pressure [Pa]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condensing Temperature [C]’
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Evaporating Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Suction Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System TXV Liquid Temperature [C]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow
Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Electricity Energy
[J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Electricity Rate
[W]
1706 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low and High Stage Compressor Electricity
Energy [J]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Electricity Energy
[J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Electricity Rate
[W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow
Rate [kg/s]

1.34.6.2.1 THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS

THAT SERVE CASES AND/OR WALKINS

1.34.6.2.2 Refrigeration System Total Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the total electric power input to the system compressor(s) in Watts.

1.34.6.2.3 Refrigeration System Total Compressor Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the system’s compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.6.2.4 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.5 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with
Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.6 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1707

1.34.6.2.7 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with
Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.8 Refrigeration System Total Low and High Stage Compressor Electric-
ity Energy [J]
This is the total electricity consumption of the system’s low- and high-stage compressor(s) in Joules
for the timestep being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a
meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref.
Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.9 Refrigeration System Average Compressor COP [W/W]

This output is the system average compressor COP, the total refrigeration effect divided by the total
power to the compressors.

1.34.6.2.10 Refrigeration System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the total heat transfer rate of the Refrigeration Compressor rack in Watts. It is the
sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade
condensers, and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include
compressor or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are
included in this value.

1.34.6.2.11 Refrigeration System Total Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total heat transfer of the Refrigeration Compressor rack in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key
= Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.6.2.12 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the low-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of all
of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor
or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this
value. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.13 Refrigeration System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat Transfer

Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the low-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for
two-stage compression systems.
1708 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.6.2.14 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the high-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of all
of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor
or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this
value. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.15 Refrigeration System Total High Stage Compressor Heat Transfer

Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the high-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for
two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.16 Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly
by this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases
and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or
condenser fan heat or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary
systems.

1.34.6.2.17 Refrigeration System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly
by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transfered for the refrigerated cases and
walk-ins that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or
condenser fan heat or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary
systems.

1.34.6.2.18 Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the sum of the heat transfer rates for any secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler
providing cooling to this system in Watts. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems
is a mechanical subcooler, the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the
cooling effect and as a positive number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the
pump energy for any secondary loops and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems
that are cooled by this system. (See the Engineering Reference for more details about the loads
placed by secondary systems upon the primary system.)

1.34.6.2.19 Refrigeration System Total Transferred Load Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1709

This output is the sum of the heat transfered for any secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler providing
cooling to this system in Joules. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems is a
mechanical subcooler, the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the
cooling effect and as a positive number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the
pump energy for any secondary loops and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems
that are cooled by this system. (See the Engineering Reference for more details about the loads
placed by secondary systems upon the primary system.)

1.34.6.2.20 Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note
this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain
characteristics in the input.

1.34.6.2.21 Refrigeration System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note
this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain
characteristics in the input.

1.34.6.2.22 Refrigeration System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system condenser in Watts. It does not
include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes. However, if a water-cooled
condenser was used to provide heat to a separate water loop, the energy transferred to that loop is
included here.

1.34.6.2.23 Refrigeration System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system condenser in Joules for the
timestep being reported. It does not include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful
purposes. However, if a water-cooled condenser was used to provide heat to a separate water loop,
the energy transferred to that loop is included here.

1.34.6.2.24 Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate

[W]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion
valve to the suction gas.

1.34.6.2.25 Refrigeration System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion
valve to the suction gas.

1.34.6.2.26 Refrigeration System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass [kg]

This output is the sum of the input inventory values for the condenser, receiver, cases, and liquid
pipes that are a part of this system.
1710 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.6.2.27 Refrigeration System Estimated Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the compressors for this system.

1.34.6.2.28 Refrigeration System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow

Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the low-stage compressors for this sys-
tem. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.29 Refrigeration System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant Mass Flow

Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the high-stage compressors for this
system. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.30 Refrigeration System Intercooler Temperature [C]

This is the saturation temperature in the intercooler. This output is valid only for two-stage
compression systems.

1.34.6.2.31 Refrigeration System Intercooler Pressure [Pa]

This is the saturation pressure in the intercooler. This output is valid only for two-stage compression
systems.

1.34.6.2.32 Refrigeration System Condensing Temperature [C]

This is the saturated condensing temperature.

1.34.6.2.33 Refrigeration System Evaporating Temperature [C]

This is the saturated evaporating temperature.

1.34.6.2.34 Refrigeration System Suction Pipe Suction Temperature [C]

This is the temperature at the compressor inlet including superheat after the cases and superheat
from any liquid suction heat exchangers.

1.34.6.2.35 Refrigeration System Thermostatic Expansion Valve Liquid Temper-

ature [C]
This is the temperature entering the thermal expansion valve before the cases, equal to the condensing
temperature minus any subcooling included in the condenser or provided by mechanical and/or liquid
suction heat exchanger subcoolers.

1.34.6.2.36 THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS

THAT SERVE AIR CHILLERS
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1711

1.34.6.2.37 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system compressor(s) in Watts.

1.34.6.2.38 Refrigeration Chiller System Total Compressor Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with Resource
Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.6.2.39 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Elec-
tricity Rate [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.40 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Elec-
tricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s low-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with
Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.41 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Elec-
tricity Rate [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Watts. This
output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.42 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Elec-
tricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s high-stage compressor(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a meter with
Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.43 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low and High Stage Com-
pressor Electricity Energy [J]
This is the total electricity consumption of the system’s low- and high-stage compressor(s) in Joules
for the timestep being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a
meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref.
Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.44 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Average Compressor COP [W/W]

This output is the system average compressor COP, the total refrigeration effect divided by the total
power to the compressors
1712 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.6.2.45 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the Refrigeration Compressor rack in Watts. It is the
sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade
condensers, and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include
compressor or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are
included in this value.

1.34.6.2.46 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Compressor Heat Transfer

Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the Refrigeration Compressor rack in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key
= Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.6.2.47 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the low-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of all
of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor
or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this
value. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.48 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Low Stage Compressor Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the low-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for
two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.49 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the high-stage compressors in Watts. It is the sum of all
of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases, walk-ins, secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers that are cooled by this system. This value does not include compressor
or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this
value. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.50 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total High Stage Compressor Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the high-stage compressors in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects). This output is valid only for
two-stage compression systems.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1713

1.34.6.2.51 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Air Chiller Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly
by this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the refrigerated cases
and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or
condenser fan heat or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary
systems.

1.34.6.2.52 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Case and Walk In Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the refrigerated cases and walk-ins served directly
by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transfered for the refrigerated cases and
walk-ins that are connected directly to this system. This value does not include compressor or
condenser fan heat or the heat transfer for cases and walk-ins served by any connected secondary
systems.

1.34.6.2.53 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Trans-
fer Rate [W]
This output is the sum of the heat transfer rates for any secondary loops, cascade condensers,
and mechanical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler
providing cooling to this system in Watts. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems
is a mechanical subcooler, the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the
cooling effect and as a positive number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the
pump energy for any secondary loops and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems
that are cooled by this system. (See the Engineering Reference for more details about the loads
placed by secondary systems upon the primary system.)

1.34.6.2.54 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Transferred Load Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
This output is the sum of the heat transfered for any secondary loops, cascade condensers, and
mechanical subcoolers cooled by this system, minus the benefit of any mechanical subcooler providing
cooling to this system in Joules. Therefore, if the only transfer load between two systems is a
mechanical subcooler, the same amount will show as a negative value for the system receiving the
cooling effect and as a positive number for the system serving that cooling load. It also includes the
pump energy for any secondary loops and the compressor energy for any cascade condenser systems
that are cooled by this system. (See the Engineering Reference for more details about the loads
placed by secondary systems upon the primary system.)

1.34.6.2.55 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note
this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain
characteristics in the input.
1714 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.6.2.56 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Total Suction Pipe Heat Gain En-
ergy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for suction piping served by this system in Watts. Note
this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the suction piping heat gain
characteristics in the input.

1.34.6.2.57 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system condenser in Watts. It does not
include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes. However, if a water-cooled
condenser was used to provide heat to a separate water loop, the energy transferred to that loop is
included here.

1.34.6.2.58 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system condenser in Joules for the
timestep being reported. It does not include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful
purposes. However, if a water-cooled condenser was used to provide heat to a separate water loop,
the energy transferred to that loop is included here.

1.34.6.2.59 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion
valve to the suction gas.

1.34.6.2.60 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Liquid Suction Subcooler Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transferred from the liquid condensate before the thermal expansion
valve to the suction gas.

1.34.6.2.61 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Trans-

fer Energy [J]

1.34.6.2.62 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory

Mass [kg]
This output is the sum of the input inventory values for the condenser, receiver, cases, and liquid
pipes that are a part of this system.

1.34.6.2.63 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Refrigerant Mass Flow

Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the compressors for this system.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1715

1.34.6.2.64 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated Low Stage Refrigerant

Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the low-stage compressors for this sys-
tem. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.65 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Estimated High Stage Refrigerant

Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow through the high-stage compressors for this
system. This output is valid only for two-stage compression systems.

1.34.6.2.66 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Intercooler Temperature [C]

This is the saturation temperature in the intercooler. This output is valid only for two-stage
compression systems.

1.34.6.2.67 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Intercooler Pressure [Pa]

This is the saturation pressure in the intercooler. This output is valid only for two-stage compression
systems.

1.34.6.2.68 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condensing Temperature [C]

This is the saturated condensing temperature.

1.34.6.2.69 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Evaporating Temperature [C]

This is the saturated evaporating temperature.

1.34.6.2.70 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Suction Temperature [C]

This is the temperature at the compressor inlet including superheat after the cases and superheat
from any liquid suction heat exchangers.

1.34.6.2.71 Refrigeration Air Chiller System TXV Liquid Temperature [C]

This is the temperature entering the thermal expansion valve before the cases, equal to the condensing
temperature minus any subcooling included in the condenser or provided by mechanical and/or liquid
suction heat exchanger subcoolers.

1.34.7 Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem
The Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem object allows users to model detailed transcritical carbon
dioxide (CO2 ) booster refrigeration systems used in supermarkets. The object allows for modeling
either a single stage system with medium-temperature loads or a two stage system with both medium-
and low-temperature loads.
The input objects required to model a detailed transcritical CO2 refrigeration system include the
following:

– One Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem object,

1716 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– At least one refrigeration load object which may include any combination of the following:
– Refrigeration:Case,
– Refrigeration:WalkIn,
– Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList (may include both cases and/or walk-in cooler names),
– At least one Refrigeration:Compressor object (multiple compressors are entered using a Refrig-
eration:CompressorList),
– One Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled object,

Output variables are available to describe the total heat exchange between all the refrigeration
objects and the zones containing these objects. These variables are described at the end of this
section.
At least one refrigeration load object must be defined which may be one of two types of loads,
including a refrigerated display case and a walk-in cooler, (Ref. Refrigeration:Case, and Refrigera-
tion:WalkIn). If multiple loads are served by the same system, the user should use the refrigerated
case and walk-in list object available to assign all cases and walk-ins cooled directly by this system
(Ref. Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList).
The name of at least one compressor must be defined and a list object is available if the
system is served by more than one compressor (Ref. Refrigeration:Compressor and Refrigera-
tion:CompressorList).
Heat is rejected to the outdoors via an air-cooled gas cooler (Ref. Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled).
The Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem object coordinates the energy flows between the other refrig-
eration objects and is used to set system parameters.
The inputs for the refrigeration system object, in addition to the names of the other refrigeration
objects described above, include a name for this system, the receiver pressure, the subcooler effec-
tiveness, and the refrigeration system working fluid. Optional input fields are also provided for
users seeking to keep track of suction pipe heat gains.
A detailed description of the transcritical CO2 booster refrigeration system may be found in the
Refrigeration section of the Engineering Reference.

1.34.7.1 Inputs

1.34.7.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a transcritical CO2 refrigeration system. Any
reference to this refrigeration system by another object will use this name.

1.34.7.1.2 Field: System Type

Identifies the transcritical CO2 refrigeration system as either a single-stage system with only medium-
temperature loads, or a two-stage system with both medium- and low-temperature loads. Valid
choices are: SingleStage for single stage systems or TwoStage for two stage systems.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1717

1.34.7.1.3 Field: Medium Temperature Refrigerated Case or WalkIn or Case-

AndWalkInList Name
Identifies a single case, a single walk-in, or a particular list of refrigerated cases and walk-ins, that
is cooled by the medium-temperature stage of the refrigeration system. The name will be vali-
dated against the case, walk-in, and CaseAndWalkInList names (Ref. Refrigeration:Case, Refriger-
ation:WalkIn, and Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList) in the input file. Only medium temperature
cases and walk-ins served directly by the system should be included in this list. Note that this entry
is required for both single-stage and two-stage systems.

1.34.7.1.4 Field: Low Temperature Refrigerated Case or WalkIn or CaseAnd-

WalkInList Name
Identifies a single case, a single walk-in, or a particular list of refrigerated cases and walk-ins, that is
cooled by the low-temperature stage of the refrigeration system. The name will be validated against
the case, walk-in, and CaseAndWalkInList names (Ref. Refrigeration:Case, Refrigeration:WalkIn,
and Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList) in the input file. Only low temperature cases and walk-ins
served directly by the system should be included in this list. Note that this entry is valid only for
two-stage systems.

1.34.7.1.5 Field: Refrigeration Gas Cooler Name

The name of the gas cooler that is used to reject heat from the transcritical refrigeration system. The
name will be validated against the gas cooler names (Ref. Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled) in
the input file.

1.34.7.1.6 Field: High Pressure Compressor or Compressor List Name

Identifies a single compressor, or a particular list of compressors, that provides compression for a
single-stage system or the high pressure stage of a two-stage system. The name will be validated
against the compressor list names (Ref. List:Refrigeration:Compressors) in the input file. Note that
this entry is required for both single-stage and two-stage systems.

1.34.7.1.7 Field: Low Pressure Compressor or Compressor List Name

Identifies a single compressor, or a particular list of compressors, that provides compression for the
low pressure stage of a two-stage system. The name will be validated against the compressor list
names (Ref. List:Refrigeration:Compressors) in the input file. Note that this entry is valid only for
two-stage systems.

1.34.7.1.8 Field: Receiver Pressure

This numeric field specifies the refrigerant pressure (Pa) in the receiver. The default value for the
receiver pressure is 4.0 × 106 Pa.

1.34.7.1.9 Field: Subcooler Effectiveness

This numeric field specifies the heat exchanger effectiveness of the subcooler. The default value for
the subcooler effectiveness is 0.4.
1718 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.7.1.10 Field: Refrigeration System Working Fluid Type

The type of refrigerant used by the system. It is assumed that carbon dioxide will be the refrigerant
used in the transcritical CO2 refrigeration system. However, the user must specify the name used
in the input file which refers to carbon dioxide. This name will be validated against Fluid Names
(Ref. Fluid Properties section) in the input file. Note that the corresponding property data for
carbon dioxide (R744), available in FluidPropertiesRefData.idf, must be supplied in the input file.

1.34.7.1.11 Field: Sum UA Suction Piping for Medium Temperature Loads

This optional field is typically used to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on system performance
and zone heat balance. Enter the value for suction piping heat gain (in W/C) for the medium-
temperature suction line, i.e., sum up the product of the pipe wall insulation conductance times
the outer surface area of the pipe insulation. Please see the Engineering Reference for guidance in
calculating this value. If the Sum UA Suction Piping for Medium Temperature Loads is entered,
the Medium Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name is also required.

1.34.7.1.12 Field: Medium Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name

This optional field is typically used to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on system perfor-
mance. If the previous field, Sum UA Suction Piping for Medium Temperature Loads, is blank, this
field will not be used. Enter the name of the zone where the medium-temperature suction piping is
located. The suction piping heat gains will be calculated based upon the air temperature within this
zone. The heat balance of this zone will also be affected by the piping heat exchange. Additional
output variables are described at the end of this section for the total impact of refrigeration on zones,
including suction pipe heat exchange.

1.34.7.1.13 Field: Sum UA Suction Piping for Low Temperature Loads

This optional field is typically used to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on system performance
and zone heat balance. Enter the value for suction piping heat gain (in W/C) for the low-temperature
suction line, i.e., sum up the product of the pipe wall insulation conductance times the outer surface
area of the pipe insulation. Please see the Engineering Reference for guidance in calculating this
value. If the Sum UA Suction Piping for Low Temperature Loads is entered, the Low Temperature
Suction Piping Zone Name is also required. Note that this entry is valid only for two-stage systems.

1.34.7.1.14 Field: Low Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name

This optional field is typically used to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on system perfor-
mance. If the previous field, Sum UA Suction Piping for Low Temperature Loads, is blank, this
field will not be used. Enter the name of the zone where the low-temperature suction piping is
located. The suction piping heat gains will be calculated based upon the air temperature within this
zone. The heat balance of this zone will also be affected by the piping heat exchange. Additional
output variables are described at the end of this section for the total impact of refrigeration on zones,
including suction pipe heat exchange. Note that this entry is valid only for two-stage systems.

1.34.7.1.15 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Medium Temperature
System”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1719

by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
The following is an example input for a transcritical CO2 refrigeration system.

Refrigeration:TranscriticalSystem ,
TransRefrigSys , !- Name
TwoStage , !- System Type
MTLoads , !- Medium Temperature Refrigerated Case or Walkin or
CaseAndWalkInList Name
LTLoads , !- Low Temperature Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList
Name
RefrigGasCooler , !- Refrigeration Gas Cooler Name
HPCompressors , !- High Pressure Compressor or CompressorList Name
LPCompressors , !- Low Pressure Compressor or CompressorList Name
4000000 , !- Receiver Pressure
0.4, !- Subcooler Effectiveness
R744 , !- Refrigeration System Working Fluid Type
, !- Sum UA Suction Piping for Medium Temperature Loads
, !- Medium Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name
, !- Sum UA Suction Piping for Low Temperature Loads
, !- Low Temperature Suction Piping Zone Name
TransRefrigSys; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.34.7.2 Outputs

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total High Pressure Compressor Electricity

Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total High Pressure Compressor Electricity En-
ergy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Electricity Rate
[W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Average COP [W/W]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Cases and Walk Ins
Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk Ins Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction Pipe Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Trans-
fer Energy [J]
1720 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Pipe Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System High Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System High Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Heat Transfer Energy
[J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass [kg]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Evaporating Temper-
ature [C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction Temperature
[C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Evaporating Temperature
[C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Temperature [C]

1.34.7.2.1 Refrigeration Transcritical System Total High Pressure Compressor

Electricity Rate [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s high pressure compressor(s) in Watts.

1.34.7.2.2 Refrigeration Transcritical System Total High Pressure Compressor

Electricity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s high pressure compressor(s) in Joules for the
timestep being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a
meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref.
Output:Meter objects).

1.34.7.2.3 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Electric-

ity Rate [W]
This output is the total electric power input to the system’s low pressure compressor(s) in Watts.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1721

1.34.7.2.4 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Electric-

ity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s low pressure compressor(s) in Joules for the
timestep being reported. The individual consumption for each compressor is also added to a
meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref.
Output:Meter objects).

1.34.7.2.5 Refrigeration Transcritical System Total Compressor Electricity En-

ergy [J]
This output is the total electric power input to all of the system’s compressor(s) in Watts.

1.34.7.2.6 Refrigeration Transcritical System Average COP [W/W]

This output is the system average compressor COP, which is the total refrigeration effect divided by
the total power to all of the compressors.

1.34.7.2.7 Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Cases and

Walk Ins Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the medium temperature refrigerated cases and
walk-ins served directly by this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for
the medium temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.

1.34.7.2.8 Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Cases and

Walk Ins Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the medium temperature refrigerated cases and
walk-ins served directly by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transferred for the
medium temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.

1.34.7.2.9 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk

Ins Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the low temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins
served directly by this system in Watts. It is the sum of all of the heat transfer rates for the low
temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.

1.34.7.2.10 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Cases and Walk

Ins Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from the low temperature refrigerated cases and walk-
ins served directly by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transferred for the low
temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.

1.34.7.2.11 Refrigeration Transcritical System Total Cases and Walk Ins Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer energy from all the low- and medium-temperature refrigerated
cases and walk-ins served directly by this system in Joules. It is the sum of all of the heat transferred
for all the refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are connected directly to this system.
1722 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.7.2.12 Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction

Pipe Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for the medium-temperature suction piping served by this
system in Watts. Note this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the
medium-temperature suction piping heat gain characteristics in the input.

1.34.7.2.13 Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction

Pipe Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for the medium-temperature suction piping served by this
system in Watts. Note this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the
medium-temperature suction piping heat gain characteristics in the input.

1.34.7.2.14 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Pipe

Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for the low-temperature suction piping served by this
system in Watts. Note this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the
low-temperature suction piping heat gain characteristics in the input.

1.34.7.2.15 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Pipe

Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This output is the total heat transfer rate for the low-temperature suction piping served by this
system in Watts. Note this is an optional input, and is only available if the user has described the
low-temperature suction piping heat gain characteristics in the input.

1.34.7.2.16 Refrigeration Transcritical System High Pressure Compressor Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the high pressure Compressors in Watts. It is the sum
of all of the heat transfer rates for the low- and medium-temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins
as well as the low pressure compressors that are cooled by this system. This value does not include
compressor or condenser fan heat. If specified as in input value, the suction pipe heat gains are
included in this value.

1.34.7.2.17 Refrigeration Transcritical System High Pressure Compressor Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the high pressure compressors in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key
= Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.7.2.18 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate of the low pressure Compressors in Watts. It is the sum of
all of the heat transfer rates for the low temperature refrigerated cases and walk-ins that are cooled
by this system. This value does not include compressor or condenser fan heat. If specified as in
input value, the suction pipe heat gains are included in this value.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1723

1.34.7.2.19 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Pressure Compressor Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer of the low pressure compressors in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key
= Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.7.2.20 Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer Rate

[W]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system gas cooler in Watts. It does not
include system heat rejection that has been recovered for useful purposes.

1.34.7.2.21 Refrigeration Transcritical System Net Rejected Heat Transfer En-

ergy [J]
This output is the total heat rejected by this system to the system gas cooler in Joules for the
timestep being reported. It does not include system heat rejection that has been recovered for
useful purposes.

1.34.7.2.22 Refrigeration Transcritical System Estimated Refrigerant Inventory

Mass [kg]
This output is the sum of the input refrigerant inventory values for the gas cooler, receiver, cases,
and liquid pipes that are a part of this system.

1.34.7.2.23 Refrigeration Transcritical System Refrigerant Mass Flow Rate

[kg/s]
This output is the calculated refrigerant mass flow rate through the high pressure compressors for
this system.

1.34.7.2.24 Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Evaporat-

ing Temperature [C]
This is the saturated evaporating temperature for the medium temperature loads.

1.34.7.2.25 Refrigeration Transcritical System Medium Temperature Suction

Temperature [C]
This is the temperature at the high pressure compressor inlet including superheat after the display
cases and superheat from the suction line heat exchanger.

1.34.7.2.26 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Evaporating

Temperature [C]
This is the saturated evaporating temperature for the low-temperature loads.

1.34.7.2.27 Refrigeration Transcritical System Low Temperature Suction Tem-

perature [C]
This is the temperature at the low pressure compressor inlet including superheat after the display
cases.
1724 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.8 Refrigeration:Compressor
The compressors are described here using manufacturer’s data for curves that provide the efficiency,
cooling capacity, and power consumption. The corresponding rated values for cycle superheat and
subcooling are also required.
A dataset has been provided containing the compressor rating data, including the
performance curve inputs, for a large number of compressors. See RefrigerationCom-
pressorCurves.idf.

1.34.8.1 Inputs

1.34.8.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a compressor. Any reference to this compressor by
another object will use this name.

1.34.8.1.2 Field: Refrigeration Compressor Power Curve Name

This required field provides the name of the curve object that describes the compressor power as a
function of the evaporating and condensing temperatures, as specified in ARI 540. The curve is of
the bicubic form(ref: Curve:Bicubic). However, the input order for the Energy Plus bicubic curve
does not match the ARI 540 standard order. When this curve is entered, the user should use the
following assignments:
N1 is ARI C1 and N2 is ARI C2.
N3 is ARI C4 and N4 is ARI C3.
N5 is ARI C6 and N6 is ARI C5,
N7 is ARI C7.
N8 is ARI C10, N9 is ARI C8, and N10 is ARI C9.
N11 is the Minimum evaporating temperature and N12 is the Maximum evaporating temperature.
N13 is the the Minimum condensing temperature and N14 is the Maximum condensing temperature

1.34.8.1.3 Field: Refrigeration Compressor Capacity Curve Name

This required field provides the name of the curve object that describes the compressor cooling
capacity as a function of the evaporating and condensing temperatures, as specified in ARI 540.
The curve is of the bicubic form(ref: Curve:Bicubic). However, the input order for the Energy Plus
bicubic curve does not match the ARI 540 standard order. When this curve is entered, the user
should use the following assignments:
N1 is ARI C1 and N2 is ARI C2.
N3 is ARI C4 and N4 is ARI C3.
N5 is ARI C6 and N6 is ARI C5,
N7 is ARI C7.
N8 is ARI C10, N9 is ARI C8, and N10 is ARI C9.
N11 is the Minimum evaporating temperature and N12 is Maximum evaporating temperature.
N13 is the Minimum condensing temperature and N14 is the Maximum condensing temperature
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1725

1.34.8.1.4 Field: Rated Superheat

Some manufacturers specify a constant return gas temperature while others specify a constant su-
perheat (the difference between the saturated evaporating temperature and the actual return gas
temperature). Use this field for compressors that provide their rated superheat. (Do NOT use both
this field and the Rated Return Gas Temperature field.) The rated superheat is specified in units of
delta C.

1.34.8.1.5 Field: Rated Return Gas Temperature

Some manufacturers specify a constant return gas temperature ( which may also be called the Rated
Suction Temperature) while others specify a constant superheat. Use this field for compressors that
provide their rated return gas temperature. (Do NOT use both this field and the Rated Superheat
field.) The rated return gas temperature is specified in units of C.

1.34.8.1.6 Field: Rated Liquid Temperature

Some compressor manufactures rate their equipment according to a constant subcooling (the dif-
ference between the saturated condensing temperature and the actual liquid temperature entering
the thermal expansion valve before the refrigeration load). Other manufacturers specify a constant
liquid temperature.Use this field if the manufacturer specifies the rated liquid temperature. (Do
NOT use both this field and the Rated Subcooling field.) The units for this field are degrees C.

1.34.8.1.7 Field: Rated Subcooling

Some compressor manufactures rate their equipment according to a constant subcooling (the dif-
ference between the saturated condensing temperature and the actual liquid temperature entering
the thermal expansion valve before the refrigeration load). Other manufacturers specify a constant
liquid temperature.Use this field if the manufacturer specifies the rated subcooling. (Do NOT use
both this field and the Rated Liquid Temperature field.) The units for this field are delta C.

1.34.8.1.8 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
System”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.34.8.1.9 Field: Mode-of-Operation

The type of mode of operation. Valid choices are Subcritical and Transcritical. If this input
field is blank, the default will be Subcritical. If Transcritical is selected as mode of operation, the
next two input fields are required to model transcritical cycle operation electric power consumption
and cooling capacity.

1.34.8.1.10 Field: Transcritical-Compressor-Power-Curve-Name

This field is the name of the curve object that describes the transcritical operation compressor power
as a function of the saturated suction temperature and the gas cooler pressure. The curve is of the
bicubic form(ref: Curve:Bicubic). However, the input order of the coefficients for the EnergyPlus
1726 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

bicubic curve does not match the ARI 540 standard order. When this curve is entered, the user
should use the following assignments:
N1 is ARI C1 and N2 is ARI C2.
N3 is ARI C4 and N4 is ARI C3.
N5 is ARI C6 and N6 is ARI C5,
N7 is ARI C7.
N8 is ARI C10, N9 is ARI C8, and N10 is ARI C9.
N11 is the Minimum saturated suction temperature.
N12 is the Maximum saturated suction temperature.
N13 is the the Minimum gas cooler pressure and N14 is the Maximum gas cooler pressure.
If Transcritical is selected as Mode of Operation, then this input field is required.

1.34.8.1.11 Field: Transcritical-Compressor-Capacity-Curve-Name

This field is the name of the curve object that describes the transcritical compressor operation cooling
capacity as a function of the saturated suction temperature and the gas cooler outlet enthalpy. The
curve is of the bicubic form(ref: Curve:Bicubic). However, the input order of the coefficients for the
EnergyPlus bicubic curve does not match the ARI 540 standard order. When this curve is entered,
the user should use the following assignments:
N1 is ARI C1 and N2 is ARI C2.
N3 is ARI C4 and N4 is ARI C3.
N5 is ARI C6 and N6 is ARI C5,
N7 is ARI C7.
N8 is ARI C10, N9 is ARI C8, and N10 is ARI C9.
N11 is the Minimum saturated suction temperature.
N12 is the Maximum saturated suction temperature.
N13 is the the Minimum gas cooler outlet enthalpy and N14 is the Maximum gas cooler outlet
enthalpy.
If Transcritical is selected as Mode of Operation, then this input field is required.
The following is an example input for a refrigeration compressor.

Refrigeration:Compressor ,
CompressorA , !- Name
PowerCurveCompA , !- Refrigeration Compressor Power Curve Name
CapCurveCompA , !- Refrigeration Compressor Capacity Curve Name
10.0, ! – Rated Superheat {delta C}
, !- Rated Return Gas Temperature {C}
, ! – Rated Liquid Temperature{C}
15.0, !- Rated Subcooling {delta C}
MedTempRefrig; !- End -Use Subcategory
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1727

1.34.8.2 Outputs

THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE CASES
AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Compressor Run Time Fraction []

THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS THAT SERVE AIR
CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Chiller Compressor Run TimeFraction []

1.34.8.2.1 THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS

THAT SERVE CASES AND/OR WALKINS

1.34.8.2.2 Refrigeration Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric power input to the compressor in Watts.

1.34.8.2.3 Refrigeration Compressor Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electric energy consumed by the compressor in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.8.2.4 Refrigeration Compressor Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the heat removed from the refrigerated cases by the compressor in Watts.

1.34.8.2.5 Refrigeration Compressor Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the heat removed from the refrigerated cases by the compressor in Joules for the timestep
being reported.

1.34.8.2.6 Refrigeration Compressor Run Time Fraction []

This is the fraction of the time step when the compressor ran to meet the load. It is a value between
0.0 and 1.0.
1728 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.8.2.7 THE FOLLOWING OUTPUTS ARE AVAILABLE FOR SYSTEMS

THAT SERVE AIR CHILLERS

1.34.8.2.8 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric power input to the compressor in Watts.

1.34.8.2.9 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electric energy consumed by the compressor in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.8.2.10 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Heat Transfer Rate

[W]
This output is the heat removed from the refrigerated cases by the compressor in Watts.

1.34.8.2.11 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Compressor Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This is the heat removed from the refrigerated cases by the compressor in Joules for the timestep
being reported.

1.34.8.2.12 Refrigeration Chiller Compressor Run Time Fraction []

This is the fraction of the time step when the compressor ran to meet the load. It is a value between
0.0 and 1.0.

1.34.9 Refrigeration:CompressorList

This object provides a list of all the compressors included within a single refrigeration system (Ref:
Refrigeration:System). Each list must contain at least one compressor. The order in which the
individual compressors are listed here will be the order in which the compressors are dispatched to
meet the system load. That is, at very low loads, only compressor #1 will be operating. As the
load increases, the first two compressors will be operating, and so on.

1.34.9.1 Inputs

1.34.9.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a compressor list. Any reference to this compressor
list by another object will use this name. The compressor list cannot have the same name as any
individual compressor.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1729

1.34.9.1.2 Field: Refrigeration Compressor <x> Name

Identifies a particular compressor that works in conjunction with the other compressors on this list to
provides cooling to a single refrigeration system. The name will be validated against the compressor
names (ref: Refrigeration:Compressor) in the input file. This object is extensible, so additional fields
of this type can be added to the end of this object.
The following is an example input for a compressor list.

Refrigeration:CompressorList ,
MediumTempCompressorlist , !- Refrigeration Compressor List Name
CompressorA , !- Refrigeration Compressor Name \#1
CompressorB , !- Refrigeration Compressor Name \#2
CompressorC; !- Refrigeration Compressor Name \#3

1.34.10 Refrigeration:Subcooler
Two types of subcoolers are modeled by the detailed refrigeration system. As described in the
Engineering Reference, the liquid suction heat exchanger uses cool suction gas to subcool the hot
condensate after it leaves the condenser and before it reaches the thermal expansion valve. For
the liquid suction heat exchanger, both the source and sink of energy are located within the same
refrigeration system. In contrast, a mechanical subcooler is used to transfer cooling capacity from
one refrigeration system to another. The mechanical subcooler is listed as a part of the system for
which the condensate is cooled. However, the input data for the mechanical subcooler includes a
field that identifies the system that provides the cooling capacity.

1.34.10.1 Inputs

1.34.10.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a subcooler. Any reference to this subcooler by
another object will use this name.

1.34.10.1.2 Field: Subcooler Type

The type of subcooler. Valid choices are Mechanical and LiquidSuction. If the field is blank, the
default will be LiquidSuction.

1.34.10.1.3 Field: Liquid Suction Design Subcooling Temperature Difference

This numeric field is the design subcooling temperature difference (DeltaC) for a liquid suction heat
exchanger and should be blank for a mechanical subcooler.

1.34.10.1.4 Field: Design Liquid Inlet Temperature

This numeric field is the design inlet temperature (C) for the hot liquid entering a liquid suction
heat exchanger and should be blank for a mechanical subcooler.

1.34.10.1.5 Field: Design Vapor Inlet Temperature

This numeric field is the design inlet temperature (C) for the cool vapor entering a liquid suction
heat exchanger and should be blank for a mechanical subcooler.
1730 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.10.1.6 Field: Capacity-Providing System

This field is the name of the refrigeration system object that provides the cooling capacity for the
mechanical subcooler (ref: Refrigeration:System Name). This field should be blank for a liquid
suction heat exchanger.

1.34.10.1.7 Field: Outlet Control Temperature

This numeric field is the controlled outlet temperature (C) for subcooled liquid exiting a mechanical
subcooler. This field should be blank for a liquid suction heat exchanger.
The following is example input for both liquid suction and mechanical subcoolers.

REFRIGERATION:SUBCOOLER ,
SampleLSHx , !Subcooler Name
LiquidSuction , !subcooler type
6, !design liquid suction subcooling {deltaC}
16, !design inlet temperature on liquid side {C}
0, !design inlet temperature on vapor side {C}
, !Refrigeration System Detailed Name providing cooling capacity
; !Control Temperature Out for subcooled liquid {C}

! Mechanical Subcooler (uses Med Temp System to cool low temp liquid to 10C)

REFRIGERATION:SUBCOOLER ,
SampleMSC , !Subcooler Name
Mechanical , !subcooler type
, !design liquid suction subcooling {C}
, !design inlet temperature on liquid side {C}
, !design inlet temperature on vapor side {C}
MediumTempSystem , !Refrigeration System Detailed Name providing cooling capacity
10; !Control Temperature Out for subcooled liquid {C}

1.34.10.2 Outputs

FOR SUBCOOLERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]

FOR SUBCOOLERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]

1.34.10.2.1 FOR SUBCOOLERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR

WALKINS:

1.34.10.2.2 Refrigeration System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the cooling energy transferred from one system’s compressor group to the refrigerant
leaving the condenser for another refrigeration system in Watts.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1731

1.34.10.2.3 Refrigeration System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This output is the cooling energy transferred from one system’s compressor group to the refrigerant
leaving the condenser for another refrigeration system in Joules.

1.34.10.2.4 FOR SUBCOOLERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS

1.34.10.2.5 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Trans-

fer Rate [W]
This output is the cooling energy transferred from one system’s compressor group to the refrigerant
leaving the condenser for another refrigeration system in Watts.

1.34.10.2.6 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Mechanical Subcooler Heat Trans-

fer Energy [J]
This output is the cooling energy transferred from one system’s compressor group to the refrigerant
leaving the condenser for another refrigeration system in Joules.

1.34.11 Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled
The refrigeration system requires a single condenser to reject the system heat. The air cooled
condenser object is one of four options for this condenser. In an air-cooled condenser, the total
heat of rejection is characterized by a linear relationship between the difference between the inlet air
(usually the outside drybulb) and condensing temperatures. This curve is commonly found in the
condenser manufacturers’ literature. This rating curve, which corresponds to ARI 460 standards,
also has an associated rated value for subcooling that should be entered. The rated condenser fan
power and fan speed control type must be specified. If the condenser is not at ground level, the
user may specify an air inlet node name (ref: OutdoorAir:Node name). If the condenser is located
inside a conditioned zone, the zone name may be specified(ref: bbbZoneNamebbb). Optional input
is provided to help the user compare refrigerant inventories for different systems. These inputs
represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within the condenser, within a receiver
beneath the condenser, and in the liquid pipes between the condenser and the refrigerated cases.

1.34.11.1 Inputs

1.34.11.1.1 Field: Name

Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for a one or more refrigeration system(s). The name
must be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:*)
in the input file, including names used for evaporative-cooled, water-cooled, and cascade-cooled
condensers.

1.34.11.1.2 Field: Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate Curve Name
This field is the name of a curve object defining the condenser heat rejection as a function of
the difference between the condensing and entering air temperatures. The curve should be linear
(Curve:Linear). See the Engineering Reference for more discussion on the curve coefficients.
1732 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.11.1.3 Field: Rated Subcooling Temperature Difference

This numeric field specifies the rated subcooling (DeltaC) specified by the manufacturer, consistent
with the heat rejection curve rating data.

1.34.11.1.4 Field: Condenser Fan Speed Control Type

The type of fan speed control used by the condenser fan. Valid choices are Fixed, FixedLinear,
VariableSpeed, and TwoSpeed. If the field is blank, Fixed will be used. See the Engineering
Reference for a discussion of this option’s effect on fan energy consumption.

1.34.11.1.5 Field: Rated Fan Power

This numeric field specifies the rated fan power (W) specified by the manufacturer, under standard
rating conditions.

1.34.11.1.6 Field: Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio

Fan controls often include a minimum air flow ratio to avoid overheating the fan motor or for other
reasons. This numeric field should be between 0. and 1. and has a default value of 0.2.

1.34.11.1.7 Field: Air Inlet Node Name or Zone Name

This optional alpha field contains the name of the node from which the condenser draws its outdoor
air or the name of the conditioned zone where the condenser is located. If this field is left blank,
the outdoor air drybulb temperature entering the condenser is taken directly from the weather data.
If this field is not blank and an outdoor air node name is entered, this node name must also be
specified in an OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration
when calculating outdoor air temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may
be specified in an OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly
from the weather data. If a zone name is entered, the temperature of that zone is used.

1.34.11.1.8 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
Rack”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.34.11.1.9 Field: Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condenser (kg) specified by
the manufacturer, under standard rating conditions.

1.34.11.1.10 Field: Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate receiver (kg)
specified by the manufacturer or system designer, under standard rating conditions.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1733

1.34.11.1.11 Field: Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate piping (kg)
specified by the system designer, under standard rating conditions.
The following is an example input for an air-cooled condenser.

Refrigeration:Condenser:AirCooled ,
MediumTempCondenser , !- Name of condenser
MediumTempCondenserHRCurve , !-name of condenser heat of rejection curve , linear
0., ! Rated subcooling {deltaC}
VariableSpeed , ! Fan speed control type
4000. , ! Design condenser fan power {W}
0.25, !Minimum air flow fraction through condenser fan {dimensionless}
Refrigeration MediumTempSystem CondenserNode , !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name or Zone Name
MediumTempRefrig; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.34.11.2 Outputs

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W] Zone,
Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Recovered for Non-Refrigeration Purposes
Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electric Consumption [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W] HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
1734 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]

1.34.11.2.1 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR

WALKINS:

1.34.11.2.2 Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric input to the system’s condenser fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.11.2.3 Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electric Consumption [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the system’s condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.11.2.4 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration load
minus any heat recovered for defrost or other purposes).

1.34.11.2.5 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported (i.e.,
compressor energy and refrigeration load minus any heat recovered for defrost or other purposes).

1.34.11.2.6 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate

[W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating.

1.34.11.2.7 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer En-

ergy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating for the timestep being reported.

1.34.11.2.8 Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating.

1.34.11.2.9 Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating for the timestep being reported.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1735

1.34.11.2.10 Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system.

1.34.11.2.11 Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer

Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system for the timestep being reported.

1.34.11.2.12 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

1.34.11.2.13 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the electric input to the system’s condenser fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.11.2.14 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.11.2.15 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration load
minus any heat recovered for defrost or other purposes).

1.34.11.2.16 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported (i.e.,
compressor energy and refrigeration load minus any heat recovered for defrost or other purposes).

1.34.11.2.17 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating.

1.34.11.2.18 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for all purposes including defrost and
water or air heating for the timestep being reported.
1736 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.11.2.19 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Re-

covered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating.

1.34.11.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Re-

covered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating for the timestep being reported.

1.34.11.2.21 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system.

1.34.11.2.22 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12 Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled
Each refrigeration system requires a single condenser. The evaporative cooled condenser object is
one of four options for this condenser. In an evaporative-cooled condenser, the total heat of rejection
is characterized by a four-factor relationship between the condensing temperature and the difference
between the outside wetbulb and condensing temperatures. This curve must be developed by regres-
sion from the condenser manufacturers’ literature. This rating curve, which is based upon rated data
taken according to ARI 460 standards, also has an associated rated value for subcooling that should
be entered. The rated condenser fan power and fan speed control type must be specified. If the
condenser is not at ground level, the user may specify an air inlet node name (ref: OutdoorAir:Node
name). Optional input is provided to help the user compare refrigerant inventories for different
systems. These input represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within the condenser,
within a receiver beneath the condenser, and in the liquid pipes between the condenser and the
refrigerated cases.
Additional inputs are needed for basin heater parameters, water pump power, and water source. An
evaporative cooling availability schedule is available.

1.34.12.1 Inputs

1.34.12.1.1 Field: Name

Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for a one or more refrigeration system(s). The name
must be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:*)
in the input file, including names used for air-cooled, water-cooled and cascade-cooled condensers.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1737

1.34.12.1.2 Field: Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate

This numeric field should be the rated heat rejection effect (W) at standard rating conditions per
ARI 490. Be sure the rating corresponds to the correct refrigerant.

1.34.12.1.3 Field: Rated Subcooling Temperature Difference

This numeric field specifies the rated subcooling (DeltaC) specified by the manufacturer, consistent
with the rated value for total heat rejection.

1.34.12.1.4 Field: Fan Speed Control Type

The type of fan speed control used by the condenser fan. Valid choices are Fixed, FixedLinear,
VariableSpeed, and TwoSpeed. If the field is blank, Fixed will be used. See the Engineering
Reference for a discussion of this option’s effect on fan energy consumption.

1.34.12.1.5 Field: Rated Fan Power

This numeric field specifies the rated fan power (W) specified by the manufacturer, under standard
rating conditions.

1.34.12.1.6 Field: Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio

Fan controls often include a minimum air flow ratio to avoid overheating the fan motor or for other
reasons. This numeric field has a minimum value of 0. and a default value of 0.2.

1.34.12.1.7 Field: Approach Temperature Constant Term

As described in the Engineering Reference (ref Refrigeration:Condenser:Evaporative), the heat re-
jection capacity factor is specified according to the form (where Twetbulb and Tcondense are in
C):
Tcondense = A1 + A2(hrcf) + A3/(hrcf) + (1 + A4)(Twb)
This numeric field is the value for A1 and has a default value of 6.63, a minimum of 0. and a
maximum of 20. (C)

1.34.12.1.8 Field: Approach Temperature Coefficient 2

As described in the Engineering Reference (ref Refrigeration:Condenser:Evaporative), the heat re-
jection capacity factor is specified according to the form (where Twetbulb and Tcondense are in
C):
Tcondense = A1 + A2(hrcf) + A3/(hrcf) + (1 + A4)(Twb)
This numeric field is the value for A2 and has a default value of 0.468, a minimum of 0, and a
maximum of 20 (C).

1.34.12.1.9 Field: Approach Temperature Coefficient 3

As described in the Engineering Reference (ref Refrigeration:Condenser:Evaporative), the heat re-
jection capacity factor is specified according to the form (where Twetbulb and Tcondense are in
C):
Tcondense = A1 + A2(hrcf) + A3/(hrcf) +(1 + A4)(Twb)
1738 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This numeric field is the value for A3 and has a default value of 17.93, a minimum of 0, and a
maximum of 30 (C).

1.34.12.1.10 Field: Approach Temperature Coefficient 4

As described in the Engineering Reference (ref Refrigeration:Condenser:Evaporative), the heat re-
jection capacity factor is specified according to the form (where Twetbulb and Tcondense are in
C):
Tcondense = A1 + A2(hrcf) + A3/(hrcf) + (1 + A4)(Twb)
This numeric field is the value for A4 and has a default value of -0.322, a minimum of -20., and a
maximum of 20 (dimensionless).

1.34.12.1.11 Field: Minimum Capacity Factor

This numeric field is the minimum heat rejection capacity factor in the manufacturer’s data used to
develop the equation described in the preceding four fields. The default value is 0.5.

1.34.12.1.12 Field: Maximum Capacity Factor

This numeric field is the maximum heat rejection capacity factor in the manufacturer’s data used to
develop the equation described in the preceding four fields. The default value is 5.0.

1.34.12.1.13 Field: Air Inlet Node Name

This optional alpha field contains the name of the node from which the condenser draws its outdoor
air. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air drybulb temperature entering the condenser is taken
directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, this node name must also be specified in an
OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating
outdoor air temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an
OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather
data.

1.34.12.1.14 Field: Rated Air Flow Rate

The air volume flow rate, in m3 per second, entering the evaporative condenser. This value is used to
calculate the amount of water evaporated when evaporatively cooling the condenser inlet air. The
value for this field must be greater than zero. This input field is also autocalculatable, equivalent to
0.000144 m3 /s per watt of total cooling capacity [850 cfm/ton] where the total cooling capacity is
the total heat of rejection.

1.34.12.1.15 Field: Basin Heater Capacity

This field defines the power level of the basin heater, if applicable, used to avoid water freezing
in an outdoor evaporative cooler basin. This numeric field contains the capacity of the electric
basin heater in Watts per degree C. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin Heater Set
Point Temperature described in the following field. The basin heater electric power is equal to this
field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the dry-bulb
temperature of the condenser coil inlet air. The basin heater only operates when the condenser fan
is off (i.e., no compressor heat rejection). The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal
to zero, with a default value of 200 W/C if this field is left blank.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1739

1.34.12.1.16 Field: Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (°C) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this
set point temperature, as long as the condenser fan is off. The default value is 2°C if this field is left
blank.

1.34.12.1.17 Field: Rated Water Pump Power

The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump in Watts. This value is used to calculate
the power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The value
for this field must be greater than or equal to 0, with a default value of 1000 Watts if this field is
left blank. This input field is also autocalculatable, equivalent to 0.004266 W per Watt [15 W/ton]
of total cooling capacity.

1.34.12.1.18 Field: Evaporative Water Supply Tank Name

This field is used to define where the condenser obtains water used for evaporative cooling. If this field
is left blank, the unit will obtain water directly from the mains (Ref. Water Mains Temperatures).
If the name of a Water Storage Tank object is used here, then the unit will obtain its water from
that tank.

1.34.12.1.19 Field: Evaporative Condenser Availability Schedule Name

For evaporative cooled condensers, the name of the optional schedule (Ref: Schedule) that specifies
the time periods that evaporative cooling is available/unavailable. In some colder climates, evap-
orative cooling is periodically discontinued and the basin sumps drained to avoid freezing and to
avoid ice formation on the condenser. In these times, the condenser runs as a typical dry air cooled
condenser, and related evaporative cooling systems (e.g., water pump, basin heaters) do not operate.
Use of this optional schedule permits modeling of planned, seasonal interruptions of evaporative
cooling. All schedule values must be greater than or equal to zero. Typically, an ON/OFF schedule
type is used with values being either 0 or 1. A schedule value of 1 indicates that evaporative cooling
is available during the defined time period, and a value of 0 denotes that evaporative cooling is not
available during the defined time period. If the schedule name is omitted (blank), then the model
assumes that evaporative cooling of the condenser is available for the entire simulation period. Note:
the use of this schedule is the correct way to model an evaporative condenser in a climate subject
to freezing weather. However, because some users will take a single model description and run it
for a multiple climates, the code also includes an automatic switch from wet to dry operation, as
described in the Engineering Reference.

1.34.12.1.20 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
Rack”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.34.12.1.21 Field: Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condenser (kg) specified by
the manufacturer, under standard rating conditions.
1740 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.12.1.22 Field: Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate receiver (kg)
specified by the manufacturer or system designer, under standard rating conditions.

1.34.12.1.23 Field: Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate piping (kg)
specified by the system designer, under standard rating conditions.
The following is an example input for an evaporative condenser

Refrigeration:Condenser:EvaporativeCooled ,
MedTempEvapCooledCondenser , !- Refrigeration Condenser Name
64800. , !- Rated Total Heat Rejection Effect , {W}
0. , !- Rated Subcooling
VariableSpeed , !- Condenser Fan Speed Control
746., !- Rated Condenser Fan Power
0.25, !- Minimum air flow fraction through condenser fan {dimensionless
}
6.63 , !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp Const , {C}
0.468 , !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp HRCF Cooefficient
17.93 , !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp 1/ hrcf coefficient
-0.322, !- Evaporative Condenser Approach Temp Twb coefficient {1/C}
0.6 , !- Minimum Condenser Capacity Factor
4.8 , !- Maximum Condenser Capacity Factor
Outside Air Inlet Node , !- Condenser Air Inlet Node Name
1.79 , !- Rated Air Flow Rate {m3/s}
66.7 , !- Basin Heater Capacity {W/C}
1.0 , !- Basin Heater Set Point Temperature {C}
250. , !- Rated Water Pump Power {W}
EvapWaterStorageTank , !- Evaporative Water Supply Tank Name
EvapCondAvail , !- Evaporative Condenser Availability Schedule Name
, !- End -UseSubcategory
21.9 , !- Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge {kg}
10. , !- Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory
25. ; !- Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory

1.34.12.2 Outputs

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electric Consumption [J]

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1741

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Pump Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume [m3]

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume Flow
Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume [m3]

1.34.12.2.1 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR

WALKINS:

1.34.12.2.2 Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the electric input to the system’s condenser fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.12.2.3 Refrigeration System Condenser Fan Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the system’s condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1742 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.12.2.4 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads)
in Watts.

1.34.12.2.5 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.6 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.

1.34.12.2.7 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer En-

ergy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose for the
timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.8 Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for purposes such as water
or air heating.

1.34.12.2.9 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Recovered for Non-

Refrigeration Purposes Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for purposes such as water
or air heating for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.10 Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for defrost purposes within
the refrigeration system..

1.34.12.2.11 Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer

Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for defrost purposes within
the refrigeration system for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.12 Refrigeration System Condenser Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water pump
used with evaporative cooling of the condenser.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1743

1.34.12.2.13 Refrigeration System Condenser Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water pump used with evaporative cooling of the
condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type
= Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category
is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.12.2.14 Refrigeration System Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Rate [W]

This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water heater
in the basin of the evaporative system used to cool the condenser.

1.34.12.2.15 Refrigeration System Condenser Basin Heater Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water heater used to prevent freezing of the
evaporative cooling system for the condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also
added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key =
Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also available, with default to the General end-use
subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.12.2.16 Refrigeration System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume Flow

Rate [m3 /s]
The volumetric flow rate in m3 /s of water consumed while providing evaporative cooling of the
condenser.

1.34.12.2.17 Refrigeration System Condenser Evaporated Water Volume [m3 ]

This is the water consumed by evaporation in m3 while providing evaporative cooling of the condenser
for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Water,
End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also
available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.12.2.18 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

1.34.12.2.19 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the electric input to the system’s condenser fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.12.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fan Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).
1744 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.12.2.21 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads)
in Watts.

1.34.12.2.22 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.23 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.

1.34.12.2.24 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose for the
timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.25 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Re-

covered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for purposes such as water
or air heating.

1.34.12.2.26 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Re-

covered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for purposes such as water
or air heating for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.27 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for defrost purposes within
the refrigeration system.

1.34.12.2.28 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for defrost purposes within
the refrigeration system for the timestep being reported.

1.34.12.2.29 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electricity Rate

[W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water pump
used with evaporative cooling of the condenser.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1745

1.34.12.2.30 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Pump Electricity En-

ergy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water pump used with evaporative cooling of the
condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type
= Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category
is also available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.12.2.31 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electric-

ity Rate [W]
This is the electrical power requirement in Watts for the timestep being reported for the water heater
in the basin of the evaporative system used to cool the condenser.

1.34.12.2.32 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Basin Heater Electric-

ity Energy [J]
This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the water heater used to prevent freezing of the
evaporative cooling system for the condenser for the timestep being reported. This output is also
added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key =
Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also available, with default to the General end-use
subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.12.2.33 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Evaporated Water Vol-

ume Flow Rate [m3/s]
The volumetric flow rate in m3 /s of water consumed while providing evaporative cooling of the
condenser.

1.34.12.2.34 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Evaporated Water Vol-

ume [m3]
This is the water consumed by evaporation in m3 while providing evaporative cooling of the condenser
for the timestep being reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Water,
End Use Key = Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant. Use of an optional subkey category is also
available, with default to the General end-use subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.13 Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled
The refrigeration system requires a single condenser. The water cooled condenser object is one of
four options for this condenser. Manufacturer’s data is required for the rated total heat rejection,
the rated condensing temperature, and the rated leaving liquid refrigerant temperature, all per ARI
450. These values are used to calculate the subcooling included in the rated capacity. The inlet and
outlet node names as well as the water outlet temperature schedule name are required. Optional
input is provided to help the user compare refrigerant inventories for different systems. These input
represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within the condenser, within a receiver
beneath the condenser, and in the liquid pipes between the condenser and the refrigerated cases.
1746 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.13.1 Inputs

1.34.13.1.1 Field: Name

Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for one or more refrigeration system(s). The name
must be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser)
in the input file, including names used for air-cooled, evaporative-cooled, and cascade-cooled con-
densers.

1.34.13.1.2 Field: Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate

This numeric field should be the rated heat rejection effect (W) at standard rating conditions per
ARI 450. Be sure the rating corresponds to the correct refrigerant.

1.34.13.1.3 Field: Rated Condensing Temperature

This numeric field provides the rated condensing temperature (C) corresponding to the rated heat
rejection capacity.

1.34.13.1.4 Field: Rated Subcooling Temperature Difference

This numeric field provides the rated liquid refrigerant subcooling (DeltaC) corresponding to the
rated heat rejection capacity. Note this is equal to the difference between the saturated condensing
temperature and the leaving liquid refrigerant temperature.

1.34.13.1.5 Field: Rated Water Inlet Temperature

This numeric field provides the rated water inlet temperature (C) corresponding to the rated heat
rejection capacity at the rated condensing temperature.

1.34.13.1.6 Field: Water Inlet Node Name

A node name for the water-side condenser inlet must be provided.

1.34.13.1.7 Field: Water Outlet Node Name

A node name for the water-side condenser outlet must be provided.

1.34.13.1.8 Field: Water-Cooled Loop Flow Type

The type of flow loop should be specified. The two choices are VariableFlow, in which a
Pump:VariableSpeed must be included in the plant loop, or ConstantFlow, in which the loop
circuit has a constant flow rate, typically associated with a Pump:ConstandSpeed object. If the
flow type is VariableFlow, the flow needed to remove the condenser heat energy will be calculated
and requested of the pump. If the flow type is ConstantFlow, the outlet water temperature will be
determined based on the fixed loop flow rate and heat energy to be removed. The default type is
VariableFlow. Refer to additional discussion in the Engineering Reference.

1.34.13.1.9 Field: Water Outlet Temperature Schedule Name

When the water-cooled loop flow type is “VariableFlow”, the name of a schedule (Ref: Schedule)
that defines the desired condenser water outlet temperature must be provided. The schedule may
define an outlet temperature that varies through time.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1747

1.34.13.1.10 Field: Water Design Flow Rate

When the water-cooled loop flow type is “ConstantFlow”, this is the design water flow rate in
m3 /s that will be requested initially. This requested flow will be passed to the loop simulation, and
resulting actual flow will be dependent upon supply system capabilities (e.g., pump capability). The
design flow rate must always be less than the maximum flow rate, defined below.

1.34.13.1.11 Field: Water Maximum Flow Rate

This numeric field is the maximum water flow rate in m3 /s that will be allowed through the con-
denser. When the loop flow type is Variable Flow, if the calculated flow rate is higher than the
maximum flow rate, an error message will be generated, and the flow rate will be reset to the
maximum flow rate.

1.34.13.1.12 Field: Maximum Water Outlet Temperature

This numeric field specifies the maximum allowed water temperature in degrees C leaving the con-
denser. The default value is 55 degrees C.

1.34.13.1.13 Field: Minimum Water Inlet Temperature

This numeric field specifies the minimum allowed water temperature in degrees C entering the
compressor rack condenser. The default value is 10 degrees C. Refer to additional discussion in the
Engineering Reference.

1.34.13.1.14 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
System”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.34.13.1.15 Field: Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condenser (kg) specified by
the manufacturer, under standard rating conditions.

1.34.13.1.16 Field: Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate receiver (kg)
specified by the manufacturer or system designer, under standard rating conditions.

1.34.13.1.17 Field: Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate piping (kg)
specified by the system designer, under standard rating conditions.
The following is an example input for a water cooled condenser.
1748 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

Refrigeration:Condenser:WaterCooled ,
MediumTempCondenser , !- Name
58000. , !- Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate {W}
29.4 , !- Rated Condensing Temperature {C}
0.0 , !- Rated Subcooling Temperature Difference{deltaC}
10.0, !- Rated Water Inlet Temperature {C}
Condenser Inlet Node , !- Water Inlet Node Name
Condenser Outlet Node , !- Water - Outlet Node Name
Variable Flow , !- Water -cooled Loop Flow Type
Cond Outlet Temp Sch , !- Water Outlet Temperature Schedule Name
, !- Water Design Flow Rate {m3/s}
0.003 , !- Water Maximum Flow Rate {m3/s}
55., !- Maximum Water Outlet Temperature {C}
, !- Minimum Water Inlet Temperature {C}
, !- End -Use Subcategory
30. , !- Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge {kg}
65. , !- Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory {kg}
20. ; !- Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory {kg}

1.34.13.2 Outputs

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W] Zone,
Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Recovered for Non-Refrigeration Purposes
Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W] HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat
Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fluid Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1749

1.34.13.2.1 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR

WALKINS:

1.34.13.2.2 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads)
in Watts.

1.34.13.2.3 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.4 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.

1.34.13.2.5 Refrigeration System Condenser Total Recovered Heat Transfer En-

ergy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose for the
timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.6 Refrigeration System Condenser Non Refrigeration Recovered Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating.

1.34.13.2.7 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Recovered for Non-

Refrigeration Purposes Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating for the timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.8 Refrigeration System Condenser Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer

Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system..

1.34.13.2.9 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Energy Recovered for Refrig-

eration Defrost Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system for the timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.10 Refrigeration System Condenser Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

This is the mass flow rate of the water used to cool the condenser in kg/s.
1750 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.13.2.11 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

1.34.13.2.12 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads)
in Watts.

1.34.13.2.13 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.14 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat

Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose.

1.34.13.2.15 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Total Recovered Heat

Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser refrigerant inlet flow for any purpose for the
timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.16 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Re-

covered Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating.

1.34.13.2.17 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Non Refrigeration Re-

covered Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for purposes such as water or air
heating for the timestep being reported.

1.34.13.2.18 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system.

1.34.13.2.19 Refrigeration Chiller System Condenser Heat Energy Recovered for

Refrigeration Defrost Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the condenser inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system for the timestep being reported.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1751

1.34.13.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Fluid Mass Flow Rate
[kg/s]
This is the mass flow rate of the water used to cool the condenser in kg/s.

1.34.14 Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade
The refrigeration system requires a single condenser. The cascade condenser object is one of four
options for this condenser. The cascade condenser is unlike the other condenser options because it re-
jects heat to another, higher-temperature, refrigeration system. That is, the cascade condenser acts
as a heat rejection object for one system, but acts as a refrigeration load for another system. There-
fore, this object will be referenced twice: first for the system rejecting heat (see the field Refrigeration
Condenser Name for the object Refrigeration:System), and second for the system absorbing the heat
(see the input for the field Refrigeration Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name for the object
Refrigeration:System or the field Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System Name for the object
Refrigeration:TransferLoadList).
Manufacturer’s data is required for the rated condensing temperature and the rated approach tem-
perature difference. The user must also specify the condensing temperature control type. There are
two choices. The user can specify “Fixed” and the condensing temperature will be held constant at
the input value. The user can specify “Float” if they want the condensing temperature to be set by
other refrigeration loads served by the higher-temperature system.
The rated heat rejection capacity is not used except as a rough input value check on the overall
system sizing. Optional input is provided to help the user compare refrigerant inventories for different
systems. These inputs represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within the condenser,
within a receiver beneath the condenser, and in the liquid pipes between the condenser and the
refrigerated cases.

1.34.14.1 Inputs

1.34.14.1.1 Field: Name

Identifies a particular condenser that rejects heat for a single refrigeration system. The name must
be unique and will be validated against all the condenser names (ref: Refrigeration:Condenser:*) in
the input file, including names used for air-cooled, evaporative-cooled, and water-cooled condensers.

1.34.14.1.2 Field: Rated Condensing Temperature

This numeric field provides the rated condensing temperature (C).

1.34.14.1.3 Field: Rated Approach Temperature Difference

This numeric field provides the rated difference (Delta C) between the saturated condensing tem-
perature for the system rejecting heat and the saturated evaporating refrigerant temperature for the
system absorbing heat. The default value is 3.0 C.

1.34.14.1.4 Field: Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate

This numeric field should be the rated heat rejection effect (W). Be sure the rating corresponds to
the correct refrigerant(s). This value is used for system sizing error checking.
1752 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.14.1.5 Field: Condensing Temperature Control Type

The type of control used to set the saturated condensing temperature. Valid choices are Fixed
and Float. If the field is blank, Fixed will be used. Fixed will hold the condensing temperature
constant at the value specified. Float will consider the specified input as a minimum condensing
temperature. This value will be compared to the evaporating temperatures required by other loads
on the higher-temperature refrigeration system, and will use the lowest temperature required to meet
those loads, along with the Approach Temperature Difference, to set the condensing temperature.

1.34.14.1.6 Field: Condenser Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condenser (kg) specified by
the manufacturer, under standard rating conditions. This refrigerant is on the side of the condenser
rejecting heat, not on the side of the condenser absorbing the heat.

1.34.14.1.7 Field: Condensate Receiver Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate receiver (kg)
specified by the manufacturer or system designer, under standard rating conditions.

1.34.14.1.8 Field: Condensate Piping Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the condensate piping (kg)
specified by the system designer, under standard rating conditions.
The following is an example input for a cascade condenser.

Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade ,
CascadeCondenser1 , !- Name
-4. , !- Rated Condensing Temperature {C}
3. , !- Rated Approach Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
20000.0 , !- Rated Effective Total Heat Rejection Rate {W}
Fixed; !- Condensing Temperature Control Type

1.34.14.2 Outputs

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

– Zone, Sum, Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

FOR CONDENSERS COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC, Sum, Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

1.34.14.2.1 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR

WALKINS:
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1753

1.34.14.2.2 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads)
in Watts.

1.34.14.2.3 Refrigeration System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.

1.34.14.2.4 FOR CONDENSERS ON SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

1.34.14.2.5 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total heat transfer across the condenser (i.e., compressor energy and refrigeration loads)
in Watts.

1.34.14.2.6 Refrigeration Air Chiller System Condenser Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This is the total heat energy flowing across the condenser for the timestep being reported.

1.34.15 Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled
The transcritical refrigeration system requires a single gas cooler to reject the system heat. The
total heat of rejection is characterized by a linear relationship between the difference between the
outside dry-bulb and gas cooler outlet temperatures. The rated gas cooler fan power and fan speed
control type must be specified. If the gas cooler is not at ground level, the user may specify an air
inlet node name (Ref. OutdoorAir:Node name). Optional input is provided to help the user track
refrigerant inventories. These inputs represent the design values for the refrigerant inventory within
the gas cooler, within a receiver, and in the liquid pipes between the gas cooler and the refrigerated
cases.

1.34.15.1 Inputs

1.34.15.1.1 Field: Name

Identifies a particular gas cooler that rejects heat for a single refrigeration system. The
name must be unique and will be validated against all the gas cooler names (Ref. Refrigera-
tion:GasCooler:AirCooled) in the input file.

1.34.15.1.2 Field: Rated Total Heat Rejection Rate Curve Name

This field is the name of a curve object defining the gas cooler heat rejection as a function of the
difference between the gas cooler outlet and entering air temperatures. The curve should be linear
(Curve:Linear). See the Engineering Reference for more discussion on the curve coefficients.
1754 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.15.1.3 Field: Gas Cooler Fan Speed Control Type

The type of fan speed control used by the gas cooler fan. Valid choices are Fixed, FixedLinear,
VariableSpeed, and TwoSpeed. If the field is blank, Fixed will be used. Note that fan energy
consumption for the air-cooled gas cooler is computed in the same way as that of the air-cooled
condenser. For further information on fan energy calculations, see the discussion regarding air-
cooled condenser fan energy in the Engineering Reference.

1.34.15.1.4 Field: Rated Fan Power

This numeric field specifies the rated fan power (W) specified by the manufacturer, under standard
rating conditions. If this field is blank, the default value of 5000 W will be used

1.34.15.1.5 Field: Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio

Fan controls often include a minimum air flow ratio to avoid overheating the fan motor or for other
reasons. This numeric field should be between 0. and 1. and has a default value of 0.2.

1.34.15.1.6 Field: Transition Temperature

This is the temperature (C) at which the gas cooler and the refrigeration system transitions between
subcritical and transcritical operation. If this field is blank, the default value of 27.0°C will be used.

1.34.15.1.7 Field: Transcritical Approach Temperature

This is the temperature difference (C) between the refrigerant (CO2 ) exiting the gas cooler and the
air entering the gas cooler during transcritical operation. If this field is blank, the default value of
3.0°C will be used.

1.34.15.1.8 Field: Subcritical Temperature Difference

This is the temperature difference (C) between the condensing temperature and the ambient air
temperature during subcritical operation. If this field is blank, the default value of 10.0°C will be
used.
Field: Minimum Condensing Temperature
This numeric field specifies the minimum condensing temperature (C) required to maintain stable
subcritical operation. If this field is blank, the default value of 10.0°C will be used.
Field: Air Inlet Node Name
This optional alpha field contains the name of the node from which the gas cooler draws its outdoor
air. If this field is left blank, the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature entering the gas cooler is taken
directly from the weather data. If this field is not blank, this node name must also be specified in an
OutdoorAir:Node object where the height of the node is taken into consideration when calculating
outdoor air temperature from the weather data. Alternately, the node name may be specified in an
OutdoorAir:NodeList object where the outdoor air temperature is taken directly from the weather
data.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1755

1.34.15.1.9 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
Rack”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref. Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.

1.34.15.1.10 Field: Gas Cooler Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the gas cooler (kg) specified by
the manufacturer, under standard rating conditions. If this field is blank, the default value of 0.0 kg
will be used.

1.34.15.1.11 Field: Gas Cooler Receiver Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the gas cooler receiver (kg)
specified by the manufacturer or system designer, under standard rating conditions. If this field is
blank, the default value of 0.0 kg will be used.

1.34.15.1.12 Field: Gas Cooler Outlet Piping Refrigerant Inventory

This numeric field specifies the amount of refrigerant present within the gas cooling outlet piping
(kg) specified by the system designer, under standard rating conditions. If this field is blank, the
default value of 0.0 kg will be used.
The following is an example input for an air-cooled gas cooler.

Refrigeration:GasCooler:AirCooled ,
RefrigGasCooler , !- Name
GasCoolerHRCurve , !- Rated Total Heat Rejection Rate Curve Name
Fixed , !- Gas Cooler Fan Speed Control Type
6400, !- Rated Fan Power
0.2, !- Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio
27.0, !- Transition Temperature
3.0, !- Transcritical Approach Temperature
10.0, !- Subcritical Temperature Difference
10.0, !- Minimum Condensing Temperature
, !- Air Inlet Node Name
RefrigGasCooler , !- End -Use Subcategory
, !- Gas Cooler Refrigerant Operating Charge Inventory
, !- Gas Cooler Receiver Refrigerant Inventory
; !- Gas Cooler Outlet Piping Refrigerant Inventory

1.34.15.2 Outputs

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Outlet Temperature [C]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Outlet Pressure [Pa]
1756 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Defrost Recovered Heat Transfer
Energy [J]

1.34.15.2.1 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Rate

[W]
This output is the total heat transfer rate from the gas cooler in Watts, and includes compressor
energy and the refrigeration load.

1.34.15.2.2 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Heat Transfer Energy

[J]
This output is the total heat transferred from the gas cooler to the surroundings, in Joules, for the
timestep being reported.

1.34.15.2.3 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the electric input to the system’s gas cooler fan(s) in Watts.

1.34.15.2.4 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Fan Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s gas cooler fan(s) in Joules for the timestep being
reported. This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Refrigeration, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.15.2.5 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Outlet Temperature

[C]
This output is the temperature (in C) of the refrigerant exiting the gas cooler.

1.34.15.2.6 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Outlet Pressure [Pa]

This output is the pressure (in Pa) of the refrigerant exiting the gas cooler.

1.34.15.2.7 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Rate [W]
This is the total heat recovered from the gas cooler inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system.

1.34.15.2.8 Refrigeration Transcritical System Gas Cooler Defrost Recovered

Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat recovered from the gas cooler inlet flow for defrost purposes within the refrig-
eration system for the timestep being reported.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1757

1.34.16 Refrigeration:TransferLoadList
A refrigeration system may provide cooling to other, secondary, systems through either a
secondary loop or a cascade condenser (Ref. Refrigeration:SecondarySystem and Refrigera-
tion:Condenser:Cascade). If multiple transfer loads are served by a single primary system, use
this list to group them together for reference by the primary system (see the field “Refrigeration
Transfer Load or TransferLoad List Name” in the Refrigeration:System object).

1.34.16.1 Inputs

1.34.16.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration transfer load list. Any reference to this
list by another object will use this name. In particular, the primary refrigeration system absorbing
the heat from all the loads listed here will use this name to reference those loads.

1.34.16.1.2 Field: Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System <x> Name

Identifies a cascade condenser or secondary loop that is cooled, along with the other transfer
loads listed here, by a single system. The name will be validated against the Refrigera-
tion:SecondarySystem and Refrigeration:Condenser:Cascade names in the input file (the name will
also be compared against all the other condenser names, but an error will be issued if it refers to
any type of condenser other than a cascade condenser). This object is extensible, so additional
fields of this type can be added to the end of this object.
The following is an example input for a transfer load list.

Refrigeration:TransferLoadList ,
MedTempTransferLoads , !- Name
CascadeCondFrozen , !- Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System Name
SecondLoopDairy; !- Cascade Condenser Name or Secondary System Name

1.34.17 Refrigeration:SecondarySystem
A refrigeration secondary system works in conjunction with refrigerated cases and walkins (Ref.
Refrigeration:SecondarySystem, Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList, Refrigeration:Case, and Refrig-
eration:WalkIn) to simulate the performance of a secondary loop supermarket refrigeration system.
Heat from the refrigeration loads served by the secondary loop is absorbed by a primary refrigeration
system (ref: Refrigeration:System). The SecondarySystem object simulates a heat exchanger that is
an evaporator, or refrigeration load, on the primary refrigeration system.
The inputs for the refrigeration secondary system object include a name, which is also referenced to
identify the load placed upon the primary refrigeration system. The inputs that describe the loads
placed upon the secondary loop include the name of a single refrigerated case, the name of a single
walk-in cooler, or a list of cases and walkin coolers. The circulating fluid type specifies whether
or not the secondary fluid remains in the liquid state throughout the loop (e.g., a glycol or brine
solution) or undergoes a partial phase change while serving the refrigeration loads (e.g., a CO2 liquid
overfeed system). The circulating fluid name must also be specified and must correspond to a name
used to provide the fluid properties.
If the secondary fluid remains a liquid, the heat exchanger between the primary and secondary sys-
tems functions as an evaporator on the primary side and chills the circulating fluid on the secondary
1758 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

side. Inputs that describe the evaporator performance at rated conditions are used to calculate the
heat exchanger effectiveness. These values include the rated evaporator capacity (which can be spec-
ified in terms of energy or fluid flow rate), the rated evaporating temperature, the rated approach
temperature difference, and the rated range temperature difference.
If the secondary fluid undergoes a partial phase change, the heat exchanger between the primary
and secondary systems functions as an evaporator on the primary side and as a condenser on the
secondary side. The evaporator capacity, evaporating temperature, and approach temperature dif-
ference, all at full-load design conditions, are input.
The balance of the secondary system object describes the pumping system. The pumping options
include a single constant speed pump, multiple constant speed pumps, or a variable frequency-drive
pump. The user can also keep track of distribution piping and receiver shell heat gains.

1.34.17.1 Inputs

1.34.17.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration secondary system. Any reference to
this refrigeration secondary system by another object will use this name. In particular, the primary
refrigeration system absorbing the heat from this system will use this name to define that load.

1.34.17.1.2 Field: Refrigerated Case or WalkIn or CaseAndWalkInList Name

Identifies a single case, or walkin, or a particular list of refrigerated cases and walkins, that
are cooled by this refrigeration secondary system. The name will be validated against the
case, walkin, and CaseAndWalkInList names (ref. Refrigeration:Case, Refrigeration:WalkIn and
Refrigeration:CaseAndWalkInList) in the input file.

1.34.17.1.3 Field: Circulating Fluid Type

Specifies whether the fluid is always liquid (e.g., glycol solution), or undergoes a partial phase change
(e.g., CO2 liquid overfeed system). The options are “FluidAlwaysLiquid” and “FluidPhaseChange”.

1.34.17.1.4 Field: Circulating Fluid Name

The name of the secondary circulating fluid.
For “FluidAlwaysLiquid”, this name must correspond to either an ethylene or propylene glycol
(ref: FluidProperties:GlycolConcentration) or to a user-defined glycol (ref: FluidProperties:Name
and FluidProperties: GlycolConcentration) in the input file. Note that the corresponding prop-
erty data, including FluidProperties:Concentration, FluidProperties:Temperatures, and FluidProp-
erties:GlycolConcentration must also be included in the input file and are provided in GlycolProp-
ertiesRefData.idf for typical ethylene and propylene glycols.
For “FluidPhaseChange”, the refrigerant used by the secondary system must be listed in the Flu-
idProperties:Name object. The corresponding property data must also be supplied in the input
file. Property data for many refrigererants, including R11, R123, R134A, R12, R22, R404A, R507A,
R410A, and R744, are available in FluidPropertiesRefData.idf.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1759

1.34.17.1.5 Field: Evaporator Capacity

For “FluidAlwaysLiquid”, this numeric field should be the rated heat evaporator capacity (W). Be
sure the rating corresponds to the correct refrigerant and secondary circulating fluid. If this variable
is specified and the rated evaporator flow rate for secondary fluid is not, then the flow rate will be
calculated. At least one of these two input variables is required.
For “FluidPhaseChange”, this numeric field should be the evaporator capacity (W) at full-load design
conditions. If this input is left blank, the capacity will be set to the sum of the capacities of the cases
and walk-ins served by the secondary loop plus the pump motor load at full-load design conditions.

1.34.17.1.6 Field: Evaporator Flow Rate for Secondary Fluid

For “FluidAlwaysLiquid” systems, this is the rated evaporator secondary fluid flow rate in m3 /s. If
this variable is specified and the rated evaporator capacity in watts is not, then the rated capacity
will be calculated. At least one of these two input variables is required.
For “FluidPhaseChange”, this field is not used (see “Phase Cange Circulating Rate”).

1.34.17.1.7 Field:Evaporator Evaporating Temperature

This numeric field provides the evaporating temperature (C) corresponding to the evaporator capac-
ity. This is the evaporating temperature on the primary side of the heat exchanger used to chill or
condense the secondary loop circulating fluid. It is NOT the temperature in any cases or walkins
served by the secondary loop.

1.34.17.1.8 Field: Evaporator Approach Temperature Difference

For “FluidAlwaysLiquid”, this numeric field is the rated temperature difference (DeltaC) between
the circulating secondary fluid leaving the heat exchanger and the heat exchanger’s evaporating
temperature.
For “FluidPhaseChange”, this is the temperature difference (DeltaC) between the primary refrigerant
evaporating and secondary refrigerant condensing temperatures at full-load design conditions.

1.34.17.1.9 Field: Evaporator Range Temperature Difference

For “FluidAlwaysLiquid”, this numeric field is the rated temperature difference (DeltaC) between
the circulating secondary fluid entering and leaving the heat exchanger. This value is not used for
“FluidPhaseChange”.

1.34.17.1.10 Field: Number of Pumps in Loop

This numeric field provides the integer number of pumps used to circulate the secondary heat transfer
fluid. The default value is 1. Unless a variable speed pump is specified, pump energy will be
calculated in linear steps to achieve the necessary flow rate.

1.34.17.1.11 Field: Total Pump Flow Rate

This is the secondary fluid circulating flow rate in m3 /s at full-load design conditions. For “Flu-
idAlwaysLiquid”, if no value is input, the Evaporator Flow Rate for Secondary Fluid will be used.
For “FluidPhaseChange”, if no value is input, the flow rate will be calculated using the Evaporator
Capacity and the PhaseChange Circulating Rate.
1760 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.17.1.12 Field: Total Pump Power

This numeric field should be the pump power (W) at full-load design conditions. Be sure the rating
corresponds to the correct secondary circulating fluid at the design fluid temperature. EITHER the
Total Pump Power OR the Total Pump Head is required.

1.34.17.1.13 Field: Total Pump Head

This numeric field should be the design pressure drop, or head, across the secondary loop (Pa) at
full load design conditions. Be sure the rating corresponds to the correct secondary circulating fluid
at the design fluid temperature. EITHER the Total Pump Power OR the Total Head is required.

1.34.17.1.14 Field: PhaseChange Circulating Rate

This field is not used for “FluidAlwaysLiquid”.
For “FluidPhaseChange”, the Circulating Rate is defined as the total mass flow at the pump divided
by the mass flow rate of vapor returning to the separator. Values between 2.1 and 3 are common
for CO2 systems and the default is 2.5. If Total Pump Flow Rate is also defined, the PhaseChange
Circulating Rate will only be used to check whether the two values are consistent.

1.34.17.1.15 Field: Pump Drive Type

Specifies whether the pump(s) is constant speed or variable speed. The options are “Constant” and
“Variable”. The default is “Constant”.

1.34.17.1.16 Field: Variable Speed Pump Cubic Curve Name

The name of a cubic performance curve (ref: Performance Curves) that parameterizes the variation
of the variable speed pump power (and the associated load on the secondary refrigeration load) at
off-rated conditions. The curve should be normalized to have the value of 1.0 at full-load design
conditions. The variable speed pump cubic curve name is used only for the a pump drive type of
“Variable”.

1.34.17.1.17 Field: Pump Motor Heat to Fluid

This choice field determines how much of the pump motor heat will be added to the circulating
secondary fluid. This represents the motor efficiency for a non-hermetic motor. The default is
0.85. For a semi-hermetic motor, enter 1.0. The value entered must be between 0.5 and 1.0.

1.34.17.1.18 Field: Sum UA Distribution Piping

This optional field is typically used when trying to compare the impact of pipe heat gains on system
performance, particularly in comparing a DX system to a secondary system. Enter the value for
secondary loop distribution piping heat gain (in W/C). That is, sum up the product of the pipe
insulation conductance times the outer piping insulation surface area. Please see the Engineering
Reference for guidance in calculating this value.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1761

1.34.17.1.19 Field: Distribution Piping Zone Name

This optional field is used when trying to determine the impact of pipe heat gains on system perfor-
mance, particularly in comparing a DX system to a secondary system. (If the previous field, Sum
UA Distribution Piping, is blank, this field will not be used.) Enter the name of the zone where the
Distribution piping is located. The distribution piping heat gains will be calculated based upon the
air temperature within this zone and will count as a cooling credit for this zone.

1.34.17.1.20 Field: Sum UA Receiver/Separator Shell

This optional field is typically used when trying to compare the impact of refrigeration component
heat gains on system performance, particularly in comparing a conventional primary DX system to
a secondary system. Enter the value for receiver/separator heat gain (in W/C). That is, sum up
the product of the tank insulaton conductance times the outer tank insulation surface area. Please
see the Engineering Reference for guidance in calculating this value.

1.34.17.1.21 Field: Receiver/Separator Zone Name

This optional field is used when trying to determine the impact of refrigeration component heat
gains on system performance, particularly in comparing a conventional primary DX system to a
secondary system. (If the previous field, Sum UA Receiver/Separator, is blank, this field will not
be used.) Enter the name of the zone where the receiver/separator is located. The heat gains will
be calculated based upon the air temperature within this zone and will count as a cooling credit for
this zone.

1.34.17.1.22 Field: Evaporator Refrigerant Inventory

The secondary loop is chilled by a primary system via a heat exchanger. This field is the refrigerant
inventory on the cold (primary) side of that heat exchanger, in kg. The default value is zero.

1.34.17.1.23 Field: End-Use Subcategory

This field allows the specification of a user-defined end-use subcategory (e.g., “Low Temperature
Rack”). A new meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (Ref: Output:Meter
objects). Any text may be used here to further subcategorize the end-uses in the ABUPS End Uses
by Subcategory table and in the LEED Summary EAp2-4/5 Performance Rating Method Compliance
table. If this field is left blank, the equipment will be assigned to the “General” end-use subcategory.
The following is an example input for a brine-type (“FluidAlwaysLiquid”)refrigeration secondary
system.

Refrigeration:SecondarySystem ,
SecondaryMedLoop , !- Name
MedTempCaseList , !- Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
FluidAlwaysLiquid , !- Circulating Fluid Type
ProGly30Percent , !- Circulating Fluid Name
3.5E4 , !- Evaporator Capacity {W}
0.0021 , !- Evaporator Flow Rate for Secondary Fluid {M3/s}
-12.6, !- Evaporator Evaporating Temperature {C}
2.7, !- Evaporator Approach Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
4., !- Evaporator Range Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
3, !- Number of Pumps in Loop
.0023 , !- Total Pump Flow Rate {M3/s}
, !- Total Pump Power {W}
2.09E5 , !- Total Pump Head {Pa}
, !- PhaseChange Circulating Rate
1762 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

, !- Pump Drive Type

, !- Variable Speed Pump Cubic Curve Name
1.0, !- Pump Motor Heat to Fluid
21., !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/C}
SalesFloor , !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
, !- Sum UA Receiver/Separator Shell
, !- Receiver/Separator Zone Name
, !- Evaporator Refrigerant Inventory {kg}
; !- End -Use Subcategory

The following is an example input for a liquid-overfeed-type (“FluidPhaseChange”) refrigeration

secondary system.

Refrigeration:SecondarySystem ,
SecondaryLowLoop , !- Name
LowTempCaseList , !- Refrigerated Case or Walkin or CaseAndWalkInList Name
FluidPhaseChange , !- Circulating Fluid Type
R744 , !- Circulating Fluid Name
, !- Evaporator Capacity {W}
, !- Evaporator Flow Rate for Secondary Fluid {M3/s}
-39.2, !- Evaporator Evaporating Temperature {C}
2., !- Evaporator Approach Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
, !- Evaporator Range Temperature Difference {DeltaC}
3, !- Number of Pumps in Loop
, !- Total Pump Flow Rate {M3/s}
, !- Total Pump Power {W}
2.09E5 , !- Total Pump Head {Pa}
2.5, !- PhaseChange Circulating Rate
Variable , !- Pump Drive Type
SecondaryVarSpeedPump , !- Variable Speed Pump Cubic Curve Name
1.0, !- Pump Motor Heat to Fluid
10.4, !- Sum UA Distribution Piping {W/C}
SalesFloor , !- Distribution Piping Zone Name
1.4, !- Sum UA Receiver/Separator Shell
BackRoom , !- Receiver/Separator Zone Name
, !- Evaporator Refrigerant Inventory {kg}
; !- End -Use Subcategory

1.34.17.2 Outputs

FOR SECONDARY SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Rate [W]

– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass[kg]
Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Rate [W]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Energy [J]
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1763

FOR SECONDARY SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Estimated Refrigerant Inventory
Mass[kg]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Rate [W]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Energy [J]

1.34.17.2.1 FOR SECONDARY SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR

WALKINS:

1.34.17.2.2 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Rate [W]

This output is the total electric power input to the pump(s) in Watts.

1.34.17.2.3 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Energy [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the system’s pump(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.17.2.4 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the amount of refrigeration provided to the cases and walkins served by the secondary loop
in W.

1.34.17.2.5 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the amount of refrigeration provided to the cases and walkins served by the secondary loop
in Joules for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.6 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the total amount of refrigeration load placed upon the primary refrigeration system (including
loads due to the cases and walkins plus the loads from the secondary loop pumps and any energy
absorbed by the loop via pipe heat gains) in W.
1764 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.17.2.7 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total amount of energy placed upon the primary refrigeration system by the secondary
loop in Joules for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.8 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Estimated Refrigerant Inventory Mass

[kg]
This output is the sum of the input inventory values for the cases and walkins and the refrigerant
circulating through the loop.

1.34.17.2.9 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Volume Flow Rate [m3/]s

This output is the calculated volume flow through the pumps for this secondary loop.

1.34.17.2.10 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]

This output is the total heat transferred to the pipes in Watts.

1.34.17.2.11 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Energy [J]

This is the total heat transferred to the pipes in Joules for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.12 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Rate [W]

This output is the total heat transferred to the receiver in Watts.

1.34.17.2.13 Refrigeration Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain Energy [J]

This is the total heat transferred to the receiver in Joules for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.14 FOR SECONDARY SYSTEMS SERVING AIR CHILLERS:

1.34.17.2.15 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Rate

[W]
This output is the total electric power input to the pump(s) in Watts.

1.34.17.2.16 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pump Electricity Energy

[J]
This is the electricity consumption of the system’s pump(s) in Joules for the timestep being reported.
This output is also added to a meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Refrigeration,
Group Key = Plant (Ref. Output:Meter objects).

1.34.17.2.17 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This is the amount of refrigeration provided to the air chillers served by the secondary loop in W.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1765

1.34.17.2.18 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Load Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
This is the amount of refrigeration provided to the air chillers served by the secondary loop in Joules
for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.19 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer Rate
[W]
This is the total amount of refrigeration load placed upon the primary refrigeration system (including
loads due to the air chillers plus the loads from the secondary loop pumps and any energy absorbed
by the loop via pipe heat gains) in W.

1.34.17.2.20 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Total Heat Transfer En-
ergy [J]
This is the total amount of energy placed upon the primary refrigeration system by the secondary
loop in Joules for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.21 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Estimated Refrigerant

Inventory Mass [kg]
This output is the sum of the input inventory values for the air chillers and the refrigerant circulating
through the loop.

1.34.17.2.22 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Volume Flow Rate [m3/]s

This output is the calculated volume flow of coolant through the pumps for this secondary loop.

1.34.17.2.23 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Rate [W]

This output is the total heat transferred to the pipes in Watts.

1.34.17.2.24 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Pipe Heat Gain Energy
[J]
This is the total heat transferred to the pipes in Joules for the timestep being reported.

1.34.17.2.25 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain

Rate [W]
This output is the total heat transferred to the receiver in Watts.

1.34.17.2.26 Refrigeration Air Chiller Secondary Loop Receiver Heat Gain En-
ergy [J]
This is the total heat transferred to the receiver in Joules for the timestep being reported.
1766 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.18 Additional Refrigeration Outputs Available for Each Zone

Multiple refrigeration cases and walkins may be located within a single zone. Each zone may
also exchange heat with refrigeration system suction piping, secondary loop distribution piping, and
secondary loop receivers. Output variables have been prepared to sum up the total heat exchange
due to all refrigeration objects within a single zone. The output variables that start with “Zone
Refrigeration” do not account for refrigeration provided by refrigeration chiller sets or any piping
from systems serving air chillers. The output variables that start with “Zone Chillers” account for
all the refrigeration system elements serving air chillers.

1.34.19 Additional Refrigeration Outputs for Each Zone

FOR THE SUM OF ALL COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES AND/OR WALKINS:

– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Heating Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Heating Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Energy [J]
– Zone,Average,Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Rate [W]
– Zone,Average, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– Zone,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]

FOR THE SUM OF ALL COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CHILLERS:

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Energy [J]

1.34.19.1 FOR THE SUM OF ALL COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING CASES

AND/OR WALKINS:

1.34.19.2 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total sensible heat transfer between all refrigeration objects located in the zone in
Watts. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that is, remove heat
from) the zone.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1767

Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total sensible heat transfer between all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules
for for the timestep being reported. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects
cool (that is, remove heat from) the zone.

1.34.19.3 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total latent heat transfer between all refrigeration objects located in the zone in
Watts. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration equipment provides dehumidification
(thereby reducing the zone latent load).
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total latent heat transfer between all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules for
for the timestep being reported. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration equipment
provides dehumidification (thereby reducing the zone latent load).

1.34.19.4 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the total heat transfer (sensible plus latent) between all refrigeration objects located
in the zone in Watts. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that is,
remove heat from) the zone.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Heat Transfer Energy [J]
This is the total heat transfer (sensible plus latent) between all refrigeration objects located in the
zone in Joules for for the timestep being reported. A negative value will be reported when the
refrigeration objects cool (that is, remove heat from) the zone.

1.34.19.5 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total sensible cooling from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total sensible cooling from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules for for
the timestep being reported.

1.34.19.6 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Heating Rate [W]

This output is the total heating from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Heating Energy [J]
This is the total heating from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in Joules for for the timestep
being reported.

1.34.19.7 Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) from all refrigeration objects located in the
zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Case and Walk In Total Cooling Energy [J]
1768 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

This is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) from all refrigeration objects located in the zone in
Joules for for the timestep being reported.

1.34.19.8 FOR THE SUM OF ALL COOLING SYSTEMS SERVING AIR

CHILLERS:

1.34.19.9 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Heating Rate [W]

This output is the total heating from all air chillers located in the zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Heating Energy [J]
This is the total heating from all air chillers located in the zone in Joules for for the timestep being
reported.

1.34.19.10 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total sensible cooling from all air chillers located in the zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total sensible cooling from all air chillers located in the zone in Joules for for the timestep
being reported.

1.34.19.11 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This output is the total sensible heat transfer from all air chillers located in the zone in Watts. A
negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that is, remove heat from) the
zone.

1.34.19.12 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Transfer Energy [J]

This is the total sensible heat transfer from all air chillers located in the zone in Joules for for the
timestep being reported. A negative value will be reported when the refrigeration objects cool (that
is, remove heat from) the zone.

1.34.19.13 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total latent cooling from all air chillers located in the zone in Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total latent cooling from all air chillers located in the zone in Joules for for the timestep
being reported.

1.34.19.14 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow

Rate [kg/s]

This is the total amount of water removed by all air chillers located in the zone in kg/s for for the
timestep being reported.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1769

1.34.19.15 Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) from all air chillers located in the zone in
Watts.
Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Energy [J]
This is the total cooling (sensible plus latent) from all air chillers located in the zone in Joules for
for the timestep being reported.

1.34.20 Refrigeration:AirChiller
The Refrigeration:AirChiller object works in conjunction with a refrigeration chiller set, com-
pressor rack, a refrigeration system, or a refrigeration secondary system object (Ref. Zone-
Hvac:RefrigerationChillerSet, and a Refrigeration:CompressorRack, Refrigeration:System, or
Refrigeration:SecondarySystem) to simulate the performance of an air chiller, similar to one found
in a refrigerated warehouse. The air chiller model uses information at rated conditions along with
the zone conditions to determine performance. Energy use for fans and heaters is modeled based on
inputs for nominal power, schedules, and control type. The refrigeration chiller model accounts for
the sensible and latent heat exchange with the surrounding environment.
The refrigeration chiller cooler object inputs include a name, an availability schedule name, the rated
cooling capacity, the rated operating temperature, the rated cooling source temperature, the rated
total heating power and heating power schedule, the rated fan power and schedules, defrost type,
defrost control type, defrost schedule name, drip-down schedule name, defrost power, the portion of
the defrost energy used to melt ice (only for temperature termination control type), and refrigerant
inventory.
Chiller coils are rated under multiple conventions. Each rating is typically based upon a selected fin
material and refrigerant cycle, with correction factors for other materials or refrigerants. Fields are
provided here for those correction factors. The performance of all chiller coils depends upon the inlet
air temperature, relative humidity, and flow rate. Multiple methods of expressing this relationship
are provided here to accommodate the way information is provided by different manufacturers.

1.34.20.1 Inputs

1.34.20.1.1 Field: Name

A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a refrigeration chiller. Any reference to this refrig-
eration chiller by another object will use this name.

1.34.20.1.2 Field: Availability Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigeration chiller can operate
during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (maximum schedule value of 1.0 is
typically used) indicates that the refrigeration chiller will operate during a given time period. A
value equal to 0 denotes that the case does not operate (everything is OFF: refrigeration, fans,
lights, anti-sweat, etc.). Typically the refrigeration chiller will operate throughout the day (i.e.,
the schedule will contain 1 for all time periods); however, refrigeration chillers require maintenance
and/or cleaning and this can be modeled accordingly using this schedule if desired. If this field is
left blank, the default schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.
1770 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.20.1.3 Field: Capacity Rating Type

The type of capacity rating used for this refrigeration chiller. Valid choices are Unit-
LoadFactorSensibleOnly, CapacityTotalSpecificConditions, EuropeanSC1Standard, Euro-
peanSC1NominalWet, EuropeanSC2Standard, EuropeanSC2NominalWet, EuropeanSC3Standard,
EuropeanSC3NominalWet, EuropeanSC4Standard, EuropeanSC4NominalWet, EuropeanSC5Standard,
and EuropeanSC5NominalWet. In each case, select the rating option that corresponds to the
expected service conditions. For example, U.S. manufacturers quote a separate Unit Load Factor
for wet or frosted coils. If the evaporating temperature is less than 0C, input the frosted coil value.
Within the European convention, select SC1, 2, 3, 4, or 5 depending upon the expected evaporating
temperature. This field is required and there is no default value. Refer to the Engineering Reference
for further information on these rating types. NOTE: If the CapacityTotalSpecificConditions
rating type is specified, the input file must include the manufacturer’s coil capacity correction
curve in tabular form using the Table:Lookup object. An example of this may be found in the
RefrigeratedWarehouse.idf example file.

1.34.20.1.4 NOTE – ONLY ONE OF THE FOLLOWING TWO FIELDS IS

USED

1.34.20.1.5 Field: Rated Unit Load Factor

The sensible cooling capacity in watts (W/C) at rated conditions. The value entered for this field
must be greater than zero, with no default value. This value is only used if the Capacity Rating
Type is UnitLoadFactorSensibleOnly. The value given must be based upon the difference between the
chiller inlet and outlet air temperatures, not on the difference between the zone mean temperature
and the outlet air temperature.

1.34.20.1.6 Field: Rated Capacity

The cooling capacity in watts (W) at rated conditions. The value entered for this field must be
greater than zero, with no default value. This field is only used if the Capacity Rating Type
is CapacityTotalSpecificConditions, EuropeanSC1Standard, EuropeanSC1NominalWet, Euro-
peanSC2Standard, EuropeanSC2NominalWet, EuropeanSC3Standard, EuropeanSC3NominalWet,
EuropeanSC4Standard, EuropeanSC4NominalWet, EuropeanSC5Standard, or EuropeanSC5NominalWet.
For CapacityTotalSpecificConditions, this capacity includes both sensible and latent at the con-
ditions given in the next two fields. Note that the European Standard ratings are sensible only
and the European Nominal ratings include latent capacity as well. The value given here must
correspond to the capacity rating type given previously.

1.34.20.1.7 Field: Rated Relative Humidity

This field is ONLY used if the Capacity Rating Type is CapacityTotalSpecificConditions and repre-
sents the relative humidity at rated conditions, expressed as a percent. The default is 85.

1.34.20.1.8 Field: Rated Cooling Source Temperature

For a DX evaporator coil, enter the saturated evaporating temperature in ˚C. For a fluid coil, enter
the fluid coil entrance temperature in ˚C. There is no default value. This number is used, with
temperatures for other refrigeration loads on any one system, to set that system’s minimum suction
pressure or minimum circulating fluid temperature.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1771

1.34.20.1.9 Field: Rated Temperature Difference DT1

The rated difference between the air entering the refrigeration chiller and the cooling source tem-
perature in ˚C. The entered value for this field must be less than 20˚C. There is no default value.

1.34.20.1.10 Field: Maximum Difference Between Inlet Air and Evaporating

Temperature
The maximum difference between the air entering the refrigeration chiller and the cooling source
temperature in °C used to limit capacity during pull-down. The default is 1.3 times the Rated
Temperature Difference DT1.

1.34.20.1.11 Field: Coil Material Correction Factor

This field is used to enter the manufacturer’s correction factor for coil material corresponding to the
rating previously input. The default is 1.0 (dimensionless).

1.34.20.1.12 Field: Refrigerant Correction Factor

This field is used to enter the manufacturer’s correction factor for refrigerant corresponding to the
rating previously input. The default is 1.0 (dimensionless). (Note, the refrigerant itself is specified
for the detailed system or secondary loop providing the refrigerant to this coil.)

1.34.20.1.13 Field: Capacity Correction Curve Type

The type of capacity correction curve used to account for the impact of the room air conditions
on the chiller capacity. Valid choices are LinearSHR60, QuadraticSHR, European, and Tabular-
RHxDT1xTRoom. This field will default to LinearSHR60, unless the CapacityTotalSpecificCondi-
tions rating type is specified, in which case, the TabularRHxDT1xTRoom correction curve type
must be used. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on these curve types. The
resulting correction factor for LinearSHR60, QuadraticSHR, and European types will be applied to
the sensible capacity and must have output values between 1 and 2. The resulting correction factor
for TabularRHxDT1xTRoom will be applied to the CapacityTotalSpecificConditions capacity and
can have values between 0.2 and 2. If TabularRHxDT1xTRoom is used, the curve type within the
table must be specified as “Quadratic”.

1.34.20.1.14 Field: Capacity Correction Curve Name

The name of the curve object defining the total refrigerating capacity. For correction curve types
LinearSHR60 and QuadraticSHR, the independent variable is the Sensible Heat Ratio and the output
values are between 1.0 and 2.0. For correction curve type European, EnergyPlus contains built-in
capacity correction curves and specification of a capacity correction curve name is not required. For
correction curve type TabularRHxDT1xTRoom, enter the name of a Table:Lookup object that gives
the total capacity (in W) as a function of RH, DT1, and Room Temperature; IN THAT ORDER.
An example of a TabularRHxDT1xTRoom correction curve using the Table:Lookup object may be
found in the RefrigeratedWarehouse.idf example file.

1.34.20.1.15 Field: SHR60 Correction Factor

This field is only used when the capacity correction curve type is LinearSHR60. It should correspond
to the capacity factor, that is, the total capacity divided by the sensible capacity corresponding to
a Sensible Heat Ratio of 0.6. The default is 1.48 (dimensionless).
1772 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

1.34.20.1.16 Field: Rated Total Heating Power

The total heating power in watts including drip-pan and any other heaters (W). This value is required
and has no default value.

1.34.20.1.17 Field: Heating Power Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes the fraction of heater power that operates
during a given time period. A schedule value of zero denotes that all heaters are off. A schedule
value greater than 0 indicates that some portion of the total heater power will operate during that
time period (maximum schedule value of 1.0 means all heaters are fully on). If this field is left blank,
the default schedule has a value of 1 for all time periods.

1.34.20.1.18 Field: Fan Speed Control Type

The type of fan speed control used by the cooling coil’s fan(s). Valid choices are Fixed, FixedLin-
ear, VariableSpeed, and TwoSpeed. If the field is blank, Fixed will be used. See the Engineering
Reference for a discussion of this option’s effect on fan energy consumption.

1.34.20.1.19 Field: Rated Fan Power

The cooling coil fan power in watts (W). This value has a default value of 375W. This fan is assumed
to run continuously except during electric, hot brine, or hot gas defrost periods.

1.34.20.1.20 Field: Rated Air Flow

The cooling coil fan rated air flow in cubic meters per second (m3 /s). This value has no default
value and must be input.

1.34.20.1.21 Field: Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio

The minimum fraction of the rated air flow for part-load fan operation, must be between 0. and 1.0.
The default value is 0.2.

1.34.20.1.22 Field: Defrost Type

The type of defrost used for this refrigeration chiller. Valid choices are None, Off-Cycle, HotFluid,
and Electric. The default defrost type is Electric if the field is blank. HotFluid includes both hot
gas and hot brine defrost systems. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on
how the different defrost types are modeled.

1.34.20.1.23 Field: Defrost Control Type

The type of defrost control used for this refrigeration chiller. Valid choices are TimeSchedule and
TemperatureTermination. The default is TimeSchedule if the field is blank. Refer to the Engineering
Reference for further information on how the different defrost controls are modeled.
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1773

1.34.20.1.24 Field: Defrost Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes when the refrigeration chiller requires de-
frosting. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that defrost can be on during a given time period. A
value equal to 0 denotes that the defrost is off. Defrost schedules normally repeat the duration and
number of defrost cycles for each day of the year. The refrigeration chiller manufacturer typically
provides this information with the product literature. If TemperatureTermination control type is
used, the defrost schedule is used for the defrost cycle start time and the defrost cycle end time is
not allowed to extend beyond the scheduled off time. The use of Compact Schedules (ref. Schedules)
are ideal for this purpose.

1.34.20.1.25 Field: Defrost Drip-Down Schedule Name

The name of the schedule (ref: Schedule) that denotes whether the refrigeration chiller requires
additional time for draining condensate after the defrost period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates
that the defrost drip-down period is on during a given time period. A value equal to 0 denotes that
the defrost drip-down period is over. The refrigeration chiller manufacturer typically provides this
information with the product literature.
Each defrost drip-down period specified in this schedule should start at the same time as the corre-
sponding defrost period specified in the schedule for Defrost Schedule, and the drip-down schedule
defrost period should always be longer than or equal to the length of the defrost schedule time period.
For example, if the defrost schedule contains a defrost period from 7:00 to 7:15, you would specify
a case defrost drip-down period from 7:00 to 7:20 if you wanted to model a 5 minute condensate
drip-down period after the regular defrost period. If no drip-down schedule is entered, then the
defrost schedule (specified for the previous input field) will be used. The use of Compact Schedules
(ref. Schedules) are ideal for this purpose.

1.34.20.1.26 Field: Defrost Power

The defrost power in watts. This input is required for hot-fluid (hot gas or hot brine), or electric
defrost types. Refrigeration chiller manufacturers do not typically provide information on the heat
input for hot gas and hot brine defrost. Information provided for electric defrost power can be
substituted here for refrigeration chillers using hot-gas or hot-brine defrost if other information is
not available. Only electric Defrost Types consume electricity during the defrost period. The entered
value for this field must be greater than or equal to zero.

1.34.20.1.27 Field: Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice

When cooling coils go through a defrost cycle, only a portion of the defrost energy is actually
used to melt the ice. The rest of the defrost energy goes to increasing the temperature of the
coils themselves and to the refrigeration chiller environment. The Temperature Termination defrost
control type calculates the end of the defrost cycle that corresponds to melting all the ice. Therefore,
the user must input this fractional value. The default value is 0.7 for electric defrost and 0.3 for hot
fluid defrost. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further information on how the defrost energy
control types are modeled.

1.34.20.1.28 Field: Vertical Location

The vertical location for this refrigeration chiller. Valid choices are Floor, Middle, and Ceiling. The
default is Middle if the field is blank. The vertical location is used to transform the mixed zone
1774 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

air temperature to the coil inlet air temperature. Refer to the Engineering Reference for further
information on how the different vertical locations are modeled.

1.34.20.1.29 Field: Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory

The value of this optional field is the refrigerant inventory present in the refrigeration chiller during
ordinary operation. The value is used to produce an estimate of the total refrigerant present in the
refrigeration system. The value is entered in kg.
The following is an example input for a refrigeration air chiller.

Refrigeration:AirChiller ,
Freezer_1AirChiller_1 , !- Name
AvailAllYear , !- Availability Schedule Name
UnitLoadFactorSensibleOnly , !- Capacity Rating Type
10900. , !- Rated Unit Load Factor {W/deltaC}
, !- Rated Capacity {W}
, !- Rated Relative Humidity
-26., !- Rated Cooling Source Temperature {C}
8., !- Rated Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
11., !- Maximum Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
, !- Material Correction Factor
, !- Refrigerant Correction Factor
LinearSHR60 , !- Capacity Correction Curve Type
, !- Capacity Correction Curve Name
1.5, !- SHR60 Correction Factor {dimensionless}
200., !- Rated Total Heating Power {W}
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Heating Power Schedule Name
, !- Fan Speed Control Type
375., !- Rated Fan Power {W}
12.4, !- Rated Air Flow {m3/s}
, !- Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio
Electric , !- Defrost Type
TimeSchedule , !- Defrost Control Type
AirChillerDefrostSched1 , !- Defrost Schedule Name
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Defrost Drip -Down Schedule Name
55066. , !- Defrost Power {W}
, !- Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice
, !- Vertical Location
; !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg}

The following is an example input for a refrigeration air chiller.

Refrigeration:AirChiller ,
Freezer_1AirChiller_1 , !- Name
AvailAllYear , !- Availability Schedule Name
UnitLoadFactorSensibleOnly , !- Capacity Rating Type
10900. , !- Rated Unit Load Factor {W/deltaC}
, !- Rated Capacity {W}
, !- Rated Relative Humidity
-26., !- Rated Cooling Source Temperature {C}
8., !- Rated Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
11., !- Maximum Temperature Difference DT1 {DeltaC}
, !- Material Correction Factor
, !- Refrigerant Correction Factor
LinearSHR60 , !- Capacity Correction Curve Type
, !- Capacity Correction Curve Name
1.5, !- SHR60 Correction Factor {dimensionless}
200., !- Rated Total Heating Power {W}
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Heating Power Schedule Name
, !- Fan Speed Control Type
375., !- Rated Fan Power {W}
12.4, !- Rated Air Flow {m3/s}
, !- Minimum Fan Air Flow Ratio
Electric , !- Defrost Type
1.34. GROUP – REFRIGERATION 1775

TimeSchedule , !- Defrost Control Type

AirChillerDefrostSched1 , !- Defrost Schedule Name
AirChillerDripDownSched1 , !- Defrost Drip -Down Schedule Name
55066. , !- Defrost Power {W}
, !- Temperature Termination Defrost Fraction to Ice
, !- Vertical Location
; !- Average Refrigerant Charge Inventory {kg}

1.34.20.2 Outputs

– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Water Removed Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Total Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Fan Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Fan Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Heater Electricity Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Heater Electricity Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Heat Ratio []
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Frost Accumulation Mass [kg]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Total Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Total Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Heating Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Zone Heating Energy [J]

Report only for Air Chillers using electric defrost

– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Defrost Electricity Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Defrost Electricity Energy [J]

Report for each Zone exchanging energy with the Air Chiller

– HVAC,Average,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Sensible Cooling Energy [J]
– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Heating Rate [W]
1776 CHAPTER 1. INPUT-OUTPUT REFERENCE

– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Heating Energy [J]

– HVAC,Average, Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Latent Cooling Rate [W]
– HVAC,Sum,Refrigeration Zone Air Chiller Lat